JP2023168616A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes means for acquiring first predetermined information on the basis of a fact that game balls have entered first ball entering means, means for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition, first state shift means capable of being shifted between a ball entry impossible state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game balls to enter second ball entering means and a ball entry possible state in which it is possible or easy for the game balls to enter the second ball entering means, first shift mode executing means for executing a first shift mode that shifts the first state shift means between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition, and means for executing a privilege imparting mode for imparting a privilege to a player when a predetermined privilege imparting condition is satisfied which includes a fact that the game balls have entered the second ball entering means. The first shift mode executing means includes means for shifting the first state shift means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state after the privilege imparting mode is completed during execution of the first shift mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 714

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as performance (for example, Patent Document 1).

Various technical improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the soundness of gaming, such as discovering and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of increasing the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, and providing healthier gaming. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[Form] (This form is mainly based on the thirteenth embodiment below)
a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
first determining means for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means capable of transitioning between states;
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing;
a privilege granting mode execution means for executing a privilege granting mode in which a privilege is granted to a player when a predetermined privilege granting condition including that a game ball enters the second ball entering means is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine of the above embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment α. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a V winning mechanism. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing an electric accessory release lottery. This is a time chart illustrating a case 1 in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting slot. This is a time chart illustrating a case 2 in which a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flow chart showing jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuating time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. It is a flowchart which shows the entry process for a type determination gate. It is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the big winning a prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for croon. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating specific processing execution determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows opening-and-closing scenario setting processing. It is an explanatory view explaining an opening and closing scenario in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart showing V winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows standby period effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening period production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing processing period effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the first chance performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd chance performance setting process at the time of non-storage. It is a flowchart which shows V winning effect setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a second chance performance setting process when V does not win a prize. It is a flowchart which shows ending period production setting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 1st embodiment (beta). It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a V winning mechanism. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing an electric accessory release lottery. This is a time chart illustrating a case 1 in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting slot. This is a time chart illustrating a case 2 in which a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flow chart showing jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuating time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. It is a flowchart which shows the entry process for a type determination gate. It is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the big winning a prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for croon. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating specific processing execution determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows opening-and-closing scenario setting processing. It is an explanatory view explaining an opening and closing scenario in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flow chart showing V winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows standby period effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening period production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing processing period effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the first chance performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd chance performance setting process at the time of non-storage. It is a flowchart which shows V winning effect setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a second chance performance setting process when V does not win a prize. It is a flowchart which shows ending period production setting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing an electric accessory release lottery. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in a gaming machine. It is a time chart explaining special bonus processing. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting ports. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for the 1st starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information shift process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable time for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information shift process for 2nd starting gates. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for a 2nd starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable time for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows highly accurate high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening-and-closing scenario setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of an audio|voice light emission control apparatus. 3 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows display mode switching processing. It is a flowchart showing processing for special 1 game round performance. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area. It is a flowchart showing the special 1 game round performance execution process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation time measurement process for Special 1. It is a flowchart showing processing for special 2 game rendition. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area. It is an explanatory diagram explaining setting processing of a performance pattern for a small hit at the time of a special bonus. It is a flowchart showing the special 2 game round production execution process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time measurement process for Special 2. It is a flow chart showing special bonus performance setting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view explaining an operation mode of a normal electric accessory. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the validity table for the special figure starting opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the special figure starting opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing an electric accessory release lottery. It is a time chart showing an example of a process executed by a pachinko machine when a player executes a game. It is a time chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine during a non-specific period. It is a time chart showing an example of processing executed by a pachinko machine during a specific period. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for special figure starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flow chart showing jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuating time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. It is a flowchart which shows the entry process for a special electric starting opening. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd big prize winning hole. It is a flowchart which shows the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second big prize opening. It is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening opening/closing process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of an audio|voice light emission control apparatus. 3 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. It is a flowchart showing processing for game round performance. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows opening performance processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for a special electric starting gate entrance performance. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd big prize opening opening effect. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is an explanatory view showing a normal electric accessory 53 and a second variable winning device 55 in a modified example. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 4th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a validity table stored in a validity table storage area. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of the distribution table set in a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a player wins a falling lottery in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle performance and a result announcement performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display screen of the liquid crystal display device when a battle performance or a result notification performance is being executed. 7 is a time chart illustrating another example of processing when a player wins a fall lottery in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. 12 is a time chart illustrating another example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing when a fall lottery is won for the first time after startup in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing when the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment wins a jackpot for the first time after startup. It is a time chart explaining another example of processing when the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment wins the fall lottery for the first time after startup. It is a time chart explaining another example of processing when the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment wins a jackpot for the first time after startup. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is an explanatory diagram showing game state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 5 is a flowchart showing command-based processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance setting process at the time of high accuracy and high support. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won for the first time after startup in the pachinko machine of modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart explaining another example of processing when a jackpot is won for the first time after startup in the pachinko machine of modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a variation start process in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing display unit control processing at startup in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 5th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a sectional view showing the game ball sorting device in a state where the valve body is closed. It is a sectional view showing the game ball sorting device in a state where the valve body is open. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a validity table stored in a validity table storage area. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of the distribution table set in a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is an explanatory diagram showing game state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 5 is a flowchart showing command-based processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is an explanatory view showing a game ball sorting device provided in a pachinko machine of modification 1. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball sorting device provided in a pachinko machine according to a second modification. It is an explanatory view showing a game ball sorting device provided in a pachinko machine of modification 3 and its surroundings. It is a perspective view showing a game ball storage device and a forced release device provided in a pachinko machine of modification 3. It is an explanatory view showing a game ball sorting device provided in a pachinko machine of modification 4. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 6th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a validity table stored in a validity table storage area. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of the distribution table set in a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a perspective view showing a first starting port and its surroundings. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and a first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing a conventional example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 1. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of modification 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 3. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 4. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of modification 5. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of modification 6. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and a first start opening provided in a pachinko machine of modification 7. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 8. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of modification 9. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the first starting port in Modification 9. FIG. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of modification 10 and its surroundings. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of modification 11 and its surroundings. It is a front view which shows the 1st movable piece of the electric accessory with which the pachinko machine of modification 12 is equipped. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a 7th embodiment. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a distribution mechanism 120. It is an explanatory view explaining the normal electric accessory 53. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and a display surface 41a. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing an electric accessory release lottery. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating types of support modes that the pachinko machine 10 can execute. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a mode in which game balls are distributed during execution of the low frequency support mode. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a mode in which game balls are distributed when high-frequency support mode A is executed. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a mode in which game balls are distributed when high-frequency support mode B is executed. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flow chart showing jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuating time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for support mode production. It is a flowchart showing processing for game round performance. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a production pattern. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing distribution mechanism 120 normal electric accessory 53 and each starting port in modification 1. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 1; 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 1. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing distribution mechanism 120 normal electric accessory 53 and each starting port in modification 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 2; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 2; It is an explanatory view showing distribution mechanism 120, normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in modification 3. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 3. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 3; It is an explanatory view showing distribution mechanism 120, normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in modification 4. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 4. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 4. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing distribution mechanism 120, normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in modification 5. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 5. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 5. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing distribution mechanism 120, normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in modification 6. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 6. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 6. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the composition of the normal electric accessory 53. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variation time in modification example 12. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for low frequency support mode. 3 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing for high-frequency support mode A; 12 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for high-frequency support mode B. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a production pattern setting process in modification example 12. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for low frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a performance pattern in the first starting opening game round of high-frequency support mode A. It is an explanatory view explaining continuous performance in the first starting opening game round of high-frequency support mode A. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the performance pattern in the second starting opening game round of high-frequency support mode A. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is an explanatory view showing a V acquisition challenge mechanism part. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/fail table used when executing an electric accessory opening lottery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart for explaining a first opening/closing scenario. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the game ball in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the game ball in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the game ball in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section. It is a timing chart for explaining a second opening/closing scenario. It is a timing chart for explaining a third opening/closing scenario. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows shutter opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows V winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 5 is a flowchart showing command-based processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. It is an explanatory view showing a delay unit provided in a pachinko machine of modification 2. It is an explanatory view showing a variable winning device provided in a pachinko machine of modification 19. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table in Modification 22. FIG. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 9th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a fall lottery success/failure table used when executing a fall lottery. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/fail table used when executing an electric accessory opening lottery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart illustrating a process when winning a falling lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is an explanatory view explaining the display surface of the symbol display device when a battle performance or a result notification performance is being executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle performance and a result announcement performance. 12 is a timing chart illustrating processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. In the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment, it is a timing chart illustrating processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is an explanatory diagram showing gaming state determination values for each flag value of a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, and a fall flag. In the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment, it is a timing chart illustrating the processing procedure in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a process of setting a variable time for a low probability, low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process for a low probability high frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process for high probability high frequency states. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a variable time setting process for a low probability of falling high frequency state. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a variable time setting process for a low fall probability, low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart showing processing for game round performance. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for a low probability low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for a low probability high frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for high probability high frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the fall probability low frequency state. It is a flowchart showing a process for executing a game round performance. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a processing procedure in a game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached in the pachinko machine of Modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state determination processing. 12 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing in Modification 16. It is a flowchart showing gaming state determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process for high probability low frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for high probability low frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows the game time performance setting process in the modification 18. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state at the time of latency probability change. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state at the time of support mode simulation. It is a perspective view of the pachinko game machine as a 9th embodiment. It is a back view of the pachinko machine 10. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a liquid crystal pattern and a display surface 41a. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a success/failure table for a fall lottery. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success/failure table for electric accessories opening lottery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. FIG. 3 is a time chart illustrating an outline of processing (case 1). It is an explanatory diagram explaining an example of a fall pullback jackpot performance. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the most advantageous jackpot opening performance of falling pullback. It is a time chart explaining the outline of processing (case 2). 3 is a time chart illustrating an outline of processing (case 3). 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state determination processing. It is an explanatory diagram explaining details of a game state judgment value. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a process of setting a variable time for a low probability, low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process for a low probability high frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process for high probability high frequency states. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a variable time setting process for a low probability of falling high frequency state. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a variable time setting process for a low fall probability, low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU92. It is a flowchart showing processing for game round performance. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for a low probability low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for a low probability high frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for high probability high frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the fall probability low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows opening/closing execution mode performance setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening performance processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating Modification 10. FIG. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as an 11th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a validity table for low probability mode. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a validity table for high probability mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for reach judgment. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/fail table for electric accessories opening lottery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting information display section. It is an explanatory diagram showing an ending effect displayed on a pattern display device. It is an explanatory view showing the correspondence for the first time failure. It is an explanatory diagram showing correspondence for the first time normal reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing correspondence for the first time super reach. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an ending performance including a setting suggestion performance. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows setting change processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 5 is a flowchart showing command-based processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the reach time. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a reach distribution table. It is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot. It is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process for a probability-variable jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for the time of a miss. It is a flowchart which shows ending production setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time failure. It is an explanatory view showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time normal reach. It is an explanatory view showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time super reach. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for the reach time in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference process for normal reach. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern table reference process for super reach. It is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot. It is a flowchart showing normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference processing. It is a flowchart showing the performance pattern table reference process for super reach/normal jackpot. It is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process for a probability-variable jackpot. It is a flowchart showing a normal reach/probable variable jackpot performance pattern table reference process. It is a flowchart showing the performance pattern table reference process for super reach/probability variable jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for the time of a miss. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference process for the time of a loss. It is a flowchart which shows ending production setting processing. FIG. 12 is a front view of a game board included in a pachinko machine of modification 2. It is an explanatory view showing how the distribution mechanism distributes game balls. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the reach time. It is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot. It is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process for a probability-variable jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for the time of a miss. It is a flowchart which shows ending production setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time fluctuation first symbol. It is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time fluctuation second symbol. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table for appearance probability lottery in Modification 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows ending production setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for appearance period lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect setting process in modification 6. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a setting suggestion propriety table for the first time failure. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a setting suggestion propriety table for the first time normal reach. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a setting suggestion propriety table for the first time super reach. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 12th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a fall lottery success/failure table used when executing a fall lottery. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/fail table used when executing an electric accessory opening lottery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when winning a falling lottery in a game play before reaching the guaranteed number of games. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game play before the guaranteed number of games is reached. A timing chart illustrating an example of processing when it is determined that a reach occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game play before reaching the guaranteed number of games. be. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface of a symbol display device when a battle performance or a result announcement performance is being executed. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a battle performance. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a result announcement performance executed after a battle performance. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when winning a falling lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a process when, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, in a game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a process when, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in a game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. This is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing in the case where, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the first to lose mode in the mode selection lottery. be. This is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing in the case where, in the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player does not win the falling lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery. be. A timing chart illustrating an example of processing when it is determined that a reach occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game play after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart showing processing for game round performance. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing performance pattern setting processing before the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart showing performance pattern setting processing after the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart showing a process for executing a game round performance. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a high probability mode success/failure table provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 1. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mode selection table provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 2. FIG. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine in a 13th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device and the display surface of the pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a special drawing lottery, a regular drawing lottery, etc. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure propriety judgment table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type judgment table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a common figure propriety judgment table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a common figure type judgment table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a normal power switching scenario selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the flow of processing performed in a pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production performed in the Pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production performed in the Pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for special figure starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for V winning a prize openings. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol control processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows general figure fluctuation time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric accessory control processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal power opening/closing processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows special electric accessory control processing. It is a flowchart which shows special electric switch opening/closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of performance performed in a pachinko machine of a modification of a 13th embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of performance performed in a pachinko machine of a modification of a 13th embodiment.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
<<A>> First embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature aA group to feature aK group in <<Z>> below):
<<B>> Second embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature bA group to feature bN group in <<Z>> below):
<<C>> Third embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature cA group to feature cG group in <<Z>> below):
<<D>> Fourth embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature dA group to feature dG group in <<Z>> below):
<<E>> Fifth embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature eA group to feature eG group in <<Z>> below):
<<F>> Sixth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature fA group to feature fF group in <<Z>> below):
<<G>> 7th embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature gA group to feature gP group in <<Z>> below):
<<H>> Eighth embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature hA group to feature hF group in <<Z>> below):
<<I>> Ninth embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature iA group to feature iH group in <<Z>> below):
<<J>> 10th embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature jA group to feature jO group in <<Z>> below):
<<K>> Eleventh embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature kA group to feature kW group in <<Z>> below):
<<L>> Twelfth embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature lA group to feature lH group in <<Z>> below):
<<M>> 13th embodiment (mainly corresponds to feature mA group to feature mR group in <<Z>> below):
<Y> Application to other configurations:
<Z> Regarding the feature groups extracted from each of the above embodiments:

<<A>> First embodiment α:
《A1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment α. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the presentation effect by lighting up or blinking when the pachinko machine 10 performs a winning lottery, winning a jackpot, reaching a reach, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a type determining gate 202, and a variable winning opening 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a V winning mechanism 210. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that becomes an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery). If the electric role release is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to the electric role release state in which the electric role is opened in a predetermined manner. The through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, so the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a first big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the first big winning opening 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big prize opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). If a jackpot or small jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 and the second opening/closing door 213 provided in the V winning mechanism 210, which will be described later, is executed. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter, and also when a predetermined condition is met. After is satisfied, the state transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first big prize opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The type determining gate 202 is a ball entrance used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery. Specifically, a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round ends. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, a performance (right-hand hitting suggestion performance) that guides the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 is performed. When the player operates the operating handle 25 to launch a game ball to the right side of the game board 30 according to the right-handed hitting suggestion, and the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the game ball enters the game ball and hits the jackpot. A type determination process for determining the type of is executed by the main controller 60. Then, the type of jackpot is determined by the type determination process. The type determination process executed by the main controller 60 and the jackpot type set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 will also be referred to as a first starting hole game round.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34 will also be referred to as a second starting opening game round.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held.

The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter also referred to as round lamps) are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or The corresponding display will be displayed. A round game is a round game that continues until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. When the opening/closing execution mode is started and a jackpot type is determined in the type determination process executed when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the round display section 39 corresponds to the determined jackpot type. The display starts to display the number of round games played, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In other words, even if the opening/closing execution mode is started, the type determination process is not started and the jackpot type ( (including the number of round games) is not determined, so the number of round games is not displayed on the round display section 39. After that, when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is started and the jackpot type (including the number of round games) is determined, so the number of round games is displayed on the round display section 39. Is displayed.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display of symbols or a lottery result in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Perform prescribed displays based on advance notice, etc. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display of the symbol or a predetermined display according to the variable display or a predetermined display. will be displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also when a jackpot is won. It also displays effects during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41, and corresponds to a first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a and a second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b. It is a design. When a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is being executed, a liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a is displayed on the display screen. 41a, and when a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, a liquid crystal display corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b is displayed. The symbols for use are displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 3(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 as liquid crystal symbols. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a symbol such as a character is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 3(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 3(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol in each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, a game round refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display, and until the stop display ends. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the In either one of the two symbol display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the following information for each game: After the symbol row is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 3(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold games based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold games based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. A pending game session is a game session that has not yet been executed, and is used to notify the lottery result of a winning lottery regarding special information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Refers to the game round in which the variable display has not started. The number of pending games that can be held based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game display) corresponding to the four pending game rounds. Further, the number of pending games that can be held based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the second pending display area Ds2, pending displays corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as second pending game round displays) can be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3(b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuating display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. A first synchronized display section Sync1 performs display, and a second synchronized display performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37. Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a stop display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display. 1 synchronization display section Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display. The section Sync2 displays a lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first pending display area Ds1, the second pending display area Ds2, the first synchronized display section Sync1, and the second synchronized display section Sync2. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the V winning mechanism 210. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the V winning mechanism 210 includes a clown 220, a flow path 211 that allows the game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to flow to the clown 220, and a flow path 211 that circulates the game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30. A second opening/closing door 213 that opens and closes the second big prize opening 212 for the ball to flow into the channel 211, a detection sensor 214 that detects that a game ball has flowed in from the second big prize opening 212, and a gaming area. , a storage valve 216 that temporarily stores the game balls that have flowed in from the second big prize opening 212 in the storage section 218 of the channel 211, and a storage valve that drives the storage valve 216. A drive mechanism 217 is provided. Further, the clone 220 includes one V winning hole 222 and five non-V winning holes 224. The V winning hole 222 is a winning hole that becomes a jackpot when a game ball enters the ball. Even if a game ball enters the non-V winning hole 224, it will not be a jackpot, and the game ball will be ejected from the game area.

Next, the operation of the V winning mechanism 210 will be explained. If a specific type of jackpot or small win is won in a winning lottery in a game round, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game round, the opening condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied, so that 4(a), the second opening/closing door 213 opens.

When the player launches a game ball to the right side of the game board 30 by operating the operation handle 25, and the game ball circulates near the second door 213 while the second door 213 is open, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), the game ball flows into the channel 211 from the second big prize opening 212 guided by the opened second opening/closing door 213. The game balls that first flowed into the channel 211 after the second opening/closing door 213 was opened are stored in the storage section 218 by the closed storage valve 216. Further, in this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage section 218 is one. In addition, as a modification, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 4(c), when a game ball enters from the second grand prize opening 212 in a state where one game ball is stored in the storage section 218, the game ball is first stored in the storage section 218. The game balls stored in 218 block the flow to the storage section 218, flow in the direction of the outlet 215 in the flow path 211, and are discharged from the outlet 215 to the back side of the gaming area.

As shown in FIG. 4(d), when the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are satisfied, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Details of the closing conditions will be described later. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 4E, the storage valve drive mechanism 217 drives the storage valve 216 in the opening direction, and the game balls stored in the storage section 218 are distributed in the direction of the clone 220 in the flow path 211. do. Then, the game ball discharged from the channel 211 flows on the upper surface of the clone 220, and then enters the V winning hole 222 or the non-V winning hole 224. As described above, when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222, it becomes a jackpot, and when a game ball enters the non-V winning hole 224, it does not become a jackpot and is ejected from the gaming area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, each time one game ball enters (flows into) the second large prize opening 212 of the V winning mechanism 210, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71. The entry of the game ball into the second big prize opening 212 is detected by the detection sensor 214.

As described above, as a modified example, if a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 is adopted, a plurality of game balls can be stored on the upper surface of the clone 220 by opening the storage valve 216. , it is possible to improve the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole 222, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation. In this case, even if two game balls enter the V winning hole 222, it will be treated as a jackpot based only on the first game ball that entered the V winning hole 222, and the game balls will be sent to the V winning hole 222. The second game ball that enters is not treated as a jackpot, and is ejected to the back side of the game area in the same way as the game ball that enters the non-V winning hole 224.

《A2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entry holes and through gates such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a first opening/closing door drive unit 36c that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. The drive unit 34b, the second door drive unit 213b that opens and closes the second door 213, the storage valve drive mechanism 217 that drives the storage valve 216, and the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the first opening/closing door driving section 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, and controls the second opening/closing door driving section 36c so that the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed. Drive control of the opening/closing door drive section 213b. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a specific jackpot or small win, the MPU 62 drives and controls the storage valve drive mechanism 217 so that the storage valve 216 is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern are being displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time when the 1st liquid crystal pattern or the 2nd liquid crystal pattern is stopped and displayed is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. Various types of counter information are used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, allocating jackpot types, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b, a determination process execution area 64c, and a type determination process execution area 64i. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is set to the first pending value in the pending information storage area 64b. The information is stored in area Ra in chronological order. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. Stored in chronological order.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the winning random number counter C1 when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the winning random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and its updated value is determined at the timing when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode, or at the timing when a game ball enters the V prize opening 222. It is stored in the pending information storage area 64d.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the values of these winning random number counters C1 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is acquired when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the start of the opening/closing execution mode and is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the counter C2. The jackpot type (the number of round game runs) determined by the type determination process is displayed on the round display section 39.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 3(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the . For example, if C4=0 or 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33. A win/fail table for the game ball and a win/fail table for comparing with the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. As shown in the figure, in the win/fail table for the first starting opening, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, five values from 5 to 9 are set as small wins (misses). The small hit (miss) will be described later. Values other than the 10 values from 0 to 9 (10 to 1199) are outliers.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. As shown in the figure, in the win/fail table for the second starting opening, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are small wins (misses).

Here, a small hit (missing) is a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is executed, but in the support mode, a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition. It is. On the other hand, a normal error is a validity result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the support mode. In addition, in the following explanation, a small hit (missing) is also simply called a "small winning", and a normal winning is also simply called a "missing".

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of the opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the above-mentioned (2) opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing between the opening/closing execution mode is started and ends. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of occurrence of game balls entering the door 213 (winning) is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. It can be set to On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. It can be set as follows.

The opening limit time for one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213, and the opening limit number for one opening of the variable prize winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, if the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the V winning mechanism 210 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 may be arbitrary. be. Specifically, it is only necessary that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening time limit for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, it is assumed that the ball enters the variable winning device 36 and the V-winning mechanism 210 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. Good too.

In this embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a jackpot and a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger, or when a gaming ball enters the V prize opening 222. In this case, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 9(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting opening (at the time of winning the jackpot). This sorting table is referred to when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by a ball entering the first starting slot.

FIG. 9(b) shows a distribution table when a V prize is won triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole. In the distribution table, when a ball enters the first starting hole, it becomes a small win in the game round that is executed, and when the ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed using the small win as a trigger, it becomes a jackpot. Referenced when

FIG. 9(c) shows a distribution table for the second starting port (when winning a jackpot and when winning a V prize triggered by a ball entering the second starting port). The distribution table is used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by a ball entering the second starting slot, and in a game run triggered by a ball entering the second starting slot. This is referred to when the ball enters the V winning hole 222 and becomes a jackpot during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed with the small win as a trigger.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting opening in FIG. 9(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed when the ball enters the first starting opening. The types of jackpots in the case of winning are set as 5R 1st type jackpot, 5R 2nd type jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot.

The 5R first type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed five times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the first type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of playable games is limited to 90 in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, after the game is played 90 times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 5R second type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed five times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the second type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is limited to five. That is, after the game is played five times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed 10 times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 44" correspond to the 5R first type jackpot, and "45 to 60" correspond to the 5R jackpot type counter C2. It corresponds to the second type jackpot, and "61 to 99" corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting port in FIG. 9(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, In the case where a small hit occurs in the executed game round, and the ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type is 5R type 1 jackpot, 10R normal A jackpot is set.

Since the 5R first type jackpot and the 10R normal jackpot have been explained in the distribution table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 9(a), their explanation will be omitted.

In the distribution table when the ball enters the first starting slot and wins a V prize, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 5R type 1 jackpot. ``65-99'' corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 9(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by a ball entering the second starting port. If you win, you will win a small hit in the game run triggered by the ball entering the second starting slot, and you will hit the jackpot by entering the V winning slot 222 during the opening/closing execution mode that was triggered by the small winning. In this case, the jackpot types are set as 15R first type jackpot, 4R first type jackpot, and 4R second type jackpot.

The 15R first type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed 15 times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the first type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of playable games is limited to 90 in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, after the game is played 90 times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 4R first type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed four times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the first type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of playable games is limited to 90 in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, after the game is played 90 times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 4R second type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed four times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the second type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is limited to five. That is, after the game is played five times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49" correspond to the 15R first type jackpot, and "50 to 57" correspond to the 4R type jackpot. It corresponds to the 1st type jackpot, and "58-99" corresponds to the 4R 2nd type jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved, the jackpot type is distributed in such a way that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed when the ball enters the first starting slot. In the case where the ball enters the first starting slot, the ball enters the V winning slot 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by a small win, and the ball enters the V winning slot 222, resulting in a jackpot. If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round triggered by the ball entering the second starting slot, and if you win the small prize in the game round triggered by the ball entering the second starting slot. There is a difference between a case where a ball enters the V winning hole 222 and a jackpot during the opening/closing execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. ing.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i. The MPU 62 uses these values of the hit random number counter C1 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. At the same time, the display mode of the round display section 39 is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the firing of game balls into the gaming area PA continues in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is different between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role is opened several times, the electric role is opened several times. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 10(a) shows a win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4, which is the winning of electric accessory opening. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 10(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10(b), the electric accessory opening lottery win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the electric accessory opening lottery. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

《A3》Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game on the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 2.

When the player starts playing the game, he operates the operating handle 25 to fire the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30. Hereinafter, firing the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as "left-handed hitting," and firing the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as "right-handed hitting."

When the player starts hitting left-handed and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33, a game round begins to notify the winning lottery result triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33. be done. If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round ends. Here, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the type of jackpot (see FIG. 9) is not determined at the time when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed after the end of the game round in which the winning lottery is won.

When the game round in which the jackpot was won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When the opening/closing execution mode is started, a performance (right-hand hitting suggestion performance) that suggests to the player to shoot the game ball towards the right side of the game board 30 (hit right) is performed. When the player recognizes the right-handed hitting suggestion effect, fires the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and when the game ball enters (passes through) the type determination gate 202, the type is determined after starting the opening/closing execution mode. The type determination process is executed when the game ball first enters (passes through) the gate 202. The type determination process is a process for determining the jackpot type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

When the jackpot type is determined by executing the type determination process, a round game is started in which the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 perform opening/closing operations based on the opening/closing scenario set for each jackpot type. Ru. The opening/closing scenario is a program that predetermines the pattern of opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213. Details of the opening/closing scenario will be described later.

When a game ball hit right by the player enters the first grand prize opening 36a or the second grand prize opening 212 during the period in which the round game is being executed (hereinafter also referred to as the opening/closing processing period), the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 36a or the second grand prize opening 212. A set number of game balls are given to the player as a benefit (prize balls).

In this embodiment, an opening/closing scenario is set in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens only in a specific case, and a game ball can be entered into the second grand prize opening 212. Then, as explained in FIG. 4, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 212, one game ball among the game balls that entered the second big prize opening 212 is stored in the storage section 218. Then, after the storage valve 216 is opened, the water flows from the flow path 211 to the clone 220 (see FIG. 4(e)). Then, when the game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222, a new jackpot is confirmed. When a new jackpot is confirmed as a result of a game ball entering the V winning hole 222, the opening/closing execution mode that is currently being executed is interrupted and a new opening/closing execution is started based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 222. mode is started. As mentioned above, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33, the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won The jackpot type was determined when a game ball entered the type determination gate 202 in , the type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

As explained in FIG. 9, the distribution of the jackpot type in the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (FIG. 4(a)), and the distribution of the jackpot type triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (FIG. 4(a)). This is different from the distribution of jackpot types in the jackpot at the time of winning the V prize (FIG. 4(b)). In the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that more benefits will be given to the player when the jackpot type is sorted in the jackpot at the time of winning a V prize triggered by the ball entering the first starting slot. Therefore, even if a jackpot is confirmed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, if the second opening/closing door 213 opens during a round game, the player cannot move the game ball into the first opening. The user wants the game ball to enter the two major winning holes 212 and further enter the V winning hole 222. Therefore, even during a round game, the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

Even if the second opening/closing door 213 was opened and the game ball was able to enter the second large prize opening 212, the game ball could not be entered into the V winning opening 222. Then, the round game based on the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 continues.

When the round game ends and the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the high frequency support mode is set for the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, it will be executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The support mode in the game round becomes the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the player hits the game ball to the right and causes the game ball to enter the through gate 35, thereby executing the electric accessory opening lottery. If you win the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric accessory 34a opens and allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and as a result, the game ball enters the second starting port 34. A winning lottery will be held based on this.

The result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a jackpot or a small jackpot. If you win a jackpot, the game will be executed after the game round in which you won the jackpot ends, just as in the case where you win a jackpot in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33. The type of jackpot is determined by letting a game ball enter the type determining gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode. Then, a round game set to the determined jackpot type is executed.

On the other hand, if a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened once after the end of the game round in which the small win was won. The open/close execution mode is executed. Then, if a game ball enters the second big prize opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then a game ball enters the V prize opening 222, a jackpot is confirmed, and the jackpot is confirmed. The opening/closing execution mode triggered by this is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, a bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set for the type of jackpot.

Next, the player starts the game and hits the game ball to the left to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 33, and wins a small win in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33. Let's explain the case.

When a small hit is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the second opening/closing door 213 opens once after the game round in which the small win was won is completed. Execution mode is executed. After starting the opening/closing execution mode, a right-handed hitting suggestion performance is executed to suggest to the player that he/she should hit right-handed. The player executes a right-handed hit according to the right-handed hit suggestion presentation, causes a game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then a game ball enters the V winning opening 222. If the ball hits, a jackpot is confirmed, and an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, a bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set for the type of jackpot. The general flow of the game on the gaming machine in this embodiment has been explained above.

《A4》Summary of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a time chart illustrating a case 1 in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. In addition, the outline of the process described below is not executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, but only in specific cases. executed.

When the game round U1 is started when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 after the player hits left, the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a start to fluctuate. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round U1. Thereafter, the fluctuation of the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a stops. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a, but there is no effect that clearly suggests that the jackpot has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. Instead, a performance is performed in which it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether he has won a jackpot or a small win. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting sound can recognize that he has won a jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1. I can't.

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery is won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. As described above, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot has not been determined at the time of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined by the game ball entering the type determining gate 202 after the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, even when the game round in which the winning lottery is won ends, the round display section 39 does not display the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the period from the time when the opening/closing execution mode starts until the type of jackpot is determined is also referred to as a "waiting period".

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery was won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and at the same time, a performance suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting suggestion performance) is executed, and a benefit can be given to the player. A production that indicates that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot, more specifically, a production that suggests that there are two chances to win the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as "double chance production") is performed. .

When the player recognizes that the right-handed hit suggestion performance and the double chance performance have been executed, he executes the right-handed hit and the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, a type determination process is executed, and the jackpot type is determined. . Once the jackpot type is determined, the waiting period ends and the opening period begins. A right-handed hitting suggestion performance is also performed during the opening period. After the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period begins. During the opening/closing processing period, round games are executed the number of times corresponding to the determined jackpot type. At this time, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens is executed in the first round game (1Rth) of the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type. In addition, when the opening/closing processing period starts, there will be an effect that suggests that the first of the two opportunities to win the jackpot has started (hereinafter referred to as the first chance effect). ) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance production, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second big prize opening 212, and furthermore, the game ball is allowed to enter the V winning opening 222. A prompting performance is executed.

The player recognizes the first chance performance to be executed and executes the right hit, and the game ball can enter the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and the game ball can be stored. If the game balls can be stored in the section 218 (see FIG. 4) (proceed to [Storage in the storage section] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 starts the opening/closing operation after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Execute once. At this time, one game ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the channel 211 and flows into the clone 220.

The game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222 or the non-V winning hole 224. When a game ball circulating through Cloon 220 enters the V-winning slot 222 (proceeds to [Ball entering V-winning slot] shown in the time chart), in terms of processing, a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in game round U1. The round game that is being executed is continued based on this, and the jackpot that was triggered by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is not determined, but is based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 222. A new opening/closing execution mode is also not started. Further, the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 does not confer any benefits to the player or change the game state.

However, in this embodiment, the V-winning jackpot effect is executed when a game ball enters the V-winning hole 222. The V-winning jackpot performance is a performance that suggests that a game ball has entered the V-winning slot 222 and also suggests a jackpot. In this embodiment, the character "V" is displayed on the display surface 41a, and the character "Jackpot" is also displayed.

By executing the V-winning jackpot performance triggered by the game ball entering the V-winning slot 222, a new jackpot is confirmed for the player when the gaming ball enters the V-winning slot 222. It is possible to make the user recognize the situation as if it were a real event, and to create a sense of expectation. Moreover, the player can be made to recognize as if the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 has started.

Then, after the V-winning jackpot effect is executed, the 1st round of the round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1 ends, and the 2nd round (2R) starts. be done. In the second and subsequent rounds, a performance indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has been started is performed. By doing this, the player can be made to feel as if a new opening/closing execution mode has started based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222, giving the player a sense of anticipation. be able to. In other words, it is possible to give the player a new sense of anticipation during the round game that is actually being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1.

On the other hand, if the game ball circulating through Cloon 220 enters the non-V winning slot 224 (proceed to [Ball not entering V winning slot] shown in the time chart), you will win the two prepared jackpots. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second chance effect) indicating that the second chance has started is executed. The second chance performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player. At the timing when the jackpot is confirmed, an effect is executed to indicate that the jackpot has been confirmed. In addition, if the performance operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Execute a performance that shows. In this case as well, in terms of processing, the round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1 continues, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated in the second chance performance, the round game is continued. As a result, the jackpot is not confirmed and a new opening/closing execution mode is not started. Further, in the second chance performance, the operation of the performance operation button 24 does not trigger any privileges to be given to the player, nor is the game state changed.

However, in this embodiment, when the performance operation button 24 is operated in the second chance performance, a jackpot performance suggesting a jackpot is executed. Alternatively, if the performance operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period of time after execution of a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Execute a performance that shows. By executing the jackpot effect after the execution of the second chance effect in this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if a new jackpot has been confirmed by the second chance effect, and it also gives a sense of anticipation. can do.

Then, after the jackpot effect is executed, the 1st round of the round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1 ends, and the 2nd round (2R) starts. . In the second and subsequent rounds, a performance indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has been started is performed. By doing so, the player can be made to feel as if a new opening/closing execution mode based on a jackpot due to the second chance performance has started, and a sense of anticipation can be given to the player. In other words, it is possible to give the player a new sense of anticipation during the round game that is actually being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1.

In addition, the production executed during the 2nd and subsequent round games when a game ball circulating Cloon 220 enters the V winning hole 222 and a game ball circulating Cloon 220 entering the non-V winning hole 224. In this case, the performance executed during the 2nd and subsequent round games may be set to a different performance. For example, when a game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V-winning hole 222, the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V-winning hole 222 is performed as a performance during the 2nd and subsequent round games. If a game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the non-V winning slot 224 and a jackpot effect is executed due to the second chance effect, a round game from the 2nd round onward is executed. As the middle performance, a performance suggesting that an opening/closing execution mode is being executed based on a new jackpot due to the second chance performance is performed. In this way, in any case, although it is actually the same round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1, By providing different performances during the round game, it is possible to give different expectations to the players, expand the range of gameplay, and improve the interest of the game.

Next, even though the player recognizes the first chance performance and executes a right-handed hit, the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. A case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage section 218 (proceeding to [Not stored in the storage section] shown in the time chart) will be explained. In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance performance in this case is also a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player can press the performance operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, a performance indicating that a jackpot is confirmed is executed. In addition, if the performance operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Execute a performance that shows. In this case, as well as the case where the ball does not enter the V winning slot shown in the time chart, the process is executed based on the winning of the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1. The round game continues, and the jackpot is not confirmed when the performance operation button 24 is operated in the second chance performance, and a new opening/closing execution mode is not started. Further, in the second chance performance, the operation of the performance operation button 24 does not trigger any privileges to be given to the player, nor is the game state changed.

However, in this embodiment, when the performance operation button 24 is operated in the second chance performance, a jackpot performance suggesting a jackpot is executed. Alternatively, if the performance operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period of time after execution of a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Execute a performance that shows. By executing the jackpot effect after the execution of the second chance effect in this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if a new jackpot has been confirmed by the second chance effect, and it also gives a sense of anticipation. can do.

Then, after the jackpot effect is executed, the 1st round of the round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1 ends, and the 2nd round (2R) starts. . In the second and subsequent rounds, a performance indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has been started is performed. By doing so, the player can be made to feel as if a new opening/closing execution mode based on a jackpot due to the second chance performance has started, and a sense of anticipation can be given to the player. In other words, it is possible to give the player a new sense of anticipation during the round game that is actually being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1. Case 1 has been explained above.

FIG. 12 is a time chart illustrating a case 2 in which a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. In this embodiment, in all cases where a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33, the process described below is executed.

When the game round U2 is started when the player executes a left-handed hit and the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a start to fluctuate. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round U2. Thereafter, the fluctuation of the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a stops. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a small win is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a, but the display of an image on the symbol display device 41 and the output of sound clearly indicate that the small win has been won. No performance is performed, but a performance is performed in which it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether he has won a jackpot or a small win. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying images on the symbol display device 41 and outputting audio recognizes that he has won a small win in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1. I can't.

After the game round U2 in which the small win was won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. If a small win is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33, the opening/closing execution mode is started. Then, during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode, a right-handed hit suggestion presentation is executed, and a presentation indicating that there is a possibility that a bonus will be given to the player, more specifically, an opportunity to win a jackpot. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as "double chance effect") suggesting that two chances are prepared is executed.

Then, after the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period starts. In the opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened only once is executed. In addition, when the opening/closing processing period starts, there will be an effect that suggests that the first of the two opportunities to win the jackpot has started (hereinafter referred to as the first chance effect). ) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance performance, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and the game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 212, and the game ball is also entered into the V winning hole 222 to win the jackpot. A performance is performed to encourage the decision to be made.

The player can recognize the first chance performance to be executed and execute the right hit, and the game ball can enter the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. When the game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 (see FIG. 4) (proceed to "Storage in the storage section" shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. Execute once. At this time, one game ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the channel 211 and flows into the clone 220.

The game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222 or the non-V winning hole 224. When the game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222 (proceeds to [Ball entering V winning hole] shown in the time chart), a jackpot is confirmed. Then, when the jackpot is confirmed, a V winning jackpot performance is executed. The V-winning jackpot performance is a performance that suggests that a game ball has entered the V-winning slot 222 and also suggests a jackpot. In this embodiment, the character "V" is displayed on the display surface 41a, and the character "Jackpot" is also displayed. It should be noted that the V winning jackpot effect executed in case 1 and the V winning jackpot effect executed in case 2 may be effects with the same or similar content, or may be completely different effects. In the present embodiment, the V winning jackpot effect executed in case 1 and the V winning jackpot effect executed in case 2 are effects with the same or similar contents. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the progress state of the game being executed is in case 1 or case 2, and to make the player make various guesses. It can give a sense of expectation.

Thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by winning a small prize in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33, ends. Then, a new opening/closing execution mode is started, triggered by a jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222. In addition, when a jackpot occurs as a result of a game ball entering the V winning hole 222, the type of jackpot is determined as well as the confirmation of the jackpot.

In addition, the jackpot effect executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 in case 1 and the jackpot effect executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 in case 2 are the same or similar. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the performance is as follows. By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to judge whether or not a jackpot has been confirmed by the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222, and it is possible to make the player make various guesses. In addition, it is possible to give players a sense of anticipation.

On the other hand, if the game ball circulating through Cloon 220 enters the non-V winning slot 224 (proceed to [Ball not entering V winning slot] shown in the time chart), you will win the two prepared jackpots. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second chance effect) indicating that the second chance has started is executed. The second chance performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player. At the specified timing, an effect is executed to indicate that the failure has been confirmed. In addition, if the effect operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period after the execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the failure is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Execute a performance that shows. Note that the confirmation of a loss suggested in the second chance production is a content that suggests that the winning lottery in game round U2 was a loss (or that it was a loss).

After executing the second chance performance, the round game being executed triggered by winning a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, a performance urging the player to play left-handed (left-handed hitting suggestion performance) is performed. The player executes a left-handed hit and attempts to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 again.

Next, even though the player recognizes the first chance performance and executes a right-handed hit, the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. A case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage section 218 (proceeding to [Not stored in the storage section] shown in the time chart) will be explained. In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance performance in this case is also a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player can press the performance operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect indicating that the deviation has been confirmed is executed. In addition, if the effect operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period after the execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the failure is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Execute a performance that shows.

After executing the second chance performance, the round game being executed triggered by winning a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, a performance urging the player to play left-handed (left-handed hitting suggestion performance) is performed. The player executes a left-handed hit and attempts to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 again.

As explained above, both in the case where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (Case 1), and in the case where a small win is won (Case 2). ), the first symbol display section 37a displays a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. The performance will not be executed. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of a winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound cannot recognize the lottery result in the game round at the time when the game round ends. As a result, even if the player has won a small prize, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he or she has won a big prize.

Furthermore, after the game round ends, in both case 1 and case 2, the right hit suggestion performance and the double chance suggestion performance are executed, so during the period when the performance is executed after the game round ends. It is also possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win in the winning lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined at the time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, it is determined by the game ball entering the type determining gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. When the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp of the round display section 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of times the round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. On the other hand, if you have won a small prize, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, even if you win a jackpot or a small win, the round lamp will not light up immediately after the end of the game, so the round lamp will not turn on after the game ends. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from identifying whether he or she has won a jackpot or a small win in the relevant game round.

As a result, the player is not made aware of the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player hits the right ball and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the game round ends. On the other hand, for a relatively long period of time, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small win starts, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and to keep the player interested in the game. It can draw attention. In addition, when determining the type of jackpot, the player is asked to hit right and enter the game ball into the type determination gate 202, so the player is actively involved in determining the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to draw more attention to the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in case 1, even though the player won a jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1 and the game ball entered the V winning slot 222 after that, he won the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1. As a result, the round game being executed continues, and the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is not determined, and a new round game based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is not confirmed. The opening/closing execution mode is not started either. Further, the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 does not confer any benefits to the player or change the game state. On the other hand, in case 2, if you win a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2, and then the game ball enters the V winning slot 222, the jackpot is confirmed, and you win a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2. After the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning ends, a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 222 is started. In other words, when a game ball enters the V-winning hole 222, a bonus may or may not be awarded to the player, so if a game ball enters the V-winning hole 222 during a game. In addition, it is possible to make the player guess whether the privilege will be awarded or not, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the privilege will be awarded.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, the game determines whether the result of the winning lottery in the game round that triggered the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is a jackpot or a small win. It is possible to make the player guess and give the player a greater sense of expectation.

In addition, in case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, even though no benefit is given as a result of the game ball entering the V winning hole 222, the game ball enters the V winning hole 222. A V-winning jackpot effect is executed when the ball enters the winning hole 222. In case 2, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, a privilege is given that is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 222. Taking advantage of the ball being entered, a V-winning jackpot performance is executed. Therefore, even if a benefit is not granted due to the entry of a game ball into the V-winning slot 222, the benefit will not be awarded to a player who recognizes that a V-winning jackpot has been executed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that this is the case.

In case 1, even if the game ball enters the V-winning slot 222, no benefit will be given due to the ball entering, but the game ball is inserted into the V-winning slot 222 in the first chance performance. Since a performance is executed to encourage the player to make a ball, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a bonus may be awarded to the player who recognizes that the performance has been executed.Furthermore, the V It is possible to encourage the game ball to be launched in such a manner that the game ball enters the winning hole 222.

Furthermore, in case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, the 1st round of the round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1 ends, and the 2nd round game ends. Even though the 2nd round (2nd round) has started, in the 2nd and subsequent rounds, an effect indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has been started is performed. By doing this, the player can be made to feel as if a new opening/closing execution mode has started based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222, giving the player a sense of anticipation. be able to. In other words, it is possible to give the player a new sense of anticipation during the round game that is actually being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1.

<<A5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sa0101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0102.

In step Sa0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0103.

In step Sa0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0104. Note that the change type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 22), which will be described later.

In step Sa0104, ball entry processing for the starting openings is executed as the game balls enter the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sa0104 will be described later. After executing step Sa0104, the process advances to step Sa0105.

In step Sa0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the game ball enters (passes through) the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sa0105 will be described later. After executing step Sa0105, the process advances to step Sa0106.

In step Sa0106, ball entry processing for the type determining gate is executed as the game ball enters the type determining gate. Details of the ball entering process for the type determining gate in step Sa0106 will be described later. After executing step Sa0106, the process advances to step Sa0107.

In step Sa0107, ball entry processing for the big winning hole is executed as the game ball enters the big winning hole. Details of the ball entry process for the big winning a prize opening in step Sa0107 will be described later. After executing step Sa0107, the process advances to step Sa0108.

In step Sa0108, ball entry processing for the croon is executed as the game ball enters the croon. Details of the ball entry process for croon in step Sa0108 will be described later. After executing step Sa0108, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. Ball entrance processing for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13: Sa0104).

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sa0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sa0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sa0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0203.

In step Sa0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sa0204.

In step Sa0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0209.

In step Sa0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sa0201: NO), the process advances to step Sa0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sa0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sa0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sa0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sa0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0208.

In step Sa0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0209.

In step Sa0209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sa0204 or step Sa0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sa0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sa0209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sa0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sa0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sa0212.

In step Sa0212, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13), and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 22) is added to the corresponding reservation area. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of pending items added by 1 in step Sa0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13) are Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sa0210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13) is , is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sa0210. After executing step Sa0212, the process advances to step Sa0213.

In step Sa0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (pending information), and determines the success/failure determination result of the winning lottery (lottery result) and the jackpot. This is a process in which determinations are made of the type of game, the presence or absence of a reach, the variation time of game rounds, etc., before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sa0213, the process advances to step Sa0214.

In step Sa0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is used as a hold command. Set.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sa0214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 14: Sa0213) of the ball entry process for the starting port.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As mentioned above, the preliminary judgment process is based on the pending information, and the pending information is used to determine whether or not the winning lottery is correct, to determine the type of jackpot, to determine whether reach has occurred, to determine the fluctuating time of the game, etc. This is a process executed before becoming a target of the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sa0301, jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sa0301, the process advances to step Sa0302.

In step Sa0302, variation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process for determining the variation time of the game. Details of the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step Sa0302, the primary determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be explained. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the advance determination process (FIG. 15: Sa0301).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step Sa0401, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) is read out when the ball enters the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 14). After that, the process advances to step Sa0402.

In step Sa0402, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is based on the first reservation area Ra. In other words, the pending information to be subjected to the first determination process is information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, or information obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port 34. Determine whether the information was acquired as If it is determined in step Sa0402 that the read reservation area is based on the first reservation area Ra (Sa0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0403 and refers to the validity table for the first starting gate. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa0402 that the read reservation area is not based on the first reservation area Ra, that is, if the read reservation area is based on the second reservation area Rb (Sa0402: NO) , the process advances to step Sa0404 and refers to the validity table for the first starting port. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0405.

In step Sa0405, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is a jackpot in the winning lottery. In step Sa0405, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0406.

In step Sa0406, the jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sa0405, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has not won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0407.

In step Sa0407, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is a small winning in the winning lottery. In step Sa0407, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a small win in the winning lottery (Sa0407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0408.

In step Sa0408, the small hit information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

In step Sa0407, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has not won a small win in the winning lottery (Sa0407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0409.

In step Sa0409, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa0410, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa0411, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step Sa0411 that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sa0411: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0412, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa0411 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Sa0411: NO), the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is directly ended.

<Fluctuating time information acquisition process>
Next, the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be explained. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 15: Sa0302).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating time information acquisition process. In step Sa0501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port in the starting port entry process (FIG. 14) is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0502.

In step Sa0502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game round is a winning result. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a jackpot (Sa0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0503.

In step Sa0503, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step Sa0503, the process advances to step Sa0509.

In step Sa0509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sa0502, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot (step Sa0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0504, and it is determined whether or not a small win has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. judge. In step Sa0504, if it is determined that the small win has been won (Sa0504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0505.

In step Sa0505, the variable time table for small winnings stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step Sa0505, the process advances to step Sa0509.

In step Sa0509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sa0504, if it is determined that a small win has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sa0504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0506, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs. In step Sa0506, if it is determined that reach occurs (Sa0506: YES), the process advances to step Sa0507.

In step Sa0507, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa0509, and after storing the obtained variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

In step Sa0506, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Sa0506: NO), the process advances to step Sa0508, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is read. With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa0509, and after storing the obtained variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 13: step Sa0105).

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sa0601, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sa0601, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sa0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0602, and the number of accessory items held SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa0601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sa0601: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Sa0602, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sa0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0603, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. After that, the process advances to step Sa0604.

In step Sa0604, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sa0602, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items held SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sa0602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number SN of accessory items held is the upper limit value, the electric The through ball entry process is ended without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Ball entry processing for type determination gate>
Next, the ball entry process for the type determination gate will be described. The ball entry process for the type determination gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13: Step Sa0106).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the type determination gate. In step Sa0701, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the type determining gate 202 or not. In step Sa0701, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the type determining gate 202 (Sa0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0702. On the other hand, in step Sa0701, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the type determining gate 202 (Sa0701: NO), the ball entering process for the type determining gate is directly terminated.

In step Sa0702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process (see FIG. 29) is executed after winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and the entry process for this type determination gate is executed. In this step, after the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area, it is turned off (Sa0705).

If it is determined in step Sa0702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa0702: YES), the process advances to step Sa0703. In step Sa0702, if it is determined that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa0702: NO), the ball entering process for the type determination gate is immediately terminated.

In step Sa0703, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa0704.

In step Sa0704, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process (see FIG. 29) described later. be made into After executing step Sa0704, the process advances to step Sa0705.

In step Sa0705, the type determination permission flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the ball entering process for the type determining gate is ended.

<Ball entry processing for the big prize opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the big winning hole will be explained. The ball entering process for the big winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13: Step Sa0107).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the big winning hole. In step Sa0801, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a. In step Sa0801, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first big prize opening 36a (Sa0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0802. On the other hand, in step Sa0801, if it is not determined that the game ball has entered the first big prize opening 36a (Sa0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0804.

In step Sa0802, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set based on the ball entering the first large winning hole 36a. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the first big prize opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step Sa0802, the process advances to step Sa0803.

In step Sa0803, the first big prize opening ball entry command is set. The first big winning hole entry ball command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a. The first big prize opening ball entry command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of normal processing to be described later. After executing step Sa0803, the process advances to step Sa0804.

In step Sa0804, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 212 or not. In step Sa0804, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 212 (Sa0804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0805. On the other hand, in step Sa0804, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second big winning hole 212 (Sa0804: NO), the ball entering process for the big winning hole is ended.

In step Sa0805, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering the second large winning hole 212 is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second big prize opening 212, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step Sa0805, the process advances to step Sa0806.

In step Sa0806, a second grand prize opening ball entry command is set. The second big winning hole entry ball command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 212. The second grand prize opening ball entry command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process described later. After executing step Sa0806, the ball entry process for the big winning hole is ended.

<Ball entry processing for Croon>
Next, the ball entry process for Croon will be explained. The ball entry process for croon is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 13: step Sa0108).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for croon. In step Sa0901, it is determined whether or not the Kroon ball entry permission flag is ON. The croon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened in the big winning opening/closing process (FIG. 32), and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the closing 220. (FIG. 21: Sa0910). By doing this, even though the storage valve 216 is not performing the opening operation, damage or abnormality of the storage valve drive mechanism 217 or the storage valve 216 may cause game balls to unintentionally flow into the croon. It is possible to avoid hitting the jackpot by hitting the ball into the winning hole 222. If it is determined in step Sa0901 that the Kroon entry permission flag is ON (Sa0901: YES), the process advances to step Sa0902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa0901 that the Kroon ball entry permission flag is not ON (Sa0901: NO), the Kroon ball entry process is immediately terminated.

In step Sa0902, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 or not. In step Sa0902, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 (Sa0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0903.

In step Sa0903, it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON. That is, in this process, it is determined whether the opportunity for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 222 is due to winning a small hit in a winning lottery or winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. ing. As explained in case 1 of FIG. 11, if a game ball enters the V winning slot 222 as a result of winning the small prize in the winning lottery, the jackpot is confirmed, but if the player wins the small prize in the winning lottery When a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 as a result of this, the round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round continues, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 222. A jackpot triggered by the entry of the ball is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 is not started. Further, the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 does not confer any benefits to the player or change the game state. Therefore, in step Sa0903, it is determined whether the opportunity for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 222 is due to winning a small hit in the winning lottery or winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. It is determined whether the jackpot is confirmed or not. In step Sa0903, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (Sa0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0904.

In step Sa0904, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). As described above, in the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the opening/closing execution mode is activated. When a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during execution, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i) in the ball entry process for the type determination gate. However, in the case of a jackpot triggered by the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 222, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination It is stored in the processing execution area 64i). After executing step Sa0904, the process advances to step Sa0905.

In step Sa0905, the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON. The V winning jackpot flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the setting of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot due to the V winning is completed (FIG. 32: Sa1910) . After executing step Sa0905, the process advances to step Sa0906.

In step Sa0906, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 triggered by a small win in the winning lottery. The V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of normal processing to be described later. After executing step Sa0906, the process advances to step Sa0910.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa0903 that the small hit flag is not ON (Sa0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0907.

In step Sa0907, a dummy V winning command is set. The dummy V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 triggered by a jackpot in the winning lottery. The dummy V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of normal processing to be described later. After executing step Sa0907, the process advances to step Sa0910.

In step Sa0902, if it is determined that no game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 (Sa0902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0908.

In step Sa0908, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the non-V winning hole 224 or not. In step Sa0908, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the non-V winning hole 224 (Sa0908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0909. On the other hand, in step Sa0908, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the non-V winning hole 224 (Sa0908: NO), the ball entering process for the croon ends as it is.

In step Sa0909, a non-V winning command is set. The non-V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. The non-V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of normal processing to be described later. After executing step Sa0909, the process advances to step Sa0910.

In step Sa0910, the Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the ball entry process for Croon ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sa1001, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1002.

In step Sa1002, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1003.

In step Sa1003, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sa1002, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Furthermore, if commands related to effects such as a startup command, a variation command, a variation type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sa1003, the process advances to step Sa1004.

In step Sa1004, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1005.

In step Sa1005, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sa1006. In step Sa1006, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sa1006, the process advances to step Sa1007.

In step Sa1007, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1008.

In step Sa1008, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1009.

In step Sa1009, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sa1003). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sa1009, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sa1009: NO), in step Sa1010 and step Sa1011, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sa1010, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sa1011, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sa1009: YES), the process returns to step Sa1003 and each process from step Sa1003 to step Sa1008 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sa1003 to step Sa1008 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 22: Sa1006) of the normal process.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sa1101, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the fluctuation of symbols in the game round in which a jackpot or small winning is won in the winning lottery ends (Sa1112), and the opening/closing execution mode is turned on in the game state transition process (FIG. 28). When the process is to be terminated, it is turned OFF (FIG. 28: Sa1629).

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON in step Sa1101 (Sa1101: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and the main game round control is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sa1102. Finish the process. That is, when the special game state is in progress, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, in step Sa1101, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the special game state is not in progress (Sa1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1102.

In step Sa1102, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when a fluctuating display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

In step Sa1102, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (Sa1102: NO), the process proceeds to steps Sa1103 to Sa1107 for starting a game round. In step Sa1103, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sa1103, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sa1103: YES), the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1103 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sa1103: NO), the process advances to step Sa1104.

In step Sa1104, data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process advances to step Sa1105. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sa1105, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1106.

In step Sa1106, it is determined whether the PNC count flag is ON. The PNC count flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode executed in response to a jackpot for which the high-frequency support mode is set ends (see Figure 35), and is turned OFF when the high-frequency support mode ends. (See Figure 34). The PNC count flag is set to confirm the timing to start counting the number of times the game has been executed during the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sa1106 that the PNC count flag is ON (Sa1106: YES), the process advances to step Sa1107.

In step Sa1107, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The number of games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high frequency support mode. After executing step Sa1107, the present game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1106 that the PNC count flag is not ON (Sa1106: NO), the game cycle control process is immediately terminated.

In step Sa1102, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (Sa1102: YES), the processing for progressing the game round in steps Sa1108 to Sa1113 is executed.

In step Sa1108, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sa1108, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 27) described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sa1108, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sa1108: NO), the process advances to step Sa1109, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step Sa1109, the game time control process is ended.

In step Sa1108, if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (Sa1108: YES), the process advances to step Sa1110 and a variation end process is executed. The variation end process changes the symbol display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 25) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. Control display. After executing step Sa1110, the process advances to step Sa1111.

In step Sa1111, it is determined whether either the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag is ON. The jackpot flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 25) described later. The small win flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small win in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 25) described later. Further, the jackpot flag and the small win flag are turned OFF in the flag erasing process in the transition process at the end of the ending period (FIG. 35), which will be described later.

In step Sa1111, if it is determined that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sa1111: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1112 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1113, and an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is started. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of normal processing, which will be described later. After executing step Sa1113, the game time control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa1111, if it is determined that either the jackpot flag or the small win flag is not ON (Sa1111: NO), the game round control process is directly ended.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: Sa1104) of the game time control process.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step Sa1201, it is determined whether the holding area to which the data setting process is to be performed is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 6) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 6). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sa1201, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sa1201 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sa1201: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area in steps Sa1202 to Sa1207 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sa1201, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sa1201: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps Sa1208 to Sa1213 is executed.

In step Sa1202, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sa1203, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1204. In step Sa1204, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1205.

In step Sa1205, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sa1205, the process advances to step Sa1206.

In step Sa1206, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1207.

In step Sa1207, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa1207 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sa1201, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sa1201: NO), The process advances to step Sa1208.

In step Sa1208, the second start hold number RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1209. In step Sa1209, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sa1210, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1211.

In step Sa1211, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sa1211, the process advances to step Sa1212.

In step Sa1212, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1213.

In step Sa1213, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa1213 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in normal processing (FIG. 22). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: Sa1105) of the game time control process.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sa1301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) is read out when the ball enters the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 14). After that, the process advances to step Sa1302.

In step Sa1302, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In other words, the value of the winning random number counter C1 to be processed is either information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or information obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port 34. Determine whether the information was acquired as a trigger.

In step Sa1302, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1303. In step Sa1303, the validity table for the first starting port is referred to, and the process then proceeds to step Sa1305.

In step Sa1302, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1304. In step Sa1304, the validity table for the second starting port is referred to, and the process then proceeds to step Sa1305.

In step Sa1305, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a jackpot in the winning lottery. In step Sa1305, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1306.

In step Sa1306, a stop result setting process for jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a jackpot is to display a variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won. This is a process for setting whether to terminate the process. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot is acquired by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, and the address information is stored as the stop result address in the RAM 64. Store in the storage area. After executing step Sa1306, the process advances to step Sa1307.

In step Sa1307, the jackpot flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1308, and a specific process execution determination process is executed. The specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute the process described in FIG. 11, that is, the process including the execution of the W chance suggestion performance in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won. This is the process to do so. Details of the specific process execution determination process will be described later. After executing step Sa1308, the process advances to step Sa1315.

On the other hand, in step Sa1305, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has not won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1309.

In step Sa1309, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is a small winning in the winning lottery. In step Sa1309, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a small win in the winning lottery (Sa1309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1310.

In step Sa1310, a stop result setting process for a small win is executed. The stop result setting process for a small hit is to change the state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round in which a small win will be won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. After executing step Sa1310, the process advances to step Sa1311.

In step Sa1311, the small hit flag is turned on. After executing step Sa1311, the process advances to step Sa1315.

In step Sa1309, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 does not result in a small winning in the winning lottery (Sa1309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1312.

In step Sa1312, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round to be executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read out. Then, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sa1312, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the current game round to be executed (Sa1312: YES), the process advances to step Sa1313.

In step Sa1313, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. Specifically, in the current game round, which is the stop result for reach, it is set which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b before the variable display ends. Execute the process to do so. More specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sa1313, the process advances to step Sa1315.

In step Sa1312, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the current game round to be executed (Sa1312: NO), the process advances to step Sa1314.

In step Sa1314, a stop result setting process for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for a loss is the process of determining which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a miss and the variable display is to be ended. This is the process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sa1314, the process advances to step Sa1315.

In step Sa1315, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa1315, the process advances to step Sa1316.

In step Sa1316, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sa1316, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sa1316: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1317 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence or absence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sa1315 are included.

On the other hand, in step Sa1316, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa1316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1318, and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence or absence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sa1315 are included. After executing step Sa1317 or step Sa1318, the process advances to step Sa1319.

In step Sa1319, a variation type command is set. The variation type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, and whether or not a specific process is executed.

The variation command and variation type command set in steps Sa1317 to Sa1319 are sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and variation type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sa1319, the process advances to step Sa1320.

In step Sa1320, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sa1320, this variation start process ends.

<Specific process execution determination process>
Next, the specific process execution determination process will be explained. The specific process execution determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 25: Sa1308). Here, the specific processing means the series of processing described with reference to FIG. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the specific process.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing specific processing execution determination processing. In step Sa1401, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. As described above, the process explained with reference to FIG. 11 is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery that is executed in the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. Therefore, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 34. In order to do so, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display section flag is ON.

In step Sa1401, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1402. On the other hand, in step Sa1401, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa1401: YES), the specific process execution determination process is immediately terminated.

In step Sa1402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery is a predetermined specific value. As explained in FIG. 11, the process shown in FIG. 11 is executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33. Run only in certain cases instead of Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the relevant game round is a predetermined specific value or not, and if it is a specific value, it is decided to execute a specific process. In the present embodiment, the specific values are two values "0 and 1" among the values "0 to 4" of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. is set to . Therefore, in step Sa1402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery is "0" or "1". In step Sa1402, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is a specific value (Sa1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1403. On the other hand, in step Sa1402, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not a specific value (Sa1402: NO), the specific process execution determination process is directly terminated.

In step Sa1403, the specific processing flag is turned on. In the process described in FIG. 11, it is necessary to set an opening/closing scenario (opening pattern) in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode. The specific processing flag is provided to identify whether or not specific processing is executed in the process of determining the opening/closing scenario (FIG. 30: opening/closing scenario setting process). After executing step Sa1403, the process advances to step SSa1404.

In step Sa1404, a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that specific processing is to be executed. The specific processing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of normal processing, which will be described later. After executing step Sa1404, the specific process execution determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 25: Sa1015).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sa1501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1502.

In step Sa1502, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (Sa1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1503.

In step Sa1503, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sa1502, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sa1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1504, and the small hit has not been won in the winning lottery for the current gaming round. Determine whether or not the Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small win flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if the small win flag is ON (Sa1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1505.

In step Sa1505, the variable time table for small winnings stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sa1504, if it is determined that the small win has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sa1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1506.

In step Sa1506, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (Sa1506) is executed when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round in the above step Sa1502 and the small win has not been won in the winning lottery, in step Sa1506, the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a reach is generated among the game rounds in which a small win has not been won. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Sa1506: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sa1507. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sa1507, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sa1506, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sa1506: NO), the process advances to step Sa1508, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa1509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table shows that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the longer the change time becomes. It is set to be short. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referenced depends on the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN when determining the varying time of the relevant game round. are different.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the variation time. However, for example, the larger the value of the total pending number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 22: Sa1007) of the normal process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sa1601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending performance in the special game state.

If it is determined in step Sa1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sa1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1602, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa1602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sa1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1603, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step Sa1603, if it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sa1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1604, and the timing at which the fluctuating display of symbols in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b ends Determine whether or not. In step Sa1604, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (Sa1604: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sa1604, if it is determined that the timing has come to end the variable display (Sa1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1605, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game round that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 23: Sa1112), and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 28: Sa1629).

If it is determined in step Sa1605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sa1605: YES), the process advances to step Sa1606. On the other hand, in step Sa1605, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sa1605: NO), the game state transition process is ended.

In step Sa1606, it is determined whether the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON. In step Sa1606, if it is determined that the game result (result of winning lottery) of the current game round is not a small win (Sa1606: NO), the process advances to step Sa1607.

In step Sa1607, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step Sa1606, since it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is not a small win, the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is a jackpot. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the support mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sa1607, the process advances to step Sa1608.

In step Sa1608, it is determined whether the type determination completion flag is ON. The type determination completion flag is a flag for determining whether the jackpot type has been determined, and is turned ON when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process for determining the jackpot type (FIG. 29: Sa1709). It is turned off immediately before the opening/closing scenario setting process is executed (Sa1610). If it is determined in step Sa1608 that the type determination completion flag is not ON (Sa1608: NO), the process advances to step Sa1609.

In step Sa1609, type determination processing is executed. The type determination process will be described later.

In step Sa1608, if it is determined that the type determination completion flag is ON (Sa1608: YES), the process advances to step Sa1610 and the type determination completion flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sa1611.

Also, in step Sa1606, if it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is a small win (Sa1606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1611.

In step Sa1611, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. As described above, the opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which opening patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the round game are set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa1611, the process advances to step Sa1612.

In step Sa1612, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special gaming state. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa1612, the process advances to step Sa1613.

In step Sa1613, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of jackpot, and information on the jackpot or small win that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode. The information regarding the jackpot or small hit is whether the jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, or whether the small win was won, or whether the jackpot or small win resulted in the winning. Did you win a new jackpot when a game ball entered the V-winning slot 222 during the round game being played, or did you win a jackpot due to a winning lottery executed when a game ball entered the second starting slot 34? Information such as whether the player won a prize, a small win, or a new jackpot due to a game ball entering the V winning slot 222 during a round game executed due to the jackpot or small win. It is. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sa1613, the process advances to step Sa1614 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa1603 that the opening period flag is ON (Sa1603: YES), the process advances to step Sa1615.

In step Sa1615, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sa1615 that the opening period has ended (Sa1615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1616 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1617.

In step Sa1617, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, when the jackpot type is determined by the type determination process, the round display unit 39 displays a display indicating the number of round games set for the determined jackpot type, and the V winning hole 222 is displayed. When a jackpot is confirmed by the game ball entering the ball, a display indicating the number of executions of the round game set to the jackpot type determined by the confirmation of the jackpot is displayed on a round display section 39. After executing step Sa1617, the process advances to step Sa1618.

In step Sa1618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sa1602, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sa1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1619, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sa1619, the process advances to step Sa1620.

In step Sa1620, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sa1620: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1621. On the other hand, in step Sa1620, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sa1620: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended as is.

In step Sa1621, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step Sa1622.

In step Sa1622, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sa1622, the process advances to step Sa1623.

In step Sa1623, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sa1623, the process advances to step Sa1624.

In step Sa1624, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). The audio emission control device 90 starts a production corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sa1624, the process advances to step Sa1625.

In step Sa1625, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sa1601, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sa1601: YES), the process advances to step Sa1626.

In step Sa1626, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sa1623), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sa1626 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sa1626: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1627.

In step Sa1627, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sa1628, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sa1628, the process advances to step Sa1629 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa1626, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sa1626: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

In addition, in FIG. 28, the process of proceeding from the arrow extending from the figure marked with the letter "A" to step Sa1611 is displayed, but the figure marked with the letter "A" is displayed in FIG. It corresponds to the figure marked with the letter "A". That is, it shows that the process proceeds from step Sa2112 in the transition process at the end of the ending period (FIG. 34) to step Sa1611 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28). The gaming state transition process has been described above.

<Type determination process>
Next, the type determination process will be explained. The type determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1609) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the type determination process. In step Sa1701, it is determined whether the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined.

In step Sa1701, if it is determined that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is not ON (Sa1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1702.

In step Sa1702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process is executed in response to winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and in the ball entry process for the type determination gate (FIG. 19), After the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area, it is turned off (FIG. 19: Sa0705).

In step Sa1702, if it is determined that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1703, where the type determination permission flag is turned ON, and then the type determination processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa1702, if it is determined that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa1702: YES), the type determination process is directly terminated.

In step Sa1701, if it is determined that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON (Sa1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1704.

In step Sa1704, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON.

In step Sa1704, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sa1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1705, refers to the distribution table for the first starting opening, and sets the obtained jackpot type counter C2. Identify the jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1707.

In step Sa1704, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1706, refers to the distribution table for the second starting opening, and sets the acquired jackpot type counter C2. Identify the jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa1707.

In step Sa1707, the jackpot type specified in step Sa1705 or step Sa1706 is set as the jackpot type in the current jackpot. After executing step Sa1707, the process advances to step Sa1708.

In step Sa1708, the type determination completion flag is turned on, and the process then proceeds to step Sa1709. In step Sa1709, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the type determination process ends.

<Opening/closing scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be explained. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1611) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process. In step Sa1801, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. In step Sa1801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1802.

In step Sa1802, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step SSa1802 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa1802: NO), the process advances to step Sa1803.

In step Sa1803, a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario (when specific processing is not executed) is set according to the type of jackpot.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening/closing scenario in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the opening/closing scenarios are broadly classified into three types.

The first is a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 31(a). The opening/closing scenario of a normal jackpot is an opening/closing scenario in which opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode in which no specific processing is executed in the event of a jackpot are set. As shown in the figure, an opening/closing scenario is set for each round game execution number (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set as the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as the opening/closing scenario of the normal jackpot is set with an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes as a round game.

The second is a jackpot opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 31(b) when specific processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario of a jackpot when a specific process is executed is the opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 is set in the opening/closing execution mode in which a specific process is executed and a jackpot is achieved. This is a scenario. As shown in the figure, an opening/closing scenario is set for each round game execution number (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set as the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as a jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed includes the second opening/closing door 213 opening/closing once in the first round (1Rth) as a round game. , In subsequent round games, an opening/closing pattern is set in which only the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes. More specifically, in the first round, the operations of the second opening/closing door 213 and the storage valve 216 described in FIG. 4 are performed.

The third scenario is a small winning opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 31(c). In this embodiment, the opening/closing scenario of a small hit is an opening/closing scenario in which opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a small winning are set. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as an opening/closing scenario for a small win has an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door opens and closes only once in the first round (1Rth) as a round game. .

The explanation returns to FIG. 30. In step Sa1803, when a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 31(a)) according to the type of jackpot is set, the opening/closing scenario setting process is then terminated.

If it is determined in step Sa1802 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa1802: YES), the process advances to step Sa1804.

In step Sa1804, a jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 31(b)) is set when specific processing according to the type of jackpot is executed. Thereafter, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

In step Sa1801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1805.

In step Sa1805, an opening/closing scenario (FIG. 31(c)) for a small win is set. Thereafter, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1612) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step Sa1901, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. In step Sa1901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1902.

In step Sa1902, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In step Sa1902, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1903.

In step Sa1903, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sa1903 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa1903: YES), the process advances to step Sa1904.

In step Sa1904, an opening time corresponding to the specific process is set. Specifically, a time corresponding to the opening period in the specific processing explained in FIG. 11 is set. During the opening period, as explained in FIG. 11, the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step Sa1904, the process advances to step Sa1905 and the specific processing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sa1903 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa1903: NO), the process advances to step Sa1906.

In step Sa1906, an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the first starting opening is set. During the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa1902, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1907.

In step Sa1907, an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the second starting opening is set. During the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa1901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1908.

In step Sa1908, it is determined whether the V winning jackpot flag is ON. In step Sa1908, if it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1909.

In step Sa1909, an opening time corresponding to the V winning jackpot is set. During the opening period, a performance suggesting that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 and becoming a jackpot (V winning notification performance) and a right-handed hitting performance are executed. Therefore, the time when the V winning notification performance and the right hit suggestion performance can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step Sa1909, the process proceeds to step Sa1910 and the V winning jackpot flag is turned off. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa1908, if it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sa1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1911.

In step Sa1911, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In step Sa1911, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa1911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1912.

In step Sa1912, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the first starting opening is set. If a small win is won in the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33 as an opportunity, the process explained in FIG. 12 is executed. As shown in FIG. 12, in the opening period, a right-handed hit suggestion performance and a double chance suggestion performance are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion performance and the double chance suggestion performance can be executed is set as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa1911, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa1911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1913.

In step Sa1913, an opening time corresponding to a small hit for the second starting opening is set. During the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggestion performance and a performance urging the player to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 222 are performed. Therefore, the opening time is set as the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion performance and the performance encouraging the player to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 222 can be performed. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1619) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. The main prize opening/closing process is mainly composed of three control processes. Specifically, steps Sa2001 to Sa2007 are opening/closing control processing of the first opening/closing door 36b, steps Sa2008 to Step Sa2014 are opening/closing control processing of the second opening/closing door 213, and steps Sa2015 to Step Sa2022 are opening/closing control processing of the storage valve 216. It is.

In step Sa2001, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step Sa2001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sa2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2002.

In step Sa2002, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the first opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the first opening/closing door 36b. In step Sa2002, if it is determined that the condition for opening the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2003.

In step Sa2003, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa2004.

In step Sa2004, a first opening/closing door opening command is set. The first opening/closing door opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The first opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal processing. After executing step Sa2004, the process advances to step Sa2008.

In step Sa2002, if it is determined that the opening condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa2002: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2008.

In step Sa2001, if it is determined that the first opening/closing door 36b is open (Sa2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2005.

In step Sa2005, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the first opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. The closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the first opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number of openings set in advance for the first big prize opening 36a has elapsed. This is established when it is detected that a game ball has entered the ball. In step Sa2005, if it is determined that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2006.

In step Sa2006, the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa2007.

In step Sa2007, a first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal processing. After executing step Sa2007, the process advances to step Sa2008.

If it is determined in step Sa2005 that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa2005: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2008.

In step Sa2008, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 213 is open. If it is determined in step Sa2008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is not open (Sa2008: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2009.

In step Sa2009, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the second opening/closing door 213 are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the second opening/closing door 213. In step Sa2009, if it is determined that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa2009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2010.

In step Sa2010, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. After that, the process advances to step Sa2011.

In step Sa2011, a second opening/closing door opening command is set. The second opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 has been opened. The second opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2011, the process advances to step Sa2015.

If it is determined in step Sa2009 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa2009: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2015.

In step Sa2008, if it is determined that the second opening/closing door 213 is open (Sa2008: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2012.

In step Sa2012, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the second opening/closing door 213 are satisfied. The closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the second opening/closing door 213 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number of openings set in advance for the second grand prize opening 212 has elapsed. This is established when it is detected that the game ball has entered the ball. In step Sa2012, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa2012: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2013.

In step Sa2013, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sa2014.

In step Sa2014, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2014, the process advances to step Sa2015.

In step Sa2012, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa2012: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2015.

In step Sa2015, it is determined whether the storage valve 216 is open. If it is determined in step Sa2015 that the storage valve 216 is not open (Sa2015: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2016.

In step Sa2016, it is determined whether a condition for opening the storage valve 216 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the storage valve 216. If it is determined in step Sa2016 that the condition for opening the storage valve 216 is satisfied (Sa2016: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2017.

In step Sa2017, the storage valve 216 is opened. After that, the process advances to step Sa2018.

In step Sa2018, the Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is activated when a defect or abnormality occurs in the structure of the storage valve 216, and a game ball unintentionally flows from the storage section 218 to the Kroon 220 via the channel 211 and enters the V winning hole 222. Even if there is, this flag is set to prevent the V winning from becoming a jackpot. The Cloon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened in the big winning opening/closing process, and is turned OFF when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the Cloun 220. be done. After executing step Sa2018, the process advances to step Sa2019.

In step Sa2019, a storage valve opening command is set. The storage valve open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the storage valve 216 has been opened. The storage valve open command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2019, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sa2016, if it is determined that the opening condition for the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa2016: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step Sa2015 that the storage valve 216 is open (Sa2015: YES), the process advances to step Sa2020.

In step Sa2020, it is determined whether a closing condition for the storage valve 216 is satisfied. The condition for closing the storage valve 216 is satisfied when it is detected that the continuous open time (for example, 2 seconds) of the storage valve 216 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed. In step Sa2020, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa2020: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2021.

In step Sa2021, the storage valve 216 is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa2022.

In step Sa2022, a storage valve closing command is set. The storage valve close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the storage valve 216 has been closed. The storage valve closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2022, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sa2020, if it is determined that the closing condition of the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa2020: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1628) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sa2101, it is determined whether the V winning jackpot flag is ON. In [Case 2] of FIG. 12, if there is a small hit in the game round U2 and then the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, a new jackpot is confirmed and the opening/closing execution mode ends. Later, an opening/closing execution mode based on a new jackpot is started. In this step Sa2101, in order to determine whether such processing is to proceed, it is determined whether or not the V winning jackpot flag is ON in the transition processing at the end of the ending period.

In step Sa2101, if it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sa2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2102.

In step Sa2102, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot with a high-frequency support mode. In step Sa2102, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a jackpot with a high-frequency support mode (Sa2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2103.

In step Sa2103, the value of the game number counter PNC corresponding to the jackpot type is set. That is, the number of games that can be played in high-frequency support is set in the number of games counter PNC. The number of games that can be played in high-frequency support is set for each jackpot type. The number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support set for each jackpot type has been explained in FIG. 9, so the explanation will be omitted here.

After executing step Sa2103, the process advances to step Sa2104 and the PNC count flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sa2105.

In step Sa2105, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize information regarding the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support. The high-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2105, the process advances to step Sa2106.

In step Sa2106, flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag and the second symbol display section flag are turned off. After executing step Sa2106, the process advances to step Sa2107.

In step Sa2107, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

In step Sa2102, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a jackpot with a high-frequency support mode (Sa2102: NO), the process advances to step Sa2108.

In step Sa2108, flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, the V winning jackpot flag, and the second symbol display section flag are turned OFF. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2101 that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2109.

In step Sa2109, a V winning process is executed. The V winning process will be described later. After executing step Sa2109, step Sa2110. In step Sa2110, a high frequency support mode command is set. As described above, the high-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2110, the process advances to step Sa2111.

In step Sa2111, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is started. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2111, the process advances to step Sa2112.

In step Sa2112, the V winning jackpot flag is turned off. After executing step Sa2112, the process advances to step Sa1611 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28). As mentioned above, in [Case 2] of FIG. 12, if there is a small hit in the game round U2, and then the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, a new jackpot is confirmed and the corresponding After the opening/closing execution mode ends, an opening/closing execution mode based on a new jackpot is started. For this reason, after executing step Sa2112, the process advances to step Sa1611 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28). Since the game state transition process (FIG. 28) has already been explained, the explanation will be omitted. The transition process at the end of the ending period has been explained above.

<V winning process>
Next, the V winning process will be explained. The V winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 34: Sa2109) of the transition process at the end of the ending period.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the V winning process. In step Sa2201, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In step Sa2201, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2202.

In step Sa2202, the jackpot type counter stored in the ball entry process for croon (FIG. 21) is referenced to the distribution table (FIG. 9(b)) for V winnings triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting slot. Based on the value of C2, the jackpot type in the V winning jackpot is specified. After executing step Sa2202, the process advances to step Sa2204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2201 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2203.

In step Sa2203, the distribution table for the second starting opening (FIG. 9(c)) is referred to, and based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for croon (FIG. 21), the V winning jackpot is determined. Identify the jackpot type. After executing step Sa2203, the process advances to step Sa2204.

As can be seen from Step Sa2202 and Step Sa2203, even if the game ball enters the same V winning hole 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot, the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 results in a small win. As a result, when the second opening/closing door 213 opens and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, resulting in a V winning jackpot, and when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34, a small winning occurs, As a result, the sorting table to be referred to is different from the case where the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, resulting in a V winning jackpot.

In step Sa2204, the jackpot type specified in step Sa2202 or step Sa2203 is set as the jackpot type in the V winning jackpot. After executing step Sa2204, the V winning process ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 22: Sa1008) of the normal process.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sa2301, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sa2301 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sa2301: NO), the process advances to step Sa2302.

In step Sa2302, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Sa2302 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sa2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2303.

In step Sa2303, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sa2303, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa2303: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa2303: YES), the process advances to step Sa2304.

In step Sa2304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sa2304, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sa2304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2305, sets the out-of-line display, and then ends the main electric role support process. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2304 that it is not the timing to end the variable display (Sa2304: NO), the process advances to step Sa2306.

In step Sa2306, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sa2306, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessory items SN is "0" (Sa2306: NO), the present electronic accessory support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sa2306: YES), the process advances to step Sa2307.

In step Sa2307, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step Sa2307 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sa2307: YES), the process advances to step Sa2308.

In step Sa2308, an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. The winner is the winner (see FIG. 10(b)). Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa2309.

In step Sa2309, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sa2308 is a support win. In step Sa2309, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sa2309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2310, where the support win flag is turned on and set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process advances to step Sa2311.

On the other hand, in step Sa2309, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sa2309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2311 without executing the process of step Sa2310.

In step Sa2311, it is determined whether the number of games counter area is "0". The number of games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the high frequency support mode. In step Sa2311, if it is determined that the number of games counter area is not "0" (Sa2311: NO), the main power support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2311 that the number of games counter area is "0", the process advances to step Sa2312 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sa2312, the process advances to step Sa2313.

In step Sa2313, the PNC count flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa2314.

In step Sa2314, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a command to be transmitted. Set. After that, the electric support support process ends.

The low frequency support mode command set in step Sa2314 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. The audio emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, and executes processing corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step Sa2307 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (Sa2307: NO), the process advances to step Sa2315, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process advances to step Sa2316.

In step Sa2316, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sa2315 is a support win. In step Sa2316, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sa2316: NO), the present electronic role support processing is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2316 that support has been won (Sa2316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2317, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sa2302, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sa2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2318, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sa2318, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa2318: NO), since the symbols in the general figure unit 38 are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa2318: YES), the process advances to step Sa2319.

In step Sa2319, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of symbols in the common pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa2320, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sa2301, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sa2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2321, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. The electric switch opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing step Sa2321, this electronic role support process ends.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the power support process (FIG. 36: Sa2321).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sa2401, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sa2401: YES), the process advances to step Sa2402.

In step Sa2402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sa2402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa2402: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sa2402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2403, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sa2403, the process advances to step Sa2404.

In step Sa2404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sa2405, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sa2405, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sa2405: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sa2405: YES), the process advances to step Sa2406 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sa2401, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sa2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2407, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sa2407, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa2407: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Sa1507, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa2407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2408, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa2409.

In step Sa2409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sa2409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2410, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

In step Sa2410, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sa2410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2411, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2409 that the opening/closing execution mode is selected (Sa2409: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not selected in step Sa2410 (Sa2410: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2412, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

《A6》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the production operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47, as well as the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<A7>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa3101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sa3101, the process advances to step Sa3102.

In step Sa3102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, it is determined whether a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a pending command has been received, processing corresponding to the pending command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sa3102, the process advances to step Sa3103.

In step Sa3103, a game run performance setting process is executed. In the game run production setting process, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a variation type command have been received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that these commands have been received, the production settings to be executed in the game cycle are determined. The content (type) is determined, and the determined performance is set to be executed in the relevant game round. Details of the game performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3103, the process advances to step Sa3104.

In step Sa3104, a standby period effect setting process is executed. In the standby period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be performed during the above-described standby period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during the standby period. Details of the standby period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3104, the process advances to step Sa3105.

In step Sa3105, opening period effect setting processing is executed. In the opening period production setting process, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an opening command has been received, the content (type) of the production to be executed during the opening period is determined. , the determined performance is set to be executed during the opening period. Details of the opening period performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3105, the process advances to step Sa3106.

In step Sa3106, opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing processing period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be performed during the opening/closing processing period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during the opening/closing processing period. Details of the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be described later. After executing step Sa3106, the process advances to step Sa3107.

In step Sa3107, ending period effect setting processing is executed. In the ending period effect setting process, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an ending command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the ending period is determined. , the determined performance is set to be executed during the ending period. Details of the ending period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3107, the process advances to step Sa3108.

In step Sa3108, command transmission processing is executed. In the command transmission process, various production commands for displaying a moving image corresponding to the production set in the various production setting processes described above are transmitted to the display control device 100. After executing step Sa3108, the process advances to step Sa3109.

In step Sa3109, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes from step Sa3102 to step Sa3107. That is, the various lamps 47 are controlled to emit light so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effects set in steps Sa3102 to Sa3107. After executing step Sa3109, the process advances to step Sa3110.

In step Sa3110, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the processes from step Sa3102 to step Sa3107. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps Sa3102 to Sa3107 is outputted. After executing step Sa3110, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 39: Sa3102).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. In step Sa3201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa3201 that a pending command has been received (Sa3201: YES), the process advances to step Sa3202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3201 that no pending command has been received (Sa3201: NO), this pending command handling process is ended.

In step Sa3202, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. Processing is executed to enable the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of pieces of hold information and the total number of pieces of hold information. Details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sa3202 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as the "first reservation number", and the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first reservation number". The number of pieces of acquired reservation information is also referred to as the "second number of reservations", and the total number of the first number of reservations and the second number of reservations is also called the "total number of reservations". After executing step Sa3202, the process advances to step Sa3203.

In step Sa3203, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 specified in step Sa3202 and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The display mode of the first reservation display area Ds1 and the second reservation display area Ds2 is controlled based on the acquired number of reservation information. After executing step Sa3203, this pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 40: Sa3202) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing update processing when a ball enters the ball. In step Sa3301, it is determined whether or not the pending command to be read in the current timer interrupt process is one that was transmitted based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. In step Sa3301, if it is determined that the pending command to be read in the current timer interrupt processing is transmitted based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (Sa3301: YES) , the process advances to step Sa3302 and updates processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that was read in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa3302, the process advances to step Sa3304, which will be described later.

In step Sa3301, if it is determined that the pending command to be read in the current timer interrupt processing is not transmitted based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (Sa3301: NO), that is, If it is determined that the hold command has been transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the process advances to step Sa3303, and the command is sent based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. Execute update processing of the second pending quantity counter area. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information of the pending number included in the command read out in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa3303, the process advances to step Sa3304.

The reason why the processing in steps Sa3302 and Sa3303 is performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 In contrast to the case where the hold information is stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step Sa3304, a process for updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area contains the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the pending information obtained based on the entering of gaming balls into the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying the sum with the number of objects in the sound-light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sa3304, the update processing at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39: Sa3103).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game rendition setting process. In step Sa3401, it is determined whether a variation command and a variation type command have been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sa3401, if it is determined that the variation command and the variation type command have not been received (Sa3401: NO), the present game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3401 that a variation command and a variation type command have been received (Sa3401: YES), the process advances to step Sa3402.

In step Sa3402, the information contained in the received variation command and variation type command is read and stored. Specifically, whether the game round to be started is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the relevant game The results of the winning lottery in the game round, such as the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of a small win, the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time in the game round are read out and stored. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa3403.

In step Sa3403, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. As described above, the specific processing command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a jackpot and it is determined that the specific processing shown in Case 1 described above is to be executed. . In step Sa3403, if it is determined that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3404, corresponding to the game round in which the specific processing (processing shown in case 1) is to be executed. The performance pattern set is set to be executed in the relevant game round. After that, the main game performance setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa3403, if it is determined that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3403: NO), the process advances to step Sa3405, and the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is displayed at the first starting port 33. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit based on the ball entering the game ball. In this embodiment, a small win won based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is also called a "special 1 small win", and a winning based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. This small win is also called a "special 2 small win."

In step Sa3405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a special 1-small win (Sa3405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3406, and the effect pattern corresponding to the special 1-small win is set for the game round. Set it to run in . Note that the performance pattern corresponding to the special 1 small win is a performance pattern including the performance executed in the game round shown in Case 2 described above. After that, the main game performance setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa3405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a special 1-small win (Sa3405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3407, and other results of the winning lottery (specific processing is executed A performance pattern corresponding to a big hit that does not occur, a small win that is not a special 1-small win, a loss, etc.) is set to be executed in the game round. After that, the main game performance setting process is ended.

<Waiting period effect setting process>
Next, the waiting period effect setting process will be explained. The standby period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the waiting period effect setting process. In step Sa3501, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa3501 that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3502 and the sound and light specific processing flag is turned ON. The sound and light specific processing flag is a flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94, and is used by the sound and light emission control device 90 to determine whether or not to execute the production in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1). This is a flag for determination. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is started with the sound/light specific processing flag ON, the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1) is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sa3502, the process advances to step Sa3503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3501 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3503 without executing step Sa3502.

In step Sa3503, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sa3503, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa3503: NO), the main standby period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3503, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3503: YES), the process advances to step Sa3504, and the process is performed to check if the above-mentioned sound and light specific processing flag is ON. Determine whether or not.

In step Sa3504, if it is determined that the sound and light specific processing flag is ON, that is, if it corresponds to the above-mentioned case 1 (Sa3504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3505, and the right-handed hitting suggestion effect and the Set to execute the double chance suggestion effect. Thereafter, the main standby period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3504, if it is determined that the sound and light specific processing flag is not ON (Sa3504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3506, and a setting is made to execute a right-handed hitting suggestion effect during the standby period. Thereafter, the main standby period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening period production setting process>
Next, the opening period effect setting process will be explained. The opening period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39: Sa3105).

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the opening period effect setting process. In step Sa3601, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). ing. Therefore, based on the information included in the received opening command, the audio emission control device 90 determines the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). ) can be understood. In step Sa3601, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3601: NO), this opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3601 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3601: YES), the process advances to step Sa3602.

In step Sa3602, based on the information included in the received opening command, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot. In step Sa3602, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (Sa3602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3603, and an opening performance corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined. is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Thereafter, the main opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3602, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot (Sa3602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode If the winning lottery result is a small win, the process advances to step Sa3604.

In step Sa3604, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a special 1-small win. In step Sa3604, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a special 1 small win (Sa3604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3605, and if the result is a special 1 small win. A corresponding opening performance is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in case 1 described above, the right-handed hit suggestion performance and double chance suggestion performance are set to be executed during the opening period. Thereafter, the main opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3604, if it is determined that the winning lottery result that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is not a special 1 small win (Sa3604: NO), that is, the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode If the result of the winning lottery that triggered the above is a special 2-small win, the process proceeds to step Sa3606, and the opening performance corresponding to the special 2-small win is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Thereafter, the main opening period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening/closing processing period effect setting processing>
Next, the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be explained. The opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 39: Sa3106).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing period effect setting process. In step Sa3701, first chance performance setting processing is executed. In the first chance performance setting process, processing related to the setting of the first chance performance in case 1 and case 2 described above is executed. Details of the first chance performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3701, the process advances to step Sa3702.

In step Sa3702, a second chance effect setting process is executed when no storage is performed. In the non-storage second chance performance setting process, it is determined whether or not game balls are stored in the storage section 218 in the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2, and when the game balls are not stored in the storage section 218, 2. Set to execute the second chance performance. The details of the second chance effect setting process when the money is not stored will be described later. After executing step Sa3702, the process advances to step Sa3703.

In step Sa3703, V winning effect setting processing is executed. In the V winning presentation setting process, it is determined whether or not game balls are stored in the V winning hole 222, and when the game balls enter the V winning hole 222, settings are made to execute the V winning presentation. Details of the V winning effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3703, the process advances to step Sa3704.

In step Sa3704, a second chance performance setting process is executed when V does not win. In the V non-winning second chance performance setting process, in Case 1 and Case 2 described above, game balls were stored in the storage section 218, but the game balls did not enter the V winning opening 222, and the non-V winning opening 224 A second chance performance is set to be executed when a game ball enters the ball. The details of the second chance performance setting process when V does not win will be described later. After executing step Sa3704, the process advances to step Sa3705.

In step Sa3705, settings are made to execute effects for opening/closing processing periods corresponding to other jackpot types. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot type in which an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 does not open is selected, the opening/closing of the opening/closing execution mode is Set the effects to be executed during the processing period. After executing step Sa3705, the main opening/closing processing period effect setting process ends.

<First chance production setting process>
Next, the first chance effect setting process will be explained. The first chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3701) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first chance effect setting process. In step Sa3801, it is determined whether a second opening/closing door opening command has been received from the main side MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened in the winning lottery when the player wins a jackpot that executes specific processing and when he wins a small jackpot. Further, the second opening/closing door opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small winning, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231. Therefore, the audio emission control device 90 grasps the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second door 231, based on the information included in the received second door opening command. can do. In step Sa3801, if it is determined that the second opening/closing door opening command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa3801: NO), this first chance performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3801 that the second opening/closing door opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3801: YES), the process advances to step Sa3802.

In step Sa3802, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot. In step Sa3802, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot (Sa3802: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a jackpot for which the specific process is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa3803, and settings are made to execute the first chance performance in case 1 described above. After executing step Sa3803, the first chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3802, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a jackpot (Sa3802: NO), the process advances to step Sa3804.

In step Sa3804, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1-small win. In step Sa3804, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win (Sa3804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3805. Set to execute the second chance performance. After executing step Sa3805, the first chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3804, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a special 1st small win (Sa3804: NO), the main first chance performance setting process is continued. finish.

<Second chance performance setting process when not stored>
Next, the second chance performance setting process when the game is not stored will be explained. The non-storage second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3702) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the second chance performance setting process when no storage is performed. In step Sa3901, it is determined whether or not the second big winning hole entry command has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step Sa3901, if it is determined that the second big winning hole entry command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa3901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3904, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step Sa3901, if it is determined that the second grand prize opening ball entry command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa3901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3902, and the sound and optical second grand prize opening ball entry command is received. Determine whether the flag is ON. The sound-light second grand winning opening ball entry flag is a flag stored in the sound-light RAM 94, and indicates whether or not a game ball has entered the second big winning opening 212, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the storage section. This is a flag used by the audio emission control device 90 to determine whether or not the information has been stored in the audio emission control device 218.

In step Sa3902, if it is determined that the sound and light second grand winning opening ball entry flag is not ON (Sa3902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3903, and the sound and light second grand winning opening ball entry flag is turned ON. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa3904. On the other hand, in step Sa3902, if it is determined that the sound and light second large winning hole entry flag is ON (Sa3902: YES), the process directly proceeds to step Sa3904. In other words, only when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 212 and the sound-light second grand prize-winning hole entry flag is not ON, the corresponding sound-light second grand prize-winning hole is opened. Turn on the incoming ball flag.

In step Sa3904, it is determined whether a second opening/closing door closing command has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step Sa3904, if it is determined that the second opening/closing door closing command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa3904: NO), the second chance performance setting process for non-storage is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3904 that the second opening/closing door closing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3904: YES), the process advances to step Sa3905.

In step Sa3905, it is determined whether or not the sound-light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is ON, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 212 and is stored in the storage section 218. do. In step Sa3905, if it is determined that the sound and light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is ON (Sa3905: YES), this non-storage second chance production setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3905, if it is determined that the sound and light second big winning hole entry flag is not ON (Sa3905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3906.

In step Sa3906, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot. In step Sa3906, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot (Sa3906: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a jackpot for which specific processing is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa3907, and the second chance effect and jackpot announcement effect in the above-mentioned case 1 are set to be executed by the start of the 2Rth opening/closing process period. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3908, and the effect to be executed in the opening/closing processing period from the 2nd R onward is set. Thereafter, the second chance effect setting process for non-storage is completed.

In step Sa3906, if it is determined that the winning lottery result that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a jackpot (Sa3906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3909, and the trigger for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is determined to be not a jackpot. It is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a special 1-small win. In step Sa3909, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win (Sa3909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3910, and the process proceeds to step Sa3910. Settings are made to execute a second chance performance and a missed notification performance. Thereafter, the second chance effect setting process for non-storage is completed.

<V winning performance setting process>
Next, the V winning effect setting process will be explained. The V winning effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3703) of the opening/closing period effect setting process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process. In step Sa4001, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The V winning command is a command sent from the main side MPU 62 when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 triggered by a small win in a winning lottery.

In step Sa4001, if it is determined that the V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4002, and a setting is made to execute the V winning jackpot effect. As described above, the V-winning jackpot performance is a performance that suggests that a game ball has entered the V-winning slot 222 and also suggests a jackpot. After executing step Sa4002, the process advances to step Sa4005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa4001 that the V winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa4003.

In step Sa4003, it is determined whether a dummy V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The dummy V winning command is a command sent from the main side MPU 62 when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 triggered by a jackpot in the winning lottery.

In step Sa4003, if it is determined that the dummy V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4004, and a setting is made to execute the V winning jackpot effect. As described above, the V-winning jackpot performance is a performance that suggests that a game ball has entered the V-winning slot 222 and also suggests a jackpot. As described above, in this embodiment, the V winning jackpot effect set to be executed in step Sa4002 and the V winning jackpot effect set to be executed in step Sa4004 are effects with the same or similar contents. It is. After executing step Sa4004, the process advances to step Sa4005.

In step Sa4005, the above-mentioned sound and light second big prize opening ball entry flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main V winning performance setting process is ended.

<Second chance performance setting process when V does not win>
Next, the second chance performance setting process when V does not win will be explained. The V non-winning second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3704) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the second chance production setting process when V does not win. In step Sa4101, it is determined whether a V non-winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The V non-winning command is a command sent from the main side MPU 62 when a game ball enters the non-V winning hole 224. In step Sa4101, if it is determined that the V non-winning command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa4101: NO), the main V non-winning second chance production setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa4101, if it is determined that the V non-winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4102.

In step Sa4102, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot. In step Sa4102, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot (Sa4102: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a jackpot for which specific processing is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa4103, and settings are made to execute the second chance performance and jackpot announcement performance in case 1 described above. After executing step Sa4103, the process proceeds to step Sa4104, and the above-mentioned sound and light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process for setting the second chance performance when the main V does not win a prize is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa4102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a jackpot (Sa4102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa4105.

In step Sa4105, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1-small win. In step Sa4105, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win (Sa4105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4106, and the process proceeds to step Sa4106. Settings are made to execute a second chance performance and a missed notification performance. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3804 described above, and the sound and light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process for setting the second chance performance when the main V does not win a prize is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa4105, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a special 1 small win (Sa4105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3804 described above, and the sound and light Turn off the second big prize opening ball entry flag. Thereafter, the process for setting the second chance performance when the main V does not win a prize is ended.

<Ending period production setting process>
Next, the ending period effect setting process will be explained. The ending period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3107) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ending period effect setting process. In step Sa4201, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, the ending command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period). Therefore, based on the information included in the received ending command, the audio emission control device 90 determines the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period). ) can be grasped. In step Sa4201, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4201: NO), this ending period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa4201 that an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4201: YES), the process advances to step Sa4202.

In step Sa4202, based on the information included in the received ending command, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot. In step Sa4202, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (Sa4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4203, and an ending production corresponding to the type of jackpot is performed. Set to be executed during the ending period. Thereafter, the main ending period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa4202, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot (Sa4202: NO), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode If the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the main ending period effect setting process is immediately terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sa4301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa4302.

In step Sa4302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sa4401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa4501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the content of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 52) is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence process (Sa4501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at the same time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of presentation such as a preview effect or a pattern for LCD set by the sound emission control device 90, and to design a presentation image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sa4502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sa4501) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa4503.

In step Sa4503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sa4502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa4504.

In step Sa4504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sa4503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa4505, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, both in the case where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (Case 1), and in the case where a small win is won (Case 2). ), the first symbol display section 37a displays a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. The performance will not be executed. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of a winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound cannot recognize the lottery result in the game round at the time when the game round ends. As a result, even if the player has won a small prize, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he or she has won a big prize.

Furthermore, after the game round ends, in both case 1 and case 2, the right hit suggestion performance and the double chance suggestion performance are executed, so during the period when the performance is executed after the game round ends. It is also possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win in the winning lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined at the time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, it is determined by the game ball entering the type determining gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. When the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp of the round display section 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of times the round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. On the other hand, if you have won a small prize, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, even if you win a jackpot or a small win, the round lamp will not light up immediately after the end of the game, so the round lamp will not turn on after the game ends. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from identifying whether he or she has won a jackpot or a small win in the relevant game round.

As a result, the player is not made aware of the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player hits the right ball and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the game round ends. On the other hand, for a relatively long period of time, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small win starts, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and to keep the player interested in the game. It can draw attention. In addition, when determining the type of jackpot, the player is asked to hit right and enter the game ball into the type determination gate 202, so the player is actively involved in determining the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to draw more attention to the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a jackpot is determined when a game ball enters the V-winning hole 222, the game ball enters the V-winning hole 222 as a trigger. , determines the type of jackpot triggered by the ball entering the V winning hole 222. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined by entering the game ball into the type determination gate 202. , there is relatively no sense of speed in the progress of the game until the round game starts. As a result, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting slot 33, and when the game ball enters the V winning slot 222, the jackpot is confirmed. In this case, the progress of the game can be slowed down, the player's expectations for the game can be modulated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In case 1, even though the player won the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1 and the game ball subsequently entered the V winning slot 222, the player won the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1. The round game being executed as a trigger continues, and the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is performed. Run mode is also not started. Further, the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 does not confer any benefits to the player or change the game state. On the other hand, in case 2, if you win a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2, and then the game ball enters the V winning slot 222, the jackpot is confirmed, and you win a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2. After the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning ends, a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 222 is started. In other words, when a game ball enters the V-winning hole 222, a bonus may or may not be awarded to the player, so if a game ball enters the V-winning hole 222 during a game. In addition, it is possible to make the player guess whether the privilege will be awarded or not, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the privilege will be awarded.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, the game determines whether the result of the winning lottery in the game round that triggered the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is a jackpot or a small win. It is possible to make the player guess and give the player a greater sense of expectation.

In addition, in case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, even though no benefit is given as a result of the game ball entering the V winning hole 222, the game ball enters the V winning hole 222. A V-winning jackpot effect is executed when the ball enters the winning hole 222. In case 2, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, a privilege is given that is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 222. Taking advantage of the ball being entered, a V-winning jackpot performance is executed. Therefore, even if a benefit is not granted due to the entry of a game ball into the V-winning slot 222, the benefit will not be awarded to a player who recognizes that a V-winning jackpot has been executed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that this is the case.

In case 1, even if the game ball enters the V-winning slot 222, no benefit will be given due to the ball entering, but the game ball is inserted into the V-winning slot 222 in the first chance performance. Since a performance is executed to encourage the player to make a ball, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a bonus may be awarded to the player who recognizes that the performance has been executed.Furthermore, the V It is possible to encourage the game ball to be launched in such a manner that the game ball enters the winning hole 222.

Furthermore, in case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, the 1st round of the round game that is being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in game round U1 ends, and the 2nd round game ends. Even though the 2nd round (2nd round) has started, in the 2nd and subsequent rounds, an effect indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has been started is performed. By doing this, the player can be made to feel as if a new opening/closing execution mode has started based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222, giving the player a sense of anticipation. be able to. In other words, it is possible to give the player a new sense of anticipation during the round game that is actually being executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1.

Furthermore, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment wins a jackpot in the winning lottery executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the execution of the specific process is determined by the specific process execution determination process. The presence or absence of the game is determined, and then the number of executions of the round game corresponding to the jackpot is determined. That is, since whether or not to open and close the second opening/closing door 213 as a round game and the number of times the round game is executed are determined separately, the number of times the round game is executed depends on the combination of whether or not the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed and the number of times the round game is executed. It becomes possible to realize various operation modes of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<A8>> Modification of the first embodiment α:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《A8-1》Variation 1:
In the first embodiment α, the performance executed in the game round executed in case 1, that is, in the winning lottery in the game round executed with the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 as an opportunity. The effect to be executed in the game round when you win a jackpot and it is decided to execute the specific process in the specific process execution determination process, and the effect to be executed in the game cycle to be executed in case 2 above, In other words, the same performance pattern is set as the performance to be performed in the game round when a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. It may also be a configuration. By setting the same performance pattern for Case 1 and Case 2, it becomes more difficult for players to judge whether Case 1 or Case 2 is the case, and the game round in question is a winning lottery. It is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation that he or she may have won the prize.

In addition, a performance pattern table is provided in which a plurality of special performance patterns used in case 1 and case 2 are set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the game time, and from the performance pattern table, the performance pattern is set according to the fluctuation time of the game time. It may also be configured to select a performance pattern. By selecting a performance pattern from the same performance pattern table for case 1 and case 2, it becomes difficult for the player to judge whether case 1 or case 2 is the case, and the game cycle in question is It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she has won the lottery.

《A8-2》Variation 2:
In the first embodiment α, when a jackpot is confirmed when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222, a jackpot is determined when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222. Although a configuration is adopted in which the type is determined, the game ball enters the V winning slot in the same way as when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by the game ball entering the first starting slot 33. A configuration may be adopted in which the type of jackpot is determined by entering the game ball into the type determining gate 202 after the jackpot is determined by entering the ball into the type determining gate 222. By doing this, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 and a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round that is executed as a trigger, the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The type of jackpot is determined in three cases: a case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run that is triggered by The processes to be performed can be unified and the processes can be simplified.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated ball entry section (V winning jackpot type determination gate) is provided for determining the type of jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the V winning jackpot 222. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning jackpot type determining gate is arranged downstream from the V winning opening 222 with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls. In this case, the jackpot type to be determined when the game ball enters the V-winning jackpot type determination gate is determined using the same process as the type determination process in the first embodiment α. can be simplified.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning jackpot type determination gate is arranged at a position that is not downstream from the V winning opening 222 with respect to the distribution direction of game balls. For example, when a jackpot is confirmed when a game ball enters a V-winning hole 222, a type determination gate for a V-winning jackpot is arranged at a position where the ball will not enter unless the manner in which the game ball is launched is changed. By doing so, the player can play the game by changing the operation mode of the operation handle 25 in various ways, and the flow of the game can be changed frequently, and the player's active participation in the game can be increased. It is possible to promote involvement and give tone to the expectations of the players.

《A8-3》Variation 3:
In the first embodiment α, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed after a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the game ball Although a configuration has been adopted in which the type determination process is executed and the jackpot type is determined when a ball enters the type determination gate 202, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the jackpot type is determined in the fluctuation start process in the game round. That is, the jackpot type is determined before the game round ends. If the game round is a jackpot, when the game round ends, the round lamp is lit in a display mode corresponding to the determined jackpot type, but the timing of the lighting is set during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. Set the end point (immediately before the start of the opening/closing processing period) and set the opening period to be longer than usual. By doing this, the lottery result of the winning lottery is not recognized until the round lamp lights up, giving the player a sense of expectation that they have won the jackpot for a relatively long period of time. can be granted. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small win starts, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and to keep the player interested in the game. It can draw attention. In the first embodiment α, the round lamp is turned on at the end of the opening period, but a configuration may be adopted in which the round lamp is turned on at the beginning of the opening period.

《A8-4》Modification 4:
In the first embodiment α, in the opening/closing process executed in case 1 and case 2, the opening/closing scenario is set in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens and closes only once; An opening/closing scenario in which 213 opens and closes multiple times may be adopted. By doing this, the probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 is improved, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

《A8-5》Variation 5:
In the first embodiment α, the specific process execution determination process is executed at the start of the variation of the game round executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and more specifically, the specific process execution determination process ( Although the process was executed in FIG. 25), it may be executed at other timings as long as it is until the end of the game round and the start of the standby period. For example, it may be executed in the gaming state transition process. By doing so, for example, during a game round that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, a performance is executed in which the player operates the performance operation button 24, and the performance is executed. Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific process execution determination process is performed in which it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process based on whether or not the player has operated the performance operation button 24. Also, for example, whether or not to execute a specific process based on whether or not a game ball enters a specific ball entry port during a game round that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33. A configuration may be adopted in which specific processing execution determination processing is performed to determine. That is, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round that is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port 33, depending on the state of the game progress during the game round, A configuration may be adopted in which the mode of processing in the opening/closing execution mode to be executed after the end of the game round is determined. By adopting such a configuration, when a jackpot is won, the player can concentrate on the game even in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round.

《A8-6》Variation 6:
In the first embodiment α, the lottery result of the winning lottery in the suspended game round is determined by the preliminary determination process, and as a result of the preliminary determination process, if the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the suspended game round, , executes a specific process execution determination process as a process in the destination determination process, and determines whether or not to execute the specific process as shown in case 1 before the pending gaming session is executed as a gaming session. It's okay. Then, in a game round that is executed before the suspended game round is executed as a game round, a performance that suggests that a specific process will be executed later (specific process execution suggestion performance) may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the pending game session to be executed later. Furthermore, it is possible to determine whether Case 2 is applicable in the suspended game round by a preliminary determination process, and similarly execute a specific process execution suggestion effect. By doing so, the player can have a wider range of speculation about the outcome when the reserved game round is executed as a game round, and can improve the interest of the game.

《A8-7》Variation 7:
In the first embodiment α, the execution is performed during the waiting period (see FIG. 11), which is the period from the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning drawing and the opening period starts, when the jackpot is won in the winning drawing. A configuration may be adopted in which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is changed in stages as the waiting period elapses. The waiting period starts from the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery and continues until the game ball enters the type determining gate 202. In other words, the opening period does not start unless a game ball enters the type determining gate 202. If the player does not realize that he must play right-handed and plays left-handed, the game will not proceed as intended and the player's expectations will be lowered.

Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the suggestion to play right-handed to the player is gradually strengthened as the waiting period elapses from the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery. For example, compared to a right-handed hitting suggestion performance executed when the waiting period elapses from 0 seconds to 5 seconds, a right-handed hitting suggestion performance executed when the waiting period elapses from 5 seconds to 10 seconds attracts more players. In addition, compared to the right-handed hitting suggestion effect that is executed when the elapsed waiting period is 5 to 10 seconds, the elapsed time of the waiting period is 10 to 15 seconds. A configuration may also be adopted in which the right-handed hitting suggestion performance that is executed during the game strongly urges the player to play right-handed.

As a performance that suggests hitting right during the waiting period, for example, as the waiting period elapses, the sound suggesting hitting right is gradually increased (or decreased) to encourage the player to hit right. The mode may be strengthened in stages, or the size of an image indicating right-handed hitting (for example, an image of an arrow pointing to the right) may be increased in stages as the waiting period elapses, so that players can The way to encourage right-handed hitting may be gradually strengthened, or the brightness, brightness, color, etc. of the image indicating right-handed hitting may be gradually changed as the waiting period elapses (for example, by increasing or decreasing the brightness, brightness, color, etc.). ), it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of urging the player to play right-handed is gradually strengthened, or the tone of the voice guidance guiding players to play right-handed may be gradually increased as the waiting period elapses. A configuration may be adopted in which the manner in which the player is encouraged to play right-handed is gradually strengthened by increasing the strength.

By employing such a configuration, during the waiting period, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that he or she will play right-handed, and it is possible to promote smooth progress in the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《A8-8》Variation 8:
In the first embodiment α, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration including one type determining gate, but a configuration including a plurality of type determining gates may be adopted. For example, one type determination gate (hereinafter also referred to as the left type determination gate) is provided in a position where the game ball is likely to enter when hitting the ball left-handed (for example, on the left side of the game board 30), and when hitting the ball right-handed. A configuration may be adopted in which one type determination gate (hereinafter referred to as right side type determination gate) is provided at a position (for example, the right side of the game board 30) where the game ball can easily enter when the game ball is in the game board. Then, after winning the jackpot, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 that is set to win the jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting gate (see Figure 7), the left type determination gate or the right type The jackpot type is determined in advance by which type determining gate of the determining gates the game ball enters. Then, after the game round in which the jackpot was won, a performance that suggests hitting to the left (left-handed hitting suggestion performance) is executed depending on the value of the winning random number counter C1 that resulted in the jackpot, or a performance suggesting hitting to the right is executed. It determines whether to execute it and executes a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination. By doing this, the player needs to judge how to operate the operating handle 25 after the game round in which he or she wins a jackpot, and the player can be actively involved in the game, and as a result , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game.

In addition, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 that is set to win a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting gate (see Figure 7), a jackpot is achieved by entering the game ball into the left type determination gate. A value that determines the type, a value that determines the jackpot type by the entry of the game ball into the right type determination gate, a value that determines the jackpot type by the entry of the game ball into either the left type determination gate or the right type determination gate. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a value is set.

《A8-9》Modification 9:
In the first embodiment α, in the waiting period in case 1 and the opening period in case 2, there is an effect (W chance) that suggests that there are two chances to win the jackpot, respectively. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a performance (single chance performance) suggesting that one opportunity to win the jackpot is prepared (single chance performance) is performed. In this case, in each case, the second chance effect can be omitted, so the process necessary to execute the second chance effect can be omitted, and the process can be simplified.

Further, in Case 1 and Case 2, a configuration may be adopted in which a case where a double chance performance is executed and a case where a single chance performance is executed are combined. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even more in the period after the game round ends.

《A8-10》Modification 10:
In the first embodiment α, entering the ball into the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, is substantially invalid, and a small win in the winning lottery. This is a configuration in which only the ball entering the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed upon winning a prize, is substantially valid. Therefore, it is configured to include an operating mechanism (hereinafter also referred to as the V-winning assistance mechanism) that assists the entry of game balls into the V-winning slot 222 only during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed upon winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. may be adopted.

As the V winning auxiliary mechanism, for example, a mechanism that temporarily closes only the non-V winning opening 224 of the V winning opening 222 and the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the clone 220 (hereinafter also referred to as the non-V winning opening closing mechanism) ) may be adopted. In this case, the non-V winning hole closing mechanism only closes the V winning hole when the ball entering the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed after winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, is substantially invalid. Since the entry of the game ball into the winning hole 222 is assisted, the operation of the non-V winning hole closing mechanism does not substantially affect the progress of the game.

However, by operating the non-V winning hole closing mechanism, the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 is assisted, and the expectation of the player who recognizes that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 is reduced. can be improved. That is, by operating the non-V winning a prize opening closing mechanism, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player without substantially affecting the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a control means other than the main control device 60 (for example, the sound emission control device 90) controls the operation of the V winning a prize assisting mechanism. For example, in case 1, the audio emission control device 90 determines to operate the V winning assistance mechanism by receiving a specific processing command, and controls the operation of the V winning assistance mechanism at the start of the opening/closing processing period. Alternatively, the non-V winning opening 224 may be closed at the same time as the game ball is stored in the storage section 218 and the storage valve 216 is opened. configuration may be adopted. When such a configuration is adopted, the operation of the V winning a prize assisting mechanism is controlled by a control means other than the main control device 60, so that the processing burden on the main control device 60 can be reduced.

Note that the V winning assist mechanism is not limited to the non-V winning hole closing mechanism described above, and any other mechanism may be adopted as long as it is a mechanism that assists the entry of game balls into the V winning hole 222. It's okay. For example, a mechanism may be adopted that moves the flow path 211 so that the outlet through which the game balls flow out to the croon 220 in the flow path 211 is located directly above the V-winning port 222. Further, a mechanism may be adopted in which a magnet is temporarily placed near the V winning opening 222.

<<B>> First embodiment β:
Next, the first embodiment β will be described. The main difference between the first embodiment β and the first embodiment α described above is that in the first embodiment β, in the game round executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, When a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, if a game ball enters the V winning slot 222 during a round game that is triggered by the jackpot, the game ball enters the V winning slot 222. A jackpot based on the ball is determined, the round game in progress is interrupted, and a round game based on the newly determined jackpot is executed by entering the game ball into the V winning hole 222. This will be explained in detail below.

《B1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 54 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment β. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the presentation effect by lighting up or blinking when the pachinko machine 10 performs a winning lottery, winning a jackpot, reaching a reach, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a type determining gate 202, and a variable winning opening 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a V winning mechanism 210. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a first big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the first big winning opening 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big prize opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). If a jackpot or small jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 and the second opening/closing door 213 provided in the V winning mechanism 210, which will be described later, is executed. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter, and also when a predetermined condition is met. After is satisfied, the state transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first big prize opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The type determining gate 202 is a ball entrance used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery. Specifically, a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round ends. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, a performance (right-hand hitting suggestion performance) that guides the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 is executed. When the player operates the operating handle 25 to launch a game ball to the right side of the game board 30 according to the right-handed hitting suggestion, and the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the game ball enters the game ball and hits the jackpot. A type determination process for determining the type of is executed by the main controller 60. Then, the type of jackpot is determined by the type determination process. The type determination process executed by the main controller 60 and the jackpot type set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 will also be referred to as a first starting hole game round.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34 will also be referred to as a second starting opening game round.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held.

The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter also referred to as round lamps) are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or The corresponding display will be displayed. A round game is a round game that continues until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. When the opening/closing execution mode is started and a jackpot type is determined in the type determination process executed when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the round display section 39 corresponds to the determined jackpot type. The display starts to display the number of round games played, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In other words, even if the opening/closing execution mode is started, the type determination process is not started and the jackpot type ( (including the number of round games) is not determined, so the number of round games is not displayed on the round display section 39. After that, when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is started and the jackpot type (including the number of round games) is determined, so the number of round games is displayed on the round display section 39. Is displayed.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display of symbols or a lottery result in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Perform prescribed displays based on advance notice, etc. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display of the symbol or a predetermined display according to the variable display or a predetermined display. will be displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also when a jackpot is won. It also displays effects during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 56(a) is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41, and corresponds to a first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a and a second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b. It is a design. When a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is being executed, a liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a is displayed on the display screen. 41a, and when a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, a liquid crystal display corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b is displayed. The symbols for use are displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 as liquid crystal symbols. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a symbol such as a character is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 56(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 56(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, a game round refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display, and until the stop display ends. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the In either one of the two symbol display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the following information for each game: After the symbol row is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold games based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold games based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. A pending game session is a game session that has not yet been executed, and is used to notify the lottery result of a winning lottery regarding special information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Refers to the game round in which the variable display has not started. The number of pending games that can be held based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game display) corresponding to the four pending game rounds. Further, the number of pending games that can be held based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the second pending display area Ds2, pending displays corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as second pending game round displays) can be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 56(b), on the display surface 41a, a flashing display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuating display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. A first synchronized display section Sync1 performs display, and a second synchronized display performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37. Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a stop display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display. 1 synchronization display section Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display. The section Sync2 displays a lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first pending display area Ds1, the second pending display area Ds2, the first synchronized display section Sync1, and the second synchronized display section Sync2. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the V winning mechanism 210. As shown in FIG. 57(a), the V winning mechanism 210 includes a clown 220, a channel 211 that allows the game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to flow to the clown 220, and a flow path 211 that allows the game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to A second opening/closing door 213 that opens and closes the second big prize opening 212 for the ball to flow into the channel 211, a detection sensor 214 that detects that a game ball has flowed in from the second big prize opening 212, and a gaming area. , a storage valve 216 that temporarily stores the game balls that have flowed in from the second big prize opening 212 in the storage section 218 of the channel 211, and a storage valve that drives the storage valve 216. A drive mechanism 217 is provided. Further, the clone 220 includes one V winning hole 222 and five non-V winning holes 224. The V winning hole 222 is a winning hole that becomes a jackpot when a game ball enters the ball. Even if a game ball enters the non-V winning hole 224, it will not be a jackpot, and the game ball will be ejected from the game area.

Next, the operation of the V winning mechanism 210 will be explained. If a specific type of jackpot or small win is won in a winning lottery in a game round, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game round, the opening condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied, so that 57(a), the second opening/closing door 213 opens.

When the player launches a game ball to the right side of the game board 30 by operating the operation handle 25, and the game ball flows near the second door 213 while the second door 213 is open, the state shown in FIG. As shown in b), the game ball flows into the channel 211 from the second big prize opening 212 guided by the opened second opening/closing door 213. The game balls that first flowed into the channel 211 after the second opening/closing door 213 was opened are stored in the storage section 218 by the closed storage valve 216. Further, in this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage section 218 is one. In addition, as a modification, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 57(c), when a game ball enters from the second grand prize opening 212 in a state where one game ball is stored in the storage section 218, the game ball is first stored in the storage section 218. The game balls stored in 218 block the flow to the storage section 218, flow in the direction of the outlet 215 in the flow path 211, and are discharged from the outlet 215 to the back side of the gaming area.

As shown in FIG. 57(d), when the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 213 are satisfied, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Details of the closing conditions will be described later. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(e), the storage valve drive mechanism 217 drives the storage valve 216 in the opening direction, and the game balls stored in the storage section 218 are distributed in the direction of the clone 220 in the flow path 211. do. Then, the game ball discharged from the channel 211 flows on the upper surface of the clone 220, and then enters the V winning hole 222 or the non-V winning hole 224. As described above, when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222, it becomes a jackpot, and when a game ball enters the non-V winning hole 224, it does not become a jackpot and is ejected from the gaming area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, each time one game ball enters (flows into) the second large prize opening 212 of the V winning mechanism 210, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71. The entry of the game ball into the second big prize opening 212 is detected by the detection sensor 214.

As described above, as a modified example, if a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 is adopted, a plurality of game balls can be stored on the upper surface of the clone 220 by opening the storage valve 216. , it is possible to improve the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole 222, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation. In this case, even if two game balls enter the V winning hole 222, it will be treated as a jackpot based only on the first game ball that entered the V winning hole 222, and the game balls will be sent to the V winning hole 222. The second game ball that enters is not treated as a jackpot, and is ejected to the back side of the game area in the same way as the game ball that enters the non-V winning hole 224.

《B2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entry holes and through gates such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a first opening/closing door drive unit 36c that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. The drive unit 34b, the second door drive unit 213b that opens and closes the second door 213, the storage valve drive mechanism 217 that drives the storage valve 216, and the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the first opening/closing door driving section 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, and controls the second opening/closing door driving section 36c so that the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed. Drive control of the opening/closing door drive section 213b. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a specific jackpot or small win, the MPU 62 drives and controls the storage valve drive mechanism 217 so that the storage valve 216 is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern are being displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time when the 1st liquid crystal pattern or the 2nd liquid crystal pattern is stopped and displayed is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. Various types of counter information are used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, allocating jackpot types, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b, a determination process execution area 64c, and a type determination process execution area 64i. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is set to the first pending value in the pending information storage area 64b. The information is stored in area Ra in chronological order. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. Stored in chronological order.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the winning random number counter C1 when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the winning random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and its updated value is determined at the timing when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode, or at the timing when a game ball enters the V prize opening 222. It is stored in the pending information storage area 64d.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the values of these winning random number counters C1 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is acquired when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the start of the opening/closing execution mode and is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the counter C2. The jackpot type (the number of round game runs) determined by the type determination process is displayed on the round display section 39.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 56(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the . For example, if C4=0 or 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33. A win/fail table for the game ball and a win/fail table for comparing with the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63: a validity table (for probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. As shown in the figure, in the win/fail table for the first starting opening, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, five values from 5 to 9 are set as small wins (misses). The small hit (miss) will be described later. Values other than the 10 values from 0 to 9 (10 to 1199) are outliers.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. As shown in the figure, in the win/fail table for the second starting opening, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are small wins (misses).

Here, a small hit (missing) is a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is executed, but in the support mode, a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition. It is. On the other hand, a normal error is a validity result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the support mode. In addition, in the following explanation, a small hit (missing) is also simply called a "small winning", and a normal winning is also simply called a "missing".

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of the opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the above-mentioned (2) opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing between the opening/closing execution mode is started and ends. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of occurrence of game balls entering the door 213 (winning) is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. It can be set to On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. It can be set as follows.

The opening limit time for one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213, and the opening limit number for one opening of the variable prize winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, if the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the V winning mechanism 210 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 may be arbitrary. be. Specifically, it is only necessary that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening time limit for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, it is assumed that the ball enters the variable winning device 36 and the V-winning mechanism 210 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. Good too.

In this embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a jackpot and a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger, or when a gaming ball enters the V prize opening 222. In this case, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 62(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting opening (at the time of winning the jackpot). This sorting table is referred to when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by a ball entering the first starting slot.

FIG. 62(b) shows a distribution table when a V prize is won triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole. In the distribution table, when a ball enters the first starting hole, it becomes a small win in the game round that is executed, and when the ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed using the small win as a trigger, it becomes a jackpot. Referenced when

FIG. 62(c) shows a distribution table for the second starting port (at the time of winning a jackpot and when winning a V prize triggered by a ball entering the second starting port). The distribution table is used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by a ball entering the second starting slot, and in a game run triggered by a ball entering the second starting slot. This is referred to when the ball enters the V winning hole 222 and becomes a jackpot during the opening/closing execution mode that is executed with the small win as a trigger.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening in FIG. 62(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed with the ball entering the first starting opening as an opportunity. The types of jackpots in the case of winning are set as 5R 1st type jackpot, 5R 2nd type jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot.

The 5R first type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed five times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the first type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of playable games is limited to 90 in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, after the game is played 90 times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 5R second type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed five times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the second type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is limited to five. That is, after the game is played five times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed 10 times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 44" correspond to the 5R first type jackpot, and "45 to 60" correspond to the 5R jackpot type counter C2. It corresponds to the second type jackpot, and "61 to 99" corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting port in FIG. 62(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port is In the case where a small hit occurs in the executed game round, and the ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type is 5R type 1 jackpot, 10R normal A jackpot is set.

The 5R first type jackpot and the 10R normal jackpot have been explained in the allocation table for the first starting opening in FIG. 62(a), so their explanation will be omitted.

In the distribution table when the ball enters the first starting slot and wins a V prize, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 5R type 1 jackpot. ``65-99'' corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 62(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by a ball entering the second starting port. If you win, you will win a small hit in the game run triggered by the ball entering the second starting slot, and you will hit the jackpot by entering the V winning slot 222 during the opening/closing execution mode that was triggered by the small winning. In this case, the jackpot types are set as 15R first type jackpot, 4R first type jackpot, and 4R second type jackpot.

The 15R first type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed 15 times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the first type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of playable games is limited to 90 in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, after the game is played 90 times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 4R first type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed four times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the first type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of playable games is limited to 90 in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, after the game is played 90 times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The 4R second type jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed four times during the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. However, in the second type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is limited to five. That is, after the game is played five times in the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49" correspond to the 15R first type jackpot, and "50 to 57" correspond to the 4R type jackpot. It corresponds to the 1st type jackpot, and "58-99" corresponds to the 4R 2nd type jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved, the jackpot type is distributed in such a way that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed when the ball enters the first starting slot. In the case where the ball enters the first starting slot, the ball enters the V winning slot 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by a small win, and the ball enters the V winning slot 222, resulting in a jackpot. If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round triggered by the ball entering the second starting slot, and if you win the small prize in the game round triggered by the ball entering the second starting slot. There is a difference between a case where a ball enters the V winning hole 222 and a jackpot during the opening/closing execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. ing.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i. The MPU 62 uses these values of the hit random number counter C1 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. At the same time, the display mode of the round display section 39 is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the firing of game balls into the gaming area PA continues in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is different between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role is opened several times, the electric role is opened several times. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 63(a) shows a win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 63(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as values of electric accessory opening counter C4 that will be the winning electric accessory. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 63(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 63(b), the electric accessory opening lottery win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the electric accessory opening lottery. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

《B3》Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 55.

When the player starts playing the game, he operates the operating handle 25 to fire the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30. Hereinafter, firing the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as "left-handed hitting," and firing the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 will also be referred to as "right-handed hitting."

When the player starts hitting left-handed and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33, a game round begins to notify the winning lottery result triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33. be done. If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round ends. Here, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the type of jackpot (see FIG. 62) is not determined at the time when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed after the end of the game round in which the winning lottery is won.

When the game round in which the jackpot was won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When the opening/closing execution mode is started, a performance (right-hand hitting suggestion performance) that suggests to the player to shoot the game ball towards the right side of the game board 30 (hit right) is performed. When the player recognizes the right-handed hitting suggestion effect, fires the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and when the game ball enters (passes through) the type determination gate 202, the type is determined after starting the opening/closing execution mode. The type determination process is executed when the game ball first enters (passes through) the gate 202. The type determination process is a process for determining the jackpot type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

When the jackpot type is determined by executing the type determination process, a round game is started in which the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 perform opening/closing operations based on the opening/closing scenario set for each jackpot type. Ru. The opening/closing scenario is a program that predetermines the pattern of opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213. Details of the opening/closing scenario will be described later.

When a game ball hit right by the player enters the first grand prize opening 36a or the second grand prize opening 212 during the period in which the round game is being executed (hereinafter also referred to as the opening/closing processing period), the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 36a or the second grand prize opening 212. A set number of game balls are given to the player as a benefit (prize balls).

In this embodiment, an opening/closing scenario is set in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens only in a specific case, and a game ball can be entered into the second grand prize opening 212. Then, as explained in FIG. 57, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 212, one game ball among the game balls that entered the second grand prize opening 212 is stored in the storage section 218. Then, after the storage valve 216 is opened, the water flows from the flow path 211 to the clone 220 (see FIG. 57(e)). Then, when the game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222, a new jackpot is confirmed. When a new jackpot is confirmed as a result of a game ball entering the V winning hole 222, the opening/closing execution mode that is currently being executed is interrupted and a new opening/closing execution is started based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 222. mode is started. As mentioned above, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33, the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won The jackpot type was determined when a game ball entered the type determination gate 202 in , the type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

As explained in FIG. 62, the distribution of the jackpot type in the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (FIG. 57(a)), and the distribution of the jackpot type triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (FIG. 57(a)). This is different from the distribution of jackpot types in the jackpot at the time of winning the V prize (FIG. 57(b)). In the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that more benefits will be given to the player when the jackpot type is sorted in the jackpot at the time of winning a V prize triggered by the ball entering the first starting slot. Therefore, even if a jackpot is confirmed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, if the second opening/closing door 213 opens during a round game, the player cannot move the game ball into the first opening. The user wants the game ball to enter the two major winning holes 212 and further enter the V winning hole 222. Therefore, even during a round game, the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

Even if the second opening/closing door 213 was opened and the game ball was able to enter the second large prize opening 212, the game ball could not be entered into the V winning opening 222. Then, the round game based on the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 continues.

When the round game ends and the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the high frequency support mode is set for the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, it will be executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The support mode in the game round becomes the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the player hits the game ball to the right and causes the game ball to enter the through gate 35, thereby executing the electric accessory opening lottery. If you win the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric accessory 34a opens and allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and as a result, the game ball enters the second starting port 34. A winning lottery will be held based on this.

The result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a jackpot or a small jackpot. If you win a jackpot, the game will be executed after the game round in which you won the jackpot ends, just as in the case where you win a jackpot in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33. The type of jackpot is determined by letting a game ball enter the type determining gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode. Then, a round game set to the determined jackpot type is executed.

On the other hand, if a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened once after the end of the game round in which the small win was won. The open/close execution mode is executed. Then, if a game ball enters the second big prize opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then a game ball enters the V prize opening 222, a jackpot is confirmed, and the jackpot is confirmed. The opening/closing execution mode triggered by this is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, a bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set for the type of jackpot.

Next, the player starts the game and hits the game ball to the left to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 33, and wins a small win in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33. Let's explain the case.

When a small hit is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the second opening/closing door 213 opens once after the game round in which the small win was won is completed. Execution mode is executed. After starting the opening/closing execution mode, a right-handed hitting suggestion performance is executed to suggest to the player that he/she should hit right-handed. The player executes a right-handed hit according to the right-handed hit suggestion presentation, causes a game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then a game ball enters the V winning opening 222. If the ball hits, a jackpot is confirmed, and an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, a bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set for the type of jackpot. The general flow of the game on the gaming machine in this embodiment has been described above.

《B4》Summary of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 64 is a time chart illustrating a case 1 in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. In addition, the outline of the process described below is not executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, but only in specific cases. executed.

When the game round U1 is started when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 after the player hits left, the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a start to fluctuate. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round U1. Thereafter, the fluctuation of the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a stops. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a, but there is no effect that clearly suggests that the jackpot has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. Instead, a performance is performed in which it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether he has won a jackpot or a small win. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting sound can recognize that he has won a jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1. I can't.

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery is won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. As described above, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot has not been determined at the time of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined by the game ball entering the type determining gate 202 after the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Therefore, even when the game round in which the winning lottery is won ends, the round display section 39 does not display the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the period from the time when the opening/closing execution mode starts until the type of jackpot is determined is also referred to as a "waiting period".

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery was won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and at the same time, a performance suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting suggestion performance) is executed, and a benefit can be given to the player. A production that indicates that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot, more specifically, a production that suggests that there are two chances to win the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as "double chance production") is performed. .

When the player recognizes that the right-handed hit suggestion performance and the double chance performance have been executed, he executes the right-handed hit and the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, a type determination process is executed, and the jackpot type is determined. . Once the jackpot type is determined, the waiting period ends and the opening period begins. A right-handed hitting suggestion performance is also performed during the opening period. After the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period begins. During the opening/closing processing period, round games are executed the number of times corresponding to the determined jackpot type. At this time, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens is executed in the first round game (1Rth) of the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type. In addition, when the opening/closing processing period starts, there will be an effect that suggests that the first of the two opportunities to win the jackpot has started (hereinafter referred to as the first chance effect). ) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance performance, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and the game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 212, and the game ball is also entered into the V winning hole 222 to win the jackpot. A performance is performed to encourage the decision to be made.

The player recognizes the first chance performance to be executed and executes the right hit, and the game ball can enter the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and the game ball can be stored. If the game balls can be stored in the section 218 (see FIG. 57) (proceed to [Storage in the storage section] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 starts the opening/closing operation after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Execute once. At this time, one game ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the channel 211 and flows into the clone 220.

The game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222 or the non-V winning hole 224. When a game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222 (proceeds to [Ball entering V winning hole] shown in the time chart), a new jackpot is confirmed. When a new jackpot is confirmed as a result of a game ball entering the V winning hole 222, the opening/closing execution mode that is currently being executed is interrupted and a new opening/closing execution is started based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 222. mode is started. As mentioned above, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33, the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won The jackpot type was determined when a game ball entered the type determination gate 202 in , the type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

On the other hand, if the game ball circulating through Cloon 220 enters the non-V winning slot 224 (proceed to [Ball not entering V winning slot] shown in the time chart), you will win the two prepared jackpots. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second chance effect) indicating that the second chance has started is executed. The second chance performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player. At the timing when the jackpot is confirmed, an effect is executed to indicate that the jackpot has been confirmed. In addition, if the performance operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Execute a performance that shows. Note that the confirmation of the jackpot suggested in the second chance performance is content that suggests that the jackpot was won (or was won) in the winning lottery in the game round U1.

After executing the second chance performance, the 1st round of the round game being executed triggered by winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1 is completed, and the 2nd round (2R) is started.

Next, even though the player recognizes the first chance performance and executes a right-handed hit, the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. A case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage section 218 (proceeding to [Not stored in the storage section] shown in the time chart) will be explained. In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance performance in this case is also a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player can press the performance operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, a performance indicating that a jackpot is confirmed is executed. In addition, if the performance operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period of time after the execution of the performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Execute a performance that shows.

After executing the second chance performance, the 1st round of the round game being executed triggered by winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1 is completed, and the 2nd round (2R) is started. Case 1 has been explained above.

FIG. 65 is a time chart illustrating a case 2 in which a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. In this embodiment, in all cases where a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33, the process described below is executed.

When the game round U2 is started when the player executes a left-handed hit and the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a start to fluctuate. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round U2. Thereafter, the fluctuation of the symbols on the first symbol display section 37a stops. At this time, a symbol pattern indicating a small win is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a, but the display of an image on the symbol display device 41 and the output of sound clearly indicate that the small win has been won. No performance is performed, but a performance is performed in which it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether he has won a jackpot or a small win. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying images on the symbol display device 41 and outputting audio recognizes that he has won a small win in the winning lottery corresponding to game round U1. I can't.

After the game round U2 in which the small win was won ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. If a small win is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33, the opening/closing execution mode is started. Then, during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode, a right-handed hit suggestion presentation is executed, and a presentation indicating that there is a possibility that a bonus will be given to the player, more specifically, an opportunity to win a jackpot. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as "double chance effect") suggesting that two chances are prepared is executed.

Then, after the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period starts. In the opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened only once is executed. In addition, when the opening/closing processing period starts, there will be an effect that suggests that the first of the two opportunities to win the jackpot has started (hereinafter referred to as the first chance effect). ) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance performance, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, and the game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 212, and the game ball is also entered into the V winning hole 222 to win the jackpot. A performance is performed to encourage the decision to be made.

The player can recognize the first chance performance to be executed and execute the right hit, and the game ball can enter the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. If the game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 (see FIG. 57) (proceed to "Storage in the storage section" shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. Execute once. At this time, one game ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the channel 211 and flows into the clone 220.

The game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222 or the non-V winning hole 224. When the game ball circulating through the clone 220 enters the V winning hole 222 (proceeds to [Ball entering V winning hole] shown in the time chart), a jackpot is confirmed. When a jackpot is confirmed as a result of a game ball entering the V-winning hole 222, the current opening/closing execution mode is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the game ball entering the V-winning hole 222 is started. will be started. In addition, when a jackpot occurs as a result of a game ball entering the V winning hole 222, the type of jackpot is determined as well as the confirmation of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the game ball circulating through Cloon 220 enters the non-V winning slot 224 (proceed to [Ball not entering V winning slot] shown in the time chart), you will win the two prepared jackpots. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second chance effect) indicating that the second chance has started is executed. The second chance performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player. At the specified timing, an effect is executed to indicate that the failure has been confirmed. In addition, if the effect operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period after the execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the failure is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Execute a performance that shows. Note that the confirmation of a loss suggested in the second chance production is a content that suggests that the winning lottery in game round U2 was a loss (or that it was a loss).

After executing the second chance performance, the round game being executed triggered by winning a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, a performance urging the player to play left-handed (left-handed hitting suggestion performance) is executed. The player executes a left-handed hit and attempts to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 again.

Next, even though the player recognizes the first chance performance and executes a right-handed hit, the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. A case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage section 218 (proceeding to [Not stored in the storage section] shown in the time chart) will be explained. In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance performance in this case is also a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance operation button 24, and if the player operates the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player can press the performance operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect indicating that the deviation has been confirmed is executed. In addition, if the effect operation button 24 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period after the execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the failure is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Execute a performance that shows.

After executing the second chance performance, the round game being executed triggered by winning a small win in the winning lottery in game round U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, a performance urging the player to play left-handed (left-handed hitting suggestion performance) is executed. The player executes a left-handed hit and attempts to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 again.

As explained above, both in the case where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (Case 1), and in the case where a small win is won (Case 2). ), the first symbol display section 37a displays a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. The performance will not be executed. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of a winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound cannot recognize the lottery result in the game round at the time when the game round ends. As a result, even if the player has won a small prize, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he or she has won a big prize.

Furthermore, after the game round ends, in both case 1 and case 2, the right hit suggestion performance and the double chance suggestion performance are executed, so during the period when the performance is executed after the game round ends. It is also possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win in the winning lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined at the time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, it is determined by the game ball entering the type determining gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. When the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp of the round display section 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of times the round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. On the other hand, if you have won a small prize, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, even if you win a jackpot or a small win, the round lamp will not light up immediately after the end of the game, so the round lamp will not turn on after the game ends. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from identifying whether he or she has won a jackpot or a small win in the relevant game round.

As a result, the player is not made aware of the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player hits the right ball and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the game round ends. On the other hand, for a relatively long period of time, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small win starts, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and to keep the player interested in the game. It can draw attention. In addition, when determining the type of jackpot, the player is asked to hit right and enter the game ball into the type determination gate 202, so the player is actively involved in determining the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to draw more attention to the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

<<B5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sa5101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entrance detection information) is saved. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5102.

In step Sa5102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5103.

In step Sa5103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in normal processing (FIG. 75), which will be described later.

In step Sa5104, ball entry processing for the starting ports is executed as the game balls enter the first starting ports 33 and the second starting ports 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sa5104 will be described later. After executing step Sa5104, the process advances to step Sa5105.

In step Sa5105, through ball entry processing is executed when the game ball enters (passes through) the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sa5105 will be described later. After executing step Sa5105, the process advances to step Sa5106.

In step Sa5106, ball entry processing for the type determining gate is executed as the game ball enters the type determining gate. Details of the ball entering process for the type determining gate in step Sa5106 will be described later. After executing step Sa5106, the process advances to step Sa5107.

In step Sa5107, ball entry processing for the big winning hole is executed when the game ball enters the big winning hole. Details of the ball entry process for the big winning a prize opening in step Sa5107 will be described later. After executing step Sa5107, the process advances to step Sa5108.

In step Sa5108, a ball entry process for the croon is executed when the game ball enters the croon. Details of the ball entry process for croon in step Sa5108 will be described later. After executing step Sa5108, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. Ball entrance processing for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 66: Sa5104).

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sa5201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sa5201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sa5201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5203.

In step Sa5203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5204.

In step Sa5204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5209.

If it is determined in step Sa5201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sa5201: NO), the process advances to step Sa5205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sa5205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sa5205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sa5205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sa5207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5208.

In step Sa5208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5209.

In step Sa5209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sa5204 or step Sa5208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sa5209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sa5209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa5209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sa5209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sa5211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5212.

In step Sa5212, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66), and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 75) is added to the corresponding reservation area. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of pending items added by 1 in step Sa5210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66) are Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sa5210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66) is , is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sa5210. After executing step Sa5212, the process advances to step Sa5213.

In step Sa5213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (pending information), and determines the success/failure determination result of the winning lottery (lottery result) and the jackpot. This is a process in which determinations are made of the type of game, the presence or absence of a reach, the variation time of game rounds, etc., before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sa5213, the process advances to step Sa5214.

In step Sa5214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is used as a hold command. Set.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sa5214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 67: Sa5213) of the ball entry process for the starting port.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As mentioned above, the preliminary judgment process is based on the pending information, and the pending information is used to determine whether or not the winning lottery is correct, to determine the type of jackpot, to determine whether reach has occurred, to determine the fluctuating time of the game, etc. This is a process executed before becoming a target of the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sa5301, jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sa5301, the process advances to step Sa5302.

In step Sa5302, variation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process for determining the variation time of the game. Details of the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step Sa5302, the first-order determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be explained. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the advance determination process (FIG. 68: Sa5301).

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step Sa5401, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) is read out when the ball enters the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 67). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5402.

In step Sa5402, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is based on the first reservation area Ra. In other words, the pending information to be subjected to the first determination process is information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, or information obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port 34. Determine whether the information was acquired as If it is determined in step Sa5402 that the read reservation area is based on the first reservation area Ra (Sa5402: YES), the process advances to step Sa5403 and refers to the validity table for the first starting gate. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5402 that the read reservation area is not based on the first reservation area Ra, that is, if the read reservation area is based on the second reservation area Rb (Sa5402: NO) , the process advances to step Sa5404 and refers to the validity table for the first starting port. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5405.

In step Sa5405, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is a jackpot in the winning lottery. In step Sa5405, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa5405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5406.

In step Sa5406, the jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sa5405, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has not won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa5405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5407.

In step Sa5407, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is a small winning in the winning lottery. In step Sa5407, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a small win in the winning lottery (Sa5407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5408.

In step Sa5408, the small hit information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

In step Sa5407, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 does not result in a small winning in the winning lottery (Sa5407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5409.

In step Sa5409, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa5410, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa5411, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sa5411, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sa5411: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5412, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends. On the other hand, in step Sa5411, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach occurrence is not supported (Sa5411: NO), the jackpot/ready-to-reach information acquisition process is ended.

<Fluctuating time information acquisition process>
Next, the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be explained. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 68: Sa5302).

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating time information acquisition process. In step Sa5501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port in the starting port entry process (FIG. 67) is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Sa5502.

In step Sa5502, it is determined whether the winning lottery for the current game round is a winning result. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a jackpot (Sa5502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5503.

In step Sa5503, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step Sa5503, the process advances to step Sa5509.

In step Sa5509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sa5502, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot (step Sa5502: NO), the process advances to step Sa5504, and it is determined whether or not a small win has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. judge. In step Sa5504, if it is determined that the small win has been won (Sa5504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5505.

In step Sa5505, the variable time table for small winnings stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step Sa5505, the process advances to step Sa5509.

In step Sa5509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sa5504, if it is determined that a small win has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sa5504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5506, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs. In step Sa5506, if it is determined that reach occurs (Sa5506: YES), the process advances to step Sa5507.

In step Sa5507, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa5509, and after storing the obtained variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variable time information acquisition process is ended.

In step Sa5506, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Sa5506: NO), the process advances to step Sa5508, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa5509, and after storing the obtained variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variable time information acquisition process is ended.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 66: Step Sa5105).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sa5601, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sa5601, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sa5601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5602, and whether the number SN of accessory items held is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) or not Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sa5601: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Sa5602, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sa5602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5603, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. After that, the process advances to step Sa5604.

In step Sa5604, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sa5602, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items held SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sa5602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number SN of accessory items held is the upper limit value, the electric The through ball entry process is ended without storing the value of the accessory opening counter C4.

<Ball entry processing for type determination gate>
Next, the ball entry process for the type determination gate will be described. The ball entry process for the type determination gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66: Step Sa5106).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the type determination gate. In step Sa5701, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the type determining gate 202 or not. In step Sa5701, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the type determining gate 202 (Sa5701: YES), the process advances to step Sa5702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5701 that the game ball has not entered the type determining gate 202 (Sa5701: NO), the ball entering process for the type determining gate is immediately terminated.

In step Sa5702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process (see FIG. 82) is executed after winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and the entry process for this type determination gate is executed. In this step, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area and then turned off (Sa5705).

If it is determined in step Sa5702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa5702: YES), the process advances to step Sa5703. In step Sa5702, if it is determined that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa5702: NO), the ball entering process for the type determination gate is immediately terminated.

In step Sa5703, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa5704.

In step Sa5704, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process (see FIG. 82) described later. be made into After executing step Sa5704, the process advances to step Sa5705.

In step Sa5705, the type determination permission flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the ball entering process for the type determining gate is ended.

<Ball entry processing for the big prize opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the big winning hole will be explained. The ball entering process for the big winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66: Step Sa5107).

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the big winning hole. In step Sa5801, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a. In step Sa5801, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first big prize opening 36a (Sa5801: YES), the process advances to step Sa5802. On the other hand, in step Sa5801, if it is not determined that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a (Sa5801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5804.

In step Sa5802, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set based on the ball entering the first large winning hole 36a. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the first big prize opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step Sa5802, the process advances to step Sa5803.

In step Sa5803, the first grand prize opening ball entry command is set. The first big winning hole entry ball command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a. The first big prize opening ball entry command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal process described later. After executing step Sa5803, the process advances to step Sa5804.

In step Sa5804, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 212 or not. In step Sa5804, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 212 (Sa5804: YES), the process advances to step Sa5805. On the other hand, in step Sa5804, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second big winning hole 212 (Sa5804: NO), the ball entering process for the big winning hole is ended.

In step Sa5805, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering the second large winning hole 212 is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second big prize opening 212, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step Sa5805, the process advances to step Sa5806.

In step Sa5806, a second grand prize opening ball entry command is set. The second big winning hole entry ball command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 212. The second grand prize opening ball entry command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal process described later. After executing step Sa5806, the ball entry process for the big winning hole is ended.

<Ball entry processing for Croon>
Next, the ball entry process for Croon will be explained. The ball entry process for croon is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 66: step Sa5108).

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for croon. In step Sa5901, it is determined whether the Kroon ball entry permission flag is ON. The croon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened in the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 85), and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or non-V winning opening 224 provided in the closing 220. (FIG. 74: Sa5908). By doing this, even though the storage valve 216 is not performing the opening operation, damage or abnormality of the storage valve drive mechanism 217 or the storage valve 216 may cause game balls to unintentionally flow into the croon. It is possible to avoid hitting the jackpot by hitting the ball into the winning hole 222. If it is determined in step Sa5901 that the Kroon entry permission flag is ON (Sa5901: YES), the process advances to step Sa5902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5901 that the Kroon ball entry permission flag is not ON (Sa5901: NO), the Kroon ball entry process is immediately terminated.

In step Sa5902, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 or not. In step Sa5902, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 (Sa5902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5903.

In step Sa5903, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). As described above, in the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the opening/closing execution mode is activated. When a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during execution, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i) in the ball entry process for the type determination gate. However, in the case of a jackpot triggered by the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 222, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination It is stored in the processing execution area 64i). After executing step Sa5903, the process advances to step Sa5904.

In step Sa5904, the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON. The V winning jackpot flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the setting of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot due to the V winning is completed (FIG. 85: Sa6910) . After executing step Sa5904, the process advances to step Sa5905.

In step Sa5905, a V winning command is set. The V winning prize command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222. The V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of normal processing to be described later. After executing step Sa5905, the process advances to step Sa5908.

On the other hand, in step Sa5902, if it is determined that no game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 (Sa5902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5906.

In step Sa5906, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the non-V winning hole 224 or not. In step Sa5906, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the non-V winning hole 224 (Sa5906: YES), the process advances to step Sa5907. On the other hand, in step Sa5906, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the non-V winning hole 224 (Sa5906: NO), the ball entering process for the croon is ended.

In step Sa5907, a non-V winning command is set. The non-V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. The non-V winning command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of normal processing to be described later. After executing step Sa5907, the process advances to step Sa5908.

In step Sa5908, the Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the ball entry process for Croon ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sa6001, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sa6002.

In step Sa6002, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6003.

In step Sa6003, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sa6002, the command set in timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Furthermore, if commands related to effects such as a startup command, a variation command, a variation type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sa6003, the process advances to step Sa6004.

In step Sa6004, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6005.

In step Sa6005, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sa6006. In step Sa6006, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sa6006, the process advances to step Sa6007.

In step Sa6007, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6008.

In step Sa6008, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6009.

In step Sa6009, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sa6003). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sa6009, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sa6009: NO), in step Sa6010 and step Sa6011, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sa6010, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sa6011, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sa6009: YES), the process returns to step Sa6003 and each process from step Sa6003 to step Sa6008 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sa6003 to step Sa6008 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 75: Sa6006) of the normal process.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sa6101, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the fluctuation of symbols in the game round in which a jackpot or small winning is won in the winning lottery ends (Sa6112), and the opening/closing execution mode is turned on in the game state transition process (FIG. 81). It is turned OFF when terminating (FIG. 81: Sa6631).

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON in step Sa6101 (Sa6101: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and the main game round control is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sa6102. Finish the process. That is, when the special game state is in progress, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, in step Sa6101, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the special game state is not in progress (Sa6101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6102.

In step Sa6102, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when a fluctuating display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

If it is determined in step Sa6102 that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (Sa6102: NO), the process proceeds to steps Sa6103 to step Sa6107 for starting the game round. In step Sa6103, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sa6103, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sa6103: YES), this game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6103 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sa6103: NO), the process advances to step Sa6104.

In step Sa6104, data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process advances to step Sa6105. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sa6105, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6106.

In step Sa6106, it is determined whether the PNC count flag is ON. The PNC count flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode executed in response to a jackpot for which the high-frequency support mode is set ends (see Figure 87), and is turned OFF when the high-frequency support mode ends. (See Figure 88). The PNC count flag is set to confirm the timing to start counting the number of times the game has been executed during the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sa6106 that the PNC count flag is ON (Sa6106: YES), the process advances to step Sa6107.

In step Sa6107, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The number of games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high frequency support mode. After executing step Sa6107, this game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6106 that the PNC count flag is not ON (Sa6106: NO), the game cycle control process is ended.

In step Sa6102, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (Sa6102: YES), the processing for progressing the game round in steps Sa6108 to Sa6113 is executed.

In step Sa6108, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sa6108, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 80) described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sa6108, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sa6108: NO), the process advances to step Sa6109, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step Sa6109, the game time control process ends.

In step Sa6108, if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (Sa6108: YES), the process advances to step Sa6110 and a variation end process is executed. The variation end process changes the symbol display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 78) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. Control display. After executing step Sa6110, the process advances to step Sa6111.

In step Sa6111, it is determined whether either the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag is ON. The jackpot flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot in a fluctuation start process (FIG. 78) to be described later. The small win flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small win in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 78) described later. Further, the jackpot flag and the small win flag are turned OFF in the flag erasing process in the transition process at the end of the ending period (FIG. 87), which will be described later.

In step Sa6111, if it is determined that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sa6111: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6112 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6113, and an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is started. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of normal processing, which will be described later. After executing step Sa6113, the game time control process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sa6111, if it is determined that either the jackpot flag or the small win flag is not ON (Sa6111: NO), the game round control process is immediately ended.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 76: Sa6104) of the game time control process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step Sa6201, it is determined whether the holding area to which the data setting process is to be performed is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 59) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 59). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sa6201, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sa6201 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sa6201: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area in steps Sa6202 to Sa6207 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sa6201, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sa6201: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps Sa6208 to Sa6213 is executed.

In step Sa6202, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sa6203, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6204. In step Sa6204, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6205.

In step Sa6205, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sa6205, the process advances to step Sa6206.

In step Sa6206, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6207.

In step Sa6207, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa6207 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sa6201, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step Sa6201: NO), The process advances to step Sa6208.

In step Sa6208, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6209. In step Sa6209, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sa6210, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sa6211.

In step Sa6211, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sa6211, the process advances to step Sa6212.

In step Sa6212, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6213.

In step Sa6213, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa6213 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in normal processing (FIG. 75). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 76: Sa6105) of the game time control process.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sa6301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) is read out when the ball enters the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 67). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6302.

In step Sa6302, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In other words, the value of the winning random number counter C1 to be processed is either information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or information obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port 34. Determine whether the information was acquired as a trigger.

In step Sa6302, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa6302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6303. In step Sa6303, the validity table for the first starting port is referred to, and the process then proceeds to step Sa6305.

In step Sa6302, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa6302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6304. In step Sa6304, the validity table for the second starting port is referred to, and the process then proceeds to step Sa6305.

In step Sa6305, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a jackpot in the winning lottery. In step Sa6305, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa6305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6306.

In step Sa6306, a stop result setting process for jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a jackpot is to display a variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won. This is a process for setting whether to terminate the process. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot is acquired by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, and the address information is stored as the stop result address in the RAM 64. Store in the storage area. After executing step Sa6306, the process advances to step Sa6307.

In step Sa6307, the jackpot flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6308, and a specific process execution determination process is executed. The specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute the process described in FIG. 64, that is, the process including the execution of the W chance suggestion performance in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won. This is the process to do so. Details of the specific process execution determination process will be described later. After executing step Sa6308, the process advances to step Sa6315.

On the other hand, in step Sa6305, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has not won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sa6305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6309.

In step Sa6309, it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is a small winning in the winning lottery. In step Sa6309, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has won a small win in the winning lottery (Sa6309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6310.

In step Sa6310, a stop result setting process for small winning is executed. The stop result setting process for a small hit is to change the state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round in which a small win will be won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. After executing step Sa6310, the process advances to step Sa6311.

In step Sa6311, the small hit flag is turned on. After executing step Sa6311, the process advances to step Sa6315.

In step Sa6309, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 has not won a small win in the winning lottery (Sa6309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6312.

In step Sa6312, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round to be executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read out. Then, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sa6312, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the current game round to be executed (Sa6312: YES), the process advances to step Sa6313.

In step Sa6313, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. Specifically, in the current game round, which is the stop result for reach, it is set which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b before the variable display ends. Execute the process to do so. More specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sa6313, the process advances to step Sa6315.

In step Sa6312, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the current game round to be executed (Sa6312: NO), the process advances to step Sa6314.

In step Sa6314, a stop result setting process for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for a loss is the process of determining which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a miss and the variable display is to be ended. This is the process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sa6314, the process advances to step Sa6315.

In step Sa6315, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa6315, the process advances to step Sa6316.

In step Sa6316, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sa6316, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sa6316: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6317 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence/absence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sa6315 are included.

On the other hand, in step Sa6316, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa6316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6318, and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence/absence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sa6315 are included. After executing step Sa6317 or step Sa6318, the process advances to step Sa6319.

In step Sa6319, a variation type command is set. The variation type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, and whether or not a specific process is executed.

The variation command and variation type command set in steps Sa6317 to Sa6319 are sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and variation type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sa6319, the process advances to step Sa6320.

In step Sa6320, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sa6320, this variation start process ends.

<Specific process execution determination process>
Next, the specific process execution determination process will be explained. The specific process execution determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 78: Sa6308). Here, the specific process means the series of processes described in FIG. 64. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the specific process.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing specific processing execution determination processing. In step Sa6401, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. As described above, the process explained with reference to FIG. 64 is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery that is executed in the game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. Therefore, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 34. In order to do so, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display section flag is ON.

In step Sa6401, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa6401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6402. On the other hand, in step Sa6401, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa6401: YES), the specific process execution determination process is immediately terminated.

In step Sa6402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery is a predetermined specific value. As explained in FIG. 64, the process shown in FIG. 64 is executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33. Run only in certain cases instead of Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the relevant game round is a predetermined specific value or not, and if it is a specific value, it is decided to execute a specific process. In the present embodiment, the specific values are two values "0, 1" among the values "0 to 4" of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. is set to . Therefore, in step Sa6402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game round in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery is "0" or "1". In step Sa6402, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is a specific value (Sa6402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6403. On the other hand, in step Sa6402, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not a specific value (Sa6402: NO), the specific process execution determination process is directly ended.

In step Sa6403, the specific processing flag is turned on. In the process described in FIG. 64, it is necessary to set an opening/closing scenario (opening pattern) in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode. The specific processing flag is provided to identify whether or not specific processing is executed in the process of determining the opening/closing scenario (FIG. 83: opening/closing scenario setting process). After executing step Sa6403, the process advances to step SSa6404.

In step Sa6404, a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that specific processing is to be executed. The specific processing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal processing described later. After executing step Sa6404, the specific process execution determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 78: Sa6015).

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sa6501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sa6502.

In step Sa6502, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (Sa6502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6503.

In step Sa6503, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sa6502, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sa6502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6504, and the small hit has been won in the winning lottery for the current gaming round. Determine whether or not the Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small win flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if the small win flag is ON (Sa6504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6505.

In step Sa6505, the variable time table for small winnings stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sa6504, if it is determined that the small win has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sa6504: NO), the process advances to step Sa6506.

In step Sa6506, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (Sa6506) is executed when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round in the above step Sa6502, and when the small win has not been won in the winning lottery, in step Sa6506, the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a reach is generated among the game rounds in which a small win has not been won. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Sa6506: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sa6507. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sa6507, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sa6506, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sa6506: NO), proceed to step Sa6508 and refer to the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table shows that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the longer the change time becomes. It is set to be short. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referenced depends on the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN when determining the varying time of the relevant game round. are different.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the variation time. However, for example, the larger the value of the total pending number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 75: Sa6007) of the normal process.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sa6601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending performance in the special game state.

If it is determined in step Sa6601 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sa6601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6602, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa6602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sa6602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6603, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step Sa6603, if it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sa6603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6604, and the timing at which the fluctuating display of symbols in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b ends Determine whether or not. In step Sa6604, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (Sa6604: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa6604 that it is the timing at which the variable display has ended (Sa6604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6605, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game round that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 76: Sa6112), and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 81: Sa6631).

If it is determined in step Sa6605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sa6605: YES), the process advances to step Sa6606. On the other hand, in step Sa6605, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sa6605: NO), the game state transition process is ended.

In step Sa6606, it is determined whether the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON. In step Sa6606, if it is determined that the game result (winning lottery result) of the current game round is not a small win (Sa6606: NO), the process advances to step Sa6607.

In step Sa6607, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step Sa6606, since it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is not a small win, the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is a jackpot. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the support mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sa6607, the process advances to step Sa6608.

In step Sa6608, it is determined whether the type determination completion flag is ON. The type determination completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot type has been determined, and is turned ON when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process for determining the jackpot type (FIG. 82: Sa6709). It is turned off immediately before the opening/closing scenario setting process is executed (Sa6610). If it is determined in step Sa6608 that the type determination completion flag is not ON (Sa6608: NO), the process advances to step Sa6609.

In step Sa6609, type determination processing is executed. The type determination process will be described later.

In step Sa6608, if it is determined that the type determination completion flag is ON (Sa6608: YES), the process advances to step Sa6610 and the type determination completion flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sa6611.

Also, in step Sa6606, if it is determined that the game result (result of winning lottery) of the current game round is a small win (Sa6606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6611.

In step Sa6611, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. As described above, the opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which opening patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the round game are set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa6611, the process advances to step Sa6612.

In step Sa6612, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special gaming state. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa6612, the process advances to step Sa6613.

In step Sa6613, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of jackpot, and information on the jackpot or small win that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode. The information regarding the jackpot or small hit is whether the jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, or whether the small win was won, or whether the jackpot or small win resulted in the winning. Did you win a new jackpot when a game ball entered the V-winning slot 222 during the round game being played, or did you win a jackpot due to a winning lottery executed when a game ball entered the second starting slot 34? Information such as whether the player won a prize, a small win, or a new jackpot due to a game ball entering the V winning slot 222 during a round game executed due to the jackpot or small win. It is. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sa6613, the process advances to step Sa6614 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa6603 that the opening period flag is ON (Sa6603: YES), the process advances to step Sa6615.

In step Sa6615, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sa6615 that the opening period has ended (Sa6615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6616 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6617.

In step Sa6617, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, when the jackpot type is determined by the type determination process, the round display unit 39 displays a display indicating the number of round games set for the determined jackpot type, and the V winning hole 222 is displayed. When a jackpot is confirmed by the game ball entering the ball, a display indicating the number of executions of the round game set to the jackpot type determined by the confirmation of the jackpot is displayed on a round display section 39. After executing step Sa6617, the process advances to step Sa6618.

In step Sa6618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sa6602, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sa6602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6619, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sa6619, the process advances to step Sa6620.

In step Sa6620, it is determined whether the V winning jackpot flag is ON. The V winning jackpot flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the setting of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot due to the V winning is completed (FIG. 85: Sa6910) .

In step Sa6620, if it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa6620: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6621 and the V winning process is executed. The V winning process will be described later.

In step Sa6621, after executing the V winning process, the main game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6620 that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6620: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6622.

In step Sa6622, it is determined whether or not the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended (Sa6622: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6623. On the other hand, in step Sa6622, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sa6622: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sa6623, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sa6624.

In step Sa6624, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sa6624, the process advances to step Sa6625.

In step Sa6625, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sa6625, the process advances to step Sa6626.

In step Sa6626, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). The audio emission control device 90 starts a production corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sa6626, the process advances to step Sa6627.

In step Sa6627, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa6601 that the ending period flag is ON (Sa6601: YES), the process advances to step Sa6628.

In step Sa6628, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sa6625), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sa6628 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sa6628: YES), the process advances to step Sa6629.

In step Sa6629, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa6630, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sa6630, the process advances to step Sa6631 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa6628, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sa6628: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Type determination process>
Next, the type determination process will be explained. The type determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6609) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the type determination process. In step Sa6701, it is determined whether the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination process execution area 64i, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined.

In step Sa6701, if it is determined that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is not ON (Sa6701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6702.

In step Sa6702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determining process is executed in response to winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and in the ball entry process for the type determining gate (FIG. 72), After the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area, it is turned off (FIG. 72: Sa5705).

If it is determined in step Sa6702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa6702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6703, where the type determination permission flag is turned ON, and then the type determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa6702: YES), the type determination process is directly terminated.

In step Sa6701, if it is determined that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON (Sa6701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6704.

In step Sa6704, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON.

In step Sa6704, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa6704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6705, refers to the distribution table for the first starting opening, and sets the obtained jackpot type counter C2. Identify the jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6707.

In step Sa6704, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa6704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6706, refers to the distribution table for the second starting opening, and sets the obtained jackpot type counter C2. Identify the jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa6707.

In step Sa6707, the jackpot type specified in step Sa6705 or step Sa6706 is set as the jackpot type in the current jackpot. After executing step Sa6707, the process advances to step Sa6708.

In step Sa6708, the type determination completion flag is turned on, and the process then proceeds to step Sa6709. In step Sa6709, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the type determination process ends.

<Opening/closing scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be explained. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6611) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing opening/closing scenario setting processing. In step Sa6801, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. In step Sa6801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa6801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6802.

In step Sa6802, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step SSa6802 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa6802: NO), the process advances to step Sa6803.

In step Sa6803, a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario (when specific processing is not executed) is set according to the type of jackpot.

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening/closing scenario in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the opening/closing scenarios are broadly classified into three types.

The first one is a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 84(a). The opening/closing scenario of a normal jackpot is an opening/closing scenario in which opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode in which no specific processing is executed in the event of a jackpot are set. As shown in the figure, an opening/closing scenario is set for each round game execution number (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set as the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as the opening/closing scenario of the normal jackpot is set with an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes as a round game.

The second is a jackpot opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 84(b) when specific processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario of a jackpot when a specific process is executed is the opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 is set in the opening/closing execution mode in which a specific process is executed and a jackpot is achieved. This is a scenario. As shown in the figure, an opening/closing scenario is set for each round game execution number (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set as the jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as a jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed includes the second opening/closing door 213 opening/closing once in the first round (1Rth) as a round game. , In subsequent round games, an opening/closing pattern is set in which only the first opening/closing door 36b opens and closes. More specifically, in the first round, the operations of the second opening/closing door 213 and the storage valve 216 described with reference to FIG. 57 are performed.

The third scenario is a small winning opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 84(c). In this embodiment, the opening/closing scenario of a small hit is an opening/closing scenario in which opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a small winning are set. In this embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as an opening/closing scenario for a small win has an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door opens and closes only once in the first round (1Rth) as a round game. .

The explanation returns to FIG. 83. In step Sa6803, when a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 84(a)) according to the type of jackpot is set, the opening/closing scenario setting process is then terminated.

If it is determined in step Sa6802 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa6802: YES), the process advances to step Sa6804.

In step Sa6804, a jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 84(b)) is set when specific processing according to the type of jackpot is executed. Thereafter, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

In step Sa6801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6801: NO), the process advances to step Sa6805.

In step Sa6805, an opening/closing scenario (FIG. 84(c)) for a small win is set. Thereafter, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6612) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step Sa6901, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. In step Sa6901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa6901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6902.

In step Sa6902, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In step Sa6902, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa6902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6903.

In step Sa6903, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. In step Sa6903, if it is determined that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa6903: YES), the process advances to step Sa6904.

In step Sa6904, an opening time corresponding to the specific process is set. Specifically, a time corresponding to the opening period in the specific processing explained in FIG. 64 is set. During the opening period, as explained in FIG. 64, the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step Sa6904, the process advances to step Sa6905 and the specific processing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sa6903 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa6903: NO), the process advances to step Sa6906.

In step Sa6906, an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the first starting opening is set. During the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa6902, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa6902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6907.

In step Sa6907, the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the second starting opening is set. During the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa6901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6908.

In step Sa6908, it is determined whether the V winning jackpot flag is ON. In step Sa6908, if it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa6908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6909.

In step Sa6909, an opening time corresponding to the V winning jackpot is set. During the opening period, a performance suggesting that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 and becoming a jackpot (V winning notification performance) and a right-handed hitting performance are executed. Therefore, the time when the V winning notification performance and the right hit suggestion performance can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step Sa6909, the process proceeds to step Sa6910 and the V winning jackpot flag is turned off. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa6908, if it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6911.

In step Sa6911, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In step Sa6911, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa6911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6912.

In step Sa6912, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the first starting opening is set. When a small win is won in the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 as an opportunity, the process explained in FIG. 65 is executed. As shown in FIG. 65, in the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggestion presentation and a double chance suggestion presentation are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion performance and the double chance suggestion performance can be executed is set as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sa6911, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa6911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6913.

In step Sa6913, an opening time corresponding to a small hit for the second starting opening is set. During the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggestion performance and a performance urging the player to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 222 are performed. Therefore, the opening time is set as the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestion performance and the performance encouraging the player to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 222 can be performed. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6619) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. The main prize opening/closing process is mainly composed of three control processes. Specifically, steps Sa7001 to Sa7007 are opening/closing control processing for the first opening/closing door 36b, steps Sa7008 to Step Sa7014 are opening/closing control processing for the second opening/closing door 213, and steps Sa7015 to Sa7022 are opening/closing control processing for the storage valve 216. It is.

In step Sa7001, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step Sa7001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sa7001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7002.

In step Sa7002, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the first opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the first opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sa7002 that the condition for opening the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa7002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7003.

In step Sa7003, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7004.

In step Sa7004, a first opening/closing door opening command is set. The first opening/closing door opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The first opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal processing. After executing step Sa7004, the process advances to step Sa7008.

If it is determined in step Sa7002 that the condition for opening the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa7002: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7008.

If it is determined in step Sa7001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is open (Sa7001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7005.

In step Sa7005, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the first opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. The closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the first opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number of openings set in advance for the first big prize opening 36a has elapsed. This is established when it is detected that a game ball has entered the ball. If it is determined in step Sa7005 that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa7005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7006.

In step Sa7006, the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sa7007.

In step Sa7007, a first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. The first opening/closing door closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal processing. After executing step Sa7007, the process advances to step Sa7008.

If it is determined in step Sa7005 that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa7005: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7008.

In step Sa7008, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 213 is open. If it is determined in step Sa7008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is not open (Sa7008: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7009.

In step Sa7009, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the second opening/closing door 213 are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the second opening/closing door 213. If it is determined in step Sa7009 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa7009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7010.

In step Sa7010, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7011.

In step Sa7011, a second opening/closing door opening command is set. The second opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 has been opened. The second opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal processing. After executing step Sa7011, the process advances to step Sa7015.

If it is determined in step Sa7009 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa7009: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7015.

If it is determined in step Sa7008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is open (Sa7008: YES), the process advances to step Sa7012.

In step Sa7012, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the second opening/closing door 213 are satisfied. The closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the second opening/closing door 213 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number of openings set in advance for the second grand prize opening 212 has elapsed. This is established when it is detected that the game ball has entered the ball. In step Sa7012, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa7012: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7013.

In step Sa7013, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sa7014.

In step Sa7014, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa7014, the process advances to step Sa7015.

If it is determined in step Sa7012 that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa7012: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7015.

In step Sa7015, it is determined whether the storage valve 216 is open. If it is determined in step Sa7015 that the storage valve 216 is not open (Sa7015: NO), the process advances to step Sa7016.

In step Sa7016, it is determined whether a condition for opening the storage valve 216 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the storage valve 216. If it is determined in step Sa7016 that the condition for opening the storage valve 216 is satisfied (Sa7016: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7017.

In step Sa7017, the storage valve 216 is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7018.

In step Sa7018, the Kroon ball entry permission flag is turned ON. The Kroon ball entry permission flag is activated when a defect or abnormality occurs in the structure of the storage valve 216, and a game ball unintentionally flows from the storage section 218 to the Kroon 220 via the channel 211 and enters the V winning hole 222. Even if there is, this flag is set to prevent the V winning from becoming a jackpot. The Cloon ball entry permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened in the big winning opening/closing process, and is turned OFF when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the Cloun 220. be done. After executing step Sa7018, the process advances to step Sa7019.

In step Sa7019, a storage valve opening command is set. The storage valve open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the storage valve 216 has been opened. The storage valve open command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa7019, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sa7016, if it is determined that the opening condition for the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa7016: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step Sa7015 that the storage valve 216 is open (Sa7015: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7020.

In step Sa7020, it is determined whether a closing condition for the storage valve 216 is satisfied. The condition for closing the storage valve 216 is satisfied when it is detected that the continuous open time (for example, 2 seconds) of the storage valve 216 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed. In step Sa7020, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa7020: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7021.

In step Sa7021, the storage valve 216 is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sa7022.

In step Sa7022, a storage valve closing command is set. The storage valve close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the storage valve 216 has been closed. The storage valve closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa7022, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sa7020, if it is determined that the closing condition of the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa7020: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

<V winning process>
Next, the V winning process will be explained. The V winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6621) of the gaming state transition process. As shown in FIG. 81, the V winning process is performed when it is detected that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 and the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON in the ball entering process for Cloon (FIG. 74). (FIG. 74: Sa5904), it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 81: Sa6620: YES), and the process is executed.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the V winning process. In step Sa7101, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag is ON. In step Sa7101, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sa7101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7102.

In step Sa7102, the jackpot type counter stored in the ball entry process for croon (FIG. 74) is referred to in the distribution table (FIG. 62(b)) for V winnings triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting slot. Based on the value of C2, the jackpot type in the V winning jackpot is specified. After executing step Sa7102, the process advances to step Sa7104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7101 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sa7101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7103.

In step Sa7103, the allocation table for the second starting opening (FIG. 62(c)) is referred to, and based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for croon (FIG. 74), the V winning jackpot is determined. Identify the jackpot type. After executing step Sa7103, the process advances to step Sa7104.

As can be seen from Step Sa7102 and Step Sa7103, even if the game ball enters the same V winning hole 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot, the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 results in a small win. As a result, when the second opening/closing door 213 opens and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, resulting in a V winning jackpot, and when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34, a small winning occurs, As a result, the sorting table to be referred to is different from the case where the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, resulting in a V winning jackpot.

In step Sa7104, the jackpot type specified in step Sa7102 or step Sa7103 is set as the jackpot type in the V winning jackpot. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7105.

In step Sa7105, the type determination completion flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sa7106, and the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF. As can be seen from step Sa6602 in FIG. 81, by turning off the opening/closing processing period flag, it is possible to end the opening/closing execution mode in progress and start a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by the V winning jackpot. can. After executing step Sa7106, the V winning process ends.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6630) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sa7201, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot with a high-frequency support mode. In step Sa7201, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a jackpot with high-frequency support mode (Sa7201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7202.

In step Sa7202, the value of the game number counter PNC corresponding to the jackpot type is set. That is, the number of games that can be played in high-frequency support is set in the number of games counter PNC. The number of games that can be played in high-frequency support is set for each jackpot type. The number of games that can be played in the high frequency support set for each jackpot type has been explained in FIG. 62, so the explanation will be omitted here.

After executing step Sa7202, the process advances to step Sa7203 and the PNC count flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7204.

In step Sa7204, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize information regarding the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support. The high-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa7204, the process advances to step Sa7205.

In step Sa7205, flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, the V winning jackpot flag, and the second symbol display section flag are turned OFF. After executing step Sa7205, the process advances to step Sa7206.

In step Sa7206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7201 that the current jackpot is not a jackpot with a high-frequency support mode (Sa7201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7207.

In step Sa7207, flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, the V winning jackpot flag, and the second symbol display section flag are turned OFF. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 75: Sa6008) of the normal process.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sa7301, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sa7301 that the supported flag is not ON (Sa7301: NO), the process advances to step Sa7302.

In step Sa7302, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Sa7302 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sa7302: NO), the process advances to step Sa7303.

In step Sa7303, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sa7303, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa7303: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa7303: YES), the process advances to step Sa7304.

In step Sa7304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sa7304, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sa7304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7305, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sa7304: NO), the process advances to step Sa7306.

In step Sa7306, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sa7306, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sa7306: NO), the electronic accessory support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7306 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sa7306: YES), the process advances to step Sa7307.

In step Sa7307, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step Sa7307 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sa7307: YES), the process advances to step Sa7308.

In step Sa7308, an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. The winner is the winner (see FIG. 63(b)). Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7309.

In step Sa7309, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sa7308 is a support win. In step Sa7309, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sa7309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7310, where the support win flag is turned ON and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7311.

On the other hand, in step Sa7309, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sa7309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7311 without executing the process of step Sa7310.

In step Sa7311, it is determined whether the number of games counter area is "0". The number of games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the high frequency support mode. In step Sa7311, if it is determined that the number of games counter area is not "0" (Sa7311: NO), the main power support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7311 that the number of games counter area is "0", the process advances to step Sa7312 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sa7312, the process advances to step Sa7313.

In step Sa7313, the PNC count flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7314.

In step Sa7314, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. After that, the electric support support process ends.

The low frequency support mode command set in step Sa7314 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process. The audio emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, and executes processing corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step Sa7307 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (Sa7307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7315, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7316.

In step Sa7316, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sa7315 is a support win. In step Sa7316, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sa7316: NO), the present electronic role support processing is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7316 that support has been won (Sa7316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7317, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sa7302, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sa7302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7318, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sa7318, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa7318: NO), since the symbols in the general figure unit 38 are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa7318: YES), the process advances to step Sa7319.

In step Sa7319, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of symbols in the common pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sa7320, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sa7301, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sa7301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7321, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. The electric switch opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing step Sa7321, this electronic role support process ends.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The electric utility opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 89: Sa7321) of the electric utility support process.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sa7401, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sa7401: YES), the process advances to step Sa7402.

In step Sa7402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sa7402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa7402: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sa7402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa7402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7403, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sa7403, the process advances to step Sa7404.

In step Sa7404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sa7405, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sa7405, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sa7405: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sa7405: YES), the process advances to step Sa7406 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sa7401, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sa7401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7407, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sa7407, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa7407: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7407 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa7407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7408, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa7409.

In step Sa7409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sa7409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7410, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sa7410 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sa7410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7411, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7409 that the opening/closing execution mode is selected (Sa7409: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not selected in step Sa7410 (Sa7410: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7412, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<B6>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 91 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the production operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47, as well as the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<B7>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa8101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sa8101, the process advances to step Sa8102.

In step Sa8102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, it is determined whether a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a pending command has been received, processing corresponding to the pending command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sa8102, the process advances to step Sa8103.

In step Sa8103, a game run performance setting process is executed. In the game run production setting process, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a variation type command have been received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that these commands have been received, the production settings to be executed in the game cycle are determined. The content (type) is determined, and the determined performance is set to be executed in the relevant game round. Details of the game performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8103, the process advances to step Sa8104.

In step Sa8104, a waiting period effect setting process is executed. In the standby period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be performed during the above-described standby period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during the standby period. Details of the standby period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8104, the process advances to step Sa8105.

In step Sa8105, opening period effect setting processing is executed. In the opening period production setting process, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an opening command has been received, the content (type) of the production to be executed during the opening period is determined. , the determined performance is set to be executed during the opening period. Details of the opening period performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8105, the process advances to step Sa8106.

In step Sa8106, opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing processing period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be performed during the opening/closing processing period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during the opening/closing processing period. Details of the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be described later. After executing step Sa8106, the process advances to step Sa8107.

In step Sa8107, ending period effect setting processing is executed. In the ending period effect setting process, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an ending command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the ending period is determined. , the determined performance is set to be executed during the ending period. Details of the ending period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8107, the process advances to step Sa8108.

In step Sa8108, command transmission processing is executed. In the command transmission process, various production commands for displaying a moving image corresponding to the production set in the various production setting processes described above are transmitted to the display control device 100. After executing step Sa8108, the process advances to step Sa8109.

In step Sa8109, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes from step Sa8102 to step Sa8107. That is, the various lamps 47 are controlled to emit light so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effects set in steps Sa8102 to Sa8107. After executing step Sa8109, the process advances to step Sa8110.

In step Sa8110, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the processes from step Sa8102 to step Sa8107. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps Sa8102 to Sa8107 is outputted. After executing step Sa8110, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8102) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sa8201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa8201 that a pending command has been received (Sa8201: YES), the process advances to step Sa8202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8201 that no pending command has been received (Sa8201: NO), this pending command handling process is ended.

In step Sa8202, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. Processing is executed to enable the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of pieces of hold information and the total number of pieces of hold information. Details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sa8202 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as the "first reservation number", and the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first reservation number". The number of pieces of acquired reservation information is also referred to as the "second number of reservations", and the total number of the first number of reservations and the second number of reservations is also called the "total number of reservations". After executing step Sa8202, the process advances to step Sa8203.

In step Sa8203, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, based on the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 specified in step Sa8202 and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, The display mode of the first reservation display area Ds1 and the second reservation display area Ds2 is controlled based on the acquired number of reservation information. After executing step Sa8203, this pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: Sa8202) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing update processing when a ball enters the ball. In step Sa8301, it is determined whether or not the pending command to be read in the current timer interrupt process is one that was transmitted based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. In step Sa8301, if it is determined that the pending command to be read in the current timer interrupt processing is transmitted based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (Sa8301: YES) , the process proceeds to step Sa8302, and updates processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that was read in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa8302, the process advances to step Sa8304, which will be described later.

In step Sa8301, if it is determined that the pending command to be read in the current timer interrupt processing is not transmitted based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (Sa8301: NO), that is, If it is determined that the hold command has been transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the process proceeds to step Sa8303, and the command is sent to the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Execute update processing of the second pending quantity counter area. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information of the pending number included in the command read out in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa8303, the process advances to step Sa8304.

The reason why the processing in steps Sa8302 and Sa8303 is performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 In contrast to the case where the hold information is stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step Sa8304, a process for updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area contains the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the pending information obtained based on the entering of gaming balls into the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying the sum with the number of objects in the sound-light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sa8304, the update processing at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 92: Sa8103).

FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating the game rendition setting process. In step Sa8401, it is determined whether a variation command and a variation type command have been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sa8401, if it is determined that the variation command and the variation type command have not been received (Sa8401: NO), the present game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8401 that a variation command and a variation type command have been received (Sa8401: YES), the process advances to step Sa8402.

In step Sa8402, the information contained in the received variation command and variation type command is read and stored. Specifically, whether the game round to be started is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the relevant game The results of the winning lottery in the game round, such as the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of a small win, the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time in the game round are read out and stored. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa8403.

In step Sa8403, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. As described above, the specific processing command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a jackpot and it is determined that the specific processing shown in Case 1 described above is to be executed. . If it is determined in step Sa8403 that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8404, and corresponds to the game round in which the specific processing (processing shown in case 1) is to be executed. The performance pattern set is set to be executed in the relevant game round. After that, the main game performance setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa8403, if it is determined that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8405, and the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is displayed at the first starting port 33. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit based on the ball entering the game ball. In this embodiment, a small win won based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is also called a "special 1 small win", and a winning based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. This small win is also called a "special 2 small win."

In step Sa8405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a special 1-small win (Sa8405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8406, and the effect pattern corresponding to the special 1-small win is set for the game round. Set it to run in . Note that the performance pattern corresponding to the special 1 small win is a performance pattern including the performance executed in the game round shown in Case 2 described above. After that, the main game performance setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa8405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a special 1 small win (Sa8405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8407, and other results of the winning lottery (specific processing is executed A performance pattern corresponding to a big hit that does not occur, a small win that is not a special 1-small win, a loss, etc.) is set to be executed in the game round. After that, the main game performance setting process is ended.

<Waiting period effect setting process>
Next, the waiting period effect setting process will be explained. The standby period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the waiting period effect setting process. In step Sa8501, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa8501 that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8502, and the sound and light specific processing flag is turned ON. The sound and light specific processing flag is a flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94, and is used by the sound and light emission control device 90 to determine whether or not to execute the production in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1). This is a flag for determination. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is started with the sound/light specific processing flag ON, the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific processing (case 1) is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sa8502, the process advances to step Sa8503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8501 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8503 without executing step Sa8502.

In step Sa8503, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sa8503, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa8503: NO), the main standby period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa8503, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8503: YES), the process advances to step Sa8504 and checks whether the above-mentioned sound and light specific processing flag is ON. Determine whether or not.

In step Sa8504, if it is determined that the sound and light specific processing flag is ON, that is, if it corresponds to the above-mentioned case 1 (Sa8504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8505, and the right-handed hitting suggestion effect and the Set to execute the double chance suggestion effect. Thereafter, the main standby period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8504 that the sound and light specific processing flag is not ON (Sa8504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8506, and a setting is made to execute a right-handed hitting suggestion effect during the standby period. Thereafter, the main standby period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening period production setting process>
Next, the opening period effect setting process will be explained. The opening period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 92: Sa8105).

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing opening period effect setting processing. In step Sa8601, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). ing. Therefore, based on the information included in the received opening command, the audio emission control device 90 determines the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). ) can be grasped. In step Sa8601, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8601: NO), this opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8601 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8601: YES), the process advances to step Sa8602.

In step Sa8602, based on the information included in the received opening command, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot. In step Sa8602, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (Sa8602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8603, and an opening performance corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined. is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Thereafter, the main opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa8602, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot (Sa8602: NO), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode If the winning lottery result is a small win, the process advances to step Sa8604.

In step Sa8604, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a special 1 small win. In step Sa8604, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a special 1 small win (Sa8604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8605, and the result is a special 1 small win. A corresponding opening performance is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in case 1 described above, the right-handed hit suggestion performance and double chance suggestion performance are set to be executed during the opening period. Thereafter, the main opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa8604, if it is determined that the winning lottery result that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is not a special 1 small win (Sa8604: NO), that is, the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode If the result of the winning lottery that triggered the above is a special 2-small win, the process proceeds to step Sa8606, and an opening performance corresponding to the special 2-small win is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Thereafter, the main opening period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening/closing processing period effect setting processing>
Next, the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be explained. The opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 92: Sa8106).

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing period effect setting process. In step Sa8701, first chance performance setting processing is executed. In the first chance performance setting process, processing related to the setting of the first chance performance in case 1 and case 2 described above is executed. Details of the first chance performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8701, the process advances to step Sa8702.

In step Sa8702, a second chance effect setting process is executed when no storage is performed. In the non-storage second chance performance setting process, it is determined whether or not game balls are stored in the storage section 218 in the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2, and when the game balls are not stored in the storage section 218, 2. Set to execute the second chance performance. The details of the second chance effect setting process when the money is not stored will be described later. After executing step Sa8702, the process advances to step Sa8703.

In step Sa8703, V winning effect setting processing is executed. In the V winning effect setting process, it is determined whether or not game balls are stored in the V winning hole 222, and when the game balls enter the V winning hole 222, settings are made to execute the V winning effect. Details of the V winning effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8703, the process advances to step Sa8704.

In step Sa8704, a second chance production setting process is executed when V does not win. In the V non-winning second chance performance setting process, in Case 1 and Case 2 described above, game balls were stored in the storage section 218, but the game balls did not enter the V winning opening 222, and the non-V winning opening 224 A second chance performance is set to be executed when a game ball enters the ball. The details of the second chance performance setting process when V does not win will be described later. After executing step Sa8704, the process advances to step Sa8705.

In step Sa8705, settings are made to execute effects for opening/closing processing periods corresponding to other jackpot types. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot type in which an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 does not open is selected, the opening/closing of the opening/closing execution mode is Set the effects to be executed during the processing period. After executing step Sa8705, the main opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is ended.

<First chance production setting process>
Next, the first chance effect setting process will be explained. The first chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8701) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the first chance performance setting process. In step Sa8801, it is determined whether a second opening/closing door opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened in the winning lottery when a jackpot for executing specific processing is won and when a small jackpot is won. Further, the second opening/closing door opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small winning, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231. Therefore, the audio emission control device 90 grasps the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second door 231, based on the information included in the received second door opening command. can do. In step Sa8801, if it is determined that the second opening/closing door opening command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa8801: NO), this first chance performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8801 that the second opening/closing door opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8801: YES), the process advances to step Sa8802.

In step Sa8802, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot. In step Sa8802, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot (Sa8802: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a jackpot for which specific processing is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8803, and settings are made to execute the first chance effect in case 1 described above. After executing step Sa8803, the first chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a jackpot (Sa8802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8804.

In step Sa8804, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1-small win. In step Sa8804, if it is determined that the winning lottery result that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win (Sa8804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8805. Set to execute the second chance performance. After executing step Sa8805, this first chance performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa8804, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a special 1 small win (Sa8804: NO), the main first chance effect setting process is continued. finish.

<Second chance performance setting process when not stored>
Next, the second chance performance setting process when the game is not stored will be explained. The non-storage second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8702) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the second chance performance setting process when no storage is performed. In step Sa8901, it is determined whether or not the second big winning hole entry command has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step Sa8901, if it is determined that the second big winning hole entry command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa8901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8904, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step Sa8901, if it is determined that the second grand prize opening ball entry command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa8901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8902, and the second grand prize opening ball entry command for sound and light is received. Determine whether the flag is ON. The sound-light second grand winning opening ball entry flag is a flag stored in the sound-light RAM 94, and indicates whether or not a game ball has entered the second big winning opening 212, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the storage section. This is a flag used by the audio emission control device 90 to determine whether or not the information has been stored in the audio emission control device 218.

In step Sa8902, if it is determined that the sound and light second grand winning opening ball entry flag is not ON (Sa8902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8903, and the sound and light second grand winning opening ball entry flag is turned ON. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa8904. On the other hand, in step Sa8902, if it is determined that the sound and light second large winning hole entry flag is ON (Sa8902: YES), the process directly proceeds to step Sa8904. In other words, only when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 212 and the sound-light second grand prize-winning hole entry flag is not ON, the corresponding sound-light second grand prize-winning hole is opened. Turn on the incoming ball flag.

In step Sa8904, it is determined whether a second opening/closing door closing command has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step Sa8904, if it is determined that the second opening/closing door closing command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sa8904: NO), the second chance performance setting process for non-storage is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8904 that the second opening/closing door closing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8904: YES), the process advances to step Sa8905.

In step Sa8905, it is determined whether or not the sound-light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is ON, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 212 and is stored in the storage section 218. do. In step Sa8905, if it is determined that the sound and light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is ON (Sa8905: YES), the second chance production setting process for non-storage is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa8905, if it is determined that the sound and light second big winning hole entry flag is not ON (Sa8905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8906.

In step Sa8906, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot. In step Sa8906, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot (Sa8906: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a jackpot for which specific processing is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8907, and the second chance effect and jackpot announcement effect in the above-mentioned case 1 are set to be executed before the start of the 2Rth opening/closing process period. do. After that, the process advances to step Sa8908, and the effect to be executed in the opening/closing processing period from the 2nd R onwards is set. Thereafter, the main non-storage second chance effect setting process is ended.

In step Sa8906, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a jackpot (Sa8906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8909, and the trigger for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is determined to be not a jackpot. It is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a special 1-small win. In step Sa8909, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win (Sa8909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8910, and the process proceeds to step Sa8910. Settings are made to execute a second chance performance and a missed notification performance. Thereafter, the second chance effect setting process for non-storage is completed.

<V winning performance setting process>
Next, the V winning effect setting process will be explained. The V winning effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8703) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process. In step Sa9001, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The V winning command is a command sent from the main side MPU 62 when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222. In step Sa9001, if it is determined that the V winning effect command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9001: NO), the main V winning effect setting process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in step Sa9001, if it is determined that the V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9002, and an effect indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 is displayed. It is set to execute the V winning effect. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa9003, and the above-mentioned sound and light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main V winning performance setting process is ended.

<Second chance performance setting process when V does not win>
Next, the second chance performance setting process when V does not win will be explained. The V non-winning second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8704) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the second chance production setting process when V does not win. In step Sa9101, it is determined whether a non-V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62. The non-V winning command is a command sent from the main side MPU 62 when a game ball enters the non-V winning hole 224. In step Sa9101, if it is determined that the non-V winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9101: NO), the main V non-winning second chance performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa9101 that a non-V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9102.

In step Sa9102, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot. In step Sa9102, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a jackpot (Sa9102: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a jackpot for which specific processing is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa9103, and settings are made to execute the second chance effect and jackpot announcement effect in case 1 described above. After executing step Sa9103, the process proceeds to step Sa9104, and the above-mentioned sound and light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process for setting the second chance performance when the main V does not win a prize is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa9102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a jackpot (Sa9102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa9105.

In step Sa9105, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1-small win. In step Sa9105, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win (Sa9105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9106, and the process proceeds to step Sa9106. Settings are made to execute a second chance performance and a missed notification performance. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa8804 described above, and the sound and light second grand prize opening ball entry flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process for setting the second chance performance when the main V does not win a prize is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa9105, if it is determined that the winning lottery result that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a special 1 small win (Sa9105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8804 described above, and the sound and light Turn off the second big prize opening ball entry flag. Thereafter, the process for setting the second chance performance when the main V does not win a prize is ended.

<Ending period production setting process>
Next, the ending period effect setting process will be explained. The ending period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 92: Sa8107).

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the ending period effect setting process. In step Sa9201, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. In this embodiment, the ending command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period). Therefore, based on the information included in the received ending command, the audio emission control device 90 determines the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period). ) can be understood. In step Sa9201, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9201: NO), this ending period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa9201 that an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9201: YES), the process advances to step Sa9202.

In step Sa9202, based on the information included in the received ending command, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot. In step Sa9202, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (Sa9202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9203, and an ending production corresponding to the type of jackpot is performed. Set to be executed during the ending period. After that, the main ending period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa9202, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot (Sa9202: NO), that is, if the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the current opening/closing execution mode If the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the main ending period effect setting process is immediately terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sa9301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa9302.

In step Sa9302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sa9401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa9501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the content of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 105) is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence processing (Sa9501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at the same time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of presentation such as a preview effect or a pattern for LCD set by the sound emission control device 90, and to design a presentation image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sa9502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is set by the command corresponding process (Sa9501) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa9503.

In step Sa9503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sa9502), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step Sa9504.

In step Sa9504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sa9503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sa9505, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, both in the case where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (Case 1), and in the case where a small win is won (Case 2). ), the first symbol display section 37a displays a symbol pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery, but the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. The performance will not be executed. Therefore, a player who recognizes the lottery result of a winning lottery by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound cannot recognize the lottery result in the game round at the time when the game round ends. As a result, even if the player has won a small win, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as if he or she has won a jackpot.

Furthermore, after the game round ends, in both case 1 and case 2, the right hit suggestion performance and the double chance suggestion performance are executed, so during the period when the performance is executed after the game round ends. It is also possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win in the winning lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined at the time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, it is determined by the game ball entering the type determining gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. When the type of jackpot is determined, the round lamp of the round display section 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of times the round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. On the other hand, if you have won a small prize, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, even if you win a jackpot or a small win, the round lamp will not light up immediately after the end of the game, so the round lamp will not turn on after the game ends. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from identifying whether he or she has won a jackpot or a small win in the relevant game round.

As a result, the player is not made aware of the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player hits the right ball and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the game round ends. On the other hand, for a relatively long period of time, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot rather than a small win. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small win starts, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and to increase the feeling of anticipation for the game. It can draw attention. In addition, when determining the jackpot type, the player is asked to hit the ball right-handed and the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, so the player is actively involved in determining the jackpot type, and the player Therefore, it is possible to draw more attention to the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a jackpot is determined when a game ball enters the V-winning hole 222, the game ball enters the V-winning hole 222 as a trigger. , determines the type of jackpot triggered by the ball entering the V winning hole 222. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the type of jackpot is determined by entering the game ball into the type determination gate 202. , there is relatively no sense of speed in the progress of the game until the round game starts. As a result, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting slot 33, and when the game ball enters the V winning slot 222, the jackpot is confirmed. In this case, the progress of the game can be slowed down, the player's expectations for the game can be modulated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to play a round game that is triggered by winning a jackpot in a winning lottery that is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 and a new jackpot is confirmed, the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed as a trigger. Although the round game that is being executed is stopped, a new round game is started triggered by a jackpot when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222, so that the player feels a sense of anticipation for the new round game. can be granted to

In addition, in this case, the game ball is placed in the V winning hole 222 more than the jackpot type that would have been distributed if the jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball entered the first starting hole 33. It is assumed that the player may be concerned that if a new jackpot is determined by entering a ball, the jackpot type to which the player will be assigned will be at a disadvantage.

However, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Distribution (Fig. 62(a)) and distribution of the jackpot type when a jackpot is confirmed by the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (Fig. 62(a)) 62: When comparing (b)), the probability of being distributed to the 5R type 1 jackpot, which is the distribution result that gives the most advantageous benefit to the player, is the probability that the game ball enters the first starting hole 33. It is higher when the jackpot is confirmed by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 triggered by the above. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety as described above, and it is also possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the V winning hole 222 is arranged downstream of the type determining gate 202 with respect to the direction in which game balls on the game board 30 flow. Further, a V winning hole 222 is arranged downstream of the second big winning hole 212. Therefore, in case 1 above, when the player fires a game ball toward the type determination gate 202, the jackpot type is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, and the opening/closing processing period begins. When the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, the game ball that has been launched toward the type determination gate 202 is likely to enter the V winning hole 222. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after the ball enters the first starting hole 33, after the round game starts, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 212 in a natural flow. After that, the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and the game can be shifted to a round game triggered by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222. Therefore, the game can proceed smoothly. As a result, the game ball enters the V winning slot 222 and the new jackpot type is different from the jackpot type that would have been assigned if the jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed when the ball entered the first starting slot 33. This eliminates the need for players to worry that the type of jackpot that will be distributed in the event of a confirmed jackpot will be more disadvantageous, or can reduce such players' worries. . Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery executed after a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the execution of the specific process is determined by the specific process execution determination process. The presence or absence of the game is determined, and then the number of executions of the round game corresponding to the jackpot is determined. In other words, whether or not to open/close the second opening/closing door 213 as a round game and the number of times the round game is executed are determined separately, so whether or not the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed and the number of times the round game is executed are determined depending on the combination. It becomes possible to realize various operation modes of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in a game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<B8>> Modification of the first embodiment β:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<B8-1>> Modification example 1:
In the first embodiment β, in the performance executed in the game round executed in case 1, that is, in the winning lottery in the game round executed with the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 as a trigger. The effect to be executed in the game round when you win a jackpot and it is decided to execute the specific process in the specific process execution determination process, and the effect to be executed in the game cycle to be executed in case 2 above, In other words, the same performance pattern is set as the performance to be performed in the game round when a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. It may also be a configuration. By setting the same performance pattern for Case 1 and Case 2, it becomes more difficult for players to judge whether Case 1 or Case 2 is the case, and the game round in question is a winning lottery. It is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation that he or she may have won the prize.

In addition, a performance pattern table is provided in which a plurality of special performance patterns used in case 1 and case 2 are set corresponding to the varying time of the game time, and from the performance pattern table, the performance pattern is set according to the fluctuating time of the game time. It may also be configured to select a performance pattern. By selecting performance patterns from the same performance pattern table for case 1 and case 2, it becomes difficult for the player to judge whether case 1 or case 2 is the case, and It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she has won the lottery.

《B8-2》Variation 2:
In the first embodiment β, when a jackpot is confirmed when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222, a jackpot is determined when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222. Although a configuration is adopted in which the type is determined, the game ball enters the V winning slot in the same way as when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run triggered by the game ball entering the first starting slot 33. A configuration may be adopted in which the type of jackpot is determined by entering the game ball into the type determining gate 202 after the jackpot is determined by entering the ball into the type determining gate 222. By doing this, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 and a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round that is executed as a trigger, the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The type of jackpot is determined in three cases: a case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game run that is triggered by The processes to be performed can be unified and the processes can be simplified.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated ball entry section (V winning jackpot type determination gate) is provided for determining the type of jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the V winning jackpot 222. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning jackpot type determining gate is arranged downstream from the V winning opening 222 with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls. In this case, the jackpot type to be executed when the game ball enters the V-winning jackpot type determination gate is determined using the same process as the type determination process in the first embodiment β. can be simplified.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning jackpot type determination gate is arranged at a position that is not downstream from the V winning opening 222 with respect to the distribution direction of game balls. For example, when a jackpot is confirmed when a game ball enters a V-winning hole 222, a type determination gate for a V-winning jackpot is arranged at a position where the ball will not enter unless the manner in which the game ball is launched is changed. By doing so, the player can play the game by changing the operation mode of the operation handle 25 in various ways, and the flow of the game can be changed frequently, and the player's active participation in the game can be increased. It is possible to promote involvement and give tone to the expectations of the players.

《B8-3》Variation 3:
In the first embodiment β, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed after a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the game ball Although a configuration has been adopted in which the type determination process is executed and the jackpot type is determined when a ball enters the type determination gate 202, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the jackpot type is determined in the fluctuation start process in the game round. That is, the jackpot type is determined before the game round ends. If the game round is a jackpot, when the game round ends, the round lamp is lit in a display mode corresponding to the determined jackpot type, but the timing of the lighting is set during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. Set the end point (immediately before the start of the opening/closing processing period) and set the opening period to be longer than usual. By doing this, the lottery result of the winning lottery is not recognized until the round lamp lights up, giving the player a sense of expectation that they have won the jackpot for a relatively long period of time. can be granted. In other words, even after the game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or small win starts, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time, and to keep the player interested in the game. It can draw attention. In the first embodiment β, the round lamp is turned on at the end of the opening period, but a configuration may be adopted in which the round lamp is turned on at the beginning of the opening period.

《B8-4》Variation 4:
In the first embodiment β, in the opening/closing process executed in case 1 and case 2, an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens and closes only once is set; An opening/closing scenario in which 213 opens and closes multiple times may be adopted. By doing this, the probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 is improved, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

《B8-5》Variation 5:
In the first embodiment β, the specific process execution determination process is executed at the start of the variation of the game round executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, more specifically, the specific process execution determination process ( Although it is executed in FIG. 78), it may be executed at other timings as long as it is until the end of the game round and the start of the standby period. For example, it may be executed in the gaming state transition process. By doing so, for example, during a game round that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, a performance is executed in which the player operates the performance operation button 24, and the performance is executed. Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific process execution determination process is performed in which it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process based on whether or not the player has operated the performance operation button 24. Also, for example, whether or not to execute a specific process based on whether or not a game ball enters a specific ball entry port during a game round that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33. A configuration may be adopted in which specific processing execution determination processing is performed to determine. That is, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round that is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port 33, depending on the state of the game progress during the game round, A configuration may be adopted in which the mode of processing in the opening/closing execution mode to be executed after the end of the game round is determined. By adopting such a configuration, when a jackpot is won, the player can concentrate on the game even in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round.

《B8-6》Variation 6:
In the first embodiment β, the lottery result of the winning lottery in the suspended game round is determined by the earlier determination process, and as a result of the earlier determination process, if the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the suspended game round, , executes a specific process execution determination process as a process in the destination determination process, and determines whether or not to execute the specific process as shown in case 1 before the pending gaming session is executed as a gaming session. It's okay. Then, in a game round that is executed before the suspended game round is executed as a game round, a performance that suggests that a specific process will be executed later (specific process execution suggestion performance) may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the pending game session to be executed later. Furthermore, it is possible to determine whether Case 2 is applicable in the suspended game round by a preliminary determination process, and similarly execute a specific process execution suggestion effect. By doing so, the player can have a wider range of speculation about the outcome when the reserved game round is executed as a game round, and can improve the interest of the game.

《B8-7》Variation 7:
In the first embodiment β, the execution is performed during the waiting period (see FIG. 64), which is the period from the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning drawing and the opening period starts, when the jackpot is won in the winning drawing. A configuration may be adopted in which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is changed in stages as the waiting period elapses. The waiting period starts from the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery and continues until the game ball enters the type determining gate 202. In other words, the opening period does not start unless a game ball enters the type determining gate 202. If the player does not realize that he must play right-handed and plays left-handed, the game will not proceed as intended and the player's expectations will be lowered.

Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the suggestion to play right-handed to the player is gradually strengthened as the waiting period elapses from the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery. For example, compared to a right-handed hitting suggestion performance executed when the waiting period elapses from 0 seconds to 5 seconds, a right-handed hitting suggestion performance executed when the waiting period elapses from 5 seconds to 10 seconds attracts more players. This is a content that strongly encourages right-handed hitting, and in addition, compared to the right-handed hitting suggestion effect that is performed when the waiting period elapses between 5 and 10 seconds, the waiting period elapsed time is between 10 and 15 seconds. A configuration may also be adopted in which the right-handed hitting suggestion performance that is executed when the player is encouraged to play right-handed hitting more strongly.

As a performance that suggests hitting right during the waiting period, for example, as the waiting period elapses, the sound suggesting hitting right is gradually increased (or decreased) to encourage the player to hit right. The mode may be strengthened step by step, or the size of an image indicating right-handed hitting (for example, an image of an arrow pointing to the right) may be increased stepwise as the waiting period elapses, so that players can The way to encourage right-handed hitting may be gradually strengthened, or the brightness, brightness, color, etc. of the image indicating right-handed hitting may be gradually changed as the waiting period elapses (for example, by increasing or decreasing the intensity of the image). ), a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of urging the player to play right-handed is gradually strengthened, or the tone of the voice guidance guiding players to play right-handed may be gradually increased as the waiting period elapses. A configuration may be adopted in which the manner in which the player is encouraged to play right-handed is gradually strengthened by increasing the strength.

By employing such a configuration, during the waiting period, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that he or she will play right-handed, and it is possible to promote smooth progress in the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《B8-8》Variation 8:
In the first embodiment β, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration including one type determining gate, but may adopt a configuration including a plurality of type determining gates. For example, one type determination gate (hereinafter also referred to as the left type determination gate) is provided in a position where the game ball is likely to enter when hitting the ball left-handed (for example, on the left side of the game board 30), and when hitting the ball right-handed. A configuration may be adopted in which one type determination gate (hereinafter referred to as right side type determination gate) is provided at a position (for example, the right side of the game board 30) where the game ball can easily enter when the game ball is in the game board. Then, after winning the jackpot, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 that is set to win the jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 60), the left type determination gate or the right type The jackpot type is determined in advance by which type determining gate of the determining gates the game ball enters. Then, after the game round in which the jackpot was won, a performance that suggests hitting to the left (left-handed hitting suggestion performance) is executed depending on the value of the winning random number counter C1 that resulted in the jackpot, or a performance suggesting hitting to the right is executed. It determines whether to execute it and executes a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination. By doing this, the player needs to judge how to operate the operating handle 25 after the game round in which he or she wins a jackpot, and the player can be actively involved in the game, and as a result , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game.

In addition, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 that is set to win a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting gate (see Figure 60), a jackpot is achieved by entering the game ball into the left type determination gate. A value that determines the type, a value that determines the jackpot type by the entry of the game ball into the right type determination gate, a value that determines the jackpot type by the entry of the game ball into either the left type determination gate or the right type determination gate. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a value is set.

《B8-9》Variation 9:
In the first embodiment β, in the waiting period in case 1 and the opening period in case 2, there is an effect (W chance) that suggests that there are two chances to win the jackpot, respectively. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a performance (single chance performance) suggesting that one opportunity to win the jackpot is prepared (single chance performance) is performed. In this case, in each case, the second chance effect can be omitted, so the process necessary to execute the second chance effect can be omitted, and the process can be simplified.

Further, in Case 1 and Case 2, a configuration may be adopted in which a case where a double chance performance is executed and a case where a single chance performance is executed are combined. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even more in the period after the game round ends.

《B8-10》Modification 10:
In the first embodiment β, if a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 during a round game that is being executed after winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, the round game is interrupted. , a configuration is adopted in which a round game is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 222, but other configurations may be adopted.

For example, if a game ball enters the V-winning slot 222 during a round game that is being executed after winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, the game ball enters the V-winning slot 222. A configuration may be adopted in which the progress state of the game does not change, and a round game that is being executed after winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is executed to the end. In this case, the round game triggered by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is not executed. In other words, entering the ball into the V winning slot 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, is essentially invalid, and the entry of the ball into the V winning slot 222, which is triggered by winning the small jackpot in the winning lottery, is essentially invalid. Only the ball entering the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode being executed is substantially valid.

By adopting such a configuration, even if a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 during a round game that is being executed after winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, the progress of the game can be prevented. condition can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the process of interrupting the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot, and the process can be simplified.

Furthermore, entering the ball into the V winning slot 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, is essentially invalid; In a configuration in which only the ball entering the V winning hole 222 is effectively valid during the open/close execution mode being executed, the V winning hole is only activated during the opening/closing execution mode that is being executed in response to winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. A configuration including an operating mechanism (hereinafter also referred to as a V-winning assisting mechanism) for assisting the entry of the game ball into 222 may be adopted.

As the V winning auxiliary mechanism, for example, a mechanism that temporarily closes only the non-V winning opening 224 of the V winning opening 222 and the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the clone 220 (hereinafter also referred to as the non-V winning opening closing mechanism) ) may be adopted. In this case, the non-V winning hole closing mechanism only closes the V winning hole when the ball entering the V winning hole 222 during the opening/closing execution mode, which is triggered by winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, is substantially invalid. Since the entry of the game ball into the winning hole 222 is assisted, the operation of the non-V winning hole closing mechanism does not substantially affect the progress of the game.

However, by operating the non-V winning hole closing mechanism, the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 is assisted, and the expectation of the player who recognizes that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 is reduced. can be improved. That is, by operating the non-V winning a prize opening closing mechanism, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player without substantially affecting the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a control means other than the main control device 60 (for example, the audio emission control device 90) controls the operation of the V winning a prize assisting mechanism. For example, in case 1, the audio emission control device 90 determines to operate the V-winning assistance mechanism by receiving a specific processing command, and controls the operation of the V-winning assistance mechanism at the start of the opening/closing processing period. Alternatively, the non-V winning opening 224 may be closed at the same time as the game balls are stored in the storage section 218 and the storage valve 216 is opened. configuration may be adopted. When such a configuration is adopted, the operation of the V winning a prize assisting mechanism is controlled by a control means other than the main controller 60, so that the processing burden on the main controller 60 can be reduced.

Note that the V-winning assisting mechanism is not limited to the non-V-winning opening closing mechanism described above, and any other mechanism may be adopted as long as it assists the entry of game balls into the V-winning opening 222. It's okay. For example, a mechanism may be adopted in which the flow path 211 is moved so that the outlet through which the game balls flow out to the croon 220 in the flow path 211 is located directly above the V winning opening 222. Further, a mechanism may be adopted in which a magnet is temporarily placed near the V winning opening 222.

<<B>> Second embodiment:
《B1》Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained. Note that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking when the pachinko machine 10 performs a winning lottery, winning a winning, reaching a reach, etc. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." In the following explanation, the case where the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25, and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also flows down the left side of the game board will be referred to as the case where the player It is sometimes expressed as ``hit''. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general prize opening 32, an upper first starting opening 33 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the first starting opening 33), a lower first starting opening 44 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the first starting opening 44), A second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44 are ball entry ports into which game balls can enter. The upper first starting port 33 is provided above the center of the game board 30, and the lower first starting port 44 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed. . Further, the lower first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower first starting port 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the lower first starting port 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when the player wins a lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. Therefore, the second starting port 34 is provided at a position where the game ball enters when the player hits the ball to the right by operating the operating handle 25. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed.

The through gate 35 is a through gate that becomes an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 44a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery). If the electric role release is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role accessory 44a shifts to the electric role release state in which the electric role is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the lower first starting port 44 with respect to the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through. The ball can enter the lower first starting port 44. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As described above, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). If a jackpot or small jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or in a stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44. When a winning lottery is held triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the first symbol display section 37a displays a segment display corresponding to the lottery result. As a display mode until the display is performed, the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. This is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting ports (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44 are held up to a maximum of four in total for the two first starting ports.

The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a game ball passing through the through gate 35 triggers an electric accessory opening lottery, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a flashing display, or a predetermined display mode as a display mode. . When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the liquid crystal display device 41 adjusts the display accordingly. The symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. In addition, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display according to the variable display or a predetermined display. will be displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is limited to displaying a changing pattern or a predetermined display triggered by a game ball entering the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34. First, it also displays effects during the opening/closing execution mode, which is entered when a jackpot is won. The details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 109(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal pattern or a second liquid crystal pattern that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. It should be noted that as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 109(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, an image of the first liquid crystal pattern may be displayed, and an image of the second liquid crystal pattern may be displayed. Similarly, in the sub display area SA, as in the main display area MA, there are cases in which an image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed and an image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed. When the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA. If so, an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the sub-display area SA. Which of the first liquid crystal symbols and second liquid crystal symbols are displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, symbols numbered 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order as the first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 109(a), and each symbol A fluctuating display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 109(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) or second starting port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 become periodic. The variable display starts scrolling in a predetermined direction. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L1. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal pattern and the 2nd liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. can adopt various aspects.

Three symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the sub display area SA. In each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6, symbols numbered 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 109(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol A fluctuating display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 109(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L2.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the symbols in each symbol row Z4 to Z6 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. The variable display will start. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z4, symbol row Z6, and symbol row Z5, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z4 to Z6. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L2. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L2. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal pattern and the 2nd liquid crystal pattern in the sub-display area SA is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols, such as the number of symbol rows in the sub-display area SA, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. can adopt various aspects.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 109(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first starting openings (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. In addition, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33, the lower first starting opening 44) and the second starting opening 34 is the maximum, respectively. Up to four.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 109(b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuating display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. A first synchronized display section Sync1 performs display, and a second synchronized display performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37. Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a stop display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display. 1 synchronization display section Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display. The section Sync2 displays a lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the first synchronized display section Sync1, and the second synchronized display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these displays are not displayed.

《B2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 110 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies each device with the operating power. Supply electricity. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44), a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning opening Various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates such as the device 36 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting ports (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) and second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44. 44b, an opening/closing door driving section 48b that opens and closes the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric accessory is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 44a is released. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs round display on the main display section 45. Display control of section 39 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when it is specified that a game ball enters the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first starting opening (upper side When it is determined that a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or lower first starting port 44), a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are being displayed in a variable manner are ascertained. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is varied.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry are The information is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry are stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. Stored in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44), the updated value When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. It is stored in Rb.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is determined. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44), a jackpot stored in the first holding area Ra is generated. The value of the random number counter C1 is moved to the first execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, A process of comparing the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and determining whether or not there will be a jackpot is executed in parallel. Below, a process for determining whether or not a jackpot will occur when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34 will be described. The process of determining whether or not a jackpot occurs when a game ball enters is executed in parallel, and the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a and the variable display on the second symbol display section 37b are executed in parallel. Pachinko machines that can be executed in parallel are also called simultaneous variation machines.

In the following description, the game (also referred to as a game round) that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44) is referred to as the first starting port. It may be expressed as a game round for the starting opening, and a game (also referred to as a gaming round) that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34 may be expressed as a gaming round for the second starting opening.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of , and at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of a reach, regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 109(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

As another specific example, in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 109(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z4, and then the same symbols as Z4 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z6. As a result, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z5, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z5.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows display fluctuating symbols, and the background screen displays a predetermined character etc. as a video to create a reach effect. This includes one in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory is released in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is held using the value of the counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 44a to the open state. For example, if C4=0 to 463, the electric accessory 44a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=464,465, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb are also referred to as reservation information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 operates the first starting port in the pending information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44). A win/fail table for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area Ra and a jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. and the validity table for each are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. FIG. 112(a) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 112(b) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 112(a), four values from 0 to 3 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. FIG. 113(a) shows the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 113(b) shows the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 113(a), four values from 0 to 3 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. . Further, 1192 values from 4 to 1195 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a small win, and 4 values from 1196 to 1199 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a loss.

Here, a "small win" is an opportunity to shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but for both the lottery mode and support mode described later, it is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift. be. On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode. Further, in this embodiment, the small win occurs once as the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 36 is opened for an opening period of 1.6 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. . Further, 1176 values from 20 to 1195 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a small win, and 4 values from 1196 to 1199 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a loss.

In this way, in the win/fail table for the second starting gate, as well as the win/fail table for the first starting gate, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode. ing. Furthermore, in the win/fail table for the second starting opening, in both the win/fail table for the low probability mode and the win/fail table for the high probability mode, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a small win is set, and 2. When a winning lottery is executed in response to a game ball entering the starting slot, it is set so that a small win will occur with a predetermined probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode for winning lottery after opening/closing execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable winning device 36 (winning) between the start and end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high or low.

In addition to the above (1) to (3), it is also possible to set up a jackpot that requires execution of a specific process if the player wins. As will be described later, in this embodiment, a jackpot type of "specific probability variable jackpot" is set. A specific probability variable jackpot involves execution of a specific process when winning. Details will be described later.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 114(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 114(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The starting hole distribution table is referred to when a winning lottery is drawn based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 34.

As shown in FIG. 114(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes information regarding the entry of game balls into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44). Based on the jackpot types, 10R certain probability variable jackpot, 10R specific probability variable jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 10R definite variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 10 times (10 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, in the 10R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after that. Furthermore, in the 10R probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes a high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Details of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 10 times (10 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is in the high frequency winning mode. be. In addition, in the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, in the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes the high frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low frequency support mode. In the case of a 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery.

In addition, as described above, the 10R specific probability variable jackpot involves execution of a specific process when won. Details will be described later.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Further, in the 8R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode. In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes the high frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low frequency support mode. However, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot, the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 100, and if the total number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 11" correspond to a 10R probability variable jackpot, and "12 to 19" correspond to a 10R specific probability variable jackpot. Correspondingly, "20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 114(b), the distribution table for the second starting port includes 2R certain variable jackpot and 2R normal jackpot as the jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. It is set.

In the 2R definite variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 2 times (2 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, in the 2R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is a high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, in the 2R probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes a high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Details of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 2R normal jackpot, the number of opening/closing doors 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened twice (two rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Further, in the 2R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode. In addition, in the 2R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. However, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 100, and if the total number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" correspond to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and "20 to 39" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot. is set to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved, the distribution of the jackpot type is based on the game to the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44). There is a difference between a case where a jackpot is achieved based on the ball entering the ball and a case where a jackpot is achieved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. A distinction is made.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) described above, the game balls are launched into the game area PA in a similar manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency at which the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with the situation in which the lower first starting port 44 is opened. Frequency support mode and can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is different between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric accessory 44a is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role is opened multiple times, the next operation will be performed after one open state ends. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the lower first starting port 44 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the game ball will enter the lower first starting port 44. It becomes easier to ball. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 115(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 115(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the electric accessory opening counter C4 value that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 115(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 115(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that will be the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

《B3》Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 116.

FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the gaming machine.

When the game starts, in step F101, the player is made to hit the ball to the left, causing the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and enter the game ball into the upper first starting port 33. At this time, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. When a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33, a game round for the first starting port is executed and a winning lottery is performed.

If the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening is a loss (F101: NO), the game ball is repeatedly entered into the upper first starting opening 33 to execute the game round for the first starting opening.

If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery executed in the game for the first starting opening (F102: YES), if the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot (F103: NO), you can play the game for the first starting opening. A round game is executed as a benefit given to the player after the round ends (F104). Specifically, a suggestion effect is performed to encourage the player to play right. The player executes a right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first starting opening in accordance with the suggested performance, and enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode (limited to 100 games). A suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). A game round for the first starting opening is executed (F105).

The high-frequency support mode continues until the game is played 100 times (F106: NO → F107: NO), and if a jackpot is won within 100 times (F106: YES), the game progresses from step F103. .

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won within 100 games in the high-frequency support mode (F106: NO→F107: YES), the game proceeds from step F101.

The explanation returns to step F103. In step F103, if the jackpot type of the won jackpot is a certain probability variable jackpot (F103: YES), but not a specific probability variable jackpot (F108: NO), after the end of the first starting opening game round, A round game is executed as a benefit given to the player (F109). Specifically, a suggestion effect is performed to encourage the player to play right. The player executes a right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first starting opening in accordance with the suggested performance, and enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode (until the next jackpot win). A suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). A game round for the first starting opening is executed (F110).

The high-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot is won in the winning lottery (F110→F111: NO).

When the game round for the first starting opening is executed and a jackpot is won (F110→F111: YES), the game proceeds from step F103.

The explanation returns to step F108. In step F108, if the jackpot type of the won jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot (F108: YES), a round game is executed as a benefit given to the player after the end of the first starting opening game round. (F112). Specifically, a suggestion effect is performed to encourage the player to play right. The player executes a right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first starting opening in accordance with the suggested performance, and enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. A suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). A game round for the first starting opening is executed (F113).

When the game round for the first starting opening is executed and a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening to be executed (F114: YES), the game round for the first starting opening is started. At some point, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode (F115). In a normal gaming machine, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting slot game, after the first starting opening game ends, the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency port mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode at the start of the first starting slot game round.

Further, at this time, at the start of the game round for the first starting opening, a suggestion effect is executed to urge the player to play right.

During the period in which the game round for the first starting hole in which the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery is being executed, the player hits the right ball according to the suggestion presentation that urges him to hit the right hand, and inserts the game ball into the second starting hole 34. The player makes a ball and executes a game round for the second starting port (F116). At this time, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the game round for the second starting opening that is executed during the period in which the gaming round for the first starting opening that has won a jackpot in the winning lottery is being executed (hereinafter also referred to as the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening) If you win a small hit (F117: YES), one round of the round game is executed as a bonus for the small win (F118). The player enters the game ball into the grand prize opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

On the other hand, even if you do not win a small hit in the game for the second starting port (F117: NO), if the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second starting port will be played again. The oral game round is executed.

In the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening, the average value of the playing time of the gaming round for the second starting opening is compared with the average value of the gaming time of the gaming round for the second starting opening in other periods. It is set to be short, and a plurality of second starting opening game rounds can be executed during the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening. Also, as can be seen from the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) in Figure 113(b), when the game round for the second starting opening is executed, there is a high probability of winning a small hit. do. Therefore, it is possible to execute the game round for the second starting opening multiple times during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening, and win the small win multiple times, and the player can receive the benefits provided by the small winning. It is possible to obtain multiple times. Hereinafter, the process of giving a bonus to the player by winning a small win in the game round for the second starting opening during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening will also be referred to as "special bonus processing".

The special bonus process is executed until the winning game execution period for the first starting opening ends. In other words, the process is executed until the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot started in step F114 is won ends (F119: NO). When the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won ends (F119: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. That is, the game progresses in different directions depending on whether the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot is won is a normal jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, or a specific probability variable jackpot. The special bonus process will be explained below using a time chart.

FIG. 117 is a time chart illustrating special bonus processing.

FIG. 117 shows the time from time T0 when the player starts playing the game until the end of the special bonus process. The illustrated time T0 corresponds to the progress state of the game in step F101 in FIG. 116. A player starts playing a game at time T0, and enters a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 to execute a game round for the first starting port. At this time, as shown in FIG. 117, the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 109(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41 is displayed with an effect image (hereinafter referred to as the first A performance image for a starting opening (also referred to as a performance image for a starting opening) is displayed, and a performance image corresponding to a game round for a second starting opening (hereinafter also referred to as a performance image for a second starting opening) is displayed in the sub display area SA.

When the 8R specific probability variable jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting opening at time T1 (corresponding to F108: YES in FIG. 116), after the end of the first gaming round for the starting opening in which the 8R specific probability variable jackpot is won (time T2). , a round game is executed (corresponding to F112 in FIG. 116). As an internal process by the main control device 60, an opening/closing execution mode flag indicating that a round game is to be executed is turned ON. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a round effect image triggered by a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening.

At time T3, when the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF and the round game ends, the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode is turned ON as an internal process by the main controller 60. Further, as an internal process by the main controller 60, a high probability mode flag indicating that the mode is a high probability mode is turned ON. Note that the state at time T3 in FIG. 117 corresponds to the game progress state at step F113 in FIG.

In the high frequency support mode and high probability mode, when the player hits the game ball to the left and enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the first A game round for one starting opening is executed. In the first starting slot game run executed at this time, the average value of the game time of the game run is short compared to other periods.

Thereafter, when the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot has been won starts at time T4, a special bonus process is started. Specifically, when the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won is started, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In addition, in the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening, the average value of the playing time of the gaming round for the second starting opening is compared with the average value of the gaming time of the gaming round for the second starting opening in other periods. It is set to be shorter. In addition, a suggestion effect is executed to urge the player to play right-handed. Note that the processing at time T4 in FIG. 117 corresponds to step F114 and step F115 in FIG. 116. Furthermore, as shown in the column of liquid crystal display device in FIG. 117, when the special bonus process is started, the effect image for the second starting opening is displayed in the main display area MA, and the effect image for the first starting opening is displayed in the sub display area SA. A performance image is displayed.

When the player hits the right ball and enters the game ball into the second starting hole 34 to execute the second starting hole game round and wins a small hit, each of the second starting hole game times that won the small hit. After the round game is finished, one round of the round game is executed, and as an internal process in the main control device 60, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON after the game round for the second starting opening that resulted in each small win is turned ON, and is turned OFF after the round game is finished. becomes.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 117, the game round for the first starting opening is being executed, but the main controller 60 As an internal process, the measurement of the gaming time of the first starting opening gaming session is interrupted. The period during which the measurement of the gaming time of the game round for the first starting opening is interrupted is indicated by diagonal lines in the chart showing the gaming round for the first starting opening in FIG. 117. As shown in the figure, during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening, during the period when the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON due to a small win in the gaming round for the second starting opening, the winning game round for the first starting opening is Execution time measurement is interrupted.

Then, when the playing time of the game round for the first starting opening, which was measured by the internal processing, passes a predetermined time, the gaming round for the first starting opening ends at time T5, and the special bonus process ends. finish.

When the playing time of the game round for the first starting opening passes a predetermined predetermined time, the round game corresponding to the gaming round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot will be executed during the period from time T5 to time T6. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at time T5 and turned OFF at time T6.

In addition, after time T5, the game time set for the game round for the second starting opening is set to a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes. Therefore, even if the player hits right and executes the game round for the second starting opening and wins a small win, the game time for one round is extremely long, which puts the player at a disadvantage. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player's actions that do not follow the legal flow of the game on the pachinko machine 10.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is the process of giving a benefit during the execution of the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot has been won, so that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment In addition to creating a feeling of anticipation regarding the round game (opening/closing execution mode) as a benefit that will be given after the end of the game round in which the jackpot has been won, it is also possible to It can also create a sense of expectation.

In addition, during the period in which the special bonus processing is executed, during the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won, the special bonus will be given as a result of winning a small hit in the gaming round for the second starting opening. As a bonus (1R round game) is given, even if you win a jackpot in the first starting slot game, you can still play the second starting slot game and win a small hit. By having the winner win, it is possible to give an even greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, after the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, a round game will be executed in response to the jackpot winning in the first starting opening game round, so the game will have even greater expectations. can be granted to a person.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the second starting slot game can be executed in the special bonus process is based on the playing time of the first starting slot game that corresponds to the period of the special bonus process. In other words, after winning a special probability variable jackpot, by controlling the playing time of the next game round in which the jackpot is won, it is possible to control the upper limit of benefits given to the player through special bonus processing.

In addition, if the type of jackpot at time T1 shown in FIG. 116 is a specific probability variable jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot at time T4, a special event will be made with the start of the first starting slot game round of jackpot winning at time T1 as an opportunity. Bonus processing is started.

<<B4>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sb0101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entrance detection information) is saved. After that, the process advances to step Sb0102.

In step Sb0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0103.

In step Sb0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0104. Note that the change type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 120), which will be described later.

In step Sb0104, ball entry processing for the starting ports is executed as the game balls enter the first starting ports (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) and second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sb0104 will be described later. After executing step Sb0104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 118: Sb0104).

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sb0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (starting prize). 33, the determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower first starting port 44). In step Sb0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (Sb0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0202, and the payout control is performed. A prize ball command for causing the device 70 to pay out three game balls is set. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0203.

In step Sb0203, an external signal is sent to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44). Perform setting processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0204.

In step Sb0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting pending number RaN indicates the number of balls being held based on balls entering the first starting ports (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0209.

In step Sb0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (Sb0201: NO), proceed to step Sb0205, Whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sb0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sb0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sb0207. On the other hand, in step Sb0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sb0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sb0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0208.

In step Sb0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0209.

In step Sb0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sb0204 or step Sb0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sb0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sb0209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sb0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sb0209: YES), the process advances to step Sb0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process advances to step Sb0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sb0212.

In step Sb0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 118) is transferred to the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the step In Sb0210, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 118) The value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sb0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 118) are It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sb0210. After executing step Sb0212, the process advances to step Sb0213.

In step Sb0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which a determination is made as to the presence or absence of the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After executing step Sb0213, the process advances to step Sb0214.

In step Sb0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (suspension information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command. do.

The hold command is the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) or second starting port 34, and the pending information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process based on , before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 120: Step Sb0302) of normal processing, which will be described later.

In addition, when the audio emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the audio emission control device 90 displays the liquid crystal display. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display of the number of held balls in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sb0214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sb0301, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0302.

In step Sb0302, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sb0302, the process advances to step Sb0303.

In step Sb0303, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0304.

In step Sb0304, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sb0305. In step Sb0305, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sb0305, the process advances to step Sb0306.

In step Sb0306, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0307.

In step Sb0307, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided at the first starting port 44 on the right side is executed. In the electric utility support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0308.

In step Sb0308, it is determined whether a predetermined period of time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (in the second and subsequent rounds, the start of the command output processing in step Sb0302). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived.

In step Sb0308, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sb0308: NO), in step Sb0309 and step Sb0310, until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sb0309, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sb0310, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sb0308: YES), the process returns to step Sb0302 and each process from step Sb0302 to step Sb0307 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sb0302 to step Sb0307 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 120: Sb0305).

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sb0401, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the jackpot is won is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is transferred, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode is finished. The following two functions are realized by determining whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in step Sb0401. The first function is to prevent the game round from starting while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed by not executing step Sb0403 (and step Sb0406) while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. can do. In addition, as a second function, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed during the execution of a game round, by not executing step Sb0404 (and step Sb0407), which will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode is executed. It is possible to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the game session being executed during the period in which the game is being executed. Details will be explained below.

In step Sb0401, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sb0401: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the game is played without executing any of the processes after step Sb0402. Control processing ends. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, whether a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) or the second starting port 34. Regardless of whether or not the game is played, no game round is started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0401 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sb0401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0402.

In step Sb0402, it is determined whether the first game execution flag is ON. The first game-in-progress flag is a flag that turns ON when the first starting opening game round is started, and turns OFF when the first starting opening gaming round ends. In step Sb0402, if it is determined that the first game execution flag is not ON (Sb0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0403.

In step Sb0403, a fluctuation start process for the first starting port is executed. The fluctuation start process for the first starting opening is a process for starting a game round for the first starting opening. Details of the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb0403, the process advances to step Sb0405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0402 that the first game execution flag is ON (Sb0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0404.

In step Sb0404, first fluctuation stop processing is executed. The first fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of symbols in the game round for the first start opening that has been started. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sb0404, the process advances to step Sb0405.

In step Sb0405, it is determined whether the second game execution flag is ON. The second game execution flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the second starting opening is started, and turned OFF when the gaming round for the second starting opening ends. If it is determined in step Sb0405 that the second game execution flag is not ON (Sb0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0406.

In step Sb0406, a fluctuation start process for the second starting port is executed. The fluctuation start process for the second starting opening is a process for starting a game round for the second starting opening. Details of the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb0406, the present game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0405 that the second game execution flag is ON (Sb0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0407.

In step Sb0407, a second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of symbols in the game round for the second start opening that has been started. Details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sb0407, the present game round control process is ended.

<Variation start processing for the first starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be explained. The fluctuation start process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 121: Sb0403) of the game time control process.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the first starting port. In step Sb0501, it is determined whether the first pending start number RaN=0. If it is determined in step Sb0501 that the first start pending number RaN is not 0 (Sb0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0502. On the other hand, in step Sb0501, if it is determined that the first start pending number RaN=0 (Sb0501: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first start port is ended.

In step Sb0502, a first starting port pending information shift process is executed. In the first starting gate reservation information shift process, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is shifted. Details of the first starting port pending information shift process will be described later. After executing step Sb0502, the process advances to step Sb0503.

In step Sb0503, determination processing for the first starting port is executed. In the determination process for the first starting opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, a judgment is made to determine the presence or absence of a jackpot or a small win, and the jackpot type is distributed. Performs distribution judgment and reach judgment to determine whether reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb0503, the process advances to step Sb0504.

In step Sb0504, a process for setting a variable time for the first starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting opening, a fluctuation time is set which is the time from when the symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops. Details of the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb0504, the process advances to step Sb0505.

In step Sb0505, a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes special information that is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) in the current game round. In addition to containing information indicating that it is a certain event, it also includes information on the presence or absence of a reach occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sb0504. After executing step Sb0505, the process advances to step Sb0506.

In step Sb0506, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the first type command includes information on a 10R probability variable jackpot, information on a 10R specific probability variation jackpot, information on an 8R normal jackpot, or information on a loss.

The variation command and the first type command set in step Sb0505 and step Sb0506 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sb0506, the process advances to step Sb0507.

In step Sb0507, the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a is started, and the process proceeds to step Sb0508, where the first game execution flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0509, and the first fluctuation flag is turned on.

The first game execution flag is turned ON when the first starting opening game round is started, and the fluctuating display in the first symbol display section 37a becomes a stop display, which is a period in which the symbol display is stopped. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the first symbol display stop time ends. On the other hand, the first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the first starting opening game round is started, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display in the first symbol display section 37a becomes a stopped display. .

After executing step Sb0509, the process advances to step Sb0510.

In step Sb0510, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. A value is set in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 every time a game is played. After executing step Sb0510, the variation start process for the first starting port ends.

<Pending information shift processing for the first starting gate>
Next, the reservation information shift process for the first starting port will be explained. The first starting port pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 122: Sb0502) of the first starting port variation start process.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first starting port reservation information shift process. In step Sb0601, the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0602.

In step Sb0602, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. After that, the process advances to step Sb0603.

In step Sb0603, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sb0603, this pending information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for first starting port>
Next, the determination process for the first starting port will be explained. The determination process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the first starting port (FIG. 122: Sb0503).

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting port. In step Sb0701, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , is turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode related to winning the next jackpot. In step Sb0701, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sb0701: YES), the process advances to step Sb0702.

In step Sb0702, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 112(b). Determine whether the value matches the current value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0701 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sb0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0703.

In step Sb0703, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 112(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0704.

In step Sb0704, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step Sb0702 or step Sb0703 is a jackpot. In step Sb0704, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sb0704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0705.

In step Sb0705, it is determined whether the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is ON. In step Sb0705, if it is determined that the probability variable or normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is ON (Sb0705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0722, and the stoppage indicating the lottery result of the game round for the first starting opening is performed. Set the symbol to a stop symbol for missing. Thereafter, the determination process for the first starting port ends. That is, if the game round for the second starting opening that won a jackpot is being executed at the start of the variation of the gaming round for the first starting opening, the opening/closing execution mode of the stop symbols of the gaming round for the first starting opening will not be executed. Set to a combination of designs.

On the other hand, in step Sb0705, if it is determined that the probability variable or normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is not ON (Sb0705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0706, and it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON or not. judge. The specific processing flag is turned ON when a specific probability variable jackpot has been won in a game run executed before the game cycle for the first starting opening that is the subject of judgment, and is turned ON for the specific probability variable jackpot. This flag is turned off when special bonus processing is executed. In step Sb0706, if it is determined that the specific processing flag is ON (Sb0706: YES), the process advances to step Sb0707.

In step Sb0707, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. That is, processing corresponding to the special bonus processing is executed. After executing step Sb0707, the process advances to step Sb0708.

In step Sb0708, a special bonus start command is set. The special bonus start command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that special bonus processing is started. The command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 through command output processing (Sb0302) of the normal processing (FIG. 120). After executing step Sb0708, the process advances to step Sb0709.

In step Sb0709, the specific processing flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sb0710.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0706 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sb0706: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb0710.

In step Sb0710, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 114(a)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step Sb0710, the process advances to step Sb0711.

In step Sb0711, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination in step Sb0710 (jackpot type) is a variable jackpot. In step Sb0711, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (Sb0711: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0712.

In step Sb0712, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb0711 is turned ON. After executing step Sb0712, the process advances to step Sb0713.

In step Sb0713, it is determined whether the particular probability variable jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot. In step Sb0713, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot (step Sb0713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0714.

In step Sb0714, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0715, and a specific probability variable jackpot command is set. The specific probability variable jackpot command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that a specific probability variable jackpot has been won in the game round for the first starting opening to be determined. The command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 through command output processing (Sb0302) of the normal processing (FIG. 120). After executing step Sb0715, the process advances to step Sb0716.

On the other hand, in step Sb0713, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not a specific probability variable jackpot (step Sb0713: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb0716.

In step Sb0716, a stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which will be a probability variable jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb0711 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb0716, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

In step Sb0711, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probability variable jackpot (Sb0711: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb0717.

In step Sb0717, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb0711 is turned ON. After executing step Sb0717, the process advances to step Sb0718.

In step Sb0718, stop symbol setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb0711 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb0718, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

In step Sb0704, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in step Sb0702 or step Sb0703 is not a jackpot (Sb0704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0719, and the reach is stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. With reference to the determination table, a reach determination is made as to whether or not a reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the referred reach determination table. The process of step Sb0719 is executed when the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sb0704 is not a jackpot. That is, in step Sb0719, it is determined whether or not it is a game time in which a reach occurs among the game times in which the result of the judgment is not a jackpot. After executing step Sb0719, the process advances to step Sb0720.

In step Sb0720, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step Sb0719 is a reach occurrence. In step Sb0720, if it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sb0720: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0721, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sb0721, the process advances to step Sb0722.

In step Sb0722, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a loss, in the current game round that results in a loss, a process is performed to set which stop result is to be displayed on the first symbol display section 37a to end the variable display (stop display). Execute processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb0722, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

<Variable time setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port will be explained. The process of setting the variation time for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the first starting port (FIG. 122: Sb0504).

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable time for the first starting port. In step Sb0801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0802.

In step Sb0802, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sb0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0803.

In step Sb0803, with reference to the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is obtained. After executing step Sb0803, the process proceeds to step Sb0807, where the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

In step Sb0802, if it is determined that the result of the hit/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a jackpot (Sb0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0804, and the result of the reach determination regarding the current game round is that a reach has occurred. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON, and when it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sb0804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0805.

In step Sb0805, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step Sb0805, the process proceeds to step Sb0807, in which the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

In step Sb0804, if it is determined that the reach determination result for the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Sb0804: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0806, and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is determined. The fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table. After executing step Sb0806, the process proceeds to step Sb0807, in which the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the non-reach variation time table is set such that the larger the first start pending number RaN is, the shorter the variation time is. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of first start pending numbers RaN, and the fluctuation time is set to be shorter as the first start pending number RaN is smaller. It's okay.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable time table for a definite variable jackpot and a variable time table for a normal jackpot are each set individually.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 121: Sb0404) of the game time control process.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step Sb0901, it is determined whether the first fluctuation flag is ON. In step Sb0901, if it is determined that the first fluctuation flag is ON (Sb0901: YES), the process advances to step Sb0902.

In step Sb0902, a first variation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the first variable time counter PTC1 for measuring the variable time of the first starting opening game (the variable time of the first symbol display section) is counted down. In this process, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down each time the thread of step Sb0902 is passed. That is, only when the thread of step Sb0902 is passed, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down. After executing step Sb0902, the process advances to step Sb0903.

In step Sb0903, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display section has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the first variable time counter PTC1, which is counted down by the process of step Sb0902, has reached 0. In step Sb0903, if it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol display section has ended (Sb0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0904, and the variation of the first symbol display section is stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sb0905.

In step Sb0905, the first fluctuation flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0906.

On the other hand, in step Sb0903, if it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol display section has not ended (Sb0903: NO), the first variation stop process is directly ended.

In step Sb0901, if it is determined that the first fluctuation flag is not ON (Sb0901: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb0906.

In step Sb0906, a first symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The first symbol stop display time is the time during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed. In step Sb0906, the first symbol stop display time is set. However, if the first symbol stop display time has already been set, this setting is not performed. In this embodiment, the first symbol stop display time of all the first starting opening game times is set to the same length of time. After executing step Sb0906, step Sb0907 is executed.

In step Sb0907, a first symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down each time the thread of step Sb0907 is passed. After executing step Sb0907, the process advances to step Sb0908.

In step Sb0908, it is determined whether the first symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time has become zero. In step Sb0908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has ended (Sb0908: YES), the process advances to step Sb0909. On the other hand, in step Sb0908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has not ended (Sb0908: NO), the first variation stop process is ended.

In step Sb0909, the first game execution flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb0910.

In step Sb0910, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (jackpot flag according to each jackpot type) or small jackpot flag is ON. In step Sb0910, if it is determined that the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag is ON (Sb0910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0911. On the other hand, in step Sb0910, if it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (Sb0910: NO), the first fluctuation stop process is directly ended.

In step Sb0911, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0912, and after setting the opening/closing execution mode start command, the first fluctuation stop process ends.

<Variation start processing for second starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be explained. The fluctuation start process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 121: Sb0406) of the game time control process.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the second starting port. In step Sb1001, it is determined whether the second start pending number RbN=0. If it is determined in step Sb1001 that the second start pending number RbN is not 0 (Sb1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1002. On the other hand, in step Sb1001, if it is determined that the second start pending number RbN=0 (Sb1001: YES), the fluctuation start process for the second start port is ended.

In step Sb1002, second starting port pending information shift processing is executed. In the second starting gate hold information shift process, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. Details of the second starting port pending information shift process will be described later. After executing step Sb1002, the process advances to step Sb1003.

In step Sb1003, determination processing for the second starting port is executed. In the determination process for the second starting opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, a judgment is made to determine the presence or absence of a jackpot or a small win, and the jackpot type is distributed. Performs distribution judgment and reach judgment to determine whether reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb1003, the process advances to step Sb1004.

In step Sb1004, a process for setting a variable time for the second starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting opening, a fluctuation time is set which is the time from when the symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops. Details of the process for setting the variable time for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb1004, the process advances to step Sb1005.

In step Sb1005, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the reach Information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sb1004 are included. After executing step Sb1005, the process advances to step Sb1006.

In step Sb1006, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the second type command includes information on a 2R probability variable jackpot, information on a 2R normal jackpot, information on a small win, or information on a loss.

The variation command and the second type command set in step Sb1005 and step Sb1006 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and second type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sb1006, the process advances to step Sb1007.

In step Sb1007, variable display on the second symbol display section 37b is started, and the process proceeds to step Sb1008, where the second game execution flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1009, and the second fluctuation flag is turned on.

The second game execution flag is turned ON when a game round for the second start opening is started, and the fluctuating display in the second symbol display section 37b becomes a stop display, which is a period in which the symbol display is stopped. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the second symbol display stop time ends. On the other hand, the second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when a game round for the second start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display in the second symbol display section 37b becomes a stop display. .

After executing step Sb1009, the process advances to step Sb1010.

In step Sb1010, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. A value is set in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 every time a game is played. After executing step Sb1010, the variation start process for the second starting port ends.

<Holding information shift processing for second starting gate>
Next, the second starting port pending information shift process will be described. The second starting port pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 127: Sb1002) of the second starting port variation start process.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process for the second starting port. In step Sb1101, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1102.

In step Sb1102, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. After that, the process advances to step Sb1103.

In step Sb1103, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sb1103, this pending information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for second starting port>
Next, the determination process for the second starting port will be explained. The determination process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 127: Sb1003) of the variation start process for the second starting port.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second starting port. In step Sb1201, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , is normally turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode associated with winning the jackpot. In step Sb1201, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sb1201: YES), the process advances to step Sb1202.

In step Sb1202, a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second starting opening success/failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 113(b). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Sb1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1201 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sb1201: NO), the process advances to step Sb1203.

In step Sb1203, a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second starting opening win/fail table (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 113(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Sb1204.

In step Sb1204, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step Sb1202 or step Sb1203 is a jackpot. In step Sb1204, when it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sb1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1205.

In step Sb1205, it is determined whether the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is ON. In step Sb1205, if it is determined that the probability variable or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is ON (Sb1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1218, and the stoppage indicating the lottery result of the game round for the second starting opening is performed. Set the symbol to a stop symbol for missing. Thereafter, the determination process for the second starting port ends. In other words, when the first starting opening game round that won a jackpot is being executed at the start of the fluctuation of the second starting opening game round, the stop symbol opening/closing execution mode of the second starting opening gaming round will not be executed. Set to a combination of designs.

On the other hand, in step Sb1205, if it is determined that the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is not ON (Sb1205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1206.

In step Sb1206, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 114(b)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step Sb1206, the process advances to step Sb1207.

In step Sb1207, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination in step Sb1206 (jackpot type) is a variable jackpot. In step Sb1207, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is a variable jackpot (Sb1207: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1208.

In step Sb1208, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb1206 is turned ON. After executing step Sb1208, the process advances to step Sb1209.

In step Sb1209, a stop symbol setting process for a variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round that will be a probability variable jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb1206 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb1209, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

In step Sb1207, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probability variable jackpot (Sb1207: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb1210.

In step Sb1210, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb1206 is turned ON. After executing step Sb1210, the process advances to step Sb1211.

In step Sb1211, a stop symbol setting process for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which usually becomes a jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb1206 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb1211, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

In step Sb1204, if it is determined that the result of the determination in step Sb1202 or step Sb1203 is not a jackpot (Sb1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1212.

In step Sb1212, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step Sb1202 or step Sb1203 is a small hit. In step Sb1212, if the result of the judgment is a small hit (Sb1212: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1213.

In step Sb1213, the small hit flag is turned on. After executing step Sb1213, the process advances to step Sb1214.

In step Sb1214, a stop symbol setting process for small winning is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a small win, it is set which stop result is to be displayed on the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round that is a small win. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small wins stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the small win is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 64. Store the stop result in the address storage area. After executing step Sb1214, the process for determining the second starting port ends.

In step Sb1212, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is not a small hit (Sb1212: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1215.

In step Sb1215, a reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to to determine whether or not a reach determination occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the referred reach determination table. The process of step Sb1215 is executed when the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sb1204 is not a jackpot. That is, in step Sb1215, it is determined whether or not it is a game time in which a reach occurs among the game times in which the result of the win/fail determination is not a jackpot. After executing step Sb1215, the process advances to step Sb1216.

In step Sb1216, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step Sb1215 is a reach occurrence. In step Sb1216, if it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sb1216: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1217, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sb1217, the process advances to step Sb1218.

In step Sb1218, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a loss, in the current game round that results in a loss, a process is performed to set which stop result is to be displayed on the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display). Execute processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb1218, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

<Setting process of variable time for second starting port>
Next, a process for setting the variable time for the second starting port will be described. The process of setting the variation time for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second starting port (FIG. 127: Sb1004).

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port. In step Sb1301, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1302.

In step Sb1302, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb1302 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sb1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1303.

In step Sb1303, low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition processing is executed. The low-probability time fluctuation time information acquisition process is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the second starting opening game time when the second starting opening game time is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. . Specifically, when the game is in progress in step F101 in FIG. 116 and in the game in progress in step F105, when the game round for the second starting port is executed, the second starting port is This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the number of games played. Details of the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sb1303, the process advances to step Sb1307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1302 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sb1302: YES), the process advances to step Sb1304.

In step Sb1304, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb1304 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sb1304: YES), the process advances to step Sb1305.

In step Sb1305, highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition processing is executed. When the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the game round for the second starting opening is executed, the high accuracy and high frequency time varying time information acquisition process is performed for the second starting opening. This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the game times. Specifically, when the game time for the second starting port is executed in the progress state of the game in step F110 in FIG. 116 and in the progress state of the game in step F113, the second starting port is This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the number of games played. Details of the highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sb1305, the process advances to step Sb1307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1304 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sb1304: NO), the process advances to step Sb1306.

In step Sb1306, high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing is executed. The high-accuracy, low-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process is performed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and when a game round for the second starting opening is executed, the second starting opening This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the game times. Specifically, when the game time for the second start opening is executed during the game progress state of step F116 in FIG. be. Details of the high-accuracy, low-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sb1306, the process advances to step Sb1307.

In step Sb1307, the variable time information acquired in each process of step Sb1303, step Sb1305, and step Sb1306 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port is completed.

<Low-accurate time-varying time information acquisition process>
Next, a low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process will be described. The low accuracy time variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 130: Sb1303) of the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port.

As described above, the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process is executed in the game round for the second starting opening when the game is progressing in step F101 in FIG. 116 and in the game progressing state in step F105. This is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the game round for the second starting opening when the game is played. In other words, the period in which the game round for the first starting hole should normally be executed by hitting the game ball to the left and entering the game ball into the first starting hole (upper first starting hole 33, lower first starting hole 44). This is a process that is executed when the game ball is hit right and enters the second starting port 34 and a game round for the second starting port is executed. There is a possibility that someone is trying to get a benefit during a period when they should not have gotten it due to winning a small win, so in order to prevent this behavior, information is acquired in the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. The variable time information (variable time) is set to a relatively long time. This low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process will be described below.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating a low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. In step Sb1401, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sb1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1402.

In step Sb1402, the variable time table for low probability jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the low probability jackpot variable time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variable time is 7 minutes. After executing step Sb1402, this low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sb1401, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a jackpot (step Sb1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1403.

In step Sb1403, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sb1403, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the current game round (step Sb1403: YES), the process advances to step Sb1404.

In step Sb1404, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained with reference to the fluctuation time table for low probability reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the variable time table for low probability reach occurrence is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variable time is 7 minutes. After executing step Sb1404, this low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sb1403, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Sb1403: NO), the process advances to step Sb1405.

In step Sb1405, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained with reference to the fluctuation time table for low probability reach non-occurrence stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for non-reach occurrence at low probability is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 7 minutes. . After executing step Sb1405, this low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In this way, the fluctuating time information acquired in the low-accuracy time fluctuating time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time.

<High-accuracy, high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing>
Next, a highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition process will be described. The highly accurate and high frequency time variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 130: Sb1305) of the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port.

As described above, the highly accurate and highly frequent time-varying time information acquisition process is performed when the game is in progress at step F110 in FIG. 116 and when the game is in progress at step F113. This is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the game time for the second starting opening when is executed. In other words, the period in which the game round for the first starting hole should normally be executed by hitting the game ball to the left and entering the game ball into the first starting hole (upper first starting hole 33, lower first starting hole 44). This is a process that is executed when the game ball is hit right and enters the second starting port 34 and a game round for the second starting port is executed. There is a possibility that someone is trying to get a benefit during a period when they should not have been able to get it by winning a small win. The variable time information (variable time) that is displayed is set to a relatively long time. Note that the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the high-accuracy and high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is set to a shorter value than the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. This is because the period in which the highly accurate and high frequency time varying time information acquisition process is executed is more advantageous to the player compared to the period in which the low accurate time varying time information acquisition process is executed. The reason for this is that the unfairness of the player's act of executing the game round for the second start opening and gaining profits by winning a small win is not as great as in the case of the accurate time varying time information acquisition process. Hereinafter, this high-accuracy, high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition processing. In step Sb1501, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sb1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1502.

In step Sb1502, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for high probability and high frequency jackpots stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for high accuracy and high frequency jackpots is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. . After executing step Sb1502, the high-accuracy, high-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sb1501, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a jackpot (step Sb1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1503.

In step Sb1503, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sb1503, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the current game round (step Sb1503: YES), the process advances to step Sb1504.

In step Sb1504, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for highly accurate and high frequency reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for high-accuracy, high-frequency reach generation is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. be. After executing step Sb1504, the main high-accuracy high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sb1503, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Sb1503: NO), the process advances to step Sb1505.

In step Sb1505, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for reach non-occurrence at high accuracy and high frequency stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. do. In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for reach non-occurrence during high accuracy and high frequency is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. It is. After executing step Sb1505, the high-accuracy, high-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In this way, the variable time information acquired in the highly accurate and high frequency time varying time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time, but the The average value is set to a value shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the low-accuracy time fluctuation time information acquisition process.

<High-accuracy, low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing>
Next, a process for acquiring high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information will be described. The high-accuracy, low-frequency time variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 130: Sb1306) of the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port.

As described above, the high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is performed when a game round for the second starting opening is executed in the progress state of the game in step F116 in FIG. 116. This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the number of games played. In other words, this is a process that is executed when a game ball is hit to the right and enters the second starting port 34 and a game round for the second starting port is executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed. This is a process that follows the original flow of the game. The fluctuation time information (fluctuation time) acquired in the highly accurate and low frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Hereinafter, the high-accuracy/low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating high-accuracy, low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing. In step Sb1601, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and if the small hit flag is ON (Sb1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1602. In addition, during the period of special bonus processing in which the main high/low frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed, at the start of the fluctuation of the game time for the second starting opening, the gaming round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot is being executed. Therefore, the symbols of the game round for the second start opening are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols for which the opening/closing execution mode is not executed (see FIG. 129/Sb1205: NO). Therefore, during the special bonus processing period in which the main high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing is executed, the game round for the second starting opening will not win a jackpot, and therefore, unlike the processing in FIGS. 130 and 131, , there is no process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In step Sb1602, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency small winnings stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency small wins is a value between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, and the average value of the values obtained as the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. be. After executing step Sb1502, the high-accuracy-low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sb1601, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a small win (step Sb1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1603.

In step Sb1603, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency non-small winnings stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. do. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency non-small winnings is a value between 1 second and 3 seconds, and the average value of the values obtained as the fluctuation time is 2 seconds. It is. After executing step Sb1603, the high-accuracy-low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In this way, the fluctuation time information (fluctuation time) acquired in the high-accuracy and low-frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Therefore, during the execution period of the special bonus process, that is, during the period in which the first starting hole game time in which the jackpot has been won is being executed, a plurality of second starting hole game times can be executed. As a result, by winning a plurality of small wins, the player can obtain benefits during the execution of the first starting opening game round.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 121: Sb0407) of the game time control process.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. In step Sb1701, it is determined whether the second fluctuating flag is ON. In step Sb1701, if it is determined that the second fluctuation flag is ON (Sb1701: YES), the process advances to step Sb1702.

In step Sb1702, a second fluctuation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a second variable time counter PTC2 for measuring the variable time of the second starting slot game time (the variable time of the second symbol display section) is counted down. In this process, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is counted down each time the thread of step Sb1702 is passed. That is, instead of continuously counting down after passing through the thread in step Sb1702, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is counted down only when passing through the thread. After executing step Sb1702, the process advances to step Sb1703.

In step Sb1703, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display section has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the second variable time counter PTC2, which is counted down by the process of step Sb1702, has reached zero. In step Sb1703, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display section has ended (Sb1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1704, and the fluctuation of the second symbol display section is stopped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1705.

In step Sb1705, the second fluctuation flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1706.

On the other hand, in step Sb1703, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display section has not ended (Sb1703: NO), the second fluctuation stop processing is directly ended.

In step Sb1701, if it is determined that the second fluctuation flag is not ON (Sb1701: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb1706.

In step Sb1706, a second symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The second symbol stop display time is the time during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed. In step Sb1706, the second symbol stop display time is set. However, if the second symbol stop display time has already been set, this setting is not performed. In this embodiment, the second symbol stop display time of all the game times for the second start opening is set to the same length of time. After executing step Sb1706, step Sb1707 is executed.

In step Sb1707, a second symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is counted down. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is counted down every time the thread of step Sb1707 is passed. After executing step Sb1707, the process advances to step Sb1708.

In step Sb1708, it is determined whether or not the second symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time has become zero. In step Sb1708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has ended (Sb1708: YES), the process advances to step Sb1709. On the other hand, in step Sb1708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has not ended (Sb1708: NO), the second variation stop process is ended.

In step Sb1709, the second game execution flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1710.

In step Sb1710, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (jackpot flag according to each jackpot type) or small jackpot flag is ON. In step Sb1710, if it is determined that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sb1710: YES), the process advances to step Sb1711. On the other hand, in step Sb1710, if it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (Sb1710: NO), the second fluctuation stop process is directly ended.

In step Sb1711, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1712, and after setting the opening/closing execution mode start command, the second fluctuation stop process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 120: Sb0306) of the normal process.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sb1801, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sb1801, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (Sb1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1802, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step Sb1802 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sb1802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1803, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sb1803 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sb1803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1804, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game round that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In step Sb1804, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sb1804: YES), the process advances to step Sb1805. On the other hand, in step Sb1804, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sb1804: NO), the game state transition process is ended.

In step Sb1805, it is determined whether or not it is a small win. Specifically, by determining whether the small win flag is ON, it is determined whether the trigger for starting the opening/closing execution mode is a small win. In step Sb1805, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (Sb1805: NO), the process advances to step Sb1806.

In step Sb1806, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step Sb1805, since it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is not a small win, the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is a jackpot. The high probability mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the lottery mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to a low probability mode. After executing step Sb1806, the process advances to step Sb1807.

In step Sb1807, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step Sb1805, since it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is not a small win, the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is a jackpot. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the support mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sb1807, the process advances to step Sb1808.

In step Sb1808, a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to the winning of the jackpot. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: Step Sb0302) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1808, the process advances to step Sb1809.

In step Sb1809, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to a jackpot win or a small win. That is, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: Step Sb0302) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1809, the process advances to step Sb1810.

In step Sb1810, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in a round game is set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Sb1810, the process advances to step Sb1811.

In step Sb1811, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special gaming state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sb1811, the process advances to step Sb1812.

In step Sb1812, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of jackpot, and information on the jackpot or small win that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sb1812, the process advances to step Sb1813 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sb1803, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Sb1803: YES), the process advances to step Sb1814.

In step Sb1814, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is "0". In step Sb1814, if it is determined that the opening period has ended (Sb1814: YES), the process advances to step Sb1815 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1816.

In step Sb1816, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step Sb1816, the process advances to step Sb1817.

In step Sb1817, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned on. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sb1802, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sb1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1818, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sb1818, the process advances to step Sb1819.

In step Sb1819, it is determined whether or not the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended (Sb1819: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1820. On the other hand, in step Sb1819, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sb1819: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sb1820, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step Sb1821.

In step Sb1821, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sb1821, the process advances to step Sb1822.

In step Sb1822, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing step Sb1822, the process advances to step Sb1823.

In step Sb1823, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). The audio emission control device 90 starts a production corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sb1823, the process advances to step Sb1824.

In step Sb1824, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sb1801, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sb1801: YES), the process advances to step Sb1825.

In step Sb1825, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sb1822), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step Sb1825, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sb1825: YES), the process advances to step Sb1826.

In step Sb1826, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sb1827, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sb1827, the process proceeds to step Sb1828, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1829, and an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sb1825, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sb1825: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Opening/closing scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be explained. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: Sb1810) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing opening/closing scenario setting processing. In step Sb1901, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. In step Sb1901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sb1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1902.

In step Sb1902, a jackpot opening/closing scenario is set according to the type of jackpot. The opening/closing scenario is a program in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in a round game is set. After executing step Sb1902, the main opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

In step Sb1901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sb1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1903.

In step Sb1903, a small winning opening/closing scenario is set. In addition, in this embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing door 36b opens and closes once in the round game is set in the opening/closing scenario for small winnings. After executing step Sb1903, the main opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: Sb1811) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step Sb2001, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not.

In step Sb2001, if it is determined that the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot (Sb2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2002.

In step Sb2002, 3000 (approximately 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sb2001, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot win, that is, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a small win (Sb2001: NO), step Proceed to Sb2003.

In step Sb2003, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 135: Sb1818).

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sb2101, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step Sb2101 that the door 36b is not open (Sb2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2102.

In step Sb2102, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sb2102 that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (Sb2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2103.

In step Sb2103, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb2104.

In step Sb2104, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 120: Sb0302) of the normal processing. After executing step Sb2104, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sb2102, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sb2102: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step Sb2101 that the door 36b is open (Sb2101: YES), the process advances to step Sb2105.

In step Sb2105, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. The closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time of the opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or it has been detected that a preset number of game balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a. It holds true if If it is determined in step Sb2105 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sb2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2106.

In step Sb2106, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sb2107.

In step Sb2107, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: Sb0302) of the normal process. After executing step Sb2107, the main prize opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sb2105, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sb2105: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 135: Sb1827).

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sb2201, it is determined whether the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot.

In step Sb2201, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (Sb2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2202, and the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a probability-variable jackpot. Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening/closing execution mode is a variable probability jackpot.

In step Sb2202, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a probability-variable jackpot (Sb2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2203. On the other hand, in step Sb2202, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not a probability variable jackpot (Sb2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2212.

In step Sb2203, the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process is executed to turn off the ON flag among the 10R probability variable jackpot flag and the 2R probability variation flag. After executing step Sb2203, the process advances to step Sb2204.

In step Sb2204, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step Sb2204, the process advances to step Sb2205.

In step Sb2205, it is determined whether the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON. In step Sb2205, when it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON (Sb2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2209.

In step Sb2209, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, in step Sb2210, the specific processing flag is turned ON. After executing step Sb2210, the process advances to step Sb2211, where a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that specific processing (special bonus processing) is to be executed. The specific processing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal processing (FIG. 120). After executing step Sb2211, the process advances to step Sb2206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2205 that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is not ON (Sb2205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb2206.

In step Sb2206, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode. After executing step 06, the process proceeds to step 07.

In step Sb2207, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb2208, and a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

In step Sb2202, if it is determined that the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not due to a variable jackpot (Sb2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2212 and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sb2212, the process advances to step Sb2213.

In step Sb2213, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The low probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. After executing step Sb2213, the process advances to step Sb2214.

In step Sb2214, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sb2215, and 100 is set as a counter value in the number of games counter PNC. After executing step Sb2215, the process advances to step Sb2216.

In step Sb2216, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

In step Sb2201, if it is determined that the trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a jackpot (Sb2201: NO), that is, if the trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small win, step Proceed to Sb2217 and turn off the small hit flag. After executing step Sb2217, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 120: Sb0307).

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sb2301, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is brought back to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sb2301 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sb2301: NO), the process advances to step Sb2302.

In step Sb2302, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. In step Sb2302, if it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (Sb2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2303.

In step Sb2303, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sb2303, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb2303: NO), this electronic role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb2303: YES), the process advances to step Sb2304.

In step Sb2304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sb2304, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sb2304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2305, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sb2304: NO), the process advances to step Sb2306.

In step Sb2306, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sb2306, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sb2306: NO), the process for supporting the electronic accessory is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sb2306: YES), the process advances to step Sb2307.

In step Sb2307, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sb2308, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sb2307 (Sb2307: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step Sb2308 (Sb2308: YES), the process advances to step Sb2309, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sb2310.

In step Sb2310, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sb2309 is a support win. In step Sb2310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sb2310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2311, where the support win flag is turned on and set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is released. After that, the process advances to step Sb2312. On the other hand, in step Sb2310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sb2310: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2312 without executing the process of step Sb2311.

In step Sb2312, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. In step Sb2312, if it is determined that the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sb2312: YES), the process advances to step Sb2313. On the other hand, in step Sb2312, if it is determined that the win/fail lottery mode is not the low probability mode (Sb2312: NO), the main electronic win support process is ended.

In step Sb2313, it is determined whether the number of games counter area is "0". The number of games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In step Sb2313, if it is determined that the number of games counter area is not "0" (Sb2313: NO), the main power support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2313 that the number of games counter area is "0", the process advances to step Sb2314 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sb2315.

In step Sb2315, a low-frequency support command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. After that, the electric support support process ends.

The low frequency support command set in step Sb2315 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: Sb0302) of the normal process. The audio emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on receiving the low-frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sb2307 (Sb2307: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sb2308 (Sb2308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2316, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process advances to step Sb2317.

In step Sb2317, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sb2316 is a support win. In step Sb2317, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sb2317: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2317 that support has been won (Sb2317: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2318, where the support win flag is turned on, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sb2302, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sb2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2319, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. In step Sb2319, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb2319: NO), since the symbol in the general figure unit 38 is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb2319: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2320.

In step Sb2320, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb2321, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sb2301, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sb2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2322, and an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 44a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing process>
Next, the power opening/closing process will be explained. The electric role opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric role support process (FIG. 140: Sb2322).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening/closing process. In step Sb2401, it is determined whether the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 44b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (Sb2401: YES), the process advances to step Sb2402.

In step Sb2402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 44a. In step Sb2402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb2402: NO), the present electric role opening/closing process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing process ends.

In step Sb2402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2403, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 44a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sb2403, the process advances to step Sb2404.

In step Sb2404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sb2405, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sb2405, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sb2405: NO), the main electric hand opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sb2405: YES), the process advances to step Sb2406 and the support flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sb2401, if it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is not open (Sb2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2407, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 44a. In step Sb2407, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb2407: NO), the main power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sb2407, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb2407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2408 and executes an opening process to control the electric accessory 44a to an open state. . After that, the process advances to step Sb2409.

In step Sb2409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sb2409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2410, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

In step Sb2410, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sb2410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2411, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sb2409 (Sb2409: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sb2410 (Sb2410: NO), the process advances to step Sb2412, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power opening/closing process is ended.

<<B5>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 142 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<B6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sb3101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sb3101, the process advances to step Sb3102.

In step Sb3102, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process in which the state of the game being executed is stored using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as a flag is used to determine the performance to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step Sb3102, the process advances to step Sb3103.

In step Sb3103, display mode switching processing is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching the area in which the first starting port performance image and the second starting port performance image are displayed. Specifically, there is a case where a first starting port performance image is displayed in the main display area MA and a second starting port performance image is displayed in the sub display area SA, and a second case where a second starting port performance image is displayed in the main display area MA. Processing for switching between displaying the image and displaying the first starting opening effect image in the sub-display area SA is executed. Note that the first starting opening performance image includes a first liquid crystal pattern, and the second starting opening performance image includes a second liquid crystal pattern. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step Sb3103, the process advances to step Sb3104.

In step Sb3104, special 1 game round production processing is executed. The special 1 game round performance process is a process for setting and executing a performance corresponding to the first starting opening game round. Details of the special 1 game rendition process will be described later. After executing step Sb3104, the process advances to step Sb3105.

In step Sb3105, special 2 game round effect processing is executed. The special 2 game round performance processing is a process for setting and executing the performance corresponding to the second starting opening game round. Details of the processing for special 2 game rendition will be described later. After executing step Sb3105, the process advances to step Sb3106.

In step Sb3106, special bonus effect setting processing is executed. The special bonus performance setting process is a process for setting a performance to be executed during a period in which the special bonus process is being executed. Details of the special bonus performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sb3106, the process advances to step Sb3107.

In step Sb3107, other display processing is executed. Other display processing is processing for executing various display-related settings based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, processing is performed to update the number of holds displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2. After executing step Sb3107, the process advances to step Sb3108.

In step Sb3108, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes from step Sb3103 to step Sb3107. That is, the various lamps 47 are controlled to emit light so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effects set in steps Sb3103 to Sb3107. After executing step Sb3108, the process advances to step Sb3109.

In step Sb3109, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the processes from step Sb3103 to step Sb3107. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps Sb3103 to Sb3107 is outputted. After executing step Sb3109, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<State memory processing>
Next, state storage processing will be explained. The state processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 143: Sb3102).

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. In step Sb3201, it is determined whether a specific probability variable jackpot command has been received from the main side MPU 62. The specific probability variable jackpot command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of a game round in which a specific probability variable jackpot is won. In step Sb3201, if it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sb3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3202, and the sound-light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sb3202, the process advances to step Sb3203.

On the other hand, in step Sb3201, if it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sb3201: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3203.

In step Sb3203, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. The specific processing command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 when the game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot is won ends and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the specific probability variable jackpot is completed. In step Sb3203, if it is determined that the specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3204, and the sound and light side specific processing flag is turned ON. After executing step Sb3204, the process advances to step Sb3205.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3203 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3203: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3205.

In step Sb3205, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62. The special bonus start command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of a game round when a jackpot is won in a subsequent game round after winning a special probability variable jackpot. In step Sb3205, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3206, and the sound and light side specific processing flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb3207, and the special bonus start flag is turned ON. After executing step Sb3207, the process advances to step Sb3208.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3205 that the special bonus start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3208.

In step Sb3208, it is determined whether a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received from the main side MPU 62. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the time of starting the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot winning. In step Sb3208, if it is determined that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sb3208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3209.

In step Sb3209, it is determined whether the special bonus start flag is ON. In step Sb3209, if it is determined that the special bonus start flag is ON (Sb3209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3210. In step Sb3210, the special bonus start flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, this state storage process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3208 that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3208: NO), and if it is determined in step Sb3209 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (Sb3209 :NO), this status storage process is ended.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be explained. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 143: Sb3103).

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step Sb3301, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. In step Sb3301, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has been received (Sb3301: YES), the process advances to Sb3302. In step Sb3302, the special 2 main display flag is turned on. The special 2 main display flag displays the first starting port performance image including the first liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and also displays the second starting port performance image including the second liquid crystal pattern. When displaying on the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41, it is turned off, and the second start opening effect image including the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the first This is a flag that is turned ON when displaying the first starting port performance image including the liquid crystal pattern in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. In step Sb3302, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. As shown in FIG. 117, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, the game round for the second starting opening is executed multiple times, and for the player, the lottery result in the gaming round for the second starting opening is a small win. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. After executing step Sb3302, the process advances to step Sb3303.

In step Sb3303, a special 2 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the special 2 main display command displays the second starting gate effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 by controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and displays the first A first starting opening performance image including a liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step Sb3303, the process advances to step Sb3304.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3301 that the special bonus start command has not been received (Sb3301: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3304.

In step Sb3304, it is determined whether a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received. In step Sb3304, if it is determined that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received (Sb3304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3305.

In step Sb3305, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. In step Sb3305, if it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is ON (Sb3305: YES), the process advances to Sb3306 and the special 2 main display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb3307, and a special 1 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is started in response to winning a jackpot, the effect image for the first starting opening including the pattern for the first liquid crystal is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the effect image for the second liquid crystal is displayed. A display mode is set in which a second starting opening performance image including a pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

In this embodiment, if the game is played according to the legal flow of the game, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the second starting opening game is low, and the opening/closing execution mode is executed in response to the winning of the jackpot. has a high probability of winning the jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed due to a jackpot win, the first starting opening performance image including the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

In step Sb3307, as described above, the special 1 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the special 1 main display command displays the first starting gate effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 by controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and displays the second A second starting port performance image including a liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step Sb3307, this display mode switching process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has not been received in step Sb3304 (Sb3304: NO), and if it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is not ON in step Sb3305 (Sb3305: NO) , the display mode switching process ends.

<Special 1 game replay processing>
Next, the processing for special 1 game rendition will be explained. The special 1 game rendition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 143: Sb3104).

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the special 1 game rendition process. In step Sb3401, it is determined whether a special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sb3401, if it is determined that the special 1 variation command has been received (Sb3401: YES), the process advances to step Sb3402.

In step Sb3402, the command for Special 1 variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is read out. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb3403.

In step Sb3403, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb3403 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (Sb3403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3404, and a process for setting a special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is executed. The setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the preview effect and the ready-to-reach effect to be displayed in the main display area MA, based on the information read in step Sb3402. Details of the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing step Sb3404, the process advances to step Sb3406.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3403 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (Sb3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3405, and a process for setting a special 1 effect pattern for the sub display area is executed. Specifically, based on the information read in step Sb3402, the contents of the preview performance and reach performance to be displayed in the sub-display area SA are set.

Here, the process of step Sb3405, that is, the process of setting the special 1 performance pattern for the sub display area is executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed. That is, during the special bonus process, the first starting opening performance image is displayed in the sub display area SA. As explained in FIG. 117, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, during the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won, the game round for the second starting opening is executed and there is a high probability that the winning bonus will be small. A winning result is won and one round of the round game is executed. Then, during the period in which the round game is being executed in response to a small win in the game round for the second starting opening, the measurement of the playing time of the gaming round for the first starting opening is interrupted as an internal process of the main control device 60. Therefore, the display time of the first starting gate performance image displayed in the sub display area SA during this period is variable and cannot be determined at the time when the display of the first starting gate performance image starts to be displayed in the sub display area SA. . Therefore, as the effect image for the first starting opening to be displayed in the sub-display area SA, an image that does not give the player a sense of discomfort no matter what timing the display ends is set. For example, an image in which the first liquid crystal pattern is monotonically changing without any narrative, or an image in which a predetermined character repeats monotonous movements is set. By doing so, it is possible to display the first starting opening effect image in the sub-display area SA whose display time is variable so that the player does not feel strange.

After executing step Sb3405, the process advances to step Sb3406.

In step Sb3406, a process for setting a liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L (L1 or L2) is set. is set as the information for the current LCD pattern. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the special 1 variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol appears on the active line L (L1 or L2). The information corresponding to the stop result that satisfies the combination of is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is not established is set as the information of the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing step Sb3406, the process advances to step Sb3407.

In step Sb3407, processing for determining a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the special 1 fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the LCD symbol specified in step Sb3406 above are specified. Select a variable display pattern that corresponds to the combination of . When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step Sb3407, the process advances to step Sb3408.

In step Sb3408, pending information update processing is executed. In the reservation information update process, the information in the first reservation number counter area is updated so that the first reservation number stored in the first reservation number counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by one. After executing step Sb3408, the process advances to step Sb3409.

In step Sb3409, the special 1 effect setting flag is turned on. The special 1 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, variable display pattern, etc. in the game round for the first starting opening have been set. After executing step Sb3409, the process advances to step Sb3410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3401 that the special 1 variation command has not been received, the process directly advances to step Sb3410.

In step Sb3410, special 1 game round performance execution processing is executed. The special 1 game round performance execution process is a process that controls the start and end of fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first starting opening game round. Details of the special 1 game round performance execution process will be described later. After executing step Sb3410, the process advances to step Sb3411.

In step Sb3411, special 1 variation time measurement processing is executed. The special 1 variation time measurement process is a process that measures the time for which the liquid crystal symbols of the first starting opening game are displayed in a variable manner. Details of the special 1 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step Sb3411, the process for this special 1 game round effect is ended.

<Setting process of special 1 effect pattern for main display area>
Next, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area will be explained. The setting process of the Toku 1 effect pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 146: Sb3404) of the Toku 1 game round effect process.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area. In step Sb3501, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a jackpot was won. In step Sb3501, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the jackpot was won (Sb3501: YES), the process advances to step Sb3502.

In step Sb3502, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is the game round in which the probability variable jackpot was won. In step Sb3502, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the probability variable jackpot was won (Sb3502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3503.

In step Sb3503, it is determined whether the sound/light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON. In step Sb3503, if it is determined that the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot (step Sb3503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3504.

In step Sb3504, a performance pattern for a probability variable jackpot is set as the special 1 performance pattern (performance image for the first starting opening) to be displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step Sb3503, when it is determined that the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON (Sb3503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3505. In step Sb3505, a special probability variable jackpot performance pattern is set as the special 1 performance pattern (first starting opening performance image) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After executing step Sb3505, the process advances to step Sb3506.

In step Sb3506, the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the performance pattern for a variable probability jackpot set in step Sb3504 and the performance pattern for a specific probability variable jackpot set in step Sb3506 are the same or similar. By doing this, it is made difficult to distinguish whether the current jackpot is a certain probability variable jackpot or a specific probability variable jackpot, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation as to which type of jackpot it is. I can do it.

In step Sb3502, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the probability variable jackpot was won (Sb3502: NO), the process advances to step Sb3507.

In step Sb3507, a normal jackpot performance pattern is set as the special 1 performance pattern (first starting opening performance image) displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step Sb3501, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is not a game round in which a jackpot was won (Sb3501: NO), the process advances to step Sb3508.

In step Sb3508, it is determined whether the sound/light side specific processing flag is ON. In step Sb3508, if it is determined that the sound and light side specific processing flag is not ON (Sb3508: NO), the process advances to step Sb3509.

In step Sb3509, a performance pattern for missing is set as the special 1 performance pattern (performance image for the first starting opening) to be displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step Sb3508, if it is determined that the sound and light side specific processing flag is ON (Sb3508: YES), the process advances to step Sb3510.

In step Sb3510, a process for setting a performance pattern for missing for specific processing is executed. This process is executed when a specific probability variable jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting opening, and the gaming round for the first starting opening is executed after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the winning ends. be. That is, this process is a process for setting a performance pattern for losing in the game round for the first starting opening, which is executed during the period from time T3 to time T4 in FIG. 117. In this embodiment, a performance pattern that suggests that a special bonus process will be started if a jackpot is won next time is used as a performance pattern for a loss in the first starting opening game run during the period. adopt. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

<Special 1 game rendition execution processing>
Next, the special 1 game rendition execution processing will be explained. The special 1 game round performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 146: Sb3410) of the special 1 game round performance process.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the special 1 game round performance execution process. In step Sb3601, it is determined whether the special 1 effect setting flag is ON. In step Sb3601, if it is determined that the special 1 effect setting flag is ON (step Sb3601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3602. On the other hand, in step Sb3601, if it is determined that the special 1 performance setting flag is not ON (step Sb3601: NO), the game round performance execution process for this special 1 is directly ended.

In step Sb3602, it is determined whether the special 1 variation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb3602 that the special 1 variation display start flag is not ON (Sb3602: NO), the process advances to step Sb3603.

In step Sb3603, a process for starting the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display The operation details of the control device 100 etc. are set. After executing step Sb3603, the process advances to step Sb3604.

In step Sb3604, a first liquid crystal symbol variation start command is sent to the display control device 100. Specifically, information on the performance pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command, and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern based on the contents of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command as the first starting opening effect image on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step Sb3604, the process advances to step Sb3605.

In step Sb3605, the special 1 variation display start flag is turned on. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 1 is ended.

If it is determined in step Sb3602 that the special 1 variation display start flag is ON (Sb3602: YES), the process advances to step Sb3606.

In step Sb3606, it is determined whether the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC1 is 0. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the game round for the first starting opening. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down in the special 1 fluctuation time measurement process described later, and by recognizing the timing when the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 becomes 0, the sound and light side MPU 92 starts the first start. Specify the timing at which the variable time period in the oral game session ends. If it is determined in step Sb3606 that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is 0 (Sb3606: YES), the process advances to step Sb3607. On the other hand, in step Sb3606, if it is determined that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is not 0 (Sb3606: NO), the main special 1 game round production execution process is directly ended.

In step Sb3607, a process is executed to end the variation of the first liquid crystal pattern. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display control device 100, etc. for ending the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stop symbol) are set. After executing step Sb3603, the process advances to step Sb3608.

In step Sb3608, a first liquid crystal symbol variation end command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the first liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing step Sb3608, the process advances to step Sb3609.

In step Sb3609, the special 1 effect setting flag and the special 1 variable display start flag are turned OFF. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 1 is ended.

<Variation time measurement processing for special 1>
Next, the special 1 variation time measurement process will be explained. The special 1 variation time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 146: Sb3411) of the special 1 game rendition process.

The variation time measurement process for this feature 1 is a process for measuring the variation time of the game round for the first starting opening. Furthermore, this process has a function of interrupting measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the special 1 variation time measurement process. In step Sb3701, it is determined whether the special 1 variation display start flag is ON. In step Sb3701, if it is determined that the special 1 variation display start flag is ON (Sb3701: YES), the process advances to step Sb3702. On the other hand, in step Sb3701, if it is determined that the special 1 variation display start flag is not ON (Sb3701: NO), the variation time measurement process for this special 1 is directly ended.

In step Sb3702, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. In step Sb3702, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received (Sb3702: YES), the process advances to step Sb3703.

In step Sb3703, the special 1 count stop flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sb3706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3702 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (Sb3702: NO), the process advances to step Sb3704.

In step Sb3704, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. In step Sb3704, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode end command has been received (Sb3704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3705 and the special 1 count stop flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sb3705, the process advances to step Sb3706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3704 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (Sb3704: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3706.

In step Sb3706, it is determined whether the special 1 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb3706 that the special 1 count stop flag is not ON (Sb3706: NO), the process advances to step Sb3707.

In step Sb3707, the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down each time the thread of step Sb3707 is passed. That is, only when the thread of step Sb3707 is passed, the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC1 is counted down. After executing step Sb3707, the variation time measurement process for special feature 1 is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sb3706, if it is determined that the special 1 count stop flag is ON (Sb3706: YES), the main special 1 variable time measurement process is ended.

By executing such processing, the fluctuation time measurement processing for this special feature 1 is capable of measuring the fluctuation of the game times for the first starting opening, which has the function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. It is possible to measure time.

In this way, by receiving the opening/closing execution mode start command indicating the start of the opening/closing execution mode from the main side MPU 62 during the execution of a game round, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the game round in the sound/light side MPU 92 is interrupted, and the game round is stopped. By receiving an opening/closing execution mode end command indicating the end of the opening/closing execution mode from the main side MPU 62 during execution, the interrupted measurement of the fluctuation time of the game times in the sound/light side MPU 92 is restarted. When such processing is executed, if measurement of the variation time is frequently stopped and restarted, for example, during a period when a special bonus process is being executed, the variation time measured by the main MPU 62 and the sound There is also a possibility that a difference will occur between the fluctuation time measured by the optical side MPU 92 and the fluctuation time measured by the optical side MPU 92. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which information regarding the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main MPU 62 is included in the open/close execution mode start command and the open/close execution mode end command transmitted by the main MPU 62. The sound/light side MPU 92 measures the fluctuation time on the sound/light side MPU 92 based on the information regarding the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main side MPU 62 which is included in the received opening/closing execution mode start command and opening/closing execution mode end command. A configuration may be adopted in which the value of the fluctuation time is corrected. In addition, if it is known that there will be an error in the variation time measured by the acoustic and optical side MPU 92 compared to the variation time measured by the main side MPU 62, the value of the error or the value of the error will be determined in advance. When specifying the average value of and measuring the fluctuation time in the sound/light side MPU 92, a configuration may be adopted in which the error value is corrected. By doing so, it is possible to accurately synchronize the measurement of the fluctuation time between the main side MPU 62 and the audio/light side MPU 92.

<Special 2 game rendition processing>
Next, the processing for special 2 game rendition will be explained. The special 2 game rendition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 143: Sb3105).

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the special 2 game rendition process. In step Sb3801, it is determined whether a special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. In step Sb3801, if it is determined that the special 2 variation command has been received (Sb3801: YES), the process advances to step Sb3802.

In step Sb3802, the command for special 2 variation received this time is read out, and information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a small win, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb3803.

In step Sb3803, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. In step Sb3803, if it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (Sb3803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3804, and a process for setting a special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is executed. The setting process of special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the preview effect and the ready-to-reach effect to be displayed in the main display area MA, based on the information read in step Sb3802. Details of the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing step Sb3804, the process advances to step Sb3806.

On the other hand, in step Sb3803, if it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is ON (Sb3803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3805, and a process for setting a special 2 effect pattern for the sub display area is executed. Specifically, based on the information read in step Sb3802, the contents of the preview performance and reach performance to be displayed in the sub-display area SA are set.

After executing step Sb3805, the process advances to step Sb3806.

In step Sb3806, a process for setting a liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L (L1 or L2) is set. is set as the information for the current LCD pattern. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the special 2 variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol appears on the active line L (L1 or L2). The information corresponding to the stop result that satisfies the combination of is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is not established is set as the information of the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing step Sb3806, the process advances to step Sb3807.

In step Sb3807, processing for determining a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the special 2 fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the LCD symbol specified in step Sb3806 above are specified. Select a variable display pattern that corresponds to the combination of . When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step Sb3807, the process advances to step Sb3808.

In step Sb3808, pending information update processing is executed. In the reservation information update process, the information in the second reservation number counter area is updated so that the second reservation number stored in the second reservation number counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sb3808, the process advances to step Sb3809.

In step Sb3809, the special 2 effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 2 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, variable display pattern, etc. in the game round for the second starting opening have been set. After executing step Sb3809, the process advances to step Sb3810.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3801 that the special 2 variation command has not been received, the process directly advances to step Sb3810.

In step Sb3810, special 2 game round effect execution processing is executed. This is a process for controlling the start and end of fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening. Details of the special 2 game round performance execution process will be described later. After executing step Sb3810, the process advances to step Sb3811.

In step Sb3811, special 2 variation time measurement processing is executed. The special 2 variation time measurement process is a process for measuring the time for variable display of the liquid crystal symbols of the second starting opening game round. Details of the special 2 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step Sb3811, the process for this special 2 game rendition is ended.

<Setting process of special 2 effect pattern for main display area>
Next, the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area will be explained. The setting process of the special 2 performance pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 150: Sb3804) of the special 2 game round performance process.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area. In step Sb3901, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a jackpot was won. In step Sb3901, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the jackpot was won (Sb3901: YES), the process advances to step Sb3902.

In step Sb3902, a performance pattern for a jackpot including a variable probability jackpot and a normal jackpot is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step Sb3901, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the jackpot was won (Sb3901: NO), the process advances to step Sb3903.

In step Sb3903, it is determined whether the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb3903 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (Sb3903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3904.

In step Sb3904, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a small win was won. In step Sb3904, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round that won the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (Sb3904: YES), the process advances to step Sb3905.

In step Sb3905, a production pattern for a small win in normal times (not in special bonus times) is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step Sb3904, if it is determined based on the received special 2 variation command that the game round to be processed is not a game round in which a small win was won (Sb3904: NO), the process advances to step Sb3906.

In step Sb3906, a performance pattern for losing during normal times (not during special bonus times) is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

If it is determined in step Sb3903 that the special bonus start flag is ON (Sb3903: YES), the process advances to step Sb3907.

In step Sb3907, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a small win was won. In step Sb3907, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round that won the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (Sb3907: YES), the process advances to step Sb3908.

In step Sb3908, a performance pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus is set. The setting method for the performance pattern for the small win at the time of the special bonus differs depending on the state of the game at the time of execution of the process. The details of the setting process of the performance pattern for the small win at the time of the special bonus will be described later. After executing step Sb3908, the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

In step Sb3907, if it is determined based on the received special 2 variation command that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the small win was won (Sb3907: NO), the process advances to step Sb3909.

In step Sb3909, a performance pattern for losing during the special bonus is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the process of setting a production pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus in step Sb3908.

In the process of setting a performance pattern for a small win during a special bonus, the performance pattern is set by referring to performance pattern table data (TB1 to TB9) that associates the variation time of the game round to be processed with the performance pattern. do. FIG. 152 is a correspondence table in which the performance pattern table data to be referred to is associated with each game state at the time of execution of the process of setting a performance pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus.

As shown in the figure, the type of jackpot in the first starting slot game session that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the type of jackpot in the first starting slot gaming session at time T4 in FIG. 117), and the jackpot in the first starting slot gaming session that triggered the start of the special bonus process. It is used to set the effect of the game time for the second starting opening to be executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, for each remaining time RT after the start of the fluctuation of the gaming time for the first starting opening. Performance pattern table data is associated and set.

For example, if the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the type of jackpot in the gaming round for the first starting opening at time T4 in FIG. 117) is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot. If the remaining time RT of the variable time of the game round for the first starting opening at the timing of setting the performance of the gaming round for the second starting opening is 30 seconds or more but less than 60 seconds, the performance pattern table The performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening in which the small win was achieved is determined by referring to the data TB2.

As shown in the figure, each performance pattern table data is set in association with a performance pattern for each variable time UT of the game round for the second starting opening, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variable time is selected and set. .

In this way, by determining the method of setting the performance pattern for the second starting opening game round during the special bonus depending on the gaming state when setting the performance pattern, various suggestive performances can be provided to the player. can be executed.

For example, if the remaining time RT of the first starting slot game during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed becomes short, an effect that suggests that the remaining time of the special bonus process is short is executed to notify the player. It can give a feeling of irritation. In addition, when the remaining time RT for the first starting slot game is sufficient, an effect indicating that the remaining time for the special bonus process is short is executed, and after that, if there is sufficient remaining time for the special bonus process, By executing a performance that suggests this, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, by changing the method of setting the performance pattern for each type of jackpot in the first starting opening game session that triggered the start of the special bonus process, the type of jackpot in the first starting opening gaming session can be suggested. It is possible to carry out a performance.

<Special 2 game rendition execution processing>
Next, the special 2 game rendition execution processing will be explained. The special 2 game round performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 150: Sb3810) of the special 2 game round performance process.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the special 2 game round performance execution process. In step Sb4001, it is determined whether the special 2 effect setting flag is ON. In step Sb4001, if it is determined that the special 2 effect setting flag is ON (step Sb4001: YES), the process advances to step Sb4002. On the other hand, in step Sb4001, if it is determined that the special 2 performance setting flag is not ON (step Sb4001: NO), the main special 2 game round performance execution process is ended.

In step Sb4002, it is determined whether the special 2 variation display start flag is ON. In step Sb4002, if it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (Sb4002: NO), the process advances to step Sb4003.

In step Sb4003, a process for starting the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display The operation details of the control device 100 etc. are set. After executing step Sb4003, the process advances to step Sb4004.

In step Sb4004, a second liquid crystal symbol variation start command is sent to the display control device 100. Specifically, information on the performance pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbols, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command, and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern based on the contents of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command as the second starting opening effect image on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step Sb4004, the process advances to step Sb4005.

In step Sb4005, the special 2 variation display start flag is turned on. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 1 is ended.

In step Sb4002, if it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (Sb4002: YES), the process advances to step Sb4006.

In step Sb4006, it is determined whether the value of the sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is 0 or not. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the game round for the second starting opening. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down in the special 2 fluctuation time measurement process described later, and by recognizing the timing when the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 becomes 0, the sound and light side MPU 92 starts the second start. Specify the timing at which the variable time period in the oral game session ends. In step Sb4006, if it is determined that the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0 (Sb4006: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4007. On the other hand, in step Sb4006, if it is determined that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is not 0 (Sb4006: NO), the main special 2 game round performance execution process is ended.

In step Sb4007, a process is executed to end the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display control device 100, etc. for ending the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stop symbol) are set. After executing step Sb4003, the process advances to step Sb4008.

In step Sb4008, a second liquid crystal symbol variation end command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the second liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing step Sb4008, the process advances to step Sb4009.

In step Sb4009, the special 2 effect setting flag and the special 2 variable display start flag are turned OFF. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 2 is ended.

<Variation time measurement processing for Special 2>
Next, the special 2 variation time measurement process will be explained. The special 2 variation time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 150: Sb3811) of the special 2 game rendition processing.

The variation time measurement process for this feature 2 is a process for measuring the variation time of the game times for the second starting opening. Furthermore, this process has a function of interrupting measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the special 2 variation time measurement process. In step Sb4101, it is determined whether the special 2 variation display start flag is ON. In step Sb4101, if it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (Sb4101: YES), the process advances to step Sb4102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4101 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (Sb4101: NO), the main special 2 fluctuation time measurement process is ended.

In step Sb4102, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. In step Sb4102, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received (Sb4102: YES), the process advances to step Sb4103.

In step Sb4103, the special 2 count stop flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sb4106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4102 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (Sb4102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb4104.

In step Sb4104, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. In step Sb4104, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode end command has been received (Sb4104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4105, and the special 2 count stop flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sb4105, the process advances to step Sb4106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4104 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (Sb4104: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb4106.

In step Sb4106, it is determined whether the special 2 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb4106 that the special 2 count stop flag is not ON (Sb4106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb4107.

In step Sb4107, the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC2 is counted down each time the thread of step Sb4107 is passed. That is, only when the thread of step Sb4107 is passed, the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC2 is counted down. After executing step Sb4107, the variation time measurement process for special 2 ends.

On the other hand, in step Sb4106, if it is determined that the special 2 count stop flag is ON (Sb4106: YES), the main special 2 variable time measurement process is ended.

By executing such processing, the fluctuation time measurement processing for this special feature 2 is capable of measuring the fluctuation of the game times for the second starting opening, which has the function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. It is possible to measure time.

<Special bonus performance setting process>
Next, the special bonus performance setting process will be explained. The special bonus performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 143: Sb3106).

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing special bonus effect setting processing. In step Sb4201, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. In step Sb4201, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has been received (Sb4201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4202.

In step Sb4202, a special bonus effect is set. The special bonus performance includes displaying images, outputting audio, and lamps for the special bonus processing period in areas other than the main display area MA and sub display area SA of the display surface 41a during the period when the special bonus processing is being executed. This is a setting process for executing lighting, etc. After executing step Sb4202, this special bonus performance setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sb4201, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has not been received (Sb4201: NO), this special bonus effect setting process is directly ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sb4301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Sb4302.

In step Sb4302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sb4401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sb4501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 157) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Sb4501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at the same time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of presentation such as a preview effect or a pattern for LCD set by the sound emission control device 90, and to design a presentation image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sb4502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sb4501) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb4503.

In step Sb4503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which was specified by the display setting process (Sb4502), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step Sb4504.

In step Sb4504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sb4503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb4505, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is the process of giving a benefit during the execution of the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot has been won, so that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment In addition to creating a feeling of anticipation regarding the round game (opening/closing execution mode) as a benefit that will be given after the end of the game round in which the jackpot has been won, it is also possible to It can also create a sense of expectation.

In addition, even if you win a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening, special bonus processing may or may not be executed during the execution of the game round, so you may not win a jackpot. When the game round for the first start opening is started, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the special bonus process will be executed.

In addition, during the period in which the special bonus processing is executed, during the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won, the special bonus will be given as a result of winning a small hit in the gaming round for the second starting opening. As a bonus (1R round game) is given, even if you win a jackpot in the first starting slot game, you can still play the second starting slot game and win a small hit. By having the winner win, it is possible to give an even greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, after the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, a round game will be executed in response to the jackpot winning in the first starting opening game round, so the game will have even greater expectations. can be granted to a person.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the game for the second starting opening that can be executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed is the time during which the game for the first starting opening is being executed during the period. Depends on. That is, the upper limit value of the amount of benefits to be given as a special bonus is determined by the time period during which the first starting slot game is being executed during the period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first starting opening game session being executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed will continue for a longer period of time. In addition, as the end of the game round for the first starting opening approaches, there is an expectation that you would like to win as many special bonus benefits as possible, that is, you would like to play the gaming round for the second starting opening and win as many small wins as possible. It is possible to give a feeling of excitement and a sense of impatience regarding the end timing of the first starting slot game, and it is possible to give tone to the player's emotions.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

In addition, whether or not the special bonus process is executed in the game round for the first starting opening where the winning lottery is won is determined by whether or not the special bonus processing is executed before the game round for the first starting opening where the special bonus processing is executed. It is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the winning first starting opening game round. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process was executed before the first starting opening gaming round and winning the jackpot is specified. In the case of a probability-variable jackpot, a special bonus process is executed in the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot is subsequently won. That is, before the special bonus process is executed, it can be specified in advance that the special bonus process will be executed if the player wins a jackpot in the next first starting opening game round. As a result, for example, during the execution of the first starting slot game round in which a specific probability variable jackpot was won, a notice (suggestion) is given that if a jackpot is won in the first starting slot game round, a special bonus process will be executed. The special bonus process is executed between the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the special bonus process is executed or the game round for the first opening opening in which the special bonus process is executed, or winning a special probability variable jackpot. It is possible to perform a performance that foretells (suggests) that it will be performed. In addition, conditions for switching the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode if you win a specific probability variable jackpot in the first starting opening game round, and then if you win a jackpot in the first starting opening gaming round. It can be one of the In this way, in the game round for the first starting opening in which the winning lottery is won, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process is made before the game round for the first starting opening in which the special bonus processing is executed. By making the determination based on the jackpot type corresponding to the first starting slot game run that was executed and won the jackpot, various corresponding processing can be executed in response to the execution of the special bonus processing.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment switches the method of setting the variable time of the game round for the second starting opening between the period in which the special bonus process is executed and the period other than that. More specifically, the average value of the fluctuation time of the game times for the second starting opening set in the period in which the special bonus process is executed is the average value of the fluctuation time of the gaming times for the second starting opening set in other periods. shorter than average. Therefore, the period during which the special bonus process is executed can be made advantageous to the player. Furthermore, when such processing is executed, there is a risk that the player will be given an excessive advantage; however, in this embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus processing is executed, the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Since the mode is switched to the support mode, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the jackpot type of the first starting opening game to be executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, based on the jackpot type of the first starting opening game to be executed during the period. Decide on the performance pattern. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly make the player guess the lottery result (jackpot type) of the game round for the first starting opening through the presentation of the gaming round for the second starting opening. In other words, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first starting opening game round by using the effects performed during the second starting opening gaming round. Also, based on the lottery mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) after the end of the first starting slot game round that is executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed. The effect pattern of the game round for the second starting opening to be played is determined. Therefore, by using the effect executed in the game round for the second starting opening, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the lottery mode after the end of the gaming round for the first starting opening.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that, regarding the setting of the performance of the game time for the second starting opening that is executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the game for the first starting opening at the timing when the performance is set is set. The effect pattern of the game round for the second starting opening is set based on the elapsed time of the round. Therefore, for the player who has recognized the performance corresponding to the executed game round for the second starting opening, the player will be informed of the elapsed time since the first gaming round for the first starting opening was executed and the game round for the first starting opening. It is possible to make the player guess the remaining time until the end of the game, and indirectly give a feeling of anticipation for the special information game round for the first starting opening through the performance corresponding to the special information game round for the second starting opening. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such processing, that is, the process of setting the performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening, the first The condition is that the game round for the starting opening has won a jackpot. Therefore, if the game round for the second starting opening is executed while the gaming round for the first starting opening is being executed, the performance of the gaming round for the second starting opening is based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening. By having the player guess whether or not the game for the first starting opening has won a jackpot. That is, it is possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the success or failure of the winning lottery in the first starting opening game round through the presentation of the second starting opening gaming round. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such processing, that is, the process of setting the performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening, the first The condition is that a specific probability variable jackpot has been won in the first starting opening game run executed before the starting opening gaming round. Therefore, if the game round for the second starting opening is executed while the gaming round for the first starting opening is being executed, the performance of the gaming round for the second starting opening is based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening. By having the player guess whether or not he or she won a specific probability variable jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening executed before the game round for the first starting opening, in other words, in the game round for the first starting opening, It is possible to make the player guess whether a special bonus process will be executed in the game round for one starting opening, and it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation.

Furthermore, even if the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening, the symbols for the first liquid crystal display are displayed depending on the state in which the gaming round for the first starting opening is executed. There are cases in which the process of exchanging the display area for displaying the display area and the display area for displaying the second liquid crystal pattern is executed and cases in which it is not executed. Specifically, before the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won is executed, if the specific probability variable jackpot has been won, the gaming round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won is started. Taking this as an opportunity, processing is performed to exchange the display areas in which the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols are displayed. On the other hand, if a jackpot other than a specific probability variable jackpot has been won before the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won is executed, the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won is started. Taking this as an opportunity, the process of exchanging the display areas for displaying the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern is not performed. Therefore, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to determine whether the game round for the first starting opening was executed after the game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot was won. Alternatively, it can be made to guess whether it is after a game round in which a jackpot other than a specific probability variable jackpot was won. As a result, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the special bonus process will be executed, thereby giving a great sense of anticipation. Further, by executing a performance that utilizes whether or not the display area can be replaced, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the special bonus process will be executed.

<<B7>> Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《B7-1》Variation 1:
In the second embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won is determined by lottery at the start of the gaming round for the first starting opening in which the special bonus processing is to be executed. Therefore, it may be carried out, or it may be carried out based on the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening. That is, in the above embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won is determined based on the first starting opening gaming round (post-execution first Determined based on whether or not a specific probability variable jackpot was won in the first starting opening gaming round (the first starting opening gaming round) in which the jackpot was won earlier than the starting opening gaming round). However, in this modification, the jackpot type in the game round for the first starting opening to be executed first is not referred to, and the judgment is based on the jackpot type in the gaming round for the first starting opening to be executed later, or the game round for the first starting opening to be executed later. Judgment will be made by lottery at the start of the event. By doing this, there is no need to perform processing to store the jackpot type of the first starting slot game that was executed earlier and won the jackpot (for example, by storing it using a flag), which reduces the processing load. can be achieved.

In addition, it is possible to set the type of jackpot to be a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot, and if you win a guaranteed variable jackpot in the first starting opening game, you will receive a guaranteed variable jackpot or normal jackpot in the next first starting opening game. A configuration may be adopted in which special bonus processing is executed at the timing of winning. By doing so, it is not necessary to set a jackpot type such as a specific probability variable jackpot and to set a specific probability variable jackpot flag, and the processing can be simplified.

In addition, types of high-frequency support modes are provided as jackpot types, and when the high-frequency support mode set in the game round that is executed after winning the jackpot and opening/closing execution mode ends is a specific high-frequency support mode. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a special bonus process is executed when a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game round during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the jackpot types are a 10R probability variable jackpot A in which a high-frequency support mode A is executed in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern A, and a high-frequency jackpot A in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern B. A configuration is adopted in which a 10R probability variable jackpot B in which support mode B is executed can be set. For example, a configuration is adopted in which, when a jackpot is won in the first start opening game round during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a special bonus process is executed.

More specifically, a high-frequency support mode flag is prepared depending on the type of high-frequency support mode. Then, when winning the 10R probability variable jackpot B, the transition process at the end of the ending period (Fig. 139), which is executed at the end of the round game (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot, corresponds to high-frequency support mode B. Turn on the high-frequency support mode flag (hereinafter referred to as the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B). After that, during the execution of the high-frequency support mode B in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern B, the game round for the first starting opening is executed, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won, and it is determined that the jackpot has been won. In this case, it is determined whether or not the pattern B high-frequency support mode flag is ON, and when it is determined that the flag is ON, it is determined to execute the special bonus process. That is, the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B is turned OFF at the start of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening is determined, and then it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag for pattern B is ON. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the frequent support mode flag is ON or not, and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot in the first starting opening game round is determined. Various types of processing can be adopted as long as the processing allows recognition that a jackpot has been won in the game round for one starting opening.

By adopting such a configuration, in a game round after winning a specific probability variable jackpot, it is possible to recognize that a specific probability variable jackpot was won in the previous game cycle without using the specific processing flag. . That is, by providing multiple types of high-frequency support modes and determining whether the high-frequency support mode is a specific high-frequency support mode (in the above example, whether or not it is high-frequency support mode B), It is possible to recognize that the player won the special probability variable jackpot in the previous game round.

Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the type of high-frequency support mode that is executed. When a specific high-frequency support mode (in the above example, high-frequency support mode B) is being executed, the player is notified of the It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation regarding the result of winning the jackpot. In other words, if you win a jackpot in the first starting slot game while a specific high-frequency support mode is being executed, a special bonus process will be executed, so if the specific high-frequency support mode is not being executed, Compared to the success or failure of the jackpot in the first starting slot game to be executed, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, if a special bonus process is executed by winning a jackpot in the first starting slot game while a specific high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode B in the above example) is being executed, the high-frequency support mode The mode flag (high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B) is turned OFF, and the support mode is switched. Specifically, it switches to low frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the support mode will be switched during execution of a specific high-frequency support mode. In addition, if a special bonus process is executed by winning a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening while a specific high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode B in the above example) is being executed, the second starting opening The method of setting the variation time of the oral game time is changed (see FIGS. 117 and 130). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the setting method of the variable time of the second start opening game time will be changed during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode.

In addition, only one type of high-frequency support mode can be executed, and if a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game while the high-frequency support mode is being executed, a special bonus process is executed. Good too. Specifically, if a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game round while the high-frequency support mode is being executed, the high-frequency support mode is activated at a low frequency at the start of the first starting opening gaming round in which the jackpot occurred. Switch to support mode. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening while executing the high-frequency support mode, at the start of the gaming round for the first starting opening that became the jackpot, the change in the gaming round for the second starting opening will change. Switch the time setting method. Such a configuration may also be adopted.

《B7-2》Variation 2:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting opening. A configuration may be adopted in which a process of switching from frequent support mode to high-frequency support mode is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being at an excessive disadvantage during the execution of the first starting opening game round.

《B7-3》Variation 3:
In the above embodiment, the special bonus process is started at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol in the game round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot, but as a modified example, You may adopt the structure which starts from the time when the fluctuating display of the 1st symbol ends and the 1st symbol stops. In other words, during the period from the time when the fluctuation of the first symbol of the game round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot stops until the display of the stopped first symbol ends (hereinafter also referred to as the stop display period). , a configuration may be adopted in which special bonus processing is executed. Specifically, at the start of the stop display period, the setting method of the variable time of the second start opening game time is changed, and the setting method is changed from a setting method in which a relatively long time (5 to 10 minutes) is set as the variable time. Switch to a setting method that sets a relatively short time (2 to 5 seconds). Then, at the start of the stop display period, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Further, the stop display period when executing the special bonus process is set to a relatively long time such as 30 seconds to 1 minute. By doing so, the configuration of the modified example can be realized.

B6-4. Modification example 4:
In the above embodiment, when winning a probability-variable jackpot, the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode from the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed after the winning game round, and the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode until the next jackpot is won. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and as a modified example, when a probability-variable jackpot is won, the lottery mode is set to a high-probability mode from the end of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed after the winning game round. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the game shifts to the low probability mode after a predetermined number of games have been played. In other words, the configuration is such that a limit is placed on the number of times the game can be played in the high probability mode. By doing this, for example, if you win a special probability variable jackpot, and if you subsequently win a jackpot, a special bonus process will be executed. Since there is a limit on the number of times, the special bonus process will not be executed unless a jackpot is won before the limited number of games are played. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and irritation during a period in which a game round is executed in a high probability mode after winning a special probability variable jackpot, and it is possible to give tone to the player's emotions.

《B7-5》Variation 5:
In the above embodiment, even if a jackpot of any jackpot type is won in the first starting slot game round, the high-frequency support mode is executed thereafter. Therefore, during the period when the high-frequency support mode is being executed, by executing an effect that suggests the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the high-frequency support mode, the player can It can give a sense of expectation. For example, during the period when the high-frequency support mode is running, if a performance suggesting that the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot is executed, a player who recognizes the production may On the other hand, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special bonus process may be started the next time he or she wins a jackpot.

In addition, during the period in which the high-frequency support mode is being executed, the player is asked to guess whether the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the high-frequency support mode is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot or an 8R regular jackpot. When the player executes the effect that causes the player to move from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game, the player will be notified that the transition to the support mode will be changed and the special bonus process will be started. It is difficult to determine whether this is due to the fact that the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode (100 times) has ended, and it may give the player a sense of anticipation and tension. can.

《B7-6》Variation 6:
In the above embodiment, if the jackpot type in the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won earlier is a specific probability variable jackpot, it is possible to determine that the jackpot was won in the first starting opening gaming round executed later. As a trigger, the high-frequency support mode was switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starting slot game where the jackpot was won first, the jackpot was won in the first starting slot game that was executed, or the jackpot of a specific jackpot type was won. Taking this as an opportunity, a configuration may be adopted in which the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting opening. By doing so, it is possible to give the player who has recognized that the high-frequency support mode has been switched to the low-frequency support mode a sense of anticipation for the subsequent progress of the game.

B6-7. Modification example 7:
In the above embodiment, the processing at the start of the first starting slot game round in which the jackpot was won depends on whether or not the jackpot type in the first starting slot gaming round in which the jackpot was won earlier is a specific probability variable jackpot. It is determined whether or not the special bonus process is to be started at the start of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won, but this is not limited to this configuration; Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration determines the processing at the start of a game round in which a jackpot is won later. For example, if the type of jackpot in the game round in which the jackpot was won earlier is a variable jackpot, a specific effect may be started at the start of the game round in which the jackpot is won later, or a high-frequency support mode can be changed to a low-frequency support mode. Various configurations may be adopted, such as a configuration for switching between modes, a configuration for switching from a low-frequency support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and a configuration for changing the method of setting the variable time of game times.

《B7-8》Variation 8:
In this embodiment, with the start of the special bonus process as a trigger, the fluctuation time of the game times for the second starting opening becomes high despite the fact that the average value of the fluctuation time set is shorter compared to other periods. Although the frequency support mode has been switched to low frequency support, it is not limited to such a configuration. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration switches to infrequent support. For example, by switching from high-probability mode to low-probability mode, the method for setting the fluctuation time may be changed so that the average value of the fluctuation time of the set gaming times is shortened, and the high-frequency support mode may be changed to the low-frequency support mode. A configuration in which the system switches to support may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

《B7-9》Variation 9:
In the above embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game round, particularly when a jackpot is won in the first starting opening gaming round and a special bonus process is executed, the first starting opening The game round for the second starting opening that is executed during the period in which the game round for the second starting opening is executed is the production that is executed in the game round for the second starting opening compared to the game round for the second starting opening that is executed in other periods. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the second starting opening game is executed during the period from the start of one first starting opening game to the end. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the performance to be performed in a round is determined based on the symbol (lottery result) corresponding to the first game round for the first start opening. For example, depending on whether the lottery result corresponding to the first game round for the first starting opening is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot, the first gaming round for the first starting opening starts and then ends. A configuration may be adopted in which the performance (or the method of setting the performance) performed in the second starting opening game round executed during the period up to the start (or the method of setting the performance) is different. Even in this case, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first starting opening game round by using the effects performed during the second starting opening gaming round.

《B7-10》Variation 10:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a benefit is given to the player in the form of a special bonus process during the period in which the first starting slot game round in which the player wins the jackpot is being executed. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they provide benefits to the player during the period in which the current game round is being executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the low-frequency support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode and a benefit is provided to the player during the execution of the first starting opening game round in which a jackpot is won. In addition, the pachinko machine in this embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variable pachinko machine in which the game round for the first starting opening and the game round for the second starting opening are executed in parallel; A pachinko machine in which the game round and the game round for the second starting opening are executed exclusively may be adopted. In this case, during the execution of the game for the first starting hole where the jackpot has been won, the low-frequency support mode switches to the high-frequency support mode, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole, and as a bonus. A configuration may be adopted in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port.

《B7-11》Variation 11:
In the embodiment described above, elapsed time information that is information regarding the elapsed time from the start of the first starting opening game round to a predetermined timing, or information regarding the remaining time of the first starting opening gaming round (remaining time RT ), and based on the elapsed time information, produce a performance corresponding to the second starting opening game round that is executed during the period in which the first starting opening gaming round, which is the target of the acquisition of the elapsed time information, is being executed. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration sets . For example, based on the remaining time of the first starting opening game, information corresponding to the remaining time in the second starting opening gaming session that is executed during the period in which the first starting opening gaming session is being executed is displayed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect indicating that more time remains as the remaining time than the actual remaining time of the first starting slot game is executed based on the actual remaining time. Even in this case, for a player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed game round for the second starting opening, the player will be informed of the elapsed time since the game round for the first starting opening was executed and the performance for the first starting opening. It is possible to make the player guess the remaining time until the end of the game round and indirectly give a feeling of anticipation for the game round for the first starting opening through the performance corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening.

《B7-12》Variation 12:
In the above embodiment, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, the fluctuation of the symbol of the first starting opening game round that has won a jackpot is replaced by a specific small winning winning in the second starting opening gaming round. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the system is stopped when the system is activated. For example, a configuration is adopted in which two types of small wins, a first small win and a second small win, are set in the second starting opening win/fail table (see FIG. 113). Then, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, that is, while the symbols of the first starting opening gaming round winning the jackpot are changing, the second starting opening gaming round is executed, and the lottery result is changed to the first opening opening gaming round. In the case of a 2-small win, the fluctuation of the game times for the first starting opening does not stop and continues to fluctuate, as in the above embodiment. On the other hand, if the second starting opening game round is executed while the symbols of the first starting opening game round winning the jackpot are changing, and the lottery result is the first small winning, then the second At the timing when the fluctuation of the symbols of the game round for the starting opening stops, the fluctuation of the symbols of the gaming round for the first starting opening is also stopped. At this time, the symbols of the game round for the first starting opening are stopped at a symbol indicating a loss. That is, the game round for the first starting opening ends, and the special bonus process ends. Also, at this time, since the symbols of the game round for the first starting opening stop at the symbols indicating a miss, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed after the gaming round for the first starting opening is completed, and the opening/closing execution mode is not executed as a special bonus process. The support mode after the end of the game for one starting opening also becomes the low-frequency support mode.

In other words, by adopting such a configuration, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, that is, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, in other words, the game for the second starting opening when the symbols of the gaming round for the first starting opening where the jackpot has been won is changing. If the result of the lottery is the first small win, the privilege given to the player will be reduced compared to the case where the lottery result is not the first small win. Therefore, during the period when the special bonus processing is being executed, that is, even when the symbols of the first starting opening game round where the jackpot has been won are changing, the player does not feel a sense of urgency or anticipation. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, similarly to the above embodiment, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, that is, during the second start when the symbols of the game round for the first start opening that have won the jackpot are changing. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the lottery result of the oral game round does not become a jackpot.

《B7-13》Variation 13:
In the above embodiment, if the game round for the second starting opening is executed during the fluctuation of the gaming round for the first starting opening that has won the jackpot, the gaming round for the second starting opening has won the jackpot. Even though it is set to stop with a symbol indicating that you have not won a jackpot if you have won a small jackpot, if you have won a small jackpot, a symbol that indicates that you have won a small jackpot will appear. It was configured to stop, but only if you have won a specific small win, it will stop with a symbol indicating that you have won that small win, and even if you have won another small win, it will not be a small win. A configuration may be adopted in which the game is set to stop at a symbol indicating that the game has not been won.

《B7-14》Variation 14:
In the above embodiment, when a special probability variable jackpot is won in the first winning opening game round, and a jackpot is won in the first starting opening gaming round, that is, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, when a game round in which a jackpot is won in the high probability mode is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed are switched, or A configuration may be adopted in which when a game round in which a jackpot is won in the frequency support mode is executed, the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched. In addition, a display in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed when a game round in which a jackpot is won while a specific small win has been won in the previous game round is executed. A configuration in which the areas are switched may also be adopted. In addition, the objects of the symbols whose display areas are switched are not limited to the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols, but also include the first liquid crystal symbols and the symbols for the electric prize opening lottery, and the second liquid crystal symbols and the electric prizes. It may be a symbol for an open lottery. Even in this case, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to make the player make various guesses and give the player a sense of anticipation.

In addition, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starting slot game round where the jackpot was won, if a jackpot is won in each first starting slot game round, the main A configuration may be adopted in which the effect images displayed in the display area MA and the sub-display area SA are replaced, and even if the jackpot has not been won, for example, in a game round in which a reach occurs, the relevant image may be replaced. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA are replaced at the start of a game round. Further, these configurations may be combined. In combination, it is possible to encourage the player who has recognized the exchange of the effect images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub-display area SA to make various guesses in the game round that has started, giving him a sense of anticipation.

《B7-15》Variation 15:
In the above embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the upper limit of the amount of benefits to be given as a benefit, that is, the number of times that the game for the second starting opening that can win a small win can be executed. was configured to be determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting opening game session corresponding to the special bonus processing, but the upper limit of the amount of the benefit is determined based on the variation time of the gaming session that satisfies specific conditions. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they are determined based on the length of time. For example, the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the second starting port during the execution of the first starting port game is determined based on the length of the fluctuation time of the first starting port game. A configuration may also be adopted. Even in this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as the end of the game round approaches, and a sense of impatience regarding the end time of the game round, thereby making the player feel It can add modulation to emotions.

《B7-16》Variation 16:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the high-frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF at the start of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won. A configuration may be adopted in which a fall lottery is executed before a winning lottery is executed. Here, the falling lottery is a lottery for determining whether to enter the low probability mode when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this modification, the falling lottery is executed before the winning lottery in the game round. If the game round has already been played 100 times or more in the high-frequency support mode, if you win the fall lottery in the game round for the first starting opening, the lottery mode will change from the high probability mode at the start of the game round. Along with the transition to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF.

If such a configuration is adopted, if a specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first game for the first starting opening that is executed first, and then a jackpot is won in the first gaming session for the first starting opening, a special bonus process will be executed. In a state in which the game cycle is already executed in the high-frequency support mode 100 times or more, the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency mode at the same time as the first starting opening game cycle is started. If the player enters the support mode, the player may be asked whether the support mode has shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode due to winning a jackpot and starting special bonus processing. It is possible to make the player speculate whether the support mode has changed from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode due to the transition from high-probability mode to low-probability mode after winning the lottery, giving the player a great sense of urgency. This can increase the interest of the game.

《B7-17》Variation 17:
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting opening, in that gaming round, an effect that suggests information about the type of jackpot in the gaming round for the first starting opening where the jackpot was won earlier is provided. May be executed. That is, the performance to be executed in the first starting slot game round in which the jackpot was won is determined based on the type of jackpot in the first starting opening gaming round in which the jackpot was won before the first starting opening gaming round. do.

For example, if a jackpot is won in the first starting slot game round, an effect is performed that suggests that the type of jackpot in the first starting slot game round where the jackpot was won the previous time was a specific probability variable jackpot. In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that the game round for the first starting opening that is currently being executed is a game round for which special bonus processing is to be executed, giving the player a sense of anticipation. be able to. In addition, if the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won earlier was a specific probability variable jackpot, then in the gaming round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was later won, the jackpot was won first. An effect may be performed that allows the player to guess whether the type of jackpot in the first starting opening game round was a specific probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. By executing such an effect, the player is made to guess whether or not the game round for the first starting opening currently being executed is the game round for which the special bonus process is to be executed. This can give players a sense of anticipation and urgency.

《B7-18》Variation 18:
In the embodiment described above, a configuration is adopted in which the setting method of the variable time of the game round for the second start opening is switched at the start of the special bonus process. Specifically, the process is transferred from the high-accuracy, high-frequency variation time information acquisition process (FIG. 130: Sb1305) to the high-accuracy, low-frequency time variation time acquisition process (FIG. 130: Sb1306), which is executed as a special bonus process. The average value of the fluctuation time set for the game time for the second starting hole during the period in which the game time for the first starting hole is being executed is However, in addition, the game times for the second starting hole during the period in which the game times for the first starting hole, which are executed as special bonus processing, are being executed. A configuration having multiple types of methods for setting the fluctuation time may be adopted.

Specifically, in the high-accuracy, low-frequency, time-variable time acquisition process (see FIG. 133), a plurality of types of high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time tables are provided, which are selected in the event of a small win. Each of the high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time tables has a different average value of the variation time set for the second starting opening game time. For example, it is provided with a first high-accuracy, low-frequency small-win variation time table, a second high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time table, and a third high-precision, low-frequency small-win variation time table. The average value of the fluctuation time set for the second starting opening game time is shorter in the first high-accuracy, low-frequency small-win variation time table than in the second high-accuracy, low-frequency small-win variation time table, The second high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time table has a shorter average value of the variation time set in the second starting slot game time than the third, high-probability, low-frequency, small-win variation time table. If the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening during the period in which the gaming round for the first starting opening is being executed as a special bonus process is a small win, then The variable time table for setting the variable time in the game round for the 2nd starting opening includes the jackpot type and variable time of the gaming round for the 1st starting opening that corresponds to the special bonus process, etc. The determination is made based on predetermined parameters (jackpot type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS) acquired in .

For example, if the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening in the period is a small win, the fluctuation time of the second starting opening gaming round is based on the first high probability low frequency fluctuation time table for small winning. decide. In addition, if the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the gaming round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening in the period is a small win, the fluctuation time of the second starting opening gaming round is based on the second high probability low frequency fluctuation time table for small winning. decide. Furthermore, if the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is 8R normal jackpot, the period during which the gaming round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is being executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening is a small win, the fluctuation time of the game round for the second starting opening is determined based on the third high accuracy low frequency small winning fluctuation time table. do.

If such a configuration is adopted, depending on the type of variable time table for high-accuracy and low-frequency small winnings that is selected, the upper limit of the number of times the game for the second starting opening can be executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. will be different. Therefore, in addition to the feeling of anticipation regarding the start of the special bonus processing, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the method of setting the variable time of the game round for the second start opening during the special bonus processing period. can.

《B7-19》Variation 19:
In the embodiment described above, at the start of the special bonus process, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Electric accessory during the period from the time when the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF to the time when the electric accessory 44a operates in the low-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as support mode transition period) Various modes can be adopted as the mode of operation of 44a. For example, in the case of the above embodiment, the electric accessory 44a performs the opening/closing operation three times when the electric accessory is won once during the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened/closed for one electric role opening win is determined by the value of the second round counter area RC2 (see FIG. 141: electric role opening/closing process). That is, in the embodiment described above, if the player wins the power lottery during the high-frequency support mode, the value "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2.

In the case of the processing mode of the electric accessory opening/closing process (FIG. 141) of the above embodiment, suppose that the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF while the opening operation of the electric accessory 44a is being executed three times in the high frequency support mode. In this case, for the remaining opening/closing times, the opening/closing process is executed during the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low frequency support mode is set. For example, if you win the electric role opening lottery during the high frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode flag turns OFF when the electric role accessory 44a opens and closes once, the remaining number of openings (hereinafter referred to as The opening operation of the electric accessory 44a for two times (also referred to as the remaining number of openings) is performed during the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low-frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period will also be referred to as a first operation mode. That is, when the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, if the remaining number of openings is not "0", the opening time of the electric accessory 44a is set by the low frequency support mode for the number of openings remaining. It is executed during the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the electric accessory 44a is opened. In this case, the operation of the electric accessory 44a is suddenly changed at the same time as or immediately after the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the electric accessory 44a has suddenly changed, recognizes that the special bonus process has started, and immediately starts hitting right.

However, this is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment. For example, if the remaining number of releases, that is, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" at the time the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF, the remaining number of releases You may adopt the structure which performs the operation|movement of the electric accessory 44a in the opening time when high frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period will also be referred to as a second operation mode. By doing this, even if the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF, the operation of the electric accessory 44a will not suddenly change, and the player will be informed that the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF. It is possible to delay the time it takes for the player to recognize that the special bonus process has started, and as a result, it is possible to delay the time it takes for the player to recognize that the special bonus process has started. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from the start of the special bonus process until the player starts hitting right. As a result, the amount of benefits that the player can obtain through special bonus processing can be suppressed (reduced). Although the amount of benefits that the player can obtain due to the special bonus process is reduced, even after the start of the special bonus process, the opening/closing process for the remaining number of electric accessories 44a is performed during the open time in the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, by entering the game ball into the first starting port 44, the player can obtain a benefit.

Furthermore, the configuration of the above embodiment and the configuration shown in this modification may be combined. That is, the electric accessory 44a may operate in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. For example, based on the jackpot type of the first starting slot game corresponding to the special bonus process, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. You may decide whether to operate it. More specifically, if the jackpot type of the first starting opening game round corresponding to the special bonus process is a 10R certain probability variable jackpot or a 10R specific probability variable jackpot, during the support mode transition period, the electric accessory 44a is If the jackpot type of the game round for the first start opening corresponding to the special bonus process is 8R normal jackpot when the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. You may adopt the structure which operates. In this way, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of benefits that the player can acquire during the special bonus processing period.

In addition, as the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, in addition to the first operation mode and the second operation mode, a further different operation mode may be executable. Then, for example, based on the jackpot type of the first start opening game corresponding to the special bonus process, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether to operate or to operate in another operation mode. In this way, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of benefits that the player can acquire during the special bonus processing period. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player who recognizes the electric accessory 44a make various guesses during the support mode transition period, giving the player a sense of anticipation.

<<C>> Third embodiment:
《C1》Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained. Note that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the presentation effect by lighting up or blinking when the pachinko machine 10 performs a winning lottery, winning a winning, reaching a reach, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." In the following explanation, the case where the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25, and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also flows down the left side of the game board will be referred to as the case where the player It is sometimes expressed as ``hit''. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a through gate 35, a special figure starting opening 51, a special electric starting opening 52, a normal electric accessory 53, a first variable winning device 54, and a second variable winning device 55. . Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The special figure starting opening 51 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The special figure starting port 51 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed.

The first variable winning device 54 includes a first big winning opening 54a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 54b that opens and closes the first big winning opening 54a. The first opening/closing door 54b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big prize opening 54a. When a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). When a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 is executed. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable prize winning device 54 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter, and also in a predetermined manner. After the conditions are met, the state transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first big prize opening 54a of the first variable winning device 54, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery for operating the normal electric accessory 53. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery). If the electric role release is won as a result of the internal lottery, the normal electric role accessory 53 shifts to an electric role release state in which it operates in a predetermined manner. Note that up to four game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 are held.

The normal electric accessory 53 includes a movable piece 53a, a convex portion 53b arranged on the movable piece 53a, and a movable piece drive section 53c. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 53 will be explained.

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 53. FIG. 161(a) shows the ordinary electric accessory 53 in a closed state. When a game ball passes through the through gate 35 and an electric role is won in the electric role release lottery executed as a trigger, the movable piece 53a moves to the front side of the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 161(b). (hereinafter also referred to as opening). As shown in FIG. 161(c), the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the special electric start opening 52. Further, a convex portion 53b is arranged on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, and adjusts the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a.

The special electric start opening 52 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter. The special electric start opening 52 is provided below the special figure start opening 51 in the center of the game board 30. When a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the second variable prize winning device 55 operates according to a predetermined operation pattern. The operation pattern of the second variable winning device 55 when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 will be described later. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball.

The second variable winning device 55 includes a second big winning opening 55a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a second opening/closing door 55b that opens and closes the second big winning opening 55a. The second opening/closing door 55b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second big prize opening 55a. When a game ball enters the special electric start opening 52, the main control device 60 executes the opening/closing process of the second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable prize winning device 55. Specifically, the second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable winning device 55 transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and after a predetermined condition is met. , transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 55a of the second variable winning device 55, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a special symbol display section 37a. The special symbol display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The special symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying special symbols. The special symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special symbol starting port 51. The special symbol display section 37a, when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special symbol starting port 51, displays the following display modes until the segment display unit displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A variable display or a predetermined display of special symbols is caused. When the lottery ends, the special symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display section 37a starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed is referred to as a variable time. Specifically, the time period from when the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display section 37a starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed is referred to as a variable time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a reservation display section 37c made of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the special symbol display section 37a.

The reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the special figure start opening 51 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the special figure starting port 51 are held.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a game ball passing through the through gate 35 triggers an electric accessory opening lottery, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a flashing display, or a predetermined display mode as a display mode. . When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is played until either of the following conditions are met: a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the first grand prize opening 54a. , is a game in which the first opening/closing door 54b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the special symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the special symbol starting port 51, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to displaying fluctuating symbols or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special pattern starting hole 51, but also during an opening/closing execution mode that shifts to when a jackpot is won. There will also be performances and displays. The details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 162(a) is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a pattern corresponding to the special pattern displayed on the special pattern display section 37a.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), the liquid crystal display device 41 displays symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 in a variable manner as liquid crystal symbols. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 162(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Images of liquid crystal symbols are displayed in the main display area MA.

Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, symbols numbered 1 to 8 as liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 162(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom. A variable display that scrolls from the bottom to the top is performed. As shown in FIG. 162(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the special pattern start opening 51, a variable display is started in which the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L1. Note that the mode of the liquid crystal symbols in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-mentioned mode. For example, various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols on the liquid crystal, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. be.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 162(b), a hold display area Ds is displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the reservation display area Ds, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the special figure starting port 51 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the special figure starting port 51 is up to four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162(b), the display surface 41a performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. It is equipped with a synchronization display section Sync. Specifically, when the special symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the synchronization display section Sync displays a blinking display, and when the special symbol display section 37a displays a stop display, the synchronization display section Sync displays a flashing display. Displays a lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA and the synchronization display section Sync, but the display surface 41a may be configured to not display some or all of these displays. Good too.

《C2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are various winning ports such as a general winning opening 32, a through gate 35, a special figure starting opening 51, a special electric starting opening 52, a first variable winning device 54, and a second variable winning device 55. Various detection sensors installed at the ball mouth and through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a first variable winning drive section 54c that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54, and a second variable winning drive section 54c that opens and closes the second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable winning device 55. The second variable winning drive unit 55c that causes the winnings to be played is connected to the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first variable prize winning drive unit 54c so that the first opening/closing door 54b is opened and closed. Further, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the special electric start opening 52, the drive control of the second variable prize winning drive unit 55c is executed so that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, if an electric role is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the normal electric accessory drive unit 53c so that the ordinary electric accessory 53 operates (releases). Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the special symbol display section 37a in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, executes display control of the round display section 39 on the main display section 45. .

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the special figure starting opening 51. When the entry of three game balls is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of game balls into the special electric starting port 52 is identified. is 15 when a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60 and it is specified that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 54a and the second big winning hole 55a. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of each game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , whether or not a reach is occurring, the content of the reach effect, the content of the effect executed while the liquid crystal pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, etc. are grasped. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the special symbol display section 37a of the main display section 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory opening lottery to decide whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 53.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A reservation area Ra is provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry is set to the reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. are stored in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51. Ru.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether it is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not.

In addition, in the following explanation, the game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51 will be referred to as a game round. A game round is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the winning lottery result for the jackpot random number counter C1 as special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting hole 51. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the winning lottery result for one piece of special information (jackpot random number counter C1) every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information (jackpot random number counter C1) based on the entry of a game ball into the special pattern starting port 51, the special pattern display section 37a displays a segment in each game. After the display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information (jackpot random number counter C1). Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information (jackpot random number counter C1) based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure starting port 51, the following information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game play: After the predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is. Note that the special information includes not only the jackpot random number counter C1 but also the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51. .

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 37a. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and a reach occurs. It is determined whether or not to do so. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination that corresponds to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 162(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol variation time in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display section 37a and at the start of variation of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the variation time in the special symbol display section 37a, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory is released in the electric accessory execution area 64e. Using the value of the counter C4, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state. For example, if C4=0 to 461, the normal electric accessory 53 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=462 to 465, the normal electric accessory 53 is maintained in the closed state.

As described above, at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. do. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reservation area Ra are also called reservation information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores two win/fail tables, a win/fail table for the special figure start opening (for low probability mode) and a win/fail table for the special figure start opening (for high probability mode), in the win/fail table of the ROM 63. It is stored in the storage area 63a.

FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the special figure starting opening. FIG. 165(a) shows the validity table for the special figure starting opening (for low probability mode), and FIG. 165(b) shows the validity table for the special figure starting opening (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 165(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable prize winning device 54 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening/closing control of the first variable prize winning device 54 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)

As a mode of opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) above, the entry of game balls into the first variable winning device 54 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode ( A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of occurrence of winnings (winning) is relatively high or low.

In addition to the above (1) to (3), it is also possible to set up a jackpot that requires execution of a specific process if the player wins. In this embodiment as well, a jackpot is set in which, if a jackpot is won, a bonus is given to the player in addition to the bonus as a round game. In this embodiment, a benefit given to a player other than the benefit of a round game is also referred to as a "special bonus." Details of the special bonus will be described later.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the special figure starting opening. The allocation table for the special figure starting hole is referred to when a winning lottery is drawn based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure starting hole 51.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the distribution table for the special figure starting hole, 16R certain variable jackpot, 8R certain variable jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting hole 51. has been done.

In the 16R variable jackpot, the number of openings of the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is This is a high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 16R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, in the 16R probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes a high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, and the normal electric accessory 53 becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Details of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 8R definite variable jackpot, the number of openings of the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is This is a high-frequency winning mode. Further, in the 8R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after that. Furthermore, in the 8R probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes a high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, and the normal electric accessory 53 becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Details of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of openings of the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is This is a high-frequency winning mode. Further, in the 8R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode. In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes a high-frequency support mode, and the normal electric accessory 53 becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. However, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot, the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 50, and if the total number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 50. , the support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the special figure starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 39", "0 to 7" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "7 to 19" correspond to an 8R probability variation jackpot. However, "20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the support mode of the normal electric accessory 53 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game ball continues to be launched into the gaming area PA in the same manner. When compared, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency at which the normal electric accessory 53 becomes open per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is different between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for opening the normal electric accessory 53 once is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the normal electric role object 53 occurs multiple times, the next open state is completed after one open state. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the special electric starting port 52 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the special electric starting port 52. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as a means for assisting the entry of game balls into the special electric starting port 52.

FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 167(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 167(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that results in an electric lottery winning. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 456 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the normal electric role accessory 53 is opened once, and the opening time is 0.5 seconds.

FIG. 167(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 167(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 464 values from 0 to 463 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Two values, 464 to 465, are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and an electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 232/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the normal electric role accessory 53 is opened once, and the opening time is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the special electric starting port 52 is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery success/failure table.

《C3》Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 168.

FIG. 168 is a time chart showing an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when a player plays a game. This time chart shows the game times, opening/closing execution mode flag, opening/closing processing period flag, high frequency support mode flag, high probability mode flag, and each state of the first opening/closing door. A game round is executed by entering the game ball into the special figure starting port 51. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag for specifying execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends. The opening/closing processing period flag turns ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and actually performs opening/closing processing of the first opening/closing door 54b in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and turns OFF when the opening/closing processing ends. The high-frequency support mode flag turns ON when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, and turns OFF when the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The high probability mode flag turns ON when the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and turns OFF when the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. The opening/closing process of the first opening/closing door 54b is executed during the round game.

When the player starts playing the game, the player operates the operating handle 25 to cause the game board 30 to fire the game ball and enter the game ball into the special figure starting port 51. When a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, a game round is executed by the pachinko machine 10. The game times U1 and U2 shown in the drawings indicate game times that were "lost" in the winning lottery. A game round U3 that started from time T1 indicates a game round in which a jackpot was won in the winning lottery. In game round U3, after the reach effect is executed, the player is informed that he has won a jackpot as a lottery result of the winning lottery. In the example shown in FIG. 168, an 8R probability-variable jackpot was won in game round U3.

When the game round U3 in which the 8R probability variable jackpot is won at time T2 ends, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned from OFF to ON. That is, after the end of the game round U3 in which the winning lottery was won, the opening/closing execution mode is started.

At time T2, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and from time T3, the opening/closing process period flag is turned ON, and the opening/closing process of the first opening/closing door 54b is executed. In this embodiment, the opening period is the period from when the opening/closing execution mode is started until the opening/closing process period is started, that is, until the opening/closing door of the first variable winning device 54 actually performs the opening/closing operation. call. That is, the opening period is from time T2 to time T3. During the opening period, a performance (hereinafter also referred to as opening performance) is performed. In this embodiment, as the opening performance, a performance suggesting that a round game is started in which the first opening/closing door 54b opens and closes is performed. After the opening period ends, from time T3, a round game in which the first opening/closing door 54b is opened/closed is started, the first opening/closing door 54b performs the opening/closing operation, and the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 54a. It becomes a state. When a round game is executed, the player can easily enter the game ball into the first opening/closing door 54b and obtain a prize ball. That is, the round game is positioned as a privilege resulting from winning a jackpot.

Thereafter, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF and the round game ends. After the opening/closing processing period flag turns OFF, the opening/closing execution mode flag turns OFF at time T4. In this embodiment, the period from when the opening/closing process period flag turns OFF until the opening/closing execution mode flag turns OFF is called an ending period. During the ending period, a performance (hereinafter also referred to as an ending performance) is performed. In this embodiment, as an ending effect, a effect indicating that the opening/closing execution mode ends is performed.

Since the 8R probability variable jackpot was won in the winning lottery in game round U3, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON and the high probability mode flag is also turned ON from time T4. That is, the lottery mode of the game round executed from time T4 is a high probability mode. In this example, as shown in the figure, after the game times that are "missing" in the winning lottery are executed multiple times (gaming times U4 to U7) from time T4, the game times that win the winning lottery are executed from time T5. U8 is executed. In this example, an 8R probability-variable jackpot was won in the winning lottery in game round U8.

When the game round U8 in which the 8R probability variable jackpot was won at time T6 ends, the opening/closing execution mode flag changes from OFF to ON. That is, after the game round U8 in which the winning lottery is completed, the opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, at time T6, the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the high probability mode flag is not switched from ON to OFF at time T6. That is, from time T6, the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. The state of high probability mode and low frequency support mode is also called a latent probability variable state because it is difficult to recognize from the outside that it is a high probability mode. Then, the high probability mode flag changes from ON to OFF at time T7 when the opening/closing process period flag changes from OFF to ON. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the latent probability variable state during the opening period, more specifically, during the period from the end of the game round in which the jackpot hit until the start of the round game. be. In this embodiment, the transition to the latent probability variable state occurs when a jackpot is won in the high probability mode, and the opening period starts after the game round in which the jackpot was won (game round U8 in this example) ends. This is the case. As shown at the bottom of FIG. 168, in this embodiment, the opening period in which the latent probability is variable is also referred to as a "specific period." Furthermore, a period other than the specific period is also referred to as a "non-specific period." In this embodiment, a specific process (hereinafter also referred to as specific process) is executed during a specific period. Details of the specific processing executed during the specific period will be described later. Note that in this embodiment, the term "non-specific period" is used to include both the opening period in which the latent state is not in a variable state and any period other than the opening period. It may also be used to mean only an opening period that is not in a variable state.

From time T7, the high probability mode flag changes from ON to OFF, so the latent probability change state ends. Then, from time T7, the opening/closing processing period flag changes from OFF to ON, and a round game in which the first opening/closing door 54b performs opening/closing operations is started.

After the round game ends, the high frequency support mode is turned from OFF to ON from time T8, and the high probability mode flag is also turned from OFF to ON, and a new game round (game round U9 and game round U10) is started.

Next, specific processing to be executed during a specific period will be explained. First, processing in a non-specific period will be explained as a comparative example, and then processing in a specific period will be explained.

FIG. 169 is a time chart showing an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 during a non-specific period. This time chart includes a high frequency support mode flag, a high probability mode flag, whether or not a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the operation of the normal electric accessory 53, whether or not a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, Also, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b is shown.

In this explanation, as shown in the figure, processing will be explained when the high probability mode flag is ON and the high frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, the processing in the non-specific period in the state of high probability mode and high frequency support mode. do.

When a game ball enters the through gate 35 at time T11, the main control device 60 executes an electric winning lottery. If an electric role opening lottery is won, the normal electric role object 53 operates (opens) at time T12, 2.0 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, and remains open for 1.0 seconds. and assists the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the normal electric accessories 53 are opened for 1.0 seconds 2.0 seconds after a game ball enters the through gate 35. In the case of the low frequency support mode, the normal electric accessories 53 are opened for 0.5 seconds 3.0 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35.

At time T12, the normal electric accessory 53 is in an open state, making it easy for a game ball to enter the special electric starting port 52, and when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 at time T13, the game ball in the special electric starting port 52 The second opening/closing door 55b is opened at time T17, which is 10 seconds after the ball enters the ball. The second opening/closing door 55b is closed on the condition that 5 seconds have elapsed or one game ball enters the second big prize opening 55a. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second big prize opening 55a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, in this embodiment, the entry of game balls into the special electric starting port 52 is not held. That is, a game ball newly enters the special electric starting port 52 between the time a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 and the end of the opening operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entering of the ball. Even so, the opening operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of the game ball is not executed. Incidentally, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52.

Next, specific processing to be executed during a specific period will be explained.

FIG. 170 is a time chart showing an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 during a specific period. As mentioned above, the state is in a latent and variable state during a specific period. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the high frequency support mode flag is OFF and the high probability mode flag is ON. The specific period described in this example corresponds to the period between time T6 and time T7 in FIG. 168. In other words, the opening/closing processing period (the period during which the round game is executed) starts when the player wins a winning lottery in the high probability mode and starts the opening/closing execution mode after the game round in which the jackpot was won ends. This is the period until the

When a game ball enters the through gate 35 at time T21 of the specific period, the main control device 60 executes an electric winning lottery. If you win the electric role opening lottery, the normal electric role object 53 operates (opens) at time T22, 3.0 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, and remains in the open state for 0.5 seconds. and assists the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52. Since the specific period is in a latent probability change state and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, the normal electric accessories 53 will be 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35 as described above. Open for seconds.

At time T22, the normal electric accessory 53 is in an open state, making it easy for game balls to enter the special electric starting port 52, and at time T23, when the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52. The second opening/closing door 55b is opened at time T24, which is 0.5 seconds after the ball enters the ball. In the non-specific period, which is the comparative example in FIG. The second opening/closing door 55b is opened 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters. In the process performed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the major difference between the process in the non-specific period and the process in the specific period is the time from the game ball in the special electric start opening 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b opens.

During the specific period, the second opening/closing door 55b is opened at time T24, which is 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, so the special electric starting port 52 suspends the entry of the game ball. Even if you do not do so, the next time a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of a game ball into the previous special electric starting port 52 will have already been completed. There is a high possibility that the second opening/closing door 55b will be opened by the game ball entering the next special electric starting port 52. That is, in the specific period, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b is performed more often per unit time than in the non-specific period, and the player receives the game ball as a prize ball more than in the non-specific period. A lot is paid out. The payout of game balls to the player by the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b during this specific period is positioned as a benefit resulting from winning the jackpot.

During a specific period, the process in which the second opening/closing door 55b is opened 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 is a specific process, and the benefits given to the player during the specific period are called a special bonus. Also called. The longer the specific period is, the more likely it is that the second opening/closing door 55b will be opened when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, and as a result, the bonus will be given to the player. The amount of special bonuses awarded will also increase. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the length of the specific period is set for each jackpot type in the game round in which the jackpot was won immediately before the start of the specific period, and the length of each set specific period is different. In this embodiment, in the game round where the jackpot was won immediately before the start of the specific period, if the 16R probability variable jackpot is won, the specific period is 20 seconds, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot is won, the specific period is 30 seconds. In the case of winning the 8R normal jackpot, the specific period is 40 seconds. That is, the more advantageous the jackpot type is to the player, the shorter the specific period is. In other words, the longer the specific period is for the type of jackpot that is less advantageous to the player, and the more likely the amount of special bonus that the player can obtain in the specific period will be. By setting the length of the specific period in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation when winning a winning lottery, regardless of the type of jackpot.

As a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the length of the specific period is set constant regardless of the jackpot type, or a configuration in which the length of the specific period is set depending on whether the jackpot type is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot. may be adopted.

The main control device 60 in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment controls the time from when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 to when the second opening/closing door 55b is opened, depending on whether it is a specific period or not. This is done by determining whether or not the state is in a latent state. More specifically, based on the state of the high-probability mode flag and the state of the high-frequency support mode flag, the time from when the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 to when the second opening/closing door 55b is opened is controlled. It is carried out.

In this way, when a player wins a jackpot, in addition to executing a round game as a bonus, by giving a special bonus as a bonus during the opening period before the round game, the player is placed in a high probability mode. It is possible to give the player a greater sense of anticipation for winning the jackpot at the time of the event.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the specific period in which the latent probability is variable during the opening period, a performance exclusive to the specific period (also referred to as a special bonus performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority during the period in which the special bonus is given, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<<C4>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sc0101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entrance detection information) is saved. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0102.

In step Sc0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0103.

In step Sc0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in normal processing (FIG. 178), which will be described later.

In step Sc0104, the ball entering process for the special figure starting hole is executed when the ball enters the special figure starting hole 51. Details of the ball entry process for the special figure starting port in step Sc0104 will be described later. After executing step Sc0104, the process advances to step Sc0105.

In step Sc0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sc0105 will be described later. After executing step Sc0105, the process advances to step Sc0106.

In step Sc0106, ball entry processing for the special electric starting port is executed. Details of the ball entry process for the special electric starting port in step Sc0106 will be described later. After executing step Sc0106, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening will be explained. The ball entry process for the special figure starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 171: Sc0104).

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening. In step Sc0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the special figure starting hole 51 (starting winning) or not based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special figure starting hole 51. In step Sc0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the special figure starting port 51 (Sc0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sc0203. On the other hand, in step Sc0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the special figure starting port 51 (Sc0201: NO), the ball entering process for the special figure starting port is immediately terminated.

In step Sc0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the special figure starting port 51. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0204.

In step Sc0204, it is determined whether or not the start pending number RaN, which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the pending area Ra, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sc0204, if the starting pending number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (Sc0204: NO), the ball entry process for this special figure starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sc0204, if the start pending number RaN is less than the upper limit (Sc0204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0205, where 1 is added to the start pending number RaN, and then the process proceeds to step Sc0206.

In step Sc0206, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sc0103 (FIG. 171), and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 178) is It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 was added in step Sc0205. After executing step Sc0206, the process advances to step Sc0207.

In step Sc0207, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (reservation information). This is a process in which determinations are made of the type of game, the presence or absence of a reach, the variation time of game rounds, etc., before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sc0207, the process advances to step Sc0208.

In step Sc0208, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS. ) as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that a ball has entered the special figure starting port 51 and the judgment result (earlier judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the hold information acquired based on the entered ball, and the hold information is under the main control. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the winning lottery before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the special figure starting port 51, the sound emission control device 90 changes the display in the hold display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 to increase the number of hold pieces. A command for making the corresponding change is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the pending display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of pending symbols.

After executing step Sc0208, the main side MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 172: Sc0207) of the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As mentioned above, the preliminary judgment process is based on the pending information, and the pending information is used to determine whether or not the winning lottery is correct, to determine the type of jackpot, to determine whether reach has occurred, to determine the fluctuating time of the game, etc. This is a process executed before becoming a target of the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sc0301, jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sc0301, the process advances to step Sc0302.

In step Sc0302, variation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process for determining the variation time of the game. Details of the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step Sc0302, the primary determination process is ended.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be explained. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the advance determination process (FIG. 173: Sc0301).

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step Sc0401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the special figure starting hole 51 in the ball entering process for the special figure starting hole (FIG. 172) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc0402, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and the judgment result of the winning lottery performed before the winning lottery by the current ball entering is read out from the corresponding storage area. By determining the lottery result, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step Sc0402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sc0402: YES), the process advances to step Sc0403 and the win/fail table is stored. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc0405, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sc0402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sc0402: NO), the process advances to step Sc0404, and the high probability mode is selected. As a result of referring to the winning/failure table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc0405, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sc0405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sc0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0406, and is memorized by the ball entering the special symbol starting port 51 this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the area is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc0407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, the jackpot type counter stored in the storage area due to the current ball entering the special pattern starting hole 51 is determined by referring to the special pattern starting hole distribution table and comparing it with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Identify the jackpot type corresponding to C2. After executing step Sc0407, the process advances to step Sc0408.

In step Sc0408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, the identified jackpot type is stored as jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sc0405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sc0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0409, and the current entry into the special figure starting port 51 is The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the ball is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc0410, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0411, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sc0411, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sc0411: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0412, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sc0411, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach occurrence is not supported (Sc0411: NO), the first determination process is directly terminated.

<Fluctuating time information acquisition process>
Next, the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be explained. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 173: Sc0302).

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating time information acquisition process. In step Sc0501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the special figure starting hole in the special figure starting hole entry process (FIG. 172) is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0502.

In step Sc0502, it is determined whether the winning lottery related to the current game round is a winning result. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a jackpot (Sc0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0503.

In step Sc0503, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step Sc0503, the process advances to step Sc0507.

In step Sc0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sc0502, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot (step Sc0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0504, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs. In step Sc0504, if it is determined that reach occurs (Sc0504: YES), the process advances to step Sc0505.

In step Sc0505, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc0507, and after storing the obtained variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

In step Sc0504, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Sc0504: NO), the process advances to step Sc0506, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is read. With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc0507, and after storing the obtained variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the larger the value of the start pending number RaN is, the shorter the variation time is. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to differs depending on the value of the start pending number RaN when determining the fluctuation time of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is configured such that the larger the value of the start pending number RaN is, the shorter the variation time is. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the number of pending start-ups RaN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the start-up pending number RaN is smaller.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 171: Step Sc0105).

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sc0601, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (passed) the through gate 35 or not. In step Sc0601, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sc0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0602, and whether or not the number SN of accessory items held is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc0601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sc0601: NO), the main through ball entry process is ended.

In step Sc0602, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sc0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0603, where 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. After that, the process advances to step Sc0604.

In step Sc0604, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Sc0103 (FIG. 171) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sc0602, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items held SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sc0602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number SN of accessory items held is the upper limit value, the electric The through ball entry process is ended without storing the value of the accessory opening counter C4.

<Ball entry processing for special electric starting port>
Next, the entry process for the special electric starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the special electric starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 171: Step Sc0106).

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the special electric starting port. In step Sc0701, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the special electric starting port 52 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special electric starting port 52.

In step Sc0701, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the special electric starting port 52 (Sc0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0702, and a prize ball command is issued to make the payout control device 70 pay out one game ball. Set. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0703. On the other hand, in step Sc0701, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the special electric starting port 52 (Sc0701: NO), the ball entry process for the special electric starting port is immediately terminated.

In step Sc0703, it is determined whether the special electric operation flag is ON. The special electric activation flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the special electric start port 52, and the second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable winning device 55 is triggered by the game ball entering the special electric start port 52. This is a flag that turns OFF when the opening/closing operation is completed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port 52 has not been completed, the next game to the special electric starting port 52 is started. In order to avoid opening/closing operations of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of a ball, a special electric activation flag is provided.

In step Sc0703, if it is determined that the special electric operation flag is not ON (Sc0703: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0704. On the other hand, in step Sc0703, if it is determined that the special electric activation flag is ON (Sc0703: YES), the ball entry process for the special electric starting port is immediately terminated.

In step Sc0704, the special electric operation flag is turned ON. After executing step Sc0704, the process advances to step Sc0705.

In step Sc0705, a special electric starting entrance ball entry command is set. The special electric start entrance ball entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process described later. When the sound emission control device 90 receives the special electric start opening ball entry command, it executes an effect that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the special electric start opening 52.

After executing step Sc0705, the ball entry process for the special electric starting port is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sc0801, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0802.

In step Sc0802, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sc0803.

In step Sc0803, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sc0802, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, etc., is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sc0803, the process advances to step Sc0804.

In step Sc0804, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0805.

In step Sc0805, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sc0806. In step Sc0806, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the special symbol display section 37a, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sc0806, the process advances to step Sc0807.

In step Sc0807, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0808.

In step Sc0808, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. In the electrical support process, it is determined whether or not the movable piece 53a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc0809.

In step Sc0809, the process for the second big prize opening is executed. The process for the second big prize opening is a process for opening and closing the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the game ball entering the special electric start opening 52. The details of the process for the second major prize opening will be described later. After executing step Sc0809, the process advances to step Sc0810.

In step Sc0810, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sc0803). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sc0810, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sc0810: NO), in step Sc0811 and step Sc0812, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sc0811, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sc0812, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc0810 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sc0810: YES), the process returns to step Sc0803 and each process from step Sc0803 to step Sc0809 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sc0803 to step Sc0809 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 178: Sc0806) of the normal process.

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sc0901, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing execution mode and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON in step Sc0901 (Sc0901: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the main game round control is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sc0902. Finish the process. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the special figure starting port 51 or not. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc0901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sc0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0902.

In step Sc0902, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol display section 37a is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when the special symbol display section 37a starts fluctuating display, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

In step Sc0902, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (Sc0902: NO), the process proceeds to steps Sc0903 to Sc0905 for starting the game round. In step Sc0903, it is determined whether or not the start pending number RaN is "0". The case where the starting pending number RaN is "0" means that the pending number of special symbols starting opening 51 is "0". Therefore, in step Sc0903, if it is determined that the start pending number RaN is "0" (Sc0903: YES), this game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc0903 that the start pending number RaN is not "0" (Sc0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0904.

In step Sc0904, data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the reservation area Ra to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Sc0905. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sc0905, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sc0905, this game round control process is ended.

In step Sc0902, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (Sc0902: YES), the processing for progressing the game round in steps Sc0906 to Sc0915 is executed.

In step Sc0906, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sc0906, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 182) described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sc0906, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sc0906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0907, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step Sc0907, the game time control process ends.

In step Sc0906, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sc0906: YES), the process advances to step Sc0908 and a fluctuation end process is executed. The variation end process changes the symbol display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 181) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. Control display. After executing step Sc0908, the process advances to step Sc0909.

In step Sc0909, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag) is ON. In step Sc0909, if any jackpot flag is ON (Sc0909: YES), the process advances to step Sc0910.

In step Sc0910, the opening/closing execution flag is turned on. After that, the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sc0909, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sc0909: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0911.

In step Sc0911, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. After executing step Sc0911, the process advances to step Sc0912.

In step Sc0912, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. In step Sc0912, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode (Sc0912: NO), the game round control process is directly ended.

In step Sc0912, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sc0912: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0913, and it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC is 0 or not.

In step Sc0913, if it is determined that the value of the number of games counter PNC is not 0 (Sc0913: NO), the game number control process is directly ended. If it is determined in step Sc0913 that the value of the number of games counter PNC is 0 (Sc0913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0914 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sc0915, and a low frequency support mode command is set. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The audio emission control device 90 that has received the low-frequency support mode command recognizes that the support mode has shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and executes an effect corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sc0915, the game time control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 179: Sc0904) of the game time control process.

FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step Sc1001, the start reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sc1002.

In step Sc1002, the data stored in the first area of the reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sc1003.

In step Sc1003, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sc1003, the process advances to step Sc1004.

In step Sc1004, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted.

The shift command set in step Sc1004 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in normal processing (FIG. 178). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 for changing the display in the pending display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of pending symbols. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the pending display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the pending number. After executing step Sc1004, the data setting process ends.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 179: Sc0905) of the game time control process.

FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sc1101, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In step Sc1101, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sc1101: YES), the process advances to step Sc1102.

In step Sc1102, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the special symbol start opening shown in FIG. 165(b). After that, the process advances to step Sc1104. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1101 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sc1101: NO), the process advances to step Sc1103.

In step Sc1103, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is set as a jackpot win in the win/fail table (for low probability mode) for the special symbol start opening shown in FIG. 165(a). Determine whether it matches the value. After that, the process advances to step Sc1104.

In step Sc1104, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sc1102 or step Sc1103 is a jackpot win. In step Sc1104, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sc1104: YES), the process advances to step Sc1105.

In step Sc1105, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the special figure starting opening (FIG. 166). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. do. After executing step Sc1105, the process advances to step Sc1106.

In step Sc1106, a corresponding stop result setting process for jackpot is executed. Specifically, this is a process for setting which stop result will be displayed on the special symbol display section 37a in the current game round in which a jackpot will be won to end the variable display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sc1105 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sc1106, the process advances to step Sc1107.

In step Sc1107, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sc1105 is turned on. Specifically, if it is a 16R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 16R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 8R certain strange jackpot flag, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on. After that, the process advances to step Sc1110.

On the other hand, in step Sc1104, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sc1102 or step Sc1103 is not a jackpot (Sc1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1108, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the same as the value set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not it is correct.

In step Sc1108, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the game round (Sc1108: YES), the process advances to step Sc1109.

In step Sc1109, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the special symbol display section 37a in the current game round, which is the stop result for reach, to end the variable display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sc1109, the process advances to step Sc1111.

In step Sc1108, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (Sc1108: NO), the process advances to step Sc1110.

In step Sc1110, a stop result setting process for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for failure is a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the special symbol display section 37a in the current game round where the result is a failure and the variable display is to be ended. . Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sc1110, the process advances to step Sc1111.

In step Sc1111, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting a variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the special symbol display section 37a, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sc1110, the process advances to step Sc1112.

In step Sc1112, a variation command is set. The fluctuation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the special figure starting port 51, and also includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. It includes information and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sc1111. After executing step Sc1112, the process advances to step Sc1113.

In step Sc1113, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of a reach. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, including information on 16R probability variable jackpot, information on 8R probability variation jackpot, information on 8R normal jackpot, or information on whether reach occurs or not, and information on miss results. .

The variation command and type command set in steps Sc1112 and Sc1113 are sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sc1113, the process advances to step Sc1114.

In step Sc1114, the special symbol display section 37a starts displaying a variable symbol. After executing step Sc1114, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 181: Sc1111).

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sc1201, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1202.

In step Sc1202, it is determined whether the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag) in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, (Sc1202: YES), the process advances to step Sc1203.

In step Sc1203, with reference to the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc1207, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sc1202, if it is determined that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot (Sc1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1204, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (Sc1204) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game round has not won a jackpot in the above step Sc1202, in step Sc1204, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Sc1204: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sc1205. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sc1205, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc1207, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sc1204, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sc1204: NO), proceed to step Sc1206, and refer to the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1207, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set so that the larger the value of the start pending number RaN is, the shorter the variation time is. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to differs depending on the value of the start pending number RaN when determining the fluctuation time of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is configured such that the larger the value of the start pending number RaN is, the shorter the variation time is. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the number of pending start-ups RaN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the start-up pending number RaN is smaller.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 178: Sc0807) of the normal process.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sc1301, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sc1301, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (Sc1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1302, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

In step Sc1302, if it is determined that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sc1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1303, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sc1303 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sc1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1304, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game round that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In step Sc1304, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sc1304: YES), the process advances to step Sc1305. On the other hand, in step Sc1304, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sc1304: NO), the game state transition process is ended.

In step Sc1305, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the support mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sc1305, the process advances to step Sc1306.

In step Sc1306, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low frequency support mode command is a command that notifies the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode has shifted to the low frequency support mode. After executing step Sc1306, the process advances to step Sc1307.

In step Sc1307, an opening/closing execution mode command is set. The opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to winning a jackpot. The opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. After executing step Sc1307, the process advances to step Sc1308.

In step Sc1308, the opening/closing scenario setting process for the first big prize opening is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the first opening/closing door 54b in a round game is set. Specifically, when winning the 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening/closing pattern is set in which the first opening/closing door 54b opens/closes 16 times. In the case of winning the 8R probability variable jackpot and in the case of winning the 8R normal jackpot, an opening/closing pattern is set in which the first opening/closing door 54b performs eight opening/closing operations. After executing step Sc1308, the process advances to step Sc1309.

In step Sc1309, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the opening time to be set is determined based on the type of jackpot. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sc1309, the process advances to step Sc1310.

In step Sc1310, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). This opening command includes information regarding the jackpot that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode, such as information on the set opening time and information on the type of jackpot. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sc1310, the process advances to step Sc1311 and the opening period flag is turned on. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1303 that the opening period flag is ON (Sc1303: YES), the process advances to step Sc1312.

In step Sc1312, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter set in the opening time setting process is "0". In step Sc1312, if it is determined that the opening period has ended (Sc1312: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1313 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1314. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1312 that the opening period has not ended, the gaming state transition process is directly ended.

In step Sc1314, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step Sc1314, the process advances to step Sc1315.

In step Sc1315, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1316.

In step Sc1316, the high probability mode flag is turned off. As explained in FIG. 168, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are ON in the game round in which the jackpot was won, which triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, In this case, the high probability mode flag is turned off later than the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF. Specifically, the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF in step Sc1305 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, but the high probability mode flag is turned ON in step Sc1316 after it is determined in step Sc1312 that the opening period has ended. Turn it off. In this embodiment, by executing such processing, the opening period is brought into a latent probability variable state, and is set as a specific period. After executing step Sc1316, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sc1302, if it is determined that the opening/closing processing period flag is ON (Sc1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1317, and the first big prize opening opening/closing process is executed. The first big prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sc1317, the process advances to step Sc1318.

In step Sc1318, it is determined whether or not the first big winning hole opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the first big winning hole opening/closing process has ended (Sc1318: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1319. On the other hand, in step Sc1318, if it is determined that the first grand prize opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sc1318: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sc1319, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sc1320.

In step Sc1320, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sc1320, the process advances to step Sc1321.

In step Sc1321, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter for counting the ending time. After executing step Sc1321, the process advances to step Sc1322.

In step Sc1322, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 184). The audio emission control device 90 starts a production corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sc1322, the process advances to step Sc1323.

In step Sc1323, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sc1301, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sc1301: YES), the process advances to step Sc1324.

In step Sc1324, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sc1321), it is determined whether the value of the timer counter set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sc1324 that the value of the timer counter set as the ending time is "0" (Sc1324: YES), the process advances to step Sc1325.

In step Sc1325, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sc1326, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sc1326, the process advances to step Sc1327 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1328, and an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sc1324, if it is determined that the value of the timer counter set as the ending time is not "0" (Sc1324: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: Sc1309) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step Sc1401, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. At the timing of executing this process, the high-frequency support mode flag has already been turned OFF in step Sc1305, and the low-frequency support mode is set. Therefore, step Sc1401 determines whether the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode to be executed is the low frequency support mode and high probability mode, or the low frequency support mode and low probability mode. In other words, it is determined whether or not the state is in a state of latent probability change.

In step Sc1401, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON, that is, the latent probability variable state is determined (Sc1401: YES), the process advances to step Sc1402.

In step Sc1402, an opening time for a special bonus corresponding to the jackpot type is set. As described above, in this embodiment, the opening period, which is in the latent probability variable state, is used as a specific period, and a process is executed in which a special bonus is given to the player. Therefore, an opening time for special bonuses is set. As described above, in this embodiment, if a 16R probability-variable jackpot is won in the game round in which a jackpot is won immediately before the start of the specific period, the opening time (specific period) is 20 seconds, and an 8R probability-variable jackpot is won. In this case, the opening time is 30 seconds, and in the case of winning the 8R normal jackpot, the opening time is 40 seconds. That is, the more advantageous the jackpot type is to the player, the shorter the specific period is. In other words, the longer the specific period is for the type of jackpot that is less advantageous to the player, and the more likely the amount of special bonus that the player can obtain in the specific period will be. By setting the length of the specific period in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation when winning a winning lottery, regardless of the type of jackpot.

After executing step Sc1402, the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sc1401, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON, that is, the latent probability variable state is not determined (Sc1401: NO), the process advances to step Sc1403.

In step Sc1403, an opening time for a non-special bonus is set. In this embodiment, the opening time set during the opening period in which no special bonus is given is constant and is 20 seconds regardless of the type of jackpot. That is, the opening time is 20 seconds in the case of winning a 16R probability variable jackpot, winning an 8R probability variation jackpot, or winning an 8R regular jackpot in a game round in which a jackpot is won immediately before the start of the opening period. After executing step Sc1403, the opening time setting process ends.

<First prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the first big prize opening opening/closing process will be explained. The first big prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 183: Sc1317).

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening/closing process. In step Sc1501, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 54b is open. If it is determined in step Sc1501 that the first opening/closing door 54b is not open (Sc1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1502.

In step Sc1502, it is determined whether the opening conditions of the set opening/closing scenario are satisfied. Specifically, in addition to counting the number of rounds to be executed, a timer counter is used to count whether the time for maintaining the closed state of the first opening/closing door 54b has elapsed and the timing to open it has been reached in the round being executed. , it is determined whether the conditions for shifting the first opening/closing door 54b to the open state are satisfied. In step Sc1502, if it is determined that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sc1502: NO), this first grand prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1502 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sc1502: YES), the process advances to step Sc1503.

In step Sc1503, the first opening/closing door 54b is opened. After executing step Sc1503, the process advances to step Sc1504.

In step Sc1504, a first opening/closing door opening command is set. The first opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal processing. The audio light emitting device that has received the first opening/closing door opening command executes settings for executing an effect for opening the first opening/closing door. After that, the first big prize opening opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1501 that the first opening/closing door 54b is not open (Sc1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1505.

In step Sc1505, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the first opening/closing door 54b are satisfied. The closing condition for the first opening/closing door 54b is that either "seven game balls have entered the first big prize opening 54a in the open state" or "10 seconds have elapsed in the open state". It is to be. In step Sc1505, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sc1505: NO), the first big prize opening opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1505 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sc1505: YES), the process advances to step Sc1506.

In step Sc1506, the first opening/closing door 54b is closed. After executing step Sc1506, the process advances to step Sc1507.

In step Sc1507, a first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The sound emitting device that has received the first opening/closing door closing command executes settings for executing an effect for closing the first opening/closing door. After that, the first big prize opening opening/closing process ends.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: Sc1326) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sc1601, it is determined whether the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a probability-variable jackpot. Specifically, when the probability variable jackpot flag (in this embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the trigger for transitioning to the current opening/closing execution mode is It is determined that it is a guaranteed jackpot.

In step Sc1601, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a probability-variable jackpot (Sc1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1602. On the other hand, in step Sc1601, if it is determined that the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not due to a variable jackpot (Sc1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1607.

In step Sc1602, the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process is executed to turn off the ON flags among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag. After executing step Sc1602, the process advances to step Sc1603.

In step Sc1603, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step Sc1603, the process advances to step Sc1604.

In step Sc1604, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode. After executing step Sc1604, the process advances to step Sc1605.

In step Sc1605, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1606, where a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

In step Sc1601, if it is determined that the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not due to a variable jackpot (Sc1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1607 and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sc1607, the process advances to step Sc1608.

In step Sc1608, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The low probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. After executing step Sc1608, the process advances to step Sc1609.

In step Sc1609, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc1610, and 50 is set as a counter value in the number of games counter PNC. After executing step Sc1610, the process advances to step Sc1611.

In step Sc1611, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 178: Sc0808).

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sc1701, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flags in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are ON. The support flag is a flag that is normally turned ON when the electrically powered accessory 53 is placed in the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 53 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sc1701 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sc1701: NO), the process advances to step Sc1702.

In step Sc1702, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. In step Sc1702, if it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (Sc1702: NO), the process advances to step Sc1703.

In step Sc1703, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sc1703, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc1703: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sc1703: YES), the process advances to step Sc1704.

In step Sc1704, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sc1704, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sc1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1705, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1704 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sc1704: NO), the process advances to step Sc1706.

In step Sc1706, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sc1706, if it is determined that the value of the accessory reserve number SN is "0" (Sc1706: NO), the electronic accessory support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1706 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sc1706: YES), the process advances to step Sc1707.

In step Sc1707, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sc1708, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sc1707 (Sc1707: NO), and if it is in the high-frequency support mode in step Sc1708 (Sc1708: YES), the process advances to step Sc1709, where an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 463, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. The winner is the winner (see FIG. 167(b)). Furthermore, "1000" (ie, 2.0 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1710.

In step Sc1710, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sc1709 is a support win. In step Sc1710, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sc1710: YES), the process advances to step Sc1711 and the support win flag is turned ON. After executing step Sc1711, the process advances to step Sc1712.

In step Sc1712, a high-frequency support mode electric role opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, if you win the electric accessory opening lottery during the high-frequency support mode, it is set that the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessory 53 will be performed once, and the normal electric accessory 53 will open and close once. The opening/closing pattern is set to close the normal electric accessory 53 on condition that one second passes in the open state of the electric accessory 53 or one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52. Note that after executing step Sc1712, the electric support support process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sc1707 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sc1707: YES), or if it is determined in step Sc1708 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sc1708: NO), the process advances to step Sc1713.

In step Sc1713, an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. The winner is the winner (see FIG. 167(a)). Moreover, "1500" (ie, 3.0 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1714.

In step Sc1714, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sc1713 is a support win. In step Sc1714, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sc1714: NO), the main electric role support process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in step Sc1714, if it is determined that support has been won (Sc1714: YES), the process advances to step Sc1715 and the support win flag is turned ON. After executing step Sc1715, the process advances to step Sc1716.

In step Sc1716, a low-frequency support mode electric role opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, if you win the electric accessory opening lottery during the low-frequency support mode, it is set that the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessory 53 is performed once, and the normal electric accessory 53 is set to open/close once. The opening/closing pattern is set to close the normal electric accessory 53 on condition that 0.5 seconds elapses in the open state of the electric accessory 53 or one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52. Note that after executing step Sc1716, the electric support support process is ended.

In step Sc1702, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sc1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1717, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sc1717, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc1717: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in the general drawing unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1717 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sc1717: YES), the process advances to step Sc1718.

In step Sc1718, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1719, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sc1701, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sc1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1720, and an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric accessory 53 is executed. Details of the electric role opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sc1720, the process advances to step Sc1721.

In step Sc1721, it is determined whether the electric role opening/closing process has been completed. In step Sc1721, if it is determined that the electric role opening/closing process has not been completed (Sc1721: NO), the electric role supporting process is directly ended. In step Sc1721, if it is determined that the electric role opening/closing process has been completed (Sc1721: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1722, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the electric support support process ends.

<Electric opening/closing process>
Next, the power opening/closing process will be explained. The power opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the power support process (FIG. 187: Sc1720).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening/closing process. In step Sc1801, it is determined whether the normal electric accessory 53 is open. In step Sc1801, if it is determined that the normal electric accessory 53 is not open (Sc1801: NO), the process advances to step Sc1802.

In step Sc1802, it is determined whether the opening conditions of the set opening/closing scenario are satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened when winning one electric role opening lottery is counted, and the time for maintaining the closed state of the ordinary electric accessory 53 has elapsed and the timing to release it has been reached. By counting whether the normal electric accessory 53 has been opened with a timer counter, it is determined whether the conditions for shifting the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state are satisfied. In step Sc1802, if it is determined that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sc1802: NO), the electric role opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1802 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sc1802: YES), the process advances to step Sc1803.

In step Sc1803, the normal electric accessory 53 is brought into an open state. After executing step Sc1803, the process advances to step Sc1804.

In step Sc1804, a power release command is set. The power release command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that receives the electric role release command executes settings for executing the effect for electric role release. After that, the power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1801 that the normal electric accessory 53 is not open (Sc1801: YES), the process advances to step Sc1805.

In step Sc1805, it is determined whether the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 53 is satisfied. Specifically, the conditions for closing the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode are "one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open" or "when the normal electric accessory 53 is open" 1 second has elapsed in the state." The closing condition for the normal electric accessory 53 in the low frequency support mode is ``one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open'' or ``0.5 in the open state. This means that either one of the following holds true. In step Sc1805, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sc1805: NO), the electric role opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1805 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sc1805: YES), the process advances to step Sc1806.

In step Sc1806, the normal electric accessory 53 is brought into a closed state. After executing step Sc1806, the process advances to step Sc1807.

In step Sc1807, a power closure command is set. The power closure command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the electric role closing command executes settings for executing the effect for electric role closing. After that, the power opening/closing process is ended.

<Processing for the 2nd grand prize opening>
Next, the process for the second big winning hole will be explained. The process for the second big prize opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 178: Sc0809) of the normal process.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the process for the second big winning hole. In step Sc1901, it is determined whether the special electric operation flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sc1901 that the special electric activation flag is ON (Sc1901: YES), the process advances to step Sc1902. If it is determined in step Sc1901 that the special electric activation flag is not ON (Sc1901: NO), the process for the second big prize opening is ended as it is.

In step Sc1902, it is determined whether the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is ON. The opening/closing scenario setting completion flag turns ON when the opening/closing scenario for the second grand prize opening is set, and turns OFF when the opening/closing operation of the second grand prize opening 55a according to the set opening/closing scenario is completed. This is the flag. If it is determined in step Sc1902 that the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is not ON (Sc1902: NO), the process advances to step Sc1903.

In step Sc1903, a second winning opening opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. Details of the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sc1903, the process advances to step Sc1904.

In step Sc1902, if it is determined that the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is ON (Sc1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1904 without executing step Sc1903.

In step Sc1904, a second big prize opening opening/closing process is executed. Details of the second grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sc1904, the process advances to step Sc1905.

In step Sc1905, it is determined whether the second big prize opening opening/closing process has been completed. In step Sc1905, if it is determined that the second big prize opening opening/closing process has been completed (Sc1905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1906 and the special electric activation flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sc1906, the process advances to step Sc1907 and the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is turned OFF. After that, the process for the second big prize opening is ended.

In step Sc1905, if it is determined that the second big winning hole opening/closing process has not been completed (Sc1905: NO), the process for the second big winning hole is ended.

<Opening/closing scenario setting process for the second grand prize opening>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second big prize opening will be explained. The second big winning opening opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 189: Sc1903) of the second big winning opening process.

FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second big prize opening. In step Sc2001, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. In step Sc2001, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sc2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2002.

In step Sc2002, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sc2002 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sc2002: NO), the process advances to step Sc2003. Specifically, if the mode is high probability mode and low frequency support mode, that is, if the latent probability variable state is selected, the process advances to step Sc2003.

In step Sc2003, a special bonus opening/closing scenario is set as the opening/closing scenario for the second major winning opening. In the opening/closing scenario for the special bonus, a condition is set as an opening condition that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened 0.5 seconds after the start of the second big prize opening opening/closing process described later. In addition, as a closing condition, a condition is set that the game ball is closed when one game ball enters the second large winning hole 55a in the open state or when 5 seconds have elapsed in the open state. Further, in the special bonus opening/closing scenario, a condition is set that if the opening/closing process for the first major winning opening is being executed, the second major winning opening 55a will not be opened/closed. After executing step Sc2003, the process advances to step Sc2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON in step Sc2001 (Sc2001: NO), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is ON in step Sc2002 (Sc2002: YES), step Proceed to Sc2004. That is, if the state is not in the latent probability variable state (also referred to as the normal state), the process advances to step Sc2004.

In step Sc2004, a normal opening/closing scenario is set as the opening/closing scenario for the second major prize opening. In the normal opening/closing scenario, a condition is set as an opening condition that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened 10 seconds after the start of the second big prize opening opening/closing process described later. In addition, as a closing condition, a condition is set that the game ball is closed when one game ball enters the second large winning hole 55a in the open state or when 5 seconds have elapsed in the open state. Further, in the normal opening/closing scenario, a condition is set that when the opening/closing process for the first major winning opening is being executed, the second major winning opening 55a will not be opened/closed. After executing step Sc2004, the process advances to step Sc2005.

In step Sc2005, the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is turned on. Thereafter, the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second big prize opening is ended.

<Second grand prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the second big prize opening opening/closing process will be explained. The second big winning hole opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 189: Sc1904) of the second big winning hole process.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening opening/closing process. In step Sc2101, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 55b is open. If it is determined in step Sc2101 that the second opening/closing door 55b is not open (Sc2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2102.

In step Sc2102, it is determined whether the opening conditions of the set opening/closing scenario are satisfied. The contents of the opening conditions of the opening/closing scenario for the second big prize opening have been described above in FIG. 190, so a description thereof will be omitted. In step Sc2102, if it is determined that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sc2102: NO), this second grand prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2102 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sc2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2103.

In step Sc2103, the second opening/closing door 55b is opened. After executing step Sc2103, the process advances to step Sc2104.

In step Sc2104, a second opening/closing door opening command is set. The second opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal processing. The sound emitting device that has received the second opening/closing door opening command executes settings for executing an effect for opening the second opening/closing door. After that, the second big prize opening opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2101 that the second opening/closing door 55b is not open (Sc2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2105.

In step Sc2105, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the second opening/closing door 55b are satisfied. The details of the closing conditions of the opening/closing scenario for the second big prize opening have been described above in FIG. 190, so a description thereof will be omitted. In step Sc2105, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sc2105: NO), the second grand prize opening opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2105 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sc2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2106.

In step Sc2106, the second opening/closing door 55b is closed. After executing step Sc2106, the process advances to step Sc2107.

In step Sc2107, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The sound emitting device that has received the second opening/closing door closing command executes settings for executing an effect for closing the second opening/closing door. After that, the second big prize opening opening/closing process ends.

<<C5>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 192 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<C6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sc2201, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sc2201, the process advances to step Sc2202.

In step Sc2202, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process in which the state of the game being executed is stored using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as a flag is used to determine the performance to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step Sc2202, the process advances to step Sc2203.

In step Sc2203, a game rendition process is executed. The process for game round performance is a process for setting the performance in the game round. The details of the game rendition processing will be described later. After executing step Sc2203, the process advances to step Sc2204.

In step Sc2204, opening production processing is executed. The opening production process is a process for setting production during the opening period. Details of the opening presentation processing will be described later. After executing step Sc2204, the process advances to step Sc2205.

In step Sc2205, processing for special electric start entrance ball entry effect is executed. The special electric starting entrance ball entry performance process is a process for setting a performance to be executed when a game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 (hereinafter also referred to as special electric starting entrance ball entrance performance). Details of the processing for special electric starting entrance ball entry effect will be described later. After executing step Sc2205, the process advances to step Sc2206.

In step Sc2206, a second opening/closing door opening production process is executed. The second opening/closing door opening performance process is a process for setting a performance to be performed when the second opening/closing door 55b opens (hereinafter also referred to as a second opening/closing door opening performance). The details of the second opening/closing door opening production process will be described later. After executing step Sc2206, the process advances to step Sc2207.

In step Sc2207, other display processing is executed. Other display processing is processing for executing various display-related settings based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, processing is performed to update the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds. After executing step Sc2207, the process advances to step Sc2208.

In step Sc2208, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes from step Sc2203 to step Sc2207. That is, the various lamps 47 are controlled to emit light so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effects set in steps Sc2203 to Sc2207. After executing step Sc2208, the process advances to step Sc2209.

In step Sc2209, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the processes from step Sc2203 to step Sc2207. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps Sc2203 to Sc2207 is outputted. After executing step Sc2209, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<State memory processing>
Next, state storage processing will be explained. The state storage process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 193: Sc2202).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. In step Sc2301, it is determined whether a high probability mode command has been received. In step Sc2301, if it is determined that a high probability mode command has been received (Sc2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2302, and the sound-light side high probability mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc2303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2301 that the high probability mode command has not been received (Sc2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2303 without executing step Sc2302.

In step Sc2303, it is determined whether a low probability mode command has been received. In step Sc2303, if it is determined that the low probability mode command has been received (Sc2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2304, and the sound-light side high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc2305. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2303 that the low probability mode command has not been received (Sc2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2305 without executing step Sc2304.

In step Sc2305, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode command has been received. If it is determined in step Sc2305 that a high-frequency support command has been received (Sc2305: YES), the process advances to step Sc2306, and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc2307. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2305 that the high-frequency support mode command has not been received (Sc2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2307 without executing step Sc2306.

In step Sc2307, it is determined whether a low frequency support mode command has been received. In step Sc2307, if it is determined that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (Sc2307: YES), the process advances to step Sc2308, and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc2309. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2307 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (Sc2307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2309 without executing step Sc2308.

In step Sc2309, it is determined whether the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON. In step Sc2309, if it is determined that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON (Sc2309: YES), the process advances to step Sc2310.

In step Sc2310, it is determined whether the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode flag is OFF. In step Sc1310, if it is determined that the audio and optical side high-frequency support mode flag is OFF (Sc2310: YES), the process advances to step Sc2311.

In step Sc2311, the latent probability change state flag is turned ON. The latent probability variable state flag is a flag for specifying that the gaming state is in the latent probability variable state. Thereafter, the state storage process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2309 that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is not ON (Sc2309: NO), or if it is determined in step Sc1310 that the sound-light side high frequency support mode flag is not OFF (Sc2310: NO). ), the process advances to step Sc2312. In step Sc2312, the latent probability change state flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the state storage process ends.

In this process, as can be seen from steps Sc2311 and Sc2312, the sound emission control device 90 always identifies whether the state of the game controlled by the main control device 60 is a latent probability variable state.

<Processing for game rendition>
Next, the game rendition processing will be explained. The game play processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 193: Sc2203).

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the game rendition process. In step Sc2401, it is determined whether a fluctuation command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sc2401, if it is determined that a fluctuation command has been received (Sc2401: YES), the process advances to step Sc2402.

In step Sc2402, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is read out. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc2403.

In step Sc2403, a production pattern setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting a performance pattern in the game round to be processed. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sc2403, the process advances to step Sc2404.

In step Sc2404, a process for setting a liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the LCD symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L1 is displayed on the LCD. Set as the information of the symbol for use. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, it is determined from the content of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L1, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L1. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L1, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information for the current LCD pattern. After executing step Sc2404, the process advances to step Sc2405.

In step Sc2405, a game rendition command is sent to the display control device 100. The game performance command is information including the performance pattern set in step Sc2403 and the contents of the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped set in step Sc2404. The display control device 100 that has received the game round performance command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display a performance image and a liquid crystal symbol image based on the information included in the game round command. After executing step Sc2405, the process advances to step Sc2406.

In step Sc2406, pending information update processing is executed. In the process of updating the reservation information, the information in the reservation number counter area is updated so that the number of reservations stored in the reservation number counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sc2408, the game rendition process ends.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The production pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 195: Sc2403) of the game round production process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sc2501, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the effect is set has won a jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot included in the received variation command. In step Sc2501, if it is determined that the game round to be processed has won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sc2501: YES), the process advances to step Sc2502.

In step Sc2502, it is determined whether the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON. In step Sc2502, if it is determined that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON (Sc2502: YES), the process advances to step Sc2503.

In step Sc2503, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is a variable jackpot. In step Sc2503, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is a variable jackpot (Sc2503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2504.

In step Sc2504, a process for setting a production pattern for a special bonus probability variable jackpot is executed. As described above, this process is executed when the high probability mode flag on the sound and light side is ON and the probability-variable jackpot has been won in the game round to be processed. The sound and light side high probability mode flag being ON indicates that the game round to be processed has been executed in the high probability mode. That is, since the jackpot was won during the high probability mode, after the game round ends, the opening period becomes a specific period in which the latent probability is changed, and a special bonus is given to the player. Therefore, in Step Sc2504, the performance pattern to be executed in the game round includes content suggesting that a special bonus may be awarded and content suggesting that there is a possibility of winning a probability-variable jackpot. Set the production pattern. After executing step Sc2504, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sc2503, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed was won is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, it is a normal jackpot (Sc2503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2505.

In step Sc2505, a special bonus normal jackpot performance pattern setting process is executed. As described above, this process is executed when the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON and the normal jackpot has been won in the game round to be processed. As described above, the fact that the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON indicates that the game round to be processed has been executed in the high probability mode. That is, since the jackpot was won during the high probability mode, after the game round ends, the opening period becomes a specific period in which the latent probability is changed, and a special bonus is given to the player. Therefore, in step Sc2505, the performance pattern to be executed in the game round includes content suggesting that a special bonus may be awarded and content suggesting that there is a possibility of winning a regular jackpot. Set the production pattern. After executing step Sc2505, the production pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sc2502 that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is not ON (Sc2502: NO), the process advances to step Sc2506. In step Sc2506, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is a variable jackpot. In step Sc2506, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed was won is a probability variable jackpot (Sc2506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2507.

In step Sc2507, a production pattern setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. This process is executed when the high probability mode flag on the sound and light side is OFF and the probability variable jackpot has been won in the game round to be processed. The fact that the high probability mode flag on the sound and light side is OFF indicates that the game round to be processed has been executed in the low probability mode. In other words, since the jackpot was won during the low probability mode, after the game round ends, the opening period becomes a non-specific period in which the latent probability variable state is not (non-latent probability variable state), and the player receives a special No bonus will be awarded. Therefore, in step Sc2507, a performance pattern that includes content suggesting that there is a possibility of winning a probability-variable jackpot is set as a performance pattern for the performance executed in the game round. After executing step Sc2507, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sc2506, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is a normal jackpot (Sc2506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2508.

In step Sc2508, a production pattern setting process for normal jackpot is executed. This process is executed when the high probability mode flag on the sound and light side is OFF and a normal jackpot has been won in the game round to be processed. Therefore, in step Sc2508, a performance pattern including content suggesting that there is a possibility of winning a normal jackpot is set as a performance pattern of the performance executed in the game round. After executing step Sc2508, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sc2501, if it is determined that the game round to be processed has not won a jackpot in the winning lottery (sc2501: NO), the process advances to step Sc2509. In step Sc2509, a production pattern setting process for losing is executed. Note that this process also includes a process of setting a performance pattern when the winning lottery of the game round to be processed is a reach (miss). After executing step Sc2501, the production pattern setting process ends.

<Processing for opening production>
Next, the opening effect processing will be explained. The opening effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 193: Sc2204).

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the opening production process. In step Sc2601, it is determined whether an opening command has been received. If it is determined in step Sc2601 that an opening command has been received (Sc2601: YES), the process advances to step Sc2602.

In step Sc2602, the opening time is read. Specifically, information regarding the opening time included in the received opening command is read. After executing step Sc2602, the process advances to step Sc2603.

In step Sc2603, it is determined whether the latent probability change state flag is ON. In step Sc2603, if it is determined that the latent probability change state flag is ON (Sc2603: YES), the process advances to step Sc2604.

In step Sc2604, an opening performance pattern for a special bonus corresponding to the opening time is set. Specifically, since a special bonus is given during the opening period when the latent probability is changed, the opening production pattern includes content that suggests that a special bonus will be given, and a game ball entering the special electric starting port 52. The performance pattern is set to include content that encourages opening the second opening/closing door 55b and letting a game ball enter the second grand prize opening 55a. Further, in this embodiment, an opening performance pattern is prepared for each jackpot type in a game round in which a jackpot that is a trigger for executing the opening performance is won, and the opening performance pattern is set according to the jackpot type. In addition, as the opening performance for the special bonus, a configuration may be adopted in which a performance that counts down the remaining time of the opening period is executed. Additionally, a special bonus opening presentation may be performed that suggests that the opening time has been added. Specifically, a countdown of the remaining time in the opening period is started when the remaining time is less than the actually set opening time, and when the remaining time reaches a predetermined time or less, an effect of increasing the remaining time is executed. In addition, an opening performance may be performed in which the number of game balls paid out as a bonus to the player during the opening period is displayed in real time. By performing such a performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After setting the performance pattern of the opening performance for such a special bonus, the opening performance processing is ended.

If it is determined in step Sc2603 that the latent probability change state flag is not ON (Sc2603: NO), the process advances to step Sc2605.

In step Sc2605, a normal opening effect pattern is set according to the opening time. Specifically, since no special bonus is given during the opening period, which is a normal state that is not a latent state, a performance pattern that includes content that suggests that a round game will start after the opening period ends is used as an opening performance pattern. Set. Further, in this embodiment, an opening performance pattern is prepared for each jackpot type in a game round in which a jackpot that is a trigger for executing the opening performance is won, and the opening performance pattern is set according to the jackpot type. Thereafter, the opening production process ends.

<Processing for special electric start entrance ball entry performance>
Next, the processing for special electric start entrance ball entry effect will be explained. The special electric start entrance ball entrance production process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 193: Sc2205).

The special electric start opening ball entry performance process is a process for setting a performance pattern of the performance to be executed when a game ball enters the special electric start opening 52. In the present embodiment, the performance performed when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 is different between a specific period and a non-specific period.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart illustrating processing for special electric starting entrance ball entry effect. In step Sc2701, it is determined whether a special electric starting gate entry command has been received. In step Sc2701, if it is determined that the special electric starting gate entry command has been received (Sc2701: YES), the process advances to step Sc2702. On the other hand, in step Sc2701, if it is determined that the special electric starting entrance ball entry command has not been received (Sc2701: NO), the processing for special electric starting entrance ball entrance effect is directly terminated.

In step Sc2702, it is determined whether the latent probability change state flag is ON. In step Sc2702, if it is determined that the latent probability change state flag is ON (Sc2702: YES), the process advances to step Sc2703.

In step Sc2703, a special electric starting entrance ball entry performance pattern for a special bonus is set. Specifically, as a performance pattern executed when a game ball enters the special electric start opening 52, content that suggests that the second grand prize opening 55a will be opened immediately (after 0.5 seconds), and a special bonus. A production pattern with content suggesting the provision of is set. After executing step Sc2703, the process advances to step Sc2705.

On the other hand, if it is determined in 32702 that the latent probability change state flag is not ON (Sc2702: NO), the process advances to step Sc2704. In step Sc2704, a normal special electric starting entrance ball entry performance pattern is set. Specifically, as a performance pattern to be executed when a game ball enters the special electric start opening 52, a performance pattern is set that suggests that the second grand prize opening 55a will open after 10 seconds. After executing step Sc2704, the process advances to step Sc2705.

In step Sc2705, a command for special electric start entrance ball entry performance is transmitted to the display control device 100. The command for the special train starting gate entrance performance includes information regarding the performance pattern of the special train starting gate entrance performance set in step Sc2703 or step Sc2704. The display control device 100, which has received the command for special electric starting entrance ball entry performance, causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image according to the set performance pattern. After executing step Sc2705, the process for special electric starting entrance ball entry effect is ended.

<Processing for the second grand prize opening opening performance>
Next, the process for the second big prize opening opening effect will be explained. The process for the second big winning opening opening effect is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 193: Sc2206).

The process for the second major prize opening opening performance is a process for setting a performance pattern of the performance to be executed when the second major prize opening 55a is opened. In this embodiment, the effects performed when the second grand prize opening 55a is opened are different between the specific period and the non-specific period.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening opening production process. In step Sc2801, it is determined whether a second opening/closing door opening command has been received. In step Sc2801, if it is determined that the second opening/closing door opening command has been received (Sc2801: YES), the process advances to step Sc2802. On the other hand, in step Sc2801, if it is determined that the second opening/closing door opening command has not been received (Sc2801: NO), the process for the second big prize opening opening effect is ended.

In step Sc2802, it is determined whether the latent probability change state flag is ON. In step Sc2802, if it is determined that the latent probability change state flag is ON (Sc2802: YES), the process advances to step Sc2803.

In step Sc2803, the second major prize opening opening performance pattern is set. Specifically, as a performance pattern to be executed when the second major prize opening 55a is opened, a performance pattern with content that suggests that the second major prize opening 55a has been opened or content that suggests the granting of a benefit is set. be done. After executing step Sc2803, the process advances to step Sc2805.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2802 that the latent probability change state flag is not ON (Sc2802: NO), the process advances to step Sc2804. In step Sc2804, the second major prize opening opening production pattern for normal use is set. Specifically, as a pattern of the performance to be executed when the second big winning hole 55a is opened, a performance pattern with content that suggests that the second big winning hole 55a has been opened is set. After executing step Sc2804, the process advances to step Sc2805.

In step Sc2805, a command for second grand prize opening opening effect is transmitted to the display control device 100. The command for the second big winning opening opening performance includes information regarding the performance pattern of the second big winning opening opening performance set in step Sc2803 or step Sc2804. The display control device 100 that has received the second grand prize opening production command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image according to the set production pattern. After executing step Sc2805, the process for the second grand prize opening opening effect is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sc2901, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc2902.

In step Sc2902, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sc3001, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sc3101, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 157) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Sc3101), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at the same time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of presentation such as a preview effect or a pattern for LCD set by the sound emission control device 90, and to design a presentation image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sc3102, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sc3101) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc3103.

In step Sc3103, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sc3102), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc3104.

In step Sc3104, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sc3103), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc3105, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the state shifts to the latent probability variable state during the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, so the player can take advantage of the transition to the latent probability variable state. Various processes can be executed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 55 is activated after a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 in a non-specific state that is not a latent probability variable state and a specific period that is a latent probability variable state. The time until the second opening/closing door 55b opens is set to a different time. In other words, the mode of processing can be changed based on whether or not the latent probability variable state is present.

By controlling the high frequency support mode flag and the high probability mode flag, it is possible to shift to a latent probability variable state or to shift from a latent probability variable state to another state. Therefore, by controlling the timing of switching the high frequency support mode flag and the timing of switching the high probability mode flag during the opening period, the duration of the latent probability variable state (specific state) can be controlled. In other words, the execution time of a process executed in a specific period can be controlled by the timing of switching the high-frequency support mode flag and the timing of switching the high-probability mode flag. Therefore, execution control of various processes can be performed by simple processing.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides benefits to the player using two types of methods when winning a jackpot in a game round executed in the high probability mode. Specifically, during the specific period of the opening period, the time from when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b opens is made shorter (0.5 seconds) than during the non-specific period. By doing so, you will receive benefits. Further benefits are given in the round game after the end of the specific period. Therefore, when the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, compared to when it is a low-probability mode, there is not only a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot, but also an expectation for the granting of benefits after winning the jackpot. can be given to the player.

Further, by providing two types of methods for awarding benefits, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player who has recognized that the mode of processing for awarding benefits has been switched.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the length of the specific period varies depending on the type of jackpot in the game round in which the jackpot that triggered the start of the specific period was won. Therefore, when winning a jackpot, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, in the game round where the jackpot was won immediately before the start of the specific period, if the 16R probability variable jackpot is won, the specific period is 20 seconds, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot is won, the specific period is 30 seconds. In the case of winning the 8R normal jackpot, the specific period is 40 seconds. That is, the more advantageous the jackpot type is to the player, the shorter the specific period is. In other words, the longer the specific period is for the type of jackpot that is less advantageous to the player, and the more likely the amount of special bonus that the player can obtain in the specific period will be. By setting the length of the specific period in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation when winning a winning lottery, regardless of the type of jackpot. Furthermore, by providing multiple types of lengths of the specific period, it is possible to make the player guess the length of the specific period, giving the player a greater sense of anticipation and urgency, and thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to. In other words, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the length of the specific period in addition to the sense of expectation of winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows game balls to enter the special electric starting port 52 based on the state of the game, specifically, whether or not it is in a latent probability variable state (specific state or non-specific state). The time from when the second opening/closing door 55b opens is determined. Therefore, the player who expects the second door 55b to open can be made to pay attention to the state of the game. Conversely, for players who are trying to understand the state of the game (whether it is in a latent state or not), from the time the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b opens, can draw attention to the time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, entry of a game ball into the through gate 35 → opening of the normal electric accessory 53 → entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port 52 → opening of the second opening/closing door 55b → Since various game elements are related, such as the entry of the game ball into the second grand prize opening 55a, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the various game elements, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the method of awarding benefits is different depending on whether the player wins a jackpot in the high probability mode or the player who wins the jackpot in the low probability mode. Specifically, if a jackpot is won in the high probability mode, a special bonus is given as a benefit after the game round in which the jackpot was won is completed, and then a round game is given as a privilege. If you win a jackpot in the low probability mode, only a round game is awarded as a benefit after the game round in which you won the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the lottery mode during the game round. In addition, if the game round in which the player won the jackpot without knowing the lottery mode ends and the awarding of benefits starts, by understanding the manner in which the bonus is awarded, the game round in which the player won the jackpot will be able to It is possible to provide players with the pleasure of guessing the lottery mode. In this way, by associating the lottery mode in the game round in which the jackpot was won with the processing method for awarding benefits after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the method of awarding benefits is different depending on whether the player wins a jackpot in the high probability mode or the player who wins the jackpot in the low probability mode. In other words, whether the type of jackpot in the game round in which the jackpot was won and which was executed earlier than the game round in which the jackpot was won (hereinafter also referred to as the earlier winning game round) was a guaranteed variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. Based on this, a method for awarding benefits to be given after the end of a game round that is subsequently executed and wins a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a post-winning game round) is determined. Therefore, in the case of winning a jackpot, in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the method of awarding benefits after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the method for awarding benefits after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, It is also possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the method of awarding benefits.

In addition, in the case of winning a jackpot, the method of awarding benefits after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won will be explained to the player based on the type of jackpot in the first winning game round from the game round in which the jackpot was won. You can make inferences based on this. Therefore, when a game round that won a jackpot is executed, the benefits after the end of the game round that won a jackpot are based on the type of jackpot in the previous winning game round from the game round that won a jackpot. It is possible to make the player guess the awarding method, and it is also possible to make the player guess the awarding method of the bonus in the later winning game session based on the game session in which the jackpot was won, and the execution of one game session in which the jackpot was won can be made to guess. This can encourage players to make various guesses, and can further give them a sense of anticipation.

In addition, if the player wins a guaranteed jackpot in the first winning game round, in addition to giving the player a sense of anticipation regarding the benefits that will be awarded after the end of the first winning game round, after the second winning game round ends. It is also possible to give players a sense of expectation regarding the benefits that will be given.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the opening time, which is the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, is the lottery mode (high probability mode or not) of the game round in which the jackpot was won. low probability mode). That is, the opening time, which is the time of the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, is determined based on the jackpot type in the earlier winning game round from the viewpoint of the game round in which the jackpot was won. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience by allowing the player to guess the length of the opening period of the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won based on the type of jackpot in the previous winning game round. In addition, if the opening period is a specific period, it is possible to further encourage players to speculate about the opening time based on the type of jackpot in the first winning game round, and to give them an even greater sense of anticipation regarding the special bonus. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the opening effect executed during the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won is the lottery mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the game round in which the jackpot was won. mode). That is, the opening performance in the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won is determined based on the jackpot type in the earlier winning game round from the game round in which the jackpot was won. Therefore, a new gaming experience can be provided by allowing the player to guess the opening performance in the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won based on the type of jackpot in the previous winning game round. On the contrary, based on the opening performance during the opening period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, the player is made to guess various information in the earlier winning game round, such as the type of jackpot in the earlier winning game round, and new information is generated. It can provide gameplay.

<<C7>> Modification of the third embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《C7-1》Variation 1:
In the third embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and 8R probability variable jackpot, which are the jackpot types when winning a jackpot, are operated in the high probability mode after the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won. Although a configuration in which this continues is adopted, other configurations may also be adopted. Specifically, if you win a certain variable jackpot such as a 16R certain variable jackpot or an 8R certain variable jackpot, after the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode, there is a limit to the number of times you can play the game in the high probability mode. configuration may be adopted.

For example, if you win a 16R probability jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, after the lottery mode changes to high probability mode and the number of games played in the high probability mode reaches 100, the lottery mode will change to high probability. Transition from probability mode to low probability mode. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of this example, if a jackpot is won before the number of executions of the game executed in the high probability mode reaches 100, the jackpot has been won in the high probability mode, and the jackpot is won. After the game ends, the player will enter a latent state and receive a special bonus. However, after the number of game rounds executed in the high probability mode reaches 100, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, so even if you win a jackpot, after the game round in which you won the jackpot ends, No special bonuses will be given.

By adopting such a configuration, if a player wins a probability-variable jackpot and the game is played in the high-probability mode, the player can win the jackpot before the 100th game is played. It is possible to make the player strongly desire to play the game, and it is possible to make the player pay strong attention to the winning lottery result in each game round in the high probability mode, and it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《C7-2》Variation 2:
In the third embodiment, during the specific period, the time elapses from when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 to when the second opening/closing door 55b opens during the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 53. Although a configuration in which the time period is set to 0.5 seconds has been adopted, other configurations may be adopted.

FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of Modification 2. When the normal electric accessory 53 opens from the state of FIG. 143(a) and becomes the state of FIG. 203(b), the second opening/closing door 55b opens at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes, As shown in FIG. 203(c), a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of game balls that have been circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a enter the second grand prize opening 55a. Specifically, by adjusting the speed at which the game balls flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a with the number of convex portions 53b, etc., a configuration is made in which a plurality of game balls can flow simultaneously over the upper surface of the movable piece 53a. Then, when one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 53 closes and the second opening/closing door 55b opens, but the timing of the closing of the ordinary electric accessory 53 and A configuration in which the opening timing of the second opening/closing door 55b is adjusted, and as shown in FIG. 203(c), a plurality of game balls that have been circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a enter the second grand prize opening 55a. shall be. When a plurality of game balls enter the second large winning hole 55a, a number of game balls corresponding to the number of entered game balls are paid out as prize balls.

By adopting such a configuration, many benefits can be given to the player by entering the game ball into the special electric starting port 52 once during a specific period, and the player can receive special electric It is possible to draw attention to the ball entering the starting port 52 and give a great sense of anticipation.

《C7-3》Variation 3:
In the third embodiment, the opening performance for the special bonus is performed during the opening period that is the specific period (the opening period in which the special bonus is given), but the opening performance for the regular bonus is performed during the opening period that is the specific period. (Opening performance in which no special bonus is given) may be adopted.

If such a configuration is adopted, a player who recognizes that a regular opening performance has been executed during the opening period, which is a specific period, may temporarily recognize that a special bonus will not be awarded. Regardless, since a special bonus is actually awarded, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player and increase the interest of the game.

《C7-4》Variation 4:
In the third embodiment, the opening time in the opening period may be the same when the latent probability variable state is in the latent probability variable state (in the specific period) and in the case where the latent probability variable state is not in the latent probability variable state (not in the specific period). . By doing so, the process of setting the opening time according to the state (opening time setting process: see FIG. 184) can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.
C7-5. Variation 5:
In the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the more advantageous the jackpot type of the jackpot, the shorter the opening period during which a special bonus is awarded is adopted. , a configuration may be adopted in which the more advantageous the type of jackpot, the longer the opening period during which the special bonus is given. By adopting such a configuration, when a jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the player is made to more strongly desire that the jackpot type is an advantageous jackpot type, and the player has high expectations regarding the jackpot type. It can give a feeling.

《C7-6》Variation 6:
In the third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery for determining the opening time is separately executed. By doing this, it becomes difficult for the player to guess the length of the specific period based on the type of jackpot, and when a special bonus is awarded, the player will be given a new information about the length of the specific period. It can give a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《C7-7》Variation 7:
In the third embodiment, when a game ball enters the through gate 35, an electric role opening lottery is executed, and when an electric role opening lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 is electrically opened. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a non-electric accessory is provided in place of the normal electric accessory 53. In this case, the through gate 35 and the non-electric accessory are connected by a mechanical structure that does not use electricity, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the non-electric accessory operates via the mechanical structure. do. By employing such a configuration, it is possible to omit the process related to the power lottery opening lottery, and it is possible to simplify the process.

《C7-8》Variation 8:
In the third embodiment described above, a special bonus is given when the opening period is in the latent probability variable state, and a special bonus is not given when the opening period is not in the latent probability variable state, but the reverse process is performed. A configuration may also be adopted. That is, a configuration is adopted in which a special bonus is not provided when the opening period is in a variable latent probability state, and a special bonus is provided when the opening period is not in a variable latent probability state. If such a configuration is adopted, if a jackpot is won when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the time from the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52 to the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b during the opening period is 0. .5 seconds and a special bonus will be given. Normally, if you are in high probability mode, the probability of winning a jackpot is high, so it can give the player a high sense of anticipation, while if you are in low probability mode, the probability of winning a jackpot is low, so you can play in high probability mode. Although it is difficult to give players a sense of expectation compared to the case of Even when the game is in the mode, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when adopting this configuration, this configuration is realized by granting a special bonus on the condition that the opening period flag is ON, the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, and the high probability mode flag is OFF. be able to.

《C7-9》Variation 9:
In the third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the position where the normal electric accessory 53 is placed is not above the second variable prize winning device 55. For example, a so-called electric tulip type structure may be adopted above the special electric starting port 52. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to enter the special electric starting port 52 during the low-frequency support mode, and it is possible to suppress excessive awarding of prize balls.

Alternatively, a configuration that does not include the normal electric accessory 53 may be adopted. When this configuration is adopted, the structure can be simplified. Moreover, since the process of the electricity lottery opening lottery can be omitted, the process can be simplified.

《C7-10》Variation 10:
In the third embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b opens is different between the specific period and the non-specific period. A configuration may be adopted in which the time from when a game ball enters the starting port 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b opens is the same in the specific period and the non-specific period. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to omit the process of changing the time from when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b opens depending on the gaming state, and the process can be simplified.

《C7-11》Variation 11:
In the third embodiment, the latent probability variable state (specific period) and the state not in the latent probability variable state (also referred to as a non-specific period or non-latent probability variable state) are triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port 52. Although the control process for the second opening/closing door 55b has been changed, other processes may be changed between the latent probability variable state and the non-latent probability variable state. For example, a configuration that changes the operating mode of the driving accessory between a latent probability variable state and a non-latent probability variable state, a configuration that changes the type of sound to be output, a configuration that changes the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 53, etc. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it changes the processing mode between the latent probability variable state and the non-latent probability variable state.

《C7-12》Variation 12:
In the third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a variable potential jackpot) that is in a variable potential state. That is, when winning the latent probability variable jackpot, the game will be in the high probability mode and low frequency support mode in subsequent game rounds. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Therefore, the next time the player wins a jackpot, a special bonus will be awarded, but since the player does not expect the special bonus to be awarded, once the special bonus begins to be awarded, the player will be surprised. It is possible to give the player a sudden sense of expectation, and it is possible to add modulation to the player's sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《C7-13》Variation 13:
In the third embodiment, the opening time, which is the length of time in the opening period, is determined based on the type of jackpot in the game run immediately before the opening period. However, other configurations may be used. may be adopted. Specifically, in a round game, a game ball enters a specific ball entry section or through gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as a specific ball entry section) during the period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won. A gaming machine is adopted as a condition for starting. That is, even after the game round in which the jackpot was won has ended, the round game will not start until the game ball enters the specified ball. Therefore, the opening period can be the period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won until the game ball enters the specific ball entry section.

In addition, the specific ball entering part is arranged near the special figure starting port 51, the special electric starting port 52, the first variable winning device 54, and the second variable winning device 55. Furthermore, by arranging nails 42 and accessories around the ball entry opening of the specific ball entry section, the configuration is such that it is relatively difficult for game balls to enter the specific ball entry section. By doing so, a relatively long opening time can be ensured. Furthermore, since the player desires that the game ball not enter the specific ball entry area, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency during the opening period.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters a specific ball entry section. In this case, if the configuration is such that it is easy for game balls to enter the specified ball entry area, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry area, but the opening period is likely to be shortened. Prize balls as special bonuses can be made difficult to obtain. Conversely, if the configuration is such that it is difficult for game balls to enter the specified ball area, it will be difficult to win prize balls by entering the game ball into the specified ball area, but the opening period may become longer. Therefore, it is possible to easily obtain prize balls as a special bonus. In this way, by configuring the game to include a specific ball entry section, it is possible to create various types of gameplay.

《C7-14》Variation 14:
The operation mode of the first variable prize winning device 54 in the round game executed after the game round in which the jackpot lottery is won in the case where the winning lottery is won in the low probability mode and the case where the winning lottery is won in the high probability mode ( A gaming machine having a different configuration (opening scenario of the first opening/closing door 54b) may be adopted. Specifically, in the first opening/closing scenario setting process, the determination mode at the time of winning the winning lottery is specified, and based on the determination mode, the opening scenario of the first opening/closing door 54b in the round game is determined. That is, the processing method for awarding a benefit after the execution of the game round in which the winning lottery was won is determined based on the lottery mode at the time of execution of the game round in which the jackpot win was an opportunity to give the benefit.

《C7-15》Variation 15:
In the third embodiment, the time length of the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed is determined by the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot type counter C2 of the game round in which the jackpot win that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. It may be determined based on the reach random number counter C3.

<<D>> Fourth embodiment:
《D1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 204 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a fourth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button that stops the game ball firing mechanism from firing the game ball when pressed by the player, and rotation of the operating handle 25. A variable resistor is provided that detects the dynamic operation amount by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 205 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device is equipped with a liquid crystal display that displays images for designs and effects.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 206 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, a round display section 39, and a start-up display section 39a.

As illustrated, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are both open upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so that the first starting port 33 is located above the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not win in the various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 43.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. When the game ball enters the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the winning as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize and enters the second start port 34. It is possible to win at the starting opening 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is shifted to when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on winning in the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning in the big winning opening 36a becomes possible. Similarly, even when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery based on a prize entered into the second starting opening 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning can be made into the large winning opening 36a. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. The first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display device to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by winning the through gate 35 is held, the common figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. Note that the special figure unit 37 and the general figure unit 38 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery results and the lottery results.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. In a round game, the door opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

The startup display section 39a is composed of one LED lamp, and is displayed when the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state (when the power is turned on) and the high probability mode described later is taken over. ,Light. If the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state while the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability mode during the previous operation, the memory contents of the high probability mode flag will be retained when the power is turned on next time, and the high probability mode will be switched off. Taken over. In addition, it lights up in the same way when the power is turned on, but also when the high probability mode is taken over when recovering from a power outage.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning in the first start opening 33, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a predetermined display in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. In addition, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on a winning in the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a predetermined display in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. . The liquid crystal display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by winning the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is shifted to when a jackpot is won. The details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 207 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 207(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 207(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 207(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 207(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, and the symbols in each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol On either one of the display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a predetermined information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 207(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

《D2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 208 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The MPU 62 receives stable 24V DC power from the power supply device 85. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86 and a backup power supply circuit 87. The power outage monitoring circuit 86 monitors the power supply and outputs a power outage information signal when a power outage occurs. "When a power outage occurs" is not limited to when a commercial power outage occurs, but also includes when the power switch 88 is switched from an on state to an off state (when the power is turned off).

The backup power supply circuit 87 includes a capacitor, and continues supplying power to each device when receiving a power outage information signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 86. Specifically, power is supplied to the RAM 64 provided in the main control device 60, and at least a portion of the information stored in the RAM 64 continues to be held even after the power is turned off. In this embodiment, the information held includes at least a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, and a number of games counter PNC, which will be described later, and corresponds to information on the gaming state.

Note that in this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit 87 supplies power to the RAM 64 even when a power outage occurs (for example, when the power switch 88 is in the off state), and continues to hold the above-mentioned gaming state information. Instead, when a power outage occurs, the backup power supply circuit 87 continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and during that predetermined period, information on the gaming state is stored in the flash memory or The information may be saved in a nonvolatile memory such as a hard disk drive, and then restored to the RAM 64 when the power switch 88 is turned from off to on. In short, the information on the gaming state stored immediately before switching from the supply state where power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10 to the non-supply state can be continuously stored when the power is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state. Any configuration may be used.

In addition, the MPU 62 uses a plurality of detection sensors 67a to 67e provided in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to a detection sensor and determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA during a game has won a prize in each prize opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on winnings in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on winnings in the through gate 35.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there is a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and a main display. 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the display of the round display section 39 on the main display section 45. Executes display control.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning to the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a winning to the first starting opening 33 is specified. In this case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a winning to the second starting port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted. A prize ball command is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60. A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 209 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the type of jackpot such as a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach random number lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed. A fall random number counter C4 is used for a fall lottery to decide whether to end the high probability mode (also referred to as a high probability gaming state). Note that the high probability mode is a gaming state that is started by winning a probability variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low probability mode.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C5 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b includes a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When game balls enter the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 in sequence, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter C4 at the winning timing are stored in the pending information storage area. 64b in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the winning information is won. The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored as a win/fail table in the win/fail table storage area 63a (FIG. 208) of the ROM 63.

FIG. 210 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the validity table stored in the validity table storage area 63a. The pachinko machine 10 is set with a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes for winning a winning lottery. FIG. 210(a) shows a success/failure table for low probability mode, and FIG. 210(b) shows a success/failure table for high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 210(a), under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a winning lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210(b), under the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a winning lottery, the value of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 20. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the high probability mode. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type, such as a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. More specifically, the pending information is stored in the first holding area Ra of the pending information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the pending information is stored at the timing when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the types of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is determined. It is possible to set a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the numbers are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening/closing door 36b is It can be set to continue until there are 6 pieces.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a variable lottery mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning lottery table as a winning/losing table, and a variable lottery mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table. It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. As explained using FIG. 210, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/failure table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C5 is the same, but in the high-frequency support mode, Compared to the low frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role opening win is set is set to be greater, and the opening time of one time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second starting opening 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 33 is higher than that in the second starting port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 34 is higher than that in the first starting port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning occurs in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. I can do it.

Note that the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is set to be in the electric utility release state more frequently per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. In addition, in a configuration where multiple types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory opening lottery is held and the next electric accessory opening lottery is held, in the high-frequency support mode, the It may be set so that a short securing time is more likely to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. In addition, the number of openings may be increased, the opening time may be lengthened, and the time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery may be shortened. The advantage of high-frequency support mode over low-frequency support mode can be increased by applying any one or any combination of the following conditions: shortening the average securing time and increasing the probability of winning. good.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a plurality of jackpot types are sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 211(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 211(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting opening in FIG. 211(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting opening 33 are 16R certain variable jackpot, 8R certain variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot.

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 211(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot. is set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot. It corresponds to That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpots based on winnings in the second starting port 34 are probability-variable jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is divided into two types: when the jackpot is won based on winning in the first starting opening 33, and when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. This differs depending on the case where a jackpot is won based on winning in the starting slot 34.

In this way, the manner in which the jackpot type is distributed between the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in terms of advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. In addition, in the case of a losing result in the lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is used for reach judgment stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is compared with the table and it is determined whether or not to generate a reach. However, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination that corresponds to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 207(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in symbol row Z1, and then a symbol identical to Z1 is stopped and displayed in symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. , In a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the falling random number counter C4 will be explained. The fall random number counter C4 is used in a game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode, when executing a fall lottery, which is a determination as to whether or not to end the high probability mode. When winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 119, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The falling random number counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter C4 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The updated value of the fall random number counter C4 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the fall random number counter C4 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is used for the fall judgment stored in the fall judgment table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. It is checked against the table and it is determined whether to end the high probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, two random number values for winning the fall lottery are stored in the fall judgment table. That is, in a game round in the high probability mode, the probability of winning the falling lottery and ending the high probability mode and switching to the low probability mode is 1/60. In addition, in this embodiment, the falling lottery is not performed in the game round of the low probability mode.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C5 will be explained. The electric accessory release counter C5 is configured such that, for example, the number is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C5 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C5. For example, if C5=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C5=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the closed state.

Note that a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter C4 stored in the first reservation area Ra corresponds to the reservation information related to the first starting opening 33, A set of combinations of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter C4 stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponds to the reservation information related to the second starting opening 34, and these The reservation information corresponds to special information in the present invention.

<<D3>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 212 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 208) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a pending confirmation table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《D4》Summary of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In this explanation, in order to facilitate understanding of the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, an overview of the processing executed in the pachinko machine as a comparative example will first be explained, and then, An overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be explained.

《D4-1》Comparative example:
FIG. 213 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when a player wins a falling lottery in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. The pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 used was a pachinko machine configured to shift to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reached a predetermined guaranteed number of games after shifting to the high-frequency support mode. The "guaranteed number of games" is the number of games guaranteed to be played continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and is 100 times in this embodiment. However, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, even if the high-frequency support mode is played 100 times, if the high-probability mode continues as the lottery mode at that point, , the high-frequency support mode will continue as the support mode. The pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 is a reference example for comparison with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

FIG. 213(a) shows the state of lottery mode and the state of support mode in a pachinko machine as comparative example 1. In FIG. 213, the numbers shown in square brackets (for example, [1], [60]) indicate the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started.

FIG. 213(a) shows a game round in which a probability-variable jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the jackpot ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, and then the high-frequency support mode is executed for the 60th time after the start. This shows a case where the player wins the lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the lottery result in the falling lottery is reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in that game round. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, in the 60th game run after the start of the high-frequency support mode, the player wins the fall lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 60th game run after the start of the high frequency support mode, a winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

On the other hand, regarding the support mode, even if you win the falling lottery in the 60th game after the start of the high-frequency support mode, the high-probability mode ends, and you move to the low-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode After the high-frequency support mode is started after shifting to the support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until the game reaches the 100th game.

FIG. 213(b) shows each state of the production, lottery mode, and support mode executed by the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in the 60th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery. In this example, until the 60th game (plays 1 to 59), there is no winner in either the falling lottery or the winning lottery, so until the 59th game, there is no notice of the winning lottery results for each game. A normal performance (also called normal performance) for announcing the lottery results is executed. Then, in the 60th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery, for example, a battle performance (hereinafter also referred to as a battle performance) in which the player's character and the enemy's character face off is executed. The battle performance is a performance before the player is notified of whether the result will be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. In this embodiment, the battle performance is performed when you win the falling lottery, when you win the winning lottery (jackpot lottery), and when neither of these (when you win neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery). This is a performance that suggests that one of the following applies.

After executing the battle performance, a result announcement performance is performed to announce the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. In the result announcement performance, a performance corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is performed. Specifically, if the player's character wins the falling lottery, the player's character loses, and if the player's character wins the lottery (in this embodiment, the jackpot wins), the player's character wins. If not, a draw performance is performed in which the player's character and the enemy's character are tied. In the case of Comparative Example 1, since the player wins the falling lottery in the 60th game, a defeat performance is executed as a result notification performance.

In addition, as a result of winning the falling lottery in the 60th game run, the timing of shifting from high probability mode to low probability mode coincides with the timing when the 60th game winning the falling lottery starts. There is. That is, when the player wins the falling lottery in the 60th game, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. As for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as described above.

FIG. 214 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a game is executed for the 60th time after winning a winning lottery, changing the lottery mode to a high probability mode, and then starting the high frequency support mode. FIG. 214 shows a case where the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 213(b), FIG. 214 shows a case where the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery instead of winning the falling lottery.

In the 60th game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle performance is executed, and thereafter, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is performed as a result announcement performance. Then, at the timing when the 60th game in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result announcement effect ends), the lottery mode changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect and a result announcement effect. FIG. 215(a) shows a battle performance, FIG. 215(b) shows a defeat performance as a result notification performance, and FIG. 215(c) shows a victory performance as a result notification performance. In the battle production shown in FIG. 215(a), an image in which a female character on the player's side faces off against a male character on the enemy's side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are transmitted to the speaker 46. In this mode, the signal is outputted to various lamps 47. However, the battle performance may take other forms.

Furthermore, the defeat effect shown in FIG. 215(b) displays on the liquid crystal display device 41 an image of a female character on the player's side saddened by defeat, and also transmits sound and light accompanying the image to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. This is the mode in which the output is performed. However, the defeat presentation as the result announcement presentation may be in other forms.

The victory effect shown in FIG. 215(c) displays an image of the player's female character rejoicing in victory on the liquid crystal display device 41, and outputs sound and light accompanying the image to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. This is an aspect in which the However, the victory presentation as the result presentation may be in other forms.

Further, although not shown in the drawings, a draw performance in which the player character and the enemy character end in a draw may be used as a result notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 213(b), by winning the falling lottery in the 60th game round, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of the game round, but on the other hand, Since the support mode continues to be a high-frequency support mode, the player of the pachinko machine in Comparative Example 1 cannot recognize that he has won a fall due to the state of the support mode while the battle performance is being executed. . Therefore, the player can feel a sense of anticipation and tension regarding the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery due to the battle performance and the result announcement performance performed thereafter.

FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 when the aforementioned battle effect or result notification effect is being executed. As shown in the figure, when a battle effect or a result announcement effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. In the first display area 41aS, variable display and static display of symbols are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, a variable display of symbols is executed during a variable time, and a static display of symbols is executed during a stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, a battle performance or a result notification performance is performed.

FIG. 217 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process when the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 wins the falling lottery. The difference between the example shown in FIG. 213 and the example shown in FIG. 217 is the number of times the game was played after the high-frequency support mode was started until winning the fall lottery. In the example shown in FIG. 213, a case has been explained in which the player wins the falling lottery on the 60th game before reaching the guaranteed number of games, but in the example shown in FIG. This shows the case where the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game.

In FIG. 217(a), a player wins a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery, and after the jackpot ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high-probability mode, and then, in the 120th game, he wins a fall lottery, and the lottery mode changes to a low-probability mode. This shows the case of transitioning to probability mode. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, even if you win the fall lottery in the 120th game round, the lottery result in the fall lottery will be the same as in the case where you win the fall lottery in the 60th game round. This will be reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery. That is, in the example of FIG. 217(a), in the 120th game, the player wins the falling lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game, a winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

Regarding the support mode, as described above, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, if the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (specifically, 100 times), the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. However, even if the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode continues as the lottery mode at that point, the high-frequency support mode will continue as the support mode. Ru. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 217(a), if you win the falling lottery on the 120th game, the high probability mode continues until the 120th game, so the high frequency support mode continues. has been done. Then, in the 120th game, the player wins the fall lottery and the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode also shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

FIG. 217(b) shows the states of the performance, lottery mode, and support mode executed by the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in the 120th game round in which the machine wins the falling lottery. In this example, up to the 120th game (from 1st to 119th), neither the fall lottery nor the hit lottery has been won, so the normal performance is executed until the 120th game. Then, in the 120th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery, for example, the same battle performance as the previously described battle performance (FIG. 215(a)) is performed. After the battle effect is executed, a result announcement effect is executed to announce the lottery result of the fall lottery. Specifically, since the player won the fall lottery in the 120th game, a defeat performance is executed as a result notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), if the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game round, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing when the game round starts. Further, as the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The timing at which the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode is the same as the timing at which the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Therefore, at the same time as the 120th game is started, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

FIG. 218 is a time chart illustrating another example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a game is executed for the 120th time after winning a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high-probability mode, and then the high-frequency support mode is started. FIG. 218 shows a case where the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode after a big hit is won in the winning lottery. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 217(b), FIG. 218 shows a case where the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery instead of winning the falling lottery.

In the 120th game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle performance is executed, and thereafter, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is performed as a result announcement performance. Then, at the timing when the 120th game in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (that is, the timing when the winning result announcement performance ends), the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Comparing FIG. 217(b) and FIG. 218, it can be seen that the manner in which the support mode changes is different in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game. During this period, when winning a jackpot, the system is in high-frequency support mode as shown in Figure 218, while when winning a fall, it is in low-frequency support mode as shown in Figure 217(b). There is. Therefore, before the result notification effect is executed, the player determines whether the high-frequency support mode has ended and shifted to the low-frequency support mode from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 206). By doing so, the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery of the 120th game can be recognized without using the result announcement performance. That is, during the execution of the battle performance, the player can predict the type of result notification performance (win performance or defeat performance) that will be executed afterwards. Therefore, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension regarding the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game through the battle performance and result announcement performance.

In summary, it is as follows. In the case of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, as explained using FIG. 213(b) and FIG. 214, when the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, If you win the fall lottery in a game play before reaching the guaranteed number of games (100 times in this embodiment), the high-frequency support mode will continue, so you will feel a sense of anticipation and tension for the results of the fall lottery and winning lottery. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension through the performance that provides (battle performance in this embodiment) and the performance that announces the results.

However, in the case of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, as explained using FIGS. 217(b) and 218, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode as the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode. , If you win a lottery in a game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the lottery mode will shift to low probability mode at the start of the game and the support mode will shift to low frequency support mode at the same time. , If the player recognizes that the high-frequency support mode has ended before the result announcement performance is executed, the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery for the relevant game round will be announced without the result announcement performance. This can be recognized from the operating state of the electric accessory 34a. In this case, it is not possible to give the player a sense of anticipation or tension through the battle performance and result announcement performance. Specifically, if the high probability mode has been played 100 times or more, and the high frequency support mode is active, when a battle performance starts, the player's character and the enemy's character Although the presentation is such that it is not known until the results are announced which of the characters will win (in other words, it is not known until the results are announced whether the character will win the jackpot or the fall lottery), the players , by recognizing that high-frequency support has ended during the period in which the battle performance is being executed, it is possible to notify during the battle performance that the player's character will lose the current battle (he will win the fall lottery). It's predictable. This is a problem with Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 219 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a game is executed for the 120th time after winning a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high-probability mode, and then the high-frequency support mode is started. FIG. 219 shows a case where the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode after a big hit is won in the winning lottery. The pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 is a reference example for comparison with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

In the 120th game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle performance is executed, and thereafter, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is performed as a result announcement performance. The support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game that won the jackpot starts, and the timing when the 120th game that won the jackpot ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts ( In other words, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing immediately after the winning result notification effect ends. In other words, if the number of games played in the high probability mode is continuously executed for the guaranteed number of games (100 times) or more, and if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the support mode changes from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing to shift to the opening/closing mode is the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (see Fig. 218), whereas in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, The difference is that the game round in which the jackpot is won starts at the same time.

The pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 is the same as the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in the remaining respects. In other words, if you win the lottery before the number of games in the high probability mode reaches 100, the same operation as shown in FIG. 213 is performed, and you win before the number of games in the high probability mode reaches 100. If you win the jackpot in the lottery, perform the same operation as shown in Figure 214, and if you win the fall lottery if you have played the high probability mode 100 times or more, the same operation as shown in Figure 217 will be performed. Perform the same action as the action.

Comparing FIG. 217(b) and FIG. 219, it can be seen that the manner in which the support mode changes is the same in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery of the 120th game from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 206) before the result announcement performance is executed. Can not. In other words, while the battle performance is being executed, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of result notification performance (win performance or defeat performance) that will be executed afterwards. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the above-mentioned problems of Comparative Example 1 can be solved.

<<D4-2>> Overview of processing by pachinko machine 10:
Next, an overview of the processing in the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the pachinko machine of comparative example 2 in that the main display section 45 includes a startup display section 39a, and a process of turning on/off the startup display section 39a is performed. , are identical in their residuals. An overview of the process of turning on/off the display section 39a at startup will be explained.

FIG. 220 is a time chart illustrating an example of the process when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment wins the fall lottery for the first time after startup. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (power is turned off) with the lottery mode remaining in the high probability mode during the previous operation (timing t11), then When the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (power is turned on) (timing t12), the high probability mode is taken over as the lottery mode. Similarly, in the support mode, the state when the power is turned off is inherited when the power is turned on. In addition, the remaining number of guaranteed games will also be carried over. Hereinafter, the fact that the lottery mode, the support mode, and the remaining number of guaranteed games are taken over will also simply be referred to as "the gaming state is taken over." If the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is lit at timing t12 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 220 shows a case where the player wins the fall lottery in the 60th game after the high frequency support mode starts after the power is turned on, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. The "60th time" here is the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started, and is based on a game number counter PNC, which will be described later, which continues counting from the previous operation. At timing t13 when the 60th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery starts, the startup display section 39a is turned off.

Further, at timing t13, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode continues in the high frequency support mode. Although not shown, a battle performance is started at timing t13, and after the battle performance ends, a result announcement performance (defeat performance) is performed. In other words, the changes in the production, lottery mode, and support mode at timing t13 when the falling lottery is won in the 60th game run are as follows for the falling winning of Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 213(b). It is the same as time.

FIG. 221 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment wins a jackpot for the first time after startup. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, FIG. 221 shows a case where the gaming state is taken over when the power is turned on, similar to the example shown in FIG. 220. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 220, if the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is lit at timing t22 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 220, he won the falling lottery in the 60th game, but in the example shown in FIG. 221, he won the jackpot in the winning lottery in the 60th game. There is. At timing t23 when the 60th game round in which the player wins the jackpot starts, the display section 39a at startup is turned off. The jackpot win mentioned here may be either a probability-variable jackpot win or a normal jackpot win.

Although not shown, at this timing t23, a battle performance is started, and after the battle performance is finished, a victory performance is performed as a result notification performance. Then, at the timing t24 when the 60th game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result notification performance ends), the lottery mode changes from the high probability mode. At the same time as the transition to the low probability mode, the support mode transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, the changes in the performance, lottery mode, and support mode when winning the jackpot in the 60th game run are the same as when winning the jackpot in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 214.

FIG. 222 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment wins the fall lottery for the first time after startup. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the case where the gaming state is taken over when the power is turned on is shown in FIG. 222, similar to the illustrations in FIGS. 220 and 221. 220 and 221, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is lit at timing t32 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 220, the winning lottery was won in the 60th game run before the guaranteed number of games was reached, but in the example shown in FIG. 222, after the guaranteed number of games was reached, In the 120th game run, he won a lottery. At timing t33 when the 120th game round in which the player wins this fall lottery starts, the display section 39a at startup is turned off.

Although not shown, at this timing t33, execution of the battle performance is started, and after the battle performance ends, a defeat performance is performed as a result notification performance. Further, at this timing t33, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, when the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game run, the changes in the performance, lottery mode, and support mode are the same as those shown in FIG. 217.

FIG. 223 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment wins a jackpot for the first time after startup. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a case where the gaming state is taken over when the power is turned on is shown in FIG. 223, similar to the example shown in FIG. 222. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 222, if the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is lit at timing t42 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 222, the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game, but in the example shown in FIG. 223, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the 120th game. . At timing t43 when the 120th game round in which the player wins the jackpot starts, the startup display section 39a is turned off.

Although not shown, at this timing t43, a battle performance is started, and after the battle performance ends, a victory performance is performed as a result notification performance. Also, at this timing t43, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the 120th game in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery ends, and the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., the timing when the winning At timing t44 immediately after the end of the result announcement performance, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In other words, when the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery in the 120th game, the changes in the performance, lottery mode, and support mode are the same as when the player wins the jackpot in Comparative Example 2 shown in FIG. 219.

In summary, according to the pachinko machine 10 that executes the above-described process, when the power is turned on, the game state from the previous operation is carried over, and after the start-up display section 39a is lit, if the player wins a fall lottery or a winning lottery. Then, the start-up display section 39a is turned off immediately at the timing when the winning game round is started. This is the same whether you win a falling lottery or a winning lottery in a gaming session before reaching the guaranteed number of games, or winning a falling lottery or a winning lottery in a gaming session after reaching the guaranteed number of games. , the start-up display section 39a is turned off immediately at the timing when the winning game round is started. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the startup display section 39a is lit when the power is turned on, if the player wins the falling lottery or the winning lottery in the 60th game round or the 120th game round, Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the type of result announcement performance (win performance or defeat performance) to be performed later from being predicted during the execution of the battle performance from the timing when the startup display section 39a is turned off. .

According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 described above, as can be seen from the comparison between FIG. 213(b) and FIG. The manner in which the lottery mode changes is different depending on when a jackpot is won in the lottery. In addition, as can be seen from the comparison between FIG. 217(b) and FIG. 219, even in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game round, which is the winning game round, when winning the falling lottery and hitting the jackpot in the winning lottery. The manner in which the lottery mode changes is different depending on the case of winning. That is, during the period from the start to the end of the winning game round, if the winning is a jackpot, the winning mode is high probability mode, but if the winning is a fall winning game, the winning probability mode is low probability mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, when a general so-called first lamp in the morning is adopted, the timing at which the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (timing t13 in FIG. 220, timing t24 in FIG. 221, It is conceivable to turn off the first lamp in the morning at timing t33 in FIG. 222 and timing t44 in FIG. According to this configuration, in the event of a fall win, the first lamp in the morning will be turned off at the timing when the game round in which the fall win was started, and in the case of a jackpot win, the first lamp in the morning will be turned off at the timing in which the game round in which the jackpot win has ended. The lights will be turned off. Therefore, the player can recognize that the high probability mode has shifted to the low probability mode from the lighting/extinguishing state of the first lamp in the morning before the result announcement effect is executed. That is, according to this configuration, the player can predict the type of result announcement performance (win performance or defeat performance) that will be executed afterwards while the battle performance is being executed. Therefore, according to the configuration in which the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 is simply provided with the first lamp in the morning, the sense of anticipation and tension for the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 60th and 120th game rounds can be reduced to a battle effect. In some cases, the award may not be given to the player due to the result announcement performance.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the 60th game before the guaranteed number of games is reached, and the 120th game after the guaranteed number of games is reached. In either case, whether you win a fall lottery or win a jackpot in a winning lottery, the startup display section 39a is turned off at the timing when the winning game round starts, so the startup display An effect that suppresses a player from predicting whether he or she has won a fall lottery or won a jackpot in a winning lottery based on the lighting/unlit state of the part 39a, and gives a sense of anticipation and tension for the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. (Battle effect in this embodiment) and result announcement effect can give the player a sense of anticipation and tension.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the player recognizes whether he or she has won the fall lottery or won the jackpot in the winning lottery through the lighting/extinguishing state of the display section 39a at startup, winning the fall lottery is possible through the presentation. When making a player realize whether he or she has won a jackpot in a winning lottery, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension over a relatively long period of time by giving the effect a time range. It is possible. In addition, in the production, a series of productions is created by appropriately combining production elements that suggest that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot and production elements that suggest that there is a high probability of winning the falling lottery. By executing this, it is possible to give tone to the player's sense of expectation. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<<D5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sd0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and stores detection information (ball entry detection information). After that, the process advances to step Sd0102.

In step Sd0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sd0103.

In step Sd0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter C4, and the electric accessory opening counter C5 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter C4, and the electric accessory opening counter C5, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear them to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0104.

In step Sd0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sd0104 will be described later. After executing step Sd0104, the process advances to step Sd0105.

In step Sd0105, through ball entry processing is performed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry processing in step Sd0105 will be described later. After executing step Sd0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 224: Sd0104).

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sd0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sd0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sd0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sd0203.

In step Sd0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0204.

In step Sd0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sd0209.

In step Sd0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sd0201: NO), the process advances to step Sd0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sd0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sd0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0207. On the other hand, in step Sd0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sd0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sd0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0208.

In step Sd0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sd0209.

In step Sd0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sd0204 or step Sd0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sd0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sd0209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sd0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sd0209: YES), the process advances to step Sd0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process advances to step Sd0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0212.

In step Sd0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter C4 updated in step Sd0103 (FIG. 224) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding holding area. area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items to which 1 was added in step Sd0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter C4 updated in step Sd0103 are Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sd0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter C4 updated in step Sd0103 is , is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sd0210. After executing step Sd0212, the process advances to step Sd0213.

In step Sd0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter C4. This is a process in which the type, presence or absence of a reach, determination result of the success or failure of the falling lottery (lottery result), etc., are determined before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sd0213, the process advances to step Sd0214.

In step Sd0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the destination judgment process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter C4 is set as a pending command. do.

The hold command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and that the holding information is the main determination result based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command to have the sub-side control device confirm the winning lottery before the control device 60 selects a winning lottery. The hold command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 228: Step Sd0505) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 to indicate the number of hold balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display of the number of held balls in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sd0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 225: Sd0213).

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process uses the pending information to determine the validity of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the occurrence of reach, the validity of the fall lottery, etc. based on the pending information. This is a process executed before the main controller 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery.

In step Sd0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 225) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Sd0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sd0302: YES), the process advances to step Sd0303 and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sd0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round (Sd0302: NO), the process advances to step Sd0304, and the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round. The value of the falling random number counter C4 stored in the storage area by the ball is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd0305, and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won by referring to the fall determination table stored in the fall determination table storage area 63d.

In step Sd0305, if it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (Sd0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0306, where the fall winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f, and the process proceeds to step Sd0303. In step Sd0303, as described above, the low probability mode pass/fail table stored in the pass/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sd0305, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won (Sd0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0307. In step Sd0307, as a result of referring to the high probability mode success/failure table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd0308, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sd0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sd0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sd0310, the process advances to step Sd0311.

In step Sd0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sd0311, if it is determined that it corresponds to a probability variable jackpot (Sd0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0312, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sd0311, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sd0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0313, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sd0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sd0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0314, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sd0316, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sd0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0317, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sd0316, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach occurrence is not supported (Sd0316: NO), the first determination process is directly terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 224: Sd0105).

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sd0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sd0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sd0401: YES), the process advances to step Sd0402, and whether the number SN of accessory items held is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sd0401: NO), the main through ball entry process is ended.

In step Sd0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sd0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0404.

In step Sd0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 updated in step Sd0103 (FIG. 224) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sd0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sd0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The through ball entry process is ended without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C5.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sd0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0502.

In step Sd0502, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64e set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high probability mode flag is ON, the lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the high probability mode flag is OFF, the lottery mode is not a high probability mode, that is, a low probability mode. In this embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to winning the variable probability jackpot, and then turned OFF when winning the normal jackpot or winning the falling lottery.

In step Sd0502, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sd0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0503, and the startup display section 39a provided in the main display section 45 is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0504, and the startup display section flag is turned on. The startup display section flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the startup display section 39a is lit, and is stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. In response to the fact that the start-up display section 39a is turned on in step Sd0503, the start-up display section flag is turned on in step Sd0504. After executing step Sd0504, the process advances to step Sd0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0502 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sd0502: NO), the process immediately proceeds to step Sd0505.

In step Sd0505, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sd0505, the process advances to step Sd0506.

In step Sd0506, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0507.

In step Sd0507, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sd0508. In step Sd0508, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sd0508, the process advances to step Sd0509.

In step Sd0509, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0510.

In step Sd0510, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0511.

In step Sd0511, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sd0505). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sd0511, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sd0511: NO), in step Sd0512 and step Sd0513, until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sd0512, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sd0513, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sd0511: YES), the process returns to step Sd0505 and each process from step Sd0505 to step Sd0510 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sd0505 to step Sd0510 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 228: Sd0508).

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sd0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step Sd0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sd0601: YES), this game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sd0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sd0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0602.

In step Sd0602, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when a fluctuating display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

In step Sd0602, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (Sd0602: NO), the process proceeds to steps Sd0603 to Sd0606 for starting the game round. In step Sd0603, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sd0603, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sd0603: YES), the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sd0603: NO), the process advances to step Sd0604.

In step Sd0604, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process advances to step Sd0605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sd0605, a gaming state determination process for determining the gaming state is executed. Specifically, it is determined in the gaming state determination process whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. The gaming state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode is hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability/high support state." As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to execute a specific performance in a game round in a high accuracy/high support state, it is determined whether or not the game is in a high accuracy/high support state. Details of the gaming state determination process will be described later. After executing step Sd0605, the process advances to step Sd0606.

In step Sd0606, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the liquid crystal display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sd0606, the game time control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0602 that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (Sd0602: YES), the process proceeds to steps Sd0607 to Sd0611 for game progression.

In step Sd0607, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sd0607, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 232: Sd0903), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sd0607, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sd0607: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0608, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step Sd0608, the game time control process is ended.

In step Sd0607, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sd0607: YES), the process advances to step Sd0609 and a fluctuation end process is executed. The variation end process changes the symbol display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 232) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. Control display. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0610.

In step Sd0610, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high frequency support mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64e set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is high frequency support mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is not high frequency support mode, that is, low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned on after the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, ends (see step Sd1504 in FIG. 238).

In step Sd0610, if it is determined that the mode is high frequency support mode (Sd0610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0611, and the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The number of games counter PNC is a counter for counting the remaining number of guaranteed games guaranteed in the high frequency support mode. The number of games counter PNC is preset to a value of 100 in step Sd1505 in FIG. 238, which will be described later. After executing step Sd0611, the process advances to step Sd0612. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0610 that the mode is not high-frequency support mode (Sd0610: NO), the game cycle control process is ended.

In step Sd0612, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd0612, if it is determined that the high probability mode is not selected (Sd0612: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0613, and the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). It is determined whether or not the game is before reaching (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. As described above, since the number of games counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the game is continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of games played has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games played.

In step Sd0613, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sd0613: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sd0614, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sd0614, the process advances to step Sd0615.

In step Sd0615, a low-frequency support command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. After executing step Sd0615, the game time control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0613 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games (step Sd0613: YES), the game number control process is immediately ended without executing steps Sd0614 and Sd0615. Also, if it is determined in step Sd0612 that the mode is high probability mode (Sd0612: YES), the game cycle control process is immediately ended.

According to the processing from step Sd0612 to step Sd0615 described above, when the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is performed. Even after reaching the number of times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 229: Sd0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step Sd0701, it is determined whether the second start hold number RbN stored on hold in the second hold area Rb is "0". In step Sd0701, if it is determined that the second starting pending number RbN is "0" (Sd0701: YES), the data setting process for the first symbol display part of steps Sd0702 to Sd0707 is executed, and on the other hand, If it is determined that the second starting pending number RbN is not "0" (Sd0701: NO), data setting processing for the second symbol display section of steps Sd0708 to Sd0713 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the total pending number CRN is 1 or more, as explained in FIG. 229 (see FIG. 229: Sd0603). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether the second starting pending number RbN is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", that is, the pending information for variable display is stored for the second symbol display section 37b. If so, the data stored in the second hold area Rb is targeted for this data setting process, regardless of whether the first start hold count RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when hold information is stored in both the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, priority is given to the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. be done.

In step Sd0702, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sd0703, and the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0704. In step Sd0704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0705.

In step Sd0705, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sd0705, the process advances to step Sd0706.

In step Sd0706, if the second result display section flag in the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying whether the current variable display is to be started in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0707.

In step Sd0707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sd0707 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in normal processing (FIG. 228). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sd0701, if it is determined that the second starting pending number RbN is not "0" (Sd0701: NO), the data setting process for the second symbol display part of steps Sd0708 to Sd0713 is executed as described above. do.

In step Sd0708, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0709. In step Sd0709, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sd0710, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0711.

In step Sd0711, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sd0711, the process advances to step Sd0712.

In step Sd0712, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd0713.

In step Sd0713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sd0713 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Game status determination process>
Next, the gaming state determination process will be explained. The game state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 229: Sd0605) of the game time control process.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the gaming state determination process. In step Sd0801, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd0801, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sd0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0802, and it is determined whether the support mode is high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd0802, if it is determined that the mode is high frequency support mode (Sd0802: YES), the process advances to step Sd0803, and the high accuracy/high support flag is turned on. The high probability/high support flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (high probability/high support state). and is stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. When the high accuracy/high support flag is ON, it is in a high accuracy/high support state. When the high accuracy/high support flag is OFF, there is no high accuracy/high support state. According to step Sd0803, it becomes possible for the MPU 62 to specify the determination result as to whether or not the game is in a high accuracy/high support state during execution of this gaming state determination process. After executing step Sd0803, the process advances to step Sd0804.

In step Sd0804, a high accuracy/high support command, which is a command containing information for making the sub-side control device recognize that it is in a high accuracy/high support state, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Sd0804, the gaming state determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0801 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sd0801: NO), or if it is determined in step Sd0802 that it is not high frequency support mode (Sd0802: NO), step Sd0803 and step Sd0804 are not executed. , the game state determination process ends.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 229: Sd0606) of the game time control process.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sd0901, a fall determination process including a process when winning a fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Next, the process advances to step Sd0902.

In step Sd0902, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sd0902, the process advances to step Sd0903.

In step Sd0903, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sd0903, the process advances to step Sd0904.

In step Sd0904, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sd0904, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sd0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0905 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence or absence and information on the variation time set in step Sd0903 are included. On the other hand, in step Sd0904, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sd0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0906, and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence or absence and information on the variation time set in step Sd0903 are included. After executing step Sd0905 or step Sd0906, the process advances to step Sd0907.

In step Sd0907, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on a losing result.

The variation command and type command set in steps Sd0905 to Sd0907 are sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sd0907, the process advances to step Sd0908.

In step Sd0908, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sd0908, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be explained. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 232: Sd0901).

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. In step Sd1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd1001, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sd1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1002, and a judgment on the validity of the fall lottery is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fall random number counter C4 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a fall win in the fall judgment table in the fall judgment table storage area 63d. judge. In step Sd1002, if it is determined that the lottery has been won (Sd1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1003, and the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1004.

In step Sd1004, it is determined whether the startup display section 39a is lit. Specifically, it is determined whether the startup display flag in the various flag storage area 64e is turned on.

If it is determined in step Sd1004 that the startup display flag is turned on (Sd1004: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1005, and the startup display 39a provided in the main display section 45 is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1006, and the startup display section flag is turned off. After executing step Sd1006, the process advances to step Sd1007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1004 that the startup display flag is OFF (Sd1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1007 without executing steps Sd1005 and Sd1006.

In step Sd1007, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sd1007, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sd1007: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sd1008, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step Sd1009, where the low frequency support command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sd1009, the fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1007 that the number of games is within the guaranteed number of games (Sd1007: YES), the fall determination process is immediately ended. Further, if it is determined in step Sd1001 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sd1001: NO), or if it is determined in step Sd1002 that you have not won the falling lottery (Sd1002: NO), the game cycle control process is immediately terminated. .

The fall determination process configured as described above changes the lottery mode, support mode, and lighting/extinguishing of the startup display at timing t13 in FIG. 220, and the lottery mode, support mode at timing t33 in FIG. 222. , and variations in lighting/extinguishing of the display unit at startup are realized. In particular, at timing t13 in FIG. 220, the reason why the high-frequency support mode is continued despite a falling win is that if it is determined in step Sd1007 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games, steps Sd1008 and Sd1009 are not executed. This is achieved by

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 232: Sd0902).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sd1101, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd1101, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sd1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1102, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 210(b). Determine whether Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1101 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sd1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1103, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 210(a). Determine whether Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1104.

In step Sd1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sd1102 or step Sd1103 is a jackpot win. In step Sd1104, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sd1104: YES), the process advances to step Sd1105.

In step Sd1105, it is determined whether the startup display section 39a is lit. Specifically, it is determined whether the startup display flag in the various flag storage area 64e is turned on.

If it is determined in step Sd1105 that the startup display flag is turned on (Sd1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1106, and the startup display 39a provided in the main display section 45 is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sd1107, and the startup display section flag is turned off. After executing step Sd1107, the process advances to step Sd1108. Note that if it is determined in step Sd1105 that the startup display flag is OFF (Sd1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1108 without executing steps Sd1106 and Sd1107.

In step Sd1108, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd1108, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is selected (Sd1108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1109, and the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). ) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sd1109, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sd1109: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sd1110, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step Sd1111, where the low frequency support command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sd1111, the process advances to step Sd1112.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1108 that the mode is not high-frequency support mode (Sd1108: NO), or if it is determined in step Sd1109 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games (step Sd1109: YES), the process immediately proceeds to step Sd1112.

Through the processes from step Sd1104 to step Sd1111 described above, the lottery mode, support mode, and the lighting/extinguishing of the startup display section 39a at timing t23 in FIG. 221, and the lottery mode and support at timing t43 in FIG. Variations regarding the mode and lighting/extinguishing of the display unit at startup are realized. That is, at timing t23 in FIG. 221 and timing t43 in FIG. 223, the activation display section 39a is turned off even though the jackpot has been won, which is realized by steps Sd1104 to Sd1107. At timing t43 in FIG. 223, the transition to the low-frequency support mode despite winning the jackpot is achieved by executing steps Sd1110 and Sd1111 when it is determined in step Sd1109 that the number of games is not within the guaranteed number of games. be done.

In subsequent steps Sd1112 to Sd1119, a process for setting a game result in the case of a jackpot win and a process for setting a stop result are executed.

In step Sd1112, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sd1112, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sd1112: NO), proceed to step Sd1113 and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 211(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1112 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sd1112: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1114, and the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 211(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot. After executing the process of step Sd1113 or step Sd1114, the process advances to step Sd1115.

In step Sd1115, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Sd1115, if it is determined that the game result is a variable jackpot (Sd1115: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1116.

In step Sd1116, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a variable probability jackpot means that in the current game round in which a probability variable jackpot will be won, either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sd1116, the process advances to step Sd1117.

In step Sd1117, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sd1117, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sd1115, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is not a variable jackpot (Sd1115: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sd1118.

In step Sd1118, a stop result setting process for normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sd1118, the process advances to step Sd1119.

In step Sd1119, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sd1119, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sd1104, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sd1102 or step Sd1103 is not a jackpot (Sd1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1120 and executes a stop result setting process for a loss. The stop result setting process for a miss is to end the variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a miss. This is the process to set the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sd1120, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 232: Sd0903).

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sd1201, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1202.

In step Sd1202, it is determined whether the state is a high accuracy/high support state. Specifically, it is determined whether the high accuracy/high support flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are ON. As described above, the high accuracy/high support flag is a flag that is turned ON in step Sd0803 in FIG. 231. In step Sd1202, if it is determined that the high accuracy/high support flag is not ON (Sd1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1203.

In step Sd1203, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sd1203: YES). , proceed to step Sd1204. Furthermore, even if none of the above flags are ON, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is assumed that a reach has occurred. After making a determination (Sd1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1204. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sd1204, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sd1203, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the current game round (Sd1203: NO), the process advances to step Sd1205, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63e is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the non-reach variation time table is set such that the larger the total reservation number CRN, the shorter the variation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good.

Next, in step Sd1202, if it is determined that the high accuracy/high support flag is ON (Sd1202: YES), the process advances to step Sd1206.

In step Sd1206, it is determined whether or not at least one of the following cases applies: winning a winning lottery (jackpot winning), winning a fall lottery, and reaching a reach in the current game round. Specifically, i) the probability-variable jackpot flag in the various flag storage areas 64e is ON, ii) the normal jackpot flag in the various flag storage areas 64e is ON, and iii) the fall stored in the execution area AE. The value of the random number counter C4 matches the value set as a fall win in the fall judgment table in the fall judgment table storage area 63d, and iV) the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE. If at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: the value corresponds to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step Sd1206. In addition, in the description of this embodiment and its modification, "winning a winning lottery" means winning a jackpot in a winning lottery.

In step Sd1206, if it is determined that at least one of jackpot winning, falling winning, and reach occurrence occurs (Sd1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1207, and the battle stored in the variable time table storage area 63e is Obtain the variation time by referring to the result announcement performance variation time table. The variable time stored in the variable time table for battle result announcement performance is the time required to perform both the battle performance and the result announcement performance. The battle performance is the performance illustrated in FIG. 215(a). The result announcement performance is a defeat performance illustrated in FIG. 215(b), a victory performance illustrated in FIG. 215(c), or a draw performance. In this embodiment, the variable time stored in the battle result announcement effect variable time table is set to a constant length.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the variable time stored in the variable time table for battle result announcement effects can be changed depending on when a victory effect is performed as a result announcement effect, when a defeat effect is performed, and when a draw effect is performed. It may be different. In this case, the time occupied by the result announcement performance in the variable time is configured to be different depending on when a win performance is performed, when a defeat performance is performed, and when a draw performance is performed. Specifically, in the case of a victory performance, the excitement of winning can be enhanced by lengthening the variable time so that the result announcement occupies a longer time than in the case of a defeat performance or a tie performance.

After executing step Sd1207, the process proceeds to step Sd1209, and the high accuracy/high support flags in the various flag storage areas 64e are turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the variable time information acquired in step Sd1207 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1206 that it does not correspond to any of the jackpot winning, falling winning, and reach occurrence (Sd1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1208, and the losing winnings stored in the variable time table storage area 63e are performed. Obtain the variable time by referring to the variable time table for time production. In this embodiment, the variable time stored in the variable time table for effect at the time of loss is the effect when there is a high accuracy/high support state but it does not fall under any of the jackpot winning, falling winning, and reaching occurrence. This is the time required to complete the process, and is set to a certain amount of time. In the present embodiment, the variable time stored in the variable time table for effect when losing is set to be shorter than the variable time stored in the variable time table for battle result announcement effect.

After executing step Sd1208, the process proceeds to step Sd1209, and the high accuracy/high support flags in the various flag storage areas 64e are turned off. Next, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the variable time information acquired in step Sd1208 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 228: Sd0509).

FIG. 236 is an explanatory diagram showing the game state transition process. In step Sd1301, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. In step Sd1301, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sd1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1302, and the variable display of symbols on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b of one game round is Determine whether it is the timing to end. In step Sd1302, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (Sd1302; NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sd1302, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the variable display has ended (Sd1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1303, and the game result (winning lottery result) of the current game round is changed to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether it is compatible. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (Sd1303: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sd1303, if it is determined that any of the above flags is ON (Sd1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1304, and a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. do. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sd1304, the process advances to step Sd1305.

In step Sd1305, the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step Sd1305, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag (Sd1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1306, and the flags set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened. On the other hand, in step Sd1305, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag (Sd1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1307, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are ``8'' is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in . After executing step Sd1306 or step Sd1307, the process advances to step Sd1308.

In step Sd1308, the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1309, and the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is turned off.

After executing step Sd1309, the process advances to step Sd1310 and an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). This opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing step Sd1310, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sd1301, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Sd1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1311, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving section 36c is brought into the driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning the grand prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning hole 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the big winning hole 36a, or the opening limit number of balls has entered, the variable winning prize drive The driving state of the portion 36c is stopped, and the big prize opening 36a is closed. Details of the opening/closing process of the grand prize opening will be described later. After executing step Sd1311, the process advances to step Sd1312.

In step Sd1312, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sd1312: NO), the main game state transition process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sd1312: YES), the process advances to step Sd1313 and an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sd1313, the process advances to step Sd1314.

In step Sd1314, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current opening/closing execution mode ends. Details of the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described later. After executing step Sd1314, the process advances to step Sd1315.

In step Sd1315, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sd1316, and the process of terminating the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, if the 16R guaranteed strange jackpot flag, 8R certain strange jackpot flag, 16 normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag are ON, these flags are turned OFF, and if these flags are not ON, the state is changed. maintain. After executing step Sd1316, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 236: Sd1311).

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sd1401, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. In step Sd1401, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is not open (Sd1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1402, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Sd1402, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sd1402: YES), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1402 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sd1402: NO), the process advances to step Sd1403.

In step Sd1403, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. In step Sd1403, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sd1403: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Sd1403, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sd1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1404, where the variable winning drive unit is used to open the big winning opening 36a. 36c is in a driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1405.

In step Sd1405, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a, "10" is set in the entry ball counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency entry mode, for example, set "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec) in the first timer counter area T1, and set the ball entry counter area PC to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). You may also set it to "6". After executing step Sd1405, the process advances to step Sd1406.

In step Sd1406, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends. The opening command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started. The command output process (FIG. 228: Step Sd0505) sends the command to the audio emission control device 90. Based on the received opening command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also controls the content of the performance on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to open the grand prize opening 36a. The contents are updated to correspond to the fact that the opening of the site has started. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has started, and displays the performance content on the liquid crystal display device 41 when the opening of the grand prize opening 36a is started. Update the content to correspond to what has started.

In step Sd1401, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is open (step Sd1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1407, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" or not. do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the big prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step Sd1407 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sd1407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1408.

In step Sd1408, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a. In step Sd1408, if it is determined that no ball has entered (Sd1408: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1408 that an incoming ball has occurred (Sd1408: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1409, where the value of the incoming ball counter area PC is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sd1410.

In step Sd1410, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter area PC is "0". In step Sd1410, if it is determined that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is not "0" (Sd1410: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step Sd1407 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sd1407: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is "0" in step Sd1410, (Sd1410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1411 and executes the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the big winning a prize opening 36a, the variable winning a prize driving section 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1412.

In step Sd1412, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd1413, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Sd1413, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sd1413: YES), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Sd1413, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sd1413: NO), "1000" (ie, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. After executing step Sd1414, the process advances to step Sd1415 and a closing command is set. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

This set closing command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed. In the command output process (FIG. 228: Step Sd0505), the command is sent to the audio emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the presentation content on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the grand prize opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the completion of release. Further, the audio light emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has ended, and displays the content of the performance on the liquid crystal display device 41 such that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a has ended. Update the content to reflect what happened.

<Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends>
Next, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 236: Sd1314).

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In step Sd1501, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot is set in the RAM 64 as a jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd1501, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sd1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1502, and flag deletion processing is executed. The flag erasure process is a process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state. Specifically, if the opening/closing execution mode flag, high probability mode flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if these flags are not ON, the state is maintained. do. After executing step Sd1502, the process advances to step Sd1503.

In step Sd1503, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sd1504, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability modes and high frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1505.

In step Sd1505, a game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. After that, the process advances to step Sd1506.

In step Sd1506, a high probability mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sd1510.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1501 that the 16R normal jackpot flag or 8R normal jackpot flag is ON in the RAM 64 (Sd1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1507 and the flag deletion process is executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1508.

In step Sd1508, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sd1509, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sd1510.

In step Sd1510, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The power support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 228: Sd0510).

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sd1601, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sd1601 that the support flag is not ON (Sd1601: NO), the process advances to step Sd1602.

In step Sd1602, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. In step Sd1602, if it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (Sd1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1603.

In step Sd1603, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sd1603, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sd1603: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sd1603: YES), the process advances to step Sd1604.

In step Sd1604, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sd1604, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sd1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1605, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1604 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sd1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1606.

In step Sd1606, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sd1606, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sd1606: NO), the process for supporting the electronic accessory is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sd1606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1607.

In step Sd1607, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sd1608, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sd1607 (Sd1607: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step Sd1608 (Sd1608: YES), the process advances to step Sd1609, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sd1610.

In step Sd1610, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sd1609 is a support win. In step Sd1610, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sd1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1611, where the support win flag is turned ON, and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sd1610, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sd1610: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step Sd1611.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sd1607 (Sd1607: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sd1608 (Sd1608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1612, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1613.

In step Sd1613, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sd1612 is a support win. In step Sd1613, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sd1613: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1613 that support has been won (Sd1613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1614, where the support winning flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sd1602, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sd1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1615, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sd1615, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sd1615: NO), since the symbol in the general figure unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sd1615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1616.

In step Sd1616, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd1617, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sd1601, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sd1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1618, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the power support process (FIG. 239: Sd1618).

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sd1701, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sd1701: YES), the process advances to step Sd1702.

In step Sd1702, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sd1702, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sd1702: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sd1702, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sd1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1703, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sd1703, the process advances to step Sd1704.

In step Sd1704, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sd1705, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sd1705, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sd1705: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sd1705: YES), the process advances to step Sd1706 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sd1701, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sd1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1707, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sd1707, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sd1707: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sd1707, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sd1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1708, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1709.

In step Sd1709, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening/closing execution mode (Sd1709: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1710, and it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. do.

In step Sd1710, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sd1710: YES), the process advances to step Sd1711, and "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1709 that the opening/closing execution mode is selected (Sd1709: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not selected in step Sd1710 (Sd1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1712, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<D6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the battle effect and the result announcement effect will be explained. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sd1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are read out sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sd1801, the process advances to step Sd1802.

In step Sd1802, command corresponding processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the received command. Details of the command corresponding processing will be described later. After executing step Sd1802, the process advances to step Sd1803.

In step Sd1803, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in the command corresponding process of step Sd1802. After executing step Sd1803, the process advances to step Sd1804.

In step Sd1804, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the command corresponding process of step Sd1802. After executing step Sd1804, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command compatible processing>
Next, command corresponding processing will be explained. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 241: Sd1802).

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing command corresponding processing. As described above, in the command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described below.

In step Sd1901, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sd1901, if it is determined that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1902, and processing corresponding to the pending command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sd1902, the process advances to step Sd1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1901 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1903 without executing step Sd1902.

In step Sd1903, it is determined whether a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sd1903 that a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1903: YES), the process advances to step Sd1904, and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. The sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 (see FIG. 212) to specify whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The flags are stored in the set various flag storage areas 94e. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1907.

If it is determined in step Sd1903 that a high-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1905, where it is determined whether a low-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. judge. If it is determined in step Sd1905 that a low-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1905: YES), the process advances to step Sd1906, and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1907. In step Sd1905, if it is determined that the low frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1905: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sd1907.

In step Sd1907, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sd1907, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received (Sd1907: YES), the process advances to step Sd1908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1907 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sd1907: NO), the process advances to step Sd1909.

In step Sd1908, effect setting processing is executed. In the performance setting process, the battle performance, result notification performance, stop symbols, variable display pattern, etc. to be executed in the current game round are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sd1908, the process advances to step Sd1909.

In step Sd1909, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sd1909, if it is determined that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1909: YES), the process advances to step Sd1910 and an opening effect setting process is executed. In the opening performance setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening performance corresponding to the type of jackpot are set, and information corresponding to the content of the performance is set. An opening presentation command is sent to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1909 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1909: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1911 without executing step Sd1910.

In step Sd1911, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. In step Sd1911, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (Sd1911: YES), the process advances to step Sd1912 and an ending effect setting process is executed. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and the content of the ending effect is set in accordance with the content of the effect. An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd1913. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1911 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1913 without executing step Sd1912.

In step Sd1913, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, the content of presentation corresponding to the open command and the content of presentation corresponding to the closing command are set. Furthermore, when the performance operation button 24 is pressed, a performance operation command for recognizing that the performance operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a command handling subroutine (FIG. 242: Sd1902).

FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling process will be described below.

In step Sd2001, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, A process is executed to enable the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of pending information. Details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sd2001 will be described later. Below, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as the "first reservation number", and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first reservation number". The number is also called the "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also called the "total pending number". After executing step Sd2001, the process advances to step Sd2002.

In step Sd2002, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sd2001 and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 are determined. Based on the number, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled. After executing step Sd2002, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 243: Sd2001) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing update processing when a ball enters the ball. In step Sd2101, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Sd2101, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sd2101: YES), the process advances to step Sd2102, and the Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the audio-optical side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step Sd2102, the process advances to step Sd2104.

In step Sd2101, if it is determined that the held command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sd2101: NO), that is, the held command is If it is determined that the transmission was based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sd2103, and updates processing of the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is performed. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Sd2103, the process advances to step Sd2104.

The reason why the processes of step Sd2102 and step Sd2103 are performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 stores the hold information. is stored and held, whereas the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of pending information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step Sd2104, a process of updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of pending balls counter area indicates the sum of the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sd2104, the update processing at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be explained. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 242: Sd1908).

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As mentioned above, the effect setting process is a process that is executed when it is determined that a variation command and a type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect to be executed in the current game round. . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be explained.

In step Sd2201, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a fall win, the presence or absence of a reach, and the variation time is grasped. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd2202.

In step Sd2202, it is determined whether a high accuracy/high support command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sd2202, if it is determined that a high accuracy/high support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2203, and a high accuracy/high support performance setting process is executed. Details of the high accuracy/high support performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sd2203, the process advances to step Sd2205.

On the other hand, in step Sd2202, if it is determined that the high accuracy/high support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd2202: NO), the process advances to step Sd2204.

In step Sd2204, effect setting processing in normal times is executed. Specifically, a jackpot performance, a reach performance, and a losing performance are set in accordance with the fluctuation time of the game cycle in a game cycle in a state other than the high probability/high support state. After executing step Sd2204, the process advances to step Sd2205.

In step Sd2205, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the process of setting the stop symbol, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the symbol will be placed on the active line L (see Figure 207). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Sd2205, the process advances to step Sd2206.

In step Sd2206, processing for determining a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols specified in step Sd2205 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd2207.

In step Sd2207, the performance type information set in step Sd2203 or Sd2204, the stop symbol type information set in step Sd2205, and the variable display pattern type information set in step Sd2206 in the current game round are Set to command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd2208, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step Sd2208, the process proceeds to step Sd2209, and after executing the update process at the start of variation, the effect setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<High accuracy/high support performance setting process>
Next, high accuracy/high support performance setting processing will be explained. The high accuracy/high support effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 245: Sd2203).

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the high accuracy/high support performance setting process. In step Sd2301, it is determined whether or not a probability variable jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the information on the type of jackpot that were grasped in step Sd2201 of FIG. 245. In step Sd2301, an affirmative determination is made if a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot is won. In step Sd2301, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the current game round (Sd2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2302.

In step Sd2302, a battle effect/result announcement effect setting process is executed. Specifically, in the current game round, the battle effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a) and the victory effect illustrated in FIG. 215(c) are set to be executed together. A victory performance is executed continuously after a battle performance. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined according to the variable time obtained on the main control device 60 side using the variable time table for battle result announcement effect shown in FIG. After executing step Sd2302, the high accuracy/high support performance setting process is ended.

In step Sd2301, if the probability variable jackpot has not been won in the current game round (Sd2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2303.

In step Sd2303, it is determined whether or not the player has won the normal jackpot or fall lottery in the current game round. This determination is made using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the information on the type of jackpot, and the information on the presence or absence of a falling win, which were grasped in step Sd2201 of FIG. 245. In step Sd2304, an affirmative determination is made if any one of the 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and falling lottery is won. In step Sd2303, if it is determined that the normal jackpot or fall lottery was won in the current game round (Sd2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2304.

In step Sd2304, a battle effect/result announcement effect setting process is executed. Specifically, in the current game round, the battle effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a) and the defeat effect illustrated in FIG. 215(b) are set to be executed together. After the battle performance, the defeat performance is executed continuously. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined according to the variable time obtained on the main control device 60 side using the variable time table for battle result announcement effect shown in FIG. The process in step Sd2304 is similar to step Sd2302, except that step Sd2302 is a victory effect, whereas it is a defeat effect. After executing step Sd2304, the high accuracy/high support performance setting process is ended.

In step Sd2303, if it is determined that the normal jackpot or fall lottery has not been won in the current game round (Sd2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2305.

In step Sd2305, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information regarding the presence or absence of reach occurrence, which was grasped in step Sd2201 of FIG. 245. In step Sd2305, if it is determined that a reach has occurred in the current game round (Sd2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2306.

In step Sd2306, battle performance/result notification setting processing is executed. Specifically, in the current game round, the battle effect and the draw effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a) are set to be executed. After the battle performance, a draw performance is executed consecutively. The draw effect is set to execute a draw effect in which the player's character and the enemy's character are in a draw. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined according to the variable time obtained on the main control device 60 side using the variable time table for battle result announcement effect shown in FIG. After executing step Sd2306, the high accuracy/high support performance setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sd2305, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred in the current game round (Sd2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2307, and a losing performance setting process is executed. Specifically, it is set to perform a performance when none of the jackpot winnings, falling winnings, and reach occurrences occur. At the time of this setting, the performance time is determined according to the variation time acquired by the main controller 60 using the variation time table for performance when the performance is off in FIG. 235. After executing step Sd2307, the high accuracy/high support performance setting process is ended.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the variation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 245: Sd2215).

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sd2401, it is determined whether the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command. In step Sd2401, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command (Sd2401: YES), the process advances to step Sd2402, where the command is stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd2401 that the fluctuation command received this time is not the first fluctuation command (Sd2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2403, where the command is stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sd2501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd2502.

In step Sd2502, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sd2601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sd2701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 249) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Sd2701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of effects such as the preview effects and stop symbols set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode on the liquid crystal display. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them.

In step Sd2702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sd2701) etc. . After that, the process advances to step Sd2703.

In step Sd2703, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sd2702), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd2704.

In step Sd2704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sd2703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on this information, and also sends an image along with a drive signal in order to display on the liquid crystal display device 41 the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd2705, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing the battle performance and result notification performance in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state during the previous operation while the lottery mode remains the high probability mode, then the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state. When 88 is switched from the off state to the on state, the high probability mode is taken over as the lottery mode. When the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state while this high probability mode is taken over, the startup display section 39a lights up. Therefore, when the startup display section 39a goes out, the player can infer that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10, the start-up display section 39a turns off at the start of a game round in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, so that the player's guess can be overturned. Specifically, when the light goes out, the player guesses that the player has moved to the low probability mode and becomes disappointed, but in the game where the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, the player does not actually shift to the low probability mode. Therefore, the disappointed player's guess can be overturned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, regardless of whether the game round is won in a winning lottery (big hit win) or the game round is won in a fall lottery, the machine is activated at the start of the winning game round. Since the time display section 39a switches from the lit state to the unlit state, the player can guess from the lit/unlit state of the display section 39a at the time of startup whether it is a game round in which the winning lottery was won or a game round in which the winning lottery was won. You can prevent this from happening. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game round in which the falling lottery is won, the specific performance illustrated in FIG. 215(a) is performed before the result announcement performance (defeat performance) illustrated in FIG. 215(b). 215, which is the same as when winning the fall lottery, before the result announcement performance (victory performance) illustrated in FIG. Since the battle performance illustrated in (a) is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases is occurring due to the battle performance. Furthermore, as explained earlier, at the start of a game round, the player can guess from the lighting/unlighting state of the startup display section 39a whether it is a game round in which the winning lottery was won or a game round in which the winning lottery was won. You can also prevent it from happening. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give players a sense of anticipation and tension over a temporal range through the battle performance.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the player recognizes whether he or she has won a fall lottery or won a winning lottery (jackpot win) through the lighting/extinguishing state of the display section 39a at startup, it is possible to When making a player recognize whether he or she has won a lottery or a winning lottery, a sense of anticipation and urgency is given to the player over a relatively long period of time by giving the performance a time range. Is possible. In addition, in the production, a series of productions is created by appropriately combining production elements that suggest that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot and production elements that suggest that there is a high probability of winning the falling lottery. By executing this, it is possible to give tone to the player's sense of expectation. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, if the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON, the startup display section 39a lights up. Therefore, it is possible for the player to guess that the lighting/unlighting state of the startup display section 39a is related to the lottery mode that specifies whether or not the high probability mode is selected. In addition, since the startup display section 39a turns off when a battle performance, which is a specific performance, is started, it is assumed that the execution of the battle performance and the lighting/unlighting state of the startup display section 39a are related. can make people guess. Based on both guesses, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to guess that the execution of a specific performance and the lottery mode are related. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to impart a sense of anticipation and tension as to whether or not the lottery mode will shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode to the players who have recognized the execution of the battle performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, if the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON, the startup display section 39a lights up. Therefore, when the startup display section 39a goes out, the player can infer that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10, even though the start-up display section 39a is turned off at the start of the game round corresponding to the pending information for winning the winning lottery (jackpot winning), the winning lottery corresponding to the game round is not executed. Since the game is executed in a high probability mode, it is possible to overturn the player's guess. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to provide surprise to the players, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221 relative to FIG. 220 and FIG. 223 relative to FIG. In contrast, the timing at which the startup display section 39a switches from a lit state to an unlit state is different between a game round when a player wins a falling lottery and a game game when a player wins a winning lottery. Matches the game times. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing from the lighting/extinguishing state of the display section 39a at the time of startup whether it is a game round in which the falling lottery was won or a game round in which the winning lottery was won. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state and the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the startup display section 39a lights up. Therefore, when the startup display section 39a goes out, the player can infer that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the number of consecutively executed games in the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times), the lottery mode changes to the low probability mode. Taking this transition as an opportunity, the electric accessory 34a transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, when the electric accessory 34a shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the player can infer that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, the player is made to infer that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode from both the fact that the startup display section 39a has turned off and the electric accessory 34a has shifted to the low frequency support mode. I can do it. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, a game that is determined to have won a jackpot in a winning lottery. At the beginning of a round, the player's guess can be overturned. Specifically, since the startup display 39a has turned off and the electric accessory 34a has switched to the low-frequency support mode, the player assumes that the game has shifted to the low-probability mode, and is disappointed. In the game round in which a jackpot is won, the game does not actually shift to the low-probability mode, so it is possible to overturn the disappointed player's guess. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display section 39a is lit at startup, and before the number of consecutively executed games in the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (=guaranteed number of games) ), whether it is determined that you have won the jackpot in the winning lottery or if you have won the falling lottery, the startup display section 39a will display the same message at the start of the game round in which you won the jackpot or won the falling lottery. Behavior (turning on/off). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether a jackpot win or a fall win has occurred based on the display mode of the startup display section 39a. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is maintained as the support mode from the start of the game round until at least the end of the game round, regardless of whether the player wins a jackpot or wins a fall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether a jackpot win or a fall win has occurred based on the behavior of the electric accessory 34a during a game round. Therefore, from the start of the game round to the end of the game round within the guaranteed number of games, from the display mode of the startup display section 39a and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a, it is possible to determine whether it was a jackpot win or a fall win. This can prevent players from guessing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when winning a jackpot or winning a fall within the guaranteed number of games, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension for a relatively long period of time, and as a result, the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to improve the interest of children. Further, when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state and the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the startup display section 39a lights up. Therefore, when the startup display section 39a goes out, the player can infer that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at the start of a game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the startup display section 39a switches from a lit state to an off state, so that the player's guess can be overturned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

<<D7>> Modification of the fourth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《D7-1》Variation 1:
<Summary of processing in modification 1>
An overview of the processing performed by the pachinko machine in Modification 1 will first be described while pointing out the differences from the fourth embodiment. The hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the first modification is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, so parts that are the same as those in the fourth embodiment are given the same names and symbols, and the outline of the process is Explain.

FIG. 251 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when the pachinko machine of Modification 1 wins a jackpot for the first time after startup. FIG. 251 is a time chart corresponding to FIG. 221 of the fourth embodiment, and similarly to FIG. 221, it shows a case where the gaming state is taken over when the power is turned on. Then, similarly to FIG. 221, if the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is lit at timing t22 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 251, a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the 60th game run. At timing t23 when the 60th game round in which the player wins the jackpot starts, the display section 39a at startup is turned off. This is the same as FIG. 221 in the fourth embodiment.

Although not shown, at this timing t23, a battle performance is started, and after the battle performance is finished, a victory performance is performed as a result notification performance. Further, at this timing t23, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, when the 60th game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery starts (timing t23), the startup display section 39a is turned off and the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at timing t23.

FIG. 252 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process when the pachinko machine of Modification 1 wins a jackpot for the first time after startup. FIG. 252 is a time chart corresponding to FIG. 223 in the fourth embodiment, and similarly to FIG. 223, it shows a case where the gaming state is taken over when the power is turned on. Similarly to FIG. 223, if the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is lit at timing t42 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 252, a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the 120th game run. At timing t43 when the 120th game round in which the player wins the jackpot starts, the startup display section 39a is turned off. This is the same as FIG. 223 in the fourth embodiment.

Although not shown, at this timing t43, a battle performance is started, and after the battle performance ends, a victory performance is performed as a result notification performance. Further, at this timing t43, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, even if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the 120th game run, when the game run in which the jackpot win is started (timing t43), the startup display section 39a is turned off and the lottery mode is switched off. moves from high probability mode to low probability mode. This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at timing t43.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of modification 1, the process when winning the falling lottery for the first time after startup is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. That is, if the player wins the fall lottery in the 60th game after the high-frequency support mode is started after the power is turned on, the same process as in the time chart of FIG. 220 of the fourth embodiment is performed. If the player wins the fall lottery in the 120th game after the high-frequency support mode is started after the power is turned on, the same process as in the time chart of FIG. 222 of the fourth embodiment is performed.

As can be seen from the above processing overview, in the pachinko machine of Modification 1, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, either the game run in which the fall lottery was won, or the game run in which the jackpot win was won in the winning lottery. Even in the game round, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of the game round. This point differs from the fourth embodiment. In the pachinko machine of the first modification, the startup display section 39a turns off at the timing of transition to the low probability mode. By processing in this way, the control of the startup display section 39a can be controlled in conjunction with the lottery mode.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described process in the pachinko machine of modification 1 will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the fourth embodiment, except that the processes shown in FIGS. 253 to 256, which will be described later, are executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device The remaining processes executed by the MPU 62 of 60, various processes executed by the audio emission control device 90, and various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Fluctuation start processing>
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing variation start processing in Modification 1. In this variation start process, steps Sd2801 to Sd2802 are the same as steps Sd0901 to Sd0902 in the variation start process (FIG. 232) of the fourth embodiment, and steps Sd2804 to Sd2809 are the same as steps Sd0901 to Sd0902 in the variation start process (FIG. 232) of the fourth embodiment. This is the same as steps Sd0903 to Sd0908. The variation start process in the first modification differs from the variation start process in the fourth embodiment only in that a startup display control process (step Sd2803) is added between step Sd2802 and step Sd2804. It is. Details of the startup display unit control process will be described later.

<Fall judgment processing>
FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing in Modification 1. In this fall determination process, steps Sd2901 to Sd2903 are the same as steps Sd1001 to Sd1003 in the fall determination process (FIG. 233) of the fourth embodiment, and steps Sd2904 to Sd2906 are the same as the fluctuation start process (FIG. 233) of the fourth embodiment. This is the same as steps Sd1007 to Sy1009. This fall judgment process is different from the fall judgment process of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 233) in that steps Sd1004 to Sd1006 of the fall judgment process of the fourth embodiment are deleted, and the remaining They are the same in some respects. That is, in the fall determination process in Modification 1, the activation display section 39a is not turned off.

<Hit determination processing>
FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing in Modification 1. In this hit determination process, steps Sd3001 to Sd3005 are the same as steps Sd1101 to Sd1105 of the hit determination process of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 234), and steps Sd3007 to Sd3019 are the same as steps Sd1101 to Sd1105 of the hit determination process of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 234). This is the same as steps Sd1108 to Sd1120. This hit determination process is different from the hit determination process of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 234) in that step Sd1106 of the hit determination process of the fourth embodiment is deleted; The point is that the process of step Sd3006 is executed instead of step Sd1107. That is, if you win the jackpot in the winning lottery (Sd3004: YES) and it is determined that the startup display flag is turned on (Sd3005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3006, and the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are Turn off the high probability mode flag. After executing step Sd3006, the process advances to step Sd3007.

<Display control processing at startup>
FIG. 256 is a flowchart illustrating the startup display unit control process in Modification 1. The startup display unit control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 253: Sd2803). In step Sd3101, it is determined whether the startup display section 39a is lit. Specifically, it is determined whether the startup display flag in the various flag storage area 64e is turned on.

In step Sd3101, if it is determined that the startup display flag is turned on (Sd3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3102, and it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sd3102, if it is determined that the mode is not the high probability mode, that is, the mode is the low probability mode (Sd3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd3103, and the startup display section 39a provided in the main display section 45 is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd3104, and the startup display section flag is turned off. After executing step Sd3104, the startup display unit control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd3101 that the startup display flag is not turned on (Sd3101: NO), or if it is determined that the high probability mode is in step Sd3102 (Sd3102: YES), step Sd3103 and step The startup display unit control process ends without executing Sd3104.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, when the lottery mode is switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode while the startup display section 39a is lit, the startup display section 39a can be switched from on to off. Furthermore, the pachinko machine of the first modification switches the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of a game round in which the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery. Therefore, the display section 39a at startup is lit and switches its display mode from lit to off at the start of a game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. At this time, the player who recognizes that the start-up display section 39a has switched from being lit to being turned off at the start of a game round can be made to infer that the determination in that game round was executed in the low probability mode. However, the game round starts after it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery, and the lottery mode is switched from high probability mode to low probability mode at the start of the game round, so the winning lottery for the game round is in high probability mode. is executed. Therefore, it is possible to overturn the player's assumption that the winning lottery in the game round was executed in a low probability mode, and to give the player a sense of surprise. Furthermore, since the game round is a game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of surprise and anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first modification, the lottery mode is switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of a game round, but after the winning lottery is performed in the high probability mode and a jackpot is won, the lottery mode is switched. Since the mode is switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage in the relevant game round. Furthermore, since the control for switching the start-up display section 39a from on to off is linked to the control for switching the winning lottery from a high-probability mode to a low-probability mode, the control for switching the start-up display section 39a between lighting and turning off is linked. It is possible to avoid special control and to use simple control, while overturning the player's presumptions as described above and providing surprise to the player.

《D7-2》Variation 2:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the startup display section 39a, which constitutes at least a part of the display means, is composed of an LED (light emitting diode), but instead of this, an incandescent lamp, a fluorescent lamp, It may be configured with other light emitting parts such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL.

《D7-3》Variation 3:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the combination of the first display mode and the second display mode that the display means can take is a combination of a light-off state and a light-on state. It may be a combination of a state and a lighting state, or a combination of a non-lighting state and a blinking state. Furthermore, a combination of two types of blinking states with different blinking intervals may be used. Furthermore, it may be a combination of two types of pictures displayed on a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or the like. Note that the "first display mode" or "second display mode" may also include a light-off state, as described above. These configurations can also provide the same effects as those described in the fourth embodiment.

<<D7-4>> Modification example 4:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to include the power switch 88, but instead, it may be configured not to include the power switch 88. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is executed or interrupted wirelessly from outside a hall including the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and in this configuration, the power switch 88 is Regardless of whether power is supplied to the pachinko machine or not, a power outage monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device detects whether power is being supplied to the pachinko machine or in a non-supply state where power is not being supplied to the pachinko machine. become. Even with a configuration that does not include a power switch, the same effects as those described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

<<D7-5>> Modification example 5:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the determination mode (lottery mode) of the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode. may be configured to have three types of probability modes (for example, a low probability mode, a medium probability mode, and a high probability mode) divided into three stages. Furthermore, the configuration may have n types of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

《D7-6》Variation 6:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, a victory performance, a defeat performance, and a draw performance are performed as the result notification performance, but instead, only the victory performance and the defeat performance are performed as the result notification performance. It's good as well. According to this configuration, winning and losing can be made clear to the player.

<<D7-7>> Modification example 7:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the battle performance is executed as a specific performance before the result announcement performance, but the specific performance is not limited to the battle performance. The above-mentioned specific performance may have any configuration as long as it is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a result announcement performance may be executed. As the performance that suggests that the result announcement performance may be executed, for example, a performance that suggests that the lottery mode will shift from a high probability mode to a low probability mode, etc. can be adopted. With such a configuration, the same effects as those described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

《D7-8》Variation 8:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the effects executed in one game are composed of two types of effects: a battle effect and a result announcement effect. It may be composed of three types of performances: a performance and a result announcement performance. The third performance may be, for example, a promotional video of the model of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be used. Alternatively, only a result announcement performance may be performed without performing a battle performance.

《D7-9》Variation 9:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the battle effect executed when winning the falling lottery and the battle effect executed when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery are the same, but this is not limited to this. Not done. For example, a part of the image forming the battle effect may be different between the battle effect when winning a fall lottery and the battle effect when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. For example, by creating images that are similar overall but that only some players can notice are different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

《D7-10》Variation 10:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is explained by taking as an example the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. but not limited to. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case may be employed in which a condition for executing a reach effect based on the counter value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is satisfied. In this way, even if other conditions are set as the predetermined conditions, the same effects as those described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

《D7-11》Variation 11:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, at timing t43 (see FIG. 223) when the game round starts. The configuration shifts to the low-frequency support mode, but instead shifts to the low-frequency support mode at timing t44 (see FIG. 223) when the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts. It's good as well. With this configuration as well, effects similar to those described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

《D7-12》Variation 12:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the low probability mode is adopted as the first state specified by the state information in the state storage means, and the high probability mode is adopted as the second state. The first state and the second state are not limited to these. For example, the first state may be a low-frequency support mode, and the second state may be a high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, as the specific process to start execution in the specific process execution means, the process of lighting up the display section 39a at startup is employed, but the specific process is not limited to the process of lighting up the display section 39a at startup. For example, the specific process may be a process that executes a high-frequency support mode.

《D7-13》Variation 13:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is determined to be the low-probability mode when a fall lottery is performed and a winner is won. However, instead of this, the fall lottery itself is not performed. It's good as well. With this configuration as well, similarly to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to overturn the guess of the player in the game round in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, giving the player a sense of surprise, and improving the interest of the game. You can get the effect that you can.

《D7-14》Variation 14:
In the above modification 1, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game number less than the guaranteed number of games, the lottery mode changes from the high probability mode at the start of that game time. The support mode remains the high-frequency support mode (see timing t43 in FIG. 252), but instead, the lottery mode is shifted to the low-probability mode at the start of the game round. The support mode may be configured to shift from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in conjunction with the above. According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect that the control routine is simplified.

《D7-15》Variation 15:
In the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. The configuration may include two control devices such as a control device and a sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fourth embodiment. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the classification described in the fourth embodiment, and the three control devices It is sufficient that the devices 60, 90, 100 as a whole can execute all the processes in the fourth embodiment.

<<E>> Fifth embodiment:
《E1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 257 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a fifth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 258 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device is equipped with a liquid crystal display that displays images for designs and effects.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 259 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a game ball sorting device 200.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 258).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is shifted to when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on winning in the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning in the big winning opening 36a becomes possible. Similarly, even when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery based on a prize entered into the second starting opening 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning can be made into the large winning opening 36a. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display device to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by winning the through gate 35 is held, the common figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. In a round game, the door opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning in the first start opening 33, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a predetermined display in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. In addition, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on a winning in the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a predetermined display in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. . The liquid crystal display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 260(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 260(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 260(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 260(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, and the symbols in each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol On either one of the display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a predetermined information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 260(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

In FIG. 259, a game ball sorting device 200 (see FIG. 259) is a device for sorting game balls that enter from a first ball entrance 201 into which game balls can enter into a normal route NR and a special route SP. and is provided above the first starting port 33 in the gaming area PA. The detailed configuration of the game ball sorting device 200 will be explained next.

《E2》Configuration of game ball sorting device:
261 and 262 are cross-sectional views showing the game ball sorting device 200. FIG. 261 shows the valve bodies 241, 251, which will be described later, in a closed state, and FIG. 262 shows the valve bodies 241, 251 in an open state. In FIG. 261 and FIG. 262, a cut surface when cut along a plane parallel to the game board 30 is shown as a cross section. In the figure, the +X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the -X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front.

As shown in both figures, the game ball sorting device 200 includes a first passage 210, a second passage 220 arranged adjacent to the -X direction side of the first passage 210, and a second passage 220 arranged adjacent to the -X direction side of the first passage 210. and a third passage 230 disposed adjacent to the side. In this embodiment, the first to third passages 210 to 230 are made of transparent resin members.

The first passage 210 has a first ball entry port 201 at its upper end, and allows game balls entered from the first ball entry port 201 to flow downward. The first passage 210 includes one main passage 211 and two branch passages 212 and 213 separated from the main passage 211 (hereinafter referred to as "first branch passage 212" and "second branch passage 213"). , has. The cross-sectional shape of each of the passages 211 to 213 perpendicular to the flow direction is approximately U-shaped, and each passage 211 to 213 is installed such that the open side of the U-shape faces the game area PA.

The main line passage 211 is divided into a main line upstream section 211a, a main line intermediate section 211b, and a main line downstream section 211c. The main line upstream portion 211a is the most upstream portion of the main line passage 211, and has a linear shape extending directly downward from the first ball entry port 201. The main line intermediate portion 211b is a portion that continues from the lower end of the main line upstream portion 211a, and has a shape that extends from the lower end of the main line upstream portion 211a in the lower right direction and bends directly downward in the middle. The main line downstream portion 211c is a portion following the main line intermediate portion 211b, and has a linear shape extending in the lower right direction from the lower end of the main line intermediate portion 211b.

The first branch passage 212 is located directly below the first branch point 211x, with the connecting part between the main line upstream section 211a and the main line intermediate section 211b in the main line passage 211 as a branch point (hereinafter referred to as "first branch point") 211x. It has a linear shape that extends in the direction. Therefore, the main line upstream portion 211a of the main line passage 211 and the first branch passage 212 constitute one linear passage extending directly downward from the first ball entry port 201. The first branch point 211x is provided with a first game ball distribution mechanism 240 that distributes game balls to either the main line intermediate portion 211b of the main line path 211 or the first branch path 212.

The second branch passage 213 is located directly below the second branch point 211y, with a connecting part between the main line intermediate section 211b and the main line downstream section 211c in the main line passage 211 as a branch point (hereinafter referred to as "second branch point") 211y. It has a linear shape that extends in the direction. The second branch point 211y is provided with a second game ball distribution mechanism 250 that distributes the game balls to either the main line downstream portion 211c of the main line path 211 or the second branch path 213.

The second passage 220 has a second ball entry port 221 at the upper end into which a game ball can enter, and allows the game ball entered from the second ball entry port 221 to flow downward. In the present embodiment, the vertical position (that is, height) of the second ball entry port 221 is the same as the height of the first ball entry port 201 formed in the first passage 210, and the second ball entry port 221 is The opening 221 and the first ball entrance opening 201 are adjacent to each other. The second passage 220 is a single continuous passage that does not branch in the middle, and is divided into an upstream portion 220a extending directly below from the second ball entrance 221 and a downstream portion 220b extending toward the lower left. Ru.

The upstream portion 220a is arranged along the main upstream portion 211a of the first passage 210 and a portion of the first branch passage 212. In this embodiment, the side wall of the upstream portion 220a on the first passage 210 side and the side wall of the first passage 210 on the upstream portion 220a side are constituted by one wall body 210a. The cross-sectional shape of the second passage 220 perpendicular to the flow direction is approximately U-shaped like the first passage 210, and the second passage 220 is installed so that the opening side of the U-shape faces the game area PA. .

The third passage 230 has a third ball entry port 231 at the upper end into which a game ball can enter, and allows the game ball entered from the third ball entry port 231 to flow downward. In this embodiment, the height of the third ball entrance port 231 and the height of the first ball entrance port 201 formed in the first passage 210 are the same, and the height of the third ball entrance port 231 and the first ball entrance port 201 are the same. is adjacent to. The third passage 210 is a single continuous passage that does not branch in the middle, and extends directly downward without shifting from side to side when viewed from the front. However, in the depth direction (front and back directions in the figure), the third passage 230 is curved in a U-shape toward the rear side (back side in the figure) so as to straddle the main line intermediate portion 211b of the main line passage 211. . Note that this U-shaped shape allows the game ball to flow down.

The third passage 230 is arranged along the main line upstream portion 211a of the first passage 210 and the first branch passage 212, except for the above-mentioned U-shaped curved portion. In this embodiment, the side wall of the third passage 230 on the first passage 210 side of the portion excluding the U-shaped curved portion and the side wall of the first passage 210 on the third passage 230 side are common. It is constituted by one wall body 210b. The cross-sectional shape of the third passage 230 perpendicular to the flow direction is approximately U-shaped like the first passage 210, and the third passage 230 is installed so that the opening side of the U-shape faces the gaming area PA. .

The first game ball distribution mechanism 240 mainly includes a valve body 241 and an action piece 242 connected to the valve body 241. The valve body 241 is a plate-shaped member disposed within the first branch point 211x. A rotating shaft 243 is embedded in the wall 210a next to the first branch point 211x in a direction perpendicular to the game area PA, and the valve body 241 is rotatably supported around the axis of the rotating shaft 243. ing. The valve body 241 has a weight 244, and generates a moment of force around the rotating shaft 243 by its own weight including the weight 244 of the valve body 241.

The valve body 241 has a first position where it closes the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch passage 212 (the position of the valve body 241 shown in FIG. 261), and a first position where it closes the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch passage 212. The valve body 241 rotates between a second open position (the position of the valve body 241 shown in FIG. 262). The right corner CN of the first branch point 211x restricts the valve body 241 from rotating clockwise, so that the valve body 241 can be positioned at the first position. The first position is the initial position where no force other than gravity is acting on the valve body 241.

The second position is a position where the opening from the main passageway 211 to the first branch passageway 212 is opened at least enough for the game ball to pass through, and in this embodiment, the opening from the main passageway 211 to the first branch passageway 212 is opened to the extent that the game ball can pass. This is the position where it is rotated and stored inside the storage recess DE formed in the wall body 210a (see FIG. 262). Note that the second position does not necessarily have to be a position where the valve body 241 is housed inside the wall body 210a, but may be any position as long as the opening is opened enough to allow the game ball to pass through. You can also do that.

The action piece 242 is a plate-shaped member, and is provided at a point symmetrical position with respect to the valve body 241 with the rotation axis 243 as the center of symmetry. Therefore, when the valve body 241 is in the first position, the operating piece 242 projects inside the second passage 220. When the game ball enters from the second ball entry port 221, passes through the second passage 220, and reaches the action piece 242 from the state shown in FIG. 261 in the first position, the game ball The action piece 242 is pushed down, and a moment of counterclockwise force is applied to the action piece 242. As a result, the valve body 241 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 261, and as the game ball passes, the valve body 241 moves to the second position as shown in FIG. 262.

When the valve body 241 is in the second position, the opening from the main passageway 211 to the first branch passageway 212 is opened, so the game ball flows down the first branch passageway 212 from the opening. Therefore, the game ball P1 (FIG. 262) that has passed through the main line upstream portion 211a of the main line passage 211 and reached the first branch point 211x is distributed to the first branch passage 212.

After that, when the game ball leaves the action piece 242 in the second passage 220, a clockwise moment of force acts on the valve body 241 due to its own weight, and it returns from the second position to the first position (FIG. 261) .

According to the first game ball sorting mechanism 240 having the above configuration, when the game balls are distributed in the second passage 220, the game balls P1 (FIG. 261) that have reached the first branch point 211x are transferred to the first branch passage 212. It can be sorted. More specifically, since the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch line passage 212 opens when the game ball passes within the range in which the action piece 242 operates within the second passage 220, at that time, the first branch passage 212 opens. When the game ball P1 reaches the first branch point 211x of the first path 210, the game ball P1 can be distributed to the first branch path 212. In other words, a game ball enters the second ball entrance 221 of the second passage 220, and at the same time as the ball enters or a little later, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 201, the game ball that enters the first ball entry port 201 can be distributed to the first branch path 212. That is, in a specific case where the time interval between the game ball entering the first ball entry port 201 and the ball entering the second ball entry port 221 is within a specific time (period in which the action piece 242 acts). In addition, game balls that enter the first ball entry port 201 can be distributed to the first branch path 212.

The second game ball distribution mechanism 250 has the same configuration as the first game ball distribution mechanism 240. That is, the second game ball sorting mechanism 250 mainly includes a valve body 251 and an action piece 252 connected to the valve body 251. A weight 254 is attached to the valve body 251. The operation of the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 is also the same as that of the first game ball distribution mechanism 240, and the valve body 251 is in the first position ( The position of the valve body 251 shown in FIG. 261) and the second position that opens the opening from the main line passage 211 to the second branch passage 213 (the position of the valve body 251 shown in FIG. 262) do. When the game ball enters from the third ball entrance 231, passes through the third passage 230, and reaches the action piece 252, the game ball pushes down the action piece 252 and rotates counterclockwise with respect to the action piece 252. acts a moment of force. This causes the valve body 251 to move from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the opening from the main path 211 to the first branch path 212 is opened, and the game ball P2 (FIG. 262) that has reached the second branch point 211y is distributed to the second branch path 213.

The downstream end of the main passage 211 of the first passage 210 communicates with the normal route NR (FIG. 258). The downstream end of the first branch passage 212 in the first passage 210 and the downstream end of the second branch passage 213 in the first passage 210 are combined to communicate with the special route SP (FIG. 259). There is. The downstream end of the second passage 220 and the downstream end of the third passage 230 meet and communicate with the outroute OT (FIG. 259).

As shown in FIG. 259, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting port 33 via the normal route NR, the special route SP, and the normal route NR and the special route. There are three cases in which the route does not go through any of the route SPs. If the ball does not go through either the normal route NR or the special route SP, the ball enters from the left side or right side of the first starting port 33, and the probability of the ball entering the first starting port 33 is not 0. is extremely low. Since the normal route NR opens at a position shifted to the right from directly above the first starting port 33, if the ball goes via the normal route NR, the probability of the ball entering the first starting port 33 is the normal route NR. Although the probability is higher than that of not going through either of the special route SP or the special route SP, the probability is not so high, for example, 10%. This probability is adjusted by the position of the nail 42 arranged in the range from the opening of the normal route NR to the first starting port 33. Since the special route SP opens directly above and close to the first starting port 33, the probability of the ball entering the first starting port 33 is extremely high, for example, 50 to 100%. A high probability of the ball entering the first starting port 33 means a high degree of advantage for the player, so it can be called a special route SP.

Game balls that enter from the first ball entrance 201 of the game ball sorting device 200 are sorted by the game ball sorting device 200 to either the normal route NR or the special route SP described above. On the other hand, the game balls that have entered the second ball entrance 221 or the third ball entrance 231 of the game ball distribution device 200 can be routed out by simply operating the action pieces 242, 252 of the game ball distribution device 200. It is discharged from the outlet 43 via the OT.

As shown in FIGS. 261 and 262, above the first ball entrance 201, second ball entrance 221, and third ball entrance 231 of the game ball sorting device 200, nails 42 (42a, 42b) , 42c, 42d) are provided. Specifically, a first nail 42a is provided above the wall between the first ball entrance port 201 and the second ball entrance port 221, and the first nail 42a is provided between the first ball entrance port 201 and the third ball entrance port 231. A second nail 42b is provided above the wall between the holes, a third nail 42c is provided above the wall on the left side of the second ball entrance 221, and a third nail 42c is provided above the wall on the left side of the third ball entrance 231. A fourth nail 42d is provided above the body. The probability of a game ball entering each ball entry hole 201, 221, 231 changes depending on the driving position of the first to fourth nails 42a to 42d.

《E3》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 263 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power outage monitoring circuit 86 monitors the power supply and outputs a power outage information signal when a power outage occurs. "When a power outage occurs" is not limited to when a commercial power outage occurs, but also includes when the power switch 88 is switched from an on state to an off state (when the power is turned off).

In addition, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to multiple detection sensors. Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the ball entering the through gate 35. do.

The output side of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and if a winning to the second starting port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is sent. A corresponding prize ball command is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 264 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the type of jackpot such as a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach random number lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C5 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b includes a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When game balls enter the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 in sequence, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are stored in the pending information storage area 64b in chronological order. is stored in

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the winning information is won. The random number value for the jackpot is stored as a win/fail table in the win/fail table storage area 63a (FIG. 263) of the ROM 63.

FIG. 265 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the validity table stored in the validity table storage area 63a. The pachinko machine 10 is set with a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes for winning a winning lottery. The high probability mode is a gaming state that is started by winning a probability-variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode. FIG. 265(a) shows a success/failure table for low probability mode, and FIG. 265(b) shows a success/failure table for high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 265(a), under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a winning lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 15. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265(b), under the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a winning lottery, the value of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 30. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the high probability mode. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

Returning to FIG. 264, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described next. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type, such as a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. More specifically, the pending information is stored in the first holding area Ra of the pending information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the pending information is stored at the timing when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the types of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is determined. It is possible to set a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the numbers are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening/closing door 36b is It can be set to continue until there are 6 pieces.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning lottery using a winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) above as a winning/closing execution mode, and a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning lottery using a winning/losing table for the high probability mode as a winning/losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a win/fail table for the low probability mode. As explained using FIG. 265, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win/fail table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C5 is the same, but in the high-frequency support mode, Compared to the low frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role opening win is set is set to be greater, and the opening time of one time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second starting opening 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 33 is higher than that in the second starting port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 34 is higher than that in the first starting port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning occurs in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. I can do it.

Note that the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is set to be in the electric utility release state more frequently per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. In addition, in a configuration where multiple types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory opening lottery is held and the next electric accessory opening lottery is held, in the high-frequency support mode, the It may be set so that a short securing time is more likely to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. In addition, the number of openings may be increased, the opening time may be lengthened, and the time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery may be shortened. The advantage of high-frequency support mode over low-frequency support mode can be increased by applying any one or any combination of the following conditions: shortening the average securing time and increasing the probability of winning. good.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, a plurality of jackpot types are sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 266 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 266(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 266(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting opening in FIG. 266(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting opening 33 are 16R certain variable jackpot, 8R certain variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot.

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 5" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "6 to 23" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "24-27" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "28-39" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot. Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of a variable jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", and the probability of a normal jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39". It is 40% of the value of . Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in FIG. 266(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot. , 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 12" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "13 to 23" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot. "24-30" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "31-39" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is divided into two types: when the jackpot is won based on winning in the first starting opening 33, and when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. This differs depending on the case where a jackpot is won based on winning in the starting slot 34. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won based on winning in the second starting opening 34, the probability of a variable jackpot is 60%, the probability of a normal jackpot is 40%, and the probability of winning a jackpot is 40%. This is the same as the case where a jackpot is won based on winning in the first starting slot 33, but the probability of winning 16R is higher than the case where the jackpot is won based on winning in the first starting slot 33. It becomes. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

In this way, the manner in which the jackpot type is distributed between the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in terms of advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. In addition, in the case of a losing result in the lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Returning to FIG. 264, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described next. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is used for reach judgment stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is compared with the table and it is determined whether or not to generate a reach. However, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination that corresponds to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a in FIG. 260(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. , In a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C5 will be explained. The electric accessory release counter C5 is configured such that, for example, the number is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C5 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C5. For example, if C5=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C5=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the closed state.

Note that a set of combinations of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, and is stored in the second holding area Ra. A set of combinations of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb correspond to the pending information related to the second starting opening 34, and these pending information are the special Corresponds to information.

<<E4>> Electrical configuration of the audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 267 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 263) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<E5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Se0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0102.

In step Se0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Se0103.

In step Se0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C5 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory opening counter C5, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0104.

In step Se0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Se0104 will be described later. After executing step Se0104, the process advances to step Se0105.

In step Se0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Se0105 will be described later. After executing step Se0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 268: Se0104).

FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Se0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Se0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Se0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0203.

In step Se0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0204.

In step Se0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0209.

In step Se0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Se0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Se0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Se0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0207. On the other hand, in step Se0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Se0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Se0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0208.

In step Se0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0209.

In step Se0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Se0204 or step Se0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Se0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Se0209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Se0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Se0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Se0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0212.

In step Se0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Se0103 (FIG. 268) is transferred to the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, In step Se0210, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending items added by 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Se0103 is It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Se0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Se0103 is set as the second pending number RbN. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step Se0210. After executing step Se0212, the process advances to step Se0213.

In step Se0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which judgments such as whether or not a fall has occurred and the result of judging whether or not a fall has occurred (lottery result) are executed before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Se0213, the process advances to step Se0214.

In step Se0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and that the holding information is the main determination result based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command to have the sub-side control device confirm the winning lottery before the control device 60 selects a winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 272: Step Se0502) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 to indicate the number of hold balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display of the number of held balls in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Se0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 269: Se0213).

FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process uses the pending information to determine the validity of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the occurrence of reach, the validity of the fall lottery, etc. based on the pending information. This is a process executed before the main controller 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery.

In step Se0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 269) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Se0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Se0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Se0302: YES), the process advances to step Se0303, and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Se0305, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Se0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Se0302: NO), the process advances to step Se0304, and the win/fail table is stored. The high probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Se0305, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Se0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Se0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0306 and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Se0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Se0307, the process advances to step Se0308.

In step Se0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Se0308, if it is determined that it corresponds to a variable probability jackpot (Se0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Se0308, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Se0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Se0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Se0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0311, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Se0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Se0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Se0313, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Se0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Se0313: NO), the first determination process is immediately ended.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 268: Se0105).

FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Se0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Se0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Se0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0402, and whether the number SN of accessory items held is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) or not Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Se0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Se0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Se0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0404.

In step Se0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 updated in step Se0103 (FIG. 268) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Se0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is not less than the upper limit value (Se0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The through ball entry process is ended without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C5.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Se0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0502.

In step Se0502, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Se0502, the process advances to step Se0503.

In step Se0503, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0504.

In step Se0504, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Se0505. In step Se0505, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Se0505, the process advances to step Se0506.

In step Se0506, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0507.

In step Se0507, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0508.

In step Se0508, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Se0502). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Se0508, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Se0508: NO), in step Se0509 and step Se0510, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Se0509, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Se0510, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Se0508: YES), the process returns to step Se0502 and each process from step Se0502 to step Se0507 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Se0502 to step Se0507 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 272: Se0508).

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Se0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step Se0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Se0601: YES), the present game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Se0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Se0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0602.

In step Se0602, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when a fluctuating display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

If it is determined in step Se0602 that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (Se0602: NO), the process proceeds to steps Se0603 to step Se0606 for starting the game round. In step Se0603, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Se0603, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Se0603: YES), the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Se0603: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0604.

In step Se0604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process advances to step Se0605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Se0605, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the liquid crystal display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Se0605, the game time control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0602 that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (Se0602: YES), the process proceeds to steps Se0606 to Se0610 for game round progress.

In step Se0606, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Se0606, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variation time information is set in a variation time setting process (FIG. 275: Se0802) that will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Se0606, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Se0606: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0607, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step Se0607, the game time control process ends.

In step Se0606, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Se0606: YES), the process advances to step Se0608 and a fluctuation end process is executed. The variation end process changes the symbol display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 275) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. Control display. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0609.

In step Se0609, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high frequency support mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64e set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is high frequency support mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is not high frequency support mode, that is, low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned on after the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, ends (see step Se1304 in FIG. 280).

If it is determined in step Se0609 that the mode is high frequency support mode (Se0609: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0610, and the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The number of games counter PNC is a counter for counting the remaining number of guaranteed games guaranteed in the high frequency support mode. The game number counter PNC is preset to a value of 100 in step Se1305 in FIG. 280, which will be described later. After executing step Se0610, the process advances to step Se0611. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0609 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (Se0609: NO), the game cycle control process is ended.

In step Se0611, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Se0611, if it is determined that the high probability mode is not selected (Se0611: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0612, and the number of consecutive games played in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). It is determined whether or not the game is before reaching (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. As described above, since the number of games counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the game is continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of games played has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games played.

In step Se0612, if it is determined that the value of the number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Se0612: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Se0613, and the high-frequency support mode Turn off the flag. After executing step Se0613, the process advances to step Se0614.

In step Se0614, a low-frequency support command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. After executing step Se0614, the game time control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0612 that the number of games is within the guaranteed number of games (step Se0612: YES), the game number control process is immediately ended without executing steps Se0613 and Se0614. Also, if it is determined in step Se0611 that the mode is high probability mode (Se0611: YES), the game cycle control process is immediately ended.

According to the processing from step Se0611 to step Se0614 described above, when the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is performed. Even after reaching the number of times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 273: Se0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step Se0701, it is determined whether the second start pending number RbN stored in the second pending area Rb is "0". In step Se0701, if it is determined that the second starting pending number RbN is "0" (Se0701: YES), the data setting process for the first symbol display part of steps Se0702 to Se0707 is executed, and on the other hand, If it is determined that the second starting pending number RbN is not "0" (Se0701: NO), data setting processing for the second symbol display section of steps Se0708 to Se0713 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the total pending number CRN is 1 or more, as explained in FIG. 273 (see Se0603 in FIG. 273). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether the second starting pending number RbN is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", that is, the pending information for variable display is stored for the second symbol display section 37b. If so, the data stored in the second hold area Rb is targeted for this data setting process, regardless of whether the first start hold count RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when hold information is stored in both the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, priority is given to the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. be done.

In step Se0702, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Se0703, and the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0704. In step Se0704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Se0705.

In step Se0705, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Se0705, the process advances to step Se0706.

In step Se0706, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0707.

In step Se0707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Se0707 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Se0502 in normal processing (FIG. 272). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Se0701, if it is determined that the second starting pending number RbN is not "0" (Se0701: NO), the data setting process for the second symbol display part of steps Se0708 to Se0713 is executed as described above. do.

In step Se0708, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0709. In step Se0709, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Se0710, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Se0711.

In step Se0711, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Se0711, the process advances to step Se0712.

In step Se0712, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0713.

In step Se0713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Se0713 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Se0505 in the normal process (FIG. 272). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 273: Se0605) of the game time control process.

FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Se0801, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Se0801, the process advances to step Se0802.

In step Se0802, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Se0802, the process advances to step Se0803.

In step Se0803, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Se0803, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (Se0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0804, and a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence/absence and information on the variation time set in step Se0802 are included. On the other hand, in step Se0803, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Se08303: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0805, and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence/absence and information on the variation time set in step Se0802 are included. After executing step Se0804 or step Se0805, the process advances to step Se0806.

In step Se0806, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on a losing result.

The variation command and type command set in steps Se0804 to Se0806 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Se0502 in the normal process (FIG. 272). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Se0806, the process advances to step Se0807.

In step Se0807, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b is caused to start variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Se0807, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 275: Se0801).

FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Se0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Se0901, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Se0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0902, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 265(b). Determine whether Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Se0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0903, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 265(a). Determine whether Thereafter, the process advances to step Se0904.

In step Se0904, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Se0902 or step Se0903 is a jackpot win. In step Se0904, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Se0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0905.

In the subsequent steps Se0905 to Se0912, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step Se0905, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Se0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Se0905: NO), proceed to step Se0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 266(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0905 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Se0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0907, and the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 266(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in After executing the process of step Se0906 or step Se0907, the process advances to step Se0908.

In step Se0908, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Se0908, if it is determined that the game result is a variable jackpot (Se0908: YES), the process advances to step Se0909.

In step Se0909, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a variable probability jackpot means that in the current game round in which a probability variable jackpot will be won, either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Se0909, the process advances to step Se0910.

In step Se0910, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Se0910, the hit determination process ends.

In step Se0908, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is not a variable probability jackpot (Se0908: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Se0911.

In step Se0911, a stop result setting process for normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Se0911, the process advances to step Se0912.

In step Se0912, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Se0912, the hit determination process ends.

In step Se0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Se0902 or step Se0903 is not a jackpot (Se0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0913 and executes a stop result setting process in case of a loss. The stop result setting process for a miss is to end the variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a miss. This is the process to set the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Se0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 275: Se0802).

FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Se1001, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Se1002.

In step Se1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If yes (Se1002: YES), the process advances to step Se1003.

In step Se1003, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery is constant. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1004, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Se1002, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Se1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1005, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (Se1005) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game in step Se1002, in step Se1005, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Se1005: YES), and the process proceeds to step Se1006. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Se1006, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1004, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Se1005, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the current game round (Se1005: NO), proceed to step Se1007 and refer to the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1004, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the non-reach variation time table is set such that the larger the total reservation number CRN, the shorter the variation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 272: Se0506).

FIG. 278 is an explanatory diagram showing the game state transition process. In step Se1101, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. In step Se1101, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Se1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1102, and the symbol fluctuation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b of one game round is Determine whether it is the timing to end. In step Se1102, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (Se1102; NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Se1102, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the variable display has ended (Se1102: YES), the process advances to step Se1103, and the game result (winning lottery result) of the current game round is changed to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether it is compatible. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (Se1103: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Se1103, if it is determined that any of the above flags is ON (Se1103: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1104, and a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. do. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Se1104, the process advances to step Se1105.

In step Se1105, the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step Se1105, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag (Se1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1106, and the flags set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened. On the other hand, in step Se1105, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag (Se1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1107, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are ``8'' is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in . After executing step Se1106 or step Se1107, the process advances to step Se1108.

In step Se1108, the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1109, and the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is turned off.

After executing step Se1109, the process advances to step Se1110 and an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Se0505 in the normal process (FIG. 272). This opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing step Se1110, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Se1101, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Se1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1111, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving section 36c is brought into the driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning the grand prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning hole 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the big winning hole 36a, or the opening limit number of balls has entered, the variable winning prize drive The driving state of the portion 36c is stopped, and the big prize opening 36a is closed. Details of the opening/closing process of the grand prize opening will be described later. After executing step Se1111, the process advances to step Se1112.

In step Se1112, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Se1112: NO), the main game state transition process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Se1112: YES), the process advances to step Se1113 and an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Se0505 in the normal process (FIG. 272). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Se1113, the process advances to step Se1114.

In step Se1114, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current opening/closing execution mode ends. Details of the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described later. After executing step Se1114, the process advances to step Se1115.

In step Se1115, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Se1116, and the process of terminating the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, if the 16R guaranteed strange jackpot flag, 8R certain strange jackpot flag, 16 normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag are ON, these flags are turned OFF, and if these flags are not ON, the state is changed. maintain. After executing step Se1116, the main game state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 278: Se1111).

FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Se1201, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. In step Se1201, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is not open (Se1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1202, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Se1202, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Se1202: YES), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1402 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Se1202: NO), the process advances to step Se1203.

In step Se1203, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. In step Se1203, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Se1203: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Se1203, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Se1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1204, where the variable winning drive unit is used to open the big winning opening 36a. 36c is in a driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1205.

In step Se1205, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a, "10" is set in the entry ball counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency entry mode, for example, set "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec) in the first timer counter area T1, and set the ball entry counter area PC to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). You may also set it to "6". After executing step Se1205, the process advances to step Se1206.

In step Se1206, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends. The opening command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started. The command output process (FIG. 272: Step Se0505) sends the command to the audio emission control device 90. Based on the received opening command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also controls the content of the performance on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to open the grand prize opening 36a. The contents are updated to correspond to the fact that the opening of the site has started. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has started, and displays the performance content on the liquid crystal display device 41 when the opening of the grand prize opening 36a is started. Update the content to correspond to what has started.

In step Se1201, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is open (step Se1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1207, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" or not. do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the big prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step Se1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Se1207: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1208.

In step Se1208, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a. In step Se1208, if it is determined that no ball has entered (Se1208: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1208 that an incoming ball has occurred (Se1208: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1209, and the value of the incoming ball counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1210.

In step Se1210, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter area PC is "0". In step Se1210, if it is determined that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is not "0" (Se1210: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step Se1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Se1207: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is "0" in step Se1210, (Se1210: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1211 and executes the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the big winning a prize opening 36a, the variable winning a prize driving section 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1212.

In step Se1212, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Se1213, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Se1213, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Se1213: YES), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Se1213, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Se1213: NO), "1000" (ie, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. After executing step Se1214, the process advances to step Se1215 and a closing command is set. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

This set closing command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed. In the command output process (FIG. 272: Step Se0502), the command is sent to the audio emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the presentation content on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the grand prize opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the completion of release. Further, the audio light emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has ended, and displays the content of the performance on the liquid crystal display device 41 such that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a has ended. Update the content to reflect what happened.

<Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends>
Next, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 278: Se1114).

FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In step Se1301, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot is set in the RAM 64 as a jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Se1301, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Se1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1302 and the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process is executed to turn off the ON flags among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag. After executing step Se1302, the process advances to step Se1303.

In step Se1303, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Se1304, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability modes and high frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1305.

In step Se1305, a game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1306.

In step Se1306, a high probability mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Se1310.

On the other hand, in step Se1301, if it is determined that the 16R normal jackpot flag or 8R normal jackpot flag is ON in the RAM 64 (Se1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1307 and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process is executed to turn off the ON flag among the 16R normal jackpot flag and the 8R normal jackpot flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1308.

In step Se1308, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Se1309, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Se1310.

In step Se1310, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 272: Se0507).

FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Se1401, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Se1401 that the supporting flag is not ON (Se1401: NO), the process advances to step Se1402.

In step Se1402, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Se1402 that the support winning flag is not ON (Se1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1403.

In step Se1403, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Se1403, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Se1403: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Se1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1404.

In step Se1404, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the ordinary symbol unit 38. In step Se1404, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Se1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1405, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Se1404: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1406.

In step Se1406, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Se1406, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Se1406: NO), this electronic role support processing is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1406 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Se1406: YES), the process advances to step Se1407.

In step Se1407, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Se1408, in which it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Se1407 (Se1407: NO), and if it is in the high-frequency support mode in step Se1408 (Se1408: YES), the process advances to step Se1409, where an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Se1410.

In step Se1410, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Se1409 is a support win. In step Se1410, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Se1410: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1411, where the support win flag is turned on and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Se1410, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Se1410: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step Se1411.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Se1407 (Se1407: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Se1408 (Se1408: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1412, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1413.

In step Se1413, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Se1412 is a support win. In step Se1413, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Se1413: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, in step Se1413, if it is determined that support has been won (Se1413: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1414, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Se1402, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Se1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1415, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Se1415, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Se1415: NO), since the symbol in the general figure unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1415 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Se1415: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1416.

In step Se1416, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1417, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Se1401, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Se1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1418, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the power support process (FIG. 281: Se1418).

FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Se1501, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Se1501: YES), the process advances to step Se1502.

In step Se1502, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Se1502, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Se1502: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Se1502, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Se1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1503, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Se1503, the process advances to step Se1504.

In step Se1504, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Se1505, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Se1505, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Se1505: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Se1505: YES), the process advances to step Se1506 and the support flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Se1501, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Se1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1507, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Se1507, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Se1507: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Se1507: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1508, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1509.

In step Se1509, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Se1509: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1510, in which it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

In step Se1510, if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Se1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1511, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Se1509 (Se1509: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Se1510 (Se1510: NO), the process advances to step Se1512, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

A5. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the battle effect and the result announcement effect will be explained. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Se1601, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are read out sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Se1601, the process advances to step Se1602.

In step Se1602, command corresponding processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the received command. Details of the command corresponding processing will be described later. After executing step Se1602, the process advances to step Se1603.

In step Se1603, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in the command corresponding process of step Se1602. After executing step Se1603, the process advances to step Se1604.

In step Se1604, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the command corresponding process of step Se1602. After executing step Se1604, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command compatible processing>
Next, command corresponding processing will be explained. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 283: Se1602).

FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing command corresponding processing. As described above, in the command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described below.

In step Se1701, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Se1701, if it is determined that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1701: YES), the process advances to step Se1702, and processing corresponding to the pending command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Se1702, the process advances to step Se1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1701 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1703 without executing step Se1702.

In step Se1703, it is determined whether a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Se1703 that a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1703: YES), the process advances to step Se1704, and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. The sound-light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 92 of the sound-light emission control device 90 (see FIG. 267) to specify whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The flags are stored in the set various flag storage areas 94e. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1707.

If it is determined in step Se1703 that a high-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1703: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1705, where it is determined whether a low-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. judge. If it is determined in step Se1705 that a low-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1705: YES), the process advances to step Se1706 and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1707. In step Se1705, if it is determined that the low frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1705: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Se1707.

In step Se1707, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. In step Se1707, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received (Se1707: YES), the process advances to step Se1708. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1707 that the variation command and type command have not been received (Se1707: NO), the process advances to step S step Se1709.

In step Se1708, a game run production setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the jackpot performance, stop symbols, variable display patterns, etc. to be executed in the current game round are set. Details of the game performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Se1708, the process advances to step Se1709.

In step Se1709, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Se1709, if it is determined that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1709: YES), the process advances to step Se1710 and an opening effect setting process is executed. In the opening performance setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening performance corresponding to the type of jackpot are set, and information corresponding to the content of the performance is set. An opening presentation command is sent to the display side MPU 102. After that, the process advances to step Se1711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1709 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1709: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1711 without executing step Se1710.

In step Se1711, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. In step Se1711, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (Se1711: YES), the process advances to step Se1712 and an ending effect setting process is executed. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and the content of the ending effect is set in accordance with the content of the effect. An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se1713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1711 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1711: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1713 without executing step Se1712.

In step Se1713, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, the content of presentation corresponding to the open command and the content of presentation corresponding to the closing command are set. Furthermore, when the performance operation button 24 is pressed, a performance operation command for recognizing that the performance operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a command corresponding process subroutine (FIG. 284: Se1702).

FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling process will be described below.

In step Se1801, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, A process is executed to enable the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of pending information. Details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Se1801 will be described later. Below, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as the "first reservation number", and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first reservation number". The number is also called the "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also called the "total pending number". After executing step Se1801, the process advances to step Se1802.

In step Se1802, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Se1801, and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Based on the number, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled. After executing step Se1802, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 285: Se1801) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of ball entry. In step Se1901, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Se1901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Se1901: YES), the process advances to step Se1902, and the Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the audio-optical side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step Se1902, the process advances to step Se1904.

In step Se1901, if it is determined that the held command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Se1901: NO), that is, the held command is If it is determined that the transmission was based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Se1903 and updates the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Se1903, the process advances to step Se1904.

The reason why the processes of step Se1902 and step Se1903 are performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 stores the hold information. is stored and held, whereas the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of pending information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step Se1904, the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is updated. The total number of pending balls counter area indicates the sum of the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Se1904, the update processing at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game run production setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 284: Se1708).

FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the game round performance setting process. As mentioned above, the game run performance setting process is a process that is executed when it is determined that a variation command and a type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the performance that will be executed in the current game cycle. It is. Hereinafter, specific processing of the game rendition setting processing will be explained.

In step Se2001, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is grasped. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se2002.

In step Se2002, performance pattern setting processing is executed at the time of jackpot, reach time, etc. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Se2002, the process advances to step Se2003.

In step Se2003, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the symbol will be placed on the active line L (see FIG. 260). Information corresponding to a stopping result in which a combination of the same symbols is established is set as information on the current stopping symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Se2003, the process advances to step Se2004.

In step Se2004, processing for determining a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols specified in the above step Se2005 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se2005.

In step Se2005, the performance type information set in step Se2002, the stop symbol type information set in step Se2003, and the variable display pattern type information set in step Se2004 in the current game round are converted into a performance command. Set. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se2006, and the production command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step Se2006, the process proceeds to step Se2007, and after executing the update process at the start of variation, the game rendition setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 287: Se2002) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Se2101, it is determined whether or not a probability variable jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the information on the type of jackpot that were grasped in step Se2001 of FIG. 287. In step Se2101, an affirmative determination is made if a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot is won. In step Se2101, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the current game round (Se2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2102.

In step Se2102, a performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set to be executed for a performance indicating that a jackpot has been won in the current game round. At the time of this setting, the performance is determined in consideration of the variable time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the variable time table for jackpot in FIG. 277. After executing step Se2102, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Se2101, if the probability variable jackpot has not been won in the current game round (Se2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2103.

In step Se2103, it is determined whether or not a regular jackpot has been won in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the information on the type of jackpot that were grasped in step Se2001 of FIG. 287. In step Se2103, an affirmative determination is made if the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot is won. In step Se2103, if it is determined that the normal jackpot has been won in the current game round (Se2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2104.

In step Se2104, a normal jackpot performance pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set to be executed regarding a performance that normally indicates a jackpot in the current game round. At the time of this setting, the performance is determined in consideration of the variable time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the variable time table for jackpot in FIG. 277. After executing step Se2104, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Se2103, if it is determined that there is no normal jackpot in the current game round (Se2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2105.

In step Se2105, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information regarding the presence or absence of reach occurrence, which was grasped in step Se2001 of FIG. 287. In step Se2105, if it is determined that a reach has occurred in the current game round (Se2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2106.

In step Se2106, a ready-to-win performance pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set to be executed for a performance indicating that the player has reached reach in the current game round. At the time of this setting, the performance is determined in consideration of the variable time acquired by the main controller 60 using the variable time table for reaching occurrence in FIG. 277. After executing step Se2106, the production pattern setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step Se2105, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred in the current game round (Se2105: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2107 and executes a losing performance pattern setting process. Specifically, it is set to perform a performance when none of the probability-variable jackpot winning, normal jackpot winning, and reach occurrence occur. At the time of this setting, the performance time is determined according to the variable time acquired by the main controller 60 using the non-reach variable time table in FIG. 277. After executing step Se2107, the production pattern setting process ends.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of variation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game run performance setting process (FIG. 287: Se2007).

FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Se2201, it is determined whether the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command. In step Se2201, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command (Se2201: YES), the process advances to step Se2202, where the command is stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se2201 that the fluctuation command received this time is not the first fluctuation command (Se2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2203, where the command is stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Se2301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Se2302.

In step Se2302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Se2401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Se2501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 291) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Se2501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of effects such as the preview effects and stop symbols set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode on the liquid crystal display. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them.

In step Se2502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Se2501) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Se2503.

In step Se2503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Se2502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se2504.

In step Se2504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Se2503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on this information, and also sends an image along with a drive signal in order to display on the liquid crystal display device 41 the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se2505, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210 are transferred from the main passage 211 to the first branch line by the game ball sorting device 200. It is distributed to the passage 212 or the second branch passage 213. Specifically, the first game ball sorting mechanism 240, triggered by the distribution of game balls in the second path 220, moves the game balls that have reached the first branch point 211x of the first path 210 to the first branch path 212. The game balls that have reached the second branch point 211y of the first passage 210 are distributed to the second branch passage 213 by the second game ball distribution mechanism 250, triggered by the distribution of the game balls in the third passage 230. .

Therefore, the player can change the probability of the game ball entering the second ball entrance 221 of the second passage 220 by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball by operating the operation handle 25. In the first passage 210, the probability that a game ball is sorted into the first branch passage 212 can be changed, and by changing the probability that a game ball will enter the third ball entrance 231 of the third passage 230, In the first passage 210, the probability that game balls are distributed to the second branch passage 213 can be changed. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball by operating the operation handle 25, the player can determine the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage 210 and the probability that the game ball will enter the first branch passage 210 in the first passage 210. The probability that the game balls are distributed to the second branch passage 213 in the first passage 210 and the probability that the game balls are distributed to the second branch passage 213 can be individually changed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to provide the players with game results according to their skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the game balls passing through the first passage 210 are triggered by the distribution of game balls in the second passage 220 or the distribution of game balls in the third passage 230. The players are allocated to a special route SP that is advantageous to them. Therefore, the player can increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance 221 of the second passage 220 by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball by operating the operation handle 25, and By increasing the probability that a game ball enters the third ball entrance 231 of the third passage 230, the probability that the game ball will be sorted to the special route SP in the first passage 210 is increased, making the game advantageous for the player. You can get results. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to provide the players with game results according to their skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are distributed in the second passage 220, the game balls that reach the first branch point 211x of the first passage 210 are transferred to the first branch passage leading to the special route SP. 212, and, triggered by the distribution of game balls in the third passage 230, the game balls that have reached the second branch point 211y of the first passage 210 are distributed to the second branch passage 213 that leads to the special route SP. . That is, the former and the latter have a logical sum (OR) relationship, and in both the former and latter cases, it is possible to allocate game balls to the special route SP. Therefore, even if the game ball is not sorted into the first branch path 212 at the first branch point 211x of the first path 210, the player can transfer the game ball to the second branch path 212 at the subsequent second branch point 211y. I can feel hopeful that I will be sorted into this. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give players a sense of expectation, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210, the second ball entrance 221 of the second passage 220, and the third ball entrance 231 of the third passage 230 are provided. Nails 42 (42a, 42b, 42c, 42d) are provided above, and depending on the driving positions of these nails 42a to 42d, the probability of being sorted into the above-mentioned first branch passage 212 or second branch passage 213 is determined. change. The following details explain how this probability changes.

Consider the driving position of the first nail 42a provided above the wall between the adjacent first ball entry port 201 and second ball entry port 221. According to the driving position of the first nail 42a, the probability that a game ball enters the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210 changes. Specifically, by providing the first nail 42a on the first ball entry port 201 side in the left-right direction, the probability that a game ball enters the first ball entry port 201 can be reduced. In this case, the probability that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 221 of the second passage 220 increases, so the first game ball sorting mechanism 240 moves the game ball from the first passage 210 to the first branch passage 211. There is a high probability that you will be assigned to In summary, when the first nail 42a is provided on the first ball entrance 201 side of the first passage 210, the probability that a game ball enters the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210 decreases. On the contrary, in the first passage 210, the probability that game balls are sorted to the first branch passage 212 increases.

On the other hand, when the first nail 42a is provided on the second ball entrance 221 side of the second passage 220 in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball enters the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210 increases. On the contrary, since the probability that a game ball will enter the second ball entrance 221 of the second passageway is lower, the probability that a game ball will be sorted to the first branch passageway 212 in the first passageway 210 is lowered. . Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability that a ball enters the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210 and the probability that a game ball is distributed to the first branch passage 212 in the first passage 210 are different. There is a trade-off relationship.

In the pachinko machine 10, the game balls distributed to the first branch path 212 in the first path 210 are configured to proceed to a special route SP. Therefore, even if the first nail 42a is provided on the first ball entrance 201 side of the first passage 210 to reduce the probability of the ball entering the first ball entrance 201, it is difficult for the player in the first passage 210 to Since the probability that the game ball will advance to the advantageous special route SP increases, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the hole side between the hole side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the first nail 42a is provided on the second ball entrance 221 side of the second passage 220 to increase the probability of the ball entering the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210, Since the probability that the game ball will advance to the special route SP that is advantageous for the player is reduced, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased towards the player between the hole side and the player side. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward either the hall side or the player side depending on the driving position of the first nail 42a.

Similarly, consider the driving position of the second nail 42b provided above the wall between the adjacent first ball entry port 201 and third ball entry port 231. In this case as well, similarly to the relationship between the first ball entry port 201 and the second ball entry port 221 described above, the ball enters the first ball entry port 201 of the first passage 210 depending on the driving position of the second nail 42b. There is a trade-off relationship between changing the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the second branch path 213 in the first path 210 and changing the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the second branch path 213. From this point of view, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward either the hole side or the player side depending on the driving position of the second nail 42b.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first nail 42a is provided on the second ball entry port 221 side in the left-right direction, and the second nail 42b is provided on the third ball entry port 231 side in the left-right direction. Consider a configuration in which the entrance to the first ball entry port 201 is widened. In this configuration, since it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry port 221 and the third ball entry port 231 and it is easy for game balls to enter the first ball entry port 211, the player can use the operating handle 25 It is preferable to shoot the game ball aiming at the first ball entrance 201 by the operation. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of game balls sent from the first ball entrance 201 to the normal route NR per unit time. As explained earlier, the probability that a game ball that passes through the normal route NR will enter the first starting port 33 is not very high, for example, 10%, but the number of game balls that are sent to the normal route NR is increased. As a result, the total probability of the ball entering the first starting port 33 per unit time can be increased.

On the other hand, the first nail 42a is provided on the first ball entrance 201 side in the left-right direction, and the second nail 42b is provided on the first ball entrance 201 side in the left-right direction. Consider a configuration in which the path to is narrowed. In this configuration, since the paths to the second ball entry port 221 and the third ball entry port 231 are wide, game balls can easily enter the second ball entry port 221 and the third ball entry port 231. Therefore, in this configuration, it is preferable for the player to aim the game ball at the second ball entry port 221 or the third ball entry port 231 by operating the operation handle 25. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that enter the second ball entry port 221 or the third ball entry port 231 per unit time. If the number of game balls entering the second ball entry port 221 or the third ball entry port 231 increases, when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 201, the entered game ball will be routed to a special route. The probability of being assigned to SP increases. As explained earlier, since the probability that a game ball that passes through the special route SP will enter the first starting port 33 is extremely high, for example, 50 to 100%, the ball enters the first starting port 33 per unit time. You can increase the probability of In this way, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a game result according to his/her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game ball sorting device 200 is provided, the distance between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b (hereinafter referred to as the first inter-nail distance) ), and even if there is a difference in the distance between the first nail 42a and the third nail 42c (hereinafter referred to as the second inter-nail distance), the distance between the first nail 42a and the third nail 42c (hereinafter referred to as the second nail distance) is It is possible to suppress changes in the ease with which a game ball enters the ball (expected value of entry). This will be explained below using a specific example.

For example, consider a configuration in which the sum of the first inter-nail distance and the second inter-nail distance, that is, the distance between the second nail 42b and the third nail 42c, is defined to be constant. A configuration in which the first nail 42a is provided on the left side of the center between the second nail 42b and the third nail 42c, and the distance between the first nails is wider than the distance between the second nails (hereinafter referred to as "first nail 42a"). In the second ball entry port 221 located below between the first nail 42a and the third nail 42c, the game ball enters the second ball entry port 221 more easily than the first ball entry port 201. Therefore, it is difficult to open the valve body 241 in the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 (it is difficult to move from the first position to the second position). However, in the first configuration, the first ball entry hole 201 located below between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b allows the game ball to enter easily, and the first ball entry hole 201 is located below the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. By increasing the number of game balls that enter the ball opening 201, it is possible to increase the probability that game balls will enter the first starting opening 33.

On the other hand, a configuration (hereinafter referred to as In the second configuration (referred to as the "second configuration"), it is difficult for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 201 compared to the second ball entrance 221, so the first ball entrance 201 is It is difficult for game balls to enter the ball. However, in the second configuration, since it is easier for game balls to enter the second ball entry port 221 than in the first configuration, when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 201, the valve body 241 is easy to open, and the probability of entering the game ball into the first starting port 33 can be increased.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ease with which a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (input) is determined based on the difference between the first distance between nails and the second distance between nails. The expected value of the ball entering the first starting port 33 can be easily maintained constant (or within a predetermined difference). Similarly, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 for the difference between the first nail distance and the third nail distance (the distance between the second nail 42b and the fourth nail 42d) It is possible to suppress changes in the ease of rolling (expected value of ball entering), and it is possible to easily maintain the expected value of the ball entering the first starting port 33 at a constant level (or within a predetermined difference). can.

Furthermore, the distance between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b (the first inter-nail distance) and the distance between the first nail 42a and the third nail 42c (the second inter-nail distance) When considering the width (width) of the first ball entry port 201 and the width (width) of the second ball entry port 221, the width (width) of the first ball entry port 201 is ) and the width (width) of the second ball entry port 221, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 33 relative to the difference (expected value of ball entry) It is possible to suppress the change in the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33, and it is possible to easily maintain the expected value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 at a constant value (or within a predetermined difference). Further, the distance between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b (first inter-nail distance) and the distance between the second nail 42b and fourth nail 42d (third nail distance) When considering the width (width) of the first ball entry port 201 and the width (width) of the third ball entry port 231, the width (width) of the first ball entry port 201 is ) and the width (width) of the third ball entry port 231, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 33 relative to the difference (expected value of ball entry) It is possible to suppress the change in the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33, and it is possible to easily maintain the expected value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 at a constant value (or within a predetermined difference).

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the valve bodies 241, 251 in each game ball sorting mechanism 240, 250 are configured to be movable from the second position to the first position by their own weight, There is no need to use driving means such as a motor to open and close the bodies 241, 251. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

<<E6>> Modification of the fifth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《E6-1》Variation 1:
The pachinko machine as modification 1 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment only in the configuration of the game ball sorting device, and the remaining configurations are the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 1, the same components as those of the Pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are given the same names and numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 293 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball sorting device 300 provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 1. FIG. 293 shows the valve bodies 341, 351 in a closed state. In FIG. 293, the +X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the -X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the game ball sorting device 300 has a first passage 310, a second passage 320 arranged adjacent to the -X direction side of the first passage 310, and a second passage 320 arranged adjacent to the +X direction side of the first passage 310. and a third passage 330 disposed adjacent thereto. The first to third passages 310 to 330 are made of transparent resin members.

The first passage 310 has a first ball entry port 301 at its upper end, and allows game balls entered from the first ball entry port 301 to flow downward. The first passage 310 has one main passage 311, a secondary branch passage 312 branched from the main passage 311, and a grand branch passage 313 separated from the secondary branch passage 312.

The main line passage 311 is divided into a main line upstream section 311a and a main line downstream section 311b. The main line upstream portion 311a is the most upstream portion of the main line passage 311, and has a linear shape extending directly downward from the first ball entry port 301. The main line downstream portion 311b is a portion following the main line upstream portion 311a, and has a linear shape extending in the lower right direction from the lower end of the main line upstream portion 311a.

The secondary branch passage 312 is located directly below the first branch point 311x, with a junction between the main line upstream section 311a and the main line downstream section 311b of the main line passage 311 as a branch point (hereinafter referred to as "first branch point") 311x. Stretch in the direction. The first branch point 311x is provided with a first game ball distribution mechanism 340 that distributes game balls to either the main line downstream portion 311b of the main line path 311 or the child branch path 312.

The child branch passage 312 is divided into a child branch upstream portion 312a and a child branch downstream portion 312b. The child branch line upstream portion 312a is an upstream portion of the child branch line passage 312, and has a linear shape extending directly downward from the first branch point 311x. The child branch line downstream portion 312b is a portion following the child branch line upstream portion 312a, and has a linear shape extending in the lower left direction from the lower end of the child branch line upstream portion 312a.

The grand branch line passage 313 has a branch point (hereinafter referred to as "second branch point") 312x that connects the child branch upstream part 312a and the child branch downstream part 312b, and extends directly downward from the second branch point 312x. It has an elongated linear shape. The second branch point 312x is provided with a second game ball distribution mechanism 350 that distributes the game balls to either the child branch line downstream portion 312b or the grand branch line passage 313.

The second passage 320 has a second ball entrance 321 at the upper end into which a game ball can enter, and has the same shape as the second passage 220 of the fifth embodiment. In the present modification example 1, the vertical position (that is, height) of the second ball entry port 321 is the same as the height of the first ball entry port 301 formed in the first passage 310, and The ball opening 321 and the first ball entry opening 301 are adjacent to each other.

The third passage 330 has a third ball entry port 331 at the upper end into which a game ball can enter, and allows the game ball entered from the third ball entry port 331 to flow downward. In the present modification example 1, the height of the third ball entry port 331 and the height of the first ball entry port 301 formed in the first passage 310 are the same, and the third ball entry port 331 and the first ball entry port It is adjacent to 301. The third passage 310 is a single continuous passage that does not branch in the middle, and is divided into an upstream portion 330a extending directly below from the third ball entrance 331 and a downstream portion 330b extending toward the lower right. be done.

The upstream portion 330a extends directly downward without shifting from side to side when viewed from the front. However, in the depth direction (front and back directions in the figure), the upstream part 330a is curved in a U-shape toward the back side (back side in the figure) so as to straddle the main line downstream part 311b of the main line passage 311. There is. Note that this U-shaped shape allows the game ball to flow down.

The first game ball distribution mechanism 340 has the same configuration as the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment, and includes a valve body 341, an action piece 342, a rotating shaft 343, a weight 344, has. The operation of the first game ball distribution mechanism 340 is also the same as the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment, and in this modification 1, when the game balls do not flow through the second passage 320, , the game balls that have reached the first branch point 311x of the main line passageway 311 are distributed to the main line downstream side portion 311b of the main line passageway 311, and with the distribution of the game balls in the second passageway 320 as an opportunity, the game balls that have reached the first branch point 311x of the main line passageway 311 The game balls that have reached 311x are distributed to the child branch path 312.

The second game ball distribution mechanism 350 has the same configuration as the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 of the fifth embodiment, and includes a valve body 351, an action piece 352, a rotating shaft 353, a weight 354, has. The operation of the second game ball distribution mechanism 350 is also the same as the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 of the fifth embodiment, and in this modification 1, when the game balls do not flow through the third passage 330, , the game balls that have reached the second branch point 312x of the child branch path 312 are distributed to the child branch downstream side portion 312b of the child branch path 312, and with the distribution of game balls in the third path 330 as an opportunity, the game balls that have reached the second branch point 312x of the child branch path 312 are The game balls that have reached the second branch point 312x are distributed to the grandson branch line passage 313.

The downstream end of the main line passage 311 in the first passage 310 and the downstream end of the secondary branch line passage 312 in the first passage 310 are combined (the combined part is not shown) and communicate with the normal route NR. are doing. The grandchild branch passage 313 in the first passage 210 communicates with the special route SP. The downstream end of the second passage 320 and the downstream end of the third passage 330 are combined (the combined portion is not shown) and communicate with the outroute OT (FIG. 259).

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 1 configured as described above, when the game balls circulate in the second passage 320 and the game balls circulate in the third passage 330, the first passage 310 Game balls entering from the first ball entry port 301 are distributed to the grandson branch passageway 313, which is the final stage. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, the player can cause the game ball to enter both the second ball entrance 321 of the second passage 320 and the third ball entrance 331 of the third passage 330. By changing the probability, in the first passage 310, the probability that a game ball is distributed to the child branch passage 312 can be changed, and the probability that a game ball enters the third ball entrance 331 of the third passage 330 can be changed. By changing , it is possible to change the probability that game balls are distributed to the grand branch line passage 313 (and thus the special route) in the first passage 310. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, the player can determine the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage 310 and the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the grand branch passage 313 in the first passage 310. Can be changed individually. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to provide the player with a game result according to his/her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine of the first modification, the first game ball distribution mechanism 340 distributes the game balls to the child branch path 312 as a condition for the game balls that enter the first ball entry port 301 to reach the special route SP. It is necessary to satisfy both the requirement that the second game ball distribution mechanism 350 distributes the game balls to the grand branch line passage 313 (a so-called logical product (AND) relationship). Therefore, after the game balls are distributed to the child branch line passage 312 by the first game ball distribution mechanism 340, the game balls are again distributed to the grand branch line passage 313 by the second game ball distribution mechanism 350. , players will watch with a sense of tension. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the pachinko machine of the first modification, the profit is biased towards one of the hall side and the player side depending on the driving positions of the first and second nails 42a and 42b. This can further improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since there is no need to use a driving means such as a motor to open and close the valve bodies 341 and 351, the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

《E6-2》Variation 2:
The pachinko machine as the second modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment only in the configuration of the game ball sorting device, and the remaining configurations are the same. The main difference between the game ball sorting device in Modification 2 and the game ball sorting device 200 in the fifth embodiment is that it does not include the third passage 230 and the second game ball sorting mechanism 250. .

FIG. 294 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball sorting device 400 provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 2. FIG. 294 shows the valve body 441 in a closed state. In FIG. 294, the +X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the -X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front. The game ball sorting device 400 includes a first passage 410 and a second passage 420 arranged adjacent to the first passage 410 in the −X direction. The first and second passages 410, 420 are made of transparent resin members.

The first passage 410 has a first ball entry port 401 at its upper end, and allows game balls entered through the first ball entry port 401 to flow downward. The first passage 410 has one main passage 411 and a branch passage 412 separated from the main passage 411.

The main line passage 411 is divided into a main line upstream section 411a and a main line downstream section 411b. The main line upstream portion 411a has a linear shape extending directly downward from the first ball entry port 401. The main line downstream portion 411b is a portion following the main line upstream portion 411a, and has a linear shape extending in the lower right direction from the lower end of the main line upstream portion 411a.

The branch passage 412 extends directly downward from the branch point 411x, with a connecting portion between the main line upstream portion 411a and the main line downstream portion 411b of the main line passage 411 serving as a branch point 411x. A game ball distribution mechanism 440 is provided at the branch point 411x to distribute game balls to either the main line downstream portion 411b of the main line passage 411 or the branch line passage 412. The branch line passage 412 has a linear shape extending directly downward.

The second passage 420 has a second ball entrance 421 at the upper end into which a game ball can enter. In the second modification, the vertical position (that is, height) of the second ball entrance port 421 is the same as the height of the first ball entrance port 401 formed in the first passage 410, and The ball opening 421 and the first ball entry opening 401 are adjacent to each other.

The game ball distribution mechanism 440 has the same configuration as the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment, and includes a valve body 441, an action piece 442, a rotating shaft 443, and a weight 444. . The operation of the game ball distribution mechanism 440 is also the same as that of the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment, and in this modification 2, when no game balls flow through the second passage 420, the main line The game balls that have reached the branch point 411x of the passageway 411 are distributed to the main line downstream portion 411b, and with the distribution of game balls in the second passageway 420, the game balls that have reached the branch point 411x of the main line passageway 411 are distributed to the branch passageway 412. be distributed to.

The downstream end of the main passageway 411 in the first passageway 410 communicates with the normal route NR. A branch passage 412 in the first passage 410 communicates with the special route SP. The downstream end of the second passage 420 communicates with the outroute OT.

Above the first ball entrance 401 and second ball entrance 421 of the game ball sorting device 400, nails 442a, 442b, and 442c are provided. Specifically, a first nail 442a is provided above the wall between the first ball entrance 401 and the second ball entrance 421, and a first nail 442a is provided above the wall on the left side of the second ball entrance 421. A second nail 442b is provided, and a third nail 442c is provided above the wall on the right side of the first ball entry port 401. Depending on the driving position of the first to third nails 442a to 442c, the probability of the game ball entering each ball entry hole 401, 421 changes.

According to the pachinko machine of the second modification configured as described above, the player can adjust the probability of a game ball entering the first passage 410 and the probability of the game ball entering the first passage 410 by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball. , the probability that game balls are distributed to the branch path 413 can be individually changed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, it is possible to provide the player with a game result according to his/her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the pachinko machine of the second modification, like the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, can prevent profits from being biased toward one of the hall side and the player side depending on the driving position of the first nail 442a. , it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since there is no need to use a driving means such as a motor to open and close the valve body 451, the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

《E6-3》Variation 3:
The pachinko machine as the third modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment in that it is equipped with a game ball storage device and a forced release device above the game ball sorting device 200, and the remaining The configuration is the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 3, the same components as the Pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are given the same names and symbols, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 295 is an explanatory diagram showing the game ball sorting device 200 provided in the pachinko machine of modification 3 and its surroundings. In FIG. 295, the +X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the -X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front. The game ball sorting device 200 is the same as the game ball sorting device 200 in the fifth embodiment.

Above the game ball sorting device 200, specifically, the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210, the second ball entrance 221 of the second passage 220, and the third ball entrance 231 of the third passage 230. A game ball storage device 500 is provided above. A forced release device 600 is provided on the right side of the game ball storage device 500.

FIG. 296 is a perspective view showing the game ball storage device 500 and the forced release device 600. As shown in FIGS. 295 and 296, the game ball storage device 500 includes a game ball receiving container 510, a rotating shaft (axis for rotation) 520, and a restorer 530 (FIG. 295).

The game ball receiving container 510 is a box-shaped container having an opening 510a, and can store up to three game balls flowing down the game area PA. The number of game balls that can be stored in the game ball receiving container 510 is the same as the number of ball entry ports (first to third ball entry ports 201, 311, 321) provided in the game ball sorting device 200. A rotating shaft 520 is provided at the bottom of the game ball receiving container 510 on the game board 30 side. The game ball receiving container 510 is configured to be rotatable around a rotating shaft 520. Specifically, it is configured to be rotatable between a normal posture and a tilted posture.

The normal posture is the posture of the game ball receiving container 510 shown in FIGS. 295 and 296, and is a posture in which the opening 510a faces upward. The orientation of the opening 510a is the direction from the inside to the outside of the game ball receiving container 510 in the perpendicular direction of the opening surface. In the normal posture, a game ball flowing down the game area PA can be taken in from the opening 510a facing upward.

The tilted posture is a posture in which the game ball receiving container 510 is tilted so that the orientation of the opening 510a is toward the front side of the game board 30 (front side in the drawing). In the tilted position, the game balls stored in the game ball receiving container 510 can be dropped from the opening 510a facing the front side when viewed from the front.

In the initial state, the game ball receiving container 510 assumes a normal posture, and when three game balls are stored in the game ball receiving container 510, the arrow R (FIG. 296) ), the normal posture shifts to a leaning posture. As a result, the three stored game balls fall from the game ball receiving container 510 at once. That is, when the game ball receiving container 510 shifts to the tilted position, it releases three game balls downward at once.

A restorer 530 is provided at the bottom of the game ball receiving container 510. The restoring device 530 has an elastic body such as a spring inside, and returns the game ball receiving container 510 that has shifted to the tilted position to the normal position.

The forced release device 600 has a rotating shaft 610 provided perpendicularly to the game board 30 and a long plate 620 attached to the rotating shaft 610. The elongated plate 620 is a thin elongated plate, and is attached to the rotating shaft 610 such that the longitudinal direction of the elongated plate 620 is orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotating shaft 610. In conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 610, the elongated plate 620 rotates around the rotation shaft 610. A part of the game ball receiving container 510 is located within the region in which the elongated plate 620 rotates.

In this embodiment, the rotating shaft 610 always rotates counterclockwise at a constant rotational speed, and rotates once every predetermined period of time, for example, one minute. When the rotating shaft 610 rotates counterclockwise and the elongated plate 620 rotates counterclockwise, the elongated plate 620 hits the upper right side of the game ball receiving container 510, and the elongated plate 620 is in the normal posture. The game ball receiving container 510 is moved to a tilted position. As a result, the game ball receiving container 510 is forcibly shifted to the tilted position at predetermined time intervals, and the game balls stored in the game ball receiving container 510 are released downward. Even if there are two or one game balls stored in the game ball receiving container 510, the stored game balls are released downward.

In the forced release device 600, the rotating shaft 610 may be configured to rotate intermittently at predetermined time intervals instead of constantly rotating at a constant rotational speed. Further, in the forced release device 600, the elongated plate 620 may be replaced with a rod-shaped one.

According to the pachinko machine of the third modification configured as described above, the three game balls stored and released from the game ball receiving container 510 are collected at once and distributed to the first to third game balls of the game ball sorting device 200. The ball will head toward the third ball entrance 201, 221, and 231. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the probability that game balls will enter the first to third ball entrances 201, 221, 231, the game ball sorting device 200 can enter the passages 212, 213 leading to the special route SP. The probability of sorting game balls can be increased. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the third modification, it is possible to increase the probability of being advantageous to the player and improve the interest of the game.

The player fires a game ball at the game ball receiving container 510 by operating the operating handle 25. That is, the game ball is aimed at the game ball receiving container 510 so that three game balls are stored in the game ball receiving container 510. By doing this, three game balls are stored in the game ball receiving container 510, and the game balls are tilted and collected into the first to third ball entry ports 201, 221, and 231 of the game ball sorting device 200. You can make the game ball enter the ball by using the button. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the third modification, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player.

In addition, in the third modification, the game ball is forcibly ejected from the game ball receiving container 510 every time the elongated plate 620 of the forced ejection device 600 rotates once, so the player is aware that the elongated plate 620 is It is necessary to store three game balls in the game ball receiving container 510 during one rotation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the third modification, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension as to whether he or she can accumulate three game balls before the game balls are forcibly released.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of the third modification, the game ball can be automatically discharged from the game ball receiving container 510 in response to the weight of the game ball, so the configuration of the game machine can be simplified. . Furthermore, since the forced release device 600 can forcefully release game balls from the game ball storage device 500 repeatedly at predetermined time intervals, when the player attempts to finish the game, the game ball receiving container 510 Game balls are no longer left in storage. Therefore, since the next player does not start the game from an advantageous position, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

《E6-4》Variation 4:
The pachinko machine as modification 4 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment only in the configuration of the game ball sorting device, and the remaining configurations are the same. In the pachinko machine of modification 4, the same components as the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are given the same names and symbols, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 297 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball sorting device 700 provided in a pachinko machine of modification 4. FIG. 297 shows the valve bodies 741, 751 in a closed state. In FIG. 297, the +X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the -X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front. The game ball sorting device 700 in Modification 4 has the same passage configuration as the game ball sorting device 200 in the fifth embodiment, and has a first game ball sorting mechanism 740 and a second game ball sorting mechanism 740. The structure of mechanism 750 is different.

The first game ball distribution mechanism 240 and the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 in the fifth embodiment include valve bodies 241, 251, action pieces 242, 252, rotating shafts 243, 243, and weights 244, 245. It was a configuration that operated without using a driving means such as a motor. On the other hand, the first game ball distribution mechanism 740 and the second game ball distribution mechanism 750 in Modification 4 include valve bodies 741, 751 and rotating shafts 743, 743. The valve bodies 741 and 751 are each driven to open by an actuator (not shown). The actuator is electrically controlled by a main controller 60.

A first game ball detection sensor 725 is installed inside the second passage 220 to detect passage of a game ball. A second game ball detection sensor 735 is installed inside the third passage 230 to detect passage of a game ball. When the passage of a game ball is detected by the first game ball detection sensor 725, the main controller 60 controls the first game ball sorting mechanism for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) from the time of detection. The valve body 741 of 740 is opened (moves to the second position), and after the period has elapsed, the valve body 741 is closed (moves to the first position). Further, when the passage of a game ball is detected by the second game ball detection sensor 735, the main controller 60 controls the second game ball vibration for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) from the time of detection. The valve body 751 of the separation mechanism 750 is opened (moves to the second position), and after the period has elapsed, the valve body 751 is closed (moves to the first position).

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 4 configured as above, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the driving positions of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be used to determine the position between the hole side and the player side. This will prevent profits from being biased towards one side. Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, by adjusting the ejection intensity of the game ball, the probability of the game ball entering the first passage 210 and the The probability that game balls are distributed to the first branch passage 212 in the first passage 210 and the probability that game balls are distributed to the second branch passage 213 in the first passage 210 can be changed individually, and the probability that game balls are distributed to the second branch passage 213 in the first passage 210 can be changed individually. It is possible to give game results according to skill. In this way, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment.

In the first game ball sorting mechanism 740 and the second game ball sorting mechanism 750 of the fifth embodiment, the period when the valve bodies 741 and 751 are opened is the first game ball sorting mechanism 740 and the second game ball sorting mechanism It was a fixed period determined by the shape of 750. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of modification 4, the period during which the valve bodies 741 and 751 are opened can be predetermined at an arbitrary time. Note that the period during which the valve bodies 741 and 751 are opened is a period that starts from the timing when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first and second game ball detection sensors 725 and 735; The period may start after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing at which the passage was detected.

《E6-5》Variation 5:
In the fifth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 3, the operating piece of the game ball distribution mechanism is a plate-like member, and is positioned symmetrically with respect to the valve body with respect to the rotation axis as the center of symmetry. It was set up. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be provided in other shapes and in other positions. In short, any configuration can be used as long as it can receive the action from the game balls circulating through the second passage. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls flowing down the game area PA directly act on the action piece without providing a second passage or a third passage for circulating the game balls.

《E6-6》Variation 6:
The shapes of the first to third passages in the fifth embodiment and variations 1 to 4 thereof may be various shapes instead of the shapes described above.

《E6-7》Variation 7:
The game ball distribution mechanism in the fifth embodiment and its variations 1 to 4 was configured to distribute game balls to either of two paths, but instead of this, the game ball distribution mechanism has It is also possible to have a configuration in which game balls are distributed to any of the above-mentioned number of passages.

《E6-8》Variation 8:
In the fifth embodiment and its variations 1 to 4, the positional relationship between the first ball entrance port and the second ball entrance port (or the third ball entrance port) is that they are adjacent to each other. On the other hand, as a modified example, the positional relationship between the first ball entrance hole and the second ball entrance hole (or the third ball entrance hole) is such that their heights are different from each other, and even if they are adjacent to each other in the left and right direction. good. Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first ball entrance port and the second ball entrance port (or the third ball entrance port) may be separated.

《E6-9》Variation 9:
In the fifth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 4, the game ball sorting mechanism has a weight and is configured to be able to move from the second position to the first position by its own weight. On the other hand, as a modification, a structure may be adopted in which the weight of the valve body itself is biased to one side without providing a weight, so that the valve body can be moved from the second position to the first position by its own weight.

《E6-10》Variation 10:
Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment has a configuration in which a game ball storage device is provided above the game ball sorting device 200 in the fifth embodiment. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball storage device is provided above the game ball sorting device 400 (FIG. 294) in Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment. In this case, the game ball storage device is configured to release the stored game balls downward when two game balls are stored in the game ball receiving container. Further, in the third modification of the fifth embodiment, the game ball receiving container is tilted due to the weight of the plurality of game balls, so that the game balls placed on the game ball receiving container are dropped. Alternatively, the bottom of the game ball receiving container may be opened due to the weight of the plurality of game balls, thereby allowing the game balls placed on the game ball receiving container to fall. Furthermore, the game ball storage device has a configuration in which the game ball container does not tilt even if more than three game balls are placed on the game ball container, and the game ball container tilts only by the forced release device 600. It's good as well. Further, in the third modification of the fifth embodiment, the forced release device 600 may be removed.

《E6-11》Variation 11:
In the fifth embodiment and its variations 1 to 4, the game ball sorting device is provided in the game area PA where the game balls flow down, but there is no need to limit it to this, and the game ball sorting device is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. A configuration may also be adopted in which a game ball sorting device is provided in an area where balls are distributed.

<<F>> Sixth embodiment:
《F1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 298 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a sixth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 299 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device is equipped with a liquid crystal display that displays images for designs and effects.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted on the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. The game balls that enter each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed on the gaming board 30. be guided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 299).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is shifted to when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on winning in the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning in the big winning opening 36a becomes possible. Similarly, even when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery based on a prize entered into the second starting opening 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning can be made into the large winning opening 36a. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, first starting port 33, second starting port 34, or variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the opening 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display device to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by winning the through gate 35 is held, the common figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. In a round game, the door opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning in the first start opening 33, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a predetermined display in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. In addition, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on a winning in the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a predetermined display in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. . The liquid crystal display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 301 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 301(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 301(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 301(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 301(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, and the symbols in each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol On either one of the display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a predetermined information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 301(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

As shown in FIG. 300, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the interval between the pair of nails 42a, 42b.

《F2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power outage monitoring circuit 86 monitors the power supply and outputs a power outage information signal when a power outage occurs. "When a power outage occurs" is not limited to when a commercial power outage occurs, but also includes when the power switch 88 is switched from an on state to an off state (when the power is turned off).

In addition, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to multiple detection sensors. Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the ball entering the through gate 35. do.

The output side of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and if a winning to the second starting port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is sent. A corresponding prize ball command is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 303 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the type of jackpot such as a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach random number lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C5 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b includes a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When game balls enter the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 in sequence, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are stored in the pending information storage area 64b in chronological order. is stored in

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the winning information is won. The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table in the win/fail table storage area 63a (FIG. 302) of the ROM 63.

FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the validity table stored in the validity table storage area 63a. The pachinko machine 10 is set with a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes for winning a winning lottery. The high probability mode is a gaming state that is started by winning a probability-variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode. FIG. 304(a) shows a success/failure table for low probability mode, and FIG. 304(b) shows a success/failure table for high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 304(a), under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a winning lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 15. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304(b), under the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a winning lottery, the value of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 30. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the high probability mode. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

Returning to FIG. 303, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described next. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type, such as a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. More specifically, the pending information is stored in the first holding area Ra of the pending information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the pending information is stored at the timing when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the types of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is determined. It is possible to set a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the numbers are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening/closing door 36b is It can be set to continue until there are 6 pieces.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning lottery using a winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) above as a winning/closing execution mode, and a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning lottery using a winning/losing table for the high probability mode as a winning/losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a win/fail table for the low probability mode. As explained using FIG. 304, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win/fail table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C5 is the same, but in the high-frequency support mode, Compared to the low frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role opening win is set is set to be greater, and the opening time of one time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second starting opening 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 33 is higher than that in the second starting port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 34 is higher than that in the first starting port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning occurs in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. I can do it.

Note that the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is set to be in the electric utility release state more frequently per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. In addition, in a configuration where multiple types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory opening lottery is held and the next electric accessory opening lottery is held, in the high-frequency support mode, the It may be set so that a short securing time is more likely to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. In addition, the number of openings may be increased, the opening time may be lengthened, and the time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery may be shortened. The advantage of high-frequency support mode over low-frequency support mode can be increased by applying any one or any combination of the following conditions: shortening the average securing time and increasing the probability of winning. good.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, a plurality of jackpot types are sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 305 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 305(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 305(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting opening in FIG. 305(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting opening 33 are 16R certain variable jackpot, 8R certain variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot.

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 5" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "6 to 23" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "24-27" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "28-39" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot. Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of a variable jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", and the probability of a normal jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39". It is 40% of the value of . Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in FIG. 305(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot. , 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 12" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "13 to 23" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot. "24-30" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "31-39" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is divided into two types: when the jackpot is won based on winning in the first starting opening 33, and when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. This differs depending on the case where a jackpot is won based on winning in the starting slot 34. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won based on winning in the second starting opening 34, the probability of a variable jackpot is 60%, the probability of a normal jackpot is 40%, and the probability of winning a jackpot is 40%. This is the same as the case where a jackpot is won based on winning in the first starting slot 33, but the probability of winning 16R is higher than the case where the jackpot is won based on winning in the first starting slot 33. It becomes. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

In this way, the manner in which the jackpot type is distributed between the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in terms of advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. In addition, in the case of a losing result in the lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Returning to FIG. 303, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described next. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is used for reach judgment stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is compared with the table and it is determined whether or not to generate a reach. However, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination that corresponds to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a in FIG. 301(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in symbol row Z1, and then a symbol identical to Z1 is stopped and displayed in symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. , In a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C5 will be explained. The electric accessory release counter C5 is configured such that, for example, the number is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C5 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C5. For example, if C5=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C5=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the closed state.

Note that a set of combinations of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, and is stored in the second holding area Ra. A set of combinations of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb correspond to the pending information related to the second starting opening 34, and these pending information are the special Corresponds to information.

<<F3>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 306 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 302) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《F4》First starting port and life nail configuration:
FIG. 307 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 33 and its surroundings. In the figure, the X-axis positive direction indicates the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis positive direction indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the Z-axis positive direction indicates the front side of the game board 30. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the right and left directions of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis direction indicates the up-down direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front-back direction of the game board 30. The X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are three axes that are orthogonal to each other. Hereinafter, the positive direction of the X-axis will be referred to as the "+X direction," the negative direction of the X-axis will be referred to as the "-X direction," the positive direction of the Y-axis will be referred to as the "+Y direction," and the negative direction of the Y-axis will be referred to as the "-Y direction." The positive Z-axis direction is called the "+Z direction," and the negative Z-axis direction is called the "-Z direction."

The first starting port 33 is constituted by a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance 33a into which a game ball can enter. Specifically, the first starting port 33 has a hollow box shape, and has a ball entry port 33a formed on the +Y direction side surface, and penetrates the game board 30 in the front and back direction on the -Z direction side surface. A bulb opening 33b communicating with an opening (not shown) is formed. A game ball that enters from the ball entry port 33a passes through the first starting port 33, is discharged from the ball discharge port 33b, and is sent to an opening that penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. The first starting port 33 is made of a translucent resin member.

As described above, a pair of nails 42 are installed above the first starting port 33. Hereinafter, the nail on the +X direction side of the pair of nails 42 will be referred to as the "first nail 42a", and the nail on the -X direction side of the pair of nails 42 will be referred to as the "second nail 42b".

Each nail 42 provided in the pachinko machine 10, including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b, has a substantially hemispherical head 421 and a substantially cylindrical body 422, For example, it is integrally formed of brass material. The body portion 422 extends straight, has a pointed tip, and has a spiral thread groove 422s (see FIG. 308) formed in a part of the outer peripheral surface. The nails 42 are driven into the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 up to the screw groove 422s, so that even if a game ball collides with the game ball, it is difficult to come off from the game board 30 due to the impact. Each nail 42 is driven by an automatic nail gun. At least a portion of each nail 42 may be driven by an automatic nail gun, and then the inclination thereof may be adjusted as necessary.

At least at the stage of shipping from the manufacturer, each nail 42 is approximately perpendicular to the plywood 30a. Specifically, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting port 33 are at a slight angle θ1 with respect to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a, that is, the +Z-axis direction. , θ2. The reason why the inclination angles of at least some of the nails 42 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b are determined is to match the ball launch rate and winning rate to the designed values. The inclination angles of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b will be described in detail below.

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a, 42b and the first starting port 33. 308(a) is a sectional view taken along the line 1-1 in FIG. 307, and FIG. 308(b) is a sectional view taken along the line 2-2 in FIG. 307. That is, FIG. 308(a) shows the case where the first and second nails 42a, 42b and the first starting port 33 are viewed from the +Y direction side (upper side) to the −Y direction side (lower side). (Hereinafter, it is also simply referred to as a "view from above"). FIG. 308(b) shows a case where the pair of nails 42a, 42b and the first starting port 33 are viewed from the +X direction side (right side) to the -X direction side (left side) (hereinafter simply referred to as "viewed from the right side"). (also referred to as ``the case''). In FIG. 308(b), the second nail 42b located on the left side is hidden by the first nail 42a located on the right side and cannot be seen.

As shown in FIG. 308(a), when viewed from above, the first nail 42a located on the right side is such that the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined by a first angle θ1 toward the right side (+X direction). In general terms, the first nail 42a is provided so as to be inclined by +θ1 (counterclockwise θ1) with respect to the +Z direction.

In general, the pachinko machine 10 is tested for device performance, and is approved for installation in each pachinko parlor on the assumption that devices produced in the same model have roughly the same performance. The first angle θ1 is a predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the type certification test is passed. The first angle θ1 is, for example, a value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees in this embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the first nail 42a is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the first nail 42a is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As shown in FIG. 308(a), when viewed from above, the second nail 42b located on the left side is such that the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the left side (-X direction) by a second angle θ2. In terms of a general angle, the second nail 42b is provided so as to be inclined by −θ2 (θ2 clockwise) with respect to the +Z direction. The second angle θ2 is a predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, is the angle at which the type certification test is passed. The second angle θ2 is, for example, a value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and in this embodiment is, for example, 5 degrees. Note that, although the first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are equal in this embodiment, they may be different. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are also the angles intended by the manufacturer at the shipping stage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the second nail 42b is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the second nail 42b is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As a result of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b being provided at an angle as described above, there is a gap between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b as shown in FIG. The distance (width) gradually increases from the rear side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side).

The ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 is an opening along the XZ plane, and has a trapezoidal shape as shown in FIG. 308(a). Specifically, a first edge 331 corresponds to one of a pair of parallel opposite sides forming the trapezoid, and a second edge 332 corresponds to the other of the pair of opposite sides. , a third edge 333 corresponding to one of the opposite sides of the other set of trapezoids, and a fourth edge 334 corresponding to the other of the opposite sides of the other set form the trapezoid. configured. The first edge 331 and the second edge 332 are parallel to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30 (that is, along the X-axis direction), and the first edge 331 is parallel to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. The second edge 332 is located on the −Z direction side of the ball entry opening 33a. The third edge 333 is located on the +X direction side of the ball entrance 33a, and the fourth edge 334 is located on the −X direction side of the ball entrance 33a. Note that the first to fourth edges 331 to 334 can also be referred to as the inner slope of the ball entrance 33a when measuring the inner slope.

In this embodiment, the length of the first edge 331 is longer than the length of the second edge 332. If the angle on the +X direction side of the two interior angles at both ends of the second edge 332 is δ1, and the angle on the -X direction side of the above two interior angles is δ2, then δ1 and δ2 are as follows. satisfies equations (1) and (2).

δ1=θ1+90 degrees...(1)
δ2=θ2+90 degrees...(2)
However, θ1 is the inclination angle of the first nail 42a mentioned above, and θ2 is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b mentioned above.

According to equation (1), it can be seen that the third edge 333 has a configuration in which the direction based on the end on the -Z direction side is inclined from the +Z direction to the right (+X direction) by the first angle θ1. . According to equation (2), the fourth edge 334 has a configuration in which the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined from the +Z direction to the left (−X direction) by the second angle θ2. I understand. The distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in the ball entrance 33a gradually increases from the back side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). There is.

Therefore, when the first and second nails 42a and 42b and the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 are The fourth edge 334 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b. In other words, the third edge 333 corresponds to the inclination angle of the first nail 42a, that is, the angle between the first nail 42a and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the perpendicular direction to the surface of the plywood 30a). The fourth edge 334 defines the inclination angle of the second nail 42b, that is, the angle between the second nail 42b and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the angle formed by the surface of the plywood 30a). (angle with the perpendicular direction).

<<F5>> Effects of the embodiment The first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting port 33 may be damaged by unintended external factors such as an accidental impact during transportation. , the degree of inclination may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer.

FIG. 309 is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional example. In the conventional example, the same first nail 42a as in the sixth embodiment is used. As described above, the first nail 42a is inclined by the first angle θ1 from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+X direction) at the time of shipment. Similar to the sixth embodiment, a first starting port P33 is provided below the first nail 42a (in the -Y direction). The first starting port P33 differs from the first starting port 33 of the sixth embodiment in that the ball entry port P33a has a rectangular shape. That is, in the conventional example, the third edge P93 of the ball entrance P33a is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30 (Z-axis direction).

In conventional pachinko machines, the inclination of the first nail 42a may change from the time of shipment, for example, as shown by the broken line (42a') in the figure, due to an accidental shock during transportation or due to aging. There were times when I ended up. In that case, the repair person needs to return the angle to the first angle θ, which is the angle at the time of shipment. However, it is difficult for a repair person to grasp the inclination of the first angle θ from a pachinko machine whose nail's inclination has changed. It required a lot of experience with adjustments and the use of specialized adjustment equipment.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the ball entry opening 33a of the first starting opening 33 is adjusted so that the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b matches the angle at the time of shipment, which is the angle intended by the manufacturer. The orientations of the third edge 333 and fourth edge 334 in are predetermined. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the first nail 42a is connected to the third edge 333 when viewed from above, relying on the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in the ball entrance 33a. By checking and correcting the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the fourth edge 334, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b is adjusted according to the manufacturer's specifications. You can easily return it to the intended tilt. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a, 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails 42 or a special adjustment tool.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first and second ball openings 33a of the first starting opening 33 are used instead of separately providing a special member for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nails 42a and 42b can be repaired, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming complicated.

As a modification of the sixth embodiment, the third edge 333 that defines the angle of inclination of the first nail 42a and the fourth edge 334 that defines the angle of inclination of the second nail 42b are provided with the surroundings. may be colored in different colors. According to this configuration, the repairer can easily recognize that the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 serve as a reference when repairing the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. I can do it.

<<F6>> Modification of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《F6-1》Variation 1:
The pachinko machine according to the first modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment only in the direction of inclination of the life nail and the shape of the ball entry opening formed in the first starting opening. , the remaining configurations are the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 1, the same components as the Pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment are given the same names and numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 310 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 542a, 542b as life nails and a first starting port 533 provided in the Pachinko machine of Modification 1. FIG. 310(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from above. FIG. 310(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 308, the distance (width) between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b varies from the back side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). The structure gradually widened towards the end. On the other hand, in Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 310, the distance (width) between the first nail 542a and the second nail 542b varies from the back side (-Z direction side) to the front side ( It gradually becomes narrower toward the +Z direction side). Specifically, in the first nail 542a located on the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is moved from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction) by a first angle φ1. It is provided in an inclined direction. The second nail 542b located on the left side is arranged so that the central axis direction of the body part 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+X direction) by a second angle φ2. It is set in. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are predetermined angles, and in this embodiment, are the angles at which the type certification test is passed. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are, for example, any value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and are, for example, 5 degrees. Note that the first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are equal, but may alternatively be different.

In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. It was configured to gradually become wider from the side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). On the other hand, in Modification 1, as shown in FIG. ) gradually narrows from the rear side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). Specifically, the third edge 593 located on the right side has a configuration in which the direction based on the end on the −Z direction side is inclined from the +Z direction to the left side (−X direction) by a first angle φ1. There is. The fourth edge 594 located on the left side is configured such that the direction based on the end on the −Z direction side is inclined from the +Z direction to the right side (+X direction) by a second angle φ2.

Therefore, also in the pachinko machine of the first modification, the first and second nails 542a, 542b, and the ball entry port 533a of the first starting port 533 are connected to The third edge 593 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body 422 of the first nail 542a, and the fourth edge 594 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body 422 of the second nail 542b.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 1 configured as above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, relying on the third lip 593 and the fourth lip 594 at the ball entrance 533a, The inclination of each nail 542a, 542b is adjusted so that the first nail 542a is parallel to the third edge 593 and the second nail 542b is parallel to the fourth edge 594 when viewed from above. It can be checked and corrected. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 542a, 542b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the original first starting port 33 is not separately provided for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired using the ball entrance 33a, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

《F6-2》Variation 2:
The pachinko machine as the second modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment only in the direction of inclination of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the rest of the configuration is the same. It is. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 2, the same components as the Pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment are given the same names and numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 311 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a, 642b as life nails and a first starting port 633 provided in the Pachinko machine of Modification 2. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from above. FIG. 311(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

In the sixth embodiment and the first modification, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b are arranged such that the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the positive side of the X axis. Or, it had a configuration that tilted in the negative direction (to the right or left). On the other hand, in Modification 2, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are arranged so that the central axis direction of the body part 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the positive side of the Y axis. It has a configuration that tilts in the direction (upward). Specifically, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are aligned along the Z axis as shown in FIG. 311(a) when viewed from above, and along the Z axis as shown in FIG. 311(b) when viewed from the right side. ), the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined upward (+Y direction) from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) by a predetermined angle μ1. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the type certification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the type certification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is, for example, a value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees.

In the sixth embodiment and the first modification, the ball entry port 33a formed in the first starting port 33 had a trapezoidal shape. On the other hand, in Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 311(a), the ball entry port 633a formed in the first starting port 633 has a rectangular shape. Therefore, the third edge 693 and the fourth edge 694 on the +X direction side and the -X direction side, which constitute the ball entry opening 633a, are configured to extend along the +Z direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 311(b), the upper (+Y direction side) surface 633S of the first starting port 633 moves upward from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) with the end 633b in contact with the plywood 30a as a reference. It is configured to be inclined by a predetermined angle μ1 (in the +Y direction).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the second modification, when viewed from the right side, the direction of the central axis of each body 422 of the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b is the ball entry opening of the first starting opening 633. It is parallel to the upper surface 633S of 633a.

In the Pachinko machine of Modification 2 configured as described above, the inclination angle of the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633 is set so as to match the upward inclination of each nail 642a, 642b intended by the manufacturer. predetermined. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, relying on the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633, each nail 642a, 642b is placed parallel to the plane 633S when viewed from the right side. The inclination of the nails 642a, 642b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 642a, 642b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjustment tool.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of the second modification, the inclination of the nail can be repaired by using the flat surface 633S of the first starting port 33, without separately providing a special member for checking the inclination of the nail. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

《F6-3》Variation 3:
The pachinko machine of Modification 3 differs from the Pachinko machine of Modification 2 only in the direction of inclination of the life nail, and the rest of the configuration is the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 3, the same components as those of the Pachinko machine of Modification 2 are given the same names and numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 742a, 742b as life nails and a first starting port 733 provided in a pachinko machine of modification 3. FIG. 312(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from above. FIG. 312(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

In modification example 2, as shown in FIG. 311(b), the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are such that the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is in the +Z direction (double-dashed line). The configuration was such that it was tilted upward (in the +Y direction) by a predetermined angle μ1. On the other hand, in Modified Example 3, as shown in FIG. (two-dot chain line) downward (-Y direction) by a predetermined angle ν1. The predetermined angle ν1 is a predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the model certification test is passed. The predetermined angle ν1 is, for example, a value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees.

In the third modification, the ball entry port 733a formed in the first starting port 733 has a rectangular shape similarly to the second modification. However, unlike Modification 2, the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733 is tilted downward (-Y direction) from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) at a predetermined angle with respect to the end 733b in contact with the plywood 30a. The structure is inclined by ν1.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the third modification, when viewed from the right side, the center axis direction of each body 422 of the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b is the ball entry opening of the first starting opening 733. It is parallel to the upper surface 733S of 733a.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 3 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of modification 2, relying on the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733, each nail 742a is , 742b are parallel to the plane 733S thereof, and the inclination of each nail 742a, 742b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, a deviation in the inclination of the first and second nails 742a, 742b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of the third modification, the inclination of the nail can be repaired by using the flat surface 733S of the first starting port 733 without separately providing a special member for checking the inclination of the nail. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

《F6-4》Variation 4:
The pachinko machine as the fourth modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment only in the direction of inclination of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the rest of the configuration is the same. It is. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 4, the same components as the Pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment are given the same names and numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 313 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 842a, 842b as life nails and a first starting port 833 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 4. FIG. 313(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from above. FIG. 313(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

In the pachinko machines of the sixth embodiment and modifications 1 to 3, the first nail and the second nail, which are the life nails, are aligned in the +Z direction (two points The structure was such that it was tilted in any one of the following directions from the chain line (dashed line) to the right (+X direction), to the left (-X direction), upward (+Y direction), and downward (-Y direction). On the other hand, in Modification 4, the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b, which are life nails, It has a configuration that tilts in the following directions. The direction of this inclination is an angle that intersects both the X axis and the Y axis at an angle other than right angles. Specifically, the configuration is as follows.

In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 308(a), the first nail 42a located on the right side has a central axis direction of the body 422 with the tip 423 as a reference in the +Z direction. (two-dot chain line) to the right (+X direction) by a first angle θ1, and as shown in FIG. It was structured like this. On the other hand, in Modification 4, the first nail 842a located on the right side is similar to the first nail 42a of the sixth embodiment when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 313(a). As shown in FIG. 313(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with the tip 423 as a reference is a predetermined direction from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+Y direction). It was configured to be inclined by an angle ξ1.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 308(a), the second nail 42b located on the left side has a center axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 when viewed from above. It is tilted from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (-X direction) by a second angle θ2, and as shown in FIG. 308(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body 422 is It was configured along the axial direction. On the other hand, in Modification 4, the second nail 842b located on the left side is similar to the first nail 42a of the sixth embodiment when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 313(a). As shown in FIG. 313(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with the tip 423 as a reference is a predetermined direction from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+Y direction). It was configured to be inclined by an angle ξ1.

In the fourth modification, the ball entry port 833a formed in the first starting port 833 has the same trapezoidal shape as in the sixth embodiment. However, the upper surface 833S of the first starting port 833 is different from the sixth embodiment and the second modification, and is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+Y direction) with respect to the end 833b in contact with the plywood 30a. The structure is such that it is inclined by a predetermined angle ξ1. The predetermined angle ξ1 is a predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the type certification test is passed. The predetermined angle ξ1 is, for example, a value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, the first and second nails 842a, 842b and the ball entry opening 833a of the first starting opening 833 are arranged such that the third edge 893 is the third edge when viewed from above. The fourth edge 894 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 842a, and the fourth edge 894 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 842b. Further, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b is parallel to the upper surface 833S of the ball entry port 833a of the first starting port 833. It has become.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 4 configured as described above, the first nail 842a when viewed from above relies on the third lip 893 and the fourth lip 894 in the ball entrance 833a. The inclination of each nail 842a, 842b can be confirmed and corrected so that the second nail 842b is parallel to the third edge 893 and the fourth edge 894. Also, relying on the upper surface 833S of the first starting port 833, check and correct the inclination of each nail 842a, 842b so that each nail 842a, 842b is parallel to the plane 833S when viewed from the right side. can do. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 842a, 842b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjustment tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the original first starting port 833 can be used without separately providing a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired using this method, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

《F6-5》Variation 5:
In the pachinko machines of the sixth embodiment and modifications 1 to 4, the reference portion that serves as a reference for checking whether or not the first nail and the second nail, which are the life nails, are parallel when repairing the inclination is provided. , a predetermined portion of the first starting port, for example, the third edge 333 and fourth edge 334 of the ball entry port 33a shown in FIG. 308, or the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633 shown in FIG. 311. Met. On the other hand, in Modification 5, the reference portion is constituted by a dedicated mark provided at the first starting port. This will be explained in detail below.

The pachinko machine as modification 5 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remaining parts including the first and second nails 42a and 42b are different from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment. The configuration is the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 5, the same components as the Pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment are given the same names and numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a, 42b as life nails and a first starting port 933 provided in a pachinko machine of modification 5. FIG. 314(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from above. In FIG. 314(a), portions of the first and second nails 42a and 42b are broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 314(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), the ball entry port 933a formed in the first starting port 933 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. The upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. On this surface 933S, long rectangular marks 951 and 952 are printed. Marks 951 and 952 are colored by printing.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 951 is printed on the right side of the right edge 993 of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 951 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 42a located on the right side. On the surface 933S, the second mark 952 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b located on the left side. Moreover, when viewed from above, the right side outline of the first mark 951 is located slightly to the right of the right side outline of the body 422 of the first nail 42a, and the left side outline of the second mark 952 is located slightly to the left of the left side outline of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b. That is, when viewed from above, at least a portion of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a portion of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 5 configured as described above, the first nail 42a is aligned with the first mark 951 when viewed from above, relying on the first mark 951 and the second mark 952. The inclination of each nail 42a, 42b can be checked and corrected so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a, 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool. Further, when viewed from above, at least a portion of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a portion of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b. , the first and second marks 951 and 952 have high visibility. Therefore, it is easy to identify the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b.

《F6-6》Variation 6:
Another example in which the above-mentioned reference portion is constituted by a dedicated mark provided at the first starting port will be described below as modification 6.

The pachinko machine as Modification Example 6 differs from the Pachinko machine as Modification Example 2 only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails 642a and 642b. are the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 6, the same components as those of the Pachinko machine of Modification 2 are given the same names and symbols and will be described below.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a, 642b as life nails and a first starting port 1033 provided in a pachinko machine of modification 6. FIG. 315(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from above. FIG. 315(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), the ball entry port 1033a formed in the first starting port 1033 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. The upper surface 1033S of the first starting port 1033 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. A long rectangular mark 1051 is printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033.

When viewed from the right side, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 642a located on the right side. The mark 1051 is colored by printing.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 6 configured as described above, each nail 642a, 642b is arranged so that each nail 642a, 642b is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 when viewed from the right side, relying on the mark 1051. , 642b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 642a, 642b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

Note that the first mark 951 and the second mark 952 in Modification Example 5 and the mark 1051 in Modification Example 6 are made by providing unevenness on the surface of the first starting port 1033 instead of being colored by printing. It's fine if you did it. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a recess, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark does not need to be limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the direction can be defined. For example, it may be an arrow symbol or two points indicating a base point and an end point.

《F6-7》Variation example 7:
The Pachinko machine as Modification Example 7 differs from the Pachinko machine as Modification Example 5 only in the orientation of the first mark and the second mark, and the first and second nails 42a, 42b are different from each other. The remaining configuration including the shape of the first starting port 933 and the first starting port 933 are the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 7, the same components as those of the Pachinko machine of Modification 5 are given the same names and symbols, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a, 42b as life nails and a first starting port 933 provided in a pachinko machine of modification 7. FIG. 316(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from above. In FIG. 316(a), portions of the first and second nails 42a and 42b are broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 316(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 316(a), the first starting port 933 is the same as in the fifth modification. The ball entry port 933a of the first starting port 933 has a rectangular shape, and the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Long rectangular marks 1151 and 1152 are printed on this surface 933S.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 1151 is printed on the right side of the right edge 993 of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. That is, the first mark 1151 is printed on the plywood 30a with its longitudinal direction guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. In this embodiment, by printing the first right angle mark 1153 indicating that it is a right angle, it can be seen at a glance that the first mark 1151 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. Make sure you know it's guaranteed.

On the surface 933S, the second mark 1152 is printed on the left side of the left edge 994 of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. That is, the second mark 1152 is printed on the plywood 30a with its longitudinal direction guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. In this embodiment, by printing the second right angle mark 1154 indicating the right angle, it can be seen at a glance that the second mark 1152 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. Make sure you know it's guaranteed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 316(b), by printing a third right angle mark 1155 on the right side surface of the first starting port 933, the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 It may be made clear that it is guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the constituent plywood 30a. Note that the first to third right angle marks 1153 to 1155 are not necessarily necessary and may be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 7 configured as described above, the inclination of the first nail 42a can be confirmed by relying on the first mark 1151, and the degree of inclination of the first nail 42a can be confirmed by relying on the second mark 1152. The degree of inclination of the nail 42a can be confirmed. Specifically, by comparing the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 and the orientation of the first nail 42a, and comparing the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 and the orientation of the second nail 42b, the first and The degree of inclination of the second nails 42a, 42b can be confirmed. Therefore, each nail 42a, 42b can be adjusted easily.

Note that, as another modification, in modification 6 shown in FIG. 315, the direction of the mark 1051 may be changed. Specifically, in another modification, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 when viewed from the right side. That is, in the sixth modification shown in FIG. 315, the mark 1051 printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30 due to its longitudinal direction. The configuration is changed to one that is guaranteed to be printed on the plywood 30a. With this configuration as well, it is possible to check the vertical inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b.

The first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in Modification 7 are colored by printing, but instead of this, the marks may be formed by providing unevenness on the surface of the first starting port. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a recess, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark does not need to be limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the direction can be defined.

In Modification Example 7, the first mark 1151 and the second mark written on the first starting port 933 are used to ensure that the reference portion is provided perpendicularly to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. It was set to 1152. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which, in place of the mark, a protrusion made of resin, for example, is provided on the game board 30 separately from the first starting port 933. In short, any configuration can be used as long as it ensures that it is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30.

Furthermore, as another modification, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in Modification 7 may be added to the sixth embodiment and Modifications 1 and 4 thereof. According to this configuration, in addition to the third edge on the right side and the fourth edge on the left side that constitute the ball entrance, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 also affect the inclination of the nail. Since you can check the condition, you can adjust the nail more accurately.

《F6-8》Variation 8:
The pachinko machine as modification 8 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment only in the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment. are the same. In the Pachinko machine of Modification 8, the same components as the Pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment are given the same names and numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 317 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 1233 provided in the pachinko machine of modification 8 and its surroundings. In the sixth embodiment and modifications 1 to 7, the first starting port, for example, the first starting port 33 shown in FIG. The ball mouth 33a has a first edge 331 on the front side (+Z direction side), a second edge 332 on the back side (-Z direction side), a third edge 333 on the right side (+X direction side), and a left side. (-X direction side) fourth edge 334. In contrast, in Modification 8, as shown in FIG. 317, the first starting port 1233 has a hollow box shape with the wall surface on the rear side (-Z direction side) removed. That is, the upper end surface of the first starting port 1233 is approximately U-shaped.

The ball entry port 1233a formed on the upper side (+Y direction side) of the first starting port 1233 has a first lip 1291 on the front side (+Z direction side) and a second lip 1293 on the right side (+X direction side). , a third edge 1294 on the left side (-X direction side), and a part of the surface of the plywood 30a. The game ball that enters from the ball entry port 1233a passes through the first starting port 1233 and is sent to the opening 30c that penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.

The second edge 1293 on the right side (+X direction side), like the third edge 333 in the sixth embodiment, has a direction from the +Z direction to the right side (+X direction) based on the end on the -Z direction side. It is inclined by a first angle θ1. Similarly to the fourth edge 334 in the sixth embodiment, the third edge 1294 on the left side (−X direction side) has a direction from the +Z direction to the left side (−X direction ) by a second angle θ2. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are the inclination angles of the first and second nails 42a and 42b at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, as in the sixth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 8 configured as above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, relying on the second lip 1293 and the third lip 1294 at the ball entrance 1233a, Similarly to the sixth embodiment, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a, 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

Note that the shape of the first starting port described above, that is, the shape of the first starting port whose upper end surface is approximately U-shaped, is applicable to the modified examples 1 to 7 described above, in addition to the sixth embodiment. The configuration may be adopted in the following.

《F6-9》Variation 9:
The pachinko machine as modification example 9 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as modification example 8 only in the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails is different from the pachinko machine 10 as modification example 8. are the same. In the pachinko machine of modification 9, the same components as those of the pachinko machine of modification 8 are given the same names and symbols, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 318 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 1333 provided in the Pachinko machine of Modification Example 9 and its surroundings. Like the first starting port 1233 in Modification 8, the first starting port 1333 has a substantially U-shaped upper end surface. Furthermore, the first starting port 1333 differs from the first starting port 1233 in Modification Example 8 in the following points (i) to (iii).

(i) In the first starting port 1233 in Modified Example 8, as shown in FIG. The third edge 1294 was configured to be inclined by a first angle θ1 and a second angle θ2 from the +Z direction. On the other hand, in the first starting port 1333 in Modified Example 9, as shown in FIG. is parallel to the +Z direction.

(ii) In the first starting port 1333 in Modified Example 9, as shown in FIG. First numerical information Na indicating a first angle θ1 is written on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first starting port 1333, which is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b at the time of shipment of the game machine. Second numerical information Nb indicating the second angle θ2 is written. On the other hand, the first starting port 1233 in Modified Example 8 does not have such a configuration. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are numerical values indicating angles, and are, for example, "5 degrees."

(iii) The first starting port 1233 in Modification 8 had an integral configuration. On the other hand, the first starting port 1333 in Modification 9 is constituted by a first part Pa and a second part Pb. The second part Pb is mainly a left side wall portion of the first starting port 1333. The first part Pa is a part other than the second part Pb. Initially, as shown in FIG. 319, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are separate parts, and in the manufacturing stage, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined, and the first starting port 1333 is configured. First numerical information Na is printed on the first part Pa, and numerical information Nb is printed on the second part Pb. Note that printing of the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb is performed before the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 9 configured as above, the first nail located on the right side is activated based on the first numerical information Na printed on the outer surface 1333b of the right side wall of the first starting port 1333. The inclination of 42a can be confirmed and corrected. Further, by relying on the second numerical information Nb printed on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first starting port 1333, the inclination of the second nail 42b located on the left side can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a, 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of modification 9, since the first starting port 1333 is constituted by the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the first numerical information Na is attached to the first part Pa during manufacturing. It is possible to easily print the second numerical information Nb on the second part Pb. In particular, when the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are provided in the same direction so that both the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb can be viewed from the right side (+X direction side), , since the second numerical information Nb located on the left side (-X direction side) is inside the first starting port 1233, it is difficult to print the second numerical information Nb during manufacturing. According to the pachinko machine, since the first starting port 1333 is divided into the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the second numerical information Nb can be easily printed, and the first starting port 1333 can be easily printed. The mouth 1333 is easy to manufacture.

Note that although the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are described, the configuration may alternatively be such that the information indicating the angle is displayed in the form of a display of a plurality of segment light emitting parts. In short, any configuration can be used as long as it indicates information about angles.

The first starting port 1333 provided in the Pachinko machine of Modified Example 9 was of a type in which the upper end surface was approximately U-shaped; It can also be of a hollow box-shaped type. Furthermore, although the first starting port 1333 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb, it may be composed of three or more parts instead. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb indicating the inclination angle of the nail may be configured to be described in the sixth embodiment and Modifications 1, 4, 5, 7, and 8 as well.

《F6-10》Variation 10:
FIG. 320 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory 1410 provided in a pachinko machine as modification 10 and its surroundings. The electric accessory 1410 is provided, for example, at the lower center of the game board of the pachinko machine. As described above, the game board is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front and back direction, and one of the openings 1400 is provided with an electric accessory 1410.

The electric accessory 1410 is a normal electric accessory and is configured as a so-called electric tulip. The electric accessory 1410 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1411a, 1411b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). The closed state is the state shown in FIG. 320. In the closed state, since the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is small, it is difficult for game balls to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the open state (see FIG. 321 of Modification 11), the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a, 1411b increases, making it easier for game balls to enter. The game ball that has entered the electric accessory 1410 is sent to the opening 1400. For example, a winning lottery is drawn based on the entry of a game ball into the electric accessory 1410. Hereinafter, the movable piece on the +X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a, 1411b will be referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a", and the movable piece on the -X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a, 1411b will be referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a". 2 movable piece 1411b. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the +X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the -X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front.

A pair of right and left nails 1442a and 1442b are provided above the electric accessory 1410. The probability of a game ball entering the electric accessory 1410 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 1442a, 1442b. Hereinafter, the nail on the +X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a, 1442b will be referred to as the "first nail 1442a", and the nail on the -X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a, 1442b will be referred to as the "second nail 1442b". It is called. The shapes of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b are the same as the nails of the sixth embodiment.

The first nail 1442a is such that the center axis direction of the body with the tip as a reference is inclined from the +Z direction by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, +X direction). It is provided. The second nail 1442b is arranged so that the center axis direction of the body with the tip as a reference is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, -X direction) from the +Z direction. It is provided. The inclination direction and inclination angle for the first nail 1442a and the inclination direction and inclination angle for the second nail 1442b are individual, and are those at the time of shipment of the game machine.

In the electric accessory 1410, the tip portion of the first movable piece 1411a is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as "first flat surface") Sa. The tip portion of the second movable piece 1411b is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as "second flat surface") Sb. In this modification 10, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination angle and direction of the first flat surface Sa match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1442a, and the second flat surface The inclination angle and direction of Sb are designed in advance to match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1442b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the first flat surface Sa defines the direction and angle of inclination for the first nail 1442a according to the direction and angle of inclination thereof, and The surface Sb defines the direction and angle of inclination of the second nail 1442b based on the direction and angle of inclination thereof.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 10 configured as above, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, relying on the first flat surface Sa of the first movable piece 1411a in the electric accessory 1410, The inclination of the first nail 1442a can be checked and corrected to the state at the time of shipment. In addition, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination of the second nail 1442b is checked by relying on the second flat surface Sb of the second movable piece 1411b of the electric accessory 1410, and the condition at the time of shipment is checked. can be corrected. Therefore, the deviation in the inclination of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b above the electric accessory 1410 can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting nails or a special adjustment tool. be able to.

《F6-11》Variation 11:
The pachinko machine of Modification 11 is different from the pachinko machine of Modification 10 in that the direction of inclination and the angle of inclination of the flat part are different in the electric accessory, and the difference between the first nail and the second nail is The location is different. Regarding the configurations other than these, the pachinko machine as modification example 11 and the pachinko machine as modification example 10 are the same.

FIG. 321 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory 1510 provided in a pachinko machine as modification 11 and its surroundings. The electric accessory 1510 is provided, for example, at the lower center of the game board of the pachinko machine. The electric accessory 1510 is provided in the opening 1400 similarly to the electric accessory 1410 in the tenth modification. Since the opening 1400 is the same as in Modification 10, the same reference numerals are given to it. Like the electric accessory 1410 in Modification 10, the electric accessory 1510 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1511a and 1511b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). has been done. The open state is the state shown in FIG. 321.

A first nail 1542a is provided in the upper right direction of the electric accessory 1510, and a second nail 1542b is provided in the upper left direction of the electric accessory 1510. The first nail 1542a is such that the central axis direction of the body with the tip as a reference is inclined from the +Z direction by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, +X direction). It is provided. The second nail 1542b is arranged such that the central axis direction of the body with the tip as a reference is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, -X direction) from the +Z direction. It is provided. The inclination direction and inclination angle for the first nail 1542a and the inclination direction and inclination angle for the second nail 1542b are individual, and are those at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

In the electric accessory 1510, the tip portion of the first movable piece 1511a is cut off to form a first flat surface Ha, and the tip portion of the second movable piece 1511b is cut off to form a second flat surface Hb. . In the present modification 11, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and direction of the first flat surface Ha match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1542a, and the second flat surface The inclination angle and inclination direction of Hb are designed in advance to match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1542b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the first flat surface Ha defines the direction and angle of inclination for the first nail 1542a according to the direction and angle of inclination thereof, and The surface Hb defines the direction and angle of inclination of the second nail 1542b depending on the direction and angle of inclination thereof.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 11 configured as above, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, relying on the first flat surface Ha of the first movable piece 1511a in the electric accessory 1510, The inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory 1510 can be confirmed and corrected. In addition, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory 1510 relies on the second flat surface Hb of the second movable piece 1511b of the electric accessory 1510. You can check and correct the tilt. Therefore, the deviation in the inclinations of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjustment tool. In particular, the electric accessory 1510 targets the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b located at the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory 1510, which are close to the tip positions of the movable pieces 1511a and 1511b when in the open state. The nail can be easily repaired.

In Modification 10, the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb may be colored in a different color from the surroundings. Furthermore, in modification 11, the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb may be colored in a different color from the surroundings. According to these configurations, the repairer can easily recognize that the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb and the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb serve as references for repairing the inclination of the nail. I can do it.

《F6-12》Variation 12:
The pachinko machine as modification 12 is different from the pachinko machine as modification 11 in the shape of the first movable piece provided in the electric accessory, and the rest is the same. In the pachinko machine of modification 12, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of modification 11 will be described below with the same names and symbols.

FIG. 322 is a front view showing a first movable piece 1611a of an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of modification 12. The electric accessory in Modification 12 is configured as a so-called electric tulip, as in Modification 11, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state), as shown by the arrow in the figure. It is configured. The first movable piece 1611a provided in this electric accessory corresponds to the first movable piece 1511a in Modification 11, and is a movable piece located on the X direction side (right side in front view).

The first movable piece 1611a includes a movable piece main body 1620 and a protruding piece 1630 protruding from the distal end portion of the movable piece main body 1620. The end of the protruding piece 1630 opposite to the movable piece main body 1620 is a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as "first flat surface") Ta.

Similar to the electric accessory of Modification 11, a pair of nails are provided around the electric accessory in Modification 12. One of the pair of nails is the first nail 1542a in the figure. The first nail 1542a is provided at the upper right of the electric accessory. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface Ta of the protruding piece 1630 provided on the first movable piece 1611a comes closest to the first nail 1542a. When the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the angle and direction of inclination of the first flat surface Ta match the direction and angle of inclination of the first nail 1542a.

Although not shown, the second movable piece of the electric accessory in Modification 12 has a shape that is line symmetrical with respect to the first movable piece 1611a with the Y-axis direction as an axis. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the second flat surface of the protruding piece provided on the second movable piece comes closest to the second nail 1542b (see FIG. 321 of Modification 11). When the electric accessory is in the open state, the inclination angle and direction of the second flat surface match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1542b.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 12 configured as above, similarly to Modification Example 11, when the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface of the first movable piece 1611a of the electric accessory Relying on Ta, the inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected. Similarly, the inclination of the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the second flat surface of the first movable piece. Therefore, the deviation in the inclination of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b located at the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or special adjustment tools. can do.

In Modification 12 as well, the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface may be colored in a different color from the surroundings. According to this configuration, the repair person can easily recognize that the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface serve as references for repairing the inclination of the nail.

《F6-13》Variation 13:
In the sixth embodiment and its variations 1, 4, and 8, the defining means for defining the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board is the edge of the ball entrance of the first starting opening. On the other hand, as a modification, the regulating means may be a part of the outer periphery of the first starting port, or may be any part of the first starting port. Further, it is not necessary to limit the portion to the first starting port, and it may be a portion related to the second starting port or other ball entrance member. Furthermore, it can also be a part included in a member other than the ball entrance member.

《F6-14》Variation 14:
In the sixth embodiment and its variations 1 to 12, nails are used to change the distribution of game balls, but it is not limited to nails, and rod-shaped devices that can change the distribution of game balls As long as it is a member, it can be made of any structure such as a projection made of resin.

《F6-15》Variation 15:
In the above-mentioned variations 10 to 12, an electric tulip, which is a normal electric accessory, was adopted as the movable means that can be switched between the closed state and the open state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the following is adopted. Specifically, a predetermined part of the mini-attacker defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Further, as the movable means, a special electric accessory such as an attacker (big prize opening) may be adopted instead of the ordinary electric accessory. Specifically, a predetermined part of the attacker defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Furthermore, as the movable means, a non-electric accessory such as a mechanical type may be employed instead of the electric accessory.

<G> Seventh embodiment:
《G1》Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained. Note that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 323 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the presentation effect by lighting up or blinking when the pachinko machine 10 performs a winning lottery, winning a winning, reaching a reach, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." In the following explanation, the case where the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25, and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also flows down the left side of the game board will be referred to as the case where the player It is sometimes expressed as ``hit''. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 324 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33a, a first starting opening 33b, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, a normal electric accessory 53, a variable winning device 54, and a prize winning device 54. A separation mechanism 120 is provided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The distribution mechanism 120 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 30. The sorting mechanism 120 alternately sorts the game balls that have arrived at the sorting mechanism 120 into two channels. Among the two channels that the distribution mechanism 120 distributes, one channel guides the game ball to the first starting port 33a, and the other channel guides the game ball to the first starting port 33b. Details of the structure of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described later.

The first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b are ball entry ports into which game balls can enter. As shown in FIG. 324, the first starting port 33a is arranged at a position where game balls distributed to the left side when viewing the game board 30 from the front can enter by the distribution mechanism 120. Further, the first starting port 33b is arranged at a position where game balls distributed to the right side when the game board 30 is viewed from the front can enter by the distribution mechanism 120. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed. Note that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b is not limited to one, but a configuration in which two or more balls are paid out may be adopted.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. As shown in FIG. 324, the second starting port 34 is arranged between the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Note that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more.

The variable winning device 54 includes a big winning opening 54a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 54b that opens and closes the big winning opening 54a. The opening/closing door 54b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 54a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b, or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). When a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 54b of the variable prize winning device 54 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter into an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is met. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54a of the variable winning device 54, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are through gates that serve as an opportunity to perform a lottery for operating the normal electric accessory 53. As shown in FIG. 324, the through gate 35a is arranged in the distribution mechanism 120. Details of the through gate 35a will be described later. The through gate 35b is located outside the distribution mechanism 120 and on the right side of the distribution mechanism 120 when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery). If the electric role release is won as a result of the internal lottery, the normal electric role accessory 53 shifts to an electric role release state in which it operates in a predetermined manner. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball which passed through the through gate 35a and the game ball which passed through the through gate 35b are not held.

The normal electric accessory 53 is an electric accessory placed below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first starting port 33b. As described above, the normal electric accessory 53 operates in a predetermined manner when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b and wins the electric accessory opening lottery that is executed as a trigger. Details of the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described later.

Here, the sorting mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be explained.

FIG. 325 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 325(a), the sorting mechanism 120 includes a sorting mechanism housing 121 made of resin. In FIG. 325, in order to show the inside of the distribution mechanism housing 121, the outer shape of the distribution mechanism housing 121 is indicated by a broken line. The distribution mechanism casing 121 is formed with an opening 122 into which game balls can flow, and an opening 123 and an opening 124 through which game balls can flow out. Furthermore, the distribution mechanism housing 121 is formed with a left flow path R1 and a right flow path R2. Further, inside the distribution mechanism casing 121, a distribution rotating section 125 and a through gate 35a are arranged. The through gate 35a is arranged in the right flow path R2.

The sorting rotating part 125 includes a rotating shaft 126 and is rotatable around the rotating shaft 126. When the sorting rotating section 125 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, the bottom of the sorting rotating section 125 comes into contact with the sorting mechanism casing 121. Therefore, the rotation range of the sorting rotation unit 125 is limited. Further, the sorting rotating section 125 includes a left side holding section 127 and a right side holding section 128 that temporarily hold the game balls that have flowed in from the opening 122.

An example of the operation of the distribution mechanism 120 will be shown using FIGS. 325(a) to 325(d). As shown in FIG. 325(a), when the distribution rotating part 125 is tilted to the left, when a game ball flows in from the opening 122, the right holding part 128 temporarily holds the game ball. . After that, as shown in FIG. 325(b), the weight of the game ball held by the right holding part 128 causes the sorting rotating part 125 to rotate clockwise, and the game balls held by the right holding part 128 are rotated clockwise. The ball is discharged toward the right channel R2. The game ball released from the right holding part 128 passes through the through gate 35a, flows through the right channel R2, and then flows out from the opening 124. The game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first starting port 33b, or enters the second starting port 34 when the normal electric accessory 53 is operating. Note that, after rotating clockwise, the distribution rotating portion 125 maintains a state tilted to the right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325(c), when the next game ball flows in from the opening 122, the sorting rotating part 125 maintains the state tilted to the right, so it is temporarily held in the left holding part 127. Hold the game ball. After that, as shown in FIG. 325(d), the weight of the game ball held by the left holding part 127 causes the sorting rotating part 125 to rotate counterclockwise, and the game balls held by the left holding part 127 are rotated counterclockwise. The ball is discharged toward the left channel R1. The game ball released from the left side holding part 127 flows out from the opening part 123 after flowing through the left side channel R1. The game ball flowing out from the opening 123 enters the first starting port 33a. Note that after rotating counterclockwise, the sorting rotating portion 125 maintains a state tilted to the left. In this way, the distribution mechanism 120 has a function of alternately distributing game balls flowing into the opening 122 into the left channel R1 and the right channel R2.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be explained.

FIG. 326 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the normal electric accessory 53. FIG. 326(a) shows the ordinary electric accessory 53 in a closed state. As described above, the normal electric accessory 53 is arranged below the sorting mechanism 120 and above the first starting port 33b. When a game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b and wins the electric role opening lottery in the electric role opening lottery executed as a trigger, the normal electric role object 53 is equipped as shown in FIG. 326(b). The movable piece 53a protrudes toward the front side of the game board 30 (hereinafter also referred to as opening).

As illustrated, the normal electric accessory 53 includes a movable piece 53a and a convex portion 53b arranged on the movable piece 53a. Further, although not shown in FIG. 326(b), the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes an ordinary electric accessory driving section 53c that drives the movable piece 53a.

As shown in FIG. 326(b), the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, there are broadly two patterns in which the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. The first pattern is a pattern in which game balls flow in from the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 and assists the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 to enter the second starting port 34. Specifically, if the movable piece 53a protrudes when the game balls sorted to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124, the movable piece 53a moves the game balls to the second starting port. 34 to assist the ball to enter the second starting port 34. The second pattern is a pattern that assists the game ball flowing down through the through gate 35b to enter the second starting port 34. Specifically, if the movable piece 53a protrudes when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down and reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the movable piece 53a moves the game ball to the first position. The ball is guided to the second starting port 34 and assists the ball to enter the second starting port 34. In addition, in the case of the second pattern, if the movable piece 53a protrudes when the game ball that has not passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the movable piece 53a It assists the ball to enter the second starting port 34.

In the case of any of the patterns described above, it is assumed that the normal electric accessory 53 maintains the open state until the game ball flows over the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34, If the normal electric accessory 53 is in the closed state before the game ball flows over the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34, the above pattern does not apply, and in that case, In this case, the game balls flowing on the movable piece 53a do not enter the second starting port 34, but flow further downstream.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 326(b), the normal electric accessory 53 which was in the open state becomes in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 326(c). That is, the protruding movable piece 53a is housed within the game board 30. The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has multiple types of opening patterns for the normal electric accessory 53, and each type of support mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 53 assists the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. Different. The support modes provided in the pachinko machine 10 are the time from the start of the electric accessory release lottery, which is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, until the lottery result is output (electronic The variable time of the accessory opening lottery), the winning probability of the electric accessory opening lottery, and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 are different. Details of the support mode included in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described later. The sorting mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessories 53 have been explained above.

The explanation returns to FIG. 324. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33a or the first starting hole 33b. When a winning lottery is held triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, the first symbol display section 37a displays a display corresponding to the lottery result on the segment display. The first symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner as a display mode until the first symbol is displayed. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. This is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting ports (the first starting ports 33a and the first starting ports 33b) by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b are held up to a maximum of four in total for the two first starting ports.

The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a game ball passing through the through gate 35a or 35b triggers an electric accessory opening lottery, the general figure unit 38 displays a lighting display, a flashing display, or a predetermined display as a display mode of the light emitting display. is displayed. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 54. This is a game in which the door 54b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, the liquid crystal display device 41 changes the symbol accordingly. Perform a variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display according to the variable display or a predetermined display. will be displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to displaying changing symbols or predetermined displays triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b, or the second starting port 34; It also displays effects during the opening/closing execution mode that will be entered if the winner is selected. The details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 327 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 327(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal pattern or a second liquid crystal pattern that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b.

As shown in FIG. 327(a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 327(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 327(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 327(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are periodically displayed in a predetermined manner. A variable display that scrolls in the direction starts. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, a game round is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol On either one of the display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a predetermined information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 327(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

FIG. 327(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a.

Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 as liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 327(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom. A variable display that scrolls from the bottom to the top is performed. As shown in FIG. 327(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the special pattern start opening 51, a variable display is started in which the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L1. Note that the mode of the liquid crystal symbols in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-mentioned mode. For example, various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols on the liquid crystal, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. be.

Here, a game round refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display, and until the stop display ends. The lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34 is presented to the player. This is one unit of notification processing. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or second starting port 34, For each game, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner on either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop the segment display. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34. After each game, the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol on the symbol display device 41, and then the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop and display the symbol row. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 327(b), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2. In the first holding display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of held games based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold games based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. A pending game time is a game time that has not yet been played, and is a special game that has been acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or second starting port 34. Regarding information, it refers to a game round in which the variable display for informing the lottery result of a winning lottery has not started. The number of pending games that can be held based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game display) corresponding to the four pending game rounds. Further, the number of pending games that can be held based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the second pending display area Ds2, pending displays corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as second pending game round displays) can be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 327(b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuating display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. A first synchronized display section Sync1 performs display, and a second synchronized display performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37. Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a stop display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display. 1 synchronization display section Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display. The section Sync2 displays a lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first pending display area Ds1, the second pending display area Ds2, the first synchronized display section Sync1, and the second synchronized display section Sync2. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays.

《G2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b), a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, Various detection sensors provided at various ball entrances and through gates such as the variable winning device 54 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) and second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a normal electric accessory drive section 53c that opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 53, a variable winning drive section 54c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54, and a main display section. 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 54c so that the opening/closing door 54b is opened and closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric accessory is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the ordinary electric accessory drive unit 53c so that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is released. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs round display on the main display section 45. Display control of section 39 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when it is specified that a game ball enters the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first starting opening 33 ( When it is specified that a game ball enters the first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a second starting port When the entry of game balls into the mouth 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are being displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time when the 1st liquid crystal pattern or the 2nd liquid crystal pattern is stopped and displayed is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 329 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory opening lottery to decide whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 53.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry. and each value of the fluctuation type counter CS are stored in time series in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), the timing of the ball entering is determined by the updated value. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. be remembered.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is ) or when the game balls enter the second starting port 34, the game balls move to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the acquired order. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), the updated value is determined at the timing of the ball entering. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. Ru.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is the number one in the pending information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). 1 holding area Ra, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 327(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly, and at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e. Thereafter, a lottery is held in the electric accessory execution area 64e to determine whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state using the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the normal electric accessory 53 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the normal electric accessory 53 is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 moves to the first holding area of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). A win/fail table for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in Ra, and a matching table for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The validity table and the validity table are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

FIG. 330 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. FIG. 330(a) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 330(b) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 330(a), four values from 0 to 3 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 330(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 331 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. FIG. 331(a) shows the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 331(b) shows the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 331(a), four values from 0 to 3 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 331(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

A "small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 54 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following four aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the door of the variable prize winning device is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode for winning lottery after opening/closing execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)
(4) Support mode after opening/closing execution mode ends

As a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, multiple types of opening/closing patterns (hereinafter also simply referred to as "opening/closing patterns") of the opening/closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 are provided for each type of jackpot. One type of opening/closing pattern may be set correspondingly. In this embodiment, one type of opening/closing pattern is set for each type of jackpot, and the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing door 54b differs for each opening/closing pattern. The opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 54b in this embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of game balls entering the variable winning device 54 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the winnings are high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 54b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 54b reaches 7. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 54b is set to continue opening once in the opening/closing execution mode until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 54b reaches 7. I can do it.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 54b and the opening limit number for one opening are based on the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the winnings in the high-frequency winning mode are higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 54b is arbitrary. Specifically, it is only necessary that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening time limit for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 54 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. In this embodiment, a low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and a high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 332 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 332(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 332(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), and This allocation table is referred to when a winning lottery is drawn based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 332(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). As jackpot types based on the game ball entering the game ball, 16R probability variable jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot A, and 8R normal jackpot A are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 4" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot B, "5 to 19" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot A, and " 20 to 39'' is set to correspond to 8R normal jackpot A.

In 16R probability variable jackpot B, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode. In addition, for 16R Probable Variable Jackpot B, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes high probability mode, the support mode becomes high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot is won. . Note that details of the support mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained later.

In 8R definite variable jackpot A, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode. In addition, for 8R Probable Variable Jackpot A, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes high probability mode, the support mode becomes high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode A continues until the next jackpot is won. .

In 8R normal jackpot A, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, in 8R normal jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes high probability mode, the support mode becomes high frequency support mode A, and 100 games have been played since the high frequency support mode A started. The high-frequency support mode A is executed until 100 games are completed, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode A to the low-frequency support mode.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 16R certain variable jackpot B, 8R certain variable jackpot B, and 8R normal jackpot B are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 9" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot B, "10 to 19" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot B, and " 20 to 39'' is set to correspond to 8R normal jackpot B.

Since the 16R probability variable jackpot B was explained in the allocation table for the first starting opening in FIG. 332, the explanation here will be omitted.

In 8R definite variable jackpot B, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode. In addition, for 8R Probable Variable Jackpot B, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes high probability mode, the support mode becomes high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot is won. .

In 8R normal jackpot B, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode. In addition, in 8R normal jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and 100 games have been played since the start of the high frequency support mode B. The high-frequency support mode B is executed until 100 games are completed, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode B to the low-frequency support mode.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, the distribution of the jackpot type is as follows: There is a difference between a case where a jackpot is achieved based on the ball entering the game ball and a case where a jackpot is achieved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and there is also a clear difference in the advantage for the player. It is provided.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the power lottery and support mode will be explained.

FIG. 333 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 333(a) shows a win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 333(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is an electric accessory opening lottery. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) during the low frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. . When winning the electric role opening lottery, the opening/closing operation of the normal electric role model 53 is executed. The manner in which the normal electric accessory 53 opens and closes when the low-frequency support mode is executed will be described later.

FIG. 333(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B). As shown in FIG. 333(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gates 35 (through gates 35a, through gates 35b) during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. . When winning the electric role opening lottery, the opening/closing operation of the normal electric role model 53 is executed. The manner of the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessory 53 when executing the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B will be described later.

As explained above, it is easier to win the electric role opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B) than in the low-frequency support mode, according to the winning/failure table for the electric role-playing lottery. It is set to be.

Next, details of the support mode that the pachinko machine 10 can execute will be explained.

FIG. 334 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the types of support modes that the pachinko machine 10 can execute. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 can execute three types of support modes: a low-frequency support mode, a high-frequency support mode A, and a high-frequency support mode B.

[Infrequent support mode]
As shown in FIG. 334, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery is 1/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal symbol) in the electric role opening lottery is 10 seconds. That is, the time from when the electric winning lottery is started and when the normal symbols start changing until the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result is 10 seconds. In addition, in the case of winning the electric winning lottery, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts protruding and the game ball becomes able to flow on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 (the time during which the movable piece 53a maintains the state protruding from the game board 30) in the case of winning the electric prize opening lottery is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

In the low-frequency support mode, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

FIG. 335 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how game balls are distributed during execution of the low frequency support mode. In addition, in FIG. 335, when the normal electric accessory 53 is represented by a broken line, it is shown in a closed state, and when represented by a solid line, it is shown in an open state.

When a player hits the game ball to the left and causes the ball to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the game ball that enters the opening 122 is deflected to the left side by the distribution rotating part 125. It is alternately distributed into the path R1 and the right side flow path R2. As shown in FIG. 335(a), the game balls sorted to the left channel R1 flow out from the opening 123 and enter the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 335(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the normal electric role object 53 is in an open state. The probability of that happening is low. Therefore, there is a high probability that the normal electric accessory 53 is closed when the game ball flows out from the opening 124, and the game ball flows out from the opening 124 and enters the first starting port 33b. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, in most cases, game balls that enter the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, and the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (the first A game round is executed when a game ball enters the starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, even if you win in the electric winning lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, the fluctuation time of the electric winning lottery is 10 seconds. , and since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to when it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is about 0.3 seconds, the game ball that passed through the through gate 35a that triggered the winning. However, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the normal electric accessory 53 which is opened due to the winning. In addition, the game ball that reaches the normal electric accessory 53 at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in an open state may enter the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode, if you hit right and let the game ball pass through the through gate 35b, the execution is triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 35b. The probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the probability that the normal electric role model 53 will be in the open state is low. Therefore, there is a low possibility that the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b will enter the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b, and the second starting port 34, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b will flow down as it is. The ball enters the out port 43. Suppose that in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is hit to the right and the game ball passes through the through gate 35b, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. Even if you win, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 in the low-frequency support mode is 3 seconds, and the game ball that passes through the through gate 35b and reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is the second Since the time required to reach the starting port 34 is approximately 5.0 seconds, the electric accessory 53 normally reaches the second starting port 34 before the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a reaches the second starting port 34. When the game ball is closed, the game ball that triggered the winning of the electric hand opening lottery does not enter the second starting port 34.

[High frequency support mode A]
As shown in FIG. 334, in the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal symbol) in the electric role opening lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, the time from when the electric hand opening lottery is started and when the normal symbols start changing to when the regular symbols are stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result is 0.05 seconds. In addition, as described above, when winning the electric hand opening lottery, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts protruding and the game ball becomes able to flow on the upper surface is 0. It is 1 second. The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 when winning the electric role opening lottery is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

In high-frequency support mode A, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a mode in which game balls are distributed when high-frequency support mode A is executed. In addition, in FIG. 336, when the normal electric accessory 53 is represented by a broken line, it is shown in a closed state, and when represented by a solid line, it is shown in an open state.

When a player hits the ball left-handed and distributes the game ball so that it enters the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122), the game ball that enters the opening 122 is moved to the left side by the distribution rotation unit 125. The flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2 are alternately distributed. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the game balls sorted into the left channel R1 flow out from the opening 123 and enter the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 336(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is high (winning probability: 231/233), and the normal electric role item 53 is opened. There is a high probability that this will occur. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and wins the electric role release lottery, the normal electric role object 53 is set to be in the open state at the time the game ball flows out from the opening 124. In order to achieve this, the fluctuation time of the power lottery opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode A is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, in the case of winning the electric winning lottery, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts protruding and the game ball becomes able to flow on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. In other words, from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the electric role that is executed triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 35a. From the time when the variable time of the open lottery (0.05 seconds) and the variable time ends in the case of winning the electric role open lottery, until the movable piece 53a starts protruding and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface. Since the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, if you win the electric role release lottery, the ordinary electric role object 53 will be released at the time the game ball flows out from the opening 124. is open, and the game balls flowing out from the opening 124 normally flow on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the electric accessory 53.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to enable the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 to flow on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34, the normal electric role in the high frequency support mode A is The opening time of object 53 is set to 3.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the average value of the time it takes for a game ball that flows out of the opening 124 and reaches the movable piece 53a to circulate on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34 is It is 2.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 flows on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting port 34. In this way, in the high-frequency support mode A, compared to the low-frequency support mode, when a game ball is distributed to the right flow path R2, the game ball is normally started at the second start with the assistance of the electric accessory 53. There is a high probability that the ball will land in the opening 34. In addition, in high-frequency support mode A, the opening time of the normal electric accessories 53 is 3 seconds, but since it closes when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is distributed to the right flow path R2. When the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 immediately after the normal electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first starting port 33b. Further, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, if another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball is normally closed by the electric accessory 53. Therefore, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode A, not all of the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the second starting port 34. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment allows a game ball to pass through the through gate 35b when the player hits it right and passes the game ball through the through gate 35b. It is configured such that the game ball that reaches the normal electric accessory 53 does not enter the second starting port 34. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the through gate 35b and reaches the normal electric accessory 53 flows on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34. The average time it takes to do so is 5.0 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode A is set to 3.0 seconds. Therefore, even if the game ball that passes through the through gate 35b reaches the open normal electric accessory 53, the normal electric accessory 53 closes while circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, so the game ball The ball does not enter the second starting port 34 because it is normally ejected from the electric accessory 53 and flows further downward before reaching the second starting port 34. Therefore, in the case of high-frequency support mode A, the distribution mode of the game balls that enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 is the distribution mode of the game balls that maximizes the player's profit.

[High frequency support mode B]
As shown in FIG. 334, in the high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal symbol) in the electric role opening lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, the time from when the electric hand opening lottery is started and when the normal symbols start changing to when the regular symbols are stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result is 0.05 seconds. In addition, as described above, when winning the electric hand opening lottery, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts protruding and the game ball becomes able to flow on the upper surface is 0. It is 1 second. The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 when winning the electric role opening lottery is 6 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

In high-frequency support mode B, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit right and pass through the through gate 35b.

FIG. 337 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the manner in which game balls are distributed when high-frequency support mode B is executed. In addition, in FIG. 337, when the normal electric accessory 53 is represented by a broken line, it is shown in a closed state, and when represented by a solid line, it is shown in an open state.

When the player hits the ball right and distributes the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b, an electric winning lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. In high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b is high (winning probability: 231/233), and the normal electric role item 53 is opened. There is a high probability that this will occur. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and wins the electric role release lottery, when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric role object 53, the normal electric role In order to keep the accessory 53 in an open state, the fluctuation time of the electric prize opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode B is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, in the case of winning the electric winning lottery, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts protruding and the game ball becomes able to flow on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. In other words, from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the electric role that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the through gate 35b. From the time when the variable time of the open lottery (0.05 seconds) and the variable time ends in the case of winning the electric role open lottery, until the movable piece 53a starts protruding and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface. Since the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, if the electric role release lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric role object 53. At the time when the normal electric accessory 53 is opened, the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 flows on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to enable the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the normal electric accessory 53 to flow on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34, The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode B is set to 6.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the time it takes for the game ball that passes through the through gate 35b and reaches the normal electric accessory 53 to circulate on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34 is The average value is 5.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 flows on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting port 34. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode B, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 is 6.0 seconds, but it closes when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, so the ball passes through the through gate 35b. When the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 immediately after the normal electric accessory 53 closes, the game ball flows down as it is. That is, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34. Further, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, if another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball is normally closed by the electric accessory 53. Therefore, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode B, not all of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b enter the second starting port 34.

In this manner, in the high-frequency support B, when the player hits the ball right-handed, the game ball can enter only into the second starting port 34 with a high probability. As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port and the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. The expected value of the privilege awarded when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is higher than the expected value of the privilege awarded when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. In the high-frequency support mode B, if the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 Since the game ball enters the ball alternately between the two, the expectation for the benefits that will be given when winning the jackpot is higher than when the game ball enters only into the second starting hole 34 with a high probability of hitting the ball to the right. The value will be lower. Therefore, in the case of high-frequency support mode B, the distribution mode of the game ball that is hit right and passes through the through gate 35b is the distribution mode of the game ball that maximizes the player's profit.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game balls are distributed so that the player's profit is maximized, the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b)), a state in which game balls enter only into the first starting port 33 (state in low-frequency support mode), a state in which game balls enter alternately into the first starting port 33 and second starting port 34 (state in high-frequency support mode A). ), a state in which the game ball enters only the second starting port 34 (high-frequency support mode B state), three states can be created.

<<G3>> Game Flow Next, the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 338 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in step F101, at the time when the player starts playing the game, the lottery mode in the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. At this time, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect that prompts the player to hit the game ball to the left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the game balls that enter the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b in most cases, and the game balls enter the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b. A game round is executed when a game ball enters the opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). The state of step F101 is executed until a jackpot is won in a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (F102: NO ).

In the state of step F101, if you win a jackpot in a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (F102: YES), you will win a jackpot. A round game according to the type is executed (F103). For example, if the jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot B, the variable winning device 54 executes the opening/closing operation and a round game for 16 rounds is executed, and if the jackpot type is 8R probability variable jackpot A and 8R normal jackpot A, The variable winning device 54 performs opening and closing operations, and a round game for eight rounds is executed.

After the round game is finished, the game changes to a different game state depending on the jackpot type of the jackpot won earlier. If the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process advances to step F111. That is, in the case of a jackpot type that shifts to the high-frequency support mode B state after the end of the round game, the process advances to step F111.

In step F104, if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (F104: NO), the process proceeds to step F105. That is, this is a case of a jackpot type that shifts to the high-frequency support mode A state after the end of the round game, and specifically, the game is played to the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). If 8R Probable Variable Jackpot A or 8R Normal Jackpot A is won in the game run triggered by the ball entering the game, the process proceeds to step F105.

In step F105, if the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109, and if it is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, if it is a normal jackpot (for example, 8R normal jackpot A), (F105: NO ), the process proceeds to step F106.

In step F106, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to hit the game ball to the left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode A, game balls entering the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately placed in the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, game rounds are executed in the order in which the game balls enter each starting hole, with the entry of the game balls as a trigger. Therefore, in a state where the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34 alternately, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is triggered. A game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is alternately executed.

In the high-frequency support mode A in the state of step F106, a game round triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or second starting port 34 is activated. The process continues until the game is played 100 times (F107:N0→F108:NO), and if the jackpot has not been won by the time the game is played 100 times (F107:NO→F108:YES), the process goes to step F101. Return to the state shown. That is, the state returns to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F106, a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or second starting port 34 is executed 100 times. If the jackpot is won by the time the player hits the jackpot (F107: YES), the process advances to step F103, and a round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

In step F105, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109.

In step F109, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to hit the game ball to the left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

The state in step F109 is high frequency support mode A. As described above, in the high-frequency support mode A, game balls entering the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately placed in the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, game rounds are executed in the order in which the game balls enter each starting hole, with the entry of the game balls as a trigger. Therefore, in a state where the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34 alternately, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is triggered. A game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is alternately executed.

Since the state of step F109 is a high probability mode, the state of high frequency support mode A continues until a jackpot is won in the game round to be executed (F110: NO).

In the state of step F109, if a jackpot is won in a game round triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or second starting port 34; (F110: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

In step F104, if the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process advances to step F111. Specifically, when winning a 16R probability-variable jackpot B in a game run triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), or 2 When a 16R probability variable jackpot B, 8R probability variable jackpot B, or 8R normal jackpot B is won in a game round executed with the entry of a game ball into the starting hole 34 as an opportunity, the process advances to step F111.

In step F111, if the jackpot type is probability variable jackpot B (F111: YES), the process advances to step F112.

In step F112, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to hit the game ball to the right and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

In the state of high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b enters the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the normal electric accessory 53. Therefore, a game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed.

Since step F112 is a high probability mode, the state of high frequency support mode B continues until a jackpot is won in the executed game round (F113: NO).

In the state of step F112, if a jackpot is won in the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 (F113: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round corresponding to the type of jackpot is won. The game is executed.

In step F111, if the jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot B (F111: NO), the process proceeds to step F114.

In step F114, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to hit the game ball to the left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b enters the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the normal electric accessory 53. Therefore, a game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed.

The high-frequency support mode B in the state of step F114 continues until the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed 100 times (F115: NO → F116: NO), and the game If the jackpot has not been won by the time the round is executed 100 times (F115: NO→F116: YES), the process returns to the state shown in step F101. That is, the state returns to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F114, if a jackpot is won before the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed 100 times (F115: YES), the process proceeds to step F103. Then, a round game is executed according to the type of jackpot.

The flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 has been explained above. As explained in the flow of the game, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33a, first starting port 33a, A state in which game balls enter only the first starting port 33b) (low-frequency support mode state), a state in which game balls enter the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 alternately (high-frequency support mode) The game progresses while shifting between three states: state A), and a state in which game balls enter only the second starting port 34 (state in high-frequency support mode B).

Here, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the effects produced by the features will be explained by comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. If a player wins a winning lottery (including a jackpot win and, if a small win is set, a small win is also included) in a winning lottery that was previously executed with the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot. The expected value of the benefit (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) that will be given to the player is the first benefit expectation value, and the winning lottery (jackpot winning, jackpot winning, In addition, the expected value of a benefit (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) that will be given in the event of a small winning (including a small winning if a small winning is set) is set as a second benefit expected value. In addition, the expected value of the benefit that will be awarded if you win in the normal time is the expected value of the benefit in the normal time, and the expected value of the benefit that will be awarded if you win in the high frequency support mode is the expected value of the benefit in the high support mode. shall be.

Conventionally, there have been pachinko machines (hereinafter also referred to as "conventional pachinko machines") that are equipped with a sorting mechanism that distributes game balls to a first starting port and a second starting port. Conventionally, in the normal state at the beginning of the game (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a pachinko machine circulates the game ball so that it reaches the distribution mechanism and passes through the first starting hole and the second starting hole. Insert game balls alternately into the mouth and mouth. When the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessories) operate frequently, allowing game balls to enter the second starting port with a high probability without going through the sorting means. let

In conventional pachinko machines, if the expected value of benefits at high support times is higher than the expected value of benefits at normal times, and if an attempt is made to increase the difference, it is necessary to increase the expected value of benefits at high support times. It is necessary to increase the expected value of the bonus, but if the expected value of the second bonus is increased, the expected value of the bonus in normal times also increases (in normal conditions, the game ball enters the first starting port and the second starting port). (This is because the winning lottery is executed when the ball is hit.) Furthermore, even if the first benefit expected value is decreased, the normal benefit expected value is the average of the first benefit expected value and the second benefit expected value, so the effect of reducing the first benefit expected value is It becomes smaller.

Furthermore, if there are restrictions on the amount of benefits that can be granted per unit time, and the expected value of benefits during normal times is relatively large, the expected value of benefits during high support times must be adjusted to within the range of the regulations. needs to be made smaller. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the expected benefit value in normal times and the expected benefit value in high support times. In other words, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profits obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state among the gaming states excluding the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the player's expectations are increased when transitioning from the normal state (normal gaming state, state with the lowest expected value of benefits) to the high-frequency support mode (the state with the best gaming state, the state with the highest expected value of benefits). cannot be triggered.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment circulates the game balls so that they reach the distribution mechanism 120, but the game balls enter only into the first starting port 33a with a high probability. By setting the first benefit expectation value low, the normal benefit expectation value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of high-frequency support mode B, when the player hits the right ball, the game ball enters only the second starting port 34 with a high probability, so the second benefit expected value can be set high. As a result, the expected value of benefits at high support times in high frequency support B can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a wide range of profits for the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state among the gaming states excluding the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, in the case of high-frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 34. The expected benefit value during high support (when in high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected benefit value during normal time and the expected benefit value during high support (when in high frequency support mode B), and the normal state → high frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game from Mode A to High Frequency Support Mode B, the expected value of the bonus to be awarded increases step by step, and among the game states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, A wide range of profits can be provided to the player between the gaming state and the best gaming state.

Furthermore, if there are restrictions on the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time, by setting the first expected value of benefits low, the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be reduced. Adjustment is possible, and it becomes possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first benefit expected value and the second benefit expected value is increased. In other words, out of the gaming states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to provide profits per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profits obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of special benefits within the regulatory range.

The features of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the effects produced by the features will be compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) equipped with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to a first starting port and a second starting port. As explained above, this effect is not only effective for conventional pachinko machines as exemplified above, but also for pachinko machines that are equipped with two or more ball entry sections that trigger different types of drawings to be executed. It has that effect.

<<G4>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sg0101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. After that, the process advances to step Sg0102.

In step Sg0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0103.

In step Sg0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sg0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in normal processing (FIG. 345), which will be described later.

In step Sg0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sg0104 will be described later. After executing step Sg0104, the process advances to step Sg0105.

In step Sg0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). Details of the through ball entry process in step Sg0105 will be described later. After executing step Sg0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 339: Sg0104).

FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sg0201, the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 detects whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (starting prize winning). Judgment depends on the condition. In step Sg0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sg0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0203.

In step Sg0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). I do. After that, the process advances to step Sg0204.

In step Sg0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting pending number RaN indicates the number of balls being held based on balls entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0209.

In step Sg0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (Sg0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0205, and the game ball It is determined whether the ball has entered the second starting port 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sg0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sg0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sg0207. On the other hand, in step Sg0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sg0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sg0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sg0208.

In step Sg0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting reservation number RbN indicates the number of reservations based on winnings to the second starting opening 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0209.

In step Sg0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sg0204 or step Sg0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sg0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sg0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting hole is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sg0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sg0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sg0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sg0212.

In step Sg0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sg0103 (FIG. 339), and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 345) is It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 was added in step Sg0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sg0210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step Sg0103 (FIG. 339) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sg0210. After executing step Sg0212, the process advances to step Sg0213.

In step Sg0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (reservation information). This is a process in which determinations are made of the type of game, the presence or absence of a reach, the variation time of game rounds, etc., before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sg0213, the process advances to step Sg0214.

In step Sg0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS. ) as a pending command.

The hold command is based on the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or second starting port 34, and based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b), the sound emission control device 90 controls the symbol display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sg0214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 340: Sg0213).

FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As mentioned above, the preliminary judgment process is based on the pending information, and the pending information is used to determine whether or not the winning lottery is correct, to determine the type of jackpot, to determine whether reach has occurred, to determine the fluctuating time of the game, etc. This is a process executed before becoming a target of the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sg0301, jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sg0301, the process advances to step Sg0302.

In step Sg0302, variation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process for determining the variation time of the game. Details of the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step Sg0302, the primary determination process is ended.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be explained. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the advance determination process (FIG. 341: Sg0301).

FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step Sg0401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 340) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0402, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. By determining this, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step Sg0402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sg0402: YES), the process advances to step Sg0403, and the winning lottery is stored in the winning/losing table. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0405, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sg0402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sg0402: NO), the process advances to step Sg0404, and the high probability mode is selected. As a result of referring to the winning/failure table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0405, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sg0405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sg0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0406, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 that is the target of this distribution is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). refers to the distribution table for the first starting port, and if it is obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, refers to the distribution table for the second starting port. After executing step Sg0407, the process advances to step Sg0408.

In step Sg0408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sg0408, if it is determined that it corresponds to a probability variable jackpot (Sg0408: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0409, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg0408 that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sg0408: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0410, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sg0405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sg0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0411, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. Read the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0412, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sg0413, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sg0413: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0414, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sg0413, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach occurrence is not supported (Sg0413: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Fluctuating time information acquisition process>
Next, the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be explained. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 341: Sg0302).

FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating time information acquisition process. In step Sg0501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port in the starting port entry process (FIG. 340) is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0502.

In step Sg0502, it is determined whether the winning lottery for the current game round is a winning result. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a jackpot (Sg0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0503.

In step Sg0503, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step Sg0503, the process advances to step Sg0507.

In step Sg0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In step Sg0502, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot (step Sg0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0504, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs. In step Sg0504, if it is determined that reach occurs (Sg0504: YES), the process advances to step Sg0505.

In step Sg0505, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0507, and after storing the obtained variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

In step Sg0504, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Sg0504: NO), the process advances to step Sg0506, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is read. With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0507, and after storing the obtained variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the change time. There is. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referenced depends on the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN when determining the varying time of the relevant game round. are different.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the change time. However, for example, the larger the value of the total pending number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 339: Step Sg0105).

FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sg0601, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). In step Sg0601, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (Sg0601: YES), the process advances to step Sg0602. On the other hand, in step Sg0601, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (Sg0601: NO), the main through ball entry process is ended.

In step Sg0602, it is determined whether the electric utility processing execution flag is ON. The electric role processing execution flag turns ON when an electric role release lottery is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), and the electric role release lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a loss, it is turned off after setting a loss display, and when the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is a win, a win display is set and the normal electric role object 53 is released which is executed in conjunction with a win. It is turned off after the processing is completed. Hereinafter, the electric winning lottery that is triggered by a game ball passing through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), the display of the lottery results (win, miss) executed in conjunction with the lottery, and, The opening process of the normal electric accessory 53 that is executed in the case of a win is also called the electric accessory process. In addition, in this embodiment, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) does not suspend passage of the game ball. That is, during the period when the electric role processing triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is being executed, a new through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed. ), even if a game ball enters the ball, the processing for electric work triggered by the ball entering is not executed.

If it is determined in step Sg0602 that the electric utility processing execution flag is not ON (Sg0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0603 and the electric utility processing execution flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg0603, the process advances to step Sg0604. On the other hand, in step Sg0602, if it is determined that the electric processing processing execution flag is ON (Sg0602: YES), the main through ball entry processing is ended.

In step Sg0604, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Sg0103 (FIG. 339) is moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sg0701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sg0702.

In step Sg0702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sg0703.

In step Sg0703, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sg0702, the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sg0703, the process advances to step Sg0704.

In step Sg0704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0705.

In step Sg0705, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sg0706. In step Sg0706, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sg0706, the process advances to step Sg0707.

In step Sg0707, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0708.

In step Sg0708, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. In the electric utility support process, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sg0709.

In step Sg0709, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sg0703). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sg0709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sg0709: NO), in step Sg0710 and step Sg0711, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sg0710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sg0711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg0709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (Sg0709: YES), the process returns to step Sg0703 and each process from step Sg0703 to step Sg0708 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sg0703 to step Sg0708 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 345: Sg0706).

FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sg0801, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing execution mode and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON in step Sg0801 (Sg0801: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the main game round control is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sg0802. Finish the process. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the special figure starting port 51 or not. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg0801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sg0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0802.

In step Sg0802, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when a fluctuating display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

In step Sg0802, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (Sg0802: NO), the process proceeds to steps Sg0803 to Sg0805 for starting the game round. In step Sg0803, it is determined whether the number of reservations CRN is "0". The case where the number of retained items CRN is "0" means that the number of retained items is "0" for both the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) and the second starting port 34. means. Therefore, in step Sg0803, if it is determined that the pending number CRN is "0" (Sg0803: YES), the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg0803 that the number of reservations CRN is not "0" (Sg0803: NO), the process advances to step Sg0804.

In step Sg0804, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process advances to step Sg0805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sg0805, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sg0805, the present game round control process is ended.

In step Sg0802, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (Sg0802: YES), processing for progressing the game round in steps Sg0806 to Sg0815 is executed.

In step Sg0806, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sg0806, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 349) described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sg0806, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sg0806: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0807, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step Sg0807, the game time control process ends.

In step Sg0806, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sg0806: YES), the process advances to step Sg0808 and a fluctuation end process is executed. The variation end process changes the symbol display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 348) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. Control display. After executing step Sg0808, the process advances to step Sg0809.

In step Sg0809, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags (in this embodiment, 16R probability variable jackpot B flag, 8R probability variable jackpot B flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag A, 8R normal jackpot A flag) is ON. . In step Sg0809, if any jackpot flag is ON (Sg0809: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0810.

In step Sg0810, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sg0809, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sg0809: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0811.

In step Sg0811, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. After executing step Sg0811, the process advances to step Sg0812.

In step Sg0812, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. In step Sg0812, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode (Sg0812: NO), the game round control process is directly ended.

In step Sg0812, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sg0812: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0813, and it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC is 0 or not.

In step Sg0813, if it is determined that the value of the number of games counter PNC is not 0 (Sg0813: NO), the game number control process is immediately terminated. If it is determined in step Sg0813 that the value of the number of games counter PNC is 0 (Sg0813: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0814 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg0815, and a low frequency support mode command is set. The low frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process. The audio emission control device 90 that has received the low-frequency support mode command recognizes that the support mode has shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and executes an effect corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sg0815, the game time control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 346: Sg0804) of the game time control process.

FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step Sg0901, it is determined whether the holding area to which the data setting process is to be performed is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 329) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 329). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sg0901, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step Sg0901, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the first holding area Ra (step Sg0901: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area in steps Sg0902 to Sg0907 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sg0901, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sg0901: NO ), executes data setting processing for the second holding area in steps Sg0908 to Sg0913.

In step Sg0902, after subtracting 1 from the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sg0903, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sg0904. In step Sg0904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0905.

In step Sg0905, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sg0905, the process advances to step Sg0906.

In step Sg0906, when the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg0907.

In step Sg0907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sg0907 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in normal processing (FIG. 345). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sg0901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sg0901: NO), Proceed to step Sg0908.

In step Sg0908, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by one. After that, the process advances to step Sg0909. In step Sg0909, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sg0910, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sg0911.

In step Sg0911, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sg0911, the process advances to step Sg0912.

In step Sg0912, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process advances to step Sg0913.

In step Sg0913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sg0913 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in normal processing (FIG. 345). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 346: Sg0805) of the game time control process.

FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sg1001, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , and then it will be turned off if you win a regular jackpot. In step Sg1001, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sg1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1002.

In step Sg1002, a validity determination is made with reference to the high probability mode validity table. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 330(b). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sg1004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1001 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sg1001: NO), the process advances to step Sg1003.

In step Sg1003, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 330(a). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sg1004.

In step Sg1004, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sg1002 or step Sg1003 is a jackpot win. In step Sg1004, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot win (Sg1004: YES), in steps Sg1005 to Sg1012, processing for setting the gaming result in the case of a jackpot win and setting a stop result are performed. Execute the process.

In step Sg1005, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sg1005, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sg1005: NO), proceed to step Sg1006, and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 332(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot B, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot A, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot A. Determine if there are any.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1005 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sg1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1007, and the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 332(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot B, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot B, or the 8R normal jackpot B. do. After executing the process of step Sg1006 or step Sg1007. The process advances to step Sg1008.

In step Sg1008, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Sg1008, if it is determined that the game result is a variable jackpot (Sg1008: YES), the process advances to step Sg1009.

In step Sg1009, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a variable probability jackpot means that in the current game round in which a probability variable jackpot will be won, either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1009, the process advances to step Sg1010.

In step Sg1010, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R certain variable jackpot B, turn on the 16R certain variable jackpot B flag, if it is an 8R certain variable jackpot B, turn on the 8R certain variable jackpot B flag, and if it is an 8R certain variable jackpot A. Turn on the 8R sure-change jackpot A flag. After that, the process advances to step Sg1016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1008 that the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is not a probability variable jackpot (Sg1008: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to Sg1011.

In step Sg1011, a stop result setting process for normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1011, the process advances to step Sg1012.

In step Sg1012, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is 8R normal jackpot B, the 8R normal jackpot B flag is turned ON, and when it is 8R normal jackpot A, the 8R normal jackpot A flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sg1016.

In step Sg1004, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sg1002 or step Sg1003 is not a jackpot (Sg1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1013, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the same as the value set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not it is correct.

In step Sg1013, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the game round (Sg1013: YES), the process advances to step Sg1014.

In step Sg1014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round, which is the stop result for reach, to end the variable display. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1014, the process advances to step Sg1016.

In step Sg1013, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (Sg1013: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1015.

In step Sg1015, a stop result setting process for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for a miss is to end the variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a miss. This is the process to set the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1015, the process advances to step Sg1016.

In step Sg1016, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg1016, the process advances to step Sg1017.

In step Sg1017, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sg1017, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sg1017: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1018, and a first variation command is set. The first variation command indicates that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). In addition to the information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred, it also includes information on the fluctuation time set in step Sg1016.

On the other hand, in step Sg1017, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sg1017: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1019, and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on winnings in the second start opening 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. information and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sg1016 are included. After executing step Sg1018 or step Sg1019, the process advances to step Sg1020.

In step Sg1020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of a reach. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot A information, 8R normal jackpot B information, 8R normal jackpot A information, or , contains information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on out-of-reach results.

The variation command and type command set in steps Sg1018 to Sg1020 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sg1020, the process advances to step Sg1021.

In step Sg1021, the result display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying variable symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started; When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is specified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sg1021, this variation start process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 348: Sg1016).

FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sg1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sg1102.

In step Sg1102, it is determined whether the winning lottery related to the current game round is a winning result. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sg1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1103.

In step Sg1103, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg1107, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sg1102, if it is determined that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a win (Sg1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1104, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (Sg1104) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game round has not been won in step Sg1102 above, in step Sg1104, a reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Sg1104: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sg1105. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sg1105, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg1107, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sg1104, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the current game round (Sg1104: NO), proceed to step Sg1106, and refer to the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg1107, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table shows that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the longer the change time becomes. It is set to be short. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referenced depends on the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN when determining the varying time of the relevant game round. are different.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the variation time. However, for example, the larger the value of the total pending number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 345: Sg0707).

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sg1201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sg1201, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (Sg1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1202, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step Sg1202 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sg1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sg1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sg1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1204, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game round that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step Sg1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sg1204: YES), the process advances to step Sg1205. On the other hand, in step Sg1204, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sg1204: NO), the gaming state transition process is directly ended.

In step Sg1205, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. The high probability mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the lottery mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to a low probability mode. After executing step Sg1205, the process advances to step Sg1206.

In step Sg1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the support mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sg1206, the process advances to step Sg1207.

In step Sg1207, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to winning the jackpot. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process. After executing step Sg1207, the process advances to step Sg1208.

In step Sg1208, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b in a round game is set. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing door 54b in one round game is 30 seconds. However, even before 30 seconds have elapsed after opening the opening/closing door 54b, if nine game balls enter the big prize opening 54a, the opening/closing door 54b is closed. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b is set as an opening/closing scenario. In the opening/closing scenario setting process, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. For example, if it is a 16R variable jackpot B, the opening pattern of the door 54b for 16 rounds is set as the opening/closing scenario, and if it is an 8R variable jackpot A, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b for 8 rounds is set as the opening/closing scenario. is set to . After executing step Sg1208, the process advances to step Sg1209.

In step Sg1209, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special gaming state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the opening timer counter area as the opening time. After executing step Sg1209, the process advances to step Sg1210.

In step Sg1210, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of jackpot, and information on the jackpot that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sg1210, the process advances to step Sg1211 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sg1203, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Sg1203: YES), the process advances to step Sg1212.

In step Sg1212, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the opening timer counter area T set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sg1212 that the opening period has ended (Sg1212: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1213 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sg1214.

In step Sg1214, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step Sg1214, the process advances to step Sg1215.

In step Sg1215, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sg1202, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sg1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1216, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sg1216, the process advances to step Sg1217.

In step Sg1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended (Sg1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1218. On the other hand, in step Sg1217, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sg1217: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sg1218, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step Sg1219.

In step Sg1219, round display end processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sg1219, the process advances to step Sg1220.

In step Sg1220, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the ending timer counter as the ending time. After executing step Sg1220, the process advances to step Sg1221.

In step Sg1221, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step 40703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). The audio emission control device 90 starts a production corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sg1221, the process advances to step Sg1222.

In step Sg1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sg1201, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sg1201: YES), the process advances to step Sg1223.

In step Sg1223, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sg1220), it is determined whether the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sg1223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0" (Sg1223: YES), the process advances to step Sg1224.

In step Sg1224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sg1225, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sg1225, the process advances to step Sg1226 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg1227, and an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sg1223, if it is determined that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is not "0" (Sg1223: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 350: Sg1216).

FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sg1301, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 54b is open. If it is determined in step Sg1301 that the door 54b is not open (Sg1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1302.

In step Sg1302, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 54b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process (FIG. 350: Sg1208) is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 54b. If it is determined in step Sg1302 that the condition for opening the door 54b is satisfied (Sg1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1303.

In step Sg1303, the opening/closing door 54b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg1304.

In step Sg1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 54b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 345: Sg0703) of the normal processing. After executing step Sg1304, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sg1302, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 54b is not satisfied (Sg1302: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sg1301 that the door 54b is open (Sg1301: YES), the process advances to step Sg1305.

In step Sg1305, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 54b are satisfied. The closing condition for the opening/closing door 54b is that the continuous open time of the opening/closing door 54b set in the opening/closing scenario (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, or the number of openings set in advance for the big prize opening 54a (in this embodiment) has elapsed. This is established when it is detected that 9 game balls have entered the ball. If it is determined in step Sg1305 that the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 54b are satisfied (Sg1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1306.

In step Sg1306, the opening/closing door 54b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg1307.

In step Sg1307, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 54b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Sg0303) of the normal process. After executing step Sg1307, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sg1305, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 54b is not satisfied (Sg1305: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 350: Sg1225).

FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sg1401, it is determined whether or not a jackpot flag corresponding to a probability variable jackpot is turned on in the RAM 64 as a jackpot flag.

In step Sg1401, if it is determined that the jackpot flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot set in the RAM 64 is ON (Sg1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1402 and the high probability mode flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1402, the process advances to step Sg1403.

In step Sg1403, a high probability mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After executing step Sg1403, the process advances to step Sg1404.

On the other hand, in step Sg1401, if it is determined that the jackpot flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot set in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sg1401: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1404.

In step Sg1404, a high frequency support mode flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot flag, and if the determined jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot B or 8R probability variable jackpot B, the high frequency support mode B flag is turned ON, and the determined jackpot type is 8R. In the case of a probability variable jackpot A, the high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1404, the process advances to step Sg1405.

In step Sg1405, a high frequency support mode command is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, a high frequency support mode A command or a high frequency support mode B command is set. The set command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process.

In step Sg1406, a process of erasing (turning off) the jackpot flag is executed. After that, the process advances to step Sg1407.

In step Sg1407, a game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 345: Sg0708).

FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sg1501, it is determined whether or not it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flags in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are ON. The support flag is a flag that is normally turned ON when the electrically powered accessory 53 is placed in the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 53 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sg1501 that the supported flag is not ON (Sg1501: NO), the process advances to step Sg1502.

In step Sg1502, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 53, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It's a flag. If it is determined in step Sg1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sg1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1503.

In step Sg1503, it is determined whether the value of the power timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electric timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. The count value set in the power timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sg1503, if it is determined that the value of the power timer counter Td is not "0" (Sg1503: NO), the main power support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power timer counter Td is "0" (Sg1503: YES), the process advances to step Sg1504.

In step Sg1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sg1504, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sg1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1505, and a deviation display is set. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. After that, the process advances to step Sg1506, and the power processing execution flag is turned off. After executing step Sg1506, this electronic role support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sg1504: NO), the process advances to step Sg1507.

In step Sg1507, it is determined whether the electric utility processing execution flag is ON. In step Sg1507, if it is determined that the power support process execution flag is not ON (Sg1507: NO), the main power support process is ended. In step Sg1507, if it is determined that the power processing execution flag is ON (Sg1507: YES), the process advances to step Sg1508.

In step Sg1508, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sg1509, in which it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether either the high-frequency support mode A flag or the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON. If the mode is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sg1508 (Sg1508: NO), and if the mode is the high-frequency support mode in step Sg1509 (Sg1509: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1510, where an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e in the through ball entry process (FIG. 344: Sg0604) is 0 to 461, the electric accessory is released. The person wins the lottery (see FIG. 333(b)). Moreover, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "25" (ie, 0.05 sec) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. As explained in FIG. 334, in the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, since the fluctuation time in the electric role opening lottery is 0.05 seconds, the electric role timer counter Td is set to "25" (that is, 0. 05sec). The electric timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sg1511.

In step Sg1511, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sg1510 is a support win. In step Sg1511, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sg1511: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1512 and the support win flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1512, the process advances to step Sg1513.

In step Sg1513, a process for setting a power opening/closing scenario for the high-frequency support mode according to the type of the high-frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B). It is. Specifically, when the high-frequency support mode A flag is ON, a power opening/closing scenario for high-frequency support mode A is set. The electric role opening/closing scenario for high-frequency support mode A is set such that if the electric role-playing object opening lottery is won during high-frequency support mode A, the normal electric object 53 will be opened once, and the ordinary electric object 53 will be opened once. It is set that the normal electric accessory 53 is closed on the condition that three seconds elapse in the open state of the accessory 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 334). ). On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON, a high-frequency support mode B power opening/closing scenario is set. The electric role opening/closing scenario for high-frequency support mode B is set such that if the electric role-playing object opening lottery is won during high-frequency support mode B, the normal electric object 53 will be opened once, and the ordinary electric object 53 will be opened once. It is set that the normal electric accessory 53 is closed on the condition that 6 seconds elapse in the open state of the accessory 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 334). ). After executing step Sg1513, the electric support support process ends.

If it is determined in step Sg1508 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sg1508: YES), or if it is determined in step Sg1509 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sg1509: NO), the process advances to step Sg1514.

In step Sg1514, an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e in the through ball entry process (FIG. 344: Sg0604) is 0 or 1, the electric accessory is released. The person wins the lottery (see FIG. 333(a)). Furthermore, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "5000" (ie, 10.0 sec) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. As explained in FIG. 334, in the low-frequency support mode, since the fluctuation time in the electric prize opening lottery is 10 seconds, the electric prize timer counter Td is set to "5000" (that is, 10.0 sec). The electric timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sg1515.

In step Sg1515, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sg1514 is a support win. In step Sg1515, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sg1515: NO), the main electric role support process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in step Sg1515, if it is determined that support has been won (Sg1515: YES), the process advances to step Sg1516 and the support win flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1516, the process advances to step Sg1517.

In step Sg1517, a process for setting a power opening/closing scenario for the low-frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. The electric role opening/closing scenario for the low-frequency support mode is set so that if the electric role-playing object opening lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode, the normal electric object 53 will be opened once, and the normal electric object 53 will be opened once. It is set that the normal electric accessory 53 is closed on the condition that 3 seconds elapse in the open state of the electric accessory 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 334). After executing step Sg1517, the electric support support process ends.

In step Sg1502, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sg1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1518, and it is determined whether the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0". In this case, the electric timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. In step Sg1518, if it is determined that the value of the timer counter Td for the electric role is not "0" (Sg1518: NO), since the symbol in the general figure unit 38 is currently being displayed, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1518 that the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0" (Sg1518: YES), the process advances to step Sg1519.

In step Sg1519, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg1520, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sg1501, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sg1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1521, and an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric accessory 53 is executed. Details of the electric role opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sg1521, the process advances to step Sg1522.

In step Sg1522, it is determined whether the electric role opening/closing process has been completed. In step Sg1522, if it is determined that the electric role opening/closing process has not been completed (Sg1522: NO), the electric role supporting process is directly ended. In step Sg1522, if it is determined that the electric role opening/closing process has been completed (Sg1522: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1523 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sg1524, and the power processing execution flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sg1524, the electric support support process ends.

<Electric opening/closing process>
Next, the power opening/closing process will be explained. The electric role opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric role support process (FIG. 353: Sg1521).

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening/closing process. In step Sg1601, it is determined whether the normal electric accessory 53 is open. In step Sg1601, if it is determined that the normal electric accessory 53 is not open (Sg1601: NO), the process advances to step Sg1602.

In step Sg1602, it is determined whether the opening conditions of the set opening/closing scenario are satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the normal electric accessory 53 is opened (one time in this embodiment) when winning one electric role opening lottery is counted, and the closed state of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is maintained. By counting with a timer counter whether time has elapsed and the timing to open has been reached, it is determined whether the conditions for shifting the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state are satisfied. In step Sg1602, if it is determined that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sg1602: NO), the electric role opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1602 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sg1602: YES), the process advances to step Sg1603.

In step Sg1603, the normal electric accessory 53 is opened. After executing step Sg1603, the process advances to step Sg1604.

In step Sg1604, a power release command is set. The power release command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that receives the electric role release command executes settings for executing the effect for electric role release. After that, the power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1601 that the normal electric accessory 53 is not open (Sg1601: YES), the process advances to step Sg1605.

In step Sg1605, it is determined whether the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 53 is satisfied. Specifically, the conditions for closing the normal electric accessory 53 in high-frequency support mode A are "3 seconds have elapsed in the open state" or "one game ball has been released while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open". The ball has entered the second starting port 34." The closing condition for the normal electric accessory 53 in high-frequency support mode B is that ``six seconds have passed in the open state'' or ``one game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open.'' This means that either one of the following is true: ``The ball entered the ball.'' The conditions for closing the normal electric accessory 53 in the low-frequency support mode are ``3 seconds have passed in the open state'' or ``one game ball has entered the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open.'' Either one of the following conditions holds true: ``The ball entered the ball.'' In step Sg1605, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sg1605: NO), the electric role opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1605 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sg1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1606.

In step Sg1606, the normal electric accessory 53 is brought into a closed state. After executing step Sg1606, the process advances to step Sg1607.

In step Sg1607, a power closing command is set. The power closing command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the electric role closing command executes settings for executing the effect for electric role closing. After that, the power opening/closing process is ended.

<<G5>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 355 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<G6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sg1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sg1701, the process advances to step Sg1702.

In step Sg1702, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process in which the state of the game being executed is stored using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as a flag is used to determine the performance to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step Sg1702, the process advances to step Sg1703.

In step Sg1703, support mode production processing is executed. The support mode production process is a process for setting a background video and output audio in addition to the production for each game round, depending on the type of support mode. Details of the support mode presentation process will be described later. After executing step Sg1703, the process advances to step Sg1704.

In step Sg1704, a game rendition process is executed. The game round performance processing is a process for setting a performance to be executed for each game round. The details of the game rendition processing will be described later. After executing step Sg1704, the process advances to step Sg1705.

In step Sg1705, other display processing is executed. Other display processing is processing for executing various display-related settings based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, processing is performed to update the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds. After executing step Sg1705, the process advances to step Sg1706.

In step Sg1706, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the process from step Sg1703 to step Sg1705. That is, the various lamps 47 are controlled to emit light so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effects set in steps Sg1703 to Sg1705. After executing step Sg1706, the process advances to step Sg1707.

In step Sg1707, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the processes from step Sg1703 to step Sg1705. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps Sg1703 to Sg1705 is outputted. After executing step Sg1707, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<State memory processing>
Next, state storage processing will be explained. The state storage process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 356: Sg1702).

FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. The state storage process is a process for storing the state of the game being executed in the sound emission control device 90. The state storage process is mainly composed of three processes. Specifically, steps Sg1801 to Sg1804 are processes for storing whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. Steps Sg1805 to Sg1808 are processes for storing whether the lottery mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Steps Sg1809 to Sg1818 are processes for storing whether the support mode is high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B, or low-frequency support mode.

In step Sg1801, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 90 when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In step Sg1801, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode end command has been received (Sg1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1802, and the opening/closing execution mode execution flag is turned OFF. The opening/closing execution mode execution flag is a flag for storing whether the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and is turned ON when execution of the opening/closing execution mode is started, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This is the flag that will be used. After executing step Sg1802, the process advances to step Sg1803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1801 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (Sg1801: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1803.

In step Sg1803, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 90 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. In step Sg1803, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received (Sg1803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1804, and the opening/closing execution mode execution flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1804, the process advances to step Sg1805.

In step Sg1803, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (Sg1803: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1805.

In step Sg1805, it is determined whether a high probability mode command has been received. The high probability mode command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the audio emission control device 90 when the opening/closing execution mode ends and the high probability mode starts. If it is determined in step Sg1805 that a high probability mode command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sg1806 and the sound-light side high probability mode flag is turned ON. The sound-light side high probability mode flag is a flag for storing whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing step Sg1806, the process advances to step Sg1807.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1805 that the high probability mode command has not been received (Sg1805: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1807.

In step Sg1807, it is determined whether a low probability mode command has been received. The low probability mode command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the audio emission control device 90 when the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. If it is determined in step Sg1807 that a low probability mode command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sg1808, and the sound-light side high probability mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sg1808, the process advances to step Sg1809.

If it is determined in step Sg1807 that a low probability mode command has not been received (Sg1807: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1809.

In step Sg1809, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode A command has been received. The high frequency support mode A command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the audio emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A. In step Sg1809, if it is determined that the high frequency support mode A command has been received (Sg1809: YES), the process advances to step Sg1810.

In step Sg1810, it is determined whether the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON. The sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is a flag that is turned ON when the support mode shifts to high-frequency support mode B, and is turned OFF when the high-frequency support mode B shifts to another support mode. . If it is determined in step Sg1810 that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg1810: YES), the process advances to step Sg1811, and the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sg1812.

If it is determined in step Sg1810 that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is not ON (Sg1810: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1812.

In step Sg1812, the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. The sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is a flag that is turned ON when the support mode shifts to high-frequency support mode A, and is turned OFF when the high-frequency support mode A shifts to another support mode. . After executing step Sg1812, the process advances to step Sg1813.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1809 that the high-frequency support mode A command has not been received (Sg1809: NO), the process directly advances to step Sg1813.

In step Sg1813, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode B command has been received. The high frequency support mode B command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the audio emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B. In step Sg1813, if it is determined that the high frequency support mode B command has been received (Sg1813: YES), the process advances to step Sg1814.

In step Sg1814, it is determined whether the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sg1814 that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg1814: YES), the process advances to step Sg1815, and the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sg1816.

In step Sg1814, if it is determined that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg1814: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1816.

In step Sg1816, the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode B flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1816, the process advances to step Sg1817.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1813 that the high-frequency support mode B command has not been received (Sg1813: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1817.

In step Sg1817, it is determined whether a low frequency support mode command has been received. The low frequency support mode command is a command sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In step Sg1817, if it is determined that the low frequency support mode command has been received (Sg1817: YES), the process advances to step Sg1818.

In step Sg1818, the ON flag of the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode A flag or the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode B flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the state storage process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1817 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (Sg1817: NO), the state storage process is directly ended.

<Processing for support mode production>
Next, the support mode effect processing will be explained. The support mode performance process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 356: Sg1703).

FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing support mode production processing. In step Sg1901, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode execution flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sg1901 that the opening/closing execution mode execution flag is not ON (Sg1901: NO), the process advances to step Sg1902. On the other hand, in step Sg1901, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode execution flag is ON (Sg1901: YES), the support mode presentation process is ended.

In step Sg1902, it is determined whether the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag or the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON. In step Sg1902, if it is determined that neither the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag nor the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg1902: NO), the process advances to step Sg1903.

In step Sg1903, a production pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, in the state of the low-frequency support mode, images and sounds that encourage players to hit the game ball to the left and enter the distribution mechanism 120 are displayed separately from the presentation for each game session (game session presentation). This is a process for setting the content to be output as the background video and background music as a production pattern in order to output the background video and background music. After executing step Sg1903, the support mode production process ends.

If it is determined in step Sg1902 that the audio-optical high-frequency support mode A flag or the audio-optical high-frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg1902: YES), the process advances to step Sg1904.

In step Sg1904, it is determined whether the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is ON. In step Sg1904, if it is determined that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg1904: YES), the process advances to step Sg1905.

In step Sg1905, a production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode A is executed. Specifically, in the state of high-frequency support mode A, a video and audio prompting the player to hit the game ball to the left and enter the distribution mechanism 120 are displayed for each game round (game round performance). ) In order to output the background video and background music, this is a process for setting the content to be output as the background video and background music as a production pattern. In the state of high-frequency support mode A, the percentage of game balls entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the state of low-frequency support mode, and more advantageous benefits can be given if you win a jackpot. Therefore, the performance for the high-frequency support mode A is a performance that gives the player a greater sense of expectation than the performance for the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sg1905, the support mode production process ends.

If it is determined in step Sg1904 that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg1904: NO), the process advances to step Sg1906.

In step Sg1906, a production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode B is executed. Specifically, in the state of high-frequency support mode B, a video and audio prompting the player to hit the ball to the right and pass the game ball through the through gate 35b are created for each game round (game round performance). Separately, this is a process for setting the contents to be output as the background video and background music as a production pattern in order to output them as the background video and background music. In the state of high-frequency support mode B, the percentage of game balls entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the state of high-frequency support mode A, and more advantageous benefits are given if you win a jackpot. Because of this possibility, the performance for the high-frequency support mode B is a performance that gives the player a more sense of expectation than the performance for the high-frequency support mode A. After executing step Sg1906, the support mode production process ends.

<Processing for game rendition>
Next, the game rendition processing will be explained. The game play processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 356: Sg1704).

FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the game rendition processing. In step Sg2001, it is determined whether a fluctuation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sg2001 that a variation command has been received (Sg2001: YES), the process advances to step Sg2002.

In step Sg2002, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is read out. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg2003.

In step Sg2003, a production pattern setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting a performance pattern in the game round to be processed. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg2003, the process advances to step Sg2004.

In step Sg2004, a process for setting a liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the LCD symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L1 is displayed on the LCD. Set as the information of the symbol for use. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, it is determined from the content of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L1, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L1. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L1, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information for the current LCD pattern. After executing step Sg2004, the process advances to step Sg2005.

In step Sg2005, a game rendition command is sent to the display control device 100. The game performance command is information including the performance pattern set in step Sg2003 and the contents of the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped set in step Sg2004. The display control device 100 that has received the game round performance command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display a performance image and a liquid crystal symbol image based on the information included in the game round command. After executing step Sg2005, the process advances to step Sg2006.

In step Sg2006, pending information update processing is executed. In the process of updating the reservation information, the information in the reservation number counter area is updated so that the number of reservations stored in the reservation number counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sg2008, the game rendition process ends.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The production pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 359: Sg2003) of the game round production process.

FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sg2101, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the effect is to be set has won a jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot included in the received variation command. In step Sg2101, if it is determined that the game round to be processed has won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sg2101: YES), the process advances to step Sg2102.

In step Sg2102, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the performance is to be set has won a variable probability jackpot in the winning lottery. In step Sg2102, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot has been won (Sg2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2103.

In step Sg2103, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is jackpot B. In step Sg2103, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed was won is jackpot B (Sg2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2104.

In step Sg2104, a setting process for a production pattern for probability variable jackpot B is executed. If the probability variable jackpot B is won, the next game to be executed will be in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Therefore, since the probability variable jackpot B is a jackpot that is very advantageous for the player, the performance pattern for the probability variable jackpot B is set to give the player a great sense of expectation. After executing step Sg2104, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg2103, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed was won is not jackpot B (Sg2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2105.

In step Sg2105, a process of setting a production pattern for probability variable jackpot A is executed. After executing step Sg2105, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg2102, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot has not been won (Sg2102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2106. In step Sg2106, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is jackpot B. In step Sg2106, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed was won is jackpot B (Sg2106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2107.

In step Sg2107, a setting process for a performance pattern for normal jackpot B is executed. After executing step Sg2107, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg2106, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed was won is not jackpot B (Sg2106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2108.

In step Sg2108, a setting process for a performance pattern for normal jackpot A is executed. After executing step Sg2108, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg2101, if it is determined that the game round to be processed has not won a jackpot in the winning lottery (Sg2101: NO), the process advances to step Sg2109.

In step Sg2109, a process for setting a performance pattern for losing is executed. After executing step Sg2109, the production pattern setting process ends.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sg2201, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg2202.

In step Sg2202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sg2301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sg2401, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 362) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Sg2401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at the same time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of presentation such as a preview effect or a pattern for LCD set by the sound emission control device 90, and to design a presentation image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sg2402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sg2401) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg2403.

In step Sg2403, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sg2402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step Sg2404.

In step Sg2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sg2403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg2405, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even though the game balls entering from the opening 122 are sorted by the sorting mechanism 120 into the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, Whether the distributed game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, the same symbol (first symbol) changes, so the distributed game ball is not distributed. It is possible to provide a sense of surprise to a player who had guessed that a different symbol would change depending on the ball entering part (starting port). In addition, it is possible to make players make various guesses regarding the role (purpose of installation) of the distribution mechanism 120 that guides the ball to the entrance part (starting port), which fluctuates the same symbol even though it is distributed to two routes. can.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment includes a normal electric accessory 53 on the path through which game balls flow from the right flow path R2 to the first starting port 33b. No matter where R2 is distributed, the game balls distributed to either will trigger the same symbol (first symbol) to change, and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are normally electric accessories. 53 may be an opportunity to change the second symbol, and even if the distribution mode is the same in which the game balls reach the distribution mechanism 120, the first symbol and the second symbol may vary depending on the type of support mode. The proportions can be varied in different ways. That is, by controlling the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery that determines whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 will be released, it is possible to make the ratio of varying the first symbol and the second symbol different. .

More specifically, the normal electric accessory 53 can be considered as a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls flowing out from the opening 124 to the first starting port 33b and the second starting port 34, and the pachinko in this embodiment The machine 10 can be considered to include two sorting mechanisms: a sorting mechanism 120 and a normal electric accessory 53. Since the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 functioning as a distribution mechanism operates is the probability of winning the electric prize opening lottery, it can be changed by changing the support mode. Therefore, even if the distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the game balls that have arrived at the distribution mechanism 120 to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, the ordinary electric accessory 53 that functions as the distribution mechanism By changing the probability of distributing the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 (that is, the winning probability of the electric hand opening lottery), the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed. The ratio can be changed. For example, if the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 distributes game balls to the second starting port 34 (the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery) is set low (in the case of low-frequency support mode), the distribution mechanism 120 The game balls distributed to the channel R1 are allowed to enter the first starting port 33a, and the first symbol is varied. Since the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 have a low probability of winning the power release lottery, the balls can enter the first starting port 33b with a high probability and the first symbol can be varied. That is, the game ball that has reached the distribution mechanism 120 is allowed to enter the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) with a high probability, and the first symbol is varied with a high probability (frequency). can be done.

On the other hand, when the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 allocates game balls to the second starting port 34 (probability of winning the electric role opening lottery) is set high (in the case of high-frequency support mode A), the distribution mechanism 120 The game balls distributed to the left channel R1 are caused to enter the first starting port 33a, and the first symbol is varied. Since the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 have a high probability of winning the electric combination opening lottery, the balls can enter the second starting port 34 with a high probability and the second symbol can be varied. In this way, by changing the probability of winning the electric combination opening lottery, it is possible to change the changing ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol even if the distribution mode of game balls is the same.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a through gate 35b, in addition to the through gate 35a disposed inside the distribution mechanism 120, as a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing the electric winning lottery. Even if the game balls are distributed without passing through 120, the normal electric accessories 53 can be opened. As a result, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the game balls can be allowed to enter the second starting port 34 with a high probability by circulating the game balls in a distribution manner in which they pass through the through gate 35b.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can realize the following. When a player distributes game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120 in the low-frequency support mode, the game balls enter the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, and the game ball enters the second starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b. Since it is unlikely that the game ball will land on the 34, only the first symbol can be changed with a high probability. When a player distributes game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120 in high-frequency support mode A, there is a high possibility that the game balls will enter the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 34. Therefore, the first symbol and the second symbol can be varied. When a player distributes game balls so as to pass through the through gate 35b in high-frequency support mode B, there is a high possibility that the game balls will enter only the second starting port 34, so there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the second starting port 34. Only the second symbol can be changed. As a result, at least three game states are possible: a game state in which only the first symbol changes with a high probability, a game state in which the first symbol and the second symbol change, and a game state in which only the second symbol changes with a high probability. You can create a state.

In other words, when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the amount of game balls entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) per unit time is The relative ratio between the number of balls entering and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 can be changeably controlled in at least three stages. Therefore, by combining the three levels of ball entry relative ratios (gaming states), it is possible to create various new game flows and improve the interest of the game.

In other words, when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the pachinko machine 10 calculates the probability that the game balls will enter the first starting port consecutively. The probability of a game ball entering the first starting port and the second starting port is the alternate ball probability, and the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port consecutively is the second starting port. If the probability of consecutive balls entering the first starting port is higher than the probability of consecutive balls entering the first starting port and the probability of consecutive balls entering the second starting port, the first game state (low-frequency support mode) and the alternate entry probability A second game state (high frequency support mode A) in which the ball probability is higher than the first starting port continuous ball entering probability and the second starting port continuous ball entering probability, and the second starting port continuous ball entering probability is the first A third game state (high frequency support mode B) higher than the successive ball entry probability and the alternate ball entry probability can be controlled to be switchable. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 switches between three gaming states: a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode), a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A), and a third gaming state (high-frequency support mode B). By combining the three game states, it is possible to create various new game flows and increase the interest of the game.

The second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A) is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low-frequency support mode). ) is characterized in that the third gaming state (high-frequency support mode B) is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 is controlled to be able to switch between three gaming states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to add modulation to the player's expectations by switching between the gaming states. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although explained in the above game flow, the effects of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will now be explained by comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. If a player wins a winning lottery (including a jackpot win and, if a small win is set, a small win is also included) in a winning lottery that was previously executed with the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot. The expected value of the benefit (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) that will be given to the player is the first benefit expectation value, and the winning lottery (jackpot winning, jackpot winning, In addition, the expected value of a benefit (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) that will be given in the event of a small winning (including a small winning if a small winning is set) is set as a second benefit expected value. In addition, the expected value of the benefit that will be awarded if you win in the normal time is the expected value of the benefit in the normal time, and the expected value of the benefit that will be awarded if you win in the high frequency support mode is the expected value of the benefit in the high support mode. shall be.

Conventionally, there have been pachinko machines (hereinafter also referred to as "conventional pachinko machines") that are equipped with a sorting mechanism that distributes game balls to a first starting port and a second starting port. Conventionally, in the normal state at the beginning of the game (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a pachinko machine circulates the game ball so that it reaches the distribution mechanism and passes through the first starting hole and the second starting hole. Game balls are placed alternately into the mouth and the ball. When the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessories) operate frequently, allowing game balls to enter the second starting port with a high probability without going through the sorting means. let

In conventional pachinko machines, if the expected value of benefits at high support times is higher than the expected value of benefits at normal times, and if an attempt is made to increase the difference, it is necessary to increase the expected value of benefits at high support times. It is necessary to increase the expected value of the bonus, but if the expected value of the second bonus is increased, the expected value of the bonus in normal times also increases (in normal conditions, the game ball enters the first starting port and the second starting port). (This is because the winning lottery is executed when the ball is hit.) Furthermore, even if the first benefit expected value is decreased, the normal benefit expected value is the average of the first benefit expected value and the second benefit expected value, so the effect of reducing the first benefit expected value is It becomes smaller.

Furthermore, if there are restrictions on the amount of benefits that can be granted per unit time, and the expected value of benefits during normal times is relatively large, the expected value of benefits during high support times must be adjusted to within the range of the regulations. needs to be made smaller. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the expected benefit value in normal times and the expected benefit value in high support times. In other words, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profits obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state among the gaming states excluding the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the player's expectations are increased when transitioning from the normal state (normal gaming state, state with the lowest expected value of benefits) to the high-frequency support mode (the state with the best gaming state, the state with the highest expected value of benefits). cannot be triggered.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment circulates the game balls so that they reach the distribution mechanism 120, but the game balls enter only into the first starting port 33a with a high probability. By setting the first benefit expectation value low, the normal benefit expectation value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of high-frequency support mode B, when the player hits the right ball, the game ball enters only the second starting port 34 with a high probability, so the second benefit expected value can be set high. As a result, the expected value of benefits at high support times in high frequency support B can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a wide range of profits for the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state among the gaming states excluding the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, in the case of high-frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 34. The expected benefit value during high support (when in high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected benefit value during normal time and the expected benefit value during high support (when in high frequency support mode B), and the normal state → high frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game from Mode A to High Frequency Support Mode B, the expected value of the bonus to be awarded increases step by step, and among the game states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, A wide range of profits can be provided to the player between the gaming state and the best gaming state.

Furthermore, if there are restrictions on the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time, by setting the first expected value of benefits low, the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be reduced. Adjustment is possible, and it becomes possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first benefit expected value and the second benefit expected value is increased. In other words, out of the gaming states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to provide profits per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profits obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of special benefits within the regulatory range.

The features of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the effects produced by the features will be compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) equipped with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to a first starting port and a second starting port. As explained above, this effect is not only effective for conventional pachinko machines as exemplified above, but also for pachinko machines that are equipped with two or more ball entry sections that trigger different types of drawings to be executed. It has that effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the through gate 35a, through which the passage of a game ball triggers the execution of an electric winning lottery, is arranged in one route (right channel R2) distributed by the distribution mechanism 120. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120 (the order in which they are distributed to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2), and it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player. Furthermore, when the ticket is distributed to the right flow path R2, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the ticket will be won in the electric prize opening lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide at least two levels of anticipation: the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, and the lottery result in the electric role release lottery (that is, whether or not the normal electric role model 53 will be released). I can do it.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a low frequency support mode as a support mode, and a variation time (variation time of normal symbols) in the electric role opening lottery (variation time of normal symbols) and a normal In the high-frequency support mode A, in which the opening time of the electric accessory 53 is the same as the low-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the fluctuation time in the electric role opening lottery (normal symbol It is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode B in which the fluctuation time of the electric accessory 53 is short and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 is long, and by using the switching between these three support modes, it is possible to perform the high-frequency support mode B as explained in the flow of the game above. In addition, various new game flows can be created.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has the following effects.
First, define it as follows.
・Tp is the lottery time (variation time of normal symbols) for the electric role opening lottery in high-frequency support mode A, and when the electric role opening lottery is won, from the time when the variable time ends, the normal electric role object 53 picks up the game ball. The time until it becomes auxiliary (the time from when the movable piece 53a starts protruding to when the game ball can flow on the top surface) is Tm, which is normal when winning one electric hand opening lottery. The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts1, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr1, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to the ordinary electric accessory 53 The time from when the ball reaches the point until the ball enters the second starting port 34 by the opened normal electric accessory 53 is set as Tf1.
・Tp is the lottery time (variation time of normal symbols) for the electric role release lottery in high-frequency support mode B, and when the electric role release lottery is won, the normal electric role object 53 picks up the game ball from the time the variable time ends. The time until it becomes auxiliary (the time from when the movable piece 53a starts protruding to when the game ball can flow on the top surface) is Tm, which is normal when winning one electric hand opening lottery. The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts2, the time from the time the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr2, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to the ordinary electric accessory 53 The time from when the ball reaches the point until the ball enters the second starting port 34 by the opened normal electric accessory 53 is set as Tf2.
When defined in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to satisfy the following equations (1) to (3).
Tp+Tm≦Tr1...Formula (1)
Tp+Tm≦Tr2...Formula (2)
Tr1+Tf1≦Tp+Tm+Ts1<Tr2+Tf2≦Tp+Tm+Ts2...Formula (3)
In addition, in this embodiment, the specific values of each of the above parameters are Tp=0.05 seconds, Tm=0.1 seconds, Tr1=0.3 seconds, Tr2=0.3 seconds, Tf1=2 .0 seconds, Tf2=5.0 seconds, Ts1=3.0 seconds, and Ts2=6.0 seconds, satisfying the above formulas (1) to (3).

In such a configuration, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is distributed (left-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35a, the guidance by the normal electric accessory 53 ( However, if the game ball is passed through the through gate 35b (hit right), the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Since the electric accessory 53 normally closes before the ball enters the ball, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34.
Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous for players, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode A, game balls are distributed so that they pass through the through gate 35a (so that they reach the distribution mechanism 120). The distribution manner in which the balls are distributed (left-handed hitting) is more advantageous for the player than the distribution manner in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35b (right-handed hitting).

On the other hand, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode B, when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35a, and when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35b, In either case, the game ball can be caused to enter the second starting port 34 by guidance (assistance) by the normal electric accessory 53. However, when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35a, the game balls pass through the distribution mechanism 120. Only balls can pass through the through gate 35a. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed (left-handed) so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the number of game balls that reach the distribution mechanism 120 passes through the through gate 35a and enters the second starting port 34. The ratio of the number of game balls passing through the through gate 35b to the number of game balls reaching the through gate 35b when the game balls are distributed (hitting right) so as to pass through the through gate 35b is This is lower than the ratio of the number of game balls entering the starting port 34. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous for the player, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode B, the distribution mode (right-handed hitting) in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35b is selected. This is a more advantageous game ball distribution mode for the player than the distribution mode (left-handed hitting) in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35a (so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120).

Here, the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B differ only in the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 when winning one electric prize opening lottery as a control during the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can provide an advantageous game for the player by simply switching between two high-frequency support modes that differ in the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 when winning one electric role opening lottery. The distribution mode of the ball can be changed. Therefore, new gameplay features can be created, and furthermore, players can be made to actively participate in changing the distribution mode of game balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<<G7>> Modification of the seventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《G7-1》Variation 1:
In the seventh embodiment, the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b. While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball is released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flows down and enters the first starting port 33b. There are issues such as ball hitting. Modification 1 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 364 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 1. Further, FIG. 364 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in Modification 1. In addition, in FIG. 364, when the normal electric accessory 53 is represented by a broken line, it is shown in a closed state, and when represented by a solid line, it is shown in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 364(a), the second starting port 34 in this example is arranged to the right of the first starting port 33b when viewed from the front of the game board 30. Further, the normal electric accessory 53 includes two movable pieces, a left side movable piece 53d and a right side movable piece 53e. The left movable piece 53d is arranged on the game ball distribution path from the opening 124 to the first starting port 33b. The left side movable piece 53d is inclined so that the right side part is located lower than the left side part. The right side movable piece 53e is arranged on the distribution path of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b. The right side movable piece 53e is inclined so that the left side part is located lower than the right side part.

Other configurations and contents of control such as the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery, the fluctuation time in the electric role opening lottery, and the opening time of the normal electric role accessory 53 in each support mode are the same as in the above embodiment. Each support mode when such a configuration is adopted will be explained below.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the low frequency support mode, similarly to the above embodiment, game balls that enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, and the game balls are distributed to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2. The game balls distributed to the path R1 enter the first starting port 33a (FIG. 364(a)), and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the first starting port 33b (FIG. 364) (b)).

FIG. 365 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in Modification 1. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, similarly to the above embodiment, game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 365(a), the game ball thrown into the left channel R1 enters the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 365(b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are guided (assisted) to the left side movable piece 53d of the normal electric accessory 53 that is open and are guided to the second starting port with a high probability. Enter the pitch at 34. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits the right hand during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state and the second starting port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the point, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 366 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in Modification 1. In the high frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit right and pass through the through gate 35b. During execution of high-frequency support mode B, similarly to the above embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right side movable piece 53e of the normal electric accessory 53 that is open with a high probability. The ball then enters the second starting port 34.

At this time, unlike the seventh embodiment, the part (right movable piece 53e) of the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high-frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33b. Since it is not placed above, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right side movable piece 53e) in high-frequency support mode B does not pass through the upper part of the first starting port 33b and enters the second starting port 33b. It is possible to reach up to 34. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball that is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. can be suppressed from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, the modified example 1 can further increase the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 34 compared to the above embodiment.

《G7-2》Variation 2:
In the seventh embodiment, since the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, in the high-frequency support mode A, the normal electric accessory 53 While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball was released from the normal electric accessory 53 and the game ball flowing down entered the first starting port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in high-frequency support mode B, while the normal electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball There is a problem that a game ball released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flowing down may enter the first starting port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 367 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 2. Moreover, the said FIG. 367 is also an explanatory diagram explaining the low frequency support mode in the modification 2.

The difference between this second modification and the first modification is that the second modification does not include the first starting port 33b that the first modification had. The other configurations are the same as the first modification.

FIG. 367 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in Modification 2, FIG. 368 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in Modification 2, and FIG. 369 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in Modification 2. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating frequency support mode B. FIG.

In the case of modification 2, as shown in FIG. 368(b), in the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 by the distribution mechanism 120 are guided by the left side movable piece 53d to the second start The ball enters the hole 34. At this time, the modification 2 differs from the configuration of the modification 1 in that it does not include the first starting port 33b, so the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing while guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34. Even if the game ball is released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flows down, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting port 33b. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits the right hand during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state and the second starting port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the point, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

Moreover, unlike the seventh embodiment, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the part of the normal electric accessory 53 (moveable on the right side) that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high-frequency support mode The piece 53e) is not located above the first starting port 33b, and the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is not located above the first starting port 33b. It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper part. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball that is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. This can prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, the modified example 2 can further increase the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 34 compared to the seventh embodiment.

《G7-3》Variation 3:
In the seventh embodiment, since the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, in the high-frequency support mode A, the normal electric accessory 53 While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball was released from the normal electric accessory 53 and the game ball flowing down entered the first starting port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in high-frequency support mode B, while the normal electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball There is a problem that a game ball released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flowing down may enter the first starting port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modifications 1 and 2, since the normal electric accessory 53 has two parts, the left side movable piece 53d and the right side movable piece 53e, the ordinary electric accessory 53 has a normal electric accessory with respect to the game area PA of the game board There is a problem in that it is necessary to secure a wide (large) space for placing the object 53. Modification 3 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 370 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 3. Further, FIG. 370 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the third modification.

As shown in FIG. 370, the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification does not include the first starting port 33b like the second modification. Further, the second starting port 34 is arranged on the distribution path through which the game balls released from the opening 124 flow down. Further, a normal electric accessory 53 is arranged on the distribution path of the game ball from the opening 124 to the second starting port 34. The operation of the normal electric accessory 53 in this modification differs from that in the above embodiment. The normal electric accessory 53 in the third modification is opened and closed by moving a movable piece 53a protruding from the game board 30 on the plane of the game board 30. FIG. 370 shows a state of the low-frequency support mode, and the normal electric accessory 53 shown in FIGS. 370(a) and 370(b) is in a closed state.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIGS. 370(a) and 370(b), during execution of the low-frequency support mode, game balls that enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed between the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. The game balls distributed to the left channel R1 enter the first starting port 33a, and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124 and then close. The ball flows down the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the normal electric accessory 53 in the state, and further flows downward from the ordinary electric accessory 53 without entering the second starting port 34.

FIG. 371 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 3. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. FIG. 371(a) shows how a game ball thrown into the left channel R1 enters the first starting port 33a. FIG. 371(b) shows how the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. 371(b), the normal electric accessory 53 in this example shifts from the closed state to the open state by moving toward the upper right when viewing the game board 30 from the front. When the normal electric accessory 53 moves in the upper right direction, the game ball can flow from the opening 124 to the second starting port 34, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Note that the normal electric accessories 53 in the above embodiments and modified examples guide the game balls that have reached the top surface of the normal electric accessories 53 to the second starting port 34, so that the game balls cannot enter the second starting port 34. Although it functions as an auxiliary means to assist the ball, the normal electric accessory 53 in this example also facilitates the game ball released from the opening 124 to enter the second starting port 34 by shifting to the open state. Therefore, it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits the right hand during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state and the second starting port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the point, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 372 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 3. In the high frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit right and pass through the through gate 35b. As shown in the figure, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the upper surface of the wall portion W provided on the game board 30, and after circulating on the upper surface of the wall portion W, the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that is being opened. The ball enters the second starting port 34.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification does not include the first starting port 33b as in the second modification, the normal electric accessory 53 may be in the open state at an unintended timing in the high-frequency support mode A. Even in the case where the game ball shifts to the closed state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting port 33b.

In addition, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B cannot be located above the first starting port 33b. Instead, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode B can reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper part of the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball that is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. This can prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, the modified example 3 can further increase the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 34 compared to the seventh embodiment.

Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned modifications 1 and 2, the normal electric accessory 53 in modification 3 does not include two parts such as the left side movable piece 53d and the right side movable piece 53e, but is composed of one movable piece. . Therefore, the space in which the normal electric accessories 53 are arranged can be narrowed (smaller) in the game area PA of the game board 30, and the space in which the normal electric accessories 53 are arranged can be reduced.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 53 in the third modification is in the closed state, it blocks the circulation path from the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34, and also blocks the circulation path from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34. Divide the route. When in the open state, the flow path from the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 is unshielded, and the flow path from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34 is formed. Therefore, the normal electric accessories 53 can change the two distribution routes by shifting from the closed state to the open state. That is, the normal electric accessories 53 can change the states of two types of distribution channels at the same time with one state change. As a result, whether the game balls are distributed through the distribution route from the right channel R2 to the second starting port 34 or the game balls are distributed through the distribution route from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34, either In this case, it is also possible to play a game using the normal electric accessory 53.

《G7-4》Variation 4:
In the seventh embodiment, since the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, in the high-frequency support mode A, the normal electric accessory 53 While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball was released from the normal electric accessory 53 and the game ball flowing down entered the first starting port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in high-frequency support mode B, while the normal electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball There is a problem that a game ball released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flowing down may enter the first starting port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

In addition, in the configurations of the above-mentioned modifications 2 and 3, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode enter the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. It was configured so that it would flow straight down without a ball. As a result, there is a problem that the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out without depending on the movement of the accessory to the total number of prize balls paid out in a series of games becomes low. Modification 4 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 373 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 4. Further, FIG. 373 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification, the general prize opening 32 is arranged on the distribution path through which the game balls released from the opening 124 flow down. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of modification 4 does not include the first starting port 33b.

As shown in FIG. 373(a), in the low frequency support mode, game balls that enter through the opening 122 and are distributed to the left channel R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a. Then, as shown in FIG. 373(b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the general winning hole 32. In the configurations of the above-mentioned modifications 2 and 3, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode are not allowed to enter the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. However, in this modification, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode enter the general prize opening 32. Therefore, compared to the above-described modifications 2 and 3, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out without depending on the action of the accessory to the total number of prize balls paid out in a series of games.

FIG. 374 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 4. As shown in FIGS. 374(a) and 374(b), in the case of high-frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a. However, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the second starting port 34. In the configuration of the fourth modification, even if the normal electric accessory 53 closes while the left movable piece 53d is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball will not enter the general winning port 32. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 33b unintentionally. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits the right hand during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state and the second starting port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the point, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 375 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification example 4. As shown in FIG. 375, in the case of high-frequency support mode B, similarly to the above modification 1, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b has a high probability of moving to the right side of the open normal electric accessory 53. The ball enters the second starting port 34 while being guided (assisted) by the piece 53e. In the configuration of the fourth modification, unlike the seventh embodiment, the first starting port 33b is not provided. 53 (right side movable piece 53e) is not located above the first starting port 33b, and the game ball is guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right side movable piece 53e) in high frequency support mode B. It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper part of the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball that is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. This can prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, the modified example 2 can further increase the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 34 compared to the seventh embodiment.

《G7-5》Variation 5:
In the seventh embodiment, since the first starting port 33 includes two starting ports 33a and 33b, the detection of the entry of a game ball with respect to the first starting port 33 is performed at the first starting port 33. It is necessary to perform this at two ball entry parts, the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, and there are problems such as having to provide more sensors than before for detecting the entry of game balls, and the problem that the gaming area PA of the game board 30 However, there is a problem in that it is necessary to secure a wider (larger) space for arranging the starting port than before. Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, since the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B is arranged above the first starting port 33b, The game ball guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode B passes through the upper part of the first starting port 33b and reaches the second starting port 34. At this time, if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down, There is a problem that the ball may enter the first starting port 33b unintentionally. Modification 5 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 376 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 5. Further, FIG. 376 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in the fifth modification.

As shown in FIG. 376, in the distribution mechanism 120 in Modification 5, the left flow path R1 forms a semicircular shape. In addition, both the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 and released from the opening 123, and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 and released from the opening 124, are placed in the first position where they can enter. A starting port 33a is arranged. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 of modification 5 does not include the first starting port 33b.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

As shown in FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b), during execution of the low-frequency support mode, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed between the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. The game balls distributed to the left channel R1 enter the first starting port 33a, and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 also flow out from the opening 124 and then enter the first starting port 33a. 1. The ball enters the starting port 33a.

FIG. 377 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 5. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 377(a), the game ball thrown into the left channel R1 enters the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 377(b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are guided (assisted) to the left side movable piece 53d of the normal electric accessory 53 that is open and are guided to the second starting port with a high probability. Enter the pitch at 34. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits the right hand during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state and the second starting port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the point, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 378 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification 5. In the high frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit right and pass through the through gate 35b. During execution of high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) by the right side movable piece 53e of the normal electric accessory 53 that is open and enters the second starting port 34. Enter the ball.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification has only one first starting port 33a as the first starting port, compared to the seventh embodiment, it is necessary to include a sensor for detecting the entry of game balls. The number of can be reduced. In addition, the processing necessary for ball entry detection can also be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, the space that must be secured for arranging the starting port in the game area PA of the game board 30 can be made narrower (smaller) than in the seventh embodiment.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, the part (right movable piece 53e) of the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high-frequency support mode B is connected to the first starting port 34. (The first starting port 33a) is not placed above the first starting port 33a, so the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is not placed above the first starting port 33. It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through it. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball that is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. can be suppressed from entering the first starting port 33. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, the modified example 5 can further increase the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 34 compared to the above embodiment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, although the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 are , all of the balls enter the first starting port 33a, which is the same ball entry section, making it possible for the player to make various guesses about the purpose of installing the distribution mechanism 120, as well as providing a sense of surprise.

《G7-6》Variation 6:
The sorting mechanism 120 in the seventh embodiment and the modified example alternately sorts the game balls that have arrived at the left flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2. This poses a problem in that it is possible to predict how the game will be distributed, which may reduce the player's ability to concentrate on the game and the level of attention he pays to the game. Modification 6 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 379 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 6. Further, FIG. 379 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in Modification 6. In addition, in FIG. 379, when the normal electric accessory 53 is represented by a broken line, it is shown in a closed state, and when represented by a solid line, it is shown in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 379, the distribution mechanism 120 in the sixth modification includes a croon 129 that temporarily retains game balls that enter from the opening 122. The croon 129 has an opening 123 and an opening 124 formed therein. Furthermore, a through gate 35a is provided in the opening 124.

The game ball that enters through the opening 122 temporarily stays while moving within the area of the croon 129, and then is released from the opening 123 or the opening 124. That is, the distribution mechanism 120 in this modification randomly distributes the arriving game balls to the opening 123 and the opening 124.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 379(a), the game balls sorted into the opening 123 in the clone 129 enter the first starting port 33a. Further, as shown in FIG. 379(b), the game balls distributed to the opening 124 in the clone 129 pass through the through gate 35a. The electric role release lottery is executed using this passing as a trigger, but since it is a low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lottery is low, and the game balls distributed to the opening 124 have a high probability of entering the first starting port 33b. Enter the ball.

FIG. 380 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode A in modification example 6. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be hit to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 380(a), the game balls sorted into the opening 123 in the clone 129 enter the first starting port 33a. Further, as shown in FIG. 380(b), the game balls distributed to the opening 124 in the clone 129 pass through the through gate 35a, and the electric winning lottery is executed using this passage as a trigger. Since it is the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the lottery is high, and in that case, the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the open state. Therefore, the game balls sorted into the opening 124 by the croon 129 are guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 and enter the second starting port 34 with a high probability. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits the right hand during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state and the second starting port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the point, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 381 is an explanatory diagram illustrating high-frequency support mode B in modification 6. As shown in FIG. 381, in the case of high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right side movable piece 53e of the normal electric accessory 53 that is open with a high probability. The ball then enters the second starting port 34.

As described above, the sixth modification differs in the configuration of the distribution mechanism 120 from the above embodiment and modification, and includes the croon 129. That is, the game balls that have arrived at the distribution mechanism 120 are not distributed alternately into two routes, but randomly distributed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 will be distributed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120, and it is also possible to make the player concentrate on the game. In particular, in the case of high-frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the opening 123 enter the first starting port 33a, and the game balls distributed to the opening 124 enter the second starting port 33a with a high probability. Enter the ball. Therefore, unlike the case where the distribution mechanism 120 distributes alternately to two routes, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33a and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 Bias may occur. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of Modification 6, high-frequency support A can give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency.

Further, in this modification, the configuration in which the croon 129 is formed with two openings, the opening 123 and the opening 124, is adopted, but the configuration in which the croon 129 is formed with three or more openings is also possible. May be adopted. For example, the croon 129 may include a third opening in addition to the opening 123 and the opening 124. Then, a configuration in which the general prize opening 32 is provided on the distribution path of the game ball released from the third opening, or a configuration in which the ball entry section is not provided may be adopted. By doing so, it becomes even more difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 will be distributed. Therefore, it is possible to draw even more attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120 from the player.

《G7-7》Variation 7:
The pachinko machine 10 in the above embodiment adopts a configuration in which the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode when winning a jackpot with variable probability, and the high probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won. A configuration may be adopted in which there is a limit to the number of times the game can be played. By adopting such a configuration, for example, even if the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is triggered by winning the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode Since there is a limit to the number of times the game can be played in state B (for example, 150 times), if a jackpot is not won before the limit is reached, the game becomes a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the high probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh modification not only gives the player a sense of expectation of winning the jackpot, but also puts him at a disadvantage if he does not win the jackpot within the limited number of times. It is possible to give a sense of crisis that the game is about to shift to a dangerous state, and it is possible to give tone to the player's sense of expectation.

《G7-8》Variation 8:
In the above embodiment, when winning a jackpot type (probable variable jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that is in high-frequency support mode A among the jackpot types set in the distribution table for the first starting opening, A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that he or she has won. For example, in the case of winning a jackpot in the high-frequency support mode A, a mode is set in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that he or she has won a jackpot in the presentation of a game round. Then, the period of the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round in which the jackpot is won is set to be extremely short, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has been executed. Specifically, the number of round games (number of rounds) set for the jackpot type (probable variable jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that becomes high-frequency support mode A is reduced (for example, 2 rounds), and the round game is Set the time to a very short period. Furthermore, the performance during the opening/closing execution mode is also set in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. By employing such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the state has shifted from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support A after winning a jackpot. As a result, the game balls that have reached the sorting mechanism 120 are changed from the state (low-frequency support mode) in which they are alternately entering the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b without the player noticing. It is possible to shift to a state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the game balls that have arrived at the separation mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 34 alternately, thereby giving a surprise to the player. At the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《G7-9》Variation 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which game balls that have passed through the through gates 35 (through gates 35a, through gates 35b) are not held, but a configuration may be adopted in which game balls that have passed through are held ( Maximum number of reservations is 4). By doing this, in the case of high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) and reaches the normal electric accessory 53. The timing at which the normal electric accessory 53 opens is likely to deviate from the timing when the normal electric accessory 53 becomes open, and the game ball is guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 and reaches the second starting port 34 at the same timing. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether the game is successful or not, and it is possible to give a sense of anticipation and tension.

《G7-10》Variation 10:
The normal electric accessories 53 are not limited to the configurations of the above embodiments and modified examples, and other configurations can be adopted. FIG. 382 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in the figure, when the normal electric accessory 53 is in the closed state, the game ball circulation surface 53s of the plate-shaped movable piece 53a is in a state of being collapsed so that it is parallel to the plane of the game board 30. When the normal electric accessory 53 is in the open state, the circulation surface 53s rotates so as to be substantially perpendicular to the plane of the game board 30, and a game ball can flow through the circulation surface 53s. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effects as the above embodiment and modification can be achieved.

《G7-11》Variation 11:
In the seventh embodiment, a non-electric accessory may be provided instead of the normal electric accessory 53. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the non-electric accessories mechanically linked to the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are in an open state for a predetermined period of time. After the period has passed, it will be closed. By doing so, the processing can be simplified and the same effects as in the seventh embodiment can be achieved.

《G7-12》Variation 12:
In the seventh embodiment, the performance executed in each game round in each game state of low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode A, and high-frequency support mode B is determined based on the lottery result corresponding to each game time. However, it is not set to reflect information regarding the gaming state at the time the gaming session is being executed. Although each gaming state has its own characteristics, no effects have been set that reflect the characteristics, and there is room to improve the interest of the game through effects.

For example, in high-frequency support mode A, the probability that game balls alternately enter the first starting port (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) and second starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as alternate ball entering (also called the probability) is the probability that game balls enter the first starting port (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) consecutively (also called the probability of consecutive balls entering the first starting port), and the second This is higher than the probability that game balls will enter the starting port 34 consecutively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 332, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, a game round caused by a game ball entering the first starting opening (hereinafter also referred to as a first starting opening gaming round) It is more advantageous for the player to execute a game round that is caused by a game ball entering the second starting hole (hereinafter also referred to as a second starting hole game round) than when the game ball enters the second starting hole. It is composed of In other words, it is better to win a jackpot in a game round triggered by the ball entering the second starting slot than to win a jackpot in the gaming round triggered by the ball entering the first starting slot. However, there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous for the player. Specifically, if you win a jackpot, the probability of winning the jackpot type (jackpot B) that shifts to (or maintains) high-frequency support mode B as the jackpot type is that the probability of winning the jackpot in the first opening game round is It is more likely to win a jackpot in the second starting slot game than in ) is the jackpot type (jackpot A). In other words, if you win a jackpot in the second starting slot game, you will have a higher expectation of the advantageous degree of the benefits that will be given by winning the jackpot than if you win the jackpot in the first starting slot gaming round. .

Therefore, among the three game states of low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode A, and high-frequency support mode B, there is a high probability that the first starting opening game time and the second starting opening game time will be executed alternately. In the frequency support mode A, the player's sense of expectation is relatively lower in the first starting opening game round compared to the second starting opening gaming round. In addition, in high-frequency support mode A, the player may not want to win a jackpot in the first starting slot game, and in such a case, the player may not want to win a jackpot in the first starting slot gaming round for a relatively long period of time. If a performance is performed that arouses the player's expectations of whether he or she will win the jackpot or not, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in high-frequency support mode A, the first starting slot game, for which the player's expectations are low, is executed in a short period of time, and the second starting opening game, for which the player's expectation is high, is executed over a relatively long time. It is preferable to carry out this process to give the player a sense of expectation, and to reduce and suppress the player's discomfort.

Therefore, in this modification, in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game is set to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting slot gaming. By doing this, in high-frequency support mode A, the first starting opening game round, in which the player's expectations are low, is executed in a short time to suppress a decline in expectations, and the second starting opening gaming round is compared. By taking a long time to execute the game, it is possible to improve the expectations of the players.

In addition, in normal gaming machines, if the lottery result of a winning lottery is a loss (reach occurrence) or a jackpot win, the fluctuation time will be longer than that of a loss (reach non-occurrence), taking into account the time to execute the reach effect, etc. is set to be longer. In the seventh embodiment, three variable time tables are prepared corresponding to the lottery results of winning (no reach), losing (reach occurring), and jackpot, and a variable time table corresponding to the lottery results of the winning lottery is prepared. This is achieved by referencing.

However, in the high-frequency support mode A in the seventh embodiment, even if you win the winning lottery in the first starting slot game, the probability of winning the jackpot type (jackpot B) that shifts to the high-frequency support mode B is Therefore, even if the player recognizes that he or she will win a jackpot due to the performance in the first opening game round, the player's expectations for that game round are low. That is, the player's expectations for the first starting slot game run in the high-frequency support mode A are low regardless of the result of the winning lottery.

Therefore, in this modification, when the first starting slot game round is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, there is no difference in the fluctuation time between when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and when it is a loss. do. Specifically, when the first starting slot game round is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, the same variable time table is referred to regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Hereinafter, the variable time table to be referred to when the first starting opening game round is executed in the high frequency support mode A is also referred to as the variable time table for the first starting opening at high support mode A. As described above, the average value of the variable time set by referring to the variable time table for the first starting port at the time of high support mode A is the average value of the variable time for the second starting port game executed in the high frequency support mode A. Information (value) corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time table for the first starting port at high support A so that the variation time is shorter than the average value of the variation time.

An example of a specific configuration for realizing this modification will be described below. In this description, differences between this modification and the seventh embodiment described above will be explained, and descriptions of the same configurations in this modification and the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

<Variable time setting process>
FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the variation time setting process in Modification 12. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 348: Sg1016) of the variation start process in the seventh embodiment. That is, in this modification, instead of the variation time setting process described in FIG. 349 of the seventh embodiment, a variation time setting process shown in FIG. 383 described below is adopted.

In step Sg2501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sg2502.

In step Sg2502, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A flag or the high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sg2502 that neither the high-frequency support mode A flag nor the high-frequency support mode B is ON (Sg2502: NO), the process advances to step Sg2503.

In step Sg2503, variable time setting processing for low frequency support mode is executed. That is, a state in which neither the high-frequency support mode A flag nor the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON is a low-frequency support mode state, so a variable time setting process corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed. The low-frequency support mode variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time of the game times executed in the low-frequency support mode. Details of the low frequency support mode variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg2503, the process advances to step Sg2507.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg2502 that the high-frequency support mode A flag or the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg2502: YES), the process advances to step Sg2504.

In step Sg2504, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sg2504 that the high-frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg2504: YES), the process advances to step Sg2505.

In step Sg2505, variable time setting processing for high frequency support mode A is executed. The variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is a process for setting the variable time of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode A state. Details of the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A will be described later. After executing step Sg2505, the process advances to step Sg2507.

If it is determined in step Sg2504 that the high-frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg2504: NO), the process advances to step Sg2506. In step Sg2506, variable time setting processing for high frequency support mode B is executed. The variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B is a process for setting the variable time of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode B state. Details of the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B will be described later. After executing step Sg2506, the process advances to step Sg2507.

In step Sg2507, the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

<Variable time setting process for low frequency support mode>
Next, the variable time setting process for low frequency support mode will be explained. The low frequency support mode variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 383: Sg2503).

FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing for low frequency support mode. In step Sg2601, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery of the game round to be processed is a jackpot. In step Sg2601, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg2601: YES), the process advances to step Sg2602.

In step Sg2602, the current fluctuation type counter is determined by referring to the fluctuation time table for jackpot during low frequency support mode (in the figure, expressed as fluctuation time table for jackpot during low support mode) stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d. Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of CS. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for low frequency support mode is ended.

In step Sg2601, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is not a jackpot (Sg2601: NO), the process advances to step Sg2603.

In step Sg2603, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (reach occurrence). In step Sg2603, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (reach occurrence) (Sg2603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2604.

In step Sg2604, the current variation is determined by referring to the variation time table for reach occurrence in low frequency support mode (in the figure, expressed as variation time table for reach occurrence in low support mode) stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for low frequency support mode is ended.

In step Sg2603, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is not a loss (reach occurrence) (Sg2603: NO), the process advances to step Sg2605. In step Sg2605, with reference to the variable time table for reach non-occurrence in low frequency support mode stored in the variable time table storage area 63d (denoted as variable time table for reach non-occurrence in low support mode in the figure), the current The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for low frequency support mode is ended.

In addition, in this modification, in the state of the low-frequency support mode, the variable time is set according to the lottery result of the winning lottery without distinguishing between the first starting slot game time and the second starting slot gaming time. conduct. By doing so, it is not necessary to store the variable time table for the first starting slot game round and the variable time table for the second starting slot gaming round, and the storage capacity can be reduced. In addition, in the low frequency support mode, when setting the variable time, it is possible to omit the process of determining whether it is the first starting slot game time or the second starting slot gaming time, and the process of setting the variable time can be omitted. can be simplified. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode, since the probability that a game ball enters the second starting port 34 is extremely low, data is stored assuming that the second starting port game round will be executed in the low-frequency support mode. Securing capacity or complicating the process of setting variable time leads to inefficiency in manufacturing, so in the low-frequency support mode, the first starting slot game time and the second starting slot gaming time are It is preferable to set the variable time according to the lottery result of the winning lottery without distinguishing between the two.

In addition, in this modification, the average value of the fluctuation time in the case of a jackpot among the cases where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, a loss (reach occurrence), and a loss (reach non-occurrence) Each variation time table is set so that is configured.

<Variable time setting process for high-frequency support mode A>
Next, the variable time setting process for high-frequency support mode A will be explained. The variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 384: Sg2505).

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing for high frequency support mode A. In step Sg2701, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot (first starting slot game round). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display section flag is ON, and if the second symbol display section flag is OFF, it is determined that the game round to be processed is the first starting opening game round. However, when the second symbol display section flag is ON, it is determined that the game round to be processed is the second starting opening game round.

In step Sg2701, if it is determined that the game time to be processed is the first starting opening game time (Sg2701: YES), the process advances to step Sg2702. In step Sg2702, reference is made to the variable time table for the first starting port in high frequency support mode A (in the diagram, it is expressed as the variable time table for the first starting port in high support mode A) stored in the variable time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg2701, if it is determined that the game time to be processed is not the first starting opening game time (Sg2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2703. That is, when the game round to be processed is the second starting opening game round, the process advances to step Sg2703.

In step Sg2703, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a jackpot. In step Sg2703, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg2703: YES), the process advances to step Sg2704. In step Sg2704, with reference to the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening jackpot in high frequency support mode A (in the figure, it is expressed as the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening jackpot in high support mode A), the current fluctuation type counter CS Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg2703, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is not a jackpot (Sg2703: NO), the process advances to step Sg2705. In step Sg2705, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (reach occurrence). In step Sg2705, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (reach occurrence) (Sg2705: YES), the process advances to step Sg2706.

In step Sg2706, the current variation type is determined by referring to the variation time table for second starting port reach occurrence in high frequency support mode A (in the diagram, it is expressed as the variation time table for second starting port reach occurrence in high support mode A). Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the counter CS. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg2705, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (no reach occurrence) (Sg2705: NO), the process advances to step Sg2707.

In step Sg2707, with reference to the variable time table for non-occurrence of second starting port reach in high frequency support mode A (in the diagram, it is expressed as variable time table for non-occurrence of second starting port reach in high support mode A), Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 385 above, in this modification, in the high-frequency support mode A, the fluctuation time when the first starting slot game is executed is the same fluctuation regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Set the variable time by referring to the time table. As explained at the beginning of this modification, in high-frequency support mode A, even if you win the winning lottery in the first starting slot game, you will win the jackpot type (jackpot B) that will shift to high-frequency support mode B. Since the probability of winning is low, even if the player recognizes that he or she will win a jackpot due to the performance in the first opening game round, the player's expectations for that game round are low. In other words, players have low expectations for the first opening game round, regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Therefore, in this modification, when the first starting slot game round is executed in high-frequency support mode A, there is no difference in the fluctuation time between when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and when it is a loss. In order to do this, when the first starting slot game round is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, the same variable time table is referred to regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Furthermore, in this modification, when the first starting slot game round is executed in high-frequency support mode A, the variable time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, and the variable time set when the lottery result is a jackpot. The fluctuation time set in In other words, when the first starting slot game is executed in high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, and the average value of the fluctuation time set when the lottery result is a jackpot. The average value of the set fluctuation time is the same or substantially the same. In addition, in this modification, in the high frequency support mode A, the average of the fluctuation time set by the fluctuation time table for the first starting opening at the time of high support A, which is referred to when the first starting opening game round is executed. The value is the variable time table for second starting opening jackpot when high support A is referred to when the second starting opening game is executed, the variable time table for second starting opening reach occurrence when high support A, and the variable time table for second starting opening reach occurrence when high support A. Each variable time table is configured to be shorter than the average value of the variable time set by the second starting port reach non-occurrence variable time table. That is, in this modification, in high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting opening game round, in which the player's expectations are low, is greater than the fluctuation in the second starting opening gaming round, in which the player's expectations are high. It is configured to be shorter than the average time value. By adopting such a configuration, in the state of high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the first starting opening game time and suppress a decline in the player's sense of expectation. It is possible to increase a player's sense of expectation by making the fluctuation time of two starting opening game times relatively long. In addition, in high-frequency support mode A, the player may not want to win a jackpot in the first starting slot game, and in such a case, the player may not want to win a jackpot in the first starting slot gaming round for a relatively long period of time. If a performance is performed that arouses the player's expectations of whether he or she will win the jackpot or not, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, as in this modification, in the case of high-frequency support mode A, by making the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting opening game times relatively short, the player's discomfort with the game is reduced and suppressed. be able to.

<Variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B>
Next, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B will be explained. The variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 384: Sg2506).

FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B. In step Sg2801, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting slot (first starting slot game round). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display section flag is ON, and if the second symbol display section flag is OFF, it is determined that the game round to be processed is the first starting opening game round. However, when the second symbol display section flag is ON, it is determined that the game round to be processed is the second starting opening game round.

In step Sg2801, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the first starting slot game round (Sg2801: YES), the process advances to step Sg2802. In step Sg2802, reference is made to the variable time table for the first starting port in high frequency support mode B (in the diagram, it is expressed as the variable time table for the first starting port in high support mode B) stored in the variable time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg2801, if it is determined that the game time to be processed is not the first starting opening game time (Sg2801: NO), the process advances to step Sg2803. That is, when the game round to be processed is the second starting opening game round, the process advances to step Sg2803.

In step Sg2803, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a jackpot. In step Sg2803, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg2803: YES), the process advances to step Sg2804. In step Sg2804, with reference to the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening jackpot in high frequency support mode B (in the figure, it is expressed as the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening jackpot in high support mode B), the current fluctuation type counter CS Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg2803, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is not a jackpot (Sg2803: NO), the process advances to step Sg2805. In step Sg2805, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (reach occurrence). In step Sg2805, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (reach occurrence) (Sg2805: YES), the process advances to step Sg2806.

In step Sg2806, the current variation type is determined by referring to the variation time table for second starting port reach occurrence in high frequency support mode B (in the diagram, it is expressed as the variation time table for second starting port reach occurrence in high support mode B). Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the counter CS. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B is ended.

In step Sg2805, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (no reach occurrence) (Sg2805: NO), the process advances to step Sg2807.

In step Sg2807, with reference to the variable time table for non-occurrence of second starting port reach in high frequency support mode B (in the figure, it is expressed as variable time table for non-occurrence of second starting port reach in high support mode B), Obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B is ended.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 386, in the high-frequency support mode B as well as in the high-frequency support mode A, the player's expectations are low when the first starting opening game round is executed. Therefore, when setting the variable time of the first starting slot game in high-frequency support mode B, the same way as when setting the variable time of the first starting slot gaming time in high-frequency support mode A, the lottery of the winning lottery The configuration is such that the same variable time table is referenced regardless of the result. In addition, the average value of the variable time set by the variable time table for the first starting port at high support B, which is referred to when the first starting port game time is executed, is the same as that when the second starting port game time is executed. It is set by the variable time table for 2nd starting port jackpot at high support B, the variable time table for 2nd starting port reach occurrence at high support B, and the variable time table for 2nd starting port reach non-occurrence at high support B. Each variation time table is configured so that the variation time is shorter than the average value of the variation time. That is, even in the high frequency support mode B, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game is configured to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting slot gaming. By adopting such a configuration, in the state of high-frequency support mode B, it is possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the first starting opening game time and suppress a decline in the player's sense of expectation. It is possible to increase a player's sense of expectation by making the fluctuation time of two starting opening game times relatively long.

<Production pattern setting process>
FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process in modification 12. The production pattern setting process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 359: Sg2003) of the game round production process in the seventh embodiment. That is, in this modification, instead of the effect pattern setting process described in FIG. 360 of the seventh embodiment, the effect pattern setting process shown in FIG. 387 described below is adopted.

In step Sg2901, it is determined whether the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag or the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON. In step Sg2901, if it is determined that neither the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag nor the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg2901: NO), the process advances to step Sg2902.

In step Sg2902, low-frequency support mode performance pattern setting processing is executed. The performance pattern setting process for low frequency support mode is a process for setting a pattern of performance to be executed in a game round executed in the low frequency support mode. Details of the performance pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode will be described later. After executing step Sg2902, the production pattern setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sg2901, if it is determined that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag or the sound-light side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg2901: YES), the process advances to step Sg2903.

In step Sg2903, it is determined whether the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is ON. In step Sg2903, if it is determined that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg2903: YES), the process advances to step Sg2904.

In step Sg2904, high-frequency support mode A performance pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode A is a process for setting a pattern of production to be executed in a game round executed in the high-frequency support mode A state. Details of the performance pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode A will be described later. After executing step Sg2904, the production pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sg2903 that the sound-light side high-frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg2903: NO), the process advances to step Sg2905.

In step Sg2905, high-frequency support mode B performance pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode B is a process for setting a pattern of production to be executed in a game round executed in the high-frequency support mode B state. Details of the production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode B will be described later. After executing step Sg2905, the production pattern setting process ends.

<Production pattern setting process for low frequency support mode>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Sg2902) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing the low-frequency support mode production pattern setting process. In step Sg3001, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is the first starting slot game round or the second starting slot gaming round. In step Sg3001, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the first starting slot game round (Sg3001: YES), the process advances to step Sg3002.

In step Sg3002, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a jackpot. In step Sg3002, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg3002: YES), the process advances to step Sg3003.

In step Sg3003, a setting process for a performance pattern for a low frequency support mode first starting opening jackpot (in the figure, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for a low support first starting opening jackpot) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when a jackpot is won in the first opening game round in the low frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, since there is a high probability that the first starting slot game round will be executed continuously, a performance that improves the player's sense of expectation is executed in the performance executed during the first starting slot game round. More specifically, a performance that improves the player's sense of expectation is executed more than the performance executed in the first opening game round in the high-frequency support mode A, which will be described later. In other words, even if the first starting slot game is the same, the player's expectations will be different if the state of the game to be executed is different. In high-frequency support mode A, in addition to the execution of the first starting slot game time, the second starting slot game time, which is more advantageous for the player, is also frequently executed (the first starting slot game time and the second starting slot game time). (runs alternately). Therefore, in the high frequency support mode A, the player does not have much expectation for the first starting slot game round. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, only the first starting opening game round is executed with a high probability. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the player has a sense of anticipation for the first opening game round. Therefore, in the first starting slot game round in the low-frequency support mode, a performance that improves the player's sense of expectation is executed more than the performance executed during the first starting slot game round in the high-frequency support mode A. For example, in the first opening game round in the low-frequency support mode, the length of time for performing the performance (length of variable time) is changed for each lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, the length of time (fluctuation time) to execute the performance in the case of a loss (reach non-occurrence) is the shortest among the three types of loss (reach non-occurrence), loss (reach occurrence), and jackpot, and the second The configuration is made so that the length of time (variable time) for performing a performance in a loss (reach occurrence) is short, and the length of time (variable time) for performing a performance in a jackpot is the longest. In addition, the time for stopping the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the winning lottery or for the corresponding performance is made longer than the first starting slot game time in the high-frequency support mode A. By doing so, the first starting slot game time in the low frequency support mode can be made to improve the player's sense of expectation more than the first starting slot game time in the high frequency support mode A.

After executing step Sg3003, the low-frequency support mode performance pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg3002, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is not a jackpot (Sg3002: NO), the process advances to step Sg3004.

In step Sg3004, a process for setting a performance pattern for missing the first starting opening in the low frequency support mode (in the figure, is expressed as a process for setting a performance pattern for missing the first starting opening in the low frequency support mode). This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a loss in the first opening game round in the low frequency support mode. As mentioned above, in the low-frequency support mode, there is a high probability that the first starting slot game time will be executed continuously, so the game To perform a presentation with content that improves people's expectations.

After executing step Sg3004, the low-frequency support mode performance pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg3001, if it is determined that the game time to be processed is not the first starting opening game time (Sg3001: NO), the process advances to step Sg3005.

In step Sg3005, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a jackpot. In step Sg3005, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg3005: YES), the process advances to step Sg3006.

In step Sg3006, a setting process for a performance pattern for a low frequency support mode second starting opening jackpot (in the figure, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for a low support second starting opening jackpot) is executed. This process is a process of setting a performance pattern to be executed when a jackpot is won in the second starting opening game round in the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the possibility of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is extremely low. Despite such a state, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the second starting hole game round is executed, and a jackpot is won, this process is executed. Therefore, in this process, a performance is set that greatly enhances the player's sense of expectation. After executing step Sg3006, the low-frequency support mode performance pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg3005, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round to be processed is a loss (Sg3005: NO), the process advances to step Sg3007.

In step Sg3007, a process for setting a performance pattern for missing the second starting opening in the low frequency support mode (in the figure, is expressed as a process for setting a performance pattern for missing the low support mode second starting opening). This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a loss in the second starting opening game round in the low frequency support mode. In this process as well, similarly to step Sg3006, an effect with content that greatly enhances the player's sense of expectation is set. After executing step Sg3007, the low-frequency support mode performance pattern setting process ends.

<Production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode A>
Next, the production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode A will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Sg2904) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode A. In step Sg3101, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is the first starting opening game round. In step Sg3101, if it is determined that the game time to be processed is the first starting opening game time (Sg3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3102.

In step Sg3102, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is ON. In this modification, if the first starting slot game is executed twice in a row in the high-frequency support mode A, the win in the first gaming round of the two first starting slot gaming times is When the lottery result is a loss, a continuous performance is executed as a specific performance in which a series of performances are performed over the two game rounds. The continuous performance flag is turned ON when setting a performance pattern to be executed in the continuous performance, and is turned OFF at the start of the second game round in which the continuous performance is set.

In step Sg3102, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not ON (Sg3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3103. In step Sg3103, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot.

In step Sg3103, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is not a jackpot (Sg3103: NO), the process advances to step Sg3104. In step Sg3104, it is determined whether the next game time that is on hold is the first starting slot game time. In step Sg3104, if it is determined that the next game round is the first starting slot game round (Sg3104: YES), the process advances to step Sg3105 and the continuous performance flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sg3106.

In step Sg3106, a continuous performance production pattern setting process is executed. In this process, performance patterns for two games are determined in this process for the two first starting opening game times in which continuous performances are executed. Details of the contents of the performance set in the continuous performance performance pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg3106, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg3102, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is ON (Sg3102: YES), the process advances to step Sg3107. In step Sg3107, the continuous effect flag is turned OFF. In other words, when setting the performance for the first starting opening game time to be processed, if the continuous performance flag is already ON, it means that the continuous performance pattern has already been set for the first starting opening game time to be processed. This is the case when it is set. Therefore, in that case, the continuous performance flag is turned OFF and the high-frequency support mode A performance pattern setting process is immediately terminated.

In step Sg3104, if it is determined that the next game round is not the first starting slot game round (Sg3104: NO), the process advances to step Sg3108. In step Sg3108, a process for setting a performance pattern for high-frequency support mode A first starting port missing (in the diagram, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for high support mode A first starting port missing) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first opening game round in the high-frequency support mode A is a loss. Details of the effects set in the process of setting the effects pattern for missing the first starting port in high-frequency support mode A will be described later. After executing step Sg3108, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg3103, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg3103: YES), the process advances to step Sg3109. In step Sg3109, a process for setting a performance pattern for high-frequency support mode A first starting opening jackpot (in the figure, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for high support mode A first starting opening jackpot) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first opening game round in the high-frequency support mode A is a jackpot. The details of the performance set in the setting process of the high-frequency support mode A first starting opening jackpot performance pattern will be described later. After executing step Sg3109, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg3101, if it is determined that the game time to be processed is not the first starting opening game time (Sg3101: NO), the process advances to step Sg3110. In step Sg3110, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot.

In step Sg3110, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg3110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3111.

In step Sg3111, a setting process for a performance pattern for high frequency support mode A second starting opening jackpot (in the figure, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for high support mode A second starting opening jackpot) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting slot game round in the high-frequency support mode A is a jackpot. The details of the performance set in the high frequency support mode A second starting opening jackpot performance pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg3111, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

In step Sg3110, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a loss (Sg3110: NO), the process advances to step Sg3112.

In step Sg3112, a process for setting a performance pattern for high-frequency support mode A second starting opening deviation (in the diagram, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for high support mode A second starting opening deviation) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting opening game round in the high-frequency support mode A is a loss. The details of the effects set in the process of setting the effects pattern for missing the second starting port in high-frequency support mode A will be described later. After executing step Sg3112, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A is ended.

Next, the performance pattern in the game round of high-frequency support mode A will be explained.

FIG. 390 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the effect pattern in the first starting opening game round of high-frequency support mode A. First, performance patterns other than the continuous performance described above will be explained, and then, with reference to FIG. 391, a performance pattern of continuous performance will be explained.

FIG. 390(a) and FIG. 390(b) show the state of the performance pattern immediately after the first start opening game round in the high frequency support mode A is started. As shown in the figure, in the first starting game game of high-frequency support mode A, a battle effect is executed, and a turtle character representing the player's side and an octopus character representing the enemy side are fighting. is displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in the figure, at this time, the main display area MA is displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbols are changing. As mentioned above, the first starting slot game round in the high-frequency support mode A is a gaming round that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second starting slot playing round in the high-frequency support mode A. Immediately after the starting opening game round is started, the octopus representing the enemy side attacks the turtle representing the player side, suggesting that the player side is in a disadvantageous situation.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is a loss, as shown in FIG. will be displayed. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the failure is stopped and displayed. The high support A first starting opening performance pattern suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous situation and also suggests that the player has lost. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 390(a) → FIG. 390(b) → FIG. 390(c) is an example of the effect pattern for high support A first starting opening deviation shown in step Sg3108 of FIG. 389.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot A, as shown in FIGS. 390(d) and 390(e), the camera indicating the player side is The display screen 41a shows how the player withstood the attack of the octopus representing the enemy and maintained its current state. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating jackpot A is stopped and displayed. The fact that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot A means that the current gaming state (high-frequency support mode A) is set for the next game after the end of the relevant game round. This means that it is maintained even in times. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 390(d) and 390(e), if the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot A, the current gaming state Execute a performance that suggests that has been maintained.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot B, as shown in FIGS. 390(f) and 390(g), the camera indicating the player side is The display screen 41a shows how the player withstood the attack of the octopus representing the enemy, and then the turtle representing the player attacked the enemy and won. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the jackpot B is stopped and displayed. The fact that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot B means that in the next and subsequent game rounds, the game state will be more advantageous than the current game state (high-frequency support mode A). It means to move to. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 390(f) and 390(g), if the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot B, the current gaming state A performance suggesting a transition to a more advantageous gaming state is executed.

Figure 390(a) → Figure 390(b) → Figure 390(d) → Figure 390(e), and Figure 390(a) → Figure 390(b) → Figure 390(f) → Figure 390(g). The performance pattern shown is an example of the high support A first starting opening jackpot performance pattern shown in step Sg3109 of FIG. 389.

In addition, as described above, in the first starting slot game run executed in the high-frequency support mode A, the variable time is set using the same variable time table regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Therefore, the execution time of the effect explained in FIG. 390 is also set regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Further, in this modification, the variable time set for the first starting slot game time in the high-frequency support mode A is the same or substantially the same regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, the variation time set when the lottery result is a jackpot and the variation time set when the lottery result is a miss (reach occurrence and reach non-occurrence) are the same or approximately the same.

FIG. 391 is an explanatory diagram illustrating continuous performance in the first starting opening game round of high-frequency support mode A.

As described above, when the first starting opening game round is executed twice in a row in the high-frequency support mode A, the continuous performance is executed. In other words, among the game times (first starting hole game time and second starting hole game time) executed in high frequency support mode A, the first starting hole game time, which is a game time disadvantageous to the player, is played twice in a row. Therefore, the degree of disadvantage for the player is large compared to the case where the first starting slot game round and the second starting slot gaming round are executed alternately. Therefore, in the continuous performance, a performance that suggests that the degree of disadvantage for the player is large is executed across the two first starting opening game rounds. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 391(a) and 391(b), the octopus representing the enemy side is displayed larger, suggesting that the player is at a greater disadvantage. In the continuous performance, the performance pattern shown in Fig. 391(a) → Fig. 391(b) is executed in the first of the two first starting opening game times, and the main display area MA at the upper right side corresponds to the deviation. The LCD pattern will stop displaying.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first starting slot game round is a loss, as shown in FIG. 391(c), the display screen 41a will show that the turtle representing the player side is defeated. Ru. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating that the winning lottery result in the second first starting opening game round is a loss is displayed in a stopped state. do.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first starting slot game round is jackpot A, as shown in FIGS. The display screen 41a shows how the user withstood the attack of the octopus and maintained the current state. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first starting slot game round is a jackpot A stops. indicate.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first starting slot game round is jackpot B, as shown in FIGS. The display screen 41a shows how the turtle, representing the player, withstood the attack of the octopus shown and then attacked the enemy and won. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first starting slot game round is a jackpot B stops. indicate.

In this way, when the first opening game round is executed twice in a row in high-frequency support mode A, a continuous performance that suggests that the degree of disadvantage for the player is large is executed as a specific performance. be done. Executing this kind of continuous performance gives the player a sense of urgency and crisis, and if the player wins the jackpot B in the second first starting slot game, the player will receive a big It can give a sense of accomplishment.

In addition, in the case where a continuous performance is executed, the fluctuation time of the first first starting opening game time and the second first starting opening gaming time among the first starting opening gaming times that are executed twice consecutively. is the same as the method of setting the variable time in the first opening game round in the high-frequency support mode A. In other words, the variable time of the first starting slot game in which the continuous performance is executed is determined by using the same variable time table (fluctuating time table for the first starting slot at high support A time) regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Set. In addition, in this modification, the variable time set for the first starting slot game that is executed twice consecutively in the high-frequency support mode A is the same or approximately the same regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. It is. Specifically, the variation time set when the lottery result of the first starting slot game is a jackpot and the variation time set when it is a miss (reach occurrence and reach non-occurrence) are the same or almost the same. be.

FIG. 392 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the performance pattern in the second starting opening game round of high-frequency support mode A.

FIG. 392(a) and FIG. 392(b) show the performance pattern immediately after the second starting opening game round in the high-frequency support mode A is started. As shown in the figure, in the second starting game round of high-frequency support mode A, a battle effect is executed, and a turtle character representing the player's side and an octopus character representing the enemy side are fighting. is displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in the figure, at this time, the main display area MA is displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbols are changing. As mentioned above, the second starting slot game round in high-frequency support mode A is a gaming round that is more advantageous for the player than the first starting slot gaming round in high-frequency support mode A. Immediately after the start of the mouth game round, the turtle representing the player side attacks the octopus representing the enemy side, suggesting that the player side is in an advantageous situation.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is a loss, as shown in FIG. 392(c), the turtle representing the player side attacks the octopus representing the enemy side. The appearance of being defeated and defeated is displayed on the display screen 41a. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the failure is stopped and displayed. In the high support A second starting opening performance pattern, it is suggested that the player is in an advantageous situation, and then it is suggested that the player has lost. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 392(a) → FIG. 392(b) → FIG. 392(c) is an example of the effect pattern for high support A second starting opening deviation shown in step Sg3112 of FIG. 389.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot B, as shown in FIGS. 392(d) and 392(e), the camera indicating the player side is The player attacks the octopus representing the enemy side, and thereafter, a state in which the turtle representing the player has won against the octopus representing the enemy side is displayed on the display screen 41a. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the jackpot B is stopped and displayed. The fact that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot B means that in the next and subsequent game rounds, the game state will be more advantageous than the current game state (high-frequency support mode A). It means to move to. Therefore, if the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting slot game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot B, an effect is performed that suggests a transition to a gaming state more advantageous than the current gaming state. . In addition, in the seventh embodiment and this modification, since jackpot A is not set as the jackpot type when winning a jackpot in the second starting slot game round, jackpot A is not set in the case where jackpot A is won in the second starting slot gaming round. The production pattern for each case is not provided as a structure.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 392(a) → FIG. 392(b) → FIG. 392(d) → FIG. This is an example.

Note that, as described above, the variable time set for the second starting slot game time in the high-frequency support mode A differs depending on the lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, the fluctuation time table is referred to in the fluctuation time setting process depending on whether the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, a loss (reach occurrence), or a loss (reach non-occurrence). are different (see Figure 385). In this modification, the variation time (or average value of variation time) set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot is the longest, and the variation time set when the lottery result is a hit (reach occurrence) is the second longest. (or the average value of the fluctuation time) is long and the fluctuation time (or the average value of the fluctuation time) set is the shortest when there is an outlier (reach non-occurrence).

The performance pattern in the game round of high-frequency support mode A has been described above.

<Production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode B>
Next, the production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode B will be explained. The production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode B is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Sg2905) of the production pattern setting process.

FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode B. In step Sg3201, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is the first starting opening game round. In step Sg3201, if it is determined that the game time to be processed is the first starting opening game time (Sg3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3202. In step Sg3202, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot.

In step Sg3202, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg3202: YES), the process advances to step Sg3203. In step Sg3203, a setting process for a performance pattern for a high frequency support mode B first starting opening jackpot (in the figure, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for a high support mode B first starting opening jackpot) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round in the high-frequency support mode B is a jackpot. Also in high-frequency support mode B, as in high-frequency support mode A, the first starting slot game round is more disadvantageous for the player than the second starting slot playing round. Therefore, when the type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the performance pattern of the high-frequency support mode A first starting opening game, for example, Fig. 390(a) -> Fig. 390(b) -> Fig. 390(d) )→The effect pattern shown in FIG. 390(e) is set. Further, when the type of the jackpot is jackpot B, for example, the effect pattern of FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(f)→FIG. 390(g) is set. After executing step Sg3203, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B is ended.

In step Sg3202, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is not a jackpot (Sg3202: NO), the process advances to step Sg3204. In step Sg3204, a process for setting a production pattern for high frequency support mode B first starting port missing (in the diagram, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for high support mode B first starting port missing) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting slot game round in the high-frequency support mode B is a loss. The performance pattern set in this process is the same as the performance pattern of the first starting opening game in high-frequency support mode A, for example, the performance shown in FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(c). A pattern is set. After executing step Sg3204, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B is ended.

In step Sg3201, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the first starting slot game round (Sg3201: NO), the process advances to step Sg3205. In step Sg3205, it is determined whether the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot.

In step Sg3205, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a jackpot (Sg3205: YES), the process advances to step Sg3206.

In step Sg3206, a process for setting a performance pattern for high frequency support mode B second starting opening jackpot (in the figure, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for high support mode B second starting opening jackpot) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting opening game round in the high-frequency support mode B is a jackpot.

Also in high-frequency support mode B, as in high-frequency support mode A, the second starting slot game round is more advantageous for the player than the first starting slot playing round. Therefore, when the type of the jackpot is jackpot B, the performance pattern of the high-frequency support mode A second starting opening game, for example, Fig. 392(a) → Fig. 392(b) → Fig. 392(d) )→The effect pattern shown in FIG. 392(e) is set. After executing step Sg3206, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B is ended.

In step Sg3205, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round to be processed is a loss (Sg3205: NO), the process advances to step Sg3207.

In step Sg3207, a process for setting a performance pattern for high-frequency support mode B second starting port missing (in the diagram, it is expressed as a setting process for a performance pattern for high support mode B second starting port missing) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of performance to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting opening game round in the high-frequency support mode B is a loss. The performance pattern set in this process is the same as the performance pattern of the high-frequency support mode A second starting opening game, for example, the performance shown in FIG. 392(a)→FIG. 392(b)→FIG. 392(c). A pattern is set. After executing step Sg3207, the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B is ended.

As explained above, in this modification, the fluctuation time table used to determine the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game run executed in the high-frequency support mode A is the winning lottery for the first starting slot gaming run. Since the same variable time table (fluctuating time table for the first starting opening at high support mode A) is used regardless of the lottery result, in the state of high frequency support mode A, compared to the second starting opening gaming time, the It is possible to avoid drawing attention to the disadvantageous lottery result of the first starting slot game round, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's sense of expectation due to the execution of the first starting slot gaming round.

More specifically, in the low frequency support mode, when determining the variable time in the first starting slot game round, a different variable time table is used for each lottery result of the winning lottery, and in the high frequency support mode A, When determining the variable time in the first starting slot game round, the same variable time table is used regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the variable time is changed for each lottery result of the first starting slot game, whereas in the high-frequency support mode A, the fluctuation time is changed depending on the lottery result of the first starting slot game. There should be no change in the variable time. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the degree to which the lottery result of the first opening slot game is drawn to attention between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A. In the low-frequency support mode, since the variable time is changed for each winning lottery result in the first opening game round, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the lottery result. In the high-frequency support mode A, since there is no change in the variable time regardless of the result of the winning lottery in the first opening game round, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the lottery result. Therefore, between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to change the degree of attention of the player regarding the first opening game round, and to reduce the degree of attention and expectations of the player toward the game. Can be suppressed. In addition, in high-frequency support mode A, the attention level of the winning lottery result of the first starting slot game round which is not advantageous to the player is lowered, and the attention level of the winning lottery result of the second starting opening gaming round that is advantageous to the player is lowered. can be raised. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode A, when determining the variable time in the first starting slot game round, the same variable time table is used regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery, so the variable time varies depending on the lottery result of the winning lottery. Compared to the case where the variation time is determined using a variation time table, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the variation time table and to simplify the processing when determining the variation time.

In high-frequency support mode A, there is a high frequency in which the player is reminded that the first starting slot game round is more disadvantageous than the second starting slot gaming round, and the player may lower expectations. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress a decrease in the player's expectations regarding the execution of the first opening game round in the high-frequency support mode A. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the period during which the first starting slot game is executed (that is, the variable time) is relatively shorter than the period during which the second starting opening gaming session is executed (variable time). In the high-frequency support mode A, the player's attention is focused on executing the second starting slot game time rather than executing the first starting slot game time. That is, by configuring the high-frequency support mode A so that the player feels that the fluctuation time of the first starting opening game time is short and that the fluctuation time of the second starting opening gaming time is long, the high-frequency support mode It is possible to suppress a decline in the player's expectations during the entire period of support mode A.

In this modification, as one form thereof, in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game times is changed so that it is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting slot gaming times. Determine the time. That is, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game actually executed in the high-frequency support mode A is the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting slot gaming actually executed in the high-frequency support mode A. Configure it so that it is shorter than . For example, there are four variable time tables used in the variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A (variable time table for the first starting opening at high support A, variable time table for the second starting opening jackpot at high support A, and variable time table for the second starting opening jackpot at high support A, Record and set according to the value of the random number (variation type counter CS) in the variable time table for occurrence of reach at the second starting port and the variable time table for non-reach at the second starting port at high support A (see Figure 385). The average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) is, from the longest one, the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening jackpot when the support is high A, and the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening reach occurrence when the support is high A. , a variable time table for second starting port reach non-occurrence at high support A, and a variable time table for first starting port at high support A may be arranged in this order.

In addition, in high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game round where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot is the fluctuation time of the second starting slot gaming round when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot. Alternatively, in high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game in which the winning lottery result is a loss (reach occurrence) may be shorter than the average value of the winning lottery. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the result of the winning lottery is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting slot game in which the result is a loss (reach occurs), or in high-frequency support mode A, the result of the winning lottery is a loss (a reach occurs). Adopts a configuration in which the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game round where the winning lottery result is a loss (no reach occurrence) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting slot gaming round where the winning lottery result is a failure (no reach occurrence). Alternatively, a configuration having all of these features may be adopted.

For example, in this modification, there is one variable time table used when setting the variable time of the first starting slot game in high-frequency support mode A, but the lottery result of the winning lottery for the first starting slot gaming time is Different variable time tables may be used for each time. That is, the configuration includes a variable time table for first starting opening jackpot at high support A, a variable time table for first starting opening reach occurrence at high support A, and a variable time table for first starting opening reach non-occurrence at high support A. do. Then, the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the fluctuation time table for the first starting opening jackpot at high support A time is the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening jackpot at high support A time. A configuration may be adopted in which the average value of the fluctuation times (or information corresponding to the fluctuation times) recorded in the above is shorter than the average value. In addition, the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the fluctuation time table for 1st starting mouth reach occurrence at high support A is the fluctuation for 2nd starting mouth reach occurrence at high support A. A configuration that is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times (or information corresponding to the fluctuation times) recorded in the time table may be adopted. Furthermore, the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the fluctuation time table for non-occurrence of first starting port reach at high support A is A configuration may be adopted in which the average value of the fluctuation times (or information corresponding to the fluctuation times) recorded in the usage fluctuation time table is shorter than the average value.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from decreasing during the period in which the first starting slot game round is being executed. Then, the degree of attention of the winning lottery result in the first opening game round, which is not advantageous for the player, is lowered relative to the attention level of the winning lottery result in the second starting opening gaming round, which is advantageous for the player, Conversely, the degree of attention of the winning lottery result in the second starting slot game round, which is advantageous to the player, is increased relative to the attention level of the winning lottery result in the first starting slot gaming round, which is not advantageous to the player. be able to.

Furthermore, in this modification, in the high-frequency support mode A, an effect in which an octopus attacks a turtle is executed in the first starting opening game round, and an effect in which a turtle attacks an octopus in the second starting opening game round is executed. , it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which of the first starting slot game round and the second starting slot game round is being executed, and to assist the player in understanding the flow of the game. I can do it.

In addition, in high-frequency support mode A, in the first starting game round, an octopus representing the enemy side attacks a turtle representing the player side, thereby suggesting that the player side is in a disadvantageous situation, In the second starting opening game round, the player side is suggested to be in an advantageous situation by executing a performance in which the turtle representing the player side attacks the octopus representing the enemy side. By executing such an effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game round being executed is a game round that is advantageous to the player or a game time that is disadvantageous to the player, This can further assist the player in understanding the flow of the game.

Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode B, when the first starting opening game round is executed, an effect indicating that there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state more disadvantageous than the current gaming state (Fig. 390(a) ) → Figure 390(b) → Figure 390(d) → Performance pattern of Figure 390(e) / Figure 390(a) → Figure 390(b) → Figure 390(f) → Performance pattern of Figure 390(g)) This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the game round to be executed will be advantageous or disadvantageous in complexly changing gaming conditions, further aiding the player's understanding of the flow of the game. can do.

In addition, in high-frequency support mode A, when the first starting opening game is executed twice in a row, a continuous performance is executed as a specific performance, so for a player who has recognized the execution of a specific performance, It can make players aware that an event with a low probability has occurred, such as a game ball entering the first starting hole twice in a row, and arouses the player's curiosity about the occurrence of an event with a low probability of occurring. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the specific performance is not limited to continuous performance, and a configuration may be adopted in which a performance with a performance pattern set is executed every two first starting opening game times. Further, a specific performance may be executed in at least one of the two first starting opening game times.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the first symbol is a special symbol (a symbol that changes when the ball enters the starting hole), and the second symbol is a normal symbol (an electric accessory opening lottery, an electric accessory opening lottery A normal symbol may be used as the first symbol, and a special symbol may be employed as the second symbol. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the first type ball entering means is the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b), and the second type ball entering means is the second starting port 34. , a configuration may be adopted in which the first type ball entering means is the second starting port 34, and the second type ball entering means is the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b).

In addition, in this modification, when the first starting slot game round is executed in high-frequency support mode A, the variable time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, and the variable time set when the lottery result is a jackpot. As a configuration in which the set variable time is the same or substantially the same, in the high-frequency support mode A, the variable time when the first starting slot game is executed is independent of the lottery result of the winning lottery. First, we adopted a configuration in which the variable time is set by referring to the same variable time table, but when the first opening slot game is executed in high-frequency support mode A, if the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, Any configuration may be adopted as long as the variation time to be set and the variation time to be set in the case of an error are the same or substantially the same.

For example, when the first starting slot game is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, a variable time table is prepared to be referred to according to the lottery result of the winning lottery. Specifically, we prepare a fluctuation time table for jackpots, a fluctuation time table for misses (reach occurrence), and a fluctuation time table for misses (reach non-occurrence), and calculate the fluctuation times ( Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the information corresponding to the variable time (or information corresponding to the variable time) is the same or substantially the same between the variable time tables. In addition, when in high-frequency support mode A, the variable time when the first starting slot game is executed is always the same variable time (variable time with a constant value) regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. A configuration may also be adopted. Specifically, only one value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) of the first starting slot game time in high frequency support mode A is stored, and the value of any first starting slot gaming time is stored. You may adopt a configuration in which one stored fluctuation time is set for the fluctuation time, or one fluctuation time table is prepared, and the fluctuation time (or fluctuation time) stored in the fluctuation time table is set. A configuration may be adopted in which all the information (information corresponding to time) are the same or substantially the same.

In this modification, a configuration is adopted in which a continuous performance is executed as a specific performance when the first starting opening game is executed two or more times in succession in the high-frequency support mode A, but other configurations are also adopted. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the second starting opening game round is executed two or more times in succession in the high-frequency support mode A, a continuous performance is executed as a specific performance. In this case, it is advantageous for the player to continuously execute the second starting opening game in high-frequency support A, so for example, as a continuous effect, the turtle representing the player's side may change to an octopus representing the enemy's side. A configuration that executes an attacking performance may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<H>> Eighth embodiment:
《H1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 394 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as the eighth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 395 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 396 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided approximately at the center of the game board 30, and the main display section 45 is provided near the upper right of the game board 30 when viewed from the front. A decorative frame member DF whose surface is decorated is attached to the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 40.

In the space sandwiched between the portion from the upper side to the right side of the decorative frame member DF, the outer rail portion 31b, and the main display portion 45, a first right-handed rail R1 and a second right-handed rail R2 are provided. It is provided. On the right side of the lower portion of the second right-handed rail R2, a right-handed outer rail R3 is provided. The first right-handed hitting rail R1 and the second right-handed hitting rail R2 form a right-handed hitting first passage P1. The second right-handed hitting rail R2, the outer rail portion 31b, the main display portion 45, and the right-handed hitting outer rail R3 form a second passage P2 for right-handed hitting. Both the first passage P1 for right-handed hitting and the second passage P2 for right-handed hitting are formed in a substantially arc shape, and the first passage P1 for right-handed hitting is located inside the second passage P2 for right-handed hitting. Both the opening end P1a on one side of the first passage P1 and the opening end P2a on one side of the second passage P2 are located near the top of the gaming area PA, and game balls can enter therein. The opening end P1b on the other side of the first passage P1 and the opening end P2b on the other side of the second passage P2 are both located near the right side of the gaming area PA, and can send game balls toward the variable winning device 36. .

As explained earlier, by maximizing the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 (Fig. 394) or by operating the game ball launch button 26 (Fig. 394), the game ball can be moved to the right side of the game area PA. In these operations, the game ball can be guided to the second path P2 when the ball is hit to the right. On the other hand, by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 (FIG. 394) from the maximum to the direction of decreasing, it is possible to guide the game ball to the first path P1 when hitting right. Hereinafter, the second passage P2 for right-handed hitting will be referred to as "strong right-handed hitting passage P2", and the first passage P1 for right-handed hitting will be referred to as "weak right-handed hitting passage P1". The operation of guiding the game ball to the hard right hitting path P2, that is, maximizing the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 (Fig. 394) or operating the game ball firing button 26 (Fig. 394) The operation of guiding the game ball to the weak right-hand hitting path P1 is called the "weak right-hand hitting operation."

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 395).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter, and is provided below the first starting port 33. That is, the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are arranged side by side so that the first starting port 33 is located above the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 is provided below the lower opening end P1b of the weak right-handed hitting path P1 and the lower opening end P2b of the strong right-handed hitting path P2, and has a big winning opening 36a and a big winning opening 36a. It includes an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing, and a V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v. Specifically, the big prize opening 36a is located vertically below the lower opening end P1b of the weak right-handed game path P1 and the lower opening end P2b of the strong right-handed game path P2. Therefore, the game balls flowing out from each opening end P1b, P2b fall toward the big prize opening 36a.

The big prize opening 36a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is formed into a rectangular shape in this embodiment.

The opening/closing door 36b is a lid having a rectangular parallelepiped shape when viewed from the front, which is one size larger than the grand prize opening 36a, and is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the grand prize opening 36a. When a jackpot is won as a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state by rotating the upper side toward the front side about the lower edge as an axis. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on winning into the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which it is possible to enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. .

The V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v is a device that distributes the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 36a into the V winning zone FV and the non-V winning zone FNV. The V winning zone FV is an area where the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends can be shifted to the high probability mode when a game ball enters the ball. The non-V winning zone FNV is an outlier area in which it is impossible to shift to the high probability mode. The game ball that has passed through the V winning zone FV or the non-V winning zone FNV is then sent to the back side of the game board 30. The distribution is made according to the skill of the player, and if the skill is high, it becomes possible to send the game ball to the V winning zone FV.

In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71 (FIG. 395). That is, the same 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters, regardless of whether they are distributed to the V winning zone FV or the non-V winning zone FNV. Note that the number of game balls put out by the payout device 71 may be different depending on whether the ball enters the V winning zone FV or the non-V winning zone FNV. Below the V-winning zone FV, the letter "V" is engraved to indicate that the V-winning zone FV is located at this position. The detailed configuration of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v will be described later.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are discharged through a discharge passage provided on the back side of the gaming board 30. The discharge passageway is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to know the number of game balls fired onto the game board 30.

The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. In a round game, the door opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning in the first starting hole 33, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a predetermined display accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning in the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 397 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 397(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 397(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 397(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 397(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 397(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol On either one of the display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on a winning in either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a predetermined information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 397(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

<<H2>> Configuration of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v:
FIG. 398 is an explanatory diagram showing the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v. In the figure, the X-axis positive direction indicates the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis positive direction indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the Z-axis positive direction indicates the front side of the game board 30. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the right and left directions of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis direction indicates the up-down direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front-back direction of the game board 30. The X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are three axes that are orthogonal to each other. Hereinafter, the positive direction of the X-axis will be referred to as the "+X direction," the negative direction of the X-axis will be referred to as the "-X direction," the positive direction of the Y-axis will be referred to as the "+Y direction," and the negative direction of the Y-axis will be referred to as the "-Y direction." The positive Z-axis direction is called the "+Z direction," and the negative Z-axis direction is called the "-Z direction."

The V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v includes a first passage 210, a croon 220, a second passage 300, and a non-V winning opening shutter 350. The first passage 210 and the second passage 300 are made of transparent or translucent resin members.

The first passage 210 has a ball entry port 210a at the end on the +Y direction side, and a ball ejection port 210b at the end on the opposite side from the ball entry port 210a, from the ball entry port 210a to the ball ejection port 210b. This is a passageway through which game balls can be distributed. The first passage 210 has a bent shape in the middle.

A first passageway upstream portion 211 that is upstream of the bent portion of the first passageway 210 extends along the Y-axis direction when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. The ball entrance 210a located at the upper end of the first passage upstream part 211 communicates with the big prize opening 36a, and the first passage upstream part 211 communicates with the big prize opening 36a. In FIG. 398, the first passage upstream portion 211 is shown by a broken line, but this is because the above-mentioned portion is located on the back side (-Z direction side) of the surface where the big prize opening 36a is formed in the Z-axis direction. This is because the portion indicated by the broken line is formed. Note that the ball entry port 210a is located in the −Y direction, that is, vertically downward, with respect to the lower opening end P1b of the weak right-handed ball passage P1.

The first passage downstream part 212, which is downstream of the bent part in the first passage 210, extends from the bent part toward the lower left direction (that is, the -X direction and the -Y direction) when viewed from the front. In a right side view, it extends from the bent portion toward the front and lower (that is, the +Z direction and the −Y direction). The game ball that enters the ball entrance 210a from the big prize opening 36a passes through the first passage upstream part 211, then passes through the first passage downstream part 212, and passes through the first passage downstream part 212. The bulb is discharged from the end of the bulb outlet 210b.

A croon 220 is arranged on the -Y direction side of the first passage 210. The croon 220 is made of a metal member. The croon 220 has a dish shape with an inner wall 220a that slopes downward while decreasing in diameter toward the bottom, and has one hole 220b bored in the bottom. The game ball falling from the ball outlet 210b is received by the croon 220, flows down while going around the inner wall 220a, and flows into the hole 220b. In this way, the clone 220 can park the received game ball for a certain period of time. Note that by observing the flow of the game balls inside the clone 220, the player can measure the timing at which the game balls flow into the hole 220b.

The second passage 300 includes a main line passage part 310, a communication passage part 320 for communicating between the hole 220b of the croon 220 and the main line passage part 310, and a branch passage part 330 branched from the main line passage part 310. Be prepared.

The main passageway section 310 has a ball entry port 310a at the end on the +Y direction side and a ball discharge port 310b at the end on the -Y direction side, allowing game balls to flow from the ball entry port 310a to the ball discharge port 310b. It is a passageway. The main line passage section 310 is divided into a main line passage upstream section 311 located on the upstream side, a main line passage midstream section 312 located on the midstream side, and a main line passage downstream section 313 located on the downstream side.

The main passageway upstream portion 311 extends along the Y-axis direction when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. The ball entrance 310a located at the upper end of the main line passageway upstream part 311 communicates with the big prize opening 36a, and the main line passageway upstream part 311 communicates with the big prize mouth 36a. In FIG. 398, a part of the main line passage upstream part 311 is shown by a broken line, but this is on the back side (-Z direction side) of the surface where the big prize opening 36a is formed in the Z-axis direction. This is because a part of it is formed. Note that the ball entry port 310a is located in the -Y direction, that is, vertically downward, with respect to the lower opening end P2b of the hard right-handed ball passage P2.

The main passageway midstream portion 312 is a portion following the main passageway upstream portion 311, and extends from the upstream side toward the downstream side in the lower left direction (that is, the -X direction and the -Y direction).

The downstream side portion 313 of the main line passage is a portion following the midstream side portion 312 of the main line passage, extends along the Y-axis direction, and has a ball outlet 310b at the end on the −Y direction side. The position of the main line passage downstream part 313 is determined such that the central axis direction of the main line passage downstream part 313 coincides with the central axis direction of the hole 220b of the croon 220.

The communication passage section 320 extends along the Y-axis direction, and the end on the +Y direction side is connected to the hole 220b of the croon 220, and the end on the -Y direction side is connected to the main line passage section 310. As a result, a flow path for game balls along the Y-axis direction is formed from the hole 220b of the croon 220 to the ball outlet 310b of the downstream portion 313 of the main passageway.

The branch passage section 330 is connected to the boundary between the main passage midstream section 312 and the main passage downstream section 313, and has a bent shape in the middle. By this bent portion, the branch passage section 330 is divided into a branch passage upstream part 331 located on the upstream side and a branch passage downstream part 332 located on the downstream side.

The branch passage upstream portion 331 extends in the same direction as the main passage midstream portion 312. The downstream portion 332 of the branch passage extends along the Y-axis direction and has a ball outlet 330b at the end on the -Y direction side.

In this embodiment, the area around the ball outlet 310b of the main passageway section 310 is defined as the previously explained non-V winning zone FNV, and the area around the ball outlet 330b of the branch passageway section 330 is defined as the previously explained V winning zone FNV. It is stipulated in A game ball that passes through the non-V winning zone FNV and enters the ball opening 310b, and a game ball that passes through the V winning zone FV and enters the ball opening 330b are sent to the back side of the game board 30.

The non-V winning opening shutter 350 is provided at the upper end (+Y-axis direction end) of the main line passage downstream part 313, and allows game balls to enter the main line passage downstream part 313 when it is in an open state. In the closed state, game balls are prohibited from entering the downstream side portion 313 of the main passageway. Therefore, when the non-V winning port shutter 350 is in the open state, the game balls that have flowed to the upper end of the main line passage downstream part 313 are distributed to the main line passage downstream part 313 and are transferred to the non-V winning zone FNV. Sent. When the non-V winning port shutter 350 is in the closed state, the game balls that have flowed to the upper end of the downstream side portion 313 of the main path are distributed to the branch path section 330 and sent to the V winning zone FV.

In this embodiment, only the first passage 210 and the second passage 300 are connected to the big prize opening 36a. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the big prize opening 36a are sent to either the first passage 210 or the second passage 300. Specifically, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the entrance 210a of the first passage 210 is located vertically below the opening end P1b of the weak right-handed passage P1, so that the ball is sent from the weak right-handed passage P1 and wins the big prize. The game ball that enters the opening 36a is sent to the first passage 210 with a high probability. In a front view of the game board 30, since the entrance 310a of the second passage 300 is located vertically below the opening end P2b on the lower side of the hard right-handed ball passage P2, the ball is sent from the hard right-handed passage P2 to the big winning opening 36a. The game ball that enters is sent to the second passage 300 with a high probability.

A detection sensor SP1 for detecting game balls (hereinafter referred to as the first passage detection sensor) is provided near the ball entrance 210a of the first passage 210. It is possible to detect when a game ball enters the ball. A detection sensor SP2 for detecting game balls (hereinafter referred to as a second passage detection sensor) is provided near the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300. It is possible to detect when a game ball enters the ball. A detection sensor (hereinafter referred to as V winning zone detection sensor) SP3 that detects game balls is provided near the ball outlet 330b of the branching passage section 330 in the second passage 300, and by the V winning zone detection sensor SP3, Entry of a game ball into the V winning zone FV can be detected.

Detection signals from each detection sensor SP1 to SP3 are sent to the main controller 60 (FIG. 395). The main controller 60 (FIG. 395) determines the opening/closing timing of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 based on the detection signal of the first path detection sensor SP1 and the detection signal of the second path detection sensor SP2. The opening/closing of the mouth shutter 350 is instructed. In addition, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning zone FV from the detection signal of the V winning zone detection sensor SP3, the main control device 60 (FIG. 395) controls the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Processing is performed to shift the lottery mode to the high probability mode. These processes performed by the main controller 60 will be described in detail later.

《H3》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 399 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing data. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to an input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 395) is turned off. do.

Further, the input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a game ball detection sensor provided at each ball entrance. Specifically, a first starting port detection sensor 67b that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 33, and a second starting port detection sensor 67c that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 34. , a through gate detection sensor 67d that detects a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35, and detection sensors SP1 to SP3 provided in the above-mentioned V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v are connected. Of the detection sensors SP1 to SP3 provided in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v, the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2 also function as sensors that detect the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 36a. . Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the starting hole or the winning hole, and whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether it has passed or not. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do. Also, based on the entry of the ball into the first passage 210 and the entry into the second passage 300 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v, the opening and closing of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is controlled.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable prize drive part 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive part 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , a non-V winning a prize opening shutter drive section 36d that opens and closes the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350, and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed. In addition, in the first round of the opening/closing execution mode, the drive control of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter drive unit 36d is executed so that the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is opened and closed. The drive control of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter drive section 36d will be described in detail later.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 when a ball entering the big prize opening 36a is specified. Ru. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, when the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is the maximum. Game balls are fired at the front of the game board with the same firing intensity.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 400 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is stored in the pending information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reservation area Ra in chronological order. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 397(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the . For example, if C4=0 or 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 compares the game ball with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. The success/failure table of , and the success/failure table for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

FIG. 401 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. FIG. 401(a) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 401(b) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 401(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 401(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 402 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. FIG. 402(a) shows a pass/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 402(b) shows a pass/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 402(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 402(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

"Small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode)

As a mode of opening/closing control of the non-V winning hole shutter 350 of the V winning challenge mechanism section 36 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing of the non-V winning hole shutter 350 of the V winning challenge mechanism section 36 included in the variable winning device 36 is performed. A plurality of types of patterns (hereinafter also simply referred to as "opening/closing patterns") may be provided, and one or more types of opening/closing patterns may be set for each type of jackpot. The difficulty of entering the game ball into the V winning zone FV in the V winning challenge mechanism section 36v can be adjusted by the opening/closing pattern of the non-V winning opening shutter 350. In this embodiment, the following three opening/closing patterns are prepared.

・V winning no-win closing/opening pattern that makes it virtually impossible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV.
- It is possible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV, but it is difficult to put the game ball in the V winning highly difficult closing/opening pattern.
- It is possible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV, and it is easier to put the game ball in the V winning low difficulty closed opening pattern than the V winning high difficulty closing pattern.

Specific aspects of each closing/opening pattern and allocation of the first to third closing/opening patterns to types of jackpots will be explained in detail later.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 403 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 403(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 403(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. An 8R first type jackpot and an 8R second type jackpot are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" correspond to the 8R first type jackpot, and "28 to 39" correspond to the 8R second type jackpot. It is set as follows.

In the 8R first type jackpot, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened 8 times (eight rounds), and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (eight rounds), and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (eight rounds). The mode of opening/closing control is a V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern or a V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern. Which of the V-winning high-difficulty close-open pattern and the V-winning low-difficulty close-open pattern is adopted is determined by parameters other than the jackpot type. In this embodiment, if the 8R first type jackpot is won during the low frequency support mode, the V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern is adopted. On the other hand, if the 8R type 1 jackpot is won during the high frequency support mode, the V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern is adopted. Then, when a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode.

In the 8R second type jackpot, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened 8 times (8 rounds), and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (eight rounds). The mode of opening/closing control is the V winning no winning closing/opening pattern. In addition, in the V winning no-win closing/opening pattern, as mentioned above, it is virtually impossible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV, so the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends has a high probability. However, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. Furthermore, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, an error message is displayed on the symbol display device 41 to notify that an error has occurred without changing to the high probability mode. It may also be a configuration. Since the possibility that a game ball enters the V winning zone FV due to fraud by a player cannot be denied, an error message is displayed. Furthermore, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, and an error message may be displayed. Note that the above-mentioned display of the error message can be replaced by generating a warning sound, and any means may be used as long as it can notify that an error has occurred. Furthermore, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the pachinko machine may be configured to stop operating.

In this way, when winning the first type jackpot, it becomes possible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV in the V winning challenge mechanism section 36. Therefore, when winning the first type jackpot, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player plays a game in which he tries to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36 while hitting right. is preferred. How to attempt to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV will be described later. On the other hand, if you win the second type jackpot, there is virtually no entry of the game ball into the V winning zone FV. A game is played by maximizing the amount or by operating the game ball firing button 26 (FIG. 394).

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. A 16R first type jackpot and an 8R second type jackpot are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" correspond to a 16R first type jackpot, and "28 to 39" correspond to an 8R second type jackpot. It is set as follows.

In the 16R first type jackpot, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened 16 times (16 rounds), and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 16 times (16 rounds). The mode of opening/closing control is a V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern or a V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern. Which of the V-winning high-difficulty close-open pattern and the V-winning low-difficulty close-open pattern is adopted is determined by parameters other than the jackpot type. In this embodiment, if the 16R first type jackpot is won during the low frequency support mode, the V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern is adopted. On the other hand, if the 16R type 1 jackpot is won during the high frequency support mode, the V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern is adopted. Then, when a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode.

As mentioned above, in the 8R second type jackpot, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened 8 times (8 rounds), and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (8 rounds), and the The mode of opening/closing control of the winning opening shutter 350 is the V winning no winning closing/opening pattern. In addition, in the V winning no-win closing/opening pattern, as mentioned above, it is virtually impossible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV, so the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends has a high probability. However, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is as follows: This is different from the case where a jackpot is achieved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In the present embodiment, one round is defined as one opening of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode, that is, from opening to closing of the opening/closing door 36b. On the other hand, as another aspect, an aspect may be adopted in which the opening/closing door 36b opens multiple times during one round.

In this embodiment, as explained earlier, three types of jackpots are prepared: 8R 1st type jackpot, 8R 2nd type jackpot, and 16R 1st type jackpot, and these are as described above. This is to provide a difference between the aspects or modes of (1) and (2) described above, and the support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. ), the structure did not make any difference. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a difference is also provided regarding (3). For example, for 8R type 1 jackpot and 16R type 1 jackpot, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode, and for the 8R type 2 jackpot, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-frequency support mode. It may also be configured in support mode.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball continues to be launched into the gaming area PA in the same manner. When compared, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low. can.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is different between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role is opened several times, the electric role is opened several times. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 404 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 404(a) shows a win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 404(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that becomes an electric accessory opening lottery. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 404(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 404(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

<<H4>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 405 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 399) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<H5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

The processing executed by the main control device 60 includes processing for controlling the opening and closing of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 that the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v has. First, an overview of this opening/closing control will be explained. Note that the configuration of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v is as described above using FIG. 398.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing control of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is based on a condition (hereinafter also referred to as a "closing condition") for shifting the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 from an open state to a closed state, and a condition for shifting the non-V winning a prize mouth shutter 350 from an open state to a closed state The conditions for transitioning from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions") are controlled according to an opening/closing scenario, which is a recorded program. Three types of opening/closing scenarios are available. Three types of opening/closing scenarios will be explained in order.

<First opening/closing scenario>
FIG. 406 is a timing chart for explaining the first opening/closing scenario. FIG. 406(a) shows temporal changes in the open and closed states of the opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big prize opening 36a. FIG. 406(b) shows temporal changes in the ON state and OFF state of the first passage detection sensor SP1. FIG. 406(c) shows temporal changes in the ON state and OFF state of the second passage detection sensor SP2. FIG. 406(d) shows temporal changes in the closed state and open state of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350.

In the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) in which no jackpot has been won, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is in an open state. During the low-frequency support mode, if the first type jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, but in this opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state and the first round game ( Hereinafter, the round (also simply referred to as the "first round") is started (time t1). In such an opening/closing execution mode, when the closing condition of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is satisfied, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. The closing conditions are as shown in (i) and (ii) below.

(i) The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is that the first round in the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
(ii) One game ball has entered the grand prize opening 36a since the first round has started, or two gaming balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a since the first round has started. What I did.
When both of the above two items are satisfied, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In this embodiment, the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 36a is detected using both the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2. That is, when the entry of a game ball is detected by either the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2, it is recognized that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening 36a. Therefore, in item (ii), "one game ball entered the big prize opening 36a" means "one game ball entered the big winning hole 36a" means "one game ball entered the big winning hole 36a" "The fact that two game balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a" means "the fact that two game balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a" means "the game ball that has been detected by both the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2. This means that the total number of balls is 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 406, the first round is started in the opening/closing execution mode at time t1, and from this starting time (time t1) as the starting point, the first passage detection sensor SP1 moves the player to the big prize opening 36a at time t2. The first ball entering the big prize opening 36a is detected, and at time t4, the second ball entering the big prize opening 36a is detected by the second path detection sensor SP2. At time t2 and time t4, both of the items (i) and (ii) are satisfied, and the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The conditions for opening the non-V winning opening shutter 350 are as follows.
- If the condition established in (ii) is that one game ball has entered the big prize opening 36a, then 0.06 seconds have elapsed with the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the closed state.
- If the condition established in (ii) is that two game balls have entered the big prize opening 36a, 0.2 seconds have elapsed with the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the closed state.
When either of the above two conditions is established, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the closed state to the open state (times t3, t5).

According to the above opening condition, when the condition established in (ii) is that one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a, the non-V winning hole shutter 350 is extremely short at 0.06 seconds. It will be closed for a limited time. With the closing time of 0.06 seconds, it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling into the downstream part 313 (FIG. 398) of the main passageway, and the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 essentially prevents the game ball from falling into the branch passageway. It cannot be guided to the part 330 (FIG. 398) side. That is, in this embodiment, even when one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a after the first round starts, the non-V winning hole shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. , the closing time is extremely short, and the configuration is such that the game balls cannot be guided to the branch passage section 330 side. In addition, in contrast to this configuration, as another form, when one game ball enters the grand prize opening 36a after the first round starts, it may be configured such that the transition to the closed state is not performed at all. .

According to the above opening conditions, when two game balls enter the big winning hole 36a, the non-V winning hole shutter 350 will be closed for 0.2 seconds. During this 0.2 seconds, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 can guide the game ball to the branch passage section 330 side. In addition, the closing time may be changed to 0.2 seconds and may be another time less than 0.4 seconds (for example, 0.3 seconds). The reason why the time is less than 0.4 seconds will be described later.

In this embodiment, the first opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 included in the main control board 61. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 reads out the first opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when the first type jackpot is won during the low frequency support mode, and the read first opening/closing scenario. Opening/closing control of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is performed according to the opening/closing scenario.

If a player wins a type 1 jackpot while hitting left-handed in the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) without winning a jackpot, the following ( By performing the operations in steps (a) and (b), it becomes possible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v.

(a) Adjust the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 (FIG. 394) (that is, perform a slight right-handed operation) and put one game ball into the weak right-handed passage P1 (FIG. 396).
The game ball that enters the weak right-handed path P1 passes through the first path 210 from the big prize opening 36a (FIG. 398) and is discharged from the ball outlet 210b. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 407, the game ball B1 discharged from the ball outlet 210b is received by the croon 220 and flows down while going around the inner wall 220a. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 408, the game ball B1 flows into the hole 220b. Note that the time for which the game ball is held in the clone 220 is extremely long, for example, several seconds to several tens of seconds, compared to 0.6 seconds, which is the game ball firing interval of the game ball firing mechanism 81.

(b) By maximizing the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 (Fig. 394) or by operating the game ball firing button 26 (Fig. 394) (that is, by performing a strong right-handed operation), Insert one game ball into the right-handed path P2.

According to the first opening/closing scenario, when two game balls enter the big winning hole 36a after the first round starts, the non-V winning hole shutter 350 shifts to the closed state in synchronization. The player determines that the timing at which the game ball B2 inserted into the hard right-handed ball passage P2 enters the second passage 300 is such that the game ball B1 inserted into the weak right-handed ball passage P1 flows into the hole 220b of the croon 220 due to (a). The timing of putting the game ball B2 into the hard right-handed ball path P2 is adjusted so as to match the timing when the game ball B2 is inserted into the hard right-hand hitting path P2 (see FIG. 408). To explain using FIG. 406, the game ball is hit hard right so that the period until the game ball that enters the first passage 210 detected at time t2 reaches the croon 220 matches the period from time t2 to time t4. The timing of putting the game ball B2 into the passage P2 is adjusted. In this way, by timing the transition of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. The non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 in the state prevents entry into the main line passage downstream part 313 and guides it to the branch passage part 330. As a result, it becomes possible to put the game ball B1 put into the weak right-handed path P1 into the V winning zone FV. The first opening/closing scenario configured as described above is for realizing the V winning high difficulty closing/closing pattern described above.

In the first opening/closing scenario, as mentioned above, in the first round, one game ball enters the weak right-handed hitting path P1, and then one game ball enters the strong right-handed hitting path P2, Although it is possible to aim for a ball entering the V-winning zone FV (V-winning), it is also possible to aim for a V-winning by other operations. Specifically, in the first round, you can also win a V prize by entering one game ball into the light right-handed hitting path P1, and then again by entering one game ball into the weak right-handed hitting path P1. You can aim.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 36a in the first round is through the hard right-handed hitting path P2, it is impossible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV. The structure is as follows. The reason why a game ball cannot be placed in the V winning zone FV is as follows.

The second passage 300 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v has an internal structure in which it takes 0.4 seconds from the time the ball enters the ball entrance 310a until it reaches the upper part of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350. Moreover, game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the game ball that first enters the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300, the next game ball that is fired enters the big winning opening 36a, and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 becomes closed. It will reach the position of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 earlier. Therefore, when the non-V winning port shutter 350 is in the closed state, the first game ball falls to the downstream part 313 of the main passageway and does not enter the V winning zone FV.

In addition, the second passage 300 has an internal structure in which it takes 0.4 seconds for the ball to reach the non-V winning port shutter 350 after entering the ball entrance 310a, and the closing time of the non-V winning port shutter 350 is shorter than the closing time of the non-V winning port shutter 350. is set to a time shorter than 0.4 seconds, such as 0.2 seconds, so the second game ball that enters the grand prize opening 36a will win a non-V prize by entering the game ball. The mouth shutter 350 is shifted to the closed state and the ball does not enter the V winning zone FV. In this way, in this embodiment, it is not possible to aim for a V prize just by continuously entering the game ball into the hard right-handed ball path P2.

<Second opening/closing scenario>
FIG. 410 is a timing chart for explaining the second opening/closing scenario. FIG. 410(a) shows temporal changes in the open and closed states of the opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big prize opening 36a. FIG. 410(b) shows temporal changes in the ON state and OFF state of the first passage detection sensor SP1. FIG. 410(c) shows temporal changes in the ON state and OFF state of the second passage detection sensor SP2. FIG. 410(d) shows temporal changes in the closed and open states of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350.

When the second type jackpot is won, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, and in this opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state and the first round starts (time t11). In such an opening/closing execution mode, when the closing condition of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is satisfied, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. The closing conditions for the second opening/closing scenario are as shown in (iii) and (iv) below.

(iii) The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is that the first round in the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
(iv) One game ball has entered the grand prize opening 36a since the first round has started.
When both of the above two items are satisfied, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In the example of FIG. 410, at time t11, the first round is started in the opening/closing execution mode, and from this start time (time t1) as a starting point, at time t12, the first passage detection sensor SP1 moves the player to the big prize opening 36a. The first incoming ball is detected. At this time t12, both items (iii) and (iv) are satisfied, and the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The conditions for opening the non-V winning opening shutter 350 are as follows.
- 0.06 seconds have elapsed with the non-V prize opening shutter 350 in the closed state.
When the above conditions are met, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the closed state to the open state (time t13).

According to the above opening conditions, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a, the non-V winning hole shutter 350 will close for an extremely short time of 0.06 seconds. Therefore, according to the second opening/closing scenario, as in the case of the first opening/closing scenario, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 36a after the start of the first round, the game ball is actually cannot be guided to the branch passage section 330 side. In addition, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a after the first round starts, the first round is started instead of the configuration in which the non-V winning hole shutter 350 closes for an extremely short time. After that, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 36a, it may be configured such that the transition to the closed state is not performed at all.

In the second opening/closing scenario configured as described above, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 36a after the first round starts, the game ball is substantially guided to the branch passage section 330 side. In addition, since the non-V winning hole shutter 350 will not be closed when the second or later game ball enters the big winning hole 36a after the first round has started, 1. In the round, the game ball cannot be put into the V winning zone FV. The second opening/closing scenario is for realizing the V winning no winning closing/opening pattern described above.

In this embodiment, the second opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 included in the main control board 61. In the opening/closing execution mode executed when the second type jackpot is won, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 reads out the second opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63, and executes a non-V Opening/closing control of the prize opening shutter 350 is performed.

<Third opening/closing scenario>
FIG. 411 is a timing chart for explaining the third opening/closing scenario. FIG. 411(a) shows temporal changes in the open state and closed state of the opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big prize opening 36a. FIG. 411(b) shows temporal changes in the ON state and OFF state of the first passage detection sensor SP1. FIG. 411(c) shows temporal changes in the ON state and OFF state of the second passage detection sensor SP2. FIG. 411(d) shows temporal changes in the closed state and open state of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350.

During the high-frequency support mode, if the first type jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, but in this opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state and the first round starts. (time t21). In such an opening/closing execution mode, when the closing condition of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is satisfied, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. The closing conditions of the third opening/closing scenario are the same as those of the first opening/closing scenario. That is, the closing condition of the third opening/closing scenario is that both (i) and (ii) described above are satisfied.

In the example of FIG. 411, at time t21, the first round is started in the opening/closing execution mode, and from this starting time (time t21) as a starting point, at time t22, the first passage detection sensor SP1 moves the player to the big prize opening 36a. The first ball entering is detected, and at time t24, the second ball entering the big prize opening 36a is detected by the second path detection sensor SP2. At time t22 and time t24, both items (i) and (ii) are satisfied, and the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The conditions for opening the non-V winning opening shutter 350 are as follows.
- If the condition established in (ii) is that one game ball has entered the big prize opening 36a, then 0.06 seconds have elapsed with the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the closed state.
- If the condition satisfied in (ii) is that two game balls have entered the big prize opening 36a, the first round of the opening/closing execution mode has ended.
When either of the above two conditions is established, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the closed state to the open state (times t23, t25).

According to the opening conditions of the third opening/closing scenario above, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 36a, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 closes for an extremely short time of 0.06 seconds. I will do it. Therefore, according to the third opening/closing scenario, as in the case of the first opening/closing scenario, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 36a after the start of the first round, the game ball is actually cannot be guided to the branch passage section 330 side. In addition, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a after the first round starts, the first round is started instead of the configuration in which the non-V winning hole shutter 350 closes for an extremely short time. After that, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 36a, it may be configured such that the transition to the closed state is not performed at all.

In addition, the second item of the opening condition is replaced with the above-mentioned content, ``If the condition established in (ii) is that two game balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a, then two A predetermined time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) sufficient to complete the first round of the opening/closing execution mode may have elapsed since the first game ball entered the ball.

The third opening/closing scenario configured as described above is for realizing the V winning low difficulty closing/closing pattern described above. The non-V prize opening shutter 350 shifts to the closed state by only a strong right-handed operation (the first ball is a weak right-handed operation, the second ball is also possible with a strong right-handed operation, but it is also possible only with a strong right-handed operation). After that, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 remains closed until the first round ends. Therefore, when winning the first type jackpot during the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV simply by performing a hard right-handed operation.

In this embodiment, the third opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 included in the main control board 61. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 reads the third opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when the first type jackpot is won during the high frequency support mode, and the read third opening/closing scenario. Opening/closing control of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is performed according to the opening/closing scenario.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sh0101, reading processing for various detection sensors 67b to 67d and SP1 to SP3 is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67b to 67d, SP1 to SP3 connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0102.

In step Sh0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sh0103.

In step Sh0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0104. Note that the change type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 416), which will be described later.

In step Sh0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed as the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sh0104 will be described later. After executing step Sh0104, the process advances to step Sh0105.

In step Sh0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sh0105 will be described later. After executing step Sh0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 412: Sh0104).

FIG. 413 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sh0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sh0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sh0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0203.

In step Sh0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0204.

In step Sh0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sh0209.

In step Sh0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sh0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sh0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sh0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sh0207. On the other hand, in step Sh0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sh0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sh0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sh0208.

In step Sh0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sh0209.

In step Sh0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sh0204 or step Sh0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sh0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sh0209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sh0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sh0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sh0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sh0212.

In step Sh0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sh0103 (FIG. 412), and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 416) is The storage area is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations added by 1 in step Sh0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sh0103. are stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sh0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step Sh0103 (FIG. 412) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sh0210. After executing step Sh0212, the process advances to step Sh0213.

In step Sh0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (reservation information). This is a process in which determinations are made of the type of game, the presence or absence of a reach, the variation time of game rounds, etc., before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sh0213, the process advances to step Sh0214.

In step Sh0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the destination judgment process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is set as a hold command. Set.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sh0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 413: Sh0213).

FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process is based on the pending information, and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether or not a reach has occurred, etc., based on the pending information. This is a process that is executed before becoming a lottery target.

In step Sh0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 413) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and the judgment result of the winning lottery performed before the winning lottery by the current ball entering is read out from the corresponding storage area. By determining the lottery result, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step Sh0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sh0302: YES), the process advances to step Sh0303, and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh0305, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sh0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sh0302: NO), the process advances to step Sh0304, and the win/fail table is stored. The high probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh0305, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sh0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sh0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sh0307, the process advances to step Sh0308.

In step Sh0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the first type jackpot. In step Sh0308, if it is determined that it corresponds to the first type jackpot (Sh0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0309, and the first type jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sh0308, if it is determined that the first type jackpot is not supported (Sh0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0310, and the second type jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sh0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sh0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0311, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. Read the stored value of reach random number counter C3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sh0313, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach occurrence is supported (Sh0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0314, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sh0313, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach occurrence is not supported (Sh0313: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 412: Sh0105).

FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sh0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sh0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sh0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0402, and whether or not the accessory reserve number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, in step Sh0401, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sh0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Sh0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sh0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0404.

In step Sh0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Sh0103 (FIG. 412) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sh0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sh0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sh0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sh0502.

In step Sh0502, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sh0502, the process advances to step Sh0503.

In step Sh0503, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sh0504.

In step Sh0504, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sh0505. In step Sh0505, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sh0505, the process advances to step Sh0506.

In step Sh0506, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sh0507.

In step Sh0507, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sh0508.

In step Sh0508, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sh0502). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sh0508, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sh0508: NO), in step Sh0509 and step Sh0510, until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sh0509, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sh0510, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, in step Sh0508, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sh0508: YES), the process returns to step Sh0502 and each process from step Sh0502 to step Sh0507 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sh0502 to step Sh0507 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 416: Sh0505).

FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sh0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step Sh0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sh0601: YES), the present game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sh0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sh0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0602.

In step Sh0602, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when a fluctuating display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

If it is determined in step Sh0602 that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (Sh0602: NO), the process proceeds to steps Sh0603 to Sh0606 for starting the game round. In step Sh0603, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sh0603, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sh0603: YES), the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sh0603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0604.

In step Sh0604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sh0605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sh0605, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sh0605, the game time control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0602 that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (Sh0602: YES), the process proceeds to steps Sh0606 to Sh0610 for game round progression.

In step Sh0606, it is determined whether or not the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sh0606, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 419: Sh0802), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sh0606, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sh0606: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0607, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step Sh0607, the game time control process ends.

In step Sh0606, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sh0606: YES), the process advances to step Sh0608 and a fluctuation end process is executed. The variation end process changes the symbol display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 419) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. Control display. After that, the process advances to step Sh0609.

In step Sh0609, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high frequency support mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64g set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is high frequency support mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is not high frequency support mode, that is, low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned on after the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, ends.

In step Sh0609, if it is determined that the mode is high frequency support mode (Sh0609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0610, and the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The number of games counter PNC is a counter for counting the remaining number of guaranteed games guaranteed in the high frequency support mode. The game number counter PNC is preset to a value of 100 in step Sh1309 in FIG. 426, which will be described later. After executing step Sh0610, the process advances to step Sh0611. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0609 that the mode is not high-frequency support mode (Sh0609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0615, which will be described later.

In step Sh0611, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sh0611, if it is determined that the high probability mode is not selected (Sh0611: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0612, and the number of consecutive games played in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). It is determined whether or not the game is before reaching (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. As described above, since the number of games counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the game is continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of games played has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games played.

In step Sh0612, if it is determined that the value of the number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sh0612: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sh0613, and the high frequency support mode Turn off the flag. After executing step Sh0613, the process advances to step Sh0614.

In step Sh0614, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Sh0614, the process advances to step Sh0615.

In step Sh0615, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags (16R first type jackpot flag, 8R first type jackpot flag, 8R second type jackpot flag) is ON. In step Sh0615, if any jackpot flag is ON (Sh0615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0616.

In step Sh0616, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sh0615, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sh0615: NO), this game round control process is ended without executing step Sh0616.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0612 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games (step Sh0612: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0615 without executing steps Sh0613 and Sh0614. Further, when it is determined in step Sh0611 that the mode is high probability mode (Sh0611: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0615.

According to the processing from step Sh0611 to step Sh0614 described above, when the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is performed. Even after the number of games reached (that is, the value of the number of games counter PNC is 0 or less), if the high probability mode continues as the lottery mode at that point, the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode. What will be done will be realized.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 417: Sh0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step Sh0701, it is determined whether the holding area to which the data setting process is to be performed is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 400), the earliest stored reservation information (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 400). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sh0701, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step Sh0701, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sh0701: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area in steps Sh0702 to Sh0707 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sh0701, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sh0701: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps Sh0708 to Sh0713 is executed.

In step Sh0702, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sh0703, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sh0704. In step Sh0704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sh0705.

In step Sh0705, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sh0705, the process advances to step Sh0706.

In step Sh0706, when the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying which of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b is the target for starting the current variable display. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0707.

In step Sh0707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sh0707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sh0502 in normal processing (FIG. 416). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sh0701, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (Sh0701: NO), step Proceed to Sh0708.

In step Sh0708, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sh0709. In step Sh0709, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sh0710, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sh0711.

In step Sh0711, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sh0711, the process advances to step Sh0712.

In step Sh0712, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0713.

In step Sh0713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sh0713 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sh0505 in the normal process (FIG. 416). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 417: Sh0605) of the game time control process.

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sh0801, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sh0801, the process advances to step Sh0802.

In step Sh0802, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a hit or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sh0802, the process advances to step Sh0803.

In step Sh0803, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sh0803, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sh0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0804 and a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence/absence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sh0802 are included.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0803 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sh0803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0805 and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, and also includes information indicating that the reach is occurring. Information on presence/absence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sh0802 are included. After executing step Sh0804 or step Sh0805, the process advances to step Sh0806.

In step Sh0806, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on 16R type 1 jackpot, information on 8R type 1 jackpot, information on 8R type 2 jackpot, or information on whether reach occurs or not, and information on missing results. Contains information.

The variation command and type command set in steps Sh0804 to Sh0806 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sh0502 in the normal process (FIG. 416). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sh0806, the process advances to step Sh0807.

In step Sh0807, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying variable symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sh0807, this fluctuation start process is ended.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 419: Sh0801).

FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sh0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. It is turned ON at the end of the execution mode, and turned OFF at the start of the opening/closing execution mode which is executed when a jackpot is won after that.

In step Sh0901, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sh0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0902, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode) shown in 401(b). In addition, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is changed to the value shown in FIG. ) It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sh0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0903, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) shown in 401(a). Further, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is changed to the value shown in FIG. ) It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh0904.

In step Sh0904, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sh0902 or step Sh0903 is a jackpot win. In step Sh0904, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sh0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0905.

In the subsequent steps Sh0905 to Sh0912, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step Sh0905, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sh0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sh0905: NO), proceed to step Sh0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 402(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 8R first type jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R second type jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0905 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sh0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 402(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R first type jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R second type jackpot. After executing the process of step Sh0906 or step Sh0907, the process advances to step Sh0908.

In step Sh0908, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is the first type jackpot. In step Sh0908, if it is determined that the game result is a first type jackpot (Sh0908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0909.

In step Sh0909, a stop result setting process for the first type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the first type jackpot refers to which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round in which the first type jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in this state. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is determined. The information is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sh0909, the process advances to step Sh0910.

In step Sh0910, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R first type jackpot, the 16R first type jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R first type jackpot, the 8R first type jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sh0910, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sh0908, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is not a type 1 jackpot (Sh0908: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a type 2 jackpot, step Proceed to Sh0911.

In step Sh0911, a stop result setting process for the second type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the second type jackpot refers to which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round in which the second type jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in this state. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is determined. The information is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sh0911, the process advances to step Sh0912.

In step Sh0912, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is turned ON. In this embodiment, since the type of second type jackpot is only the 8R second type jackpot, the 8R second type jackpot flag is turned on. In addition, when a plurality of types of second type jackpot are set, the corresponding second type jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sh0912, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sh0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sh0902 or step Sh0903 is not a jackpot (Sh0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0913, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 399). Determine whether the value matches the current value.

In step Sh0913, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the game round (Sh0913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0914.

In step Sh0914, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round, which is the stop result for reach, to end the variable display. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e (FIG. 399), the address of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is determined. The information is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sh0914, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sh0913, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (Sh0913: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0915.

In step Sh0915, a stop result setting process for the case of disconnection is executed. The stop result setting process for a miss is to end the variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a miss. This is the process to set the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63e (FIG. 399), the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sh0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 419: Sh0802).

FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sh1001, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sh1002.

In step Sh1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R 1st type jackpot flag, 8R 1st type jackpot flag, and 8R 2nd type jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON. If so (Sh1002: YES), the process advances to step Sh1003.

In step Sh1003, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh1004, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sh1002, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sh1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1005, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (Sh1005) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Sh1002, in step Sh1005, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Sh1005: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sh1006. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sh1006, with reference to the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh1004, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sh1005, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the current game round (Sh1005: NO), the process advances to step Sh1007, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh1004, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the non-reach variation time table is set such that the larger the total reservation number CRN, the shorter the variation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Alternatively, a variable time table for type 1 jackpot, a variable time table for type 2 jackpot, a variable time table for out-of-reach, and a variable time table for complete loss may each be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 416: Sh0506).

FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sh1101, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big prize opening opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sh1101, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (Sh1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1102, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing processing period starts, which is a period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 57 is executed. , it is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

In step Sh1102, if it is determined that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sh1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1103, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step Sh1103, if it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sh1103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1104, and the timing at which the fluctuating display of symbols in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b ends Determine whether or not. In step Sh1104, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (Sh1104: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sh1104, if it is determined that the timing has come to end the variable display (Sh1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1105, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON.

In step Sh1105, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sh1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1106. On the other hand, in step Sh1105, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sh1105: NO), the game state transition process is directly ended.

In step Sh1106, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type and support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode) is set. Specifically, if it is the first type jackpot and the low frequency support mode is selected, the first opening/closing scenario described above using FIG. 406 is set. If it is a type 2 jackpot, the second opening/closing scenario described above using FIG. 410 is set. If it is a type 1 jackpot and the mode is high frequency support mode, the third opening/closing scenario described above with reference to FIG. 411 is set. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1107.

In step Sh1107, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1108.

In step Sh1108, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1109.

In step Sh1109, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, an opening time of the same constant length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. Note that the third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sh1109, the process advances to step Sh1110.

In step Sh1110, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sh0502 in the normal process (FIG. 416). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing processing period of the big prize opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sh1110, the process advances to step Sh1111 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sh1103, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Sh1103: YES), the process advances to step Sh1112.

In step Sh1112, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sh1112 that the opening period has ended (Sh1112: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1113 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sh1114.

In step Sh1114, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sh1114, the process advances to step Sh1115.

In step Sh1115, the number of rounds confirmed in step Sh1114 is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. As a result, if it is an 8R first type jackpot or an 8R second type jackpot, "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1, and if it is a 16R first type jackpot, the first round counter area RC1 is set. "16" is set in area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened, and in step Sh1115, "8" or "16" is set as an initial value. After executing step Sh1115, the process advances to step Sh1116.

In step Sh1116, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sh1102, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sh1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1117, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sh1117, the process advances to step Sh1118.

In step Sh1118, shutter opening/closing processing is executed. The shutter opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sh1118, the process advances to step Sh1119.

In step Sh1119, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". do. In step Sh1119, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sh1119: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1120. On the other hand, in step Sh1119, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sh1119: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sh1120, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sh1121.

In step Sh1121, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sh1121, the process advances to step Sh1122.

In step Sh1122, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sh1122, the process advances to step Sh1123.

In step Sh1123, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sh0502 in the normal process (FIG. 416). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sh1123, the process advances to step Sh1124.

In step Sh1124, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sh1101, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sh1101: YES), the process advances to step Sh1125.

In step Sh1125, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sh1122), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step Sh1125, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sh1125: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1126.

In step Sh1126, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sh1127, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sh1127, the process proceeds to step Sh1128, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sh1125, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sh1125: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 422: Sh1117) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sh1201, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. In step Sh1201, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is not open (Sh1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1202, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Sh1202, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sh1202: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sh1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1203.

In step Sh1203, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. In step Sh1203, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sh1203: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Sh1203, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sh1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1204, where the variable winning drive unit is used to open the big winning opening 36a. 36c is in a driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1205.

In step Sh1205, setting processing for each round is executed. In this embodiment, "15000" (ie, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a, "10" is set in the entry ball counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency entry mode, for example, set "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec) in the first timer counter area T1, and set the ball entry counter area PC to "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds). You may also set it to "6". After executing step Sh1205, the process advances to step Sh1206.

In step Sh1206, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends. The opening command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started. The command output process (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502) is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Based on the received opening command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also controls the content of the performance on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to open the grand prize opening 36a. The contents are updated to correspond to the fact that the opening of the site has started. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning hole 36a for one round has started, and also changes the presentation content on the symbol display device 41 to indicate that the opening of the big winning hole 36a has started. Update the content to correspond to what has started.

In step Sh1201, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is open (step Sh1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1207, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" or not. do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the big prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step Sh1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sh1207: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1208.

In step Sh1208, a detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36, specifically, a first passage detection sensor provided in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v, determines whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a. The determination is made based on the detection states of SP1 and second passage detection sensor SP2. In step Sh1208, if it is determined that no ball has entered (Sh1208: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1208 that an incoming ball has occurred (Sh1208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1209, where the value of the incoming ball counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1210.

In step Sh1210, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter area PC is "0". In step Sh1210, if it is determined that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is not "0" (Sh1210: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step Sh1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sh1207: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is "0" in step Sh1210, (Sh1210: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1211 and executes the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the big winning a prize opening 36a, the variable winning a prize driving section 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1212.

In step Sh1212, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh1213, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Sh1213, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sh1213: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Sh1213, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sh1213: NO), "1000" (ie, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. After executing step Sh1214, the process proceeds to step Sh1215, where a closing command is set. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

This set closing command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed. In the command output process (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502), the command is sent to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the presentation content on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the grand prize opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the completion of release. Further, the audio light emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has ended, and also indicates the performance content on the symbol display device 41 as follows: Update the content to reflect what happened.

<Shutter opening/closing process>
Next, the shutter opening/closing process will be explained. The shutter opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 422: Sh1118) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing the shutter opening/closing process. In step Sh1301, it is determined whether the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is open. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is open or not based on the operating state of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter drive unit 36d (FIG. 399). In step Sh1301, if it is determined that the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is open (Sh1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1302.

In step Sh1302, it is determined whether the closing conditions of the opening/closing scenario set in step Sh1106 of the game state transition process (FIG. 422) are satisfied. Specifically, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is compared with the number of rounds confirmed in step Sh1114 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 422), the number of rounds being executed is determined, and the number of rounds being executed is determined. Based on counting the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 36a from the detection signal of the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the detection signal of the second passage detection sensor SP2 when the number is the first round. , it is determined whether the closing conditions of the opening/closing scenario set from among the first to third opening/closing scenarios are satisfied. In step Sh1302, if it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied (Sh1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1303.

In step Sh1303, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is closed by the non-V winning a prize opening shutter drive section 36d. After executing step Sh1303, the process advances to step Sh1306, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1302 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sh1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1306 without executing step Sh1303.

In step Sh1301, if it is determined that the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is not open (Sh1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1304.

In step Sh1304, it is determined whether the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario set in step Sh1106 of the game state transition process (FIG. 422) is satisfied. Specifically, when the set opening/closing scenario is the first opening/closing scenario or the second opening/closing scenario, the timer counter determines whether the time for maintaining the closed state of the non-V prize opening shutter 350 has elapsed and the timing to open it has been reached. By counting, it is determined whether the opening condition of the first opening/closing scenario or the second opening/closing scenario is satisfied. When the set opening/closing scenario is the third opening/closing scenario, the timer counter counts whether the time for keeping the non-V prize opening shutter 350 in the closed state has elapsed and the timing to open it has been reached, or the opening/closing is executed. By determining whether the first round in the mode has ended, it is determined whether the opening condition of the third opening/closing scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sh1304 that the opening condition is satisfied (Sh1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1305.

In step Sh1305, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is opened by the non-V winning a prize opening shutter drive section 36d. After executing step Sh1305, the process advances to step Sh1306.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1304 that the opening condition is not satisfied (Sh1304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1306 without executing step Sh1305.

In step Sh1306, a V winning prize determination process is executed. The V winning prize determination process will be described later. After executing step Sh1306, this shutter opening/closing process ends.

<V prize-winning judgment process>
Next, the V winning prize determination process will be explained. The V winning prize determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a shutter opening/closing subroutine (Sh1306 in FIG. 424).

FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the V winning prize determination process. In step Sh1401, it is determined whether or not entry of a game ball into the V winning zone FV of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v is detected. This determination is made from the detection signal of the V winning zone detection sensor SP3. In step Sh1401, if entry of the game ball into the V winning zone FV is detected (Sh1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1402.

In step Sh1402, the V winning flag is turned on. The V winning flag is a flag that indicates that a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV, and is used to select the lottery mode in the normal game round that is executed after the end of the round game as either the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Used to determine whether to set. After executing step Sh1402, the process advances to step Sh1403.

In step Sh1403, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the V winning command executes settings for executing the V winning effect. The V winning presentation is a presentation for notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV. After executing step Sh1403, the main V prize determination process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sh1401, if entry of the game ball into the V winning zone FV is not detected (Sh1401: NO), this V winning determination process is ended without executing steps Sh1402 and Sh1403.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 422: Sh1127).

FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sh1501, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

In step Sh1501, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (Sh1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1502 and flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, when the 16R first type jackpot flag, the 8R first type jackpot flag, and the 8R second type jackpot flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. Also, turn off the V winning flag. After executing step Sh1502, the process advances to step Sh1503.

In step Sh1503, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sh1504, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability modes and high frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. After that, the process advances to step Sh1505.

In step Sh1505, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1509, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1501 that the V winning flag is not ON (Sh1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1506 and executes flag deletion processing. Specifically, when the 16R first type jackpot flag, the 8R first type jackpot flag, and the 8R second type jackpot flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1507.

In step Sh1507, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sh1508, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1509.

In step Sh1509, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a command to be transmitted. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The power support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 416: Sh0507).

FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sh1601, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sh1601 that the supported flag is not ON (Sh1601: NO), the process advances to step Sh1602.

In step Sh1602, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. In step Sh1602, if it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (Sh1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1603.

In step Sh1603, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sh1603, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sh1603: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sh1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1604.

In step Sh1604, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sh1604, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sh1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1605, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1604 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sh1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1606.

In step Sh1606, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sh1606, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sh1606: NO), this electronic role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sh1606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1607.

In step Sh1607, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sh1608, in which it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sh1607 (Sh1607: NO), and if it is in the high frequency support mode in step Sh1608 (Sh1608: YES), the process advances to step Sh1609, where an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1610.

In step Sh1610, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sh1609 is a support win. In step Sh1610, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sh1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1611, where the support win flag is turned on and set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sh1610, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sh1610: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step Sh1611.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sh1607 (Sh1607: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sh1608 (Sh1608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1612, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1613.

In step Sh1613, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sh1612 is a support win. In step Sh1613, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sh1613: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sh1613, if it is determined that support has been won (Sh1613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1614, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sh1602, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sh1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1615, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sh1615, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sh1615: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in fluctuation in the general figure unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sh1615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1616.

In step Sh1616, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh1617, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sh1601, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sh1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1618, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The electric utility opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 427: Sh1618).

FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sh1701, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sh1701: YES), the process advances to step Sh1702.

In step Sh1702, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sh1702, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sh1702: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sh1702, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sh1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1703, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sh1703, the process advances to step Sh1704.

In step Sh1704, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sh1705, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sh1705, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sh1705: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sh1705: YES), the process advances to step Sh1706 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sh1701, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sh1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1707, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sh1707, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sh1707: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sh1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1708, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1709.

In step Sh1709, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sh1709: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1710, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

In step Sh1710, if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sh1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1711, and "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1709 that the opening/closing execution mode is selected (Sh1709: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not selected in step Sh1710 (Sh1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1712, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

A5. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the battle effect and the result announcement effect will be explained. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sh1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are read out sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sh1801, the process advances to step Sh1802.

In step Sh1802, command corresponding processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the received command. Details of the command corresponding processing will be described later. After executing step Sh1802, the process advances to step Sh1803.

In step Sh1803, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in the command corresponding process of step Sh1802. After executing step Sh1803, the process advances to step Sh1804.

In step Sh1804, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the command corresponding process of step Sh1802. After executing step Sh1804, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command compatible processing>
Next, command corresponding processing will be explained. The command corresponding processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 429: Sh1802).

FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing command-based processing. As described above, in the command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described below.

In step Sh1901, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sh1901 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1902, and processing corresponding to the pending command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sh1902, the process advances to step Sh1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1901 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1903 without executing step Sh1902.

In step Sh1903, it is determined whether a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sh1903, if it is determined that a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1904, and the sound-light side high-frequency support mode stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 Turn on the flag. The sound-light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 92 of the sound-light emission control device 90 (see FIG. 405) to specify whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The flags are stored in the set various flag storage areas 94a. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1907.

In step Sh1903, if it is determined that the high-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1903: NO), the process advances to step Sh1905, and it is determined whether the low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. Determine. In step Sh1905, if it is determined that the low frequency support mode command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sh1905: YES), the process advances to step Sh1906 and the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1907. In step Sh1905, if it is determined that the low frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1905: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sh1907.

In step Sh1907, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sh1907, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received (Sh1907: YES), the process advances to step Sh1908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1907 that the variation command and type command have not been received (Sh1907: NO), the process advances to step S and step Sh1909.

In step Sh1908, a game run effect setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the jackpot performance, stop symbols, variable display patterns, etc. to be executed in the current game round are set. Details of the game performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sh1908, the process advances to step Sh1909.

In step Sh1909, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sh1909, if it is determined that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1910, and settings are made to execute the opening performance and the right-handed notification performance. Specifically, the jackpot type included in the opening command received this time is specified, and settings are made to start audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the contents of the opening performance corresponding to the jackpot type, and After the control corresponding to the opening performance is finished, the audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the right-handed notification performance are set to start, and then the opening performance and the right-handed notification performance are set to be executed. An opening presentation command for the purpose is sent to the display side MPU 102. In the right-handed hitting notification effect, in the first round, the first game ball is put into the weak right-handed hitting path P1 (Fig. 396), and the second game ball is put into the hard right-hitting path P2, thereby winning a V prize. Execute a performance that encourages you to aim. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1909 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1909: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1911 without executing step Sh1910.

In step Sh1911, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main CPU 62. The V winning command is a command sent from the main side CPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 92 when a game ball enters the V winning zone FV during execution of the big winning hole opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. In step Sh1911, if it is determined that the V winning command has been received from the main CPU 62 (Sh1911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1912.

In step Sh1912, settings are made to execute the V winning effect. Specifically, the setting of the light emission data of various lamps for the V winning effect and the setting of the audio output data are performed. The V winning performance is a performance that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV. After executing step Sh1912, the process advances to step Sh1913.

In step Sh1913, a V winning presentation command is sent to the display side MPU 102. Note that, upon receiving the V winning effect command, the display side MPU 102 sets image data for the V winning effect and causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image based on the image data. After executing step Sh1913, the process advances to step Sh1914. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1911 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1914 without executing steps Sh1912 and Sh1913.

In step Sh1914, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sh1914 that an ending command has been received (Sh1914: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1915, and settings are made to execute an ending effect and a left-handed hitting notification effect. Specifically, the content of the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the audio output control and light emission control are performed in accordance with the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the gaming state. At the same time, after the control corresponding to the ending effect is finished, the audio output control and light emission control corresponding to the left-handed notification effect are set to start, and after that, the ending effect and the left-handed effect are set to start. An ending effect command for setting the notification effect to be executed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh1916. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1914 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1914: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1916 without executing step Sh1915.

In step Sh1916, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, the content of presentation corresponding to the open command and the content of presentation corresponding to the closing command are set. Furthermore, when the performance operation button 24 is pressed, a performance operation command for recognizing that the performance operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a command handling subroutine (Sh1902 in FIG. 430).

FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling process will be described below.

In step Sh2001, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, A process is executed to enable the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of pending information. Details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sh2001 will be described later. Below, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as the "first reservation number", and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first reservation number". The number is also called the "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also called the "total pending number". After executing step Sh2001, the process advances to step Sh2002.

In step Sh2002, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sh2001 and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 are determined. Based on the number, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled. After executing step Sh2002, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 431: Sh2001) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing update processing when a ball enters the ball. In step Sh2101, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Sh2101, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sh2101: YES), the process advances to step Sh2102, and the sound Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the audio-optical side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step Sh2102, the process advances to step Sh2104.

In step Sh2101, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sh2101: NO), that is, the pending command is If it is determined that the transmission was based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sh2103, and updates the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Sh2103, the process advances to step Sh2104.

The reason why the processing in step Sh2102 and step Sh2103 is performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 stores the hold information. is stored and held, whereas the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of pending information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step Sh2104, updating processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of pending balls counter area indicates the sum of the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sh2104, the update processing at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game run performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of command corresponding processing (FIG. 430: Sh2108).

FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing the game round performance setting process. As mentioned above, the game run performance setting process is a process that is executed when it is determined that a variation command and a type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the performance that will be executed in the current game cycle. It is. Hereinafter, specific processing of the game rendition setting processing will be explained.

In step Sh2201, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is grasped. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh2202.

In step Sh2202, performance pattern setting processing is executed at the time of jackpot, reach time, etc. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sh2202, the process advances to step Sh2203.

In step Sh2203, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R 1st type jackpot, 8R 1st type jackpot, or 8R 2nd type jackpot, the active line L (see Figure 397) Information corresponding to a stopping result in which a combination of the same symbols is established on the top is set as information on the current stopping symbol. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R type 1 jackpot or an 8R type 1 jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the combination of the same symbols. At the same time, a combination of the same even numbered symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R first type jackpot. Further, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is an 8R type 2 jackpot, the same combination of even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Sh2203, the process advances to step Sh2204.

In step Sh2204, processing for determining a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols specified in step Sh2205 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh2205.

In step Sh2205, the performance type information set in step Sh2202, the stop symbol type information set in step Sh2203, and the variable display pattern type information set in step Sh2204 in the current game round are converted into a performance command. Set. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh2206, and the relevant effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sh2206, the process proceeds to step Sh2207, and after executing the update process at the start of variation, the game rendition setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 433: Sh2202) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sh2301, it is determined whether or not the first type jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the information on the type of jackpot that were grasped in step Sh2201 of FIG. 433. In step Sh2301, an affirmative determination is made if the 16R first type jackpot or the 8R first type jackpot is won. In step Sh2301, if it is determined that the first type jackpot has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sh2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh2302.

In step Sh2302, a performance pattern setting process for the first type jackpot is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set to be executed for a performance indicating that the first type jackpot has been won in the current game round. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired by the main controller 60 using the jackpot variation time table in FIG. 421. After executing step Sh2302, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sh2301, if the first type jackpot has not been won in the current game round (Sh2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh2303.

In step Sh2303, it is determined whether or not the second type jackpot has been won in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the information on the type of jackpot that were grasped in step Sh2201 of FIG. 433. In step Sh2303, an affirmative determination is made if the 16R second type jackpot or the 8R second type jackpot is won. In step Sh2303, if it is determined that the second type jackpot has been won in the current game round (Sh2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh2304.

In step Sh2304, a performance pattern setting process for the second type jackpot is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set to be executed for a performance indicating that the second type jackpot has been won in the current game round. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired by the main controller 60 using the jackpot variation time table in FIG. 421. After executing step Sh2304, the production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sh2303, if it is determined that the second type jackpot has not been won in the current game round (Sh2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh2305.

In step Sh2305, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information regarding the presence or absence of reach occurrence, which was grasped in step Sh2001 of FIG. 433. In step Sh2305, if it is determined that a reach has occurred in the current game round (Sh2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh2306.

In step Sh2306, a ready-to-win performance pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set to be executed for a performance indicating that the player has reached reach in the current game round. At the time of this setting, the performance is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired by the main control device 60 using the variation time table for reaching generation in FIG. 421. After executing step Sh2306, the production pattern setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sh2305, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred in the current game round (Sh2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh2307 and executes a losing performance pattern setting process. Specifically, it is set to perform an effect when none of the first type jackpot winning, the second type jackpot winning, and the reach occurrence occur. At the time of this setting, the performance time is determined according to the variable time acquired by the main controller 60 using the non-reach variable time table in FIG. 421. After executing step Sh2307, the production pattern setting process ends.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be explained. The update process at the time of starting the variation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 433: Sh2207) of the game run performance setting process.

FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sh2401, it is determined whether the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command. In step Sh2401, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command (Sh2401: YES), the process advances to step Sh2402, where the command is stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh2401 that the fluctuation command received this time is not the first fluctuation command (Sh2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh2203, where the command is stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sh2501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh2502.

In step Sh2502, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sh2601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sh2701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 437) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Sh2701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the device 41.

In step Sh2702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is set by the command corresponding process (Sh2701) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh2703.

In step Sh2703, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sh2702), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh2704.

In step Sh2704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sh2703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sh2705, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the second path detection sensor SP2, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is switched from the open state to the closed state. (hereinafter also referred to as the retention area), the player causes the game balls to pass through the second passage detection sensor SP2, thereby switching the game balls flowing out from the clone 220 into a closed state. It can be made to flow down along the upper surface of the rear non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350, and the game ball can be made to flow into the V winning zone FV. That is, the player can control the switching of the state of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 by allowing the game ball to pass through the second path detection sensor SP2 in consideration of the timing at which the game ball flows out from the clone 220. . As a result, it is possible to make technical intervention by the player regarding the switching of the state of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the residence time is the length of time from when the game ball flows into the clown 220 until it flows out (the length of time that the game ball stays in the clown 220). is longer than the second passage arrival time, which is the length of time from when the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 until it passes through the second passage detection sensor SP2. Therefore, after visually confirming that the game ball has flowed into the clone 220 and started to stay there, the player allows the game ball to pass through the second path detection sensor SP2, taking into consideration the timing at which the game ball flows out from the clone 220. Therefore, even if a game ball is fired toward the second path detection sensor SP2, when the game ball flowing out from the clone 220 passes through the non-V winning hole shutter 350, the state of the non-V winning hole shutter 350 is checked. It is possible to make it into a closed state, and the game balls flowing out from the clone 220 can be made to flow into the V winning zone FV. That is, after visually confirming that the game balls have flowed into the croon 220 and started to stay there, once the game balls are stopped being ejected, and while checking the movement of the game balls staying in the croon 220, the second path detection sensor is activated. It is possible to measure the timing of firing the game ball toward SP2, and to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension for a relatively long time regarding the timing of firing the game ball. As a comparative example, if the residence time is shorter than the second passage arrival time, the timing to launch the game ball toward the second passage detection sensor SP2 is determined after the game ball has stopped firing. It is not possible to do so, and it is necessary to fire the game balls continuously. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can measure the timing of launching the game ball toward the second path detection sensor SP2 while checking the movement of the game ball staying in the croon 220, so the above comparative example Rather, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in order to allow the game ball to pass over the non-V winning port shutter 350 at the timing when the non-V winning port shutter 350 is in the closed state, the timing at which the gaming ball flows out from the clone 220 and the non-V winning port shutter 350 must be adjusted. Considering the period during which the closed state is maintained (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), it is necessary to allow the game ball to pass through the second passage detection sensor SP2, so that the player is not actively encouraged to play the game. You can have them participate.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period during which the non-V winning opening shutter 350 maintains the closed state (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) is the period after the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81. It is configured to be shorter than the length of time until it flows out from the clone 220 via the clone 220 (hereinafter also referred to as retention area outflow time). Therefore, it is difficult or impossible to cause the game ball that has passed through the first passage detection sensor SP1 to pass through the clone 220 and further to flow into the V winning zone FV by the closed non-V winning opening shutter 350. It can be done. That is, it can be made difficult or impossible to cause the game ball to flow into the V winning zone FV using only one game ball. In other words, the game ball that stays in the croon 220 and then flows into the V winning zone FV via the non-V winning port shutter 350 and the game ball that passes through the second path detection sensor SP2 are made into separate game balls. This can be encouraged. By doing this, it is possible to encourage the player's technical intervention regarding the firing of a plurality of game balls, and to draw the player's attention to the trends of the plurality of game balls, thereby further increasing the interest of the game. I can do it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is in a closed state, the area into which the gaming balls that have passed through the non-V winning opening shutter 350 flow into the area is such that the gaming balls will not flow into the area from the next time onwards. Since this is the area (V winning zone FV) that is set as a condition for shifting the lottery mode of the game round to the high probability mode, it is possible to make the player desire to have game balls flow into the V winning zone FV. This allows the player to concentrate on the technical intervention regarding opening and closing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350, as well as giving a sense of anticipation and urgency.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as an opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350, it is impossible or impossible for the gaming ball to enter the V winning zone FV unless the gaming ball is distributed to the first path detection sensor SP1. A difficult first opening/closing scenario and a third opening/closing scenario in which it is possible or easy to allow a game ball to enter a V winning zone FV without passing the game ball to a first passage detection sensor SP1 are provided. When the first opening/closing scenario is set as the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350, it is necessary to circulate the gaming ball to the first path detection sensor SP1 in order to let the gaming ball enter the V winning zone FV. Yes, the player needs technical intervention to operate the game ball, such as adjusting the firing strength of the game ball. On the other hand, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, there is no need to distribute the game ball to the first passage detection sensor SP1 in order to cause the game ball to enter the V winning zone FV, so the player can: Compared to the case where the first opening/closing scenario is set, technical intervention is not required for the game ball firing operation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment changes the difficulty level of the player's technical intervention (technical intervention It is possible to change the degree of tension and anticipation of the player, thereby adding modulation to the player's sense of urgency and anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is switched from the open state to the closed state when the game ball passes the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2, so the opening/closing scenario that is set is changed. Regardless of whether it is the first opening/closing scenario or the second opening/closing scenario, it is necessary to operate the operating handle 25 so that the game ball passes through the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2, It is possible to encourage the player's technical intervention in bringing the game ball into the V winning zone FV, and as a result, the player can be made to actively participate in the game.

Furthermore, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the V winning zone FV by simply passing the game ball through the second path detection sensor SP2 (that is, without passing the game ball through the first path detection sensor SP1). A game ball was distributed to the second path detection sensor SP2 for a player who had experienced a game in a game state set in the third opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing operation of the non-V prize opening shutter 350 was performed as shown in FIG. In this case, even though the non-V winning opening shutter 350 switches from the open state to the closed state, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 cannot allow the gaming balls that have passed through the second path detection sensor SP2 to flow into the V winning zone FV. By having the player experience the game in the game state set in the first opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing operation is performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and when the first opening/closing scenario is set. It is possible to encourage the distribution of game balls to the first path detection sensor SP1.

In addition, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, the period during which the non-V prize opening shutter 350 is in the closed state regardless of whether the game ball circulates through either the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2. Therefore, if the third opening/closing scenario is set, the player can easily bring the game ball into the V winning zone FV. can. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, at least the game state in which the first opening/closing scenario is set is first passed. In other words, a player who has played the game in the first opening/closing scenario has at least once experienced the technical intervention required to cause the game ball to flow into the V winning zone FV when the first opening/closing scenario is set. Therefore, in a round game in which the first opening/closing scenario is set, the game ball succeeds in entering the V winning zone FV and becomes a high probability mode, and during the high probability mode (high frequency support mode), the first opening/closing scenario is set. If the player wins a type 1 jackpot, if the technical intervention required to cause the game ball to flow into the V winning zone FV is performed again in a round game in which the first opening/closing scenario is set, there is a risk that the player will become exhausted. There is. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that the third opening/closing scenario is set when the first type jackpot is won in a game in the high-frequency support mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unnecessarily exhausted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first opening/closing scenario is set, even if the timing pattern when the game ball enters the grand prize opening 36a is the same, the game ball does not pass through the grand prize opening 36a. If the passing pattern of the game ball to the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2 of the game ball later differs, the degree of advantage for the player differs. Specifically, even if the pattern of the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole 36a is the same, the first path detection sensor SP1 and the second path detection sensor of the game ball after passing through the big winning hole 36a As the passage pattern of the game ball to SP2, there is a passage pattern that allows the game ball to enter the V-winning zone FV, and a passage pattern that does not allow the game ball to enter the V-winning zone FV. There is. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350 in the opening/closing execution mode is the first opening/closing scenario, the game ball is sent to the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2. It is possible to make the user recognize what kind of passing pattern is advantageous, and it is possible to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency regarding the degree of advantage.

In this embodiment, when the second opening/closing scenario is set, regardless of the pattern of timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole 36a, there is a high probability that the game ball will be placed in the V winning zone FV. Since the ball cannot enter the ball, the advantage is the same.

In this embodiment, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, regardless of the pattern of the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole 36a, the game ball is placed in the V winning zone FV with a high probability. Since the ball can enter the ball, the degree of advantage is the same.

In addition, the degree of advantage for the player in the first opening/closing scenario differs depending on the pattern of the game balls entering the grand prize opening 36a, and is more advantageous than the second opening/closing scenario. The degree of advantage for the player is the same regardless of the pattern of entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening 36a, and the degree of advantage for the player is the same regardless of the pattern of entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening 36a in the third opening/closing scenario. Moreover, it is more advantageous than the first opening/closing scenario and the second opening/closing scenario. Therefore, by using three specific different opening/closing scenarios, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment determines the opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350 during a round game based on the game state (support mode) at the time of execution of the game round in which the first type jackpot was won. If the player wins a jackpot, the player can be made aware of the state of the game at the time of execution of the game, and as a result, the player can pay attention to the game. Furthermore, the player who has recognized the gaming state at the time of the game round in which the jackpot was won is encouraged to speculate about the type of opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to be set, and It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and urgency regarding the opening/closing pattern (opening/closing scenario).

In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 wins a jackpot, if the type of the jackpot is a type 1 jackpot, and if the support mode in the game round in which the jackpot was won is the low-frequency support mode, If the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 during the round game is set to the first opening/closing scenario, and the support mode in the game round in which the jackpot is won is the high-frequency support mode, the non-V winning opening during the round game is set to the first opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing scenario of the opening shutter 350 is set to the third opening/closing scenario. That is, when winning the first type jackpot, the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 during the round game differs depending on the gaming state (support mode) of the game round in which the jackpot was won.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 wins a jackpot, if the type of the jackpot is a type 2 jackpot, and if the support mode in the game round in which the jackpot was won is the low-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 If the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 during the game is set to the second opening/closing scenario, and the support mode in the game round in which the jackpot is won is the high-frequency support mode, the non-V winning opening during the round game is set to the second opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing scenario of the shutter 350 is set to the second opening/closing scenario. That is, when winning the second type jackpot, the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning hole shutter 350 during the round game is the same regardless of the gaming state (support mode) of the game round in which the jackpot was won.

Therefore, when winning a jackpot, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to the type of jackpot. Furthermore, if the type of jackpot is a Type 1 jackpot, the non-V winning opening during the round game will depend on whether the support mode of the game round in which the jackpot was won is a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode. Since the opening/closing scenario of the shutter 350 (determination method for determining the lottery mode for the next game round to be executed) is different, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and tension. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when winning a jackpot, it is necessary to know what type of jackpot it was, what the state of the game (support mode) was, and the opening/closing scenario (opening/closing) of the non-V winning opening shutter 350. It is possible to give the player a sense of guessing and expectation in stages, such as asking him/her how the game will turn out (aspects), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the non-V winning hole shutter 350 is triggered by the fact that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 36a since the start of the round game has become two. , to switch from the open state to the closed state. In this case, a player who desires to place a game ball into the V winning zone FV is encouraged to fire the game ball while counting the number of game balls to enter the big winning hole 36a. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the closed state of the non-V winning hole shutter 350 is maintained from the time when the second (Nth) game ball enters the big winning hole 36a after the round game is started. If the first (N-1st) game ball reaches the non-V winning slot shutter 350 during the period when the round game starts, the first (N-1st) game ball Since switching is performed between the open state and the closed state so that it is possible or easy to allow the game ball to enter the V winning zone FV, the player is forced to enter the ball into the big winning hole 36a. In addition to encouraging the game ball to be fired while counting the number of game balls, at least the first game ball (N-1th) from the time the round game is started and the round game is started. Regarding the second game ball (Nth game ball), further technical intervention from the player can be encouraged. Specifically, the period during which the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is maintained in the closed state from the time when the second (Nth) game ball enters the big winning opening 36a from when the round game is started. To adjust the timing and firing strength of the game ball launch so that the first (N-1st) game ball reaches the non-V winning opening shutter 350 from when the round game is started. It is possible to prompt the player. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency as to whether or not he or she will be able to bring the first (N-1st) game ball into the V winning zone FV.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the non-V winning hole shutter 350 opens the second passage 300 after one (J) game ball enters the first passage 210 from the start of the round game. When one (K) game ball enters the ball, the open state is switched to the closed state. In this case, for a player who wishes to place a game ball into the V winning zone FV, one (J) game ball is placed in the first passage 210 and one (K) game ball is placed in the second passage 300. In order to pass this, active technological intervention can be encouraged, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is configured such that when the first (J-th) game ball that enters the first passage 210 reaches the non-V winning opening shutter 350 from the time when the round game is started, It is within the period during which the non-V prize opening shutter 350 is maintained in a closed state from the time when the round game is started until the number of game balls that have entered the second passage 300 reaches 1 (K pieces). In this case, the first (J-th) game ball that entered the first passage 210 from the start of the round game is sent to the V winning zone FV, so the game ball enters the V winning zone FV. For players who wish to do so, the time when the first (Jth) game ball that entered the first passage 210 from the start of the round game reaches the non-V winning slot shutter 350 is The period during which the non-V prize opening shutter 350 is kept closed starts from the time when the number of game balls that entered the second passageway 300 reaches 1 (K pieces) from the start of the round game. In this way, it is possible to encourage the player to adjust the timing and intensity of the shot of the game ball, and further technical intervention from the player can be encouraged.

<<H6>> Modification of the eighth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《H6-1》Variation 1:
In the eighth embodiment, the delay means provided in the first passage was constituted by the clone 220. In the configuration in which the croon 220 is used as a delay means, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball will be ejected, and the probability of failing to win a V prize is relatively high, which may make the player uncomfortable. As a solution to this problem, the delay means may be constituted by a meandering path in which the passage is bent in a meandering manner. According to the meandering path, the time it takes for a game ball that enters the entrance of the meandering path to reach the exit of the meandering path can be delayed compared to a straight path where the entrance and exit are connected straight. The meandering path makes it easier to predict the timing at which game balls will be ejected compared to the croon 220. For this reason, according to the first modification, it is easier to time the game ball into the second passage 300 and, furthermore, to time the game ball into the hard right-handed passage P2 than in the eighth embodiment. As a result, it is possible to increase the success rate of winning a V prize even though the player is required to intervene technically.

《H6-2》Variation 2:
As a solution to the problem with the clone shown in Modification 1, the following configuration may be adopted.

FIG. 439 is an explanatory diagram showing a delay unit 420 provided in a pachinko machine according to modification 2. The pachinko machine of the second modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment in that a delay unit 420 is provided instead of the croon 220 (FIG. 398), and the other configurations are the same as those of the eighth embodiment. It is the same as the form. In the pachinko machine of the second modification, the same components as the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment are given the same names and numerals and will be described below. The delay unit 420 includes a rotating body 422 and a cover member 424 that covers the rotating body 422.

The rotating body 422 is connected to a drive motor provided on the back side of the game board, and rotates at a constant speed (for example, one rotation every 60 seconds) around a rotating shaft 422a that is substantially perpendicular to the game board. ing. A recess 422b into which one game ball can enter is provided on the circumference of the rotating body 422.

The cover member 424 is a member that covers the circumference of the rotating body 422, and an upper opening 424a into which a game ball can enter is provided on the upper side of the rotating body 422, and an upper opening 424a into which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower side of the rotating body 422. A lower opening 424b is provided through which game balls can pass. The upper opening 424a is located directly below the bulb outlet 210b (FIG. 398) of the first passage 210. The lower opening 424b is connected to the communication passage 320 (FIG. 398). In the delay unit 420, after the game ball enters the upper opening 424a of the cover member 424, the rotating body 422 rotates and the timing when the position of the recess 422b and the position of the upper opening 424a of the cover member 424 coincide. Then, the ball enters the recess 422b of the rotating body 422. In addition, the game ball that enters the recess 422b of the rotating body 422 is released when the rotating body 422 rotates and the position of the recess 422b matches the position of the lower opening 424b of the cover member 424. It falls from the recess 422b and is discharged downward from the lower opening 424b of the covering member 424.

According to the delay unit 420, the time from when the game ball enters the upper opening 424a of the covering member 424 until it is discharged from the lower opening 424b is determined by a straight path where the entrance and exit are connected straight. can be delayed compared to According to the pachinko machine of this modification, the timing at which game balls are ejected from the delay unit 420 is easier to predict than the clone 220. Furthermore, since the rotating body 422 rotates at a constant speed, the time from when the game ball enters to when it is ejected can always be constant, so that the game ball is It is easier to predict the timing of discharge. For these reasons, according to the second modification, it becomes easy to time the game ball into the second path 300, and furthermore, to time the game ball into the hard right-handed path P2. Note that the delay means is not limited to the croon 220 of the eighth embodiment, the meandering path of the first modification, and the delay unit 420 of the second modification, and the delay means is not limited to the croon 220 of the eighth embodiment, the meandering path of the first modification, and the delay unit 420 of the second modification. Any type of configuration may be used as long as the device can delay the time required to do so.

《H6-3》Variation 3:
In the eighth embodiment and its first and second modifications, a delay means is provided. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which no delay means is provided. In this case, during the period after the entry of the game ball into the first path 210 is detected by the first path detection sensor SP1 until the game ball reaches a position in front of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350, the next The length of the first passage 210 is determined so that the fired game ball can reach the second passage 300. Also according to this third modification, it becomes easy to time the game ball into the second passage 300, and by extension, the timing to put the game ball into the hard right-handed passage P2.

《H6-4》Variation 4:
In the eighth embodiment and its variations 1 to 3, one item of the closing conditions of the first opening/closing scenario is "(ii) One game is placed in the grand prize opening 36a after the start of the first round. A ball has entered the ball, or two game balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a after the first round has started." On the other hand, as a modified example, "(ii) One game ball enters the big winning hole 36a after the first round starts, or the big winning hole enters the big winning hole 36a after the first round starts. 36a has entered the game ball." That is, the condition after "or" in (ii) may be changed from two to three. In the case of this modification, in the example shown in FIG. 406, it is determined that (ii) is satisfied at time t6. Further, instead of three, other values such as four or five may be used. According to these modifications, since it is necessary to count the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening 36a, the player requires further technical intervention. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the players to participate more actively in the game, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Note that similar modifications can be made to the closing conditions of the third opening/closing scenario.

《H6-5》Variation 5:
In the eighth embodiment and its variations 1 to 4, the closing conditions of the first opening/closing scenario are (i) that the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the execution of the first round in the opening/closing execution mode; ii) One game ball has entered the grand prize opening 36a since the first round has started, or two gaming balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a since the first round has started. It was decided that both of the following would hold true. With this closing condition configuration, even if the game ball first enters the hard right-handed path P2 after the start of the first round, the subsequent entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 36a will cause the game ball to become non-V. The prize opening shutter 350 shifts to the closed state. However, in this embodiment, as described above, if the first ball to enter the big winning hole 36a in the first round is through the hard right-handed path P2, the game ball cannot be put into the V winning zone FV. Since the channel configuration makes it impossible to win, the player essentially loses the opportunity to aim for a V-winning prize. As a solution to this problem, as a modification, the closing conditions of the first opening/closing scenario may be set as shown in (v) to (vii) below.

(v) The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is that the first round in the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
(vi) One game ball entered the first passage 210 after the first round started.
(vii) One game ball enters the grand prize opening 36a after the above (iv) is established.
When all of the above items (v) to (vii) are satisfied, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

According to the closing conditions of this modification, even if the first ball that enters the big winning hole 36a in the first round is through the strong right-handed ball path P2, the second and subsequent balls will enter the weak right-handed path P1. When the game ball enters the first passage 210, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed by the game ball entering the next big winning opening 36a following the ball entering the first passage 210. This allows the game balls that entered the first passage 210 to enter the V winning zone FV. That is, even if the first game ball enters the big prize opening 36a in the first round through the hard right-handed path P2, the player will not lose the opportunity to aim for a V prize. Therefore, according to the fifth modification, it is possible to contribute to reducing the player's sense of loss and discomfort caused by losing the opportunity to aim for a V prize, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Note that the condition (vi) in Modification 5 may be replaced with "two game balls have entered the first passage 210 after the first round has started." Further, instead of two, other numbers such as three, four, five, etc. may be used.

In addition, the condition (vi) in this modification 5 may be changed to "two game balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a after the above (iv) has been established." Further, instead of two, other numbers such as three, four, five, etc. may be used.

《H6-6》Variation 6:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 5, one item of the closing conditions of the first opening/closing scenario is (i) the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the execution of the first round in the opening/closing execution mode. It was decided that it would be inside. On the other hand, as a modification, the content of (i) may be "the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is that the second round is being executed in the opening/closing execution mode". Furthermore, instead of the second round, other rounds such as the third or fourth round may be in progress. Further, the present invention does not have to be limited to one round, and may be any one of a plurality of rounds being executed, for example, the first round or the second round. Furthermore, it may also mean that one of all rounds in the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If it is determined that one of the plurality of rounds is being executed, it is possible to increase the number of games in which the player aims at the V winning zone FV, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

<<H6-7>> Modification example 7:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 6, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is configured to be closed at the timing immediately after the closing conditions of the first to third opening/closing scenarios are satisfied. On the other hand, as a modified example, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 may be closed at a timing when a predetermined delay time (hereinafter referred to as a closing delay time) has elapsed after the closing condition is satisfied. . With this configuration, in addition to the technical intervention in the eighth embodiment and its variations 1 to 6, further technical intervention is required because the player needs to intuitively measure the closing delay time. . Therefore, it is possible to encourage players to participate more actively, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

《H6-8》Variation 8:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the variable winning device 36 was provided on the right side of the gaming area PA. On the other hand, as a modification, the variable prize winning device 36 may be provided on the left side or the center side of the gaming area PA. In these cases, it is preferable to exclude the weak right-handed hitting path P1 and the strong right-handed hitting path P2. According to this modification 8, it is possible to aim for a V-win by hitting the ball differently from right-handed hitting.

《H6-9》Variation 9:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the second passage detection sensor SP2 was provided near the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300. On the other hand, as a modified example, the second passage detection sensor SP2 may be provided at a position away from the ball entry opening 310a in the second passage 300. In the case of this configuration, since the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 cannot be closed at the timing when a game ball enters the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300, the second passage detection sensor SP2 is activated in the second passage 300. It is preferable to mark the placed position. According to this modification 9, by adjusting the timing of putting the game ball into the hard right-handed passage P2, the game ball passes through the second passage 300 with respect to the timing when the game ball flows into the hole 220b of the croon 220. The timing at which the game ball moves to the position of the mark is made to match. Thereby, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 can be moved to the closed state at the timing when the game ball flows into the hole 220b of the croon 220, and it becomes possible to pass the game ball to the V winning zone FV. According to this modification 9, the player is required to take technical intervention to aim at the mark. Therefore, it is possible to encourage players to participate more actively, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

《H6-10》Variation 10:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the croon 220 has one hole 220b. On the other hand, as a modification, the croon may have a plurality of holes. One of the plurality of holes is connected to the second passage 300, and the remaining holes are connected to a passage different from the second passage 300. The game balls that have entered the remaining holes are sent to the back side of the game board 30 through this passage. According to this modification 10, even if it is successful to enter the game ball into the weak right-handed hitting path P1 and the game ball into the first path 210, the game ball is sent to a path other than the second path 300. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not he will be able to discharge the game ball into the hole that continues to the second passage 300. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

《H6-11》Variation 11:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the downstream end of the main passage midstream portion 312 of the main passage section 310 of the second passage 300 is located at the position where the non-V prize opening shutter 350 in the second passage 300 is arranged. It is connected to the more upstream side, that is, to the part where the main passage section 310 branches to the branch passage section 330. On the other hand, as a modification, the downstream end of the main passage midstream portion 312 does not connect to the branch passage part 330, but is connected to the downstream side of the second passage 300 from the position where the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is arranged. It may also be configured as follows. In the eighth embodiment, as described above, the second passage 300 has an internal structure in which it takes 0.4 seconds from the time the ball enters the ball entrance 310a until it reaches the non-V winning hole shutter 350. Accordingly, the game ball that enters the second passage 300 is not sent to the branch passage section 330. On the other hand, in this modification 11, the game ball entering the second passage 300 is not sent to the branch passage part 330 by a simple structure without adopting the above-mentioned internal structure. I can do it.

《H6-12》Variation 12:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, the first passage 210 and the second passage 300 are connected to the big prize opening 36a. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which only one passage, for example, the first passage 210, is connected to the big prize opening 36a. In this case, the configuration is such that the hard right-handed ball passage P2 and the second passage 300 are not provided. According to this modification 12, the player can play the game by adjusting the timing of entering one game ball into the first passage 210 and then letting the game ball enter the first passage 210. It becomes possible to put the ball into the V winning zone FV. Therefore, according to the twelfth modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the eighth embodiment.

《H6-13》Variation 13:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified examples, two game ball detection sensors, that is, the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2, detect that a game ball enters the big prize opening 36a. The structure is as follows. On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which one game ball detection sensor detects that a game ball enters the big prize opening 36a. Specifically, one game ball detection sensor is configured to be able to detect both the entry of a game ball into the first passage 210 and the entry of a game ball into the second passage 300. That is, the configuration includes one game ball detection sensor that is turned on when a game ball enters either the first passage 210 or the second passage 300. With this configuration as well, the same control as in the eighth embodiment can be performed. In addition, as the game ball detection sensor, various types of sensors such as magnetic type and optical type can be employed.

《H6-14》Variation 14:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the mechanism and configuration shown in FIG. ), but the mechanism may be used for other purposes. For example, it may be used as a mechanism for determining the number of rounds in a round game when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery. For example, a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) is allocated to the ball entry area (hereinafter referred to as the "second round determined ball entry area") that corresponds to the non-V winning zone FNV, and it corresponds to the V winning zone FV. A number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) that is more advantageous to the player than the number of rounds allocated to the second round determination ball entry area is allocated to the ball entry area. Then, after the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of round games allocated to the ball entry area where the game ball entered first is executed during the opening/closing processing period of the opening/closing execution mode. do. In addition, when this configuration is adopted, between the ball entrance 210a of the first passage 210 and the opening end P1b of the weak right-handed ball passage P1, and between the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300 and the hard right-handed ball passage The configuration is such that the big prize opening 36a and the opening/closing door 36b are not provided between the opening end P2b of P2 and the opening end P2b.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to have the player make technical intervention when determining the number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to have the player actively intervene during the period of the opening/closing execution mode. This allows the player to actively participate in the game and to concentrate on the game. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the number of rounds to be determined.

《H6-15》Variation 15:
In the eighth embodiment, the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2 may each separately count the passage of the game ball. Then, after the first passage detection sensor SP1 detects the passage of J (J is an integer/for example, J=2) game balls from the time the round game starts, the second passage detection sensor SP2 detects the passage of K ( A configuration may be adopted in which the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is switched from the open state to the closed state upon detecting the passage of a game ball where K is an integer/for example, K=3). By adopting such a configuration, a player who wishes to send game balls to the V winning zone FV can have J game balls pass through the first passage 210 and K game balls through the second passage 300. Therefore, active technical intervention can be encouraged, and the interest of the game can be improved.

《H6-16》Variation 16:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified examples, the opening/closing scenario for controlling the opening/closing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is based on the jackpot type and the support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode) at the time of winning the jackpot. The configuration was set based on On the other hand, as a modification, the opening/closing scenario may be set based on the jackpot type and the value of the second symbol display section flag. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying which of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b is the target for starting the current variable display. Specifically, in step Sh1106 of FIG. 422, if it is a first type jackpot and the second symbol display section flag is OFF, the first opening/closing scenario (FIG. 406) is set, and the first type jackpot is set. If there is, and the second symbol display flag is ON, the third opening/closing scenario (Fig. 411) is set, and if it is a second type jackpot, the second symbol display flag is ON or OFF. The second opening/closing scenario (FIG. 410) is set even if the

By employing the above configuration, when a first type jackpot is achieved in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the first opening/closing scenario realizes the V winning highly difficult closing/opening pattern. is set. When a first type jackpot is achieved by a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, a third opening/closing scenario is set to realize a V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern. When the second type jackpot occurs, a second opening/closing scenario is set to realize the V winning no-win closing/opening pattern, regardless of whether the winning lottery trigger is from the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. be done.

According to the pachinko machine having such a configuration, the opening/closing scenario can be changed in response to switching of the display between the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Therefore, the player who recognizes the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b is prompted to guess the type of opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to be set, and It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and urgency regarding the opening/closing pattern (opening/closing scenario). In addition, considering that the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is more likely to occur in the high-frequency support mode, according to the pachinko machine of this modification 16, the game ball enters the second starting port 34 based on the jackpot type and the support mode. It is possible to realize a configuration that performs almost the same operation as the eighth embodiment in which an opening/closing scenario is set.

《H6-17》Variation 17:
In the eighth embodiment, when a first type jackpot is achieved through a winning lottery, the opening/closing scenario is changed to the first opening/closing scenario based on the support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode) at the time of winning the jackpot. and the third opening/closing scenario. In the above modification 16, when a first-class jackpot occurs in the winning lottery, the opening/closing scenario is changed to It was decided whether to use the first opening/closing scenario or the third opening/closing scenario. On the other hand, as a modified example, when a first type jackpot is obtained by a winning lottery, the opening/closing scenario is changed to the first opening/closing scenario and the first opening/closing scenario based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the time of winning the first type jackpot. It may be configured to determine which of the three open/close scenarios to use. For example, if you win the 8R type 1 jackpot using the distribution table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. The first opening/closing scenario is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the time of winning is, for example, 14 to 27, the third opening/closing scenario is determined. Further, for example, if the 16R first type jackpot is won using the distribution table for the second starting opening shown in FIG. The first opening/closing scenario is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the time of winning is, for example, 14 to 27, the third opening/closing scenario is determined.

Similarly to the eighth embodiment and the 16th modification, the pachinko machine of this modification 17 also prompts speculation about the type of opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to be set, and A sense of anticipation and urgency can be imparted to the pattern (opening/closing scenario).

《H6-18》Variation 18:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, three opening/closing scenarios are prepared as opening/closing scenarios for controlling opening/closing of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350. On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which two of the three opening/closing scenarios are prepared. Specifically, the configuration may include a first opening/closing scenario and a second opening/closing scenario, a first opening/closing scenario and a third opening/closing scenario, or a second opening/closing scenario and a third opening/closing scenario. It is also possible to have a configuration in which . Further, as a modified example, one opening/closing scenario out of the three opening/closing scenarios, specifically, a configuration in which only the first opening/closing scenario is prepared, or a configuration in which only the third opening/closing scenario is prepared may be adopted.

《H6-19》Variation 19:
The eighth embodiment and its modifications are provided with a non-V winning a prize opening shutter drive section 36d that opens and closes the non-V winning a prize mouth shutter 350, and the main controller 60 drives and controls the non-V winning a prize mouth shutter driving section 36d. By doing so, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is configured to be opened and closed. On the other hand, as a modification 19, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter may be configured to operate automatically in response to the force of the game ball flowing down, without using a driving means such as a motor.

FIG. 440 is an explanatory diagram showing a variable winning device 536 provided in a pachinko machine of modification 19. The variable winning device 536 includes a big winning opening 36a, an opening/closing door 36b, and a V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v. Since the big prize opening 36a and the opening/closing door 36b have the same configuration as in the eighth embodiment, they will be given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v includes a first passage 210, a croon 220, a second passage 600, and a non-V prize opening shutter 650. Since the first passage 210 and the clone 220 have the same configuration as in the eighth embodiment, they are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The second passage 600 includes a main line passage part 610, a communication passage part 620 for communicating between the hole 220b of the croon 220 and the main line passage part 610, and a branch passage part 330 branched from the communication passage part 620. Be prepared. Since the branch passage section 330 has the same configuration as the eighth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Comparing the second passage 300 in the eighth embodiment (FIG. 398) with the second passage 600 in the present modification 19, in the second passage 300 in the eighth embodiment, the main passage midstream portion 312 and the main passage downstream portion Although the communication passage part 320 was configured to be connected to the middle part with the side part 313, in the second passage 600 of the present modification 19, the communication passage part 620 connects from the hole 220b of the croon 220 to the main passage part. 610 near the ball outlet 610b, and the communicating passage section 620 is configured to communicate with the main line passage section 610 at a portion downstream of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 650.

The non-V winning a prize opening shutter 650 is provided between the main line passage section 610 and the communication passage section 620, and forms an acute angle (for example, 80 and a second flat plate 652 connected to each other. The non-V winning opening shutter 650 is configured to be rotatable in the direction of the arrow in the figure (clockwise) with the part where the first flat plate 651 and the second flat plate 652 are connected as the rotation axis OA. , game balls falling from the hole 220b of the croon 220 can be distributed to the downstream side of the main path section 610 and the side of the branch path section 330.

Specifically, the default state of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 650 is the first state shown by the solid line in the figure, and the first flat plate 651 is pushed down by the game ball flowing down the main path midstream portion 612. As a result, the state shifts to the second state indicated by the broken line in the figure. After the game ball passes through the non-V winning opening shutter 650 portion, the non-V winning opening shutter 650 returns to the first state due to its own weight. In the first state, the second flat plate 651 is oriented vertically and opens the communication passage section 620. In the second state, the second flat plate 651 is oriented horizontally, specifically, the upper surface of the second flat plate 651 is oriented to connect with the lower inner surface of the branch passage section 330, thereby closing the communication passage section 620. do. Therefore, in the first state, the game ball that has fallen from the hole 220b of the croon 220 can be sent to the downstream side of the main passage section 610 through the communication passage section 620, and in the second state, the game ball that has fallen from the hole 220b of the croon 220 can be sent to the downstream side of the main passage section 610. The game balls that have fallen from the can be sent to the branch passage section 330 side.

The player can change the state of the non-V winning opening shutter 650 by passing the gaming ball through the non-V winning opening shutter 650 portion of the main passageway section 610, taking into consideration the timing at which the gaming ball falls from the hole 220b of the clone 220. can be switched to a second state in which the communication passage section 620 is closed. As a result, the player can distribute the game balls that have fallen from the hole 220b of the croon 220 to the branch passage section 330 side, and can cause the game balls to enter the V winning zone FV.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, in a round game in which the first type jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the first opening/closing scenario is set, the game is placed in the V winning zone FV. The configuration is such that when a ball is successfully entered into a high probability mode and a first type jackpot is won during the high probability mode (high frequency support mode), a third opening/closing scenario is set. On the other hand, in this modification 19, since the opening/closing pattern of the non-V prize opening shutter 650 is determined by the above-mentioned mechanical configuration, it is possible to win the first type jackpot during the high-frequency support mode. If you win, you cannot change the opening/closing pattern. Therefore, in this modification 19, it is assumed that there is a jackpot in the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (in this modification 19, there is no distinction between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot). ) In a round game where you win, if you successfully enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV and enter the high probability mode, and win the jackpot during the high probability mode (high frequency support mode), Even if the game ball is successfully entered into the V-winning zone FV by the V-winning challenge mechanism section 536v, the V-winning will be invalidated. That is, in this modification 19, only in the first round game in which the jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the game ball is entered into the V winning zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 536v. By adopting a configuration in which no benefits are given for doing so, it is possible to easily employ the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v in which the opening/closing pattern is mechanically determined to be one type.

Further, as described above, only the first round game in which a jackpot is won in the normal state is configured to give a benefit for entering the game ball into the V winning zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 536v. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a skilled player from repeatedly being awarded a benefit for entering a game ball into the V winning zone FV. In addition, in this modification 19, the structure was such that only the first round game in which the jackpot was won in the normal state was given a benefit for entering the game ball into the V winning zone FV, but instead of this, In the first round game where you win a jackpot under normal conditions, if the game ball enters the V winning zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 536v, a privilege is given, and in the second round game that follows, the V acquisition challenge mechanism A privilege is given when a game ball enters the V winning zone FV by the section 536v, and when a game ball enters the V winning zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v in the third round game, It is also possible to have a configuration in which no benefits are given. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus is given when a game ball enters the winning zone FV in other round games such as the third and fourth rounds.

In addition, as an embodiment in which the non-V winning a prize opening shutter is realized by a mechanical structure, there is no need to limit it to the structure of the above modification 19, and other structures may be used. For example, the passage configuration of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section is the same as Modification Example 19, and a button that is turned on by a game ball is provided in the middle of the main passageway midstream section 612 of the main passageway part 610, and when the button is turned on by the game ball. Alternatively, the non-V winning a prize opening shutter may be mechanically closed.

《H6-20》Variation 20:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications (including modification 19), the game balls are distributed to the non-V winning zone FNV when the non-V winning opening shutter is in the open state, and the non-V winning opening shutter is in the closed state. When this happens, the game balls are distributed to the V winning zone FV. On the other hand, as a modified example, when the shutter (V winning hole shutter) is open, the game ball is sorted into the V winning zone FV, and when the shutter is closed, the game ball is distributed to the non-V winning zone FV. A configuration may also be adopted in which the information is distributed to zones FNV. With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the eighth embodiment.

《H6-21》Variation 21:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the destinations to which game balls are distributed are changed by opening and closing the shutter. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the distribution destinations of game balls are changed by a configuration other than opening/closing the shutter. For example, by changing the shape of the passage, the destination to which game balls are distributed may be changed. With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the eighth embodiment.

《H6-22》Variation 22:
In the eighth embodiment, the opening/closing scenario is set based on the jackpot type and the support mode, and in the sixteenth modification, the opening/closing scenario is set based on the jackpot type and the value of the second symbol display section flag. On the other hand, as a modified example, the system of jackpot types may be changed and opening/closing scenarios may be set based only on jackpot types.

FIG. 441 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in Modification 22. FIG. 441(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 441(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. As shown in FIG. 441(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes 8R first type jackpot and 8R second type jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. A seed jackpot is set. In this embodiment, "0 to 27" corresponds to the 8R first type jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R second type jackpot. As shown in FIG. 441(b), the distribution table for the second starting port includes 16R type 3 jackpot and 8R second type jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. A seed jackpot is set. In this embodiment, "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R type 3 jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R type 2 jackpot.

In this modification 22, in the first type jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is the V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern. In the second type jackpot, similarly to the eighth embodiment, the mode of opening/closing control of the non-V winning a prize opening shutter 350 is the V winning no winning closing/opening pattern. In the third type jackpot, the opening/closing control mode of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is a V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern. In step Sh1106 of FIG. 422, if it is a first type jackpot, the first opening/closing scenario (Fig. 406) is set, if it is a second type jackpot, the second opening/closing scenario (Fig. 410) is set, and the second opening/closing scenario (Fig. 410) is set. In the case of a type 3 jackpot, the configuration is such that a third opening/closing scenario (FIG. 411) is set. With such a configuration as well, a configuration that performs the same operation as Modification 16 can be realized.

<<I>> Ninth embodiment:
《I1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 442 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as the ninth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 443 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 444 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. The game balls that enter each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed on the gaming board 30. be guided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 443).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, first starting port 33, second starting port 34, or variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the opening 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed until it is stopped is also referred to as the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only display effects triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 445 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 445(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 445(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 445(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 445(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 445(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. A unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section In either the second symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the symbol display device for each game. At step 41, after a predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 445(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The number of balls to be held based on the number of balls entering the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first holding display area Ds1. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 444, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the interval between the pair of nails 42a, 42b.

<<I2>> Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 446 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing information. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to an input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 443) is turned off. do.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various winning holes such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable prize drive part 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive part 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 447 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. A fall random number counter CF is used for the fall lottery to decide whether to end the high probability mode (also referred to as high probability gaming state). The "high probability mode" is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is stored in the pending information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reservation area Ra in chronological order. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry are set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 445(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be explained. The fall random number counter CF is used in a game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode, when executing a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high probability mode. When winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The falling random number counter CF is updated regularly and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The updated value of the fall random number counter CF is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing. Then, after the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the value of the win/fail table stored in the falling lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 ( (fall lottery success/failure table), and it is determined whether or not to end the high probability mode.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the . Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. For example, if C4=0 or 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fall random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 448 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table. FIG. 448(a) shows a pass/fail table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and FIG. 448(b) shows a pass/fail table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 448(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the low probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 448(b), in the high probability mode win/fail table, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

"Small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is determined. It is possible to set a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the numbers are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the door 36b is closed. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table, and a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is made using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table. A low-probability mode can be set in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. As explained using FIG. 448, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win/fail table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 449 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 449(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 449(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. There are 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot. The difference between the 16R fixed jackpot and the 8R fixed jackpot is that the number of openings of the door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R fixed jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R fixed jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 16R guaranteed variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, in the case of a losing result in the winning lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and no change in the lottery mode and support mode occurs. When sorting the type of jackpot, if it is a 16 probability strange jackpot or an 8R probability strange jackpot, as explained earlier, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high probability mode. This state continues until the next time a jackpot is won in a winning lottery or a winner is won in a fall lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 450 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery success/failure table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 450, three values, 0, 1, and 2, are set in the fall lottery success/failure table as the value of the fall random number counter CF that is a win in the fall lottery. Ninety-seven values from 3 to 99 are set as the value of the falling random number counter CF that is a failure. In other words, in a game in high probability mode, the probability of winning the fall lottery and ending the high probability mode and switching to low probability mode is 3/100, and the probability of losing the fall lottery and continuing in high probability mode is 3/100. It is 97/100. In addition, in this embodiment, the falling lottery is not performed in the game round of the low probability mode.

FIG. 451 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 451(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 451(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 451(b) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (for the high-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 451(b), the electric accessory opening lottery win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the electric accessory opening lottery. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

<<I3>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 452 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 446) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《I4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, if the number of games has reached a predetermined guaranteed number of games, the machine shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The "guaranteed number of games" is the number of games guaranteed to be played continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and is 100 times in this embodiment. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. After the guaranteed number of games exceeds 100, if the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that point, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode If the player wins the falling lottery during a game in which the number of games played has not reached the guaranteed number of games since the start of the game (for example, 60 times), the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode. Then, from the 60th game round, a winning lottery is performed in the low probability mode. On the other hand, regarding the support mode, even if you win the falling lottery in the 60th game and the high probability mode ends and you move to the low probability mode, even if the high probability mode ends and you move to the low probability mode, the 100th time since the high frequency support mode started The high-frequency support mode continues until the game reaches the first game to be played.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot with variable probability is won by a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then, after the high frequency support mode is started, If you win a jackpot in a winning lottery in a game where the number of games has not reached the guaranteed number of games (for example, 60 times), the timing when the 60th game ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., the winning (timing immediately after the end of the result announcement performance), the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 60th game ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts. That is, when the guaranteed number of games has not been reached, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game period in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Next, a case will be described in which a player wins a falling lottery and a case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games is reached.

FIG. 453 is a timing chart illustrating the process when the player wins the falling lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. In FIG. 453(a), a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to high probability mode, the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. In the game after the number of games played reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, 120 times), if the player wins the lottery and the lottery mode changes to low probability mode and the support mode changes to low frequency support mode. It shows. Even if you win the fall lottery in the 120th game, the lottery result in the fall lottery will be reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in that game, just as if you won the fall lottery in the 60th game. . That is, in the example of FIG. 453(a), in the 120th game, the player wins the falling lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game, a winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

Regarding the support mode, as described above, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, if the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (100 times), the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. However, even if the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode continues as the lottery mode at that point, the high-frequency support mode will continue as the support mode. Ru. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 453(a), if you win the fall lottery on the 120th game, the high probability mode continues until the 120th game, so the high frequency support mode continues. has been done. Then, in the 120th game, the player wins the fall lottery and the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode also shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

FIG. 453(b) shows each state of the performance, lottery mode, and support mode that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes in the 120th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery. In this example, until the 120th game (1st to 119th), there is no winning lottery or winning lottery, so until the 120th game, the result of the winning lottery for each game is announced. A normal performance (also called a normal performance) is performed to announce the lottery results. Then, in the 120th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery, for example, a battle performance (hereinafter also referred to as a battle performance) in which the player's character and the enemy's character face off is executed. The battle performance is a performance before the player is notified of whether the result will be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. In this embodiment, the battle performance is when you win the falling lottery, when you win the winning lottery (winning the jackpot), and when neither of these (when you win neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery). This is a performance that suggests that one of the following applies.

After executing the battle performance, a result announcement performance is performed to announce the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. In the result announcement performance, a performance corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is performed. Specifically, if the player's character wins the falling lottery, the player's character loses, and if the player's character wins the lottery (in this embodiment, the jackpot), the player's character wins. If not, a draw performance is performed in which the player's character and the enemy's character are tied. In the case of FIG. 453(b), since the player wins the fall lottery in the 120th game, a defeat effect is executed as a result notification effect. The series of performances from the start of the battle performance to the end of the defeat performance is hereinafter also referred to as a "battle/defeat performance."

In addition, as a result of winning the falling lottery in the 120th game run, the timing of shifting from high probability mode to low probability mode coincides with the timing at which the 120th game winning the falling lottery starts. There is. That is, when the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Further, as the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The timing at which the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode is almost the same as the timing at which the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Therefore, the low-frequency support mode is entered almost simultaneously with the start of the 120th game.

FIG. 454 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when the aforementioned battle effect or result notification effect is being executed. As shown in the figure, when a battle effect or a result announcement effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. In the first display area 41aS, variable display and static display of symbols are performed. Specifically, in the unit game time, a variable display of symbols is executed during a variable time, and a static display of symbols is executed during a stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, a battle performance or a result notification performance is performed.

FIG. 455 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect and a result announcement effect. FIG. 455(a) shows a battle performance, FIG. 455(b) shows a defeat performance as a result notification performance, and FIG. 455(c) shows a victory performance as a result notification performance. The battle effect shown in FIG. 455(a) displays an image of a confrontation between a female character on the player's side and a male character on the enemy's side on the symbol display device 41, and also transmits sounds and lights accompanying the image to the speaker 46. In this mode, the signal is outputted to various lamps 47. However, the battle performance may take other forms.

Furthermore, the defeat effect shown in FIG. 455(b) causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image of a female character on the player's side saddened by defeat, and also transmits sound and light accompanying the image to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. This is the mode in which the output is performed. However, the defeat presentation as the result announcement presentation may be in other forms.

The victory effect shown in FIG. 455(c) causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image in which the player's female character is happy with the victory, and outputs the sound and light accompanying the image to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. This is an aspect in which the However, the victory presentation as the result presentation may be in other forms.

Further, although not shown in the drawings, a draw performance in which the player character and the enemy character end in a draw may be used as a result notification performance.

Next, a description will be given of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. Below, prior to explaining the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the process executed by the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 will be explained.

FIG. 456 is a timing chart illustrating processing when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. Specifically, FIG. 456 shows that in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a jackpot with variable probability is won in the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high probability mode and the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode. After that, after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode (for example, 120 times), you win a jackpot in the winning lottery, and when the opening/closing execution mode starts A case is shown in which the lottery mode has transitioned to low probability mode and the support mode has transitioned to low frequency support mode.

In the 120th game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle performance is executed, and thereafter, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is performed as a result announcement performance. At the end of the 120th game in which the jackpot was won, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., the timing when the winning result announcement performance ends). At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side.

Here, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 performs the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment when winning the falling lottery in the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, that is, the same operation as shown in FIG. 453. shall perform the action. Comparing FIG. 453(b) and FIG. 456, it can be seen that the manner in which the support mode changes in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game is different between the two. During this period, when winning a jackpot, the system is in high-frequency support mode as shown in Figure 456, while when winning a fall, it is in low-frequency support mode as shown in Figure 453(b). There is. Therefore, assuming the gaming machine of Comparative Example 1 that executes both the process shown in FIG. 453(b) and the process shown in FIG. Then, by determining whether the high-frequency support mode has ended and shifted to the low-frequency support mode from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 444), the results of the fall lottery and winning lottery of the 120th game are determined. can be recognized. That is, during the execution of the battle performance, the player can predict the type of result notification performance (win performance or defeat performance) that will be executed afterwards. In other words, if the high-probability mode has been played 100 times or more, and the high-frequency support mode is active, when a battle performance starts, the player's character and the enemy's character Although the content is such that it is not known until the results are announced who will win (in other words, it is not known until the results are announced whether you will win the jackpot or the fall lottery in the winning lottery), the players , by recognizing that the high-frequency support has ended from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a during the period when the battle performance is being executed, the player's character loses the current battle (wins the falling lottery). This can be predicted during the battle production. Therefore, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension regarding the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game through the battle performance and result announcement performance. This is a problem with Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 457 is a timing chart illustrating processing when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a player wins a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode, and then the high-frequency support mode starts. FIG. 457 shows a case in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the 120th game run after the game is played, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 120th game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle performance is executed, and thereafter, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is performed as a result announcement performance. The support mode shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game that won the jackpot started, and when the 120th game that won the jackpot ended, the opening/closing execution mode started. The lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result announcement performance ends). In other words, if the number of games played in the high-probability mode is continuously executed for the guaranteed number of games (100 times) or more, and if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing to shift to the support mode is the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (see FIG. 456), whereas the pachinko machine of this embodiment The difference is that the machine 10 is set at the timing at which the game round in which the jackpot was won starts (ie, at the start of the game round).

Comparing FIG. 453(b) and FIG. 457, it can be seen that the manner in which the support mode changes is the same in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery of the 120th game from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 444) before the result announcement effect is executed. Can not. In other words, while the battle performance is being executed, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of result notification performance (win performance or defeat performance) that will be executed afterwards. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned problems of comparative example 1 can be solved.

In addition, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the timing to shift the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode will start from the game where you won the jackpot. Hereinafter, the process of making the aspect of the support mode during the battle/victory presentation period match that at the time of winning by falling is referred to as "support mode simulation process".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, various flags are prepared in order for the MPU 62 to specify various gaming states. Specifically, there is a high probability mode flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and a high probability mode flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. A high-frequency support mode flag, a fall flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not a player has won a fall lottery are provided. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a gaming state determination value is used for collectively specifying each value (each flag value) of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag in the MPU 62. Provided. That is, the game state determination value is a numerical value that allows identification of each flag value of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag. These flags and gaming state determination values are stored in various flag storage areas 64g (see FIG. 446) of the RAM 64.

FIG. 458 is an explanatory diagram showing gaming state determination values for each flag value of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag. As shown in the figure, the flag value of the high probability mode flag is set to "02H (meaning 02 in hexadecimal notation, the same applies hereinafter)" when the mode is high probability mode, and when it is not high probability mode (i.e. low probability mode ), "00H" is set. As the flag value of the high-frequency support mode flag, "01H" is set when the mode is high-frequency support mode, and "00H" is set when it is not high-frequency support mode (that is, low-frequency support mode). There is. As the flag value of the fall flag, "10H" is set if the player wins the fall lottery, and "00H" is set if the player does not win the fall lottery.

In this embodiment, the gaming state determination value is the sum of the flag values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall flag. Therefore, the following results.
- If the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the fall flag is "00H", the gaming state judgment value as the sum of these values is "00H". becomes.
- If the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the fall flag is "00H", the gaming state determination value is "01H".
- If the high probability mode flag is "02H", the high frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the fall flag is "00H", the gaming state determination value is "02H".
- If the high probability mode flag is "02H", the high frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the fall flag is "00H", the gaming state determination value is "03H".
- If the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the fall flag is "10H", the gaming state determination value is "11H".
- If the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the fall flag is "10H", the gaming state determination value is "10H".

What can be seen from FIG. 458 is that the gaming state determination value is uniquely derived according to the combination of the flag values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall flag. Therefore, based on the game state determination value, it is possible to determine whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and whether or not you have won the fall lottery. It is possible to specify.

In addition, in this embodiment, an addition process is performed to add each flag value of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag, and the added value (total value) is defined as the gaming state determination value. On the other hand, as a modified example, the gaming state determination value is uniquely specified based on subtraction processing, multiplication processing, division processing, or arithmetic processing that combines two or more of these processing and addition processing. Good too. In short, as long as the gaming state determination value can be derived uniquely according to the combination of the flag values of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag, any calculation process can be used. There may be.

In the rightmost column of the table shown in FIG. 458, a term "gaming state at the time of calculating the gaming state determination value" is added. The contents of this section briefly indicate what kind of gaming state the gaming state determination value indicates, and are as follows.

When the game state determination value is "00H", the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode, and is in a normal state. This state is also referred to hereinafter as a "low-probability, low-frequency state."

When the gaming state determination value is "01H", the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability mode and high frequency support mode, and is in a so-called time saving state. This state is also referred to as a "low probability high frequency state" hereinafter. When a normal jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the lottery mode is shifted to a low probability mode and the support mode is shifted to a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, a "low probability high frequency state" is entered. This low probability high frequency state is maintained until the number of games played after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games played.

When the game state determination value is "02H", it is in the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the pachinko machine is in a so-called latent probability change state. The latent probability change state is a state that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment cannot take, but this point will be explained in detail later. This state is also referred to hereinafter as a "high probability low frequency state". After you win a probability-variable jackpot in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode will change to high probability mode and the support mode will change to high-frequency support mode, and after that, the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started will change. In the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, if a jackpot is won and the above-mentioned support mode simulation process is performed, the game enters the "high probability low frequency state".

When the gaming state determination value is "03H", the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and is in a so-called variable probability state. This state is also referred to hereinafter as a "high probability high frequency state." When a probability variable jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the lottery mode is shifted to a high probability mode and the support mode is shifted to a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, a "high probability high frequency state" is entered.

When the game state determination value is "11H", the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability mode and high frequency support mode due to a fall within the guaranteed number of games, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a so-called fall time shortening state. This state is also referred to hereinafter as a "low probability of falling high frequency state." After you win a probability-variable jackpot in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode will change to high probability mode and the support mode will change to high-frequency support mode, and after that, the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started will change. When a fall lottery is won in a game that has not reached the guaranteed number of games, the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode. At this time, the state becomes "low probability of falling and high frequency state". This low fall probability high frequency state is maintained until the number of games played after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games played.

When the game state determination value is "10H", the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode due to a fall after the guaranteed number of games, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a so-called fall normal state. The normal fall state is the state at the 120th game time shown in FIG. 453 described above, and is also referred to hereinafter as the "low probability of fall, low frequency state." After you win a probability-variable jackpot in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode will change to high probability mode and the support mode will change to high-frequency support mode, and after that, the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started will change. In the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if a fall lottery is won, the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode and the support mode shifts to a low frequency support mode. At this time, a "low probability of falling and low frequency state" occurs.

The case when the gaming state determination value is "02H" will be further explained. When the gaming state determination value is "02H", it can be said that a pachinko machine of a model equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state is in a latent probability variable state. A "latent probability state" is a state in which there is no support from the electric accessory 34a even though the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is in the high probability mode, and the player is in the high probability mode. It is impossible or difficult to determine whether or not there is. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as can be seen from the outline of the processing explained so far, the latent probability change state does not occur. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won after the guaranteed number of games, the above-mentioned support mode simulation process is performed, so the game state determination value is calculated as "02H". It happens.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the manner in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner and in a stopped manner differs depending on the above-mentioned gaming state determination value and the lottery result in the winning lottery. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a large number of variable time tables that specify the modes of variable display and stop display of symbols are stored in advance in the variable time table storage area 63h. A large number of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage area 63h are classified by gaming state determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment includes a group of variable time tables corresponding to each gaming state determination value. The variable time table group is a collection of variable time tables that is a collection of a plurality of variable time tables specified by the value of the jackpot flag and the value of the reach occurrence flag. The jackpot flag is a flag for specifying the type of jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot). The reach occurrence flag is a flag for specifying whether or not a reach occurrence has occurred.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, there is a low probability low frequency state fluctuation time table group used when the gaming state judgment value is "00H", and a group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states used when the gaming state judgment value is "01H". A variable time table group for low probability high frequency states, a variable time table group for high probability high frequency states used when the gaming state judgment value is "03H", and a falling low table group used when the gaming state judgment value is "11H". A variable time table group for high probability high frequency states and a variable time table group for low probability low frequency states used when the gaming state determination value is "10H" are stored in the variable time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63. has been done. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the latent probability variable state does not occur as described above, the variable time table group for the latent probability variable state used when the gaming state determination value is "02H" is the variable time of the ROM 63. It is not prepared in the table storage area 63h (FIG. 446).

For this reason, in a pachinko machine that only performs support mode simulation processing when a jackpot is won after the guaranteed number of games, if the game state judgment value is shifted from "03H" to "02H" by support mode simulation processing. Another problem is that the process is interrupted or stopped when attempting to read out the variable time table group for latent probability variable states to be used when the gaming state judgment value is "02H" from the variable time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63. was there.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after calculating the gaming state determination value, if the calculation result is "02H", the game state determination value is rewritten to "03H". , has a configuration that solves the above problems.

FIG. 459 is a timing chart illustrating the processing procedure for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probability variable jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. In the 120th game run after the 120th game, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery at time t1, support mode simulation processing is performed at time t2 immediately after time t1, and the support mode is changed to high-frequency support mode. to infrequent support mode.

At time t3 following time t2, a game state determination value is calculated, and when the calculation result is "02H", processing is performed to rewrite the game state determination value to "03H". At time t3, the high probability mode flag is ON (="02H"), the high frequency support mode flag is OFF (="00H"), and the fall flag is OFF (="00H"). The calculation result of the gaming state determination value is "02H". Therefore, the gaming state determination value is rewritten from "02H" to "03H" by the rewriting process.

At time t4 following time t3, processing for setting a variable time is performed. This variable time setting is performed based on the gaming state determination value rewritten to "03H". Specifically, the MPU 62 reads the high probability high frequency state variable time table group corresponding to the case where the gaming state determination value is "03H" from the variable time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63, and reads this The fluctuation time is set using the fluctuation time table group for high probability and high frequency states. Reading of this variable time table group is performed normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped.

At time t5 following time t4, variable display of symbols starts based on the variable time set at time t4.

Note that FIG. 459 is only for explaining the processing procedure, and the process actually progresses instantaneously from time t2 when the support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode to time t5 when fluctuation starts. . Therefore, as explained using FIG. 457, it can be said that the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of a game round.

<<I5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Si0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and stores detection information (ball entry detection information). After that, the process advances to step Si0102.

In step Si0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si0103.

In step Si0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear them to 0. Then, the updated values of each of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Si0104. Note that the change type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 464), which will be described later.

In step Si0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed as the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Si0104 will be described later. After executing step Si0104, the process advances to step Si0105.

In step Si0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Si0105 will be described later. After executing step Si0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 460: Si0104).

FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Si0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Si0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Si0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Si0203.

In step Si0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Si0204.

In step Si0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Si0209.

In step Si0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Si0201: NO), the process advances to step Si0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Si0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Si0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Si0207. On the other hand, in step Si0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Si0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Si0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Si0208.

In step Si0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Si0209.

In step Si0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Si0204 or step Si0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Si0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Si0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Si0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Si0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Si0212.

In step Si0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Si0103 (FIG. 460) is stored in the first memory of the free storage area of the corresponding holding area. area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items to which 1 was added in step Si0210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Si0103 are Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Si0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Si0103 is , is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Si0210. After executing step Si0212, the process advances to step Si0213.

In step Si0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF. This is a process in which the type, presence or absence of a reach, determination result of the success or failure of the falling lottery (lottery result), etc., are determined before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Si0213, the process advances to step Si0214.

In step Si0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the destination judgment process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is set as a pending command. do.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 464: Step Si0503) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Si0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 461: Si0213) of the ball entry process for the starting port.

FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process uses the pending information to determine the validity of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the occurrence of reach, the validity of the fall lottery, etc. based on the pending information. This is a process executed before the main controller 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery.

In step Si0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 461) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Si0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Si0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Si0302: YES), the process advances to step Si0303, and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Si0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round (Si0302: NO), the process advances to step Si0304, and the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the ball is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si0305, and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won by referring to the fall determination table stored in the fall determination table storage area 63d.

In step Si0305, if it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (Si0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0306, where the fall winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Si0303. In step Si0303, as described above, the low probability mode pass/fail table stored in the pass/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Si0305, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won (Si0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0307. In step Si0307, as a result of referring to the high probability mode success/failure table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si0308, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode hit/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Si0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Si0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Si0310, the process advances to step Si0311.

In step Si0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Si0311, if it is determined that it corresponds to a probability variable jackpot (Si0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0312, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0311 that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Si0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0313, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Si0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Si0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0314, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Si0316, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Si0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0317, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0316 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Si0316: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 460: Si0105).

FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Si0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Si0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Si0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0402, and the number of reserved accessories SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Si0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Si0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Si0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. After that, the process advances to step Si0404.

In step Si0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Si0103 (FIG. 460) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Si0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is not less than the upper limit (Si0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Si0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Si0502.

In step Si0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Si0503.

In step Si0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Si0502, the command set in timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Si0503, the process advances to step Si0504.

In step Si0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Si0505.

In step Si0505, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Si0506. In step Si0506, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Si0506, the process advances to step Si0507.

In step Si0507, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Si0508.

In step Si0508, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Si0509.

In step Si0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Si0503). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Si0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Si0509: NO), in step Si0510 and step Si0511, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Si0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Si0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Si0509: YES), the process returns to step Si0503 and each process from step Si0503 to step Si0508 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Si0503 to step Si0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 464: Si0506).

FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Si0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step Si0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Si0601: YES), the present game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Si0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Si0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0602.

In step Si0602, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

In step Si0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in variable display (Si0602: NO), the process advances to step Si0603.

In step Si0603, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Si0603, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Si0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0604.

In step Si0604, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Si0604, the present game round control process is ended.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 465: Si0603) of the game time control process.

FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Si0701, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN exceeds "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" or less means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Si0701, if it is determined that the total number of reservations CRN is less than or equal to "0" (Si0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Si0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0702.

In step Si0702, a hold information shift process is executed to set the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Si0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Si0703, a fall determination process including a process when winning a fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Next, the process advances to step Si0704.

In step Si0704, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Si0704, the process advances to step Si0705.

In step Si0705, a gaming state determination process for determining the gaming state is executed. Specifically, the gaming state is determined by calculating the gaming state determination value described above. Details of the gaming state determination process will be described later. After executing step Si0705, the process advances to step Si0706.

In step Si0706, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game round on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b based on the gaming state judgment value and the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is a process for setting the variable time. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Si0706, the process advances to step Si0707.

In step Si0707, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, information as to whether reach has occurred, and information on the variable time set in step Si0706. After executing step Si0707, the process advances to step Si0708.

In step Si0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on a losing result.

The variation command and type command set in step Si0707 and step Si0708 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal processing (FIG. 464). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Si0708, the process advances to step Si0709.

In step Si0709, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Si0709, the process advances to step Si0710.

In step Si0710, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Si0710, this variation start process ends.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 466: Si0702).

FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Si0801, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 447) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 447). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Si0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Si0801 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Si0801: YES), holding information shift processing for the first holding area in steps Si0802 to Si0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Si0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Si0801: NO ), the reservation information shift process for the second reservation area in steps Si0808 to Step Si0813 is executed.

In step Si0802, after subtracting 1 from the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Si0803, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Si0804. In step Si0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Si0805.

In step Si0805, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Si0805, the process advances to step Si0806.

In step Si0806, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. After that, the process advances to step Si0807.

In step Si0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Si0807 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in normal processing (FIG. 464). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Si0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (Si0801: NO), step Proceed to Si0808.

In step Si0808, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si0809. In step Si0809, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Si0810, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si0811.

In step Si0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Si0811, the process advances to step Si0812.

In step Si0812, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process advances to step Si0813.

In step Si0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Si0813 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in normal processing (FIG. 464). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be explained. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 466: Si0703).

FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. In step Si0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Si0901, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Si0901: YES), the process advances to step Si0902.

In step Si0902, the success/failure determination of the fall lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table for the fall lottery. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a winning in the fall lottery success/failure table (see FIG. 450) in the fall lottery table storage area 63d. Determine whether or not the In the following step Si0903, if the result of the judgment in step Si0902 is that the lottery is won (Si0903: YES), the process advances to step Si0904.

In step Si0904, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si0905, and the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The fall flag is a flag for storing the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the fall lottery. After executing step Si0905, the process advances to step Si0906.

In step Si0906, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Si0906, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Si0906: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Si0907, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Si0907, the main fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0906 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games (Si0906: YES), the fall determination process is immediately terminated. In addition, if it is determined in step Si0901 that the mode is not high probability mode (Si0901: NO), or if the result of the judgment in step Si0903 is that the fall lottery has not been won (Si0903: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

By the fall determination process configured as described above, the variation in the lottery mode and support mode at the timing of the fall and winning shown in FIG. 453 is realized.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 466: Si0704).

FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Si1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Si1001, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Si1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1002, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 448(b). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Si1004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Si1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1003, where a propriety determination is made with reference to the propriety table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 448(a). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Si1004.

In step Si1004, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Si1002 or step Si1003 is a jackpot win. In step Si1004, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Si1004: YES), the process advances to step Si1005. The time when this jackpot is won corresponds to time t1 in the timing chart of FIG. 459.

In step Si1005, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Si1005, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is selected (Si1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1006, and the number of consecutively executed games in the high-frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). ) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Si1006, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Si1006: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Si1007, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. The process of turning off this high-frequency support mode flag corresponds to support mode simulation process. The time when this high-frequency support mode flag turns OFF corresponds to time t2 in the timing chart of FIG. 459. After executing step Si1007, the process advances to step Si1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1005 that the mode is not high-frequency support mode (Si1005: NO), or if it is determined in step Si1006 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games (step Si1006: YES), the process immediately proceeds to step Si1008.

Through the processes from step Si1004 to step Si1007 described above, the fluctuations in the lottery mode and support mode at the timing of winning the jackpot shown in FIG. 457 are realized.

In subsequent steps Si1008 to Step Si1012, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step Si1008, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Si1008, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Si1008: NO), proceed to step Si1009 and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 449(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1008 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Si1008: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1010, and the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 449(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Si1009 or step Si1010, the process advances to step Si1011.

In step Si1011, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Si1008 or step Si1009 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 16R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 8R certain strange jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. If it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Si1011, the process advances to step Si1012.

In step Si1012, processing for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Si1009 or step Si1010 is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Si1012, the hit determination process ends.

In step Si1004, if the result of the winning lottery in step Si1002 or Si1003 is not a jackpot (Si1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1013 and refers to the reach determination table to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the relevant game round. Make a judgment. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Si1014.

In step Si1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Si1013 is that a reach occurs in the game round (Si1014: YES), the process advances to step Si1015 and the reach occurrence flag is turned on. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Si1015, the process advances to step Si1016.

On the other hand, in step Si1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Si1013 is that a reach does not occur in the game round (Si1014: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1016 without executing step Si1015.

In step Si1016, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Si1016, the hit determination process ends.

<Game status determination process>
Next, the gaming state determination process will be explained. The game state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 466: Si0705).

FIG. 470 is a flowchart showing the gaming state determination process. The gaming state determination process is a process of calculating the gaming state determination value described above. Hereinafter, specific processing of the gaming state determination processing will be explained.

In step Si1101, the game state determination value PN is calculated by adding the value of the high probability mode flag, the value of the high frequency support mode flag, and the value of the fall flag. As previously explained using FIG. 458, the gaming state determination value PN can be obtained by adding up the values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall flag. After executing step Si1101, the process advances to step Si1102.

In step Si1102, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained in step Si1101 is "02H". In step Si1102, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "02H" (Si1102: YES), the process advances to step Si1103 and a process is performed to rewrite the gaming state determination value PN from "02H" to "03H". . The time when this gaming state determination value PN is rewritten from "02H" to "03H" corresponds to time t3 in the timing chart of FIG. 459. After executing step Si1103, the present gaming state determination process is ended.

In step Si1102, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si1102: NO), the present gaming state determination process is ended without executing step Si1103.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 466: Si0706).

FIG. 471 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Si1201, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 470) is "00H". In step Si1201, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "00H" (Si1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1202, and a variable time setting process for a low probability low frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low probability low frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a low probability low frequency state. The fluctuation time setting process for the low-probability, low-frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1202, this variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Si1201 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "00H" (Si1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1203.

In step Si1203, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 470) is "01H". In step Si1203, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "01H" (Si1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1204, and a variable time setting process for a low probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low probability high frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a low probability high frequency state. The fluctuation time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1204, this variable time setting process ends.

In step Si1203, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is not "01H" (Si1203: NO), the process advances to step Si1205.

In step Si1205, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 470) is "03H". In step Si1205, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "03H" (Si1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1206, and a variable time setting process for a high probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a high probability high frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a high probability high frequency state. The fluctuation time setting process for the high-probability, high-frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1206, this variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Si1205 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "03H" (Si1205: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1207.

In step Si1207, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 470) is "11H". In step Si1207, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "11H" (Si1207: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1208, and a variable time setting process for a low fall probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low fall probability high frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a low fall probability high frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1208, this variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Si1207 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si1207: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1209.

In step Si1209, a variable time setting process for a low fall probability low frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low probability of falling and low frequency state is a process of setting a variable time when the gaming state is a low probability of falling and low frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low fall probability/low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1209, this variable time setting process ends.

<Variation time setting process for low probability and low frequency states>
Next, a variation time setting process for a low probability and low frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 471: Si1202).

FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing variation time setting processing for a low probability, low frequency state. In step Si1301, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si1302.

In step Si1302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (Si1302: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1303.

In step Si1303, a variable time table for jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for low probability and low frequency states includes (i) a variable time table for jackpots used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and low frequency state, (ii) a variable time table for a jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a low probability and low frequency state; A variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (iii) a reach non-reach table that is used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and low frequency state. A variable time table for occurrence is provided. In step Si1303, (i) is specified from among (i) to (iii). (i) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Si1303, the process advances to step Si1304.

In step Si1304, the variation time table specified in step Si1303 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Si1301 is obtained. Subsequently, in step Si1305, the variable time information acquired in step Si1304 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the low-probability, low-frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si1302, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Si1302: NO), the process advances to step Si1306, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Determine. Since this process (Si1306) is executed when there is no jackpot winning in the winning lottery related to the current game round in step Si1302, in step Si1306, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Si1306: YES), and step Proceed to Si1307. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63.

In step Si1307, the reach occurrence flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Si1307, the process advances to step Si1308.

In step Si1308, a variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (ii) low-probability, low-frequency state, a variable time table for reach generation is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. (ii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a reach normal performance. After executing step Si1308, the process proceeds to step Si1304 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si1308 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS.

In step Si1306, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Si1306: NO), the process advances to step Si1309.

In step Si1309, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (iii) low-probability, low-frequency state, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified, which is used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur. (iii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Si1309, the process proceeds to step Si1304 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si1309 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS.

<Variation time setting processing for low probability and high frequency states>
Next, the fluctuation time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 471: Si1204).

FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing variation time setting processing for a low probability high frequency state. In step Si1401, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Si1402.

In step Si1402, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (Si1402: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1403.

In step Si1403, a variable time table for jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for low probability high frequency states includes (iv) a variable time table for jackpots used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability high frequency state, and (v) a variable time table for winning a jackpot in a low probability high frequency state. Variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (vi) Non-reach table used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and high frequency state. A variable time table for occurrence is provided. In step Si1403, (iv) is specified from among (iv) to (vi). (iv) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Si1403, the process advances to step Si1404.

In step Si1404, the variation time table specified in step Si1403 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Si1401 is obtained. Subsequently, in step Si1405, the variable time information acquired in step Si1404 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the fluctuation time setting process for the low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si1402, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Si1402: NO), the process advances to step Si1406, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Determine. Since this process (Si1406) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Si1402, in step Si1406, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Si1406: YES), and step Proceed to Si1407. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63.

In step Si1407, the reach occurrence flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Si1407, the process advances to step Si1408.

In step Si1408, a variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (v) low-probability, high-frequency state, a variable time table for reach generation is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. (v) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Si1408, the process proceeds to step Si1404 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si1408 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS.

In step Si1406, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Si1406: NO), the process advances to step Si1409.

In step Si1409, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (vi) low-probability, high-frequency state, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified, which is used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and reach does not occur. For example, (vi) is a variable time table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Si1409, the process proceeds to step Si1404 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si1409 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS.

<Variation time setting process for high-probability, high-frequency states>
Next, a variable time setting process for a high-probability, high-frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 471: Si1206).

FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing variation time setting processing for a high probability and high frequency state. In step Si1501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Si1502.

In step Si1502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (Si1502: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1503.

In step Si1503, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for high probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for high probability and high frequency states includes (vii) a variable time table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and high frequency state, (viii) a winning time table for a high probability and high frequency state, A variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (ix) A variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and high frequency state. A variable time table for occurrence is provided. In step Si1503, (vii) is specified from among (vii) to (ix). (vii) is a variable time table for performing a battle/victory performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a victory performance executed after the battle performance. The battle/victory performance is, for example, the performance shown in FIGS. 455(a) and 455(c). In step Si1503 of FIG. 474, "variable time table for battle/victory performance" is written. After executing step Si1503, the process advances to step Si1504.

In step Si1504, the variation time table specified in step Si1503 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Si1501 is obtained. Subsequently, in step Si1505, the variable time information acquired in step Si1504 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The time when this variable time information is set in the variable time counter area corresponds to time t4 in the timing chart of FIG. 459. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si1502, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Si1502: NO), the process advances to step Si1506, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Determine. This process (Si1506) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Si1502, so in step Si1506, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Si1506: YES), and step Proceed to Si1507. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63.

In step Si1507, the reach occurrence flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Si1507, the process advances to step Si1508.

In step Si1508, a variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for high probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from among (vii) to (ix), identify (viii) a variable time table for reach generation that is used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and high frequency state. do. (viii) is a variable time table for performing a battle/draw performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a draw performance executed after the battle performance. In step Si1508 of FIG. 474, "variable time table for battle/draw effect" is written. After executing step Si1508, the process proceeds to step Si1504 described above, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Si1508 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In step Si1506, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Si1506: NO), the process advances to step Si1509.

In step Si1509, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for high probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from among (vii) to (ix), (ix) variable time table for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and high frequency state. , to identify. (ix) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for losing. In step Si1509 of FIG. 474, "variable time table for losing performance" is written. After executing step Si1509, the process proceeds to step Si1504 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si1509 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS.

<Variation time setting process for low fall probability high frequency state>
Next, a variable time setting process for a low fall probability high frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 471: Si1208).

FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for a low fall probability high frequency state. In step Si1601, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Si1602.

In step Si1602, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (Si1602: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1603.

In step Si1603, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for low probability of falling and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for low probability of falling and high frequency state includes (x) variable time table for jackpot used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in the low probability of falling and high frequency state, (xi) high frequency state of low probability of falling. A variable time table is provided which is used when a winning lottery results in a losing result. In step Si1603, (x) is specified from (x) and (xi). (x) is a variable time table for performing a battle/victory performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a victory performance executed after the battle performance. In particular, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned battle/victory performance includes a performance that suggests that the player has won by falling. Note that instead of this configuration, a battle/victory performance may be used that does not include a performance suggesting that the player has won by falling. Specifically, the same battle/victory performance as the battle/victory performance (battle/victory performance in a high probability/high frequency state) described in step Si1503 of FIG. 474 may be used. In step Si1603 of FIG. 475, "variable time table for battle/victory (suggestion of falling) effect" is written. After executing step Si1603, the process advances to step Si1604.

In step Si1604, the variation time table specified in step Si1603 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Si1601 is obtained. Subsequently, in step Si1605, the variable time information acquired in step Si1604 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the low fall probability high frequency state is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1602 that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Si1602: NO), the process advances to step Si1606.

In step Si1606, from the variable time table group for low fall probability high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, in the above-mentioned (xi) low fall probability high frequency state, there are no results in the winning lottery. Specify the variable time table to be used when (xi) is a variable time table for performing a battle/defeat performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a defeat performance performed after the battle performance. The battle/defeat performance is, for example, the performance shown in FIGS. 455(a) and 455(b). In step Si1606 of FIG. 475, "variable time table for battle/defeat effect" is written. After executing step Si1606, the process proceeds to step Si1604 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si1606 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS.

<Variable time setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency state>
Next, a variable time setting process for a low fall probability low frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 471: Si1209).

FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for a low fall probability low frequency state. In step Si1701, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si1702.

In step Si1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (Si1702: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1703.

In step Si1703, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for low probability of falling and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for low probability of falling and low frequency states includes (xii) variable time table for jackpot used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in the low probability of falling and low frequency state, (xiii) low probability of falling and low frequency state A variable time table is provided which is used when a winning lottery results in a losing result. In step Si1703, (xii) is specified from (xii) and (xiii). (xii) is a variable time table for performing a battle/victory performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a victory performance executed after the battle performance. In particular, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned battle/victory performance includes a performance suggesting that the player has won by falling. Note that instead of this configuration, a battle/victory performance may be used that does not include a performance suggesting that the player has won by falling. Specifically, the same battle/victory performance as the battle/victory performance (battle/victory performance in a high probability/high frequency state) described in step Si1503 of FIG. 474 may be used. In step Si1703 of FIG. 475, "Fluctuating time table for battle/victory (fall suggestion) effect" is written. After executing step Si1703, the process advances to step Si1704.

In step Si1704, the variation time table specified in step Si1703 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Si1701 is obtained. Subsequently, in step Si1705, the variable time information acquired in step Si1704 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the low probability and low fall frequency state is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1702 that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Si1702: NO), the process advances to step Si1706.

In step Si1706, from the variable time table group for the low probability of falling and low frequency state stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, in the above-mentioned (xiii) low probability of falling and low frequency state, there is no result in the winning lottery. Specify the variable time table to be used when (xiii) is a variable time table for performing a battle/defeat performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a defeat performance performed after the battle performance. The battle/defeat performance is, for example, the performance shown in FIGS. 455(a) and 455(b). In step Si1706 of FIG. 475, "variable time table for battle/defeat effect" is written. After executing step Si1706, the process proceeds to step Si1704 described above, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Si1706 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 465: Si0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Si1801, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Si1801, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 471) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Si1801, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Si1801: NO), this fluctuation end processing is ended.

In step Si1801, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Si1801: YES), the process advances to step Si1802, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are selected. A process is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step Si1803, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Si1803, the process advances to step Si1804.

In step Si1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the jackpot has been won (Si1804: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1805.

In step Si1805, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Si1805 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Si1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1806, and it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. If it is determined in step Si1806 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Si1806: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1807, and the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Si1807, the process advances to step Si1808. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1806 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is less than or equal to 0 (Si1806: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1808 without executing step Si1807.

In step Si1808, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Si1808, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Si1808: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1809, and the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100). It is determined whether the number of games played is before the number of games played (=within the guaranteed number of games played). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. Since the guaranteed number of games counter PNC indicates the number of remaining guaranteed number of games, by determining whether PNC>0, the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode can be determined. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of games has yet to reach the guaranteed number of games.

In step Si1809, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Si1809: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Si1810, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Si1810, the process advances to step Si1811.

In step Si1811, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Si1811 that the fall flag is ON (Si1811: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1812 and the fall flag is turned OFF. After executing step Si1812, the process advances to step Si1813.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Si1808 (Si1808: YES), or if it is determined that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games in step Si1809 (step Si1809: YES), steps Si1810 to Step Si1812 The process proceeds to step Si1813 without executing. Also, if it is determined in step Si1811 that the fall flag is not ON (Si1811: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1813 without executing step Si1812.

In step Si1813, the game state determination value PN is calculated by adding the value of the high probability mode flag, the value of the high frequency support mode flag, and the value of the fall flag. This process is the same as step Si1101 in FIG. 470, and updates the gaming state determination value PN. After executing step Si1813, the process advances to step Si1814.

In step Si1814, a gaming state command is set. The gaming state command includes information on the gaming state determination value PN determined in step Si1813. The set gaming state command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). The audio emission control device 90 can grasp the gaming status after the game round is completed using this gaming status command. After executing step Si1814, this variable time end process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1805 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Si1805: NO), the process advances to step Si1815.

In step Si1815, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Si1815 that the fall flag is ON (Si1815: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1816 and the fall flag is turned OFF. If it is determined that the fall flag is ON in step Si1815, the case corresponds to the state of the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (fall normal state) due to a fall after the guaranteed number of games, as shown in the bottom row of FIG. 458. However, in this embodiment, the falling normal state ends only once in the game round in which the falling lottery is won, and in order to shift to the normal state shown in the top row of FIG. 458, the falling flag is turned off in step Si1816. do. After executing step Si1816, the process proceeds to step Si1813 described above.

If it is determined in step Si1815 that the fall flag is not ON (Si1815: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1813 described above without executing step Si1816.

In step Si1804, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Si1804: NO), the process proceeds to step Si117, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. do. After executing step Si1817, this variable time end process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 464: Si0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Si1901, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big prize opening opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Si1901 that the ending period flag is not ON (Si1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1902, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing processing period starts, which is a period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. , it is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Si1902 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Si1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1903, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Si1903 that the opening period flag is not ON (Si1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1904, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Si1904 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Si1904: YES), the process advances to step Si1905. On the other hand, in step Si1904, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Si1904: NO), the main gaming state transition process is directly ended.

In step Si1905, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Si1906. In step Si1906, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si1907.

In step Si1907, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in this embodiment, conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions"), This is a program in which conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the opening/closing execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

For example, the closing conditions are as follows.
- The elapsed time after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Si1907, the process proceeds to step Si1908 described above.

In step Si1908, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, an opening time of the same constant length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. Note that the third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Si1908, the process advances to step Si1909.

In step Si1909, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing processing period of the big prize opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Si1909, the process advances to step Si1910 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Si1903, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Si1903: YES), the process advances to step Si1911.

In step Si1911, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Si1911 that the opening period has ended (Si1911: YES), the process advances to step Si1912 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Si1913.

In step Si1913, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Si1913, the process advances to step Si1914.

In step Si1914, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Si1915, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 464: Step Si0503) of the normal process. After executing step Si1915, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Si1902, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Si1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1916, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Si1916, the process advances to step Si1917.

In step Si1917, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". do. In step Si1917, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Si1917: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1918. On the other hand, in step Si1917, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Si1917: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Si1918, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step Si1919.

In step Si1919, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Si1919, the process advances to step Si1920.

In step Si1920, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Si1920, the process advances to step Si1921.

In step Si1921, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Si1921, the process advances to step Si1922.

In step Si1922, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Si1901, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Si1901: YES), the process advances to step Si1923.

In step Si1923, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Si1920), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Si1920 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Si1923: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1924.

In step Si1924, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si1925, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Si1925, the process proceeds to step Si1926 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Si1926, the process advances to step Si1927.

In step Si1927, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". If it is determined in step Si1927 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Si1927: YES), the process advances to step Si1928.

In step Si1928, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol variation (gaming round) ends. This is a command that includes information about. This set customer waiting command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Si1928 in the normal process (FIG. 464). After executing step Si1928, the present game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si1927, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Si1927: NO), the main game round control process is ended. Further, in step Si1923, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Si1923: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big winning opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 478: Si1916) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Si2001, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step Si2001 that the door 36b is not open (Si2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2002.

In step Si2002, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Si2002 that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (Si2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2003.

In step Si2003, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process advances to step Si2004.

In step Si2004, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 464: Step Si0503) of the normal process. After executing step Si2004, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Si2002, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Si2002: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Si2003 and step Si2004.

If it is determined in step Si2001 that the door 36b is open (Si2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2005.

In step Si2005, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Si2005 that the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied (Si2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2006.

In step Si2006, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2007.

In step Si2007, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 464: Step Si0503) of the normal process. After executing step Si2007, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Si2005, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Si2005: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Si2006 and step Si2007.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 478: Si1925) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Si2101, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot is turned on in the jackpot flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Si2101, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Si2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2102, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to ON. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Si2102, the process advances to step Si2103.

In step Si2103, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Si2104, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. After that, the process advances to step Si2105.

In step Si2105, a guaranteed game count counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2106.

In step Si2106, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Si2111.

On the other hand, in step Si2101, if it is determined that the 16R regular jackpot flag and the 8R regular jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are not ON (Si2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2107, and among the 16R regular jackpot flag and 8R regular jackpot flag in the RAM 64, Turn off the flag that is ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2108.

In step Si2108, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Si2109, where a guaranteed number of games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. After that, the process advances to step Si2110.

In step Si2110, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Si2111.

In step Si2111, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electrical support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 464: Si0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Si2201, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Si2201 that the supported flag is not ON (Si2201: NO), the process advances to step Si2202.

In step Si2202, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Si2202 that the support winning flag is not ON (Si2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2203.

In step Si2203, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Si2203, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Si2203: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Si2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2204.

In step Si2204, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Si2204, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Si2204: YES), the process advances to step Si2205, sets the out-of-line display, and then ends the main electric role support process. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2204 that it is not the timing to end the variable display (Si2204: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2206.

In step Si2206, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Si2206, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Si2206: NO), the electronic award support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2206 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Si2206: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2207.

In step Si2207, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Si2208, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If the mode is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Si2207 (Si2207: NO), and the high-frequency support mode is in the step Si2208 (Si2208: YES), the process advances to step Si2209 and a lottery for opening the electric accessories is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Si2210.

In step Si2210, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Si2209 is a support win. In step Si2210, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Si2210: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2211, where the support win flag is turned on and set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Si2210, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Si2210: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step Si2211.

If it is determined in step Si2207 that the mode is opening/closing execution mode (Si2207: YES), or if it is determined in step Si2208 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (Si2208: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2212, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process advances to step Si2213.

In step Si2213, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Si2212 is a support win. In step Si2213, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Si2213: NO), the present electronic role support processing is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2213 that support has been won (Si2213: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2214, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Si2202, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Si2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2215, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Si2215, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Si2215: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the general figure unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2215 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Si2215: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2216.

In step Si2216, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si2217, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Si2201, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Si2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2218, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for power support processing (FIG. 481: Si2218).

FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Si2301, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Si2301: YES), the process advances to step Si2302.

In step Si2302, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Si2302, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Si2302: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Si2302, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Si2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2303, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Si2303, the process advances to step Si2304.

In step Si2304, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Si2305, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Si2305, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Si2305: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Si2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2306 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Si2301, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Si2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2307, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Si2307, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Si2307: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Si2307: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2308, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2309.

In step Si2309, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening/closing execution mode (Si2309: NO), the process advances to step Si2310, and it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. do.

If it is determined in step Si2310 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Si2310: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2311, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2309 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Si2309: YES), or if it is determined in step Si2310 that the high frequency support mode is not in effect (Si2310: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2312, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<I6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 483 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Si2401, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Si2401, the process advances to step Si2402.

In step Si2402, a game rendition process is executed. In the game round performance processing, processing related to the performance to be executed during the game round from the start of symbol variation until it stops is performed. Details of the game presentation processing will be described later. After executing step Si2402, the process advances to step Si2403.

In step Si2403, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the performance during the grand prize opening/closing processing period, and the performance during the ending period is performed. After executing step Si2403, the process advances to step Si2404.

In step Si2404, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying a moving image showing the gaming state on the symbol display device 41, a process of displaying a demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as a moving image indicating the gaming state, a background moving image determined according to the gaming state determination value PN included in the gaming state command received from the main side MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Si2404, the process advances to step Si2405.

In step Si2405, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Si2405, the process advances to step Si2406.

In step Si2406, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio data read out in the above BGM process and each production process. After executing step Si2406, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for game rendition>
Next, the game rendition processing will be explained. The game play processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 483: Si2402).

FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing the game rendition processing. In step Si2501, a game run performance setting process is executed. The game run performance setting process is a process that is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process that sets the performance to be executed in the game cycle when the game cycle is started. be. Details of the game performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Si2501, the process advances to step Si2502.

In step Si2502, a game rendition execution process is executed. The game round performance execution process is a process that is executed when the game round performance (notice performance and reach performance) is set to be executed in the game round performance setting process described above. The details of the game performance execution process will be described later. After executing step Si2502, the main game rendition processing is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game run performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 484: Si2501) of the game run performance process.

FIG. 485 is a flowchart showing the game round performance setting process. In step Si2601, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Si2601, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Si2601: NO), the present game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2601 that a variation command and a type command have been received (Si2601: YES), the process advances to step Si2602.

In step Si2602, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, the variation time, and the gaming state determination value PN is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2603.

In step Si2603, performance pattern setting processing is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round (contents and execution timing of the preview effect, the ready-to-reach effect) based on the effect pattern table. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Si2603, the process advances to step Si2604.

In step Si2604, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R probability-variable jackpot, an 8R probability-variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, a symbol is placed on the active line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery in this game is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered pattern combination is selected as the same pattern combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined from the contents of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Si2604, the process advances to step Si2605.

In step Si2605, processing for setting a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols set in step Si2604 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In addition, when selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2606.

In step Si2606, information on the effect pattern, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2607, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Si2607, the process advances to step Si2608, and an update process at the start of variation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Si2608, the main game performance setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 485: Si2603) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Si2701, it is determined whether the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485) is "00H". In step Si2701, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "00H" (Si2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2702, and a performance pattern setting process for a low probability low frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for a low probability low frequency state is a performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is a low probability low frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability and low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2702, this variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Si2701 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "00H" (Si2701: NO), the process advances to step Si2703.

In step Si2703, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485) is "01H". In step Si2703, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "01H" (Si2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2704, and a production pattern setting process for a low probability high frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is the performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low probability high frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2704, the main performance pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Si2703 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "01H" (Si2703: NO), the process advances to step Si2705.

In step Si2705, it is determined whether the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485) is "03H". In step Si2705, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "03H" (Si2705: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2706, where a production pattern setting process for a high probability and high frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for a high probability and high frequency state is a performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is a high probability and high frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2706, the main effect pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Si2705 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "03H" (Si2705: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2707.

In step Si2707, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485) is "11H". In step Si2707, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "11H" (Si2707: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2708, and a production pattern setting process for a low probability of falling high frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state is the performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low probability of falling high frequency state. The production pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2708, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Si2707 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si2707: NO), the process advances to step Si2709.

In step Si2709, a performance pattern setting process for a low fall probability low frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is the performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low probability of falling and low frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2709, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability and low frequency states>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the low probability and low frequency state will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 486: Si2702). The production pattern setting process for the low-probability, low-frequency state is performed depending on the case where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and when neither of the cases applies. This is to set the performance pattern. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for the low probability and low frequency state. In step Si2801, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Si2802.

In step Si2802, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). . In step Si2802, if it is determined that the winning result is a jackpot (Si2802: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2803.

In step Si2803, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability and low frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for low probability and low frequency states includes (I) a performance pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and low frequency state; (II) a performance pattern table for winning a jackpot in a low probability and low frequency state; (III) A reach generation production pattern table that is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, and (III) a reach non-reach generation table that is used when a reach does not occur without a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and low frequency state. A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si2803, (I) is specified from among (I) to (III). (I) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Si2803, the process advances to step Si2804.

In step Si2804, the performance pattern table specified in step Si2803 is referred to, and a performance corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern obtained in step Si2801 is determined. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si2805, the effect pattern acquired in step Si2804 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si2805, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability and low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si2802, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Si2802: NO), the process advances to step Si2806, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). In step Si2806, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Si2806: YES), the process advances to step Si2807.

In step Si2807, a performance pattern table for a reach generation is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (II) low-probability, low-frequency state, a reach occurrence production pattern table is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. (II) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for reach. After executing step Si2807, the process proceeds to step Si2804 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si2807 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

In step Si2806, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Si2806: NO), the process advances to step Si2808.

In step Si2808, a performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability and low frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (III) low-probability, low-frequency state, a reach non-occurrence production pattern table is specified, which is used when a big hit is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur. (III) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for losing. After executing step Si2808, the process proceeds to step Si2804 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si2808 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability high frequency state>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 486: Si2704). The production pattern setting process for the low-probability, high-frequency state is performed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a so-called time-saving state and wins a jackpot, when a reach occurs, or when neither of these cases applies. This is to set a performance pattern. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state. In step Si2901, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si2902.

In step Si2902, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). . In step Si2902, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Si2902: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2903.

In step Si2903, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability and high frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for low probability and high frequency states includes (IV) a performance pattern table for jackpots used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and high frequency state, and (V) a performance pattern table for winning a jackpot in a low probability and high frequency state. (VI) Reach generation production pattern table used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (VI) Reach non-reach generation table used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and high frequency state. A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si2903, (IV) is specified from among (IV) to (VI). (IV) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Si2903, the process advances to step Si2904.

In step Si2904, the production pattern table specified in step Si2903 is referred to, and a production corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the random number RN for the current production pattern obtained in step Si2901 is performed. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si2905, the effect pattern acquired in step Si2904 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si2905, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si2902, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Si2902: NO), the process advances to step Si2906, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). In step Si2906, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Si2906: YES), the process advances to step Si2907.

In step Si2907, a performance pattern table for reaching generation is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability and high frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (V) low-probability, high-frequency state, a reach generation performance pattern table is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. (V) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for reach. After executing step Si2907, the process proceeds to step Si2904 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si2907 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

In step Si2906, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Si2906: NO), the process advances to step Si2908.

In step Si2908, a performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability and high frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (VI) low-probability, high-frequency state, a reach non-occurrence performance pattern table is specified, which is used when a big hit is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur. (VI) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for losing. After executing step Si2908, the process proceeds to step Si2904 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si2908 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

<Production pattern setting process for high-probability, high-frequency states>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 486: Si2706). The production pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is performed depending on the case where the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called probability variable state, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and when neither of the cases corresponds. This is to set a performance pattern. In addition, after winning the probability variable jackpot in the winning lottery and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game ball state judgment value PN becomes "03H" indicating a high probability and high frequency state, and after that, in the subsequent game rounds when the guaranteed number of games has been reached. , when winning a jackpot, by performing the support mode simulation process, the game ball state determination value PN becomes "02H" indicating a high probability low frequency state, and then the game ball state determination value PN is changed to "02H". This effect pattern setting process is also executed when the process of rewriting from "03H" to "03H" is executed. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state. In step Si3001, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Si3002.

In step Si3002, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). . In step Si3002, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Si3002: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3003.

In step Si3003, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from the performance pattern table group for high probability and high frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for high probability and high frequency states includes (VII) a performance pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the high probability and high frequency state, (VIII) a high probability and high frequency state, and (IX) Reach generation performance pattern table used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (IX) Reach non-reach generation table used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and high frequency state. A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si3003, (VII) is specified from among (VII) to (IX). (VII) is, for example, a performance pattern for performing a battle/victory performance consisting of a battle performance and a victory performance executed after the battle performance. In step Si3003 of FIG. 489, "production pattern table for battle/victory production" is written. After executing step Si3003, the process advances to step Si3004.

In step Si3004, the performance pattern table specified in step Si3003 is referred to, and a performance corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern obtained in step Si3001. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si3005, the effect pattern acquired in step Si3004 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si3005, the production pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si3002, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Si3002: NO), the process advances to step Si3006, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). In step Si3006, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Si3006: YES), the process advances to step Si3007.

In step Si3007, a performance pattern table for reaching generation is specified from the performance pattern table group for high probability and high frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (VIII) high-probability, high-frequency state, a reach occurrence production pattern table is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. (VIII) is a performance pattern table for performing a battle/draw performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a draw performance executed after the battle performance. In step Si3007 of FIG. 489, "effect pattern table for battle/draw effect" is written. After executing step Si3007, the process proceeds to step Si3004 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si3007 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

In step Si3006, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Si3006: NO), the process proceeds to step Si3008.

In step Si3008, a performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the performance pattern table group for high probability and high frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (IX) high-probability, high-frequency state, a reach non-occurrence effect pattern table is specified, which is used when a big hit is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur. (IX) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for losing. In step Si3008 of FIG. 489, "effect pattern table for effect effect" is written. After executing step Si3008, the process proceeds to step Si3004 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si3008 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability of falling and high frequency state>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 486: Si2708). The production pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and high frequency state is to set a production pattern according to the case where the pachinko machine 10 wins the jackpot and the case where the jackpot is not won when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called falling time shortening state. be. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the performance pattern setting process for a low probability of falling high frequency state. In step Si3101, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Si3102.

In step Si3102, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). . In step Si3102, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Si3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3103.

In step Si3103, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for a low probability of falling high frequency state stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for low probability of falling and high frequency state includes (X) performance pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in the low probability of falling and high frequency state, and (XI) high frequency state of low probability of falling. A production pattern table is provided which is used when a winning lottery results in a losing result. In step Si3103, (X) is specified from (X) and (XI). (X) is a performance pattern table for performing a battle/victory performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a victory performance executed after the battle performance. In particular, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned battle/victory performance includes a performance that suggests that the player has won by falling. Note that instead of this configuration, a battle/victory performance may be used that does not include a performance suggesting that the player has won by falling. In step Si3103 of FIG. 490, "effect pattern for battle/victory (suggestion of fall) effect" is written. After executing step Si3103, the process advances to step Si3104.

In step Si3104, the production pattern table specified in step Si3103 is referred to, and a production corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the random number RN for the current production pattern obtained in step Si3101 is performed. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si3105, the effect pattern acquired in step Si3104 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si3105, the effect pattern setting process for the low fall probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si3102, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Si3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Si3106.

In step Si3106, from the performance pattern table group for the low probability of falling high frequency state stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93, in the above-mentioned (XI) low probability of falling high frequency state, in the winning lottery Specify the production pattern table to be used when the result is a miss. (XI) is a performance pattern table for performing a battle/defeat performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a defeat performance executed after the battle performance. In step Si3106 of FIG. 490, "effect pattern table for battle/defeat effect" is written. After executing step Si3106, the process proceeds to step Si3104 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si3106 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency state>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the low fall probability and low frequency state will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 486: Si2709). The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is to set a performance pattern depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 wins the jackpot or does not win the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called normal falling state. be. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state. In step Si3201, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Si3202.

In step Si3202, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). . In step Si3202, if it is determined that the winning result is a jackpot (Si3202: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3203.

In step Si3203, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for a low probability of falling and low frequency state stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for low probability of falling and low frequency state includes (XII) performance pattern table for jackpot used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in the low probability of falling and low frequency state, (XIII) low probability of falling and low frequency state A production pattern table is provided which is used when a winning lottery results in a losing result. In step Si3203, (XII) is specified from (XII) and (XIII). (XII) is a performance pattern table for performing a battle/victory performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a victory performance executed after the battle performance. In particular, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned battle/victory performance includes a performance suggesting that the player has won by falling. Note that instead of this configuration, a battle/victory performance may be used that does not include a performance suggesting that the player has won by falling. In step Si3203 of FIG. 490, "effect pattern for battle/victory (suggestion of fall) effect" is written. After executing step Si3203, the process advances to step Si3204.

In step Si3204, the performance pattern table specified in step Si3203 is referred to, and a performance corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern obtained in step Si3201. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si3205, the effect pattern acquired in step Si3204 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si3205, the production pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si3202, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination in the current game round is not a jackpot (Si3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Si3206.

In step Si3206, from the performance pattern table group for the low probability of falling and low frequency state stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93, in the above-mentioned (XIII) low probability of falling and low frequency state, in the winning lottery Specify the production pattern table to be used when the result is a miss. (XIII) is a performance pattern table for performing a battle/defeat performance, which is composed of, for example, a battle performance and a defeat performance executed after the battle performance. In step Si3206 of FIG. 490, "effect pattern table for battle/defeat effect" is written. After executing step Si3206, the process proceeds to step Si3204 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si3206 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

<Process for executing game rendition>
Next, the process for executing the game round effect will be explained. The game run performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 484: Si2502) of the game run performance process.

FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the process for executing game rendition. In step Si3301, it is determined whether or not the performance pattern set in the game round performance setting process (FIG. 485) described above exists. In step Si3301, if it is determined that the set performance pattern does not exist (Si3301: NO), the process for executing the game round performance is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si3301 that the set effect pattern exists (Si3301: YES), the process advances to step Si3302.

In step Si3302, the set effect pattern is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Si3303, where it is determined whether it is the timing to start the game effect. The game performance described here is a performance based on various performance patterns set in the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 486). These performance patterns store the content and timing of the performance to be executed in the relevant game round.

In step Si3303, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the game round effect (Si3303: NO), the process for executing the present game round effect is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si3303 that it is the timing to start the game round effect (Si3303: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3304. The time when it is determined that it is the start timing of this game performance corresponds to time t5 in the timing chart of FIG. 459.

In step Si3304, a video display start command corresponding to the content of the game round performance set in the performance pattern is transmitted to the display control device 100. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si3305, and a light emission control process for the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the game round performance set in the performance pattern is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Si3306, where the sound output LSI (not shown) starts reproducing audio data corresponding to the content of the preview performance set in the performance pattern. After executing step Si3306, the process for executing this game round effect is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Si3401, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Si3402.

In step Si3402, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Si3501, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Si3601, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 494) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Si3601), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them.

In step Si3602, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Si3601) etc. . After that, the process advances to step Si3603.

In step Si3603, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Si3602), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step Si3604.

In step Si3604, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Si3603), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si3605, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability-variable jackpot is won through the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. After that, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in a game after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games after the high-frequency support mode starts, the support mode simulation process will cause the start of that game. At times, the support mode is transitioned from a high frequency support mode to a low frequency support mode. On the other hand, even if the player wins the falling lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to guess whether the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery or the game round in which the fall lottery was won, based on the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a that can operate in the high-frequency support mode. It can be suppressed. Therefore, according to the present pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of a game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery by the support mode simulation process. In some cases, the device is in low-frequency support mode even though it is in high-probability mode. This state corresponds to a latent probability variable state (gaming state determination value PN=“02H”) in a pachinko machine model equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state. On the other hand, since this pachinko machine 10 is not equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state, the variable time table group for the latent probability variable state used when the gaming state judgment value PN is "02H" is based on the variation of the ROM 63. It is not prepared in the time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) (because it is wasteful to prepare a variable time table for when the gaming state determination value PN is "02H"). Therefore, this pachinko machine 10 is designed such that it is impossible to set the variable time when it is in a high probability low frequency state. For this reason, in this pachinko machine 10, after calculating the gaming state determination value PN, if the calculation result is "02H", the gaming state determination value PN is rewritten to "03H". When the state is in a low frequency state, it is assumed that the state is in a variable probability state (gaming state determination value PN = "03H"), and a variable time can be set. Therefore, according to the present pachinko machine 10, the variable time setting is performed normally and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, so that high reliability of the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be ensured.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a gaming state determination value PN that can specify each value of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and falling flag is calculated, and based on the gaming state determination value PN, Since the variable time is set, the variable time can be set by referring to the gaming state determination value PN without referring to the values of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag. I can do it. For this reason, control for setting the variable time can be simplified.

<<I7>> Modification of the ninth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《I7-1》Variation 1:
<Summary of processing in modification 1>
The processing procedure performed by the Pachinko machine in Modification 1 will be described first, pointing out the differences from the ninth embodiment. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 1 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, so the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the ninth embodiment, and the processing procedure Explain.

In the ninth embodiment, after calculating the gaming state determination value, when the calculation result is "02H", a process is executed to rewrite the gaming state determination value to "03H". On the other hand, as a first modification, a configuration is adopted in which the game state determination value is calculated before the support mode simulation process without executing the process of rewriting the game state determination value.

FIG. 496 is a timing chart illustrating the processing procedure for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached in the Pachinko machine of Modification 1. As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine of Modification 1, the winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. In the 120th game run since then, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery at time t11, a game state determination value is calculated at time t12 immediately after time t11. At time t12, the high probability mode flag is ON (="02H"), the high frequency support mode flag is ON (="01H"), and the fall flag is OFF (="00H"). The calculation result of the gaming state determination value is "03H".

At time t13 following time t12, processing for setting a variable time is performed. This variable time setting is performed based on "03H", which is the gaming state determination value calculated at time t12. Specifically, the MPU 62 reads the high probability high frequency state variable time table group corresponding to the case where the gaming state determination value is "03H" from the variable time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63, and reads this The fluctuation time is set using the fluctuation time table for high probability and high frequency states. Reading of this variable time table group is performed normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped.

At time t14 following time t13, support mode simulation processing is executed, and the support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

At time t15 following time t14, variable display of symbols starts based on the variable time set at time t13. That is, the support mode simulation process is executed after the variable time setting and before the start of variable display.

Note that FIG. 496 is merely for explaining the processing procedure, and the process actually progresses instantaneously from time t12 when the gaming state determination value is calculated to time t15 when the variable display starts. Therefore, as explained using FIG. 457, it can be said that the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of a game round.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described process in the pachinko machine of modification 1 will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the ninth embodiment, except that the processing shown in FIGS. 497 to 499, which will be described later, is executed by the MPU 62 of the main Other processes executed by the MPU 62 of 60, various processes executed by the audio emission control device 90, and various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Fluctuation start processing>
FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing variation start processing in Modification 1. In this fluctuation start processing, steps Si3701 to Si3708 are the same as steps Si0701 to Si0708 of the fluctuation start processing of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 466), and steps Si3713 to Si3714 are the same as steps Si0701 to Si0708 of the fluctuation start processing of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 466). This is the same as steps Si0709 to Si0710. The variation start process in Modification 1 differs from the variation start process in the ninth embodiment only in that steps Si3709 to Si3712 are added between step Si3708 and step Si3713.

In step Si3709, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (Si3709: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si3710.

In step Si3710, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Si3710, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is selected (Si3710: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3711, and the number of consecutively executed games in the high-frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). ) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Si3711, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Si3711: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Si3712, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. The process of turning off this high-frequency support mode flag corresponds to support mode simulation process. The time when this high-frequency support mode flag turns OFF corresponds to time t14 in the timing chart of FIG. 496. After executing step Si3712, the process advances to step Si3713.

If it is determined in step Si3709 that the winning lottery result is not a jackpot (none of the flags is ON) (Si3709: NO), if it is determined in step Si3710 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Si3710: NO), Alternatively, if it is determined in step Si3711 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games (step Si3711: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3713 without executing step Si3712. According to the added steps Si3709 to Si3712, support simulation processing is performed.

<Hit determination processing>
FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing in Modification 1. In this hit determination process, steps Si3801 to Si3804 are the same as steps Si1001 to Si1004 of the hit determination process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 469), and steps Si3805 to Si3813 are the same as steps Si3805 to Si3813 of the hit determination process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 469). This is the same as steps Si1008 to Si1016. The only difference between the hit determination process in the first modification and the hit determination process in the ninth embodiment is that steps Si1005 to Si1007 in the hit determination process in the ninth embodiment are deleted. These deleted steps Si1005 to Si1007 correspond to support simulation processing.

<Game status determination process>
FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the gaming state determination process in Modification 1. In this gaming state determination process, step Si3901 is the same as step Si1101 of the gaming state determining process (FIG. 470) of the ninth embodiment. The only difference between the game state determination process in the first modification and the game state determination process in the ninth embodiment is that steps Si1102 to Si11103 in the game state determination process in the ninth embodiment are deleted. The time when the gaming state determination value PN is calculated in step Si3901 corresponds to time t12 in the timing chart of FIG. 496.

According to the game state determination process having the above configuration, the process of rewriting the game state determination value from "02H" to "03H" is never executed. In addition, according to the variation start process and the hit determination process configured as described above, the support simulation process is executed after the game state determination process that calculates the game state determination value.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery due to the support mode simulation process. A gaming state determination value PN is calculated at a timing before the game is made, and a fluctuation time is set based on the calculated gaming state determination value PN. Therefore, like the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the variable time setting is performed normally and the process is not interrupted or stopped, ensuring high reliability in the operation of the pachinko machine 10. can do.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player wins the fall lottery. In either case, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a whether the game round won a jackpot in the winning lottery or the game round won a fall lottery. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, like the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can. Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, like the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, since the variable time is set based on the gaming state determination value PN, the high probability mode flag, the high frequency The variable time can be set by referring to the gaming state determination value PN without referring to each value of the support mode flag and fall flag. For this reason, control for setting the variable time can be simplified.

《I7-2》Variation 2:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the high-frequency support mode flag, which is the state information, has a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode as states that can be specified. It is also possible to have three types of support modes (for example, low-frequency support mode, medium-frequency support mode, and high-frequency support mode) in which the frequency at which 34a is opened per unit time is divided into three stages. Furthermore, the configuration may have n types of support modes in which the frequency is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

《I7-3》Variation 3:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the determination mode (lottery mode) of the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode. may be configured to have three types of probability modes (for example, a low probability mode, a medium probability mode, and a high probability mode) divided into three stages. Furthermore, the configuration may have n types of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

<<I7-4>> Modification example 4:
In the above-mentioned ninth embodiment and its first modification, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is explained using the case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, but the predetermined condition is that a jackpot is won in a winning lottery. but not limited to. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case may be employed in which a condition for executing a reach effect based on the counter value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is satisfied.

《I7-5》Variation 5:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is determined to be the low-probability mode when a fall lottery is performed and a winner is won. However, instead of this, a configuration is adopted in which the fall lottery itself is not performed. It's good as well. With this configuration, it is also possible to prevent the processing from being interrupted and stopped due to the inability to set the variable time in the event that the latent probability variable state occurs due to the influence of noise, for example. It is possible to obtain the effect that high reliability of operation can be ensured.

《I7-6》Variation 6:
In the ninth embodiment, the state of the support mode before shifting by the support mode simulation process is determined by rewriting the gaming state determination value PN. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state of the support mode before being transferred by processing is separately stored, and a configuration in which the stored state of the support mode is used to calculate the gaming state determination value PN anew. With this configuration, as in the ninth embodiment, it becomes impossible to set the variable time and it is possible to prevent the processing from being interrupted and stopped, thereby ensuring high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine. You can get the effect of being able to do this.

<<I7-7>> Modification example 7:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the gaming state determination value PN is calculated based on the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall flag. A configuration may be adopted in which the gaming state determination value PN is calculated based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag without using the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag. Alternatively, the game state determination value PN may be calculated based on the high frequency support mode flag and the fall flag without using the high probability mode flag.

《I7-8》Variation 8:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, a variable time table group is selected based on the gaming state determination value PN, and within the range of the selected variable time table group, the judgment result (lottery result) of the winning lottery is determined. However, instead of this, a group of variable time tables is selected based on the result of determining the validity of the winning lottery (lottery result), and within the range of the selected group of variable time tables, A configuration may be adopted in which the variable time table is specified based on the gaming state determination value PN. With this configuration, as in the ninth embodiment, it becomes impossible to set the variable time and it is possible to prevent the processing from being interrupted and stopped, thereby ensuring high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine. You can get the effect of being able to do this.

《I7-9》Variation 9:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the main control device 60 side sets the variation time based on the gaming state determination value PN, and the sound emission control device 90 sets the production pattern based on the gaming state determination value PN. The configuration was configured to set the . On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific operation or display mode of the gaming machine other than the above, for example, a background moving image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, is set based on the gaming state determination value.

《I7-10》Variation 10
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the variation time is set based on the gaming state determination value PN, but a configuration may be adopted in which the gaming state determination value PN is not calculated. Specifically, the variation time may be set based on the values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall flag. With this configuration, as in the ninth embodiment, it becomes impossible to set the variable time and it is possible to prevent the processing from being interrupted and stopped, thereby ensuring high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine. You can get the effect of being able to do this.

《I7-11》Variation 11:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, a victory performance, a defeat performance, and a draw performance are performed as the result announcement performance, but instead, only the victory performance and the defeat performance are performed as the result notification performance. It's good as well. According to this configuration, winning and losing can be made clear to the player.

《I7-12》Variation 12:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the battle performance is executed as a specific performance performed before the result announcement performance, but the specific performance is not limited to the battle performance. The above-mentioned specific performance may have any configuration as long as it is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a result announcement performance may be executed. As the performance that suggests that the result announcement performance may be executed, for example, a performance that suggests that the lottery mode will shift from a high probability mode to a low probability mode, etc. can be adopted. With such a configuration, the same effects as those described in the ninth embodiment can be obtained.

《I7-13》Variation 13:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the effects executed in one game are composed of two types of effects: a battle effect and a result announcement effect. Instead, a preview effect and a battle effect are used. It may be composed of three types of performances including the result announcement performance. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be used. Alternatively, only a result announcement performance may be performed without performing a battle performance.

《I7-14》Variation 14:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the battle performance executed when winning the falling lottery and the battle performance executed when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery are the same, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. For example, a part of the image forming the battle effect may be different between the battle effect when winning a fall lottery and the battle effect when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. For example, by creating images that are similar overall but that only some players can notice are different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

《I7-15》Variation 15:
In the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. The configuration may include two control devices such as a control device and a sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the ninth embodiment. Further, in the ninth embodiment and its first modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the classification described in the ninth embodiment, and the three control devices It is sufficient that the devices 60, 90, 100 as a whole can execute all the processes in the ninth embodiment.

《I7-16》Variation 16:
In the ninth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the latent probability variable state is not installed as the gaming state, but instead, it may be configured to include the latent probability variable state as the gaming state. The pachinko machine of modification 16 will be described in detail below. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine of modification 16 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, so the same names and symbols will be used for the same parts as in the ninth embodiment, and the following description will be explained. conduct.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot are prepared as jackpot types (see FIG. 449). In place of this, in the pachinko machine of modification 16, in addition to the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, a latent probability variable jackpot is prepared as the jackpot types. In the latent probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is a high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode ends. It is a jackpot that the later support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. Moreover, the pachinko machine of modification 16 is configured not to notify that it is in the high probability mode during or after a game round in which a jackpot has been won. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of modification 16, when the player wins a latent probability jackpot, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the game is in the high probability mode. In this way, the pachinko machine of modification 16 is equipped with a latent probability variable state as a game state. Note that the latent probability variable state does not need to be limited to a configuration in which the transition occurs when a latent probability variable jackpot is won; as a modification, it may be entered in other specific cases, for example, after winning a jackpot and entering a high probability high frequency state. If the number of games played exceeds a predetermined number of times, the support mode is shifted from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode, and thereby the high probability mode is maintained, but the player cannot switch to the high probability mode. It may also be configured to be in a latent probability variable state in which it is not possible to determine whether it is a low probability mode or a low probability mode.

Compared to the specific control in the ninth embodiment, the pachinko machine of Modification Example 16 has the processing shown in FIGS. The processes shown in FIGS. 504 and 505 to be described later that are executed by the MPU 92 are different from those shown in FIGS. The various processes executed are the same.

<Hit determination processing>
FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing in modification 16. In this hit determination process, steps Si4001 to Si4007 are the same as steps Si1001 to Si1007 of the hit determination process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 469), and steps Si4009 to Si4017 are the same as steps Si4009 to Si4017 of the hit determination process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 469). This is the same as steps Si1008 to Si1016. The hit determination process in Modification 16 differs from the hit determination process in the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4008 is added between step Si4007 and step Si4009.

In step Si4008, the support mode simulation flag is turned ON. The support mode simulation flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode simulation process has been executed in the current game round, and when it is ON, it indicates that the support mode simulation process has been executed. If this is the case, it is determined that the support mode simulation process is not being executed. In step Si4007, in response to the execution of the support mode simulation process of turning off the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Si4008, where a process of turning on the support mode simulation flag is performed. The value of the support mode simulation flag is cleared to OFF immediately before the process of Si0709 that starts the variable display of symbols in the variation start process (FIG. 466). After executing step Si4008, the process advances to step Si4009.

<Game status determination process>
FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the gaming state determination process in modification 16. In this gaming state determination process, steps Si4101 and Si4102 are the same as steps Si1101 and Si1102 of the gaming state determining process (FIG. 470) of the ninth embodiment, and step Si4104 is the same as step Si1103 of the gaming state determining process (FIG. 470). are the same. The only difference between the game state determination process in modification 16 and the game state determination process in the ninth embodiment is that step Si4103 is added between step Si4102 and step Si4104.

In step Si4103, it is determined whether support mode simulation processing has been executed in the game round. Specifically, it is determined whether the support mode simulation flag is ON. If it is determined in step Si4103 that the support mode simulation flag is ON (Si4103: YES), the process advances to step Si4104. In step Si4103, if it is determined that the support mode simulation flag is not ON (Si4103: NO), the present game state determination process is ended.

According to this gaming state determination process, only when the gaming state determination value PN is "02H" due to the execution of the support mode simulation process, the gaming state determination value PN is changed from "02H" to "03H". If the gaming state is changed to a potential variable state due to winning a latent probability variable jackpot, the gaming state judgment value PN will be maintained as "02H" and will be rewritten to "03H". There isn't.

<Variable time setting process>
FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process in modification 16. In this variable time setting process, steps Si4201 to Si4208 are the same as steps Si1201 to Si1208 of the variable time setting process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 471), and step Si4210 is the same as steps Si1201 to Si1208 of the variable time setting process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 471). ) is the same as step Si1209. The variable time setting process in Modification 16 differs from the variable time setting process in the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4209 and step Si4211 are added.

If it is determined in step Si4207 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si4207: NO), the process advances to step Si4209. In step Si4209, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN is "02H". In step Si4209, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si4209: NO), that is, if the gaming state determination value PN is "10H", the process advances to step Si4210. In step Si4210, a variable time setting process for a low fall probability, low frequency state is executed, which is the same process as step Si1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 471) of the ninth embodiment.

In step Si4209, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "02H" (Si4209: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4211, and a variable time setting process for a high probability low frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a high probability low frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a latent probability variable state. The fluctuation time setting process for the high probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si4211, this variable time setting process ends.

<Variation time setting process for high probability low frequency states>
Next, the variable time setting process for the high probability low frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the high probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 502: Si4211).

FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing variation time setting processing for a high probability low frequency state. In step Si4301, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a (FIG. 446) of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Si4302.

In step Si4302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that the jackpot has been won (Si4302: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si4303.

In step Si4303, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for high probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for high probability low frequency states includes (xiv) a variable time table for jackpots used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability low frequency state, (xv) a winning variable time table for a high probability low frequency state, (xvi) A variable time table for reach generation that is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (xvi) A variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when a reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and low frequency state. A variable time table for occurrence is provided. In step Si4303, (xiv) is specified from among (xiv) to (xvi). After executing step Si4303, the process advances to step Si4304.

In step Si4304, the variation time table specified in step Si4303 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current variation type counter CS value obtained in step Si4301 is obtained. Subsequently, in step Si4305, the variable time information acquired in step Si4304 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the high probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si4302, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Si4302: NO), the process advances to step Si4306, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Determine. Since this process (Si4306) is executed when there is no jackpot winning in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Si4302, in step Si4306, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (Si4306: YES), and step Proceed to Si4307. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63.

In step Si4307, the reach occurrence flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Si4307, the process advances to step Si4308.

In step Si4308, a variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for high probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, a variable time table for reach generation is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (xv) high probability low frequency state. (xv) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a reach normal performance. After executing step Si4308, the process proceeds to step Si4304 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si4308 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS.

In step Si4306, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Si4306: NO), the process advances to step Si4309.

In step Si4309, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for high probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (xvi) high-probability, low-frequency state, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified, which is used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and reach does not occur. (xvi) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Si4309, the process proceeds to step Si4304 described above, and refers to the variation time table specified in step Si4309 to obtain variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS.

<Production pattern setting process>
FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process in modification 16. In this effect pattern setting process, steps Si4401 to Si4408 are the same as steps Si2701 to Si2708 of the effect pattern setting process of the ninth embodiment (Fig. 486), and step Si4410 is the effect pattern setting process of the ninth embodiment (Fig. 486). ) is the same as step Si2709. The effect pattern setting process in modification 16 differs from the effect pattern setting process in the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4409 and step Si4411 are added.

If it is determined in step Si4407 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si4407: NO), the process advances to step Si4409. In step Si4409, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN is "02H". In step Si4409, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si4409: NO), that is, if the gaming state determination value PN is "10H", the process advances to step Si4410. In step Si4410, a performance pattern setting process for a low probability of falling low frequency state is executed, which is the same process as step Si2709 of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 486) of the ninth embodiment.

In step Si4409, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "02H" (Si4409: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4411, and a production pattern setting process for a high probability low frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state is the performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is the latent probability variable state. The performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si4411, this effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for high probability low frequency state>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 504: Si4411). The production pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability low frequency state, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and when none of the cases apply. This is to set a performance pattern according to the situation. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing performance pattern setting processing for a high probability low frequency state. In step Si4501, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process advances to step Si4502.

In step Si4502, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). . In step Si4502, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Si4502: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4503.

In step Si4503, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for high probability and low frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for high probability low frequency state includes (XIV) a performance pattern table for jackpot used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in high probability low frequency state, (XV) a winning performance pattern table for high probability low frequency state, (XVI) Reach generation production pattern table used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (XVI) Non-reach generation effect used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and low frequency state A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si4503, (XIV) is specified from (XIV) to (XVI). After executing step Si4503, the process advances to step Si4504.

In step Si4504, the production pattern table specified in step Si4503 is referred to, and a production corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the random number RN for the current production pattern obtained in step Si4501 is performed. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si4505, the effect pattern acquired in step Si4504 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si4505, the performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si4502, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Si4502: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4506, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). In step Si4506, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Si4506: YES), the process advances to step Si4507.

In step Si4507, a performance pattern table for reaching generation is specified from the performance pattern table group for high probability low frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (XV) high-probability, low-frequency state, a reach occurrence production pattern table is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. (XV) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for reach. After executing step Si4507, the process proceeds to step Si4504 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si4507 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

In step Si4506, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Si4506: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4508.

In step Si4508, a performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the performance pattern table group for high probability low frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (XVI) high-probability, low-frequency state, a reach non-occurrence production pattern table is specified, which is used when a big hit is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur. (XVI) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for losing. After executing step Si4508, the process proceeds to step Si4504 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si4508 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine of modification 16, when a latent probability strange jackpot is won in a winning lottery, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is the high probability mode, and the support mode is It enters a latent variable state, which is a low-frequency support mode. Further, according to the pachinko machine of variation 16, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high probability jackpot is won. When a jackpot is won in a game after the number of games played after the frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, a high probability low frequency state is entered when support mode simulation processing is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine of modification 16, the high probability low frequency state may be in the latent probability variable state or in the case where the support mode simulation process is performed as described above.

In the case of the latent probability variable state, in the variable time setting process of FIG. In the performance pattern setting process of FIG. 504, a performance pattern for a high probability low frequency state is set in step Si4411. On the other hand, when support mode simulation processing is performed, processing is performed to rewrite the gaming state determination value PN from "02H" to "03H" (see FIG. 501), so that the gaming state is changed to a variable state ( It is assumed that the game state determination value PN=“03H”), and the above-mentioned variable time setting and effect pattern setting are performed.

In a pachinko machine equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state, when support mode simulation processing is performed as described above, a high probability low frequency state similar to the latent probability variable state will be obtained, but in this case, in the conventional technology, No particular consideration was given to how the gaming operations should be performed. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 16, as described above, the setting of the variable time and the setting of the performance pattern are different between the case of the latent probability change state and the case of performing the support mode simulation process. It will be different. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of modification 16, it is possible to perform a performance suitable for a game round in which the latent probability is changed and a performance suitable for a game round in which the support mode simulation process has been executed, and to properly inform the player of the game state. Can be notified.

《I7-17》Variation 17:
The pachinko machine 10 of modification 16 is the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state. Instead, as a 17th modification, the pachinko machine of the 1st modification of the 9th embodiment may be equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state. The pachinko machine of modification 17 will be described in detail below. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine of modification 17 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, so the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the ninth embodiment, and the following description will be explained. conduct.

The pachinko machine 10 of modification 17 is equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state, similar to the pachinko machine of modification 16 of the ninth embodiment.

The pachinko machine of modification 17 has the processing shown in FIGS. The processes shown in FIGS. 504 and 505 described above that are executed by the MPU 92 of the control device 90 are different from those shown in FIGS. , various processes executed in the display control device 100 are the same. That is, in the pachinko machine of modification 17, similarly to the pachinko machine of modification 16, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes the variable time setting process shown in FIGS. The production pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 504 and 505 is executed, and this is different from the 16th modification of the ninth embodiment in this respect.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 17 configured as described above, the processing procedure in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games is the same as the processing procedure of modification 1 shown in FIG. After the state determination value PN is calculated and the fluctuation time is set, the support mode simulation process is performed. Therefore, even if the support mode simulation process is performed in a game round, the gaming state judgment value PN at the time when the variable time is set is "03H", which is the value before the support mode simulation process is performed. Become. Therefore, when support mode simulation processing is performed, the setting of the fluctuation time corresponding to "03H (= high probability high frequency state)", which is an appropriate value before support mode simulation processing is performed, and the production The pattern is set. On the other hand, in the latent probability variable state due to winning the latent probability variable jackpot, the gaming state judgment value PN is "02H (= high probability low frequency state)", and the variable time setting corresponding to 02H and the performance pattern settings are made. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of modification 17, similarly to the pachinko machine of modification 16, the setting of the fluctuation time and the performance pattern are The settings will be different. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of modification 17, similarly to the pachinko machine of modification 16, a performance suitable for a game round in the latent probability change state and a performance suitable for a game round in which the support mode simulation process is executed is executed. This allows the player to be appropriately informed of the gaming status.

《I7-18》Variation 18:
The pachinko machine of modification 18 has the same hardware configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Regarding the software configuration of the pachinko machine of Modified Example 18, that is, regarding specific control, the following points (a) to (e) are different compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, and regarding other processing. are the same. In the pachinko machine of modification 18, the following description will be given using the same names and symbols for the same parts as in the ninth embodiment.

(A) The pachinko machine of Modified Example 18 is equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state, whereas the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is not equipped with a latent probability variable state as a gaming state. Note that the method of installing the latent probability variable state is the same as Modification 16 and Modification 17 of the ninth embodiment.

(B) In the pachinko machine of Modification 18, the hit determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has the same content as the hit determination process (FIG. 500) in Modification 16 of the ninth embodiment. . That is, in the pachinko machine of modification 18, when the support mode simulation process of turning off the high-frequency support mode flag is performed, the process of turning on the support mode simulation flag is executed; The pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment does not include the support mode simulation flag itself.

(C) In the pachinko machine of Modification 18, the gaming state determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has the same content as the gaming state determination process (FIG. 499) in Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment. ing. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a process of rewriting the gaming state determination value from "02H" to "03H" is performed, whereas in the pachinko machine of modification 18, the gaming state determination value is changed to "02H". ” to “03H” is not performed.

(d) In the pachinko machine of the 18th modification, the variable time setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has the same contents as the variable time setting process (FIG. 502) in the 16th modification of the 9th embodiment. ing. Note that the variable time setting process for a high probability low frequency state (FIG. 503), which is one of the subroutines of the variable time setting process, is also the same. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a variable time setting process for high probability and low frequency states is not prepared, whereas in the pachinko machine of modification 18, the gaming state determination value PN is "02H". There is a variable time setting process for high probability low frequency states that is executed when .

(E) The pachinko machine of Modification 18 differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment with respect to the processes shown in FIGS.

<Game rendition setting process>
FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the game time performance setting process in Modified Example 18. In this game round performance setting process, steps Si4601, Si4603 to Si4608 are the same as steps Si2601 and Si2603 to Si2608 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 485) of the ninth embodiment. In the game run performance setting process in Modified Example 18, only the process of step Si4602 is different from the game run performance setting process of the ninth embodiment.

In step Si2602 of the game rendition setting process (FIG. 485) of the ninth embodiment, the fluctuation command received this time is read out, and from the command, the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, the fluctuation time, and the game A process was being performed to read out information on the state determination value PN. On the other hand, in step Si4602 of the game run performance setting process in modification 18, in addition to the above information, information on the support mode simulation flag is also read out. The support mode simulation flag is turned ON by the hit determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as described above, but the main controller 60 side uses the information of the support mode simulation flag as a variation command. and transmits it to the audio emission control device 90. In step Si2602, this variation command is received, and information on the support mode simulation flag is also read from the command.

<Production pattern setting process>
FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process in modification 18. In this effect pattern setting process, steps Si4701 to Si4708 are the same as steps Si2701 to Si2708 of the effect pattern setting process of the ninth embodiment (Fig. 486), and step Si4710 is the effect pattern setting process of the ninth embodiment (Fig. 486). ) is the same as step Si2709. The effect pattern setting process in Modification 18 differs from the effect pattern setting process in the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4709 and steps Si4711 to Si4713 are added.

If it is determined in step Si4707 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si4707: NO), the process advances to step Si4709. In step Si4709, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN is "02H". In step Si4709, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si4709: NO), that is, if the gaming state determination value PN is "10H", the process advances to step Si4710. In step Si4710, performance pattern setting processing for a low probability of falling and low frequency state is executed, which is the same process as step Si2709 of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 486) of the ninth embodiment.

In step Si4709, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "02H" (Si4709: YES), the process advances to step Si4711.

In step Si4711, it is determined whether support mode simulation processing has been executed in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether the support mode simulation flag in main controller 60 is ON.

If it is determined in step Si4711 that the support mode simulation flag is not ON (Si4711: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4712 and executes a performance pattern setting process for a high probability low frequency state when the latency varies. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state when the latent probability changes is the effect pattern setting process when the gaming state is the latent probability variable state. The production pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si4711, the present effect pattern setting process ends.

In step Si4711, if it is determined that the support mode simulation flag is ON (Si4711: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4713, and execution pattern setting processing for a high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation is performed. The performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation is the performance pattern setting process when the support mode simulation process is performed in the current game round. The production pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation will be described later. After executing step Si4713, this effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for high probability low frequency state when latency is variable>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state when the latency probability changes will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state at the time of latency change is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 507: Si4712). The production pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state when the latency is variable is applicable to both cases when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability low frequency state and a jackpot is won or a reach occurs. The effect pattern is set depending on the case where the game is not performed or not. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state when the latency probability changes. In step Si4801, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Si4802.

In step Si4802, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). . In step Si4802, if it is determined that the winning result is a jackpot (Si4802: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4803.

In step Si4803, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for a high probability low frequency state during latency probability change stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for high probability and low frequency state when the latency is variable includes (XVII) performance pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in high probability and low frequency state, (XVIII) high probability low frequency state (XIX) A production pattern table for reach generation that is used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (XIX) Used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and low frequency state. A production pattern table for non-reach occurrence is provided. In step Si4803, (XVII) is specified from among (XVII) to (XIX). After executing step Si4803, the process advances to step Si4804.

In step Si4804, the effect pattern table specified in step Si4803 is referred to, and the effect corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si4602 (FIG. 506) and the value of the random number RN for the current effect pattern obtained in step Si4801. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si4805, the effect pattern acquired in step Si4804 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si4805, the production pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state when the latency probability changes is completed.

On the other hand, in step Si4802, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Si4802: NO), the process advances to step Si4806, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 485). In step Si4806, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Si4806: YES), the process advances to step Si4807.

In step Si4807, a performance pattern table for reaching generation is specified from the performance pattern table group for high probability low frequency states when latency probability changes stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (XVIII) high-probability, low-frequency state, a reach occurrence production pattern table is specified that is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. (XVIII) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for reach. After executing step Si4807, the process proceeds to step Si4804 described above, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si4807 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

In step Si4806, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Si4806: NO), the process advances to step Si4808.

In step Si4808, a performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the performance pattern table group for high probability low frequency states when latency probability changes stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (XIX) high-probability, low-frequency state, a reach non-occurrence effect pattern table is specified, which is used when a big hit is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur. (XIX) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for losing. After executing step Si4808, the process proceeds to step Si4804 described earlier, and refers to the performance pattern table specified in step Si4808 to obtain a performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN.

<Production pattern setting process for high-probability, low-frequency states when simulating support mode>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the high-probability, low-frequency state during support mode simulation will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 507: Si4713) of the effect pattern setting process. The performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation sets a performance pattern according to the jackpot win when the support mode simulation process is executed and the gaming state is in the high probability low frequency state. It is something. Since the game round in which the support mode simulation process is performed can only occur when a jackpot is won, in this performance pattern setting process, only the performance pattern corresponding to the jackpot is set. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing a production pattern setting process for a high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation. In step Si4901, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Si4902.

In step Si4902, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for a high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. After executing step Si4902, the process advances to step Si4903.

In step Si4903, the production pattern table specified in step Si4902 is referred to, and a production corresponding to the variation time read out in step Si4602 (FIG. 506) and the value of the random number RN for the current production pattern obtained in step Si4901 is performed. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si4904, the effect pattern acquired in step Si4903 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Si4904, the performance pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation is completed.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 18, when a latent probability strange jackpot is won in the winning lottery, after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is the high probability mode, and the support mode is It enters a latent variable state, which is a low-frequency support mode. In addition, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 18, when a jackpot with variable probability is won through the winning lottery, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high probability jackpot is won. When a jackpot is won in a game after the number of games played after the frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, a high probability low frequency state is entered when support mode simulation processing is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine of Modification Example 18, the high-probability, low-frequency state may be a latent probability variable state, or the support mode simulation process may be performed as described above.

In the variable time setting process executed in the main controller 60, the same variable time setting process for the high probability low frequency state is performed in the case of the latent probability variable state and the case where the support mode simulation process is performed ( (See FIG. 502 of modification 16). On the other hand, in the effect pattern setting process executed in the sound emission control device 90, in the case of the latent probability change state, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state at the time of latent probability change is performed, and the support mode simulation process is performed. In this case, a performance pattern setting process for a high probability low frequency state is performed when simulating the support mode (FIG. 507). Therefore, in the variable time setting process executed by the main controller 60, the control routine can be made common between the case of the latent probability variable state and the case of the support mode simulation process. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of modification 18, control can be simplified. Furthermore, in the effect pattern setting process executed in the audio emission control device 90, different effect patterns can be set for the case of the latent probability change state and the case of the support mode simulation process. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 18, it is possible to perform a performance suitable for a game round in which the latent probability is changed, and a performance suitable for a game round in which the support mode simulation process has been executed, and to properly inform the player of the game state. Can be notified.

<<J>> 10th embodiment:
《J1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 510 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 511 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 512 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. The game balls that enter each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed on the gaming board 30. be guided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 511).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. . In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, first starting port 33, second starting port 34, or variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the opening 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed until it is stopped is also referred to as the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only display effects triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 513 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 513(a) is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 513(a), liquid crystal symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the liquid crystal pattern to be variably displayed, a liquid crystal pattern in which a character or other pattern is attached to each liquid crystal pattern showing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 513(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the liquid crystal symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls from the bottom to the top is performed. As shown in FIG. 513(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one liquid crystal symbol is displayed in each symbol column in a stopped state on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the liquid crystal symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a state in which a predetermined liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. becomes. When the fluctuating display of the liquid crystal symbols ends and the liquid crystal symbols stop displaying, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of liquid crystal symbols is valid. It is formed on line L. For example, a combination of the same liquid crystal symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of fluctuating display of the liquid crystal symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the fluctuating display of the liquid crystal symbols in the symbol rows, each Various modes can be adopted for the variable display of the symbols, such as the number of symbols in the symbol row.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. A unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section In either the second symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the symbol display device for each game. At step 41, after a predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 513(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The number of balls to be held based on the number of balls entering the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first holding display area Ds1. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four, respectively.

《J2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 514 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing data. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to an input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 511) is turned off. do.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various winning holes such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable prize drive part 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive part 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 515 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. A fall random number counter CF is used for the fall lottery to decide whether to end the high probability mode (also referred to as high probability gaming state). The "high probability mode" is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is stored in the pending information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reservation area Ra in chronological order. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry are set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 513(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be explained. The fall random number counter CF is used in a game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode, when executing a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high probability mode. When winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum. The falling random number counter CF is updated regularly and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The updated value of the fall random number counter CF is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing. Then, after the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the value of the win/fail table stored in the falling lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 ( (fall lottery success/failure table), and it is determined whether or not to end the high probability mode.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the . Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. For example, if C4=0 or 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fall random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 516 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table. FIG. 516(a) shows a pass/fail table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and FIG. 516(b) shows a pass/fail table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 516(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the low probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 516(b), in the high probability mode win/fail table, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

"Small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is determined. It is possible to set a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the numbers are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the door 36b is closed. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table, and a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is made using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table. A low-probability mode can be set in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. As explained using FIG. 516, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win/fail table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 517 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 517(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 517(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. There are 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot. The difference between the 16R fixed jackpot and the 8R fixed jackpot is that the number of openings of the door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R fixed jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R fixed jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 9" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "10 to 64" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "65-74" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "75-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 16R guaranteed variable jackpot and 8R regular jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, in the case of a losing result in the winning lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and no change in the lottery mode and support mode occurs. When sorting the type of jackpot, if it is a 16 probability strange jackpot or an 8R probability strange jackpot, as explained earlier, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high probability mode. This state continues until the next time a jackpot is won in a winning lottery or a winner is won in a fall lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 518 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery success/failure table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 518, two values, 0 and 1, are set in the fall lottery success/failure table as the value of the fall random number counter CF that is a win in the fall lottery. 198 values from 2 to 199 are set as the value of the fall random number counter CF that is a failure. In other words, in a game game in high probability mode, the probability of winning the fall lottery and ending the high probability mode and switching to the low probability mode is 1/100, and the probability of losing the fall lottery and continuing in the high probability mode is 1/100. It is 99/100. In addition, in this embodiment, the falling lottery is not performed in the game round of the low probability mode.

FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 519(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 519(a), the electric accessory opening lottery win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that will result in an electric role opening win. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 519(b) shows a win/fail table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (for the high-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 519(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

<<J3>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 520 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 514) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《J4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, if the number of games has reached a predetermined guaranteed number of games, the machine shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The "guaranteed number of games" is the number of games guaranteed to be played continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and is 100 times in this embodiment. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. After the guaranteed number of games exceeds 100, if the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that point, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a variable probability jackpot is won in the winning lottery, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After that, if you win the fall lottery in a game in which the number of games played has not reached the guaranteed number of games (for example, 60 times) after the high-frequency support mode started, from the 60th game, the low A winning lottery is executed in probability mode. On the other hand, regarding the support mode, even if you win the falling lottery in the 60th game and the high probability mode ends and you move to the low probability mode, even if the high probability mode ends and you move to the low probability mode, the 100th time since the high frequency support mode started The high-frequency support mode continues until the game reaches the first game to be played.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot with variable probability is won by a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then, after the high frequency support mode is started, If you win the falling lottery after the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, 120 times), the lottery mode will change from high probability mode to low probability mode from the 60th game. The winning lottery will be executed in low probability mode. Moreover, from the 60th game round, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when winning a winning lottery, the type of jackpot is not suggested in the performance executed in the game round in which the jackpot was won, and in the production executed in the opening/closing execution mode executed thereafter. Therefore, the player cannot identify whether he or she has won the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot through the performance. However, since the stop symbols displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b differ depending on the type of jackpot, the player may If you consciously identify the stopped symbols in the portion 37b, you can identify the jackpot type.

Also, in the game round that is executed after winning a jackpot, in order to prevent the player from identifying the type of jackpot, during the execution of the game round, it is possible to distinguish between high probability state and low probability state. Execute a performance that cannot be identified (hereinafter also referred to as a state-invisible performance). Furthermore, even if the player wins the falling lottery during the high probability mode and within the guaranteed number of games, the performance does not indicate to the player that he has won the falling lottery. Further, when winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, but the effect does not indicate to the player that the lottery mode has shifted. The performance that is performed in the game round that is executed after the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode is also a state non-display performance.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, after winning the falling lottery during the high probability mode and within the guaranteed number of games and shifting to the low probability mode, the game is played within the guaranteed number of games (that is, while the high frequency support mode continues). If you win a jackpot, you must have won a jackpot within the guaranteed number of games after winning a fall lottery during the high probability mode in the performance of the game where you won the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a fall pull back jackpot). A performance suggesting this (hereinafter referred to as a fall-back jackpot performance) is executed. Furthermore, the jackpot type in the falling pullback jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as the most advantageous jackpot type. In this embodiment, it is a 16R probability variable jackpot). ), in the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed immediately after the game round in which the falling pull-back jackpot is won, the falling pull-back jackpot and the jackpot type are among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine 10. A performance suggesting that this is the most advantageous type of jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the most advantageous jackpot opening performance) is executed. In addition, in the case of a falling pull back jackpot, if the jackpot type is not the most advantageous jackpot type, the falling pull back jackpot performance will be executed in the game round where the jackpot was won, but during the opening period, the falling pull back most advantageous jackpot opening The performance is not performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if you win a falling lottery during the high probability mode, and if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery in the game round in which you won the falling lottery, you win the falling lottery. A performance suggesting that a jackpot was won in a winning lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a falling jackpot) in the game round is executed.

Specifically, if you win a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games (a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games), an effect that suggests that you have won a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games). A jackpot performance (also called a jackpot performance) is executed in the game round, and a falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games is executed as an opening performance executed during the opening period, indicating that a falling jackpot has been won within the guaranteed number of games.

In addition, if you win a falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games (after the guaranteed number of games), there will be an effect that suggests that you have won a falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as a guaranteed game). To perform a falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed number of games (also called a falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed number of games), and to execute a falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games as an opening performance executed during the opening period, which suggests that a falling jackpot has been won outside the guaranteed number of games.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot (also called a pullback jackpot) is won within the guaranteed number of games played in the high-frequency support mode 100 times after winning the normal jackpot, , it is suggested that the player won the jackpot in the performance of the game round in which the jackpot was won, but it does not suggest that it was a pullback jackpot.

An overview of the above-described processing will be explained using a time chart. In this explanation, three cases will be explained. As case 1, processing will be described in the case where the player wins the fall lottery within the guaranteed number of games and wins the jackpot in the subsequent game (within the guaranteed number of games). As case 2, processing will be explained in the case where the player wins the falling lottery within the guaranteed number of games and also wins the jackpot in the game round in which the falling lottery is won. As case 3, processing will be described in the case where the player wins a falling lottery outside the guaranteed number of games, and also wins a jackpot in the game round in which the falling lottery is won.

FIG. 521 is a time chart showing an example of a process executed in the Pachinko machine 10 in order to explain the outline (Case 1) of the process in the Pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, this time chart includes, from the top, execution/non-execution of the first starting slot game, execution/non-execution of the second starting slot gaming, ON/OFF of the high probability mode flag, and high frequency support. The ON/OFF of the mode flag, the ON/OFF of the opening/closing execution mode flag, the ON/OFF of the opening/closing processing period flag, and the effect to be executed are shown.

The high probability mode flag is a flag that is ON when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and OFF when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. The high-frequency support mode flag is a flag that is ON when the support mode is high-frequency support mode and OFF when the support mode is low-frequency support mode.

The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing execution mode and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing processing period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing processing period (round game) and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing processing period. Note that the opening/closing execution mode includes an opening period, an opening/closing processing period, and an ending period. That is, the opening/closing processing period is a part of the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

As shown in the time chart, the game time U1, the game time U2, and the game time U3 are executed as the game time for the first starting opening during the period from time T0 to time T1. During the period from time T0 to time T1, the high probability mode flag is OFF and the high frequency support mode flag is also OFF, so the gaming state is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. At this time, the performance is a normal game performance. A normal game round performance is a performance executed in a game round in a specific state, such as the above-mentioned state hidden performance, a falling jackpot performance within the guaranteed number of games, and a falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed number of games. Refers to performances other than those performed by The normal game run performance also includes a performance that is executed in a game run that is not in a specific state (also referred to as a normal game run) when a jackpot is won in that game run. A normal game run is executed in a low probability mode and low frequency support mode game state.

In this example, it is assumed that an 8R probability-variable jackpot was won in game round U3. If the player wins the 8R fixed-variable jackpot in game round U3, the player will be notified that he or she has won the jackpot in the game round effect executed during game round U3, but the jackpot type (in particular, whether it is a fixed-variable jackpot or a normal jackpot) will be notified to the player. ) will not be announced. That is, it does not notify that it is an 8R probability-variable jackpot. Note that if the player consciously identifies the display on the special figure unit 37, the player can identify the type of jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, the jackpot type is not notified in the performance to be performed.

As shown in the figure, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned on at the end of the game round U3, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round U3 ends. An opening period starts with the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and an opening performance is performed as a performance. Thereafter, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON, so that the opening period ends and the opening/closing processing period starts, and a round effect is executed as the effect. Thereafter, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, thereby ending the opening/closing processing period and starting the ending period. During the ending period, an ending performance is performed as a performance. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF, the opening/closing execution mode ends and the ending period ends.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are turned ON from time T2. Then, game round U4 is started. At this time, a game round in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode starts from time T2, but in the performance executed in the game round, it is made clear to the player whether it is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Execute a performance that is impossible or difficult to identify (state non-clarification performance). Further, as described above, in the performance in the game round U3 in which the player wins the jackpot, the player is notified that the player has won the jackpot, but the type of jackpot is not notified. Therefore, the player plays a game round without being able to ascertain whether the lottery mode of the game round to be executed after time T2 is a high probability mode or a low probability mode from the effect to be performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player fun and anticipation of guessing the type of jackpot in the game round U3. Furthermore, even if the jackpot type of the jackpot win in game round U3 is normal jackpot and the lottery mode in the game rounds from game round U4 is low probability mode, the state non-display performance is executed as the performance, so the game It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation that the lottery mode may be a high probability mode.

As shown in the time chart, after playing a plurality of game rounds from time T2, if you win the falling lottery executed at the start of game time U5, which is performed at time T3, there is a high probability from the start of game time U5. The mode flag is turned OFF, and the lottery mode becomes a low probability mode. Since the number of games U5 is within the guaranteed number of games, the high-frequency support mode flag continues to be in the ON state, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the guaranteed number of games ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, even though the player wins in the falling lottery in game round U5, in the performance executed in the game round, the player is informed that he has won the falling lottery and the lottery mode is changed from high probability mode to low probability mode. Players are not notified of the transition. The performances executed in the game round U5 and the game rounds executed after the game round U5 are state non-display performances that make it impossible or difficult for the player to identify whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. By doing this, within the guaranteed number of games, even if the player wins the lottery and the lottery mode shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (shifts from high probability mode to low probability mode), the player will It is not possible (or it is difficult to identify) whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode based on the performance being executed. Therefore, it is possible to always give the player a sense of expectation as to whether the lottery mode will be the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

Then, when a jackpot lottery is won in game round U6, which is within the guaranteed number of games, a performance that suggests that the jackpot is a falling pull-back jackpot effect (falling pull-back jackpot effect) is executed as a performance during the execution of game round U6. Execute. Further, in this example, it is assumed that a 16R probability-variable jackpot was won in game round U6. As shown in FIG. 517, the 16R probability-variable jackpot is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player among the jackpot types set in the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a fall pullback jackpot effect. As shown in FIG. 522(a), after the fluctuating liquid crystal symbol displays a liquid crystal symbol corresponding to a jackpot on the display surface 41a, as shown in FIG. 522(b), the jackpot falls and is pulled back. Execute a performance that suggests that it was a jackpot.

The explanation returns to FIG. 521. After the execution of the fall-back jackpot performance is completed and the game round U6 is completed, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON from time T5, and the opening/closing execution mode is started. In the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode, in addition to suggesting that it was a falling pull-back jackpot, a falling pull-back most advantageous jackpot opening performance that suggests that the jackpot type was a 16R probability-variable jackpot is executed.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the most advantageous jackpot opening performance for falling back. As shown in the figure, as an opening effect, a display screen 41a suggests that a predetermined character has won a fall-back jackpot, and that another character has won a jackpot type of 16R probability-variable jackpot.

The explanation returns to FIG. 521. After the opening performance in the opening period from time T5 is finished, the opening/closing processing period (round game), and the ending period are finished, the opening/closing execution mode is ended with the opening/closing execution mode flag being turned OFF.

After that, from time T6, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are turned ON, and a game round is started. At this time, the performance executed in each game round is a state non-display performance. Since it was suggested that it was a probability variable jackpot in the opening performance that started from time T5, it was possible for the player to recognize that the game round that started from time T6 was a high probability mode. The reason why the state non-disclosure effect is executed in the game rounds after time T6 despite the existence of the above condition will be explained below.

If the winning lottery is executed in each game after time T6 in a predetermined game, the high probability mode shifts to the low probability mode. If a performance exclusive to the high probability mode is executed in the game round starting from time T6, when the player wins the falling lottery and shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the performance exclusive to the high probability mode is executed. This causes the player to recognize that he has won the falling lottery and has transitioned from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to not suggest that the lottery has been won and that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the state non-display effect is provided in the game round starting from time T6. Execute. Even if the winning lottery is won and the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the state non-display performance is performed in the game times within the guaranteed number of games. The reason why the state non-disclosure effect is executed in the game rounds after time T6 even though the player recognizes that the game round starting from time T6 is in the high probability mode has been explained. The outline of the processing in the pachinko machine 10 (case 1) has been described above.

FIG. 524 is a time chart illustrating the process (case 2) when the player wins a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games. As mentioned above, a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games is a winning of a jackpot in a game that falls within the guaranteed number of games. As shown in the figure, the gaming session starting from time T12 is being executed in the gaming state of high probability mode and high frequency support mode. Then, a falling lottery and a winning lottery are executed in each game round.

As shown in the figure, when the player wins the falling lottery in the game round U15 and also wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, a falling jackpot game round effect within the guaranteed number of games is executed in the game round U15. The falling jackpot game performance within the guaranteed number of games is a performance that suggests to the player that he has won the falling lottery and won the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game times within the guaranteed number of games. Thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode is started from time T14, and during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, a falling jackpot opening effect within the guaranteed number of games is executed. The falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games is an opening performance that suggests to the player that he has won the falling lottery and has won the winning lottery in the game within the guaranteed number of games.

By executing the falling jackpot game performance within the guaranteed number of games and the opening performance of the falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games, even though you win the falling lottery and the lottery mode shifts to low probability mode, you will still win the jackpot in the same game round. It is possible to make the player aware that such a very rare event has occurred, and give the player a sense of superiority and accomplishment. In addition, in this embodiment, the falling jackpot game performance within the guaranteed number of games and the falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games are such that the player wins the falling lottery in the game number within the guaranteed number of games, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot winning. , and is executed in all cases where the jackpot is won. The outline of the processing in the pachinko machine 10 (case 2) has been described above.

FIG. 525 is a time chart illustrating the process when the player wins a jackpot that falls outside the guaranteed number of games (Case 3). As mentioned above, a falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games is a jackpot won in a falling game time outside the guaranteed number of games. As shown in the figure, the gaming session starting from time T22 is being executed in the gaming state of high probability mode and high frequency support mode. Then, a falling lottery and a winning lottery are executed in each game round.

As shown in the figure, when the player wins the falling lottery in the game round U25 and also wins the winning lottery, a falling jackpot game round effect outside the guaranteed number of games is executed in the game round U25. The falling jackpot game round performance outside the guaranteed number of games is a performance that suggests to the player that he has won the falling lottery and has won the winning lottery in the game round outside the guaranteed number of games. Thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode is started from time T24, and during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, a falling jackpot opening effect outside the guaranteed number of games is executed. The falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games is an opening performance that suggests to the player that he has won the falling lottery and has won the winning lottery in the game round outside the guaranteed number of games.

By executing the falling jackpot game performance outside the guaranteed number of games and the falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games, winning the falling lottery and winning the jackpot in the same game even though the lottery mode has shifted to low probability mode. It is possible to make the player aware that such a very rare event has occurred, and give the player a sense of superiority and accomplishment. In addition, in this embodiment, the falling jackpot game performance outside the guaranteed number of games and the opening performance of falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games are those in which the player wins the falling lottery in the game round outside the guaranteed number of games, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot winning. , and is executed in all cases where a jackpot is won. The outline of the processing in the pachinko machine 10 (case 3) has been described above.

As explained above in the overview, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific performance when a jackpot is won in the low probability mode gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the high probability mode gaming state. Specifically, in case 1, a falling pull-back jackpot effect and a falling pull-back most advantageous jackpot opening effect are executed as specific effects. In case 2, as specific performances, a falling jackpot performance within the guaranteed number of games and a falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games are executed. In case 3, as specific performances, a falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed number of games and a falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games are executed. By executing such processing, it is possible to make the player recognize, through a specific performance, that he won the jackpot in a gaming round that was executed in a disadvantageous gaming condition for the player. Nevertheless, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction for winning the jackpot.

Further, each specific performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the player has won a jackpot from a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more aware that he has won a jackpot despite the disadvantageous gaming conditions, and it is possible to give the player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won, in the subsequent game round, a performance that makes it impossible or difficult for the player to discern the game state in the current game round (status non-display performance) will be performed, so any game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to identify whether a game round is being executed in the current state. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. .

Furthermore, when such processing is being executed, if the conditions for a specific performance to be executed are met and the specific performance is executed, the game that has been executed up to now will be canceled for the first time due to the specific performance. A game that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state in the previous round was an unfavorable gaming state, and allows the player to reminisce about the gaming state and game content of the previous gaming rounds after the fact. It is possible to create a sense of fun and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player is made aware that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

Furthermore, if the player wins a jackpot within the guaranteed number of games after falling and the type of jackpot is the most advantageous type for the player, the most advantageous fall-back jackpot during the opening period. Since the jackpot opening performance is executed, after winning the jackpot, the player will know that he has won the most advantageous type of jackpot from an unfavorable gaming state, giving the player an even greater sense of superiority and happiness. can be granted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling and pulling back most advantageous jackpot opening performance in Case 1, the falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games in Case 2, and the falling jackpot opening performance outside of the guaranteed number of games in Case 3 are the same as those for the game cycle that became the jackpot. Since the game is executed after the game is finished, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation even after the game round is finished, and also to make the player pay attention to the game even after the game round is finished.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, among the gaming states, the gaming state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most advantageous state), and the gaming state of the low probability mode and the The gaming state in the frequent support mode is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most disadvantageous state), and the gaming state in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous state and is the most disadvantageous state. This is a more advantageous gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a medium advantageous state). In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific performance is executed when a jackpot is won in the game round after the transition from the most advantageous gaming state to the middle advantageous gaming state. Therefore, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that he has won the jackpot before the player shifts to the most disadvantageous state, which is the most disadvantageous state, and to prevent the player from being in danger after the fact. It is possible to give a sense of accomplishment (a sense of crisis caused by later learning that the situation was actually dangerous) and a sense of accomplishment and superiority due to winning a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the specific performance, ie, the fall-back jackpot performance, is a performance that suggests that the player has won the jackpot after falling. In other words, the falling pull-back jackpot effect is the jackpot of the game round that became a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the preceding winning game round) one game round that became a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the winning game round) in which the falling pull-back jackpot occurred. The player can be made to recognize that the type was a probability-variable jackpot, that he subsequently won a falling lottery, and that he won a jackpot in a low probability mode during the guaranteed game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the type of jackpot in the previous game round in which the jackpot occurred after the fact, and to create a gaming experience that allows the player to reminisce about the previous games from the previous winning game round. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the falling pull-back jackpot performance, the jackpot type of the game round that became a jackpot (preceding winning game round) just before the game round that became the falling pull-back jackpot (the winning game round) is guaranteed to change. To make a player recognize that he won a jackpot, that he subsequently won a falling lottery, and that he won a jackpot in a low probability mode during a guaranteed game. Furthermore, if the type of jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the most advantageous fall-back effect is executed. That is, based on the jackpot type in the game round in which the falling pull-back jackpot was determined and the jackpot type in the preceding winning game round, the performance to be performed after the game round in which the falling pull-back jackpot was determined is determined. A player who recognizes a specific performance executed after the game round that was determined to be a falling pull-back jackpot is informed of the type of jackpot in the game round that was determined to be a falling pull-back jackpot, and the advance winning game based on the specific performance. It is possible to make the player reminisce and speculate about the type of jackpot in the game, and to give the player the sense of anticipation for the game game that is currently being played as well as the interest of having the player reminisce about the game game that was played in the past.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, a specific performance, for example, a falling pull-back jackpot performance, is a jackpot of a game round that became a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as an advance winning game round) that was a jackpot one game before the game round that became a fall pull-back jackpot. To make a player recognize that the type was a probability-variable jackpot, that he subsequently won a falling lottery, and that he won a jackpot in a low-probability mode during a guaranteed game. In other words, with regard to whether or not to execute a specific performance and the content of the specific performance, the changes in the gaming state from the game where the jackpot was won first to the game where the jackpot was won after that are determined. It is decided based on. Therefore, a player who has recognized a specific performance can recognize (confirm) the mode of change in the game state in a game run executed in the past based on the specific performance. Therefore, in cases where the player was unable to recognize the manner in which the gaming status had changed in the gaming rounds executed between the first gaming round in which he won the jackpot and the subsequent gaming round in which he won the jackpot. Also, by making the player aware of the specific performance, it is possible to make the player aware of the changes in the game state in the game rounds that have been played so far. It is possible to create a gameplay experience that allows players to reminisce about the game state and game content in the game round, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the specific performance to be executed during the opening period is also determined based on the manner in which the game state changes from the first game round where the player wins the jackpot to the game round where the player wins the jackpot after that. In other words, until the opening period after the end of the game round that resulted in a jackpot, players can be made to pay attention to the changes in the game state in the game rounds played so far, the content of the games, and the performance. .

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a specific performance when winning a jackpot after transitioning from a high probability, high frequency state, which is an advantageous gaming state, to a low probability, high frequency state, which is a disadvantageous gaming state. do. Therefore, even if the player is aware that the game state has shifted from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous one even though the state is not explicitly shown, the player will still be able to switch from a high probability high frequency state to a low probability high frequency state. After the player's expectations have been temporarily lowered due to the transition to the frequency state, a specific performance is executed when the player wins the jackpot. By performing this effect, it is possible to further promote the game and increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the opening time based on the manner of change in the game state in the game rounds executed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. . Therefore, for example, when performing a performance (opening performance) during the opening period, which is a period corresponding to the opening time, the contents of the performance may be changed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. It can be determined according to the manner in which the gaming state changes during the executed gaming session. As a result, the player who has recognized the opening effect can, based on the effect, change the state of the game in the game rounds executed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. can be recognized (confirmed). Therefore, after the fact, it is possible to make the player aware of the changes in the game state in the game rounds played so far, and to make the player reminisce about the game state and the contents of the game played in the game rounds played so far. It is possible to create gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game round that starts immediately after the game round in which the jackpot is won (preceding winning game round) is a game round in a gaming state (high probability high frequency state) that is advantageous for the player. After that, the player shifts to a disadvantageous game state (low probability high frequency state) (winning a falling lottery), and then executes a specific performance when winning a jackpot (falling back jackpot). Therefore, after the player's expectations have temporarily decreased due to a transition to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, a specific performance is executed in the event that the player wins the jackpot. By executing a specific performance, the player's joy in the game can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<J5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sj0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and stores detection information (ball entry detection information). After that, the process advances to step Sj0102.

In step Sj0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sj0103.

In step Sj0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear them to 0. Then, the updated values of each of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0104. Note that the change type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 530), which will be described later.

In step Sj0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed as the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sj0104 will be described later. After executing step Sj0104, the process advances to step Sj0105.

In step Sj0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sj0105 will be described later. After executing step Sj0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 526: Sj0104).

FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sj0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sj0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sj0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0202, and the prize ball is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0203.

In step Sj0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0204.

In step Sj0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0209.

In step Sj0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sj0201: NO), the process advances to step Sj0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sj0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sj0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0206, and the prize ball is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sj0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sj0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0208.

In step Sj0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0209.

In step Sj0209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sj0204 or step Sj0208 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sj0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sj0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting hole is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sj0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sj0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sj0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0212.

In step Sj0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sj0103 (FIG. 526) is stored in the first memory of the free storage area of the corresponding holding area. area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items to which 1 was added in step Sj0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sj0103 are Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sj0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sj0103 is , is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sj0210. After executing step Sj0212, the process advances to step Sj0213.

In step Sj0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF. This is a process in which the type, presence or absence of a reach, determination result of the success or failure of the falling lottery (lottery result), etc., are determined before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sj0213, the process advances to step Sj0214.

In step Sj0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the destination judgment process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is set as a pending command. do.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sj0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 527: Sj0213) of the ball entry process for the starting port.

FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process uses the pending information to determine the validity of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the occurrence of reach, the validity of the fall lottery, etc. based on the pending information. This is a process executed before the main controller 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery.

In step Sj0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 527) is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Sj0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sj0302: YES), the process advances to step Sj0303 and the winning lottery is stored in the winning/losing table memory. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sj0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode when the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round (Sj0302: NO), the process advances to step Sj0304, and the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the ball is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery by referring to the fall judgment table stored in the fall judgment table storage area 63d.

In step Sj0305, if it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (Sj0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0306, where the fall winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Sj0303. In step Sj0303, as described above, the low probability mode validity table stored in the validity table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sj0305, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won (Sj0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0307. In step Sj0307, as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj0308, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sj0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sj0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0309, and the value is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sj0310, the process advances to step Sj0311.

In step Sj0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sj0311, if it is determined that it corresponds to a probability variable jackpot (Sj0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0312, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0311 that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sj0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0313, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sj0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sj0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0314, and the value of the ball entered into the starting hole this time is stored in the memory area. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sj0316, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sj0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0317, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0316 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Sj0316: NO), the first determination process is directly ended.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 526: Sj0105).

FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sj0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sj0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sj0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0402, and it is determined whether the number of accessory items held SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sj0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Sj0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sj0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0404.

In step Sj0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Sj0103 (FIG. 526) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sj0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is not less than the upper limit (Sj0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sj0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0502.

In step Sj0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0503.

In step Sj0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sj0502, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sj0503, the process advances to step Sj0504.

In step Sj0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0505.

In step Sj0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sj0506. In step Sj0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sj0506, the process advances to step Sj0507.

In step Sj0507, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0508.

In step Sj0508, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0509.

In step Sj0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sj0503). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sj0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sj0509: NO), in step Sj0510 and step Sj0511, the process is executed until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sj0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sj0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sj0509: YES), the process returns to step Sj0503 and each process from step Sj0503 to step Sj0508 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sj0503 to step Sj0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 530: Sj0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sj0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step Sj0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sj0601: YES), the main game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sj0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sj0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0602.

In step Sj0602, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

In step Sj0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in variable display (Sj0602: NO), the process advances to step Sj0603.

In step Sj0603, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sj0603, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sj0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sj0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0604.

In step Sj0604, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sj0604, the main game round control process is ended.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 531: Sj0603) of the game time control process.

FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sj0701, it is determined whether the total number of pending items CRN exceeds "0". The case where the total number of reservations CRN is "0" or less means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sj0701, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0" (Sj0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sj0701: YES), the process advances to step Sj0702.

In step Sj0702, a pending information shift process is executed to set the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb to the state after the start of variation, and the process proceeds to step Sj0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sj0703, a fall determination process including a process when winning a fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Next, the process advances to step Sj0704.

In step Sj0704, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sj0704, the process advances to step Sj0705.

In step Sj0705, a gaming state determination process for determining the gaming state is executed. Specifically, the gaming state is determined by calculating a gaming state determination value, which will be explained later. Details of the gaming state determination process will be described later. After executing step Sj0705, the process advances to step Sj0706.

In step Sj0706, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game round on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b based on the gaming state judgment value and the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is a process for setting the variable time. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sj0706, the process advances to step Sj0707.

In step Sj0707, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, as well as information on whether reach occurs or not, and information on the variable time set in step Sj0706. Furthermore, the fluctuation command includes information as to whether the guaranteed game round flag is ON, information as to whether the game rotation drop flag is ON, and information as to whether or not you won the fall lottery in the game rotation. information, and information regarding the gaming state determination value. After executing step Sj0707, the process advances to step Sj0708.

In step Sj0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on a losing result.

The variation command and type command set in step Sj0707 and step Sj0708 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sj0708, the process advances to step Sj0709.

The processing from step Sj0709 to step Sj0712 described below is performed when the high probability mode continues in a game round other than the guaranteed number of games, and when a jackpot is won in the target game round and when a fall lottery is won. In either case, the support mode is shifted from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support at the start of the relevant game round, and it is determined for the player whether he or she has won the lottery or the jackpot. This is processing to make it impossible or difficult to identify. In normal gaming machines, if the high probability mode continues outside of the guaranteed number of games, and if you win the fall lottery, the high probability mode will be applied at the start of the game in the fall determination process, which will be explained in detail later. In order to turn off the mode flag (Fig. 534: Sj0904) and the high-frequency support mode flag (Fig. 534: Sj0908), change from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round in which you won the falling lottery. to move to. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the end of the game round. Therefore, even if the performance in the game round is such that it is difficult to distinguish between winning the falling lottery or winning the jackpot, it is possible to identify the timing of transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in the game round. Therefore, the player is able to determine whether or not he or she has won the falling lottery at the start of the game round.

In this embodiment, by the processing from step Sj0709 to step Sj0712, if the high probability mode continues in a game round other than the guaranteed number of games, even if a jackpot is won in the game round to be processed, the game round Since the system shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game, if the player recognizes that the game has transitioned from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game, the falling lottery It is not possible to distinguish whether the player has won a game or a jackpot, and the player can be given a sense of anticipation and tension until he or she recognizes the notification of the result of winning determination at the end of a game round. The processing from step Sj0709 to step Sj0712 will be specifically described below.

In step Sj0709, it is determined whether the jackpot flag corresponding to any jackpot type is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the game round to be processed. In step Sj0709, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sj0709: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0710.

In step Sj0710, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sj0710 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sj0710: YES), the process advances to step Sj0711.

In step Sj0711, it is determined whether the number of games to be processed is within the guaranteed number of games. Specifically, it is determined whether the guaranteed number of games counter PNC>0. The guaranteed number of games counter PNC is a counter that counts down the number of guaranteed games. When the guaranteed game time, that is, the high-frequency support mode is started, the value "100" is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC, and the value "1" is subtracted every time the game time ends. In step Sj0711, if it is determined that the number of games to be processed is not within the guaranteed number of games (outside the guaranteed number of games) (S3711: NO), the process advances to step Sj0712.

In step Sj0712, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0713. In addition, if it is determined in step Sj0709 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sj0709: NO), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sj0710: NO), in step Sj0711 the game to be processed is a guaranteed game. If it is determined that there is pronation (Sj0711: YES), the process advances to step Sj0713.

In step Sj0713, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sj0713, the process advances to step Sj0714.

In step Sj0714, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sj0714, this variation start process ends.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 532: Sj0702).

FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sj0801, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 515) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 515). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sj0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sj0801 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sj0801: YES), holding information shift processing for the first holding area in steps Sj0802 to Sj0807 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0801 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb, (step Sj0801: NO) ), executes the hold information shift process for the second hold area in steps Sj0808 to Sj0813.

In step Sj0802, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sj0803, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0804. In step Sj0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0805.

In step Sj0805, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sj0805, the process advances to step Sj0806.

In step Sj0806, when the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0807.

In step Sj0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sj0807 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sj0801, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (Sj0801: NO), step Proceed to Sj0808.

In step Sj0808, the second starting reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0809. In step Sj0809, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sj0810, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj0811.

In step Sj0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sj0811, the process advances to step Sj0812.

In step Sj0812, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process advances to step Sj0813.

In step Sj0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sj0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be explained. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 532: Sj0703).

FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. In step Sj0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sj0901, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sj0901: YES), the process advances to step Sj0902.

In step Sj0902, the success/failure determination of the fall lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table for the fall lottery. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a winning in the fall lottery success/failure table (see FIG. 518) in the fall lottery table storage area 63d. Determine whether or not the In the following step Sj0903, if the result of the judgment in step Sj0902 is that the lottery is won (Sj0903: YES), the process advances to step Sj0904.

In step Sj0904, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj0905, and the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The fall flag is a flag for storing the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the fall lottery. After executing step Sj0905, the process advances to step Sj0906.

In step Sj0906, the game rotation drop flag is turned ON. The game rotation drop flag is a flag for identifying that the player has won the rotation lottery in the game rotation to be processed. Therefore, the game spin drop flag is turned ON when the player wins the fall lottery, and is turned OFF at the end of the game round in which the player wins the fall lottery. The difference between the game rotation fall flag and the fall flag is that the game rotation fall flag is a flag that turns ON only in the game round in which the fall lottery is won, whereas the fall flag turns ON when the fall lottery is won. This is a flag that turns OFF at the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery. Both the game rotation fall flag and the fall flag are used in the game state determination process (FIG. 536) which will be described later. After executing step Sj0906, the process advances to step Sj0907.

In step Sj0907, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sj0907, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sj0907: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process advances to step Sj0908, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sj0908, the main fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0907 that the number of games is within the guaranteed number of games (Sj0907: YES), the main fall determination process is ended. Further, the main fall determination process is also performed when it is determined in step Sj0901 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sj0901: NO), and when the result of the judgment in step Sj0903 is that the fall lottery has not been won (Sj0903: NO). finish.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 532: Sj0704).

FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sj1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sj1001, if it is determined that the high probability mode is selected (Sj1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1002, and a suitability determination is made with reference to the suitability table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 516(b). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sj1004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sj1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1003, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 516(a). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sj1004.

In step Sj1004, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sj1002 or step Sj1003 is a jackpot win. In step Sj1004, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sj1004: YES), the process advances to step Sj1005.

In step Sj1005, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sj1005, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sj1005: NO), proceed to step Sj1006, and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 517(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1005 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sj1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1007, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is displayed (see FIG. 517(b)). Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sj1006 or step Sj1007, the process advances to step Sj1008.

In step Sj1008, a flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sj1006 or step Sj1007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 16R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 8R certain strange jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. If it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sj1008, the process advances to step Sj1009.

In step Sj1009, processing for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sj1006 or step Sj1007 is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sj1009, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sj1004, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sj1002 or Sj1003 is not a jackpot (Sj1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1010, refers to the reach determination table, and determines whether reach occurs in the game round. Determine whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 514). Determine whether the value matches the current value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1011.

In step Sj1011, if the result of the reach determination in step Sj1010 is that a reach occurs in the game round (Sj1011: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1012 and turns on the reach occurrence flag. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sj1012, the process advances to step Sj1013.

On the other hand, in step Sj1011, if the result of the reach determination in step Sj1010 is that a reach does not occur in the game round (Sj1011: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1013 without executing step Sj1012.

In step Sj1013, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sj1013, the hit determination process ends.

<Game status determination process>
Next, the gaming state determination process will be explained. The game state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 532: Sj0705).

FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the gaming state determination process. The gaming state determination process is a process of calculating a gaming state determination value. Details of the gaming state determination value will be described later. Hereinafter, specific processing of the gaming state determination processing will be explained.

In step Sj1101, the game state determination value PN is calculated by adding the value of the high probability mode flag, the value of the high frequency support mode flag, and the value of the fall flag.

Here, details of the gaming state determination value will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, various flags are prepared in order for the MPU 62 to specify various gaming states. Specifically, there is a high probability mode flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and a high probability mode flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. A high-frequency support mode flag, a fall flag, etc. are provided for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the player has won the fall lottery. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the MPU 62 uses a gaming state determination value to collectively identify the values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag (each flag value). is available. That is, the gaming state determination value is a numerical value that allows identification of each flag value of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag. These flags and gaming state determination values are stored in various flag storage areas 64g (see FIG. 514) of the RAM 64.

FIG. 537 is an explanatory diagram illustrating details of the gaming state determination value. FIG. 537(a) is a correspondence table showing the correspondence between OFF/ON of each flag and the flag value. As shown in the figure, when the high probability mode flag is OFF, the flag value is set to "00H (meaning 00 in hexadecimal notation, the same applies hereinafter)", and when the high probability mode flag is ON, the flag value is "02H (means 02 in hexadecimal notation, the same applies hereinafter)" is set. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the flag value is set to "00H", and when the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the flag value is set to "01H". When the fall flag is OFF, the flag value is set to "00H", and when the fall flag is ON, the flag value is set to "10H".

In the present embodiment, the gaming state determination value is the total value of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag values.

FIG. 537(b) is a correspondence table showing the correspondence between the gaming states that the pachinko machine 10 can take and the gaming state determination values corresponding to each gaming state. The gaming state determination values corresponding to each gaming state are as follows.
- In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a normal state) that is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as a low probability low frequency state), the high probability mode flag is "00H" and the high frequency support mode is The support mode flag is "00H", the fall flag is "00H", and in this case, the gaming state determination value as the sum of these values is "00H".
- In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a time saving state) that is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as a low probability high frequency state), the high probability mode flag is "00H" and the high frequency support mode is The support mode flag is "01H" and the fall flag is "00H", and in this case, the gaming state determination value as the sum of these values is "01H".
・In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a variable probability state) that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as a high probability high frequency state), the high probability mode flag is "02H", and the high frequency support mode is The support mode flag is "01H", the fall flag is "00H", and in this case, the gaming state determination value as the sum of these values is "03H".
・In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a fall time saving state) that is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as a low probability of falling high frequency state) due to a fall within the guaranteed number of games, the high probability mode flag is set. is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the fall flag is "10H", and in this case, the gaming state determination value as the sum of these values is "11H".
・In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as normal fall state) that is in low probability mode and low frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as low probability of falling low frequency state) due to a fall outside the guaranteed number of games (after the end of the guaranteed number of games) In this case, the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the fall flag is "10H", and in this case, the gaming state judgment value as the sum of these is "10H". ”.

As can be seen from FIG. 537(b), the gaming state determination value is uniquely derived according to the combination of the flag values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall flag. Therefore, based on the game state determination value, it is possible to determine whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and whether or not you have won the fall lottery. It becomes possible to specify.

In addition, in this embodiment, an addition process is performed to add each flag value of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag, and the added value (total value) is defined as the gaming state determination value. On the other hand, as a modified example, the gaming state determination value is uniquely specified based on subtraction processing, multiplication processing, division processing, or arithmetic processing that combines two or more of these processing and addition processing. Good too. In short, as long as the gaming state determination value can be derived uniquely according to the combination of the flag values of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, and fall flag, any calculation process can be used. There may be. The gaming state determination value has been explained above.

The explanation returns to FIG. 536. After calculating the gaming state determination value PN in step Sj1101, the process advances to step Sj1102. In step Sj1102, the calculated gaming state determination value PN is stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM64. Thereafter, the gaming state determination value process is ended.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 532: Sj0706).

FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sj1201, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 536) is "00H". In step Sj1201, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "00H" (Sj1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1202, and a variable time setting process for a low probability low frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low probability low frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a low probability low frequency state. The fluctuation time setting process for the low-probability, low-frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj1202, this variation time setting process ends.

In step Sj1201, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is not "00H" (Sj1201: NO), the process advances to step Sj1203.

In step Sj1203, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 536) is "01H". In step Sj1203, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "01H" (Sj1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1204, and a variable time setting process for a low probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low probability high frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a low probability high frequency state. The fluctuation time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj1204, this variation time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sj1203 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "01H" (Sj1203: NO), the process advances to step Sj1205.

In step Sj1205, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 536) is "03H". In step Sj1205, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "03H" (Sj1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1206, and a variable time setting process for a high probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a high probability high frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a high probability high frequency state. The fluctuation time setting process for the high-probability, high-frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj1206, this variation time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sj1205 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "03H" (Sj1205: NO), the process advances to step Sj1207.

In step Sj1207, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN obtained by the gaming state determination process (FIG. 536) is "11H". If it is determined in step Sj1207 that the gaming state determination value PN is "11H" (Sj1207: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1208, and a variable time setting process for a low fall probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low fall probability high frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is a low fall probability high frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj1208, this variation time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sj1207 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "11H" (Sj1207: NO), the process advances to step Sj1209.

In step Sj1209, a variable time setting process for a low fall probability, low frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for a low probability of falling and low frequency state is a process of setting a variable time when the gaming state is a low probability of falling and low frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low fall probability/low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj1209, this variation time setting process ends.

<Variation time setting process for low probability and low frequency states>
Next, a variation time setting process for a low probability and low frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 538: Sj1202).

FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing variation time setting processing for a low probability, low frequency state. In step Sj1301, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sj1302.

In step Sj1302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the jackpot has been won (Sj1302: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1303.

In step Sj1303, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, as explained with reference to FIG. 521, in the game state of the low probability and low frequency state, a normal game performance (hereinafter also referred to as normal performance) is executed. Therefore, the variable time tables of the group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states are variable time tables for normal performance. After executing step Sj1303, the process advances to step Sj1304.

In step Sj1304, the variation time table specified in step Sj1303 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current variation type counter CS value obtained in step Sj1301 is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj1305, and the variable time information acquired in step Sj1304 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the low-probability, low-frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sj1302, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sj1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1306, and it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON. do. In step Sj1306, if it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sj1306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1307 and the reach occurrence flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1308.

In step Sj1308, a variable time table for reach occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1308, the process advances to step Sj1304. Since step Sj1304 and step Sj1305 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

If it is determined in step Sj1306 that the reach occurrence flag is not ON (Sj1306: NO), the process advances to step Sj1309.

In step Sj1309, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1309, the process advances to step Sj1304 described above. Since step Sj1304 and step Sj1305 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

<Variation time setting processing for low probability and high frequency states>
Next, the fluctuation time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 538: Sj1204).

FIG. 540 is a flowchart illustrating the fluctuation time setting process for a low probability high frequency state. In step Sj1401, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sj1402.

In step Sj1402, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the winning is a jackpot (Sj1402: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1403.

In step Sj1403, a variable time table for jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the low-probability, high-frequency gaming state is a gaming state in a gaming round after winning a normal jackpot, and is a so-called time-saving gaming state. In this case, as described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to identify whether he or she has won the normal jackpot or the probability variable jackpot, the state non-display effect is performed. Therefore, the variable time tables of the group of variable time tables for low probability and high frequency states are variable time tables for state non-explicit presentation. After executing step Sj1403, the process advances to step Sj1404.

In step Sj1404, the variation time table specified in step Sj1403 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1401 is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj1405, and the variable time information acquired in step Sj1404 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the fluctuation time setting process for the low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1402 that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sj1402: NO), the process advances to step Sj1406. In step Sj1406, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sj1406 that the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sj1406: YES), the process advances to step Sj1407.

In step Sj1407, the reach occurrence flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sj1407, the process advances to step Sj1408.

In step Sj1408, a variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1408, the process advances to step Sj1404 described above. Since step Sj1404 and step Sj1405 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

In step Sj1406, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sj1406: NO), the process advances to step Sj1409.

In step Sj1409, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1409, the process advances to step Sj1404 described above. Since step Sj1404 and step Sj1405 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

<Variation time setting process for high-probability, high-frequency states>
Next, a variable time setting process for a high-probability, high-frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 538: Sj1206).

FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing variation time setting processing for a high-probability, high-frequency state. In step Sj1501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Sj1502.

In step Sj1502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the winning is a jackpot (Sj1502: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1503.

In step Sj1503, it is determined whether the guaranteed game times flag is ON. The guaranteed game count flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the current gaming state is within the guaranteed game count. The guaranteed game count flag is a flag that turns ON when the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games, and turns OFF when the number of games played is outside the guaranteed number of games. In this embodiment, the performance when a jackpot is achieved in a high probability and high frequency state is set to a different performance depending on whether the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games or when the number of games played is outside the guaranteed number of games. In this state, when the jackpot flag is ON, processing is performed to identify whether the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games or outside the guaranteed number of games played. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 performs processing when a jackpot occurs in a high-probability, high-frequency state, when the number of games is within the guaranteed number of games, and when it is outside the guaranteed number of games. Set the variation time of game times to different values. The processing will be described later. In addition, when the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games and when the number of games played is outside the guaranteed number of games, the probability of occurrence of reach in the game round when a jackpot is achieved in a high probability/high frequency state is set to have a different probability. You can also use it as

If a jackpot is won within the guaranteed number of games in a high probability and high frequency state, a state non-display performance is executed. Specifically, from the start of a game round, an effect is executed that changes the LCD symbols without indicating whether the game time is in a high probability state or a low probability state, and then a reach effect and a jackpot effect are executed. Execute.

On the other hand, if a player wins a jackpot outside of the guaranteed number of games in a high-probability, high-frequency state, a performance is performed to make the player guess whether he or she won the jackpot or a fall lottery. Execute the performance to be announced. In this embodiment, outside of the guaranteed number of games in the high-probability, high-frequency state, whether you win a jackpot or win a fall lottery, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game. let Therefore, the player who recognizes that the high-frequency support mode has shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the start of a game round guesses whether he has won the jackpot or the lottery. Therefore, in accordance with the player's psychology, a performance is performed that allows the player to guess whether he or she has won a jackpot or a fall lottery. In this embodiment, a battle performance is executed in which a character representing the player's side and a character representing the enemy side fight as a performance that allows the player to guess whether he or she has won the jackpot or the falling lottery. Then, in the case of a jackpot, a performance in which the character representing the player side wins (victory performance) is executed. Hereinafter, a series of performances including a battle performance and a victory performance will also be referred to as a battle victory performance. Furthermore, if the player wins the falling lottery, a performance is performed in which the character representing the player side is defeated (defeat performance). Hereinafter, a series of performances including a battle performance and a defeat performance will also be referred to as a battle defeat performance.

The explanation returns to FIG. 541. If it is determined in step Sj1503 that the guaranteed game times flag is not ON (Sj:1504: NO), the process advances to step Sj1504. In step Sj1504, a variable time table for a jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games is specified from a group of variable time tables for high probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. As described above, since step Sj1504 is a jackpot in a high probability and high frequency state outside the guaranteed number of games, the specified variable time table is a variable time table for battle victory performance. In addition, as mentioned above, in the case of a jackpot in a high-probability, high-frequency state outside the guaranteed number of games, it is also possible to shift from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game and shift to the high-probability, low-frequency state. Regardless, the reason why the gaming state when setting the variable time is a high-probability, high-frequency state is because the processing of calculating the gaming state determination value (FIG. 532: Sj0705) is executed first, and This is because after the variable time setting process (FIG. 532: Sj0706) is executed, the process of turning off the high frequency support mode flag (FIG. 532: Sj0712) is executed. After executing step Sj1504, the process advances to step Sj1505.

In step Sj1505, the variation time table specified in step Sj1504 is referred to to obtain variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1501. Subsequently, in step Sj1506, the variable time information acquired in step Sj1505 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj1503, if it is determined that the guaranteed game times flag is ON (Sj1503: YES), the process advances to step Sj1507. In step Sj1507, a variable time table for a jackpot within the guaranteed number of games is specified from a group of variable time tables for high probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. As described above, step Sj1507 is a process for a jackpot in a high probability and high frequency state within the guaranteed number of games, so the specified variable time table is a variable time table for state non-display effect. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1505. Since step Sj1505 and step Sj1506 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in step Sj1502, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sj1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1508, and it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON. do. In step Sj1508, if it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sj1508: YES), the process advances to step Sj1509 and the reach occurrence flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sj1510.

In step Sj1510, a variable time table for reach occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for high probability and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. As described above, step Sj1510 is a process for when a reach occurs in a high-probability, high-frequency state within the guaranteed number of games and outside the guaranteed number of games, so the specified fluctuation time table is used for state non-display production. This is a variation time table. After executing step Sj1510, the process advances to step Sj1505. Since step Sj1505 and step Sj1506 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

If it is determined in step Sj1508 that the reach occurrence flag is not ON (Sj1508: NO), the process advances to step Sj1511.

In step Sj1511, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1511, the process advances to step Sj1505 described above. Since step Sj1505 and step Sj1506 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

<Variation time setting process for low fall probability high frequency state>
Next, a variable time setting process for a low fall probability high frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 538: Sj1208).

FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for a low probability of falling high frequency state. In step Sj1601, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sj1602.

In step Sj1602, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the winning is a jackpot (Sj1602: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1603.

In step Sj1603, it is determined whether or not the game rotation drop flag is ON. As described above, the game spin drop flag is a flag for identifying that the player has won the spin lottery in the game spin to be processed. The game spin drop flag is turned ON when the player wins the fall lottery, and is turned OFF at the end of the game round in which the player wins the fall lottery. That is, in step Sj1603, it is determined whether the current gaming state of low probability of falling and high frequency state is due to winning the falling lottery in the relevant game round that is the processing target, or whether it is due to the winning of the falling lottery in the relevant game round that is being processed. It is determined whether this is due to winning the fall lottery in . As described above, in this embodiment, if the player wins the falling lottery and also wins the jackpot in the relevant game round, a specific effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the process of step Sj1603, it is possible to determine whether the current low probability of falling high frequency game state is caused by winning the falling lottery in the relevant game round, which is the processing target, or whether it is caused by winning the fall lottery in the relevant game round. It is determined whether this is due to winning the falling lottery in the game round executed in the previous game.

In step Sj1603, if it is determined that the game rotation drop flag is ON (Sj1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1604. In step Sj1604, a variable time table for a fall jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for a low probability of falling, high frequency state stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The case where step Sj1604 is executed is the case where the player wins the falling lottery and moves to the low probability high frequency state, so the state before falling is the high probability high frequency state within the guaranteed number of games (Fig. 524 reference). Therefore, the variable time table for the falling jackpot specified by this process is a variable time table for the rolling jackpot game rotation performance within the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sj1604, the process advances to step Sj1605.

In step Sj1605, the falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is turned ON. The falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is a flag that turns ON when it is specified that it is a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games, and turns OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed due to the jackpot. The falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is used when determining the opening effect to be executed during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. As described above, in the case of a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games, a falling jackpot opening effect within the guaranteed number of games is executed as the opening performance (see FIG. 524). That is, the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is a flag for specifying whether or not it is a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games when determining the opening performance.

After executing step Sj1605, the process advances to step Sj1606. In step Sj1606, the variation time table specified in step Sj1605 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1601 is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj1607, and the variable time information acquired in step Sj1606 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the low fall probability high frequency state is completed.

In step Sj1603, if it is determined that the game rotation drop flag is not ON (Sj1603: NO), the process advances to step Sj1608. In step Sj1608, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for low probability of falling and high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The case where step Sj1608 is executed means that the game round to be processed is within the guaranteed game round, and in the game round executed before the game round, the player wins the falling lottery and enters a low probability high frequency state, This is a case of a fall back jackpot where the player wins the jackpot from that state (see FIG. 521). Therefore, the variable time table for the jackpot specified by this process is the variable time table for the fall pullback jackpot effect. After executing step Sj1608, the process advances to step Sj1609.

In step Sj1609, the fall pullback jackpot flag is turned on. The falling pull-back jackpot flag is a flag that turns ON when it is specified that it is a fall pull-back jackpot, and turns OFF when the opening/closing execution mode executed due to the jackpot ends. The falling pull back jackpot flag is used when determining the opening effect to be executed during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. As mentioned above, in the case of a falling pull-back jackpot, the jackpot type in the falling pull-back jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player (most advantageous jackpot: this implementation) among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine 10. If it is a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot (in terms of format), it is a falling pullback jackpot and the jackpot type is a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed immediately after the game round in which the falling pullback jackpot is won. A performance (falling back most advantageous jackpot opening performance) that suggests the details of the current state of the jackpot is executed by suggesting this (see FIG. 521). That is, the falling pull-back jackpot flag is a flag for specifying whether or not it is a falling pull-back jackpot when determining the opening performance. After executing step Sj1609, the process advances to step Sj1606. Since step Sj1606 and step Sj1607 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1602 that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sj1602: NO), the process advances to step Sj1610. In step Sj1610, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON. In step Sj1610, if it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sj1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1611 and the reach occurrence flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1612.

In step Sj1612, a variable time table for reach occurrence is specified from a group of variable time tables for low fall probability, high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table is a variable time table for state non-display. After executing step Sj1612, the process advances to step Sj1606. Since step Sj1606 and step Sj1607 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

In step Sj1610, if it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is not ON (Sj1610: NO), the process advances to step Sj1613. In step Sj1613, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low fall probability, high frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1613, the process advances to step Sj1606 described above. Since step Sj1606 and step Sj1607 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

<Variable time setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency state>
Next, a variable time setting process for a low fall probability low frequency state will be explained. The variable time setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 538: Sj1209).

FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for a low fall probability low frequency state. In step Sj1701, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sj1702.

In step Sj1702, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the winning is a jackpot (Sj1702: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1703.

In step Sj1703, a variable time table for a fall jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for a low probability of falling and low frequency state stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The case where step Sj1703 is executed means that the game round to be processed is a game round in which a high probability high frequency state is continuously being executed in a game round where the game round to be processed is a game round in which a high probability high frequency state is continuously executed, and the fall lottery is won, and This is a case where the player wins a jackpot in the game round (see FIG. 525). Therefore, the variable time table for a falling jackpot specified by this process is a variable time table for a falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sj1703, the process advances to step Sj1704.

In step Sj1704, the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is turned ON. The falling jackpot flag outside the guaranteed number of games is a flag that turns ON when it is specified that it is a falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games, and turns OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed due to the jackpot. The guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is used when determining the opening effect to be executed during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. As described above, in the case of a falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games, a falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games is executed as the opening performance (see FIG. 525). That is, the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is a flag for specifying whether or not it is a falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games when determining the opening performance.

After executing step Sj1704, the process advances to step Sj1705. In step Sj1705, the variation time table specified in step Sj1703 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1701 is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj1706, and the variable time information acquired in step Sj1705 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the low probability and low fall frequency state is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1702 that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sj1702: NO), the process advances to step Sj1707. In step Sj1707, a variable time table for falling and missing is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability of falling and low frequency states stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The case where step Sj1707 is executed is a process that is executed only in the game round in which the player wins the falling lottery outside of the guaranteed number of games in the high probability and high frequency state and loses the winning lottery. In this case, a performance is performed to make the player guess whether he or she has won the jackpot or a falling lottery, and then a performance is performed to announce that the player has won the falling lottery. In this embodiment, the battle defeat effect described above is executed. Therefore, the variable time table specified in step Sj1707 is a variable time table for battle defeat effects. After executing step Sj1707, the process advances to step Sj1705. Since step Sj1705 and step Sj1706 have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 531: Sj0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sj1801, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sj1801, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 538) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sj1801, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sj1801: NO), this fluctuation end processing is ended.

In step Sj1801, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sj1801: YES), the process advances to step Sj1802, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are displayed. A process is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step Sj1803, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sj1803, the process advances to step Sj1804.

In step Sj1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sj1804, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sj1804: NO), the process advances to step Sj1805.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1804 that any jackpot flag is ON (Sj1804: YES), the process advances to step Sj1816. In step S1816, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj1817, and if it is determined that the fall flag is ON (Sj1817: YES), the process proceeds to step S1818, and the fall flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S1814. If it is determined in step Sj1817 that the fall flag is not ON (Sj1817: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1814 without executing step Sj1818.

In step Sj1805, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sj1805 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sj1805: YES), the process advances to step Sj1806. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1805 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sj1805: NO), the process advances to step Sj1817. The processing in steps Sj1817 and Sj1818 has already been explained, so the explanation will be omitted. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1814.

In step Sj1806, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds zero. If it is determined in step Sj1806 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sj1806: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1807, and the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sj1807, the process advances to step Sj1808. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1806 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is less than or equal to 0 (Sj1806: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1808 without executing step Sj1807.

In step Sj1808, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sj1808, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sj1808: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1809, and the number of consecutive games played in the high frequency support mode is within the guaranteed number of games. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not.

In step Sj1809, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sj1809: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process advances to step Sj1810. In step Sj1810, the guaranteed game times flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1811. In step Sj1811, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sj1811, the process advances to step Sj1812.

In step Sj1812, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sj1812, if it is determined that the fall flag is ON (Sj1812: YES), the process advances to step Sj1813 and the fall flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sj1813, the process advances to step Sj1814.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sj1808 (Sj1808: YES), or if it is determined that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games in step Sj1809 (step Sj1809: YES), the fall flag is turned ON in step Sj1812. If it is determined that is not ON (Sj1812: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sj1814.

In step Sj1814, it is determined whether or not the game rotation drop flag is ON. In step Sj1814, if it is determined that the game rotation drop flag is ON (Sj1814: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1815 and the game rotation drop flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the fluctuation end processing is ended. In step Sj1814, if it is determined that the game rotation drop flag is not ON (Sj1814: NO), the variation end process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 530: Sj0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sj1901, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big prize opening opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sj1901 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sj1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1902, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing processing period starts, which is a period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. , it is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sj1902 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sj1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1903, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sj1903 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sj1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1904, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sj1904 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sj1904: YES), the process advances to step Sj1905. On the other hand, in step Sj1904, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sj1904: NO), the game state transition process is directly ended.

In step Sj1905, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1906. In step Sj1906, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1907.

In step Sj1907, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in this embodiment, conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions"), This is a program in which conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

In this embodiment, the open condition and the close condition are set as follows.
(open condition)
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the opening/closing execution mode.
(Closing condition)
- The elapsed time after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.

When the above-mentioned opening conditions are satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state. Moreover, when either one of the two items in the closing conditions is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sj1907, the process advances to step Sj1908 described above.

In step Sj1908, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the opening time setting process will be explained later. After executing step Sj1908, the process advances to step Sj1909.

In step Sj1909, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (Sj0503) in the normal processing (FIG. 530). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing processing period of the big prize opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sj1909, the process advances to step Sj1910 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sj1903, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Sj1903: YES), the process advances to step Sj1911.

In step Sj1911, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sj1911 that the opening period has ended (Sj1911: YES), the process advances to step Sj1912 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj1913.

In step Sj1913, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sj1913, the process advances to step Sj1914.

In step Sj1914, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sj1915, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: Step Sj0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sj1915, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sj1902, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sj1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1916, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sj1916, the process advances to step Sj1917.

In step Sj1917, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". do. In step Sj1917, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sj1917: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1917 that the grand prize opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sj1917: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sj1918, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step Sj1919.

In step Sj1919, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sj1919, the process advances to step Sj1920.

In step Sj1920, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sj1920, the process advances to step Sj1921.

In step Sj1921, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). The ending command includes information on the ending time set in the ending time setting process (Sj1919). The audio emission control device 90 executes an ending effect based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sj1921, the process advances to step Sj1922.

In step Sj1922, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sj1901, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sj1901: YES), the process advances to step Sj1923.

In step Sj1923, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sj1920), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sj1920 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sj1923: YES), the process advances to step Sj1924.

In step Sj1924, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sj1925, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sj1925, the process advances to step Sj1926 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sj1926, the process advances to step Sj1927.

In step Sj1927, an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The set opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). The sound emission control device 90 ends the performance in the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening/closing execution mode termination command. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1923 that the ending period has not ended (Sj1923: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 545: Sj1908) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step Sj2001, it is determined whether the falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is ON. In step Sj2001, if it is determined that the falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is ON (Sj2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2002.

In step Sj2002, opening time setting processing for a falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games is executed. Specifically, the time preset as the time required to execute the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot opening performance during the opening period is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). As described above, the falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games is an opening performance that suggests that the player has won the falling jackpot within the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sj2002, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sj2001, if it is determined that the falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is not ON (Sj2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2003.

In step Sj2003, it is determined whether the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is ON or not. If it is determined in step Sj2003 that the falling jackpot flag outside the guaranteed number of games is ON (Sj2003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2004. In step Sj2004, an opening time setting process for a falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games is executed. Specifically, the time set in advance as the time required to execute the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot opening performance during the opening period is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). Note that, as described above, the opening performance of falling jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games is an opening performance that suggests that the player has won a falling jackpot outside of the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sj2004, the opening time setting process ends.

In step Sj2003, if it is determined that the falling jackpot flag outside the guaranteed number of games is not ON (Sj2003: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2005.

In step Sj2005, it is determined whether the fall pullback jackpot flag is ON. In step Sj2005, if it is determined that the fall pullback jackpot flag is ON (Sj2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2006. In step Sj2006, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot. In step Sj2006, if it is determined that the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot (Sj2006: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2007.

In step Sj2007, an opening time setting process for the most advantageous jackpot for falling back is executed. Specifically, a time set in advance as the time required to execute the fall-back most advantageous jackpot opening effect during the opening period is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). As described above, the falling back most advantageous jackpot opening performance is a performance that suggests that after winning the falling lottery during the high probability mode, the player has won the jackpot within the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sj2004, the opening time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sj2005 that the falling pullback jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2005: NO), and if it is determined in step Sj2006 that the jackpot type is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (Sj2006: NO), step Sj2008 Proceed to.

In step Sj2008, normal opening time setting processing is executed. Specifically, a time preset as the time required to perform the normal opening performance during the opening period is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). A normal opening performance is an opening performance other than a specific opening performance, such as a jackpot opening performance that falls within the guaranteed number of games, a jackpot opening performance that falls outside the guaranteed number of games, or a jackpot opening performance that falls back and is the most advantageous. It refers to In the normal opening performance, a performance is performed that suggests to the player that he has won a jackpot. After executing step Sj2008, the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 545: Sj1916) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sj2101, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step Sj2101 that the door 36b is not open (Sj2101: NO), the process advances to step Sj2102.

In step Sj2102, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sj2102 that the conditions for opening the door 36b are satisfied (Sj2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2103.

In step Sj2103, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process advances to step Sj2104.

In step Sj2104, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sj2104, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sj2102, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sj2102: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sj2103 and step Sj2104.

If it is determined in step Sj2101 that the door 36b is open (Sj2101: YES), the process advances to step Sj2105.

In step Sj2105, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sj2105 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sj2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2106.

In step Sj2106, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2107.

In step Sj2107, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sj2107, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sj2105, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sj2105: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sj2106 and step Sj2107.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 545: Sj1925) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 548 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sj2201, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sj2201, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sj2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2202, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to ON. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sj2202, the process advances to step Sj2203.

In step Sj2203, it is determined whether the falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is ON. In step Sj2203, if it is determined that the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is ON (Sj2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2204, and the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2203 that the falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed number of games is not ON (Sj2203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2205 without executing step Sj2204.

In step Sj2205, it is determined whether the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is ON or not. In step Sj2205, if it is determined that the guaranteed number of games extra fall jackpot flag is ON (Sj2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2206 and the guaranteed number of games extra fall jackpot flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sj2207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2205 that the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2207 without executing step Sj2206.

In step Sj2207, it is determined whether the fall pullback jackpot flag is ON. In step Sj2207, if it is determined that the falling pull back jackpot flag is ON (Sj2207: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2208 and the falling pull back jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2209. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2207 that the falling pullback jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2207: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2209 without executing step Sj2208.

In step Sj2209, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sj2210, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. After that, the process advances to step Sj2211.

In step Sj2211, 100 is set in a guaranteed game count counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is a value set in advance as the number of guaranteed games, and is 100 in this embodiment. After that, the process advances to step Sj2212.

In step Sj2212, the guaranteed game times flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj2213, where a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is a high probability mode, is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set as . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2214.

On the other hand, in step Sj2201, if it is determined that the 16R regular jackpot flag and the 8R regular jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are not ON (Sj2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2215, and the 16R regular jackpot flag and the 8R regular jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are set to Turn off the flag that is ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2216.

In step Sj2216, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj2217, and 100 is set in the guaranteed game count counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, in step Sj2218, the guaranteed game times flag is turned ON. After executing step Sj2218, the process proceeds to step Sj2219, and a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90. Set as the command to be sent. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2214.

In step Sj2214, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a command to be transmitted. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 530: Sj0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sj2301, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sj2301 that the supported flag is not ON (Sj2301: NO), the process advances to step Sj2302.

In step Sj2302, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Sj2302 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sj2302: NO), the process advances to step Sj2303.

In step Sj2303, it is determined whether the value of the electric timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electric timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. The count value set in the power timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sj2303, if it is determined that the value of the power timer counter Td is not "0" (Sj2303: NO), the main power support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sj2303: YES), the process advances to step Sj2304.

In step Sj2304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the ordinary symbol unit 38. In step Sj2304, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the variable display (Sj2304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2305, sets the out-of-order display, and then ends the electronic role support process. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sj2304: NO), the process advances to step Sj2306.

In step Sj2306, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessory objects SN is greater than "0". In step Sj2306, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sj2306: NO), the electronic accessory support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sj2306: YES), the process advances to step Sj2307.

In step Sj2307, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sj2308, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sj2307 (Sj2307: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step Sj2308 (Sj2308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2309, where an electric accessories opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. The electric timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2310.

In step Sj2310, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sj2309 is a support win. In step Sj2310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sj2310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2311 and the support win flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj2312, and a high-frequency support mode electric role opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. Specifically, this is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high-frequency support mode. In the opening/closing scenario, conditions for opening the electric accessory 34a (electric opening condition) and closing conditions for the electric accessory 34a (electric closing condition) are set. In step Sj2312, after executing the high frequency support mode electric role opening/closing scenario setting process, the main electric role support process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sj2310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sj2310: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the processes of step Sj2311 and step Sj2312. .

If it is determined in step Sj2307 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (Sj2307: YES), or if it is determined in step Sj2308 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (Sj2308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2313, and the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. After that, the process advances to step Sj2314.

In step Sj2314, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sj2313 is a support win. In step Sj2314, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sj2314: NO), the main electronic role support process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2314 that support has been won (Sj2314: YES), the process advances to step Sj2315 and the support win flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2316, and a low-frequency support mode electric utility opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. Specifically, this is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. In the opening/closing scenario, conditions for opening the electric accessory 34a (electric opening condition) and closing conditions for the electric accessory 34a (electric closing condition) are set. In step Sj2316, after executing the electric role opening/closing scenario setting process for the low-frequency support mode, the main electric role support process is ended.

In step Sj2302, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sj2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2317, and it is determined whether the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0". In step Sj2317, if it is determined that the value of the electric timer counter Td is not "0" (Sj2317: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the general figure unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2317 that the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0" (Sj2317: YES), the process advances to step Sj2318.

In step Sj2318, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj2319, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sj2301, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sj2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2320, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Details of the electric switch opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing step Sj2320, this electronic role support process ends.

<Electric opening/closing process>
Next, the power opening/closing process will be explained. The electric role opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric role support process (FIG. 549: Sj2320).

FIG. 550 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening/closing process. In step Sj2401, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. In step Sj2401, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sj2401: NO), the process advances to step Sj2402.

In step Sj2402, it is determined whether the opening conditions of the set opening/closing scenario are satisfied. Specifically, in addition to counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened (one time in this embodiment) when winning one electric accessory opening lottery, the time required to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 34a is calculated. By counting with a timer counter whether the opening timing has elapsed or not, it is determined whether the conditions for shifting the electric accessory 34a to the open state are satisfied. In step Sj2402, if it is determined that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sj2402: NO), the electric role opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2402 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sj2402: YES), the process advances to step Sj2403.

In step Sj2403, the electric accessory 34a is opened. After executing step Sj2403, the process advances to step Sj2404.

In step Sj2404, a power release command is set. The power release command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: Step Sj0503) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that receives the electric role release command executes settings for executing the effect for electric role release. After that, the power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2401 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sj2401: YES), the process advances to step Sj2405.

In step Sj2405, it is determined whether a closing condition for the electric accessory 34a is satisfied. In step Sj2405, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sj2405: NO), the electric power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2405 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sj2405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2406.

In step Sj2406, the electric accessory 34a is brought into a closed state. After executing step Sj2406, the process advances to step Sj2407.

In step Sj2407, a power closing command is set. The power closing command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: Step Sj0503) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the electric role closing command executes settings for executing the effect for electric role closing. After that, the power opening/closing process is ended.

<<J6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sj2501, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sj2501, the process advances to step Sj2502.

In step Sj2502, a game rendition process is executed. In the game round performance processing, processing related to the performance to be executed during the game round from the start of symbol variation until it stops is performed. Details of the game presentation processing will be described later. After executing step Sj2502, the process advances to step Sj2503.

In step Sj2503, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the opening/closing processing period, and the ending period is performed. Details of the opening/closing execution mode production process will be described later. After executing step Sj2503, the process advances to step Sj2504.

In step Sj2504, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying a moving image showing the gaming state on the symbol display device 41, a process of displaying a demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as a moving image indicating the gaming state, a background moving image determined according to the gaming state determination value PN included in the gaming state command received from the main side MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Sj2504, the process advances to step Sj2505.

In step Sj2505, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sj2505, the process advances to step Sj2506.

In step Sj2506, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio data read out in the above BGM process and each production process. After executing step Sj2506, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for game rendition>
Next, the game rendition processing will be explained. The game presentation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 551: Sj2502).

FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the game rendition process. In step Sj2601, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sj2601, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sj2601: NO), the present game rendition process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2601 that a variation command and a type command have been received (Sj2601: YES), the process advances to step Sj2602.

In step Sj2602, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, the variation time, and the gaming state determination value PN is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2603.

In step Sj2603, a game performance pattern setting process is executed. The game round performance pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the performance pattern (contents and execution timing of the preview performance and reach performance) to be executed in the current game round based on the performance pattern table. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sj2603, the process advances to step Sj2604.

In step Sj2604, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R probability-variable jackpot, an 8R probability-variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, a symbol is placed on the active line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery in this game is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered pattern combination is selected as the same pattern combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined from the contents of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Sj2604, the process advances to step Sj2605.

In step Sj2605, processing for setting a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols set in step Sj2604 is specified. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In addition, when selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process advances to step Sj2606.

In step Sj2606, information on the effect pattern, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj2607, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sj2607, the process advances to step Sj2608, and an update process at the start of variation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sj2608, the main game rendition processing is ended.

<Game rendition pattern setting process>
Next, the game rendition pattern setting process will be explained. The game run performance pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 552: Sj2603) of the game run performance process.

FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sj2701, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552) is "00H". In step Sj2701, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "00H" (Sj2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2702, and a performance pattern setting process for a low probability low frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for a low probability low frequency state is a performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is a low probability low frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability and low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2702, this variation time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sj2701 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "00H" (Sj2701: NO), the process advances to step Sj2703.

In step Sj2703, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552) is "01H". In step Sj2703, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "01H" (Sj2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2704, and a performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is the performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low probability high frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2704, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sj2703 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "01H" (Sj2703: NO), the process advances to step Sj2705.

In step Sj2705, it is determined whether the gaming state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 552) is "03H". In step Sj2705, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "03H" (Sj2705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2706, and a production pattern setting process for a high probability high frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for a high probability and high frequency state is a performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is a high probability and high frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2706, the main effect pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sj2705 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "03H" (Sj2705: NO), the process advances to step Sj2707.

In step Sj2707, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552) is "11H". In step Sj2707, if it is determined that the gaming state determination value PN is "11H" (Sj2707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2708, where a production pattern setting process for a low probability of falling high frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state is the performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low probability of falling high frequency state. The production pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2708, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sj2707 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "11H" (Sj2707: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2709.

In step Sj2709, a performance pattern setting process for a low probability of falling and low frequency state is executed. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is the performance pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low probability of falling and low frequency state. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2709, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability and low frequency states>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the low probability and low frequency state will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 553: Sj2702) of the effect pattern setting process. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability and low frequency state is a process for setting the performance pattern for the game round when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing a production pattern setting process for a low probability, low frequency state. In step Sj2801, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552), it is determined whether the result of the judgment is a jackpot win or not. . In step Sj2801, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sj2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2802.

In step Sj2802, a process for setting a performance pattern for a jackpot in a low probability, low frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game round to be processed, a performance pattern is set for executing a performance announcing a jackpot win in the normal game round performance (see FIG. 521). Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for this low probability, low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sj2801, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Sj2801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2803, where it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552). In step Sj2803, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Sj2803: YES), the process advances to step Sj2804.

In step Sj2804, a process for setting a production pattern for reach generation in a low probability, low frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game round to be processed, a performance pattern is set for executing a performance that announces the occurrence of a reach in the normal game round performance (see FIG. 521). Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for this low probability, low frequency state is ended.

In step Sj2803, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has not occurred (Sj2803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2805.

In step Sj2805, a process for setting a production pattern for non-reach occurrence in a low-probability, low-frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game round to be processed, a performance pattern is set for executing a performance in which a reach does not occur (missing) in a normal game round performance (see FIG. 521). Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for this low probability, low frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability high frequency state>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 553: Sj2704). The performance pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is a process for setting a performance pattern for a game round when the pachinko machine 10 is in a so-called time saving state. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 555 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state. In step Sj2901, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552), it is determined whether the result of the judgment is a jackpot win or not. . In step Sj2901, when it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sj2901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2902.

In step Sj2902, a process for setting a performance pattern for a jackpot in a low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern for executing a state non-display performance (for jackpot) is set in the relevant game round to be processed. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for this low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sj2901, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Sj2901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2903, where it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552). In step Sj2903, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Sj2903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2904.

In step Sj2904, a process of setting a production pattern for reach generation in a low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern for executing a state non-display performance (for generating a reach) is set in the relevant game round to be processed. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for this low probability high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj2903, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has not occurred (Sj2903: NO), the process advances to step Sj2905.

In step Sj2905, a process for setting a production pattern for non-reach occurrence in a low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern for executing a state non-display performance (for non-reach occurrence) is set in the relevant game round to be processed. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for this low probability high frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for high-probability, high-frequency states>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state will be explained. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 553: Sj2706). The performance pattern setting process for a high probability and high frequency state is a process for setting a performance pattern for a game round when the pachinko machine 10 is in a so-called variable probability state. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 556 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for the high probability and high frequency state. In step Sj3001, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2601 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 552). . In step Sj3001, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sj3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3002.

In step Sj3002, it is determined whether or not the guaranteed game round is in progress, based on the information regarding the guaranteed game round flag included in the variable command stored in the command storage process (FIG. 551: Sj2501). If it is determined in step Sj3002 that the guaranteed game is not in progress (Sj3002: NO), the process advances to step Sj3003.

In step Sj3003, a process for setting a performance pattern for a jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games in a high probability and high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern for executing a battle victory performance in the relevant game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the production pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3002 that the guaranteed game is in progress (Sj3002: YES), the process advances to step Sj3004. In step Sj3004, a process for setting a performance pattern for a jackpot within the guaranteed number of games in a high probability and high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a production pattern for executing a state non-disclosure production in the relevant game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the production pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj3001, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot win (Sj3001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3005, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552). In step Sj3005, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Sj3005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3006.

In step Sj3006, a process for setting a production pattern for a reach occurrence in a high probability and high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a production pattern for executing a state non-disclosure production in the relevant game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the production pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj3005, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has not occurred (Sj3005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3007. In step Sj3007, a process of setting a performance pattern for non-reach occurrence in a high probability and high frequency state is executed. That is, a performance pattern for executing the state non-disclosure performance in the relevant game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the production pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability of falling and high frequency state>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the low probability of falling high frequency state will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 553: Sj2708). The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and high frequency state is to set the performance pattern for a game round when the pachinko machine 10 is in a so-called fall time shortening state. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing performance pattern setting processing for a low probability of falling high frequency state. In step Sj3101, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552), it is determined whether the result of the judgment is a jackpot win or not. . In step Sj3101, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sj3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3102.

In step Sj3102, based on the information regarding the falling lottery in the relevant game round that is included in the variation command stored in the command storage process (FIG. 551: Sj2501), it is determined whether or not the falling lottery was won in the relevant game round that is the processing target. Determine. In step Sj3102, if it is determined that the lottery has been won in the game round to be processed (Sj3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3103.

In step Sj3103, a process for setting an effect pattern for a falling jackpot in a low probability of falling high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set for executing a falling jackpot performance within the guaranteed number of games in the game round to be processed. Thereafter, the effect pattern setting process for the main low probability of falling high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj3102, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won in the game round to be processed (Sj3102: NO), the process advances to step Sj3104. In step Sj3104, a process for setting a performance pattern for a jackpot in a low probability of falling and high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern for executing a fall pullback jackpot performance in the game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the effect pattern setting process for the main low probability of falling high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj3101, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot win (Sj3101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3105, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 552). In step Sj3105, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Sj3105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3106.

In step Sj3106, a process of setting an effect pattern for generating a reach in a low probability of falling high frequency state is executed. Specifically, a production pattern for executing a state non-disclosure production in the relevant game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the effect pattern setting process for the main low probability of falling high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj3105, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has not occurred (Sj3105: NO), the process advances to step Sj3107. In step Sj3107, a process for setting a performance pattern for non-reach occurrence in a low fall probability high frequency state is executed. That is, a performance pattern for executing the state non-disclosure performance in the relevant game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence in the main fall low probability high frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency state>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the low fall probability and low frequency state will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 553: Sj2709). The performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is to set the performance pattern for a game round when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called normal state of falling. This production pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing the performance pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state. In step Sj3201, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sj2601 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 552). . In step Sj3201, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sj3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3202.

In step Sj3202, a process for setting a production pattern for a falling jackpot in a low probability of falling and low frequency state is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern is set for executing a falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed number of games in the relevant game round to be processed. Thereafter, the effect pattern setting process for the main low probability of falling high frequency state is ended.

In step Sj3201, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is not a jackpot (Sj3201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3203. In step Sj3203, a process for setting a performance pattern for falling and missing is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern for executing a battle defeat performance in the game round to be processed is set. Thereafter, the production pattern setting process for the low probability of falling and low frequency state is completed.

<Opening/closing execution mode production setting process>
Next, the opening/closing execution mode performance setting process will be explained. The opening/closing execution mode effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 551: Sj2503). The opening/closing execution mode performance setting process is a process for setting the performance pattern of the performance to be performed during the opening period, the opening/closing processing period, and the ending period.

FIG. 559 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing execution mode effect setting process. In step Sj3301, it is determined whether an opening command has been received. If it is determined in step Sj3301 that an opening command has been received (Sj3301: YES), the process advances to step Sj3302.

In step Sj3302, opening presentation processing is executed. The opening performance process is a process for setting a performance pattern for the opening performance to be executed during the opening period. Details of the opening presentation processing will be described later. After executing step Sj3302, the process advances to step S3303.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3301 that the opening command has not been received (Sj3301: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sj3303.

In step Sj3303, it is determined whether an opening/closing process start command has been received. In step Sj3303, if it is determined that the opening/closing process start command has been received (Sj3303: YES), the process advances to step Sj3304. In step Sj3304, opening/closing processing period production processing is executed. The opening/closing processing period performance processing is processing for setting a performance pattern for opening/closing processing period performance to be executed during the opening/closing processing period. Specifically, a performance pattern is set that notifies the progress of the round game or notifies the player that he or she has won a jackpot. After executing step Sj3304, the process advances to step S3305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3303 that the opening/closing process start command has not been received (Sj3303: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sj3305.

In step Sj3305, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step Sj3305 that an ending command has been received (Sj3305: YES), the process advances to step Sj3306.

In step Sj3306, ending effect processing is executed. The ending effect process is a process that sets a effect pattern for the ending effect to be executed during the ending period. Specifically, a performance pattern is set that suggests information regarding a game round that will be started after the opening/closing execution mode ends, or that notifies the player that he or she has won a jackpot. After executing step S3306, the main opening/closing execution mode performance setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3305 that the ending command has not been received (Sj3305: NO), the main opening/closing execution mode performance setting process is ended.

<Processing for opening production>
Next, the opening effect processing will be explained. As described above, the opening performance process is a process for setting a performance pattern for the opening performance to be executed during the opening period. In the present embodiment, the performance pattern of the opening performance is determined based on the game state of the game round of the jackpot winning that caused the opening/closing execution mode including the opening period to be executed. Which type of opening effect is to be set is determined by the opening time setting process (FIG. 546) by the main controller 60, and the audio emission control device 90 uses the opening command sent from the main controller 60. Recognizes the type of opening performance that is set.

FIG. 560 is a flowchart showing opening production processing. In step Sj3401, the opening effect set in the opening command received from the main control device 60 is specified. After executing step Sj3401, the process advances to step Sj3402. In step Sj3402, it is determined whether the set performance is a falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games. In step S3402, if it is determined that the set performance is a falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games (Sj3402: YES), the process advances to step Sj3403. In step Sj3403, a performance pattern for executing a falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games is set as the opening performance. Thereafter, the main opening production process is ended.

In step Sj3402, if it is determined that the set performance is not a falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games (Sj3402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3404. In step Sj3404, it is determined whether the set performance is a falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games. In step Sj3404, if it is determined that the set performance is a falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games (Sj3404: YES), the process advances to step Sj3405. In step Sj3405, a performance pattern for executing a falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games is set as the opening performance. Thereafter, the main opening production process is ended.

In step Sj3404, if it is determined that the set performance is not the guaranteed number of games falling jackpot opening performance (Sj3404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3406. In step Sj3406, it is determined whether or not the set performance is a falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening performance. In step Sj3406, if it is determined that the set performance is the falling back most advantageous jackpot opening performance (Sj3406: YES), the process advances to step Sj3407.

In step Sj3407, a performance pattern for executing a falling pullback maximum jackpot opening performance is set as the opening performance. Thereafter, the main opening production process is ended.

In step S3406, if it is determined that the set performance is not the falling back most advantageous jackpot opening performance (Sj3406: NO), the process advances to step Sj3408. In step Sj3408, a performance pattern for executing a normal opening performance is set as the opening performance. Thereafter, the main opening production process is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sj3501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj3502.

In step Sj3502, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sj3601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sj3701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 562) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence process (Sj3701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them.

In step Sj3702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is set by the command corresponding process (Sj3701) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj3703.

In step Sj3703, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sj3702), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step Sj3704.

In step Sj3704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sj3703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sj3705, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the low probability mode gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the high probability mode gaming state, a specific effect is executed. Specifically, in case 1, a falling pull-back jackpot effect and a falling pull-back most advantageous jackpot opening effect are executed as specific effects. In case 2, as specific performances, a falling jackpot performance within the guaranteed number of games and a falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games are executed. In case 3, as specific performances, a falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed number of games and a falling jackpot opening performance outside the guaranteed number of games are executed. By executing such processing, it is possible to make the player recognize, through a specific performance, that he won the jackpot in a gaming round that was executed in a disadvantageous gaming condition for the player. Nevertheless, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction for winning the jackpot.

Further, each specific performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the player has won a jackpot from a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more aware that he has won a jackpot despite the disadvantageous gaming conditions, and it is possible to give the player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won, in the subsequent game round, a performance that makes it impossible or difficult for the player to discern the game state in the current game round (status non-display performance) will be performed, so any game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to identify whether a game round is being executed in the current state. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. .

Furthermore, when such processing is being executed, if the conditions for a specific performance to be executed are met and the specific performance is executed, the game that has been executed up to now will be canceled for the first time due to the specific performance. A game that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state in the previous round was an unfavorable gaming state, and allows the player to reminisce about the gaming state and game content of the previous gaming rounds after the fact. It is possible to create a sense of fun and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player is made aware that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

Furthermore, if the player wins a jackpot within the guaranteed number of games after falling and the type of jackpot is the most advantageous type for the player, the most advantageous fall-back jackpot during the opening period. Since the jackpot opening performance is executed, after winning the jackpot, the player will know that he has won the most advantageous type of jackpot from an unfavorable gaming state, giving the player an even greater sense of superiority and happiness. can be granted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling and pulling back most advantageous jackpot opening performance in Case 1, the falling jackpot opening performance within the guaranteed number of games in Case 2, and the falling jackpot opening performance outside of the guaranteed number of games in Case 3 are the same as those for the game cycle that became the jackpot. Since the game is executed after the game is finished, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation even after the game round is finished, and also to make the player pay attention to the game even after the game round is finished.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, among the gaming states, the gaming state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most advantageous state), and the gaming state of the low probability mode and the The gaming state in the frequent support mode is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most disadvantageous state), and the gaming state in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous state and is the most disadvantageous state. This is a more advantageous gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a medium advantageous state). In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific performance is executed when a jackpot is won in the game round after the transition from the most advantageous gaming state to the middle advantageous gaming state. Therefore, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that he has won the jackpot before the player shifts to the most disadvantageous state, which is the most disadvantageous state, and to prevent the player from being in danger after the fact. It is possible to give a sense of accomplishment (a sense of crisis caused by later learning that the situation was actually dangerous) and a sense of accomplishment and superiority due to winning a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the specific performance, ie, the fall-back jackpot performance, is a performance that suggests that the player has won the jackpot after falling. In other words, the falling pull-back jackpot effect is the jackpot of the game round that became a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the preceding winning game round) one game round that became a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the winning game round) in which the falling pull-back jackpot occurred. The player can be made to recognize that the type was a probability-variable jackpot, that he subsequently won a falling lottery, and that he won a jackpot in a low probability mode during the guaranteed game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the type of jackpot in the previous game round in which the jackpot occurred after the fact, and to create a gaming experience that allows the player to reminisce about the previous games from the previous winning game round. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the falling pull-back jackpot performance, the jackpot type of the game round that became a jackpot (preceding winning game round) just before the game round that became the falling pull-back jackpot (the winning game round) is guaranteed to change. To make a player recognize that he won a jackpot, that he subsequently won a falling lottery, and that he won a jackpot in a low probability mode during a guaranteed game. Furthermore, if the type of jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the most advantageous fall-back effect is executed. That is, based on the jackpot type in the game round in which the falling pull-back jackpot was determined and the jackpot type in the preceding winning game round, the performance to be performed after the game round in which the falling pull-back jackpot was determined is determined. A player who recognizes a specific performance executed after the game round that was determined to be a falling pull-back jackpot is informed of the type of jackpot in the game round that was determined to be a falling pull-back jackpot, and the advance winning game based on the specific performance. It is possible to make the player reminisce and speculate about the type of jackpot in the game, and to give the player the sense of anticipation for the game game that is currently being played as well as the interest of having the player reminisce about the game game that was played in the past.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, a specific performance, for example, a falling pull-back jackpot performance, is a jackpot of a game round that became a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as an advance winning game round) that was a jackpot one game before the game round that became a fall pull-back jackpot. To make a player recognize that the type was a probability-variable jackpot, that he subsequently won a falling lottery, and that he won a jackpot in a low-probability mode during a guaranteed game. In other words, with regard to whether or not to execute a specific performance and the content of the specific performance, the changes in the gaming state from the game where the jackpot was won first to the game where the jackpot was won after that are determined. It is decided based on. Therefore, a player who has recognized a specific performance can recognize (confirm) the mode of change in the game state in a game run executed in the past based on the specific performance. Therefore, in cases where the player was unable to recognize the manner in which the gaming status had changed in the gaming rounds executed between the first gaming round in which he won the jackpot and the subsequent gaming round in which he won the jackpot. Also, by making the player aware of the specific performance, it is possible to make the player aware of the changes in the game state in the game rounds that have been played so far. It is possible to create a gameplay experience that allows players to reminisce about the game state and game content in the game round, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the specific performance to be executed during the opening period is also determined based on the manner in which the game state changes from the first game round where the player wins the jackpot to the game round where the player wins the jackpot after that. In other words, until the opening period after the end of the game round that resulted in a jackpot, players can be made to pay attention to the changes in the game state in the game rounds played so far, the content of the games, and the performance. .

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a specific performance when winning a jackpot after transitioning from a high probability, high frequency state, which is an advantageous gaming state, to a low probability, high frequency state, which is a disadvantageous gaming state. do. Therefore, even if the player is aware that the game state has shifted from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous one even though the state is not explicitly shown, the player will still be able to switch from a high probability high frequency state to a low probability high frequency state. After the player's expectations have been temporarily lowered due to the transition to the frequency state, a specific performance is executed when the player wins the jackpot. By performing this effect, it is possible to further promote the game and increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the opening time based on the manner of change in the game state in the game rounds executed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. . Therefore, for example, when performing a performance (opening performance) during the opening period, which is a period corresponding to the opening time, the contents of the performance may be changed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. It can be determined according to the manner in which the gaming state changes during the executed gaming session. As a result, the player who has recognized the opening effect can, based on the effect, change the state of the game in the game rounds executed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. can be recognized (confirmed). Therefore, after the fact, it is possible to make the player aware of the changes in the game state in the game rounds played so far, and to make the player reminisce about the game state and the contents of the game played in the game rounds played so far. It is possible to create gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game round that starts immediately after the game round in which the jackpot is won (preceding winning game round) is a game round in a gaming state (high probability high frequency state) that is advantageous for the player. After that, the player shifts to a disadvantageous game state (low probability high frequency state) (winning a falling lottery), and then executes a specific performance when winning a jackpot (falling back jackpot). Therefore, after the player's expectations have temporarily decreased due to a transition to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, a specific performance is executed in the event that the player wins the jackpot. By executing a specific performance, the player's joy in the game can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<J7>> Modification of the 10th embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《J7-1》Variation 1:
In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine in which, when winning a probability-variable jackpot, the high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won, except when winning a falling lottery. , the features in the above embodiments may be applied to other types of pachinko machines. For example, a pachinko machine (so-called ST machine) equipped with a function that limits the number of game rounds executed in high probability mode to a predetermined number of times when winning a fixed variable jackpot (so-called number cut variable probability function). May be applied to

In this modification, as an example of an ST pachinko machine, the limit number of game runs that can be executed in high probability mode (hereinafter also referred to as the limited number of play runs) is 100 when winning a jackpot. During the game play within the limited number of executions, the gaming state is a high-probability, high-frequency state, and when the limited number of executions is exceeded, the game state shifts to a low-probability, low-frequency state. In addition, if you normally win a jackpot, you can play the game in the low probability high frequency state (hereinafter also referred to as the time saving state) 100 times, and if the number of times the game is executed exceeds 100, the low probability low frequency transition to state. In this modification, the features of the above embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine with such specifications.

In this case, for example, when a player wins a jackpot, in the performance of the game round in which the jackpot was won, and in the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, the player to make it unidentifiable or difficult to identify. After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, even in a newly executed game round, a state non-display performance is performed in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to discern whether the game state is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Therefore, when a player wins a jackpot, he/she plays the game without being able to recognize whether the gaming state of the subsequent game round is a high probability/high frequency state or a low probability/high frequency state (time saving state). .

In this modification, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state (hereinafter also referred to as a pullback jackpot), and the type of the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, the opening/closing execution is performed during the game round in which the probability variable jackpot occurred. During the mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), as a specific effect, the game state of the game run being executed was a time-saving state (low probability high frequency state), and the jackpot was hit during the time-saving state. A performance suggesting that a prize has been won and that the type of the winning jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving medium pullback probability-variable jackpot suggestion production) is executed.

Furthermore, in this modification, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state, and the type of the jackpot is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player (hereinafter referred to as the most advantageous jackpot type) among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine, jackpot type), the game state of the game run that was being executed as a specific production during the game run that became the jackpot and during the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period) An effect that suggests that you were in a time-saving state (low probability high-frequency state), that you won a jackpot during the time-saving state, and that the type of jackpot you won is the most advantageous jackpot type (hereinafter referred to as the most advantageous jackpot type during time savings). Execute the jackpot suggestion performance).

In addition, when there is a jackpot other than the case explained above, the normal jackpot performance is executed in the game round in which the jackpot is won, and the normal opening performance, round performance, and ending performance are also performed in the opening/closing execution mode.

As explained above, by executing the time-saving medium pullback probability variable jackpot suggestion effect, execution is performed in the low-probability, high-frequency state (time-saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state for the player compared to the high-probability, high-frequency state. It is possible to make the player aware that he won a jackpot in the game he played, and that the type of jackpot is a guaranteed variable jackpot, through a specific effect (a time-saving medium pull-back probability variable jackpot suggestion effect), and to prevent disadvantageous effects. To give a player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction in winning a jackpot despite the gaming state.

In addition, by executing the most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect during time saving, the game executed in the low probability high frequency state (time saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state for the player compared to the high probability high frequency state. It is possible to make the player aware that he won the jackpot in the round, and that the jackpot type is the most advantageous jackpot type, through a specific effect (time-saving pullback most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect). To give a player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction in winning a jackpot despite the gaming state.

In addition, similarly to the above embodiment, when winning a jackpot, in the game round to be executed after that, a performance that makes it impossible or difficult for the player to identify the game state in the game round that is being executed (state non-display performance) is performed. Since the game is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game round is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. .

Furthermore, when such processing is being executed, if the conditions for a specific performance to be executed are met and the specific performance is executed, the game that has been executed up to now will be canceled for the first time due to the specific performance. A game that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state in the previous round was an unfavorable gaming state, and allows the player to reminisce about the gaming state and game content of the previous gaming rounds after the fact. It is possible to create a sense of fun and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player is made aware that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

In addition to this, when a jackpot is won during the time saving state, a specific performance may be performed regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, in the case of a pullback jackpot, during the game round in which the jackpot occurred and during the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), a specific effect is used to suggest that the jackpot is a pullback jackpot. Execute the performance. Even in this case, effects similar to those of the above embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, as a condition for executing a specific performance, if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the type of jackpot is not limited to the probability-variable jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot, but may be set to another jackpot type. good. For example, a specific performance may be executed when a jackpot is won in the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds (for example, 16R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot) during the time saving state.

《J7-2》Variation 2:
The features of the above embodiment may be applied, for example, to a type of pachinko machine (so-called variable probability limit machine) in which a limit (variable probability limit) is set on the number of times that a variable probability jackpot can be won consecutively.

In this modification, as an example of a fixed variable limit machine, the number of times that a fixed variable jackpot can be won consecutively (hereinafter also referred to as the limit number) is 5 times, and if the fixed variable jackpot is won 5 times in a row, , a game machine that usually wins the jackpot on the sixth time is used. Note that the number of times a player can win a probability-variable jackpot consecutively is five times, but there are cases where a jackpot is won less than five times and a normal jackpot is won, and subsequent game rounds become a low-probability mode. In addition, when winning a probability-variable jackpot, the game cycle to be executed will be in the high-frequency support mode until the next jackpot is won. In other words, it becomes a high-probability, high-frequency state. On the other hand, if you normally win a jackpot, you can play the game in the low probability high frequency state (time saving state) 100 times, and if the number of times you play the game exceeds 100, it will shift to the low probability low frequency state. . In this modification, the features of the above embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine with such specifications.

In this case, for example, when a player wins a jackpot, in the performance of the game round in which the jackpot was won, and in the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, the player to make it unidentifiable or difficult to identify. After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, even in a newly executed game round, a state non-display performance is performed in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to discern whether the game state is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Therefore, when a player wins a jackpot, he/she plays the game without being able to recognize whether the gaming state of the subsequent game round is a high probability/high frequency state or a low probability/high frequency state (time saving state). .

In this modification, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state (pullback jackpot) and the type of the jackpot is a fixed variable jackpot, during the game round in which the fixed variable jackpot occurred and during the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode). period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), as a specific performance, the game state of the game run being executed was a time-saving state (low probability high frequency state), and that a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. A performance suggesting that the type of the winning jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot (a time-saving medium pullback probability-variable jackpot suggestion production) is executed.

Furthermore, in this modification, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state, and the type of the jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine (the most advantageous jackpot type). ), during the game round in which the jackpot occurred and during the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), the game state of the game round being executed as a specific effect is set to a time-saving state. (Low probability high frequency state), that a jackpot was won during the time saving state, and that the type of jackpot won is the most advantageous jackpot type. Execute.

In addition, when there is a jackpot other than the case explained above, the normal jackpot performance is executed in the game round in which the jackpot is won, and the normal opening performance, round performance, and ending performance are also performed in the opening/closing execution mode.

By performing such processing, the same effects as in the tenth embodiment and the first modification can be obtained. In other words, by executing a time-saving medium-time pullback probability variable jackpot suggestion performance, the game rounds executed in the low-probability, high-frequency state (time-saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state for the player compared to the high-probability, high-frequency state, are executed. It is possible to make the player aware that he has won a jackpot, and that the type of jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, through a specific effect (a time-saving, pull-back, probability-variable jackpot suggestion effect), and even in unfavorable gaming conditions. Regardless of the situation, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction in winning the jackpot.

In addition, by executing the most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect during time saving, the game executed in the low probability high frequency state (time saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state for the player compared to the high probability high frequency state. It is possible to make the player aware that he won the jackpot in the round, and that the jackpot type is the most advantageous jackpot type, through a specific effect (time-saving pullback most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect). To give a player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction in winning a jackpot despite the gaming state.

In addition, similar to the above embodiments and modifications, if a jackpot is won, in the subsequent game round, the game state in the current game round cannot be discerned by the player or is difficult (state non-disclosure). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which gaming state the game round is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. .

Furthermore, when such processing is being executed, if the conditions for a specific performance to be executed are met and the specific performance is executed, the game that has been executed up to now will be canceled for the first time due to the specific performance. A game that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state in the previous round was an unfavorable gaming state, and allows the player to reminisce about the gaming state and game content of the previous gaming rounds after the fact. It is possible to create a sense of fun and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player is made aware that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

In addition to this, when a jackpot is won during the time saving state, a specific performance may be performed regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, in the case of a pullback jackpot, during the game round in which the jackpot occurred and during the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), a specific effect is used to suggest that the jackpot is a pullback jackpot. Execute the performance. Even in this case, effects similar to those of the above embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, as a condition for executing a specific performance, if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the type of jackpot is not limited to the probability-variable jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot, but may be set to another jackpot type. good. For example, a specific performance may be executed when a jackpot is won in the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds (for example, 16R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot) during the time saving state.

《J7-3》Variation 3:
The features of the above embodiments may be applied, for example, to a type of pachinko machine (so-called one-set type probability-changing machine) in which the number of successive probability-variable jackpot wins is fixed.

In this modification, as an example of a one-set type probability-changing machine, if you win a probability-variable jackpot from a low-probability mode gaming state, you will win a probability-variable jackpot twice in a row (so-called 2-time 1 set). , the type of jackpot at the time of winning a jackpot after winning two probability-variable jackpots is a normal jackpot.

In addition, when winning a probability-variable jackpot, the game cycle to be executed will be in the high-frequency support mode until the next jackpot is won. In other words, it becomes a high-probability, high-frequency state. On the other hand, if you normally win a jackpot, you can play the game in the low probability high frequency state (also called the time saving state) 100 times, and if the number of times you play the game exceeds 100, you will be in the low probability low frequency state. Transition. In this modification, the features of the above embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine with such specifications.

In this case, for example, when a player wins a jackpot, in the performance of the game round in which the jackpot was won, and in the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, the player to make it unidentifiable or difficult to identify. After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, even in a newly executed game round, a state non-display performance is performed in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to discern whether the game state is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Therefore, when a player wins a jackpot, he/she plays the game without being able to recognize whether the gaming state of the subsequent game round is a high probability/high frequency state or a low probability/high frequency state (time saving state). .

In this modification, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state (also called a pullback jackpot) and the type of the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, during the game round in which the probability variable jackpot occurred and during the opening/closing execution mode. (Opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), as a specific effect, the game state of the game being executed was a time-saving state (low probability high frequency state), and the player won the jackpot during the time-saving state. In addition, a performance suggesting that the type of the winning jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot (a time-saving pullback performance suggesting a probability-variable jackpot) is executed.

Furthermore, in this modification, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state, and the type of the jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine (the most advantageous jackpot type). ), during the game round in which the jackpot occurred and during the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), the game state of the game round being executed as a specific effect is set to a time-saving state. (Low probability high frequency state), that a jackpot was won during the time saving state, and that the type of jackpot won is the most advantageous jackpot type. Execute.

In addition, when there is a jackpot other than the case explained above, the normal jackpot performance is executed in the game round in which the jackpot is won, and the normal opening performance, round performance, and ending performance are also performed in the opening/closing execution mode.

By performing such processing, the same effects as in the tenth embodiment and the modification can be obtained. In other words, by executing a time-saving medium-time pullback probability variable jackpot suggestion performance, the game rounds executed in the low-probability, high-frequency state (time-saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state for the player compared to the high-probability, high-frequency state, are executed. It is possible to make the player aware that he has won a jackpot, and that the type of jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, through a specific effect (a time-saving, pull-back, probability-variable jackpot suggestion effect), and even in unfavorable gaming conditions. Regardless of the situation, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction in winning the jackpot.

In addition, by executing the most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect during time saving, the game executed in the low probability high frequency state (time saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state for the player compared to the high probability high frequency state. It is possible to make the player aware that he won the jackpot in the round, and that the jackpot type is the most advantageous jackpot type, through a specific effect (time-saving pullback most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect). To give a player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction in winning a jackpot despite the gaming state.

In addition, similar to the above embodiments and modifications, if a jackpot is won, in the subsequent game round, the game state in the current game round cannot be discerned by the player or is difficult (state non-disclosure). Since the player is unable to identify in which gaming state the game round is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which gaming state the game round is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. .

Furthermore, when such processing is being executed, if the conditions for a specific performance to be executed are met and the specific performance is executed, the game that has been executed up to now will be canceled for the first time due to the specific performance. A game that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state in the previous round was an unfavorable gaming state, and allows the player to reminisce about the gaming state and game content of the previous gaming rounds after the fact. It is possible to create a sense of fun and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player is made aware that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

In addition to this, when a jackpot is won during the time saving state, a specific performance may be performed regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, in the case of a pullback jackpot, during the game round in which the jackpot occurred and during the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period), a specific effect is used to suggest that the jackpot is a pullback jackpot. Execute the performance. Even in this case, effects similar to those of the above embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, as a condition for executing a specific performance, if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the type of jackpot is not limited to the probability-variable jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot, but may be set to another jackpot type. good. For example, a specific performance may be executed when a jackpot is won in the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds (for example, 16R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot) during the time saving state.

《J7-4》Variation 4:
The features of the above embodiment are, for example, a type of pachinko machine (so-called It may also be applied to V-type variable machines).

In this modification, as an example of a V-probability changer, a falling lottery is executed in the game round in the high probability mode. When a game round in the high probability mode is executed, if a fall lottery is won, the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode from the game round in which the fall lottery is won. In this modification, the features of the above embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine with such specifications.

In this modification, the game is executed without being able to recognize whether the game state of the game to be executed is a high probability high frequency state or a low probability high frequency state (time saving state). That is, in the game round, a state non-display effect is executed.

In this modification, if a jackpot is won in a game after the lottery mode has changed from high probability mode to low probability mode after winning the falling lottery, and during the round game (during the opening/closing processing period) When the game ball circulates in the V zone during a specific period, a specific performance is executed using the game ball circulating in the V zone as an opportunity. Specifically, as a specific performance, the lottery mode shifts from a high probability mode to a low probability mode due to winning a falling lottery in a game that has already been executed, and also a game in which a jackpot is won in the low probability mode. Execute the suggested performance (falling back jackpot performance). That is, in this modification, a fall-back jackpot performance is executed as a specific performance triggered by the distribution of game balls in the V zone. In addition, in this case, if you do not win the falling lottery and win a jackpot in the high probability mode gaming state, and then the game ball is distributed to the V zone, or the gaming state is changed to the low probability mode from the first game after the jackpot. , after the game round in which the jackpot was won first (hereinafter also referred to as the advance winning game round) ends, such as when a jackpot is won in the gaming state and the game ball is subsequently distributed to the V zone. The identification is triggered by the distribution of game balls to the V zone, based on the changes in the game state of the game rounds executed until the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won (hereinafter also referred to as the winning game round). The content of the presentation may be set (changed).

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific performance is performed as an opening performance during the opening period or an ending performance during the ending period. For example, the content of a specific performance to be executed as an ending performance is determined based on the mode of change in the game state in the game rounds executed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. The ending time, which is the temporal length of the ending period, is determined based on the configuration and the changes in the game state in the game rounds executed between the end of the preceding winning game round and the end of the winning game round. You may adopt the structure which determines. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easy to set the ending effect according to the change in the game state from the preceding winning game round to the winning game round, and the ending effect can be easily set according to the change in the game state from the previous winning game round to the winning game round, and the ending effect can be set according to the change in the game state for each game round. It is possible to ease time restrictions when designing an ending effect.

Further, the period during which a specific performance is executed is not limited to the ending period, but may be executed during a game round in which a jackpot is won. In addition, if the type of jackpot is the most advantageous type for the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most advantageous jackpot type), the game round effect to be executed in the game round in which the jackpot is won is a falling pullback jackpot. The jackpot type is the most advantageous jackpot type. You may perform a performance that suggests something.

As explained above, in this modified example, when a game ball circulates in the V zone during a specific period, a specific effect that suggests the game state in the game round that has already been played is executed, so the game ball circulates in the V-Zone, which increases the player's joy in the fact that the gaming state of the gaming round that starts after a certain period will be in the high probability mode, and also increases the gaming state of the gaming rounds that have been executed so far. It is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to reminisce about the contents of the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even though the game was played in high probability mode, the player won the lottery and switched to low probability mode, and then won a jackpot, and the game balls circulated in the V-zone during a specific period. Taking this as an opportunity, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific performance is executed, the player's expectations are lowered due to winning the falling lottery and the gaming state has shifted to the low probability mode, and the game ball circulates in the V zone, and when it is determined that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player from the next game round, a specific performance is executed. In such a configuration, the player's expectations are once significantly lowered by winning the fall lottery and shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and then the player's expectations increase by winning the jackpot. Moreover, during a specific period after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won, the game ball passes through the V zone and the expectation is further increased, and a specific performance is executed, so the expectation of the player is reduced. At the same time, specific effects can make the player aware of changes in the game state in the game rounds played so far, and improve the game performance in the game rounds played so far. It is possible to create a gameplay experience that allows players to reminisce about the state and the contents of the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the V zone is arranged inside the variable prize winning device 36 (big prize opening 36a), the V zone is located downstream of the opening/closing door 36b with respect to the distribution direction of game balls, and further than the V zone. A configuration may be adopted in which a V zone on-off valve (hereinafter also referred to as V on-off valve 36v) is installed on the upstream side. In this case, the opening/closing door 36b opens at the timing when the game ball circulates through the variable winning device 36, the game ball enters the big prize opening 36a, and at the timing when the game ball circulates through the V opening/closing valve 36v. When the V on-off valve 36v is open, the game ball can circulate through the V zone. Therefore, by adjusting the opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening timing of the V opening/closing valve 36v, the jackpot type (hereinafter also referred to as the first type jackpot) in which the game ball is likely to enter the V zone, and the gaming A jackpot type (second type jackpot) in which the ball is difficult to enter the V zone can be set.

In this modification, the time from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the opening of the V opening/closing valve 36v is the same for both the first type jackpot and the second type jackpot. The opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b is different between the first type jackpot and the second type jackpot. Therefore, if the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode until the opening/closing door 36b is opened for the first time is defined as the opening period, the first type jackpot and the second type jackpot are the temporal length of the opening period (opening time ) are different. By adjusting the opening time, it is possible to set a first type jackpot in which game balls are likely to circulate in the V zone during an opening/closing execution mode and a second type jackpot in which game balls are difficult to circulate in the V zone.

In this modification, if you win a falling lottery and are in a low-probability, high-frequency state, you win a jackpot, and the type of jackpot is that game balls in the V zone are likely to be distributed, that is, the probability is high from the next game round. In the case of a type 1 jackpot with a high possibility of shifting to the mode, a specific effect may be executed during the opening period. Further, in this case, since game balls have not yet circulated in the V zone during the opening period, the content of the specific performance may be made to suggest that the jackpot was a fall-back jackpot. In other words, the performance does not give any suggestion regarding the distribution of game balls to the V zone. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the content of the specific performance includes content suggesting that there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the V zone.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players during the opening period of the V-probability changing machine.

Further, even though the player won the first type jackpot, the player did not perform an operation to fire the game ball toward the variable winning device 36, and the player missed the timing for the game ball to circulate through the V zone. In order to reduce the player's frustration in the case of a flat tire (so-called flat tire), an effect that reduces the player's frustration may be performed during the round game or during the ending period. As a performance to reduce the player's sense of frustration, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific performance is executed that suggests that the jackpot was a fall-back jackpot. Furthermore, in order to reduce the feeling of impatience, a configuration may be adopted in which the ending period is set short so that the next game round can be played quickly.

《J7-5》Variation 5:
In the tenth embodiment and the modified example described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the state non-disclosure effect is not performed. In this case, the player will be able to recognize the gaming status of the current gaming session, but even if the player recognizes the gaming status, if a particular effect is executed when winning a jackpot, It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and superiority.

For example, in the tenth embodiment, when the number of games is played within the guaranteed number of games in the high probability and high frequency state, an effect that allows the player to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode is performed. . Thereafter, the player wins the falling lottery within the guaranteed number of games and shifts to a low probability, low frequency state. At this time, as a performance performed in the game round, a performance that allows the player to recognize that the lottery mode is a low probability mode is performed. Thereafter, when a jackpot is won in the low probability and high frequency state, the jackpot is a falling pull-back jackpot, and a specific performance is executed during the game round in which the falling pull-back jackpot is achieved. Specifically, the falling pull back jackpot effect is executed during the game round in which the falling pull back jackpot has occurred.

By doing this, after the player's expectations are temporarily lowered by winning the falling lottery and transitioning from a high probability high frequency state to a low probability high frequency state, a specific effect is executed by winning a jackpot. Therefore, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to further enhance the player's joy at winning a jackpot in a state where expectations are lowered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《J7-6》Variation 6:
In the tenth embodiment, the specific performance was executed during the game round and the opening period when the jackpot was won, but the specific performance may be executed at other timings. For example, it may be executed as a round effect during a specific opening/closing process period. In addition, a specific performance may be performed as an ending performance during the ending period. Even if a specific performance is executed as a round performance or an ending performance, the same effects as those of the tenth embodiment and the modified example described above can be obtained.

When a specific performance is executed as a round performance, a different time may be set as the round time for each game state in a game round in which a jackpot is won. Originally, the number of round games is different for each type of jackpot, so the round playing time is different, but in addition to the difference in round time depending on the number of round games, the interval between each round is Alternatively, the time between one opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b and the next opening/closing operation may be changed.

For example, even if it is the same 16R probability variable jackpot, the round time when winning the 16R probability variation jackpot from the high probability high frequency state and the 16R probability variation jackpot after moving to the low probability high frequency state by winning the falling lottery. The round time will be different depending on the situation. In this case, the round time is changed by changing the interval between each round or the time between the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b and the next opening/closing operation. Then, a specific performance is executed during a round game when a 16R probability variable jackpot is won after shifting to a low probability high frequency state due to winning the falling lottery. By executing a specific performance during the round game in this manner, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game even during the round game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《J7-7》Variation example 7:
Even if a configuration is adopted in which the guaranteed number of games in the high-frequency support mode is increased if the player wins the jackpot after falling and transitioning to the low-probability, high-frequency state, than if the player wins the jackpot from other gaming states. good. This modification adopts a configuration in which when a jackpot is won from a low probability high frequency state, the guaranteed number of games is set to be larger than when a jackpot is won from a gaming state other than the low probability high frequency state. For example, if you win a jackpot from a gaming state other than winning a jackpot after falling and transitioning to a low-probability high-frequency state, the guaranteed number of games in the high-frequency support mode will be reduced to 100 in the subsequent gaming rounds. However, only if you win the jackpot after falling and transitioning to the low-probability high-frequency state, the guaranteed number of games in the high-frequency support mode will be 120 if the game starts after that. Set. In addition, with this configuration, in the opening period and ending period when you win a jackpot after falling and transitioning to a low probability high frequency state, as a specific effect, you will be shown that you won a jackpot after winning a falling lottery. In addition to executing a performance that suggests, a configuration may be adopted that executes a performance that suggests that the number of guaranteed games is greater (or that the number of guaranteed games has increased) than the jackpot winning from other gaming states. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of anticipation due to winning the jackpot after winning the falling lottery and pulling back and winning the jackpot.

《J7-8》Variation 8:
In the above embodiment, when comparing the period corresponding to the period in which the specific effect is executed when the specific effect is executed and the period corresponding to the period during which the specific effect is executed when the specific effect is not executed, A configuration may be adopted in which the period during which a specific effect is executed is shorter. For example, in the case of a configuration in which a specific production is executed using an opening period, the opening time when the specific production is executed is configured to be shorter than the opening time when the specific production is not executed. . Even during the opening period, the player may desire to play the next game as soon as possible. Specific effects are executed for the purpose of further increasing the player's sense of anticipation, so if the opening time becomes longer in order to execute a specific effect, the effect of executing the specific effect will be reduced. There is a possibility that it will happen. Therefore, the opening time when a specific performance is performed is configured to be shorter than the opening time when the specific performance is not performed, and the specific performance is performed using the short opening time. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of expectation.

《J7-9》Variation 9:
Various conditions may be adopted as conditions for executing a specific performance. For example, in the tenth embodiment described above, a specific effect is executed when a player wins a fall lottery and wins a jackpot in a low-probability, high-frequency state in a game round that is executed after winning a probability-variable jackpot. For example, after winning a normal jackpot, a game run is played 100 times in a low probability high frequency state (time saving state), and if a jackpot is won in the playing time in the time saving state, a specific effect may be executed. Alternatively, a specific effect may be executed if a jackpot is won within a predetermined number of times after the 100 games in the time-saving state are completed.

Other types of gaming machines in which when you win a fixed-variable jackpot, the high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won in subsequent game rounds, but there is a limit to the number of game rounds that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode. When adopting a specific performance in a type of gaming machine that may shift from a high probability high frequency state to a high probability low frequency state, such as, the high probability high frequency state shifts to a high probability low frequency state A specific effect may be executed when a jackpot is won in a game with a low frequency, or when the type of jackpot is a specific jackpot type.

In this way, various configurations can be adopted as long as the configuration executes a specific performance when a jackpot is won after transitioning from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state. By doing this, even if the player is aware that the gaming state has shifted from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state, the player's expectations regarding the transition from the high probability high frequency state to the low probability high frequency state After the player's sense of anticipation has once decreased, a specific effect is executed in response to winning a jackpot, so by executing a specific effect, the player's joy at winning a jackpot even when his or her sense of expectation has decreased is further enhanced. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which a state non-display effect is executed in a game round, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game round is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. . Then, when the conditions for a specific performance to be executed are satisfied and the specific performance is executed, the game state in the game rounds that have been executed so far is an unfavorable gaming state for the first time due to the specific performance. To improve the interest of a game by making the player aware of this, and by making the player reminisce about the game state and content of the games played so far after the fact. I can do it. Furthermore, since the player is made aware that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

《J7-10》Variation 10:
In this modification, within the guaranteed number of games in the high probability and high frequency state, the battle performance is executed in the game times in which the falling lottery is won and the game times in which the winning lottery is won. In addition, the battle effect is executed even in a game round in which the player does not win the falling lottery and does not win the winning lottery. The content of the battle performance to be executed is a battle between various characters representing the enemy side and characters on the player side. If you win the falling lottery, and if you do not win the falling lottery and do not win the winning lottery, there will be a battle performance in which the player's character loses (battle defeat performance), and a battle performance in which the player's character loses. A battle performance (battle draw performance) that results in a draw between characters on the enemy side is executed. If a jackpot is won, a battle performance (battle victory performance) is executed in which the player's character wins. In addition, in the opening performance that is executed after the game round in which the jackpot was won, a performance that suggests whether or not the player had won the falling lottery in the game round in which the battle defeat performance or battle draw performance was previously executed. Execute. Hereinafter, a specific example will be shown and explained.

FIG. 564 is an explanatory diagram illustrating Modification 10. FIG. As shown in the figure, an 8R probability variable jackpot is won in the game round U3, and the game state changes to a high-probability, high-frequency state from the game round U4. In the game round executed in the high-probability, high-frequency state, the state non-disclosure effect is performed in the same way as in the tenth embodiment. Therefore, the player plays the game without being able to identify whether the lottery mode of the game round to be executed is the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

Thereafter, a battle effect is executed in game round U5, which is a game round within the guaranteed number of games. Note that the game round U5 is a game round in which no player wins the falling lottery, nor does he win the winning lottery. In game round U5, a battle defeat performance is executed in which the player's character is defeated at the end of the battle performance. Specifically, a character representing the player's side and an octopus, which is one of the characters representing the enemy's side, execute a battle, and at the end of the performance, the character on the player's side is defeated. In the game round U5, a battle defeat effect is executed, but the success or failure of the falling lottery is not shown in this game round. Therefore, the player ends up playing the game without being able to discern whether or not the game state has changed due to the executed battle defeat effect.

Thereafter, in the game round U6 within the guaranteed number of games and in which the falling lottery is won, a battle defeat effect is executed. Specifically, a character representing the player's side and a turtle, which is one of the characters representing the enemy's side, execute a battle, and at the end of the performance, the character on the player's side is defeated. In the game round U6 as well, a battle defeat effect is performed, but the success or failure of the falling lottery is not shown in this game round. Therefore, the player continues playing the game without being able to discern whether or not the game state has changed due to the executed battle defeat effect. Note that after the time when the player wins the falling lottery in game round U6, the game state shifts from the high probability high frequency state to the low probability high frequency state.

Thereafter, in the game round U7 within the guaranteed number of games and in which the winning lottery is won, a battle victory effect is executed. Specifically, a character representing the player's side and a crab, which is one of the characters representing the enemy's side, execute a battle, and at the end of the performance, the character on the player's side wins. After executing a battle victory performance, a jackpot announcement performance is executed to announce that a jackpot has been won in a winning lottery.

Then, in the opening performance started after the end of the game round U7, as a specific performance, a performance suggesting that the player had won the falling lottery in the game round in which the battle performance with the turtle was executed is executed. Thereafter, a normal round performance is performed during the opening/closing processing period, and a normal ending performance is performed during the ending period. Note that the specific performance may be performed as a round performance or as an ending performance. Furthermore, in the game round U5 and the game round U6 in which the battle defeat performance is executed/not executed, a battle draw performance may be performed instead of the battle defeat performance. In addition, the enemy character in the battle performance has a high probability that a specific character A (for example, a turtle) will be selected if the character has won the falling lottery, and has not won the falling lottery, and If a winning lottery has not been won, the probability of selecting a specific character B (for example, an octopus) may be increased, or the selected character may be randomly selected. You may.

Furthermore, if in a game round within the guaranteed number of games, the player does not win the falling lottery but wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, a battle victory effect is executed in the game round. In this case, the battle defeat effect may be executed in a game round that is executed before the game round in which the jackpot is won and in which the winning lottery is not won. By doing this, even if the player has not won the fall lottery, it is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player by making him or her guess whether or not he or she has won the fall lottery.

As explained above in Modification 10, by executing the battle effect in the game play within the guaranteed number of games, you can win the jackpot until the result of the battle effect (win or defeat) is shown as the effect. It is possible to encourage the player to guess whether he has won the lottery or whether he has won the falling lottery, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation and tension. In addition, if the executed battle performance is a battle defeat performance, the game round in which the battle defeat performance was executed does not indicate the propriety of the falling lottery, and the state hidden performance is also performed in subsequent game rounds. Therefore, in the game rounds after the battle defeat effect or battle draw effect is executed, the player is made to guess what the game state will be, giving the player a sense of anticipation and tension. be able to.

Further, when the executed battle performance is a battle victory performance, the player can be made aware that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction and superiority.

Furthermore, during the opening period, as a specific performance, a performance suggesting that the player had won the falling lottery in the game round in which the battle performance with the turtle was executed, so a battle defeat performance with the turtle was performed. Make the player aware that the gaming state had shifted from a high-probability mode to a low-probability mode during the game round, and give the player an advantage over winning the jackpot even though the gaming state had shifted to an unfavorable state. It can give a sense of satisfaction and satisfaction. In addition, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to create a gaming experience that allows the player to reminisce about the content of the performance in the game round U7, the game state and the content of the game in the subsequent game round.

In addition, in the battle production, each character on the enemy's side will be selected in each case: if they win the falling lottery, if they do not win the winning lottery, and if they win the jackpot in the winning lottery. If the probability of winning is set in advance, the player who recognizes the character selected in each battle performance will be asked to guess the result of the fall lottery or the winning lottery result during the execution of the battle performance. This can provide the player with an even greater sense of anticipation and urgency.

In addition, if the probability of each of the battle defeat effect and battle draw effect being selected is set in advance for each case of winning the falling lottery and not winning the winning lottery. , it is possible to draw the player's attention even more to the result of the battle performance (win, draw, defeat), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《J7-11》Variation 11:
In the tenth embodiment described above, the specific effect includes content that suggests to the player what kind of gaming state he was in to win the jackpot, but the specific effect does not include such content. May be adopted. For example, if it is a performance that is executed only when a jackpot is won after transitioning from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state, or when the type of jackpot is of a specific type, what kind of aspects can be used? Any production may be adopted, and the content of the specific production may be of any kind. By employing such a configuration, the player can have the added pleasure of guessing the regularity with which a particular performance will be executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

《J7-12》Variation 12:
In the tenth embodiment and the modification described above, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by taking as an example the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case may be employed in which a condition for executing a reach effect based on the counter value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is satisfied.

<K> Eleventh embodiment:
《K1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 565 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 566 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 567 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. The game balls that enter each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed on the gaming board 30. be guided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 566).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided below the first starting port 33. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 34. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, first starting port 33, second starting port 34, or variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the opening 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed until it is stopped is also referred to as the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only display effects triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 568 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 568(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 568(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 568(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 568(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom or from bottom A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 568(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. A unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section In either the second symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the symbol display device for each game. At step 41, after a predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 568(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The number of balls to be held based on the number of balls entering the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first holding display area Ds1. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four, respectively.

《K2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 569 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing data. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to an input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 566) is turned off. do.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various winning holes such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable prize drive part 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive part 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. As a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, if the electric accessory opening is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be played in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Furthermore, the setting information display section 34d is connected to the output port of the main control board 61. The setting information display section 34d will be described in detail later.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 570 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. The "high probability mode" is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry is set to the first value in the pending information storage area 64b. It is stored in the reservation area Ra in chronological order. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry are set in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. are stored in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not a reach occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not a reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 568(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 under the situation where the reach line is formed, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the types of reach are normal reach (also called normal reach), super reach, which suggests that the possibility (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is higher than normal reach, and hit lottery. There is a special reach that suggests that the probability (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the lottery is higher than the super reach, and different characters are displayed as videos in each of the normal reach, super reach, and special reach. By recognizing the characters that appear in the reach, the player determines whether it is normal reach, super reach, or special reach, and estimates the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to the game round. You can feel hopeful. Note that the difference in performance between normal reach, super reach, and special reach does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned differences in characters, and may be caused by changing the background color or changing the shape or color of the symbol.

The frequency with which Normal Reach, Super Reach, and Special Reach appear is determined to be relatively high or low. Specifically, the appearance frequency of super reach is lower than the appearance frequency of normal reach, and the appearance frequency of special reach is lower than the appearance frequency of super reach.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the . Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. For example, if C4=0 or 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is also called reservation information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes for winning a lottery. Furthermore, even in the same low probability mode, there are 6 levels of lottery settings (``Lottery setting 1'' to ``Lottery setting 6'') with different probabilities of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is as follows.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on, one of six lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6" is set. Then, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes a winning lottery by referring to the win/fail table corresponding to the lottery setting set at the time of power-on. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is low probability mode, the main controller 60 refers to the win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 1. Run the winning lottery.

FIG. 571 is an explanatory diagram showing a validity table for six types of low probability modes. 571(a) shows a win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 1, FIG. 571(b) shows a win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 2, and FIG. 571(c) shows a win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 3. 571(d) shows a winning/failure table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 4, FIG. 571(e) shows a winning/failure table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 5, FIG. 571(f) shows a win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 6.

As shown in FIG. 571(a), the win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 1 contains five values from 0 to 4 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The value of is set. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers.

As shown in FIG. 571(b), the win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 2 contains six values from 0 to 5 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The value of is set. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the six values from 0 to 5 (6 to 1199) are outliers.

As shown in FIG. 571(c), the win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 3 contains seven values from 0 to 6 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The value of is set. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the seven values from 0 to 6 (7 to 1199) are outliers.

As shown in FIG. 571(d), the win/fail table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 4 contains eight values from 0 to 7 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The value of is set. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the eight values from 0 to 7 (8 to 1199) are outliers.

As shown in FIG. 571(e), the winning/failure table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 5 includes nine values from 0 to 8 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The value of is set. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the nine values from 0 to 8 (9 to 1199) are outliers.

As shown in FIG. 571(f), the winning/failure table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 6 contains 10 values from 0 to 9 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The value of is set. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 10 values from 0 to 9 (10 to 1199) are outliers. That is, in this embodiment, the larger the number following "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning the winning lottery in the low probability mode.

In this embodiment, no matter which one of the six lottery settings is set, in the high probability mode, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the same win/fail table. That is, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is the same regardless of the lottery settings that have been set.

FIG. 572 is an explanatory diagram showing a validity table for high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 572, in the high probability mode winning/failure table, 32 values from 0 to 31 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. . Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 32 values from 0 to 31 (32 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than any of the low probability modes of lottery setting 1 to lottery setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the low probability mode of lottery settings 1 to 6 is set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode depends on which of lottery settings 1 to 6 the pachinko machine 10 is set to. It was configured to change. On the other hand, as another aspect, even in the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery will change depending on which of lottery settings 1 to 6 is set. may be configured.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

"Small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is determined. It is possible to set a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the numbers are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the door 36b is closed. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table, and a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is made using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table. A low-probability mode can be set in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. As explained using FIGS. 571 and 572, it is better to perform a winning lottery using a high-probability win/fail table than to perform a winning lottery using a low-probability win/fail table. The probability of winning the jackpot is high.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 573 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 573(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 573(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. There are 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot. The difference between the 16R fixed jackpot and the 8R fixed jackpot is that the number of openings of the door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R fixed jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R fixed jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 16R guaranteed variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, in the case of a losing result in the winning lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and no change in the lottery mode and support mode occurs. When sorting the type of jackpot, if it is a 16 probability strange jackpot or an 8R probability strange jackpot, as explained earlier, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high probability mode. This state continues until the next time a jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, a table for reach determination (hereinafter referred to as a reach determination table) will be described. The reach determination validity table is table data for comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not a reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

FIG. 574 is an explanatory diagram showing the validity table for reach determination. As shown in FIG. 574, in the reach determination table, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as values for winning the reach among the values of the reach random number counter C3 from 0 to 399. Among the values from 0 to 399, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 399) are set as outliers, that is, values that do not win the reach. That is, in a situation where a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, the probability of winning a reach is 1/20.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment operates according to the total number of reserved game balls that is the sum of the number of reserved game balls that entered the first starting port 33 and the number of reserved game balls that entered the second starting port 34. Five reach determination tables with different probabilities of winning the reach are provided. The success/failure table shown in FIG. 574 is for the case where the total number of pending items is 4 or more, and the five success/failure tables for reach judgment including the hit/fail table show that the smaller the total number of pending items, the higher the probability of winning the reach. It's getting expensive. For example, if the total number of pending items is 3, the probability of reaching winning is approximately 1/11, if the total number of pending items is 2, the probability of reaching winning is approximately 1/10, and if the total number of pending items is 1, the probability of winning is approximately 1/11. The probability of winning a reach is approximately 1/9, and when the total number of pending items is 0, the probability of winning a reach is approximately 1/6. Note that the number of reach judgment propriety tables does not need to be limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. In short, there are a plurality of success/failure tables for reach determination, and any structure may be used as long as the smaller the total number of pending tables, the higher the probability of winning the reach.

FIG. 575 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory release lottery.

FIG. 575(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 575(a), the electric accessory opening lottery win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that will result in an electric role opening win. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 575(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 575(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

《K3》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 576 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 569) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, a reach allocation table storage area 93c, a setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《K4》Lottery settings:
As previously explained using FIG. 569, the setting information display section 34d is connected to the output port of the main control board 61.

FIG. 577 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the setting information display section 34d. The setting information display section 34d is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and is composed of four 7-segment displays 34d1 to 34d4 arranged adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each of the 7-segment displays 34d1 to 34d4 includes seven segment light-emitting sections and a DP light-emitting section that indicates a decimal point, and depending on the combination of whether or not these light-emitting sections emit light, "1" and "2" are displayed. ”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, “9”, “0”, “b”, “L.”, “6.”, etc. It is possible to display numerical values, characters, symbols, etc. In this embodiment, the seven segment light emitting sections and the DP light emitting section are configured with red LEDs (light emitting diodes).

The lottery setting (" Information indicating "Lottery setting 1" to "Lottery setting 6") is displayed. Specifically, the number following "lottery setting" regarding the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 6", the number "6" is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4, as shown in FIG. 577.

In this embodiment, when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on, one selected from six lottery settings can be set. This will be explained in detail below.

The main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing settings, a button for changing settings, and a RAM clear button. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a frame opening switch and a door opening switch. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11. The door open switch is a switch that is turned on when the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. When the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power switch 88 of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and a key for changing the settings is inserted into the keyhole. Then, with the inserted key turned toward the setting change side (for example, turned clockwise) and the RAM clear button, frame release switch, and door release switch all turned on, the power switch 88 is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is switched from the state to the ON state (power is turned on), the pachinko machine 10 starts in the setting change mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode, information indicating the lottery setting at the time of the previous power OFF is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4 of the setting information display section 34d. For example, if the lottery setting at the time of the previous power OFF is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4. Then, each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the information displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4 changes from "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → " 6"→"1"→"2"...

When the information displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4 is a number corresponding to the lottery setting desired by the administrator, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position. , the lottery settings are changed to correspond to the information displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4. Specifically, for example, when the administrator presses the setting change button and "6" is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4, the administrator moves the setting change key from the setting change side to its original position. When turned to , the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "lottery setting 6".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 in this way, it is possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode.

《K5》Setting suggestion production:
Whether the probability of winning a jackpot is set high or low for the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing is useful information for the player. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by executing a performance (hereinafter referred to as "setting suggestion performance") that suggests which lottery setting is the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the player can It is configured such that it can be inferred from the presentation which lottery setting the pachinko machine 10 currently has. Specifically, in this embodiment, as a setting suggestion performance, when a player wins a jackpot in a winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending performance executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 An effect is executed in which a specific pattern such as a person, an animal, an object, a character, etc. (hereinafter also referred to as a "setting suggestion pattern") appears so that the probability of appearance is based on the current lottery setting. As a setting suggestion performance, it is preferable that the player is required to play the game for a certain period or more, and that the current lottery setting cannot be confirmed 100%. Therefore, in this embodiment, the current lottery setting can be estimated from the appearance probability of a specific symbol.

FIG. 578 is an explanatory diagram showing an ending effect displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 578(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a normal ending effect. FIG. 578(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an ending effect when a setting suggestion effect is performed. As can be seen from the comparison between the two, when a setting suggestion effect is performed, a treasure box pattern appears as a setting suggestion pattern PX in the middle of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 578(b). In the present embodiment, the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set in six stages depending on the probability that the setting suggestion symbol (treasure box symbol) PX appears in the ending performance, that is, the probability that the setting suggestion performance is executed in the ending performance. The player can guess which of the lottery settings ("lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6") corresponds to.

FIG. 579 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of a setting suggestion symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10, when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 1", the probability that the setting-suggesting symbol will appear in the ending performance when winning a jackpot is 1/10. , when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 2", the above probability is 1/8, and when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 3", the above probability is 1/5. If the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 4", the above probability is 1/4, and if the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 5", the above probability is 1/3. Therefore, when the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 6", the above probability is 1/2.

According to the appearance probabilities of setting-suggesting symbols for each of "Lottery settings 1" to "Lottery settings 6" above, the larger the number following "Lottery settings", the higher the probability of a winning lottery when the lottery mode is low probability mode. The higher the lottery setting has a higher probability of winning, the higher the probability that a setting-suggesting pattern will appear in the ending effect.

The appearance probabilities of the setting suggestion symbols for each of the above-mentioned "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6" are predetermined in the pachinko machine 10 and depend on the model of the pachinko machine 10. However, in a configuration that depends only on the model of the pachinko machine 10, there is a problem in that it is relatively easy for the player to guess which lottery setting is the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the correspondence between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol shown in FIG. The configuration is such that the correspondence between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern is changed from the standard based on the display mode of the symbol variation. The symbol variation is a symbol variation executed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. As explained above, the display mode of symbol variation is roughly divided into four types: miss, normal reach, super reach, and special reach. The term "miss" here refers to a state in which a jackpot was not won in the winning lottery and no reach occurred. In the case of a failure, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol in the ending performance is determined based on the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579.

FIG. 580 shows each lottery setting and setting when the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game after starting up the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also simply referred to as "initial variation display mode") is normal reach. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between suggestion patterns and appearance probabilities; This correspondence relationship differs from the standard correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 579 in that the value of the denominator of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion picture is subtracted by 1. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach, and the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 1", a setting-suggesting pattern appears in the ending performance when winning a jackpot. The probability is 1/9, and if the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 2", the above probability is 1/7, and if the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 3", the probability is 1/7. , the above probability is 1/4, and if the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 4", the above probability is 1/3, and the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 5". In this case, the above probability is 1/2, and when the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 6", the above probability is 1/1.

According to the correspondence shown in FIG. 580, compared to the standard correspondence shown in FIG. There is. The probability that the initial variation display format will be normal reach is lower than the probability that the initial variation display format will be out of reach, so in consideration of this lower probability, the probability of appearance of setting suggestion symbols for each lottery setting is increased. There is.

Note that the value of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion picture shown in FIG. 580 is just an example, and any value can be used as long as the probability of appearance is higher than the appearance probability of the standard setting suggestion picture shown in FIG. 579.

FIG. 581 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol when the display mode of the initial variation is super reach. This correspondence relationship differs from the standard correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 579 in that the value of the denominator of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion picture is subtracted by 2. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the initial variation display mode is super reach and the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 1", the probability that the setting suggestion symbol will appear in the ending performance is 1/8 Therefore, when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 2", the above probability is 1/6, and when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 3", the above probability is 1/6. /3, and when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 4", the above probability is 1/2, and when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 5", the above probability is 1/2. is 1/1, and when the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 6", the above probability is 1/1.

According to the correspondence shown in FIG. 581, compared to the correspondence shown in FIG. 580 when the initial variation display mode is normal reach, setting suggestions are made for each of "Lottery setting 1" to "Lottery setting 6". The probability of the pattern appearing is high. The probability that the initial variation display format will be Super Reach is lower than the probability that the initial variation display format will be Normal Reach, so in consideration of this lower probability, the probability of appearance of setting suggestion symbols for each lottery setting is increased. ing. In particular, when the lottery mode is low probability mode and the probability of winning a winning lottery is "lottery setting 5" or higher, the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol in the ending effect is 1/1 (100% in percentage). It has become.

Note that the value of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol shown in FIG. 581 is an example, and any value may be used as long as the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol is higher than the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol in the case of normal reach shown in FIG. 580. You can also do it.

If the initial fluctuation display mode is Special Reach, regardless of which of "Lottery Settings 1" to "Lottery Settings 6" is set, the setting suggestion picture in the ending effect when winning the jackpot The appearance probability was set to be constant at a high probability (for example, 1/2 or 1/1). In addition, the setting-suggesting patterns were made to be different for each of "Lottery setting 1" to "Lottery setting 6."

FIG. 582 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an ending effect including a setting suggestion effect when the display mode of the initial variation is special reach. The display mode of the initial fluctuation is a special reach effect, and if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the subsequent game round, the symbol PY of a treasure box with numbers written on it will appear as a setting suggestion effect in the ending effect as a setting suggestion effect. The performance will be executed. The numbers written on the treasure box match the numbers following "lottery settings" regarding the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 6", as shown in FIG. be done.

Note that the setting suggestion picture PY may be replaced with a female character holding a placard with numbers written on it. Further, the numbers corresponding to the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 may be replaced with letters, symbols, or pictures as long as the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 can be clearly indicated. In short, the setting-suggesting pattern PY may be any image as long as it suggests the setting of the winning probability; for example, a turtle pattern for "lottery setting 1" and a turtle symbol for "lottery setting 2". In the case of ``Lottery setting 3'', a pattern of an octopus, a female character pattern, etc. may be used.

The player clearly determines whether the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is one of "Lottery Settings 1" to "Lottery Settings 6" from the pattern PY of the treasure box with numbers written on it that appears during the ending performance. I can guess. Since the probability that the display mode of the first variation will be Special Reach is extremely lower than the probability that the display mode of the first variation will be Super Reach, in this embodiment, the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made clear. , now displays numbers that correspond to the lottery settings.

In the pachinko machine 10 having such a configuration, the player memorizes whether the initial variation is displayed as normal reach, super reach, special reach, or miss, plays the game, and hits the jackpot in subsequent game rounds. , the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect in the ending effect is estimated, and the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is determined based on the obtained appearance rate and the above-mentioned memorized display mode of the initial fluctuation. It becomes possible to guess. In this case, from the player's point of view, compared to a configuration in which the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects depends only on the model of the pachinko machine 10, there is a strong sense of randomness in which lottery settings are selected, and it depends on the skill of the player. , it is possible to correctly infer the lottery setting.

On the other hand, a player who does not know the display format of the initial variation cannot accurately guess which lottery setting is selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make the player want to know the display mode of the initial fluctuation. As a result, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the morning, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the beginning in the morning.

Furthermore, when the display mode of the first variation is other than a loss, compared to the case where the display mode of the first variation is a loss, a setting suggestion effect appears in the ending effect when winning a jackpot in a game after the first time. Since the probability is high, it is a great opportunity for players to accurately guess the lottery settings. Therefore, if the display mode of the initial variation is other than a loss, the player will want to continue playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 of the gaming machine after the first game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a strong motivation to continue playing the game after the first game.

<<K6>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sk0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and stores detection information (ball entry detection information). After that, the process advances to step Sk0102.

In step Sk0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sk0103.

In step Sk0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of each of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sk0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in normal processing (FIG. 587), which will be described later.

In step Sk0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sk0104 will be described later. After executing step Sk0104, the process advances to step Sk0105.

In step Sk0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry processing in step Sk0105 will be described later. After executing step Sk0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 583: Sk0104).

FIG. 584 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sk0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sk0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sk0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sk0203.

In step Sk0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sk0204.

In step Sk0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk0209.

In step Sk0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sk0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sk0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sk0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sk0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sk0207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sk0208.

In step Sk0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk0209.

In step Sk0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sk0204 or step Sk0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sk0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sk0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sk0209, if the starting pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sk0209: YES), the process advances to step Sk0210, where 1 is added to the starting pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process advances to step Sk0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sk0212.

In step Sk0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sk0103 (FIG. 583) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding holding area. area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items to which 1 was added in step Sk0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sk0103 is It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sk0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sk0103 is , is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sk0210. After executing step Sk0212, the process advances to step Sk0213.

In step Sk0213, it is determined whether the information indicating the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as "setting information") is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the lottery settings set in the pachinko machine 10 are in six stages from "Lottery setting 1" to "Lottery setting 6", so when normal, the setting information ranges from "1" to "6". The value will be within the range. Therefore, in step Sk0213, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main side RAM 64 is read, and if the setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6", the setting information is set to a predetermined value. If it is determined that the value is within the range, but on the other hand, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise etc., the setting information is determined to be within the specified range. It is determined that the value is not within the range.

The setting information is changed as necessary by a setting change process (FIG. 588), which will be described later, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This changed setting information is stored in a predetermined area (setting information storage area) of the main side RAM 64, and in step Sk0213, the lottery settings stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 are set. The information is read and a judgment is made regarding this setting information. Note that if the setting information is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting information when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was last turned off is stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64. Since it is held, in step Sk0213, a determination is made regarding the setting information when this power switch is turned off. When the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power outage occurs, at least a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 receives power from a backup power source such as a capacitor, so the setting information storage area is set to a predetermined area. By setting the settings and saving the settings information stored in the settings information storage area to a predetermined area, the settings information can be retained when the power switch is turned off. If it is determined in step Sk0213 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sk0213: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0214.

In step Sk0214, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which a determination is made as to whether or not an event has occurred before the pending information becomes a target of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sk0214, the process advances to step Sk0215.

In step Sk0215, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 587: Step Sk0505) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sk0215, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

On the other hand, in step Sk0213, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0213: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0216, and the game stop command is sent to the payout control device 70, which is the sub-side control device. It is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The game stop command is a command for causing the payout control device 70 and the audio emission control device 90, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the progress of the game is to be stopped. After executing step Sk0216, the process advances to step Sk0217 and the game stop flag is turned on. As a result, when the normal processing (FIG. 587) is executed, execution of the processing group for advancing the game (processing group of steps Sk0505 to Step Sk0510 in FIG. 587) is avoided, and the progress of the game is stopped. . After executing step Sk0217, the ball entry process for the main starting port is ended.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 584: Sk0214).

FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process is based on the pending information, and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether or not a reach has occurred, etc., based on the pending information. This is a process that is executed before becoming a lottery target.

In step Sk0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 584) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. By understanding this, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step Sk0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sk0302: YES), the process advances to step Sk0303 and the setting information is Refer to the corresponding success/failure table for low probability mode. Specifically, setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is selected from the six types of low probability mode success/failure tables (see FIG. 571) stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Identify the corresponding validity table and refer to the specified validity table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk0305, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table in step Sk0303, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sk0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sk0302: NO), the process advances to step Sk0304, and the win/fail table is stored. The high probability mode validity table stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk0305, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sk0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sk0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0306 and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sk0307, the process advances to step Sk0308.

In step Sk0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sk0308, if it is determined that it corresponds to a variable probability jackpot (Sk0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0308 that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sk0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sk0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sk0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0311, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sk0313, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sk0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Sk0313: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 583: Sk0105).

FIG. 586 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sk0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sk0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sk0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0402, and the number of reserved accessories SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sk0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Sk0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sk0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. After that, the process advances to step Sk0404.

In step Sk0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Sk0103 (FIG. 583) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sk0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is not less than the upper limit (Sk0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sk0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sk0502.

In step Sk0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sk0503.

In step Sk0503, an operation by the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 is accepted, and a setting change process is executed to change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process will be described later. After executing step Sk0503, the process advances to step Sk0504.

In step Sk0504, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the game stop flag is a flag that is turned ON in order to stop the progress of the game when it is determined that the setting information of the lottery setting is not normal. In step Sk0504, if it is determined that the game stop flag is not ON (step Sk0504: NO), the process advances to step Sk0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0504 that the game stop flag is ON (step Sk0504: YES), the processing in steps Sk0505 to Sk0510 is skipped. That is, when the game stop flag is ON, the processing for enabling the game to proceed from step Sk0505 to step Sk0510 is not executed, making it impossible to proceed with the game. Hereinafter, the processing after step Sk0505, which is the processing for enabling the game to proceed, will be explained.

In step Sk0505, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sk0502, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sk0505, the process advances to step Sk0506.

In step Sk0506, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sk0507.

In step Sk0507, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sk0508. In step Sk0508, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sk0508, the process advances to step Sk0509.

In step Sk0509, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sk0510.

In step Sk0510, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sk0511.

In step Sk0511, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sk0505). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. If it is determined in step Sk0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sk0511: NO), the process advances to step Sk0512.

In step Sk0512, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sk0512, the process advances to step Sk0513.

In step Sk0513, the variation type counter CS is updated to 1. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sk0513, the process advances to step Sk0514.

In step Sk0514, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. In step Sk0514, if it is determined that the game stop flag is ON (step Sk0514: YES), the process returns to step Sk0511. That is, when the game stop flag is ON, only the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the update of the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0514 that the game stop flag is not ON (step Sk0514: NO), the process advances to step Sk0515.

In step Sk0515, it is determined whether the setting information indicating the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. The process of step Sk0515 is the same as the process of step Sk0213 of the starting hole entry process (FIG. 584). If it is determined in step Sk0515 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sk0515: YES), the process returns to step Sk0511. In other words, if the setting information is normal, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are updated and the setting information of the lottery setting is normal within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. The process of determining whether or not there is one is repeated.

In step Sk0515, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0515: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0516, and the game stop command is sent to the payout control device 70, which is the sub-side control device, and the sound emitting device. It is transmitted to the control device 90. After executing step Sk0516, the process proceeds to step Sk0517 and the game stop flag is turned on. The processing in step Sk0516 and step Sk0517 is the same as the processing in step Sk0216 and step Sk0217 of the ball entrance processing at the starting port (FIG. 584). After executing step Sk0517, the process returns to step Sk0511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sk0511: YES), the process returns to step Sk0504 and each process from step Sk0504 to step Sk0510 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sk0504 to step Sk0510 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random. Furthermore, by using the remaining time to determine whether the setting information for the lottery setting is normal or not, the remaining time can be effectively utilized.

<Settings change process>
Next, the setting change process will be explained. The setting change process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 587: Sk0503).

FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the setting change process. In step Sk0601, it is determined whether the setting change key, the RAM clear button, the frame release switch, and the door release switch, all of which have been described above, are ON. Note that "the setting change key is ON" means that the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole and is located on the setting change side. In step Sk0601, if it is determined that the setting change key, RAM clear button, frame release switch, and door release switch are all ON (step Sk0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0602.

In step Sk0602, setting information for lottery settings stored in the main side RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, setting information for lottery settings stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in other areas other than the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64. Copy it to the update setting information storage area. After executing step Sk0602, the process advances to step Sk0603.

In step Sk0603, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the setting information display section 34d is started. Specifically, the update setting information is displayed by lighting on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4 of the setting information display section 34d. After executing step Sk0603, the process advances to step Sk0604.

In step Sk0604, it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. Since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6". do. If it is determined in step Sk0604 that the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sk0604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0606. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0604 that the update setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0604: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information If information other than numerical values is stored due to noise or the like, the process advances to step Sk0605 and the update setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk0606.

In step Sk0606, it is determined whether the setting change key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, the signal is High level during the period when the setting change key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the signal is high during the period when the setting change key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. During this period, the signal indicating the low level is monitored, and if the falling edge of the signal from high level to low level is detected, the setting change key (keyhole) is turned to the OFF side. judge. If it is determined in step Sk0606 that the setting change key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sk0606: NO), the process advances to step Sk0607 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. Determine whether

If it is determined in step Sk0607 that the setting change button has been pressed (step Sk0607: YES), the process advances to step Sk0608, and the update setting information is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as update setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as update setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". Thereafter, the process returns to step Sk0604 described above, and it is determined whether the updated update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0607 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step Sk0607: NO), the process returns to step Sk0604 described above without executing the process in step Sk0608, and the update setting information is changed. It is determined whether the value is within a predetermined range.

In step Sk0606 described above, if it is determined that the setting change key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sk0606: YES), the process advances to step Sk0609.

In step Sk0609, the update setting information stored in the main side RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64. make a copy. After executing step Sk0609, the process advances to step Sk0610 and ends the control for displaying the update setting information on the setting information display section 34d. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk0611, and a setting information command, which is a command indicating the setting information read in step Sk0609, is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0601 that at least one of the setting change key, RAM clear button, frame release switch, and door release switch is not ON (step Sk0601: NO), the process advances to step Sk0612; The setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main side RAM 64 is read. After executing step Sk0612, the process advances to step Sk0611, and a setting information command, which is a command indicating the setting information read in step Sk0612, is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. As a result, if it is determined that at least one of the setting change key, RAM clear button, frame release switch, and door release switch is not ON, a process group for changing the setting information (step Sk0602 to step Processing group Sk0610) is prohibited, and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned off last time is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a setting information command. sent to.

After executing step Sk0611, this setting change process ends. In addition, after the setting change process is completed, the setting information of the changed lottery settings is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the relevant pachinko machine on the management screen. It is also possible to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of 10.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 587: Sk0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sk0701, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step Sk0701, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sk0701: YES), the present game control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sk0702. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0701 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sk0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0702.

In step Sk0702, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

In step Sk0702, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in variable display (Sk0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0703.

In step Sk0703, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sk0703, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sk0702, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sk0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0704.

In step Sk0704, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sk0704, the present game round control process is ended.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 589: Sk0704) of the game time control process.

FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing variation start processing. In step Sk0801, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN exceeds "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" or less means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sk0801, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0" (Sk0801: NO), this fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0801 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sk0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0802.

In step Sk0802, it is determined whether the setting information indicating the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. The process of step Sk0802 is the same as the process of step Sk0213 of the starting hole entry process (FIG. 584). In step Sk0802, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0803, and the game stop command is sent to the payout control device 70, which is the sub-side control device, and the sound emitting device. It is transmitted to the control device 90.

After executing step Sk0803, the process proceeds to step Sk0804 and the game stop flag is turned ON. The processing in step Sk0803 and step Sk0804 is the same as the processing in step Sk0216 and step Sk0217 of the ball entrance processing at the starting port (FIG. 584). After executing step Sk0804, this variation start process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0802 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sk0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0805.

In step Sk0805, a pending information shift process is executed to set the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Sk0806. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sk0806, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sk0806, the process advances to step Sk0807.

In step Sk0807, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game round on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b based on the gaming state judgment value and the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is a process for setting the variable time. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sk0807, the process advances to step Sk0808.

In step Sk0808, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, information as to whether reach has occurred, and information on the variable time set in step Sk0807. After executing step Sk0808, the process advances to step Sk0809.

In step Sk0809, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on 16R probability-variable jackpot, information on 8R probability-variable jackpot, information on 16R regular jackpot, information on 8R regular jackpot, or information on the losing result of the winning lottery. It is.

The variation command and type command set in step Sk0808 and step Sk0809 are sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sk0809, the process advances to step Sk0810.

In step Sk0810, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sk0810, the process advances to step Sk0811.

In step Sk0811, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk0811, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 590: Sk0802) of the variation start process.

FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sk0901, it is determined whether the holding area to which the holding information shift process is to be performed is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 570) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 570). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sk0901, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sk0901 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sk0901: YES), holding information shift processing for the first holding area in steps Sk0902 to Step Sk0907 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sk0901, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sk0901: NO ), the reservation information shift process for the second reservation area in steps Sk0908 to Step Sk0913 is executed.

In step Sk0902, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sk0903, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sk0904. In step Sk0904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sk0905.

In step Sk0905, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sk0905, the process advances to step Sk0906.

In step Sk0906, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk0907.

In step Sk0907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sk0907 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in normal processing (FIG. 587). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sk0901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (Sk0901: NO), step Proceed to Sk0908.

In step Sk0908, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk0909. In step Sk0909, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sk0910, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sk0911.

In step Sk0911, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sk0911, the process advances to step Sk0912.

In step Sk0912, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk0913.

In step Sk0913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sk0913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 590: Sk0803).

FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sk1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sk1001, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sk1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1002, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1001 that it is not the high probability mode (Sk1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1003, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is selected from the six types of low probability mode success/failure tables (see FIG. 571) stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. A corresponding validity table is specified, and a validity determination is made by referring to the specified validity table. For example, if the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is "1", the judgment is made by referring to the judgment table for low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 1. . In the win/fail determination, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table corresponding to the setting information. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1004.

In step Sk1004, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sk1002 or step Sk1003 is a jackpot win. In step Sk1004, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sk1004: YES), the process advances to step Sk1005.

In step Sk1005, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sk1005, if it is determined that the mode is high-frequency support mode (Sk1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1006, and the number of consecutive games played in high-frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). ) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sk1006, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sk1006: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sk1007, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sk1007, the process advances to step Sk1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1005 that the mode is not high-frequency support mode (Sk1005: NO), or if it is determined in step Sk1006 that the number of games played is within the guaranteed number of games (step Sk1006: YES), the process immediately proceeds to step Sk1008.

Through the processes from step Sk1004 to step Sk1007 described above, variations in the lottery mode and support mode at the timing of winning a jackpot are realized.

In the following steps Sk1008 to Sk1012, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step Sk1008, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sk1008, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sk1008: NO), proceed to step Sk1009 and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 573(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1008 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sk1008: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1010, and the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 573(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sk1009 or step Sk1010, the process advances to step Sk1011.

In step Sk1011, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sk1008 or step Sk1009 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 16R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 8R certain strange jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. If it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sk1011, the process advances to step Sk1012.

In step Sk1012, a process for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sk1009 or step Sk1010 is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sk1012, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sk1004, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sk1002 or Sk1003 is not a jackpot (Sk1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1013, and the game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are held. With reference to the reach determination table corresponding to the number of pieces, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the relevant game round. Specifically, the total number of pending balls CRN obtained in step Sk0211 of the entry process for the starting opening (FIG. 584) is read from the total number of pending balls storage area and stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 569). The reach judgment correctness table corresponding to the total pending number CRN is specified from among the plurality of reach judgment correctness tables that have been set, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is determined by the reach judgment specified above. In the propriety table, it is determined whether the reach matches the value set as occurrence. After that, the process advances to step Sk1014.

In step Sk1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Sk1013 is that a reach occurs in the relevant game round (Sk1014: YES), the process advances to step Sk1015 and the reach occurrence flag is turned on. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk1015, the process advances to step Sk1016.

On the other hand, in step Sk1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Sk1013 is that a reach does not occur in the game round (Sk1014: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1016 without executing step Sk1015.

In step Sk1016, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sk1016, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 590: Sk0804).

FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sk1101, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step Sk1102.

In step Sk1102, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (Sk1102: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sk1103.

In step Sk1103, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk1104, where the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sk1102, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sk1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1105, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (Sk1105) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Sk1102, in step Sk1105, the reach is It is determined whether or not this is the game time in which the game occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sk1105: YES), and step Sk1106 is executed. Proceed to.

In step Sk1106, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk1104, where the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sk1105, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the current game round (Sk1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1107, and the variable time table for losing that is stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. , obtains the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk1104, where the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table for generating a reach is set to differ based on the type of reach. Specifically, the fluctuation time is set from shortest to longest in the order of normal reach, super reach, and special reach. However, the variation time is not limited to this, and the variation time may be set in the order of normal reach, super reach, and special reach from the longest to the shortest.

Similarly, the variable time information stored in the jackpot variable time table is set differently based on the type of reach. Specifically, the fluctuation time is set from shortest to longest in the order of normal reach, super reach, and special reach. However, the variation time is not limited to this, and the variation time may be set in the order of normal reach, super reach, and special reach from the longest to the shortest.

The fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table for losing is compared with each fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation time table for reaching occurrence and each fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for jackpot occurrence, The fluctuation time is set to be short. However, it is not limited to this, and on the contrary, the fluctuation time may be set to be longer.

Also, when comparing the variable time information stored in the variable time table for jackpot and the variable time information stored in the variable time table for reach generation, it is found that the variable times that are easy to select and the variable times that are difficult to select are different. The structure is as follows. Specifically, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table for jackpot is the fluctuation time that is difficult to select, in the order of fluctuation time corresponding to normal reach, fluctuation time corresponding to super reach, and fluctuation time corresponding to special reach. On the other hand, the variable time information stored in the variable time table for reach occurrence is configured to be a variable time that is easy to select from among the variable time corresponding to normal reach, the variable time corresponding to super reach, The variation time corresponding to the special reach is arranged such that the variation time is more likely to be selected and the variation time is less likely to be selected. In this embodiment, with this configuration, it is realized that the probability (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery increases from low to high in the order of normal reach, super reach, and special reach.

In addition, there is a variable time table for guaranteed variable jackpots, a variable time table for normal jackpots, a variable time table for out-of-reach times, and a change-in time table for out-of-reach times (when no jackpot is won in the winning lottery and no reach occurs). A configuration may also be adopted in which the variable time tables are individually set.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 589: Sk0707) of the game time control process.

FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sk1201, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sk1201, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 593) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If it is determined in step Sk1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sk1201: NO), this fluctuation end process is ended.

In step Sk1201, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sk1201: YES), the process advances to step Sk1202, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are selected. A process is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step Sk1203, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sk1203, the process advances to step Sk1204.

In step Sk1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the game has won a jackpot, and if none of the flags are ON, it is determined that the game has not won a jackpot. In step Sk1204, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sk1204: NO), the process advances to step Sk1205.

In step Sk1205, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sk1205 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sk1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1206, and it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. If it is determined in step Sk1206 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sk1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1207, and the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sk1207, the process advances to step Sk1208. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1206 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is less than or equal to 0 (Sk1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1208 without executing step Sk1207.

In step Sk1208, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sk1208, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sk1208: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1209, and the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100). It is determined whether the number of games played is before the number of games played (=within the guaranteed number of games played). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. Since the guaranteed number of games counter PNC indicates the number of remaining guaranteed number of games, by determining whether PNC>0, the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode can be determined. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of games has yet to reach the guaranteed number of games.

In step Sk1209, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sk1209: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sk1210, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sk1210, the process advances to step Sk1211.

In step Sk1211, a low-frequency support command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. After executing step Sk1211, this variation end processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1205 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sk1205: NO), this fluctuation end process is ended.

In step Sk1204, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is a jackpot (Sk1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1212, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. do. After executing step Sk1212, this variation end processing is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 587: Sk0509).

FIG. 595 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sk1301, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big prize opening opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sk1301, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (Sk1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1302, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing processing period starts, which is a period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. , it is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sk1302 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sk1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1303, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sk1303 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sk1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1304, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sk1304, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sk1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1305. On the other hand, in step Sk1304, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sk1304: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sk1305, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1306. In step Sk1306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sk1307.

In step Sk1307, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in this embodiment, conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions"), This is a program in which conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the opening/closing execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

For example, the closing conditions are as follows.
- The elapsed time after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sk1307, the process proceeds to step Sk1308 described above.

In step Sk1308, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, an opening time of the same constant length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. Note that the third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sk1308, the process advances to step Sk1309.

In step Sk1309, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing processing period of the big prize opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sk1309, the process advances to step Sk1310 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sk1303 that the opening period flag is ON (Sk1303: YES), the process advances to step Sk1311.

In step Sk1311, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sk1311 that the opening period has ended (Sk1311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1312 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sk1313.

In step Sk1313, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sk1313, the process advances to step Sk1314.

In step Sk1314, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sk1315, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 587: Step Sk0505) of the normal process. After executing step Sk1315, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sk1302, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sk1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1316, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sk1316, the process advances to step Sk1317.

In step Sk1317, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". do. In step Sk1317, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sk1317: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1318. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1317 that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sk1317: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as is.

In step Sk1318, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step Sk1319.

In step Sk1319, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sk1319, the process advances to step Sk1320.

In step Sk1320, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sk1320, the process advances to step Sk1321.

In step Sk1321, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sk1321, the process advances to step Sk1322.

In step Sk1322, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sk1301, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sk1301: YES), the process advances to step Sk1323.

In step Sk1323, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sk1320), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sk1320 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sk1323: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1324.

In step Sk1324, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sk1325, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sk1325, the process proceeds to step Sk1326 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sk1326, the process advances to step Sk1327.

In step Sk1327, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". In step Sk1327, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sk1327: YES), the process advances to step Sk1328.

In step Sk1328, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol variation (gaming round) ends. This is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sk1328 in the normal process (FIG. 587). After executing step Sk1328, the present game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sk1327, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sk1327: NO), the main game round control process is ended. Further, in step Sk1323, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sk1323: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 595: Sk1316) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sk1401, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step Sk1401 that the door 36b is not open (Sk1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1402.

In step Sk1402, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sk1402 that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (Sk1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1403.

In step Sk1403, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1404.

In step Sk1404, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 587: Step Sk0505) of the normal processing. After executing step Sk1404, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sk1402, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sk1402: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sk1403 and step Sk1404.

If it is determined in step Sk1401 that the door 36b is open (Sk1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1405.

In step Sk1405, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sk1405 that the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied (Sk1405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1406.

In step Sk1406, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sk1407.

In step Sk1407, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 587: Step Sk0505) of the normal processing. After executing step Sk1407, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sk1405, if it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sk1405: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sk1406 and step Sk1407.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 595: Sk1325).

FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sk1501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sk1501, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sk1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1502, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to ON (Sk1501: YES). Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sk1502, the process advances to step Sk1503.

In step Sk1503, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sk1504, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. After that, the process advances to step Sk1505.

In step Sk1505, 100 is set in a guaranteed game count counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1506.

In step Sk1506, a high probability mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sk1511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1501 that the 16R regular jackpot flag and the 8R regular jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are not ON (Sk1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1507, and among the 16R regular jackpot flag and 8R regular jackpot flag in the RAM 64, Turn off the flag that is ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1508.

In step Sk1508, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sk1509, where a guaranteed number of games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to 100. After that, the process advances to step Sk1510.

In step Sk1510, a low probability mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sk1511.

In step Sk1511, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a command to be transmitted. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 587: Sk0510).

FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sk1601, it is determined whether or not it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sk1601 that the supported flag is not ON (Sk1601: NO), the process advances to step Sk1602.

In step Sk1602, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Sk1602 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sk1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1603.

In step Sk1603, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sk1603, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sk1603: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sk1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1604.

In step Sk1604, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sk1604, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sk1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1605, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1604 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sk1604: NO), the process advances to step Sk1606.

In step Sk1606, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sk1606, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sk1606: NO), the electronic award support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sk1606: YES), the process advances to step Sk1607.

In step Sk1607, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sk1608, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sk1607 (Sk1607: NO) and if it is in the high-frequency support mode in step Sk1608 (Sk1608: YES), the process advances to step Sk1609, where an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sk1610.

In step Sk1610, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sk1609 is a support win. In step Sk1610, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sk1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1611, where the support win flag is turned on and set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sk1610, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sk1610: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step Sk1611.

If it is determined in step Sk1607 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Sk1607: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sk1608 (Sk1608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1612, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1613.

In step Sk1613, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sk1612 is a support win. In step Sk1613, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sk1613: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1613 that the support has been won (Sk1613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1614, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sk1602 that the support winning flag is ON (Sk1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1615, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sk1615, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sk1615: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the general figure unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sk1615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1616.

In step Sk1616, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk1617, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sk1601, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sk1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1618, and an electric utility opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The electric utility opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 598: Sk1618) of the electric utility support process.

FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sk1701, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sk1701: YES), the process advances to step Sk1702.

In step Sk1702, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sk1702, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sk1702: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sk1702, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sk1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1703, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sk1703, the process advances to step Sk1704.

In step Sk1704, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sk1705, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sk1705, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sk1705: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sk1705: YES), the process advances to step Sk1706 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sk1701, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sk1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1707, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sk1707, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sk1707: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sk1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1708, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1709.

In step Sk1709, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sk1709: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1710, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sk1710 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sk1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1711, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1709 that the opening/closing execution mode is selected (Sk1709: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not selected in step Sk1710 (Sk1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1712, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<K7>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 600 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sk1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are read out sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sk1801, the process advances to step Sk1802.

In step Sk1802, command corresponding processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the received command. Details of the command corresponding processing will be described later. After executing step Sk1802, the process advances to step Sk1803.

In step Sk1803, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY is updated. The setting suggestion random number counter CY is a counter that generates a random number used when determining whether or not to perform a setting suggestion effect. Specifically, in step Sk1803, 1 is added to the setting suggestion random number counter CY, and when the setting suggestion random number counter CY reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY is stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1804.

In step Sk1804, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in the command corresponding process of step Sk1802. After executing step Sk1804, the process advances to step Sk1805.

In step Sk1805, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the command corresponding process of step Sk1802. After executing step Sk1805, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command compatible processing>
Next, command corresponding processing will be explained. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 600: Sk1802).

FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing command corresponding processing. As described above, in the command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described below.

In step Sk1901, it is determined whether a setting information command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sk1901, if it is determined that the setting information command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1901: YES), the process advances to step Sk1902, and the setting information of the lottery setting included in the setting information command received this time is It is read out and stored in the sound/light side RAM 94. After executing step Sk1902, the process advances to step Sk1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1901 that the setting information command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1903 without executing step Sk1902.

In step Sk1903, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sk1903 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1904, and processing corresponding to the pending command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sk1904, the process advances to step Sk1905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1903 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1905 without executing step Sk1904.

In step Sk1905, it is determined whether a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sk1905 that a high-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1905: YES), the process advances to step Sk1906 and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. The sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 (see FIG. 576) to specify whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The flags are stored in the set various flag storage areas 94e. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1909.

If it is determined in step Sk1905 that the high-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1907, where it is determined whether or not the low-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. judge. If it is determined in step Sk1907 that a low-frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1907: YES), the process advances to step Sk1908, and the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1909. If it is determined in step Sk1907 that the low frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1907: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sk1909.

In step Sk1909, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sk1909 that the variation command and type command have been received (Sk1909: YES), the process advances to step Sk1910. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1909 that the variation command and type command have not been received (Sk1909: NO), the process advances to step S and step Sk1911.

In step Sk1910, a game run performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the jackpot performance, stop symbols, variable display patterns, etc. to be executed in the current game round are set. Details of the game performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sk1910, the process advances to step Sk1911.

In step Sk1911, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sk1911, if it is determined that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1911: YES), the process advances to step Sk1912 and an opening effect setting process is executed. In the opening performance setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening performance corresponding to the type of jackpot are set, and information corresponding to the content of the performance is set. An opening presentation command is sent to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1913. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1911 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1913 without executing step Sk1912.

In step Sk1913, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step Sk1913 that an ending command has been received (Sk1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1914, and ending effect setting processing is executed. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and the content of the ending effect is set in accordance with the content of the effect. An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk1915. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1913 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1913: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1915 without executing step Sk1914.

In step Sk1915, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, the content of presentation corresponding to the open command and the content of presentation corresponding to the closing command are set. Furthermore, when the performance operation button 24 is pressed, a performance operation command for recognizing that the performance operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command corresponding process subroutine (Sk1904 in FIG. 601).

FIG. 602 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling process will be described below.

In step Sk2001, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, A process is executed to enable the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of pending information. Details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sk2001 will be described later. Below, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as the "first reservation number", and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first reservation number". The number is also called the "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also called the "total pending number". After executing step Sk2001, the process advances to step Sk2002.

In step Sk2002, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sk2001 and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 are determined. Based on the number, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled. After executing step Sk2002, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 602: Sk2001) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing update processing when a ball enters the ball. In step Sk2101, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Sk2101, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 (Sk2101: YES), the process advances to step Sk2102 and the sound is emitted. Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the audio-optical side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step Sk2102, the process advances to step Sk2104.

In step Sk2101, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sk2101: NO), that is, the pending command is If it is determined that the transmission was based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sk2103, and updates the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Sk2103, the process advances to step Sk2104.

The reason why the processes of step Sk2102 and step Sk2103 are performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 stores the hold information. is stored and held, whereas the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of pending information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step Sk2104, a process for updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of pending balls counter area indicates the sum of the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sk2104, the update process at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game run performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 601: Sk1910) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing the game rendition setting process. As mentioned above, the game run performance setting process is a process that is executed when it is determined that a variation command and a type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the performance that will be executed in the current game cycle. It is. Hereinafter, specific processing of the game rendition setting processing will be explained.

In step Sk2201, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is grasped. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk2202.

In step Sk2202, a performance pattern setting process is executed at the time of jackpot, reach time, etc. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sk2202, the process advances to step Sk2203.

In step Sk2203, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the symbol will be placed on the active line L (see Figure 568). Information corresponding to a stopping result in which a combination of the same symbols is established is set as information on the current stopping symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Sk2203, the process advances to step Sk2204.

In step Sk2204, processing is executed to determine the variable display pattern for the current game round. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols specified in the above step Sk2205 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk2205.

In step Sk2205, information on the performance pattern set in step Sk2202, the stop symbol set in step Sk2203, and the variable display pattern set in step Sk2204 in the current game round is set in the performance command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk2206, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sk2206, the process proceeds to step Sk2207, where update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sk2207, the present game performance setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 604: Sk2202) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 605 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sk2301, it is determined whether or not a probability variable jackpot has been won in the winning lottery of the current game round. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the information on the type of jackpot that were grasped in step Sk2201 of FIG. 604. In step Sk2301, an affirmative determination is made if a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot is won. In step Sk2301, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot has been won in the winning lottery of the current game round (Sk2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2302.

In step Sk2302, a production pattern setting process for a variable jackpot is executed. The performance pattern setting process for a probability-variable jackpot is a process for setting to execute a production pattern for a production that indicates a probability-variable jackpot in the current game round. The performance pattern setting process for the probability-variable jackpot will be described later. After executing step Sk2302, the main performance pattern setting process ends.

In step Sk2301, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery of the current game round (Sk2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2303.

In step Sk2303, it is determined whether or not a normal jackpot has been won in the winning lottery of the current game round. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the information on the type of jackpot that were grasped in step Sk2201 of FIG. 604. In step Sk2303, an affirmative determination is made if the 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot is won. In step Sk2303, if it is determined that the normal jackpot has been won in the winning lottery of the current game round (Sk2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2304.

In step Sk2304, a normal jackpot performance pattern setting process is executed. The performance pattern setting process for normal jackpot is a process of setting to execute a performance pattern for a performance indicating that the player has won a normal jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round. The normal jackpot performance pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sk2304, the main performance pattern setting process ends.

In step Sk2303, if it is determined that the normal jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery of the current game round (Sk2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2305.

In step Sk2305, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game round. This determination is made using the information regarding the presence or absence of reach occurrence, which was grasped in step Sk2201 of FIG. 604. In step Sk2305, if it is determined that a reach has occurred in the current game round (Sk2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2306.

In step Sk2306, a ready-to-win performance pattern setting process is executed. The performance pattern for reach is a process of setting to execute performance patterns for performances that indicate various types of reach in the current game round. The reach effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sk2306, this effect pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sk2305, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred in the current game round (Sk2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2307 and executes a losing performance pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for losing is a process for setting the effect to be executed when none of the probability variable jackpot winning, the normal jackpot winning, and the reach occurrence occur. The production pattern setting process for when the game is off will be described later. After executing step Sk2307, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Reach performance pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process for reach time will be explained. The reach effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2306) of the effect pattern setting process. The ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process determines the type of reach and sets a performance pattern according to the type of reach. Hereinafter, this ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 606 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for reach time. In step Sk2401, the reach distribution table for when the reach is off is referred to. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores a reach distribution table for when the reach is off and a reach distribution table for the jackpot in the reach distribution table storage area 93c (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. ing.

FIG. 607 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of reach distribution tables. FIG. 607(a) shows a reach distribution table for a miss-reach time, and FIG. 607(b) shows a reach-for-reach distribution table for a jackpot. In each reach distribution table, normal reach, super reach, and special reach are set as distribution results.

As shown in FIG. 607(a), the reach distribution table for out-of-reach times shows the correspondence between the variation time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As explained earlier, the variation time at the time of a missed reach (when there is no big hit in the winning lottery and a reach occurs) set by the variation time setting process (FIG. 593) executed by the main side MPU 62 is as follows. It depends on the type of reach. The correspondence between this variation time and the type of reach is stored in the reach distribution table for when the reach is off. Specifically, a variation time of 30 seconds corresponds to normal reach, a variation time of 60 seconds corresponds to super reach, and a variation time of 120 seconds corresponds to special reach. Compatible.

As shown in FIG. 607(b), the reach distribution table for the jackpot shows the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As explained earlier, the variable time at the time of a jackpot (when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery) set by the variable time setting process (FIG. 593) executed by the main MPU 62 is based on the type of reach. It has become. The correspondence between this variable time and the type of reach is stored in the reach distribution table for jackpots. Specifically, when the variation time is 35 seconds, it corresponds to normal reach, when the variation time is 65 seconds, it corresponds to super reach, and when the variation time is 125 seconds, it corresponds to special reach. Compatible.

In step Sk2401 of FIG. 606, the reach distribution table for the off-reach time shown in FIG. 607(a) is read out from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2403, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for missed reach in step Sk2401, it is determined whether the fluctuation time information grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) corresponds to normal reach. .

In step Sk2403, if it is determined that normal reach is supported (Sk2403: YES), the process advances to step Sk2404.

In step Sk2404, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. The determination flag after the second time is a flag that is turned ON to indicate that the symbols on the symbol display device 41 have changed for the second time or later since the Pachinko machine 10 is started, and is turned OFF when the Pachinko machine 10 is started. It has been initialized. The second and subsequent determination flags are stored in a second and subsequent determination flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. In step Sk2404, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2404: YES), the process advances to step Sk2405, and the first fluctuation The information that the display mode of is normal reach is stored. Specifically, the first variation normal reach flag stored in the first variation normal reach flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on.

After executing step Sk2405, the process advances to step Sk2406, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2406, the process advances to step Sk2407.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2404 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2407 without executing steps Sk2405 and Sk2406.

In step Sk2407, the effect pattern table for normal reach stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is determined. Get the performance pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk2408, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2407 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sk2408, the present ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2403 that normal reach is not supported (Sk2403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2409, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for off-reach in step Sk2401, step Sk2201 (Fig. 604), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time information grasped by step 604) corresponds to super reach.

In step Sk2409, if it is determined that super reach is supported (Sk2409: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2410.

In step Sk2410, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2410, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is determined that this is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2410: YES), the process advances to step Sk2411, and the first fluctuation The information that the display mode of is super reach is stored. Specifically, the first variation super reach flag stored in the first variation super reach flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk2411, the process proceeds to step Sk2412, and the determination flag is turned ON from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2412, the process advances to step Sk2413.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2410 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2410: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2413 without executing step Sk2411 and step Sk2412.

In step Sk2413, the performance pattern table for super le reach stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is used. Get the corresponding performance pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk2408 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2413 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In step Sk2409, if it is determined that super reach is not supported (Sk2409: NO), the process advances to step Sk2414. If it is determined in step Sk2409 that super reach is not supported, this means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for missed reach in step Sk2401 is special reach, and in this case, step Proceed to Sk2414.

In step Sk2414, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2414, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2414: YES), the process advances to step Sk2415, and the first fluctuation is determined to be OFF. The information that the display mode of is special reach is stored. Specifically, the first variation special reach flag stored in the first variation special reach flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk2415, the process proceeds to step Sk2416, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2416, the process advances to step Sk2417.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2414 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2414: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2417 without executing steps Sk2415 and Sk2416.

In step Sk2417, the performance pattern table for special reach stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the correspondence is made to the variable time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604). Obtain the performance pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk2408 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2417 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In addition, the first fluctuation normal reach flag, the first fluctuation super reach flag, and the first fluctuation special that can be turned ON by the performance pattern setting process for this reach, the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process, and the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process described later. Each value of the reach flag disappears and is reset to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

<Normal jackpot production pattern setting process>
Next, the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process will be explained. The normal jackpot effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 605: Sk2304). The performance pattern setting process for normal jackpots determines the type of reach in the same way as the performance pattern setting process for ready-to-win, and sets the performance pattern for normal jackpots according to the type of reach. Hereinafter, this normal jackpot performance pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 608 is a flowchart showing the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process. In step Sk2501, the ready-to-win distribution table (FIG. 607(b)) is read out from the ready-to-win distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2503, and as a result of referring to the reach allocation table for jackpot in step Sk2501, it is determined whether the information on the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) corresponds to normal reach.

In step Sk2503, if it is determined that normal reach is supported (Sk2503: YES), the process advances to step Sk2504.

In step Sk2504, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2504, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time onwards, that is, it is determined that this is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2504: YES), the process advances to step Sk2505, and the first fluctuation Turn on the normal reach flag. After executing step Sk2505, the process advances to step Sk2506, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2506, the process advances to step Sk2507.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2504 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2507 without executing steps Sk2505 and Sk2506.

In step Sk2507, the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to the performance pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93. Obtain the performance pattern corresponding to. The performance pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot is a table with a performance pattern that suggests that a normal reach has occurred and a normal jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2507, the process advances to step Sk2508.

In step Sk2508, the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2507 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After execution of step Sk2508, this normal jackpot performance pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2503 that normal reach is not supported (Sk2503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2509, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for jackpot in step Sk2501, step Sk2201 (Fig. 604 ) determines whether or not the fluctuation time information grasped by the method corresponds to super reach.

In step Sk2509, if it is determined that super reach is supported (Sk2509: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2510.

In step Sk2510, it is determined whether or not the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2510, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is determined that this is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2510: YES), the process advances to step Sk2511, and the first fluctuation Turn on the super reach flag. After executing step Sk2511, the process proceeds to step Sk2512, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2512, the process advances to step Sk2513.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2510 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2510: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2513 without executing step Sk2511 and step Sk2512.

In step Sk2513, the performance pattern table for super le reach/normal jackpot stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the performance pattern table grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to. To obtain a performance pattern corresponding to variable time. The performance pattern table for super reach/normal jackpot is a table of performance patterns that suggests that a super reach has occurred and a normal jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2513, the process proceeds to step Sk2508 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2513 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In step Sk2509, if it is determined that super reach is not supported (Sk2509: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2514. In step Sk2509, if it is determined that super reach is not supported, it means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for jackpot in step Sk2501 is special reach, and in this case, step Sk2514 Proceed to.

In step Sk2514, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2514, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time onward, that is, it is determined that this is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2514: YES), the process advances to step Sk2515, and the first fluctuation is determined to be OFF. Turn on the special reach flag. After executing step Sk2515, the process advances to step Sk2516, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2516, the process advances to step Sk2517.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2514 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2514: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2517 without executing step Sk2515 and step Sk2516.

In step Sk2517, the variation grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to the performance pattern table for special reach/normal jackpot stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93. To obtain a performance pattern corresponding to time. The performance pattern table for special reach/normal jackpot is a table with a performance pattern that suggests that a special reach has occurred and a normal jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2517, the process proceeds to step Sk2508 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2517 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

<Production pattern setting process for guaranteed strange jackpot>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the probability-variable jackpot will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the probability variable jackpot is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2302) of the performance pattern setting process. The performance pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot determines the type of reach, similar to the performance pattern setting process for a ready-to-win situation, and sets a performance pattern for a probability variable jackpot according to the type of reach. Hereinafter, this performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot will be described in detail.

FIG. 609 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for a probability variable jackpot. In step Sk2601, the ready-to-win distribution table (FIG. 607(b)) is read out from the ready-to-win distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2603, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for the jackpot in step Sk2601, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time information grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) corresponds to normal reach.

In step Sk2603, if it is determined that normal reach is supported (Sk2603: YES), the process advances to step Sk2604.

In step Sk2604, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2604, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time onwards, that is, it is determined that this is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2604: YES), the process advances to step Sk2605, and the first fluctuation Turn on the normal reach flag. After executing step Sk2605, the process advances to step Sk2606, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2606, the process advances to step Sk2607.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2604 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2607 without executing steps Sk2605 and Sk2606.

In step Sk2607, the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to the production pattern table for normal reach/probable variable jackpot stored in the production pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93. Obtain the performance pattern corresponding to. The performance pattern table for normal reach/probability variable jackpot is a table of performance patterns that suggests that a normal reach has occurred and a probability variable jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2607, the process advances to step Sk2608.

In step Sk2608, the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2607 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sk2608, the production pattern setting process for an extremely likely jackpot is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2603 that normal reach is not supported (Sk2603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2609, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for jackpot in step Sk2601, step Sk2201 (Fig. 604 ) determines whether or not the fluctuation time information grasped by the method corresponds to super reach.

In step Sk2609, if it is determined that super reach is supported (Sk2609: YES), the process advances to step Sk2610.

In step Sk2610, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2610, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF from the second time onward, that is, it is determined that this is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2610: YES), the process advances to step Sk2611, and the first fluctuation Turn on the super reach flag. After executing step Sk2611, the process proceeds to step Sk2612, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2612, the process advances to step Sk2613.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2610 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2613 without executing steps Sk2611 and Sk2612.

In step Sk2613, the performance pattern table for super reach/probability variable jackpot stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuations grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) are referred to. To obtain a performance pattern corresponding to time. The performance pattern table for super reach/probability variable jackpot is a table of performance patterns that suggests that a super reach has occurred and a probability variable jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2613, the process proceeds to step Sk2608 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2613 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In step Sk2609, if it is determined that super reach is not supported (Sk2609: NO), the process advances to step Sk2614. If it is determined in step Sk2609 that super reach is not supported, this means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for jackpot in step Sk2601 is special reach, and in this case, step Sk2614 Proceed to.

In step Sk2614, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2614, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is determined that this is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2614: YES), the process advances to step Sk2615, and the first fluctuation Turn on the special reach flag. After executing step Sk2615, the process proceeds to step Sk2616, and the determination flag is turned ON from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2616, the process advances to step Sk2617.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2614 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2614: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2617 without executing steps Sk2615 and Sk2616.

In step Sk2617, the performance pattern table for special reach/probability variable jackpot stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuations grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) are referred to. To obtain a performance pattern corresponding to time. The performance pattern table for special reach/probability variable jackpot is a table with a production pattern that suggests that a special reach has occurred and a probability variable jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2617, the process proceeds to step Sk2608 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2617 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

<Production pattern setting process for when it is off>
Next, a description will be given of the production pattern setting process for when the game is off. The performance pattern setting process for when the performance is off is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2307) of the performance pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the production pattern setting process for when the game is off will be described in detail.

FIG. 610 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for when the game is missed. In step Sk2701, it is determined whether the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk2701, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is the first symbol fluctuation after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2701: YES), the process advances to step Sk2702, and the first fluctuation The information that the display mode of is incorrect is stored. Specifically, the first fluctuation failure flag stored in the first fluctuation failure storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk2702, the process proceeds to step Sk2703, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk2703, the process advances to step Sk2704.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2701 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2704 without executing steps Sk2702 and Sk2703.

In step Sk2704, with reference to the performance pattern table for when the performance is off stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM 93, the performance pattern table corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is determined. Get the performance pattern. The performance for when you miss is a performance that suggests that you did not win the jackpot and the reach did not occur. Specifically, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 41 are This is a production in which each effect is different on the effective line L. After executing step Sk2704, the process proceeds to step Sk2705, where the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2704 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sk2705, the performance pattern setting process for when the game is out of stock is ended.

Note that the value of the initial fluctuation failure flag that can be turned ON in the failure performance pattern setting process disappears and is reset to OFF when the Pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be explained. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of command corresponding processing (FIG. 601: Sk1914). The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 611 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step Sk2801, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk2802.

In step Sk2802, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is a special reach. Specifically, the first variable special that can be turned ON in the production pattern setting process for reach time (Figure 606), the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot (Figure 608), and the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot (Figure 609). By determining whether the reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is a special reach. In step Sk2802, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial variation is not a special reach (step Sk2802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2803.

In step Sk2803, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. Specifically, the first variable super that can be turned ON in the production pattern setting process for reach (Figure 606), the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot (Figure 608), and the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot (Figure 609). By determining whether the reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. In step Sk2803, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not super reach (step Sk2803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2804.

In step Sk2804, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach. Specifically, the initial variation normal reach that can be turned ON in the production pattern setting process for reach (Figure 606), the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot (Figure 608), and the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot (Figure 609). By determining whether the flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach. In step Sk2804, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial variation is not normal reach (step Sk2804: NO), the process advances to step Sk2805.

In step Sk2805, a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first failure is specified from a plurality of types of setting suggestion propriety table groups stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. The setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d stores in advance a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time failure, a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first normal reach, and a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time super reach. ing. In step Sk2805, a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first failure is specified from these three types of setting suggestion propriety table groups.

FIG. 612 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time failure. As shown in FIG. 612, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time failure is composed of six setting suggestion propriety tables associated with each type of lottery setting. The type of lottery settings is a classification of the types of lottery settings, and in this embodiment, "Lottery settings 1", "Lottery settings 2", "Lottery settings 3", "Lottery settings 4", and "Lottery settings 5". , "Lottery setting 6". That is, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time failure includes a setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 1", a setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 2", and a setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 3". A table, a setting suggestion propriety table for "lottery setting 4", a setting suggestion propriety table for "lottery setting 5", and a setting suggestion propriety table for "lottery setting 6" are provided.

The setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 1" contains 6048 values from 0 to 6047 as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion effect among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestion from 0 to 60479. is set. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 6048 values from 0 to 6047 (6048 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/10.

The setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 2" includes 7560 values from 0 to 7559 as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion effect among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestions from 0 to 60479. is set. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 7560 values from 0 to 7559 (7560 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/8.

The setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 3" includes 12096 values from 0 to 12095 as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion effect among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestions from 0 to 60479. is set. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 12096 values from 0 to 12095 (12096 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/5.

The setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 4" includes 15120 values from 0 to 15119 as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion performance among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestion from 0 to 60479. is set. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 15120 values from 0 to 15119 (15120 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/4.

The setting suggestion propriety table for “Lottery Setting 5” includes 20160 values from 0 to 20159 as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion performance among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestion from 0 to 60479. is set. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 20160 values from 0 to 20159 (20160 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/3.

The setting suggestion propriety table for "Lottery setting 6" includes 30240 values from 0 to 30239 as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion effect among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestion from 0 to 60479. is set. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 30240 values from 0 to 30239 (30240 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/2.

The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time loss configured as described above is used to realize the correspondence between each standard lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol as explained earlier using FIG. 579. This is a group of tables.

Returning to FIG. 611, in step Sk2805, after specifying the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first failure, the process proceeds to step Sk2806.

In step Sk2806, a setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group identified in step Sk2805, that is, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time failure. The setting information for the lottery setting is information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 in step Sk1902 of the command corresponding process (FIG. 601). For example, if the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is "6", a setting suggestion propriety table for "lottery setting 6" in which the value of the winning setting suggestion random number counter CY is "0 to 30239" is created. is specified. After executing step Sk2806, the process advances to step Sk2807.

In step Sk2807, the setting suggestion propriety table specified in step Sk2806 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2808, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk2807, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk2801 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion effect. .

In step Sk2808, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk2808: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2809, and the ending effect pattern with the setting suggestion picture PX added is applied during the current ending period. Set as a performance pattern to be executed. The ending performance pattern to which the setting suggestion picture PX is added is stored in advance in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93, and is read out from the performance pattern table storage area 93a for use.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2808 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is not supported (Sk2808: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2810, and the normal ending effect pattern without the setting suggestion effect is applied to the current ending. Set as a performance pattern to be executed during the period. The normal ending performance pattern is stored in advance in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93, and is read out from the performance pattern table storage area 93a for use. After executing step Sk2809 or step Sk2810, this ending effect setting process is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sk2801 to Sk2809, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the first time loss shown in FIG. It is possible to perform an effect in which a setting-suggesting pattern appears with a probability of appearance of the setting-suggesting pattern according to the lottery settings, which is determined from the correspondence relationship between times.

In step Sk2804, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk2804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2811.

In step Sk2811, a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first normal reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion propriety table groups stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 613 is an explanatory diagram showing a group of setting suggestion propriety tables for the first normal reach. Like the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time normal reach in FIG. 612, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time normal reach is composed of six setting suggestion propriety tables associated with each type of lottery setting. .

In the setting suggestion propriety table for each lottery setting, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY from 0 to 60479, values for winning to execute the setting suggestion performance and values for winning are recorded. In the setting suggestion correctness table for "Lottery setting 1", the winning probability is 1/9, and in the setting suggestion correctness table for "Lottery setting 2", the winning probability is 1/7, and in the setting suggestion correctness table for "Lottery setting 3", the winning probability is 1/7. The probability of winning is 1/4 in the setting suggestion correctness table for ``Lottery setting 4'', the winning probability is 1/3 in the setting suggestion correctness table for ``Lottery setting 5'', and the winning probability is 1/3 in the setting suggestion correctness table for ``Lottery setting 5''. In the suggestion validity table, the winning probability is 1/2, and in the setting suggestion validity table for "lottery setting 6", the winning probability is 1/1.

The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first normal reach configured as described above is based on the correspondence between each standard lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol for the first normal reach, which was explained using FIG. 580. This is a group of tables for realizing relationships.

Returning to FIG. 611, in step Sk2811, after specifying the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first normal reach, the process proceeds to step Sk2806 described earlier.

In step Sk2806 after executing step Sk2811, a setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group specified in step Sk2811, that is, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first normal reach. . After executing step Sk2806, the process advances to step Sk2807 and refers to the specified setting suggestion propriety table.

By executing the processes of steps Sk2801 to Sk2804, Sk2811, and Sk2806 to Sk2810, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, It is possible to perform an effect in which the setting suggestion symbol appears with the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol according to the lottery settings, which is determined from the correspondence relationship for the first normal reach time shown in 580. As a result, in each of lottery setting 1 to lottery setting 6, when the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol is higher than the appearance probability when the display mode of the initial variation is out of order. As a result, a setting-suggesting pattern can appear.

In step Sk2803, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk2803: YES), the process advances to step Sk2812.

In step Sk2812, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first super reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion propriety table groups stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 614 is an explanatory diagram showing a group of setting suggestion propriety tables for the first time super reach. Similar to the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time super reach in FIG. There is.

In the setting suggestion propriety table for each lottery setting, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY from 0 to 60479, values for winning to execute the setting suggestion performance and values for winning are recorded. The winning probability is 1/8 in the setting suggestion correctness table for "Lottery setting 1", the winning probability is 1/6 in the setting suggestion correctness table for "Lottery setting 2", and the winning probability is 1/6 in the setting suggestion correctness table for "Lottery setting 3". In the setting suggestion correctness table for ``Lottery setting 4'', the winning probability is 1/3, and in the setting suggestion correctness table for ``Lottery setting 4'', the winning probability is 1/2, and in the setting suggestion correctness table for ``Lottery setting 5'', the winning probability is 1/2. In the suggestion validity table, the winning probability is 1/1, and in the setting suggestion validity table for "lottery setting 6", the winning probability is 1/1.

The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time super reach configured as above is based on the appearance probability of each standard lottery setting and setting suggestion symbol for the first time super reach, which was explained using FIG. 581. This is a group of tables for realizing the correspondence relationship.

Returning to FIG. 611, in step Sk2812, after specifying the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time super reach, the process proceeds to step Sk2806 described earlier.

In step Sk2806 after executing step Sk2812, a setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group specified in step Sk2812, that is, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time super reach. do. After executing step Sk2806, the process advances to step Sk2807 and refers to the specified setting suggestion propriety table.

By executing the processes of steps Sk2801 to Sk2803, Sk2812, and Sk2806 to Sk2810, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, It is possible to perform an effect in which the setting suggestion symbol appears with the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol according to the lottery settings, which is determined from the correspondence relationship for the first super reach shown in 581. As a result, in each of lottery settings 1 to 5, when the initial variation display mode is super reach, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol is higher than when the initial variation display mode is normal reach. , a setting-suggesting picture can appear. Regarding lottery setting 6, the setting suggestion pattern can be made to appear with a probability of 1/1 (100% in percentage), which is the same as when the initial variation display mode is normal reach.

In step Sk2802, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach (step Sk2802: YES), the process advances to step Sk2813.

In step Sk2813, the ending performance pattern to which the setting suggestion picture PY with numbers is added is set as the performance pattern to be executed in the current ending period. In the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM 93, six types of ending performance patterns are stored in advance, each with a setting suggestion picture PY in which numbers from "1" to "6" are individually written. has been done. In step Sk2813, from these six types of ending effect patterns, an ending effect pattern to which a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is added is specified, and the specified ending effect pattern is used as the current ending effect pattern. Set as a performance pattern to be executed during the ending period. The setting information for the lottery setting is stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 in step Sk1902 of the command corresponding process (FIG. 601). For example, if the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is "6", the ending effect pattern (see Figure 582) with the setting suggestion pattern PY marked with "6" will be used during the current ending period. It is set as a performance pattern to be executed in. After executing step Sk2813, this ending effect setting process is ended.

By executing the processes of steps Sk2801, Sk2802, and Sk2813, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the setting information. A setting suggestion pattern PY with numbers written on it can be made to appear.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sk2901, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk2902.

In step Sk2902, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sk3001, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 617 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sk3101, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 616) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Sk3101), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them.

In step Sk3102, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sk3101) etc. . After that, the process advances to step Sk3103.

In step Sk3103, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sk3102), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk3104.

In step Sk3104, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sk3103), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk3105, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery mode is set to low by changing the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up (when the power is turned on). In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed. Then, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending performance that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting. An effect in which a suggestive pattern (treasure box pattern) PX appears is executed. Furthermore, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting is configured to change based on the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine 10. In summary, in the above ending performance, settings are suggested so that the appearance probability is based on the type of current lottery settings and the display mode of symbol fluctuations performed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine 10. The effect of the picture pattern PX is executed. Therefore, the player observes the symbol variations executed in the first game after starting up the pachinko machine 10, and first memorizes the display mode of the symbol variations. After that, when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and moves to the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion symbol PX, which is the symbol of a treasure chest, appears in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PX is estimated by observing whether or not the symbol PX for suggesting the setting is present, and based on the obtained probability of appearance and the previously memorized display mode of symbol fluctuations in the first game round, the current lottery setting is determined. It can be inferred that

When considering a comparative pachinko machine in which the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX is determined based only on the current lottery setting, according to the comparative example pachinko machine, setting suggestion depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. The probability of appearance of the pattern PX is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the appearance probability of setting suggestion symbols PX does not depend solely on the model of the pachinko machine, so the player can It is up to the player's skill to strongly feel that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX is random, and to take into consideration the display mode of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to accurately guess which lottery setting is currently set. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player needs to play the first game after starting the pachinko machine 10, so for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in the morning, When playing games, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the player can set the Since it is necessary to estimate the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX by observing whether or not the suggestion symbol PX appears, it is necessary to repeat the period in which the ending effect is performed, and it is necessary for the player to It is possible to actively encourage players to play the game repeatedly.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a miss, a normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach as display modes for symbol variations. The display modes of these symbol variations are arranged in this order from low to high expectations for a jackpot in the winning lottery. In addition, the higher the display mode of the symbol variation that is expected to result in a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round, the higher the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PX. When the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX is high, the setting suggestion symbol PX is more likely to appear than when the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX is low, so the expectation level for a jackpot in the winning lottery. When a display mode with high symbol fluctuation occurs, it becomes possible to estimate the lottery settings in a short period and with high accuracy. For this reason, from the perspective of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX, we want the player to have a display mode of symbol fluctuations that has a high expectation of a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round. It can give a sense of expectation.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and after turning on the power. In the first game round, by generating a reach with a high degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot in the winning lottery, it is possible to create with one's own hands a machine on which the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

In general pachinko machines, even if a super reach or special reach occurs in a game round, if a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery corresponding to the game round, the player will not feel a sense of expectation. It can be done, but after that it cannot provide any real value. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, although it is limited to the first game after starting the pachinko machine 10, when a super reach or special reach occurs, the setting for the ending performance after that It is possible to provide the player with the value of improving the probability of appearance of the suggestive pattern PX.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the total number of held game balls, which is the sum of the number of held game balls that entered the starting port 33 and the number of held game balls that entered the second starting port 34, is 0 (zero). In this case, the probability of winning a li-zhi in a game round is relatively high, so the probability that a li-zhi effect will be executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine 10 is relatively high. On the other hand, if the display mode of the symbol change executed in the first game after starting up the pachinko machine 10 is normal reach, super reach, or special reach, it is more likely to be used for setting suggestions than if it is a miss. Since the appearance probability of the pattern PX is high, the setting suggestion pattern PX can be generated with a relatively high probability.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine 10 is special reach, a number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is recorded. Since the ending effect is executed with the added setting suggestion symbol PY, setting information of the lottery settings can be known with high accuracy (actually, 100% accuracy). On the other hand, in the case of a super reach, a normal reach, or a loss, it is necessary to estimate the setting information of the lottery setting based on the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern (treasure box pattern) PX. Therefore, from this point of view as well, the player will feel a strong sense of randomness in guessing the winning probability setting, and the setting suggestion symbol PY with numbers corresponding to the winning probability setting will appear. You can enjoy both the anticipation of wanting it and the gameplay of estimating the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion pattern PX in a predetermined period. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<K8>> Modification of the 11th embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《K8-1》Variation 1:
<Summary of processing in modification 1>
An overview of the processing performed by the pachinko machine in Modification 1 will first be described while pointing out the differences from the eleventh embodiment. The hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the first modification is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, so the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the eleventh embodiment, and the outline of the process is Explain.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode, the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is A setting suggestion effect is executed in which a setting suggestion symbol appears with an appearance probability according to the type, but in particular, the appearance probability of the above setting suggestion effect for each type of lottery setting is determined after the pachinko machine 10 is started. It has a configuration that changes based on the display mode of symbol fluctuation executed in the first game round. On the other hand, in Modification 1, the setting suggestion symbol appears with an appearance probability based on the type of the pachinko machine's current lottery setting even during other presentation periods other than the ending period for executing the above ending presentation. The configuration is such that the setting suggestion effect can be executed, and the period during which this setting suggestion effect is executed is defined as the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine (hereinafter simply referred to as the "initial variation display mode"). The configuration is such that switching is performed based on the Specifically, if the display mode of the first variation is out of order, a setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, and if the display mode of the first variation is normal reach, a super reach has occurred in the game round. The configuration is such that a setting suggestion performance is executed in the performance indicating that the first fluctuation is super reach, and when the display mode of the first fluctuation is super reach, the setting suggestion performance is executed in the performance indicating that the normal reach has occurred in the game round. When the display mode is a special reach, a setting suggestion performance is executed in a performance indicating a loss in the game round (a so-called complete loss in which a jackpot is not won in a winning lottery and a reach does not occur).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 includes a group of setting suggestion propriety tables for the first time failure, and a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time normal reach. The configuration is such that a table group and a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time super reach are stored. In contrast, in Modification 1, only the setting suggestion propriety table group that is the same as the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first failure (see FIG. 612) is stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. The configuration is as follows. That is, in the first modification, a group of setting suggestion propriety tables for realizing the correspondence between each standard lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol described using FIG. 579 is stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d. remembered. During the period in which the above-described setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed using this setting suggestion propriety table group so that the appearance probability is based on the type of lottery setting.

With the above configuration, if the display mode of the initial variation is out of order, the appearance probability will be based on the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine during the ending period after the execution of the game round in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery. Then, the effect of the setting suggestion picture (treasure box picture) PX is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 579, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is "Lottery setting 1", the setting suggestion symbol PX is produced so that the appearance probability is 1/10, and the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 1". When the lottery setting is "Lottery setting 2", the setting suggestion symbol PX is performed so that the probability of appearance is 1/8, and when the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 3", 1 When the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 4", the setting suggestion symbol PX is executed so that the probability of appearance is 1/5. When the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 5", the setting suggestion symbol PX is performed so that the appearance probability is 1/3, and the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 5". 6'', the setting suggestion pattern PX is rendered so that the appearance probability is 1/2.

If the initial fluctuation display mode is Normal Reach, settings are suggested so that the appearance probability is based on the current lottery settings of the Pachinko machine during the presentation period that indicates the occurrence of Super Reach in subsequent game rounds. The effect of the picture pattern PX is executed. The appearance probability based on the lottery settings is the same as the appearance probability based on the lottery settings in the ending period described above.

If the initial fluctuation display mode is Super Reach, settings are suggested so that the appearance probability is based on the current lottery settings of the Pachinko machine during the presentation period that indicates that Normal Reach has occurred in subsequent game rounds. The effect of the picture pattern PX is executed. The appearance probability based on the lottery settings is the same as the appearance probability based on the lottery settings in the ending period described above.

If the display mode of the initial fluctuation is Special Reach, a setting suggestion is made so that the appearance probability is based on the current lottery settings of the Pachinko machine during the presentation period that indicates a loss in subsequent game rounds. The presentation of the pattern PX is executed. The appearance probability based on the lottery settings is the same as the appearance probability based on the lottery settings in the ending period described above.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described process in the pachinko machine of modification 1 will be described. The specific control differs from the specific control in the eleventh embodiment in the processing shown in FIGS. Various processes executed by the MPU 62, other processes executed by the audio emission control device 90, and various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Reach performance pattern setting process>
The reach effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2306) of the effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, this ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 618 is a flowchart illustrating the ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process in Modification 1. In this reach effect pattern setting process, steps Sk3201 to Sk3206, steps Sk3208 to Sk3212, and steps Sk3214 to Sk3217 are steps Sk2401 to Sk2406 and steps of the reach effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the 11th embodiment. This is the same as steps Sk2408 to Sk2412 and steps Sk2414 to Sk2417. In the ready-to-win performance pattern setting process in Modification 1, only step Sk3207 and step Sk3213 are different from the ready-to-win performance pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment.

In step Sk2407 of the performance pattern setting process for reach time (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment, the performance pattern corresponding to the variable time is acquired with reference to the performance pattern table for normal reach time. On the other hand, in step Sk3207 of the production pattern setting process for ready-to-reach in the first modification, a subroutine normal ready-to-reach production pattern table reference process is executed. The normal reach performance pattern table reference processing will be described later.

In step Sk2413 of the performance pattern setting process for reach time (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment, the performance pattern corresponding to the variable time is acquired with reference to the performance pattern table for super reach time. On the other hand, in step Sk3213 of the performance pattern setting process for ready-to-reach in Modification 1, a process for referring to the performance pattern table for super ready-to-reach, which is a subroutine, is executed. The performance pattern table reference process for super reach will be described later.

After executing step Sk3207, step Sk3213, or step Sk3217, the process advances to step S3208. After executing step Sk3208, the actual ready-to-reach production pattern setting process is completed.

<Processing to refer to the production pattern table for normal reach>
Next, the normal reach performance pattern table reference processing will be described. The normal reach performance pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 618: Sk3207) of the reach performance pattern setting process. The normal reach performance pattern table reference process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 619 is a flowchart showing the normal reach performance pattern table reference process. In step Sk3301, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk3302.

In step Sk3302, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. Specifically, it is turned ON in the reach performance pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 621 described later), and the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether or not the obtained initial fluctuation super reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach.

In step Sk3302, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3303.

In step Sk3303, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. The setting information for the lottery setting is information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 in step Sk1902 of the command corresponding process (FIG. 601). For example, when the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is "6", the value of the winning setting suggestion random number counter CY is "0 to 30239" from the setting suggestion propriety table group shown in FIG. 612. A setting suggestion propriety table for “lottery setting 6” is specified. After executing step Sk3302, the process advances to step Sk3304.

In step Sk3304, the setting suggestion propriety table identified in step Sk3303 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3305, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk3304, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3301 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance. .

In step Sk3305, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk3305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3306, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal reach to which the setting suggestion pattern PX is added. After the execution of step Sk3306, the actual ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sk3305 that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk3305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3307, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the variable time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal reach, which is available in the table. After executing step Sk3307, this normal reach effect pattern table reference process is ended.

On the other hand, even when it is determined in step Sk3302 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not super reach (step Sk3302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3307.

By executing the above-mentioned reach effect pattern setting process and normal reach effect pattern table reference process, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach, it is possible to avoid winning the jackpot in the game after the first time. When a normal reach occurs, in the performance suggesting that the normal reach has occurred, a setting suggestion performance can be executed with an appearance probability according to the lottery setting determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579.

<Processing to refer to the production pattern table for super reach>
Next, the super reach effect pattern table reference process will be explained. The super reach effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 618: Sk3213) of the reach effect pattern setting process. The super reach effect pattern table reference process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the super reach performance pattern table reference process. In step Sk3401, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk3402.

In step Sk3402, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach. Specifically, it is turned ON in the reach performance pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 621 described later), and the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether the obtained initial fluctuation normal reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach.

In step Sk3402, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk3402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3403.

In step Sk3403, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3404, the setting suggestion propriety table identified in step Sk3403 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3405, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk3404, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3401 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance. . Step Sk3403 to Step Sk3405 are the same process as Step Sk3303 to Step Sk3305 of the normal reach effect pattern table reference process (FIG. 619).

If it is determined in step Sk3405 that the setting suggestion performance corresponds to the winning (Sk3405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3406, where the performance pattern table is stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM 93. The effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the effect pattern table for super reach to which the setting suggestion pattern PX is added. After executing step Sk3406, the present ready-to-reach production pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sk3405 that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk3405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3407, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal super reach, which is currently available. After executing step Sk3407, this super reach effect pattern table reference process is ended.

On the other hand, also when it is determined in step Sk3402 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not normal reach (step Sk3402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3407.

By executing the above-mentioned reach effect pattern setting process and super reach effect pattern table reference process, when the initial variation display mode is normal reach, it is possible to avoid winning the jackpot in the game after the first time. When a super reach occurs, a setting suggestion effect can be executed with an appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579, in the effect suggesting that the super reach has occurred. .

<Normal jackpot production pattern setting process>
The normal jackpot effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 605: Sk2304). Hereinafter, this normal jackpot performance pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in Modification 1. In this normal jackpot performance pattern setting process, steps Sk3501 to Sk3506, steps Sk3508 to Sk3512, and steps Sk3514 to Sk3517 are steps Sk2501 to Sk2506 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 608) of the 11th embodiment, This is the same as steps Sk2508 to Sk2512 and steps Sk2514 to Sk2517. In the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in the first modification, only step Sk3507 and step Sk3513 are different from the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process of the 11th embodiment.

In step Sk2507 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 608) of the 11th embodiment, the performance pattern corresponding to the variable time is obtained with reference to the normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table. On the other hand, in step Sk3507 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in the first modification, a subroutine normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process is executed. The normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference processing will be described later.

In step Sk2513 of the normal jackpot effect pattern setting process (FIG. 608) of the 11th embodiment, the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time is obtained by referring to the super reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table. . On the other hand, in step Sk3513 of the normal jackpot effect pattern setting process in the first modification, a subroutine super reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table reference process is executed. The super reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table reference process will be described later.

Thereafter, after executing step Sk3507, step Sk3513, or step Sk3517, the process advances to step S3508. After execution of step Sk3508, this normal jackpot performance pattern setting process is ended.

<Normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference processing>
Next, normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference processing will be explained. The normal reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 621: Sk3507) of the normal jackpot effect pattern setting process. Below, the normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 622 is a flowchart showing normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference processing. In step Sk3601, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sk3602.

In step Sk3602, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is super reach. Specifically, the first time that can be turned ON in the reach performance pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 621), and the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether or not the fluctuation super reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach.

In step Sk3602, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk3602: YES), the process advances to step Sk3603.

In step Sk3603, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3604, the setting suggestion propriety table identified in step Sk3603 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3605, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk3604, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3601 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance. . Step Sk3603 to Step Sk3605 are the same processes as Step Sk3303 to Step Sk3305 of the normal reach performance pattern table reference process (FIG. 619).

In step Sk3605, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk3605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3606, where the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot to which setting suggestion symbols PX are added. In the normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table with the setting suggestion symbol PX added, the setting suggestion symbol PX appears in the part of the normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern that suggests that a normal reach has occurred. is configured to do so. After executing step Sk3606, the present ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sk3605 that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk3605: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3607, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot that is currently available. After executing step Sk3607, this normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process is ended.

On the other hand, even when it is determined in step Sk3602 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not super reach (step Sk3602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3607.

By executing the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process and the normal reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process described above, if the display mode of the initial variation is super reach, a normal jackpot will be generated in the game after the first time. When a player wins and a normal reach occurs, in the effect suggesting that the normal reach has occurred, a setting suggestion effect is executed with an appearance probability according to the lottery setting determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. be able to.

<Super reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process>
Next, the super reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process will be explained. The super reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 621: Sk3513) of the normal jackpot effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the super reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process will be described in detail.

FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing the super reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process. In step Sk3701, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk3702.

In step Sk3702, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach. Specifically, the first time that can be turned ON in the reach performance pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 621), and the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether the fluctuation normal reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach.

In step Sk3702, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach (step Sk3702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3703.

In step Sk3703, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3704, the setting suggestion propriety table specified in step Sk3703 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3705, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk3704, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3701 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance. . Step Sk3703 to Step Sk3705 are the same processes as Step Sk3303 to Step Sk3305 of the normal reach performance pattern table reference process (FIG. 619).

In step Sk3705, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk3705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3706, where the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for super reach/normal jackpot to which setting suggestion symbols PX are added. In the Super Reach/Normal Jackpot performance pattern table with setting-suggesting symbols PX added, the setting-suggesting symbols are used in the part of the Super Reach/Normal Jackpot performance pattern that suggests that a Super Reach has occurred. It is configured so that PX appears. After the execution of step Sk3706, the actual ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sk3705 that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk3705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3707, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal super reach/normal jackpot that is currently available. After executing step Sk3707, this super reach/normal jackpot performance pattern table reference process is ended.

On the other hand, even when it is determined in step Sk3702 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not normal reach (step Sk3702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3707.

By executing the normal jackpot effect pattern setting process and the super reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table reference process described above, if the initial fluctuation display mode is normal reach, a normal jackpot will be generated in the game after the first time. When a winner is won and a super reach occurs, in the production suggesting that the super reach has occurred, a setting suggestion production is performed with an appearance probability according to the lottery setting determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. can be executed.

<Production pattern setting process for guaranteed strange jackpot>
The performance pattern setting process for the probability variable jackpot is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2302) of the performance pattern setting process. Hereinafter, this performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot will be described in detail.

FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for the probability variable jackpot in Modification 1. In this performance pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot, steps Sk3801 to Sk3806, steps Sk3808 to Sk3812, and steps Sk3814 to Sk3817 are steps Sk2601 to Sk2606 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot of the 11th embodiment (FIG. 609), This is the same as steps Sk2608 to Sk2612 and steps Sk2614 to Sk2617. In the performance pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot in Modification 1, only step Sk3807 and step Sk3813 are different from the performance pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot of the 11th embodiment.

In step Sk2607 of the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot of the 11th embodiment (FIG. 609), the production pattern corresponding to the variable time is obtained by referring to the production pattern table for normal reach/probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, in step Sk3807 of the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot in the first modification, a subroutine normal reach/probability variable jackpot production pattern table reference process is executed. The normal reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference processing will be described later.

In step Sk2613 of the production pattern setting process for variable probability jackpots (FIG. 609) of the 11th embodiment, the production pattern corresponding to the variable time is obtained by referring to the production pattern table for super reach/probability variable jackpots. . On the other hand, in step Sk3813 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot in the first modification, a subroutine super reach/probability pattern table reference process for a variable probability jackpot is executed. The performance pattern table reference process for super reach/probable jackpot will be described later.

Thereafter, after executing step Sk3807, step Sk3813, or step Sk3817, the process advances to step S3508. After executing step Sk3808, the production pattern setting process for an extremely likely jackpot is ended.

<Processing to refer to the production pattern table for normal reach/probable jackpot>
Next, the normal reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference processing will be explained. The normal reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 624: Sk3807) of the performance pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot. Hereinafter, the normal reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing the normal reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference process. In step Sk3901, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk3902.

In step Sk3902, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is super reach. Specifically, the first variable super which can be turned ON in the performance pattern setting process for reach time (Fig. 618), the performance pattern setting process for normal jackpot (Fig. 621), and the performance pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot (Fig. 624) By determining whether the reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach.

In step Sk3902, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk3902: YES), the process advances to step Sk3903.

In step Sk3903, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3904, the setting suggestion propriety table identified in step Sk3903 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3905, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk3904, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3901 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance. . Step Sk3903 to Step Sk3905 are the same processes as Step Sk3303 to Step Sk3305 of the normal reach performance pattern table reference process (FIG. 619).

In step Sk3905, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk3905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3906, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal reach/probability variable jackpot to which setting suggestion symbols PX are added. In the production pattern table for normal reach/probability variable jackpot with the setting suggestion symbol PX added, the setting suggestion symbol PX appears in the part of the production pattern for normal reach/probability variation jackpot that suggests that a normal reach has occurred. is configured to do so. After executing step Sk3906, the actual ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sk3905 that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk3905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3907, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal reach/probability variable jackpot that is currently available. After executing step Sk3907, this normal reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference process is ended.

On the other hand, even when it is determined in step Sk3902 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not super reach (step Sk3902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3907.

By executing the above-mentioned performance pattern setting process for guaranteed variable jackpot and normal reach/probable variable jackpot performance pattern table reference process, if the display mode of the initial variation is super reach, a guaranteed variable jackpot will be created in the game after the first time. When a player wins and a normal reach occurs, in the effect suggesting that the normal reach has occurred, a setting suggestion effect is executed with an appearance probability according to the lottery setting determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. be able to.

<Reference processing of production pattern table for super reach/probable jackpot>
Next, the process of referring to the performance pattern table for super reach/probable jackpot will be explained. The super reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 624: Sk3813) of the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot. Hereinafter, the super reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference process will be described in detail.

FIG. 626 is a flowchart showing the super reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference process. In step Sk4001, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk4002.

In step Sk4002, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach. Specifically, the initial variation normal reach that can be turned on in the production pattern setting process for reach (Figure 618), the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot (Figure 621), and the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot (Figure 624). By determining whether the flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach.

In step Sk4002, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach (step Sk4002: YES), the process advances to step Sk4003.

In step Sk4003, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk4004, the setting suggestion propriety table specified in step Sk4003 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk4005, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk4004, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk4001 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance. . Step Sk4003 to Step Sk4005 are the same processes as Step Sk3303 to Step Sk3305 of the normal reach performance pattern table reference process (FIG. 619).

In step Sk4005, if it is determined that the setting suggestion performance corresponds to the winning (Sk4005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4006, where the effect is stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM 93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for super reach/probability variable jackpot to which setting suggestion symbols PX are added. In the performance pattern table for super reach/probability variable jackpots that includes setting-suggestion symbols PX, the setting-suggestion symbols are used in the part of the performance pattern for super reach/probability variable jackpots that suggests that a super reach has occurred. It is configured so that PX appears. After executing step Sk4006, the actual ready-to-reach performance pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sk4005, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk4005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4007, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal super reach/probability variable jackpot that is currently available. After executing step Sk4007, this super reach/probability variable jackpot performance pattern table reference process is ended.

On the other hand, even when it is determined in step Sk4002 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not normal reach (step Sk4002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4007.

By executing the above-mentioned performance pattern setting process for guaranteed variable jackpot and performance pattern table reference process for super reach/probable variable jackpot, if the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach, a guaranteed variable jackpot will be created in the game after the first time. When a winner is won and a super reach occurs, in the production suggesting that the super reach has occurred, a setting suggestion production is performed with an appearance probability according to the lottery setting determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. can be executed.

<Production pattern setting process for when it is off>
The performance pattern setting process for when the performance is off is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2307) of the performance pattern setting process. Hereinafter, this effect pattern setting process for the time of failure will be explained in detail.

FIG. 627 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a performance pattern for when the game is missed in Modification 1. In this production pattern setting process for a missed performance, steps Sk4101 to Sk4103 and step Sk4105 are the same as steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 and step Sk2705 of the production pattern setting process for a missed performance (FIG. 610) of the 11th embodiment. In the performance pattern setting process for when the game is off in the first modified example, only step Sk4104 is different from the process for setting the performance pattern when the game is off in the eleventh embodiment.

In step Sk2704 of the performance pattern setting process for failure times (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment, the performance pattern corresponding to the variable time is acquired with reference to the performance pattern table for failure times. On the other hand, in step Sk4104 of the effect pattern setting process for failure in the first modification, a subroutine effect effect pattern table reference process for failure is executed. The effect pattern table reference process for when the game is missed will be described later.

<Processing to refer to the production pattern table for failure>
Next, a description will be given of the process of referring to the production pattern table for when the game is missed. The effect pattern table reference process for failure is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Sk4104 in FIG. 627) of the effect pattern setting process for failure. Hereinafter, the process of referring to the performance pattern table for failure will be described in detail.

FIG. 628 is a flowchart illustrating the process of referring to the performance pattern table for failure. In step Sk4201, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk4202.

In step Sk4202, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is a special reach. Specifically, the first fluctuation that can be turned ON in the production pattern setting process for reach (Figure 618), the production pattern setting process for normal jackpot (Figure 621), and the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot (Figure 624). By determining whether the special reach flag is ON, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is a special reach.

In step Sk4202, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach (step Sk4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4203.

In step Sk4203, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk4204, the setting suggestion propriety table specified in step Sk4203 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk4205, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk4204, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk4201 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion effect. . Step Sk4203 to Step Sk4205 are the same processes as Step Sk3303 to Step Sk3305 of the normal reach performance pattern table reference process (FIG. 619).

In step Sk4205, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk4205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4206, where the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the effect pattern table for failure when the setting suggestion pattern PX is added. After executing step Sk4206, the present ready-to-win production pattern setting process ends.

In step Sk4205, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk4205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4207, and the effect is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound and light side ROM93. The performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is obtained by referring to the performance pattern table for normal out-of-performance. After executing step Sk4207, the process of referring to the performance pattern table for when the book is out of stock is ended.

On the other hand, even when it is determined in step Sk4202 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not special reach (step Sk4202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4207.

By executing the above-mentioned process for setting the performance pattern for winning and the process for referring to the performance pattern table for losing, it is possible to avoid winning the jackpot in the game after the first time when the display mode of the initial variation is special reach. When a reach does not occur, a setting suggestion performance can be executed with an appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579, in a performance suggesting a complete miss.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be explained. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of command corresponding processing (FIG. 601: Sk1914). The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 629 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step Sk4301, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk4302.

In step Sk4302, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial variation is out of order. Specifically, it is possible to determine whether or not the display mode of the first variation is off by determining whether or not the initial variation off flag that can be turned ON in the out-of-off performance pattern setting process (FIG. 627) is ON. Make a judgment.

If it is determined in step Sk4302 that the display mode of the initial variation is out of order (step Sk4302: YES), the process advances to step Sk4303.

In step Sk4303, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk4304, the setting suggestion propriety table specified in step Sk4303 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk4305, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk4304, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk4301 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance. . Step Sk4303 to Step Sk4305 are the same processes as Step Sk3303 to Step Sk3305 of the normal reach effect pattern table reference process (FIG. 619).

If it is determined in step Sk4305 that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk4305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4306, and the ending effect pattern to which the setting suggestion symbol PX is added is applied during the current ending period. Set as a performance pattern to be executed. The ending performance pattern to which the setting suggestion picture PX is added is stored in advance in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93, and is read out from the performance pattern table storage area 93a for use.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk4305 that the setting suggestion effect does not correspond to winning (Sk4305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4307, and the normal ending effect pattern without setting suggestion effect is applied to the current ending. Set as a performance pattern to be executed during the period. The normal ending performance pattern is stored in advance in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound/light side ROM 93, and is read out from the performance pattern table storage area 93a for use. After executing step Sk4306 or step Sk4307, this ending effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, even if it is determined in step Sk4302 that the display mode of the initial variation is not out of order (step Sk4302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4307.

By executing the above-mentioned ending effect setting process, if the display mode of the initial variation is out of order, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, it will be executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with the appearance probability according to the lottery setting determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed when the pachinko machine is started (when the power is turned on), so that the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. In the winning lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed. Then, during a predetermined period, an effect is performed in which the setting suggestion pattern (treasure box pattern) PX appears so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting. Furthermore, the predetermined period during which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears is configured to change based on the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine. For this reason, the player observes the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine, and first memorizes the display mode of the symbol variation. Thereafter, the player estimates a predetermined period during which the setting suggestion symbol PX will appear from the previously memorized display mode of symbol fluctuations in the first game round, and in that predetermined period, the player estimates the setting that is the symbol of the treasure chest. By observing whether or not the suggesting symbol PX appears and estimating the appearance probability of the setting suggesting symbol PX, it is possible to infer which lottery setting is currently set.

Considering the pachinko machine of the comparative example in which the predetermined period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX appears is fixed, according to the comparative example pachinko machine, the setting suggestion pattern PX depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. A predetermined period for appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, the predetermined period during which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears does not depend solely on the model of the pachinko machine, so the player cannot guess the lottery settings. It is up to the player's skill to strongly feel the randomness of the appearance period of the setting suggestion symbols PX necessary for , it is possible to accurately grasp the predetermined period during which the effect in which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears, and in turn, it is possible to accurately guess which lottery setting is currently set. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the player needs to play the game in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. , when a pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, it is possible to actively encourage players to play games from the beginning in the morning.

The pachinko machine of the first modification has a miss, a normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach as display modes of symbol variations. The display modes of these symbol variations are arranged in this order from low to high expectations for a jackpot in the winning lottery. On top of that, the display mode of the symbol variation that has a higher expectation of becoming a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round, the higher the probability that the predetermined period in which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears will be executed in the game round. It is set to be the presentation period for the display mode of the fluctuation. The period of effects that have a high probability of being executed in a game session has a higher frequency of occurrence than the period of effects that have a low probability of being executed in a game session, so the expectation level for a jackpot in the winning lottery increases. When a display mode with high symbol variation occurs, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. For this reason, from the perspective of the frequency of occurrence during a predetermined period in which the setting suggestion symbol PX may appear, the symbol variation that has a high degree of expectation of a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round is given to the player. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the display mode of ``I want the display mode to occur.''

According to the pachinko machine of the first modification, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player can play the game at each machine first thing in the morning. In the first game after turning on the power, by generating a reach with a high degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot in a winning lottery, a machine on which a setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear can be created with one's own hands.

In general pachinko machines, even if a super reach or special reach occurs in a game round, if a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery corresponding to the game round, the player will not feel a sense of expectation. It can be done, but after that it cannot provide any real value. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of modification 1, only in the first game after starting the pachinko machine, when a super reach or special reach occurs, the setting suggestion picture PX It is possible to provide the player with the value of being able to set a predetermined period in which there is a possibility of occurrence to be a period in which the occurrence frequency is high.

In the pachinko machine of Modification Example 1, the total number of held game balls, which is the sum of the number of held game balls that entered the starting port 33 and the number of held game balls that entered the second starting port 34, is 0 (zero). In some cases, since the probability of winning a reach in a game round is relatively high, the probability that a reach effect will be executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine is relatively high. On the other hand, if the display mode of the symbol change executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine is normal reach, super reach, or special reach, the setting suggestion symbol will be Since the frequency of occurrence during the predetermined period in which PX appears is high, the setting suggestion pattern PX can be generated relatively frequently.

《K8-2. 》Modification 2:
<Structure of gaming machine in modification 2>
The pachinko machine in the second modification differs in the configuration of the game board compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. The configuration of the game board will be described first, pointing out the differences from the eleventh embodiment. Regarding the hardware configuration in the second modification, the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the eleventh embodiment, and detailed explanations are omitted.

FIG. 630 is a front view of a game board 230 included in a pachinko machine of modification 2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, a first starting port 33 was provided at the lower center of the game board 30 (see FIG. 567). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of the second modification, a distribution mechanism 250 for distributing game balls, a first starting port 233, and a second starting port 234 are provided below the center of the game board 230. The other parts of the game board 230 are the same as the game board 30 in the eleventh embodiment. The distribution mechanism 250 alternately distributes the entered game balls to the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234. The second starting port 234 has the same function as the second starting port 34 provided below the distribution mechanism 250.

FIG. 631 is an explanatory diagram showing how the distribution mechanism 250 distributes game balls. As shown in FIG. 631(a), when one game ball PB1 enters the distribution mechanism 250 from the ball entry section 251, the game ball PB1 comes into contact with the blade section 252. By contacting the game ball PB1, the blade portion 252 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle around the shaft portion 252a, and distributes the game ball PB1 to the ball release portion 254. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 631(b), the game balls PB1 that have been sorted to the ball release section 254 are ejected from the ball release section 254 and enter the second starting port 234. Further, as shown in FIG. 631(b), the blade portion 252 is in a state in which it is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, unlike the state in FIG. 631(a).

As shown in FIG. 631(c), when another game ball PB2 enters the distribution mechanism 250 from the ball entry section 251 in this state, the game ball PB2 comes into contact with the blade section 252. By contacting the game ball PB2, the blade portion 252 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle around the shaft portion 252a, and distributes the game ball PB2 to the ball release portion 253. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 631(d), the game balls PB2 that have been sorted to the ball release section 253 are ejected from the ball release section 253 and enter the first starting port 233. Further, as shown in FIG. 631(d), the blade portion 252 returns to the state shown in FIG. 631(a). In this way, the sorting mechanism 250 moves the game balls that entered from the ball entry section 251 to the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 by repeating the operations shown in FIGS. 631(a) to 631(d). Alternately distribute.

According to the pachinko machine of the second modification, the player can enter the game balls alternately into the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 by entering the game balls into the distribution mechanism 250. As a result, the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 233 and the special information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 234 are alternately can be stored as pending information. The sorting mechanism 250 is made of a transparent resin member, and by looking at the sorting mechanism 250, the player can determine whether the game ball is sorted into the first starting port 233 or the second starting port 234. As a result, storage of reservation information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 233 and storage of reservation information based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 234 are possible. You can see that they are taking place alternately. In addition, the player can also check the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 233 by looking at the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b in the special symbol unit 37 (FIG. 567). It can be confirmed that storage of information and storage of reservation information based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 234 are performed alternately.

<Summary of processing in modification 2>
An overview of the processing performed by the pachinko machine in the second modification will be described below, pointing out the differences from the eleventh embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 11th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is performed, the setting suggestion symbol (treasure box symbol) is used in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The setting suggestion performance that causes PX to appear is executed such that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, but in particular, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting is The configuration is such that it changes based on the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game after starting up the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in modification example 2, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the above, a setting suggestion effect in which a setting suggestion symbol PX appears is executed such that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, and a setting suggestion effect for each type of lottery setting is executed. The appearance probability of the symbol PX is based on the special information obtained based on the symbol variation executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 233, and the second starting port. The structure changes depending on whether the information is based on special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the ball into the game ball 234. In other words, the above-mentioned lottery setting is determined depending on whether the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 to either the first starting port 233 or the second starting port 234. The configuration is such that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX for each type is changed.

Next, a specific example of control for executing the above-described process in the pachinko machine of modification 2 will be described. The specific control differs from the specific control in the eleventh embodiment in the processing shown in FIGS. Various processes executed by the MPU 62, other processes executed by the audio emission control device 90, and various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Update process when entering the ball>
The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 602: Sk2001) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 632 is a flowchart showing update processing when a ball enters the ball. In this updating process when the ball enters, steps Sk4401, Sk4402, Sk4406, and Sk4410 are the same as steps Sk2101, Sk2102, Sk2103, and Sk2104 in the updating process when the ball enters the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 603). are the same. In the update processing at the time of ball entry in the second modification, what is different from the update processing at the time of ball entry in the eleventh embodiment are steps Sk4403 to Step Sk4405 and steps Sk4407 to Step Sk4409.

In step Sk4403, which is executed after executing step Sk4402, it is determined whether the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later. The second and subsequent determination flag is a flag that turns ON to indicate that the symbols on the symbol display device 41 change after the second time after starting the pachinko machine, and is initialized to OFF when the pachinko machine starts. has been done. In step Sk2404, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is the first symbol change after starting the pachinko machine (step Sk4403: YES), the process advances to step Sk4404, and the pachinko machine is turned off. Information indicating that the symbol variation executed in the first game round after activation is based on special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 233 is stored. Specifically, the first fluctuation first symbol flag stored in the first fluctuation first symbol flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sk4404, the process advances to step Sk4405, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk4405, the process advances to step Sk4410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk4403 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk4403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4410 without executing steps Sk4404 and Sk4405.

In step Sk4407, which is executed after executing step Sk4406, it is determined whether or not the second and subsequent determination flag is OFF. In step Sk4407, if it is determined that the determination flag is OFF for the second time or later, that is, it is the first symbol change after starting the pachinko machine (step Sk4407: YES), the process advances to step Sk4408, and the pachinko machine is turned off. Information indicating that the symbol variation executed in the first game after activation is based on special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 234 is stored. Specifically, the first time fluctuation second symbol flag stored in the first time fluctuation second symbol flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sk4408, the process proceeds to step Sk4409, and the determination flag is turned on from the second time onwards. After executing step Sk4409, the process advances to step Sk4410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk4407 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk4407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4410 without executing steps Sk4408 and Sk4409.

In addition, each value of the initial variation first symbol flag and the initial variation second symbol flag that can be turned ON in the update process at the time of main ball entry disappears and is reset to OFF when the Pachinko machine is powered off.

According to the update process at the time of main ball entry, the game ball that first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is assigned to either the first starting port 233 or the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250. Whether it has been distributed or not is stored depending on which of the first variation first symbol flag and the second variation second symbol flag is turned ON.

<Reach performance pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process for reach time will be explained. The reach effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2306) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for reach time. In this reach effect pattern setting process, steps Sk4501 to Sk4503, Sk4504 to Sk4506, Sk4507, and Step Sk4508 are steps Sk2401 to Sk2401 of the reach effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the 11th embodiment. It is the same as Step Sk2403, Step Sk2407 to Step Sk2409, Step Sk2413, and Step Sk2417. The difference between the reach performance pattern setting process in the second modification and the reach performance pattern setting process in the eleventh embodiment is step Sk2404 in the reach performance pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment. The only difference is that the processes of ~Step Sk2406, Step Sk2410~Step Sk2412, and Step Sk2414~Step Sk2416 are deleted.

According to the performance pattern setting process for this reach, if it is determined that a normal reach has occurred in the current game round (Sk4503: YES), the performance pattern table for normal reach is referred to (Sk4504), and the performance Set a pattern (Sk4505), and if it is determined that a super reach has occurred in the current game round (Sk4506: YES), refer to the effect pattern table for super reach (Sk4507) and set the effect pattern. (Sk4505), and if it is determined that a super reach has not occurred in this game, that is, a special reach has occurred (Sk4506: NO), refer to the performance pattern table for special reach (Sk4508). ), and set its performance pattern (Sk4505). In the reach-time production pattern setting process of the 11th embodiment, in addition to setting the production pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned reach type, the display mode ( In contrast, in the ready-to-win production pattern setting process of Modification 2, the process of storing the display mode of the first variation is not performed.

<Normal jackpot production pattern setting process>
Next, the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process will be explained. The normal jackpot effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 605: Sk2304).

FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process. In this normal jackpot performance pattern setting process, Step Sk4601 to Step Sk4603, Step Sk4604 to Step Sk4606, Step Sk4607, and Step Sk4608 are Step Sk2501 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process (FIG. 608) of the 11th embodiment. ~Step Sk2503, Step Sk2507~Step Sk2509, Step Sk2513, and Step Sk2517 are the same. The normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in the second modification is different from the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process of the 11th embodiment in the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process of the 11th embodiment (FIG. 608). The only difference is that the processes from step Sk2504 to step Sk2506, step Sk2510 to step Sk2512, and step Sk2514 to step Sk2516 are deleted.

According to this normal jackpot production pattern setting process, if it is determined that a normal reach has occurred in the current game round (Sk4603: YES), the production pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot is referred to (Sk4604 ), set the effect pattern (Sk4605), and if it is determined that a super reach has occurred in this game round (Sk4606: YES), refer to the effect pattern table for super reach/normal jackpot ( Sk4607), set the performance pattern (Sk4605), and if it is determined that a super reach has not occurred in this game round, that is, a special reach has occurred (Sk4606: NO), when a special reach or normal jackpot Refer to the effect pattern table for (Sk4608) and set the effect pattern (Sk4605). In the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process of the 11th embodiment, the above-mentioned set of performance patterns corresponding to the type of reach is set, as well as the display mode of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. (The display mode of the first variation) is configured to be stored, but in contrast, in the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process of Modification 2, the process of storing the display mode of the first variation is not performed.

<Production pattern setting process for guaranteed strange jackpot>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for the probability-variable jackpot will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for the probability variable jackpot is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2302) of the performance pattern setting process.

FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for a probability variable jackpot. In this production pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot, steps Sk4701 to Step Sk4703, Step Sk4704 to Step Sk4706, Step Sk4707, and Step Sk4708 are steps Sk2601 of the production pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot (FIG. 609) of the 11th embodiment. ~Step Sk2603, Step Sk2607~Step Sk2609, Step Sk2613, and Step Sk2617 are the same. The production pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot in the second modification is different from the production pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot of the 11th embodiment in the production pattern setting process for a variable probability jackpot of the 11th embodiment (FIG. 609). The only difference is that steps Sk2604 to Sk2606, Sk2610 to Sk2612, and Sk2614 to Sk2616 are deleted.

According to the production pattern setting process for a guaranteed variable jackpot, if it is determined that a normal reach has occurred in the current game round (Sk4703: YES), the production pattern table for normal reach/probability variable jackpot is referred to (Sk4704). ), set the effect pattern (Sk4705), and if it is determined that a super reach has occurred in this game round (Sk4706: YES), refer to the effect pattern table for super reach/probable jackpot ( Sk4707), set the performance pattern (Sk4705), and if it is determined that a super reach has not occurred in this game round, that is, a special reach has occurred (Sk4706: NO), when a special reach/probable jackpot occurs. Refer to the effect pattern table for (Sk4708) and set the effect pattern (Sk4705). In the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process of the 11th embodiment, the above-mentioned set of performance patterns corresponding to the type of reach is set, as well as the display mode of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. (The display mode of the first variation) is configured to be stored, but in contrast, in the production pattern setting process for probability variable jackpot of the second modification, the process of storing the display mode of the first variation is not performed.

<Production pattern setting process for when it is off>
Next, a description will be given of the production pattern setting process for when the game is off. The performance pattern setting process for when the performance is off is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2307) of the performance pattern setting process.

FIG. 636 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for when the game is missed. In this effect pattern setting process for a missed event, steps Sk4801 to Step Sk4802 are the same as steps Sk2704 to Sk2705 of the effect pattern setting process for a missed event (FIG. 610) of the 11th embodiment. The difference between the effect pattern setting process for a missed effect in the second modification and the effect pattern setting process for a missed effect of the 11th embodiment is step Sk2701 in the effect pattern setting process for a missed effect of the 11th embodiment (FIG. 610). ~The only difference is that the process in step Sk2703 is deleted.

That is, according to the performance pattern setting process for when the game loses, the performance pattern table for when the game loses is referred to (Sk4801), and the performance pattern is set (Sk4802). In the performance pattern setting process for failure of the 11th embodiment, in addition to setting the performance pattern described above, the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine (display mode of the first variation) However, in contrast, in the production pattern setting process for when the game is out of the book according to modification example 2, the process of storing the display mode of the initial variation is not performed.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be explained. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of command corresponding processing (FIG. 601: Sk1914). The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In this ending effect setting process, step Sk4901 and steps Sk4905 to Sk4909 are the same as step Sk2801 and steps Sk2806 to Sk2810 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the 11th embodiment. The ending effect setting process in the second modification differs from the ending effect setting process in the eleventh embodiment in steps Sk4902 to Sk4904.

In step Sk4902, which is executed after executing step Sk4901, the symbol variation (initial variation) executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 233. It is determined whether or not it is based on the special information provided. Specifically, it is determined whether the first fluctuation first symbol flag, which can be turned ON in the update process (FIG. 632) at the time of ball entry, is ON.

In step Sk4902, when it is determined that the first variation first symbol flag is ON, that is, the first variation is based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 233. (Step Sk4902: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sk4903, and the setting suggestion validity table group for the first fluctuation 1st symbol is selected from the two types of setting suggestion validity table groups stored in the setting suggestion validity table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specify the setting suggestion propriety table group. The setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d stores in advance a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol and a setting suggestion propriety table group for the second initial variation symbol. A setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol is specified from two types of setting suggestion propriety table groups.

FIG. 638 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol. The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first fluctuation first symbol has the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 612) for the first time losing in the 11th embodiment. The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol shows the correspondence between each standard lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol.

FIG. 639 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time fluctuation second symbol. The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first time variation second symbol has the same contents as the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 613) for the first normal reach in the 11th embodiment. The setting suggestion propriety table group for the second symbol of the first variation is compared with the correspondence of the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol (Fig. 638), and the denominator of the appearance probability of the symbol for setting suggestion is The value is subtracted by 1.

Note that the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first fluctuation second symbol is configured to have the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 613) for the first normal reach in the 11th embodiment; The content may be the same as the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 614) for the first time super reach. In short, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the second symbol of the first fluctuation is set so that the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol is higher than that of the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first symbol of the first fluctuation. The content may be any content as long as it is.

Returning to FIG. 637, in step Sk4903, after specifying the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 638) for the first fluctuation first symbol, the process proceeds to step Sk4905. In step Sk4905, similarly to step Sk2806 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the 11th embodiment, the setting suggestion propriety table specified immediately before, here, the setting for the first fluctuation first symbol specified in step Sk4903. From the group of suggestion propriety tables, a setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is identified.

On the other hand, in step Sk4902, the first variation first symbol flag is not ON, that is, the first variation second symbol flag is ON, and the first variation is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 234. If it is determined that it is based on the special information (step Sk4902: NO), the process advances to step Sk4904, and the two types of setting suggestions stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 are displayed. A setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 639) for the first variation second symbol is specified from the propriety table group. After executing step Sk4904, the process advances to step Sk4905. In step Sk4905, a setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table identified just before, here, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first fluctuation second symbol specified in step Sk4904. do.

By looking at the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 on the display surface 41a (FIG. 568) of the symbol display device 41, a player who plays a game with the pachinko machine for the first time in a day, It is possible to check which of the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 the game ball that first enters the distributing mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed by the distributing mechanism 250. Alternatively, by directly looking at the distribution mechanism 250, it is possible to confirm which of the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 the fuel has been distributed to.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine of modification 2, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed when the pachinko machine is started (when the power is turned on), so that the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. In the winning lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed. Then, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending performance that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting. An effect in which a suggestive pattern (treasure box pattern) PX appears is executed. Furthermore, according to the first time fluctuation first symbol flag and the first time fluctuation second symbol flag, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is transferred to the first starting port 233 and the second starting hole by the distribution mechanism 250. The appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting in the ending performance is stored by the first variation first symbol flag and the second first variation symbol flag. It is structured so that it changes depending on the destination. To summarize, in the above ending performance, the appearance probability is based on the type of current lottery setting and the destination to which the game balls are initially distributed by the distribution mechanism 250, which is stored by the first variation first symbol flag and the second variation second symbol flag. The effect of the setting suggestion picture PX is executed so that the setting suggestion picture PX is displayed. For this reason, the player first observes and memorizes where the game balls that first enter the distribution mechanism 250 are distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine. After that, when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and moves to the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion symbol PX, which is the symbol of a treasure chest, appears in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The current lottery setting is determined based on the obtained appearance probability and the destination to which the game balls are initially distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 that has been stored previously. You can guess which one it is.

When considering a comparative pachinko machine in which the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX is determined based only on the current lottery setting, according to the comparative example pachinko machine, setting suggestion depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. The probability of appearance of the pattern PX is determined. On the other hand, according to the Pachinko machine of Modification 2, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX does not depend solely on the model of the Pachinko machine, so the player does not have to worry about the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX depending only on the model of the Pachinko machine. Depending on the skill of the player, who strongly feels the randomness of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX and takes into consideration the destination to which the game balls are initially distributed by the distribution mechanism 250, it is possible to accurately determine which lottery setting is currently set. It can be inferred that Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, the player needs to play the game when a game ball first enters the sorting mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, in the morning. When a pachinko machine is powered on, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games from the beginning of the morning.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 2, when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggestion is made during the period in which the ending effect is performed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Since it is necessary to observe whether or not the setting suggestion symbol PX appears and estimate the probability of the appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PX, it is necessary to repeatedly make the period in which the ending effect is performed, and the Playing games can be actively encouraged.

In the pachinko machine of the second modification, it is more advantageous for the player if the distribution mechanism 250 distributes the game balls to the second starting port 234 rather than the first starting port 233 (Fig. 573). In addition, the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion pattern PX is higher when the first game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 to the second starting port 234 than to the first starting port 233. . When the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX is high, the setting suggestion pattern PX appears more easily than when the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX is low. When the allocation destination is the second starting port 234, it becomes possible to estimate the lottery settings in a short period and with high accuracy. For this reason, the player is given a sense of expectation that the first game ball is distributed to the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250, also from the perspective of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX. be able to.

According to the pachinko machine of the second modification, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and the first distribution of game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is performed. By selecting a game machine whose tip is the second starting opening 234, it is possible to select a machine on which the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

In the pachinko machine of Modification 2, the game hall manager may, before opening the game hall, remove the blades when the blade portion 252 (see FIG. 631) of the distribution mechanism 250 is in the position shown in FIG. 631(c). By switching the portion 252 to the position shown in FIG. 631(a), the second starting port 234 can be used as the destination to which the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 during the first game in the morning. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall can adjust the pachinko machine so that the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear, if necessary.

《K8-3》Variation 3:
The processing performed by the pachinko machine in the third modification will be described below, showing the differences from the second modification. Note that the hardware configuration of the Pachinko machine in Modification 3 is the same as the Pachinko machine in Modification 2, so parts that are the same as Modification 2 will be described using the same names and symbols.

In the pachinko machine of the above modification 2, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode, the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is set in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The configuration is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect in which a setting suggestion pattern (treasure box pattern) PX appears so that the appearance probability is based on The configuration is such that the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion performance for each type of lottery setting changes depending on whether the ball is allocated to a first starting port 233 or a second starting port 234 by a distributing mechanism 250. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of modification 3, in addition to the above-mentioned ending performance period, a setting suggestion effect is executed in which a setting suggestion symbol appears with an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. The configuration is such that the period during which this setting suggestion performance is executed is such that the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is divided into the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250. The structure is such that the system switches depending on which of the two categories it has been allocated to. Specifically, when the game ball that first enters the sorting mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is sorted by the sorting mechanism 250 to the first starting port 233, in the ending effect, the game ball is drawn based on the lottery settings. The configuration is such that the setting suggestion performance is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting, and when the distribution mechanism 250 distributes to the second starting port 234, the setting suggestion performance is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting in the normal reach performance in the game round. The configuration was configured to execute. It should be noted that, instead of the normal reach, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect may be executed in the super reach or the special reach. Other processes executed in the pachinko machine of the third modification are the same as those executed in the pachinko machine of the second modification.

According to the Pachinko machine of Modified Example 3 configured as described above, after starting the Pachinko machine, the player can determine where the game balls that first enter the distribution mechanism 250 will be distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. Observe and memorize first. Thereafter, the player estimates a predetermined period (ending period or normal reach period) during which the setting suggestion symbol PX will appear from the destination to which the game balls are initially distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 stored previously, and selects the predetermined period. , it is possible to guess which lottery setting is currently in place by observing whether or not the setting-suggesting symbol PX, which is the symbol of the treasure chest, appears and estimating the appearance probability of the setting-suggesting symbol PX. can. Considering the pachinko machine of the comparative example in which the predetermined period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX appears is fixed, according to the comparative example pachinko machine, the setting suggestion pattern PX depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. A predetermined period for appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to the Pachinko machine of Modification 3, the predetermined period in which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears does not depend solely on the model of the Pachinko machine, so the player cannot guess the lottery settings. The setting-suggesting pattern PX appears depending on the player's skill, such as having a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the setting-suggesting pattern PX, which is necessary for the game, and taking into consideration the destination to which the game balls are initially distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. It is possible to accurately grasp the predetermined period during which the performance is to be performed, and in turn, it is possible to accurately guess which lottery setting is currently set. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the third modification, the player needs to play the game when a game ball first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, in the morning. When a pachinko machine is powered on, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games from the beginning of the morning.

In the Pachinko machine of Modification Example 3, similarly to the Pachinko machine of Modification Example 2, when the game ball is allocated to the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250 is better than when the destination is the first starting port 233. This is highly advantageous for the player (see FIG. 573). In addition, in the pachinko machine of the third modification, when the distribution mechanism 250 first distributes game balls to the second starting port 234, the game ball is distributed to the second starting port 234 more often in a game round. The configuration is such that the setting suggestion performance is executed during a performance period for a performance with a high probability of occurrence, that is, a normal reach. Since the period of a performance that has a high probability of being executed in a game round has a higher frequency of occurrence than the period of a performance that has a low probability of being executed in a game round, the distribution mechanism 250 determines the first game ball distribution. When the allocation destination is the second starting port 234, it becomes possible to estimate the lottery settings in a short period and with high accuracy. For this reason, from the perspective of the frequency of occurrence during the period in which the setting suggestion performance is executed, the player has an expectation that the first game ball distribution destination by the distribution mechanism 250 should be the second starting port 234. can be granted.

According to the pachinko machine of the third modification, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in a game hall, the player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and the first distribution of game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is performed. By selecting a game machine whose tip is the second starting opening 234, it is possible to select a machine on which the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

In the Pachinko machine of Modification 3, similar to the Pachinko machine of Modification 2, the administrator of the game hall determines the position of the blade part 252 (see FIG. 631) of the distribution mechanism 250 before opening the game hall (see FIG. 631). In the case of position c), by switching the blade portion 252 to the position shown in FIG. 631(a), the second starting port 234 can be used to distribute the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 during the game first thing in the morning. can. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall can adjust the pachinko machine so that the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear, if necessary.

As a modification of Modification 3, if the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed to the first starting port 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, the game rotation In the super reach, the setting suggestion performance is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery settings, and when the distribution mechanism 250 distributes to the second starting port 234, in the normal reach, the appearance probability is based on the lottery settings. It may also be configured to execute setting suggestion effects. In short, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed to the second startup port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250, rather than being distributed to the first startup port 233 by the distribution mechanism 250. Any combination of reach may be used as long as it is configured to execute a setting suggestion performance with a type of reach performance that is more likely to be executed in a game round if the player is given a chance.

《K8-4》Variation 4:
An overview of the processing performed by the pachinko machine in Modification 4 will first be described while pointing out the differences from the 11th embodiment. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth modification is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, so the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the eleventh embodiment, and the outline of the process is Explain.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 11th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is performed, the setting suggestion symbol (treasure box symbol) is used in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The setting suggestion performance that causes PX to appear is executed such that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, but in particular, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting is The configuration is such that it changes based on the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game after starting up the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in modification example 4, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the above, a setting suggestion effect in which a setting suggestion symbol PX appears is executed such that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, and a setting suggestion effect for each type of lottery setting is executed. The appearance probability of the pattern PX is configured to change based on the result of an appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started up. That is, in the ending performance, the setting suggestion symbol PX is performed so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting and the result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started.

The appearance probability lottery is a lottery process for deriving the appearance probability of a setting suggestion effect that causes the setting suggestion symbol PX to appear, and is executed when the pachinko machine is started up. The appearance probability lottery is executed by comparing the random number counter CZ for lottery with the distribution table for appearance probability lottery. The value of the lottery random number counter CZ is randomly updated when the pachinko machine is started up.

FIG. 640 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the appearance probability lottery distribution table used when executing the appearance probability lottery. As shown in FIG. 640, in the distribution table for the appearance probability lottery, among the values of the lottery random number counter CZ of "0 to 99", "0 to 29" correspond to a high appearance probability, and "30 ~99'' corresponds to the standard appearance probability. The "standard appearance probability" is a parameter indicating that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion effect is standard. "High appearance probability" is a parameter indicating that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the standard. According to the distribution table for the appearance probability lottery, the item is allocated to the high appearance probability with a probability of 3/10.

The lottery results of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started are temporarily stored in the main side RAM 64 of the main controller 60 as appearance probability lottery result information, and after that, the appearance probability lottery result information is transferred from the main controller 60 side. It is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 side. The appearance probability lottery result information is stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90 until the power switch 88 of the pachinko machine is turned off.

In the pachinko machine of this modification 4, the symbols are displayed in the game round (hereinafter referred to as the initial game round) within the period from when the pachinko machine is started until the number of times the game round reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The contents of the variable display of symbols on the display device 41 are configured to be different for game rounds after the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as normal game rounds). In the initial game round, the content of the variable display is more diverse and intense than in the normal game round, in order to improve the gambling spirit of the players who play the game from the beginning in the morning.

In the pachinko machine of this modification 4, the variable display of the symbols in the initial game round is changed according to the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery. Specifically, if the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is a high appearance probability, a special character (for example, a goddess character) will appear during the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round, and the appearance probability lottery will be performed. When the lottery result is the standard appearance probability, the above-mentioned effect in which a special character appears during the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round is not performed. A player who plays a game first thing in the morning can know the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery by observing whether a special character appears or not in the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round.

Next, the ending effect setting process executed in the pachinko machine of modification 4 will be explained. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 641 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In this ending effect setting process, step Sk5001 and steps Sk5005 to Sk5009 are the same as step Sk4901 and steps Sk4906 to Sk4910 of the ending effect setting process of modification 2 (FIG. 637). The ending effect setting process in the fourth modification is different from the ending effect setting process in the second modification in steps Sk5002 to Sk5004.

In step Sk5002, which is executed after step Sk5001 is executed, it is determined whether the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started has a high appearance probability. This determination is made using appearance probability lottery result information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94.

In step Sk5002, if it is determined that the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is not a high appearance probability (step Sk5002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk5003, and a group of setting suggestion propriety tables for standard appearance probability is specified. In the pachinko machine of modification 4, the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 includes a setting suggestion propriety table group for standard appearance probability and a setting suggestion propriety table group for high appearance probability. remembered.

The setting suggestion propriety table group for the standard appearance probability has the same contents as the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 3 (FIG. 638), that is, the first time in the eleventh embodiment. The contents are the same as the setting suggestion propriety table for failure (FIG. 612). The setting suggestion propriety table for standard appearance probability shows the correspondence between each standard lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol.

The setting suggestion propriety table group for high appearance probability has the same contents as the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 639) for the first time fluctuation second symbol provided in the pachinko machine of modification 3, that is, the first time in the eleventh embodiment. The content is the same as the setting suggestion propriety table for normal reach (FIG. 613). In the setting suggestion validity table group for high appearance probability, the value of the denominator of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol is subtracted by 1 compared to the correspondence relationship in the setting suggestion validity table group for standard appearance probability. ing.

Note that the setting suggestion propriety table group for high appearance probability has the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach in the 11th embodiment (FIG. 613); The content may be the same as the setting suggestion propriety table for reach time (FIG. 614). In short, if the setting suggestion propriety table group for high appearance probability is set so that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol is higher than that of the setting suggestion propriety table group for standard appearance probability, The content may be either.

In step Sk5003, a setting suggestion propriety table group for standard appearance probability is specified from these two types of setting suggestion propriety table groups.

In step Sk5003, after specifying a group of setting suggestion propriety tables for standard appearance probabilities, the process advances to step Sk5005. In step Sk5005, similarly to step Sk4905 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 637) of modification 2, the setting suggestion propriety table specified immediately before is used, here, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the standard appearance probability specified in step Sk5003. From this, a setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk5002 that the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery has a high appearance probability (step Sk5002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk5004, and is stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. A setting suggestion propriety table group for high appearance probability is specified from the two types of setting suggestion propriety table groups. After executing step Sk5004, the process advances to step Sk5005. In step Sk5005, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion propriety table identified just before, here, the setting suggestion propriety table group for high appearance probability identified in step Sk5004.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine of the present modification 4, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery settings of the pachinko machine is changed, so that in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, The probability of winning the jackpot will change. Then, an appearance probability lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is started, and the result of the appearance probability lottery (whether it corresponds to high appearance probability or standard appearance probability) is determined in the initial game after starting the pachinko machine. This is indicated by whether or not a special character appears during the variable display of symbols. Then, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, based on the type of the current lottery setting and the result of the appearance probability lottery. The setting suggestion pattern PX, which is a treasure box pattern, is rendered so as to have a probability of appearance. For this reason, the player observes whether or not a special character appears during the variation of symbols executed in the initial game round, and memorizes the observation result. After that, if the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and moves to the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion symbol PX, which is the symbol of a treasure chest, will appear in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The current lottery setting is determined based on the obtained appearance probability and whether or not the previously memorized special character appears. can be inferred.

When considering a comparative pachinko machine in which the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX is determined based only on the current lottery setting, according to the comparative example pachinko machine, setting suggestion depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. The probability of appearance of the pattern PX is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 4, the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PX does not depend solely on the model of the pachinko machine, so the player can use The probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PX is strongly felt to be random, and depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration whether or not a special character appeared in the initial game, it is possible to determine which lottery setting is currently set. can be guessed accurately. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of variation 4, the player needs to play the game from the first game after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, , it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 4, when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the player receives setting suggestions during the period in which the ending effect is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Since it is necessary to observe whether or not the setting suggestion symbol PX appears and estimate the probability of the appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PX, it is necessary to repeatedly make the period in which the ending effect is performed, and the Playing games can be actively encouraged.

According to the Pachinko machine of Modification 4, when a plurality of Pachinko machines of Modification 4 are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and determines the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery. By selecting a game machine with a high appearance probability, it is possible to select a machine where the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

The pachinko machine of modification 4 can also be modified as follows, for example. In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 4, a special character such as a goddess character appears during the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round as a method of notifying the player of the lottery results of the appearance probability lottery. Alternatively, the background color of the variable display of symbols in the initial game round may be changed, or the shape or color of the symbols may be changed.

In addition, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery, instead of the above configuration, during the standby screen displayed by the symbol display device 41 during the period from when the pachinko machine is started until the game is started by the player. Additionally, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect (for example, an effect that causes a special character to appear) is performed.

In the pachinko machine of modification 4, the appearance probability lottery is configured to be divided into two ways, standard appearance probability and high appearance probability, but instead of this, it may be configured to be divided into three or more ways. In this case, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX changes in accordance with the degree of the distributed appearance probability.

《K8-5》Variation 5:
Processing by the pachinko machine in Modification 5 will be described below, showing the differences from Modification 4 described above. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in modification 5 is the same as that of the pachinko machine in modification 4, so the same parts as in modification 4 will be described using the same names and symbols.

In the pachinko machine of the above modification 4, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode, the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is set in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The configuration is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect in which a setting suggestion symbol (treasure box symbol) PX appears so that the appearance probability is based on the The appearance probability of the setting suggestion effect for each type of lottery setting is changed depending on the lottery result (whether it falls under high appearance probability or standard appearance probability). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of modification 5, in addition to the above-mentioned ending performance period, a setting suggestion effect is executed in which setting suggestion symbols appear with an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. This is possible, and the appearance period lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is started up, and the period for executing this setting suggestion performance is switched according to the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started up.

FIG. 642 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the appearance period lottery distribution table used when executing the appearance period lottery. As shown in FIG. 642, in the distribution table for the appearance period lottery, among the values of the lottery random number counter CZ of "0 to 99", "0 to 29" correspond to the high probability period, and "30 ~99'' corresponds to the standard probability period. "Standard probability period" is a parameter indicating a period in which the probability of execution is standard. "High probability period" is a parameter indicating a period in which the probability of execution is higher than the standard. According to the distribution table for appearance period lottery, the probability of being allocated to the high probability period is 3/10.

In the pachinko machine of this modification 5, the symbols in the game round (hereinafter referred to as the initial game round) within the period from when the pachinko machine is started until the number of times the game round reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The variable display was changed according to the lottery results of the appearance period lottery. Specifically, if the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period, a special character (for example, a goddess character) will appear during the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round, and the appearance period lottery will be performed. When the lottery result is in the standard probability period, the above-mentioned effect in which a special character appears during the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round is not performed. A player who plays a game first thing in the morning can know the lottery result of the appearance period lottery by observing whether a special character appears or not in the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round.

If the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a standard probability period, the ending performance is configured to execute a setting suggestion performance with the appearance probability based on the lottery settings, and the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period. In this case, the setting suggestion performance is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting in the normal reach in the game round. It should be noted that, instead of the normal reach, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect may be executed in the super reach or the special reach. Other processes executed in the pachinko machine of the fifth modification are the same as those executed in the pachinko machine of the fourth modification.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 5 configured as described above, the player observes whether or not a special character appears during the variation of symbols executed in the initial game round, and uses the observation result. Remember. Thereafter, the player estimates a predetermined period (ending period or normal reach period) in which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears from the previously memorized observation results, and during that predetermined period, the setting suggestion symbol PX, which is the symbol of the treasure chest, appears. The current lottery setting can be estimated by observing whether or not the setting-suggesting pattern PX appears and estimating the appearance probability of the setting-suggesting pattern PX. Considering the pachinko machine of the comparative example in which the predetermined period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX appears is fixed, according to the comparative example pachinko machine, the setting suggestion pattern PX depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. A predetermined period for appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 5, the predetermined period during which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears does not depend solely on the model of the pachinko machine, so the player cannot guess the lottery settings. I strongly feel that the appearance period of the setting suggestion symbols PX, which is necessary for the game, is random, and the setting suggestion symbols PX will appear depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration whether or not a special character has appeared in the initial game. It is possible to accurately grasp the predetermined period during which the performance is to be performed, and in turn, it is possible to accurately guess which lottery setting is currently set. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of variation 5, the player needs to play the game from the first game after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, , it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

According to the Pachinko machine of Modification 5, if a plurality of Pachinko machines of Modification 5 are installed in a game hall, the player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and receives the lottery result of the appearance period lottery. By selecting a gaming machine in which is a high probability period, it is possible to select a machine in which the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

The pachinko machine of modification 5 can also be modified as follows, for example. In the pachinko machine of Modification Example 5, a special character such as a goddess character appears during the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round as a method of informing the player of the lottery results of the appearance period lottery. Alternatively, the background color of the variable display of symbols in the initial game round may be changed, or the shape or color of the symbols may be changed.

In addition, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance period lottery, instead of the above configuration, the symbol display device 41 displays the standby screen during the period from when the pachinko machine is started until the player starts playing the game. Additionally, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect (for example, an effect that causes a special character to appear) is performed.

In the pachinko machine of modification 5, the appearance period lottery is configured to be divided into two ways, a standard probability period and a high probability period, but instead of this, it may be configured to be divided into three or more ways. In this case, the period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX appears changes depending on the degree of probability of the allocated period.

In addition, as a modification of this modification 5, when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a standard probability period, a setting suggestion effect is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting in the super reach in the game round. Then, when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period, a configuration may be adopted in which a setting suggestion effect is executed with an appearance probability based on the lottery setting in normal reach. In short, if the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period than if the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a standard probability period, the setting is set in the period of the production that has a higher probability of being executed in the game round. Any combination of reach may be used as long as the structure executes the suggestive effect.

《K8-6》Variation 6:
<Summary of processing in modification 6>
An overview of the processing performed by the pachinko machine in the sixth modification will be described first, pointing out the differences from the eleventh embodiment. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the sixth modification is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, so the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the eleventh embodiment, and the outline of the process is Explain.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 is, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is set. In the ending performance executed at the end of the execution mode, the setting suggestion pattern PX is made to appear with an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the configuration is such that the player can guess the lottery settings based on the difference in the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbols PX. On the other hand, in modification 6, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine is, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the machine shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode In the ending performance executed at the end of the game, a setting suggestion pattern PY on which a number corresponding to the current lottery setting type of the pachinko machine is written appears. In other words, the player is configured to be able to guess (in fact, specify) the lottery setting based on the difference in numbers written on the setting suggestion symbols PY. In addition, in the sixth modification, as in the eleventh embodiment, the probability of performing a setting suggestion performance in the ending performance is based on the display mode of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. The structure was designed to change depending on the situation.

Next, a specific example of control for executing the above-described process in the pachinko machine of modification 6 will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the eleventh embodiment in the process shown in FIG. Various processes executed, other processes executed in the audio emission control device 90, and various processes executed in the display control device 100 are the same.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of command corresponding processing (FIG. 601: Sk1914). The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In this ending effect setting process, Step Sk5101 to Step Sk5104, Step Sk5106, Step Sk5107, Step Sk5109, and Step Sk5112 are the same as Step Sk2801 to Step Sk2804 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the 11th embodiment. This is the same as Sk2807, step Sk2808, step Sk2810, and step Sk2813. The ending effect setting process in the sixth modification differs from the ending effect setting process in the eleventh embodiment in step Sk5105, step Sk5108, step Sk5110, and step Sk5111.

In step Sk5112, which is executed when it is determined in step Sk5102 that the display mode of the initial variation is special reach (step Sk5102: YES), a setting suggestion pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the setting information is written is added. The ending performance pattern is set as the performance pattern to be executed during the current ending period. The process of step Sk5112 is the same process as step Sk2813 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the eleventh embodiment. For example, if the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is "Lottery setting 6", the ending performance pattern (see Figure 582) to which the setting suggestion pattern PY with "6" is added is the current one. This is set as a performance pattern to be executed during the ending period. According to this ending performance pattern, the setting suggestion pattern PY with numbers written on it will always appear during the ending performance. In other words, the probability of appearance of the setting-suggesting pattern in the ending effect is 1/1 (100% in percentage terms). After executing step Sk5112, this ending effect setting process is ended.

In step Sk5102, it is determined that the display mode of the initial variation is not special reach (step Sk5102: NO), and in the subsequent step Sk5103, it is determined that the display mode of the initial variation is not super reach (step Sk5103: NO), and in the subsequent step Sk5104 In the case where it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not normal reach (step Sk5104: NO), the process advances to step Sk5105.

In step Sk5105, the setting suggestion propriety table for the first failure is specified from the three types of setting suggestion propriety tables stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d in modification example 6, a setting suggestion propriety table for the first time failure, a setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach, and a setting suggestion propriety table for the first super reach are stored in advance. has been done. In step Sk5105, a setting suggestion propriety table for the first failure is specified from these three types of setting suggestion propriety tables.

FIG. 644 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table for the first time failure. In the setting suggestion propriety table for the first time failure, 6048 values from 0 to 6047 are set as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion effect among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestion from 0 to 60479. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 6048 values from 0 to 6047 (6048 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/10.

Note that the winning value described above is an example, and as long as the probability of winning is not 1/1, the winning value can be any value.

Returning to FIG. 643, in step Sk5105, after specifying the setting suggestion propriety table for the first failure, the process proceeds to step Sk5106, where the identified setting suggestion propriety table, here, the setting suggestion propriety table for the first failure is referred to. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sk5107, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion propriety table in step Sk5106, it is determined whether the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk5101 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion effect. .

In step Sk5107, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the winning (Sk5107: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk5108, and a setting suggestion pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the setting information is written is added. The ending performance pattern is set as the performance pattern to be executed during the current ending period. The processing in step Sk5108 is the same as the processing in step Sk5112.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk5107 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is not supported (Sk5107: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk5109, and the current ending is changed to the normal ending effect pattern without the setting suggestion effect. Set as a performance pattern to be executed during the period. After executing step Sk5108 or step Sk5109, this ending effect setting process is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sk5101 to Sk5109, if the display mode of the initial variation is wrong and you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect will be executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. , an effect is executed in which a setting suggestion symbol PY with a number corresponding to the setting information appears with a probability of 1/10 specified by the setting suggestion propriety table for the first time failure shown in FIG. 644. be able to.

In step Sk5104, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk5104: YES), the process advances to step Sk5110.

In step Sk5110, the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion propriety tables stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 645 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach. In the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach, 7560 values from 0 to 7559 are set as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion performance among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestion from 0 to 60479. ing. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 7560 values from 0 to 7559 (7560 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/8. This probability of winning is higher than the probability of winning defined in the setting suggestion validity table for the first time failure.

The above winning value in the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach is just an example, and any value can be used as long as the probability of winning is higher than the winning probability stipulated in the setting suggestion propriety table for the first time losing. You can also do that.

Returning to FIG. 643, in step Sk5110, after specifying the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach, the process proceeds to step Sk5106, where reference is made to the specified setting suggestion propriety table, here, the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach. conduct.

By executing the processes of steps Sk5101 to Sk5104, Sk5110, and Sk5106 to Sk5109, if the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach and you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode ends. In the ending effect that is executed at the time, the setting suggestion symbol PY with a number corresponding to the setting information is displayed with a probability of 1/8 specified by the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach shown in Fig. 645. You can execute the effects that appear.

In step Sk5103, if it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk5103: YES), the process advances to step Sk5111.

In step Sk5111, the setting suggestion propriety table for the first super reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion propriety tables stored in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 646 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion propriety table for the first time super reach. In the setting suggestion propriety table for the first time super reach, 12096 values from 0 to 12095 are set as values for winning to execute the setting suggestion effect among the values of the random number counter CY for setting suggestion from 0 to 60479. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 60479, values other than the 12096 values from 0 to 12095 (12096 to 60479) are outliers. The probability of winning in this case is 1/5. This winning probability is higher than the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach.

The above winning values in the setting suggestion propriety table for the first time super reach are just examples, and any value can be used as long as the winning probability is higher than the winning probability stipulated in the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach. You can also.

Returning to FIG. 643, in step Sk5111, after specifying the setting suggestion propriety table for the first super reach, the process proceeds to step Sk5106, where the specified setting suggestion propriety table, here, the setting suggestion propriety table for the first super reach, is specified. Make a reference.

By executing the processes of steps Sk5101 to Sk5103, Sk5111, and Sk5106 to Sk5109, if the display mode of the initial variation is super reach, you win a jackpot in the winning lottery, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode In the ending effect that is executed at the end, a setting suggestion symbol with a number corresponding to the setting information is displayed with a probability of 1/5 specified by the setting suggestion propriety table for the first super reach shown in FIG. 646. It is possible to perform an effect in which PY appears.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 6 configured as above, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed when the pachinko machine is started, so that in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, The probability of winning the jackpot will change. Then, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written. An effect in which the special symbol PY appears is executed. Furthermore, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY during the ending period is configured to change based on the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine. For this reason, the player observes the symbol variations executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine, and first memorizes the display mode of the symbol variations. Thereafter, the player estimates the probability that the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear during the ending period from the previously memorized display mode of symbol fluctuations in the first game round, and waits for the setting suggestion symbol PY to appear. After waiting, it is possible to infer (in fact, specify) which setting the winning probability is based on the setting suggestion pattern PY that appears.

When considering a comparative example of a pachinko machine that only executes an effect in which setting suggestion symbols PY with numbers corresponding to setting information of lottery settings appear with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example In the pachinko machine, the probability of appearance of the performance in which the setting suggestion symbol PY appears depends only on the model of the pachinko machine, so the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of modification 6, an effect is executed in which the setting suggestion symbol PY appears so that the appearance probability is based on the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game round. Therefore, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the effect in which the setting suggestion pattern PY appears. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion symbol PY with numbers corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting will appear, and as a result, the interest of the game is improved. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of variation 6, since the player needs to play the first game after starting the pachinko machine, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, , it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

The pachinko machine of modification 6 has a miss, a normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach as display modes of symbol variations. The display modes of these symbol variations are arranged in this order from low to high expectations for a jackpot in the winning lottery. In addition, the higher the display mode of a symbol variation that is expected to result in a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round, the higher the probability that the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear. When the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY is high, the setting suggestion symbol PY is more likely to appear than when the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY is low, so the expectation of a jackpot in the winning lottery. When a display mode with high symbol fluctuation occurs, it becomes possible to guess the lottery setting in a short period of time. For this reason, from the perspective of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY, we would like the player to have a display mode of symbol fluctuation that has a high expectation of a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round. It can give a sense of expectation.

According to the pachinko machine of variation 6, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game on each machine first thing in the morning, and in the first game after turning on the power, By generating a reach that is highly expected to become a jackpot in a winning lottery, it is possible to create with one's own hands a table on which the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

《K8-7》Variation 7:
In the pachinko machine of the first modification of the eleventh embodiment, there is an ending period for executing the ending effect, a period for executing the effect indicating a loss, and a period for executing the effect indicating that a normal reach has occurred. and during the period for executing the effect indicating that a super reach has occurred, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in which a setting suggestion symbol appears with an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. The configuration is such that the period for executing this setting suggestion performance is determined from among the plurality of periods based on the display mode of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine. On the other hand, in Modification 7, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which one is the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, a setting suggestion picture with a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is written. The PY is configured to appear at a predetermined appearance probability (for example, a probability of 1/40), and then, similarly to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, an ending period for executing an ending effect is provided. , set from among the period for executing the effect indicating a miss, the period for executing the effect indicating that a normal reach has occurred, and the period for executing the effect indicating that a super reach has occurred. The period for performing the performance in which the suggesting symbols PY appear is determined based on the display mode of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 7 with the above configuration, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Probability changes. Then, during the period determined as described above, an effect is performed in which the setting suggestion symbol PY on which the number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written appears with a predetermined appearance probability. For this reason, the player observes the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine, and first memorizes the display mode of the symbol variation. Thereafter, the player estimates a predetermined period in which the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear from the previously memorized display mode of symbol fluctuations in the first game round, and will appear with a predetermined appearance probability in the predetermined period. From the setting suggestion symbol PY, it is possible to infer (in fact, specify) which setting information of the lottery setting is set.

When considering a configuration in which the pachinko machine of the comparative example executes an effect in which a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting appears at a predetermined fixed time, the pachinko machine of the comparative example In a pachinko machine, the period during which an effect in which a setting suggestion pattern PY appears is determined depending only on the model of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 7, the period for executing a specific performance is not determined solely depending on the model of the gaming machine, so the player cannot guess the setting information of lottery settings. It is up to the player's skill to strongly feel the randomness of the appearance period of the necessary setting suggestion symbols PY, and to take into consideration the display mode of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. It is possible to accurately grasp the period during which the effect in which the setting suggestion pattern PY appears is executed. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of variation 7, the player needs to play the first game after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, , it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

The pachinko machine of Modification Example 7 has a miss, a normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach as display modes of symbol variations. The display modes of these symbol variations are arranged in this order from low to high expectations for a jackpot in the winning lottery. On top of that, the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round, the higher the probability that the predetermined period in which the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear will be the symbol that will be executed in the game round. It is set to be the presentation period for the display mode of the fluctuation. The period of effects that have a high probability of being executed in a game session has a higher frequency of occurrence than the period of effects that have a low probability of being executed in a game session, so the expectation level for a jackpot in the winning lottery increases. When a display mode with high symbol variation occurs, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. For this reason, in terms of the frequency of occurrence during a predetermined period in which the setting suggestion symbol PY may appear, the symbol variations that have a high degree of expectation of a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first game round are presented to the player. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the display mode of ``I want the display mode to occur.''

According to the Pachinko machine of Modification Example 7, similar to the Pachinko machine of Modification Example 1, when a plurality of Pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game at each machine first thing in the morning, In the first game after turning on the power, by generating a reach with a high degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot in a winning lottery, the player can create with his own hands a machine on which the setting suggestion pattern PY is likely to appear.

《K8-8》Variation 8:
The processing performed by the pachinko machine in Modification 8 will be described first while showing the differences from Modification 2 of the 11th embodiment. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the eighth modification is the same as the pachinko machine in the second modification. That is, the pachinko machine of modification 8 is configured to include a distribution mechanism 250 that alternately distributes the entered game balls to the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234, similar to the pachinko machine of modification 2. (See Figure 630). In Modification Example 8, the following description will be given using the same names and symbols for the same parts as in Modification Example 2.

In the pachinko machine of modification 2, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which lottery setting is the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the machine shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the pachinko machine is displayed. In the ending effect executed at the end of the game, the setting suggestion pattern PX is made to appear with an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. In other words, the configuration is such that the player can guess the lottery settings based on the difference in the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbols PX. On the other hand, in Modified Example 8, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine is, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is set. In the ending performance executed at the end of the game, a setting suggestion pattern PY on which a number corresponding to the current lottery setting type of the pachinko machine is written appears. In other words, the player is configured to be able to guess (in fact, specify) the lottery setting based on the difference in numbers written on the setting suggestion symbols PY.

On top of that, in the pachinko machine of modification 8, as in modification 2, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY in the ending effect is determined by the symbol variation executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. The configuration changes depending on whether the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 233 or the special information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 234. And so. In other words, depending on whether the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 to either the first starting port 233 or the second starting port 234, the ending performance will be different. The configuration is such that the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion pattern PY is changed.

A detailed explanation using a flowchart of the ending performance will be omitted in this modification 8, but in the ending performance setting process in modification 8, the symbol variation executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine is the first If it is based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 233, a setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation first symbol is specified, and the setting suggestion is executed in the first game round. If the symbol variation is based on special information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 234, a setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation second symbol is specified. The setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation first symbol has, for example, the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 644) for the first time failure included in the pachinko machine of modification 6. The setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation second symbol has, for example, the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 645) for the first normal reach provided in the pachinko machine of modification 6. In this embodiment, the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion propriety table for the second initial variation symbol is higher than the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation first symbol. . After that, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion performance has been won by referring to the specified setting suggestion propriety table, and if the setting suggestion effect has been won, the ending is added with a setting suggestion symbol PY with a number corresponding to the setting information. Performs processing to set the performance pattern. On the other hand, if the winning result is not won, processing is performed to set a normal ending effect pattern in which no setting suggestion effect is performed.

According to the pachinko machine of variation 8, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery settings of the pachinko machine is changed, thereby changing the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. be done. Then, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written. An effect in which the special symbol PY appears is executed. Furthermore, according to the first time fluctuation first symbol flag and the first time fluctuation second symbol flag, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is transferred to the first starting port 233 and the second starting hole by the distribution mechanism 250. The configuration is such that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY in the ending effect changes depending on the destination stored in the first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag. has been done. For this reason, the player first observes and memorizes where the game balls that first enter the distribution mechanism 250 are distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine. Thereafter, the player estimates the probability that the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear during the ending period based on the previously memorized distribution destinations of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250, and waits for the setting suggestion symbol PY to appear. , it is possible to infer (in fact, specify) which setting of the winning probability is set based on the appearing setting suggestion pattern PY.

As a comparative example gaming machine, when considering a configuration that only executes an effect in which setting suggestion symbols PY with numbers corresponding to setting information of lottery settings appear with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example In this gaming machine, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY depends only on the model of the gaming machine, so the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of modification 8, during the ending period, it is possible to determine which route the game ball that first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine was distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. Since the effect in which the setting suggestion symbol PY appears is executed so that the probability of appearance is based on the distribution destination shown, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY. . Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion pattern PY will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of modification example 8, the player needs to play the game when a game ball first enters the sorting mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, in the morning. When a pachinko machine is powered on, it is possible to actively encourage players to play games from the beginning in the morning.

In the pachinko machine of Modification 8, it is more advantageous for the player if the distribution mechanism 250 distributes game balls to the second starting port 234 rather than the first starting port 233 (Fig. 573). In addition, the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion pattern PY is higher when the destination of the first game ball distribution by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 than when the first opening 233. . When the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is high, the setting suggestion pattern PY appears more easily than when the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is low. When the allocation destination is the second starting port 234, it becomes possible to estimate the lottery settings in a short period and with high accuracy. For this reason, the player is given a sense of expectation that the first game ball is distributed to the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250, also from the perspective of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY. be able to.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 8, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and the first distribution of game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is performed. By selecting a game machine whose tip is the second starting opening 234, it is possible to select a machine on which the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

《K8-9》Variation 9:
In the pachinko machine of the above modification 8, the game board 30 is provided with a distribution mechanism 250 that alternately distributes the entered game balls to the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234, and in the winning lottery. When you win a jackpot and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the type of the pachinko machine's current lottery setting is displayed. The configuration is such that a setting suggestion effect that causes The configuration is such that the appearance probability of a setting suggestion performance including a setting suggestion picture PY changes depending on which of the settings suggestion pictures PY is assigned. On the other hand, in modification 9, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect including a setting suggestion symbol PY on which a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is written, in addition to the period of the above-mentioned ending effect. The configuration is such that the period during which this setting suggestion performance is executed is such that the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is placed between the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250. The system is configured to switch depending on which category it is assigned to. Specifically, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed to the first starting port 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, the setting suggestion picture is displayed in the ending effect. It is configured to execute a setting suggestion performance including PY, and when it is distributed to the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250, it is suggested that a reach (any of normal reach, super reach, and special reach is possible) has occurred. The configuration is such that a setting suggestion performance including a setting suggestion picture PY is executed in the reach performance. In this modified example 9, a configuration is adopted in which a setting suggestion performance including a setting suggestion symbol PY is executed at a predetermined appearance probability (for example, a probability of 1/40) in each of the above-mentioned periods.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 9 with the above configuration, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed when the pachinko machine is started, so that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Probability changes. Then, during a period determined by whether the game ball that first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine was distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 to either the first starting port 233 or the second starting port 234. , an effect in which a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting appears is executed with a predetermined probability of appearance. For this reason, the player first observes and memorizes where the game balls that first enter the distribution mechanism 250 are distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine. After that, the player estimates a predetermined period in which the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear from the previously stored destinations to which the game balls are allocated by the distribution mechanism 250, and sets the setting to appear with a predetermined probability of appearance in the predetermined period. From the suggestion pattern PY, it is possible to infer (in fact, specify) which setting information of the lottery setting is set.

Assuming that the comparative example gaming machine is configured to execute an effect in which a setting suggestion symbol PY with numbers corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting appears at a predetermined fixed time, the comparative example In a gaming machine, the period during which the setting suggestion pattern PY appears depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 9, the period for executing a specific performance is not determined solely depending on the model of the gaming machine, so the player cannot rely on guessing the setting information of lottery settings. We strongly feel that the appearance period of the necessary setting suggestion pattern PY is random, and consider which route the game ball that first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine was distributed to by the distribution mechanism 250. Depending on the player's skill in placing the setting suggestion symbol PY, it is possible to accurately grasp the period during which the performance including the setting suggestion symbol PY is to be executed. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of modification 9, the player needs to play the game when a game ball first enters the sorting mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, in the morning. When a pachinko machine is powered on, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games from the beginning of the morning.

In the Pachinko machine of Modification 9, similarly to the Pachinko machine of Modification 3, when the game ball is distributed to the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250 is better than when the destination is the first starting port 233. This is highly advantageous for the player (see Figure 573). In addition, in the pachinko machine of Modification Example 9, when the distribution mechanism 250 initially distributes game balls to the second starting port 234, the game ball is distributed to the second starting port 234 in a game round. The configuration is such that the setting suggestion performance is executed during a performance period for a performance with a high probability of occurrence, that is, a normal reach. Since the period of a performance that has a high probability of being executed in a game round has a higher frequency of occurrence than the period of a performance that has a low probability of being executed in a game round, the distribution mechanism 250 determines the first game ball distribution. When the allocation destination is the second starting port 234, it becomes possible to estimate the lottery settings in a short period and with high accuracy. For this reason, from the perspective of the frequency of occurrence during the period in which the setting suggestion performance is executed, the player has an expectation that the first game ball distribution destination by the distribution mechanism 250 should be the second starting port 234. can be granted.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 9, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and the first distribution of game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is performed. By selecting a game machine whose tip is the second starting opening 234, it is possible to select a machine on which the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear.

As a modification of modification 9, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed to the first starting port 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, the reach (normal reach, super The configuration is such that the setting suggestion performance is executed in a reach performance that suggests that a reach (either reach or special reach is possible) has occurred, and when the allocation is distributed to the second starting port 234 by the distribution mechanism 250, in the ending performance described above. The configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect described above is executed.

In addition, as another modification of modification 9, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed to the first starting port 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, the normal reach The configuration may be such that the setting suggestion performance is executed in the performance of , and when the distributing mechanism 250 distributes to the second starting port 234, the setting suggestion performance is executed in the performance of super reach. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined period for executing the setting suggestion performance is determined from among a plurality of ready-to-reach performances.

《K8-10》Variation 10:
Processing by the pachinko machine in Modification 10 will be explained while showing the differences from Modification 4 of the 11th embodiment. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in modification 10 is the same as that of the pachinko machine in modification 4, so the following description will be given using the same names and symbols for the same parts as in modification 4.

In the pachinko machine of modification 4, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which lottery setting is the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the machine shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the pachinko machine is displayed. In the ending performance executed at the end of the game, the setting suggestion pattern PX is made to appear with an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. In other words, the configuration is such that the player can guess the lottery settings based on the difference in the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbols PX. On the other hand, in Modification 10, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of a pachinko machine is, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode In the ending effect executed at the end of the game, a setting suggestion pattern PY on which a number corresponding to the current lottery setting type of the pachinko machine is written appears. In other words, the configuration is such that the player can guess (actually, specify) the lottery setting based on the difference in the numbers written on the setting suggestion symbols PY. In addition, in the pachinko machine of modification 10, similarly to modification 4, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY in the ending effect changes based on the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery performed when the pachinko machine is started. The structure is as follows. That is, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY is changed in the ending performance depending on whether the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started is a standard appearance probability or a high appearance probability.

A detailed explanation using a flowchart of the ending performance will be omitted in Modification 10, but in the ending performance setting process in Modification 10, the standard appearance probability is the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery that is executed when the pachinko machine is started. In this case, a setting suggestion propriety table with the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation first symbol is specified, and if the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started has a high appearance probability. In this step, a setting suggestion propriety table having the same contents as the setting suggestion propriety table for the second symbol of the initial fluctuation is specified. After that, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion performance has been won by referring to the specified setting suggestion propriety table, and if the setting suggestion effect has been won, an ending with a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the setting information written on it is added. Performs processing to set the performance pattern. On the other hand, if the winning result is not won, processing is performed to set a normal ending effect pattern in which no setting suggestion effect is performed.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 10, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, thereby changing the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. be done. Then, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written. An effect in which the special symbol PY appears is executed. Furthermore, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY in the ending performance is configured to change depending on the result of an appearance probability lottery that is executed when the pachinko machine is started up. Similar to Modification 4, the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is configured to be notified to the player by making a special character such as a goddess character appear during the variable display of symbols in the initial game round. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a special character appears during the variation of the symbols executed in the initial game round, and memorizes the observation result. Thereafter, the player estimates the probability that the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear during the ending period from the previously memorized observation results, waits for the setting suggestion symbol PY to appear, and waits for the setting suggestion symbol PY to appear. It is possible to infer (in fact, specify) which winning probability setting is based on the picture PY.

As a comparative example gaming machine, when considering a configuration that only executes an effect in which setting suggestion symbols PY with numbers corresponding to setting information of lottery settings appear with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example In this gaming machine, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY depends only on the model of the gaming machine, so the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of modification 10, during the ending period, the setting suggestion symbol PY appears such that the appearance probability is based on the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started. Since the effect is executed, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion pattern PY will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of variation 10, the player needs to play the game first after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, the player In contrast, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 10, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery has a high appearance probability. By selecting a game machine with , it is possible to select a machine where the setting suggestion pattern PY is likely to appear.

The pachinko machine of modification 10 can also be modified as follows, for example. In Modified Example 10, the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is informed to the player by making a special character appear during the variable display of symbols in the initial game round. On the other hand, as a modification of Modification 10, a configuration may be adopted in which the configuration for notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is not provided. According to this configuration, although the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY is determined by an appearance probability lottery, the lottery result cannot be known, so the likelihood of the setting suggestion symbol PY appearing is more strongly randomized. You will feel sexual. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 10, there is even more expectation that the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion pattern PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written is likely to appear. It is possible to impart a feeling to the player.

In Modification 10, the appearance probability lottery is executed as the degree parameter deriving means for deriving the degree parameter for determining the degree of appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations can be adopted as long as a degree parameter for determining the degree of appearance probability can be derived, such as a configuration that switches between standard appearance probability and high appearance probability depending on the day of the week or date. .

In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 10, a special character such as a goddess character appears during the fluctuating display of symbols in the initial game round as a method of informing the player of the lottery results of the appearance probability lottery. Alternatively, the background color of the variable display of symbols in the initial game round may be changed, or the shape or color of the symbols may be changed.

In addition, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery, instead of the above configuration, the symbol display device 41 displays a standby screen during the period from when the pachinko machine is started until the player starts playing the game. Additionally, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect (for example, an effect that causes a special character to appear) is performed.

In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 10, the appearance probability lottery is configured to be divided into two ways, standard appearance probability and high appearance probability, but instead of this, it may be configured to be divided into three or more ways. In this case, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY changes in accordance with the degree of the distributed appearance probability.

《K8-11》Variation 11:
In the pachinko machine of the above modification 10, the appearance period lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is started, and when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the ending effect to be executed, a setting suggestion effect including a setting suggestion symbol PY with a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is executed, and further based on the lottery result of the appearance period lottery. In this way, the probability of appearance of a setting suggestion effect including a setting suggestion picture PY is changed. On the other hand, in this modification 11, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that includes a setting suggestion symbol PY on which a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is written, outside of the period of the above-mentioned ending effect. This configuration is such that an appearance period lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is started up, and a period for executing setting suggestion performance is switched based on the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started up. If the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine starts up is the standard probability period, the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion symbol PY is executed in the ending effect, and is executed when the pachinko machine starts up. If the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period, a setting that includes a setting suggestion symbol PY in a reach effect that suggests that reach (normal reach, super reach, or special reach is possible) has occurred. The structure was designed to carry out suggestive performances. In addition, in the present modification 11, a setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion picture PY is executed at a predetermined probability of appearance (for example, a probability of 1/40) in each of the above-mentioned periods. Similar to Modification 10, the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is informed to the player by making a special character such as a goddess character appear during the variable display of symbols in the initial game round.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 11 with the above configuration, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery settings of the pachinko machine is changed, so that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Probability changes. Then, in the period determined by whether the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started up is divided into the standard probability period or the high probability period, the number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is determined. An effect in which a setting suggestion pattern PY with ``'' appears is executed with a predetermined probability of appearance. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a special character appears during the variation of symbols executed in the initial game round, and memorizes the observation result. Thereafter, the player estimates a predetermined period in which setting suggestion symbols PY will appear from the previously stored observation results, and selects a lottery from among setting suggestion symbols PY that appear with a predetermined probability of appearance during that predetermined period. It is possible to infer (in fact, specify) which setting information of the setting is.

When considering a configuration in which a setting-suggesting pattern PY with numbers corresponding to setting information of lottery settings appears as a comparative example gaming machine, it is executed at a certain predetermined time. In a gaming machine, the period during which the setting suggestion pattern PY appears depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 11, the period for executing a specific performance is not determined solely depending on the model of the gaming machine, so the player cannot guess the setting information of lottery settings. Depending on the skill of the player, such as having a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the necessary setting suggestion symbols PY, and taking into account the results of the appearance period lottery that is executed when the pachinko machine is started, the setting suggestion symbols PY may be It is possible to accurately grasp the period during which the included effects will be executed. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of variation 11, the player needs to play the game first after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, the player In contrast, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

According to the pachinko machine of variation 11, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in a game hall, a player plays a game at each machine first thing in the morning, and the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is set during the high probability period. By selecting a game machine with , it is possible to select a machine where the setting suggestion pattern PY is likely to appear.

As a modification of Modification 11, if the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started is the standard probability period, the above setting suggestion performance is executed in the normal reach performance, and the pachinko machine If the lottery result of the appearance period lottery performed at startup is a high probability period, the setting suggestion performance may be executed in the super reach performance. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined period for executing the setting suggestion performance is determined from among a plurality of reach performances.

Furthermore, various modifications to Modification Example 10 can also be applied to Modification Example 11 as they are.

《K8-12》Variation 12:
In the eleventh embodiment described above, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting is the display of symbol fluctuations executed in the first game round from the time when the pachinko machine is started, and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting is the starting point. It was configured to vary based on the aspect. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be used as the starting point. Furthermore, in addition to the predetermined time when the pachinko machine is started, various times can be set as the starting point. Furthermore, instead of the first game round, the display mode of the symbol fluctuation executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, such as the second, third, fifth time, etc. The above change may be made based on the above.

《K8-13》Variation 13:
In the above modification 1, the appearance period in which the setting suggestion symbol PX appears starts from the time when the pachinko machine is started, and changes based on the display mode of the symbol change executed in the first game round from the time when the pachinko machine is started. It was structured like this. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be used as the starting point. Furthermore, in addition to the predetermined time when the pachinko machine is started, various times can be set as the starting point. Furthermore, instead of the first game round, the display mode of the symbol fluctuation executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, such as the second, third, fifth time, etc. The above change may be made based on the above.

《K8-14》Variation 14:
In the above modification 2, starting from the time when the pachinko machine is started, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting is changed from the time when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 is sorted. It was configured to change based on which one was assigned by the mechanism 250. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be used as the starting point. Furthermore, in addition to the predetermined time when the pachinko machine is started, various times can be set as the starting point. Furthermore, it is not limited to the game balls that first enter the distribution mechanism 250, but the number of game balls that have arrived at the distribution mechanism 250 from the time of the starting point, such as the second ball, third ball, fifth ball, etc., is a predetermined number. The above change may be made based on the destination to which the game ball is distributed when the number reaches the number.

《K8-15》Variation 15:
In the above modification 3, the appearance period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX for each type of lottery setting appears starts from the time when the pachinko machine is started, and the game ball that first entered the sorting mechanism 250 is configured to change based on which one is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be used as the starting point. Furthermore, in addition to the predetermined time when the pachinko machine is started, various times can be set as the starting point. Furthermore, it is not limited to the game balls that first enter the distribution mechanism 250, but the number of game balls that have arrived at the distribution mechanism 250 from the time of the starting point, such as the second ball, third ball, fifth ball, etc., is a predetermined number. The above change may be made based on the destination to which the game ball is distributed when the number reaches the number.

《K8-16》Variation 16:
In the above modification 4, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each lottery setting type is configured to change based on the result of the appearance probability lottery executed starting from the time when the pachinko machine is started. It had been. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be used as the starting point. Furthermore, in addition to the predetermined time when the pachinko machine is started, various times can be set as the starting point.

《K8-17》Variation 17:
In the above modification 5, the appearance period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX appears starts from the time when the pachinko machine is started up, and is configured to change based on the result of the appearance probability lottery executed from the start. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be used as the starting point. Furthermore, in addition to the predetermined time when the pachinko machine is started, various times can be set as the starting point.

《K8-18》Variation 18:
The above-mentioned modifications 12 to 17 are configurations in which the starting point is changed to a point other than when the pachinko machine is started up in each of the configurations of the 11th embodiment to modification 5, whereas modification 6 to modification Similarly, in No. 11, the starting point may be changed to a time other than the time when the pachinko machine is started, that is, a predetermined time (for example, noon). In addition, in each modification described later, in a configuration in which the starting point is the time when the pachinko machine is started, the starting point is similarly set to a time other than the time when the pachinko machine is started, that is, at a predetermined time (for example, noon). It is also possible to change the configuration to

《K8-19》Variation 19:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modification example, one of the periods in which the setting suggestion symbol PX or the setting suggestion symbol PY appears is set to the opening/closing mode when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. It was an ending period that was executed at the end of execution mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, the opening period that is executed after winning the jackpot in the winning lottery and then shifting to the opening/closing execution mode can be used as the period in which the setting suggestion symbol PX or the setting suggestion symbol PY appears. good. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode may be set as the period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX or the setting suggestion pattern PY appears. Furthermore, the predetermined period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX or the setting suggestion pattern PY appears may be one period in a game round, for example, a period in which a reach effect is performed.

《K8-20》Variation 20:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modification example, the period when the setting suggestion pattern PX or the setting suggestion pattern PY can appear is set to a predetermined period such as an ending period, and as long as the pachinko machine is operating, this predetermined period is always set. The structure was designed to allow for a period of On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which only a predetermined valid period can be a predetermined period in which the setting suggestion pattern PX or the setting suggestion pattern PY appears. The validity period can be, for example, from noon to 14:00. According to this configuration, it is possible to actively encourage players to play games between noon and 2:00 p.m. Further, the validity period may be a period after the duration of the game by the player exceeds a predetermined time (for example, one hour). The duration of the game by the player is determined by, for example, the time period during which the touch sensor 25a (see FIG. 565) continues to be turned on without any break, for example, 5 minutes or more. According to this configuration, it is possible to actively encourage the player to continue playing the game for a predetermined period of time or longer.

《K8-21》Variation 21:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modification, the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion pattern PX or the setting suggestion pattern PY is determined by various methods, but this is limited to the description of the eleventh embodiment and each modification. isn't it. For example, if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery, the next time (only one subsequent time), if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery, the setting suggestion symbol PY will be used with a probability of 1/1 during the ending period after the winning. It is also possible to have a configuration that appears in . According to this configuration, it is possible to actively encourage a player who has won a jackpot in the winning lottery to continue playing the game until he wins the next jackpot.

《K8-22》Variation 22:
In each modification of the eleventh embodiment, the distribution mechanism 250 that distributes the arrived game balls into two routes is adopted as the distribution means for sorting the arrived game balls into two routes. A configuration may be adopted in which game balls are distributed to three or more routes. In this case, the appearance probability or appearance period of the setting suggestion picture PX (or setting suggestion picture PY) is configured to change based on each distribution destination. In addition, the sorting mechanism 250, which serves as a sorting means for sorting arriving game balls to a plurality of routes, regularly switches the destination of distribution, but instead of this, the arriving game balls are randomly assigned to a plurality of routes. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the information is distributed to

《K8-23》Variation 23:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modification example, as a method of executing the setting suggestion pattern PX (or setting suggestion pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability, a random number for setting suggestion is generated, and the random number is The system adopted a configuration in which it is determined whether the random number corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion performance by comparing it with the validity table for setting suggestion. According to this configuration, if the game is played for a long time, the setting suggestion symbol PX (or the setting suggestion symbol PY) can be executed so that the appearance probability is specified in the win/fail table. When the period is short, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX (or the setting suggestion symbol PY) does not necessarily converge to the appearance probability defined in the validity table. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment and each modification example, the player is disappointed that the setting suggestion symbol PX (or setting suggestion symbol PY) does not appear for a long time and is unable to know the setting information of the lottery setting. There was a risk that he would feel the sensation. On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting suggestion pattern PX (or setting suggestion pattern PY) always appears at a predetermined appearance probability every predetermined specific period. For example, in the case of appearing with a probability of 1/10, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, the setting suggestion performance is always won 5 times out of 50 times. Furthermore, for example, when the setting suggestion performance is made to appear with a probability of 1/10, the number of times it appears is counted, and the setting suggestion performance may be won at the 10th time. According to these configurations, if the game is played for a certain period of time, the setting suggestion symbol PX (or the setting suggestion symbol PY) will always appear, so the player will not feel the above-mentioned disappointment.

《K8-24》Variation 24:
In each modification such as the eleventh embodiment, modification 2, modification 4, etc., in order to accurately guess the setting information of the lottery setting, the player must execute it in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. For each display mode of symbol fluctuations (or the first destination to which game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is started, or the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started). It is necessary to empirically understand the correspondence between the lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting-suggesting symbol by playing games with the pachinko machine for a long time. On the other hand, information indicating the above-mentioned correspondence relationship (hereinafter referred to as correspondence relationship information) may be disclosed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine. There are the following methods of disclosure:

For example, a pachinko machine may be configured to include means for displaying correspondence information during the first game after starting the pachinko machine. In addition, in a pachinko machine, during the period from when the pachinko machine is started until the game is started by the player, or when the game is not started for a long time after the game ends, the standby screen displayed by the symbol display device 41 is displayed. Additionally, it may be configured to include means for displaying correspondence information.

In addition, in place of the configuration disclosed on the pachinko machine, the above-mentioned measures can be made in the model explanation POP prepared next to the pachinko machine table, pachinko machine pamphlets, bulletin boards in game halls, Internet homepages, pachinko-related magazines, etc. It may also be configured to disclose related information.

《K8-25》Variation 25:
In each of the above-mentioned modifications such as Modification 1, Modification 3, and Modification 5, in order to accurately guess the setting information of the lottery settings, the player must check the correspondence between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol. relationship, and the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game after starting the pachinko machine (or the destination to which the first game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, or It is necessary to empirically understand the correspondence between the appearance probability lottery result (random lottery result executed at startup) and the appearance period of the setting suggestion symbol by playing games with the pachinko machine for a long time. On the other hand, information indicating the correspondence between the two above may be disclosed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine. As for the disclosure method, the disclosure method explained in Modification 24 can be applied to Modification 25 as is.

《K8-26》Variation 26:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX for each type of lottery setting or the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY on which a number corresponding to the lottery setting type is written is ( i) information indicating the display mode of symbol fluctuations to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the time when the starting point is reached; It is configured to change based on information indicating the distribution destination indicating where the entered game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 250, or (iii) information indicating the result of the appearance probability lottery executed at the starting point. was. On the other hand, as a modified example, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX or the setting suggestion symbol PY is changed to the above (i) to (iii), and the number of executions of the game is a predetermined number of times from the starting point. When this happens, it may be configured to change based on information indicating whether or not a jackpot was won in the winning lottery corresponding to the game round (information indicating the success/failure determination result of the winning lottery). In addition, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX or the setting suggestion symbol PY will be changed based on information indicating the type of jackpot when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, information on whether reach occurs, etc. may be configured. In the 11th embodiment, the types of jackpots are four types: 16R fixed variable jackpot, 8R fixed variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot, but instead, regardless of the number of rounds, they are simply fixed variable jackpot and normal jackpot. There may be two ways. Furthermore, there is no need for the restriction that "the number of times the game time is executed reaches a predetermined number of times from the time when the game time is the starting point", and there is no need to limit the number of times the game time is executed. , information indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery, information indicating the type of jackpot when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, information on whether reach has occurred, etc. good. Alternatively, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX or the setting suggestion symbol PY may be changed to the above (i) to (iii), and the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PX or the setting suggestion symbol PY may be changed to It may be configured to change based on a predetermined number of game balls (any number is acceptable as long as it is an integer of 1 or more) entering the gate 35, etc.). In short, the above (i) to (iii) can be replaced with any game information as long as it is predetermined game information that is stored in the game information storage means when a predetermined game condition is met. Note that the predetermined game conditions are preferably predetermined game conditions that the player can recognize as having been fulfilled. The player recognizes that the predetermined game condition has been met, and can then estimate the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion symbol based on the recognized memory. Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions need not be limited to one item, but may be a combination of a plurality of items.

《K8-27》Variation 27:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX and the number written on the setting suggestion symbol PY are determined based on the current lottery setting in the winning lottery. Ta. On the other hand, as a modified example, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PX and the number written in the setting suggestion symbol PY may be determined based on numerical information unrelated to the type of lottery setting. Numerical information unrelated to the type of lottery settings mentioned above includes, for example, information indicating the type of jackpot when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, information indicating whether reach has occurred, and information indicating the number of rounds in the event of a jackpot. , information indicating the number of jackpots on the current day or the previous day, information indicating the number of pending items, and various other numerical information can be employed. In the 11th embodiment, the types of jackpots are four types: 16R fixed variable jackpot, 8R fixed variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot, but instead, regardless of the number of rounds, they are simply fixed variable jackpot and normal jackpot. There may be two ways. The setting suggestion pattern is not limited to the above-described treasure box pattern PX or the treasure box pattern PY with numbers written on it, and can be replaced with other performance information images indicating performance information. The performance information image may be, for example, a stop symbol that is a combination of symbols. Specifically, combinations of the same odd numbered symbols displayed when the jackpot type is a variable jackpot, combinations of the same even numbered symbols displayed when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, and combinations of reach symbols. (A combination of symbols in which only one symbol is the same but the others are the same) may be configured to correspond to the production information image. When the type of jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, for example, a combination of the same odd symbols is displayed, but the display method is a direct probability variable symbol display mode that immediately displays the same combination of odd symbols as a stop symbol. There is a pachinko machine that has a promotion probability variable pattern display mode in which a combination of even-numbered symbols is once displayed as a stop symbol, and then the same combination of odd-numbered symbols is displayed. When the present invention is applied to this type of pachinko machine, a direct variable probability pattern display corresponding to numerical information indicating that the type of jackpot is a variable probability jackpot based on information indicating that a jackpot has been won in a winning lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which mode stop symbols are displayed with a predetermined probability. According to this configuration, the first stop symbol (combination of even symbols) in the promotion probability variable symbol display mode will be displayed with a probability less than or equal to the probability obtained by subtracting the above predetermined probability from 100%, and the direct probability variable symbol display will be displayed. It becomes possible to appropriately control the mode and the promotion probability variable symbol display mode. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with a direct variable probability symbol display mode and a promoted probability variable symbol display mode, information indicating that a jackpot has been won in a winning lottery and numerical information indicating that the type of jackpot is a variable probability jackpot is specified. It may be configured to display stop symbols in the direct probability variable symbol display mode as performance information images based on appearance probabilities. With this configuration as well, the first stop symbol (combination of even symbols) in the promotion probability variable symbol display mode will be displayed with a probability less than or equal to the probability obtained by subtracting the above appearance probability from 100%, and the first stop symbol (combination of even symbols) in the promotion probability variable symbol display mode will be displayed. Appropriate control of the promotion probability variable symbol display mode becomes possible.

Further, the performance information image may be an image indicating that a 16R probability variable jackpot has been won, which corresponds to numerical information indicating the larger number of rounds (16 rounds in the 11th embodiment). Specifically, in modification 8 or modification 9 of the eleventh embodiment, which includes a distribution mechanism 250 that alternately distributes entered game balls to the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234, the type of lottery setting Instead of the setting suggestion symbol PY with numbers corresponding to PY written on it, an image indicating that the above-mentioned 16R probability-variable jackpot has been won may be displayed with a probability of appearance based on the destination to which the game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. good. The image showing that the 16R probability variable jackpot has been won (hereinafter referred to as the 16R probability variable jackpot image) may be, for example, an image that shows numerical information as it is, or an image that shows a pattern that corresponds to the numerical information. . Furthermore, it may be a combination of the same odd-numbered symbols indicating a probability-variable jackpot, and an image having a unique color associated with numerical information. Even with the above configuration, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot image, so that the player can be actively given a sense of expectation that the 16R probability variable jackpot image will appear. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《K8-28》Variation 28:
From the sixth variation of the eleventh embodiment or the tenth variation of the eleventh embodiment, "a first lottery means that executes a first lottery process, and a second lottery means that performs a first lottery process, and In a gaming machine comprising a second lottery means for executing a process, a numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information, and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance, the first lottery process is performed in the first lottery process. a lottery probability setting means for setting a probability of a second lottery result in the second lottery process to a predetermined probability when the result is a second lottery result, and the specific performance execution means is configured to set the probability of the second lottery result in the second lottery process to a predetermined probability, Features such as ``a gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying an effect information image corresponding to the numerical information when a lottery result is obtained'' are extracted. Here, in Modification 6, the first lottery process is a lottery process for distributing the type of reach that is executed in the game round (strictly speaking, a lottery process that determines the variation time that can specify the type of reach). In Modification 10, the appearance probability lottery is applicable, but the present invention is not limited to these. For example, the first lottery process can be a winning lottery for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won, a distribution lottery for determining the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, or the like. In the eleventh embodiment and its variations, there are four types of jackpots: 16R fixed variable jackpot, 8R fixed variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot, but instead of this, it is simply a fixed variable jackpot regardless of the number of rounds. There may be two ways: and a normal jackpot. The second lottery process corresponds to the lottery process (Sk5106 and Sk5107 of the ending effect setting process in FIG. 641) that determines whether or not the setting suggestion effect has been won by referring to the setting suggestion propriety table, but is limited to this. It is not something that will be done. For example, in a pachinko machine that has a direct probability variable symbol display mode and a promotion probability variable symbol display mode, the second lottery process is a lottery to determine which of the direct probability variable symbol display mode and the promotion probability variable symbol display mode is to be executed. be able to. In Modification 6 and Modification 10, the setting suggestion pattern PY corresponds to the effect information image corresponding to the numerical information, but it is not limited to this. For example, the performance information image may be a combination of the same odd-numbered symbols as the first stop symbol.

《K8-29》Variation 29:
The pachinko machine of modification 29 of the 11th embodiment has the same hardware configuration as the pachinko machine of modification 6 of the 11th embodiment, and only a part of the software configuration is different. In the Pachinko machine of Modification Example 29, the same parts as in Modification Example 6 will be described below using the same names and symbols.

In the pachinko machine of modification 29, as with the pachinko machine of modification 6, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine is, the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and enters the opening/closing execution mode. In the ending performance executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode when the machine is shifted, a setting suggestion pattern PY on which a number corresponding to the current lottery setting type of the pachinko machine is written appears.

On top of that, in the pachinko machine of modification 29, like the pachinko machine of modification 6, the probability that the setting suggestion symbol PY appears in the ending performance is determined by the probability that the setting suggestion symbol PY will appear in the first game after starting the pachinko machine. The structure changes based on the display mode of the symbol variation (hereinafter also referred to as the display mode of the first variation) (see FIG. 643). However, in the pachinko machine of Modification Example 29, depending on the display mode of the initial fluctuation, the special information when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round (the game round that led to the ending performance) is displayed in the first start. The appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY also depends on whether it is obtained by entering the game ball into the opening 33 or by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34. The configuration was changed. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of modification 29, the probability of appearance of the setting suggestion pattern PY in the ending performance is as follows.

When the display mode of the first variation is incorrect, similarly to Modification 6, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY is 1/1 defined by the setting suggestion propriety table for the first deviation shown in FIG. 644. The probability is 10.

When the display mode of the first variation is normal reach, similarly to Modification 6, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY is 1/1 determined by the setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach shown in FIG. 645. The probability is 8. However, the probability of 1/8 is that the special information when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round (the game round that led to the ending effect) is that the game ball enters the first starting hole 33. This is limited to cases where the information was acquired by If the special information when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning lottery of this game round is obtained by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34, the probability is set to 1/1. . Note that the probabilities of 1/8 and 1/1 are not limited to these values, and the special information when it is determined that it is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game is the game input to the first starting port 33. The special information when a jackpot is determined in the winning lottery of the current game round is obtained by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, rather than the case where the special information is obtained by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. You can change it to any value as long as it is more expensive.

When the display mode of the first variation is super reach, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY is defined by the setting suggestion propriety table for the first time super reach shown in FIG. 646, as in Modification 6. The probability is 1/5. However, the probability of 1/5 is that the special information when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round (the game round that led to the ending performance) is that the game ball enters the first starting hole 33. This is limited to cases where the information was acquired by If the special information when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning lottery of this game round is obtained by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34, the probability is set to 1/1. . Note that the probabilities of 1/5 and 1/1 are not limited to these values, and the special information when it is determined that it is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game is the game input to the first starting port 33. In contrast to the case where the special information was obtained by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the special information when it was determined that it was a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round was obtained by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. You can change it to any value as long as it is more expensive.

When the display mode of the initial variation is special reach, the probability is 1/1 as shown in step Sk5112 of FIG. 643, similarly to modification 6.

According to the pachinko machine of modification 29 configured as above, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed when the pachinko machine is started, so that in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, The probability of winning the jackpot will change. Then, when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and move to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written. An effect in which the special symbol PY appears is executed. Furthermore, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY during the ending period is configured to change based on the display mode of symbol variation executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine. In addition, if the display mode of the symbol change executed in the first game round is normal reach or super reach, the winning lottery of the current game round (game round that led to the ending effect) The special information when it is determined that it is a jackpot is obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting port 33 or by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34. The configuration is such that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY changes depending on whether the setting suggestion pattern PY is the same or not.

For this reason, the player observes the symbol variations executed in the first game round after starting the pachinko machine, and first memorizes the display mode of the symbol variations. Thereafter, the player considers the previously memorized display mode of symbol fluctuations in the first game round, and the special information when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round is displayed in the first starting slot 3 By considering whether the game ball is acquired by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34 or by the game ball entering the second starting port 34, the setting suggestion picture is set during the ending period. It is possible to estimate the probability that PY will appear, wait for the setting suggestion symbol PY to appear, and infer (in fact, specify) which setting of the winning probability is based on the appearance of the setting suggestion symbol PY. .

When considering a comparative example of a pachinko machine that only executes an effect in which setting suggestion symbols PY with numbers corresponding to setting information of lottery settings appear with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example In the pachinko machine, the probability of appearance of the performance in which the setting suggestion symbol PY appears depends only on the model of the pachinko machine, so the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 29, the display mode of the symbol change performed in the first game round and the special information when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round are displayed in the first game round. The appearance probability is set based on whether the game ball was acquired by entering the first starting port 33 or by entering the second starting port 34. Since the effect in which the suggestion pattern PY appears is executed, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the effect in which the setting suggestion pattern PY appears. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion symbol PY with numbers corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting will appear, and as a result, the interest of the game is improved. can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine of modification example 29, if the display mode of the symbol change executed in the first game round is normal reach or super reach, it is determined that there is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round. The special information when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round is more important than the case where the special information when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round is acquired by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. The configuration is such that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is higher when the setting suggestion pattern PY is obtained by entering the game ball into the second starting hole 34. For this reason, the player is given a sense of expectation that the game ball should enter the second starting port 34 rather than the first starting port 33, also from the perspective of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY. be able to.

According to the pachinko machine of variation 29, the player needs to play the first game after starting the pachinko machine, so for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, It is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

In addition, in modification 29, whether the special information when it is determined that it is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round is acquired by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second The appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol PY changes depending on whether the symbol PY was obtained by entering the game ball into the starting hole 34 or not, because the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game round is normal reach. Although the configuration is such that there are cases in which there is a super reach and cases where there is a super reach, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may include only the case of normal reach, only the case of super reach, or include the case of miss. Furthermore, without taking into account the display mode of the symbol fluctuation executed in the first game round, the special information when it is determined that it is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round is sent to the first starting opening 33. The appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY may be configured to change depending on whether the setting suggestion pattern PY is obtained by entering the ball or by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34. can.

Further, in the modification 29, the setting suggestion pattern PY is adopted as the effect information image corresponding to the numerical information, but there is no need to limit it to this, and it is possible to replace it with another effect information image. Other performance information images include, for example, stop symbols that are a combination of symbols corresponding to numerical information. Specifically, the combination of the same odd numbered symbols displayed when the type of jackpot is a variable jackpot, the combination of the same even numbered symbols displayed when the type of jackpot is a regular jackpot, and the combination of reach symbols. (A combination of symbols in which only one symbol is the same but the others are the same) may be configured to correspond to the production information image. That is, instead of the configuration of Modification Example 29, for example, special information when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the winning lottery of the current game round is obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting port 33. The probability of appearance of the same combination of odd symbols indicating that the type of jackpot is a variable jackpot is changed depending on whether the jackpot is obtained by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34 or by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34. You can also.

《K8-30》Variation 30:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, the pachinko machine is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. It is also possible to adopt a configuration including two control devices such as a control device and a sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eleventh embodiment. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the classification described in the eleventh embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as long as all the processes in the eleventh embodiment can be executed.

<<L>> Twelfth embodiment:
《L1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 647 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking at each game round played by the pachinko machine 10, when winning a jackpot, when a reach occurs, and so on. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the front surface of the game board at a predetermined firing intensity, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 648 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 649 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning hole 32, first starting hole 33, second starting hole 34, through gate 35, and variable winning device 36 are inserted into the individual openings formed on the game board 30. be guided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 648).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that becomes an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery). If the electric role release is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to the electric role release state in which the electric role is opened in a predetermined manner. The through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, so the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, first starting port 33, second starting port 34, or variable winning device 36 are placed out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the opening 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is held triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed until it is stopped is also referred to as the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color or combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 650 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 650(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 650(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 650(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 650(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. A unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section In either the second symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the symbol display device for each game. At step 41, after a predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 650(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The number of balls to be held based on the number of balls entering the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first holding display area Ds1. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

As shown in FIG. 649, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the interval between the pair of nails 42a, 42b.

《L2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 651 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing data. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to an input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies each device with the operating power. Supply electricity. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 648) is turned off. do.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various winning holes such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable prize drive part 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive part 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 652 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. A fall random number counter CF is used for the fall lottery to decide whether to end the high probability mode (also referred to as high probability gaming state). The "high probability mode" is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is stored in the pending information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reservation area Ra in chronological order. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry are set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 650(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be explained. The fall random number counter CF is used in a game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode, when executing a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high probability mode. When winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The falling random number counter CF is updated regularly and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The updated value of the fall random number counter CF is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing. Then, after the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the value of the win/fail table stored in the falling lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 ( (fall lottery success/failure table), and it is determined whether or not to end the high probability mode.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fall random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 653 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table. FIG. 653(a) shows a pass/fail table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and FIG. 653(b) shows a pass/fail table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 653(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the low probability mode win/fail table as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 653(b), in the high probability mode win/fail table, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

"Small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is determined. It is possible to set a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the numbers are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the door 36b is closed. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table, and a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is made using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table. A low-probability mode can be set in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. As explained using FIG. 653, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win/fail table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 654 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 654(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 654(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game. The two allocation tables function as a reference table for allocating the jackpot type, but in this embodiment, they also function as a reference table for allocating the first drop mode and the second fall mode in the mode selection lottery. Details of the mode selection lottery will be described later.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 654(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. A 16R probability-variable jackpot, an 8R probability-variable jackpot, and an 8R regular jackpot are set.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot. The difference between the 16R fixed jackpot and the 8R fixed jackpot is that the number of openings of the door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R fixed jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R fixed jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and the support after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It is a jackpot that the mode becomes high frequency support mode. The number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 89" correspond to an 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these three types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot next, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 654(b), the distribution table for the second starting port includes jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34. A 16R probability-variable jackpot, an 8R probability-variable jackpot, and an 8R regular jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 99", "0 to 74" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "75 to 89" correspond to an 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type set in the distribution table for the first starting opening and the jackpot type set in the distribution table for the second starting opening are the same. However, a different configuration may be used instead. Further, the types of jackpots defined by each distribution table need not be limited to three types, and may be four types including, for example, 16R normal jackpot, two types, or five or more types. Further, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other numbers such as 4R and 5R, for example.

In addition, in the case of a losing result in the winning lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and no change in the lottery mode and support mode occurs. When sorting the type of jackpot, if it is a 16 probability strange jackpot or an 8R probability strange jackpot, as explained earlier, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high probability mode. This state continues until the next time a jackpot is won in a winning lottery or a winner is won in a fall lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 655 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery success/failure table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 655, three values, 0, 1, and 2, are set in the fall lottery success/failure table as the value of the fall random number counter CF that is a win in the fall lottery. Ninety-seven values from 3 to 99 are set as the value of the falling random number counter CF that is a failure. In other words, in a game in high probability mode, the probability of winning the fall lottery and ending the high probability mode and switching to low probability mode is 3/100, and the probability of losing the fall lottery and continuing in high probability mode is 3/100. It is 97/100. In addition, in this embodiment, the falling lottery is not performed in the game round of the low probability mode.

FIG. 656 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 656(a) shows a win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 656(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that will be the winning electric accessory. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 656(b) shows a win/fail table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (for the high-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 656(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that becomes an electric accessory opening lottery. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

<<L3>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 657 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 651) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《L4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as a support mode until the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed number of games. The "guaranteed number of games" is the number of games guaranteed to be played continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and is, for example, 100 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. After the guaranteed number of games exceeds 100, if the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that point, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

FIG. 658 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when winning a falling lottery in a game play before reaching the guaranteed number of games. FIG. 658(a) shows the state of lottery mode and the state of support mode. In FIG. 658, the numbers shown in brackets (for example, [1], [60]) indicate the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode If the lottery is won in a game before the number of games played after the game starts reaches the guaranteed number of games (60 times in the illustrated example), the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode. Then, from the 60th game round, a winning lottery is performed in the low probability mode. On the other hand, regarding the support mode, even if you win the falling lottery in the 60th game and the high probability mode ends and you move to the low probability mode, even if the high probability mode ends and you move to the low probability mode, the 100th time since the high frequency support mode started The high-frequency support mode continues until the game reaches the first game to be played.

FIG. 658(b) shows each state of the production, lottery mode, and support mode that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes in the 60th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery. In this example, up to the 60th game (from 1st to 59th), no one wins in the fall lottery, winning lottery, or reach lottery, so up to the 59th game, the winning lottery in each game A normal performance (also referred to as a normal performance) for announcing the results and lottery results is executed. Then, in the 60th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery, for example, a battle performance (hereinafter also referred to as a battle performance) in which the player's character and the enemy's character face off is executed.

The battle performance is a performance performed before the result announcement performance that announces the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, three types of battle effects are prepared: a normal battle effect, a life-or-death battle effect, and a dominant battle effect. Normally, battle effects suggest that the result is one of the following: an outcome that is advantageous to the player (win), an outcome that is disadvantageous to the player (defeat), or an outcome that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player (draw). It's a performance. The life-or-death battle performance is a performance that suggests either an outcome advantageous to the player (win) or an outcome disadvantageous to the player (defeat). The dominant battle performance is a performance that suggests either a result that is advantageous to the player (a win) or a result that cannot be said to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player (a draw). In the game rounds before the guaranteed number of games is reached, a normal battle performance is executed as a battle performance. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 658(b), a normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect.

After executing the battle performance, a result announcement performance is performed to announce the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. In the result announcement performance, a performance corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, if the player wins the falling lottery and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, a defeat effect is executed in which the player's character is defeated. Regardless of the lottery result of the falling lottery, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is executed. When a reach occurs without winning a falling lottery and without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, a draw performance is performed in which a player's character and an enemy's character are tied. In the example shown in FIG. 658(b), since the player wins the falling lottery in the 60th game round, a defeat performance is executed as a result notification performance.

In addition, as a result of winning the falling lottery in the 60th game run, the timing of shifting from high probability mode to low probability mode coincides with the timing when the 60th game winning the falling lottery starts. There is. That is, when the player wins the falling lottery in the 60th game, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. As for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as described above.

FIG. 659 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game before the guaranteed number of games is reached.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a player wins a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode, and then the high-frequency support mode starts. If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in a game before the number of games played after reaching the guaranteed number of games (in the illustrated example, 60 times), the 60th game ends and the opening/closing execution mode is changed. The lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the starting timing (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result announcement performance ends). On the other hand, the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 60th game ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts. That is, when the guaranteed number of games has not been reached, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game period in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Regarding the performance, in the example shown in Fig. 659, up to the 60th game (1st to 59th), there is no win in the fall lottery, hit lottery, or reach lottery, so the normal performance is used until the 59th game. Execute. Then, in the 60th game round in which the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, a battle performance and a result announcement performance that announces that he has won the jackpot in the winning lottery are executed. Furthermore, as explained earlier, in the game play before the guaranteed number of games is reached, a normal battle performance, which is a performance that suggests victory, defeat, or draw, is executed as a battle performance. be done. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 659, a normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect.

FIG. 660 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game rounds before reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player did not win the fall lottery, did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and reached the reach (so-called off reach) in the reach determination. ) is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process when it is determined that an error occurs. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then , did not win the fall lottery and did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery during the number of games played before the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started reached the guaranteed number of games (60 times in the illustrated example) FIG. 660 shows processing when it is determined that a reach (missing reach) occurs in the reach determination.

In the 60th game in which a player does not win the falling lottery, does not win a jackpot in the winning lottery, and is determined to have a reach (missing reach) in the reach determination, either a win, a loss, or a draw. A normal battle performance that can suggest that the above applies is executed, and then a draw performance in which the player's character neither wins nor loses is executed as a result announcement performance. In game rounds where you do not win the falling lottery and do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the lottery mode maintains the high probability mode and the support mode maintains the high frequency support mode, regardless of whether or not a reach occurs. do.

FIG. 661 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when the aforementioned battle effect or result notification effect is being executed. When a battle performance or a result notification performance is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. In the first display area 41aS, variable display and static display of symbols are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, a variable display of symbols is executed during a variable time, and a static display of symbols is executed during a stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, a battle performance or a result notification performance is performed.

FIG. 662 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a battle effect. FIG. 662(a) shows an example of a normal battle effect, FIG. 662(b) shows an example of a life-and-death battle effect, and FIG. 662(c) shows an example of a dominant battle effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as a battle performance, an image (moving image) of a confrontation between a female character on the player's side and a male character on the enemy's side is displayed. It's different. In the life-or-death battle shown in Figure 662(b), the swords held by both characters are larger than in the normal battle shown in Figure 662(a), creating an image that suggests that the only outcome of the battle is victory or defeat. ing. In the dominance battle shown in Figure 662(c), the sword held by the player's female character is larger than the sword held by the enemy's male character, and the player has the upper hand, and the only outcome of the battle is a win or a draw. (In other words, the image suggests that there is no losing.) In addition, in each battle performance, the images shown in FIGS. 662(a) to 662(c) are displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and the sound and light accompanying the images are transmitted through the speaker 46 and various other devices. output to the lamp 47.

The images of the normal battle effect, the life-or-death battle effect, and the superior battle effect described above are just examples, and the images are not limited to these. In this embodiment, each battle production had almost the same overall composition, with a female character on the player's side facing off against a male character on the enemy's side, and only the swords held by the characters were different. Alternatively, the overall composition may be completely different depending on the type of battle production. In short, a normal battle performance is a performance that can suggest that the outcome of a battle is a victory, a defeat, or a draw, while a life-or-death battle performance is a performance that can indicate that the outcome of a battle is a victory or a defeat. A dominant battle performance is a performance that can suggest that the result of a battle is either a victory or a draw. It can also be an aspect. Furthermore, even if the above-mentioned effects cannot be obtained, if they are different from each other, what kind of effects should be used for each of the normal battle effect, life-or-death battle effect, and superiority battle effect? You can also do it. The reason why the normal battle performance, life-and-death battle performance, and dominant battle performance are made to be different from each other is to change the sense of urgency and anticipation given to the player depending on the type of battle performance. If this is not desired, the normal battle performance, the life-or-death battle performance, and the superiority battle performance can each have the same performance content.

FIG. 663 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a result announcement performance executed after the battle performance. FIG. 663(a) shows a victory performance as a result notification performance, FIG. 663(b) shows a defeat performance as a result notification performance, and FIG. 663(c) shows a draw performance as a result notification performance. In the victory performance, as shown in FIG. 663(a), an image (moving image) of a female character on the player's side rejoicing at victory is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 661) of the display surface 41a, and the image is The accompanying sound and light are outputted to a speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 659 in which the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, a victory performance is executed as a result notification performance.

In the defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 663(b), an image (moving image) of a female character on the player's side saddened by defeat is displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and a sound accompanying the image is displayed. and light to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 658 in which the player wins the fall lottery, a defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

In the draw performance, as shown in FIG. 663(c), an image (moving image) indicating that the female character on the player's side has not lost is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 661) of the display surface 41a. , the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 output audio and light accompanying the image. In a game game before the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started reaches the guaranteed number of games, and in a game game where a reach occurred without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, A draw performance is performed as a result announcement performance. Note that each of the victory effect, defeat effect, and draw effect may be replaced with the images (moving images) shown in FIGS. 663(a) to 663(c) and may be other images (moving images). In short, a win effect can be any image that can notify the player that the result is advantageous, and a loss effect can be an image that can notify the player that the result is disadvantageous. Any image can be used as long as the draw effect can notify the player that the result is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous.

Next, a case will be described in which the player wins the fall lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, and the case where the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery.

FIG. 664 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when winning the falling lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. In Fig. 664(a), a probability-variable jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to high probability mode, the support mode shifts to high-frequency support mode, and then the high-frequency support mode starts. In the game after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the player wins the lottery and the lottery mode changes to the low probability mode and the support mode changes to the low frequency support mode. This shows the case where the data has been migrated. Even if you win the fall lottery in the 120th game, the lottery result in the fall lottery will be reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in that game, just as if you won the fall lottery in the 60th game. . That is, in the example of FIG. 664(a), in the 120th game, the player wins the falling lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game, a winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

Regarding the support mode, as described above, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, if the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (100 times), the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. However, even if the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode continues as the lottery mode at that point, the high-frequency support mode will continue as the support mode. Ru. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 664(a), if you win the fall lottery on the 120th game, the high probability mode continues until the 120th game, so the high frequency support mode continues. has been done. Then, in the 120th game, the player wins the fall lottery and the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode also shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

FIG. 664(b) shows each state of the performance, lottery mode, and support mode that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes in the 120th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery. In this example, until the 120th game (1st to 119th), there is no winning lottery or winning lottery, so until the 120th game, the result of the winning lottery for each game is announced. A normal performance (also called a normal performance) is performed to announce the lottery results. Then, in the 120th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery, a battle effect is executed. Here, as a battle performance, the life-and-death battle performance described earlier (see FIG. 662(b)) is executed.

After executing the life-and-death battle performance, a result announcement performance for announcing the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result announcement performance, a performance corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, if the player wins the fall lottery and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, a defeat effect in which the player's character loses is executed, as shown in FIG. 663(b). If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a victory effect in which the player's character wins, as shown in FIG. 663(a), is executed regardless of the result of the falling lottery. In the case of FIG. 664(b), since the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, a defeat performance is performed as a result notification performance.

In addition, as a result of winning the falling lottery in the 120th game run, the timing of shifting from high probability mode to low probability mode coincides with the timing at which the 120th game winning the falling lottery starts. There is. That is, when the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Further, as the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The timing at which the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode is almost the same as the timing at which the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Therefore, the low-frequency support mode is entered almost simultaneously with the start of the 120th game.

Next, a description will be given of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. Below, prior to explaining the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the process executed by the pachinko machines of Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 will be explained.

FIG. 665 is a timing chart illustrating processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 when, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, FIG. 665 shows that in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a probability variable jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high probability mode and the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode. After that, after the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the opening/closing is executed. A case is shown in which the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode at the start of the mode.

In the 120th game round in which the player does not win the falling lottery but wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, a battle performance is executed, and thereafter, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is executed as a result announcement performance. At the end of the 120th game in which the jackpot was won, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., the timing when the winning result announcement performance ends). At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side.

Here, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, if the player wins the falling lottery and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the pachinko machine in the lottery mode and the support mode It is assumed that the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, that is, the operation shown in FIG. 664 is performed. Comparing FIG. 664(b) and FIG. 665, it can be seen that the manner in which the support mode changes in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game is different between the two. During this period, when you do not win the falling lottery and win the jackpot in the winning lottery, you are in the high-frequency support mode as shown in Figure 665, but you win the falling lottery and win the jackpot in the winning lottery. If not, the low frequency support mode is set as shown in FIG. 664(b). Therefore, when assuming the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 that executes both the process shown in FIG. 664(b) and the process shown in FIG. 665, the player Then, by checking whether the high-frequency support mode has ended and shifted to the low-frequency support mode from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649), it is determined whether or not the fall lottery was won in the 120th game. You can recognize whether or not it is.

Specifically, in the 120th game, if the player is able to confirm that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) stops opening/closing before the result notification effect is executed, Assuming that the high-frequency support mode ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game is started, it can be predicted that the player has won the lottery at the 120th game. As a result, the player is able to predict the type of result announcement performance that will be executed later while the battle performance is being executed. In other words, if the high-probability mode has been played 100 times or more, and the high-frequency support mode is active, when a battle performance starts, the player's character and the enemy's character Although the content is such that it is not known until the results are announced who will win (in other words, it is not known until the results are announced whether you will win the falling lottery or the jackpot in the winning lottery), the players By confirming that the high-frequency support has ended from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a during the period when the battle performance is being executed, the player's character will lose the current battle (win the fall lottery). This can be predicted during the battle production. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of urgency and anticipation for the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery in the 120th game through the battle performance and result announcement performance. This is a problem with Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 666 is a timing chart illustrating a process when, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a player wins a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high-probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode, and then the high-frequency support mode is started. In the 120th game run after the 120th game, there is a case where the player does not win the falling lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. is shown.

In the 120th game round in which the player does not win the falling lottery but wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, a battle performance is executed, and thereafter, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is executed as a result announcement performance. The support mode shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game that won the jackpot started, and when the 120th game that won the jackpot ended, the opening/closing execution mode started. The lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result announcement performance ends). In other words, if the number of games played in the high probability mode is more than the guaranteed number of games (100 times), and if you do not win the fall lottery but win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing at which the machine shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is the timing at which the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (see FIG. 665). On the other hand, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 differs in that the timing is when the game round in which the jackpot is won starts (that is, at the start of the game round).

Comparing FIG. 664(b), which is an example of winning the falling lottery, and FIG. 666, which is an example of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game, It can be seen that the manner in which the support mode changes is the same. For this reason, before the result announcement performance is executed, the player, from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 649), may have won the falling lottery in the 120th game, or won the jackpot in the winning lottery. It is impossible to know whether you have won or not. In other words, while the battle performance is being executed, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of result notification performance (win performance or defeat performance) that will be executed afterwards. Therefore, if you win the falling lottery in the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the process shown in FIG. 664(b) is performed, and if you win the jackpot in the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 that executes the process shown in 666, the above-described problems of Comparative Example 1 can be solved.

However, even with the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the following problem occurs.

According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if you win the fall lottery or win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode is activated at the timing when the game round starts. shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) stops opening and closing operations. In the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, if you do not win the falling lottery and do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode maintains the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessories 34a ( 649) continues the opening/closing operation. Therefore, by confirming that the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 649) continues to open and close even after the start of the game, the player can avoid falling lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is possible to predict that the player did not win and also did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the battle performance executed in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached corresponds to not winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Even if it is a performance that suggests a superiority battle, it is confirmed that the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 649) continues to open and close, indicating that it is a draw, that is, winning the falling lottery. Moreover, since it is possible to predict that the player did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the dominant battle performance becomes meaningless. In other words, the battle performance executed in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached is only meaningful as a life-and-death battle performance in which the only outcome of the battle is victory or defeat. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, there was a problem in that it was not possible to widen the range of battle effects executed in the game rounds after the guaranteed number of games was reached.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment solves both the problems of Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 by having the following configuration.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a probability-variable jackpot through a winning lottery, shifts the lottery mode to a high probability mode, shifts the support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and then, after the high-frequency support mode starts, guarantees games. There are two modes for changing the support mode when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game after the number of games has been reached (for example, the 120th game). The two modes are hereinafter referred to as "first drop mode" and "last drop mode." In this embodiment, which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the second drop mode, is determined by a lottery (hereinafter referred to as mode selection lottery), and the results of the mode selection lottery are as follows: The configuration is such that the player is not notified.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved as a result of a winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. However, regarding the mode selection lottery, when a jackpot is achieved as a result of a winning lottery, , the jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine whether the mode is first drop mode or last drop mode. If a jackpot is achieved in the winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, the first-fall mode is selected using the distribution table for the first starting port shown in FIG. 654(a). If the game ball enters the second starting port 33 and there is a jackpot in the lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 33, the second starting port is sorted as shown in FIG. 654(b). A table is used to determine whether the mode is first drop mode or last drop mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39", "65 to 89" and "90 to 99" correspond to the first drop mode. "40 to 64" corresponds to the late fall mode. That is, in the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 64" which are associated with the 16R probability variable jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, "0 to 39" are "40 to 64" are associated with the first drop mode, and "40 to 64" are associated with the last drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "65 to 89", which is associated with the 8R probability variable jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, is associated with the first drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99", which is associated with the 8R normal jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, is associated with the first drop mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49", "75 to 89" and "90 to 99" correspond to the first drop mode. "50 to 74" corresponds to the late fall mode. That is, in the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 74" that are associated with the 16R probability variable jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, "0 to 49" are "50 to 74" are associated with the first drop mode, and "50 to 74" are associated with the last drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "75 to 89", which is associated with the 8R probability variable jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, is associated with the first drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99", which is associated with the 8R normal jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, is associated with the first drop mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the distribution result of the mode selection lottery for the value of the type counter C2 specified in the distribution table for the first starting port, and the type specified in the distribution table for the second starting port. Although the configuration is different from the distribution result of the mode selection lottery based on the value of the counter C2, the configuration may be the same.

FIG. 667 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and enters the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing when winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then , after the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the player does not win the fall lottery, but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. In addition, FIG. 667 shows a case where the first draw mode is won in the mode selection lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 120th game, where the player did not win the fall lottery, but won the jackpot in the winning lottery, and won the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery, it was suggested that he would fall under either victory or defeat. A life-and-death battle effect to be obtained (see FIG. 662(b)) is executed, and then a victory effect in which the player's character wins (see FIG. 663(a)) is executed as a result announcement effect. If you win the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery, the support mode changes from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support at the timing when the 120th game round in which you won the jackpot starts (i.e., at the start of the game round). At the timing when the 120th game in which the player won the jackpot ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., the timing immediately after the winning result announcement effect ends), the lottery mode changes from the high probability mode. Shift to low probability mode. These changes in the performance, lottery mode, and support mode match the changes in the performance, lottery mode, and support mode in Comparative Example 2 shown in FIG. 666.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and enters the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing when winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then , after the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the player does not win the fall lottery, but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. FIG. 668 shows a case where the player wins the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 120th game, the player did not win the fall lottery, but won the jackpot in the winning lottery, and won the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery, suggesting that the player would fall under either a win or a draw. A winning battle effect (see FIG. 662(c)) is executed, and then a victory effect (see FIG. 663(a)) in which the player's character wins is executed as a result notification effect. If you win the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery, the 120th game in which you won the jackpot ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., the timing immediately after the winning result announcement effect ends). As a result, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. These changes in the states of the lottery mode and support mode match the changes in the states of the lottery mode and support mode in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 665.

Comparing the case where you win the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery (Figure 667) and the case where you win the last drop mode in the mode selection lottery (Figure 668), you can see that the number of games played in the high probability mode is guaranteed. If it has been executed continuously for a number of times (100 times) or more, and if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery, the battle performance that is executed in that game time will be a win if you win in the first drop mode. , it is a life-or-death battle performance that could suggest that the game falls under either defeat, whereas if you win the late fall mode, it could suggest that you fall under either victory or a draw. The difference is that it is a dominant battle production. Regarding the timing at which the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, if you win in the first-rate mode, it is the timing at which the game round in which you won the jackpot starts (i.e., at the start of the game round). On the other hand, the difference is that when winning in the late fall mode, the timing is when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts.

FIG. 669 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery, does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and reaches the reach (so-called loser) in the reach determination. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when it is determined that a reach (reach) occurs. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then , in the game after the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the player does not win the fall lottery and wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. FIG. 669 shows a process when it is determined that a reach (missing reach) will occur in the reach judgment.

In the 120th game in which the player did not win the falling lottery, did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and was determined to have reached a reach (missing reach) in the reach determination, it falls under either a win or a draw. A dominant battle effect (see FIG. 662(c)) that may suggest that the player's character will win or lose is executed, and then a draw effect in which the player's character neither wins nor loses (see FIG. 663(c)) is executed as a result announcement effect. . In game rounds where you do not win the falling lottery and do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the lottery mode maintains the high probability mode and the support mode maintains the high frequency support mode, regardless of whether or not a reach occurs. do.

In summary, it is as follows. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game play after reaching the guaranteed number of games,
(A) If you win the falling lottery (regardless of the result of the winning lottery), or
(B) In the event that you do not win the fall lottery, win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and win the first to lose mode in the mode selection lottery,
A life-or-death battle performance is executed as a battle performance executed in the game round, and the support mode is shifted to a low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game round starts (that is, at the start of the game round).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games,
(C) If you do not win the falling lottery and do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, but it is determined that a reach will occur in the reach determination, or
(D) If you do not win the fall lottery, win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and win the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery,
A superior battle performance is executed as a battle performance executed in the game round, and the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the same timing in the above case (A) and the above case (B), so the guaranteed number of games is guaranteed. In the game round after reaching the number, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting that he has won the falling lottery based on the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) during the battle performance. play. Furthermore, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, it is possible to perform a life-or-death battle effect or a dominant battle effect, so it is possible to perform a battle effect executed in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. This has the effect of expanding the range of production.

<<L5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 670 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sl0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and stores detection information (ball entry detection information). After that, the process advances to step Sl0102.

In step Sl0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sl0103.

In step Sl0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear them to 0. Then, the updated values of each of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sl0104. Note that the change type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 674), which will be described later.

In step S10104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed as the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the entry process for the starting port in step Sl0104 will be described later. After executing step Sl0104, the process advances to step Sl0105.

In step S10105, through ball entry processing associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sl0105 will be described later. After executing step Sl0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 670: Sl0104).

FIG. 671 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sl0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sl0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sl0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sl0203.

In step Sl0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0204.

In step Sl0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sl0209.

In step Sl0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (S10201: NO), the process advances to step Sl0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Sl0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sl0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sl0207. On the other hand, in step Sl0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S10205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sl0207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0208.

In step Sl0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sl0209.

In step Sl0209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sl0204 or step Sl0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sl0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (S10209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sl0209: YES), the process advances to step Sl0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process advances to step Sl0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sl0212.

In step Sl0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 670) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding holding area. area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items to which 1 was added in step Sl0210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 are Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sl0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 is , is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sl0210. After executing step Sl0212, the process advances to step Sl0213.

In step Sl0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF. This is a process in which the type, presence or absence of a reach, determination result of the success or failure of the falling lottery (lottery result), etc., are determined before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0213, the process advances to step Sl0214.

In step Sl0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the destination judgment process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is set as a pending command. do.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 674: Step Sl0503) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sl0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 671: Sl0213).

FIG. 672 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process uses the pending information to determine the validity of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the occurrence of reach, the validity of the fall lottery, etc. based on the pending information. This is a process executed before the main controller 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery.

In step Sl0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 671) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Sl0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sl0302: YES), the process advances to step Sl0303 and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table stored in area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sl0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round (Sl0302: NO), the process advances to step Sl0304, and the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the ball is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0305, and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won by referring to the fall determination table stored in the fall determination table storage area 63d.

In step Sl0305, if it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (Sl0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0306, where the fall winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Sl0303. In step Sl0303, as described above, the low probability mode pass/fail table stored in the pass/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sl0305, if it is determined that the player has not won the falling lottery (Sl0305: NO), the process advances to step Sl0307. In step Sl0307, as a result of referring to the high probability mode success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode hit/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sl0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sl0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sl0310, the process advances to step Sl0311.

In step Sl0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sl0311, if it is determined that it corresponds to a variable probability jackpot (Sl0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0312, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0311 that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sl0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0313, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sl0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sl0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0314, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step Sl0316 that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sl0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0317, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0316 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Sl0316: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 670: Sl0105).

FIG. 673 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sl0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sl0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sl0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0402, and the number of reserved accessories SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sl0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Sl0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sl0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0404.

In step Sl0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 670) is stored in the first memory area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sl0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sl0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 674 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sl0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sl0502.

In step Sl0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sl0503.

In step Sl0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sl0502, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sl0503, the process advances to step Sl0504.

In step Sl0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0505.

In step Sl0505, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sl0506. In step Sl0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sl0506, the process advances to step Sl0507.

In step Sl0507, a gaming state transition process is executed to shift the gaming state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0508.

In step Sl0508, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0509.

In step Sl0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sl0503). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sl0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sl0509: NO), in step Sl0510 and step Sl0511, until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sl0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sl0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sl0509: YES), the process returns to step Sl0503 and each process from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 674: Sl0506).

FIG. 675 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sl0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step Sl0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sl0601: YES), the present game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sl0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sl0601: NO), the process advances to step Sl0602.

In step Sl0602, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

In step Sl0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in the process of variable display (Sl0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0603.

In step Sl0603, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sl0603, the present game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sl0602: YES), the process advances to step Sl0604.

In step Sl0604, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sl0604, the present game round control process is ended.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 675: Sl0603) of the game time control process.

FIG. 676 is a flowchart showing variation start processing. In step Sl0701, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN exceeds "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" or less means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sl0701, if it is determined that the total number of reservations CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sl0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sl0701: YES), the process advances to step Sl0702.

In step Sl0702, a hold information shift process is executed to set the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Sl0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sl0703, a gaming state determination process is performed to determine the gaming state. Details of the gaming state determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0703, the process advances to step Sl0704.

In step Sl0704, a fall determination process including a process when winning a fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Next, the process advances to step Sl0705.

In step Sl0705, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0705, the process advances to step Sl0706.

In step Sl0706, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the occurrence of a reach, etc. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl0706, the process advances to step Sl0707.

In step Sl0707, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, as well as information on whether reach occurs or not, and information on the variable time set in step Sl0706. After executing step Sl0707, the process advances to step Sl0708.

In step Sl0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on a 16R probability variable jackpot, information on an 8R probability variation jackpot, information on an 8R normal jackpot, or information on a losing result.

The variation command and type command set in step Sl0707 and step Sl0708 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sl0708, the process advances to step Sl0709.

In step Sl0709, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sl0709, the process advances to step Sl0710.

In step Sl0710, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl0710, this variation start process ends.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 676: Sl0702).

FIG. 677 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sl0801, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 652) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 652). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sl0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sl0801 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sl0801: YES), holding information shift processing for the first holding area in steps Sl0802 to Step Sl0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sl0801, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sl0801: NO ), the reservation information shift process for the second reservation area in steps Sl0808 to Step Sl0813 is executed.

In step Sl0802, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sl0803, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0804. In step Sl0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0805.

In step Sl0805, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sl0805, the process advances to step Sl0806.

In step Sl0806, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0807.

In step Sl0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sl0807 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in normal processing (FIG. 674). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step Sl0801, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (Sl0801: NO), step Proceed to SL0808.

In step Sl0808, the second start hold number RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0809. In step Sl0809, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sl0810, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0811.

In step Sl0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sl0811, the process advances to step Sl0812.

In step Sl0812, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0813.

In step Sl0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sl0813 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in normal processing (FIG. 674). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Game status determination process>
Next, the gaming state determination process will be explained. The game state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 676: Sl0703).

FIG. 678 is a flowchart showing the gaming state determination process. In step Sl0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl0901, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (S10901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0902, and it is determined whether the support mode is high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl0902 that the mode is high-frequency support mode (Sl0902: YES), the process advances to step Sl0903, and the high-accuracy/high-support flag is turned on. The high probability/high support flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (high probability/high support state). and is stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. When the high accuracy/high support flag is ON, it is in a high accuracy/high support state. When the high accuracy/high support flag is OFF, there is no high accuracy/high support state. According to step Sl0903, it becomes possible for the MPU 62 to specify the determination result as to whether or not the game is in a high accuracy/high support state when executing this gaming state determination process. After executing step Sl0903, the process advances to step Sl0904.

In step Sl0904, a high accuracy/high support command, which is a command containing information for making the sub-side control device recognize that it is in a high accuracy/high support state, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Sl0904, the gaming state determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0901 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sl0901: NO), or if it is determined that it is not high frequency support mode in step Sl0902 (Sl0902: NO), step Sl0903 and step Sl0904 are not executed. , the game state determination process ends.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be explained. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 676: Sl0704).

FIG. 679 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. In step Sl001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1001, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sl1001: YES), the process advances to step Sl1002.

In step Sl1002, the success/failure determination of the fall lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table for the fall lottery. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a winning in the fall lottery success/failure table (see FIG. 655) in the fall lottery table storage area 63d. Determine whether or not the In the following step Sl1003, if the result of the judgment in step Sl1002 is that the lottery is won (Sl1003: YES), the process advances to step Sl1004.

In step Sl1004, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1005, and the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The fall flag is a flag for storing the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the fall lottery. After executing step Sl1005, the process advances to step Sl1006.

In step Sl1006, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutively executed games in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (hereinafter simply referred to as "before the guaranteed number of games"). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. Since the guaranteed number of games counter PNC indicates the number of remaining guaranteed number of games, by determining whether PNC>0, the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode can be determined. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1006, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1006: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not before the number of guaranteed games (=after the number of guaranteed games), step Proceeding to Sl1007, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1007, the main fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1006 that the game is before the guaranteed game (Sl1006: YES), the fall determination process is immediately terminated. In addition, if it is determined in step Sl1001 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sl1001: NO), or if the result of the judgment in step Sl1003 is that the fall lottery has not been won (Sl1003: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

By the fall determination process configured as described above, the variation in the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing of the fall win as shown in FIG. 664 (after the guaranteed number of games, fall win) is realized.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 676: Sl0705).

FIG. 680 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sl1101, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1101, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (S11101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1102, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 653(b). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sl1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1101 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sl1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1103, where a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 653(a). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sl1104.

In step Sl1104, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is a jackpot win. In step Sl1104, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sl1104: YES), the process advances to step Sl1105.

In steps Sl1105 to Step Sl1109, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step Sl1105, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1105, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sl1105: NO), proceed to step Sl1106, and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 654(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1105 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sl1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1107, and the allocation table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 654(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. do. After executing the process of step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, the process advances to step Sl1108.

In step Sl1108, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is turned on. Specifically, if it is a 16R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 16R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 8R certain strange jackpot flag, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on. After executing step Sl1108, the process advances to step Sl1109.

In step Sl1109, a process for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 651), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1109, the process advances to step Sl1110.

In step Sl1110, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1110, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is selected (Sl1110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1111, and the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed (for example, 100 times). ) (=before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sl1111, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1111: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not before the number of guaranteed games (=after the number of guaranteed games), step Proceed to Sl1112.

In steps Sl1112 to Step Sl1116, various processes are executed when the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery after the guaranteed number of games.

In step Sl1112, a command after the guaranteed number of games is set. The command after the set guaranteed number of games is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). When the audio emission control device 90 receives this command after the guaranteed number of games, it becomes possible to understand that the current game time is the game time after the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sl1112, the process advances to step Sl1113.

In step Sl1113, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination (mode selection lottery) in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is the first drop mode. It was previously explained that in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, a distribution determination is made to distribute the types of jackpots, but in the game play after the high-frequency support mode is started and the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the fall A mode selection lottery is also carried out in which the manner in which the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery without winning the lottery is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is the distribution table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 654(a) or the second starting opening shown in FIG. 654(b). In the distribution table, it is determined whether the distribution result of the mode selection lottery matches the value set as the first drop mode. Then, in step Sl1113, it is determined whether the result of the mode selection lottery in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is the first drop mode (=last drop mode).

In step Sl1113, if the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode (Sl1113: YES), the process advances to step Sl1114, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1115.

In step Sl1115, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The first drop mode flag is a flag for storing that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode. After executing step Sl1115, the process advances to step Sl1116.

In step Sl1116, a first drop mode command is set. The set first drop mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). When the audio emission control device 90 receives this first drop mode command, it can understand that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode. After executing step Sl1116, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1110 that the mode is not high-frequency support mode (Sl1110: NO), if it is determined in step Sl1111 that the number of games is less than the guaranteed number of games (step Sl1111: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl1113 that the mode is not the first drop mode In other words, if it is determined that it is the late fall mode (step Sl1113: NO), the hit determination process is immediately ended. Note that if you win the falling lottery and win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the determination in step Sl1110 is NO, so the processes in steps Sl1111 to Sl1116 are not executed.

By the processing from Step Sl1101 to Step Sl1107 and the processing from Step Sl1110 to Step Sl1116 described above, the lottery mode and support mode at the timing of winning the jackpot as shown in FIG. fluctuations are realized.

In step Sl1104, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is not a jackpot (Sl1104: NO), the process advances to step Sl1117, and the reach determination table is referred to determine whether reach occurs in the game round. Make a determination as to whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 651). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Sl1118.

In step Sl1118, if the result of the reach judgment in step Sl1117 is that a reach occurs in the game round (Sl1118: YES), the process advances to step Sl1119 and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl1119, the process advances to step Sl1120.

On the other hand, in step Sl1118, if the result of the reach judgment in step Sl1117 is that a reach does not occur in the game round (Sl1118: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1120 without executing step Sl1119.

In step Sl1120, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1120, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 676: Sl0706).

FIG. 681 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sl1201, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1202.

In step Sl1202, it is determined whether the state is a high accuracy/high support state. Specifically, it is determined whether the high accuracy/high support flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high accuracy/high support flag is a flag that is turned ON in step Sl0903 in FIG. 678. If it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high accuracy/high support flag is not ON (Sl1202: NO), the process advances to step Sl1203.

In steps Sl1203 to Step Sl1209, processing for setting a variable time is executed in a gaming state that is not in a high probability/high support state (a gaming state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode). do.

In step Sl1203, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R certain variable jackpot flag, 8R certain variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON, Assuming that the jackpot has been won (Sl1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1204.

In step Sl1204, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1205, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the main variable time setting process ends.

In step Sl1203, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl1203: NO), the process advances to step Sl1206, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (Sl1206) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Sl1203 above, in Sx1206, the reach (so-called It is determined whether it is a game round in which a hit (missing reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sl1206: YES), and step Sl1207 Proceed to.

In step Sl1207, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1208.

In step Sl1208, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the main variable time setting process ends.

In step Sl1206, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1206: NO), the process advances to step Sl1209, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The non-reach variable time table is a so-called out-of-reach variable time table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the main variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high accuracy/high support flag is ON (Sl1202: YES), the process advances to step Sl1210.

In steps S1210 to S11213, a process of setting a variable time is executed in a high probability/high support state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

In step Sl1210, the high accuracy/high support flag is changed from ON to OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sl1211.

In step Sl1211, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games played in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (=before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sl1211, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Sl1211: YES), that is, if it is determined that the number of games is less than the guaranteed number of games, the process advances to step Sl1212.

In step Sl1212, a variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After executing step Sl1212, this variable time setting process ends.

In step Sl1211, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1211: NO), that is, if it is determined that the number of guaranteed games has elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sl1213, and the guaranteed number of games is played. Execute the variable time setting process after the number of times. The variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After executing step Sl1213, this variable time setting process ends.

<Variable time setting process before guaranteed number of games>
Next, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be explained. The variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 681: Sl1212).

FIG. 682 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1301, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R certain variable jackpot flag, 8R certain variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, it is a jackpot. Assuming that it is a win (S11301: YES), the process advances to step Sl1302.

In step Sl1302, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the variable time table group for before the guaranteed number of games,
(i) A variable time table for jackpots used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game before the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as before the guaranteed number of games played)・Referred to as variable time table for jackpot),
(ii) Variable time for falling that is used when you win the falling lottery in the game before the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode starts reaches the guaranteed number of games, but you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery. table (hereinafter referred to as the guaranteed number of games and falling variable time table),
(iii) In the game before the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, reach (so-called missed reach) A variable time table for out-of-reach occurrence that is used when this occurs (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for out-of-reach occurrence before the guaranteed number of games),
is provided. In step Sl1302, the variable time table for jackpot before the guaranteed number of games, which is (i), is specified from among (i) to (iii). The variable time table for jackpot before the guaranteed number of games is a variable time table for, for example, executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and executing a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 659). After executing step Sl1302, the process advances to step Sl1303.

In step Sl1303, the variation time table specified in step Sl1302 is referred to to obtain variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Sl1201 of the variation time setting process (FIG. 681). Subsequently, in step Sl1304, the variable time information acquired in step Sl1303 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl1301, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl1301: NO), the process advances to step Sl1305, and whether or not the winning lottery result for the current gaming round has been won is determined. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1305 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1305: YES), the process advances to step Sl1306.

In step Sl1306, a variable time table for falling is specified from the group of variable time tables for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (i) to (iii), the variable time table for falling before the guaranteed number of games, which is (ii), is specified. The variable time table for falling before the guaranteed number of games is a variable time table for, for example, executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and executing a defeat effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 658). After executing step Sl1306, the process proceeds to step Sl1303 described earlier, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1306 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

In step Sl1305, if it is determined that there is no winning in the falling lottery related to the current game round (Sl1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1307, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Execute this process (step Sl1307) when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Sl1301, and when the jackpot lottery has not been won for the current game round in step Sl1305. Therefore, in step Sl1307, it is determined whether or not this is a game round in which a reach (so-called missed reach) occurs among the game times in which there is no winning in the falling lottery and in which there is no big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sl1307: YES), and step Sl1308 Proceed to.

In step Sl1308, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1309.

In step Sl1309, a variable time table for occurrence of a missed reach is specified from a group of variable time tables for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (i) to (iii), the variable time table for occurrence of out-of-reach, which is (iii) before the guaranteed number of games, is specified. The variable time table for occurrence of missed reach before the guaranteed number of games is a variable time table for, for example, executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and executing a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 660). After executing step Sl1309, the process proceeds to step Sl1303, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1309 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl1307, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1307: NO), the process advances to step Sl1310, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h With reference to , the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The process of step Sl1310 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 681). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

<Variable time setting process after guaranteed number of games>
Next, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be explained. The variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 681: Sl1213).

FIG. 683 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1401, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R certain variable jackpot flag, 8R certain variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, it is a jackpot. Assuming that the winning result is determined (Sl1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1402.

In step Sl1402, it is determined whether or not the player has won the lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1402 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1402: NO), the process advances to step Sl1403.

In step Sl1403, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery for the current game round is the first drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1403, if it is determined that the first drop mode flag is ON (Sl1403: YES), the process advances to step Sl1404.

In step Sl1404, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1405.

In step Sl1405, a variable time table for the jackpot first drop mode is specified from a group of variable time tables for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games,
(iv) A jackpot used when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and win the first-down mode in the mode selection lottery in the game after the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games. In addition, a variable time table for first drop mode (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for after guaranteed number of games/jackpot first drop mode),
(v) A jackpot used when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and win the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery in the game after the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started reaches the guaranteed number of games. In addition, a variable time table for the after-fall mode (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for the after-guaranteed number of games/after-jackpot fall mode);
(vi) Variation for falling that is used when you win the falling lottery in the game after the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, but you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery. Time table (hereinafter referred to as variable time table for after guaranteed number of games/fall),
(vii) In the game after the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed number of games, there is a chance that you will not win the falling lottery, and you will not win the jackpot in the winning lottery. ) occurs, a variable time table for out-of-reach occurrence (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for out-of-reach occurrence after guaranteed number of games),
is provided. In step Sl1405, the variable time table (iv) for guaranteed number of games/jackpot first drop mode is specified from among (iv) to (vii). The variable time table for guaranteed number of games and jackpot first drop mode is, for example, a variable time table for executing a life-or-death battle effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result announcement effect (see FIG. 667). After executing step Sl1405, the process advances to step Sl1406.

In step Sl1406, the variation time table specified in step Sl1405 is referred to to obtain variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Sl1201 of the variation time setting process (FIG. 681). Subsequently, in step Sl1407, the variable time information acquired in step Sl1406 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1403 that the result of the mode selection lottery for the current game round is not the first drop mode, that is, the last drop mode (Sl1403: NO), the process advances to step Sl1408.

In step Sl1408, the variable time table for the jackpot after-fall mode is specified from the group of variable time tables for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for the after-guaranteed number of games/after-jackpot drop mode, which is (v), is specified. The variable time table for the after-guaranteed number of games/after-jackpot drop mode is a variable time table for, for example, executing a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and executing a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 668). After executing step Sl1408, the process proceeds to step Sl1406 described earlier, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1408 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

In addition, in step Sl1402, if it is determined that the winner has been won in the falling lottery related to the current game round (Sl1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1405 without executing step Sl1403 and step Sl1404, and the guaranteed number of games is won. Specify the variable time table for the later/jackpot first drop mode. If you win in the fall lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games and also win the jackpot in the winning lottery for the current game, the high frequency support mode flag is set in step Sl1007 of the fall determination process (FIG. 679). is turned OFF and NO is determined in step Sl1110 of the hit determination process (FIG. 680), so the first drop mode flag is not turned ON in step S1115 of the hit determination process (FIG. 680). Therefore, in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games, in order to avoid the process of Step Sl1403, a process of Step Sl1402 for determining a fall flag is provided between Step Sl1401 and Step Sl1403. Then, when the determination is YES in step Sl1402, the process proceeds to step Sl1405, and the variable time table for the guaranteed number of games/jackpot first drop mode is specified.

In step Sl1401, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl1401: NO), the process advances to step Sl1409, and it is determined whether or not the winning lottery result for the current gaming round was won. Determine. Specifically, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1409, if it is determined that the fall flag is ON (Sl1409: YES), the process advances to step Sl1410.

In step Sl1410, a variable time table for falling is specified from a group of variable time tables for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from among (iv) to (vii) described above, the variable time table for falling after guaranteed number of games (vi) is specified. The variable time table for falling after the guaranteed number of games is a variable time table for, for example, executing a life-and-death battle effect as a battle effect and executing a defeat effect as a result announcement effect (see FIG. 664). After executing step Sl1410, the process proceeds to step Sl1406, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1410 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1407, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

In step Sl1409, if it is determined that there is no winning in the falling lottery related to the current game round (Sl1409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1411, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Executing this process (step Sl1411) when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Sl1401, and when the jackpot lottery has not been won for the current game round in step Sl1409. Therefore, in step Sl1411, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a reach (so-called missed reach) occurs among the game times in which no winning is made in the falling lottery and there is no big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sl1411: YES), and step Sl1412 Proceed to.

In step Sl1412, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1413.

In step Sl1413, a variable time table for out-of-reach occurrence is specified from a group of variable time tables for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for occurrence of out-of-reach after the guaranteed number of games, which is (vii), is specified. The variable time table for occurrence of out-of-reach after guaranteed number of games is, for example, a variable time table for executing a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 669). After executing step Sl1413, the process proceeds to step Sl1406, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1413 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1407, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sl1411, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1411: NO), the process advances to step Sl1414, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h With reference to , the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The process in step Sl1414 is the same as the process in step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 681). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1407, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 675: Sl0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 684 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sl1501, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sl1501, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 681) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sl1501, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sl1501: NO), this fluctuation end processing is ended.

In step Sl1501, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sl1501: YES), the process advances to step Sl1502, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are selected. A process is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step Sl1503, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sl1503, the process advances to step Sl1504.

In step Sl1504, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1504, if it is determined that none of the flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl1504: NO), the process advances to step Sl1505.

In step Sl1505, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sl1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1506, and it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sl1506, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1507, and the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sl1507, the process advances to step Sl1508. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1506 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is less than or equal to 0 (Sl1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1508 without executing step Sl1507.

In step Sl1508, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1508, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sl1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1509, and the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100). It is determined whether or not it is before the guaranteed number of games (= before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not.

In step Sl1509, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1509: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not less than the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sl1510, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sl1510, the process advances to step Sl1511.

In step Sl1511, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1511, if it is determined that the fall flag is ON (Sl1511: YES), the process advances to step Sl1512 and the fall flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1512, this variable time end process is ended.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sl1508 (Sl1508: YES), or if it is determined that the number of games played is before the guaranteed number of games in step Sl1509 (step Sl1509: YES), steps Sl1510 to Step Sl1512 This variable time end processing ends without executing. Also, when it is determined in step Sl1511 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1511: NO), the present variable time end process is ended without executing step Sl1512.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sl1505: NO), the process advances to step Sl1513.

In step Sl1513, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1513, if it is determined that the fall flag is ON (Sl1513: YES), the process advances to step Sl1514 and the fall flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1514, this variable time end process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl1513 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1513: NO), this variable time end process is ended without executing step Sl1514.

In step Sl1504, it is determined that any one of the 16R certain variable jackpot flag, the 8R certain variable jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win. If so (Sl1504: YES), the process advances to step Sl1515, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl1515, this variation time end process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 674: Sl0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 685 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sl1601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big prize opening opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sl1601, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (Sl1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1602, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing processing period starts, which is a period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. , it is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sl1602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sl1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1603, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step Sl1603, if it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sl1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1604, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sl1604, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sl1604: YES), the process advances to step Sl1605. On the other hand, in step Sl1604, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sl1604: NO), the game state transition process is directly ended.

In step Sl1605, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1606. In step Sl1606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sl1607.

In step Sl1607, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in this embodiment, conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions"), This is a program in which conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the opening/closing execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

For example, the closing conditions are as follows.
- The elapsed time after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sl1607, the process advances to step Sl1608 described above.

In step Sl1608, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, an opening time of the same constant length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. Note that the third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1608, the process advances to step Sl1609.

In step Sl1609, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing processing period of the big prize opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sl1609, the process advances to step Sl1610 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sl1603, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Sl1603: YES), the process advances to step Sl1611.

In step Sl1611, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1611 that the opening period has ended (Sl1611: YES), the process advances to step Sl1612 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sl1613.

In step Sl1613, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sl1613, the process advances to step Sl1614.

In step Sl1614, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sl1615, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 674: Step Sl0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sl1615, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sl1602, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sl1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1616, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sl1616, the process advances to step Sl1617.

In step Sl1617, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". do. In step Sl1617, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed (Sl1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1618. On the other hand, in step Sl1617, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sl1617: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sl1618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step Sl1619.

In step Sl1619, round display end processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sl1619, the process advances to step Sl1620.

In step Sl1620, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1620, the process advances to step Sl1621.

In step Sl1621, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sl1621, the process advances to step Sl1622.

In step Sl1622, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sl1601, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sl1601: YES), the process advances to step Sl1623.

In step Sl1623, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sl1620), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step Sl1620, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sl1623: YES), the process advances to step Sl1624.

In step Sl1624, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1625, and transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sl1625, the process advances to step Sl1626 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1626, the process advances to step Sl1627.

In step Sl1627, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". In step Sl1627, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sl1627: YES), the process advances to step Sl1628.

In step Sl1628, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol variation (gaming round) ends. This is a command that includes information about. This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl1628 in the normal process (FIG. 674). After executing step Sl1628, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl1627, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sl1627: NO), the main game round control process is ended. Further, in step Sl1623, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sl1623: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 685: Sl1616).

FIG. 686 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sl1701, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step Sl1701 that the door 36b is not open (Sl1701: NO), the process advances to step Sl1702.

In step Sl1702, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1702 that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (Sl1702: YES), the process advances to step Sl1703.

In step Sl1703, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1704.

In step Sl1704, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 674: Step Sl0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sl1704, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sl1702, if it is determined that the opening condition for the door 36b is not satisfied (Sl1702: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sl1703 and step Sl1704.

In step Sl1701, if it is determined that the door 36b is open (Sl1701: YES), the process advances to step Sl1705.

In step Sl1705, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1705 that the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied (Sl1705: YES), the process advances to step Sl1706.

In step Sl1706, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sl1707.

In step Sl1707, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 674: Step Sl0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sl1707, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sl1705, if it is determined that the closing condition for the door 36b is not satisfied (Sl1705: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sl1706 and step Sl1707.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 685: Sl1625).

FIG. 687 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sl1801, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot among the jackpot flags is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1801, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sl1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1802, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sl1802, the process advances to step Sl1803.

In step Sl1803, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1804, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1805.

In step Sl1805, a guaranteed game count counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1806.

In step Sl1806, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sl1811.

On the other hand, in step Sl1801, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are not ON (Sl1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1807, and the 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1808.

In step Sl1808, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sl1809, where a guaranteed number of games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to 100. After that, the process advances to step Sl1810.

In step Sl1810, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sl1811.

In step Sl1811, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a command to be transmitted. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 674: Sl0508).

FIG. 688 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sl1901, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sl1901 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sl1901: NO), the process advances to step Sl1902.

In step Sl1902, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. In step Sl1902, if it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (Sl1902: NO), the process advances to step Sl1903.

In step Sl1903, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sl1903, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1903: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1903: YES), the process advances to step Sl1904.

In step Sl1904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sl1904, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sl1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1905, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main power support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is not the timing to end the variable display (Sl1904: NO), the process advances to step Sl1906.

In step Sl1906, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sl1906, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sl1906: NO), the electronic accessory support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1906 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sl1906: YES), the process advances to step Sl1907.

In step Sl1907, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1908, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sl1907 (Sl1907: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step Sl1908 (Sl1908: YES), the process advances to step Sl1909, where an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sl1910.

In step Sl1910, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sl1909 is a support win. In step Sl1910, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sl1910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1911, where the support win flag is turned ON and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sl1910, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sl1910: NO), the electric accessory support process is ended without executing the process of step Sl1911.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sl1907 (Sl1907: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sl1908 (Sl1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1912, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process advances to step Sl1913.

In step Sl1913, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sl1912 is a support win. In step Sl1913, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sl1913: NO), the main electric role support processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1913 that the support has been won (Sl1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1914, where the support winning flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sl1902, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sl1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1915, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sl1915, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1915: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in the general figure unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1915: YES), the process advances to step Sl1916.

In step Sl1916, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1917, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sl1901, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sl1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1918, and an electric utility opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The electric utility opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 688: Sl1918).

FIG. 689 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sl2001, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sl2001: YES), the process advances to step Sl2002.

In step Sl2002, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sl2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2002: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sl2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2003, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sl2003, the process advances to step Sl2004.

In step Sl2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sl2005, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sl2005, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sl2005: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sl2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2006, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sl2001, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sl2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2007, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sl2007, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2007: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2008, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . After that, the process advances to step Sl2009.

In step Sl2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sl2009: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2010, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

In step Sl2010, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sl2010: YES), the process advances to step Sl2011, and "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sl2009 (Sl2009: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sl2010 (Sl2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2012, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<L6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 690 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sl2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sl2101, the process advances to step Sl2102.

In step Sl2102, a game rendition process is executed. In the process for the game round performance, processing related to the performance to be executed in the game round from the start of symbol variation until it stops is performed. Details of the game presentation processing will be described later. After executing step Sl2102, the process advances to step Sl2103.

In step Sl2103, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the performance during the grand prize opening/closing processing period, and the performance during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sl2103, the process advances to step Sl2104.

In step Sl2104, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying a moving image showing the gaming state on the symbol display device 41, a process of displaying a demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as a moving image indicating the gaming state, a background moving image determined according to the gaming state determination value PN included in the gaming state command received from the main side MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Sl2104, the process advances to step Sl2105.

In step Sl2105, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sl2105, the process advances to step Sl2106.

In step Sl2106, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio data read out in the above BGM process and each production process. After executing step Sl2106, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for game rendition>
Next, the game rendition processing will be explained. The game play processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 690: Sl2102).

FIG. 691 is a flowchart showing the game rendition process. In step Sl2201, a game run performance setting process is executed. The game run performance setting process is a process that is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process that sets the performance to be executed in the game cycle when the game cycle is started. be. Details of the game performance setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2201, the process advances to step Sl2202.

In step Sl2202, a process for executing a game rendition is executed. The game round performance execution process is a process that is executed when the game round performance (notice performance and reach performance) is set to be executed in the game round performance setting process described above. The details of the game performance execution process will be described later. After executing step Sl2202, the main game rendition processing is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game run performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 691: Sl2201) of the game run performance process.

FIG. 692 is a flowchart showing the game rendition setting process. In step Sl2301, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sl2301, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sl2301: NO), the main game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2301 that a variation command and a type command have been received (S12301: YES), the process advances to step Sl2302.

In step Sl2302, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a falling win, the presence or absence of a reach, and the variation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step Sl2303.

In step Sl2303, a production pattern setting process is executed. The performance pattern setting process is a process that determines and sets the performance pattern (battle performance, result announcement performance, preview performance, and reach performance content and execution timing) to be executed in the current game round based on the performance pattern table. be. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2303, the process advances to step Sl2304.

In step Sl2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the active line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery in this game is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined from the contents of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Sl2304, the process advances to step Sl2305.

In step Sl2305, processing for setting a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols set in step Sl2304 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In addition, when selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process advances to step Sl2306.

In step Sl2306, information on the effect pattern, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl2307, and the production command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2307, the process advances to step Sl2308, and an update process at the start of variation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2308, the main game performance setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 692: Sl2303) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 693 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sl2401, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 657) of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Sl2402.

In step Sl2402, it is determined whether a high accuracy/high support command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sl2402, if it is determined that the high accuracy/high support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: NO), the process advances to step Sl2403.

The processing from step Sl2403 to step Sl2408 is to execute a jackpot performance, a reach performance, and a miss performance in a game round in a state other than the high accuracy/high support state.

In step Sl2403, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 692). . In step Sl2302, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot (Sl2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2404.

In step Sl2404, the performance pattern table for jackpot stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and the current A performance pattern for a jackpot corresponding to the value of a random number RN for performance pattern is acquired. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2404 is the jackpot obtained by executing step Sl1204 and step Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 681) executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time for Therefore, the performance pattern acquired in step Sl2404 corresponds to the variable time for the jackpot obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2404, the process advances to step Sl2405.

In step Sl2405, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2404 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After that, the main performance pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl2403, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl2403: NO), the process advances to step Sl2406, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Determine. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 692). In step Sl2406, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the current game round (Sl2406: YES), the process advances to step Sl2407.

In step Sl2407, the effect pattern table for reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and the current A performance pattern for generating a reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for performance pattern is acquired. The variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2407 is the reach obtained by executing step Sl1208 and step Sl1205 in the variation time setting process (FIG. 681) executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time for occurrence. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2407 corresponds to the variable time for generating a reach obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2407, the process proceeds to step Sl2405 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2407 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After that, the main performance pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sl2406, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl2406: NO), the process advances to step Sl2408.

In step Sl2408, the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) with reference to the performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound and light side ROM 93, A performance pattern for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern is acquired. The variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2408 is the reach obtained by executing step Sl1209 and step Sl1205 in the variation time setting process (FIG. 681) executed by the main MPU 62. This is a variable time for non-occurrence. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2407 corresponds to the variable time for non-reach occurrence obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2408, the process proceeds to step Sl2405 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2408 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After that, the main performance pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl2402 that a high accuracy/high support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: YES), the process advances to step Sl2409.

In steps Sl2409 to Step Sl2411, processing for setting a performance pattern is executed in a high probability/high support state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

In step Sl2409, it is determined whether a command after guaranteed number of games has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sl2409, if it is determined that the command after guaranteed number of games has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sl2409: NO), the process advances to step Sl2410.

In step Sl2410, performance pattern setting processing before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After that, the main performance pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sl2409, if it is determined that the command after the number of games has been received from the main side MPU 62 (step Sl2409: YES), that is, if it is determined that the guaranteed number of games has passed, the process advances to step Sl2411.

In step Sl2411, performance pattern setting processing after the guaranteed number of games is executed. The production pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After that, the main performance pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games>
Next, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be explained. The performance pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 693: Sl2410).

FIG. 694 is a flowchart showing performance pattern setting processing before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl2501, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 692). . In step Sl2501, if it is determined that the winning lottery result is a jackpot (Sl2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2502.

In step Sl2502, the performance pattern table corresponding to the jackpot is specified from the performance pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the performance pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games,
(I) A performance pattern table that executes a normal battle performance as a battle performance and a victory performance as a result notification performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for normal battle performance/victory performance);
(II) A performance pattern table that executes a normal battle performance as a battle performance and a defeat performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for normal battle performance/defeat performance);
(III) A performance pattern table that executes a normal battle performance as a battle performance and a draw performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for normal battle performance/draw performance);
is provided. In step Sl2502, the performance pattern table (I) for normal battle performance/victory performance is specified from among (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2502, the process advances to step Sl2503.

In step Sl2503, the performance pattern table for normal battle performance/victory performance specified in step Sl2502 is referred to, and the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 693) in step Sl2401 are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The variable time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2503 is determined by executing steps Sl1302 to S11304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 682) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time before the guaranteed number of games and for the jackpot. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2503 corresponds to the variable time before the guaranteed number of games and for the jackpot obtained by the main side MPU 62. After executing step Sl2503, the process advances to step Sl2504, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2503 is set.

By executing the processes from step Sl2501 to step Sl2504 described above, the performances in FIG. 659 (before the guaranteed number of games, jackpot win), that is, the normal battle performance as the battle performance and the victory performance as the result announcement performance, are performed. It can be carried out. After executing step Sl2504, the performance pattern setting process for the guaranteed number of games or earlier is ended.

In step Sl2501, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2505, and the result of the falling lottery for the current game round is a winning. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is a winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a falling winning that is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 692). . In step Sl2505, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery is a winning result (Sl2505: YES), the process advances to step Sl2506.

In step Sl2506, a performance pattern table corresponding to the falling win is specified from the performance pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, the performance pattern table (II) for normal battle performance/defeat performance is specified from among the above-mentioned (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2506, the process advances to step Sl2507.

In step Sl2507, the performance pattern table for normal battle performance/defeat performance specified in step Sl2506 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (Fig. 692) and step Sl2401 of the performance pattern setting process (Fig. 693) are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2507 is determined in step Sl1306, step Sl1303, and step This is the variable time for falling and before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1304. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2507 corresponds to the variable time before the guaranteed number of games and for falling obtained by the main side MPU 62. After executing step Sl2507, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2507 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for the guaranteed number of games or earlier is ended.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2506, Sx2507, and Sx2504 described above, the effects in FIG. 658 (before the guaranteed number of games, falling and winning), that is, the normal battle effect as the battle effect and the result announcement effect It is possible to perform a defeat performance.

In step Sl2505, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery for the current game round is not a win (Sl2505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2508, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 692). In step Sl2508, if it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (Sl2508: YES), the process advances to step Sl2509.

In step Sl2509, the performance pattern table corresponding to the missed reach is specified from the performance pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, the performance pattern table (III) for the normal battle performance/draw performance is specified from among the above-mentioned (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2509, the process advances to step Sl2510.

In step Sl2510, the performance pattern table for the normal battle performance/draw performance specified in step Sl2509 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and step Sl2401 of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 693) are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2510 is determined in step Sl1309, step Sl1303, and step Sl1309, step Sl1303, and This is the variable time for occurrence of out-of-reach before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1304. For this reason, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2510 corresponds to the variable time for occurrence of out-of-reach before the guaranteed number of games obtained by the main side MPU 62. After executing step Sl2510, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2510 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for the guaranteed number of games or earlier is ended.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2508 to Sx2510, and Sx2504 described above, the effects in FIG. 660 (before the guaranteed number of games, out-of-reach occurs), that is, the normal battle effect as a battle effect and the result announcement effect. You can perform a draw performance.

In step Sl2508, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl2508: NO), the process advances to step Sl2511.

In step Sl2511, the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) with reference to the performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound and light side ROM 93, A performance pattern for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern is acquired. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2511 is determined by executing step Sl1310 and step Sl1304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 682) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time for reach non-occurrence obtained by Therefore, the performance pattern acquired in step Sl2511 corresponds to the variable time for non-reach occurrence acquired by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2511, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2511 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for the guaranteed number of games or earlier is ended.

<Production pattern setting process after guaranteed number of games>
Next, the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be explained. The effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 693: Sl2411) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 695 is a flowchart showing performance pattern setting processing after the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl2601, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 692). . In step Sl2601, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot (Sl2601: YES), the process advances to step Sl2602.

In step Sl2602, it is determined whether the result of the falling lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is a winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a falling winning that is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 692). . In step Sl2602, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery is not a winning result (Sl2602: NO), the process advances to step Sl2603.

In step Sl2603, it is determined whether a first drop mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sl2603, if it is determined that the first drop mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2603: YES), it is assumed that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2604.

In step Sl2604, a performance pattern table corresponding to a jackpot win and a first-fall mode win is identified from the performance pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93. do. In the performance pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games,
(IV) A performance pattern table that executes a life-or-death battle performance as a battle performance and a victory performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for life-or-death battle performance/victory performance);
(V) a performance pattern table for executing a life-and-death battle performance as a battle performance and a defeat performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for life-or-death battle performance/defeat performance);
(VI) A performance pattern table for executing a dominant battle performance as a battle performance and a victory performance as a result notification performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for superior battle performance/victory performance);
(VII) A performance pattern table for executing a dominant battle performance as a battle performance and a draw performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for a superior battle performance/draw performance);
is provided. In step Sl2604, the production pattern table for the life-and-death battle production/victory production, which is (IV), is specified from among (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2604, the process advances to step Sl2605.

In step Sl2605, with reference to the performance pattern table for life-or-death battle performance/victory performance identified in step Sl2604, the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (Fig. 692) and step Sl2401 of the performance pattern setting process (Fig. 693) are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2605 is determined by executing steps Sl1405 to S11407 in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games (FIG. 683) executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time for the jackpot first drop mode after the guaranteed number of games obtained. Therefore, the performance pattern acquired in step Sl2605 corresponds to the variable time for the after-guaranteed number of games/jackpot first drop mode obtained by the main side MPU 62. After executing step Sl2605, the process advances to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2605 is set.

By executing the processes from step Sl2601 to step Sl2606 described above, the production in FIG. 667 (after the guaranteed number of games, jackpot win, first drop mode win), that is, the life-or-death battle performance as a battle performance and the result announcement performance. You can perform a victory performance. After executing step Sl2606, the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2603 that the first drop mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S12603: NO), it is assumed that the result of the mode selection lottery is the last drop mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2607.

In step Sl2607, a performance pattern table corresponding to a jackpot win and late fall mode win is identified from the performance pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93. do. Specifically, from among (IV) to (VII) described above, the performance pattern table for superior battle performance and victory performance, which is (VI), is specified. After executing step Sl2607, the process advances to step Sl2608.

In step Sl2608, the performance pattern table for superior battle performance/victory performance identified in step Sl2605 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (Fig. 692) and step Sl2401 of the performance pattern setting process (Fig. 693) are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2608 is determined in step Sl1408, step Sl1406, and This is the variable time for the after-guaranteed number of games/jackpot after-fall mode obtained by executing Sl1407. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2608 corresponds to the variable time for the after-guaranteed number of games/after-jackpot fall mode obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2608, the process advances to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2608 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

In addition, in step Sl2602, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery is a win (Sl2602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2604 without executing step Sl2603, and the production pattern table for life-or-death battle production/victory production is created. Identify.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2601 to Sx2603, Sx2607, Sx2608, and Sx2606 described above, the performance in FIG. 668 (after the guaranteed number of games, jackpot win, late fall mode win), that is, the dominant battle performance as a battle performance, A victory performance can be performed as a result announcement performance.

In step Sl2601, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl2601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2609, and the result of the falling lottery for the current game round is a win. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is a winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a falling winning that is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 692). . In step Sl2609, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery is a win (Sl2609: YES), the process advances to step Sl2610.

In step Sl2610, a performance pattern table corresponding to the falling win is specified from the performance pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a of the sound/light side ROM 93. Specifically, the performance pattern table (V) for the life-and-death battle performance/defeat performance is specified from among the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2610, the process advances to step Sl2611.

In step Sl2611, with reference to the production pattern table for life-or-death battle production/defeat production specified in step Sl2610, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (Fig. 692) and step Sl2401 of the production pattern setting process (Fig. 693) are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2611 is determined in step Sl1410, step Sl1406, and This is the variable time for falling after the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1407. For this reason, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl26011 corresponds to the variable time after the guaranteed number of games and for falling obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2611, the process advances to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2611 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2601, Sx2609 to Sx2611, and Sx2606 described above, the production in FIG. 664 (after the guaranteed number of games, falling and winning), that is, the life-or-death battle production as a battle production and the defeat as a result announcement production. You can also perform.

In step Sl2609, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery related to the current game round is not a win (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2612, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach is generated based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 692). In step Sl2612, if it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (Sl2612: YES), the process advances to step Sl2613.

In step Sl2613, a performance pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of a missed reach is specified from the performance pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, from among (IV) to (VII) described above, the performance pattern table (VII) for the dominant battle performance/draw performance is specified. After executing step Sl2613, the process advances to step Sl2614.

In step Sl2614, the performance pattern table for superior battle performance/draw performance specified in step Sl2613 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (Fig. 692) and step Sl2401 of the performance pattern setting process (Fig. 693) are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2614 is determined in step Sl1413, step Sl1406, and This is the variable time for occurrence of out-of-reach after the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1407. For this reason, the performance pattern acquired in step Sl2614 corresponds to the variable time after the guaranteed number of games and for the out-of-reach occurrence obtained by the main side MPU 62. After executing step Sl2614, the process advances to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2614 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2601, Sx2609, Sx2612 to Sx2614, and Sx2606 described above, the performance in FIG. 669 (missing reach occurs after the guaranteed number of games), that is, the dominant battle performance as a battle performance and the result announcement performance. You can perform a draw performance.

In step Sl2612, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl2612: NO), the process advances to step Sl2615.

In step Sl2615, the variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) with reference to the performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound and light side ROM 93, A performance pattern for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern is acquired. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2615 is determined by executing step Sl1414 and step Sl1407 in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games (FIG. 683) executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time for reach non-occurrence obtained by Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2615 corresponds to the variable time for non-reach occurrence acquired by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2615, the process proceeds to step Sl2606 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2615 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

<Process for executing game rendition>
Next, the process for executing the game round effect will be explained. The game run performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 691: Sl2202) of the game run performance process.

FIG. 696 is a flowchart showing the process for executing the game rendition. In step Sl2701, it is determined whether or not the performance pattern set in the game round performance setting process (FIG. 692) described above exists. In step Sl2701, if it is determined that the set performance pattern does not exist (S12701: NO), the process for executing the game round performance is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2701 that the set effect pattern exists (Sl2701: YES), the process advances to step Sl2702.

In step Sl2702, the set performance pattern is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Sl2703, where it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the game round performance. The game performance described here is a performance based on various performance patterns set in the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 693). These performance patterns store the content and timing of the performance to be executed in the relevant game round.

In step Sl2703, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the game round effect (S12703: NO), the process for executing the present game round effect is ended. On the other hand, in step Sl2703, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the game round effect (Sl2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2704.

In step Sl2704, a video display start command corresponding to the content of the game round performance set in the performance pattern is transmitted to the display control device 100. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl2705, and a light emission control process for the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the game round performance set in the performance pattern is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl2706, where the sound output LSI (not shown) starts reproducing audio data corresponding to the content of the preview performance set in the performance pattern. After executing step Sl2706, the process for executing this game round effect is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 697 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sl2801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Sl2802.

In step Sl2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 698 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sl2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of that image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sl3001, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 698) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence processing (Sl3001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the device 41.

In step Sl3002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sl3001) etc. . After that, the process advances to step Sl3003.

In step Sl3003, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sl3002), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process advances to step Sl3004.

In step Sl3004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sl3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl3005, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

《L7》Action/Effect:
As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the probability variable jackpot is won by the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high probability mode and the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode. After that, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games after the high-frequency support mode started (= after the number of guaranteed games), if you win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode will be activated. The frequent support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, and the timing of this shift is switched between the start of the game round and the end of the game round by a lottery (=mode selection lottery). If the timing of transitioning to low-frequency support mode is at the start of a game round, a life-or-death battle effect will be executed in that game round, and the timing of transitioning to low-frequency support mode is at the end of the game round. In this case, a superiority battle effect is executed in the game round. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, in the game after the guaranteed number of games, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the performance can be performed in two ways: a life-and-death battle performance and a dominant battle performance. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to widen the range of performances in the event that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if the falling lottery is won, or if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the mode selection lottery is In both cases where the first drop mode is won, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game round starts, and the electric accessories 34a (FIG. 649) stop opening and closing operations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether he or she has won the falling lottery or the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can give players a sense of urgency and anticipation for the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery for the game rounds after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, through the battle performance, and as a result, the game It is possible to further increase interest in the game.

Here, let us assume a pachinko machine that has only a first drop mode and does not have a last drop mode (=the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 described above). According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a life-or-death battle effect is executed that suggests that the player has either won a jackpot in the lottery (win) or won the fall lottery (defeat). Therefore, if the battle effect is started in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player will be able to decide whether the result of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery or the result of winning the falling lottery. Although this can be predicted and gives a sense of urgency and anticipation to the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery, it is not possible to give the player a sense of security in the battle performance including a draw. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, there are two ways to perform the life-and-death battle performance and the dominant battle performance. Since the performance can be performed, it is possible to perform a battle performance including a draw based on a superior battle performance, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security in the battle performance including a draw.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and wins in the first losing mode in the mode selection lottery, and in the falling lottery. The opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same in the winning game round. For this reason, even if the player confirms that the electric accessory 34a has stopped at the start of the game round, the player does not win the falling lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and the game round in which he wins the first-fall mode in the mode selection lottery. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the following: and the game round in which the falling lottery was won. However, by confirming that the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a has stopped at the start of the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, you can win the jackpot in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and be the first in the mode selection lottery. The player can understand that the game has been narrowed down to either the game round in which the falling mode was won or the game round in which the falling lottery was won. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game is narrowed down to one of the game times in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the game game in which the player won the first-to-be-fallen mode in the mode selection lottery, and the game game in which he won the falling lottery. By executing a life-or-death battle effect that suggests that the player has won the lottery, it is possible to improve the player's sense of urgency and anticipation as to whether he or she has won a jackpot in the winning lottery or won the fall lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after reaching the guaranteed number of games, a game that does not win the fall lottery, wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery. The opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same in the game times in which the player did not win the falling lottery, did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and was determined to generate a reach (so-called missed reach) in the reach determination. It is. Therefore, even if the player observes that the electric accessory 34a continues to open and close in the game round, he will not win the falling lottery, but will win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and will win the mode selection lottery. A game round in which you won the late fall mode, or a game round in which you did not win the falling lottery and did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, but it was determined that a reach occurred in the reach determination. You can prevent people from guessing. However, by confirming that the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a continues in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, you will not win the falling lottery, but will win the jackpot in the winning lottery. Either the game round in which the late fall mode was won in the selection lottery, or the game round in which the player did not win the fall lottery, did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and was determined to generate a reach in the reach determination. The player can understand that the list has been narrowed down to . Therefore, in this embodiment, in the game game where the person does not win the falling lottery and wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and also wins the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery, and the game where he does not win the falling lottery and wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. By executing a dominant battle effect that suggests that the game was narrowed down to one of the game rounds that were determined to generate a reach in the reach judgment without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. It is possible to improve the player's expectations as to whether the occurrence of a miss-reach or a missed reach has occurred, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the present pachinko machine 10, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery; In the case where you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery but win the falling lottery, it is possible to fall into either of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (win) or winning the falling lottery (defeat). Since the suggestive life-or-death battle effect is executed, the life-or-death battle effect can give the player a sense of urgency and anticipation for the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery for the game rounds after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this pachinko machine 10, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if you do not win the fall lottery, but win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and win the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery. and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (win) in the case where the player did not win the falling lottery and did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, but it was determined that a reach (so-called missed reach) would occur in the reach determination. A superiority battle performance is performed that suggests that either of the following is true: or not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery and not winning the falling lottery (tie). Since the dominant battle performance only results in a win or a draw, the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the dominant battle performance is executed than when the life-or-death battle performance is executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation through the dominant battle effect, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if you do not win the falling lottery and win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the life-or-death battle performance and the dominant battle performance are selected. Either of these will be executed. A life-and-death battle performance can result in defeat, but a superiority battle performance can only result in a win or a draw, so when a superiority battle performance is performed, it is better to perform a life-or-death battle performance than when a life-or-death battle performance is performed. It is highly advantageous for players. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by making a dominant battle effect appear. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, when winning the late fall mode in which a superior battle performance can be executed, the type of jackpot is limited to the 16R probability-variable jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player (see FIG. 654). , it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the distribution table, the 16R probability variable jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player, is associated with the late fall mode, which has a high degree of advantage. , the 8R normal jackpot, which has the lowest degree of advantage for the player, may be associated with a late fall mode, which has a high degree of advantage. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the late fall mode with a high degree of advantage is associated with two types of jackpots, for example, a 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R probability variable jackpot. According to this configuration, when winning the late fall mode in which a superior battle performance can be executed, the type of jackpot is limited to a variable jackpot that is highly advantageous to the player, giving the player a high sense of expectation. can do.

<<L8>> Modification of the 12th embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<L8-1>> Modification example 1:
In the twelfth embodiment described above, in the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games after the high-frequency support mode is started (=after the number of guaranteed games), the support mode is changed in the case of winning a jackpot. Which mode to adopt, the falling mode or the late falling mode, was determined by a lottery based on the jackpot type counter C2 (=mode selection lottery), but as a modification, in the winning lottery It may also be configured to be determined by lottery based on the used jackpot random number counter C1. Specifically, it is as follows. The hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the first modification is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, so the same names and symbols will be used for the same parts as in the twelfth embodiment, and the following explanation will be given. I do.

FIG. 700 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a high probability mode success/failure table provided in the pachinko machine of modification 1. In the high probability mode win/fail table, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 whose win/fail result is a jackpot is the same as in the high probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 653(b)) in the twelfth embodiment. Further, in the high-probability mode win/fail table, out of the values 0 to 1199, values of 0 to 15, where the win/fail result is a jackpot, are associated with the allocation results of the mode selection lottery. Specifically, among the values 0 to 15 that can be a jackpot, 10 values 0 to 9 are set to the first drop mode, and six values 10 to 15 are set to the last drop mode.

In the pachinko machine of the first modification, when it is determined that the high probability mode is selected in the winning determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, a winning lottery is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. At the same time, a mode selection lottery is held to determine whether the mode is the first drop mode or the second drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 700. However, if they match, the first prize is determined depending on whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value set in the first drop mode or the second drop mode as the distribution result of the mode selection lottery. Determine whether it is in fall mode or late fall mode.

As a result, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the start of the high-frequency support mode (= after the guaranteed number of games), the support mode will be changed first. It is possible to decide which mode to adopt, the falling mode or the late falling mode. Note that the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 other than the part for determining which mode to adopt among the first drop mode and the second drop mode is the same as in the twelfth embodiment. Further, various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and various processes executed in the display control device 100 are also the same as those in the twelfth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 1 configured as above, similar to the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, the performance when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached It is possible to widen the range of aspects of It can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game similarly to the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment.

In addition, in this modification example 1, by adding an item of the allocation result of the mode selection lottery to the winning/failure table and referring to the winning/failure table, the allocation result of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 can be obtained. was. On the other hand, as another modification, the win/fail table remains the same as in the twelfth embodiment, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 used for referencing the win/fail table is compared with a threshold value that distinguishes the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode. By doing so, it may be configured to determine whether the mode is the first drop mode or the second drop mode. Specifically, in the case of the win/fail table for the high probability mode illustrated in FIG. By determining whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is 10 or more, it is determined whether the game is in the last drop mode or the first drop mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode to adopt when a jackpot is won. In particular, according to this modification, when the possible value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is large, for example, 65536 (2 to the 16th power), the processing time required for determination can be shortened.

《L8-2》Variation 2:
In the twelfth embodiment and its first modification, the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the start of the high-frequency support mode (=after the guaranteed number of games). As a form of this, it was determined by lottery which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode to be adopted. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, based on the number of games played since the high-frequency support mode was started, one of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode is selected. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined which one to adopt. Specifically, it is as follows. The hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the second modification is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, so the same parts as in the twelfth embodiment will be described using the same names and symbols. I do.

In the pachinko machine of the second modification, the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 stores a mode selection table for determining the first drop mode or the last drop mode.

FIG. 701 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the mode selection table. As shown in the figure, the mode selection table shows whether it is the first drop mode or the last drop mode for the number of games played from the 101st time, which is after the guaranteed number of games, among the number of games played since the high-frequency support mode was started. It has a data structure that associates selection results. In the example of FIG. 701, the period from the 101st to the 105th time and the period from the 109th time onward are set as the number of games in which the first drop mode is played. The period from the 106th time to the 108th time is set as the number of times the game is played in the late drop mode.

In this way, in the mode selection table, for each game after the guaranteed number of games, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode will be changed to either the first drop mode or the last drop mode. It is stipulated whether the following mode is adopted. When the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 wins the jackpot in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games, the MPU 62 refers to the mode selection table and provides support in the game when the jackpot is won after the guaranteed number of games. It is determined whether the manner of mode change is to be changed into a first drop mode or a later drop mode. Note that the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 other than the part for determining which mode to adopt among the first drop mode and the second drop mode is the same as in the twelfth embodiment. Further, various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and various processes executed in the display control device 100 are also the same as those in the twelfth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the second modification configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, the performance when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is possible to widen the range of aspects of It can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game similarly to the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment. Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 2, the period after the guaranteed number of games has been reached is divided into multiple periods, and for each divided period, either the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode is selected. Since it is possible to set in advance whether or not to adopt the mode, it is possible to prevent the processing from being biased toward either the first drop mode or the last drop mode, resulting in a situation that is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to perform a production with a rich storyline.

Note that the mode selection results stored in the mode selection table shown in FIG. 701 are merely examples, and various configurations can be made, such as a configuration in which the number of times switching between the first fall mode and the second fall mode is increased. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of mode selection tables with different mode selection results are prepared in advance and the mode selection table to be used is switched. For example, in a win/fail table, a "big win" and a "small win" are provided as a result of a winning lottery, and when a small win is won, the mode selection table is switched. According to this configuration, switching between the first drop mode and the last drop mode can be performed in a variety of ways. In particular, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode selection table is switched when a small win is won, it is possible to create a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to notice that the player has won a small win in the winning lottery. , it becomes possible to switch the mode selection table.

Furthermore, the mode selection table displays the selection result of first drop mode or last drop mode for the number of games played from the 101st time after the guaranteed number of games among the number of games played since the high frequency support mode started. It was a data structure that corresponded to the data structure, but on the other hand, the selection result of first drop mode or last drop mode for the number of games played from the first time after the high frequency support mode started. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the In this configuration, from the first to the 100th game, the late drop mode is set (see FIG. 659).

In the second modification, the mode selection result corresponding to the number of games is obtained by referring to the mode selection table. On the other hand, as another modification example, without using a mode selection table, by performing an operation that compares the number of games with a threshold value that distinguishes between the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode, it is possible to select the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined whether the Specifically, in the mode selection table illustrated in FIG. 701, the thresholds for distinguishing between the first drop mode and the second drop mode are 101, 106, and 109, so by arithmetic processing, if the number of games is 101 or more, If the number of games is 106 or more and less than 109, it is determined that the mode is in the second drop mode, and if the number of games is 109 or more, the first drop mode is determined. mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode to adopt depending on the number of games played.

《L8-3》Variation 3:
In the twelfth embodiment and its first modification, the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the start of the high-frequency support mode (=after the guaranteed number of games). Which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the last drop mode, was determined by lottery. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the first drop mode or the last drop mode is determined according to the variable time set by the variable time setting process. With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

<<L8-4>> Modification example 4:
In the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment and the above-mentioned variations 1 to 3, the configuration is such that the player is not informed of which mode, the first drop mode or the second drop mode, will be adopted. On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is informed which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode is to be adopted. For example, at the start of a game round, the result of mode adoption is displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to this modification 4, when the player knows from the display on the symbol display device 41 that it is the late fall mode, the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) stops at the start of the game round. When this is acknowledged, it can be predicted that the player has won the falling lottery in the middle of the dominant battle performance. Therefore, according to the fourth modification, the player can leave room for predicting that he has won the falling lottery during the battle performance.

In the twelfth embodiment, the mode selection result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained by referring to the sorting table used when sorting the jackpot types. On the other hand, as another modification example, without using a distribution table, by performing an operation that compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 with a threshold value that distinguishes the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode, it is possible to determine whether the first-fall mode is It may also be configured to determine whether it is in the late fall mode. Specifically, in the allocation table for the first starting port illustrated in FIG. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 or more and less than 40, it is determined that the mode is the first drop mode, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 40 or more and less than 65, the mode is determined to be the last drop mode. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 65 or more, it is determined that the game is in the first drop mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode to adopt according to the jackpot type counter C2. In the case of the twelfth embodiment, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The distribution results of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 were configured to be different depending on the case obtained based on the entered ball, but according to this modification example 4, the distribution results are the same. .

《L8-5》Variation 5:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, the low frequency support mode is adopted as the first state specified by the state information in the state storage means, and the high frequency support mode is adopted as the state other than the first state. However, the first state and states other than the first state are not limited to these. For example, the first state may be high-frequency support mode, and the second state may be low-frequency support mode. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, the high-frequency support mode flag, which is state information, has a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode as states that can be specified. It is also possible to have three types of support modes (for example, low-frequency support mode, medium-frequency support mode, and high-frequency support mode) in which the frequency at which 34a is opened per unit time is divided into three stages. Furthermore, the configuration may have n types of support modes in which the frequency is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

《L8-6》Variation 6:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, the determination mode (lottery mode) of the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode. It may be configured to have three types of probability modes divided into three stages (for example, a low probability mode, a medium probability mode, and a high probability mode). Furthermore, the configuration may have n types of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

《L8-7》Variation example 7:
In the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment and its modified examples, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is explained using the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case may be employed in which a condition for executing a reach effect based on the counter value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is satisfied.

《L8-8》Variation 8:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, the main controller 60 side sets the variable time based on various types of information including the high-frequency support mode, and the audio emission control device 90 sets the variable time based on various types of information including the high-frequency support mode. The production pattern is set based on this information. On the other hand, as a modified example, a specific operation or display mode other than the above in the gaming machine, for example, a background video to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, is set based on various information including the high-frequency support mode. It may also be a configuration.

《L8-9》Variation 9:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, a battle performance (battle performance) is executed as a specific performance performed before the result announcement performance, but the above-mentioned specific performance is limited to a battle performance. There isn't. The above-mentioned specific performance may have any configuration as long as it is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a result announcement performance may be executed. With this configuration as well, the same effects as those described in the twelfth embodiment can be obtained.

《L8-10》Variation 10:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, the effects executed in one game are composed of two types of effects: a battle effect and a result announcement effect. It may be composed of three types of performances including the announcement performance. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be used.

《L8-11》Variation 11:
In the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment and its variations, there is a life-or-death battle effect that is executed when winning the falling lottery, and a life-or-death battle performance that is executed when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery and winning the first-to-fall mode in the mode selection lottery. The battle production was the same, but is not limited to this. For example, a part of the image that makes up the life-or-death battle effect is different between the life-or-death battle effect when you win a falling lottery and the life-or-death battle effect when you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and win the first to lose mode. It's good as well. For example, by creating images that are similar overall but that only some players can notice are different, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game. In addition, in the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment and its first modification, the dominant battle performance is executed when the fall lottery is not won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the late fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery. , the superiority battle effect executed when it is determined that a reach (so-called missed reach) will occur in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery was the same, It is not limited to this. For example, a part of the image forming the dominant battle performance may be different between the former dominant battle performance and the latter dominant battle performance. For example, by creating images that are similar overall but that only some players can notice are different, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

《L8-12》Variation 12:
In the twelfth embodiment and its variations, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game round after the guaranteed number of games, the life-or-death battle performance and the superiority battle performance are selectively executed in the game round. However, as a modified example, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game after the guaranteed number of games, in that game, either the life-or-death battle effect or the dominant battle effect is selected. It may be configured such that only one of them is executed, and the other of the life-or-death battle effect and the superiority battle effect is executed in the game rounds before the guaranteed number of games. For example, if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery for a game after the guaranteed number of games, or if you win in a fall lottery for that game, a life-or-death battle effect will be performed in that game, and If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery for a game round, or if you do not win in the falling lottery for the game round and you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, a dominant battle effect will be performed in the game round. It may also be a configuration. In this configuration, the dominant battle performance may be a battle performance with other content as long as it is different from the life-or-death battle performance, or may be a performance other than the battle performance with other content.

《L8-13》Variation 13:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, if after reaching the guaranteed number of games, a reach (so-called missed reach) occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. We have adopted a configuration in which a dominant battle effect is performed in the determined game round, but as a modified example, a reach is generated in the reach judgment without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Then, even in the game rounds in which it is not determined, a superior battle effect may be performed. That is, regardless of whether or not a reach has occurred in the reach determination, a superiority battle effect may be performed in a game round in which the player does not win the falling lottery and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery. According to this modification, effects similar to those described in the twelfth embodiment can be obtained.

《L8-14》Variation 14:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. A configuration including two control devices, such as a device and a sub-control device, may also be used. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the twelfth embodiment. Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment and its first modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the classification described in the twelfth embodiment; It is sufficient that the devices 60, 90, 100 as a whole can execute the various processes in the twelfth embodiment.

<<M>> Thirteenth embodiment:
《M1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 702 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking when a special drawing is drawn by the pachinko machine 10, when a winning prize is won, when a reach is generated, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25 (rotating operation), the game ball launch mechanism fires the game balls onto the front of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment) in conjunction with the operation. fired. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotation operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Then, when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the firing strength of the game ball is less than a predetermined value, the fired game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The firing mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, when the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 is more than a predetermined value, that is, when the firing strength of the game ball is more than a predetermined value, the fired game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The firing mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right-handed hitting."

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can "hit the ball to the right." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. It can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 703 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a general figure starting gate 35, a general electric winning device 34, a first special electric winning device 57, a second special electric winning device 58, and an out port 43. In particular, in this embodiment, a single resin flow path 301 through which the game ball can flow is provided in the right side game area where the game ball can reach when "hitting right". In this case, a general electricity winning device 34, a first special electricity winning device 57, a second special electricity winning device 58, and an outlet 43 are provided in order from the upstream side. In addition, in this embodiment, since no nails are provided on the path from when the game ball is launched until it reaches the distribution path 301, the game ball that is "hit to the right" hits the distribution path 301 on a fixed trajectory. reach. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since no nails are provided inside the circulation path 301, each game ball circulating inside the circulation path 301 has no variation in behavior and circulates in the same manner. Each component provided on the game board 30 will be explained below.

The general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, one game ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30.

The normal figure starting gate 35 is a gate provided with a through hole through which a game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through, a normal figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main control device 60, is executed. As a result of the general drawing lottery, when a general drawing is won, a general electric opening/closing execution mode is started in which the ordinary electric accessory 34b, which will be described later, performs an opening/closing operation. The general electric power opening/closing execution mode includes a general electric power opening period, a general electric power switching processing period, and a general electric power ending period. The normal electricity opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is started, and the normal electricity opening/closing processing period is a period in which the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The general electric accessory ending period is a waiting period after the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 34b is completed until the next general electric accessory lottery becomes executable. Note that even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed. In this embodiment, the standard figure starting gate 35 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30. In addition, in this embodiment, a general prize opening 32 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 35 can enter. More specifically, a general prize opening 32 is provided directly below the common figure starting gate 35. In addition, in the following explanation, the game ball passing through the standard pattern starting gate 35 is also referred to as "the game ball enters the standard pattern starting gate 35".

The ordinary electric winning device 34 includes a special figure starting opening 34a into which a game ball can enter, and a normal electric accessory 34b functioning as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the special figure starting opening 34a.

The normal electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the special figure starting port 34a, and when the above-mentioned normal electric opening/closing execution mode is started, the game ball is in a special state. The starting port 34a in the figure is in an open state in which the ball can enter.

In this embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b is constituted by a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state protrudes in front of the game board 30, and its upper surface forms the bottom surface of the flow path 301, The game ball is in a state where it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the normal electric accessory 34b is stored at the rear of the game board 30, and the game balls that have been distributed through the distribution path 301 are transferred to the special figure provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. The ball is now ready to enter the starting port 34a. Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 34b, and the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is reduced by the projections. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 34b of this embodiment is 0.7 seconds or more.

The special figure starting port 34a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, three game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71, and internal control by the main control device 60 is performed. A special drawing lottery is executed. As a result of the special drawing lottery, when a special drawing jackpot or special drawing small winning is won, a special electric accessory (the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b), which will be described later, performs an opening/closing operation. mode is started. The special train opening/closing execution mode consists of a special train opening period, a special train opening/closing processing period, and a special train ending period. The special electric service opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory starts, the special electric service opening/closing processing period is the period when the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory is actually executed, and the special electric accessory ending period is the waiting period until the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory starts. This is the waiting period after the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory is completed until the next special drawing lottery can be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the special drawing lottery, special drawing jackpot and loss are not set, but only special drawing small winning is set. In this embodiment, when a special figure small win is won as a result of the special figure lottery, a special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b executes an opening/closing operation is started.

The first special electric winning device 57 includes a first grand prize opening 57a into which game balls can enter, a first special electric accessory 57b that functions as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the first big prize opening 57a, and a first It is provided with a V winning opening 57av provided inside the big winning opening 57a.

The first special electric accessory 57b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first big prize opening 57a, and when the above-mentioned special electric opening/closing execution mode is started, the game ball is closed. is in an open state where the ball can enter the first big prize opening 57a.

In this embodiment, the first special electric accessory 57b is formed of a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state projects forward of the game board 30, with its upper surface forming the bottom surface of the flow path 301. The game ball is in a state where it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the first special electric accessory 57b is stored at the rear of the game board 30, and the game balls flowing through the distribution path 301 are placed below the first special electric accessory 57b. The ball can be entered into the first big prize opening 57a. Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b, and the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b is reduced by the projections. . As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b of this embodiment is 1.0 seconds or more.

The first big prize opening 57a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter when the first special electric accessory 57b is in an open state, and when a game ball enters, 15 game balls enter. The ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the V winning hole 57av is provided inside the first big winning hole 57a.

The V prize opening 57av is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, the V prize jackpot is won and the above-mentioned special electric opening/closing execution mode is started. As described above, in this embodiment, the V winning hole 57av is provided inside the first big winning hole 57a, and the game ball that enters the first big winning hole 57a is then reliably entered into the V winning hole 57av. The ball is configured to enter the ball. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 57av, a special electric opening/closing execution mode is started in which a second special electric accessory 58b, which will be described later, performs an opening/closing operation. In addition, in the following explanation, the game ball entering the V-winning hole 57av is also referred to as "winning the V-winning jackpot."

The second special electric winning device 58 includes a second grand prize opening 58a into which game balls can enter, and a second special electric accessory 58b that functions as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the second grand prize opening 58a. There is.

The second special electric accessory 58b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 58a, and when the above-mentioned special electric opening/closing execution mode is started, the game ball is closed. is in an open state where the ball can enter into the second big prize opening 58a.

In this embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b is formed of a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state protrudes forward of the game board 30, and its upper surface forms the bottom surface of the flow path 301. The game ball is in a state where it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the second special electric accessory 58b is stored at the rear of the game board 30, and the game balls flowing through the distribution path 301 are placed below the second special electric accessory 58b. The ball can be entered into the second big prize opening 58a.

The second big prize opening 58a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter when the second special electric accessory 58b is in an open state, and when a game ball enters, 15 game balls enter. The ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. Note that the above-mentioned V winning hole is not provided inside the second big winning hole 58a.

The out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30 and at the end of the flow path 301, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 43. .

Note that "entering the ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and a mode in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. In addition, it also includes a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being ejected from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area. In addition, the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32, the special drawing starting hole 34a, the first big winning hole 57a, the V winning hole 57av, and the second big winning hole 58a is also expressed as winning.

Next, various display sections provided on the game board 30 will be explained.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a special symbol display section 37a.

The special symbol display section 37a is a display section that displays special symbols in a variable and static manner. The special symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a fluctuating manner and in a static manner when a special symbol lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special symbol start opening 34a. When a special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of a game ball into the special symbol starting hole 34a as a trigger, the special symbol display section 37a changes the display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is performed. , Execute variable display of special symbols. Thereafter, the special symbol display section 37a stops displaying the special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a will also be referred to as special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the special symbol display section 37a is constituted by a 7 segment display in which 7 segment light emitting sections are arranged in a figure 8 shape. When a game ball enters a special pattern starting hole 34a, a 7-segment display constituting a special pattern display section 37a flashes in a predetermined manner and then lights up in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery. However, the special symbol display section 37a is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may have other configurations.

Note that the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a until the end of the variable display and the stop display is also referred to as a special symbol game round. That is, the special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting hole 34a. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one special symbol lottery every one special symbol game. Further, the time required for one special figure game is also called unit special figure game time. The unit special figure game time is the special figure fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display section 37a until the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed, and the time when the result of the special figure lottery is displayed. It is made up of the special figure stop time which is the time during which it is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in a general pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode or variable display of special symbols, a special pattern lottery based on the entry of the game ball is performed. It has a function to suspend the execution of the special drawing drawing (also called the special drawing holding function), and is equipped with a special drawing holding display section that displays information corresponding to the number of held special drawing drawings. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have the above-mentioned special figure holding function, nor is it equipped with a special figure holding display section.

The normal pattern unit 38 includes a normal pattern display section 38a and a normal pattern pending display section 38b.

The normal symbol display section 38a is a display section that displays normal symbols in a variable and static manner. The normal symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and in a stationary manner when a common symbol lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the common symbol starting gate 35. When a normal pattern lottery is executed with the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern starting gate 35, the normal pattern display section 38a changes the display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the general pattern lottery is performed. , Executes a variable display of normal symbols. Thereafter, the normal symbol display section 38a stops displaying the normal symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time period from when the fluctuating display of the regular symbol starts until it is stopped and displayed on the regular symbol display section 38a is also referred to as the regular symbol fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol display section 38a is constituted by a 7 segment display in which 7 segment light emitting sections are arranged in a figure 8 shape. When a game ball enters the regular symbol starting gate 35, a 7-segment display constituting a regular symbol display section 38a flashes in a predetermined manner and then lights up in a prescribed manner corresponding to the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery. However, the normal symbol display section 38a is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may have other configurations.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a until the end of the variable display and the stop display is also called a normal symbol game round. That is, the regular game game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the regular lottery that is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the regular game starting gate 35. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one regular lottery game every single regular lottery game. Further, the time required for one regular game game is also called unit regular game time. The unit normal pattern game time is the normal pattern fluctuation time which is the time from the start of the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display section 38a until the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and It is made up of the regular figure stop time which is the time during which the figure is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general pattern starting gate 35 during execution of the normal pattern opening/closing execution mode or fluctuating display of normal symbols, the general pattern lottery based on the entry of the game ball is performed. It has a function of suspending the execution (also referred to as a general drawing holding function), and is provided with a general drawing holding display section 38b that displays information corresponding to the number of holdings of the held general drawing lottery.

The common symbol holding display section 38b is a display section that displays information corresponding to the number of pending common symbol drawings. In this embodiment, the standard lottery drawing based on the entry of game balls into the standard pattern starting gate 35 is suspended up to a maximum of four (four times). In addition, in this embodiment, the common map reservation display section 38b is constituted by four LED lamps, and the LED lamps of the number corresponding to the number of pending common map lottery tickets are lit.

The round display section 39 is a display section that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. A round game is either the passage of a predetermined time (maximum opening time), or the arrival of a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls) into the grand prize opening. This is a game in which a special electric accessory continues to be opened until one of the conditions is met. The number of round games varies depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The round display section 39 starts a display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric switch opening/closing process period in the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode, and ends the display when the special electric line opening/closing process period ends. In this embodiment, the round display section 39 is configured by arranging two seven-segment displays in which seven segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a figure-eight shape. However, the round display section 39 is not limited to two 7-segment displays, and may have other configurations.

Note that the above-described special figure unit 37, general figure unit 38, and round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, but may be configured by, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. It may be constituted by various display devices capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results, such as a machine, a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by a display control device 100, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the symbol display device 41 included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a or the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol display device 41 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display. Further, the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variable display of decorative symbols, but also performs effect display during the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode and the normal electric current opening/closing execution mode. The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 704 is an explanatory diagram showing decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 704(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 704(A), the symbol display device 41 displays symbols representing numbers 1 to 7 in a variable manner as decorative symbols. In addition, as the decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern indicating the numbers 1 to 7 may be used.

FIG. 704(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In this embodiment, the main display area MA is a large area at the center of the display surface 41a, and the sub display area SA is an area smaller than the main display area MA at the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

Three decorative symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the decorative patterns numbered 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 704(A) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and the decorative patterns A fluctuating display that scrolls periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 704(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative symbol for each decorative symbol row is displayed in a state where it is stopped on the active line L1.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35 and the variable display of the normal pattern starts in the normal pattern display section 38a, the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row Z1 to Z3 are periodically displayed in a predetermined manner. A variable display that scrolls in the direction starts. Then, the scrolling decorative symbols are switched from variable display to standby display in the order of decorative symbol row Z1, decorative symbol row Z3, and decorative symbol row Z2. Thereafter, in synchronization with the timing at which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a, one decorative pattern is stopped and displayed for each of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3. If the result of the general pattern drawing by the main control device 60 is a normal pattern win, when the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row ends and the display is stopped, a predetermined A combination of decorative patterns is formed on the effective line L1. For example, a combination of the same decorative symbols is formed on the active line L1. The manner in which the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol column are displayed is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, but may vary depending on the number of decorative symbol columns, the number of effective lines, the direction of scrolling of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol column, and each Various modes can be adopted as modes for displaying variations in decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in a decorative pattern row.

Next, reach in decorative patterns will be explained. The reach is the possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a win will be formed on the active line L1 in some decorative symbol rows among the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This refers to a display state in which a certain combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in that state, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining decorative symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a win refers to a combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 704(B), the decorative pattern "7" is first stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern row Z1, and then the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the decorative pattern row Z3. A reach line is formed by the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1 being stopped and displayed, and while the reach line is being formed, the decorative patterns are scrolling in the decorative pattern row Z2 (variably displayed). ) state is called reach. When a hit occurs, the same decorative pattern as the one forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern row Z2.

In addition, when the reach line is formed, decorative patterns are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the remaining decorative pattern rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a reach effect. This also includes a method that performs a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of decorative patterns in which a reach line is formed. .

In the sub display area SA, like the main display area MA, three decorative symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special symbol starting port 34a and a variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol display section 37a, the decorative symbol in the sub display area SA starts with the start of the variable display. The variable display of will start. Then, in synchronization with the timing at which the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the special symbol display section 37a, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L2 for each of the decorative symbol rows Z4 to Z6. That is, in this embodiment, the decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA are synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a.

As shown in FIG. 704(B), a common symbol reservation display area Dn is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the general pattern holding display area Dn, the number of general pattern drawings that are held on hold based on the entry of game balls into the normal pattern starting gate 35 (the number of pending general pattern drawings) is displayed. The pending common symbol lottery refers to a common symbol lottery that has not yet been executed, and in which the fluctuating display of the common symbol to notify the lottery result of the relevant common symbol lottery has not started. In this embodiment, the number of pending standard lottery tickets that can be held based on the entry of the game ball into the standard ticket starting gate 35 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the reservation display area Dn is capable of displaying reservations corresponding to four reserved lottery tickets.

Further, as shown in FIG. 704(B), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display section 38a. It includes a regular symbol synchronous display section Sync1 and a special symbol synchronous display section Sync2 that performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display section 37a. Specifically, when the normal symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the normal symbol display section 38a, the common symbol synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and the normal symbols are displayed in a stopped state in the normal symbol display section 38a. In this case, the general map synchronization display section Sync1 lights up. In addition, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the special symbol display section 37a, The special figure synchronization display section Sync2 displays lighting.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 includes a main display area MA, a sub-display area SA, a regular symbol pending display area Dn, a regular symbol synchronous display section Sync1, and a special symbol synchronous display section. Although the configuration is such that Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

《M2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 705 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively.

A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity.

In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are various types such as a general winning opening 32, a special winning opening 34a, a regular winning opening 35, a first big winning opening 57a, a V winning opening 57av, and a second big winning opening 58a. Various detection sensors installed at the ball entrance are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether the game balls flowing down the game area PA have entered each ball entrance. Further, the MPU 62 executes a special drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing starting gate 34a, and executes a regular drawing drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the regular drawing starting gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a first special electric accessory drive section 57c that opens and closes the first special electric accessory 57b, and a second special electric accessory drive that opens and closes the second special electric accessory 58b. The main display section 45 is connected to the normal electric accessory driving section 34c that opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 34b. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the first special electric accessory driving section 57c or the second special electric accessory so that the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened/closed. Drive control of the accessory drive unit 58c is executed. Further, in the normal electrical opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the normal electric accessory drive unit 34c so that the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and closed. Furthermore, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the special symbol display section 37a in the main display section 45, and when the special symbol opening/closing execution mode is executed, the MPU 62 controls the display of the special symbol display section 37a on the main display section 45 when the special symbol lottery is executed. Display control of the display unit 39 is executed. Furthermore, when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the ordinary symbol display section 38a in the main display section 45.

Furthermore, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the special figure starting opening 34a. When the entry of game balls is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the game is played to the first grand prize opening 57a or the second grand prize opening 58a. When the entry of a ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the decorative patterns on the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. At the same time, it grasps whether or not a reach is occurring, the content of the reach effect, the content of the effect executed while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time of the decorative symbols, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 706 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for special drawing drawings, regular drawing drawings, etc. The various counters are used when the MPU 62 performs a special drawing lottery, a regular drawing lottery, and the like. Specifically, the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 and the special symbol type determination counter Cs2 are used for the special symbol lottery. Moreover, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. Moreover, the ordinary figure correctness determination counter Cn1 and the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2 are used for ordinary figure lottery. In addition, the common figure reach determination counter Cn3 is used to determine whether or not a reach is generated when a decorative pattern displayed on the symbol display device 41 is moved out of position. Moreover, the normal symbol variation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the variation time of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial values of the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 and the regular symbol validity determination counter Cn1.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1 to Cn4, and Cini is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure determination area 64c, a regular figure holding area 64d, and a regular figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the values of the special figure correctness determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry are stored in the special figure determination area 64c. . Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, each value of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1, the general pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the standard pattern reach determination counter Cn3 at the timing of the ball entry is They are stored in chronological order in the general map holding area 64d.

The details of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 will be explained. The special figure correctness determination counter Cs1 is used to determine whether or not a special figure is won (a special figure jackpot or a special figure small hit). The special figure correctness determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special figure is won, is a part of the above-mentioned special figure lottery. The special figure validity determination counter Cs1 is configured such that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the special figure appropriateness determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure appropriateness determination counter Cs1. Note that the random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 (value=0 to 1199).

The special pattern validity judgment counter Cs1 is updated regularly, and when the special pattern opening/closing execution mode is not being executed and the special pattern on the special pattern display section 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner, the game ball is placed in the special pattern starting port 34a. When the ball enters, the updated value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the special figure correctness judgment counter Cs1 stored in the special figure judgment area 64c is compared with the special figure correctness judgment table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and a special figure jackpot or special figure small hit is won. It is determined whether or not to do so. As will be described later, the special pattern jackpot and special pattern loss are not set in the special pattern validity determination table of this embodiment, so the special pattern small win will be won with a 100% probability.

Next, details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be explained. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of special symbol. The special symbol type determination, which is a determination of the type of the special symbol, is a part of the above-mentioned special symbol lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is updated regularly, and when the special symbol opening/closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol on the special symbol display section 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner, the game ball is placed in the special symbol starting port 34a. When the ball enters, the updated value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c together with the value of the above-mentioned special figure validity determination counter at the timing of the ball input.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the special figure appropriateness determination using the value of the special figure appropriateness determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64c. Then, from among the plurality of special figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one special figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure validity determination is selected, and the special figure type determination table is selected in the special figure determination area 64c. The value of the special symbol type determination counter Cs2 stored in is compared with the selected special symbol type determination table to determine the type of the special symbol. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 37a based on the determined type of special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, since all the results of the special pattern validity determination are special pattern small wins, only one type of special pattern type determination table for special pattern small wins is prepared.

Next, details of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 will be explained. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used to determine the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is updated once every time the normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process, and the updated value is displayed in the special symbol display section 37a. Obtained immediately before the start of the variable display of special symbols. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is compared with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure variation time is determined.

Next, details of the ordinary figure validity determination counter Cn1 will be explained. The common symbol correctness determination counter Cn1 is used when determining whether or not a common symbol is won. The determination of whether or not this common symbol is a winning symbol is a part of the above-mentioned common symbol lottery. The ordinary figure validity determination counter Cn1 is configured, for example, to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 1199, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the ordinary figure correctness determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1.

The normal figure validity determination counter Cn1 is updated regularly, and when the game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal figure holding area 64d at the timing of the passing.

The value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1 is stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d up to four each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, and is moved to the normal pattern determination area 64e in the stored order. Then, the value of the common symbol validity determination counter Cn1 moved to the common symbol determination area 64e is compared with the common symbol validity determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether the common symbol wins or not. is determined.

Next, details of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2 will be explained. The ordinary symbol type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the type of ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol type determination, which is the determination of the type of the ordinary symbol, is a part of the ordinary symbol lottery described above. The ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, the updated value is updated at the timing of the ball entry into the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. It is stored together with the value in the general drawing holding area 64d.

The value of the normal figure correctness determination counter Cn1 is stored in the normal figure holding area 64d up to four each time a game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, and the value of the above-mentioned normal figure correctness determination counter Cn1 is stored in the normal figure holding area 64d in the order in which it is stored. It moves to the ordinary figure determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the normal pattern appropriateness determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e to perform the normal pattern judgment. Then, from among the plurality of common figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, one common figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the normal figure judgment is selected, and one common figure type determination table is selected in the common figure determination area 64e. The value of the normal symbol type determination counter Cn2 stored in is compared with the selected ordinary symbol type determination table to determine the type of the ordinary symbol. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display section 38a based on the determined type of the normal symbol.

Next, details of the normal figure reach determination counter Cn3 will be explained. The common figure reach determination counter Cn3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the common figure propriety determination is not a common figure hit. The normal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The normal pattern reach judgment counter Cn3 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, its updated value is updated at the timing of the ball entry into the normal pattern correctness judgment counter Cn1 and It is stored in the ordinary figure holding area 64d together with the value of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2.

The value of the normal pattern reach judgment counter Cn3 is stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d up to four each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, and the above-mentioned normal pattern correctness judgment counter Cn1 and It moves to the ordinary figure determination area 64e together with the value of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2.

When the MPU 62 determines that the normal pattern is not a hit in the normal pattern judgment, the value of the normal pattern reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the special pattern determination area 64c is stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. It is compared with the common figure reach determination table that exists, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs. In addition, when the result of the normal pattern correctness determination in the normal pattern lottery is a normal pattern hit, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the normal pattern reach determination counter Cn3.

Next, details of the normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 will be explained. The normal symbol variation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The ordinary figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The normal symbol fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is updated once every time the normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process, and the updated value is displayed in the normal pattern display section 38a. Normally obtained just before the start of the fluctuating display of symbols. Then, the value of the acquired common figure variation type determination counter Cn4 is compared with the common figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the common figure variation time is determined.

Next, the special figure validity determination table will be explained.

FIG. 707 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special symbol validity determination table. As described above, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 1199 in the special figure correctness determination counter Cs1. Then, based on the acquired value of the special pattern correctness judgment counter Cs1 and the special pattern correctness judgment table, the special pattern correctness judgment which is the judgment of whether or not to win a special pattern winning (special pattern jackpot or special pattern small winning) is made. It is done.

As shown in FIG. 707, in the special figure propriety judgment table of this embodiment, out of 1200 values from 0 to 1199 of the special figure propriety judgment counter Cs1, all values from 0 to 1199 are considered to be small hits. The value is set as a winning value, and the value that will result in winning a special chart jackpot and the value that will result in a special chart failure are not set. In other words, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure correctness determination is that the special figure small win will be won with a probability of 100%.

“Special figure small hit” is a determination result that triggers the start of the special electric opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be explained.

FIG. 708 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special symbol type determination table. As described above, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Then, a special symbol type determination table is selected according to the result of the above-mentioned special symbol validity determination, and the special symbol type is determined based on the selected special symbol type determination table and the acquired value of the special symbol type determination counter Cs2. A special figure type determination is performed to determine the type. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, only the special figure small hit is set as the result of the special figure correctness determination, so the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can determine the special figure type for the special figure small hit. It only has tables.

As shown in FIG. 708, in the special symbol type determination table of this embodiment, among the 100 values of 0 to 99 of the special symbol type determination counter Cs2, 40 values of 0 to 39 are the special symbol A ( The special pattern small win A) is set, and the remaining 60 values from 40 to 99 are set as the special pattern B (special pattern small win B). All of the special symbol types set in the special symbol type determination table trigger the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, but each type of special symbol is selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. The types of special electric switch opening/closing scenarios are different.

The special electric opening/closing scenario is a control program in which the mode of control of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the special electric switching execution mode is stored, and depending on the type of the special electric switching scenario selected, the special electric opening/closing scenario is The manner of opening and closing of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the execution mode is different.

Next, the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection table will be explained.

FIG. 709 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection table.

FIG. 709(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening/closing scenario selection table for special figure small winning. The special train opening/closing scenario selection table for special figure small winning is a table for selecting a special electric opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of special symbol when a special figure small winning is won.

As shown in FIG. 709(A), in the special figure small winning special electric opening/closing scenario selection table of this embodiment, a special electric opening/closing scenario A for special figure small winning is set corresponding to the special symbol A. Corresponding to symbol B, special electric opening/closing scenario B for special symbol small winning is set. That is, if a special pattern small hit is won in the special pattern validity judgment and the result of the special pattern type judgment is special pattern A, the special pattern opening/closing scenario A for special pattern small winning is executed when the special pattern opening/closing execution mode is executed. is selected, and on the other hand, if the special pattern small hit is won in the special pattern judgment, and the result of the special pattern type judgment is special pattern B, the special pattern small win is selected when the special pattern opening/closing execution mode is executed. Special electric switch opening/closing scenario B will be selected.

When the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for special map small winning is started, first, a special train opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special train opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 1.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. The game ends when either of the following conditions is satisfied: or, the maximum number of balls entering the game, 10, enters the first grand prize opening 57a. When the special electric line opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric line ending period of 0.5 seconds starts. In addition, since it is virtually impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first big prize opening 57a during the opening of the first special electric accessory 57b for 1.0 seconds, the special electric opening/closing for special figure small winning The total time required for the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on scenario A will be fixed at 2.0 seconds.

When the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario B for special map small winning is started, first, a special train opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special train opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 1.1 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. The game ends when either of the following conditions is satisfied: or, the maximum number of balls entering the game, 10, enters the first grand prize opening 57a. When the special electric line opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric line ending period of 0.5 seconds starts. In addition, since it is virtually impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first big prize opening 57a during the opening of the first special electric accessory 57b for 1.1 seconds, the special electric opening/closing for special figure small winning The total time required for the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on scenario B will be fixed at 2.1 seconds.

Moreover, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where the special figure small hit is won in the special figure correctness determination, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started also when the game ball enters the V winning a prize opening 57av.

FIG. 709(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario selection table. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first large winning hole 57a and directly enters the V winning hole 57av during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for special map small winnings. , the V-winning jackpot A is won, and after the special electricity opening/closing execution mode ends, the special electricity opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is selected, and the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special electricity opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot starts. be done. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 57a and directly enters the V prize opening 57av during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for special map small winning, After the V-winning jackpot B is won, and the special electricity opening/closing execution mode ends, the special electricity opening/closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is selected, and the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special electricity opening/closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is started.

When the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is started, first, a special electric line opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special electric line opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 16 times (16 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, in one round game. The game ends when either one of the following conditions is satisfied: or the maximum number of entering balls, 10, enters the second grand prize opening 58a. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 3.0 seconds. When the special electric line opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric line ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

When the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is started, first, a special electric line opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special electric line opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 12 times (12 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, in one round game. The game ends when either one of the following conditions is satisfied: or the maximum number of entering balls, 10, enters the second grand prize opening 58a. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 5.9 seconds. When the special electric line opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric line ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

As mentioned above, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric opening/closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls entered is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls are allowed to enter the second prize opening 58a during the maximum opening period of 5.0 seconds. I can't. That is, in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds due to ten game balls entering the second special electric accessory 58b during one opening. It is also structured so that it will not close down in a short period of time. As a result, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds, regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched by the player. The time length (total time required) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on special train opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special train opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) +3.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special electric end ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Similarly, in V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric opening/closing process period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls to enter is set to 10, but the Since the shortest firing interval is 0.6 seconds, only about eight game balls at most can enter the second grand prize opening 58a during the maximum opening period of 5.0 seconds. That is, even in the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds due to 10 game balls entering during one opening of the second special electric accessory 58b. It is constructed so that it will not close in a shorter time than the As a result, even in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds, regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched by the player. , The time length of the special train opening/closing execution mode (total time required) based on special train opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special train opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 12 (number of rounds) ) + 5.9 seconds (special transmission interval period) x 11 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special transmission ending period), which is fixed at 125.9 seconds.

In this way, in the present embodiment, regardless of which special electric line opening/closing scenario is selected, V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A or V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B, the time length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode is (total required time) is 126.0 seconds or less. Then, the time length (total required time) of the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric switch opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot, and the time length (total required time) of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot. time) is as small as about 0.1 seconds.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot. The total time required (126.0 seconds) and the time (128.0 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as "total time A") is the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario B for special map small winnings. time (2.1 seconds) and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot (128.0 seconds, hereinafter "total time B") ) is the same as The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

Next, the ordinary figure validity determination table will be explained.

FIG. 710 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the ordinary figure validity determination table. As described above, when a game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 1199 in the normal figure validity determination counter Cn1. Then, based on the obtained value of the common symbol validity determination counter Cn1 and the common symbol validity determination table, a common symbol validity determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the common symbol is won, is performed.

As shown in FIG. 710, in the ordinary figure validity determination table of this embodiment, among the 1200 values of 0 to 1199 of the ordinary figure validity determination counter Cn1, 4 values 0 to 3 are determined per ordinary figure. The value is set as a winning value, and the other values are set as values that are out of the ordinary. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the determination of the validity of a common symbol is that the probability of winning a common symbol is 1/300.

“Normal power supply hit” is a determination result that triggers the start of the general power switching execution mode. On the other hand, "outside the normal map" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the normal power switching execution mode.

Next, the ordinary figure type determination table will be explained.

FIG. 711 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the ordinary figure type determination table. As described above, when a game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the normal figure type determination counter Cn2. Then, the normal pattern type determination table is selected according to the result of the above-mentioned normal pattern judgment, and the normal pattern is determined based on the selected normal pattern type judgment table and the obtained value of the normal pattern judgment counter Cn1. A common figure type determination is performed to determine the type.

As a result of the above-mentioned normal pattern determination, if it is determined that the normal pattern has been hit, the normal pattern type determination table 1 is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern is out of place as a result of the normal pattern validation determination, the normal pattern is selected. Type determination table 2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 711(A), the ordinary figure type determination table 1 of this embodiment includes 40 values from 0 to 39 out of 100 values from 0 to 99 of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2. Normal symbol A (A per common symbol) is set, 20 values from 40 to 59 are set to normal symbol B (B per common symbol), and 15 values from 60 to 74 are normal symbols. C (C per ordinary symbol), 15 values from 75 to 89 are set to ordinary symbol D (D per ordinary symbol), and 5 values from 90 to 94 are set to ordinary symbol E ( The three values 95 to 97 are set to the normal symbol F (F per common symbol), and the two values 98 to 99 are set to the normal symbol G (F per common symbol). It is set to hit G). The types of ordinary symbols set in the ordinary symbol type determination table 1 all trigger the execution of the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, but for each type of ordinary symbol, when the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed The types of selected utility power switching scenarios are different. The normal electric power opening/closing scenario is a control program in which the mode of control of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric power switching execution mode is stored, and depending on the type of the general electric utility switching scenario that is selected, the ordinary electric role in the ordinary electric power switching execution mode is stored. The manner in which the object 34b is opened and closed is different.

As shown in FIG. 711(B), in the ordinary symbol type determination table 2 of this embodiment, out of the 100 values from 0 to 99 of the ordinary symbol type determination counter Cn2, all 100 values are ordinary symbols. It is set to Z (normal map off). That is, when it is determined that the normal pattern is out of order in the normal pattern validity determination, the type of the normal pattern is determined to be the normal pattern Z.

Next, the normal power switching scenario selection table will be explained.

FIG. 712 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal power switching scenario selection table. The general electric switch opening/closing scenario selection table is a table for selecting a general electric switch opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of normal symbol when a general symbol is won.

As shown in FIG. 712, in the general electric switch opening/closing scenario selection table of this embodiment, general electric switch opening/closing scenarios A to G are set corresponding to the normal symbols A to G, respectively. In other words, if the general pattern is won in the normal pattern determination and the normal pattern type determination results in normal patterns A to G, the normal pattern opening/closing scenarios A to G are selected when the normal pattern opening/closing execution mode is executed. G will be selected respectively. The details of the normal power switching scenarios A to G will be explained below.

When the utility switch execution mode based on the utility switch scenario A is started, a utility switch opening period of 5.0 seconds is first started, and then a utility switch processing period is started. During the ordinary power opening/closing processing period, the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens once, and the opening time for one opening is set to 0.8 seconds. When the general electric power opening/closing processing period ends, a general electric power ending period of 140.0 seconds starts. In addition, if 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls that enter, enter the special figure starting port 34a during the normal electricity opening/closing processing period, the normal electric accessory 34b will be opened for one time, which is 0. .Even before 8 seconds have elapsed, the state will be closed and the normal electricity opening/closing processing period will end. However, in this embodiment, the shortest firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds, so the normal electricity It is configured so that ten game balls, which is the maximum number of balls, will not enter the special figure starting opening 34a during the opening/closing processing period.

When the general electric power switching execution mode based on the general electric power switching scenario B is started, first, a general electric power opening period of 5.0 seconds is started, and then a general electric power switching processing period is started. During the normal electric opening/closing processing period, the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens twice, the opening time for each opening is 0.8 seconds, the total opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens twice, the opening time for each opening is 0.8 seconds, the total opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens twice. The closing period (normal power interval period) of 34b is set to 135.0 seconds. When the general electric power opening/closing processing period ends, a general electric power ending period of 140.0 seconds starts. In addition, during the normal electric switch opening/closing process period, if 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls, enter the special figure starting port 34a, the normal electric accessory 34b will have a total opening time of 1.6 Even before the second elapses, the state will be closed and the normal electricity opening/closing processing period will end, but in this embodiment, the shortest firing interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so the normal electricity opening/closing process will end. It is configured so that ten game balls, which is the maximum number of balls that can enter, will not enter the special figure starting opening 34a during the period. The same applies to normal power switching scenarios C to G described below.

The normal power switching scenarios C to G are different from the normal power switching scenario B only in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and the total opening time during the normal power switching processing period, and other controls are different from the normal power switching scenario B. Same as scenario B. Specifically, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened during the normal electricity switching processing period of the normal electricity switching scenario C is three times, and the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 34b during the normal electricity switching processing period of the normal electricity switching scenario D is three times. The number of times is 4, and the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened during the ordinary electric switching processing period of the ordinary electric switching scenario E is 5 times. The number of openings is 6 times, and the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 34b during the normal electricity switching processing period of the normal electricity switching scenario G is 7 times.

As described above, in this embodiment, the time length (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (general power interval period) and the time length (140.0 seconds) of the general power ending period set in the general power opening/closing scenario are set. 0 seconds) are the total required time (126.0 seconds) of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot. The time is set longer than the total required time (125.9 seconds). Furthermore, the time length (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (general power interval period) and the time length (140.0 seconds) of the general power ending period set in the general power opening/closing scenario are both , is set to be longer than the total time A (128.0 seconds) and the total time B (128.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

In addition, in the following explanation, winning a special pattern small hit in the special pattern judgment and determining that the special pattern is A in the special pattern type judgment is also referred to as "winning the special pattern small winning A in the special pattern lottery." express. The same applies to special symbol B. Furthermore, the fact that the winning pattern was won in the normal pattern determination and the normal pattern A was determined in the normal pattern type determination is also expressed as "winning the normal pattern A in the general pattern lottery." The same applies to normal symbols B to G.

<<M3>> Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 713 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

The audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92 which is a calculation device that controls the entire audio emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 that generates a sound signal and operates based on the generated sound signal. It is equipped with a sound output LSI 97 that drives a sound output LSI 97 to output sound, and an audio data ROM 98 that is a memory in which various audio data are stored. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to a sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates a sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback start command from the MPU 92, it specifies the sound that should be started playing as instructed by the playback start command, and uses the sound data corresponding to the identified sound for audio data. The sound to be read out from the ROM 98 and reproduced is generated. Then, the sound output LSI 97 outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Further, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback end command from the MPU 92, it specifies the sound to be stopped, which is instructed by the playback end command, and ends the playback of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels and simultaneously generates a maximum of 16 sounds, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46. Further, the sound output LSI 97 can mute the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel, and cancel the mute setting, according to instructions from the MPU 92. For an audio channel set to mute, the sound output LSI 97 reads the corresponding audio data and generates the sound to be played. However, when mixing with the sound of other audio channels, the audio channel for which the mute setting is set is By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel to be muted to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel to be muted is prevented from being mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and also receives signals indicating the operation mode of the production operation button 24. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《M4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 714 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. FIG. 715 and FIG. 716 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

A player who plays a game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment first operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35 provided at the lower center of the game board 30. Adjust the firing strength of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 714, when the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-mentioned general pattern lottery, and displays the normal symbols in the normal pattern display section 38a. (time t1). Further, the audio emission control device 90 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a.

Thereafter, when the set regular symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the main controller 60 stops and displays the fluctuating regular symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery, and emits sound. The control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the common symbol lottery (time t2). By checking the display mode of the normal symbols stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a or the display mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, the player enters the lottery of the regular symbol lottery. Be able to recognize the results. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the result of the ordinary drawing lottery is a winning ordinary drawing, the decorative symbols that are changing in the main display area MA are displayed when the numbers in the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are the same. The display is stopped in a certain display mode (for example, "555"). On the other hand, if the result of the general drawing lottery is out of ordinary drawings, the decorative patterns that are changing in the main display area MA are displayed in a display mode (where the numbers in the three decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are not the same (do not line up)). For example, the display is stopped at "135").

The player repeatedly enters the game ball into the standard pattern starting gate 35 until winning the standard pattern in the standard pattern lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, since the general winning hole 32 is provided downstream of the general drawing starting gate 35, the game ball that enters the general drawing starting gate 35 enters the general winning opening 32 as it is, and 1 The game balls are put out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

As a result of the ordinary symbol lottery, if a winning symbol is won, the main controller 60 displays the changing ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display section 38a in accordance with the type of symbol per ordinary symbol (type of ordinary symbol). After that, select the general electric switch opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of ordinary symbol (type of ordinary symbol), and start the electric utility opening/closing execution mode based on the selected general electric switch opening/closing scenario (time t2). On the other hand, the audio emission control device 90 displays the fluctuating decorative pattern in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode executed after winning the normal pattern. The display is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the number of openings.

Specifically, in this embodiment, if the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode is 1 and the winning is A per ordinary symbol, the changing decorative pattern is changed to "1↓1". ” (a display mode in which only the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol row Z2 are scrolled) to generate a reach, and then stop displaying in a display mode such as “111”. Furthermore, for example, if the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode is 2 and you win the ordinary symbol B, as shown in FIG. 715(A), the changing decorative pattern After generating a reach by displaying in a display mode such as "2↓2", it is stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "222" as shown in FIG. 715(B). Therefore, when a reach occurs in the fluctuating decorative pattern in the main display area MA, the player can control the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode that is executed when winning a normal pattern. Since it is possible to recognize this, it is possible to give the player not only a sense of expectation as to whether or not he or she will win the normal figure, but also a sense of expectation as to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b will be opened after winning. . The reason why the player has expectations regarding the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened will be described later.

Hereinafter, in the example shown in FIG. 714, a case will be described in which the winning symbol B is won as a result of the common symbol lottery.

As a result of the utility map lottery, if the utility map B is won, the main controller 60 starts the utility power switching execution mode based on the utility power switching scenario B described above, and starts the utility power opening/closing period of the utility power switching execution mode. (time t2). As described above, in the normal power switching execution mode based on the normal power switching scenario B, the normal electric accessory 34b opens twice. Furthermore, when the general electric power opening period starts, the audio emission control device 90 starts the general electric power opening production and the right-handed hitting notification process. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 716(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a general electrician opening effect, and a special electrician opening/closing execution mode ( A performance that suggests that a so-called jackpot will occur twice is executed. In addition, in the right-handed hitting notification process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The hitting instruction image GD1 is displayed, and the speaker 46 outputs a sound such as "Hit right!".

The player who recognizes that he should "hit the ball right-handed" by the right-hand hitting notification process operates the operating handle 25 to "hit the right hand." When the player "hits right", the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 reaches the circulation path 301 provided on the right side of the game area PA of the game board 30. Here, in this embodiment, it is configured such that it takes 0.7 seconds or more for the game ball to pass over the normal electric accessory 34b in the closed state. In this embodiment, game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the player continues to play right-handed after the start of the right-handed hitting notification process, at least one game ball is passing over the normal electric accessory 34b in the closed state (the game ball is ).

Then, when the normal power opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts a normal power opening/closing processing period and starts opening the normal electric accessory 34b for the first time (time t3). Then, the game ball passing over the ordinary electric accessory 34b falls below the opened ordinary electric accessory 34b, and enters the special figure starting port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. The ball enters the ball (time t4).

When a game ball enters the special symbol starting hole 34a, the main controller 60 executes the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, starts variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a, and the sound emission control device 90, Variable display of decorative symbols is started in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 (time t4). In this embodiment, the special symbol variation time is set to 0.5 seconds each time, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery.

After that, when the set special symbol fluctuation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the main controller 60 changes the special symbol that is changing in the special symbol display section 37a to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The sound emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special drawing lottery. (Time t5). As mentioned above, in this embodiment, in the special drawing lottery, the special drawing small hit (special drawing small winning A or special drawing small winning B) is always won. For example, the result of the special drawing drawing When is a special drawing small hit A, the sound emission control device 90 stops and displays the fluctuating decorative pattern in the sub-display area SA in a display mode such as "777", and the result of the special drawing drawing is a special drawing small winning. If it is a win B, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "333" in the sub-display area SA.

In the example shown in FIG. 714, a case will be explained in which the special figure small win A is won as a result of the special figure lottery.

As a result of the special drawing lottery, if the special drawing small hit A is won, the main control device 60 starts the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special electric drawing opening/closing scenario A for the special drawing small winning, and The opening period starts (time t5).

Then, when the special electric power opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts a special electric power opening/closing processing period and starts opening the first special electric accessory 57b (time t6). As described above, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened once during the special electric opening/closing process period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for special map small winnings. Here, in this embodiment, it is configured such that it takes 1.0 seconds or more for the game ball to pass over the first special electric accessory 57b in the closed state. In this embodiment, game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the player continues to play right-handed after the start of the right-handed hitting notification process, at least one game ball is passing over the first special electric accessory 57b in the closed state (game (the ball is on top of the ball). Therefore, when the first special electric accessory 57b is opened, the game ball passing over the first special electric accessory 57b falls below the opened first special electric accessory 57b, and the first special electric accessory 57b falls below the opened first special electric accessory 57b. The ball enters the first big prize opening 57a provided below the electric accessory 57b (time t7).

When a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a, the game ball enters the V winning hole 57av as it is (time t7). That is, in the present embodiment, if the player continues to play right-handed, he can easily insert the game ball into the first big prize opening 57a and the V prize opening 57av while opening the first special electric accessory 57b ( It has a configuration that allows the ball to enter the ball (reliably).

When the game ball enters the V-winning hole 57av, the audio emission control device 90 produces a V-winning performance that suggests that the game ball enters the V-winning hole 57av and wins the V-winning jackpot. The main controller 60 executes a production suggesting that the special train opening/closing execution mode of the round is started, and after the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small win that is being executed ends, A 16-round special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned V winning jackpot special electric line opening/closing scenario A is started (time t8).

When the special electric train opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A is started, the special electric opening/closing processing period starts after 0.5 seconds of the special electric opening period has elapsed, and 16 of the second special electric accessory 58b is started. The first opening of the rounds (first round round game) is started (time t9). Then, the second special electric accessory 58b is activated when either the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds has elapsed or the maximum number of entering balls, which is 10 game balls, is satisfied. , the state is closed. After entering the closed state, the second opening of the second special electric accessory 58b (second round round game) is started after 3.0 seconds of the closing period (special electric interval period) has elapsed. After that, after the 16th opening of the second special electric accessory 58b (16th round round game) is completed and closed, the special electric ending period starts, and when 0.5 seconds of the special electric accessory ending period has elapsed, , the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot special electric line opening/closing scenario A ends (time t10). During the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, the player enters the game ball into the second grand prize opening 58a while the second special electric accessory 58b is being opened. By doing so, a large amount of game balls can be won as prize balls.

As mentioned above, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric opening/closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls entered is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls are allowed to enter the second prize opening 58a during the maximum opening period of 5.0 seconds. I can't. That is, in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds due to ten game balls entering the second special electric accessory 58b during one opening. It is also structured so that it will not close down in a short period of time. As a result, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is It is fixed at 5.0 seconds, and the time length (total required time) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special train opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 3.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special electric line ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds. That is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot in this embodiment is started for 126.0 seconds regardless of the manner in which the game ball is fired by the player and the behavior of the game ball after firing. It will be over in seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, from the time point (time t3) when the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode starts, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special electricity opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is started. The configuration is such that the time required until the time when the game starts (time t8) is about 4 seconds at most if the player plays the "right-handed hit" as instructed by the right-handed hit notification process. There is.

In this embodiment, since the closing period (normal power interval period) in the power switching processing period of the power switching execution mode based on the power switching scenario B is set to 135.0 seconds, the normal electric accessory After 135.0 seconds have elapsed since the first closing of the electric accessory 34b, the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b starts (time t11).

As a result, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 714, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot ends before the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b starts. become.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a due to the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the ordinary electricity opening/closing scenario B, the main control device 60 controls the above-mentioned special figure The lottery is executed, and the special symbol display section 37a starts to display the special symbols in a variable manner, and the audio emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 ( time t12).

The subsequent processing flow differs only in that the general power interval period (closing period) in the general power opening/closing execution mode is replaced with the general power ending period, and the processing flow from time t13 to time t18 shown in FIG. 714 is as follows. The flow of processing is the same as that from time t5 to time t10 described above. Since the time length of the utility grid ending period in the utility grid opening/closing execution mode based on the utility grid opening/closing scenario B is set to 140.0 seconds, even if there is a pending utility map lottery, the normal The next general drawing lottery will not be executed until 140.0 seconds of the general electricity ending period that starts after the second closing of the electric accessory 34b has elapsed. In other words, it is configured such that the next general lottery is not executed earlier than the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the second V winning jackpot. After that, 140.0 seconds of the general electric power ending period have elapsed, and the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends (time t19).

In addition, in this embodiment, a general electric power ending effect indicating that the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends is executed for 5 seconds before the end of the general electric power ending period. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 716(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as an ending effect for the general public, and a character string such as "Did you have fun? See you soon!!" indicate.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the process from time t3 to time t10 is repeated the number of times corresponding to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the 16th or 12th round V winning jackpot is executed the number of times corresponding to the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 714, in the case where the player wins the special drawing small hit A in the first and second special drawing drawings, and then the game ball enters the V winning slot 57av and wins the V winning jackpot. As explained above, this is a case where the player wins the special map small jackpot B in the first or second special drawing lottery, and then the game ball enters the V winning slot 57av and wins the V winning jackpot. In this case, the main control device 60 starts the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned V winning jackpot special electric switch opening/closing scenario B during the general electric power interval period in the ordinary electric current opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the special figure starting port 34a is not provided with a special figure holding function, if the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b starts and the game ball is placed in the special figure starting hole 34a. If the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special electricity opening/closing scenario for the V prize jackpot has not ended even when the ball enters, the special drawing drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing starting port 34a will not be executed. . As a result, it is impossible to win the special drawing small prize in the special drawing lottery, and it is also impossible to win the V prize winning jackpot.

Furthermore, unlike the example shown in FIG. 714, if the player does not "hit right" even though the right hitting notification process is being executed, while the normal electric accessory 34b is being released, It is not possible to allow the game ball to enter the special figure starting port 34a, or it is not possible to allow the game ball to enter the first large winning port 57a and the V winning port 57av while the first special electric accessory 57b is being opened. Can not. In this case, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special electric line opening/closing scenario for the special map small win or the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario for the V-winning jackpot will not start, and the player will not be able to open or close the regular electric line. It is necessary to wait for the end of the closing period (normal power interval period) or the normal power ending period until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the execution mode.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that a player can consecutively win a V-winning jackpot is determined based on the type of normal symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of times the special electricity opening/closing execution mode can be executed based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode is determined. Therefore, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode becomes a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when a general figure is won in the ordinary figure lottery and the ordinary electric power opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player may be interested in the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric utility opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to make the game more interesting and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, since a special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various regulations imposed on pachinko machines in which a special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, this embodiment does not have a high probability mode (so-called variable probability state) in which the probability of winning a special drawing jackpot is high in the special drawing lottery, so the control can be simplified and it is possible to The various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode (so-called electric support mode) increases the probability of winning a common symbol in the common symbol lottery, and increases the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened when winning a common symbol. Since the machine does not have any mode), control can be simplified and the various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines that have these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various gaming features.

In addition, since this embodiment does not have a function to hold the special drawing drawing, the special drawing holding area for holding the special drawing drawing can be omitted from the main side RAM 64, and the storage area of the main side RAM 64 can be saved. It becomes possible to effectively utilize it for other purposes.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the regular electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots occur consecutively). Therefore, when playing a series of jackpots in a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is in high probability mode (so-called variable probability state), it is difficult to win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery and the next special electric opening/closing execution mode does not start easily. This makes it possible to avoid such a situation (so-called jamming).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the general figure starting gate 35, and the general figure is won in the general figure lottery and the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, and when the normal figure opening/closing execution mode is executed, If the firing mode reaches 301 (the so-called "right-handed" firing mode) and the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals, the game ball enters the special figure starting port during the normal power opening/closing execution mode. 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed, and during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed. The game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 57a enters the V winning hole 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed.

According to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode is the time required from the start to the end of the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, and the time required from the start to the end of the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. The configuration is such that the time can be set to be longer than the sum of the time required from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (total time: 128.0 seconds). More specifically, in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals in a firing mode in which it reaches the flow path 301 (a so-called "right-handed" firing mode), the normal power opening/closing execution mode is started. If the time required from the time when the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 714) is defined as the specific required time, The configuration allows the time required to complete the process to be set to be longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit ends and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends, the normal electric switch opening/closing execution mode continues, and the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode continues. During the continuation of the mode, the normal electric accessory 34b may transition to the open state and the game ball may enter the special figure starting port 34a.

According to the present embodiment, in the case where the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the general figure lottery in which the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice or more, the special electric power accessory 34b based on the V winning jackpot is selected during the execution of the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends. becomes possible. If the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot ends, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed again, and then the V-winning jackpot is again executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed. In other words, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won at a general figure that opens twice or more in the ordinary figure lottery and the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode is executed, the special electric accessory opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning and the V winning jackpot are executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the power switching execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game ball is moved to the special figure start opening 34a while the special symbols are changing, during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. When the ball enters the special drawing, it avoids acquiring various counter values for the special drawing lottery (in other words, it does not have a function to hold the special drawing lottery). Even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a hit or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution based on a special figure small hit will not be executed afterwards. mode will not be executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will also not be executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, we want the player to finish the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot before the timing when the game ball can enter the special figure starting port 34a comes. It can create a sense of tension.

Also, unlike this embodiment, if the game ball starts the special symbol while the special symbol is changing, while the special electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed based on the special symbol small hit, or while the special electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed based on the V winning jackpot. In the case where a configuration is adopted in which acquisition of various counter values for the special drawing lottery is not avoided even when a ball enters the opening 34a (that is, a configuration including a function of holding the special lottery drawing), the normal electric accessory 34b If a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of First, the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may be executed multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, one of the ordinary electric accessory 34b It is possible to realize a game in which the number of executions of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed once for each opening of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Therefore, the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state because the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has become longer than a predetermined length, the special electricity It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the opening/closing execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not end, and even though the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends early during the general electricity interval period of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode ends. It is possible to prevent the game from being prolonged due to a long period from when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened until the next release.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the normal power switching execution mode, the normal electric accessory 34b is in the normal power interval period, which is a period from the transition from the open state to the closed state until the transition from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a longer time (135.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, the length of the general electric power interval period of the general electric power opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 A case will be described in which a comparative example configuration is adopted in which the time is set to a shorter time (for example, 80.0 seconds).

First, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. After that, the first general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the second time, the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be newly started. After that, the second general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the third time, the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are in the first and third opening states of the ordinary electric accessories 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. The game starts when the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a, but even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a in the second open state, the game will not start. .

Next, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power opening/closing execution mode has ended, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has not been executed, so the game ball If the ball enters the special figure starting hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. After that, the second general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the third time, the special electric electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be newly started. After that, the third general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the fourth time, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are in the second and fourth opening states of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. The game starts when the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a, but even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a in the third open state, the game will not start. .

As described above, unlike the present embodiment, the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the general power interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is set to a shorter time than the length of the special power switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this case, the timing of the start of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode is not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. This poses a problem in that it becomes difficult to control the game.

Next, set the length of the regular power interval interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode to a time (135. A case will be described in which the configuration of this embodiment is adopted in which the time period is set to .0 seconds).

First, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit will be executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed. After that, the first general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed either. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power opening/closing execution mode has ended, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has not been executed, so the game ball If the ball enters the special figure starting hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the regular power interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special power switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, it is assumed that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not being executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a when the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V There is no possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the winning jackpot will not be started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode, It is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to execute the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set an upper limit on the number of times that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the middle and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the general electric accessory 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state in the general electric utility opening/closing execution mode until the general electric drawing lottery becomes executable, which is the general electric utility ending. The length of the period can be set to a longer time (140.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which the length of the general electric line ending period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. I will explain about it. In this configuration, for example, if a general drawing drawing is executed after the end of the general electricity ending period and a general drawing is won, the general electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the game is played during the execution of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, if the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the general electric power ending period, the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot even after the general electrician ending period ends. The execution mode continues, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may continue even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric line ending period can be set to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. To suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot continues even after the general electric line ending period ends, and to suppress a disadvantageous situation to the player. I can do it.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general power ending period is set to a length greater than or equal to the length of the general power interval period, so that a series of The flow of the game can be similarly realized during the general electricity ending period of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. As a result, a new system has been created that enables the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to be executed in both the general electricity interval period and the general electricity ending period in the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to realize games.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed during the electric power interval period of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode, so that the number of the electric power interval periods included in the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is This is a very important element for people. Therefore, when a player wins a general map in a general map lottery and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player will not know how many regular power switch interval periods are included in the general power switch opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to arouse interest in the game and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed multiple times between the start and the end of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode. Whether or not the game is successful is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the player wins the general map in the general map lottery and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is started, and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode starts. In this case, it is possible to make the player interested in how many times the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the performance (Fig. 715, Fig. 716 (A), etc.) that suggests the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is When the player wins and the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player can be made interested in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode, and the game is improved. You can improve your interest.

In particular, in this embodiment, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the case of winning the normal drawing lottery (the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened ( In other words, since it suggests the number of consecutive winnings of V-winning jackpots, it can make the player feel that they want the decorative symbols with as large a number as possible to stop on the active line L1, which improves the interest of the game. can be achieved. Further, when a reach is generated by a decorative pattern with a large number, it is possible to make the player have high expectations.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the general drawing lottery, the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is performed at least a plurality of times for one general drawing. When one cycle from the opening of the normal electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 714) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game round, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is defined as one special game round. One special game round is executed based on the object 34b opening at the first timing (time t3 in Figure 714), and the normal electric power is released at the second timing (time t11 in Figure 714) after the one special game round ends. The accessory 34b is controlled to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game a plurality of times for one common symbol in the common symbol lottery.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a restriction period is generated to limit the start of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols. More specifically, a predetermined limited period is generated in a period from the first timing until the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating display of normal symbols from starting before the end of one special game round, so the normal drawing lottery is executed even though one special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the user is As a result, for example, even though the result of the regular lottery is a regular lottery that is advantageous to the player, the game ball is not a special lottery because the 1 special game round that has already been executed has not finished. It is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the ball enters the starting hole 34a.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of V-winning jackpots (V-winning jackpots A and B) are set, so not only the number of V-winning jackpots won in one utility switch opening/closing execution mode, but also the It is also possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to whether he or she will win the type of V-winning jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot. The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode (2.1 seconds) based on the special train opening/closing scenario B for special map small winnings. Since it is the same as the total time B, which is the sum of the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode (125.9 seconds) based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small win, When the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot is executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the special drawing small win is executed. , the timing at which the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends is the same as when the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B is subsequently executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b becomes the same, so for example, the content of the performance executed during the waiting time can be made common. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, a regular game starting gate 35 is provided at the lower central position of the game board 30, and a general prize opening 32 is located at a position where the game ball that enters the regular game starting gate 35 can enter. Since this is provided, similar to a general pachinko machine in which a special figure starting port 34a is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, while awarding a prize ball to a player, it is possible to win a regular figure in a regular figure lottery. It is possible to realize a game in which the player expects to win a prize.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operating handle 25 so that the game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35, so many game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35. It will be a ball. In this embodiment, since the game ball that enters the normal figure starting gate 35 enters the general winning hole 32, it is possible to increase the proportion of the number of prize balls from the general winning hole 32 to the total number of prize balls. can. In other words, it is possible to lower the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the action of the accessory to the total number of prize balls.

<<M5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to proceed with the above-described game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 717 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 periodically (at a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In step Sm0101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. After that, the process advances to step Sm0102.

In step Sm0102, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sm0103.

In step Sm0103, the values of the regular symbol validity determination counter Cn1, the regular symbol type determination counter Cn2, the regular symbol reach determination counter Cn3, the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1, and the special symbol type determination counter Cs2 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the values of the regular symbol validity determination counter Cn1, the regular symbol type determination counter Cn2, the regular symbol reach determination counter Cn3, the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1, and the special symbol type determination counter Cs2, and When each counter value reaches the maximum value, each counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each determination counter Cn1 to Cn3, Cs1, and Cs2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sm0104.

In step Sm0104, ball entry processing for the normal pattern starting gate is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the normal pattern starting gate 35. Details of the ball entry process for the normal figure starting gate will be described later. After executing step Sm0104, the process advances to step Sm0105.

In step Sm0105, ball entry processing for the special figure starting hole is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting hole 34a. Details of the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening will be described later. After executing step Sm0105, the process advances to step Sm0106.

In step Sm0106, ball entry processing for the V winning hole is executed based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 57av. Details of the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described later. After executing step Sm0106, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Ball entry process for general starting gate>
Next, a description will be given of the ball entry process for the normal figure starting gate. The ball entry process for the regular pattern starting gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 717: Sm0104).

FIG. 718 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the normal figure starting gate. In step Sm0201, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the normal figure starting gate 35 or not. In step Sm0201, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the normal pattern starting gate 35 (Sm0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0202, and the normal pattern drawing pending number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. In addition, the number of standard lottery tickets pending SN is a value indicating the number of standard lottery tickets that are suspended (waiting for execution) based on the entry of game balls into the standard ticket starting gate 35. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of regular lottery tickets is 4. On the other hand, in step Sm0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the normal pattern starting gate 35 (Sm0201: NO), the ball entry process for this general pattern starting gate is ended.

In step Sm0202, if it is determined that the number SN of ordinary drawings pending is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sm0202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0203, and 1 is added to the number SN of ordinary drawings pending. After that, the process advances to step Sm0204.

In step Sm0204, each value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1, the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the normal pattern reach determination counter Cn3 is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the normal pattern holding area 64d of the RAM 64, that is, in step Sm0203. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number SN of regular lottery tickets added to 1 in . After that, the process advances to step Sm0205.

In step Sm0205, a normal figure destination determination process is executed. The ordinary figure destination determination process is based on the information (ordinary figure reservation information) of each value of the ordinary figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1, the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2, and the ordinary figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the ordinary figure reservation area 64d. , the judgment results of the normal pattern lottery (the judgment results of the normal pattern validity judgment, the judgment results of the normal pattern type judgment, the judgment results of the normal pattern reach occurrence, etc.) This is a process that is determined before becoming a target of the drawing lottery. After executing step Sm0205, the process advances to step Sm0206.

In step Sm0206, a general figure hold command is set. Specifically, it is executed based on the information of each value of the common pattern propriety determination counter Cn1, the common pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the common pattern reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the general pattern holding area 64d (normal pattern pending information). The judgment result of the ordinary drawing destination determination process is set as the ordinary drawing holding command.

The regular game hold command instructs the sub-side control device to transmit the determination result of the regular game destination determination process for the regular game hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the regular game starting gate 35. This is a command to make the figure reservation information recognized before it becomes the target of the regular figure lottery which usually involves a change in the symbol. The standard figure hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 721: Step Sm0503) of the normal processing described later. When the audio emission control device 90 receives the common symbol holding command, the display control device issues a command to change the display in the common symbol pending display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the common symbol lottery pending number SN. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the regular symbol holding display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the regular symbol lottery pending number SN.

After executing step Sm0206, the ball entry process for the regular pattern starting gate is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sm0202, if it is determined that the value of the number SN of reserved lottery tickets is not less than the upper limit value (Sm0202: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number SN of reserved lottery tickets of regular lottery tickets is the upper limit value, , the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1, the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the normal pattern reach determination counter Cn3 are not stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d, and the ball entry process for the normal pattern starting gate is ended.

<Ball entry processing for special figure starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening will be explained. Ball entry processing for the special figure starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 717: Sm0105).

FIG. 719 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening. In step Sm0301, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the special figure starting opening 34a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special figure starting opening 34a. In step Sm0301, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the special figure starting port 34a (Sm0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0302, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. After that, the process advances to step Sm0303. On the other hand, in step Sm0301, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the special pattern starting port 34a (Sm0301: NO), the ball entering process for this special pattern starting port is ended.

In step Sm0303, it is determined whether the special electric switching execution mode flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The special electric switch opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when starting the above-mentioned special electric switch opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, the special electric switching execution mode flag is a flag that is ON while the special electric switching execution mode is being executed. In step Sm0303, if it is determined that the special electric switching execution mode flag is not ON (step Sm0303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special electric switching execution mode is not being executed, the process advances to step Sm0304.

In step Sm0304, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is turned ON when the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a starts to fluctuate, and is turned OFF when the special symbol fluctuates. That is, the special symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is ON while the special symbol is fluctuating. In step Sm0304, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0304: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not fluctuating, the process advances to step Sm0305.

In step Sm0305, each value of the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 and the special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the special symbol determination area 64c of the main side RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sm0306.

In step Sm0306, the special symbol fluctuation start flag stored in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The special symbol variation start flag is a flag for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a, and is turned OFF when the variation of the special symbol is started, as will be described later. After executing step Sm0306, the ball entering process for this special figure starting opening is ended.

<Ball entry processing for V prize opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be explained. Ball entry processing for the V winning a prize opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 717: Sm0106).

FIG. 720 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the V winning hole. In step Sm0401, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the V winning hole 57av based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning hole 57av. In step Sm0401, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 57av (Sm0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0402, and it is determined whether the V winning flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON or not. Determine. The V winning flag turns ON when a game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, and when the V winning flag turns ON, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started, and when the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. This is a flag that is turned OFF when this occurs. That is, in step Sm0402, by determining whether or not the V winning flag has already been turned on, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning hole 57av, steps Sm0403 to Sm0405 described below The system uses a configuration that prevents redundant processing.

In step Sm0402, if it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0403 and the V winning flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0404, and the V winning prize type flag corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is turned ON is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the V winning prize A flag is turned ON as the V winning prize type flag, and the special symbol B flag is ON as the special symbol type flag. If so, the V winning prize B flag is turned ON as the V winning prize type flag. After that, the process advances to step Sm0405.

In step Sm0405, a V winning command is set. The V-winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball enters the V-winning hole 57av and wins the V-winning jackpot, and the type of the V-winning. The V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 721: Step Sm0503) of normal processing to be described later. Upon receiving the V-winning command, the audio emission control device 90 activates the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the fact that the game ball entered the V-winning hole 57av and won the V-winning jackpot, the type of the V-winning, and the V-winning. A V-winning performance is executed, which is a performance that suggests that the ``V'' winning performance is to be started.

After executing step Sm0405, the ball entry process for this V winning hole is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm0401 that no game ball has entered the V winning hole 57av (step Sm0401: NO), and when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON in step Sm0402 (step Sm0402: YES) ends the ball entry process for this V winning hole without executing the processes from step Sm0403 to step Sm0405 described above.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 721 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sm0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm0502.

In step Sm0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sm0503.

In step Sm0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sm0502, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Furthermore, if a startup command or commands related to various effects to be described later are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sm0503, the process advances to step Sm0504.

In step Sm0504, the values of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special pattern variation type determination counter Cs4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each value of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special pattern variation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, the corresponding counter value is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special pattern variation type determination counter Cs4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sm0505.

In step Sm0505, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read. After that, the process advances to step Sm0506.

In step Sm0506, a normal symbol control process which is a control process regarding the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a is executed. In the normal symbol control process, control is performed such as a general symbol lottery and a variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery. Details of the normal symbol control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0506, the process advances to step Sm0507.

In step Sm0507, a normal electric accessory control process, which is a control process regarding the ordinary electric accessory 34b, is executed. In the normal electric accessory control process, control in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 34b is performed. Details of the normal electric accessory control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0507, the process advances to step Sm0508.

In step Sm0508, a special symbol control process is executed, which is a control process regarding the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a. In the special symbol control process, the special symbol lottery and the variable display of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery are controlled. Details of the special symbol control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0508, the process advances to step Sm0509.

In step Sm0509, a special electric accessory control process, which is a control process regarding the special electric accessory, is executed. In the special electric accessory control process, control in a special electric opening/closing execution mode for opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b and the second special electric accessory 58b is performed. Details of the special electric accessory control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0509, the process advances to step Sm0510.

In step Sm0510, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the standby state. Thereafter, after executing step Sm0510, the process advances to step Sm0511.

In step Sm0511, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sm0503). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sm0511, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sm0511: NO), in step Sm0512 and step Sm0513, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the respective values of the random number initial value counter Cini, the regular figure variation type determination counter Cn4, and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sm0512, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sm0513, 1 is added to each value of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special pattern variation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, each updated value of the regular figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sm0511: YES), the process returns to step Sm0503 and each process from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the values of the random number initial value counter Cini, the regular figure variation type determination counter Cn4, and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 using this remaining time, these counter values are randomly updated. can do.

<Normal symbol control processing>
Next, the normal symbol control process will be explained. The normal symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 721: Sm0506).

FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing normal symbol control processing. In step Sm0601, a normal symbol variation start process is executed, which is a process for starting the variation of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing step Sm0601, the process advances to step Sm0602.

In step Sm0602, a normal symbol fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a, is executed. Details of the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0602, this normal symbol control process ends.

<Normal symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, the normal symbol variation start process will be explained. The normal symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 722: Sm0601) of the normal symbol control process.

FIG. 723 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation start processing. In step Sm0701, it is determined whether the general power switching execution mode flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The general power switching execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when starting the general power switching execution mode, and is turned OFF when the general power switching execution mode ends. That is, the general power switching execution mode flag is a flag that is ON while the general power switching execution mode is being executed.

In step Sm0701, if it is determined that the normal power opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm0701: YES), this normal symbol fluctuation start process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sm0702, which will be described later. . That is, during the execution of the normal power opening/closing execution mode, fluctuation of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a is not started. On the other hand, in step Sm0701, if it is determined that the normal power switching execution mode flag is not ON (Sm0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0702.

In step Sm0702, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The normal symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that turns ON when the normal symbol fluctuation starts in the normal symbol display section 38a, and turns OFF when the normal symbol fluctuation ends. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is ON while the normal symbol is fluctuating. In step Sm0702, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0702: NO), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not fluctuating, the process proceeds to step Sm0703.

In step Sm0703, it is determined whether the number SN of ordinary drawings pending is greater than or equal to "1". In step Sm0703, if it is determined that the normal symbol lottery pending number SN is not greater than "1" (Sm0703: NO), this normal symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm0703, if it is determined that the number SN of ordinary drawings pending is "1" or more (Sm0703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0704. That is, in a situation where the normal symbol opening/closing execution mode is not being executed and the normal symbols are not changing in the normal symbol display section 38a, when the common symbol lottery pending number SN is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step Sm0704.

In step Sm0704, the number SN of ordinary drawings pending is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sm0705.

In step Sm0705, a general pattern reservation information shift process is executed, which is a process of shifting the general pattern reservation information stored in each area of the general pattern reservation area 64d. Specifically, in the general pattern reservation information shift process, the general pattern reservation information stored in the first area of the general pattern reservation area 64d is moved to the general pattern determination area 64e, and then the general pattern reservation information is moved from the second area to the first area. , the general map reservation information in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on. After executing step Sm0705, the process advances to step Sm0706.

In step Sm0706, a common symbol correctness determination process is executed, which is a process for determining whether or not the common symbol wins. Specifically, in the normal pattern validity determination process, based on the value of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e and the above-mentioned normal pattern correctness determination table, it is determined whether the normal pattern wins or not. Determine whether or not. After executing step Sm0706, the process advances to step Sm0707.

In step Sm0707, a normal symbol type determination process, which is a process for determining the type of a regular symbol, is executed. Specifically, in the ordinary figure type determination process, the above-mentioned ordinary figure type determination table is selected according to the result of ordinary figure validity determination, and the value of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2 stored in the ordinary figure determination area 64e and the ordinary figure type determination table are selected. , the type of the normal symbol is determined based on the selected ordinary symbol type determination table. After executing step Sm0707, the process advances to step Sm0708.

In step Sm0708, the ordinary symbol type flag corresponding to the type of ordinary symbol determined in the ordinary symbol type determination process of step Sm0707 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that it is a normal symbol A in the ordinary symbol type determination process in step Sm0707, the ordinary symbol A flag is turned ON as the ordinary symbol type flag, and if it is determined that it is a regular symbol B. To do this, turn on the normal symbol B flag as the ordinary symbol type flag. After executing step Sm0708, the process advances to step Sm0709.

In step Sm0709, a general figure fluctuation time setting process is executed. The normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is a process for setting the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern display section 38a. Details of the ordinary figure fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm0709, the process advances to step Sm0710.

In step Sm0710, a command for normal figure variation is set. The normal pattern variation command includes information indicating that the current pattern change is based on the entry of the game ball into the normal pattern starting gate 35, as well as information as to whether or not a reach has occurred. Information about the normal figure fluctuation time set in step Sm0709 is included. After executing step Sm0710, the process advances to step Sm0711.

In step Sm0711, a general pattern type command is set. The ordinary symbol type command includes information on the result of ordinary symbol validity determination (whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit) and the result of ordinary symbol type determination (the type of ordinary symbol).

The ordinary figure variation command and ordinary figure type command set in step Sm0710 and step Sm0711 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 721). The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect based on the received ordinary figure variation command and ordinary figure type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing step Sm0711, the process advances to step Sm0712.

In step Sm0712, fluctuation of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm0713, and the normal figure fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned on. After that, this normal symbol variation start process is ended.

<General figure fluctuation time setting process>
Next, the ordinary figure fluctuation time setting process will be explained. The normal symbol fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 723: Sm0709).

FIG. 724 is a flowchart showing the general figure fluctuation time setting process. In step Sm0801, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 stored in the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm0802.

In step Sm0802, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern validity determination regarding the current normal pattern variation is a normal pattern hit. Specifically, among the general pattern type flags stored in the RAM 64, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is ON, and the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is set to ON. If it is ON, it is determined that the result of the determination of whether or not the normal pattern is correct is a normal pattern. In step Sm0802, when it is determined that the result of the determination of whether or not the normal pattern is correct (Sm0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0803.

In step Sm0803, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 is obtained by referring to the regular pattern fluctuation time table for per standard pattern stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the acquired variable time information is set in the general figure variable time timer counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value of this general figure variable time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm0804, this general pattern fluctuation time setting process is ended.

In step Sm0802, if it is determined that the result of the normal symbol validity determination regarding the current normal symbol variation is not a common symbol hit (Sm0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0805, and the reach is determined in the current normal symbol variation. Determine whether it occurs. Since this process (Sm0805) is executed when the result of the normal symbol propriety determination regarding the current normal symbol variation in step Sm0802 is not a normal symbol hit, in step Sm0805, the normal symbol propriety determination result is normal. It is determined whether or not a variation in a normal symbol that does not result in a hit is a variation in which a reach occurs. Specifically, with reference to the standard figure reach determination table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, the value of the standard figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the standard figure determination area 64e is determined as the standard figure reach determination table. If it matches the value set as reach occurrence in the table, it is determined that reach has occurred. In step Sm0805, if it is determined that reach occurs (Sm0805: YES), the process advances to step Sm0806.

In step Sm0806, the variation time corresponding to the current value of the normal pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 is referred to the normal pattern fluctuation time table (for occurrence of reach) stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Get information. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the general figure fluctuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the regular map fluctuation time setting process is ended.

In step Sm0805, if it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current variation of the normal symbol (Sm0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0807, and the normal symbol off (reach non-reach) is stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. With reference to the ordinary figure variation time table for (occurrence), the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the ordinary figure variation type determination counter Cn4 is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the general figure fluctuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the normal pattern variation time table for normal pattern loss (no reach occurrence) is such that the larger the number of normal pattern lottery pending pieces SN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is. It is set to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the number of pending lottery tickets SN, and the fluctuation time is set to be shorter as the number of pending lottery tickets SN is smaller. It's okay. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time information stored in the normal pattern variation time table for normal pattern winning and the normal pattern variation time table for normal pattern loss (reach occurrence).

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal symbol control process (FIG. 722: Sm0602).

FIG. 725 is a flowchart showing normal symbol fluctuation stop processing. In step Sm0901, it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation flag is ON. In step Sm0901, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0901: NO), this normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0901 that the normal figure fluctuation flag is ON (step Sm0901: YES), the process advances to step Sm0902.

In step Sm0902, it is determined whether or not the regular figure fluctuation time set in the regular figure fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 724) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the regular pattern fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it has become "0", it is determined that the regular pattern fluctuation time has elapsed. do. In step Sm0902, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (step Sm0902: NO), this normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm0902, if it is determined that the normal figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sm0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0903.

In step Sm0903, the normal symbols that are changing in the normal symbol display section 38a are stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal symbol type flag that is turned ON. As a result, the normal symbols in the display mode corresponding to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery are stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display section 38a. After executing step Sm0903, the process advances to step Sm0904.

In step Sm0904, it is determined whether or not the common symbol type flag corresponding to the common symbol is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern validity determination regarding the current normal pattern variation is a normal pattern hit. In step Sm0904, if it is determined that the ordinary symbol type flag corresponding to the ordinary symbol is not ON (step Sm0904: NO), that is, the result of the ordinary symbol validity determination regarding the current ordinary symbol variation is not the ordinary symbol. If there is, the process proceeds to step Sm0905, and the normal symbol type flag (in this case, the normal symbol Z flag) that is ON is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, this normal symbol variation stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sm0904, if it is determined that the common symbol type flag corresponding to the common symbol is ON (step Sm0904: YES), that is, the result of the normal symbol validity determination regarding the current variation of the common symbol is the common symbol. If it is a hit, the process advances to step Sm0906 and the general power switching execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, this normal symbol variation stop processing is ended. As a result, if the result of the normal pattern propriety determination regarding the current normal pattern variation is a normal pattern hit, the normal power opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Normal electric accessory control processing>
Next, the normal electric accessory control process will be explained. The normal electric accessory control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 721: Sm0507).

FIG. 726 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory control processing. In step Sm1001, it is determined whether the general electricity ending period flag is ON. The general electricity ending period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the general electricity ending period and turned OFF at the end of the general electricity ending period. That is, the general electricity ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the general electricity ending period is in progress.

In step Sm1001, if it is determined that the general electricity ending period flag is not ON (Sm1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1002, and it is determined whether the general electricity switching period flag is ON. The general power switching processing period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the general power switching processing period and turned OFF at the end of the general power switching processing period. That is, the general power switch-on/close processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the normal power switch-on/close processing period is in progress.

In step Sm1002, if it is determined that the general electricity opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1003, and it is determined whether the general electricity opening period flag is ON. The general electricity opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the general electricity opening period and turned OFF at the end of the general electricity opening period. That is, the general electricity opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is during the general electricity opening period.

If it is determined in step Sm1003 that the general power opening period flag is not ON (Sm1003: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1004, and it is determined whether the general power opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sm1004, if it is determined that the general electricity switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm1004: YES), the process proceeds to a processing group for starting the general electricity switching execution mode starting from step Sm1005, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step Sm1004, if it is determined that the normal electric opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1004: NO), this normal electric accessory control process is ended.

In step Sm1005, a normal power switching scenario selection process is executed. The utility switch scenario selection process is a process for selecting the type of utility switch scenario to be referred to in the utility switch execution mode, based on the utility map type flag and the above-mentioned utility switch scenario selection table. Specifically, for example, when the normal pattern A flag is ON as the normal pattern type flag, the normal electricity opening/closing scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1005, the process advances to step Sm1006.

In step Sm1006, general electricity opening time setting processing is executed. The general electricity opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the general electricity opening period (hereinafter also referred to as general electricity opening time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the general electric power opening time information is acquired from the general electric power switching scenario selected by the general electric power switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electric power opening time information is stored in the general electric power generating unit provided in the RAM 64. Set the power opening time timer counter. The value of this general electricity opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1006, the process advances to step Sm1007.

In step Sm1007, a utility power opening command is set. The set general electricity opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The audio emission control device 90 is set to execute a general electric power opening effect and a right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the general electric power line opening command. After executing step Sm1007, the process proceeds to step Sm1008, and the general electricity opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present normal electric accessory control process is ended.

In step Sm1003, if it is determined that the utility power opening period flag is ON (Sm1003: YES), the process advances to step Sm1009.

In step Sm1009, it is determined whether the general electricity opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the general electric power opening time timer counter set as the general electric power opening time in the general electric power opening time setting process described above is "0". In step Sm1009, if it is determined that the general electricity opening period has ended (Sm1009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1010, and the general electricity opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sm1011.

In step Sm1011, the normal power switching processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sm1012, and a normal power switching processing period command is set. The set normal power switching processing period command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output processing (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (FIG. 721). This normal power switch-on/close processing period command includes information on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened during the current normal power switch-on/close processing period. The audio emission control device 90 is set to execute an effect corresponding to the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 34b based on the received normal electric opening/closing processing period command. After executing step Sm1012, this normal electric accessory control process is ended.

In step Sm1002, if it is determined that the normal power switching processing period flag is ON (Sm1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1013, and the normal power switching processing is executed. In the normal electricity opening/closing process, the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is controlled based on the normal electricity opening/closing scenario selected by the normal electricity opening/closing scenario selection process described above. Details of the normal power switching processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1013, the process advances to step Sm1014.

In step Sm1014, it is determined whether the normal power switching processing period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the last opening of the normal electric accessory 34b based on the normal electric opening/closing scenario has been completed and it has entered the closed state, and whether the final opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b has been completed and it is closed. When it is determined that the state has been reached, it is determined that the normal power switching processing period has ended. In step Sm1014, if it is determined that the normal electric power opening/closing processing period has not ended (Sm1014: NO), the present normal electric accessory control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1014 that the normal power switching processing period has ended (Sm1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1015, and the normal power switching processing period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sm1016.

In step Sm1016, a general electricity ending time setting process is executed. The general electricity ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the general electricity ending period (hereinafter also referred to as general electricity ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the general electric power ending time information is acquired from the general electric power switching scenario selected by the general electric power switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electric power ending time information is stored in the general electric power generating unit provided in the RAM 64. Set the electric ending time timer counter. The value of this general electricity ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1016, the process advances to step Sm1017.

In step Sm1017, a general electricity ending command is set. The set general electricity ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). After executing step Sm1017, the process proceeds to step Sm1018, and the general electricity ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present normal electric accessory control process is ended.

In step Sm1001, if it is determined that the general electricity ending period flag is ON (Sm1001: YES), the process advances to step Sm1019.

In step Sm1019, it is determined whether the general electricity ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the general power ending time timer counter set as the general power ending time in the general power ending time setting process described above is "0". In step Sm1019, if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory ending period has not ended (Sm1019: NO), the present ordinary electric accessory control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1019 that the general electricity ending period has ended (Sm1019: YES), the process advances to step Sm1020.

In step Sm1020, the utility power ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1021, and the ordinary figure type flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm1022.

In step Sm1022, a general power switching execution mode end command is set. The set normal power opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1023, and the general power switching execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the present normal electric accessory control process is ended.

<Normal power opening/closing processing>
Next, the normal power switching processing will be explained. The normal electric power opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 726: Sm1013) of the normal electric accessory control process.

FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing normal power switching processing. In step Sm1101, it is determined whether the normal electric accessory 34b is open. In step Sm1101, if it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is not open (Sm1101: NO), the process advances to step Sm1102.

In step Sm1102, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the normal electric accessory 34b are satisfied. Specifically, the normal electricity switching scenario selected by the normal electricity switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the opening condition for the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal electricity switching scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1102, if it is determined that the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1103.

In step Sm1103, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. After that, the process advances to step Sm1104.

In step Sm1104, a normal power release command is set. The normal power release command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the normal electric accessory 34b has been released. The general power release command is sent to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1104, this general power switch-on/closing process ends.

In step Sm1102, if it is determined that the opening condition for the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (Sm1102: NO), the main electric power opening/closing process is directly ended.

In step Sm1101, if it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is open (Sm1101: YES), the process advances to step Sm1105.

In step Sm1105, it is determined whether a closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied. Specifically, the normal electricity opening/closing scenario selected by the normal electricity opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal electricity opening/closing scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1105, if it is determined that the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1106.

In step Sm1106, the normal electric accessory 34b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sm1107.

In step Sm1107, a utility power closing command is set. The normal power closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the normal electric accessory 34b has been closed. The general electricity closing command is sent to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1107, this general power switch-on/closing process ends.

In step Sm1105, if it is determined that the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (Sm1105: NO), the main electric power opening/closing process is directly ended.

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process will be explained. The special symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 721: Sm0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 728 is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing. In step Sm1201, a special symbol variation start process is executed, which is a process for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing step Sm1201, the process advances to step Sm1202.

In step Sm1202, a special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed, which is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. Details of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1202, this special symbol control process ends.

<Special symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, the special symbol variation start process will be explained. The special symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 728: Sm1201) of the special symbol control process.

FIG. 729 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. In step Sm1301, it is determined whether the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The special electric switching execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when starting the special electric switching execution mode, and is turned OFF when the special electric switching execution mode is ended. That is, the special electric switching execution mode flag is a flag that is ON while the special electric switching execution mode is being executed.

In step Sm1301, if it is determined that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm1301: YES), this special symbol variation start process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sm1302, which will be described later. That is, during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1301 that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1301: NO), the process advances to step Sm1302.

In step Sm1302, it is determined whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. In step Sm1302, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1302: YES), this special symbol variation start process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sm1303, which will be described later. That is, when the V winning flag is ON, the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a do not start changing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1302 that the V winning flag is not ON (Sm1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1303.

In step Sm1303, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is turned ON when the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a starts to fluctuate, and is turned OFF when the special symbol fluctuates. That is, the special symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is ON while the special symbol is fluctuating. In step Sm1303, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation flag is ON (step Sm1303: YES), this special symbol fluctuation start process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sm1304, which will be described later. . That is, when the flag during special symbol variation is ON, variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a is not started. On the other hand, in step Sm1303, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm1303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not fluctuating, the process proceeds to step Sm1304.

In step Sm1304, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation start flag is ON. As mentioned above, the special pattern fluctuation start flag indicates that the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a when the special pattern opening/closing execution mode is not in progress and the special pattern is not changing in the special pattern display section 37a. This is a flag that is turned ON in this case. In step Sm1304, if it is determined that the special symbol variation start flag is not ON (Sm1304: NO), this special symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm1304, when it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation start flag is ON (Sm1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1305. That is, when the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, the V winning flag is not ON, and the special pattern is not changing in the special pattern display section 37a. , proceed to step Sm1305.

In step Sm1305, the special figure fluctuation start flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm1306.

In step Sm1306, a special pattern correctness determination process is executed, which is a process for determining whether or not a special pattern winning (special pattern large winning or special pattern small winning) is won. Specifically, in the special pattern validity determination process, based on the value of the special pattern validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the special pattern determination area 64e and the above-mentioned special pattern validity determination table, it is determined whether the special pattern is won or not. Determine whether or not. After executing step Sm1306, the process advances to step Sm1307.

In step Sm1307, special symbol type determination processing, which is processing for determining the type of special symbol, is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination process, the above-mentioned special figure type determination table is selected according to the result of the special figure validity determination, and the value of the special figure type determination counter Cn2 stored in the special figure determination area 64e and the value of the special figure type determination counter Cn2 are selected. , and the selected special symbol type determination table, the type of the special symbol is determined. After executing step Sm1307, the process advances to step Sm1308.

In step Sm1308, the special symbol type flag corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the special symbol type determination process of step Sm1307 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that the special symbol is A in the special symbol type determination process in step Sm1307, the special symbol A flag is turned on as the special symbol type flag, and if it is determined that the special symbol is B. To do so, turn on the special symbol B flag as the special symbol type flag. After executing step Sm1308, the process advances to step Sm1309.

In step Sm1309, special figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed. The special symbol variation time setting process is a process for setting the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. Details of the special figure fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm1309, the process advances to step Sm1310.

In step Sm1310, a special figure variation command is set. The special figure variation command includes information indicating that the current symbol variation is based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 34a, and information on the special figure variation time set in step Sm1309. It is. After executing step Sm1310, the process advances to step Sm1311.

In step Sm1311, a special figure type command is set. The special pattern type command includes information on the result of the special pattern validity judgment (whether or not the special pattern is a hit) and the result of the special pattern type judgment (the type of special pattern).

The special figure variation command and special figure type command set in step Sm1310 and step Sm1311 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 721). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect based on the received special figure variation command and special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sm1311, the process advances to step Sm1312.

In step Sm1312, variation of the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1313, and the special symbol fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, this special symbol variation start process is ended.

<Special figure fluctuation time setting process>
Next, the special figure fluctuation time setting process will be explained. The special symbol variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 729: Sm1309) of the special symbol variation start process.

FIG. 730 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation time setting process. In step Sm1401, the value of the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 stored in the regular symbol variation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Sm1402.

In step Sm1402, with reference to the special symbol variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, variation time information corresponding to the current value of the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1403, and the acquired variable time information is set in the special figure variable time timer counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value of this special figure variable time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1403, this special figure fluctuation time setting process is ended.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 728: Sm1202) of the special symbol control process.

FIG. 731 is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation stop processing. In step Sm1501, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation flag is ON or not. In step Sm1501, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm1501: NO), this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm1501, when it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation flag is ON (step Sm1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1502.

In step Sm1502, it is determined whether the special figure variation time set in the special figure variation time setting process (FIG. 730) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure variation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it has become "0", it is determined that the special figure variation time has elapsed. do. In step Sm1502, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (step Sm1502: NO), this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm1502, when it is determined that the special figure variation time has elapsed (step Sm1502: YES), the process advances to step Sm1503.

In step Sm1503, the special symbol being changed in the special symbol display section 37a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. As a result, special symbols in a display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 37a. After executing step Sm1503, the process advances to step Sm1504.

In step Sm1504, it is determined whether the special pattern type flag corresponding to the special pattern win (special pattern jackpot or special pattern small win) is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol validity determination regarding the current change in the special symbol is a special symbol hit. In step Sm1504, if it is determined that the special pattern type flag corresponding to the special pattern is not ON (step Sm1504: NO), that is, the result of the special pattern propriety judgment regarding the current change in the special pattern is not the special pattern. If there is, the process proceeds to step Sm1505, and the special figure type flag that is ON is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1507, and the special figure fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. In addition, in this embodiment, since all the results of the special pattern validity determination are special pattern small wins, it is not possible to determine that the special pattern type flag corresponding to the special pattern winning is not ON in step Sm1504 and proceed to step Sm1505. do not have.

On the other hand, in step Sm1504, if it is determined that the special symbol type flag corresponding to the special symbol is ON (step Sm1504: YES), that is, the result of the special symbol appropriateness determination regarding the current change in special symbol is the special symbol. If it is a hit, the process advances to step Sm1506 and the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1507, and the special figure fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. As a result, if the result of the special symbol propriety determination regarding the current special symbol variation is a special symbol hit, the special electric opening/closing execution mode will be started.

<Special electric accessory control processing>
Next, the special electric accessory control process will be explained. The special electric accessory control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 721: Sm0509) of the normal process.

FIG. 732 is a flowchart showing the special electric accessory control process. In step Sm1601, it is determined whether the special electric train ending period flag is ON. The special telephone ending period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special telephone ending period and turned OFF at the end of the special telephone ending period. That is, the special call ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special call ending period is in progress.

In step Sm1601, if it is determined that the special electric line ending period flag is not ON (Sm1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1602, and it is determined whether the special electric line opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The special electric switching processing period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special electric switching processing period and turned OFF at the end of the special electric switching processing period. That is, the special electric switch switching processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special electric current switching processing period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special electric opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1603, and it is determined whether the special electric opening period flag is ON. The special telephone opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special telephone opening period and turned OFF at the end of the special telephone opening period. That is, the special telephone opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special telephone opening period is in progress.

In step Sm1603, if it is determined that the special electric opening period flag is not ON (Sm1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1604, and it is determined whether the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sm1604, if it is determined that the special electric switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm1604: YES), the process proceeds to a processing group for starting the special electric switching execution mode starting from step Sm1607, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Sm1604, if it is determined that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1605, and it is determined whether or not the V winning prize flag is ON. In step Sm1605, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1606, where the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag and the V trigger flag are turned ON, and then, in step Sm1607, which will be described later. The process proceeds to the subsequent processing group for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The V trigger flag is a flag for determining whether the trigger for executing the current special electric opening/closing execution mode is due to a V winning prize. On the other hand, in step Sm1605, if it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm1605: NO), this special electric accessory control process is ended. That is, in this embodiment, not only when a special figure is won in the special figure lottery (when the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON), but also when a game ball enters the V winning hole 57av and a V winning jackpot is won. The special electric opening/closing execution mode is also started when the player wins (when the V winning flag is turned ON).

In step Sm1607, special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection processing is executed. The special train opening/closing scenario selection process selects the type of special train opening/closing scenario to be referred to in the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the V trigger flag, the V winning type flag, the special figure type flag, and the above-mentioned special train opening/closing scenario selection table. This is the process of Specifically, for example, when the V trigger flag is OFF and the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, special symbol opening/closing scenario A for special symbol winning is selected. Further, for example, when the V trigger flag is ON and the V winning prize A flag is ON as the V winning prize type flag, the V winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1607, the process advances to step Sm1608.

In step Sm1608, a special electric train opening time setting process is executed. The special telephone opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the special telephone opening period (hereinafter also referred to as special telephone opening time). Specifically, in this embodiment, special train opening time information is acquired from the special train opening/closing scenario selected by the above-mentioned special train opening/closing scenario selection process, and the acquired special train opening time information is stored in the special train opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. Set to . The value of this special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1608, the process advances to step Sm1609.

In step Sm1609, a special call opening command is set. The set special electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The audio light emission control device 90 is set to execute a special call opening effect and a right-handed notification effect based on receiving the special call opening command. After executing step Sm1609, the process advances to step Sm1610 and the special electric opening period flag is turned ON. After that, this special electric accessory control process ends.

In step Sm1603, if it is determined that the special electric opening period flag is ON (Sm1603: YES), the process advances to step Sm1611.

In step Sm1611, it is determined whether the special call opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special train opening time timer counter set as the special train opening time in the above-mentioned special train opening time setting process is "0". In step Sm1611, if it is determined that the special electric line opening period has ended (Sm1611: YES), the process advances to step Sm1612 and the special electric line opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sm1613.

In step Sm1613, round display start processing is executed, which is processing for displaying the number of rounds in the current special electric opening/closing execution mode on the round display section 39. Specifically, the number of rounds set in the selected special electric opening/closing scenario is read out, and the read out number of rounds is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step Sm1613, the process advances to step Sm1614.

In step Sm1614, the special electric switching processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sm1615, and a special electric switch opening/closing processing period command is set. The set special electric switch opening/closing processing period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (FIG. 721). This special electric opening/closing processing period command includes information on the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric opening/closing processing period. Based on the received special electric opening/closing processing period command, the audio emission control device 90 is set to execute an effect corresponding to the number of openings of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b. After executing step Sm1615, this special electric accessory control process ends.

In step Sm1602, if it is determined that the special electric switching processing period flag is ON (Sm1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1616, and the special electric switching processing is executed. In the special electric opening/closing process, the opening/closing operation of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is controlled based on the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the above-mentioned special electric opening/closing scenario selection process. Details of the special electric switch opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sm1616, the process advances to step Sm1617.

In step Sm1617, it is determined whether the special electric switching processing period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the last opening of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b based on the special electric opening/closing scenario has been completed and the closed state has been reached, and the first special electric accessory 58b is closed. When it is determined that the last opening of the object 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b has been completed and the closed state has been reached, it is determined that the special electric opening/closing processing period has ended. In step Sm1617, if it is determined that the special electric opening/closing process period has not ended (Sm1617: NO), this special electric accessory control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1617 that the special electric switching processing period has ended (Sm1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1618, and the special electric switching processing period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sm1619.

In step Sm1619, a round display end process is executed, which is a process for ending the display of the number of rounds on the round display section 39. After that, the process advances to step Sm1620.

In step Sm1620, a special call ending time setting process is executed. The special call ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the special call ending period (hereinafter also referred to as special call ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, special train ending time information is acquired from the special train opening/closing scenario selected by the above-mentioned special train opening/closing scenario selection process, and the acquired special train ending time information is stored in the special train ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. Set to . The value of this special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1620, the process advances to step Sm1621.

In step Sm1621, a special electricity ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The audio emission control device 90 is set to execute a special electric line ending effect based on receiving the special electric line ending command. After executing step Sm1621, the process advances to step Sm1622, and the special electricity ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this special electric accessory control process ends.

In step Sm1601, if it is determined that the special electricity ending period flag is ON (Sm1601: YES), the process advances to step Sm1623.

In step Sm1623, it is determined whether the special call ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special call ending time timer counter set as the special call ending time in the above-described special call ending time setting process is "0". In step Sm1623, if it is determined that the special electric accessory ending period has not ended (Sm1623: NO), this special electric accessory control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special electric train ending period has ended (Sm1623: YES), the process advances to step Sm1624.

In step Sm1624, the special call ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm1625.

In step Sm1625, it is determined whether the V trigger flag is ON. In step Sm1625, if it is determined that the V trigger flag is not ON (step Sm1625: NO), that is, if the trigger for executing the current special electric opening/closing execution mode is not due to a V winning, the process advances to step Sm1626. , turn off the special figure type flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm1628, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is ON (step Sm1625: YES), that is, if the trigger for executing the current special electric opening/closing execution mode is due to a V winning, step Sm1627 Then, the V trigger flag, the V prize winning flag, and the V winning prize type flag are turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm1628.

In step Sm1628, a special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The set special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The sound emission control device 90 is set to end the special electric line ending effect based on receiving the special electric opening/closing execution mode end command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1629, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, this special electric accessory control process ends.

<Special electric opening/closing process>
Next, the special electric switch opening/closing process will be explained. The special electric opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 732: Sm1616) of the special electric accessory control process.

FIG. 733 is a flowchart showing special electric switch opening/closing processing. In step Sm1701, it is determined whether the first special electric accessory 57b is open. In step Sm1701, if it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is not open (Sm1701: NO), the process advances to step Sm1702.

In step Sm1702, it is determined whether a condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the opening condition for the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1702, if it is determined that the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (Sm1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1703.

In step Sm1703, the first special electric accessory 57b is released. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm1704.

In step Sm1704, a first special electricity release command is set. The first special electric release command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been released. The first special power release command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1704, this special electric switch opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sm1702, if it is determined that the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is not satisfied (Sm1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708, which will be described later.

In step Sm1701, if it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is being opened (Sm1701: YES), the process advances to step Sm1705.

In step Sm1705, it is determined whether the closing condition for the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the closing condition for the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric switch opening/closing scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1705, if it is determined that the closing condition for the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (Sm1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1706.

In step Sm1706, the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sm1707.

In step Sm1707, a first special electricity closing command is set. The first special electric power closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been closed. The first special electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1707, this special electric switch opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sm1705, if it is determined that the closing condition for the first special electric accessory 57b is not satisfied (Sm1705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708, which will be described later.

In step Sm1708, it is determined whether the second special electric accessory 58b is open. In step Sm1708, if it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is not open (Sm1708: NO), the process advances to step Sm1709.

In step Sm1709, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the second special electric accessory 58b are satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1709, if it is determined that the condition for opening the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1709: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1710.

In step Sm1710, the second special electric accessory 58b is released. After that, the process advances to step Sm1711.

In step Sm1711, a second special electricity release command is set. The second special electric power opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has been opened. The second special power release command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1711, this special electric switch opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sm1709, if it is determined that the opening condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1709: NO), this special electric opening/closing process is directly ended.

In step Sm1708, if it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is being opened (Sm1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1712.

In step Sm1712, it is determined whether the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric switch opening/closing scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1712, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1713.

In step Sm1713, the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sm1714.

In step Sm1714, a second special electricity closing command is set. The second special electric accessory close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has been closed. The second special electric power closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1714, this special electric switch opening/closing process ends.

In step Sm1712, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1712: NO), this special electric opening/closing process is directly ended.

<<M6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 734 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sm3101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sm3101, the process advances to step Sm3102.

In step Sm3102, a process for general game round performance is executed. In the normal figure game round performance processing, processing related to the effect during the execution of the normal figure game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when a command for ordinary pattern variation and a general pattern type command are received, the normal pattern variation time included in the general pattern variation command and the type of normal pattern included in the general pattern type command are Based on this, processing related to variable display and static display of decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3102, the process advances to step Sm3103.

In step Sm3103, a normal power switch opening/closing execution mode presentation process is executed. In the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during execution of the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a general electricity opening command is received, settings are made to execute a general electricity opening performance and a right-handed notification process corresponding to the type of general electricity opening/closing scenario. Further, when a general power switch-on/close processing period command is received, a general power switch-on/close processing period effect corresponding to the type of general power switch-on/close scenario is set to be executed. Further, when a general power opening command is received, a general electric power opening effect corresponding to the type of general electric power opening/closing scenario and the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed. Further, when a general electricity closing command or a general electricity ending command is received, a general electricity closing effect corresponding to the type of general electricity opening/closing scenario and the number of closing times of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed. Furthermore, when it is 5 seconds before the end of the general electric power ending period, a general electric power ending effect is executed. After executing step Sm3103, the process advances to step Sm3104.

In step Sm3104, special figure game round performance processing is executed. In the special figure game round performance processing, processing related to the performance during execution of the special figure game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special pattern variation command and a special pattern type command are received, the special pattern variation time included in the special pattern variation command and the special pattern type included in the special pattern type command are Based on this, processing related to variable display and static display of decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3104, the process advances to step Sm3105.

In step Sm3105, special electric opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the effect during execution of the special electric current opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special train opening command is received, settings are made to execute a special train opening performance and right-handed notification process corresponding to the type of special train opening/closing scenario. Further, when receiving a special electric train opening/closing processing period command, settings are made to execute a special electric train opening/closing processing period effect corresponding to the type of special electric train opening/closing scenario. Further, when a special electric power release command is received, a special electric power opening effect corresponding to the type of special electric power opening/closing scenario and the number of times the special electric accessory is opened is executed. Furthermore, when a special electric train closing command is received, a special electric train interval period performance corresponding to the type of special electric train opening/closing scenario and the number of times the special electric accessory is closed is executed. Furthermore, when a special train ending command is received, a special train ending effect corresponding to the type of special train opening/closing scenario is executed. After executing step Sm3105, the process advances to step Sm3106.

In step Sm3106, V winning presentation processing is executed. In the V-winning effect processing, when a V-winning command is received, a setting is made to execute a presentation that suggests a V-winning effect. After executing step Sm3106, the process advances to step Sm3107.

In step Sm3107, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sm3107, the process advances to step Sm3108.

In step Sm3108, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio data read out in each of the above-described production processes. After executing step Sm3108, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 735 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sm6101, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Sm6102.

In step Sm6102, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 736 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sm6201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 737 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sm6301, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 736) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, if a video display start command corresponding to a preview performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the video corresponding to the preview performance is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, if a video display start command corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the video corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the command correspondence processing (Sm6301), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them. Details of the command corresponding processing will be described later.

In step Sm6302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sm6301) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm6303.

In step Sm6303, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sm6302), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm6304.

In step Sm6304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sm6303), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm6305, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that a player can consecutively win a V-winning jackpot is determined based on the type of normal symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of times the special electricity opening/closing execution mode can be executed based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode is determined. Therefore, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode becomes a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when a general figure is won in the ordinary figure lottery and the ordinary electric power opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player may be interested in the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric utility opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to make the game more interesting and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, since a special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various regulations imposed on pachinko machines in which a special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, this embodiment does not have a high probability mode (so-called variable probability state) in which the probability of winning a special drawing jackpot is high in the special drawing lottery, so the control can be simplified and it is possible to The various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode (so-called electric support mode) increases the probability of winning a common symbol in the common symbol lottery, and increases the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened when winning a common symbol. Since the machine does not have any mode), control can be simplified and the various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines that have these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various gaming features.

In addition, since this embodiment does not have a function to hold the special drawing drawing, the special drawing holding area for holding the special drawing drawing can be omitted from the main side RAM 64, and the storage area of the main side RAM 64 can be saved. It becomes possible to effectively utilize it for other purposes.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the regular electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots occur consecutively). Therefore, when playing a series of jackpots in a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is in high probability mode (so-called variable probability state), it is difficult to win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery and the next special electric opening/closing execution mode does not start easily. This makes it possible to avoid such a situation (so-called jamming).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the general figure starting gate 35, and the general figure is won in the general figure lottery and the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, and when the normal figure opening/closing execution mode is executed, If the firing mode reaches 301 (the so-called "right-handed" firing mode) and the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals, the game ball enters the special figure starting port during the normal power opening/closing execution mode. 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed, and during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed. The game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 57a enters the V winning hole 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed.

According to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode is the time required from the start to the end of the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, and the time required from the start to the end of the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. The configuration is such that the time can be set to be longer than the sum of the time required from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (total time: 128.0 seconds). More specifically, in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals in a firing mode in which it reaches the flow path 301 (a so-called "right-handed" firing mode), the normal power opening/closing execution mode is started. If the time required from the time when the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 714) is defined as the specific required time, The configuration allows the time required to complete the process to be set to be longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit ends and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends, the normal electric switch opening/closing execution mode continues, and the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode continues. During the continuation of the mode, the normal electric accessory 34b may transition to the open state and the game ball may enter the special figure starting port 34a.

According to the present embodiment, in the case where the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the general figure lottery in which the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice or more, the special electric power accessory 34b based on the V winning jackpot is selected during the execution of the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends. becomes possible. If the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot ends, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed again, and then the V-winning jackpot is again executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed. In other words, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won at a general figure that opens twice or more in the ordinary figure lottery and the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode is executed, the special electric accessory opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning and the V winning jackpot are executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the power switching execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game ball is moved to the special figure start opening 34a while the special symbols are changing, during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. When the ball enters the special drawing, it avoids acquiring various counter values for the special drawing lottery (in other words, it does not have a function to hold the special drawing lottery). Even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a hit or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution based on a special figure small hit will not be executed afterwards. mode will not be executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will also not be executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, we want the player to finish the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot before the timing when the game ball can enter the special figure starting port 34a comes. It can create a sense of tension.

Also, unlike this embodiment, if the game ball starts the special symbol while the special symbol is changing, while the special electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed based on the special symbol small hit, or while the special electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed based on the V winning jackpot. In the case where a configuration is adopted in which acquisition of various counter values for the special drawing lottery is not avoided even when a ball enters the opening 34a (that is, a configuration including a function of holding the special lottery drawing), the normal electric accessory 34b If a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of First, the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may be executed multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, one of the ordinary electric accessory 34b It is possible to realize a game in which the number of executions of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed once for each opening of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Therefore, the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state because the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has become longer than a predetermined length, the special electricity It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the opening/closing execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not end, and even though the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends early during the general electricity interval period of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode ends. It is possible to prevent the game from being prolonged due to a long period from when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened until the next release.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the normal power switching execution mode, the normal electric accessory 34b is in the normal power interval period, which is a period from the transition from the open state to the closed state until the transition from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a longer time (135.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, the length of the general electric power interval period of the general electric power opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 A case will be described in which a comparative example configuration is adopted in which the time is set to a shorter time (for example, 80.0 seconds).

First, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. After that, the first general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the second time, the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be newly started. After that, the second general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the third time, the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are in the first and third opening states of the ordinary electric accessories 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. The game starts when the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a, but even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a in the second open state, the game will not start. .

Next, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power opening/closing execution mode has ended, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has not been executed, so the game ball If the ball enters the special figure starting hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. After that, the second general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the third time, the special electric electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be newly started. After that, the third general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the fourth time, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are in the second and fourth opening states of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. The game starts when the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a, but even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a in the third open state, the game will not start. .

As described above, unlike the present embodiment, the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the general power interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is set to a shorter time than the length of the special power switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this case, the timing of the start of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode is not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. This poses a problem in that it becomes difficult to control the game.

Next, set the length of the regular power interval interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode to a time (135. A case will be described in which the configuration of this embodiment is adopted in which the time period is set to .0 seconds).

First, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit will be executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed. After that, the first general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed either. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power opening/closing execution mode has ended, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has not been executed, so the game ball If the ball enters the special figure starting hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the regular power interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special power switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, it is assumed that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not being executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a when the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V There is no possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the winning jackpot will not be started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode, It is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to execute the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set an upper limit on the number of times that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the middle and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the general electric accessory 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state in the general electric utility opening/closing execution mode until the general electric drawing lottery becomes executable, which is the general electric utility ending. The length of the period can be set to a longer time (140.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which the length of the general electric line ending period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. I will explain about it. In this configuration, for example, if a general drawing drawing is executed after the end of the general electricity ending period and a general drawing is won, the general electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the game is played during the execution of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, if the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the general electric power ending period, the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot even after the general electrician ending period ends. The execution mode continues, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may continue even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric line ending period can be set to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. To suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot continues even after the general electric line ending period ends, and to suppress a disadvantageous situation to the player. I can do it.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general power ending period is set to a length greater than or equal to the length of the general power interval period, so that a series of The flow of the game can be similarly realized during the general electricity ending period of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. As a result, a new system has been created that enables the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to be executed in both the general electricity interval period and the general electricity ending period in the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to realize games.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed during the electric power interval period of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode, so that the number of the electric power interval periods included in the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is This is a very important element for people. Therefore, when a player wins a general map in a general map lottery and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player will not know how many regular power switch interval periods are included in the general power switch opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to arouse interest in the game and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed multiple times between the start and the end of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode. Whether or not the game is successful is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the player wins the general map in the general map lottery and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is started, and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode starts. In this case, it is possible to make the player interested in how many times the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the performance (Fig. 715, Fig. 716 (A), etc.) that suggests the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is When the player wins and the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player can be made interested in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode, and the game is improved. You can improve your interest.

In particular, in this embodiment, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the case of winning the normal drawing lottery (the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened ( In other words, since it suggests the number of consecutive winnings of V-winning jackpots, it can make the player feel that they want the decorative symbols with as large a number as possible to stop on the active line L1, which improves the interest of the game. can be achieved. Further, when a reach is generated by a decorative pattern with a large number, it is possible to make the player have high expectations.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the general drawing lottery, the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is performed at least a plurality of times for one general drawing. When one cycle from the opening of the normal electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 714) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game round, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is defined as one special game round. One special game round is executed based on the object 34b opening at the first timing (time t3 in Figure 714), and the normal electric power is released at the second timing (time t11 in Figure 714) after the one special game round ends. The accessory 34b is controlled to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game a plurality of times for one common symbol in the common symbol lottery.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a restriction period is generated to limit the start of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols. More specifically, a predetermined limited period is generated in a period from the first timing until the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating display of normal symbols from starting before the end of one special game round, so the normal drawing lottery is executed even though one special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the user is As a result, for example, even though the result of the regular lottery is a regular lottery that is advantageous to the player, the game ball is not a special lottery because the 1 special game round that has already been executed has not finished. It is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the ball enters the starting hole 34a.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of V-winning jackpots (V-winning jackpots A and B) are set, so not only the number of V-winning jackpots won in one utility switch opening/closing execution mode, but also the It is also possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to whether he or she will win the type of V-winning jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot. The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode (2.1 seconds) based on the special train opening/closing scenario B for special map small winnings. Since it is the same as the total time B, which is the sum of the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode (125.9 seconds) based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small win, When the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot is executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the special drawing small win is executed. , the timing at which the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends is the same as when the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B is subsequently executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b becomes the same, so for example, the content of the performance executed during the waiting time can be made common. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, a regular game starting gate 35 is provided at the lower central position of the game board 30, and a general prize opening 32 is located at a position where the game ball that enters the regular game starting gate 35 can enter. Since this is provided, similar to a general pachinko machine in which a special figure starting port 34a is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, while awarding a prize ball to a player, it is possible to win a regular figure in a regular figure lottery. It is possible to realize a game in which the player expects to win a prize.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operating handle 25 so that the game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35, so many game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35. It will be a ball. In this embodiment, since the game ball that enters the normal figure starting gate 35 enters the general winning hole 32, it is possible to increase the proportion of the number of prize balls from the general winning hole 32 to the total number of prize balls. can. In other words, it is possible to lower the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the action of the accessory to the total number of prize balls.

<<M7>> Modification of the 13th embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《M7-1》Variation 1:
In the embodiment described above, just before the end of the power interval period of the power switch execution mode, a pseudo power switch ending effect that suggests the end of the power switch execution mode is executed, so that the player is temporarily informed of the power switch. After making the user think that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, it may be configured to perform a continuation performance which is a performance that suggests that the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode will actually continue without ending. This will be explained in detail below.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, in addition to the seven types of normal symbols A to G in the above embodiment, a normal symbol H (H per common symbol) is set as a result of the common symbol type determination in the common symbol lottery. , In addition to the seven types of general electric switching scenarios A to G in the above embodiment, a general electric switching scenario H is prepared. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol H is the ordinary symbol H in the ordinary symbol type determination, the ordinary symbol opening/closing scenario H is selected.

Compared to the normal electricity switching scenario G (in which the normal electric accessory 34b is opened 7 times), the normal electricity opening/closing scenario H is different from the first closing of the ordinary electric accessory 34b to the second opening during the ordinary electricity opening/closing processing period. The only difference is the length of the closing period (first general power interval period), and the other controls are the same as the normal power opening/closing scenario G. Specifically, in the above-mentioned general power switching scenario G, the length of all general power interval periods including the first general power interval period is set to 135.0 seconds, whereas in the general power switching scenario H In this case, the length of the first general power interval period is set to 145.0 seconds, which is 10.0 seconds longer than the other general power interval periods.

In this modified example, when winning the winning symbol H in the lottery, the decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as in the case of winning the winning symbol A. 111" and stops.

The player who recognizes the stop mode of this decorative pattern opens the normal electric accessory 34b once in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode that is executed based on the current normal pattern winning, and executes the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode. It is recognized that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot is executed once during this period.

After that, it is suggested that the utility switching execution mode will end for 5 seconds from 10 seconds before to 5 seconds before the end of the first utility interval period of the utility switching execution mode based on the utility switching scenario H. Execute a pseudo-disaster ending performance. The contents of this pseudo general electric power ending effect are the same as the contents of the normal general electric power ending effect (Fig. 716 (B )) is the same as

FIG. 738 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. In this modified example, as a pseudo public electricity ending effect, a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. Display. In addition, during the execution of this pseudo general electric power ending production, a right-handed instruction image GD2, which is an image combining a character string such as "right-handed hit" and a right-pointing arrow, is displayed in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Display. This right-handed hitting instruction image GD2 is smaller in size than the right-handed hitting instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. 716(A), and is a display that is difficult to be recognized by the player.

The player who recognizes this pseudo ordinary electricity opening/closing execution effect understands that in this ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed only once based on the V winning jackpot, and the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode ends. I recognize that.

Thereafter, for 5 seconds from 5 seconds before the end of the first general power interval period to its end, a continuation effect is performed that indicates that the general power switch opening/closing execution mode continues without ending. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 738(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a continuous effect, and a character string saying "Are you surprised!? There are still more jackpots to come!" Display. During execution of this continuous performance, a right-hand hitting instruction image GD1 larger than the right-hand hitting instruction image GD2 shown in FIG. 738(A) is displayed in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, Outputs a sound such as "Hit the right!" As a result, the player can recognize that the general power opening/closing execution mode continues without ending, and can also recognize that it is a state in which he should "hit the ball to the right."

As explained above, in this modified example, after the pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed, which is the effect that suggests that the general electric power switching execution mode ends, it is possible that the general electric power switching execution mode will continue without ending. Since a continuation effect that is a suggestive effect is executed, after giving the player a feeling of disappointment that the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes even more difficult to realize that the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode actually continues without ending. It can create great joy and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, the decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode such as "111" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and then the pseudo general power ending effect is displayed during the first general power interval period. However, the target general electric power interval period during which the pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed is not limited to the first electric power electric power interval. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the decorative pattern is stopped in a display mode such as "333" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and then a pseudo general power ending effect is executed during the third general power interval period. Good too. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed in any of the electric power interval periods from the second time onward. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed every time during the electric power interval period. Even with such a configuration, after giving the player a sense of disappointment that the general power switching execution mode ends, it makes the player feel even greater joy when the general power switching execution mode actually continues without ending. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《M7-2》Variation 2:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the control mode of the final round of the special electric switch opening/closing processing period in the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is set to be a different mode from the control mode of other rounds, and in the said final round, Unless the maximum number of game balls enters the second grand prize opening 58a within a predetermined time to end the final round early, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V prize jackpot will not be executed. It may also be configured such that the This will be explained in detail below.

In this modification, only the round game of the final round (16th round) of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is configured such that the second special electric accessory 58b is opened multiple times, and the second special electric accessory 58b is opened multiple times. The opening time of each round is 0.5 seconds, the closing time until the next opening is 1.0 seconds, the maximum opening time is 30.0 seconds, the maximum number of balls that can enter is 10, and the special electric ending period is 0.0 seconds. It is set. Therefore, until 10 game balls enter the second big prize opening 58a in the final round, the final round ends unless the total opening time of the second special electric accessory 58b reaches the maximum opening time. do not. Specifically, the final round continues until 60 openings for 0.5 seconds and 59 closings for 1.0 seconds are reached, and the time required for the final round is 89.0 seconds at maximum. On the other hand, since the maximum number of balls entered in the final round is set to 10, the final round ends when 10 game balls enter the second grand prize opening 58a, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode also ends. finish. That is, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A of this modification, the time required per round is 5 from the 1st round to the 15th round, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Although it is fixed at .0 seconds, only in the 16th round, the time required for one round changes significantly depending on the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. The time required for the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot of this modification varies from about 130 seconds to a maximum of 209.5 seconds.

In this modification, as in the above embodiment, the normal electricity interval period is 135.0 seconds, and the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning must be completed before the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b. For example, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V winning will not be executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, in the final round of the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, a predetermined number (maximum number of entering balls) of game balls are allowed to enter the second grand prize opening 58a within a predetermined time. Execute a performance to encourage players to enter the ball.

FIG. 739 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 739(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a performance to promote ball entry. Do your best!" and displays the remaining time of the power grid interval period.

Then, if the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning can be completed before the general electric power interval period ends, that is, before the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V winning An effect suggesting that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above is executed is executed. Specifically, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 739(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as "Congratulations!! There are still more jackpots to come!" Display.

On the other hand, if the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning cannot be terminated by the end of the general electricity interval period, that is, before the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V winning Execute a disappearance effect that suggests that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on is no longer executed. Specifically, in this modified example, as a disappearing effect, a sad female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. has disappeared.'' is displayed. Then, the displayed right-handed hitting instruction image GD1 is changed to a smaller right-handed hitting instruction image GD2.

As explained above, in this modification, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot, the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the second grand prize opening 58a is sent to the second grand prize opening 58a before the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Since it is possible to provide the player with the game of letting the ball enter the ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Then, as the time required for the final round becomes longer, there is a possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed. It is possible to create a feeling of impatience, such as wanting the final round to be completed before the game is released, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, a ball entry promotion performance is a performance that encourages a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second grand prize opening 58a within a predetermined time. Therefore, a new game in which a predetermined number of game balls enter the second big prize opening 58a within a predetermined time causes the special electric opening/closing execution mode to end by the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b. In addition to making the player understand the nature of the game, it is also possible to increase the player's motivation to enter a predetermined number of game balls into the second grand prize opening 58a within a predetermined time.

In addition, in this modification, if the special electric opening/closing execution mode does not end before the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, the disappearance effect is executed, so the player is informed that the The player can be made to recognize that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode has not ended, and can also be made to recognize that the subsequent flow of the game will change due to the fact that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has not been terminated.

Furthermore, in this modification, special electric opening/closing scenario A for V-winning jackpot (16 rounds, varying length) has a larger number of rounds than special electric opening/closing scenario B for V-winning jackpot (12 rounds, fixed length). On the other hand, there is also a risk that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed due to the lengthening of the time required for the final round. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel both happy and nervous, as if he had taken on a risk in exchange for a large number of benefits (a large number of rounds), and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. .

In addition, in this modification, the required time is not fixed only for the final round, but this is not limited to such a configuration. A configuration in which the time is not fixed may also be used. That is, the configuration may be such that the total time required for the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not fixed. Even with this configuration, there is a possibility that the next special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be executed due to the overall time required for the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot becoming longer. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the player and increase the interest of the game.

《M7-3》Variation 3:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the time required for each round game that constitutes the special train opening/closing processing period of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is fixed by adopting the configuration of this modification described below. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modification, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing execution scenario, the special electric opening period is 12.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 10, the number of openings of the second special electric accessories 58b in one round is one, and the maximum opening time is set to 0.1 seconds, the maximum number of balls to enter is 5, the special call interval period is set to 12.0 seconds, and the special call ending period is set to 5.0 seconds. In this modification, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b as speed reduction means for reducing the passing speed of the game ball, and the game ball reaches the second special electric accessory 58b. The ball will temporarily stay on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b until it passes through it.

Then, in a situation where game balls are fired toward the distribution path 301 at 0.6 second intervals and the fired game balls reach the second special electric accessory 58b, the second special electric accessory 58b is If the closed state is maintained for 0 seconds or more, a maximum of about 8 game balls will stay on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b during the closed state. Then, when the second special electric accessory 58b is opened, about eight game balls that had been staying on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b enter the second big prize opening 58a. Although the maximum number of game balls entering the second grand prize opening 58a is set to five, the maximum number of game balls that enter the second grand prize opening 58a has already been reached before it is detected that the game balls have entered the second grand prize opening 58a. Since 0.1 second of time has elapsed, the second special electric accessory 58b will not be able to operate the second special electric accessory 58b regardless of whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 58a has reached the maximum number of balls that have entered. , the state is closed. Therefore, the time required for one round is fixed at 0.1 seconds, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball.

As a result, the time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing execution scenario for the V winning jackpot in this modification is 12.0 seconds (special train opening period) + 0.1 seconds (1 round) x 10 (number of rounds) + 12 0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 9 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electric line ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Even with such a configuration, the time required for the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be fixed, as in the above embodiment.

《M7-4》Variation 4:
In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, even if the required time of all the round games constituting the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot reaches the maximum opening time, the ordinary electric in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode It may be configured such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode is surely completed before the next opening of the accessory 34b. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modification, only one type of special electric opening/closing scenario for the V-winning jackpot is set, and in the special electric opening/closing scenario, the special electric opening period is 5.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 16, and the second special electric role in one round. The number of times the object 58b is opened is set to 1, the maximum opening time is set to 20.0 seconds, the maximum number of balls to enter is 10, the special electric interval period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the special electric signal ending period is set to 5.0 seconds.

Therefore, the longest time required for each round game in this modification is 20.0 seconds, and the longest time required for the entire special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario is 5.0 seconds (special train opening period) + 20 seconds. 0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), resulting in 405.0 seconds.

Next, the shortest time required for each round game in this modification will be explained. Also in this modification, the shortest firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds, so the shortest time required for 10 game balls to enter the second grand prize opening 58a is 6.0 seconds. The shortest time required for each round game is about 6.0 seconds. As a result, the shortest time required for the entire special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario is 5.0 seconds (special train opening period) + approximately 6.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 seconds. Seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electrician ending period), which is approximately 181.0 seconds.

In this modification, in each utility switch scenario, the utility grid interval period is set to 415.0 seconds, the utility grid ending period is set to 420.0 seconds, and the special grid switch is set based on the special map small hit. The execution mode ends in about 2.0 seconds. Therefore, in this modification, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed after the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is included. Even if the time required for all round games is the longest, 20.0 seconds, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode will be changed by the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode. It will definitely end.

In other words, according to this modification, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed after the first opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, and all the round game requirements included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode are executed. Even if the time is the longest, 20.0 seconds, it is possible to realize a pachinko machine 10 that can open the normal electric accessories 34b after the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. As a result, regardless of the length of time required for multiple round games included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be reliably executed multiple times. It becomes possible to do so.

《M7-5》Variation 5:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned variations, during the execution of a round game during the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, information corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game being executed is displayed on the symbol display device 41. It may also be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a. Specifically, for example, a character string such as "The first round is in progress!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 during the period in which the first round of the round game is being executed. .

Further, information corresponding to the number of remaining round games may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 during the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, during a period in which the first round of the round game in the special electric opening/closing execution mode consisting of 16 rounds of round games is being executed, the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays "15 remaining. During the period in which the round game of the 15th round is being executed, a character string such as ``1 round remaining'' is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. During the period in which the round game (round) is being executed, a character string such as "Last!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, during the special train ending period of the special train opening/closing execution mode, an image of a specific character (for example, a whale character) saying lines such as "Did you have fun? See you again!" is displayed as a specific image. It may also be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode has ended, and also give the player a sense of fulfillment in having executed the special electric current opening/closing execution mode and a desire to continue playing the game. can do.

Further, at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, information regarding the profits earned by the player during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, during the special train ending period of the special train opening/closing execution mode, information regarding the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the execution of the special train opening/closing execution mode (information regarding the number of game balls acquired by the player) information) may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the profit that he or she has earned by executing the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode, and also to feel a sense of fulfillment in having executed the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode and afterward. It is possible to give the player a desire to play the game.

In addition, during the execution of the round game in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and thereafter, the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner are stopped in a predetermined display mode. It may also be configured to be displayed. Specifically, for example, immediately after winning a common symbol in a common symbol lottery, the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b due to winning the common symbol is not indicated to the player, and thereafter. , During the execution of the final round game of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, decorative symbols are displayed variably on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and after the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends, the ordinary electric accessories 34b are displayed. When it is to be opened (in the case of consecutive openings), for example, the decorative pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed in a display mode with the same decorative pattern such as "777", and on the other hand, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode is terminated. If the normal electric accessory 34b does not open later (if it does not open consecutively), the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a display mode in which identical decorative patterns such as "326" are not aligned, for example. According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbols starts during the execution of the round game, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise, and the display mode when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed can be changed. It is possible to give the player a great sense of anticipation as to how the (stop mode) will turn out.

《M7-6》Variation 6:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10 in FIG. 714), the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode (time t11) ), if the player does not play right-handed, a special system is used to notify players that they should play right-handed more strongly than the normal right-handed notification processing executed in other periods. A configuration may also be adopted in which right-handed hitting notification processing is executed. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

Also in this modification, as in the above embodiment, since the opening time of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is short, the player can play the game ball after confirming that the normal electric accessory 34b has been opened. When the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is already in the closed state, and the special figure starting port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b is fired. It is not possible to let the game ball enter the ball. Then, a game in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed because the game ball did not enter the special figure starting hole 34a, and as a result, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is also not executed. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the person.

Therefore, in this modification, "right-handed hitting" is performed during the period from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot until the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that "right-handed hitting" is not being performed, a special right-handed hitting notification process is executed. Specifically, in the special right-handed hitting notification process, a right-handed hitting instruction image with larger characters and arrows than the right-handed hitting instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. 716(A) is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and A voice such as "Please hit with the right hand" is output from the speaker 46 at maximum volume.

Note that various configurations can be adopted as a configuration for determining whether or not "right-handed hitting" is being performed. For example, in this modification, a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball is provided near the entrance of the flow path 301, and the interval at which the passage of a game ball is detected by the sensor is a predetermined interval (for example, 2.0 seconds). ) or more, it is determined whether or not "right-handed hitting" is being performed. If it is determined that the interval at which the passing of the game ball is detected by the sensor is greater than or equal to a predetermined interval, it is determined that a "right-handed hit" is not being performed, and on the other hand, if the interval is less than the predetermined interval. If it is determined, it is determined that "right-handed hitting" is being performed.

As explained above, in this modification, in the period from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot until the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode, "right-handed hit" If it is determined that "right-handed hitting" is not being performed, a special right-handed hitting notification process is executed, so that the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and as a result, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is also not executed. can.

Note that the notification mode for the special right-handed hitting notification process may be a mode in which the notification is stronger (violently) than the notification mode for the normal right-handed hitting notification process, that is, a notification mode that makes it easier for the player to recognize that he should hit the right-handed ball. , but is not limited to the above notification mode. For example, the right-handed hitting instruction image displayed in the special right-handed hitting notification process may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced, or, for example, the right-handed hitting instruction image may emit rainbow-colored light and blink. Good too.

《M7-7》Variation 7:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, a structure may be adopted in which the result of the special pattern lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the special pattern starting hole 34a includes a special pattern failure. According to such a configuration, even if a general figure is won in the general figure lottery, the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special figure small win will not occur after that. Since there is a possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned drawings will not be executed, it is possible to make the players interested in the result of the special drawing lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《M7-8》Variation 8:
In the ordinary electric winning device 34 of the embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, a special electric starting opening may be provided instead of the special figure starting opening 34a. When a game ball enters the special electric start opening provided instead of the special figure starting opening 34a, the above-mentioned special figure lottery is not performed and the first special electric accessory 57b opens and closes in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control by omitting the counter and table for the special drawing lottery, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications.

《M7-9》Variation 9:
In the ordinary power winning device 34 of the above embodiment and each modification, a V winning hole is provided in place of the special figure starting hole 34a, and the first special electric winning device 57 (the first big winning hole 57a, the first special electric winning hole The configuration may be such that the object 57b and the V winning opening 57av) are omitted. According to such a configuration, when the game ball enters the regular symbol starting gate 35 and the regular symbol is won in the regular symbol lottery, the regular electrical opening/closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the V winning hole while the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened during the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, even after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is still continuing, and if the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens again and the game ball enters the V winning hole, The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize winning jackpot is executed multiple times per general figure without going through the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the above embodiment. It becomes possible to realize the configuration.

In addition, as in this modification, in a configuration in which the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is not executed, or in a configuration in which the execution period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is very short, the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode If it is possible to set the time required from start to finish to be longer than the time required from the start to end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be set to It is possible to realize a configuration that can be executed multiple times during execution of the electric switching execution mode.

《M7-10》Variation 10:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, all the results of the special drawing lottery executed when the game ball enters the special drawing starting hole 34a are set to a special drawing jackpot, and the first special drawing winning device 57 (first big winning opening 57a, first special electric accessory 57b, V winning opening 57av) may be omitted. According to such a configuration, when the game ball enters the regular symbol starting gate 35 and the regular symbol is won in the regular symbol lottery, the regular electrical opening/closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a while the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened during the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot is executed. In the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot, opening/closing processing of the second special electric accessory 58b is executed. Thereafter, even after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing jackpot, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode continues, and the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened again and the game ball enters the special drawing starting port 34a. For example, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot will be executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing jackpot is executed multiple times per general map without going through the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit in the above embodiment. It becomes possible to realize the configuration.

It should be noted that not all of the results of the special drawing lottery may be set as a special drawing jackpot, and a configuration may be adopted in which a special drawing jackpot is set as a part of the results of the special drawing drawing. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which 50% of the results of the special drawing lottery are set to be a special drawing jackpot, and the remaining 50% are set to be a special drawing loss. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the players interested in the results of the special drawing lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《M7-11》Variation 11:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, a configuration may be provided in which a high probability mode (so-called probability variable state) is provided in which the probability of winning a special map jackpot is increased in the special map lottery. Specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the start of a high probability mode as a specific profit is determined based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 57av, and after the start of the high probability mode, a As a configuration (number-of-times fixed variable machine, ST (special time) machine) that terminates the high probability mode when a predetermined termination condition that the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode is executed multiple times (for example, 100 times) is satisfied. Good too.

Further, in this configuration, information corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol lottery to be executed in the high probability mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, if the remaining number of special drawing lots to be executed in the high probability mode is 15, a character string such as "15 remaining" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, A character string such as "Last!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 during a period when the special symbol is changing in the last special symbol lottery executed in the high probability mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of special lottery drawings executed in the high probability mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, during the special train ending period of the special train opening/closing execution mode, an image of a specific character (for example, a whale character) saying lines such as "Did you have fun? See you again!" is displayed as a specific image. It may also be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode has ended, and also give the player a sense of fulfillment in having executed the special electric current opening/closing execution mode and a desire to continue playing the game. can do.

Furthermore, at the end of the high probability mode, information regarding the profits earned by the player during execution of the high probability mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, the number of times you won a special jackpot without switching from high probability mode to low probability mode (so-called consecutive winnings), and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the said consecutive winnings. Information regarding the number of game balls acquired by the player may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to understand the profits that he or she has earned by executing the high probability mode, and also to feel a sense of fulfillment from executing the high probability mode and to play the game thereafter. It can give motivation to.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which one specific benefit is determined from among multiple types of specific benefits (for example, specific benefits A and B). Specifically, for example, in a configuration that includes the above-mentioned high-frequency support mode (so-called electric support state) in addition to the high-probability mode, specific profit A starts the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. , both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are configured to end when 100 special lottery drawings are executed without winning a special lottery jackpot.On the other hand, for specific profit B, the high probability mode and a high-frequency support mode is started, and the high-probability mode ends when 100 special lottery drawings are executed without winning a special lottery jackpot, and the high-frequency support mode ends when a special lottery is executed without winning a special lottery jackpot. It may be configured such that the lottery ends when the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times. For example, specific profit A starts a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and in both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, 100 special lottery drawings are made without winning a special lottery jackpot. On the other hand, specific profit B is when the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times without winning the special drawing jackpot in either the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode. The configuration may be such that the process ends at . According to such a configuration, players are not only interested in whether or not a specific benefit will be awarded, but also what type of specific benefit will be awarded if a specific benefit is awarded. It can arouse interest and interest in things such as

Also, during execution of the special symbol lottery in the high probability mode (while the special symbols are changing), decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and thereafter, the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner are changed to a predetermined display mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the display is stopped at . Specifically, for example, during execution of a special symbol lottery in the high probability mode, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a special symbol jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In the case where the special pattern jackpot is not won in the special drawing lottery, For example, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "326" in which identical decorative patterns are not aligned. According to such a configuration, since the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols starts during execution of the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode, what will be the display mode (stop mode) when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed? It is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation.

Furthermore, the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b may be performed at least a plurality of times per ordinary figure based on the result of the ordinary figure lottery.

In addition, if one cycle from the release of the normal electric accessory 34b to the end of the high probability mode is defined as one special game round, one special game round based on the normal electric accessory 34b being released at the first timing is defined as one special game round. The normal electric accessory 34b may be controlled to open at a second timing after the execution and the completion of the one special game round.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display of normal symbols is restricted from starting. More specifically, a predetermined limited period may be generated in a period from the first timing until the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing.

In addition, the special symbol lottery in high probability mode can vary in execution time between the shortest first special symbol variation time (for example, 2 seconds) and the longest second special symbol variation time (for example, 180 seconds) depending on the game state. Yes, even if multiple special drawing lots in the high probability mode of one special game run after the first timing are all executed in the second special figure variation time, A configuration may also be adopted in which the normal electric accessory 34b can be opened after the end.

In this way, according to the present modification example, since the high probability mode is provided, it is possible to improve the interest of the game more than in the above embodiment and each of the above modification examples.

<Y> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that releases a game ball a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as pachinko machines that generate jackpots when rights are generated, pachinko machines that are equipped with other accessories, arranged ball machines, and mahjong balls.

Also, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

Moreover, some of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

<Z> Regarding the feature groups extracted from each of the above embodiments:
The feature groups (features of the invention group) extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects and the like as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to each of the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics aA group>
The feature aA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
In the first case in which the determining means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot based on the ball entering the starting hole), the game ball is played in a predetermined manner. means for executing a performance (a right-handed shot suggestion performance) to encourage firing during a period after the game round execution means finishes the game round;
In a second case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small win) , means for executing a performance (right-handed hitting suggestion performance) for prompting the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner during a period after the game round execution means finishes the game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aA1, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes the effect to encourage the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner, so if the effect is executed based on the second case, Even in the case where It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the performance has been executed.

[Feature aA2]
The gaming machine according to feature aA1,
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
Type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means;
Equipped with
The type determining means includes means (a function of executing type determining processing) for determining the benefit of the one type to be given to the player after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature aA2, the type determining means determines a benefit of one type to be given to the player after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that the type determination means determines the benefit of one type to be given to the player after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. To delay the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means, compared to a gaming machine that determines the one type of benefit to be given to the player before the end of the game. I can do it. Therefore, after a game round is over, when a performance is executed that prompts the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions is determined based on the performance. It is possible to give the player who is making the judgment a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed based on the first case, and furthermore, information regarding the benefit can be displayed on the benefit type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether or not the special information corresponding to a game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not the special information corresponds to a game round that meets the predetermined condition. Compared to a gaming machine that determines one type of benefit to be given to the player before the end, a period during which a sense of expectation can be given that the performance has been executed based on the first case. can be made longer.

[Feature aA3]
The gaming machine according to feature aA2,
A ball entrance part for determining the type (type determination gate 202) is provided, which is a ball entrance part into which a game ball can enter;
The type determining means provides a benefit of the one type to the player upon entry of a game ball into the type determining ball entry section after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining.

According to feature aA3, after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and furthermore, after the player enters the game ball into the entry section for determining the type, the benefit type display means displays the type. Since the information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the determining means is displayed, the timing at which the benefit type display means displays the information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means can be further delayed. Therefore, after a game round is over, when a performance is executed that prompts the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions is determined based on the performance. It is possible to give the player who is making the judgment a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed based on the first case, and furthermore, information regarding the benefit can be displayed on the benefit type display means. The time point at which it becomes possible to determine whether or not the special information corresponding to a game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not the game ball In contrast to gaming machines in which one type of benefit to be given to a player is determined before the end of a game round in which special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the first Based on this case, it is possible to further lengthen the period during which the user can feel the expectation that the performance has been executed.

[Feature aA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to feature aA3,
After the game round corresponding to the first case is completed, specific processing execution means executes a specific process including causing the production execution means to execute a production that urges the production ball to be fired in a predetermined manner;
specific processing execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing;
Equipped with
The type determining means includes:
Based on the result of the determination by the specific process execution determining means as to whether or not to execute the specific process (the process in case 1 in FIG. 10), one of a plurality of predetermined types of benefits is granted to the player. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining one type of benefit to be given.

According to feature aA4, the type determining means can determine the type of benefit depending on whether or not a specific process is executed, among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits. In other words, the manner in which the benefit of the type determined by the type determining means is granted and the manner in which the specific process is executed by the specific process execution means can be related.

<Characteristic aB group>
The feature aB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aB1]
A gaming machine comprising a privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The benefit granting means is
In the first case, means for granting a benefit when the game ball passes through a specific area;
In the second case, means for not giving a benefit even though the game ball passes through the specific area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aB1, there are cases in which a privilege is awarded when the game ball passes through a specific area, and cases in which a privilege is not awarded even though the game ball passes through a specific area. When a game ball passes through a specific area during play, it is possible to make the player guess whether a privilege will be awarded or not, and to give a feeling of expectation that the privilege will be awarded.

[Feature aB2]
The gaming machine according to feature aB1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as the time from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
Equipped with
The first case corresponds to the case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. This is a case where the process corresponding to the result of the determination (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win) is executed after the end of the game round,
In the second case, when the determining means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the process corresponding to the result of the determination after the end of the game round corresponding to the determination ( A gaming machine characterized in that the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot) is being executed.

According to feature aB2, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a game, in addition to giving a sense of anticipation by making people guess whether a benefit will be awarded or not, special information corresponding to the game round is provided. By allowing players to guess whether the game satisfies a predetermined condition, or whether special information corresponding to a game round does not meet a predetermined condition and satisfies a predetermined specific condition, the It can give a sense of expectation.

[Feature aB3]
The gaming machine according to feature aB1 or feature aB2,
Equipped with a performance execution means for performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
In the first case, taking the passing of the game ball through the specific area as an opportunity, means for executing an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the specific area;
In the second case, taking the passing of the game ball through the specific area as a trigger, means for executing an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aB3, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a game, whether a bonus is awarded or not, the game ball passes through the specific area. This triggers a performance that suggests that the game ball has passed through a specific area, so the player who recognizes that the performance that suggests that the game ball has passed through a specific area is , it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a privilege will be given.

[Feature aB4]
The gaming machine according to feature aB2 or feature aB3,
The benefit granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition, means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round;
If the special information corresponding to a game round executed by the game round executing means does not satisfy the predetermined condition and satisfies a predetermined specific condition, after the end of the game round, the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round execution means is A means of granting benefits;
Equipped with
Furthermore, the gaming machine
If the special information corresponding to the game run executed by the game run executing means satisfies the predetermined condition, one type of benefit is granted to the player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits. Type determining means to determine;
benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means;
Equipped with
The type determining means includes means (a function of executing type determining processing) for determining the benefit of the one type to be given to the player after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature aB4, the type determining means determines the benefit of one type to be given to the player after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. To delay the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means, compared to a gaming machine that determines the one type of benefit to be given to the player before the end of the game. I can do it. When the benefit type display means displays information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means, the player can judge that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, Since the display timing can be delayed, it is possible to tell the player whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions, or if the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined conditions. It is possible to lengthen the period in which the player is made to guess whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player is given a sense of anticipation.

<Characteristic aC group>
The feature aC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aC1]
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting means is
In the first case, means for granting a benefit when the game ball passes through a specific area;
In the second case, means for not giving a benefit even though the game ball passes through the specific area;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
Despite the second case, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for executing an effect that urges the game ball to be launched in such a manner that the game ball passes through the specific area.

According to feature aC1, even though it is the second case, a performance is performed that encourages the game ball to be fired in a manner that the game ball passes through a specific area, so it is recognized that the performance has been performed. It is possible to give the player who has played the game a sense of expectation that the first case may be the case, and to encourage the player to shoot the game ball in a manner that causes the game ball to pass through a specific area.

[Feature aC2]
The gaming machine according to feature aC1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
Equipped with
The first case is a case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small win). and
The second case is a case where the determining means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot),
moreover,
in the second case, type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to the player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
Benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means;
a ball entry part for determining the type (type determination gate 202), which is a ball entry part into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The type determining means provides a benefit of the one type to the player upon entry of a game ball into the type determining ball entry section after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. equipped with a means to determine the
The type determining ball entry section (type determining gate 202) is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in such a manner as to cause the game ball to pass through the specific area can enter. .

According to feature aC2, the type determining means determines one type of benefit to be given to the player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits in the second case. Further, the benefit type display means displays information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means. Therefore, the player can determine whether it is the first case or the second case by recognizing whether or not information regarding one type of benefit is displayed on the benefit type display means. Even if the performance execution means is in the second case and executes a performance that urges the game ball to be fired in a manner that causes the game ball to pass through a specific area, the player cannot display the benefit type display means. It is possible to determine whether the first case or the second case is the case by recognizing whether information regarding one type of benefit is displayed, and in this case, the player's sense of expectation is reduced. I end up.

However, in this feature group, the type determining means is configured to provide special information to the player when the game ball enters the type determining ball entry section after the end of a game round where the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. The benefit of the type is determined, and the type determining ball entry section is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in such a manner that the game ball passes through a specific area can enter, so that the performance execution means Even in this case, at the time when the effect that urges the game ball to be fired in a manner that causes the game ball to pass through a specific area is executed, the benefit type display means will display the one determined by the type determination means. Information regarding benefits for each type is not displayed. It is not until the player fires the game ball in a manner that it passes through a specific area and the game ball enters the type determining ball entry section that the benefit type display means displays information regarding the benefit of the one type determined by the type determining means. Display information. Therefore, even though the performance execution means is in the second case, at the time when it executes a performance that urges the game ball to be fired in a manner that causes the game ball to pass through a specific area, it does not notify the player of the first The game ball is fired in a manner that makes it difficult to judge whether it is the case of the first case or the second case, and gives a sense of expectation that the game ball may be the first case, while causing the game ball to pass through a specific area. can be encouraged to do so.

<Characteristic aD group>
The feature aD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting means is
a first granting means that grants a benefit to the player after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
a second granting means that grants a benefit when the game ball passes through a specific area;
Equipped with
The benefit granting means is
Although the game ball has passed through the specific area, if the game ball passed through the specific area during the period in which the first awarding means is awarding the benefit, the specific comprising means for continuing the granting of the benefit by the first granting means without granting the benefit triggered by passing through the area;
The performance execution means is
Even if the game ball passes through the specific area during the period in which the first awarding means is giving the benefit, the game ball passes through the specific area, and the game A gaming machine characterized by executing a performance that suggests that the ball has passed through the specific area.

According to feature aD1, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the period in which the first awarding means is awarding the award, the award that is triggered by the game ball passing through the specific area is not provided. Even though the first granting means continues to grant the benefit, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the period in which the first granting device is granting the benefit, the game ball passes through a specific area. Since a performance that suggests that the game ball has passed is executed, the player who recognizes that the performance has been executed is notified when the first provision means interrupts the provision and the game ball passes through a specific area. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that the granting of special benefits will begin.

[Feature aD2]
The gaming machine according to feature aD1,
The performance execution means is
A game machine characterized in that, when the first granting means grants the benefit, the first granting means executes an effect suggesting that the game ball be launched in a manner that it passes through the specific area.

According to feature aD2, when the first granting means grants a benefit, it executes an effect that suggests firing the game ball in such a manner that it passes through a specific area, so that the game ball passes through the specific area. If this occurs during the period in which the first granting means is granting a benefit, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even though the benefit triggered by passing through a specific area is not granted. This is possible, and by having the player shoot the game ball in such a manner that it passes through a specific area, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic aE group>
The feature aE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aE1]
a benefit granting means (a function of executing an opening/closing execution mode) for granting a benefit to a player;
A ball entry area into which a game ball can enter (first starting port 33, second starting port 34, V winning port 222), and a plurality of bonus awarding opportunity ball entry areas that serve as an opportunity to award the benefits;
Type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
A gaming machine comprising:
The type determining means includes:
When the game ball enters the first privilege awarding opportunity ball entry area (first starting port 33, second starting port 34), the game ball enters the first privilege awarding opportunity ball entry area. A first benefit in which the type of benefit to be granted is determined based on the fact that the game ball enters a ball entry area (type determination gate 202) that is different from the first benefit award opportunity ball entry area. Type determining means;
When the game ball enters the second privilege awarding opportunity ball entry area (V winning hole 222), the award is given based on the game ball entering the second privilege awarding opportunity ball entry area. a second benefit type determining means that determines the type of benefit when a game ball enters the second benefit opportunity ball entry area (V winning hole 222);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aE1, the method of determining the type by the type determining means is two cases: when the game ball enters the first privilege awarding opportunity entry area, and when the game ball enters the second benefit awarding opportunity entry area. Since the game is different depending on the type of bonus, it is possible to create a variety of gameplay features and increase the interest of the game.

[Feature aE2]
The gaming machine according to feature aE1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as the time from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
Equipped with
The acquisition condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the first benefit granting opportunity ball entry area,
The first benefit type determining means includes:
In the period after the end of the game run executed by the game run execution means when a game ball enters the first benefit opportunity entry area, what is the first benefit offer opportunity entry area? A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the type of benefit to be granted when a game ball enters a different ball entry area.

According to feature aE2, in the period after the end of the game run executed by the game run execution means when a game ball enters the first benefit award opportunity ball entry area, the player is asked to decide the type of benefit. Since the player is actively involved in the game, it is possible to keep the player's attention on the game even during the period after the end of the game round.

[Feature aE3]
The gaming machine according to feature aE1 or feature aE2,
When the game ball enters the second benefit granting opportunity ball entry area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the benefit granting means includes means for determining granting of the benefit.

According to feature aE3, when the game ball enters the second benefit awarding opportunity ball entry area, the benefit awarding means determines to award the benefit. Further, according to feature aE1, when the game ball enters the second benefit provision opportunity ball entry area, the second benefit type determination means determines whether the game ball enters the second benefit provision opportunity ball entry area. The type of benefit to be awarded based on the ball being hit is determined by the game ball entering the second benefit awarding opportunity ball entry area. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second benefit award opportunity ball entry area, it is determined that a benefit will be awarded, and the type of benefit that will be awarded is also determined. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball enters the second benefit opportunity ball entry area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature aE2 above, when a game ball enters the first privilege award opportunity ball entry area, the game ball enters the first benefit award opportunity ball entry area as a trigger. A game round is executed, and in the period after the end of the game round, when a game ball enters an entry area different from the first award opportunity entry area, the type of benefit to be granted is determined. The decision is made, and then the benefits will be awarded. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first benefit award opportunity ball entry area, compared to the case where a game ball enters the second benefit award opportunity ball entry area, it takes longer until the benefit is granted. There is no sense of speed. As a result, the progress of the game can be slowed down depending on when the game ball enters the first privilege award opportunity ball entry area and when the game ball enters the second benefit award opportunity ball entry area. This makes it possible to give tone to the player's expectations for the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic aF group>
The feature aF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
a first prize opening, which is a ball entry part that provides an opportunity to award a prize ball, which is a game ball as a bonus, to a player;
a second prize opening, which is a ball entrance part that is an opportunity to give a prize ball, which is a game ball as a privilege, to a player, and is a ball entrance part different from the first prize opening;
The first prize opening is set in a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which a game ball cannot enter or in which it is difficult to enter the ball compared to the state in which the ball enters. A first prize opening state transition means (first opening/closing door 36b) for transitioning between a certain non-ball entering state,
The second winning hole is set in a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which a game ball cannot enter or in which it is difficult to enter the ball compared to the state in which the ball enters. A second prize opening state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) for transitioning between a certain non-ball entry state,
a state transition means operation control means that controls the operation of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The state transition means operation control means includes:
When the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition, the second prize opening state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) is activated after the end of the game round. a second winning opening state transition determining means for determining whether or not to operate during the period in which the benefit is granted;
operation number determining means for determining the number of operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means;
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to feature aF1, when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round execution means satisfies a predetermined condition, the second prize opening state transition means grants the above-mentioned benefit after the end of the game round. Since the process of determining whether to operate during the period and the process of determining the number of operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means are executed separately, when awarding benefits, The first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state change depending on whether or not the second winning hole state transition means operates and the combination of the number of operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means. It becomes possible to realize various operating modes of the means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature aF2]
The gaming machine according to feature aF1,
The operation number determining means includes:
After the second winning hole state transition determining means determines whether or not to operate the second winning hole state transition means during the period for giving the benefit after the end of the game round, the first winning hole state transitions. A gaming machine comprising means for determining the number of operations of the means and the second winning hole state transition means.

According to feature aF2, the number of operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means is determined after first determining whether or not to operate the second winning hole state transition means. During the period from determining whether or not to operate the winning hole state transition means to determining the number of times of operation of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means, the second winning hole state transition means is activated. Processing can be executed based on the determination result of whether or not to operate. For example, if the result of the determination is to operate the second winning opening state transition means, it is determined whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means, and then the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means are activated. During the period until the number of operations of the state transition means is determined, it is possible to start executing an effect that suggests operating the second winning hole state transition means, and after the start of the effect, the first winning hole state transition The number of operations of the means and the second winning opening state transition means can be determined.

[Feature aF3]
The gaming machine according to feature aF1 or feature aF2,
In the first case in which the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (jackpot), the second In the case where the special information corresponding to the game round and the means for executing the effect that prompts the entry of the game ball into the winning hole do not satisfy the predetermined conditions, and the predetermined specific conditions are met (small winning ), in a second case where the determining means determines that the game round is completed, means for executing an effect that prompts a game ball to enter the second prize opening in a period after the game round executing means finishes the game round. A performance execution means comprising;
After the game round corresponding to the first case ends, specific processing execution means executes a specific process including causing the production execution means to execute a production that prompts a game ball to enter the second prize opening. and,
specific processing execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing;
Equipped with
The second winning opening state transition determining means includes means for determining whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means based on the result of the determination by the specific processing determining means. Game machine.

According to feature aF3, the second winning opening state transition determining means determines whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means based on the result of the determination by the specific processing determining means. The mode of execution of the process and the mode of operation of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means can be related.

<Characteristic aG group>
The feature aG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player;
A prize opening which is a ball entrance part into which a game ball can enter, and which gives a prize ball, which is a game ball, to a player as a privilege when a game ball enters the ball entrance part; ,
The entry prize hole can be divided into two states: a ball entry state in which a game ball can enter or it is easy to enter, and a non-ball entry state in which a game ball cannot enter or it is difficult to enter the ball compared to the ball entry state. A winning opening state transition means (a function for executing a big winning opening opening/closing process) that transitions the state between the ball entering state and the winning opening state;
State transition mode determining means (type determination processing) for determining a state transition mode in which the entered prize hole state transition means causes the entered prize hole to undergo state transition;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
Equipped with
The entry prize state transition means is
In the first case (in the case of a jackpot) in which the determining means determines that the special information corresponding to a game round satisfies the predetermined condition, after the end of the game round, the state of the entered prize hole is changed to the non-entering state. to the state of entering the sphere,
In the case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and in the second case (in the case of a small hit) in which the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the game comprising means for transitioning the state of the entered prize hole from the ball not entered state to the ball entered state after the end of the round;
The performance execution means are
In the first case, the state transition mode determining means determines the state transition mode from the time when the game round in the first case is completed, and the effect prompting the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner. means to be executed during the period up to the point in time (waiting period);
In the second case, when the game round in the second case is completed, the state transition mode determining means executes an effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner. Means for executing the operation during a period (opening period) from the time after the determination until the entered prize hole state transition means first transitions the state of the entered prize hole from the non-ball entry state to the ball entry state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aG1, even though the processing periods are different in the first case and the second case, in both cases, an effect is performed that urges the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner. do. Therefore, in the first case and the second case, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effects encouraging the player to shoot the game balls in a predetermined manner are being executed in different periods. As a result, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, a game in which it is determined based on the effect whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed based on the first case.

[Feature aG2]
The gaming machine according to feature aG1,
The performance that encourages the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner is a performance that encourages the game ball to be launched in a manner that the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning hole 222),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific area is an area through which only game balls that enter the winning slot can pass.

According to feature aG2, the specific area is an area through which only game balls that have entered the winning hole can pass. According to the above characteristic aG1, in both the first case and the second case, after executing a performance that urges the game ball to be launched in a manner in which the game ball passes through a specific area, the prize opening state is The transition means first transitions the state of the winning hole from the ball not entering state to the ball entering state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who has played the game according to the performance to enter the game ball into the winning hole, and it is also possible to make it easier for the game ball to pass through a specific area. .

[Feature aG3]
The gaming machine according to feature aG1 or feature aG2,
A ball entry part for determining state transition mode (type determination gate 202) is provided, which is a ball entry part into which a game ball can enter.
In the first case, the state transition mode determining means triggers the entry of the game ball into the state transition mode determining ball entry section after the end of the game round corresponding to the first case. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the state transition mode.

Generally, in the first case, the gaming machine displays information regarding the determined state transition mode.
According to feature aG3, in the first case, the state transition mode determining means is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the state transition mode determining ball entry section after the end of the game round corresponding to the first case. Since the state transition mode is determined as follows, information regarding the state transition mode is not displayed until at least the game ball enters the state transition mode determination ball entry section, and depending on how the player shoots the game ball, It is possible to extend the period until the player is made to recognize whether it is the first case or the second case. Therefore, even if the performance is executed based on the second case, it gives the player a sense of expectation that the performance was executed based on the first case. The period during which it can be done can be extended.

Further, in the first case, the state transition mode is determined by the entry of the game ball into the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the end of the game round corresponding to the first case. This allows the player to be actively involved in determining the state transition mode, and allows the player to pay attention to the game even after the end of the game round where the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, and the state transition mode is determined. It is possible to increase expectations regarding the state transition mode.

[Feature aG4]
The gaming machine according to feature aG3,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific area is disposed downstream of the state transition mode determining ball entry section in the direction in which gaming balls flow.

According to feature aG4, the specific area is arranged downstream of the state transition mode determining ball entry section in the direction in which game balls flow. Therefore, in the first case, if a performance is performed that encourages the game ball to be fired in such a manner that the game ball passes through a specific area, and the player proceeds with the game according to the performance, the player The game ball can be entered into the ball entry part for determining state transition mode without being conscious, the state transition mode can be determined smoothly, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Characteristic aH group>
The feature aH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing the game round when the period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game round operation is defined as one game round. A control means for controlling the progress state of the game;
A specific area that is an area that can be an opportunity to change the progress state of the game due to the passage of the game ball,
Between a passing state in which a game ball can pass through the specific area or a state in which it is easy to pass through, and a non-passing state in which a gaming ball cannot pass through or is difficult to pass through compared to the passing state. A specific area state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) that transitions with
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific area state transition means includes:
In the first case where the determining means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot based on the ball entering the starting hole in Modification 10 of the first embodiment α) (b), means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state;
In a second case where the special information corresponding to a game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (a modification of the first embodiment α) 10), means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
means for not changing the progress state of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the passing state in the first case;
means for changing the progress state of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the passing state in the second case;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aH1, the specific area state transition means transitions the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state in both the first case and the second case. The player is not allowed to identify whether this is the case or the second case. Therefore, when a specific area is transitioned from a non-passing state to a passing state, the player can be made to guess whether it is the first case or the second case, and the player's expectations It can improve the feeling. Further, in the first case, the control means does not change the progress state of the game even if the game ball passes through a specific area in the passing state, so the control means does not change the progress state of the game based on the first case. can be maintained.

[Feature aH2]
The gaming machine according to feature aH1,
Equipped with a performance execution means for performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
In the first case, means for executing a performance (right-handed hitting suggestion performance) for prompting the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner during a period after the game round execution means finishes the game round;
In the second case, means for executing a performance (right-handed hitting suggestion performance) for prompting the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner during a period after the game round execution means finishes the game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aH2, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes the effect to encourage the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner, so if the effect is executed based on the second case, Even in the case where It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the performance has been executed.

[Feature aH3]
The gaming machine according to feature aH1 or feature aH2,
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
Type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means;
Equipped with
The type determining means includes means (a function of executing type determining processing) for determining the benefit of the one type to be given to the player after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature aH3, the type determining means determines the benefit of one type to be given to the player after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. To delay the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means, compared to a gaming machine that determines the one type of benefit to be given to the player before the end of the game. I can do it. Therefore, after a game round is over, when a performance is executed that prompts the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions is determined based on the performance. It is possible to give the player who is making the judgment a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed based on the first case, and furthermore, information regarding the benefit can be displayed on the benefit type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether or not the special information corresponding to a game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not the special information corresponds to a game round that meets the predetermined condition. Compared to a gaming machine that determines one type of benefit to be given to the player before the end, a period during which a sense of expectation can be given that the performance has been executed based on the first case. can be made longer.

<Characteristic aI group>
The feature aI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing the game round when the period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game round operation is defined as one game round. a first control means (main control device 60) which is a control means provided and controls the progress state of the game;
A specific area (V winning hole 222) that is an area that can be an opportunity to change the progress state of the game due to the passage of the game ball;
a second control means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) that is a control means different from the first control means and controls processing that does not affect the progress state of the game;
an operation mechanism (V winning assist mechanism) that executes operations that may affect the behavior of game balls in circulation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first control means includes:
In the first case where the determining means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a jackpot based on the ball entering the starting hole in Modification 10 of the first embodiment α) (b), means for not changing the progress state of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area;
In a second case where the special information corresponding to a game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (a modification of the first embodiment α) means for changing the progress state of the game if the game ball passes through the specific area (in the case of a small win in step 10);
specific information transmitting means that transmits specific information to the second control means in the first case and does not transmit the specific information to the second control means in the second case;
Equipped with
The second control means includes:
The operating mechanism has a first state in which the circulating game balls can pass through the specific area, and a second state in which the circulating game balls can more easily pass through the specific area than in the first state. means for transitioning between states;
means for transitioning the operating mechanism from the first state to the second state when the specific information is received from the specific information transmitting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aI1, since the second control means controls the transition of the state of the operating mechanism, the processing by the first control means can be reduced. Further, the second control means causes the operating mechanism to transition from the first state to the second state when specific information is received in the first case, and does not receive the specific information in the second case. The operating mechanism does not transition from the first state to the second state. Furthermore, in the first case, the first control means does not change the progress state of the game even if the game ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, by controlling the transition of the state of the operating mechanism by the second control means, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being affected.

[Feature aI2]
The gaming machine according to γA1,
A passing state in which a gaming ball can pass through the specific area or a state in which the gaming ball can easily pass through the specific area, and a passing state in which the gaming ball can easily pass through the specific area; Equipped with specific area state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) for transitioning between a non-passage state, which is a state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through compared to the pass state,
The specific area state transition means includes:
means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state in the first case (when a jackpot is achieved based on the ball entering the starting hole);
In the second case (in the case of a small hit), means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aI2, the specific area state transition means transitions the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state in both the first case and the second case. The player is not allowed to identify whether this is the case or the second case. Therefore, when a specific area is transitioned from a non-passing state to a passing state, the player can be made to guess whether it is the first case or the second case, and the player's expectations It can improve the feeling. Further, in the first case, the first control means does not change the progress state of the game even if the game ball passes through a specific area that is in the passing state, so that the game based on the first case does not change. progress can be maintained.

[Feature aI3]
The gaming machine according to feature aI1 or feature aI2,
The second control means includes a performance execution means for performing a performance,
The performance execution means is
In the first case, means for executing a performance (right-handed hitting suggestion performance) for prompting the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner during a period after the game round execution means finishes the game round;
In the second case, means for executing a performance (right-handed hitting suggestion performance) for prompting the game ball to be launched in a predetermined manner during a period after the game round execution means finishes the game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aI3, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes the effect to encourage the game balls to be launched in a predetermined manner, so if the effect is executed based on the second case, Even in the case where It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the performance has been executed.

[Feature aI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features aI1 to feature aI3,
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
Type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
Benefit type display means (round lamp) for displaying information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means;
Equipped with
The type determining means includes means (a function of executing type determining processing) for determining the benefit of the one type to be given to the player after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature aI4, the type determining means determines the benefit of one type to be given to the player after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. To delay the timing at which the benefit type display means displays information regarding the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means, compared to a gaming machine that determines the one type of benefit to be given to the player before the end of the game. I can do it. Therefore, after a game round is over, when a performance is executed that prompts the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions is determined based on the performance. It is possible to give the player who is making the judgment a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed based on the first case, and furthermore, information regarding the benefit can be displayed on the benefit type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether or not the special information corresponding to a game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not the special information corresponds to a game round that meets the predetermined condition. Compared to a gaming machine that determines one type of benefit to be given to the player before the end, a period during which a sense of expectation can be given that the performance has been executed based on the first case. can be made longer.

<Characteristic aJ group>
The feature aJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aJ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
Type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning hole 222) during the period in which the benefit of the one type determined by the type determining means is granted, the benefit granting means determines the one type of benefit determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for terminating the granting of benefits of one type even though the granting of the benefits of that type has not ended.

According to feature aJ1, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the period during which the benefit of the one type determined by the type determining means is being granted, the granting of the benefit of the first type has ended. Even though there is no such thing, the granting of the benefit of the one type will be terminated, so when executing a new process triggered by the game ball passing through a specific area, the granting of the benefit of the one type will be terminated. It is possible to avoid conflict between the process and the process executed in conjunction with the process. In other words, as a process to be executed when a game ball passes through a specific area during a period in which a benefit of one type determined by the type determination means is granted, It is possible to perform the same processing as that performed by

[Feature aJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature aJ1,
The benefit granting means is configured to stop granting the benefit of the one type if the game ball passes through a specific area during the period in which the benefit of the one type determined by the type determining means is granted. Means for ending the granting of the one type of benefit and starting the granting of a new benefit based on the game ball passing through a specific area, even though the awarding of the one type of benefit has not ended (game in the first embodiment α) A gaming machine comprising: a function of executing state transition processing/Sa2106 in V winning processing).

According to feature aJ2, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the period during which the benefit of the one type determined by the type determining means is being granted, the granting of the benefit of the first type has ended. Despite the fact that there is no such thing, the granting of benefits for that one type will end, but the granting of new benefits will begin based on the passing of the game ball through a specific area, so there will be a sense of expectation for the granting of new benefits. can be given to the player.

[Feature aJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature aJ1 or feature aJ2,
A ball entrance part for determining the type (type determination gate 202) is provided, which is a ball entrance part into which a game ball can enter;
The type determining means provides a benefit of the one type to the player upon entry of a game ball into the type determining ball entry section after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining (a function for executing type determination processing).

According to feature aJ3, one type of benefit to be given to the player is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the type determination ball entry section after the end of a game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. , the player will be actively involved in determining the type of benefit to be awarded, and the special information will attract the player's attention to the game even after the game session where the predetermined condition is satisfied, It is possible to increase expectations regarding the type of benefit to be determined.

[Feature aJ4]
The gaming machine according to feature aJ2 or feature aJ3,
The type determining means is a means for determining the type of privilege to be given when the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning hole 222), triggered by the game ball passing through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature aJ4, the type determining means determines the type of benefit to be given when a game ball passes through a specific area, based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area, so that the player There is no need for the type determining means to determine the benefit of one type by letting the game ball enter the type determining ball entry section, and it is possible to determine the specific area by a series of steps starting from the passing of the game ball in the specific area. It is possible to start giving new benefits based on the passage of the game ball, and it is possible to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball passes through a specific area.

<Characteristic aK group>
The feature aK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aK1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
In the first case where the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition (a jackpot due to the ball entering the starting slot), after the end of the game round, the player a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player in a second case (V prize jackpot), which is a case where a game ball passes through a specific area (V prize opening);
Type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be given to the player from among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits in the first case and the second case;
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific area (V winning opening) is
The game ball can pass during the period in which the benefit granting means is granting the benefit;
The benefit granting means is
During the period in which the privilege corresponding to the first case is being granted, when the game ball passes through the specific area and the second case occurs, the privilege corresponding to the first case is not granted. comprising means for stopping and starting the provision of the benefit corresponding to the second case,
The type determining means includes:
In the second case, the first type of benefit to be given to the player is set to the most advantageous type to the player among the plurality of predetermined types of benefits. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of making a decision.

According to feature aK1, the game ball can pass through the specific area during the period in which the bonus granting means is granting the benefit, and the bonus granting means is not granting the benefit corresponding to the first case. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the period of time and the second case occurs, the provision of the benefit corresponding to the first case is stopped and the provision of the benefit corresponding to the second case is started. , it is possible to avoid conflicting processes regarding the granting of benefits. In addition, during the period when the privilege corresponding to the first case is being granted, the game ball passes through a specific area and the second case occurs, and the awarding of the privilege corresponding to the first case is stopped and the above-mentioned When the granting of the benefits corresponding to case 2 begins, the player may be concerned that the type of benefit corresponding to case 1 will be disadvantageous compared to the type of benefit that was previously granted. It is assumed that However, in this gaming machine, the type determining means determines the type of benefit that is most advantageous to the player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits in the second case than in the first case. Since the probability is high, it is possible to reduce the anxiety of such players, and it is possible to give the players an even greater sense of expectation.

[Feature aK2]
The gaming machine according to feature aK1,
A ball entrance part for determining the type (type determination gate 202) is provided, which is a ball entrance part into which a game ball can enter.
In the first case, the type determining means is configured to determine the type of the game ball, in response to the entry of the game ball into the type determining ball entry section after the end of the game round corresponding to the first case. comprising means for determining the first type of benefit to be given to the player in accordance with the case;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific area is arranged downstream of the type-determining ball entry section in the direction in which game balls flow.

According to the feature aK2, the type determining means, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the type determining ball entry section after the end of the game round corresponding to the first case, determines the game according to the first case. Therefore, at the end of the game round corresponding to the first case, the type of benefit to be granted has not been determined, and the player cannot receive the first type of benefit. It is not possible to recognize the degree of advantage of the corresponding benefit in each case. Then, the player circulates game balls toward the type determining ball entry section in order to determine the type of privilege to be awarded. At this time, the specific area is located downstream of the type-determining ball entry part in the direction in which the game balls flow, and the game balls flowing toward the type-determining ball entry part pass through the specific area. Cheap. Therefore, after the benefits to be granted corresponding to the first case have been determined and the granting of benefits has started, it is easy to shift to the granting of benefits corresponding to the second case in a natural flow, and the game can proceed smoothly. can be done. Furthermore, since the granting of benefits corresponding to the first case naturally shifts to the granting of benefits corresponding to the second case, the granting of benefits corresponding to the first case corresponds to the second case. In order to prevent players from feeling anxious that, in the case of transitioning to the granting of benefits, the type of benefit corresponding to the first case that was granted earlier, It is possible to reduce the anxiety of such players. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Feature aK3]
The gaming machine according to feature aK1 or feature aK2,
In the second case, the type determining means determines, in response to the passing of the game ball through the specific area, a benefit of the first type to be given to the player corresponding to the second case. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for determining.

According to feature aK3, in the second case, the type determining means is configured to determine one type of benefit to be given to the player in response to the second case, triggered by the game ball passing through a specific area. Determine. Therefore, in the second case, the player does not need to cause the type determining means to determine the benefit of one type by entering the game ball into the type determining ball entry section, and the player does not need to cause the game ball to pass through a specific area. Through the series of steps from 1 to 3, the type of benefit corresponding to the second case is determined, and the provision of a new benefit is started. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball passes through a specific area.

<Characteristic bA group>
The feature bA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low-frequency support mode) at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination is notified. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for switching to a frequency support mode).

According to feature bA1, based on the result of the determination by the determination means, there is provided a means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round for notifying the result of the determination. By the processing executed after the start of the round and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous. For example, if the control mode of the state transition means is a control mode that is advantageous to the player, and the process executed after the start of a game round becomes a state that is advantageous to the player, the state is excessively advantageous to the player. There is a possibility that it will become. However, since the gaming machine according to this feature is equipped with a means for switching the control mode based on the result of the determination by the determining means at the start of a gaming round, for example, a state advantageous to the player can be created by processing executed after the start of a gaming round. In such a case, by switching the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player. .

[Feature bA2]
The gaming machine according to feature bA1,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), it is better that the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). A game machine characterized in that a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the game ball is controlled.

According to feature bA2, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having this feature, if a process executed after the start of a game round results in a state advantageous to the player, the control mode is changed from a control mode advantageous to the player to a control mode advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to switch to a control mode that does not become too much, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

[Feature bA3]
The gaming machine according to feature bA1 or feature bA2,
Equipped with a benefit granting means for granting benefits,
The benefit granting means is
If the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the result of the determination is notified. After-game round benefit granting means (function for executing round games) for granting a reward after the end of the game round. )and,
When a game session corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a benefit granting unit during a game session that grants a benefit during the execution of the game session (a function that executes special bonus processing) and
The control means includes:
When the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition (when the specific processing flag is ON), the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a switching means (a function of turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

According to feature bA3, when a game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, a bonus is awarded during the execution of the game round by the game round execution bonus granting means, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, the control means includes means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round when the game round satisfies a specific condition. Even during a period in which benefits are being provided by the ongoing benefit providing means, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

[Feature bA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to feature bA3,
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The auxiliary means is
disposed in either the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section,
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determining means regarding the first special information, and a first special information game time for notifying the result of the determination made by the determining means regarding the second special information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a second special information game round, which is a game round, in parallel.

According to feature bA4, since it includes a means for running the first special information game round and the second special information game round in parallel, for example, the second special information game round is executed while the first special information game round is being executed. It becomes possible to provide benefits based on the determination results. In such a case, the process executed after the start of the first special information game round will give the player an advantageous situation, but the gaming machine with this feature changes the control mode to the first at the start of the first special information game round. Since a means for switching from the control mode to the second control mode is provided, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state during the execution of the first special information game round.

<Characteristic bB group>
The feature bB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a round game) that grants a benefit after the end of a game round that notifies the result of the determination;
The game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (the game round in which the jackpot has been won) is defined as the game round where the condition is met, and the game round where the condition is met is executed first among the two game rounds where the condition is met. is a precondition-satisfied game time, and the condition-satisfaction game time that is executed after the pre-conditions-satisfaction game time is a post-conditions-satisfaction game time. Processing determining means that determines based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the previous condition is satisfied (based on the jackpot type of the previous game round in which the jackpot was won, special bonus processing is performed at the start of the game round after winning the jackpot) function to decide whether or not to execute related processing),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature bB1, since it includes a process determining means that determines the process at the start of the game round where the post-condition is satisfied based on special information corresponding to the game round where the post-condition is satisfied, it is easier to execute the game round where the post-condition is satisfied. It is also possible to execute in advance a process corresponding to the process to be executed at the start of the game round where the post-conditions are met. For example, in a game round where the preceding condition is met, an effect that suggests a process to be executed at the start of the game round where the post-condition is met may be executed, or in a game round that is executed between the game round where the preceding condition is met and the game round where the post-condition is met. It is possible to execute various corresponding processes for the process to be executed at the start of the game round where the post-conditions are met, such as executing a performance that suggests the process to be executed at the start of the game round where the post-conditions are met, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.
In addition, since the process at the start of the game round where the post-condition is satisfied is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the post-condition is satisfied, for example, the process determined as the process at the start of the game round where the post-condition is satisfied is If the processing is advantageous to the player, as a response process to the processing, a process that does not give the player an excessive advantage due to the processing based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the condition is satisfied is carried out after the game round where the condition is satisfied. Can be executed at start.

[Feature bB2]
The gaming machine described in feature bB1,
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
Equipped with
The processing determining means includes:
Determining whether to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game round (determining whether to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag). , a gaming machine comprising means for executing the game based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the precondition is satisfied.

According to feature bB2, the processing determining means determines whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round where the post-condition is satisfied, corresponding to the game round where the pre-condition is satisfied. Since it is executed based on special information, for example, if a process advantageous to the player is executed at the start of a game round where the post-condition is satisfied based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the pre-condition is satisfied, the response to that process is As a process, it is determined whether or not to switch the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player at the start of a game round where the post-condition is satisfied based on special information corresponding to the game round where the precondition is satisfied. It becomes possible to execute the determination, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

[Feature bB3]
The gaming machine described in feature bB2,
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising a means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The gaming machine further includes:
A game time setting means for setting the game time when the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time,
A game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a first condition satisfying game round, and the first condition satisfying game round that is executed first among the two first condition fulfilling game rounds is defined as a first condition satisfying game round. When the first condition is met as a game time, and the first condition is met after the first condition is met, and the first condition is met as a game time after the first condition is met,
The playing time determining means includes:
The method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round that is executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game time is being executed is based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition satisfaction game time. (setting process of the variable time for the second starting opening in the second embodiment/based on the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot earlier At the start of the opening game round, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag is ON or OFF, and based on the state of the high-frequency support mode flag, the period during which the first starting opening game round that later won the jackpot is being executed. 1. A gaming machine comprising: a function of determining a method of setting a variable time of a game round for a second start opening to be executed at a time.

According to feature bB3, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round to be executed during the period in which the first post-condition-satisfying game round is being executed is set to the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition-satisfying game round. For example, the game time of the second special information game run is determined based on the special information corresponding to the first condition satisfaction game run during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game run is being executed. The setting method can be determined to be advantageous to the player. More specifically, as the method of setting the playing time of the second special information game round, it is possible to decide on a setting method in which the average value of the playing time is relatively short. In this case, there is a risk that the period during which the first post-condition satisfying game round is executed may be excessively advantageous to the player, but for example, as shown in feature bB2 above, as a response process to the process, , the control mode can be switched at the start of the first post-condition satisfying game round based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition satisfying game round, so for example, the control mode can be switched from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is advantageous to the player. By switching to a control mode that is not excessive, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game round is being executed.

<Characteristic bC group>
The feature bC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A game time setting means for setting the game time, where the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are provided as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
A gaming machine comprising:
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means, the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode). However, the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode),
The gaming time setting means includes:
As the method for setting the playing time, at least a first setting method and a second setting method in which the average value of the playing time to be set is shorter than the first setting method can be executed,
The control means includes:
The gaming time setting means switches the gaming time setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity (switching the gaming time setting method for the second starting opening at the start of the specific bonus process). Despite switching the variable time setting method/switching from high-accuracy, high-frequency time-variable time information acquisition processing to high-accuracy, low-frequency time-variable time information acquisition processing, the control mode is changed to A gaming machine comprising means for switching from the first control mode to the second control mode (a function of turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

In general gaming machines, when switching the playing time setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method, which has a shorter average value of the playing time than the first setting method, the state The control mode of the transition means is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode in which the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than in the second control mode. However, in this case, the player may be given an excessive advantage.
According to the gaming machine of feature bC1, although the gaming time setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity, the control mode is switched to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity. Since the first control mode is switched to the second control mode, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

[Feature bC2]
The gaming machine according to feature bC1,
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The specific opportunity is the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition,
The control means includes:
The game time setting means determines the game time of the second special information game time that is executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is being performed. Despite switching the setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control mode is switched from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low frequency support mode) based on the specific opportunity.

According to feature bC2, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round to be executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is Even if switching from the first setting method to the second setting method results in an advantageous situation for the player, the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions Since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode in response to this, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.
Furthermore, since the trigger for switching the control mode is the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions, the benefits are not awarded after the first special information game round ends. It is also possible to execute processing that involves various changes in the state of the game to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic bD group>
The feature bD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determining means regarding the first special information, and a first special information game time for notifying the result of the determination made by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising a means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The performance execution means is
The production executed in the second special information game round that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round corresponds to the first special information game round. A gaming machine comprising means for determining based on the first special information (in the second embodiment, a function for executing a setting process of a performance pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus).

According to feature bD1, the effect to be executed in the second special information game round that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round is the same as the one said first special information game round. Since the determination is made based on the first special information corresponding to the special information game round, it is possible to indirectly make the player guess about the first special information game round through the performance executed in the second special information game round. , it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first special information game round by using the effects performed during the second special information game round.

[Feature bD2]
The gaming machine according to feature bD1,
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a benefit granting means that grants a benefit after the end of a game round that notifies the result of the determination;
a benefit type determining unit that determines the type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting unit from among a plurality of types of the benefit;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the first Means for determining the performance to be executed in the second special information game round that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the special information game round (the jackpot type in the first starting opening game round corresponding to the special bonus process) (a function of setting a performance pattern table for a small win in a game round for the second starting opening to be executed during the period of the special bonus processing) based on the above.

According to feature bD2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the type of benefit that will be awarded after the end of the first special information game round by using the effect executed in the second special information game round.

[Feature bD3]
The gaming machine according to feature bD1 or feature bD2,
The determination means has at least two types of determination modes, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode), for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Judgment mode can be executed,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the determining means is executing the second determining mode than when executing the first determining mode,
The performance execution means is
a determination mode that the determining means executes in a game round that is executed after the end of the first special information game round when the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition; means for determining the performance to be executed in the second special information game round that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round based on the type of Depending on whether the type of jackpot in the game round for the first opening slot is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot, a performance pattern table for the small win in the gaming round for the second opening slot to be executed during the period of the special bonus processing is set. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature bD3, the determination mode of the game round to be executed after the end of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is determined by using the effect executed in the second special information game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the type.

<Characteristic bE group>
The feature bE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game time (a game time for the first starting opening in the second embodiment), which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information; comprising means for concurrently executing a second special information game time (a second starting opening game time), which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means on the information;
The benefit granting means is
A game round in which, when the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a post-game round benefit, which is a benefit, is given after the end of the first special information game round. Post-end benefit granting means (function of executing the opening/closing execution mode in the second embodiment);
If the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus during the game run, which is a benefit, is provided during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. A bonus granting unit (a function for executing special bonus processing in the second embodiment) during game play execution to be granted;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature bE1, since the game system includes the after-gaming round benefit granting means and the game round bonus granting means, it is possible to give players a sense of anticipation regarding the after-gaming round bonus and the during-game round bonus. In addition, for example, by setting cases in which a bonus is granted during a game session and cases in which it is not granted, it is possible to set a case in which a bonus is granted during a game session and a case in which it is not granted, during a period in which the first special information game session corresponding to the first special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is being executed. Even if there is, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency by making him or her guess whether or not a benefit will be awarded during the game round.

[Feature bE2]
The gaming machine according to feature bE1,
The bonus granting means during the game run is:
The execution of the game round is triggered by the second special information game round (game round for second starting opening) that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed, which gives the bonus during the execution of the game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for giving a medium benefit (a privilege for a round game triggered by a small win in a game round for the second starting opening).

According to feature bE2, the bonus during the game run is granted in response to the second special information game run that is executed during the period in which the first special information game run that grants the bonus during the game run is being executed. Even if the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the player is given an even greater sense of expectation by further executing the second special information game round. be able to.

[Feature bE3]
The gaming machine according to feature bE1 or feature bE2,
comprising a game time setting means for setting a game time, which is the time of a game time executed by the game time execution means, based on the special information;
The upper limit value of the amount of the bonus to be given as the bonus during the game session is determined by the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game session that gives the bonus during the game session. A gaming machine characterized in that the amount is determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting slot game run executed as a special bonus process.

According to feature bE3, the upper limit value of the amount of benefits to be given as a benefit during a game session is determined by the amount of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game session that provides the benefit during a game session. Since it is determined based on the length, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first special information game round will last longer. In addition, as the end of the first special information game round approaches, players can feel a sense of expectation to obtain as many benefits as possible during the game round, and a sense of impatience regarding when the first special information game round will end. It is possible to add modulation to the emotions of the person.

<Characteristic bF group>
The feature bF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determining means regarding the first special information, and a first special information game time for notifying the result of the determination made by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The performance execution means is
The first special information acquires elapsed time information that is information regarding the elapsed time from the start of the game round to a predetermined timing, and based on the elapsed time information, the first special information that is the target of acquiring the elapsed time information. Effect setting processing execution means (in the second embodiment, the effect setting processing execution means for executing the effect setting process for setting the effect corresponding to the second special information game time to be executed during the period when the special information game time is being executed) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing processing for setting a performance pattern for small winnings.

According to feature bF1, based on the elapsed time information which is information regarding the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game round to a predetermined timing, execution is performed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. Since the effect corresponding to the second special information game time that is played is set, the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the second special information game time that has been executed will be notified after the first special information game time is executed. To make the player guess the elapsed time and the remaining time until the end of the first special information game round, and indirectly give a sense of anticipation for the first special information game round through a performance corresponding to the second special information game round. I can do it.

[Feature bF2]
The gaming machine according to feature bF1,
The performance execution means is
It is characterized by comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the production setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round from which the elapsed time information is to be obtained. Game machine.

According to feature bF2, it is determined whether or not to execute the production setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round for which the elapsed time information is to be obtained. Therefore, the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information game round is provided to the player based on the performance corresponding to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to guess whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and to indirectly give a sense of anticipation for the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round. .

[Feature bF3]
The gaming machine according to feature bF1 or feature bF2,
comprising a benefit granting means for granting a benefit after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition;
The performance execution means is
When the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, the first special information game round that satisfies the specific condition starts and then a predetermined Obtain elapsed time information that is information regarding the elapsed time until the timing (remaining time RT of the variable time of the first starting opening game time), and execute the first special information game time that is the target of obtaining the elapsed time information. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a performance setting process for setting a performance corresponding to the second special information game round to be executed during the period in which the game is played.

According to feature bF3, the first special information game time is specified to the player based on the performance corresponding to the second special information game time that is executed during the period in which the first special information game time is being performed. It is possible to make the player guess whether or not the condition is satisfied, and it is possible to indirectly give a feeling of expectation for the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round.

[Feature bF4]
The gaming machine according to feature bF3,
Equipped with a benefit granting means for granting benefits,
The benefit granting means is
If the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the result of the determination is notified. After-gaming round benefit granting means (function for executing a round game) for granting a prize after the end of the gaming round; )and,
If a game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the specific condition, a bonus granting means during the execution of the game round (a function for executing special bonus processing) that grants a bonus during the execution of the game round; ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature bF4, when a game session corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a benefit is granted during the execution of the game session, so the first special information It is possible to make it possible to guess whether or not the first special information game round satisfies a specific condition based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the game round is being executed. , it is possible to indirectly give a greater sense of expectation regarding the benefits that may be awarded during the execution of the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round.

<Characteristic bG group>
The feature bG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Judgment result notifying means for notifying the result of the judgment by the judging means using a pattern;
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game operation and the end of the game operation in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced using symbols. means and
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The benefit granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of winning a jackpot), a privilege granting means is provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
and a special condition-fulfilling benefit granting means for granting a benefit when the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies a specific condition (in the case of a small win);
The determination result notification means includes:
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is made using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponds to the second special information game round that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is being executed, despite reporting the result. If the determining means determines that the second special information to be processed satisfies the specific condition, the second special information corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific condition fulfillment notification process for notifying the result of the determination using the symbol.

According to the feature bG1, a process is executed when a symbol corresponding to a determination result indicating that the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed, and a process is executed when the second special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to avoid conflicting at the same time with the process executed in response to the display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the condition is satisfied.

[Feature bG2]
The gaming machine according to feature bG1,
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
Equipped with
The control means includes:
At the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) to the second control mode ( A gaming machine characterized by having a means for switching to a low-frequency support mode).

According to feature bG2, at the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, there is provided means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode. By the process executed after the start of the first special information game round and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

<Characteristic bH group>
The feature bH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bH1]
a firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area;
a first ball entry portion (first starting port 33) into which game balls circulating in the gaming area can enter;
a second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) into which game balls circulating in the gaming area can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
Display means (liquid crystal display device 41 in the second embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The display means is
First identification information (a first liquid crystal symbol in the second embodiment) that is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information. comprising a region-based display means for displaying second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the second embodiment) that is identification information for indicating in different display regions of the display means, respectively;
The area-specific display means is
The first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed in a first state (a state in which a specific probability variable jackpot has not been won in the first winning opening game round). , a process of exchanging a display area for displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and a display area for displaying the second identification information corresponding to the second special information. Despite not being executed, the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is in a second state (winning a specific probability strange jackpot in the first winning opening game round) when executed in a state in which the first identification information corresponds to the first special information, the display area displays the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the second identification information corresponding to the second special information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a process of exchanging a display area with a display area at a predetermined timing.

According to feature bH1, even if the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first identification information may be changed depending on the state in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information is executed. Since the process of exchanging the display area for displaying the display area and the display area for displaying the second identification information may or may not be executed, the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is When executed, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to determine whether the state in which the first special information game was executed was the first state or not. It is possible to guess what the situation was.

[Feature bH2]
The gaming machine according to feature bH1, wherein the state in which the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed is the first state or the second state. comprising a status determination process execution means for executing a status determination process to determine whether there is a
The state determining means includes:
The first special information is based on special information corresponding to a previously executed first special information game that is a first special information game that was executed earlier than the first special information game that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the state determination process.

According to feature bH2, it is determined whether the state in which the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is executed is the first state or the second state. Since the processing is carried out based on the special information corresponding to the first special information game round, for example, in the first special information game round that satisfies the predetermined conditions, processing based on the special information corresponding to the previously executed first special information game round is performed. , processing can be performed using whether or not the display area can be replaced. For example, by performing an effect such as whether or not to replace the display area, information regarding the special information corresponding to the previously executed first special information game round can be suggested.

<Characteristic bI group>
The feature bI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a game time setting means for setting a game time that is a time for a game time to be executed by the game time execution means based on the special information;
a benefit granting unit (a function of executing special bonus processing in the second embodiment) that grants a benefit when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
The upper limit value of the amount of the benefit given as the benefit is the length of the gaming time set by the gaming time setting means for the gaming session corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (special bonus processing). 1. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the variation time of the first starting slot game run is determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting slot game run.

According to feature bI1, the upper limit value of the amount of benefits to be given as benefits is determined based on the length of the gaming time set by the gaming time setting means for the gaming round corresponding to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the playing time of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition will last longer. In addition, as the end of the game session approaches, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation to obtain as many benefits as possible, and a sense of impatience regarding the timing of the end of the game session, and it is possible to add tone to the player's emotions. .

[Feature bI2]
The gaming machine according to feature bI1,
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry section, and a first state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry section. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means being capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. means and
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the benefit granting means grants the benefit, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to the second control mode (low frequency support mode).

According to feature bI2, when the benefit granting means grants a benefit, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, depending on the benefits granted after the start of the game round and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

[Feature bI3]
The gaming machine described in feature bI2,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), it is better that the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). A game machine characterized in that a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the game ball is controlled.

According to feature bI3, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having this feature, at the start of a game round in which a privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means, it is possible to switch the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic bJ group>
The feature bJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bJ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A game time setting means for setting the game time, where the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The gaming time setting means includes:
Triggered by the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the start of the first start opening game round in which the jackpot has been won), the The method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round is based on the first setting method (highly accurate and high frequency time varying time information acquisition process/step Sb1305 in the second embodiment), and the average value of the playing time to be set is A gaming machine comprising means for switching to a second setting method (high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process/step Sb1306 in the second embodiment) different from the first setting method.

According to feature bJ1, when the first special information game time that satisfies the predetermined condition is started, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game time is changed to the first setting. Since the method includes a means for switching to a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method, the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is set before the start of the first special information game round. After starting, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time can be changed, and the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed. That is, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed by starting the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Features bJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature bJ1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second setting method sets an average value of gaming time that is shorter than that of the first setting method.

According to feature bJ2, the second setting method has a shorter average value of the set playing time than the first setting method, so the first special information of the first special information game round that satisfies the predetermined condition is Compared to before the start, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time after the start can be increased, and an advantageous game state can be created. That is, an advantageous gaming state can be created by starting a first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Features bJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature bJ1 or feature bJ2,
The gaming time setting means includes:
As the method of setting the playing time of the second special information game round, it is possible to select a plurality of types of setting methods of playing time with different average values of the playing time to be set,
With the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game time is changed to the first setting. switching from the method to one of the plurality of gaming time setting methods,
The one game time setting method is selected from among a plurality of types of game time setting methods having different average values of the game time to be set, the first game time setting method corresponding to the first special information game time that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine (gaming machine in modification 18 of the second embodiment) characterized in that the determination is made based on the special information of No. 1.

According to feature bJ3, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round that is switched upon the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is as follows: Since it is determined based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round that satisfies the first special information game round, the first special information game round that satisfies the predetermined conditions gives the player a feeling of anticipation, It is also possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the method of setting the playing time of the second special information game round, which is switched upon the start of the first special information game round.

<Characteristic bK group>
The feature bK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bK1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, which is capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
A specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B) among the plurality of types of control modes (high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in modification 1 of the second embodiment) that can be executed by the control means. If the specific control mode is being executed, at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determining means is announced, the specific control mode that is being executed differs from the specific control mode based on the result of the determination. Despite executing a control mode switching determination process which is a process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode, the specific control among the plurality of control modes executable by the control means A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not executing the control mode switching determination process at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced when a control mode other than the control mode is being executed. (Gaming machine in modification 1 of the second embodiment).

According to feature bK1, when a specific control mode is being executed, at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced, the control mode is changed from the specific control mode being executed based on the result of the determination. Since the control mode switching determination process, which is the process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, is executed, if the specific control mode is being executed by the control means, In addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the result of the determination at the start of a game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding whether or not the control mode will be switched.

[Feature bK2]
The gaming machine according to feature bK1,
The control means includes:
When the control mode switching determination process is executed and it is determined that the control mode is to be switched,
comprising means for switching the control mode from the specific control mode to a predetermined control mode at the start of a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means;
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B in modification 1 of the second embodiment), the control means controls the state transition means in the predetermined control mode (low-frequency support mode B). A gaming machine characterized in that a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the state transition means is controlled in the support mode.

According to feature bK2, when the control means controls the state transition means in a specific control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry section than when the control means controls the state transition means in a predetermined control mode. . Therefore, even if the game state shifts to a state advantageous to the player by executing some processing when the control mode is switched by the control means, the control mode changes from a specific control mode to a predetermined one. Since the control mode is switched to the control mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

[Feature bK3]
The gaming machine according to feature bK1 or feature bK2,
The control means includes:
A game characterized in that, in the control mode switching determination process, it is determined that the control mode is to be switched if, as a result of the determination by the determination means, special information that is the subject of the determination satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine.

According to feature bK3, it is determined that the control mode will be switched if the special information to be determined as a result of the determination by the determination means satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the player who recognizes that the control mode has been switched However, it can be recognized that the special information to be determined satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player by using the switching of the control mode.

<Characteristic bL group>
The feature bL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bL1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A game time setting means for setting the game time, where the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state (when the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry part or the second ball entry part. a state transition means for transitioning between;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, which is capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The gaming time setting means includes:
A specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B) among the plurality of types of control modes (high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in modification 1 of the second embodiment) that can be executed by the control means. If it is being executed, based on the result of the determination regarding the first special information at the start of the first special information game round in which the determination result of the first special information by the determination means is announced. and whether or not to switch the setting method of the playing time of the second special information game round from the first setting method to a second setting method in which the average value of the playing time to be set is different from the first setting method. Despite executing a setting method switching determination process for determining whether the control means is currently executing a control mode different from the specific control mode among the plurality of executable control modes, The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for not executing the setting method switching determination process at the start of the first special information game round that notifies the result of the determination on the first special information by the determination means. (Gaming machine in modification 1 of the second embodiment).

2nd special information If you switch the setting method for the playing time of the game session from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the playing time to be set is different from the first setting method, the average value of the playing time to be set is different from the first setting method. The number of times the second special information game is executed can be changed, and the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed.

Therefore, according to feature bL1, when the control means is executing a specific control mode among a plurality of executable control modes, the determination result of the first special information by the determination means is notified. At the start of the first special information game round, the game time setting method for the second special information game round is changed from the first setting method based on the determination result for the first special information. A game in which the control means recognizes that a specific control mode is being executed because a setting method switching determination process is executed to determine whether to switch to a second setting method whose average value is different from the first setting method. expectations regarding whether the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round will be changed at the start of the first special information game round, that is, whether the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game will be changed. It can give a sense of urgency and tension.

[Feature bL2]
The gaming machine described in feature bL1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second setting method sets an average value of gaming time that is shorter than that of the first setting method.

According to feature bL2, since the second setting method has a shorter average value of the gaming time set than the first setting method, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round is the first setting method. If the setting method is switched from to the second setting method, it is possible to increase the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time, and it is possible to shift to an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, for a player who has recognized that the control means is executing a specific control mode, at the start of the first special information game time, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game time is changed to the first one. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the setting method will be switched to the second setting method and the situation will be shifted to an advantageous state.

[Feature bL3]
The gaming machine according to feature bL1 or feature bL2,
The control means includes:
When the control means is executing a specific control mode among the plurality of executable control modes, the result of the determination is announced at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced. Despite executing a control mode switching determination process, which is a process of determining whether to switch from the specific control mode currently being executed to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, based on , when the control means is executing a control mode different from the specific control mode among the plurality of executable control modes, the number of game times to notify the result of the determination by the determination means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not executing the control mode switching determination process at the time of start.

According to feature bL3, when a specific control mode is being executed, at the start of a game round in which the determination result by the determination means is announced, the current control mode is changed from the specific control mode being executed based on the determination result. Since a control mode switching determination process is executed, which is a process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from a specific control mode, the player can confirm that the specific control mode is being executed by the control means. In this case, at the start of a game round, in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the result of the determination, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding whether or not the control mode will be switched.

<Characteristic bM group>
The feature bM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bM1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
From the time of switching from the first control mode to the second control mode (the time of switching the high-frequency support mode flag from ON to OFF), the auxiliary means starts state transition in the second control mode. A gaming machine (No. (gaming machine in modification 19 of the second embodiment).

According to feature bM1, by controlling the auxiliary means in multiple types of operation modes during the control mode transition period, the player is not allowed to make various guesses when switching from the first control mode to the second control mode. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and improve the interest of the game. For example, during the control mode transition period, by controlling the auxiliary means in an operation mode that is different from the operation mode in the first control mode or the second control mode, it is possible to temporarily confuse the player or cause surprises. can be given gender.

[Feature bM2]
The gaming machine according to feature bM1,
The control means includes:
means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period in a first operation mode that is an operation mode when execution of the first control mode is continued;
A gaming machine comprising means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in a different operation mode from the first operation mode.

According to feature bM2, since it includes a means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in the first operation mode that is the operation mode when execution of the first control mode is continued, It is possible to delay making the player recognize that the control mode has been switched to the second control mode, and it is possible to overturn the player's guess or give the player a sense of surprise. Further, since the control unit includes means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means in a control mode transition period in a different operation mode from the first operation mode, the control section changes the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode. There are various ways to improve interest, such as making the player aware that the control mode has changed at the same time as the change, and temporarily making it difficult for the player to recognize what state the game has entered. can be controlled. Furthermore, by using these means in combination, it is possible to impart various emotions to the player during the control mode transition period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic bN group>
The feature bN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bN1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Judgment result notifying means for notifying the result of the judgment by the judging means using a pattern;
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game operation and the end of the game operation in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced using symbols. means and
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a third ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter, and which facilitates entry of the ball when a predetermined accessory is activated;
Accessories control means for controlling the operation of the predetermined accessories (variable winning device 36 of the second embodiment, opening/closing door 36b);
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The accessory control means includes:
a predetermined condition activation means for activating the predetermined accessory (the variable winning device 36 of the second embodiment, the opening/closing door 36b) when the predetermined condition is met (in the case of winning a jackpot); and the predetermined condition. and a specific condition operating means that operates the predetermined accessory (the variable winning device 36 and the opening/closing door 36b of the second embodiment) when a specific condition different from the above is met (in the case of winning a small win). ,
The benefit granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when winning a jackpot), causing the predetermined condition operating means to operate the predetermined accessory at the end of the game round. comprises means for granting a benefit when a predetermined condition is met for granting a benefit according to the
The game round execution means is
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is When the first specific condition is satisfied as the specific condition (in the case of winning the first small win in Modification Example 12 of the second embodiment), the second specific condition that satisfies the first specific condition is means for ending the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game round corresponding to the special information;
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is If the second specific condition is satisfied (if the second small win in Modification 12 of the second embodiment is won), the second specific condition that satisfies the second specific condition is and means for not ending the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition when the second special information game round corresponding to the special information ends. Gaming machine (gaming machine in modification 12 of the second embodiment).

According to feature bN1, when the special information corresponding to the second special information game round satisfies the first specific condition, the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game round Since the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information game round is ended, if the second special information game round is executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed, the second special information game round will be terminated. Even if the second special information corresponding to the second special information satisfies a specific condition, the player is made to guess whether the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied among the specific conditions. This can give players a sense of anticipation and urgency.

[Feature bN2]
The gaming machine according to feature bN1,
The determination result notification means includes:
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is made using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponds to the second special information game round that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is being executed, despite reporting the result. If the determining means determines that the second special information to be processed satisfies the specific condition, the second special information corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific condition fulfillment notification process for notifying the result of the determination using the symbol.

According to the feature bN2, a process is executed when a symbol corresponding to a determination result indicating that the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed, and a process is executed when the second special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to avoid conflicting at the same time with the process executed in response to the display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic cA group>
The feature cA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature cA1]
A ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter (special electric starting port 52 in the third embodiment);
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
An auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part (normal electric accessory 53 in the third embodiment);
As a control mode for controlling the operation of the auxiliary means, there is a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), and a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when controlling the auxiliary means in the first control mode. Auxiliary control means having a second control mode (high frequency support mode) that facilitates ball control;
A gaming machine comprising:
The determining means is
The determination modes for making the determination include a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has
The gaming machine is
After the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (the game round in which the jackpot was won) ends, the control mode is the first control mode, and the determination mode is the second determination mode. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a specific state (latent probability variable state in the third embodiment).

According to feature cA1, since the game transitions to a specific state after the end of a game that satisfies a predetermined condition, various processes can be executed by utilizing the transition to the specific state. For example, after the end of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a process of awarding a benefit to a player using a unique method only during a period in a specific state. Further, by controlling the determination mode and the control mode, it is possible to shift to a specific state or to shift from a specific state to another state. Therefore, by controlling the timing of switching the determination mode and the timing of switching the control mode after the end of a game round that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to control the duration of a specific state, and only in the case of a specific state. The execution time of the processing to be performed can be controlled by the timing of switching the determination mode and the timing of switching the control mode. Therefore, after a game round that satisfies a predetermined condition is completed, execution of various processes can be controlled by simple processing.

[Feature cA2]
The gaming machine according to feature cA1,
comprising a benefit granting means for granting a benefit after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
The benefit granting means is
a first benefit granting means (a function of granting a special bonus) that grants the benefit when the specific state (latent probability variable state in the third embodiment);
a second benefit granting means (a function of executing a round game) that grants the benefit after the end of the specific state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature cA2, the determination mode is switched since it includes a first benefit granting means that grants a benefit when the specific state is in, and a second benefit granting device that grants a benefit after the specific state ends. By controlling the timing and the timing of switching the control mode, the temporal length of the period during which the first benefit granting means grants the benefit is controlled, and further, the second benefit granting means starts granting the benefit. You can control the timing. Furthermore, since two types of benefit granting means are provided, it is possible to provide surprise to the player who recognizes that the granting of a benefit by the first benefit granting means has switched to the granting of a benefit by the second benefit granting means. .

[Feature cA3]
The gaming machine according to feature cA1 or feature cA2,
comprising a duration determining means (a function of executing the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) for determining the duration of the specific state,
The duration determining means includes:
Means for determining the duration based on special information in the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition (determining whether or not it is a high probability mode in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to feature cA3, the duration is determined based on the special information in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, so that when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a sense of anticipation is given to the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player guess the duration of the specific state that will be transitioned to after the end of the game round, giving the player a greater sense of anticipation and increasing the interest in the game.

<Characteristic cB group>
The feature cB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature cB1]
A first ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter (special electric starting port 52 in the third embodiment);
a drive means that drives a predetermined drive mechanism (second opening/closing door 55b) when a game ball enters the first ball entry section;
Drive start time determining means (a second drive start time in the third embodiment) that determines a drive start time that is the time from when a game ball enters the first ball entry section to when the predetermined drive mechanism starts driving. function to execute the opening/closing scenario setting process for the winning opening),
A control means (main control device) that executes control regarding the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising:
The drive start time determining means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that the drive start time is determined based on a control state (state of lottery mode and support mode) by the control means.

According to feature cB1, since the drive start time of the drive mechanism is determined based on the state of control by the control means, it is possible to draw the attention of players who expect the drive mechanism to the state of progress of the game. I can do it. Conversely, since the progress state of the game and the drive start time are related, it is difficult for players who are trying to grasp the progress state of the game to know when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to draw attention to the entry of the ball and the drive of the drive mechanism. As a result, by controlling the state of control regarding the progress of the game in association with the driving start time, it is possible to keep the player's attention on the game at all times.

[Feature cB2]
The gaming machine according to feature cB1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry part (normal electric accessory 53 in the third embodiment);
As a control mode for controlling the operation of the auxiliary means, there is a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), and a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when controlling the auxiliary means in the first control mode. Auxiliary control means having a second control mode (high frequency support mode) that facilitates ball control;
Equipped with
The determining means is
The determination modes for making the determination include a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has
The control means includes:
After the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions, a specific state (latent probability variable state) in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode ),
The drive start time determining means includes:
Based on whether or not the state during the special game period, which is the period from the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition until the start of the next game round, is the specific state, A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the driving start time in the special gaming period.

According to feature cB2, the drive start time in the special game period is determined based on whether the state in the special game period is a specific state or not. Therefore, during the special gaming machine period, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the specific state is present. More specifically, during the special game period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the determination mode and control mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to various elements such as the determination mode, control mode, ball entry into the first ball entry section, drive start time, and drive of the drive mechanism, thereby increasing the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature cB3]
The gaming machine according to feature cB1 or feature cB2,
The drive mechanism includes a second ball entry part (second big prize opening 55a) into which a game ball can enter,
When the second ball entry part is driven by the drive mechanism, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry part compared to before the drive,
The gaming machine further includes:
A gaming machine comprising a prize ball payout means for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when a game ball enters the second ball entering section.

According to feature cB3, the drive mechanism includes a second ball entry section into which a game ball can enter, and when the drive mechanism drives the second ball entry section, the number of game balls increases compared to before driving. The game ball enters the second ball entry part easily, and the game ball is paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the second ball entry part, so that the player pays more attention to the drive start time of the drive mechanism. At the same time, it is possible to draw more attention to the progress of the game.

<Characteristic cD group>
The feature cD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature cD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit after a condition-fulfilling game round, which is the game round corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means to satisfy the predetermined condition;
Equipped with
The benefit granting means is
The length of the benefit granting period, which is the period during which the benefit is granted, is the benefit granting time (the opening time in the specific period in the third embodiment), depending on the condition-fulfilling game round that triggered the granting of the benefit. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a privilege granting time determining means (a function of setting an opening time according to the jackpot type in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) that determines based on the corresponding special information.

According to feature cD1, the bonus award time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the condition is satisfied, so in addition to the player's satisfaction that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, the bonus award time is The length can also give a sense of anticipation and tension. In other words, with respect to special information corresponding to a game round, it is possible to give a sense of expectation not only about whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, but also about the length of the privilege awarding time corresponding to the special information. I can do it.

[Feature cD2]
The gaming machine according to feature cD1,
The benefit granting means is
comprising a first benefit granting means (a function of granting a special bonus) and a second benefit granting means (a function of executing a round game),
The first benefit granting means includes the benefit granting time determining means (a function of executing the opening time setting process in the third embodiment),
The second benefit granting means is a means for starting the granting of benefits as the second benefit granting means after the first benefit granting means finishes granting the benefits (the end of the opening period in the gaming state transition process). A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to later execute a first prize opening opening/closing process.

According to feature cD2, the first benefit granting means includes a benefit granting time determining means, so that regarding the special information corresponding to the game round, not only the expectations such as whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, but also the It is also possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the length of the privilege granting time during which the privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means. Furthermore, according to feature cD2, the benefit granting means includes the first benefit granting means and the second benefit granting means, so that in addition to the granting of benefits by the first benefit granting means, the second benefit granting means It is also possible to give players a sense of expectation regarding the granting of benefits by the granting means.

<Characteristic cE group>
The feature cE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature cE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A benefit provision in which a benefit is granted after the end of a condition-fulfilling game round (a game round in which a jackpot is won in the third embodiment), which is the game round corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means to satisfy the predetermined condition. means and
A gaming machine comprising:
The determining means is
The determination modes for making the determination include a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has
The benefit granting means is
A processing method for awarding the benefit is determined based on the determination mode in which the determination means made the determination on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the condition was met that triggered the granting of the benefit. A gaming machine comprising means (a function of determining whether or not the high probability mode is set in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment).

According to feature cE1, the method of processing for awarding a benefit is determined based on the determination mode in which the determination means has determined the special information corresponding to the game round where the condition was met that triggered the awarding of the benefit. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the determination mode at the time of playing a game is the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Furthermore, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in the current determination mode, it is possible to make the player guess and pay attention to the method of processing for awarding a benefit that will be executed thereafter. In addition, in the case where the condition-satisfying game round ends and awarding of benefits starts without the player knowing the determination mode, by understanding the processing method for awarding benefits, it is possible to prevent the condition-satisfying game that was executed first. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the determination mode for the game. In this way, by associating the determination mode in the game round where the condition is satisfied with the processing method for awarding benefits after the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature cE2]
The gaming machine according to feature cE1,
The benefit granting means is
comprising a first benefit granting means (a function of granting a special bonus) and a second benefit granting means (a function of executing a round game),
When the determination means makes the determination in the first determination mode (low probability mode) with respect to the special information corresponding to the game round in which the condition was satisfied, which was the occasion for granting the benefit, the condition is satisfied. After the end of the game round, the first benefit granting means does not grant the benefit, but the second benefit granting device grants the benefit,
When the determination means makes the determination in the second determination mode (high probability mode) with respect to the special information corresponding to the game round in which the condition was satisfied, which was the opportunity to grant the benefit, the condition is satisfied. After the end of a game round, the first benefit granting means grants a benefit, and after the first benefit granting means finishes granting a benefit, the second benefit granting device grants a benefit. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature cE2, if a determination is made in the first determination mode in a game round where the condition is met, the first bonus granting means does not grant the benefit after the game round where the condition is met, but the second benefit is granted. If a benefit is granted by means and a determination is made in the second determination mode in the game round where the condition is met, the benefit is granted by the first benefit granting means after the game round where the condition is met, and the first benefit is After the granting means finishes granting the benefits, the second benefit granting means grants the benefits, so depending on the determination mode in the game round where the conditions are met, the degree of advantage to the player in the subsequent benefits is determined. different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay even more attention to the determination mode. Furthermore, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition when the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first benefit granting means and the second benefit granting means provide benefits, so the determination mode is In the second determination mode, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature cE3]
The gaming machine according to feature cE2,
The first benefit granting means is
As the first benefit granting means, the first benefit granting time (opening time in a specific period in the third embodiment), which is the temporal length of the first benefit granting period, which is the period in which the benefit is granted, is the period in which the benefit is granted. A first benefit granting time determining means that determines based on the special information corresponding to the condition-fulfilling game round that triggered the granting (setting the opening time according to the jackpot type in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to feature cE3, the first benefit awarding time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the condition was met that triggered the awarding of the benefit, so the benefit is awarded by the first benefit awarding means. Even if it is known, it is possible to make the player guess the first benefit award time determined based on the special information in the game round where the condition is met, and to give him a sense of anticipation.

[Feature cE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features cE2 to feature cE3,
A first ball entry part (special electric starting port 52 in the third embodiment) into which a game ball can enter;
a drive mechanism (second variable winning device 55) that is driven on the condition that a game ball enters the ball entering section;
a second ball entry portion (second grand prize opening 55a) that facilitates the entry of game balls by the drive mechanism;
Equipped with
The first benefit granting means is
In a specific period (opening period in the third embodiment) that is a period from the end of the condition satisfying game round until the second privilege granting means starts the privilege, the first The drive mode from when the game ball enters the first ball entry section until the driving of the drive mechanism ends is controlled so that the game ball easily enters the second ball entry section (special electric starting port 52 The present invention is characterized by comprising means for granting benefits during the specific period by shortening the time from when a game ball enters the game ball until the second opening/closing door 55b opens compared to periods other than the specific period. A gaming machine.

According to feature cE4, in a specific period, the game ball is driven after entering the first ball entry part so that the game ball enters the second ball entry part more easily than in periods other than the specific period. By controlling the drive mode until the drive of the mechanism ends, a privilege is given in a specific period, so that the drive of the drive mechanism ends after the game ball enters the first ball entry section in the specific period. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the drive mode described above, and it is also possible to give the player a sense of anticipation based on the drive mode.

<Characteristic cF group>
The feature cF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature cF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
On the condition that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (winning a jackpot in the third embodiment), after the completion of the condition-fulfilling game round that is the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. , a first drive mechanism (first variable winning device 54 in the third embodiment) that continuously drives;
A first ball entry part (first grand prize opening 54a) that facilitates entry of game balls by driving the first drive mechanism;
a special benefit granting means that grants a benefit (special bonus) during a specific period (opening period) that is a period from the end of the condition satisfying game round until the first driving mechanism starts continuous driving;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature cF1, a benefit is given during a specific period that is a period from the end of a game round where the conditions are met until the first drive mechanism starts continuous driving. Normally, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first drive mechanism is continuously driven to provide a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. do. According to feature cF1,
By continuously driving the first drive mechanism, the bonus is awarded in a specific period before the bonus is awarded to the player, so it is possible to provide surprise to the player and to It can give a sense of expectation.

[Feature cF2]
The gaming machine according to feature cF1,
The special benefit granting means is
A gaming machine comprising means for determining the temporal length of the specific period (opening period) based on special information corresponding to the game round in which the condition is satisfied.

According to feature cF2, since the temporal length of the specific period is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the condition is satisfied, various processes ( For example, it is possible to make the player guess the temporal length of the specific period based on the performance (for example, presentation, etc.), thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation.

[Feature cF3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
The special benefit granting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of advantage of the granted privilege is controlled by the temporal length of the specific period (opening period).

According to feature cF3, since the degree of advantage of the bonus to be granted is controlled by the temporal length of the specific period, it gives the player a greater sense of expectation regarding the temporal length of the specific period. be able to.

[Feature cF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3,
A second ball entry part (special electric starting opening 52 in the third embodiment) different from the first ball entry part (first large winning opening 54a),
a second drive mechanism (second variable winning device 55) that is driven on the condition that a game ball enters the second ball entering section;
A third ball entry part (second grand prize opening 55a) that facilitates entry of game balls by driving the second drive mechanism;
Equipped with
The special benefit granting means is
During the specific period, after the game ball enters the second ball entry section, the game ball enters the third ball entry section more easily than during periods other than the specific period. Control the drive mode until the driving of the drive mechanism ends (shorten the time from when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b opens compared to periods other than the specific period) ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for granting a benefit during the specific period.

According to feature cF4, in a specific period, after a game ball enters the second ball entry section, the game ball enters the third ball entry section more easily than during a period other than the specific period. By controlling the drive mode until the drive of the second drive mechanism ends, a privilege is given in a specific period. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the driving manner until the driving of the mechanism is completed, and it is also possible to give the player a sense of anticipation based on the driving manner.

<Characteristic cG group>
The feature cG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature cG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit after a condition-fulfilling game round, which is the game round corresponding to the special information determined by the determining means to satisfy the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
Of the two game times where the condition is met, the game time where the condition is met is the first game time where the condition is met (the first winning game time in the third embodiment), and the game time where the condition is met which is executed later is the game time where the condition is met. In the case of a condition-fulfilling game round (post-winning game round in the third embodiment),
The benefit granting means is
Means for determining a process to be executed after the completion of the post-condition-satisfying game round based on the special information (determination mode from the next game round based on the jackpot type of the first-winning game round) corresponding to the preceding condition-satisfying game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature cG1, the process to be executed after the end of the post-condition-satisfying game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the previous-condition-satisfying game round, so when the condition-satisfying game round is executed, the condition is satisfied. In addition to giving players a sense of expectation regarding the processing that will be executed after the end of the game round, it also creates a sense of expectation regarding the processing method when the next condition-satisfied game round (post-condition-satisfaction game round) is executed. can be granted.

[Feature cG2]
The gaming machine according to feature cG1,
The benefit granting means is
As a process to be executed after the end of the game round where the post-conditions are met, a method of giving a benefit after the end of the game round where the post-conditions are met is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the pre-conditions are met (of the first-place winning game round). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining a jackpot type (determination mode from the next game round based on the type of jackpot).

According to feature cG2, the processing method for awarding benefits after the end of the game round where the post-conditions are met is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the condition is met, so when the game round where the condition is met, , in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the processing method for awarding benefits after the end of the condition-fulfilling game round, when the next condition-fulfilling game round (post-condition fulfilling game round) is executed. It is also possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the processing method for awarding benefits. In addition, when a condition-fulfilling game round is executed, regarding the processing method for awarding benefits after the end of the condition-fulfilling game round, we will inform the player that the condition-fulfilling game round executed before the condition-fulfilling game round will be given to the player. It is possible to make a guess based on special information in a game round (a game round where the pre-conditions are met). Therefore, when a game round where the conditions are met is executed, a method for awarding benefits after the game round where the conditions are met is estimated based on special information in the previous game round where the conditions are met from the perspective of the game round where the conditions are met; , it is possible to make the player guess the method of awarding benefits in the subsequent condition-fulfilling game round based on the condition-fulfilling game round, and to encourage the player to make various guesses by executing one condition-fulfilling game round; Furthermore, a sense of expectation can be imparted.

[Feature cG3]
The gaming machine according to feature cG2,
The benefit granting means is
comprising a first benefit granting means (a function of granting a special bonus) and a second benefit granting means (a function of executing a round game),
If the special information corresponding to the game round where the prior condition is satisfied satisfies a specific condition (when the jackpot type is a probability-variable jackpot), after the game round where the post-condition is satisfied, the first benefit granting means After the bonus is granted and the bonus is finished being awarded by the first bonus granting means, the second bonus granting unit grants the bonus, and the special information corresponding to the game round in which the first condition is satisfied is If the condition is not satisfied (when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot), after the end of the game round where the post-conditions are satisfied, the first privilege granting means does not award the privilege, and the second privilege granting means A gaming machine characterized in that a benefit is granted by.

According to feature cG3, when the special information corresponding to the game round where the prior condition is satisfied satisfies a specific condition, it gives the player a sense of expectation regarding the granting of benefits after the game round where the prior condition is satisfied. In addition to this, it is also possible to create great expectations regarding the granting of benefits after the end of the game round in which the post-conditions are met.

[Feature cG4]
The gaming machine according to feature cG3,
The first benefit granting means is
The first benefit granting time, which is the temporal length of the first benefit granting period, which is a period during which the benefit is granted as the first benefit granting means after the end of the post-condition fulfilling game round, is determined by A gaming machine comprising: a first benefit granting time determining means (a function of setting an opening time according to the jackpot type in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) that determines the first benefit granting time based on the special information corresponding to the above. .

According to feature cG4, if the special information corresponding to the game round where the previous condition is satisfied satisfies a specific condition, the first benefit granting time in the first benefit granting period after the end of the game round where the subsequent condition is satisfied. , the player can make a guess based on the number of game rounds in which the post-condition is satisfied, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation.

[Feature cG5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features cG1 to feature cG4,
The benefit granting means is
As a process to be executed after the completion of the game round in which the post-condition is satisfied, the length of time (opening time) from the end of the game round in which the post-condition is satisfied until the awarding of benefits (round game) is started is determined by determining the length of time (opening time) from the end of the game round in which the post-condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining based on the special information corresponding to a game round (a function for determining whether or not it is a high probability mode in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment).

According to feature cG5, the length of time from the end of the game round where the post-conditions are met until the awarding of benefits starts is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the post-conditions are met. A new gaming experience can be provided by allowing the player to guess the length of time until the round is executed and the awarding of benefits is started based on special information corresponding to the game round where the preconditions are satisfied.

[Feature cG6]
The gaming machine according to feature cG5,
The benefit granting means is
comprising a first benefit granting means (a function of granting a special bonus) and a second benefit granting means (a function of executing a round game),
A second benefit grant, which is the temporal length of a second benefit grant start period, which is a period from the end of the post-condition fulfillment game round until the start of granting a benefit (round game) as the second benefit granting means. Determining a start time (opening time) based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the prior condition is satisfied (determining whether or not it is a high probability mode in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized in that during the second benefit granting start period (opening period), the first benefit granting means grants a benefit (granting a special bonus).

According to feature cG6, since the benefit granting means includes the first benefit granting means and the second benefit granting means, when a condition satisfying game round is executed, the first specific grant is given to the player. In addition to the feeling of expectation for the provision of a privilege by the means, it is possible to give the feeling of expectation for the provision of a privilege by the second privilege provision means. Further, the second benefit grant start time, which is the temporal length of the second benefit grant start period, which is the period in which the first benefit grant means grants the benefit, is based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the prior condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player is asked to guess the second benefit award start time based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the pre-conditions are met, and the benefit provided by the first benefit award means during the second benefit award start period. It is possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the provision of .

<Characteristic dA group>
The feature dA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature dA1]
Display means (controls the startup display section 39a and the startup display section 39) that can have a first display mode (turning off the startup display section 39a) and a second display mode (lighting up the startup display section 39a) a main controller 60) that realizes the functions of
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
Means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination mode for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a lower probability mode than the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
Once in a game round, the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (fluctuating display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b) is started and then terminated. In this case, a game round execution means for executing the game round;
means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether or not the determination mode is the second determination mode, the storage immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state; storage means (RAM 64) capable of continuously storing the determination mode information when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
Means for displaying in the second display mode when the determination mode is the second determination mode when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) Steps Sd0502 and Sd0503 in the normal processing of FIG. 228),
Switching the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition while being displayed in the second display mode. A gaming machine comprising: means (steps Sd1104 to Sd1106 in the hit determination process in FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side).

According to feature dA1, when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the display means performs display in the second display mode. . Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is possible for the player to assume that the judgment mode has shifted from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. can. However, in feature dA1, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, which overturns the player's guess. be able to. Specifically, by switching to the first display mode, the player assumes that the mode has shifted to the first determination mode and becomes disappointed, but in a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, Since there is actually no transition to the first determination mode, the disappointed player's speculation can be overturned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature dA2]
The gaming machine according to feature dA1,
Determination mode determining means (main control board 61 side fall determination process in FIG. 233 executed by the MPU 62 of
The display means is
At the start of a game round that is being displayed in the second display mode and is determined to be executed in the first decision mode by the decision mode determining means, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the second display mode. 233. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to the display mode of No. 1 (steps Sd1002, Sd1004, and Sd1005 in the fall determination process in FIG. 233).

According to the feature dA2, in any case of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition or a game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the display means is displayed at the start of the game round. Since the display mode is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is determined from the display mode of the display means that the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions will be executed in the first judgment mode. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the number of games played. Therefore, according to feature dA2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature dA3]
The gaming machine according to feature dA2,
Equipped with a performance execution means for performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
means for executing a specific performance in a game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the specific effect in a game round determined to be executed in the first judgment mode by the judgment mode determining means.

According to feature dA3, the same specific effect is executed in both the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases it is due to a specific performance. Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases is occurring based on the display mode of the display means at the start of a game round. Therefore, according to feature dA3, by providing a temporal width with a specific performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension over a relatively long period of time.
[Feature dA4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to feature dA3,
The display means includes an LED,
The first display mode is a state where the LED is off,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second display mode is a lighting state of the LED.

According to feature dA4, it is possible to identify the determination mode using a simple display mode such as the LED's off/on state. Therefore, according to feature dA4, visibility for the player can be improved, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic dB group>
The feature dB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Features dB1]
A display means capable of taking a first display mode and a second display mode;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition; the determination mode for making the determination includes a first determination mode; a second determination mode that has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether or not the determination mode is the second determination mode, the storage immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state; storage means capable of continuously storing the determination mode information when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
Means for displaying in the second display mode when the determination mode is the second determination mode when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) Steps Sd0502 and Sd0503 in the normal processing of FIG. 228),
Means for switching the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode (on the main control board 61 side) when a predetermined game round is started while the display mode is displayed in the second display mode. Steps Sd1104 to Sd1106) in the hit determination process of FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62;
Equipped with
The determining means is
Although the display means switches from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the predetermined game session, the judgment corresponding to the predetermined game session is changed to the second judgment mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means (steps Sd1101 to Sd1103 in the hit determination process in FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) in the mode.

According to the feature dB1, when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the display means performs display in the second display mode. Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is difficult for the player to assume that the judgment mode has shifted from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. can. However, in the feature dB1, although the display means switches from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of a predetermined game session, the determination corresponding to the predetermined game session is changed to the second display mode. Since the game is executed in this mode, it is possible to overturn the player's guess. Therefore, according to the feature dB1, it is possible to provide surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features dB2]
The gaming machine described in feature dB1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined gaming session is the gaming session that corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature dB2, it is possible to overturn the player's assumption that the game has shifted to the first determination mode in a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, thereby giving the player a greater sense of surprise. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic dC group>
The feature dC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature dC1]
A display means capable of taking a first display mode and a second display mode;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition; the determination mode for making the determination includes a first determination mode; a second determination mode that has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether or not the determination mode is the second determination mode, the storage immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state; storage means capable of continuously storing the determination mode information when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state;
Determination mode determining means (main control board 61-side MPU 62);
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
Means for displaying in the second display mode when the determination mode is the second determination mode when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) Steps Sd0502 to Sd0503 in the normal processing of FIG. 228),
means for switching the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at a predetermined switching timing while displaying in the second display mode;
Equipped with
The timing at which the determination means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode is the timing at which the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode. While the first game round is different from the second game round as the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition, Steps Sd1002 to Sd1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 233, and step Sd1308 in the gaming state transition process in FIG. 236, which is executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side.
The predetermined switching timing for switching to the first display mode is the same between the first game round and the second game round (steps Sd1004 to Sd1005 in the fall determination process in FIG. 233 and the main Steps Sd1105 to Sd1106 in the hit determination process in FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62 on the control board 61 side)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature dC1, the predetermined switching timing at which the display means switches the display mode to the first display mode is the first game round in which the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the first determination mode; A match is made with the second game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. For this purpose, from the display mode of the display means, the player can be informed whether it is the first game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode or the second game round that corresponds to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions. You can prevent people from guessing. Therefore, according to the feature dC1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature dC2]
The gaming machine according to feature dC1,
In the first game round, the predetermined switching timing is at the start of the first game round, and in the second game round, the predetermined switching timing is at the start of the second game round. A gaming machine characterized by certain things.

According to feature dC2, since the display means switches the display mode to the first display mode at the same time as the game round starts, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of tension. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature dC3]
The gaming machine according to feature dC2,
In the first game round, the timing at which the determination means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode is at the start of the first game round, and in the second game round, A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which the determination means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode is at the end of the second game round.

According to feature dC3, in the second game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, switching to the first determination mode is performed at the end of the second game round. A determination corresponding to can be performed in the second determination mode. Therefore, according to feature dC3, it is possible to provide surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

<Characteristic dD group>
The feature dD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature dD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
State storage means (high probability mode) for storing state information (lottery mode information) that allows identification of two exclusive states, the first state (low probability mode) and the second state (high probability mode). flag) and
a specific process execution unit that starts execution of a specific process (lighting of the display unit 39a at startup) based on the status information stored in the status storage unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The state storage means includes:
means capable of continuously storing the state information stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is being supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state when the gaming machine switches from the non-supply state to the supply state; Prepare,
The specific processing execution means is
means for starting execution of the specific process (lighting of the display section 39a at startup) when the state information is information specifying the second state when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state; ,
A gaming machine comprising: means for terminating the specific processing at the start of the gaming round that satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the characteristic dD1, the specific processing execution means starts executing the specific processing when the state information is information that specifies the second state when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state. It is possible to make the player who recognizes that the process is being executed recognize that the player is in the second state. Furthermore, since the specific processing execution means ends the specific processing at the start of a game round that satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can infer that the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the specific processing are related. can be done. Therefore, when a specific process is being executed, the player can pay attention to whether or not the specific process ends, and when the specific process ends, the player can start playing the game from the start of the game round. It can give people a great sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature dD2]
The gaming machine according to feature dD1,
The determining means is
comprising means for executing a first determination mode and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode as a determination mode for making the determination;
The first state is a state in which the determination means executes the first determination mode, and the second state is a state in which the determination means executes the second determination mode. Game machine.

According to the feature dD2, the first state is a state in which the determination means executes the first determination mode, and the second state is a state in which the determination means executes the second determination mode. The player, who has recognized that the can create a sense of expectation.

[Feature dD3]
The gaming machine according to feature dD1 or feature dD2,
Equipped with a display section that is visible to players,
The specific processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the specific processing, a display mode of the display unit is changed to a display mode indicating that the display unit is in the second state.

According to feature dD3, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the display section. Further, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player who recognizes that the display mode of the display section is the display mode indicating the second state.

<Characteristic dE group>
The feature dE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature dE1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
Means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination mode for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a lower probability mode than the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
Means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, the support modes for performing the assistance include a first support mode (low frequency support mode) and a means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. an auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) having a second support mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the possibility of ball entry is higher than the first support mode;
A control means for controlling the auxiliary means, wherein the auxiliary means performs the determination after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition from the first support mode to the second support mode. Control means for shifting the auxiliary means from the second support mode to the first support mode when the mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode;
determination mode information for specifying whether the determination mode is the second determination mode, and support mode information for specifying whether the support mode is the second support mode, respectively. storage means, the determination mode information and the support mode information stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state, from the non-supply state to the supply state; a storage means that can continue to store information when switched to
A display means capable of taking a first display mode (lighting out of the display section 39a at startup) and a second display mode (lighting up of the display section 39a at startup), wherein the display means is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state. In some cases, when the determination mode is the second determination mode, display means for displaying in the second display mode (start-up display unit 39a and a main unit that realizes a function of controlling the start-up display unit 39) a control device 60);
A gaming machine comprising:
When the display means is displaying in the second display mode and the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition after the number of executions reaches the predetermined number of times; Then, when the game round in which the determination has been made is started, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side). Steps Sd1104 to Sd1106 in the hit determination process of FIG. Steps Sd1108 to Sd1110 in the hit determination process in FIG. 234)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature dE1, when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the display means performs display in the second display mode. . Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is difficult for the player to assume that the judgment mode has shifted from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. can. Further, according to the feature dE1, after the number of executions of the game after the transition to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the auxiliary means triggers the transition of the determination mode to the first determination mode. Shifting the auxiliary means to the first support mode. Therefore, when the auxiliary means shifts from the second support mode to the first support mode, the player can infer that the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. That is, the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode both because the display mode of the display means has switched to the first display mode and because the auxiliary means has switched to the first support mode. The player can be made to guess. However, according to feature dE1, after the number of executions of the game round after transitioning to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number of times, at the start of the game round when it is determined that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In this case, the player's above guess can be overturned. Specifically, due to the switch to the first display mode and the switch to the first support mode, the player guesses that the player has moved to the first judgment mode and is disappointed; In the game round corresponding to the special information that is satisfied, the game does not actually shift to the first determination mode, so that the disappointed player's guess can be overturned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature dE2]
The gaming machine according to feature dE1,
comprising a determination mode determining means for determining in which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game round is to be performed at the start of the game round;
The display means is displaying in the second display mode, and after the number of executions reaches the predetermined number of times, the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in a first determination mode. In this case, when the game round in which the determination has been made is started, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, and the control means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, and the control means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode. Shifts from the second support mode to the first support mode.

According to feature dE2, while the display means is displaying in the second display mode, the auxiliary means makes a determination after the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number after transitioning to the second support mode. When the determination mode determining means determines to execute in the first determination mode, the display means displays the same information as when it is determined that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition at the start of the game round in which the determination was made. behave. Therefore, based on the display mode of the display means, the player can guess whether it is determined that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition or if it is determined that the determination is to be performed in the first determination mode. You can prevent this from happening. Further, according to the feature dE2, the determination mode determining means executes the determination in the first determination mode after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode. When the determination is made, the control means shifts the support mode to the first support mode, which is the same as when it is determined that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, at the start of the game round in which the determination is made. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two cases has occurred based on the behavior of the auxiliary means during the game round. Therefore, according to feature dE2, after the number of executions of the game after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number of times, based on the display mode of the display means and the behavior of the auxiliary means, the two aforementioned It is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the cases has occurred. Therefore, according to the feature dE2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic dF group>
The feature dF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature dF1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the gaming machine into the ball entry section;
Means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination mode for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a lower probability mode than the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
Means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, the support modes for performing the assistance include a first support mode (low frequency support mode) and a means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section. an auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) having a second support mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the possibility of ball entry is higher than the first support mode;
A control means for controlling the auxiliary means, when the number of times the auxiliary means executes the game after the transition from the first support mode to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number of times, control means for shifting the auxiliary means from the second support mode to the first support mode when the determination mode is the first determination mode;
determination mode information for specifying whether the determination mode is the second determination mode, and support mode information for specifying whether the support mode is the second support mode, respectively. storage means, the determination mode information and the support mode information stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state, from the non-supply state to the supply state; a storage means that can continue to store information when switched to
determination mode determining means for determining, at the start of the game round, which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game round is to be executed;
A display means capable of taking a first display mode (lighting out of the display section 39a at startup) and a second display mode (lighting up of the display section 39a at startup), wherein the display means is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state. In some cases, when the determination mode is the second determination mode, display means for displaying in the second display mode (start-up display unit 39a and a main unit that realizes a function of controlling the start-up display unit 39) a control device 60);
A gaming machine comprising:
When the display means is displaying in the second display mode and the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition before the number of executions reaches the predetermined number of times; , or when the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the first determination mode,
The display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game round in which the determination or determination has been made;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means maintains the second support mode as the support mode from the start of the game round in which the judgment or decision is made until at least the end of the game round.

According to the feature dF1, while the display means is displaying in the second display mode, the auxiliary means displays special information before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the second support mode. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, or if it is determined that the determination is to be made in the first determination mode, the display means will display the information at the start of the game round in which the determination or determination was made. , has the same behavior. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two cases has occurred based on the display mode of the display means. Furthermore, according to the feature dF1, in either of the two cases, the control means controls the support mode from the start of the game round in which the judgment or decision was made until at least the end of the game round as the support mode. Stay in mode. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two cases has occurred based on the behavior of the auxiliary means during the game round. Therefore, from the display mode of the display means and the behavior of the auxiliary means between the start of the game round and the end of the game round before the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number, the above two cases It is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the following has occurred. Therefore, according to feature dF1, the auxiliary means creates a sense of anticipation and tension in the player for a relatively long period before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the second support mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to feature dF1, when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the display means is in the second display mode. Perform display. Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is difficult for the player to assume that the judgment mode has shifted from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. can. However, in feature dF1, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, which overturns the player's guess. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

[Feature dF2]
The gaming machine described in feature dF1,
When the display means is displaying in the second display mode and the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition after the number of executions reaches the predetermined number of times; , or when the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the first determination mode,
The display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game round in which the determination or determination has been made;
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means shifts the support mode from the second support mode to the first support mode at the start of the game round in which the determination or determination has been made.

According to feature dF2, while the display means is displaying in the second display mode, the auxiliary means displays special information after the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the second support mode. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, or if it is determined that the determination is to be made in the first determination mode, the display means will display the information at the start of the game round in which the determination or determination was made. , has the same behavior. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two cases has occurred based on the display mode of the display means. Further, according to feature dF2, in either of the two cases, the control means shifts the support mode to the first support mode at the start of the game round in which the determination or determination has been made. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two cases has occurred based on the behavior of the auxiliary means during the game round. Therefore, according to the feature dF2, both before the number of times the auxiliary means executes the game after shifting to the second support mode reaches the predetermined number of times, and after the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number, It is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two cases has occurred based on the display mode of the display means and the behavior of the auxiliary means.

<Characteristic dG group>
The feature dG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Feature dG1]
Display means (controls the startup display section 39a and the startup display section 39) that can have a first display mode (turning off the startup display section 39a) and a second display mode (lighting up the startup display section 39a) a main controller 60) that realizes the functions of
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
Means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination mode for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a lower probability mode than the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
Means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether the determination mode is the first determination mode or the second determination mode, the means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether the determination mode is the first determination mode or the second determination mode, the device being configured to change a gaming machine from a supply state in which power is being supplied to a power supply state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine. storage means (RAM 64) capable of continuously storing the determination mode information stored immediately before the state is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
means for displaying in the second display mode when the determination mode is the second determination mode when switching from the non-supply state to the supply state;
While displaying in the second display mode, when the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the first display. means for switching to the mode;
Equipped with
The gaming machine further includes:
Means for switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition while being displayed in the second display mode; A gaming machine characterized by comprising the following.

According to feature dG1, the display means changes the display mode from the second display mode when the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode while displaying in the second display mode. Switch to the first display mode. Further, this gaming machine switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, while displaying in the second display mode, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of a game round corresponding to a special condition that satisfies a predetermined condition. . At this time, when a player recognizes that the display mode has been switched from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of a game round, the player is informed that the judgment in the game round was executed in the first judgment mode. It can make you guess. However, a game round is started after the determining means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game round. The determination is performed in the second determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to overturn the player's assumption that the determination in the game round was executed in the first determination mode, and to give the player a sense of surprise. Furthermore, since the game round corresponds to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of surprise and anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to feature dG1, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of a game round, but when the determination means makes a determination in the second determination mode and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode after the determination, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage in the game round. Furthermore, since the control for switching the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode is linked to the control for switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, the display mode of the display means is switched. While avoiding unusual control and making the control simple, it is possible to have the effect of overturning the player's assumption as described above and providing surprise to the player.

[Feature dG2]
The gaming machine described in feature dG1,
comprising a determination mode determining means for determining in which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game round is to be performed at the start of the game round;
The display means is
At the start of a game round that is being displayed in the second display mode and is determined to be executed in the first decision mode by the decision mode determining means, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the second display mode. 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for switching to the display mode shown in FIG.

According to the feature dG2, in any case of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition or a game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the display means is displayed at the start of the game round. Since the display mode is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is determined from the display mode of the display means that the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions will be executed in the first judgment mode. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the number of games played. Therefore, according to feature dG2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Features dG3]
The gaming machine described in feature dG2,
Equipped with a performance execution means for performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
means for executing a specific performance in a game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the specific effect in a game round determined to be executed in the first judgment mode by the judgment mode determining means.

According to feature dG3, the same specific performance is executed in both the game round corresponding to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions and the game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases it is due to a specific performance. Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases is occurring based on the display mode of the display means at the start of a game round. Therefore, according to feature dG3, by providing a temporal width with a specific performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension over a relatively long period of time.

<Characteristic eA group>
The feature eA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eA1]
A first ball entrance (first ball entrance) that allows a game ball to enter, and that allows the entered game ball to reach a predetermined area (first starting port 33). 201) and
a second ball entrance (second ball entrance 221) adjacent to the first ball entrance, which is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter;
In a specific case where the time interval between the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry port and the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry port is within a specific time, in the specific case; auxiliary means for making it easier for the game ball entering the first ball entrance to reach the predetermined area, compared to cases other than the above;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature eA1, since the auxiliary means is provided, even if there is a difference between the width (width) of the first ball entrance hole and the width (width) of the second ball entrance hole, the predetermined value for the difference can be adjusted. It is possible to suppress changes in the ease with which the game ball reaches the area (expected value of arrival). This will be explained below using a specific example.

For example, consider a configuration in which the sum of the width (width) of a first ball entrance port and the width (width) of a second ball entrance port that are adjacent to each other is defined as a constant width (width). In the first configuration in which the width of the first ball entry port is wider than the width of the second ball entry port, the game ball enters the second ball entry port more easily than the first ball entry port. Although the above specific case is unlikely to occur because the first ball entry port is wide, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port, and the ball enters the first ball entry port per unit time. By increasing the number of game balls entering the ball, it is possible to increase the probability of the game ball reaching a predetermined area.

On the other hand, in the second configuration in which the width of the first ball entry port is narrower than the width of the second ball entry port, the game ball enters the first ball entry port more easily than the second ball entry port. Because it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port compared to the first configuration, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port compared to the first configuration. When a game ball enters the first ball entrance, the above specific case is likely to occur, and the probability of the game ball reaching a predetermined area can be increased.

In this way, according to feature eA1, the ease with which a game ball reaches a predetermined area with respect to the difference between the width (width) of the first ball entrance hole and the width (width) of the second ball entrance hole is determined. It is possible to suppress changes in the expected value of the game ball reaching the predetermined area, and it is possible to easily maintain the expected value of the game ball reaching the predetermined area at a constant value (or within a predetermined difference).

[Feature eA2]
The gaming machine according to feature eA1,
The auxiliary means is
A first type route that is a predetermined route for a game ball, and in which the probability that a game ball that enters from the first ball entry port reaches the winning port as the predetermined area is a first probability value. (Normal route NR) and
A second probability value that is a predetermined path of the game ball and that the probability that the game ball that enters the first ball entry port will reach the entry prize port is higher than the first probability value. Type 2 route (special route SP) and
In cases other than the specific case, a game ball that enters from the first ball entry port is distributed to the first type route, and in the specific case, a game ball that enters from the first ball entry port. A gaming machine comprising: a game ball sorting device (game ball sorting device 200) that sorts the balls to the second type route.

According to feature eA2, in cases other than the specific case, the game ball entering from the first ball entry port is sorted to the first type route, and in the specific case, the game ball enters from the first ball entry port. The played game balls are distributed to the second type route. Therefore, in a specific case, the probability that the game ball will reach the winning hole can be increased. In this way, according to feature eA2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature eB group>
The feature eB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eB1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A passage provided in the distribution area, which has a first ball entry port (first ball entry port 201) into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that enters the first ball entry port. A first passage (first passage 210) through which the
A passage provided in the circulation area, which has a second ball entry port (second ball entry port 221) adjacent to the first ball entry port, and the ball enters the second ball entry port. A gaming machine comprising: a second passageway (second passageway 220) through which game balls are distributed;
It is characterized by comprising a behavior changing means (first game ball distribution mechanism 240) that changes the behavior of the game balls in the first path by receiving an action from the game balls circulating in the second path. Game machine.

According to feature eB1, the behavior of the game balls in the first passage is changed by the action of the behavior changing means from the game balls circulating in the second passage. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can change the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage, and thereby increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance in the second passage. The probability that the behavior of will change can be changed. Therefore, according to feature eB1, it is possible to provide the player with a game result according to his/her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Consider a case where, in feature eB1, a nail is provided above the boundary between the first ball entrance of the adjacent first passage and the second ball entrance of the second passage. Depending on the driving position of this nail, the probability that the game ball enters the first ball entrance of the first passage changes. Specifically, by providing the above-mentioned nail on the first ball entry port side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that a game ball will enter the first ball entry port. In this case, since the probability that the game ball enters the second ball entrance of the second passage increases, the probability that the behavior of the game ball changes in the first passage by the behavior changing means increases. In summary, if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first ball entrance side of the first passage, the probability of a game ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passage will be reduced. Therefore, the probability that the behavior of the game ball changes in the first passage increases.

On the other hand, if the nail described above is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage increases. On the contrary, since the probability that the game ball enters the second ball entrance of the second passage becomes low, the probability that the behavior of the game ball changes in the first passage becomes low. Therefore, according to the feature eB1, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance in the first passage and the probability that the behavior of the game ball will change in the first passage.

Here, if it is assumed that the probability that the game ball will advance to a path advantageous to the player in the first path is improved by changing the behavior of the game ball in the first path, then the nail mentioned above is The game ball is provided on the first ball entrance side of the first passageway, so that even if the probability of the ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passageway is lowered, the game ball advances on a path that is advantageous for the player in the first passageway. Since the probability increases, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the hole side between the hole side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage to increase the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage, the game cannot be played in the first passage. Since the probability that the game ball will advance to a path that is advantageous to the player is reduced, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the player between the hole side and the player side. Therefore, according to the feature eB1, it is also possible to prevent profits from being biased toward either the hole side or the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Features eB2]
The gaming machine described in feature eB1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the behavior changing means is configured to distribute game balls in the first passageway to one of a plurality of destinations.

According to feature eB2, the destination of the game balls in the first passage is sorted by the behavior changing means. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can change the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage, thereby allowing the player to play the game in the first passage. It is possible to change the probability that the ball will be assigned a destination.

[Features eB3]
The gaming machine described in feature eB2,
a first type route (normal route NR) that is provided in the distribution area and is a predetermined route for game balls;
a second type route (special route SP) that is provided in the distribution area and is a predetermined route for game balls and is more advantageous for the player than the first type route;
Equipped with
The behavior changing means is
If no action is received from the game balls flowing through the second path, sorting the game balls in the first path toward the first type path;
A gaming machine comprising means for distributing game balls in the first passage toward the second type route by receiving an action from the game balls circulating in the second passage.

According to feature eB3, when no action is received from the game balls circulating through the second passage, the game balls are sorted toward the first type route and receive action from the game balls circulating through the second passage. Accordingly, the game balls are sorted toward the second type route, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball will be distributed toward the second type route, and to obtain a game result advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature eB3, it is possible to provide the player with a game result according to his/her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic eC group>
The feature eC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eC1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
a first passage (main passage 211) provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls;
a branch passageway (first branch passageway 212) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and is branched from the first passageway;
Game ball distribution means (first game ball distribution mechanism 240) that distributes game balls into the first path and the branch path at a branch point to the branch path in the first path;
A gaming machine comprising: a second passageway (second passageway 220) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls;
The game ball sorting means is
If the game balls do not flow through the second path, distribute the game balls that have reached the branch point to the first path,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for distributing game balls that have reached the branching point to the branching passage in response to the distribution of the gaming balls in the second passage.

According to feature eC1, when the game balls do not circulate in the second passage, the game balls are distributed to the first passage, and when the game balls circulate in the second passage, the game balls are distributed to the branch passage. It will be done. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game balls, the player can change the probability that the game balls will flow through the second path, thereby changing the probability that the game balls will be distributed to the branch path in the first path. can be changed. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game balls, the player can individually change the probability that the game balls will flow through the first passage and the probability that the game balls will be distributed to the branch passages in the first passage. can be done. As a result, according to the feature eC1, it is possible to provide the player with a game result that corresponds to his or her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature eC2]
The gaming machine described in feature eC1,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage, and has a first ball entrance (first ball entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter,
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second ball entrance (second ball entrance 221) into which a game ball can enter,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are adjacent to each other.

According to feature eC2, the first ball entry port of the first passage and the second ball entry port of the second passage are adjacent to each other. Now, let us consider a case where a nail is provided above the border between the first and second ball entrances that are adjacent to each other. Depending on the driving position of this nail, the probability that the game ball enters the first ball entrance of the first passage changes. Specifically, by providing the above-mentioned nail on the first ball entry port side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that a game ball will enter the first ball entry port. In this case, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage is high, the probability that the game ball will be sorted into the branch passage in the first passage by the game ball sorting means is high. Become. In summary, if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first ball entrance side of the first passage, the probability of a game ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passage will be reduced. Therefore, in the first passage, the probability that the game balls are sorted into the branch passage increases.

On the other hand, if the nail described above is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage increases. On the contrary, since the probability that a game ball enters the second ball entrance of the second passage becomes low, the probability that a game ball is distributed to a branch passage in the first passage becomes low. Therefore, according to the feature eC2, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage and the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch passage in the first passage.

Here, in the first passage, it is assumed that the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player is improved by sorting the game ball to the branch passage. Even if the probability of a ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passageway is lowered by providing the game ball on the ball entrance side of the first passageway, the probability that the game ball will proceed to a path advantageous to the player in the first passageway is increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the hole side between the hole side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage to increase the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage, the game cannot be played in the first passage. Since the probability that the game ball will advance to a path that is advantageous to the player is reduced, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the player between the hole side and the player side. Therefore, according to feature eC2, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward either the hole side or the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eC3]
The gaming machine according to feature eC1 or feature eC2,
a first type route (normal route NR) that is provided in the distribution area and is a predetermined route for game balls;
a second type route (special route SP) that is a predetermined route for game balls provided in the distribution area and is more advantageous for the player than the first type route;
A downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type passage,
A gaming machine characterized in that a downstream end of the branch passage leads to the second type route.

According to feature eC3, when game balls do not circulate through the second passage, the game balls are sorted into the first type route, and with the distribution of game balls in the second passage as an opportunity, the game balls are distributed to the second type route, which is advantageous for the player. Sorted into the seed route. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball will be distributed to the second type route, and to obtain an advantageous game result for the player. Therefore, according to the feature eC3, it is possible to provide the player with a game result that corresponds to his/her skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature eD group>
The feature eD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eD1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
a first passage (main passage 211) provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls;
a branch passageway (first branch passageway 212) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and is branched from the first passageway;
A gaming machine comprising: game ball distribution means (first game ball distribution mechanism 240) that distributes game balls into the first path and the branch path at a branch point to the branch path in the first path. And,
The game ball sorting means is
a valve body (valve body 241) that is movable between a first position that closes the opening from the first passage to the branch passage and a second position that opens the opening so that a game ball can pass through;
An action piece that operates in conjunction with the valve body and can move the valve body from the first position to the second position by receiving an action from a game ball circulating in an area different from the first passage. (Action piece 242) A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

According to feature eD1, the valve element moves from the first position to the second position under the action of a game ball flowing in an area different from the first passage, thereby branching off from the first passage. The opening to the passage opens and the game balls are sorted into the branch passage. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, the player can change the probability that the game ball will flow through the above-mentioned different areas, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch path in the first path. can be changed. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game balls, the player can individually change the probability that the game balls will flow through the first passage and the probability that the game balls will be distributed to the branch passages in the first passage. can be done. As a result, according to the feature eD1, it is possible to provide the player with a game result that corresponds to his or her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature eD2]
The gaming machine described in feature eD1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the valve body is configured to be able to move from the second position to the first position by its own weight.

According to feature eD2, the valve body can maintain the first position in the initial posture where no force other than gravity is acting. Moreover, as described above, the valve body moves from the first position to the second position by receiving the action from the game ball flowing in an area different from the first passage through the action piece. do. Therefore, according to feature eD2, there is no need to use a driving means such as a motor to open and close the valve body, so the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

[Feature eD3]
The gaming machine according to feature eD1 or feature eD2,
A second passage (second passage 220) provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls.
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the area different from the first passage is a predetermined area within the second passage.

According to feature eD3, the distribution of game balls in the second passage is triggered, and the game balls are distributed to the branch passage. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game balls, the player can change the probability that the game balls will flow through the second path, thereby changing the probability that the game balls will be distributed to the branch path in the first path. can be changed.

[Feature eD4]
The gaming machine described in feature eD3,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage, and has a first ball entrance (first ball entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter,
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second ball entrance (second ball entrance 221) into which a game ball can enter,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are adjacent to each other.

According to feature eD4, the first ball entry port of the first passage and the second ball entry port of the second passage are adjacent to each other. Now, let us consider a case where a nail is provided above the border between the first and second ball entrances that are adjacent to each other. Depending on the driving position of this nail, the probability that the game ball enters the first ball entrance of the first passage changes. Specifically, by providing the above-mentioned nail on the first ball entry port side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that a game ball will enter the first ball entry port. In this case, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage is high, the probability that the game ball will be sorted into the branch passage in the first passage by the game ball sorting means is high. Become. In summary, if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first ball entrance side of the first passage, the probability of a game ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passage will be reduced. Therefore, in the first passage, the probability that the game balls are sorted into the branch passage increases.

On the other hand, if the nail described above is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage increases. On the contrary, since the probability that a game ball enters the second ball entrance of the second passage becomes low, the probability that a game ball is distributed to a branch passage in the first passage becomes low. Therefore, according to feature eD4, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage and the probability that the game ball will be sorted into the branch passage in the first passage.

Here, in the first passage, it is assumed that the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player is improved by sorting the game ball to the branch passage. Even if the probability of a ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passageway is lowered by providing the game ball on the ball entrance side of the first passageway, the probability that the game ball will proceed to a path advantageous to the player in the first passageway is increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the hole side between the hole side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage to increase the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage, the game cannot be played in the first passage. Since the probability that the game ball will advance to a path that is advantageous to the player is reduced, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the player between the hole side and the player side. Therefore, according to feature eD4, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward either the hole side or the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eD5]
The gaming machine described in feature eD4,
a first type route (normal route NR) that is provided in the distribution area and is a predetermined route for game balls;
a second type route (special route SP) that is a predetermined route for game balls provided in the distribution area and is more advantageous for the player than the first type route;
A downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type passage,
A gaming machine characterized in that a downstream end of the branch passage leads to the second type route.

According to feature eD5, when game balls do not circulate through the second passage, the game balls are sorted into the first type route, and with the distribution of game balls in the second passage as an opportunity, the game balls are distributed to the second type route, which is advantageous for the player. Sorted into the seed route. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball will be distributed to the second type route, and to obtain an advantageous game result for the player. Therefore, according to the feature eD5, it is possible to provide the player with a game result that corresponds to his/her skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics eE group>
The feature eE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eE1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
a first passage (main passage 211) provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls;
a first branch passage (first branch passage 212) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls, and is separated from the first passage;
a second branch passageway (second branch passageway 213) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and is separated from the first passageway;
At a first branching point to the first branch passage in the first passage, first game ball sorting means (first game ball distribution means) for sorting game balls into the first passage and the first branch passage; Sorting mechanism 240);
At a second branch point to the second branch passage in the first passage, a second game ball sorting means (second game ball distribution means) that distributes game balls into the first passage and the second branch passage A gaming machine comprising a sorting mechanism 250) and
a second passage (second passage 220) provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls;
a third passage (third passage 230) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls;
The first game ball sorting means is
If the game balls do not flow through the second path, distribute the game balls that have reached the first branch point to the first path,
comprising means for distributing game balls that have reached the first branching point to the first branching passage in response to the distribution of the gaming balls in the second passage;
The second game ball sorting means includes:
If the game balls do not flow through the third path, distribute the game balls that have reached the second branch point to the first path,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for distributing game balls that have reached the second branching point to the second branching passage in response to the distribution of the gaming balls in the third passage.

According to feature eE1, when the game balls do not circulate through the second passage, the game balls are distributed to the first passage, and when the game balls circulate in the second passage, the game balls are distributed to the first branch. Sorted into aisles. In addition, when the game balls do not circulate through the third passage, the game balls are distributed to the first passage, and when the game balls circulate in the third passage, the game balls are distributed to the second branch passage. . Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can change the probability that the game ball will flow through the second path, so that the game ball will flow into the first branch path in the first path. The probability of being sorted can be changed, and by changing the probability that game balls will circulate through the third passage, it is possible to change the probability that game balls will be sorted into the second branch passage in the first passage. can. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game balls, the player can determine the probability that the game balls will flow through the first passage, the probability that the game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage, and the probability that the game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage. The probability that game balls are distributed to the second branch passage in one passage can be individually changed. As a result, according to the feature eE1, it is possible to provide the player with a game result that corresponds to his or her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature eE2]
The gaming machine according to feature eE1,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage, and has a first ball entrance (first ball entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter,
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second ball entrance (second ball entrance 221) into which a game ball can enter,
The third passage is an entrance to the third passage, and has a third ball entrance (third ball entrance 231) into which a game ball can enter,
The second ball entrance port is adjacent to the first ball entrance port on one side in the left-right direction,
A gaming machine characterized in that the third ball entrance port is adjacent to the first ball entrance port on the other side in the left-right direction.

According to feature eE2, the second ball entry port of the second passage is close to the first ball entry port of the first passage, and the third ball entry port of the third passage is close to the first ball entry port of the third passage. The passageway is close to the first ball entry port. Now, let us consider a case where a nail is provided above the border between the first and second ball entrances that are adjacent to each other. Depending on the driving position of this nail, the probability that the game ball enters the first ball entrance of the first passage changes. Specifically, by providing the above-mentioned nail on the first ball entry port side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that a game ball will enter the first ball entry port. In this case, since there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage, the first game ball sorting means will cause the game ball to enter the first branch passage in the first passage. The probability of being sorted increases. In summary, if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first ball entrance side of the first passage, the probability of a game ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passage will be reduced. Therefore, in the first passage, the probability that game balls are sorted to the first branch passage increases.

On the other hand, if the nail described above is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage increases. On the contrary, since the probability that a game ball enters the second ball entrance of the second passage becomes low, the probability that a game ball is distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage becomes low. Therefore, according to feature eE2, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability that a ball enters the first ball entrance in the first passage and the probability that the game ball is sorted into the first branch passage in the first passage. be.

Here, in the first passage, it is assumed that the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player is improved by sorting the game ball to the branch passage. Even if the probability of a ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passageway is lowered by providing the game ball on the ball entrance side of the first passageway, the probability that the game ball will proceed to a path advantageous to the player in the first passageway is increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the hole side between the hole side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage to increase the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage, the game cannot be played in the first passage. Since the probability that the game ball will advance to a path that is advantageous to the player is reduced, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the player between the hole side and the player side. Therefore, according to feature eE2, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward either the hole side or the player side depending on the nail driving position.

Similarly, consider a case where a nail is provided above the border between the first and third ball entrances that are adjacent to each other. In this case, as well as the relationship between the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port described above, the probability of the ball entering the first ball entry port of the first path is determined by the driving position of this nail. There is a trade-off between changing the probability of the game ball being distributed to the second branch passage in the first passage and changing the probability that the game ball is distributed to the second branch passage. From this point of view, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased towards either the hole side or the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Features eE3]
The gaming machine according to feature eE1 or feature eE2,
a first type route (normal route NR) that is provided in the distribution area and is a predetermined route for game balls;
a second type route (special route SP) that is a predetermined route for game balls provided in the distribution area and is more advantageous for the player than the first type route;
The downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type passage,
A gaming machine characterized in that a downstream end of the first branch passage and a downstream end of the second branch passage are combined to reach the second type route.

According to feature eE3, the distribution of game balls in the second passage or the distribution of game balls in the third passage can be used as an opportunity to distribute the game balls to the second type route which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance in the second passage, and increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance in the third passage. By increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the ball entrance, the probability that the game ball will be sorted into the second type route in the first path is increased, and it is possible to obtain a game result that is advantageous to the player. can. Therefore, according to the feature eE3, it is possible to provide the player with a game result according to his/her skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic eF group>
The feature eF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eF1]
The distribution area where game balls are distributed,
a first passage (main passage 311) provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls;
a first branch passage (child branch passage 312) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls, and is branched from the first passage;
a second branch passage (grand branch passage 313) that is provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls, and is separated from the first branch passage;
At a first branching point to the first branching passage in the first passage, first game ball sorting means (first game ball sorting means) for sorting game balls into the first passage and the first branching passage; mechanism 340);
At a second branching point to the second branching passage in the first branching passage, a second game ball sorting means (second game ball sorting means) for distributing game balls into the first branching passage and the second branching passage; A gaming machine comprising a mechanism 350) and
a second passageway (second passageway 320) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls;
a third passageway (third passageway 330) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls;
The first game ball sorting means is
If the game balls do not flow through the second path, distribute the game balls that have reached the first branch point to the first path,
comprising means for distributing game balls that have reached the first branching point to the first branching passage, triggered by the distribution of the gaming balls in the second passage;
The second game ball sorting means is
If the game balls do not flow through the third passage, allocating the game balls that have reached the second branching point to the first branching passage;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for distributing game balls that have reached the second branching point to the second branching passage, taking the distribution of the gaming balls in the third passage as an opportunity.

According to feature eF1, when a game ball circulates in the second passage and a game ball circulates in the third passage, the game ball that entered the first passage goes to the second branch passage. Can be sorted. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game balls, the player can change the probability that the game balls will flow through the second path, and thereby distribute the game balls to the first branch path in the first path. By changing the probability that game balls will be distributed through the third passage, the probability that game balls will be distributed to the second branch passage in the first branch passage can be changed. Therefore, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball, the player can individually change the probability that the game ball enters the first path and the probability that the game ball is ultimately distributed to the second branch path. can be done. As a result, according to the feature eF1, it is possible to provide the player with a game result that corresponds to his or her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature eF2]
The gaming machine described in feature eF1,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage, and has a first ball entrance (first ball entrance 301) into which a game ball can enter,
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second ball entrance (second ball entrance 321) into which a game ball can enter,
The third passage is an entrance to the third passage and has a third ball entrance (third ball entrance 331) into which a game ball can enter,
The second ball entrance port is adjacent to the first ball entrance port on one side in the left-right direction,
A gaming machine characterized in that the third ball entrance port is adjacent to the first ball entrance port on the other side in the left-right direction.

According to feature eF2, the second ball entry port of the second passage is close to the first ball entry port of the first passage, and the third ball entry port of the third passage is close to the first ball entry port of the third passage. The passageway is close to the first ball entry port. Now, let us consider a case where a nail is provided above the border between the first and second ball entrances that are adjacent to each other. Depending on the driving position of this nail, the probability that the game ball enters the first ball entrance of the first passage changes. Specifically, by providing the above-mentioned nail on the first ball entry port side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that a game ball will enter the first ball entry port. In this case, since there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage, the first game ball sorting means distributes the game ball to the first branch passage in the first passage. The probability of being In summary, if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first ball entrance side of the first passage, the probability of a game ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passage will be reduced. Therefore, in the first passage, the probability that the game balls are sorted to the first branch passage increases.

On the other hand, if the nail described above is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage increases. On the contrary, since the probability that the game ball enters the second ball entrance of the second passage becomes low, the probability that the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage becomes low. Therefore, according to feature eF2, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability that the ball enters the first ball entrance in the first passage and the probability that the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage. .

Here, in the first passage, it is assumed that the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player is improved by sorting the game ball to the branch passage. Even if the probability of a ball entering the first ball entrance of the first passageway is lowered by providing the game ball on the ball entrance side of the first passageway, the probability that the game ball will proceed to a path advantageous to the player in the first passageway is increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the hole side between the hole side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the second ball entrance side of the second passage to increase the probability that the ball will enter the first ball entrance of the first passage, the game cannot be played in the first passage. Since the probability that the game ball will advance to a path that is advantageous to the player is reduced, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward the player between the hole side and the player side. Therefore, according to feature eF2, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased toward either the hole side or the player side depending on the nail driving position.

Similarly, consider a case where a nail is provided above the border between the first and third ball entrances that are adjacent to each other. In this case, as well as the relationship between the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port described above, the probability of the ball entering the first ball entry port of the first path is determined by the driving position of this nail. There is a trade-off relationship between changing the probability of the game ball being distributed to the second branch path. From this point of view, it is possible to prevent profits from being biased towards either the hole side or the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eF3]
The gaming machine according to feature eF1 or feature eF2,
a first type route (normal route NR) that is provided in the distribution area and is a predetermined route for game balls;
a second type route (special route SP) that is a predetermined route for game balls provided in the distribution area and is more advantageous for the player than the first type route;
A downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type passage,
A gaming machine characterized in that a downstream end of the first branch path leads to the second type path.

According to feature eF3, both the distribution of game balls in the second passage and the distribution of game balls in the third passage are used as an opportunity to distribute the game balls to the second type route which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, the player can increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance in the second passage, and increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance in the third passage. By increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the ball entrance, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the second type route can be increased, and a game result advantageous to the player can be obtained. Therefore, according to the feature eF3, it is possible to provide the player with a game result according to his/her skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic eG group>
The feature eG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eG1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A passage provided in the distribution area, which has a first ball entry port (first ball entry port 201) into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that enters the first ball entry port. A first passage (first passage 210) through which the
A passage provided in the circulation area, which has a second ball entry port (second ball entry port 221) adjacent to the first ball entry port, and the ball enters the second ball entry port. A gaming machine comprising: a second passageway (second passageway 220) through which game balls are distributed;
A game ball guiding means capable of guiding a game ball in a direction advantageous to a player based on a game ball entering from the first ball entry port and a game ball entering from the second ball entry port. (game ball sorting device 200),
A game ball storage means that stores game balls, and when a plurality of game balls are stored, discharges the stored game balls toward the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port. A game machine comprising: a game ball storage means (game ball storage device 500).

According to feature eG1, the game ball guide means determines whether the game ball is advantageous to the player based on the game ball that entered from the first ball entry port and the game ball that entered from the second ball entry port. can be guided in the same direction. Generally, the probability that a game ball enters two adjacent ball entry ports consecutively is relatively low, but according to feature eG1, the game ball storage means allows a plurality of game balls to enter the first ball entry port and Since the ball is ejected toward the second ball entry port, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port successively. Therefore, according to the feature eG1, it is possible to increase the probability of being advantageous to the player and improve the interest in the game.

[Features eG2]
The gaming machine described in feature eG1,
The game ball storage means (game ball storage device 500) is
A game ball receiving container (game ball receiving container 510) is placed above the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, and on which game balls are placed. A gaming machine characterized in that, by tilting the ball receiving container, game balls placed on the game ball receiving container fall.

According to the feature eG2, the game ball can be ejected from the game ball receiving container by receiving the weight of the game ball without using a driving means such as a motor, so that the configuration of the game machine can be simplified.

[Features eG3]
The gaming machine according to feature eG1 or feature eG2,
forced release means (forced release device 600) for forcibly releasing the game balls stored in the game ball storage means at predetermined time intervals;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature eG3, game balls can be forcibly released from the game ball storage means repeatedly at predetermined time intervals. Therefore, when the player attempts to finish the game, the game balls will not remain stored in the game ball storage means. Therefore, since the next player does not start the game from an advantageous position, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

<Characteristic fA group>
The feature fA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 6, 8, and 10 to 12.

[Feature fA1]
A game board that constitutes a gaming area where game balls are distributed;
A rod-shaped member (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) that is provided on the surface of the game board and changes the flow of game balls;
A reference portion (a reference portion) provided on the game board is arranged so that it is parallel to the rod-shaped member when viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the top to the bottom, from the right side to the left side). A third edge 333, a fourth edge 334 at the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33, an upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633, a first mark 951, a second mark 952, a mark 1051),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

For example, rod-shaped members such as nails that change the distribution of game balls may have an inclination that differs from the manufacturer's intended size due to unintended external factors such as an accidental impact during transportation. . According to feature fA1, the inclination of the reference part is predetermined so as to match the inclination of the rod-shaped member intended by the manufacturer, so that when viewed from a predetermined direction by relying on the reference part. The inclination of the rod-shaped member can be checked and corrected so that the rod-shaped member is parallel to the reference part. Therefore, a deviation in the inclination of the rod-shaped member can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the rod-shaped member or a special adjustment tool.

[Feature fA2]
The gaming machine according to feature fA1,
A ball entrance member (first starting port 33) that forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
Equipped with
The rod-shaped member is a nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided above the ball entry member,
The gaming machine characterized in that the reference part is provided in the ball entry member.

According to feature fA2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference part provided on the ball entrance member. For this reason, it is possible to easily correct a deviation in the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature fA3]
The gaming machine according to feature fA2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the reference portion is an edge (third edge 333, fourth edge 334) of the ball entry opening (ball entry opening 33a).

According to feature fA3, the inclination of the nail can be repaired without separately providing a dedicated member as a reference part in the ball entrance member, thereby preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated. I can do it.

[Feature fA4]
The gaming machine according to feature fA2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reference portion is a mark (a first mark 951, a second mark 952, a mark 1051) attached to the ball entry member.

According to feature fA4, the visibility of the reference portion can be easily increased, and the reliability of repair can be increased.

<Characteristic fB group>
The feature fB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 6, 8, and 10 to 12.

[Feature fB1]
A gaming machine,
A game board that constitutes a gaming area where game balls are distributed;
nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) that are provided on the surface of the game board and change the distribution of game balls;
A regulating means different from the nail (a third lip 333, a fourth lip in the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33, edge 334, upper surface 633S of first starting port 633, first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as an accidental impact during transportation, for example. According to feature fB1, since the regulating means defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, relying on the regulating means, so that the angle defined by the regulating means is achieved, By checking and correcting the inclination of the nail, it is possible to restore the inclination of the nail to the original inclination. Therefore, the deviation in the inclination of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

[Feature fB2]
The gaming machine described in feature fB1,
A ball entrance member (first starting port 33) that is provided below the nail and forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the regulating means is provided in the ball entry member.

According to feature fB2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the regulating means provided on the ball entrance member. For this reason, it is possible to easily correct a deviation in the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature fB3]
The gaming machine described in feature fB2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the regulation means are edges (third edge 333, fourth edge 334) of the ball entry opening (ball entry opening 33a).

According to the feature fB3, the inclination of the nail can be repaired without separately providing a dedicated member as a defining means, so that the configuration of the gaming machine can be prevented from becoming complicated.

[Feature fB4]
The gaming machine described in feature fB2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the defining means is a mark (a first mark 951, a second mark 952, a mark 1051) attached to the ball entry member.

According to feature fB4, the visibility of the defining means can be easily increased, and the reliability of repair can be increased.

<Characteristic fC group>
The feature fC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 9 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature fC1]
A game board that constitutes a gaming area where game balls are distributed,
nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) that are provided on the surface of the game board and change the distribution of game balls;
Angle information specifying means (first numerical information Na, second numerical information Nb) indicating information about the angle formed between the nail and the surface of the game board;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as an accidental impact during transportation, for example. According to feature fC1, the angle information display means is configured to show information about the angle that matches the nail inclination intended by the manufacturer, so that the angle information display means can be used to confirm and correct the nail inclination. can do. Therefore, the deviation in the inclination of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

[Feature fC2]
The gaming machine according to feature fC1,
A ball entrance member (first starting port 33) that is provided below the nail and forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the angle information indicating means is provided in the ball entry member.

According to feature fC2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the angle information indicating means provided on the ball entrance member. For this reason, it is possible to easily correct a deviation in the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature fC3]
The gaming machine according to feature fC2,
The nails include a first nail provided on one side in a predetermined direction, and a second nail provided on the other side in the predetermined direction;
Equipped with
The ball entry member is
composed of at least a first part and a second part,
The first part is provided with first angle information specifying means indicating information on the angle about the first nail,
A game machine characterized in that the second part is provided with second angle information display means that indicates information about the angle about the second nail.

According to feature fC3, since the ball entrance member is composed of at least the first part and the second part, the first angle information indicating means is provided on the first part and the second part is provided with the first angle information indicating means during manufacturing. It is possible to easily provide the second angle information clarifying means. In particular, the first angle information indicating means and the second angle information indicating means are oriented in the same direction so that both the first angle information indicating means and the second angle information indicating means can be viewed from one side. When the angle information display means is provided on the inside of the ball entrance member, it is difficult to provide the angle information display means inside the ball entrance member during manufacturing. However, according to feature fC3, when the ball enters the Since the mouth member is composed of the first part and the second part, it is easy to manufacture.

<Characteristic fD group>
The feature fD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 5 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature fD1]
A game board that constitutes a gaming area where game balls are distributed;
nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) that are provided on the surface of the game board and change the distribution of game balls;
Marks that define the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board (the third lip 333, the fourth lip 334 at the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33, the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633) , first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as an accidental impact during transportation, for example. According to feature fD1, since the mark defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is checked and corrected by relying on the mark so that the angle specified by the mark is achieved. This allows you to straighten the nail to the angle the manufacturer intended. Therefore, the deviation in the inclination of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

[Feature fD2]
The gaming machine according to feature fD1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the mark defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

According to feature fD2, the inclination of the nail can be easily returned to the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

[Feature fD3]
The gaming machine according to feature fD1 or feature fD2,
A ball entrance member (first starting port 33) that is provided below the nail and forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the mark is provided on the ball entry member.

According to feature fD3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the mark provided on the ball entrance member. For this reason, it is possible to easily correct a deviation in the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature fD4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features fD1 to feature fD3,
When viewed from a predetermined direction (viewed from above to below), the mark is parallel to the nail, and at least a portion of the mark is not hidden by the nail. Game machine.

According to feature fD4, by checking whether the nail is parallel to the mark when viewed from a predetermined direction, it is possible to recognize whether the inclination of the nail is the size intended by the manufacturer. Moreover, since at least a portion of the mark is not hidden by the nail when viewed from a predetermined direction, the mark has high visibility. Therefore, according to the feature fD4, it is easy to recognize the inclination of the nail, and the deviation in the inclination of the nail can be repaired more easily.

<Characteristic fE group>
The feature fE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modifications 10 to 12 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature fE1]
A game board that constitutes a gaming area where game balls are distributed,
nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) that are provided on the surface of the game board and change the distribution of game balls;
a ball entrance (opening 1400) into which a game ball can enter;
A movable part (movable pieces 1411a, 1411b, 1511a, 1511b, 1611a) that is provided in the ball entry hole and can be switched between a closed state and an open state to change the ease with which the ball enters the ball entry hole. A movable means (electric accessory 1410, 1510) comprising:
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable part is
A game machine characterized by having predetermined portions (Sa, Sb, Ha, Hb, Ta) that define an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board.

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as an accidental impact during transportation, for example. According to feature fE1, since the predetermined part of the movable part defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is determined by relying on the predetermined part so that the angle defined by the predetermined part is achieved. By checking and correcting the nail, you can correct the inclination of the nail to the manufacturer's intended angle. Therefore, the deviation in the inclination of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a special adjustment tool.

[Feature fE2]
The gaming machine according to feature fE1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined portion defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

According to feature fE2, the nail can be easily restored to the inclination condition at the time of shipment of the game machine.

[Feature fE3]
The gaming machine according to feature fE1 or feature fE2,
A game machine characterized in that, in the movable means, when the movable part is in a closed state, the predetermined portion of the movable part defines the angle.

According to the feature fE3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired by relying on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the closed state so that the angle is defined by the predetermined portion.

[Feature fE4]
The gaming machine according to feature fE1 or feature fE2,
A game machine characterized in that, in the movable means, when the movable part is in an open state, the predetermined portion of the movable part defines the angle.

According to feature fE4, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired by relying on a predetermined part of the movable part when the nail is in the open state. In particular, a nail near the position of the movable part in the open state can be targeted for repair, and the nail can be easily repaired.

<Characteristic fF group>
The feature fF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 7 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature fF1]
A game board that constitutes a gaming area where game balls are distributed;
a reference portion (first mark 1151, second mark 1152) provided on the game board and guaranteed to be installed at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In game machines, accessories such as nails are installed on the game board. According to the feature fF1, the inclination of the accessory can be checked and corrected by relying on the reference part that is guaranteed to be at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board. Therefore, the deviation in the inclination of the accessory can be easily and accurately repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the inclination of the accessory or a special adjustment tool.

[Feature fF2]
The gaming machine according to feature fF1,
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) that are provided on the surface of the game board and change the distribution of game balls
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the angle guaranteed by the reference part is a right angle.

According to the feature fF2, the inclination of the nail can be checked and corrected by relying on the reference part that is guaranteed to be installed perpendicular to the surface of the game board. Nails are installed at the inclination intended by the manufacturer, but according to feature fF2, the inclination of the nail can be easily determined by comparing the orientation of the nail with a reference part that is guaranteed to be installed vertically. can be confirmed. Therefore, the inclination of the nail can be easily adjusted.

<Characteristics gA group>
The feature gA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gA1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (second starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of the game ball triggers a change in the second symbol;
The number of game balls entering the first type ball entering means and the number of game balls entering the second type ball entering means per unit time when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player. control means for controlling a relative ratio of pitches entered, which is a relative ratio to the number of pitches entered, to be changeable in at least three stages;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature gA1, when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of game balls entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means per unit time. Since the relative ratio between the number of balls entering the game ball and the number of entering balls is controlled to be changeable in at least three stages, it is possible to create various new game flows by combining the three stages of relative ratio of entering balls. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature gA2]
The gaming machine according to feature gA1,
a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position;
lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second type ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed into at least two levels: a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is divided into at least two stages: a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. changeable;
The auxiliary time, which is the time during which the auxiliary means provides the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is divided into a first auxiliary time and a second auxiliary time that is longer than the first auxiliary time. It can be changed to at least two stages,
As the control mode, a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), a second control mode (high-frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high-frequency support mode B) can be executed,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time,
A game machine characterized in that the relative ratio of ball input is changed by switching the control mode.

According to feature gA2, the control means changes the relative ratio of balls entered by switching between three control modes that differ in the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the assistance time, so the control is relatively simple. It is possible to realize switching of the relative ratio of entering balls.

<Characteristics gB group>
The feature gB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gB1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of the game ball triggers a change in the second symbol;
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 120) that alternately distributes the arrived game balls to a first route (left channel R1) and a second route (right channel R2);
a first detection means (through gate 35a) that detects that the game ball has passed a first detection position that is a predetermined position on the second path;
lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the detection of passage of the game ball by the first detection means;
auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) that guides the arriving game ball in a predetermined distribution direction when the predetermined lottery is won;
Equipped with
The first type ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game balls sorted to the first route can enter the ball,
The auxiliary means is arranged at a position that can be reached by the game balls distributed to the second route,
A game machine characterized in that the second type ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball guided in the distribution direction by the auxiliary means can enter.

According to feature gB1, among the game balls that have arrived at the sorting means, the game balls that have been sorted to the first route enter the first type ball entry means, and the game balls that have been sorted to the second route are Among them, the game ball assisted by the auxiliary means enters the second type ball entering means. Therefore, when game balls are distributed in such a manner that they reach the distribution means, by changing the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the frequency of game balls entering the first type ball entry means can be adjusted to a predetermined level. It is possible to change the frequency of entry of game balls into the second type ball entry means while keeping it constant within the range.

[Feature gB2]
The gaming machine according to feature gB1,
a second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passing through a second detection position which is a position different from the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position;
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the second detection means detecting passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means is
A game machine characterized in that the game ball is placed at a position that can be reached after passing through the second detection position.

According to feature gB2, when a game ball is distributed so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position, the game ball is sent only to the second type ball entry means. You can let the ball enter the ball. Therefore, by changing the distribution mode, it is possible to change the frequency of balls entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means.

<Characteristics gC group>
The feature gC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gC1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33a in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the symbol;
A second ball entry means (first starting port 33b in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the pattern;
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 120) that distributes the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes;
a first guide path (left flow path R1) that guides the sorted game balls to the first ball entry means;
a second guide path (right side flow path R2) that guides the sorted game balls to the second ball entry means;
Equipped with
The symbol that changes when a game ball enters the first ball entry means is the same as the symbol that changes when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature gC1, even if a game ball is sorted by the sorting means, even if the sorted game ball enters the first ball entering means, it will not enter the second ball entering means. Even when a ball is hit, the same symbol changes in each case, so it is possible to provide a surprise to players who had guessed that different symbols would change depending on the method of entering the ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature gC2]
The gaming machine according to feature gC1,
a first symbol variation means that varies a first symbol in response to the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third ball entry means (second starting port 34) in which the entry of the game ball triggers a change in the pattern;
a second symbol varying means for varying a second symbol which is a different symbol from the first symbol in response to the game ball entering the third ball entering means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature gC2, since the third ball entering means is provided where the entering of the game ball causes the second symbol to fluctuate, the player is provided with a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuation of the first symbol. , it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuation of the second symbol. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player make various guesses regarding the role of the allocating means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature gC3]
The gaming machine according to feature gC2,
Auxiliary means that is arranged on a route through which game balls flow from the sorting means to the second ball entry means, and assists game balls circulating on the route to enter the third ball entry means. (Normal electric accessory 53).

According to feature gC3, since the auxiliary means for assisting the ball to enter the third ball entering means is provided on the path through which the game ball flows to the second ball entering means, the game balls sorted by the sorting means However, there are cases where the same symbol (first symbol) is changed regardless of whether it is distributed to the first guide route or the second guide route. This may become an opportunity to change the second symbol, and the rate at which the first symbol and the second symbol are varied can be made different depending on the operation pattern of the auxiliary means.

[Feature gC4]
The gaming machine according to feature gC3,
comprising a detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second guide route,
The auxiliary means is
Triggered by the detection means detecting the passing of the game ball, the game ball circulating on the path from the sorting means to the second ball entering means enters the third ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by assisting in the following.

According to feature gC4, the auxiliary means is triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game balls, and the auxiliary means detects the passing of the game balls from the distribution means to the second ball entry means, so that the game balls circulating on the route where the game balls flow from the distribution means to the second ball entry means are transferred to the third ball entry means. Since the ball entry means assists the ball to enter the ball, it encourages the player to let the game ball flow through the second guide path, and when the game ball passes a predetermined position, it creates a feeling of anticipation in the player. can be granted. Further, by encouraging the player to distribute the game balls through the second guide route, the player can be made to concentrate on the game.

[Feature gC5]
The gaming machine according to feature gC4,
comprising lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, game balls flowing on a route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means are assisted to enter the third ball entering means. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature gC5, when the detection means detects the passage of a game ball and wins a predetermined lottery that is executed as a trigger, the auxiliary means moves the ball along the route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means. Since it assists the circulating game balls to enter the third ball entry means, the rate at which the first symbol and the second symbol are varied is controlled by controlling the probability of winning in a predetermined lottery. I can do it.

[Feature gC6]
The gaming machine according to feature gC4 or feature gC5,
When the detection means for detecting passing through a predetermined position on the second guide route is the first detection means (through gate 35a),
comprising a second detection means (through gate 35b) different from the first detection means that detects passing through a specific position different from the position on the route distributed by the distribution means,
The auxiliary means is
When the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, assists the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gC6, the auxiliary means, triggered by the second detection means detecting passage of the game ball, causes the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means. Since the game ball is assisted in hitting the ball, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the third ball entry means via the second detection means without passing through the distribution means. As a result, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the game ball can enter only the third ball entry means with a high probability.

[Feature gC7]
The gaming machine according to feature gC6,
The lottery execution means is
Executing the predetermined lottery in response to the second detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
The auxiliary means is
A game machine characterized in that, when winning the predetermined lottery, the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means is assisted to enter the third ball entry means.

According to feature gC7, the auxiliary means detects that the passing of the game ball is detected by the second detecting means when the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball when winning a predetermined lottery that is executed as a trigger. Since the game ball is assisted in entering the third ball entering means, the game ball is allowed to enter the third ball entering means via the second detecting means without passing through the sorting means. becomes possible. Therefore, if a player distributes game balls so that they reach the distribution means after lowering the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means receive the game balls. Since there is a low possibility that the game ball will enter the third ball entry means, only the first symbol can be varied with a high probability. In addition, when the game ball is distributed so that the player reaches the distribution means after increasing the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means, and A game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the first symbol and the second symbol can be varied. Furthermore, if the player distributes the game balls in such a way that the second detection means detects the passage of the game balls after increasing the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the game balls reach the sorting means. Since the probability is low and the probability that the game ball enters the third ball entering means via the second detection means and the auxiliary means is high, only the second symbol can be changed with high probability. Therefore, there are at least three states: a gaming state in which only the first symbol changes with a high probability, a gaming state in which the first symbol and the second symbol vary, and a gaming state in which only the second symbol changes with a high probability. can be created. As a result, new gaming features can be created by variously combining three gaming states in which the two symbols change at different rates.

[Feature gC8]
The gaming machine according to feature gC6,
comprising a control means for controlling the gaming machine,
The control means is capable of executing a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), a second control mode (high-frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high-frequency support mode B). ,
In the first control mode,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means;
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means;
In the second control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passing is detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means;
In the third control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passing is detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
A game machine characterized in that a game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means can or easily enter the third ball entry means with assistance from the auxiliary means.

According to feature gC8, the control means can execute three control modes with different degrees of difficulty (difficulty/ease) of entering the game ball into the third ball entry means, so By using switching, it is possible to create various new game flows.

[Feature gC9]
The gaming machine according to feature gC8,
The control means includes:
The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed into at least two levels: a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result (variable time of the electric role open lottery) is set as a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. It is changeable in at least two stages with time,
The auxiliary time, which is the time during which the auxiliary means provides the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is divided into a first auxiliary time and a second auxiliary time that is longer than the first auxiliary time. It can be changed to at least two stages,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The gaming machine characterized in that the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to feature gC9, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the assistance time, the difficulty level (difficulty/ease) of entering the game ball into the third ball entering means can be adjusted. ), it is possible to execute three different control modes, so it is possible to create various new game flows by using the switching of the control modes with relatively easy control.

<Characteristic gD group>
The feature gD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gD1]
A predetermined ball entry means into which a game ball can enter (second starting port 34 in the seventh embodiment);
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific position;
lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting arriving game balls into a plurality of routes;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine characterized in that the detection means is arranged on one of the plurality of routes (right side channel R2).

According to feature gD1, the detection means for detecting passage of a game ball, which is a trigger for executing a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not the auxiliary means assists the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, Since it is placed on one of the plurality of routes to be distributed, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means.

[Feature gD2]
The gaming machine according to feature gD1,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33b) arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the one route by the distribution means can enter the ball if not assisted by the auxiliary means. Prepare,
The ball entry means through which the game ball enters when assisted by the auxiliary means is a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) different from the first ball entry means. A gaming machine.

According to feature gD2, since the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has been sorted into one route by the sorting means can enter if it is not assisted by the auxiliary means, In addition to giving players a sense of expectation regarding the manner in which game balls are distributed by the dividing means, if the game balls are distributed to one route, will the game balls enter the first ball entering means? With the aid of the auxiliary means, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the ball will enter the second ball entering means, and to give at least two levels of expectation regarding the outcome of the game ball that has reached the distribution means. be able to.

[Feature gD3]
The gaming machine according to feature gD1 or feature gD2,
a third ball entrance means (first starting port 33a) disposed at a position where game balls distributed to a route different from the first route (left flow path R1) by the distribution means can enter;
a first symbol variation means that varies a first symbol upon entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means;
a second symbol variation means that varies a second symbol upon entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature gD3, even though the game ball is sorted by the sorting means, even if the sorted game ball enters the first ball entering means, the ball enters the third ball entering means. Even in this case, since the first symbol, which is the same symbol, changes, it is common for different symbols to vary depending on the entering means of the ball that has been distributed by the distributing means, triggered by the entry of the game ball. It is possible to provide a sense of surprise to players who have guessed that the game machine has a similar configuration, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic gE group>
[Feature gE1]
A first distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) that alternately distributes the arrived game balls to a first path (left channel R1 in the seventh embodiment) and a second path (right channel R2);
a second sorting means (ordinary electric accessory 53) that sorts the game balls flowing through the second route into a third route and a fourth route;
a first type ball entry means (first starting port) in which the entry of the game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
a second type ball entry means (second starting port) in which the entry of the game ball triggers a change in the second symbol;
Equipped with
The first type ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls that have passed through the first route and the third route can enter the ball,
The second type ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the fourth route can enter the ball,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second allocating means changeably controls the probability of allocating game balls to the fourth route.

According to feature gE1, there are two sorting means, and the probability that the second sorting means distributes game balls to the fourth route can be changed, so that the game reached by the first sorting means Even when the balls are allocated alternately to the first route and the second route, by changing the probability that the second allocating means will allocate the game balls to the fourth route, the first symbol and the second route can be changed. The variable ratio with the second symbol can be changed. For example, when the second sorting means sets the probability of distributing game balls to the fourth route to be low, the game balls sorted to the first route by the first sorting means are transferred to the first type ball entering means. The ball enters and the first symbol changes. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second route can be distributed to the third route with a high probability by the second distribution means, and the balls can be caused to enter the first type ball entry means, thereby changing the first symbol. . That is, the game ball that has reached the first sorting means can enter the first type ball entering means with a high probability, and the first symbol can be varied. Furthermore, when the second sorting means sets a high probability of sorting the game balls to the fourth route, the game balls sorted to the first route by the first sorting means are transferred to the first type ball entering means. The ball enters and the first symbol changes. On the other hand, the game balls that have been sorted to the second route can be sorted to the fourth route with high probability by the second sorting means, and can be caused to enter the second type ball entering means, thereby making it possible to change the second symbol. . In this way, by changing the probability that the second allocating means allocates game balls to the fourth route, it is possible to change the varying ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Feature gE2]
The gaming machine according to feature gE1,
The second sorting means (ordinary electric accessory 53) distributes game balls flowing through the second route to the fourth route (open state), when the game balls are distributed through the first sorting means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a guide means for guiding game balls that are distributed without entering the ball to the second type ball entry means.

According to feature gE2, in an aspect in which game balls circulating through the second route are distributed to the fourth route, there is a guide for guiding game balls circulating through the second type ball entry means without passing through the first sorting means. Have the means. Therefore, by distributing game balls in a distribution manner in which they reach the second sorting means, which is a manner in which they are sorted to the fourth route, without passing through the first sorting means, the game balls enter the second type. The probability of the ball hitting the means can be increased, and the ratio at which the second symbol changes can be increased as the ratio at which the first symbol and the second symbol change.

[Features gE3]
The gaming machine according to feature gE1 or feature gE2,
a detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second path;
lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
Equipped with
The second allocating means determines, based on the result of the predetermined lottery, which path to allocate the game balls circulating through the second path to the third path or the fourth path. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gE3, the second sorting means determines whether to sort game balls flowing through the second route to the third route or the fourth route based on the result of a predetermined lottery. Therefore, the player cannot know in advance which route, the third route or the fourth route, the game balls circulating on the second route will be distributed to. Therefore, the player is made to guess the result of a predetermined lottery and whether the game balls flowing through the second route will be sorted to the third route or the fourth route, and at the same time, it creates a sense of anticipation. This can increase the interest of the game.

<Characteristic gF group>
[Feature gF1]
A first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter (second starting port 34 in the seventh embodiment);
a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position;
lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
A control means for controlling the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed into at least two levels: a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery until the output of the lottery result (variable time of the electric role opening lottery) is set as a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. It is changeable in at least two stages with time,
The auxiliary time, which is the time during which the auxiliary means provides the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is divided into a first auxiliary time and a second auxiliary time that is longer than the first auxiliary time. Can be changed to at least two stages,
As the control mode, a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), a second control mode (high-frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high-frequency support mode B) can be executed,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The gaming machine characterized in that the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to feature gF1, the control means can switch between three control modes in which the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the assistance time are different. Various game flows can be created.

[Feature gF2]
The gaming machine according to feature gF1,
a second ball entry means (first starting port) which is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and which is different from the first ball entry means;
a first sorting means that alternately sorts the arriving game balls into a first path (left side flow path R1) and a second path (right side flow path R2);
Equipped with
The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls that have passed through the first route and the second route can enter,
The detection means detects that the game ball has passed the predetermined position on the second path,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary means is arranged on a path through which game balls flow from the second path to the second ball entering means.

According to feature gF2, although the distributing means alternately distributes game balls to the first route and the second route, the second ball entering means does not distribute the game balls to the first route and the second route. Since the distributed game balls are arranged at positions where they can enter, it is possible to make the players make various guesses as to the purpose of installing the distribution means, and to add surprise. Furthermore, since the auxiliary means assists the game balls that have been sorted to the second route to enter the first ball entry means, the game balls that have been sorted to the second route by the sorter are assisted by the auxiliary means. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not he/she will be assisted, and also to give him/her a sense of expectation.

<Features gG group>
The feature gG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gG1]
Ball entry means into which a game ball can enter (second starting port 34 in the seventh embodiment);
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting arriving game balls into a plurality of routes;
a first detection means (through gate 35a) that detects passing through a first detection position that is a position on one of the plurality of routes;
a second detection means (through gate 35b) that detects passing through a second detection position that is a position different from the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position;
a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic role open lottery);
auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
Equipped with
The lottery execution means is
Executing the predetermined lottery in response to the first detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
Executing the predetermined lottery in response to the second detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
A lottery mode in which a lottery execution time from the time when the first detection means or the second detection means detects passage of the game ball to the time when the predetermined lottery is started and the lottery result is output is Tp. Prepare,
The auxiliary means is
assisting the game ball passing through the first detection position to enter the ball entry means when winning the predetermined lottery;
assisting the game ball passing through the second detection position to enter the ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
When the predetermined lottery is won, the time from the time when the lottery result is output until the time when the auxiliary means becomes in the state where the assistance is possible is Tm,
When providing the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, an assistance mode in which the assistance time which is the time for the assistance is a first assistance time Ts1, and the assistance time is the first assistance time Ts1. and an auxiliary mode in which the second auxiliary time Ts2 is longer than Ts1,
Tr1 is the time from when the game ball passes through the first detection position until the time when the game ball reaches the auxiliary means; Tr1 is the time from when the game ball passes through the second detection position until the time when the game ball reaches the auxiliary means; As Tr2,
The time from the time when the game ball that has passed through the first detection position reaches the auxiliary means until the ball enters the ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means is Tf1, and the time that the game ball that has passed through the second detection position is When the time from the time when the ball reaches the auxiliary means until the ball enters the ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means is Tf2,
Tp+Tm≦Tr1
Tp+Tm≦Tr2
Tr1+Tf1≦Tp+Tm+Ts1<Tr2+Tf2≦Tp+Tm+Ts2
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gG1, the auxiliary means includes an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, and an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2. In the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the first detection position, that is, the game ball is circulated so as to reach the distribution means. In this case, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means, but if the game ball is passed through the second detection position, the game ball can enter the ball entering means. Since the assistance provided by the auxiliary means ends before the game ball enters the ball, it is impossible to cause the game ball to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous for the player, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, the ball passes through the first detection position (reaches the distribution means). ) A distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed is a distribution mode of the game balls that is more advantageous for the player than a distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the second detection position.

On the other hand, in the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the first detection position, and when the game ball is caused to pass through the second detection position, In either case, the game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means with assistance from the auxiliary means. However, when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, the game balls pass through the sorting means, so of the game balls that reach the sorting means, only the game balls that have been sorted to one route are It is not possible to pass through the first detection position. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed so as to reach the distribution means, the ratio of the number of game balls passing through the first detection position and entering the ball entering means to the number of game balls reaching the distribution means. is the number of game balls passing through the second detection position and entering the ball entering means relative to the number of game balls reaching the second detection position when the game balls are passed through the second detection position. It will be lower than the proportion of the number of pieces. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous for the player, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, the distribution mode is such that the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the second detection position. This is a distribution mode of the game balls that is more advantageous for the player than a distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position (so as to reach the distribution means).

Therefore, by switching the auxiliary mode by the auxiliary means, it is possible to change the distribution mode of the game balls that is advantageous for the player among the distribution modes in which the game balls enter the ball entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means. New gameplay features can be created, and furthermore, players can be made to actively participate in changing the distribution mode of game balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic gH group>
The feature gH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gH1]
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 120) that alternately distributes arriving game balls to a first guide route (left channel R1 in modification 5 of the seventh embodiment) and a second guide route (right channel R2) )and,
A ball entry portion (first starting port 33a in modification 5 of the seventh embodiment) into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the first guide route and the second guide route both guide the game ball to the same ball entry section.

According to feature gH1, even though the game balls are sorted by the sorting means, the game balls sorted to the first guide route and the game balls sorted to the second guide route are both the same. Since the player is guided to the ball entry area of the player, it is possible to make the player make various guesses as to the purpose of installing the distribution means, and to add a sense of surprise.

[Feature gH2]
The gaming machine according to feature gH1,
In the case where the ball entry portion guided by both the first guide route and the second guide route is the first ball entry portion, the ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter is the first ball entry portion. a second ball entry part (second starting port 34) different from the first ball entry part;
a first detection means (through gate 35a) that detects that the game ball has passed a first detection position that is a predetermined position on the second guide route;
lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery upon detection of passage of the game ball by the first detection means;
An auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) disposed on the route through which game balls flow from the second guide route to the first ball entry section, and when winning the predetermined lottery, the auxiliary means for assisting the game ball that has reached the auxiliary means to enter the second ball entry section;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature gH2, it is possible to cause some of the game balls distributed to the second guide route to enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, by controlling the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first ball entry section and the number of game balls entering the second ball entry section is controlled. be able to.

[Feature gH3]
The gaming machine described in feature gH2,
a second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passing through a second detection position which is a position different from the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position;
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery in response to the second detection means detecting passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means is
A game machine characterized in that the game ball is placed at a position that can be reached after passing through the second detection position.

According to feature gH3, when a game ball is distributed so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position, the game ball is distributed only to the second ball entry part. You can let the ball enter the ball.

<Characteristic gI group>
The feature gI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gI1]
The distribution area where game balls are distributed,
Distribution route changing means (ordinary electric accessories 53 in Modification 3 of the seventh embodiment) that is arranged in the distribution area and changes the distribution route through which game balls can be distributed;
Equipped with
The distribution route changing means is
When in the first state (closed state), the first distribution route (the route from the right channel R2 to the second starting port 34) through which game balls can flow is blocked, and the first distribution route through which game balls can flow is blocked. 2 distribution route (route from wall W to second starting port 34),
A gaming machine characterized in that when in a second state (open state), the shielding of the first distribution route is released and the second distribution route is formed.

According to feature gI1, the distribution route changing means can change two distribution routes by transitioning from the first state to the second state. That is, the distribution route changing means can simultaneously change the status of two types of distribution routes with one status change. As a result, whether the game balls are distributed through the first distribution channel or the game balls are distributed through the second distribution channel, it is possible to execute a game using the distribution route changing means. .

[Feature gI2]
The gaming machine according to feature gI1,
Equipped with a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic role open lottery),
The distribution route changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined lottery is won, the game machine shifts from the first state to the second state.

According to feature gI2, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state when winning a predetermined lottery, so it gives the player a sense of expectation regarding the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. can do. Furthermore, by controlling the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, it is possible to control the probability and frequency of changing the first distribution route and the second distribution route.

[Feature gI3]
The gaming machine according to feature gI2,
A first detection means (through gate) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a first position on the first distribution route and upstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball. 35a) and
a second detection means (through gate) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a second position on the second distribution route, which is upstream in the distribution direction of the game balls than the distribution route changing means; 35b),
The lottery execution means is
Executing the predetermined lottery in response to the first detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined lottery is executed when the second detection means detects passage of the game ball.

According to feature gI3, a predetermined lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the first position or the second position, so it is possible to create various games using this property. For example, depending on the state of the game, it may be controlled so that it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball pass through the first position, or it may be more advantageous for the player to have the game ball pass through the second position. By controlling the game so that it is advantageous to the player, it is possible to create a game that encourages the player to change the distribution mode of game balls, and to encourage active participation in the game.

[Feature gI4]
The gaming machine according to feature gI3,
The distribution route changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the first position and that triggered the winning is released from the shielding by the distribution route changing means, and the first distribution A gaming machine characterized in that the first state shifts to the second state at a timing when a route can be distributed.

According to feature gI4, when a game ball is passed through the first position and a predetermined lottery is won, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, and the shielding of the first distribution route is released. However, it is possible to suppress a phenomenon in which game balls cannot be distributed to the first distribution route during the period when the shielding is released, and the expectations of the players are lowered.

[Feature gI5]
The gaming machine according to feature gI3 or feature gI4,
The distribution route changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game balls that passed through the second position and that triggered the winning are routed through the second distribution route formed by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine that transitions from the first state to the second state at a timing that allows distribution.

According to feature gI5, when a game ball is passed through the second position and a predetermined lottery is won, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state and the second distribution route is formed. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress a phenomenon in which game balls cannot be distributed to the second distribution channel during the period when the second distribution channel is being formed, which lowers the expectations of the players.

[Feature gI6]
The gaming machine according to feature gI1 to feature gI5,
comprising a ball entry means disposed at a specific position in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
The specific position is
A position on the first distribution route and downstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of game balls, and on the second distribution route and further downstream than the distribution route changing means. The game machine is also located downstream in the direction of distribution of game balls.

According to feature gI6, the position is on the first distribution route and is downstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of game balls, and is on the second distribution route and is located on the downstream side of the distribution route changing means. Since the ball entering means is provided at a position downstream of the ball entering means with respect to the game ball distribution direction, when the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, the game ball enters the ball entering means. There is a high possibility that the player will land the ball, and the player's expectations can be increased.

<Characteristic gJ group>
The feature gJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gJ1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port 33b in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
a second type ball entry means (second starting port 34) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol;
It is a sorting means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for sorting arriving game balls, and when it does not operate, it allows the game balls circulating at a predetermined position to enter the first type ball entering means, and when it operates, it , a sorting means for causing the game balls circulating in the predetermined position to enter the second type ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature gJ1, depending on whether or not the sorting means operates, the means by which the game ball that reaches the sorting means enters the ball after being sorted differs, and the fluctuating symbols vary. , it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the distribution means operates.

[Features gJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature gJ1,
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific position;
lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic winning lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the allocating means operates when the predetermined lottery is won.

According to feature gJ2, since the sorting means operates when a predetermined lottery is won, it is possible to control the frequency at which the sorting means operates by controlling the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to control the rate at which the first symbol and the second symbol are varied.

[Features gJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature gJ2,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific position is a position where a game ball that has passed through the specific position can reach the distribution means.

According to feature gJ3, the specific position is a position where the game ball that has passed through the specific position can reach the distributing means. It is also possible to draw attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the position. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the game balls pass a specific position, and then to pay attention to how the game balls that have passed the specific position are distributed by the distribution means, and the game balls are distributed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages regarding the manner in which the game will be played.

<Characteristics gK group>
The feature gK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gK1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (a second starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol;
A control means for controlling a gaming state;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls will consecutively enter the first type ball entry means is defined as the probability of continuous entry into the first type ball entry means, and the game ball The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is defined as the alternate ball entry probability, and the probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entry means is defined as the second ball entry probability. If the probability of consecutive balls entering the seed ball means is
a first game state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of continuous ball entry by the first type ball entry means is higher than the alternate ball entry probability and the probability of continuous ball entry by the second type ball entry means;
a second game state (high frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability;
a third game state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entry means successive ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the alternate ball entry probability;
A game machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for switchably controlling the game state.

According to feature gK1, since the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state in a switchable manner, by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create various new game flows, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature gK2]
The gaming machine according to feature gK1,
information acquisition means that acquires special information when a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
The case where the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition satisfies the predetermined condition. If the game round to be executed after the game round is executed in the second game state (when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting opening game round of high-frequency support mode A is jackpot A), a specific A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing a performance.

According to feature gK2, when a game round that is executed after a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition in the second game state is executed in the second game state, a specific effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player through a specific effect that the second gaming state will continue. Further, in the second gaming state, a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is executed, and the player recognizes that the special information corresponding to the game round being executed satisfies the predetermined condition. In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the particular performance will be executed, and it is possible to maintain the player's concentration on the game.

[Feature gK3]
The gaming machine according to feature gK2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance is a performance that suggests that the current gaming state will be maintained.

According to feature gK3, when a game round that is executed after a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition in the second game state is executed in the second game state, the current game state is Since the performance that suggests that the game will be maintained is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of relief and a desire to shift to a more advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. .

[Features gK4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features gK1 to feature gK3,
the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
the third gaming state (high-frequency support mode B) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A);
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gK4, since three gaming states that are different in the degree of advantage for the player are controlled to be switchable, it is possible to add modulation to the player's expectations by switching the gaming state, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic gL group>
The feature gL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gL1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (a second starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a fluctuation time determining means for determining a fluctuation time that is the time from the start to the end of one fluctuation of each symbol of the first symbol and the second symbol in the game round;
A control means for controlling a gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The variable time determining means includes:
A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In (high frequency support mode A),
When the special information acquired due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means satisfies the predetermined condition, the value of the fluctuation time of the game round corresponding to the special information ( The value of the fluctuation time of the first opening game round in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot) and the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entry means are the predetermined information. If the above conditions are not met, the value of the fluctuation time of the game round corresponding to the special information (the value of the fluctuation time of the first opening game round in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a loss) is the same or A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining substantially the same value.

According to feature gL1, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In a gaming state where the game ball is high, the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entry means will be adjusted depending on whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Since the fluctuation times of the game times to be played are the same or substantially the same, it is possible to avoid drawing attention to the result of the determination as to whether the special information satisfies the predetermined condition or not. Therefore, for example, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In the gaming state, if the game round that is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means is a game round that is disadvantageous to the player, the judgment in that game round is Since it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the result, it is possible to suppress a drop in the player's expectations during the period in which the game round is being executed.

[Features gL2]
The gaming machine according to feature gL1,
Fluctuation time random number acquisition means for acquiring a fluctuating time random number used in determining the fluctuating time;
A fluctuation time table in which the value of each fluctuation time random number and fluctuation time information, which is information that can specify the temporal length of the fluctuation time, are recorded in correspondence;
Equipped with
The variable time determining means includes:
A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is lower than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In the alternate ball low probability game state (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode B),
When determining the fluctuation time in the game round that is executed due to the entry of a game ball into the type 1 ball entry means, the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition; Different variable time tables are used depending on the case where the condition is not satisfied.
A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In the alternate entry high probability game state (high frequency support mode A),
When determining the variation time in the game round executed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means, if the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition; A gaming machine characterized in that the same variable time table is used in cases where the condition is not satisfied.

According to feature gL2, in the alternate ball entry low probability game state, when determining the fluctuation time in the game round to be executed due to the entry of game balls into the type 1 ball entry means, Different variable time tables are used depending on whether or not the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. When determining the variable time in a game round to be executed, the same variable time table is used whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition or not. That is, in the alternate ball entry low probability game state, while the special information corresponding to the first type ball entry method is provided with a change in the variable time between when the predetermined condition is satisfied and when it is not satisfied, the alternate ball entry method is In the high ball entry probability game state, there is no change in the variation time between the case where the special information corresponding to the first type ball entry means satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where it does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By doing this, it is determined whether the special information corresponding to the first type ball entry means satisfies the predetermined condition or not between the alternate ball entry low probability game state and the alternate ball entry high probability game state. It is possible to make a difference in the degree to which the results are drawn to the attention of the players. In the alternate ball entry low probability game state, since the special information corresponding to the first type ball entry method has a variation time between when the predetermined condition is satisfied and when it is not, the player is informed of the result of the judgment. You can draw attention to this. In the alternate ball entry high probability game state, there is no change in the variation time between when the special information corresponding to the first type ball entry method satisfies the predetermined condition and when it does not, so it is difficult for the player to make decisions. You can avoid drawing attention to the results. Therefore, between the alternate ball entry low probability game state and the alternate ball entry high probability game state, it is possible to change the player's attention level regarding the game round caused by the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entry means. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to the game and a decrease in expectations.

In addition, in the alternate ball entry high probability game state, when determining the fluctuation time in the game round to be executed due to the entry of game balls into the first type ball entry means, special Since the same variable time table is used whether the information satisfies the predetermined condition or not, different variable time tables are used depending on whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition or not. Compared to the case of determining the fluctuation time, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the fluctuation time table and to simplify the processing when determining the fluctuation time.

[Feature gL3]
The gaming machine according to feature gL1 or feature gL2,
A game ball enters the second type ball entry means before a game round (first starting port game round) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that it is more advantageous for a player to execute a gaming round (second starting slot gaming round) due to this.

According to feature gL3, a game round is executed due to a game ball entering the second type ball entering means rather than a game ball entering the first type ball entering means. The configuration is such that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game round. Therefore, players have high expectations for game turns caused by the game ball entering the second type ball entry means, and expectations for game turns caused by the game ball entering the first type ball entry means. do not. However, in the alternate ball entry low probability game state, the variation time of the game round due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means is changed according to the result of the determination, so the first type It is possible to draw the player's attention to the determination result of the game round caused by the game ball entering the ball entering means. On the other hand, in the alternate ball entry high probability game state, there is no change according to the determination result regarding the variation time of the game round caused by the game ball entering the first type ball entry means. It is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the determination result of the game round due to the game ball entering the seed ball means. Therefore, in the alternate ball entry high probability game state, it is possible to reduce the attention level of the determination results of game rounds that are not advantageous to the player, and increase the attention level of the determination results of game rounds that are advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's sense of expectation.

[Features gL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features gL1 to feature gL3,
The control means includes:
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls will consecutively enter the first type ball entry means is defined as the probability of continuous entry into the first type ball entry means, and the game ball The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is defined as the alternate ball entry probability, and the probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entry means is defined as the second ball entry probability. If the probability of consecutive balls entering the seed ball means is
The control means includes:
a first game state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of continuous ball entry by the first type ball entry means is higher than the alternate ball entry probability and the probability of continuous ball entry by the second type ball entry means;
a second game state (high frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability;
a third game state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entry means successive ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the alternate ball entry probability;
A game machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for switchably controlling the game state.

According to feature gL4, since the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state in a switchable manner, by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create various new game flows, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic gM group>
The feature gM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gM1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (a second starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a benefit granting means that grants a benefit when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a fluctuation time determining means for determining a fluctuation time that is the time from the start to the end of one fluctuation of each symbol of the first symbol and the second symbol;
A gaming machine comprising:
A game ball enters the second type ball entry means before a game round (first starting port game round) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means. Due to this, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game round (second starting opening game round),
The variable time determining means includes:
A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In (high frequency support mode A),
When the special information acquired due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the average of the fluctuation time of the game round corresponding to the special information. The special information whose value (the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting slot game round in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a loss) is acquired due to the entry of a game ball into the second type ball entry means. does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, the average value of the fluctuation time of the game round corresponding to the special information (the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting opening game round in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a loss) A gaming machine characterized in that the variable time is determined so as to be shorter.

In a gaming state, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. , a game round executed due to a game ball entering the first type ball entering means (hereinafter also referred to as a first type game round) is executed when a game ball enters the second type ball entering means. Due to this, players are often reminded that they are at a disadvantage compared to the game round being executed (also called the second type game round), and the expectations of players during the execution of the first type game round are high. may cause a decrease in

According to feature gM1, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In a gaming state where the game time is high, the average value of the fluctuation time of the game time when the special information corresponding to the first type game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition is Since the fluctuation time is determined so as to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the relevant game round when the conditions are not met, it is suppressed from lowering the player's expectations during the period when the first type game round is being executed. can do. Then, the degree of attention of the judgment result of the first type game round which is not advantageous to the player is lowered relative to the degree of attention of the judgment result of the second type game round which is advantageous to the player, and conversely, it is The degree of attention of the judgment result of the second type game round which is advantageous can be increased relative to the degree of attention of the judgment result of the first type game round which is not advantageous to the player.

[Feature gM2]
The gaming machine according to feature gM1,
The variable time determining means includes:
The game in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In the state (high frequency support mode A),
When the special information acquired due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means satisfies the predetermined condition, the average value of the fluctuation time of the game round corresponding to the special information. (The average value of the fluctuation time of the first opening game round in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot) is the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the second type ball entry means. shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the game round corresponding to the special information (the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting opening game round in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot) when the predetermined condition is met; The gaming machine is characterized in that the fluctuation time is determined so that the fluctuation time is satisfied.

According to feature gM2, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. In a gaming state where the game time is high, the average value of the fluctuation time of the game time when the special information corresponding to the first type game time satisfies the predetermined condition is Since the fluctuation time is determined so as to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the relevant game round when the above conditions are satisfied, it is further suppressed from lowering the player's expectations during the period in which the first type game round is being executed. can do. Then, the degree of attention of the judgment result of the first type game round which is not advantageous to the player is further lowered relative to the degree of attention of the judgment result of the second type game round which is advantageous to the player, and conversely, The degree of attention of the determination result of the second type game round, which is advantageous to the player, can be further increased relative to the degree of attention of the determination result of the first type game round, which is not advantageous to the player.

[Features gM3]
The gaming machine according to feature gM1 or feature gM2,
Equipped with a control means for controlling the gaming state,
The control means includes:
The gaming state is
A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is lower than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode B),
A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. (High frequency support mode A),
1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a state transition means for controlling a state to be transitionable.

A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. This is a condition that frequently reminds us that the first type game round is relatively disadvantageous to the second type game round, and the game ball is alternately placed in the first type entering ball means and the second type entering ball means. In a game state in which the probability of a ball entering the game ball is lower than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively, the first type game round is at a relative disadvantage compared to the second type game round. It is difficult to remember things.

According to feature gM3, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the same ball entry means consecutively. It is also possible to shift to a low gaming state, which means that it is possible to shift to a state in which it is difficult to recall that the first type of gaming session is relatively disadvantageous compared to the second type of gaming session, and the player It is possible to further suppress a decrease in expectations.

<Characteristic gN group>
The feature gN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gN1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
a second type ball entry means (a second starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol;
information acquisition means that acquires special information when a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A control means for controlling a gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means consecutively. In the high gaming state (high frequency support mode A),
The performance execution means is
Means for executing a first performance (a performance in which the enemy character attacks) in a game round (first starting opening game round) that is executed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entrance means. and,
In a game round (second starting opening game round) that is executed due to the entry of a game ball into the second type ball entering means, a second performance (on the player's side) that is different from the first performance is performed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a means for executing a performance in which a character attacks;

According to feature gN1, the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means consecutively. In a game state that is higher than the probability, the first performance is executed in the game round that is executed due to the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second type ball entry means. Since the second effect is executed in the game round that is executed due to the ball entering, it is easy for the player to recognize which ball entering means the game round is caused by the game ball entering. This can help players understand the flow of the game.

[Feature gN2]
The gaming machine according to feature gN1,
A game ball enters the second type ball entry means before a game round (first starting port game round) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means. Due to this, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game round (second starting opening game round),
The first performance is a performance that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous situation;
The second performance is a performance that suggests that the player is in an advantageous situation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gN2, the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means consecutively. In a game state where the probability is higher, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game round being executed is a game round that is advantageous to the player or a game time that is disadvantageous to the player. This can further assist in understanding the flow of the game.

[Feature gN3]
The gaming machine according to feature gN1 or feature gN2,
The control means includes:
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls will consecutively enter the first type ball entry means is defined as the probability of continuous entry into the first type ball entry means, and the game ball The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is defined as the alternate ball entry probability, and the probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entry means is defined as the second ball entry probability. When the probability of consecutive balls being entered is the means of seeding balls,
a first game state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of successive ball entry by the first type ball entry means is higher than the alternate ball entry probability and the probability of continuous ball entry by the second type ball entry means;
a second game state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability;
a third game state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the alternate ball entry probability;
A game machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for switchably controlling the game state.

According to feature gN3, since the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state in a switchable manner, by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create various new game flows, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature gN4]
The gaming machine described in feature gN3,
the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
the third gaming state (high-frequency support mode B) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A);
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gN4, since three gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player are controlled to be switchable, it is possible to add modulation to the player's expectations by switching the gaming states, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics gO group>
The feature gO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gO1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (a second starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A control means for controlling a gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
In the case where game balls are distributed in a distribution mode that is most advantageous to the player,
The probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entering means is the probability that a game ball successively enters the first type ball entering means and the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means. In the gaming state (high frequency support mode B) where the probability of alternately entering the ball into the second type ball entering means is higher,
The performance execution means is
When a game round (first starting opening game round) is executed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means, it is possible to shift to a gaming state more disadvantageous than the current gaming state. A game machine characterized by executing a performance that suggests that the game has sex.

According to feature gO1, the probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entering means is the same as the probability that a game ball successively enters the first type ball entering means and the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means. When a game round is executed due to a game ball entering the first type ball entering means in a gaming state where the probability is higher that the ball enters the ball means and the second type ball entering means alternately, , because it executes an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the current gaming state, it is difficult to determine whether the executed game round will be advantageous or disadvantageous in a complex gaming state. This makes it easier for players to recognize the game, and further assists players in understanding the flow of the game.

[Features gO2]
The gaming machine according to feature gO1,
A game ball enters the second type ball entry means before a game round (first starting port game round) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that it is more advantageous for a player to execute a gaming round (second starting slot gaming round) due to this.

According to feature gO2, the probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entering means is the same as the probability that a game ball consecutively enters the first type ball entering means and the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means. In a game state where the probability of a ball entering the ball means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher, the probability that a game round due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means is executed is low. In other words, it is a state in which the probability of being disadvantageous to the player is low. In such a gaming state, if a game round is executed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means, there is a possibility that the game state will shift to a more disadvantageous gaming state than the current gaming state. Since the performance that suggests a certain thing is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game round to be executed will be advantageous or disadvantageous in a complicated game state, and the flow of the player's game can be changed. This can further aid understanding.

[Features gO3]
The gaming machine according to feature gO1 or feature gO2,
The control means includes:
In the case where game balls are distributed in a distribution mode that is most advantageous to the player,
The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means consecutively, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately, and the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) that has a higher probability of consecutively entering the second type ball entry means;
The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately, the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means consecutively, and the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means a second game state (high-frequency support mode A) that is higher than the probability of successive balls entering the second type ball entry means;
The probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entering means is the probability that a game ball successively enters the first type ball entering means and the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means. a third game state (high-frequency support mode B) that has a higher probability of alternately entering the ball into the second type ball entry means;
A game machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for switchably controlling the game state.

According to feature gO3, since the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state in a switchable manner, by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create various new game flows, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. While the three game states are switched in this way, when a game round is executed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means, it is difficult to determine whether the game round to be executed will be advantageous or disadvantageous. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize what will happen, and it is possible to further assist the player in understanding the flow of the game.

[Features gO4]
The gaming machine described in feature gO3,
the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
the third gaming state (high-frequency support mode B) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A);
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gO4, it is possible to switch between three gaming states that differ in the degree of advantage for the player, so by switching between the gaming states, it is possible to add modulation to the player's expectations. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic gP group>
The feature gP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gP1]
A first type ball entry means (first starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (a second starting port in the seventh embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A control means for controlling a gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means consecutively. In the high gaming state (high frequency support mode A),
The performance execution means is
If a game ball enters the first type ball entering means twice consecutively, the game ball is executed due to the two consecutive times the game ball enters the first type ball entering means. A game characterized by comprising means for executing a specific performance (continuous performance in the seventh embodiment) in at least one game out of two consecutive game rounds (first opening game round). Machine.

According to feature gP1, the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means consecutively. In a game state where the probability is higher than the probability, if the ball enters the first type ball entry means twice in a row, a specific performance is executed, so the player who recognizes the execution of a specific performance is given the first It is possible to make the player aware that an event with a low probability has occurred, such as a ball hitting the seed ball twice in a row, and to arouse the player's curiosity about the occurrence of an event with a low probability of occurring. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature gP2]
The gaming machine described in feature gP1,
In the specific performance (continuous performance of the seventh embodiment), the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means. In the game state (high-frequency support mode A) where the probability of the ball consecutively entering the first type ball entering means is higher, the game ball alternately enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means. A game machine characterized in that the performance is different from the performance performed in a game round that is performed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means when the ball enters.

According to feature gP2, the specific effect is for the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entry means when the game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately. Since the effect is different from the effect executed in the game round that is executed due to the occurrence of the event, it is possible to make the player even more aware that an event with a low probability has occurred. It is possible to further arouse the player's curiosity about things, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature gP3]
The gaming machine according to feature gP1 or feature gP2,
The specific production is a series of productions (continuous production) that span two consecutive game rounds that are executed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type ball entry means twice in a row. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

According to feature gP3, the specific production is a series of productions spanning two consecutive game rounds that are executed due to the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entry means twice in a row. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance that has a flow spanning two game rounds as the content of a specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to further make the player aware that an event with a low probability of occurring is a special situation.

[Feature gP4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features gP1 to feature gP3,
The control means includes:
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls will consecutively enter the first type ball entry means is defined as the probability of continuous entry into the first type ball entry means, and the game ball The probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means alternately is defined as the alternate ball entry probability, and the probability that a game ball consecutively enters the second type ball entry means is defined as the second ball entry probability. If the probability of consecutive balls entering the seed ball means is
The control means includes:
a first game state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of continuous ball entry by the first type ball entry means is higher than the alternate ball entry probability and the probability of continuous ball entry by the second type ball entry means;
a second game state (high frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability;
a third game state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entry means successive ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means consecutive ball entry probability and the alternate ball entry probability;
A game machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for switchably controlling the game state.

According to feature gP4, since the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state in a switchable manner, by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create various new game flows, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature gP5]
The gaming machine described in feature gP4,
the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low-frequency support mode);
the third gaming state (high-frequency support mode B) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode A);
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature gP5, since three gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player are controlled in a switchable manner, switching the gaming states can add modulation to the player's expectations. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic hA group>
The feature hA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature hA1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area in which the fired game balls flow downward;
a retention means having a retention area (croon 220 in the eighth embodiment) for retaining game balls flowing down the gaming area;
a sorting means (non-V prize opening shutter 350) disposed on the distribution path of the gaming balls flowing out from the retention area and distributing the arriving gaming balls into at least a first direction and a second direction;
A gaming machine comprising:
The sorting means is triggered by a game ball passing through a first position (a position where a first passage detection sensor SP1 and a second passage detection sensor SP2 are provided), which is a predetermined position in the gaming area. A game machine characterized by being equipped with a switching means for switching the distribution direction of game balls (open state and closed state).

According to feature hA1, when the game balls pass through the first position, the distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing out from the retention means switches the distribution direction by the switching means, so that the game balls flow out from the retention means. By allowing the game balls to pass through the first position while taking into consideration the timing of the game, the game balls flowing out from the retention means can be distributed in the distribution direction after being switched by the switching means. That is, the player can control the direction in which the game balls are distributed by passing the game balls through the first position in consideration of the timing at which the game balls flow out from the retention means. As a result, it is possible to make technical intervention by the player regarding the direction in which the game balls are distributed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature hA2]
The gaming machine according to feature hA1,
The retention time, which is the length of time from when the game ball enters the retention area (clune 220) to when it exits, is defined as the retention time, which is the length of time from the time the game ball enters the retention area (croon 220) until the game ball exits from the first position (second passageway) after the game ball is launched from the launch means. A gaming machine characterized in that the first position passing time is longer than the first position passing time, which is the length of time it takes to pass through the first position (position where the detection sensor SP2 is provided).

According to feature hA2, the retention time is longer than the first position passing time, so after the player visually confirms that the game ball has flowed into the retention means and started staying there, the game ball flows out from the retention means. In order to cause the game ball to pass through the first position in consideration of the timing, even if the game ball is launched toward the first position, it will flow out of the retention means in the distribution direction after being switched by the switching means. You can sort the game balls. That is, after visually confirming that the game ball has flowed into the retention means and started to stay there, stop firing the game ball and return it to the first position while checking the movement of the game ball retained in the retention means. It is possible to measure the timing of firing the game ball toward the target, and to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension for a relatively long period of time regarding the timing of firing the game ball. As a comparative example, if the residence time is shorter than the first position passing time, the timing to launch the game ball toward the first position can be determined after the game ball has stopped firing. First, it is necessary to fire the game balls continuously. On the other hand, the feature hA2 is that, as described above, it is possible to measure the timing of launching the game ball toward the first position while checking the movement of the game ball retained in the retention means, so it is better than the comparative example above. Also, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature hA3]
The gaming machine according to feature hA1 or feature hA2,
The switching means changes the distribution direction of the game balls from the second direction (open state) to the first direction (closed state), triggered by the game balls passing through the first position. comprising means for switching for a specific period (0.2 seconds in the case of the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is more advantageous for a player when the game balls circulate in the first direction than when the game balls circulate in the second direction.

According to feature hA3, in order to distribute the game balls in the advantageous first direction, the timing of the game balls flowing out from the retention means and the specific period are considered, and the game balls are placed in the first position. Since it is necessary for the player to pass through the game, the player can actively participate in the game.

[Feature hA4]
The gaming machine according to feature hA3,
A game characterized in that the specific period is shorter than a retention area outflow time (Clune outflow time), which is the length of time from when the game ball is launched from the launch means until it flows out of the retention area. Machine.

According to feature hA4, since the specific period is shorter than the retention area outflow time, the game ball that has passed through the first position is passed through the retention means, and the game ball is further directed in the first direction by the switching means. It can make distribution difficult or impossible. That is, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to pass the game ball in the first direction using only one game ball. In other words, it is possible to encourage the game balls to be circulated in the first direction via the switching means after staying in the retention area and the game balls to be passed through the first position to be separate game balls. . By doing this, it is possible to encourage the player's technical intervention regarding the firing of a plurality of game balls, and to draw the player's attention to the trends of the plurality of game balls, thereby further increasing the interest of the game. I can do it.

[Feature hA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features hA1 to hA4,
It is possible or easy for the game balls sorted in the first direction by the sorting means to flow in, and it is impossible or difficult for the game balls sorted in the second direction by the sorting means to flow in. comprising a first region that is a region,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first area is an area where the inflow of game balls into the first area is set as one of the conditions for changing the game state to a specific state.

According to feature hA5, the first area is an area where the inflow of game balls into the first area is set as one of the conditions for changing the game state to a specific state, so the specific state is When the situation is advantageous to the player, the player can be made to desire to have the game balls sorted in the first direction by the sorting means, and regarding technical intervention regarding the sorting of the game balls by the sorting means. , it is possible to make the player concentrate even more and to give him a sense of anticipation and tension.

[Feature hA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features hA1 to hA4,
It is possible or easy for the game balls sorted in the first direction by the sorting means to flow in, and it is impossible or difficult for the game balls sorted in the second direction by the sorting means to flow in. a first area that is an area where
It is impossible or difficult for the game balls sorted in the first direction by the sorting means to flow in, and it is possible or easy for the game balls sorted in the second direction by the sorting means to flow in. a second region which is a region;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player;
The benefit granting means is
comprising means for determining a benefit to be given based on the inflow of game balls into the first area or the second area,
A gaming machine characterized in that a privilege given when a game ball flows into the first region is more advantageous than a privilege given when a game ball flows into the second region.

According to feature hA6, the benefit given when the game ball flows into the first area is more advantageous than the benefit given when the game ball flows into the second area, so the distribution means It is possible to make the player desire to sort the balls in the first direction, to make the player concentrate more on the technical intervention regarding the sorting of the game balls in the sorting means, and to create a sense of anticipation and tension. can be granted.

<Characteristic hB group>
The feature hB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature hB1]
a first passageway through which game balls can be distributed;
a first ball entry area into which a game ball can enter;
A distribution mode changing means (non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the eighth embodiment) that changes the distribution mode of the game balls that have arrived;
The state of the distribution mode changing means is set to a first state (open state) in which it is impossible or difficult to send the game balls that have reached the distribution mode changing means to the first ball entry area, and a first state (open state) in which it is impossible or difficult to send the game balls that have reached the distribution mode changing means to the first ball entry area; a switching means for switching between a second state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy to send the game ball that has reached the means to the first ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The switching means is
As an operation mode for switching the state of the distribution mode changing means between the first state and the second state,
In the first mode (eighth (first opening/closing scenario in the embodiment);
A second mode (second mode) in which it is possible or easy to allow the game ball to enter the first ball entry area without passing the game ball through the first passage (first passage detection sensor SP1); Third opening/closing scenario in the eighth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature hB1, the switching means selects a first mode in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the first ball entry area unless the game ball is circulated through the first passage; and a second mode in which it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the first ball entry area without passing the game ball through the passage. When the first mode is being executed, it is necessary to circulate the game ball in the first path in order to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entry area, and the player must be able to launch the game ball. Technical intervention is required for the game ball firing operation, such as adjusting the strength. On the other hand, when the second mode is being executed, there is no need to circulate the game balls in the first path in order to make the game balls enter the first ball entry area, so the player can: No technical intervention is required for the game ball firing operation compared to when the first mode is executed. Therefore, according to the game machine of this feature, by switching the operation mode of the switching means between the first mode and the second mode, a game in which a game ball enters the first ball entry area is possible. The difficulty level (degree of technical intervention) of the player's technical intervention can be changed, and the player's sense of urgency and anticipation can be modulated. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature hB2]
The gaming machine described in feature hB1,
Equipped with a detection means for detecting when a game ball passes a predetermined position,
The switching means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the state of the distribution mode changing means is switched from the first state to the second state when the detection means detects passage of a game ball.

According to feature hB2, the switching means switches the state of the distribution mode changing means from the first state to the second state when the detection means detects passage of a game ball, so that the operation mode of the switching means is changed. Regardless of whether it is in the first mode or the second mode, it is necessary to operate the game ball so that it passes through a predetermined position, and to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entry area. It is possible to encourage technical intervention from players regarding this, and as a result, it is possible to encourage players to actively participate in the game.

[Feature hB3]
The gaming machine according to feature hB1 or feature hB2,
a second passageway that is different from the first passageway and is a passageway through which game balls can be distributed;
a first detection means (first passage detection sensor SP1) that detects that a game ball has passed a first position on the first passage;
a second detection means (second passage detection sensor SP2) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a second position on the second passage;
Equipped with
The switching means is
When the first detection means or the second detection means detects passage of a game ball, the state of the distribution mode changing means is changed from the first state (open state) to the second state (closed state). ),
When the period during which the distribution mode changing means continues the second state due to the switching by the switching means is defined as the second state continuation period,
The first mode is
It becomes possible or easy for the game balls that have passed through the first passage to reach the distribution mode changing means during the second state duration period, and the game balls that have passed through the second passage are in the second state. This is an operation mode in which the state of the circulation mode changing means is switched between the first state and the second state so that it is impossible or difficult to reach the circulation mode changing means during the continuous period. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature hB3, in the first mode, even when game balls are distributed in the second passage, the switching means does not switch the state of the distribution mode changing means from the first state to the second state. Nevertheless, since it is impossible or difficult for the game balls that have circulated through the second path to reach the distribution mode changing means during the second state duration period, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and In the case of the first mode, it is possible to encourage the distribution of game balls in the first passage. Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the first passage or the second passage, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the operation of the distribution mode changing means, and it is possible to make the player concentrate on the game. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features hB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features hB1 to feature hB3,
a second passageway that is different from the first passageway and is a passageway through which game balls can be distributed;
a first detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed a first position on the first passage;
a second detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed a second position on the second passage;
Equipped with
The switching means is
Switching the state of the distribution mode changing means from the first state to the second state when the first detecting means or the second detecting means detects passage of a game ball,
When the period during which the distribution mode changing means continues the second state due to the switching by the switching means is defined as the second state continuation period,
The second mode is
It becomes possible or easy for the game balls that have passed through the first passage to reach the distribution mode changing means during the second state duration period, and the game balls that have passed through the second passage are in the second state. The operation mode is an operation mode in which the state of the distribution mode changing means is switched between the first state and the second state so that the distribution mode changing means can be reached or easily reached during the continuous period. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature hB4, in the case of the second mode, no matter which of the first passageway and the second passageway the game ball circulates, the game ball reaches the distribution mode changing means during the second state continuation period. Therefore, in the case of the second mode, the player can easily enter the game ball into the first ball entry area.

<Characteristic hC group>
The feature hC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature hC1]
A ball entry means (big prize opening 36a) into which game balls can enter;
a control means for controlling the state of the game;
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a specific control mode (first opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350),
A first case is a case in which the timing pattern of a plurality of game balls entering the ball entry means from a starting point (starting time of a round game) is a first ball entry pattern,
When a second case is defined as a case where the timing pattern of the plurality of game balls entering the ball entry means from the point of origin is a second ball entry pattern,
The specific control mode (first opening/closing scenario) is
Even though the first ball entry pattern in the first case and the second ball entry pattern in the second case are the same, the degree of advantage of the player in the first case This is a control mode in which the degree of advantage of the player in the second case is different (this is an open/close scenario that may or may not be a high probability mode).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature hC1, the specific control mode is set in the first case even though the first ball entry pattern in the first case and the second ball entry pattern in the second case are the same. Since the degree of advantage of the player in the second case and the degree of advantage of the player in the second case are different control modes, the player who recognizes that the control mode of the game being executed is a specific control mode On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation and urgency regarding the degree of advantage.

[Feature hC2]
The gaming machine according to feature hC1,
When the specific control mode is the first control mode,
The control means includes a second control mode (a second opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350) different from the first control mode,
A third case is defined as a case where the timing pattern of a plurality of game balls entering the ball entry means from the starting point is a third ball entry pattern,
When a fourth case is defined as a case where the timing pattern of a plurality of game balls entering the ball entry means from the point of origin is a fourth ball entry pattern,
The second control mode is
If the third ball entry pattern in the third case is the same as the fourth ball entry pattern in the fourth case, the degree of advantage of the player in the third case and the A gaming machine characterized by being in a control mode in which the degree of advantage for the player in the fourth case is the same.

According to feature hC2, since the game includes a first control mode and a second control mode, the player needs to determine whether the control mode is the first control mode or the second control mode. , the player can concentrate on the game. Further, in the second control mode, if the third ball entering pattern in the third case and the fourth ball entering pattern in the fourth case are the same, the player's advantage in the third case is The first control mode has the same degree of advantage as the player's advantage in the fourth case, but the first control mode Although the second ball entering pattern is the same, the degree of advantage of the player in the first case is different from the degree of advantage of the player in the second case, so the control mode is different from the degree of advantage of the player in the second case. The players are gradually given a sense of anticipation and tension, such as whether the control mode is the first control mode or the second control mode, and whether the first control mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature hC3]
The gaming machine according to feature hC1 or feature hC2,
The ball entry means includes a plurality of passages (a first passage 210 and a second passage 300) through which game balls that have entered the ball can pass;
The game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass through only one of the plurality of passages,
The specific control mode (first opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350) is as follows:
A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of advantage to the player varies depending on the manner in which the plurality of game balls that enter the ball entry means pass through the plurality of passages.

According to feature hC3, since the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the manner in which the plurality of game balls that have entered the ball entry means pass through the plurality of passages, the specific control mode controls the passage manner in the plurality of passages. It is possible to have the player make technical intervention for control, and it is possible to encourage the player to actively participate in the game.

[Feature hC4]
The gaming machine according to feature hC2,
The ball entry means includes a plurality of passages (a first passage 210 and a second passage 300) through which game balls that have entered the ball can pass;
The game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass through only one of the plurality of passages,
The second control mode (second opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350) is as follows:
A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of advantage to the player is the same regardless of the manner in which the plurality of game balls that enter the ball entry means pass through the plurality of passages.

According to feature hC4, in the second control mode, the degree of advantage for the player is the same regardless of the manner in which the plurality of game balls that have entered the ball entry means pass through the plurality of paths. When the control mode is executed, there is no need to detect how the plurality of game balls pass through the plurality of paths, and the processing can be simplified.

[Feature hC5]
The gaming machine according to feature hC2,
When the specific control mode is the first control mode,
The control means includes:
A third control mode (a third opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350) different from the first control mode and the second control mode,
A fifth case is a case where the timing pattern of the ball entering the ball entering means from the starting point is a fifth ball entering pattern,
When a sixth case is defined as a case where the timing pattern of a plurality of game balls entering the ball entry means from the point of origin is a sixth ball entry pattern,
The third control mode is
If the fifth ball entry pattern in the fifth case is the same as the sixth ball entry pattern in the sixth case, the degree of advantage of the player in the fifth case and the A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of advantage to the player in the sixth case is the same, and the control mode is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode.

According to feature hC5, if the fifth ball entering pattern in the fifth case and the sixth ball entering pattern in the sixth case are the same, the third control mode controls the game in the fifth case. Since the degree of advantage given to the player in the sixth case is the same as the degree of advantage given to the player in the sixth case, the sense of urgency given to the player can be alleviated more than in the first control mode. Furthermore, since the third control mode is more advantageous for the player than the second control mode, it can give the player a greater sense of anticipation than the second control mode. That is, since the first control mode, second control mode, and third control mode each give a different sense of expectation and sense of urgency to the player, the three control modes with different characteristics are switched. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic hD group>
The feature hD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature hD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Game round execution means for executing the game round, where one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means until the end of the game round operation. and,
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
Type determining means for determining one type of benefit to be given to the player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits (first type jackpot and second type jackpot in the eighth embodiment);
A control means for controlling the state of the game (support mode in the eighth embodiment);
Equipped with
The benefit granting means is
When the type of benefit determined by the type determining means is a first type of benefit (first type jackpot), there are two cases: a first case that satisfies a specific condition and a second case that does not satisfy the specific condition. means for determining the manner in which the benefit is granted (opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350) in a different manner depending on the case;
If the type of benefit determined by the type determining means is a second type of benefit (second type jackpot), the granting of the benefit is different in the first case and the second case. means for determining the aspect to be the same aspect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature hD1, when a game round is executed, the player is given a sense of expectation as to what type of benefit will be received (whether it is a first type of benefit or a second type of benefit). can be granted. In addition, if the type of benefit to be granted is a first type of benefit, the manner in which the benefit is granted will differ between the first case where a specific condition is met and the second case where the specific condition is not met. Since the bonuses are different, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency regarding the manner in which the bonus will be awarded. Therefore, according to this feature, when a game round is executed, the player is asked to guess and guess in stages, such as what type of benefit is and how the benefit is granted. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature hD2]
The gaming machine according to feature hD1,
The first case is a case where the gaming state at the time of execution of the gaming round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is a first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
The second case is characterized in that the gaming state at the time of execution of the gaming round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode). A gaming machine that does.

According to feature hD2, when the type of benefit to be granted is a first type of benefit, the gaming state is the first gaming state and the second gaming state. , since the manner in which benefits are given differs, it gives players a sense of guessing and anticipation, such as what the state of the game would be when a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature hD3]
The gaming machine according to feature hD1 or feature hD2,
The benefit granting means is
Game state determination that executes processing for determining the game state (lottery mode: low probability mode or high probability mode) of a game cycle to be executed after the game cycle corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. comprising a game state determination process execution means for executing the process,
The gaming state determination processing execution means includes:
If the type of benefit determined by the type determining means is a first type of benefit (first type jackpot), the above at the time of execution of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. The processing mode of the game state determination process (lottery mode) is determined depending on whether the game state is the first game state (low frequency support mode) or the second game state (high frequency support mode). a means for executing the determining manner) in a different manner (different opening/closing scenarios of the non-V prize opening shutter 350);
If the type of benefit determined by the type determining means is a second type of benefit (second type jackpot), the above at the time of execution of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. The processing mode of the gaming state determination process is the same when the gaming state is the first gaming state (low frequency support mode) and when the gaming state is the second gaming state (high frequency support mode). means (the same opening/closing scenario of the non-V prize opening shutter 350);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature hD3, when a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is executed, the player is asked what type of benefit is (whether it is a first type of benefit or a second type of benefit). It is possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the benefit of the customer. Furthermore, if the type of benefit to be granted is a first type of benefit, if the gaming state at the time of execution of the gaming round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is the first gaming state; Since the processing mode of the gaming state determination process is different depending on whether the player is in the second gaming state or the second gaming state, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency regarding the processing mode of the gaming state determining process. . Therefore, according to this feature, when a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions is executed, it is possible to determine what type of benefit is, what the gaming status is, and whether the game round corresponding to the special information is played. It is possible to give the player a sense of guessing and anticipation in stages, such as what the mode of processing will be for determining the game state of the game to be executed later, and the interest of the game can be increased. You can improve your performance.

<Characteristic hE group>
The feature hE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature hE1]
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
A first state in which it is possible or easy to sort the game balls that have entered the ball entry means into a first ball entry area; and a first state in which the game balls that have entered the ball entry means are sorted to the first ball entry area. a sorting means (non-V prize opening shutter 350 in the eighth embodiment) that switches between a second state in which it is impossible or difficult to do so;
A gaming machine comprising:
The sorting means is
The second state occurs when the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry means from the starting point (when the round game is started) reaches N (N is an integer of 2 or more). A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine switches from the first state to the first state.

According to feature hE1, the distributing means changes to the second state when the number of game balls that have entered the ball entering means reaches N (N is an integer of 2 or more) since the starting point. to the first state. In this case, the player who desires to allocate the game balls to the first area is encouraged to shoot the game balls while counting the number of game balls to be entered into the ball entering means. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature hE2]
The gaming machine according to feature hE1,
The sorting means is
Within a specific period from the time when the Nth game ball enters the ball input means from the time when the starting point is reached, the N-1th game ball from the time when the starting point arrives at the sorting means. switching between the first state and the second state so that it becomes possible or easy to allocate the N-1th game ball to the first area when A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature hE2, in addition to prompting the player to fire the game balls while counting the number of game balls that enter the ball entering means, at least the N-1th game ball from the starting point. Regarding the game ball and the N-th game ball from the starting point, further technical intervention by the player can be encouraged. Specifically, within a specific period from the time when the Nth game ball enters the ball entering means from the time when it becomes the starting point, the N-1th game ball from the time when it becomes the starting point enters the distribution means. The player can be prompted to adjust the timing and intensity of firing of the game ball so that the game ball reaches the target. Further, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension as to whether or not the N-1th game ball can be allocated to the first area.

<Characteristic hF group>
The feature hF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 5 of the eighth embodiment.

[Feature hF1]
a first passageway through which game balls can be distributed;
a second passageway through which game balls can be distributed;
Distribution mode changing means for changing the distribution mode of the game balls sent from the first passage and the second passage, the means for changing the distribution mode of the game balls sent from the first passage and the second passage, wherein Distribution mode changing means (in the eighth embodiment, a non-V prize opening shutter 350) and
Equipped with
The distribution mode changing means is
Trigger when K game balls (K is an integer) enter the second path after J game balls (J is an integer) enter the first path from the time of starting point. A gaming machine characterized in that: the second state is switched to the first state.

According to feature hF1, the distribution mode changing means changes the number of game balls (K is an integer) to the second passage after J (J is an integer) game balls have entered the first passage from the starting point. When a game ball enters the ball, the second state is switched to the first state. In this case, for a player who wishes to send game balls to the first area, an active technique is applied to make J game balls pass through the first path and K game balls through the second path. It is possible to encourage intervention and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature hF2]
The gaming machine according to feature hF1,
The distribution mode changing means is
The time when the J-th game ball that has entered the first passage since the starting point reaches the distribution mode changing means is the game ball that has entered the second passage from the time that has become the starting point. If it is within a predetermined period from the time when the number of balls reaches K, the J-th game ball that has entered the first path from the time of the starting point is sent to the first area. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature hF2, for a player who desires to send game balls to the first area, the J-th game ball that has entered the first passage from the time when it becomes the starting point is sent to the distribution mode changing means. Adjust the timing and intensity of firing of game balls so that the time of arrival is within a predetermined period from the time when the number of game balls that have entered the second passage reaches K from the time when the game balls are the starting point. This can encourage further technological intervention by players.

<Characteristic iA group>
The feature iA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, at the start of the game round, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state. State information transfer means (support mode simulation process: steps Si1004, Si1005, Si1007 in the hit determination process in FIG. 469),
gaming operation setting means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the state specified by the state information before the transition when the transition is made by the state information transitioning means;
gaming operation starting means for starting the gaming operation based on the set mode of the gaming operation;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a gaming machine that is designed so that when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the mode of gaming operation is set based on a state other than the first state, the first state is set by the state information transfer means. When a transition is made to information specifying the state, it becomes impossible to set the mode of gaming operation, and there is a problem in that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iA1, since the mode of the gaming operation is set based on the state specified by the state information before being transferred by the state information transfer means, the mode of the gaming operation is the first mode. Therefore, the setting is performed normally and the processing is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to feature iA1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iA2]
The gaming machine according to feature iA1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode and a control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means in a different manner. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is enabled to be executed, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature iA2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. The mode of gaming operation is also set based on the status information. Therefore, changes in the control mode and changes in the mode of gaming operations are linked. Therefore, according to feature iA2, since it is possible to indicate to the player the change in the control mode that changes the state of the auxiliary means by the aspect of the gaming operation, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature iA3]
The gaming machine according to feature iA2,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 468 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round that is determined to be executed in the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state ( (steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907 in the fall determination process in FIG. 468);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature iA3, in both cases of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and a game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the state is changed at the start of the game round. Information is transitioned to information identifying the first state. For this reason, it is possible to determine whether the game session corresponds to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions or the game session determined to be executed in the first determination mode based on the change in the state of the auxiliary means that is linked to the change in the state information. It is possible to prevent players from guessing. Therefore, according to feature iA3, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature iA4]
The gaming machine according to feature iA3,
The gaming operation setting means includes:
When the state information transition means shifts to information specifying the first state in a state where the determination mode determining means has determined to execute the determination in the second determination mode; , means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the state specified by the state information before being transferred by the transfer.

According to feature iA4, when the state information is transferred by the state information transfer means to information specifying the first state, the special information is in the second determination mode with a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition. Nevertheless, the gaming state may become the first state, a so-called latent probability variable state. Here, if we consider a case where the gaming machine is designed in such a way that it is impossible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the latent probability change state, the state information transfer means specifies the first state. If a latent probability change state occurs due to the information being transferred to the game information, it becomes impossible to set the mode of gaming operation, and there is a problem in that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iA4, since the mode of gaming operation is set based on the state specified by the state information before being transferred by the state information transfer means, the mode of gaming operation is the first mode. Therefore, the game operation mode is not set based on the latent probability change state. Therefore, according to feature iA4, the gaming state is set normally and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, making it possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iA5]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features iA1 to Feature iA4,
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, state judgment value calculation means (game state in FIG. 470 Step Si1101) in the determination process;
When the calculated state determination value is the first value (“02H” in FIG. 459) as the state determination value that can be taken when the state information is information that specifies the first state. Then, when the state information is information specifying a state other than the first state, the state judgment value is set to a second value (“03H” in FIG. 459) as the state judgment value. a state determination value rewriting means (steps Si1102 and Si1103 in the gaming state determination process in FIG. 470),
Equipped with
The gaming operation setting means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for setting the mode of the gaming operation (variable time setting process in FIG. 471) based on the state determination value rewritten by the state determination value rewriting means.

According to feature iA5, when setting the mode of gaming operation, the setting can be made by referring to the state determination value without referring to multiple types of information. For this reason, control for setting the mode of gaming operations can be simplified. Furthermore, since the mode of gaming operation is set after switching the state determination value, if the mode of gaming operation is designed to be set based on a state other than the first state, Processing is not interrupted or stopped, and high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine can be ensured.

[Feature iA6]
The gaming machine according to feature iA5,
The gaming operation setting means includes:
Based on the state judgment value rewritten by the state judgment value rewriting means, the movement patterns that the game movement can take are limited (selection of a variable time table group), and the judgment is performed within the range of the limited movement patterns. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the result of the determination by the means.

According to feature iA6, the mode of gaming operation can be set with a simple configuration based on the state determination value and the result of determination by the determination means.

<Characteristic iB group>
The feature iB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
gaming operation setting means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the state specified by the state information at the start of the gaming round;
After the setting by the gaming operation setting means at the start of the gaming round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state. a state information transition means (support mode simulation process: steps Si3709, Si3710, Si3712 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 497) that transitions the first state to information specifying;
gaming operation starting means for starting the gaming operation based on the mode of the gaming operation set by the gaming operation setting means at the start of the gaming round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a gaming machine that is designed so that when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the mode of gaming operation is set based on a state other than the first state, the first state is set by the state information transfer means. When a transition is made to information specifying the state, it becomes impossible to set the mode of gaming operation, and there is a problem in that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iB1, the mode of gaming operation is set based on the state specified by the state information at a timing before the state information is transferred by the state information transfer means. The mode of operation is set based on a state other than the first state, so the setting is performed normally and the processing is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to feature iB1, high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine can be ensured.

[Feature iB2]
The gaming machine described in feature iB1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature iB2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. The mode of gaming operation is also set based on the status information. Therefore, changes in the control mode and changes in the mode of gaming operations are linked. Therefore, according to feature iB2, since it is possible to indicate to the player the change in the control mode that changes the state of the auxiliary means by the aspect of the gaming operation, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature iB3]
The gaming machine described in feature iB2,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 468 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round that is determined to be executed in the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state ( (steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907 in the fall determination process in FIG. 468);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature iB3, in any case, a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition or a game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the state is changed at the start of the game round. Information is transitioned to information identifying the first state. For this reason, it is possible to determine whether the game session corresponds to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions or the game session determined to be executed in the first determination mode based on the change in the state of the auxiliary means that is linked to the change in the state information. It is possible to prevent players from guessing. Therefore, according to feature iB3, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to feature iB3, when the state information is transferred by the state information transfer means to information specifying the first state, the special information enters the second determination mode with a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition. In some cases, the gaming state becomes the first state even though the player is in the latent state. Here, if we consider a case where the gaming machine is designed in such a way that it is impossible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the latent probability change state, the state information transfer means specifies the first state. If a latent probability change state occurs due to the information being transferred to the game information, it becomes impossible to set the mode of gaming operation, and there is a problem in that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iB3, the game operation is performed based on the state specified by the state information at a timing before the state information transfer means transfers the state information to information specifying the first state. Since the mode is set, the mode of the gaming operation is set based on a state other than the first state, and the mode of the gaming operation is not set based on the latent probability change state. . Therefore, according to feature iB3, the setting of the gaming state is performed normally and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, making it possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Features iB4]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features iB1 to Feature iB3,
At the start of the game round, state determination value calculation means (FIG. 499) that calculates a state determination value (gaming state determination value in FIG. 458) from a plurality of types of information including at least the state information stored in the state storage means. Step Si3901) in the gaming state determination process of
Equipped with
The gaming operation setting means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for setting the mode of the gaming operation (variable time setting process in FIG. 471) based on the state judgment value calculated by the state judgment value calculation means.

According to feature iB4, when setting the mode of gaming operation, the setting can be made by referring to the state determination value without referring to multiple types of information. For this reason, control for setting the mode of gaming operations can be simplified.

[Features iB5]
The gaming machine described in feature iB4,
The gaming operation setting means includes:
Based on the state judgment value calculated by the state judgment value calculation means, the movement patterns that the game movement can take are limited (selection of a group of variable time tables), and the judgment is performed within the range of the limited movement patterns. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the result of the determination by the means.

According to feature iB5, it is possible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the state determination value and the result of determination by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Characteristic iC group>
The feature iC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one game round is defined as the time from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation, the game round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by it),
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low-frequency support mode) and a first control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than in the control mode;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
a gaming operation setting means for setting an aspect of the gaming operation based on the control mode at the start of the gaming round;
In a specific case, and after the setting by the gaming operation setting means is executed at the start of the game round, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the control means. control mode switching means for switching to the first control mode;
gaming operation starting means for starting the gaming operation based on the mode of the gaming operation set by the gaming operation setting means at the start of the gaming round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a gaming machine designed so that the aspect of gaming operation is set based on the second control mode in a specific case, switching from the second control mode to the first control mode by a control mode switching means If this is done, it becomes impossible to set the mode of gaming operation, and there is a problem that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iC1, before the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode by the control mode switching means, the mode of the gaming operation is set based on the control mode. Therefore, the mode of gaming operation is set based on the second control mode, and therefore, the setting is performed normally and the process is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to feature iC1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Features iC2]
The gaming machine according to feature iC1,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 468 fall detection processing),
The control mode switching means includes:
If the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the first switching means (support mode simulation processing: FIG. 497 Steps Si3709, Si3710, Si3712) in the fluctuation start process of
A second switching means (see FIG. Steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907) in the fall determination process of 468;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature iC2, in any case, whether it is a game time corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition or a game time determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the control is performed at the start of the game time. The mode is switched to the first control mode. For this reason, it is possible to determine whether the game time corresponds to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition or the game time determined to be executed in the first determination mode based on the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the control mode. It is possible to prevent players from guessing. Therefore, according to feature iC2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to feature iC2, when the first switching means switches the control mode to the first control mode when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In some cases, the control mode becomes the first control mode even though the second determination mode has a high probability, a so-called latent probability variable state. Now, if we consider a case where the gaming machine is designed in such a way that it is impossible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the latent probability change state, the control mode is changed to the first control mode by the first switching means. If a latent probability change state occurs due to switching, it becomes impossible to set the mode of gaming operation, and there is a problem in that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iC2, the mode of the gaming operation is set based on the control mode before the first switching means switches the control mode to the first control mode. The mode is set based on the second control mode, and the mode of gaming operation is not set based on the latent probability change state. Therefore, according to the feature iC2, the gaming state is set normally and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, making it possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Features iC3]
The gaming machine according to feature iC1 or feature iC2,
The gaming operation setting means includes:
Based on the control mode, the operation pattern that the game operation can take is limited (selection of a variable time table group), and within the range of the restricted operation pattern, the game operation is performed based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting an operation mode.

According to feature iC3, it is possible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the control mode and the result of determination by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Feature iD group>
The feature iD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its first modification.

[Feature iD1]
an information acquisition means that acquires the first special information and the second special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
a first determination means (steps Si1002 to Si1004 of the hit determination process in FIG. 469) that determines whether the acquired first special information satisfies a first condition;
a second determination means (steps Si0902 and Si0903 of the fall determination process in FIG. 468) that determines whether the acquired second special information satisfies a second condition;
One time in a gaming session, the gaming operation is terminated after the gaming operation that informs at least one of the result of the determination by the first determining means and the result of the determination by the second determining means is started. In this case, a game round execution means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 465 executed by it) that executes the game round,
A state storage means (high frequency support mode) that stores state information (support mode information) that can identify two exclusive states, the first state (low frequency support mode) and the second state (high frequency support mode). frequency support mode flag) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
In both cases where the first special information satisfies the first condition and the second special information satisfies the second condition, the status information is transmitted at the start of the game round. a state information transition means (support mode simulation process: steps Si1004, Si1005, Si1007 in the hit determination process in FIG. 469) that transitions from information specifying the second state to information specifying the first state;
a first gaming operation setting means for setting an aspect of the gaming operation based on the second state at the start of the gaming round when the first special information satisfies the first condition; ,
a second gaming operation setting means for setting an aspect of the gaming operation based on the first state at the start of the gaming round when the second special information satisfies the second condition; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a gaming machine designed such that when the first special information satisfies the first condition, the mode of gaming operation is set based on a state other than the first state, the state information transfer means When a transition is made to information specifying the first state, it becomes impossible to set the mode of gaming operation, and there is a problem in that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iD1, at the start of a game round when the first special information satisfies the first condition, the mode of the game operation is set based on the second state. Therefore, the settings are performed normally and the process is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to feature iD1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iD2]
The gaming machine according to feature iD1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying the second state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable and stored in the state storage means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first control mode is enabled to be executed when the status information being displayed is information specifying the first status (infrequent support mode).

According to feature iD2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. The mode of gaming operation is also set based on the status information. Therefore, changes in the control mode and changes in the mode of gaming operations are linked. Therefore, according to the feature iD2, since it is possible to indicate to the player the change in the control mode that changes the state of the auxiliary means by the aspect of the gaming operation, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to feature iD2, in either case, the first special information satisfies the first condition, and the second special information satisfies the second condition, the start of the game period. At times, state information is transitioned to information identifying a first state. Therefore, the auxiliary means that is linked to the change in the state information determines whether the first special information satisfies the first condition or whether the result of the determination by the second determination means satisfies the second condition. It is possible to prevent players from making guesses based on changes in the state. Therefore, according to feature iD2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature iD3]
The gaming machine according to feature iD1 or feature iD2,
The first determining means includes:
As the determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, there is a first determination mode (low probability mode), and the first determination mode has a higher probability that the first special information satisfies the first condition than the first determination mode. has a high second determination mode (high probability mode),
The gaming machine is
At the start of the game round, the second determination determines whether the determination by the first determining means in the game round is to be performed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Judgment mode determining means (fall judgment process in FIG. 468) that determines based on the result of the judgment by the means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature iD3, even though the first special information is in the second determination mode (high probability mode) with a high probability of satisfying the first condition, the state specified by the state information is in the first (low-frequency support mode), a so-called latent variable state. Now, let's consider a case where a gaming machine is designed in such a way that it is impossible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the state of variable latency. There was an issue where the settings became impossible and the process would be interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iD3, at the start of a gaming session when the first special information satisfies the first condition, the mode of gaming operation changes to the second state (high-frequency support mode). Since the settings are made based on this, there is no possibility that the game operation mode is set based on the latent probability change state. Therefore, according to feature iD3, the setting of the gaming operation mode is performed normally and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, so that high reliability can be ensured in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iD4]
The gaming machine described in any one of feature iD1 to feature iD3,
The gaming operation setting means includes:
Based on the state information stored in the state storage means, the action patterns that the game action can take are limited (selection of a variable time table group), and within the range of the limited action patterns, the first A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the result of the determination by the determining means.

According to feature iD4, the mode of gaming operation can be set with a simple configuration based on the state information and the results of determination by the first and second determination means.

<Characteristic iE group>
The feature iE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by it),
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means include a first control mode (low-frequency support mode) and a control mode in which the game ball is sent to the ball input means more than the first control mode. a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which entry is easy, and the state transition means is controlled in either the first control mode or the second control mode. first state information storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores first state information (high frequency support mode flag) that can specify whether the
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. a determination mode (high probability mode), and a second state in which it is possible to specify in which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means is to be performed. a second state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing information (high probability mode flag);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Comprehensive state information that generates comprehensive state information (gaming state determination value in FIG. 458) indicating the state of the gaming machine by combining a plurality of state information including at least the first state information and the second state information. Equipped with a generation means,
The game round execution means is
state information transition means for shifting the first state information from information specifying the second control mode to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game round in a specific case;
At the start of the game round, the comprehensive state information generated by the comprehensive state information generating means specifies that the first state information specifies the first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the second state information specifies the first control mode (low frequency support mode). When the state information is the first information that can be obtained when specifying the second determination mode (high probability mode) (latent probability variable state: "02H" in FIG. 458), the comprehensive state information is When the first status information specifies the second control mode (high frequency support mode) and the second status information specifies the second determination mode (high probability mode), the second possible comprehensive state information rewriting means (steps Si1102 and Si1103 in the gaming state determination process in FIG. 470) for rewriting the information (high probability high frequency state: "03H" in FIG. 458);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Based on the comprehensive state information, for example, a specific operation or display mode of the gaming machine is set, and the setting of the mode is such that the comprehensive state information specifies information other than the first information (a state other than the latent variable state). Consider a gaming machine that is designed to be played when (information). In this gaming machine, when the second status information specifies the second determination mode and the specific status information transition means transitions to the information that specifies the first control mode, the comprehensive status information changes to the information that specifies the first control mode. 1, and as a result, the above-mentioned settings become impossible, and there is a problem in that the processing is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iE1, since the comprehensive state information is rewritten from the first information (information that specifies the latent probability change state) to the second information by the comprehensive state information rewriting means, the above setting is Processing is performed normally and the process is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to feature iE1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Features iE2]
The gaming machine according to feature iE1,
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 468 fall detection processing),
The state information transfer means includes:
Means for executing a transition to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game round when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (support mode simulation processing: hit in FIG. 469) Steps Si1004, Si1005, Si1007) in the determination process;
Means for executing a transition to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game round when the judgment mode determining means has decided to execute the game in the first judgment mode (see FIG. 468). Steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907) in the fall determination process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature iE2, in any case of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition or a game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode, at the start of the game round, the 1 status information is transferred to information specifying the first status. For this reason, the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the first state information determines whether the game time corresponds to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions or the game time determined to be executed in the first determination mode. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing based on the change. Therefore, according to feature iE2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Features iE3]
The gaming machine according to feature iE1 or feature iE2,
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming operation setting means (variable time setting process in FIG. 471) that sets the mode of the gaming operation based on the comprehensive state information rewritten by the comprehensive state information rewriting means.

According to feature iE3, the process of setting the gaming operation mode based on the comprehensive state information is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to feature iE3, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Features iE4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features iE1 to feature iE3,
The gaming operation setting means includes:
Based on the comprehensive state information rewritten by the comprehensive state information rewriting means, the possible motion patterns of the gaming motion are limited (selection of a group of variable time tables), and the judgment is performed within the range of the limited motion patterns. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the result of the determination by the means.

According to feature iE4, it is possible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the comprehensive state information and the result of determination by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Characteristic iF group>
The feature iF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its first modification.

[Feature iF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by it),
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means include a first control mode (low-frequency support mode) and a control mode in which the game ball is sent to the ball input means more than the first control mode. a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which entry is easy, and the state transition means is controlled in either the first control mode or the second control mode. first state information storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores first state information (high frequency support mode flag) that can specify whether the
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. a determination mode (high probability mode), and a second state in which it is possible to specify in which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means is to be performed. a second state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing information (high probability mode flag);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
state information transition means for shifting the first state information from information specifying the second control mode to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game round in a specific case;
means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the first state information and the second state information at the start of the game round, the first state information being the first control mode; (low frequency support mode) and when the second state information specifies the second determination mode (high probability mode) (latent probability variable state: “02H” in FIG. 458), the first When the state information specifies the second control mode (high frequency support mode) and the second state information specifies the second determination mode (high probability mode) (high probability high frequency state: Fig. 458 471);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

It is impossible to set the mode of gaming operations based on a state in which the first state information specifies the first control mode and the second state information specifies the second determination mode (so-called latent probability variable state). In a game machine designed as such, when the state information transition means transitions to the information specifying the first control mode, the game enters a latent probability change state, making it impossible to set the gaming operation mode. There was an issue where the process would be interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to feature iF1, when the latent probability variable state is entered, the same gaming operation mode as in the high probability high frequency state is set, so the setting is performed normally and the processing is interrupted or It never stops. Therefore, according to feature iF1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iF2]
The gaming machine according to feature iF1,
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 468 fall detection processing),
The state information transfer means includes:
Means for executing a transition to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game round when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (support mode simulation processing: hit in FIG. 469) Steps Si1004, Si1005, Si1007) in the determination process;
Means for executing a transition to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game round when the judgment mode determining means has decided to execute the game in the first judgment mode (see FIG. 468). Steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907) in the fall determination process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature iF2, in any case, a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition or a game round determined to be executed in the first determination mode, at the start of the game round, the 1 status information is transferred to information specifying the first status. For this reason, the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the first state information determines whether the game time corresponds to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions or the game time determined to be executed in the first determination mode. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing based on the change. Therefore, according to feature iF2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature iF3]
The gaming machine according to feature iF1 or feature iF2,
The gaming operation setting means includes:
Based on the first state information and the second state information, the action patterns that the gaming action can take are limited (selection of a variable time table group), and the judgment is made within the range of the limited action patterns. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the result of the determination by the means.

According to feature iF3, it is possible to set the mode of gaming operation based on the first and second state information and the result of determination by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Characteristic iG group>
The feature iG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 16 and modification 17 of the ninth embodiment.

[Features iG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the determination mode for making the determination being a first determination mode (low probability mode); a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by it),
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than in the control mode;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific case, a specific state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode (latent probability variable state in Modification 16 and Modification 17 of the ninth embodiment) ) has a state transition means for transitioning to
The game round execution means is
control mode switching means for causing the control means to switch the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition; Support mode simulation processing: Step Si4007) in the hit determination processing of FIG. 500;
gaming operation setting means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the determination mode and the control mode at the start of the gaming round;
gaming operation starting means for starting the gaming operation based on the set mode of the gaming operation;
Equipped with
The gaming operation setting means includes:
a first game operation setting means for setting a first mode as the mode of the game operation when the state transition means transitions to the specific state;
When the control mode is switched to the first control mode by the control mode switching means and the specific state is entered, a second mode different from the first mode is set as the mode of the gaming operation. a second game operation setting means for setting;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a gaming machine including a state transition means for transitioning to a specific state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode in a specific case, the control mode is the second control mode. If the control mode switching means switches from the second control mode to the first control mode from a gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the gaming state becomes the same specific state. However, in this case, in the prior art, no particular consideration was given to how the gaming operation should be performed. On the other hand, according to feature iG1, when the state transition means transitions to a specific state, the first mode is set as the mode of game operation, and the control mode is changed to the first control mode by the control mode switching means. When the state is shifted to a specific state by switching, a second mode different from the first mode is set as the gaming operation mode. Therefore, according to feature iG1, the effect is suitable for when the state transition means transitions to a specific state, and when the control mode is switched to the first control mode by the control mode switching means, A suitable performance can be executed and the game state can be appropriately notified to the player.

[Features iG2]
The gaming machine according to feature iG1,
The second game operation setting means includes:
Means for setting the aspect of the gaming operation based on the second control mode, which is the control mode before being transferred by the control mode switching means, and the determination mode (Modification 16 of the ninth embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration extracted from the above, and comprising steps Si4205 and Si4206) in the variable time setting process of FIG. 502.

According to the feature iG2, the mode of the gaming operation is set by a simple configuration in which the mode of the gaming operation is set based on the second control mode, which is the control mode before being transferred by the control mode switching means, and the determination mode. can be set in the second mode. Therefore, according to feature iG2, the configuration for setting the mode of gaming operation can be simplified.

[Features iG3]
The gaming machine according to feature iG1,
The second gaming operation setting means includes:
Means for setting the aspect of the gaming operation based on the determination mode and the control mode at a timing before the control mode switching means switches the control mode to the first control mode (in the ninth embodiment) A gaming machine having a configuration extracted from Modification Example 17, and comprising a variable time setting (variable time setting) executed in accordance with the procedure shown in FIG. 496 of Modification Example 1 cited in Modification Example 17.

According to the feature iG3, the game operation can be easily performed by a simple configuration in which the mode of the gaming operation is set based on the determination mode and the control mode at a timing before the control mode is switched to the first control mode by the control mode switching means. The mode of operation can be set to the second mode. Therefore, according to feature iG3, the configuration for setting the mode of gaming operation can be simplified.

<Characteristic iH group>
The feature iH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 18 of the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the determination mode for making the determination being a first determination mode (low probability mode); a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by it),
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than in the control mode;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific case, the control mode is the first control mode, and the determination mode is the second determination mode (the latent probability variable state in the sixteenth modification of the ninth embodiment). has a state transition means,
The game round execution means is
control mode switching means for causing the control means to switch the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition; Support mode simulation processing: step Si4007) in the hit determination processing of FIG. 500;
gaming operation setting means for setting the mode of the gaming operation based on the determination mode and the control mode at the start of the gaming round;
gaming operation starting means for starting the gaming operation based on the set mode of the gaming operation;
Equipped with
The gaming operation setting means includes:
A first case is a case where the state transition means transitions to the specific state, and a first case is a case where the control mode is switched to the first control mode by the control mode switching device. In case 2, in the first case and the second case, at least the first element (the variable time in modification example 18) of the plurality of elements constituting the aspect of the gaming operation is A gaming machine characterized in that it includes first setting means that performs the setting in the same manner.

In a gaming machine including a state transition means for transitioning to a specific state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode in a specific case, the control mode is the second control mode. If the control mode switching means switches from the second control mode to the first control mode from a gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the gaming state becomes the same specific state. However, in this case, in the prior art, no particular consideration was given to how the gaming operation should be performed. On the other hand, according to feature iH1, there is a first case in which the state transition means transitions to the specific state, and a transition to the specific state occurs when the control mode switching device switches the control mode to the first control mode. In the second case, at least the first element among the plurality of elements constituting the mode of the gaming operation is the same, and the setting of the gaming operation is performed. Therefore, according to feature iH1, the control routine for setting the first element can be shared between the first case and the second case, so that control can be simplified.

[Features iH2]
The gaming machine described in feature iH1,
A first control device (main control device 60),
a second control device (sound emission control device 90);
Equipped with
The gaming operation setting means includes:
A second setting means for making the settings by making at least a second element (the performance pattern in modification example 18) different among the plurality of elements between the first case and the second case. ,
The first control device includes the first setting means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second control device includes the second setting means.

According to feature iH2, the first control device side can set the first element common to the first case and the second case, and the second control device side can set the first element common to the first case and the second case. It is possible to set the second element differently depending on the case and the second case. For this reason, while the first control device side shares the control routine for setting the first element between the first case and the second case, the second control device side uses the control routine for setting the first element in common between the first case and the second case. The mode of the gaming operation can be set by making the second element different in the second case. Therefore, according to feature iH2, a performance suitable for the first case and a performance suitable for the second case can be executed, and the game state can be appropriately notified to the player.

<Characteristics jA group>
The feature jA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
means for controlling the game state of the game round into at least two types of game states, a first game state (low probability mode) and a second game state (high probability mode), and the first game state is the above-mentioned game state. A gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The performance execution means is
When the special information corresponding to the gaming session executed in the first gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information corresponding to the gaming session executed in the second gaming state A gaming machine comprising means for executing a specific effect (specific effect in the tenth embodiment) that is not executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to feature jA1, the player is made to recognize, through a specific performance, that the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first game state disadvantageous to the player satisfies a predetermined condition. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition despite an unfavorable gaming condition.

[Features jA2]
The gaming machine according to feature jA1,
The performance execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for executing, as the specific performance, a performance that indicates that the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition. .

According to feature jA2, the content of the specific production is content that suggests that the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first gaming state satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first gaming state satisfies a predetermined condition. Nevertheless, it is possible to make the player more aware that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and it is possible to give the player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction.

[Features jA3]
The gaming machine according to feature jA1 or feature jA2,
The performance execution means is
The game round execution means is characterized in that, while executing the game round, the game round execution means is provided with means for executing a performance (state non-display performance) that makes it impossible or difficult for the player to identify the game state in the game round that is currently being executed. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature jA3, since the player executes a performance in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to identify the game state in the game round that is being executed, it is difficult for the player to identify in which game state the game round is being executed. It can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. . Furthermore, when such processing is executed, if the special information corresponding to the game run executed in the first gaming state satisfies a predetermined condition and a specific effect is executed, a specific For the first time, the effect makes it possible for the player to recognize that the gaming state in the gaming rounds that have been played so far was an unfavorable gaming state, and after the fact, it is possible to make the player realize that the gaming state in the gaming rounds that have been played so far It is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to reminisce about the contents of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

[Features jA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features jA1 to Features jA3,
comprising a benefit granting means that, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, grants a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
When the special information corresponding to the game round in the first gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition, the benefit awarding means selects one of the multiple types of awarding modes (jacket types) of the benefit. comprising means for granting the benefit in a manner of granting;
The performance execution means is
In the case where the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition, and the benefit granting means selects a specific one of the plurality of types of benefit granting modes, A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the specific effect when awarding a benefit in a granting manner (a type of jackpot that is most advantageous to a player).

According to feature jA4, when the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first gaming state satisfies a predetermined condition, and the benefit granting means selects a specific granting method among multiple types of benefit granting modes. Since a specific effect is executed when a benefit is given in a certain mode, when a specific effect is executed, special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first game state is provided to the player in a predetermined manner. In addition to satisfying the above conditions, it is possible to make the player aware that a benefit will be awarded in a specific manner, giving the player a sense of superiority.

[Features jA5]
The gaming machine described in feature jA4,
The performance execution means is
In the case where the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition, and the benefit granting means is a player among the plurality of types of granting modes of the benefit, A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the specific effect when awarding a benefit in the most advantageous awarding manner.

According to feature jA5, when the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the first gaming state satisfies a predetermined condition, and the benefit granting means selects the player from among the multiple types of benefit granting modes. Since a specific performance is executed when a privilege is awarded in the most advantageous granting manner, a greater sense of superiority and happiness can be given to the player when the specific performance is executed.

[Features jA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature jA1 to feature jA5,
The performance execution means is
comprising means for executing the specific performance after the end of the game round that corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition and that triggered the execution of the specific performance. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature jA6, the specific performance is executed after the game round that triggered the execution of the specific performance has ended, so that a sense of anticipation is given to the player even after the game round has ended. In addition to this, it is possible to draw the players' attention to the game even after the game round has ended.

<Characteristics jB group>
The feature jB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
comprising means for controlling the game state in the game round to one of a plurality of types of game states,
The performance execution means is
When the acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a gaming state suggestion effect ( A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the specific effect in the tenth embodiment.

According to feature jB1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a game state suggestion effect is executed that suggests information regarding the game state in which the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition was executed. Therefore, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the game state suggesting performance. Further, by using the game state suggestion performance, it is possible to create a game experience in which the player is made to reminisce about the game state and game content in the game rounds played so far after the fact, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Features jB2]
The gaming machine described in feature jB1,
The performance execution means is
During the period in which the game round corresponding to the special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition is being executed, the game state in the game round being executed may be difficult or difficult for the player to identify. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing (non-explicit performance).

According to feature jB2, during a period in which a game round corresponding to special information that does not satisfy a predetermined condition is being executed, a performance that is difficult or impossible for the player to discern the gaming state of the game round that is being executed is prohibited. Since the game is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game round is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. .

[Features jB3]
The gaming machine according to feature jB1 or feature jB2,
The performance execution means is
The acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the gaming state in which the gaming round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition was executed is one of the plurality of gaming states. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the gaming state suggesting performance when the game is in a specific gaming state.

According to feature jB3, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and when the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is in a specific gaming state, a gaming state suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize after the fact that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in a specific gaming state, and the player is encouraged to reminisce about how the game was executed in the specific gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features jB4]
The gaming machine described in feature jB3,
comprising a benefit granting means that, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, grants a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
When the special information corresponding to the game round in the specific gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition, the benefit awarding means selects one of the multiple types of awarding modes (jackpot type) for the benefit. comprising means for granting the benefit in a granting manner;
The performance execution means is
In the case where the acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the benefit granting means grants a benefit in a specific granting mode among the plurality of types of granting modes of the benefit, the game state suggestion A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a performance.

According to feature jB4, when the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and when the benefit granting means grants a benefit in a specific granting mode among multiple types of benefit granting modes, the gaming state suggesting performance is performed. Since this is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the bonus will be awarded in a specific awarding manner.

[Features jB5]
The gaming machine described in feature jB4,
The performance execution means is
In the case where the acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the benefit granting means grants the benefit in a manner most advantageous to the player among the plurality of types of granting manners of the benefit, A gaming machine comprising means for executing the gaming state suggesting performance.

According to feature jB5, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition and when the benefit granting means grants the benefit in the most advantageous granting manner to the player among multiple types of granting manners, the gaming state Since the suggestion effect is executed, when the game state suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a very great sense of superiority and happiness.

<Characteristics jC group>
The feature jC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
comprising means for controlling the game state of the game round to one of a plurality of types of game states;
The performance execution means is
When the game state of the game round changes, the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed after the time when the game state changes (winning the falling lottery) meets the predetermined conditions. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a gaming state suggesting performance (a specific performance in the tenth embodiment) that suggests information regarding the gaming state in the gaming round when the conditions are satisfied.

According to feature jC1, when the game state of a game round changes, after the time when the game state changes, and when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a predetermined condition, , since the game state suggestion performance that suggests information about the game state in the game round is executed, the game state suggestion performance makes the player recognize after the fact that the game state in the game round has changed, and It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to reminisce about the game state and game content during the game session.

[Feature jC2]
The gaming machine according to feature jC1,
The performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not executing the gaming state suggesting performance during a period in which the gaming round corresponding to the special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition is being executed.

According to feature jC2, the gaming state suggestion effect is not executed during the period when the gaming round corresponding to the special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition is being executed, so the gaming state is not shown to the player during the execution of the gaming round. The player can be made to guess, giving the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and making the player pay attention to the game. In addition, the player cannot identify that the gaming state of a gaming session has changed during the execution of the gaming session, and during the execution of the gaming session, it is not possible for the player to identify whether the gaming status has changed or not. It is possible to make the player guess, to constantly draw attention to the game, and to further give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency.

[Features jC3]
The gaming machine according to feature jC1 or feature jC2,
The performance execution means is
If the gaming state of the gaming round changes to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the current state, the special information corresponding to the gaming round to be executed after the time when the gaming state changes satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by executing the gaming state suggesting performance when

According to feature jC3, it is possible to make the player recognize and recall after the fact that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition despite the unfavorable gaming state, through the playing state suggesting performance, and the player It can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction.

[Features jC4]
The gaming machine described in feature jC3,
The performance execution means is
means for executing the gaming state suggestion effect when the gaming state of the gaming round changes to a gaming state more disadvantageous than the current state and the special information corresponding to the gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature jC4, a gaming state suggestion effect is executed in a special case where the gaming state of a gaming round changes to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the current state, and the special information corresponding to the gaming round satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give a great sense of superiority to the player who recognizes that the game state suggesting performance has been executed.

<Characteristics jD group>
The feature jD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
The game state in the game round is controlled to one of a plurality of types of game states, and as the plurality of types of game states, the most advantageous state which is the most advantageous game state (high probability high in the tenth embodiment) the most disadvantageous state (low probability low frequency state), which is the most disadvantageous gaming state; and the medium advantageous state (low probability state), which is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous state and more advantageous than the most disadvantageous state. a means capable of controlling at least three gaming states with a probability high frequency state;
The performance execution means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the middle advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the most advantageous state and the most disadvantageous state. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a specific effect that is not executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to feature jD1, when the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the medium advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition, the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the most advantageous state and the most disadvantageous state Since a specific performance is executed that would not be executed if the conditions of It is possible to make the player strongly aware of the situation, and it is possible to give the player a sense of crisis after the fact (a sense of crisis caused by learning later that the situation was actually dangerous), as well as a sense of accomplishment and superiority.

[Feature jD2]
The gaming machine according to feature jD1,
The performance execution means is
When the gaming state changes from the most advantageous state to the middle advantageous state, and when the special information corresponding to the game round in the middle advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, as the specific effect. , a gaming machine that executes a gaming state suggestion effect that suggests information regarding the gaming state in the relevant gaming round.

According to feature jD2, when the most advantageous state changes to a middle advantageous state and the special information corresponding to the game round in the middle advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition, the game is Since the game-suggesting performance that suggests information about the game state at the time is executed, by executing a specific performance, the game state has changed from the most advantageous state to the medium-advantageous state, that is, the game state has become unfavorable. It is possible to make the player recall that the game condition had changed, and to give the player a sense of accomplishment and superiority that the special information has satisfied a predetermined condition even though the game condition has changed to a disadvantageous one. can.

[Feature jD3]
The gaming machine according to feature jD2,
The performance execution means is
At least during a period in which the special information corresponding to the game rounds in the most advantageous state, the medium advantageous state, and the most disadvantageous state does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a suggestion regarding the game state in the game round to be executed is provided. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for not performing a performance.

According to feature jD3, at least during a period in which the special information corresponding to the game rounds in the most advantageous state, medium advantageous state, and most disadvantageous state does not satisfy a predetermined condition, a suggestion regarding the game state in the game round to be executed is provided. Since no performance is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which gaming state the game round is being executed during the execution of these game rounds. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the gaming state during the execution of the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game. . Furthermore, when performing such processing, if special information corresponding to a game run executed in a medium advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition and a specific effect is executed, or In the case where the state changes to an advantageous state and the special information corresponding to the game round in the middle advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition, the game state in the game round that has been executed until now can be changed by a specific production. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and after the fact, it is possible to create a gameplay experience in which the player is reminded of the game status and game content of the game play that has been executed so far, and to improve the interest of the game. . Furthermore, since the player is also made aware that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

[Feature jD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features jD1 to feature jD3,
comprising a benefit granting means that, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, grants a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
When the special information corresponding to the game round in which the gaming state is the middle advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, the benefit granting means grants one of a plurality of types of granting modes of the benefit. comprising means for granting the benefit in a manner,
The performance execution means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round executed in the medium advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, and the benefit granting means selects a specific granting mode from among the plurality of types of bonus granting modes. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the specific effect when awarding a benefit.

According to feature jD4, when special information corresponding to a game round executed in a medium advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition, and the benefit granting means is in a specific granting mode among multiple types of benefit granting modes, Since a specific effect is executed when a benefit is given, when a specific effect is executed, special information corresponding to a game round executed in a medium advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition for the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware that the privilege is awarded in a specific awarding manner, and it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Characteristics jE group>
The feature jE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Judgment means for judging whether or not it is a hit based on the acquired special information;
Winning type determining means for determining a winning type that is a winning type when the result of the determination by the determining means is a winning win;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
If the result of the determination in the executed game round is a winning game, the preceding winning game round is a game round that was determined to be a winning game one game before the game round in which the winning game was determined to be a winning game. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a suggestive performance (specific performance in the tenth embodiment) that suggests information based on the winning type.

According to feature jE1, if the result of the determination in the executed game round is a winning win, there is a preceding winning which is a game round that was determined to be a winning win one game before the game round in which the winning winning was determined. Since the suggestion performance suggesting information based on the winning type in the game round is executed, the player who recognizes the suggestion performance can be made to recognize the winning type corresponding to the previous winning winning. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that does not suggest to the player the winning type corresponding to the winning game in the advance winning game round, the next time the player wins a winning game, a suggestive performance that suggests information based on the winning type in the preceding winning game round is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize the type of winning in the advance winning game round after the fact, and it is possible to create a gaming experience that allows the player to reminisce about the games from the advance winning game round until now. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

[Features jE2]
The game times described in feature jE1,
The winning type determining means determines one winning type from among winning types including at least a first winning type and a second winning type, as the winning type to be determined;
The first winning type is a winning type that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second winning type,
The performance execution means is
means for executing the suggestion performance when the result of the determination in the executed game round is a win, and when the winning type in the preceding winning game round is the first winning type. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature jE2, when the result of the determination in the executed game round is a win, and the winning type in the preceding winning game round is the first winning type, the suggestion effect is executed. Even though the player won with an unfavorable winning type in the previous winning game round (for example, a normal jackpot on a gaming machine that can set a normal jackpot and a variable jackpot), the player is informed by a suggestive performance that he has won after that. By making the player aware of this after the fact, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and superiority.

[Features jE3]
The gaming machine according to feature jE1 or feature jE2,
Comprising a game state control means for controlling a game state,
The gaming state control means includes:
Based on the winning type related to the winning winning, controlling the gaming state in the gaming round to be executed after the gaming round in which the winning winning is determined,
The performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the game round, the game state in the game round that is being executed executes an effect that is difficult or impossible for the player to discern.

According to feature jE3, based on the winning type related to the winning game, the game state in the game round to be executed after the game round in which the winning game is determined to be a winning game is controlled, so that the winning type in the preceding winning game round is different from the winning type in the subsequent game. Affect the state. However, since the player executes a performance that is difficult or impossible for the player to discern the game state in the game round that is being executed, it is difficult to determine which type of winning the preceding winning game round was, and in which game state the game round is being played. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to identify whether the game is being executed or not. As a result, during the execution of a game round, it is possible for the player to guess the winning type of the advance winning game round and the game state of the game round being executed, giving the player a sense of anticipation and tension. be able to. In addition, if you win a winning game in such a situation and execute a suggestive effect, the winning type of the preceding winning game, the game status of the game that has been executed so far, and the content of the game will be changed after the fact. It is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to reminisce and to let the player reminisce, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Characteristics jF group>
The feature jF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Judgment means for judging whether or not it is a hit based on the acquired special information;
Winning type determining means for determining a winning type that is a winning type when the result of the determination by the determining means is a winning win;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
If the result of the determination in the executed game round is a winning win, the winning type in the game round in which the winning game was determined to be a win, and the game time that was one game before the game round in which the winning game was determined to be a winning win. Based on the winning type in the preceding winning game round, which is the game round in which the win was determined to be a win, the performance to be performed after the game round in which the winning was determined (the specific performance in the tenth embodiment) is determined. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for.

According to feature jF1, if the result of the determination in the executed game round is a win, based on the winning type in the game round in which the winning was determined and the winning type in the preceding winning game round, Since the performance to be executed after the game round that was determined to be a winning win is determined, the performance that is executed after the game round that is determined to be a winning win is determined, so that the player who recognizes the performance that has been performed after the game round that is determined to be a winning prize is notified based on the relevant performance. It is possible to make players guess about the winning type in the game round that was determined to be ``win'' and the winning type in the advance winning game round, and in addition to feeling excited about the game round that is currently being played, it is also interesting to have the player reminisce about the game round that was played in the past. can be granted to

[Features jF2]
The gaming machine according to feature jF1,
The winning type determining means determines, as the winning type to be determined, one winning type from among the winning types including at least a first winning type (normal jackpot) and a second winning type (probable variable jackpot),
The first winning type is a winning type that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second winning type,
The performance execution means is
If the result of the determination in the executed game round is a winning of the second winning type, and the winning type in the preceding winning game round is the first winning type, A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific performance after the game round that is a win of a second winning type.

According to feature jF2, if the result of the determination in the executed game round is a winning of the second winning type, and the winning type in the preceding winning game round is the first winning type, Since a specific effect is executed after the game round where the winning type of 2 is won, a player wins with an unfavorable winning type (for example, a normal jackpot on a gaming machine that can set normal jackpot and variable probability jackpot) in the preceding winning game round. However, after the fact, the player is notified through a specific production that he or she has won a win with an advantageous winning type (for example, a regular jackpot and a fixed variable jackpot on a gaming machine that can be set to a normal jackpot and a fixed variable jackpot). By making the player aware of this, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and superiority.

<Characteristics jG group>
The feature jG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Features jG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
comprising means for controlling the gaming state in the gaming round to at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The performance execution means is
The game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a game round where the condition is satisfied, and the game round that corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition one time before the game round where the condition is satisfied is defined as the game round that corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. In the case of a game round in which the preceding condition is satisfied, a predetermined performance (a specific performance in the tenth embodiment) to be executed in response to the execution of the game round in which the condition is satisfied is executed after the end of the game round in which the preceding condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining based on a mode of change in a game state in a game round executed until after the end of the game round in which the condition is satisfied.

According to feature jG1, a predetermined effect that is executed upon execution of a game round where the condition is satisfied is executed during the game round that is executed between after the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and after the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. Since the determination is made based on the mode of change in the gaming state in The mode of change can be recognized (confirmed). For example, even if the player is unable to recognize the manner in which the gaming state has changed in the game run executed between the end of the game run where the preceding condition is met and the end of the game run where the condition is met, the predetermined By making the player aware of the performance, the player can be made to recognize after the fact the manner in which the gaming state has changed in the game rounds that have been played so far, and the game performance in the game rounds that have been played so far It is possible to create a gameplay experience that allows players to reminisce about the state and the contents of the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Features jG2]
The gaming machine described in feature jG1,
The performance execution means is
The performance to be executed after the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied is based on the mode of change in the gaming state in the game round executed between after the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and after the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for determining.

According to feature jG2, the mode of change in the gaming state in the game round executed between the end of the preceding condition satisfying game round and the end of the condition satisfying game round is performed after the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. Since the decision is made based on the above, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game and performance even after the game round in which the condition is satisfied has ended.

[Features jG3]
The gaming machine according to feature jG1 or feature jG2,
The second gaming state (high probability mode) is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low probability mode),
The performance execution means is
If the second gaming state shifts to the first gaming state between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied, the game round where the condition is satisfied is executed. a means of executing a specific performance in response to the
If the second gaming state is maintained between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied, the specific effect will not be applied even if the game round where the condition is satisfied is executed. means not to carry out the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature jG3, a specific effect is executed when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition after transitioning from the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, to the first gaming state, which is a disadvantageous gaming state. do. Specifically, after the player's expectations have temporarily decreased due to the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, a specific effect is executed if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. By executing a specific performance, it is possible to further enhance the player's joy when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in a state where expectations have been reduced, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can.

[Features jG4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature jG1 to feature jG3,
The performance executing means includes a game round performance executing means for executing a game round performance in a game round that is executed between after the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and after the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied,
The game rendition execution means is
As the game round effect, the mode of change in the game state in the game round executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied is impossible or difficult for the player to discern. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a performance (state non-display performance).

According to feature jG4, as a game round effect, it is impossible for the player to discern the manner in which the game state changes in the game round that is executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. Or, because a difficult performance is executed, the player cannot recognize the mode of change in the gaming state from the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied until the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied, and It is possible to arouse the player's desire to know the mode of change. In such a state, by executing a predetermined effect triggered by the execution of a game round in which the condition is satisfied, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the predetermined effect.

<Characteristics jH group>
The feature jH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a benefit granting unit that, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, grants a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
comprising a game state switching means capable of controlling the game state in the game round to at least a first game state and a second game state;
The benefit granting means is
During the benefit award period, which is the period that starts after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions, game balls are sent to specific ball openings into which game balls can enter. A specific ball entrance state transition means that executes a specific ball entrance state transition process that transitions between a ball entry possible state in which a game ball can be entered and a non-ball entry possible state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball. and,
A specific period (opening period in the tenth embodiment and a specific time determining means for determining a specific time that is the temporal length of the ending period);
The specific time determining means includes:
The game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a game round where the condition is satisfied, and the game round that corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition one time before the game round where the condition is satisfied is defined as the game round that corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. In the case of a game round in which the preceding condition is satisfied, the identification is performed based on the mode of change in the gaming state in the game round executed between the end of the game round in which the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round in which the condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining time.

According to feature jH1, the specific time is determined based on the mode of change in the gaming state in the game round executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, when executing an effect during a period corresponding to a specific time, the content of the effect is determined according to the manner of change in the gaming state in the game round executed until the end of the game round where the condition is met. can do. As a result, the player who has recognized the effect can, based on the effect, change the state of the game in the game rounds executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. can be recognized (confirmed). Suppose that the player recognizes, while the game round is being executed, the mode of change in the gaming state in the game round executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is met. Even if the player is unable to do so, by making the player aware of the effect, the player can be made aware of the changes in the gaming state in the game rounds played so far, and this It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay experience in which the player can reminisce about the game status and game contents of the game rounds played up to that point.

[Feature jH2]
The gaming machine according to feature jH1,
The specific time determining means includes:
A pre-grant period that determines the pre-grant time, which is the temporal length of a pre-grant period (opening period), which is a period from the start of the benefit grant period to the start of the state transition processing period, of the specific period. Equipped with time determining means,
The pre-grant time determining means includes:
comprising means for determining the pre-granting time based on a mode of change in the gaming state in a gaming session executed between the end of the gaming session where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the gaming session where the condition is satisfied. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature jH2, the pre-granting time is determined based on the mode of change in the gaming state in the game run executed between the end of the game run where the preceding condition is met and the end of the game run where the condition is met. Therefore, for example, when performing a performance during the period corresponding to the pre-grant time, the content of the performance may be changed depending on the change in the gaming state in the game round executed before the end of the game round where the condition is met. can be determined. As a result, the player who has recognized the effect can, based on the effect, change the state of the game in the game rounds executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. can be recognized (confirmed). Even if the player is unable to recognize the mode of change in the gaming state in the game round executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is met, the relevant production By making the player aware of this, it is possible to make the player recognize after the fact the manner in which the gaming state has changed in the gaming rounds that have been played so far. It is possible to create a gameplay experience that allows players to reminisce about the content of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Features jH3]
The gaming machine according to feature jH1,
The specific time determining means includes:
A post-grant time that determines the post-grant time, which is the temporal length of a post-grant period (ending period), which is a period from the end of the state transition processing period to the end of the benefit grant period, of the specific period. Equipped with decision means,
The post-grant time determining means includes:
comprising means for determining the post-granting time based on a mode of change in the gaming state in a gaming session executed between the end of the gaming session where the preceding condition is met and the end of the gaming session where the condition is met. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature jH3, the post-grant time is determined based on the mode of change in the gaming state in the game rounds executed from the end of the game round in which the preceding condition is satisfied to the end of the game round in which the condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, when executing a performance during a period corresponding to the time after granting, the content of the performance may be changed depending on the change in the gaming state in the game round executed before the end of the game round where the condition is met. can be determined. As a result, the player who has recognized the effect can, based on the effect, change the state of the game in the game rounds executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition is satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition is satisfied. can be recognized (confirmed). Furthermore, by executing the performance during the period corresponding to the time after award, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game until the end of the award award period, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature jI group>
The feature jI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a benefit granting unit that, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, grants a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
A gaming state in which the gaming state in the gaming round can be controlled into at least a first gaming state (low probability mode) and a second gaming state (high probability mode) more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Equipped with a switching means,
The game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is a first specific game round, and the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is set as the first specific game round. In the case of the second specific game round,
The performance execution means is
When the gaming state of the gaming round executed after the first specific gaming round is the second gaming state, and the gaming state of the second specific gaming round is the first gaming state, A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific performance execution means for executing a performance (specific performance in the tenth embodiment).

According to feature jI1, when the gaming state of a gaming round executed after the first specific gaming round is the second gaming state, and the gaming state of the second specific gaming round is the first gaming state, Execute the performance. That is, after a game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a game round in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player starts, and then the gaming state shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player, and then the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Execute a specific performance when the conditions are met. Therefore, after the player's expectations are temporarily lowered due to a transition to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, a specific performance is executed when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the player's expectations are reduced. By executing a specific performance, the player's joy in knowing that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition can be further enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature jI2]
The gaming machine according to feature jI1,
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing, as the specific performance, a performance that suggests that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game round that is the first gaming state.

According to feature jI2, as a specific performance, a performance that suggests that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in the game round that is the first gaming state is executed, so that the special information is changed from an unfavorable gaming state to a predetermined one. It is possible to make the player strongly aware that the conditions have been met, and it is possible to further impart a sense of superiority and expectation.

[Feature jI3]
The gaming machine according to feature jI1 or feature jI2,
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance is executed after the end of the second specific game round.

According to feature jI3, since the specific performance is executed after the end of the second specific game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and anticipation even after the second specific game round has ended. At the same time, it is possible to attract attention to the game.

<Characteristics jJ group>
The feature jJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jJ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a game state control means for controlling the game state of the game round;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
A game in which a game state suggesting performance (a specific performance in the tenth embodiment) that suggests the game state of a completed game round, which is the game round that has already been executed, is executed after the time when the completed game round ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a state suggesting performance execution means.

According to feature jJ1, since the game state suggestion effect that suggests the game state of the played game round is executed after the played game round ends, the game state and the game status of the game round played so far are executed. It is possible to create a gameplay experience in which the content can be recalled after the fact, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Features jJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature jJ1,
The gaming state suggestion performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the gaming state suggesting performance when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature jJ2, the game system is provided with a means for executing a game state suggesting effect when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, thereby giving the player a sense of superiority that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In addition to this, it is possible to make the player aware of the gaming state that led to the special information meeting the predetermined conditions, so it is possible to make the player even more aware that the special information has satisfied the predetermined conditions. It is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction.

[Features jJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature jJ1 or feature jJ2,
The gaming state suggestion performance execution means is
The present invention is characterized by comprising means for executing the game state suggestion performance when the game state of the executed game round satisfies a specific condition (for example, when transitioning from a high probability mode to a low probability mode). Game machine.

According to feature jJ3, when the gaming status of the executed gaming session satisfies a specific condition, the gaming status suggestion effect is executed, so that depending on the setting of the specific condition, the player is not given the opportunity to play the gaming session of the executed gaming session. It is possible to control the timing at which the state is recalled afterwards. For example, if a specific condition is set such that the gaming state of the played game round is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player and the special state satisfies a predetermined condition, It is possible to recall what happened after the fact, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction that the special information has satisfied a predetermined condition.

[Features jJ4]
The gaming machine according to feature jJ3,
The gaming state control means includes:
The gaming state in the gaming round can be controlled to at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The gaming state suggestion performance execution means is
When the gaming state of the executed gaming session satisfies the specific condition, at least the gaming state of the executed gaming session immediately before executing the gaming status suggestion effect is the first gaming state. A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the gaming state suggesting performance.

According to feature jJ4, when the gaming state of the executed gaming session satisfies a specific condition, at least when the gaming status of the executed gaming session immediately before executing the gaming status suggestion performance is the first gaming state. , since the game state suggestion performance is executed, if the special information corresponding to the game played immediately before the game state suggestion performance satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information will be further adjusted to the predetermined condition. It is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction for having fulfilled the requirements.

<Characteristics jK group>
The feature jK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jK1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The determining means is
The determination can be performed in a first determination mode (low probability mode) or a second determination mode (high probability mode),
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the determination is performed in the second determination mode than when the determination is performed in the first determination mode,
Furthermore, the gaming machine
Prior to the determination by the determining means in the game round to be executed, determination mode determining means is provided for determining the determination mode in the game round;
The performance execution means is
In the case where the determination mode in the game round executed immediately before the game round to be determined, which is the game round that is the target of the determination by the determination means, is the second determination mode, the game round to be determined The judgment mode in is the first judgment mode (in the tenth embodiment, the player wins the fall lottery in the judgment target game round), and the special information corresponding to the judgment target game round meets the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect (the specific effect in the tenth embodiment) when it is determined that the condition is satisfied.

According to feature jK1, when the determination mode in the game round executed immediately before the target game round is the second determination mode, the determination mode in the target game round is the first determination mode, and , when it is determined that the special information corresponding to the game round to be determined satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific effect is executed, so the player who recognizes that the specific effect has been executed can perform the second judgment. It is recognized that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in the game round when the mode is shifted to the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise at the occurrence of an extremely rare event in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in the game round when the second determination mode was shifted to the first determination mode, and Despite being in the first determination mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and accomplishment because the special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Features jK2]
The gaming machine described in feature jK1,
The specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for executing, as the specific performance, a suggestive performance that suggests that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition while the determination mode is in the first determination mode.

According to feature jK2, as a specific effect, a suggestion effect that suggests that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is executed when the judgment mode is in the first judgment mode. Nevertheless, it is possible to make the player more aware that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to encourage the player's sense of superiority and accomplishment.

[Features jK3]
The gaming machine according to feature jK1 or feature jK2,
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the specific performance after the end of the game round to be determined.

According to feature jK3, since the specific performance is executed after the end of the game round to be determined, after the result of the determination in the game round to be determined is announced, that is, the game to be determined Even after the game ends, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game.

<Features jL>
The feature jL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jL1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
The determination mode of the determination means is set to a first determination mode or a second determination mode that has a higher probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition than executing the determination in the first determination mode (low probability mode). (high probability mode);
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
specific processing execution means for executing a specific process after a condition-satisfied game round that corresponds to special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
Specific processing time determining means for determining a specific processing time (opening time and ending time in the tenth embodiment) that is the time for executing the specific process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific processing time determining means includes:
Determining the specific processing time based on whether or not the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at a timing after the end of the game round immediately before the game round where the condition is met. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for.

According to feature jL1, the specific processing time is determined based on whether or not the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the timing after the end of the game round immediately before the game round where the condition is met. For example, by changing the length of the specific processing time depending on whether or not the first determination mode has shifted to the second determination mode after the end of the game round immediately before the game round where the condition is met, The player can be made to recognize whether or not the first determination mode has shifted to the second determination mode.

[Features jL2]
The gaming machine described in feature jL1,
comprising a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The benefit granting means is
During the benefit award period, which is the period that starts after the end of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions, game balls are sent to specific ball openings into which game balls can enter. A specific ball entrance state transition means that executes a specific ball entrance state transition process that transitions between a ball entry possible state in which a game ball can enter and a non-ball entry possible state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball. Equipped with
The specific processing time is
The game is characterized in that it is the temporal length of the period excluding the state transition processing period (opening/closing processing period), which is the period during which the specific entrance ball state transition processing is executed, out of the period for awarding benefits. Machine.

According to feature jL2, the specific processing time is the length of the period for awarding benefits excluding the state transition processing period, which is the period during which the specific entrance state transition processing is being executed. For example, using the period excluding the state transition processing period of the period for granting benefits, the judgment mode changes from the second judgment mode to the first judgment at the timing after the end of the game round immediately before the game round where the condition is satisfied. The player can be made aware of whether or not the mode has been shifted to. As a result, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game even during the bonus granting period after the condition-fulfilling game round has ended.

[Features jL3]
The gaming machine described in feature jL2,
The specific processing time is
A gaming machine characterized in that the time length is a pre-granting period (opening period), which is a period from the start of the privilege granting period to the start of the state transition processing period.

According to feature jL3, the specific processing time is the length of the pre-grant period, which is the period from the start of the benefit grant period to the start of the state transition processing period. The player can be made to recognize whether or not the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at a timing after the end of the game round immediately before the game round where the condition is satisfied. As a result, even in the pre-granting period after the condition-fulfilling game round ends, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game.

[Features jL4]
The gaming machine described in feature jL2,
The specific processing time is
A gaming machine characterized in that the time length is a post-grant period (ending period) that is a period from the end of the state transition processing period to the end of the privilege grant period.

According to feature jL4, the specific processing time is the temporal length of the post-grant period, which is the period from the end of the state transition processing period to the end of the benefit grant period. The player can be made to recognize whether or not the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at a timing after the end of the game round immediately before the game round where the condition is met. As a result, even in the pre-granting period after the condition-fulfilling game round ends, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game.

<Characteristics>
The feature jM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jM1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state in the gaming round to at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A specific area where game balls can be distributed (V zone in the 10th embodiment),
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
When game balls circulate in the specific area during a specific period, means for controlling the gaming state of a game round starting after the specific period to the second gaming state (high probability mode). ,
The performance execution means is
Means for executing a game state suggesting performance (specific performance in the tenth embodiment) that suggests the game state in the already executed game round, triggered by the distribution of game balls in the specific area during the specific period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature jM1, when a game ball circulates in a specific area during a specific period, a game state suggestion effect that suggests the game state in the already executed game round is executed, so that the game ball circulates in a specific area. By distributing this, the game state of the game round started after a specific period will be controlled to the second game state, and this will promote the joy of players, and will also increase the pleasure of the players in the game round that has been executed so far. It is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to reminisce about the state and the content of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Features jM2]
The gaming machine according to feature jM1,
The performance execution means is
When the gaming state of the game run executed immediately before the specific period is the first gaming state, the gaming state is changed to A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a suggestive performance.

According to feature jM2, when the gaming state of the game run executed immediately before a specific period is the first gaming state, the game is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball circulates in a specific area during a specific period. Executes a state-suggesting performance. In other words, in a state where the game state of the game run executed immediately before a specific period is the first gaming state, and the player's sense of expectation is lowered, the game balls circulate in a specific area and the player's expectations are lowered. When it is determined that the game will be in an advantageous state, a game state suggesting performance is executed. Therefore, in a state where the player's sense of expectation has decreased, the game ball passes through a specific area and the game state suggesting effect is executed to increase the player's joy that the game ball has passed through the specific area. , it is possible to further promote the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features jM3]
The gaming machine according to feature jM1 or feature jM2,
The specific period starts after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
The performance execution means is
After the end of the first game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed after the first game round is changed to the predetermined condition. The gaming state of the gaming round executed until the end of the second gaming round that satisfies the condition shifts from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, and When the gaming state is the first gaming state, the gaming state suggestion is triggered by a game ball circulating in the specific area during the specific period that starts after the end of the second gaming round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a performance.

According to feature jM3, the game state of a game run executed between the end of the first game time and the end of the second game time changes from the second game state to the first game state. When the game state of the second game round is the first game state, a game state suggesting performance is executed using the fact that game balls circulate in a specific area in a specific period as an opportunity. Therefore, in a state where the player's expectations have been significantly reduced due to the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state between the first gaming round and the second gaming round, the second gaming round When the special information meets a predetermined condition in the second game round, the player's expectation increases, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during a specific period after the end of the second game round, the player's expectation increases further. In this state, a game state suggesting performance is executed, which helps to increase the player's sense of expectation, and also allows the game state suggestive performance to later explain the change in the game state in the game rounds played so far. It is possible to make the player aware of this, and it is possible to create a gameplay experience in which the player is reminded of the game status and game contents of the game rounds played so far, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Features jN>
The feature jN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature jN1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state in the gaming round to at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
a benefit granting unit that, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, grants a benefit to the player after the completion of a condition-fulfilling game round that is a game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition; ,
A specific area where game balls can be distributed,
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting means is
During the benefit granting period, which is the period that starts after the end of the game round where the above conditions are met, a game ball can be entered into a specific ball opening that can be entered into a ball entry state. A specific ball entrance state transition means that executes a specific ball entrance state transition process for transitioning between a non-enterable state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball;
Of the benefit granting period, the grant is a period from the end of the state transition processing period (opening/closing processing period) during which the specific entrance state transition processing is executed until the end of the benefit granting period. Post-grant time determining means for determining the post-grant time which is the temporal length of the subsequent period (ending period in the tenth embodiment);
The gaming state control means includes:
If game balls are distributed in the specific area during a specific period that is included in the benefit grant period and is earlier than the post-grant period, the game starts after the specific period. comprising means for controlling the gaming state of the gaming session to the second gaming state,
The post-grant time determining means includes:
Executed between after the end of the preceding condition-satisfied game round, which is a game round corresponding to the special information that satisfied the predetermined condition one time before the condition-satisfied game round, and after the end of the condition-satisfied game round. A gaming machine comprising means for determining the post-granting time based on the gaming state in the gaming round.

According to feature jN1, the post-granting time is determined based on the mode of change in the gaming state in the game round executed from the end of the game round in which the preceding condition is satisfied to the end of the game round in which the condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, when performing a performance during a period corresponding to the time after granting, the content of the performance can be determined according to the gaming state in the game round executed before the end of the game round where the condition is met. can. As a result, the player who has recognized the performance can recognize the gaming state in the game round that was executed between the end of the game round where the preceding condition was satisfied and the end of the game round where the condition was satisfied based on the relevant performance. can. Furthermore, by executing the performance during the period corresponding to the time after award, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game until the end of the award award period, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, if the game ball circulates in a specific area during a specific period, the relevant effect will be executed in the subsequent post-granting period, and the player's joy that the game ball circulated in the specific area will be expressed. This can be aided by directing.

[Feature jN2]
The gaming machine according to feature jN1,
Equipped with a performance execution means for performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
During the post-granting period, execute a gaming state suggesting performance that is a performance that suggests the gaming state in a gaming round that was executed between after the end of the game round where the preceding condition was satisfied and after the end of the game round where the condition was satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature jN2, since the game state suggestion effect is executed during the post-granting period, it creates a gaming experience that allows the player to reminisce about the game state and game contents of the game rounds played so far after the fact. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game until the end of the period for awarding the benefit, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristics jO group>
The feature jO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Features jO1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state control means includes:
comprising means for controlling the game state of the game round to one of a plurality of types of game states;
The performance execution means is
When the game state of the game round changes, a first specific performance (battle performance in Modification 10 of the 10th embodiment) is executed in the game time in which the game state changes (winning the falling lottery). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for.

According to feature jO1, when the game state of a game round changes, the first specific performance is executed in the game time where the game state has changed, so the game recognizes that the first specific performance has been executed. It is possible to make the player guess what the game state of the game round will be, and give the player a sense of expectation and tension.

[Features jO2]
The gaming machine described in feature jO1,
The performance execution means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round after the game round in which the first specific performance was executed satisfies the predetermined condition, the second specific performance (the specific performance in Modified Example 10 of the 10th Embodiment) ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second specific performance execution means for executing.

According to feature jO2, when the special information corresponding to the game round after the game round in which the first specific performance was executed satisfies the predetermined condition, the second specific performance is executed, so the second specific performance is executed. In addition to feeling happy that the special information has satisfied the predetermined condition, the player who recognizes that the special information has been played is asked to guess that the game state of the game has changed, and the game that has been played so far is It is possible to create a gaming experience that allows the player to reminisce about the game state and game content during the game.

[Features jO3]
The gaming machine described in feature jO2,
The second specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing, as the second specific performance, a performance that suggests that the gaming state has changed in the game round in which the first specific performance was executed.

According to feature jO3, as the second specific performance, a performance that suggests that the gaming state has changed in the game round in which the first specific performance was executed is executed, so that it is possible to know that the second specific performance has been executed. Making the recognized player recognize that the gaming state had changed in the game round in which the first specific performance was executed, and the gaming state and game content in the game round after the first specific performance was executed. It is possible to create a gameplay experience that allows the player to reminisce.

[Features jO4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features jO1 to feature jO3,
The performance execution means is
When the gaming state of the gaming round changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the first specific performance is executed in the gaming round in which the gaming state changes (winning the falling lottery). have the means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

According to feature jO4, by executing the first specific performance, the player can be made to recognize that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition even though the gaming state has changed to a disadvantageous gaming state, and the game It can give people a sense of superiority and satisfaction.

<Characteristic kA group>
The feature kA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588),
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect during a predetermined period;
When a predetermined game condition is established, a game information storage means that stores predetermined game information (initial variation off flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag, and Initial variation special reach flag, MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412, and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach effect pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512, and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process of FIG. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the out-of-off performance pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, means (sound emission control board 91 side MPU 92 and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 643 executed by the MPU 92)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kA1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of settings by accepting an external operation, and the numerical information is The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the predetermined winning probability setting. Then, when a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied, predetermined gaming information is stored by the gaming information storage means. Further, based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, the specific performance execution means displays a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined gaming condition is met, and from the observation results estimates the probability that a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information will appear in a predetermined period, and then sets the performance. It is possible to wait for the information image to appear, and from the appearance of the effect information image, to know which numerical information is stored.

Assuming that the comparative example gaming machine is configured to display an image corresponding to the winning probability setting with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example gaming machine has a configuration in which the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the winning probability setting is Since the amount depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the feature kA1, the performance information image is displayed with a predetermined probability in a predetermined period based on the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, so that the player can: You can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of performance information images. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that a performance information image as a specific performance will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature kA1, in order to grasp the probability of appearance of a performance information image as a specific performance, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is met. , it is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which predetermined gaming conditions are met.

When a plurality of gaming machines of feature kA1 are installed, the player creates a machine where a specific effect is likely to appear by creating a state in which a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied on each machine. be able to.

[Feature kA2]
The gaming machine according to feature kA1,
The game information storage means includes:
The first gaming information is stored when the first gaming condition (initial variation normal reach) is established, and a second gaming condition (initial variation super reach) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming condition is established. comprising means for storing second game information when
The specific performance execution means is
When the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information than when the predetermined game information is the first game information, the predetermined game information for displaying the performance information image is A gaming machine characterized by high probability.

According to feature kA2, the first game information that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the first game information stored when the first game condition is satisfied. Since the probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when the second game information is stored when the second game condition is satisfied, the probability of appearance of the effect information image is higher for the player. From this point of view, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second gaming condition, which is advantageous to the player, will be established as the predetermined gaming condition.

[Feature kA3]
The gaming machine according to feature kA1 or feature kA2,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kA3, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after the end of the game round, and the specific effect execution means, A performance information image as a specific performance is displayed during a period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific effect.

[Feature kA4]
The gaming machine according to feature kA1 or feature kA2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is one period in the game round (a period in which a reach effect is performed).

According to feature kA4, a performance information image as a specific performance is displayed during one period in a game round. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a specific performance should appear for a certain period of time in the game.

[Feature kA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kA1 to feature kA4,
The game information storage means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for storing the type of the performance executed in the game round as the predetermined game information when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the time when the game round becomes a starting point. .

According to feature kA5, the game information storage means stores the type of performance to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, and the specific performance execution means stores Based on the type of the performance, the performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information is displayed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, in order to understand the stored numerical information, the player needs to play the game when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. , it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game the predetermined number of times.

<Characteristic kB group>
The feature kB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 7 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Features kB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588),
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect of displaying a effect information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical information during a predetermined period;
When a predetermined game condition is established, a game information storage means that stores predetermined game information (initial variation off flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag, and Initial variation special reach flag, MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412, and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach effect pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512, and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process of FIG. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the out-of-off performance pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Determining the predetermined period for executing the specific performance from among a plurality of performance periods for executing the performance based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means. Period determining means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk3302 to Step Sk3306 of the normal reach performance pattern table reference process in FIG. 619 executed by the MPU 92, and super reach in FIG. 620 executed by the MPU 92) Steps Sk3402 to Sk3406 of the effect pattern table reference process, Steps Sk4202 to Sk4206 of the effect pattern table reference process for failure shown in FIG. 628 executed by the MPU92, and Steps of the ending effect process of FIG. Sk4302 to step Sk4306 etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kB1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of settings by accepting an operation from the outside, and the numerical information The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the predetermined winning probability setting. The game information storage means stores predetermined game information when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Then, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect for displaying the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical information in a predetermined period. Further, the execution period determining means provided in the specific performance execution means determines that the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is stored in at least the game information storage means from among the plurality of performance periods for executing the performance. It is determined based on the predetermined game information provided. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined game condition has been met, estimates the predetermined period in which a specific effect appears from the observation result, and estimates the effect information image during the predetermined period. It is possible to wait for the numerical information to appear, and from the appearance of the performance information image, to know which numerical information is stored. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which the period for executing a specific performance is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the period for executing a specific performance is determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to feature kB1, the period for executing a specific performance is not determined solely depending on the model of the gaming machine, so the player can Depending on the skill of the player, who strongly senses the randomness of the appearance period of a certain effect and takes into account whether or not a predetermined game condition is met, it is possible to accurately estimate the period during which a specific effect will be executed, and even to store it in memory. It is possible to understand which numerical information is included. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature kB1, in order to estimate the period for executing a specific performance, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is met. It is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which the conditions are met.

When a plurality of gaming machines with feature kB1 are installed, the player can create a state in which the predetermined gaming conditions are met on each machine, and select the machine where a period in which a specific effect is likely to occur is likely to occur. can be produced by hand.

[Features kB2]
The gaming machine described in feature kB1,
The game information storage means includes:
The first gaming information is stored when the first gaming condition (initial variation normal reach) is established, and a second gaming condition (initial variation super reach) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming condition is established. comprising means for storing second game information when
The execution period determining means includes:
A production that has a higher probability of being executed in a game round when the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information than when the predetermined game information is the first game information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for determining the predetermined period so as to be a production period for the following.

According to feature kB2, the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the first game information that is more advantageous to the player than the first game information that is stored when the first game condition is satisfied. The predetermined period is determined so that the second game information that is stored when the second game condition is satisfied is the performance period for a performance that has a higher probability of being executed in a game round. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second gaming condition, which is advantageous to the player, will be established as the predetermined gaming condition, also in terms of the frequency of occurrence during the predetermined period. .

[Features kB3]
The gaming machine described in feature kB1 or feature kB2,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of performance periods to be determined by the execution period determining means include a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a second period (ending period) after the ending period.

According to feature kB3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing a performance in a game round and a second period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. In either of the above, a specific effect is executed to display a effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical information. Since the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific performance will be executed more frequently.

[Features KB4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features kB1 to feature kB3,
The game information storage means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for storing the type of the performance executed in the game round as the predetermined game information when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the time when the game round becomes a starting point. .

According to feature kB4, the game information storage means stores the type of performance to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, and the specific performance execution means stores Based on the type of the performance, a predetermined period for executing a specific performance for displaying a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information is determined. Therefore, in order to understand the stored numerical information, the player needs to play the game when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. , it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game the predetermined number of times.

<Characteristic kC group>
The feature kC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment or modification 10 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kC1]
The first lottery means that executes the first lottery process (in the sixth modification, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and step Sk2401 of the first reach performance pattern setting process in FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92) , in Modification 10, an appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started up);
A second lottery means (MPU92 on the audio emission control board 91 side, and Sk5106 and Sk5107 of the ending effect setting process in FIG. 641 executed by the MPU92) that executes the second lottery process after executing the first lottery process;
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information (RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62);
A specific effect execution means (MPU 92 on the audio emission control board 91 side and ending effect setting processing executed by the MPU 92) that executes a specific effect;
In a gaming machine equipped with
If the first lottery result in the first lottery process (for example, normal reach in modification 6, high appearance probability in modification 10), the second lottery result in the second lottery process. comprising a lottery probability setting means for setting the probability that the
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying an effect information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the numerical information when the second lottery result is obtained in the second lottery process.

According to feature kC1, when the first lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process, the probability that the second lottery result will be obtained in the second lottery process is determined to be a predetermined probability, and the process is executed after the first lottery process is executed. When a second lottery result is obtained in the second lottery process performed, a performance information image corresponding to the numerical information is displayed. Therefore, the player first observes whether or not the first lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process, estimates the probability of obtaining the second lottery result in the second lottery process from the observation result, and then selects the second lottery result. In the process, it is possible to wait until the second lottery result and the performance information image appears, and from the appearance of the performance information image, it is possible to understand which numerical information is stored. When considering a configuration in which the performance information image is displayed with a predetermined probability as the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, since the probability of appearance of the performance information image depends only on the model of the gaming machine, The player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to feature kC1, the probability of obtaining the second lottery result in the second lottery process that determines whether or not to display the performance information image is determined based on the lottery result in the first lottery process. Therefore, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the performance information image. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player a sense of expectation that the performance information image will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature kC2]
The gaming machine according to feature kC1,
The lottery probability setting means is
comprising means for setting a probability of a second lottery result in the second lottery process to a probability lower than the predetermined probability when a lottery result other than the first lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process; A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature kC2, the probability that the performance information image will appear is higher when the lottery result of the first lottery process is the first lottery result than when it is other than the first lottery result. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he/she wants the first lottery result in the first lottery process.

[Feature kC3]
The gaming machine according to feature kC1 or feature kC2,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Equipped with
The numerical information storage means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for storing numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means as the predetermined numerical information.

According to feature kC3, the player is able to grasp the setting of the winning probability in the third lottery process from the appearance of the performance information image as a specific performance.

[Feature kC4]
The gaming machine according to feature kC3,
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance information image is displayed during one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined in the third lottery process that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kC4, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the third lottery process, after the end of the game round in which the specific performance execution means has determined that the conditions for winning are satisfied. During one period, a performance information image is displayed as a specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the third lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

<Characteristic kD group>
The feature kD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 8 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kD1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
Means for executing a special game state for giving a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means that the winning condition is satisfied, the means for executing a special game state that provides a bonus to the player, the game ball entering the second ball entry means; The benefit granted to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is granted to the player in the special game state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. a special game state execution means set to be more advantageous to the player than the said benefit provided to the player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588),
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 250) for sorting arriving game balls into a first path leading to the first ball entering means and a second path leading to the second ball entering means;
Sorting destination storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) for storing, as a distribution destination, which route out of the first route and the second route the arrived game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means; The first time fluctuation first symbol flag and the first time fluctuation second symbol flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the update process at the time of ball entry in FIG. 632 executed by the MPU 92),
a specific performance execution means for displaying a performance information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical information with a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
The predetermined appearance probability for displaying the performance information image is higher when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature kD1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of settings by accepting an operation from the outside, and the numerical information The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the predetermined winning probability setting. The distribution destination storage means stores, as the distribution destination, which route out of the first route and the second route the arriving game ball is distributed to by the distribution means. Then, during a predetermined period of time, the specific performance execution means gives more money than the first ball entering means than when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route leading to the first ball entering means. The performance information image is displayed so that the appearance probability of the performance information image is higher when the benefit to be given is a second route leading to an advantageous second ball entry means. Therefore, the player observes whether the arriving game ball is sorted to the first route or the second route by the sorting means, and based on the observation result, the memorized numerical value is determined within a predetermined period. It is possible to estimate the probability that a performance information image corresponding to the information will appear, wait for the performance information image to appear, and understand from the appearance of the performance information image which one is the stored numerical information.

Assuming that the comparative example gaming machine is configured to display an image corresponding to the winning probability setting with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example gaming machine has a configuration in which the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the winning probability setting is Since the amount depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the feature kD1, since the performance information image is displayed with the appearance probability based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means, the player can determine the appearance probability of the performance information image. You can feel the randomness strongly. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that a performance information image as a specific performance will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature kD1, the benefit provided is more advantageous than the first ball entry means than when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route leading to the first ball entry means. Since the probability of the appearance of a specific effect is higher when the second route leads to the second ball entry means, the probability of the appearance of the specific effect is higher for the player. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the destination of the ball to be distributed by the distribution means will be the second route.

[Feature kD2]
The gaming machine according to feature kD1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to the feature kD2, a specific effect is performed to suggest the setting of the winning probability based on the appearance probability during one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

[Feature kD3]
The gaming machine according to feature kD1 or feature kD2,
The allocation destination storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for storing, as an allocation destination, which route among the plurality of routes the first game ball is allocated to by the allocation means after the gaming machine is started up. .

According to feature kD3, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing, as the distribution destination, the route to which the first game ball was distributed by the distribution device after the gaming machine was activated. , when the gaming machine is started in the morning, by playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can know to which route the first game ball was distributed by the distributing means after the gaming machine was started. By observing it, you can infer the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, according to feature kD3, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kE group>
The feature kE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 8 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kE1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
Means for executing a special game state for giving a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means that the winning condition is satisfied, the means for executing a special game state that provides a bonus to the player, the game ball entering the second ball entry means; The benefit granted to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is granted to the player in the special game state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. a special game state execution means set to be more advantageous to the player than the said benefit provided to the player;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588),
a specific performance execution means for displaying a performance information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical information with a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
In the case where the special information when it is determined by the determining means that the winning condition is satisfied is obtained by entering the game ball into the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means A game machine characterized in that the predetermined appearance probability for displaying the performance information image is higher when the performance information image is acquired by a game ball entering the game ball.

According to feature kE1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of settings by accepting an operation from the outside, and the numerical information The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the predetermined winning probability setting. Then, special information is obtained by the specific effect executing means when the determining means determines that the winning conditions are satisfied during a predetermined period by entering the game ball into the first ball entering means. The effect information image is displayed so that the appearance probability of the effect information image is higher when the effect information image is obtained by entering the game ball into the second ball entering means. Therefore, the player must determine whether the special information when it is determined by the determining means that the winning conditions are met is due to the game ball entering the first ball entering means or whether the game ball is entering the second ball entering means. From the observation results, estimate the probability that a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information will appear during the predetermined period, wait for the performance information image to appear, and determine whether the performance information image appears. It is possible to understand which numerical information is stored from the performance information image.

Assuming that the comparative example gaming machine is configured to display an image corresponding to the winning probability setting with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example gaming machine has a configuration in which the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the winning probability setting is Since the amount depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to feature kE1, the special information when it is determined by the determining means that the winning conditions are satisfied is whether the special information is due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means, or whether the special information is due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means Since the performance information image is displayed with a probability of appearance depending on whether the game ball enters the game ball, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the performance information image. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that a performance information image as a specific performance will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature kE1, when the special information determined by the determining means that the winning conditions are satisfied is obtained by entering the game ball into the first ball entering means, the second If the image is obtained by entering the game ball into the ball entering means, the probability of appearance of the effect information image as a specific effect is higher, so the appearance of the specific effect for the player is higher. Also from the perspective of probability, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the game ball should enter the second ball entry means rather than the first ball entry means.

[Feature kE2]
The gaming machine according to feature kE1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to the feature kE2, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed during one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

<Characteristic kF group>
The feature kF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588),
A specific effect execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92) that executes a specific effect during a predetermined period;
When a predetermined game condition is established, a game information storage means that stores predetermined game information (initial variation off flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag, and Initial variation special reach flag, MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412, and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach effect pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512, and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process of FIG. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the out-of-off performance pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
means (sound emission control board 91) for displaying a performance information image (setting suggestion pattern PX) with an appearance probability specified by the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means and the stored numerical information; Ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the side MPU 92 and the MPU 92)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kF1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of settings by accepting an operation from the outside, and the numerical information The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the predetermined winning probability setting. Then, when a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied, predetermined gaming information is stored by the gaming information storage means. Furthermore, the performance information image is displayed by the specific performance execution means with the appearance probability specified by the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means and the stored numerical information. Therefore, the player first observes whether or not a predetermined gaming condition is met. Thereafter, the player observes whether or not the performance information image appears during a predetermined period, estimates the appearance probability of the performance information image, and uses the obtained appearance probability and the result of the above observation to It is possible to infer which setting the winning probability is in a predetermined lottery process. When considering a comparative gaming machine in which the probability of appearance of a specific effect is determined based only on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of a specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. The probability of appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to feature kF1, since the probability of appearance of a performance information image as a specific performance is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, the player needs to estimate the probability of winning. The setting of the winning probability can be accurately estimated depending on the skill of the player who strongly feels the randomness of the appearance probability of the performance information image and takes into account whether or not predetermined game conditions are satisfied. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature kF1, in order to estimate the probability of appearance of a performance information image as a specific performance, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is met. , it is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which predetermined gaming conditions are satisfied.

When a plurality of gaming machines of feature kF1 are installed, the player creates a state where a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied on each machine, thereby creating a machine where the performance information image is likely to appear easily. be able to.

[Feature kF2]
The gaming machine according to feature kF1,
The game information storage means includes:
The first gaming information is stored when the first gaming condition (initial variation normal reach) is established, and a second gaming condition (initial variation super reach) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming condition is established. comprising means for storing second game information when
The specific performance execution means is
When the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information than when the predetermined game information is the first game information, the predetermined game information for displaying the performance information image is A gaming machine characterized by high probability.

According to feature kF2, the first game information that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the first game information stored when the first game condition is satisfied. Since the probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when the second game information is stored when the second game condition is satisfied, the probability of appearance of the effect information image is higher for the player. This also gives the player a sense of expectation that the second gaming condition, which is advantageous to the player, will be established as the predetermined gaming condition.

[Feature kF3]
The gaming machine according to feature kF1 or feature kF2,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kF3, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after the end of the game round, and the specific effect execution means, A performance information image as a specific performance is displayed during a period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

[Features kF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features kF1 to feature kF3,
The game information storage means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for storing the type of the performance executed in the game round as the predetermined game information when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the time when the game round becomes a starting point. .

According to feature kF4, the game information storage means stores the type of performance to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, and the specific performance execution means stores Based on the type of the performance, the performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information is displayed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, in order to understand the stored numerical information, the player needs to play the game when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. , it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game the predetermined number of times.

<Characteristic kG group>
The feature kG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Features kG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588),
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect during a predetermined period;
When a predetermined game condition is established, a game information storage means that stores predetermined game information (initial variation off flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag, and Initial variation special reach flag, MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412, and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach effect pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512, and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process of FIG. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the out-of-off performance pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, means (sound emission control board 91 side MPU 92 and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 643 executed by the MPU 92),
The game information storage means includes:
The first gaming information is stored when the first gaming condition (initial variation normal reach) is established, and a second gaming condition (initial variation super reach) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming condition is established. comprising means for storing second game information when
The specific performance execution means is
When the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information than when the predetermined game information is the first game information, the predetermined game information for displaying the performance information image is A gaming machine characterized by high probability.

According to feature kG1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of settings by accepting an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the predetermined winning probability setting. Then, when a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied, predetermined gaming information is stored by the gaming information storage means. Further, based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, the specific performance execution means displays a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined gaming condition is met, and from the observation results estimates the probability that a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information will appear in a predetermined period, and then sets the performance. It is possible to wait for the information image to appear, and from the appearance of the effect information image, to know which numerical information is stored.

Assuming that the comparative example gaming machine is configured to display an image corresponding to the winning probability setting with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example gaming machine has a configuration in which the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the winning probability setting is Since the amount depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the feature kG1, the performance information image is displayed with a predetermined probability in a predetermined period based on the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, so that the player can: You can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the performance information image. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that a performance information image as a specific performance will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature kG1, in order to grasp the probability of appearance of a performance information image as a specific performance, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is met. , it is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which predetermined gaming conditions are met.

When multiple kG1 gaming machines are installed, the player can create a machine where a specific performance is likely to appear by creating a state where predetermined gaming conditions are met on each machine. be able to.

According to feature kG1, the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the first game information that is more advantageous to the player than the first game information that is stored when the first game condition is satisfied. Since the probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when the second game information is stored when the second game condition is satisfied, the probability of appearance of the effect information image is higher for the player. From this point of view, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second gaming condition, which is advantageous to the player, will be established as the predetermined gaming condition.

<Characteristic kH group>
The feature kH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Winning probability setting means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change process in FIG. 588),
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect during a predetermined period;
When a predetermined game condition is established, a game information storage means that stores predetermined game information (initial variation off flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag, and Initial variation special reach flag, MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412, and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach effect pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512, and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variable jackpot performance pattern setting process of FIG. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the out-of-off performance pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, means (sound emission control board 91 side MPU 92 and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 643 executed by the MPU 92),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kH1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of settings by accepting an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the predetermined winning probability setting. Then, when a predetermined gaming condition is satisfied, predetermined gaming information is stored by the gaming information storage means. Further, based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, the specific performance execution means displays a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined gaming condition is met, and from the observation results estimates the probability that a performance information image corresponding to the stored numerical information will appear in a predetermined period, and then sets the performance. It is possible to wait for the information image to appear, and from the appearance of the effect information image, to know which numerical information is stored.

Assuming that the comparative example gaming machine is configured to display an image corresponding to the winning probability setting with a predetermined probability of appearance, the comparative example gaming machine has a configuration in which the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the winning probability setting is Since the amount depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the feature kH1, the performance information image is displayed with a predetermined probability in a predetermined period based on the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means, so that the player can: You can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the performance information image. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that a performance information image as a specific performance will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature kH1, in order to grasp the probability of appearance of a performance information image as a specific performance, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied. , it is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which predetermined gaming conditions are met.

When multiple gaming machines of the feature kH1 are installed, the player can create a machine where a specific effect is likely to appear by creating a state where predetermined gaming conditions are satisfied on each machine. be able to.

According to feature kH1, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after the end of the game round, and the specific performance execution means, A performance information image as a specific performance is displayed during one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

<Characteristic kI group>
The feature kI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
A specific effect execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92) that executes a specific effect so as to have a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
Effect type storage means (stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect to be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number since the starting point. The first fluctuation off flag, first fluctuation normal reach flag, first fluctuation super reach flag, and first fluctuation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the reach performance pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403-Sk2406, Sk2409-Sk2412, and Sk2414-Sk2416, and steps Sk2503-Sk2506, Sk2509-Sk2512, and Sk2514-Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2603-Sk2606, Sk2609-Sk2612, and Sk2614-Sk2616 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot in FIG. 609, and steps Sk2701-Sk2703 of the performance pattern setting process for a loss in FIG.
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Means for executing the specific performance (audio MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process in FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature kI1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the performance type storage means changes the number of executions of the game from the starting point to the predetermined number. The type of performance to be executed in the game round when the number of times is reached is stored, and the specific performance execution means determines the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means and the setting changing means during a predetermined period. A specific performance is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the winning probability setting. Therefore, when the number of executions of a game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player observes the performance executed in the game round and first memorizes the type of the performance. Thereafter, the player observes whether or not a specific effect appears during a predetermined period, estimates the appearance probability of the specific effect, and uses the obtained appearance probability and the previously memorized Depending on the type of performance, it is possible to infer which setting of the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process is set. When considering a comparative gaming machine in which the probability of appearance of a specific effect is determined based only on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of a specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. The probability of appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to feature kI1, the appearance probability of a particular effect is not determined solely by the model of the gaming machine, so the player can There is a strong sense of randomness in the appearance probability, and the chances of winning are determined by the skill of the player, such as taking into account the type of effect that will be executed in the game round when the number of times the game round has been executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. Probability settings can be accurately estimated. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to feature kI1, since the player needs to play the game when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player is required to play the game when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number. It is possible to actively encourage players to play games on a regular basis.

According to feature kI1, since it is necessary for the player to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect by observing whether or not a specific effect appears in a predetermined period, it is necessary for the player to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect. It is possible to actively encourage players to play the game repeatedly.

When a plurality of gaming machines with feature kI1 are installed, the player can play a specific performance on each machine when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. You can create a platform that is easy to appear on with your own hands.

[Feature kI2]
The gaming machine according to feature kI1,
The type of the performance executed in the game round is a first game round performance (normal reach), and the expectation level that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process is higher than the first game round performance. Also has at least a high second game performance (super reach),
The specific performance execution means is
The appearance probability of the specific performance is higher when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the feature kI2, the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process and the expectation level is higher than the case where the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. Since the probability of appearance of a specific effect is higher in the case of a 2-game effect, it is important to the player that the number of executions from the starting point is equal to the predetermined number of times from the viewpoint of the probability of appearance of a specific effect. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a highly anticipated second game round performance in which the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process will occur in the game round that has been won.

[Feature kI3]
The gaming machine according to feature kI1,
The types of performances executed in the game round include a first game round performance (normal reach) and a second game round performance (super reach) that has a lower probability of being executed in the game round than the first game round performance. and has at least
The execution of the specific performance is
The appearance probability of the specific performance is higher when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature kI3, the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a second game round performance that has a lower probability of being executed in a game round than when it is a first game round performance. , since the probability of appearance of a specific effect is high, from the perspective of the probability of appearance of a specific effect for the player, it will be executed in the game round when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that the second game performance with low probability and high rarity will occur.

[Feature kI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kI1 to feature kI3,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kI4, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after the end of the game round, and the specific performance execution means, During one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied, a specific performance is performed to suggest the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

[Feature kI5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kI1 to feature kI4,
The performance type storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing the type of the performance executed in the first gaming round after the gaming machine is started up.

According to feature kI5, the performance type storage means includes means for storing the type of performance executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started, so that, for example, when the gaming machine is started in the morning, By playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can observe which type of performance will be executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started up, and estimate the winning probability setting. can. Therefore, according to feature kI5, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kJ group>
The feature kJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kJ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means during a predetermined period;
Effect type storage means (stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect to be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number since the starting point. The first fluctuation off flag, first fluctuation normal reach flag, first fluctuation super reach flag, and first fluctuation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the reach performance pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403-Sk2406, Sk2409-Sk2412, and Sk2414-Sk2416, and steps Sk2503-Sk2506, Sk2509-Sk2512, and Sk2514-Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2603-Sk2606, Sk2609-Sk2612, and Sk2614-Sk2616 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot in FIG. 609, and steps Sk2701-Sk2703 of the performance pattern setting process for a loss in FIG.
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
an execution period in which the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined from among a plurality of performance periods for performing the performance based on the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means; Determining means (MPU92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk3302 to Step Sk3306 of the normal reach effect pattern table reference process in FIG. 619 executed by the MPU92, and super reach effect in FIG. 620 executed by the MPU92) Steps Sk3402 to Sk3406 of the pattern table reference process, Steps Sk4202 to Sk4206 of the effect pattern table reference process for failure shown in FIG. 6181 executed by the MPU92, and Step Sk4302 of the ending effect process of FIG. 629 executed by the MPU92. ~Step Sk4306 etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kJ1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an external operation, and the performance type storage means changes the number of executions of the game from the starting point to a predetermined number. The type of performance to be executed in the game round when the number of times is reached is stored, and the specific performance execution means sets the appearance probability to be based on the winning probability setting determined by the setting changing means in a predetermined period. , a specific performance is executed. Further, the execution period determining means provided in the specific performance execution means stores the predetermined period for executing the specific performance from among the plurality of performance periods for executing the performance in the performance type storage means. Determined based on the type of performance being performed. Therefore, when the number of executions of a game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player observes the performance executed in the game round and first memorizes the type of the performance. Thereafter, the player estimates the predetermined period in which a specific effect will appear based on the previously stored type of effect in the game round, and estimates the probability of appearance of the specific effect in the predetermined period. , it is possible to infer which setting the winning probability is in a predetermined lottery process. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which the period for executing a specific performance is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the period for executing a specific performance is determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to feature kJ1, the period during which a specific performance is executed does not depend only on the model of the gaming machine, so the player can Depending on the skill of the player, he feels a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the effects, and takes into account the type of effect that will be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. It is possible to accurately grasp the period during which a specific performance is to be executed, and in turn, to accurately estimate the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to feature kJ1, since the player needs to play the game when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player is required to play the game when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number. It is possible to actively encourage players to play games on a regular basis.

According to feature kJ1, it is necessary for the player to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect by observing whether or not a specific effect appears in a predetermined period. It is possible to actively encourage players to play the game repeatedly.

When multiple gaming machines of feature kJ1 are installed, the player can perform a specific effect by playing the game on each machine when the number of executions of the game reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. You can create a platform with your own hands that is easy to run.

[Features kJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature kJ1,
As the type of the performance executed in the game round, the first game round performance (normal reach) and the expectation level that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game round performance. Also has at least a high second game performance (super reach),
The execution period determining means includes:
Regarding a performance that has a higher probability of being executed in a game round when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance is the first game round performance. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the predetermined period so that the performance period is as follows.

According to the feature kJ2, the second game round has a higher expectation level that satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. In the case of a performance, the predetermined period is determined so that the performance period is for a performance that has a higher probability of being executed in a game round, so the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period is From this point of view, in the game round that has been executed a predetermined number of times since the starting point, a highly anticipated second game round performance in which the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process occurs. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the product is desired.

[Features kJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature kJ1,
The types of performances executed in the game round include a first game round performance (normal reach) and a second game round performance (super reach) that has a lower probability of being executed in the game round than the first game round performance. and has at least
The execution period determining means includes:
A performance that has a higher probability of being executed in the game round when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for determining the predetermined period so as to be a production period for the following.

According to feature kJ3, the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a second game round performance that has a lower probability of being executed in a game round than when it is a first game round performance. Since the predetermined period is determined so as to be the performance period for a performance that has a high probability of being executed in a game round, it is important for the player to understand the starting point from the viewpoint of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a second game round performance with a low probability of being executed and a high rarity will occur in a game round when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Features kJ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features kJ1 to feature kJ3,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of performance periods to be determined by the execution period determining means include a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a second period (ending period) after the ending period.

According to feature kJ4, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing a performance in a game round and a second period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. In any of the above, a specific effect is performed to indicate the setting of the winning probability based on the appearance probability. Since the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the specific performance will be executed more frequently.

[Features kJ5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features kJ1 to feature kJ4,
The performance type storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing the type of the performance executed in the first gaming round after the gaming machine is started up.

According to feature kJ5, the performance type storage means includes means for storing the type of performance executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started, so that, for example, when the gaming machine is started in the morning, By playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can observe which type of effect will be executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started up, and determine the predetermined period during which a specific effect will appear. It is possible to estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, according to feature kJ5, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kK group>
The feature kK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 2 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kK1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 250) that distributes the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect with a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
When the number of game balls that have reached the sorting means since the starting point reaches N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is distributed by the sorting means to the plurality of routes. Distribution destination storage means for storing which route the distribution was made to as the distribution destination (first time variation first symbol flag and first time variation second symbol flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64, and voice The MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side, and the updating process at the time of ball entry in FIG. 632 executed by the MPU 92),
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Means for executing the specific performance (audio MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 637 executed by the MPU 92)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kK1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the allocation destination storage means changes the N-th game ball from the starting point. Which route out of a plurality of routes has been distributed to by the distribution means is stored as the distribution destination, and the specific performance execution means stores the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means and the setting in a predetermined period. A specific performance is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the winning probability setting determined by the changing means. For this reason, the player observes which route the N-th game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the starting point, and first memorizes the destination. After that, the player observes whether or not a specific effect appears during a predetermined period, estimates the probability of appearance of the specific effect, and uses the obtained appearance probability and the previously memorized allocation destination. , it is possible to infer which setting the winning probability is in a predetermined lottery process. When considering a comparative gaming machine in which the probability of appearance of a specific effect is determined based only on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of a specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. The probability of appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to feature kK1, the probability of appearance of a particular performance is not determined solely by the model of the gaming machine, so the player can There is a strong sense of randomness in the appearance probability of , and the probability of winning can be set depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration which route the Nth game ball was distributed to by the distribution means from the starting point. can be guessed accurately. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature kK1, since the player needs to play the game when the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point reaches N, It is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game N times.

According to feature kK1, the player needs to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect by observing whether or not a specific effect appears in a predetermined period. It is possible to actively encourage players to play the game repeatedly.

When multiple gaming machines of feature kK1 are installed, the player can play the game when the number of gaming balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point reaches N on each machine. , you can create a table with your own hands that makes it easy for a specific effect to appear.

[Feature kK2]
The gaming machine according to feature kK1,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquisition means is entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means,
moreover,
Means for executing a special game state for giving a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means that the winning condition is satisfied, the means for executing a special game state that provides a bonus to the player, the game ball entering the second ball entry means; The benefit granted to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. A special gaming state execution means is provided that is set to be more advantageous to the player than the given privilege,
The sorting means is
The plurality of routes include a first route leading to the first ball entering means and a second route leading to the second ball entering means,
The specific performance execution means is
The appearance probability of the specific performance is higher when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. Game machine.

According to the feature kK2, when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route leading to the first ball entry means, the first ball receiving means has a more advantageous benefit than the first ball entry means. 2. Since the probability of appearance of a specific effect is higher when the route is the second route leading to the means of entering the ball, from the point of view of the probability of appearance of a specific effect to the player, It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the destination of the Nth game ball to be distributed by the distribution means will be the second route.

[Features kK3]
The gaming machine according to feature kK1 or feature kK2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to the feature kK3, a specific performance for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is performed during one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific effect.

[Features kK4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features kK1 to feature kK3,
The allocation destination storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for storing, as an allocation destination, which route among the plurality of routes the first game ball is allocated to by the allocation means after the gaming machine is started up. .

According to feature kK4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing as the distribution destination the route to which the first game ball was distributed by the distribution device after the game machine was started, so that, for example, , when the gaming machine is started in the morning, by playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can know to which route the first game ball was distributed by the distributing means after the gaming machine was started. By observing it, you can infer the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, according to feature kK4, it is possible to actively encourage players to play games from the beginning in the morning.

<Characteristic kL group>
The feature kL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 3 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kL1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 250) that distributes the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means during a predetermined period;
When the number of game balls that have reached the sorting means since the starting point reaches N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is distributed by the sorting means to the plurality of routes. Distribution destination storage means for storing which route the distribution was made to as the distribution destination (first time variation first symbol flag and first time variation second symbol flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64, and voice The MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side, and the updating process at the time of ball entry in FIG. 632 executed by the MPU 92),
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
an execution period in which the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined from among a plurality of performance periods for executing the performance based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a determining means.

According to feature kL1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an external operation, and the allocation destination storage means changes the N-th game ball from the starting point. Which route out of a plurality of routes was distributed by the distribution means is stored as the distribution destination, and the specific performance execution means generates an appearance based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting change means in a predetermined period. A specific performance is performed so as to have a certain probability. Furthermore, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is stored in the allocation destination storage means from among the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect, by the execution period determining means provided in the specific effect executing means. The decision is made based on the allocation destination. For this reason, the player observes which route the N-th game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the starting point, and first memorizes the destination. Thereafter, the player estimates the predetermined period in which a specific effect will appear from the previously memorized allocation destination, estimates the probability of appearance of the specific effect in the predetermined period, and performs the predetermined lottery process. It is possible to guess which setting the winning probability is. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which the period for executing a specific performance is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the period for executing a specific performance is determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to feature kL1, the period for executing a specific performance is not determined solely depending on the model of the gaming machine, so the player cannot determine the specific performance needed to estimate the winning probability setting. There is a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the effects, and depending on the skill of the player, it is possible to create a specific effect by taking into consideration which route the Nth game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the starting point. It is possible to accurately grasp the execution period and, in turn, accurately estimate the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature kL1, since the player needs to play the game when the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point reaches N, It is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game N times.

According to feature kL1, it is necessary for the player to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect by observing whether or not a specific effect appears in a predetermined period. It is possible to actively encourage players to play the game repeatedly.

When a plurality of gaming machines of feature kL1 are installed, the player can play the game when the number of gaming balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point reaches N on each machine. , you can create a table with your own hands that makes it easy for a specific effect to appear.

[Feature kL2]
The gaming machine described in feature kL1,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquisition means is entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means,
moreover,
Means for executing a special game state for giving a benefit to a player based on the determination by the determination means that the winning conditions are satisfied, the means for executing a special game state that provides a bonus to the player, the game ball entering the second ball entry means; The benefit granted to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. A special gaming state execution means is provided that is set to be more advantageous to the player than the given privilege,
The sorting means is
The plurality of routes include a first route leading to the first ball entering means and a second route leading to the second ball entering means,
The execution period determining means includes:
The performance period for the performance is more likely to be executed when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for determining the predetermined period.

According to the feature kL2, when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route leading to the first ball entry means, the first ball receiving means has a more advantageous benefit than the first ball entry means. 2. Since the predetermined period is determined so that the second route leading to the ball entry means is the performance period for the performance with a higher probability of being executed, Also in terms of the frequency of occurrence of the period, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the destination of the N-th game ball from the starting point by the distribution means is the second route.

[Feature kL3]
The gaming machine according to feature kL1 or feature kL2,
The plurality of performance periods to be determined by the execution period determining means include a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a second period (ending period) after the ending period.

According to feature kL3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing a performance in a game round and a second period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. In any of the above, a specific effect is performed to indicate the setting of the winning probability based on the appearance probability. Since the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for performing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific performance will be performed more frequently.

[Feature kL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kL1 to feature kL3,
The allocation destination storage means is
A game machine characterized by comprising means for storing, as an allocation destination, which route among the plurality of routes the first game ball is allocated to by the allocation means from the time when the game ball is a starting point.

According to feature kL4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing, as the distribution destination, the route to which the first game ball was distributed by the distribution device after the game machine was activated, so that, for example, , when the gaming machine is started in the morning, by playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can know to which route the first game ball was distributed by the distributing means after the gaming machine was started. By observing it, you can infer the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, according to feature kL4, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kM group>
The feature kM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 4 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kM1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect with a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
degree parameter deriving means (appearance probability lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability;
degree parameter performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the derived degree parameter;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
means for executing the specific performance so that the appearance probability is based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means and the winning probability setting determined by the setting changing means. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature kM1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process. The degree parameter is derived, the degree parameter performance execution means executes a performance corresponding to the derived degree parameter, and the specific performance execution means calculates the derived degree parameter and the determined winning probability in a predetermined period. A specific effect is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the settings of . Therefore, the player observes the performance corresponding to the derived degree parameter and memorizes the performance. After that, the player observes whether or not a specific effect appears during a predetermined period, estimates the probability of appearance of the specific effect, and uses the obtained appearance probability and the previously memorized effect to It is possible to infer which setting the winning probability is in a predetermined lottery process. When considering a comparative gaming machine in which the probability of appearance of a specific effect is determined based only on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of a specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. The probability of appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to feature kM1, the appearance probability of a particular performance is not determined solely by the model of the gaming machine, so the player can The setting of the winning probability can be accurately estimated depending on the player's skill, such as having a strong sense of randomness in the appearance probability and taking into account the effect corresponding to the degree parameter described above. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature kM1, the player needs to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect by observing whether or not a specific effect appears during a predetermined period. It is necessary to generate the game repeatedly, and it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game repeatedly.

[Characteristic kM2]
The gaming machine according to feature kM1,
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. means (an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and a game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
The degree parameter deriving means includes:
comprising means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates by lottery;
The degree parameter performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from the time when the game becomes a starting point until the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to feature kM2, since the player needs to play the game during the period from the starting point until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the player is required to play the game during this period. You can actively encourage this. For example, if the starting point is when the gaming machine is started, then according to feature kM2, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the beginning in the morning.

[Features kM3]
The gaming machine according to feature kM2,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kM3, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after the end of the game round, and the specific effect execution means, During one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied, a specific performance is performed to suggest the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific effect.

<Characteristic kN group>
The feature kN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 5 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kN1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means during a predetermined period;
degree parameter deriving means (appearance period lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability;
degree parameter performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the derived degree parameter;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for performing the specific performance from among a plurality of performance periods for performing the performance based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kN1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an external operation, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process. The degree parameter is derived, the degree parameter performance execution means executes a performance corresponding to the derived degree parameter, and the specific performance execution means executes a performance for a predetermined period based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting change means. A specific effect is executed so that the probability of appearance is as follows. Furthermore, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is derived by the degree parameter deriving means from among the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect, by the execution period determining means provided in the specific effect executing means. determined based on the degree parameter. Therefore, the player observes the performance corresponding to the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means and memorizes the performance. Thereafter, the player estimates the predetermined period in which a specific effect will appear from the previously memorized effects, and estimates the probability of appearance of the specific effect in the predetermined period, thereby determining the probability of the appearance of the specific effect in the predetermined lottery process. It is possible to guess what the winning probability setting is. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which the period for executing a specific performance is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the period for executing a specific performance is determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to feature kN1, the period during which a specific performance is executed does not depend solely on the model of the gaming machine, so the player can Depending on the skill of the player, who strongly feels the randomness of the appearance period of the performance and takes into consideration the performance corresponding to the above-mentioned degree parameter, the setting of the winning probability can be accurately estimated. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature kN1, it is necessary for the player to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect by observing whether or not a specific effect appears during a predetermined period. It is necessary to generate the game repeatedly, and it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game repeatedly.

[Feature kN2]
The gaming machine according to feature kN1,
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the time when the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game round operation is finished. means (an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and a game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
The degree parameter deriving means
comprising means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates by lottery;
The degree parameter performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from a starting point until the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to feature kN2, since the player needs to play the game during the period from the starting point until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the player is required to play the game during this period. You can actively encourage this. For example, if the starting point is when the gaming machine is started up, then according to feature kM2, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from first thing in the morning.

[Feature kN3]
The gaming machine according to feature kN2,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of performance periods to be determined by the execution period determining means include a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a second period (ending period) after the ending period.

According to feature kN3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing a performance in a game round and a second period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. In any of the above, a specific effect is performed to indicate the setting of the winning probability based on the appearance probability. Since the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific performance will be executed more frequently.

<Characteristic kO group>
The feature kO group is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly includes Modification 1 of the 11th embodiment, Modification 3 of the 11th embodiment, and Modification 5 of the 11th embodiment. It is extracted from.

[Feature kO1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
A plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a second period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for executing the specific performance from among the performance periods.

According to feature kO1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the game round executing means notifies the result of the determination of the predetermined lottery process. The game round is executed, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a predetermined period so that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability. Furthermore, the execution period determining means provided in the specific performance execution means determines the first period for executing the performance in a game round and the second period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. The predetermined period for executing a specific effect is determined from among the periods. Therefore, the player predicts which of a plurality of performance periods including the first period and the second period will be the predetermined period in which a specific effect will appear, and selects the predetermined period during which the specific effect will appear. In this case, by estimating the appearance probability of a specific effect, it is possible to infer which setting of the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process is set. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which the period for executing a specific performance is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the period for executing a specific performance is determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to feature kO1, the period during which a specific effect is executed is determined by factors other than the winning probability setting, such as an event that occurs before the specific effect appears. If the configuration is determined, the player will strongly feel the randomness of the period in which a specific effect appears, which is necessary for estimating the setting of the winning probability, and the player will have a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the specific effect, which is necessary for estimating the setting of the winning probability. Depending on the player's skill in taking this into consideration, it is possible to accurately grasp the period during which a specific performance is to be executed, and in turn, to accurately estimate the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the feature kO1, the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, so the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for performing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific performance will be performed more frequently.

[Features kO2]
The gaming machine described in feature kO1,
Effect type storage means (stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect to be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number since the starting point. The first fluctuation off flag, first fluctuation normal reach flag, first fluctuation super reach flag, and first fluctuation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the reach performance pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403-Sk2406, Sk2409-Sk2412, and Sk2414-Sk2416, and steps Sk2503-Sk2506, Sk2509-Sk2512, and Sk2514-Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2603-Sk2606, Sk2609-Sk2612, and Sk2614-Sk2616 of the performance pattern setting process for the probability variable jackpot shown in FIG. 609, and steps Sk2701-Sk2703 of the performance pattern setting process for the loss time of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU92,
The execution period determining means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period based on the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means.

According to the feature kO2, the performance type storage means stores the type of performance to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, and the specific performance execution means stores the performance type. The predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined based on the type of performance stored in the type storage means. Therefore, when the number of executions of a game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player observes the performance executed in the game round and memorizes the type of the performance. It becomes possible to estimate the predetermined period in which a specific performance appears from the type of performance in the game round. Therefore, depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into account the type of effect to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the period for executing a specific performance can be determined accurately. This makes it possible to accurately estimate the probability of winning.

[Features kO3]
The gaming machine described in feature kO2,
The type of the performance executed in the game round is a first game round performance (losing), and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process is higher than the first game round performance. has at least a high second game performance (normal reach),
The execution period determining means includes:
When the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance, the second period is determined to be the predetermined period, and the performance is stored in the performance type storage means. A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the first period to be the predetermined period when the type of the performance is the second game round performance.

The first period is a period that occurs during a game round, whereas the second period is a period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the conditions for winning are met, and the period that occurs during the first period occurs more frequently than in the second period. According to feature kO3, when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a first game round performance with a low expectation level that satisfies the conditions for winning in the lottery process, a second game performance with a low occurrence frequency is selected. If the period is a predetermined period and the type of production is a highly anticipated second game performance that satisfies the conditions for winning in the lottery process, the second period with a high occurrence frequency becomes the predetermined period. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the frequency of occurrence during a predetermined period in which a specific performance is executed, conditions for winning in the lottery process are set for the player in a game round in which the number of executions reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the second game round production with a high degree of expectation will occur.

[Features kO4]
The gaming machine according to feature kO1 or feature kO2,
The types of performances executed in the game round include a first game round performance (miss), and a second game round performance (normal reach) that has a lower probability of being executed in the game round than the first game round performance. , has at least
The execution period determining means includes:
When the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance, the second period is determined to be the predetermined performance period, and the performance is stored in the performance type storage means. A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the first period to be the predetermined performance period when the type of the performance being performed is the second game performance.

The first period is a period that occurs during a game round, whereas the second period is a period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the conditions for winning are met, and the period that occurs during the first period occurs more frequently than in the second period. According to feature kO4, when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a first game round performance that has a high probability of being executed in a game round, the second period with a low occurrence frequency is a predetermined period. Therefore, when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a second game round performance that has a low probability of being executed in a game round, the second period with a high occurrence frequency becomes the predetermined period. , In terms of the frequency of occurrence during a predetermined period in which a specific effect is executed for the player, the probability that it will be executed in a game session when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number from the starting point is It is possible to create a feeling of expectation that the second game round performance, which is low and rare, will occur.

[Features kO5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features kO2 to feature kO4,
The performance type storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing the type of the performance executed in the first gaming round after the gaming machine is started up.

According to feature kO5, the performance type storage means includes means for storing the type of performance executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started, so that, for example, when the gaming machine is started in the morning, By playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can observe which type of effect will be executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started up, and determine the predetermined period during which a specific effect will appear. It is possible to estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, according to feature kO5, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kP group>
The feature kP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications of Modification 1 of the 11th embodiment and Modification 3 of the 11th embodiment.

[Feature kP1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the time when the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game round operation is finished. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the winning probability setting determined by the setting changing means during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for executing the specific performance from among a plurality of periods for each type of performance in the game round.

According to feature kP1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the game run executing means notifies the result of the determination of the predetermined lottery process. The game round is executed, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a predetermined period so that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability. Further, the execution period determining means provided in the specific performance execution means determines a predetermined period for executing the specific performance from among a plurality of periods for each type of performance in the game round. Therefore, the player has to predict which of the plurality of periods for each type of effect in a game round the predetermined period in which a specific effect will appear, and then select the specific effect during that predetermined period. By estimating the appearance probability of , it is possible to infer which setting of the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process is set. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which the period for executing a specific performance is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the period for executing a specific performance is determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to feature kP1, the period during which a specific effect is executed is determined by factors other than the winning probability setting, such as an event that occurs before the specific effect appears. If the configuration is determined, the player will strongly feel the randomness of the period in which a specific effect appears, which is necessary for estimating the setting of the winning probability, and the player will have a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the specific effect, which is necessary for estimating the setting of the winning probability. Depending on the player's skill in taking this into consideration, it is possible to accurately grasp the period during which a specific performance is to be executed, and in turn, to accurately estimate the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature kP2]
The gaming machine described in feature kP1,
Effect type storage means (stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect to be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number since the starting point. The first fluctuation off flag, first fluctuation normal reach flag, first fluctuation super reach flag, and first fluctuation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the reach performance pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403-Sk2406, Sk2409-Sk2412, and Sk2414-Sk2416, and steps Sk2503-Sk2506, Sk2509-Sk2512, and Sk2514-Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2603-Sk2606, Sk2609-Sk2612, and Sk2614-Sk2616 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot in FIG. 609, and steps Sk2701-Sk2703 of the performance pattern setting process for a loss in FIG.
Equipped with
The execution period determining means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period based on the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means.

According to feature kP2, the performance type storage means stores the type of performance to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, and the specific performance execution means stores the performance type. The predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined based on the type of performance stored in the type storage means. Therefore, when the number of executions of a game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player observes the performance executed in the game round and memorizes the type of the performance. It becomes possible to estimate the predetermined period in which a specific performance appears from the type of performance in the game round. Therefore, depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into account the type of effect to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the period for executing a specific performance can be determined accurately. This makes it possible to accurately estimate the winning probability settings.

[Feature kP3]
The gaming machine described in feature kP2,
As the type of the performance executed in the game round, the first game round performance (normal reach) and the expectation level that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game round performance. Also has at least a high second game performance (super reach),
The execution period determining means includes:
A performance that has a higher probability of being executed in the game round when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the predetermined period so as to be a performance period of a type.

According to feature kP3, the second game round has a higher expectation level that satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. In the case of a performance, the predetermined period is determined so that the performance period of the performance type has a higher probability of being executed in a game round, so the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period is From this point of view, in the game round that has been executed a predetermined number of times since the starting point, a highly anticipated second game round performance in which the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process occurs. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the product is desired.

[Feature kP4]
The gaming machine described in feature kP2,
The types of performances executed in the game round include a first game round performance (normal reach) and a second game round performance (super reach) that has a lower probability of being executed in the game round than the first game round performance. and has at least
The execution period determining means includes:
A performance that has a higher probability of being executed in the game round when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the predetermined period so as to be a performance period of a type.

According to feature kP4, the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a second game round performance that has a lower probability of being executed in a game round than when it is a first game round performance. Since the predetermined period is determined so as to be the performance period for a performance that has a high probability of being executed in a game round, it is important for the player to understand the starting point from the viewpoint of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a second game round performance with a low probability of being executed and a high rarity will occur in a game round when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Feature kP5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kP2 to feature kP4,
The performance type storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing the type of the performance executed in the first gaming round after the gaming machine is started.

According to feature kP5, the performance type storage means includes means for storing the type of performance executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started, so that, for example, when the gaming machine is started in the morning, By playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can observe which type of effect is executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started up, and determine the predetermined period during which a specific effect appears. It is possible to estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, according to feature kP5, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kQ group>
The feature kQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kQ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
A specific effect execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92) that executes a specific effect during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
A first performance execution means (executed by the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and the MPU 92) that executes the specific performance so that the appearance probability is based on the winning probability setting determined by the setting change means. Step Sk2806 to Step Sk2810 of the ending effect setting process in FIG. 611),
A second effect execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a diagram executed by the MPU 92 Step Sk2813) of the ending effect setting process of 611,
selection execution means for selectively executing either one of the first performance execution means and the second performance execution means during the predetermined period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kQ1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the game run executing means notifies the result of the determination of the predetermined lottery process. A game round is executed, and a specific effect is executed during a predetermined period by the specific effect execution means. Further, a first effect execution means for executing a specific effect so that the selection execution means provided in the specific effect execution means has an appearance probability based on the winning probability setting determined by the setting changing means; Either one of the second performance execution means is executed as a specific performance, in which a performance including an image suggesting setting of a probability is executed as a specific performance. For this reason, players can either guess the winning probability setting based on an image that suggests the winning probability setting (it is possible to guess with high accuracy), or they can guess the probability of a specific effect appearing in a predetermined period. , it becomes possible to guess what the winning probability setting is in a predetermined lottery process. Therefore, the player feels a strong sense of randomness in guessing the setting of the winning probability, and the player has a feeling of expectation that an effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability will appear, and a feeling of expectation that a performance including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability will appear, You can also enjoy the gameplay of estimating the probability of a particular production appearing. As a result, according to the feature kQ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature kQ2]
The gaming machine described in feature kQ1,
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
Effect type storage means (stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect to be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number since the starting point. The first fluctuation off flag, first fluctuation normal reach flag, first fluctuation super reach flag, and first fluctuation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the reach performance pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403-Sk2406, Sk2409-Sk2412, and Sk2414-Sk2416, and steps Sk2503-Sk2506, Sk2509-Sk2512, and Sk2514-Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2603-Sk2606, Sk2609-Sk2612, and Sk2614-Sk2616 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot in FIG. 609, and steps Sk2701-Sk2703 of the performance pattern setting process for a loss in FIG.
Equipped with
The selection execution means is
The present invention is characterized by comprising means for selectively executing either one of the first performance means and the second performance means based on the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means. A gaming machine.

According to feature kQ2, the performance type storage means stores the type of performance to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, and the specific performance execution means stores the performance type. Either one of the first performance means and the second performance means is alternatively executed based on the type of performance stored in the type storage means. Therefore, when the number of executions of a game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player can determine whether a particular performance is the first performance execution means by observing the performance executed in the game round. It is possible to predict which of the second performance execution means will perform the performance. Therefore, depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into account the type of effect to be executed in a game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the period for executing a specific performance can be determined accurately. This makes it possible to accurately estimate the winning probability settings.

[Feature kQ3]
The gaming machine according to feature kQ2,
As the type of the performance executed in the game round, the first game round performance (super reach) and the expectation level that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process are the first game round performance. has at least a second game round performance (special reach) higher than
The selection execution means is
When the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance, the first performance execution means is executed, and the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for causing the second performance execution means to execute in the case of the second game performance.

According to feature kQ3, when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a first game round performance with a low expectation level that satisfies the conditions for winning in the lottery process, the first performance execution means specifies When the performance is executed and the type of performance is a highly anticipated second game round performance that satisfies the conditions for winning in a lottery process, a specific performance is executed by a second performance execution means. On the other hand, since the specific performance executed by the second performance execution means is a performance including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability, the setting of the winning probability can be easily estimated with high accuracy. Therefore, from the perspective of easily estimating the winning probability setting, in the game round that has been executed a predetermined number of times since the starting point, the second game round that has a high expectation that satisfies the conditions for winning in the lottery process It is possible to create a sense of expectation that the performance should occur.

[Feature kQ4]
The gaming machine described in feature kQ3,
As the type of the performance executed in the game round, a third game round performance (where the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process and the expectation level is lower than the first game round performance) normal reach),
Equipped with
The selection execution means is
means for causing the first performance execution means to execute when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the third game round performance;
The first performance execution means is
The appearance probability of the specific performance is higher when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the third game round performance. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the feature kQ4, the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game performance and the third game whose expectation level that satisfies the conditions for winning in the lottery process is lower than that of the second game performance. When it is a game performance, a specific performance is executed by the first performance execution means, and when it is a second game performance, a specific performance is executed by the second performance execution means. In addition, a specific type of performance is stored in the performance type storage means so that the appearance probability is higher when the performance type is the first game round performance than when the performance type is the third game round performance. The performance is executed. Therefore, the first game round performance with the middle level of expectation among the first to third game round performances is better than the third game round performance with the lowest expectation level among the first to third game round performances. The winning probability is set when a specific performance is executed and the second game performance has the highest expectation among the first to third game performances so that the appearance probability is higher. The setting of the winning probability is indicated by the suggested image. Therefore, the higher the degree of expectation that the performance type stored in the performance type storage means satisfies the conditions for winning in the lottery process, the more easily the player can estimate the winning probability setting with high accuracy. becomes possible.

[Feature kQ5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kQ2 to feature kQ4,
The performance type storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing the type of the performance executed in the first gaming round after the gaming machine is started up.

According to feature kQ5, the performance type storage means includes means for storing the type of performance executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started, so that, for example, when the gaming machine is started in the morning, By playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can observe which type of effect will be executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started up, and determine the predetermined period during which a specific effect will appear. It is possible to estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, according to feature kQ5, it is possible to actively encourage players to play games from the beginning in the morning.

<Characteristic kR group>
The feature kR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kR1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. means (the main control MPU 62 and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
A specific effect execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side) that executes a specific effect including an image (setting suggestion pattern PY) that suggests the setting of the winning probability so as to have a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period. and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92),
Effect type storage means (stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect to be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number since the starting point. The first fluctuation off flag, first fluctuation normal reach flag, first fluctuation super reach flag, and first fluctuation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the reach performance pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403-Sk2406, Sk2409-Sk2412, and Sk2414-Sk2416, and steps Sk2503-Sk2506, Sk2509-Sk2512, and Sk2514-Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2603-Sk2606, Sk2609-Sk2612, and Sk2614-Sk2616 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot in FIG. 609, and steps Sk2701-Sk2703 of the performance pattern setting process for a loss in FIG.
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Means for executing the specific effect (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, Ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by MPU 92)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kR1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the performance type storage means changes the number of executions of the game from the starting point to a predetermined number. The type of performance executed in the game round when the number of times is reached is stored, and the specific performance execution means stores a specific performance including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability in the performance type storage means during a predetermined period. It is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the type of performance stored. Therefore, when the number of executions of a game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player observes the performance executed in the game round and first memorizes the type of the performance. Thereafter, the player estimates the probability that a specific effect including an image that suggests a winning probability setting will appear during a predetermined period from the previously stored type of effect in the game round, and You can wait for it to appear, and from the specific effect that appears, you can infer what the winning probability setting is.

Assuming that the gaming machine of the comparative example has a configuration that only executes a specific effect that includes an image that suggests a winning probability setting with a predetermined probability of appearance, the gaming machine of the comparative example has a configuration in which the above specific effect Since the appearance probability of depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to feature kR1, in a predetermined period, a specific effect is set such that the appearance probability is based on the type of effect executed in the game play a predetermined number of times from the starting point. is executed, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the probability of appearance of a specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that a specific performance will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature kR1, in order to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific performance, the player needs to play the game when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. , the player can be actively encouraged to play the game the predetermined number of times.

When a plurality of gaming machines of feature kR1 are installed, the player can play the game on each machine when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, thereby achieving a specific effect. You can create a platform that is easy to appear on with your own hands.

[Feature kR2]
The gaming machine according to feature kR1,
The type of the performance executed in the game round is a first game round performance (normal reach), and the expectation level that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process is higher than the first game round performance. Also has at least a high second game performance (super reach),
The specific performance execution means is
The appearance probability of the specific performance is higher when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the feature kR2, the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process and the expectation level is higher than the case where the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. Since the probability of a specific performance appearing is higher in the case of a 2-game performance, from the viewpoint of the probability of appearance of a specific performance for the player, the number of executions from the starting point is a predetermined number of times. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that in the game round in which the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, a highly anticipated second game round effect will occur.

[Features kR3]
The gaming machine according to feature kR1,
The types of performances executed in the game round include a first game round performance (normal reach) and a second game round performance (super reach) that has a lower probability of being executed in the game round than the first game round performance. and has at least
The execution of the specific performance is
The appearance probability of the specific performance is higher when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature kR3, the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a second game round performance that has a low probability of being executed in a game round, rather than a first game round performance. , since the probability of appearance of a specific effect is high, from the perspective of the probability of appearance of a specific effect for the player, it will be executed in the game round when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that the second game performance with low probability and high rarity will occur.

[Features kR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kR1 to feature kR3,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kR4, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after the end of the game round, and the specific effect execution means, During one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied, a specific performance is performed to suggest the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

[Features kR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features kR1 to feature kR4,
The performance type storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing the type of the performance executed in the first gaming round after the gaming machine is started up.

According to feature kR5, the performance type storage means includes means for storing the type of performance executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started, so that, for example, when the gaming machine is started in the morning, By playing the game first thing in the morning, the player observes which type of effect is executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started up, and estimates the probability of appearance of a specific effect. be able to. Therefore, according to feature kR5, it is possible to actively encourage players to play games from the beginning in the morning.

<Characteristic kS group>
The feature kS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 7 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kS1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image suggesting setting of the winning probability (setting suggestion pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
Effect type storage means (stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect to be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number since the starting point. The first fluctuation off flag, first fluctuation normal reach flag, first fluctuation super reach flag, and first fluctuation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the reach performance pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403-Sk2406, Sk2409-Sk2412, and Sk2414-Sk2416, and steps Sk2503-Sk2506, Sk2509-Sk2512, and Sk2514-Sk2516 of the normal jackpot performance pattern setting process in FIG. Steps Sk2603-Sk2606, Sk2609-Sk2612, and Sk2614-Sk2616 of the performance pattern setting process for a variable jackpot in FIG. 609, and steps Sk2701-Sk2703 of the performance pattern setting process for a loss in FIG.
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
an execution period in which the predetermined period for performing the specific performance is determined from among a plurality of performance periods for performing the performance based on the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means; Determining means (MPU92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk3302 to Step Sk3306 of the normal reach effect pattern table reference process in FIG. 619 executed by the MPU92, and super reach effect in FIG. 620 executed by the MPU92) Steps Sk3402 to Sk3406 of the pattern table reference process, Steps Sk4202 to Sk4206 of the effect pattern table reference process for failure shown in FIG. 6181 executed by the MPU92, and Step Sk4302 of the ending effect process of FIG. 629 executed by the MPU92 ~Step Sk4306 etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature kS1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the performance type storage means changes the number of executions of the game from the starting point to a predetermined number. When the number of times reaches the number of times, the type of performance executed in the game round is stored, and the specific performance execution means makes the specific performance including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability have a predetermined probability of appearance during a predetermined period. It is executed as follows. Further, the execution period determining means provided in the specific performance execution means stores the predetermined period for executing the specific performance from among the plurality of performance periods for executing the performance in the performance type storage means. Determined based on the type of performance being performed. Therefore, when the number of executions of a game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, the player observes the performance executed in the game round and first memorizes the type of the performance. Thereafter, the player estimates the predetermined period in which a specific effect will appear based on the previously stored type of effect in the game round, and waits for the specific effect to appear during the predetermined period. , it is possible to infer what the winning probability setting is based on the specific effect that appears. Considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the predetermined period for executing a specific effect is fixed, the period for executing the specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. It is decided. On the other hand, according to feature kS1, the period during which a specific performance is executed does not depend only on the model of the gaming machine, so the player can Depending on the skill of the player, he feels a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the effects, and takes into account the type of effect that will be executed in the game round when the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. It is possible to accurately grasp the period during which a specific performance is to be executed, and in turn, to accurately estimate the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to feature kS1, in order to estimate the appearance period of a specific performance, the player needs to play the game when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number from the time when it becomes the starting point. , the player can be actively encouraged to play the game the predetermined number of times.

When a plurality of gaming machines of feature kS1 are installed, the player can perform a specific effect by playing the game on each machine when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number from the starting point. You can create a platform with your own hands that is easy to run.

[Feature kS2]
The gaming machine according to feature kS1,
As the type of the performance executed in the game round, the first game round performance (normal reach) and the expectation level that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game round performance. Also has at least a high second game performance (super reach),
The execution period determining means includes:
Regarding a performance that has a higher probability of being executed in a game round when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance is the first game round performance. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the predetermined period so that the performance period is as follows.

According to the feature kS2, the second game round has a higher expectation level that satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. In the case of a performance, the predetermined period is determined so that the performance period is for a performance that has a higher probability of being executed in a game round, so the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period is From this point of view, in the game round that has been executed a predetermined number of times since the starting point, a highly anticipated second game round performance in which the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process occurs. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the product is desired.

[Feature kS3]
The gaming machine according to feature kS1,
The types of performances executed in the game round include a first game round performance (normal reach) and a second game round performance (super reach) that has a lower probability of being executed in the game round than the first game round performance. and has at least
The execution period determining means includes:
A performance that has a higher probability of being executed in the game round when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the second game round performance than when the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is the first game round performance. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for determining the predetermined period so as to be a production period for the following.

According to feature kS3, the type of performance stored in the performance type storage means is a second game round performance that has a lower probability of being executed in a game round than when it is a first game round performance. Since the predetermined period is determined so as to be the performance period for a performance that has a high probability of being executed in a game round, it is important for the player to understand the starting point from the viewpoint of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a second game round performance with a low probability of being executed and a high rarity will occur in a game round when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Feature kS4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kS1 to feature kS3,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of performance periods to be determined by the execution period determining means include a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a second period (ending period) after the ending period.

According to feature kS4, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing a performance in a game round and a second period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. In one of the above, a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability is executed. Since the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for performing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific performance will be performed more frequently.

[Feature kS5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kS1 to feature kS4,
The performance type storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing the type of the performance executed in the first gaming round after the gaming machine is started up.

According to feature kS5, the performance type storage means includes means for storing the type of performance executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started, so that, for example, when the gaming machine is started in the morning, By playing the game first thing in the morning, the player observes which type of effect is executed in the first game after the gaming machine is started up, and estimates the period during which a specific effect appears. be able to. Therefore, according to feature kS5, it is possible to actively encourage players to play games from the beginning in the morning.

<Characteristic kT group>
The feature kT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 8 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kT1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 250) that distributes the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image suggesting setting of the winning probability (setting suggestion pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
When the number of game balls that have reached the sorting means since the starting point reaches N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is distributed by the sorting means to the plurality of routes. Distribution destination storage means for storing which route the distribution was made to as the distribution destination (first time variation first symbol flag and first time variation second symbol flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64, and voice The MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side, and the updating process at the time of ball entry in FIG. 632 executed by the MPU 92),
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
Means for executing the specific effect (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, Ending effect setting process of FIG. 637 executed by MPU 92)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kT1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the allocation destination storage means changes the N-th game ball from the starting point. Which of the plurality of routes has been allocated to by the allocation means is stored as the allocation destination, and the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability in a predetermined period. This is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means. Therefore, the player observes to which route the N-th game ball has been distributed from the starting point by the distribution means, and first memorizes the destination. Thereafter, the player estimates the probability that a specific effect including an image that suggests a winning probability setting will appear during a predetermined period from the previously memorized allocation destination, and waits for the specific effect to appear. , it is possible to infer which setting the winning probability is based on the specific performance that has appeared.

Considering that the gaming machine of the comparative example has a configuration that only executes a specific effect that includes an image that suggests setting of winning probability with a predetermined probability of appearance, the gaming machine of the comparative example has Since the appearance probability of depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the feature kT1, the appearance probability is based on the distribution destination indicating which route the N-th game ball is distributed from the starting point in a predetermined period by the distribution means. As such, since a specific performance is executed, the player can strongly feel the randomness of the appearance probability of the specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to actively give the player a sense of expectation that a specific performance will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature kT1, in order to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific performance, the player must play the game when the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point reaches N. Because of the necessity, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game during these N game rounds.

When a plurality of gaming machines with feature kT1 are installed, the player can play the game when the number of gaming balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point on each machine reaches N. , you can create a table with your own hands that makes it easy for a specific effect to appear.

[Feature kT2]
The gaming machine according to feature kT1,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquisition means is entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means,
moreover,
Means for executing a special game state for giving a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means that the winning condition is satisfied, the means for executing a special game state that provides a bonus to the player, the game ball entering the second ball entry means; The benefit granted to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. A special gaming state execution means is provided that is set to be more advantageous to the player than the given privilege,
The sorting means is
The plurality of routes include a first route leading to the first ball entering means and a second route leading to the second ball entering means,
The specific performance execution means is
The appearance probability of the specific performance is higher when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. Game machine.

According to the feature kT2, when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route leading to the first ball entry means, the first ball entry means has a more advantageous benefit than the first ball entry means. 2. Since the probability of appearance of a specific effect is higher when the route is the second route leading to the means of entering the ball, from the point of view of the probability of appearance of a specific effect to the player, It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the destination of the Nth game ball to be distributed by the distribution means will be the second route.

[Feature kT3]
The gaming machine according to feature kT1 or feature kT2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to the feature kT3, a specific performance is performed to suggest the setting of the winning probability based on the appearance probability during one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

[Feature kT4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kT1 to feature kT3,
The allocation destination storage means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for storing, as an allocation destination, which route among the plurality of routes the first game ball is allocated to by the allocation means after the gaming machine is started up. .

According to feature kT4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing, as the distribution destination, which route the first game ball is distributed to by the distribution device after the game machine is started, so that, for example, , when the gaming machine is started in the morning, by playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can know to which route the first game ball was distributed by the distributing means after the gaming machine was started. By observing it, you can estimate the probability of a particular performance occurring. Therefore, according to feature kT4, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kU group>
The feature kU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 9 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature kU1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
A game round performance execution means (MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and a game round performance setting process of FIG. 604 executed by the MPU 92) that executes the performance in the game round;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
Sorting means (distributing mechanism 250) that distributes the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image suggesting setting of the winning probability (setting suggestion pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
When the number of game balls that have reached the sorting means since the starting point reaches N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is distributed by the sorting means to the plurality of routes. Distribution destination storage means for storing which route the distribution was made to as the distribution destination (first time variation first symbol flag and first time variation second symbol flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64, and voice The MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side, and the updating process at the time of ball entry in FIG. 632 executed by the MPU 92),
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
an execution period in which the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined from among a plurality of performance periods for executing the performance based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a determining means.

According to feature kU1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an external operation, and the allocation destination storage means changes the N-th game ball from the starting point. The distribution means stores which route out of a plurality of routes the item has been distributed to, and the specific performance execution means predetermines a specific performance including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability during a predetermined period. is executed so that the probability of occurrence is . Further, the execution period determining means provided in the specific performance execution means stores the predetermined period for executing the specific performance from among the plurality of performance periods for executing the performance in the performance type storage means. Determined based on the type of performance being performed. For this reason, the player observes which route the N-th game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the starting point, and first memorizes the destination. Thereafter, the player estimates the predetermined period in which the specific effect will appear from the previously memorized distribution destination, waits for the specific effect to appear during the predetermined period, and waits for the specific effect to appear during the predetermined period. From the performance, it is possible to infer which setting the winning probability is. Considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the predetermined period for executing a specific effect is fixed, the period for executing the specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. It's decided. On the other hand, according to feature kU1, the period during which a specific effect is executed does not depend solely on the model of the gaming machine, so the player can There is a strong sense of randomness in the appearance period of the effects, and depending on the skill of the player, it is possible to create a specific effect by taking into consideration which route the Nth game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the starting point. It is possible to accurately grasp the execution period and, in turn, accurately estimate the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, active technical intervention by the player can be encouraged, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature kU1, in order to estimate the appearance period of a specific performance, the player must play the game when the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point reaches N. Because of the necessity, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game during these N game rounds.

When a plurality of gaming machines of feature kU1 are installed, the player can play the game when the number of gaming balls that have reached the distribution means from the starting point reaches N on each machine. , you can create a table with your own hands that makes it easy for a specific effect to appear.

[Features kU2]
The gaming machine according to feature kU1,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquisition means is entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means,
moreover,
Means for executing a special game state for giving a bonus to a player based on the determination by the determination means that the winning condition is satisfied, the means for executing a special game state that provides a bonus to the player, the game ball entering the second ball entry means; The benefit granted to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special gaming state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. A special gaming state execution means is provided that is set to be more advantageous to the player than the given privilege,
The sorting means is
The plurality of routes include a first route leading to the first ball entering means and a second route leading to the second ball entering means,
The execution period determining means includes:
The performance period for the performance is more likely to be executed when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for determining the predetermined period.

According to the feature kU2, when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route leading to the first ball entry means, the first ball receiving means has a more advantageous benefit than the first ball entry means. 2. Since the predetermined period is determined so that the second route leading to the ball entry means is the performance period for the performance with a higher probability of being executed, Also in terms of the frequency of occurrence of the period, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the destination of the N-th game ball from the starting point by the distribution means is the second route.

[Features kU3]
The gaming machine according to feature kU1 or feature kU2,
The plurality of performance periods to be determined by the execution period determining means include a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a second period (ending period) after the ending period.

According to feature kU3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing a performance in a game round and a second period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. In any of the above, a specific effect is performed to indicate the setting of the winning probability based on the appearance probability. Since the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for executing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific performance will be executed more frequently.

[Features kU4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kU1 to feature kU3,
The allocation destination storage means is
A game machine characterized by comprising means for storing, as a distribution destination, which route among the plurality of routes the first game ball is distributed to by the distribution means from the time when the game ball is a starting point.

According to feature kU4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing, as the distribution destination, the route to which the first game ball was distributed by the distribution means after the game machine was started. , when the gaming machine is started in the morning, by playing the game first thing in the morning, the player can know to which route the first game ball was distributed by the distributing means after the gaming machine was started. By observation, it is possible to estimate the period of appearance of a particular effect. Therefore, according to feature kU4, it is possible to actively encourage players to start playing games first thing in the morning.

<Characteristic kV group>
The characteristic kV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 10 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kV1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image suggesting setting of the winning probability (setting suggestion pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
degree parameter deriving means (appearance probability lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for executing the specific effect so that the predetermined appearance probability becomes an appearance probability based on the degree parameter.

According to feature kV1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process. The degree parameter is derived, and the specific effect executing means causes the specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability to have an appearance probability based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means in a predetermined period. is executed. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example that executes a specific performance including an image that suggests setting of winning probability in a predetermined period with a predetermined appearance probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the gaming machine The probability of appearance of a particular effect depends only on the model of the machine. On the other hand, according to feature kV1, since a specific performance is executed such that the appearance probability is based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means, the specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. Since the appearance probability of a particular effect is not determined, the player feels randomness in the appearance probability of a specific effect. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic kV1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a specific performance including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability is likely to appear.

[Features kV2]
The gaming machine described in feature kV1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: degree parameter performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter derivation means.

According to feature kV2, the player observes and memorizes a performance corresponding to a degree parameter in advance, and then estimates the probability of appearance of the specific performance in a predetermined period from the memorized performance. I can do it. Therefore, the player can estimate the probability of appearance of a specific effect that includes an image that suggests setting of winning probability.

[Features kV3]
The gaming machine described in feature kV2,
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game round operation. Means (comprising an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62,
The degree parameter deriving means
comprising means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates by lottery;
The degree parameter performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from the time when the game becomes a starting point until the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to feature kV3, in order to estimate the probability of appearance of a specific performance, the player needs to play the game during the period from the starting point until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number. , players can be actively encouraged to play games during this period. For example, if the starting point is when the gaming machine is started, then according to feature kV3, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the beginning in the morning.

[Features kV4]
The gaming machine described in feature kV3,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied.

According to feature kV4, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after the end of the game round, and the specific effect execution means, During one period after the end of the game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied, a specific performance is performed to suggest the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in a predetermined lottery process, also in terms of the appearance of a specific performance.

<Characteristic kW group>
The characteristic kW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 11 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Features kW1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Judgment means (main control board 61 side MPU 62, and the hit determination process in FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting changing means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the settings shown in FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62 change processing) and
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image suggesting setting of the winning probability (setting suggestion pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability during a predetermined period;
degree parameter deriving means (appearance period lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability;
Equipped with
The specific performance execution means is
execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for performing the specific performance from among a plurality of performance periods for performing the performance based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature kW1, the setting change means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process, and the degree parameter deriving means changes the winning probability setting in a predetermined lottery process. The degree parameter is derived, and the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability in a predetermined period. Furthermore, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is derived by the degree parameter deriving means from among the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect, by the execution period determining means provided in the specific effect executing means. determined based on the degree parameter. Considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the period for executing a specific effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, it depends only on the model of the gaming machine. The period during which a specific performance will be performed is determined. On the other hand, according to feature kW1, the period during which a specific effect is executed does not depend only on the model of the gaming machine, so the player can There is a sense of randomness in the period in which the effects appear. If the appearance period changes, the appearance frequency usually changes, so the player also feels randomness in the ease with which a particular effect appears. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the feature kW1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a specific effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability is likely to appear.

[Features kW2]
The gaming machine described in feature kW1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: degree parameter performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter derivation means within a predetermined period from a time when the degree parameter is a starting point.

According to feature kW2, a player observes and memorizes a performance corresponding to a degree parameter in advance, and then, from the memorized performance, a period during which a specific performance including an image suggesting a winning probability setting appears. can be predicted.

[Features kW3]
The gaming machine described in feature kW2,
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the time when the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game round operation is finished. means (an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and a game time control process in FIG. 589 executed by the MPU 62);
The degree parameter deriving means
comprising means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates by lottery;
The degree parameter performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from a starting point until the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to feature kW3, in order to estimate the appearance period of a specific performance, the player needs to play the game during the period from the starting point until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number. , players can be actively encouraged to play games during this period. For example, if the starting point is when the gaming machine is started, then according to feature kW3, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from first thing in the morning.

[Features kW4]
The gaming machine described in feature kW3,
In the game round, if it is determined that the special information satisfies the conditions for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a benefit granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) that grants a benefit after the end of the game round. and the big prize opening opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of performance periods to be determined by the execution period determining means include a first period for executing the performance in the game round, and a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a second period (ending period) after the ending period.

According to feature kW4, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing a performance in a game round and a second period after the end of a game round in which it is determined that the winning conditions are satisfied. In any of the above, a specific effect is performed to indicate the setting of the winning probability based on the appearance probability. Since the second period occurs only after the winning conditions are met, the first period occurs more frequently than the second period. Therefore, the predetermined period for performing the specific performance is determined to be the first period, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific performance will be performed more frequently.

<Characteristics IA group>
The feature IA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 675 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition; There is a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, and a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is at the end of the game round. and a second transition mode (late drop mode), and the first transition mode is executable when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode). , state information transition means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680, Sx1110~Sx1116)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lA1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies the first state from information that specifies a state other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode, which is at the start of a game round, and a second transition mode, which is at the end of a game round. Therefore, according to feature lA1, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information is transferred to the game based on the information that specifies the first state after the state information is transferred. A game is played in two ways: a game based on information specifying a state other than the previous first state; and a game based on information specifying a state other than the previous first state. Therefore, according to the feature 1A1, it is possible to widen the range of game modes in a game round, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lA2]
The gaming machine according to feature 1A1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature 1A2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature 1A2, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lA3]
The gaming machine according to feature 1A2,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1A3, a gaming session that corresponds to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and is executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and a gaming session that is executed in the first transition mode by the determination mode determining means. In any game round in which it is decided to execute a determination in the determination mode, at the start of the game round, the state information is determined from information specifying a state other than the first state to determine the first state. The state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. Therefore, when a player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has become the first control mode at the start of a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions. A game round in which the first condition is satisfied and the game is executed in the first transition mode, and a game round in which the determination mode determination means decides to execute the determination in the first determination mode. It is unclear which one it is, but it can be assumed that it was narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, according to feature 1A3, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature lA4]
The gaming machine according to feature 1A2 or feature 1A3,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is changed to the first determination mode. means for maintaining information specifying a state other than the state (NO determination in step Sl1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679, NO determination in step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lA4, a game session corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a game session that corresponds to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. In either case, the status information is is maintained as information specifying a state other than the first state. Therefore, if the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues in the second control mode in a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is a game corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. A gaming session that is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a gaming session that is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a gaming session that is determined in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means when the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Although it is unclear which of the game rounds it was decided to carry out, it can be assumed that the selection was narrowed down to one of both game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to feature 1A4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature lA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features 1A1 to 1A4,
The state information transfer means includes:
A game round after the number of executions of the game round reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for transferring the state information when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature 1A5, a game is played after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. In the case where the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the range of gaming modes can be expanded.

<Characteristic group IB>
The feature IB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature 1B1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 675 executed by it),
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The performance execution means is
The first condition is that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (winning a jackpot in the winning lottery), and the first result in which the first condition is met and the game is better than the first condition. The second result is that the second condition, which is less advantageous to the player (it is determined that a missed reach occurs), is met, and the third condition, which is less advantageous to the player than the second condition (fall a third result (winning in a lottery), and a result announcement performance means for performing a result announcement performance that announces which of the results falls under;
Means for executing a predetermined effect before the result announcement effect, the predetermined effect being a first suggestion effect (life or death) that suggests that one of the first result and the third result corresponds to the result. Execution of a predetermined performance that executes either one of the following (battle performance), and a second suggestive performance that suggests that one of the first result and the second result corresponds to the above (superior battle performance). means and
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to feature IB1, in a game round, there is a first result in which a first condition such that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is met, and a second condition that is less advantageous to the player than the first condition. A result announcement performance is executed to notify which one of the second result that has been met and the third result that has been met that has a third condition that is less advantageous to the player than the second condition has been met. However, a predetermined performance is executed before the result announcement performance. The predetermined effects include a first suggestion effect that suggests that one of the first result and the third result applies, and a first suggestion effect that suggests that one of the first result and the second result applies. Either one of the second suggestion effects is executed. Conventionally, when presenting three results, it is common to suggest that one of the first, second, and third results applies, but in this case In this case, the suggestive effects are limited to one type. On the other hand, according to feature IB1, a first suggestion effect that suggests that one of the first result and the third result corresponds to one of the first result and the second result, and one of the first result and the second result. It is possible to execute two types of suggestion effects: a second suggestion effect that suggests that the above applies. Therefore, according to the feature 1B1, it is possible to widen the range of modes of the predetermined performance performed before the result announcement performance in a game round, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1B2]
The gaming machine according to feature 1B1,
comprising state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition; There is a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, and a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is at the end of the game round. and a second transition mode (late drop mode), and the first transition mode is executable when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode). , state information transition means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680, Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The predetermined performance execution means is
and means for executing the first suggestion performance in a game round in which the transition is made in the first transition mode, and executing the second suggestion performance in a game game in which the transition is made in the second transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature IB2, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies the first state from information that specifies a state other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of a game round and a second transition mode at the end of a game round. A first suggestion performance is executed in a game round in which a transition is made in the mode, and a second suggestion performance is executed in a game round in which a transition is made in a second transition mode. Therefore, according to feature 1B2, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first suggestion effect based on the information specifying the first state after the state information has been transferred and the state information The suggestion effect is performed in two ways: a second suggestion effect based on information specifying a state other than the first state before transition. Therefore, according to feature 1B2, it is possible to widen the range of performance modes in a game round when the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. .

[Feature 1B3]
The gaming machine according to feature 1B2,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature IB3, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature 1B3, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1B4]
The gaming machine according to feature 1B3,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1B4, a game session corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, which is executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and a game session that corresponds to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, and a game session that is executed in the first transition mode by the determination mode determining means. In any game round in which it is decided to perform a determination in the determination mode, at the start of the game round, the state information is determined from information specifying a state other than the first state to determine the first state. The state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. Therefore, when a player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has become the first control mode at the start of a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. A game round in which the first condition is met and the game is executed in the first transition mode, and a game round in which the determination mode determination means decides to execute the determination in the first determination mode. It is unclear which one it is, but it can be assumed that it was narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, according to feature 1B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature 1B5]
The gaming machine according to feature 1B3 or feature 1B4,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is changed to the first determination mode. means for maintaining information specifying a state other than the state (NO determination in step Sl1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679, NO determination in step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1B5, a game session corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, a game session that is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a game session where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In either case, the status information is is maintained as information specifying a state other than the first state. Therefore, if the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues in the second control mode in a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is a game corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. A gaming session in which the second condition is satisfied and the game is executed in the second transition mode, and a gaming session in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and is determined in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means. It is unclear which of the game rounds it was decided to execute, but it can be assumed that it was narrowed down to one of both game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to feature 1B5, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature 1B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features 1B1 to 1B5,
The state information transfer means includes:
A game round after the number of executions of the game round reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for transferring the state information when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature IB6, a game is played after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. times, and the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the range of presentation modes can be expanded.

<Characteristic IC group>
The feature IC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 675 executed by it),
Predetermined action execution means (electric accessory 34a, electric accessory drive unit 34b) capable of executing a predetermined action that can change the degree of advantage for the player;
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed from a second operation mode to a mode that is more advantageous for the player than the second operation mode. A first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, as a means for transitioning to a first operation mode with a lower degree, and the timing of transitioning the operation mode is different. and a second transition mode (later drop mode) in which the timing is the end of the game round, and an operation mode transition means (steps Sl1104 and Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680),
The performance execution means is
In the game round in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, the first performance (life-or-death battle performance) is executed, and in the game round in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the first performance is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a second performance (superiority battle performance) that suggests that the game is highly advantageous to a player.

According to feature 1C1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed from the second operation mode to the second operation mode. There is a first transition mode in which the timing of the transition is at the start of the game round, and a second transition mode in which the timing of the transition is at the end of the game round. You can switch between. Then, in a game round in which the transition is made in the first transition mode, that is, in a game round in which the game moves quickly to the first action with a lower degree of advantage, the first effect on the side with a lower degree of advantage for the player is executed. , in the game round in which the transition is made in the second transition mode, that is, in the game round in which the game moves later to the first action with a lower degree of advantage, the second effect on the side with a higher degree of advantage to the player is executed. . Therefore, according to feature LC1, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the advantage for the player is matched to the degree of advantage that the player can obtain by the predetermined action by the predetermined action execution means. It is possible to switch between a first performance and a second performance that have different degrees. Therefore, according to the feature 1C1, it is possible to widen the range of performances in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1C2]
The gaming machine according to feature IC1,
The predetermined operation execution means includes:
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
Equipped with
The game round execution means is
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. and a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means, the first operation mode is realized by executing the first control mode, and the second control mode is realized by executing the first control mode. A gaming machine comprising: a control means for realizing the second operation mode depending on the mode.

According to feature LC2, by switching the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means from the second control mode to the first control mode, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed to the second operation. mode, it is possible to shift to a first mode of operation that is less advantageous for the player than the second mode of operation. Therefore, according to feature 1C2, controllability is excellent.

[Feature 1C3]
The gaming machine according to feature IC2,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed to the second determination mode. means for transitioning from the operation mode to the first operation mode (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1C3, a gaming session corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, which is executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and a gaming session that is executed in the first transition mode by the determination mode determining means. In any of the game rounds in which it is decided to execute a determination in the determination mode, at the start of the game round, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed from the second operation mode. , the first operation mode is shifted to the first operation mode which is less advantageous for the player than the second operation mode. Therefore, if the player observes that the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means has become the first operation mode at the start of a game round, the player can confirm that the current game round meets the predetermined conditions. A game round that corresponds to the special information that is satisfied and is executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and a determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the first determination mode. Although it is unclear which of the two game times it was, it can be assumed that it was narrowed down to one of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the change in the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means. Therefore, according to feature 1C3, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature 1C4]
The gaming machine according to feature 1C2 or feature 1C3,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 679 (fall determination processing),
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the predetermined action execution means executes the means for maintaining the operation mode of a predetermined operation in the second operation mode (NO determination in step Sl1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679, NO determination in step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature LC4, a game session corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a game session that corresponds to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. In any case, in a game round in which the determination mode is determined to be executed in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means (a game round when the decision is made in the second determination mode), the predetermined action is The operation mode of the predetermined operation by the execution means is maintained in the second operation mode. Therefore, if the player observes that the operation mode for a predetermined action by the predetermined action execution means continues in the second operation mode in a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is based on the predetermined conditions. A gaming session corresponding to special information that satisfies the second condition and is executed in the second transition mode, and a gaming session that corresponds to special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition and is executed in the second transition mode; Although it is unclear which of the game rounds it was decided to perform the determination in the second determination mode under, it can be assumed that the selection was narrowed down to one of both game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means. Therefore, according to feature 1C4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic LD group>
The feature ID group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 675 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game execution means is
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
The determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode (not winning the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery). The first state is determined from information specifying a state other than the first state from the stored state information at the start of a game round related to the specific case. a game round start state information transition means (steps Sl1104, Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680),
At the end of the game round related to the specific case, the game round ends in which processing is performed to transfer the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state. time state information transfer means (step Sl1606 in the game state transfer process in FIG. 685);
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the processing by the state information transfer means at the start of the game round can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (the mode selection transition switching means that enables the processing by the state information transition means at the end of the game round to be executed when the lottery result is in a late fall mode;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the game round related to the specific case, the determination mode determining means has determined to execute the determination in the first determination mode (winning the fall lottery), and the special information is based on the predetermined condition. (a jackpot in a winning lottery);
In the game round related to the specific case, the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. and that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, and a second suggestion effect means for performing a suggestion effect (superiority battle effect) that suggests that either of the following applies;
When the first condition is met, the first suggestion production means is enabled to execute the suggestion production, and when the second condition is met, the second suggestion production means is enabled to perform the suggestion production. Suggestive performance switching means (steps Sl2603 to Sx2608 in the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games in FIG. 695);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1D1, at the start of a game round when the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case). , the state information is transferred from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the decision mode determining means decides to perform the decision in the first decision mode. Suggestive effects are executed to suggest that either of the following conditions apply: and that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. The determination by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, and therefore the degree of advantage for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it will be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature LD1, when the timing of transitioning the state information to the information specifying the first state is when the player starts, the degree of advantage for the player is low, and the degree of advantage for the player is low. A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree is high and that one of the following applies will be executed. If it is assumed that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature LD1, , the player will be at a disadvantage at the start of the game round, and before notifying the player, it is necessary to confirm that the degree of advantage for the player is low and that the degree of advantage for the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that one of the above applies. Therefore, according to feature 1D1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature 1D1, when the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), At the time of termination, the state information is transferred from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the judgment mode determining means determines to perform the judgment in the second judgment mode. and the special information no longer satisfies the predetermined conditions, or the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. . The fact that the determination mode determining means decides to perform the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition can be said to be a situation that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it will be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature ID1, if the timing of transitioning the state information to the information specifying the first state is when the player finishes, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player, and A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree of advantage is high and that one of the following applies will be executed. If it is assumed that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature LD1, , since the player is not disadvantaged until the end of the game round, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player in that game round, nor is it highly advantageous for the player. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that the above applies. Therefore, according to feature 1D1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to feature LD1, in a game round when the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case). , the suggestion performance is performed in two ways: a suggestion performance by the first suggestion performance means and a suggestion performance by the second suggestion performance means. Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, it is possible to widen the range of performance modes in a game round in a specific case, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1D2]
The gaming machine according to feature ID1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature ID2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature 1D2, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1D3]
The gaming machine according to feature 1D1 or feature 1D2,
Each of the game round start state information transfer means and the game round end state information transfer means,
A game round after the number of executions of the game round reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for transferring the state information in the specific case.

According to feature LD3, a game is played after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. In the case where the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the range of game modes can be expanded.

<Characteristic IE group>
The feature group IE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lE1]
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein a first determination mode (low probability mode) is used as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, and a first determination mode (low probability mode); a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 675 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the determination mode is shifted from the first determination mode to the second determination mode, and the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode. a determination mode/control mode transition means for transitioning to the mode;
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. Judgment mode transition means (step Sl004 in the fall judgment process in FIG. 679);
Starting from the time when the determination mode is transferred from the first determination mode to the second determination mode by the determination mode/control mode transition means, the number of times the game is executed from the starting point reaches a predetermined number of times. preprocessing means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode a predetermined number of times until the control mode is reached;
After the number of executions of the game from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times, if the determination mode is the second determination mode, continuing the second control mode as the control mode; post-processing means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the determination mode transitions from the second control mode to the first determination mode;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
If the second control mode continues as the control mode after the number of executions of the game from the starting point reaches the predetermined number, the first determination is made by the determination mode determining means. In the game round in which it is decided to execute the determination in the mode (the game round in which the winning lottery was won), or in the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the game round in which the jackpot win was won), a first performance means for performing a performance with predetermined content (life-or-death battle performance);
a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode (an unsuccessful game round); or a second performance means for performing a performance with content different from the predetermined content (superiority battle performance) in a game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (a game round in which a jackpot was won);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lE1, the control mode changes to the second control mode after the number of executions of the game from the starting point reaches a predetermined number, starting from the time when the judgment mode is shifted to the second judgment mode. If the game continues, the game game where the determination mode determining means decides to perform the determination in the first determination mode, or the game game where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, is displayed with the predetermined content. The performance is executed. On the other hand, a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or a game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In a certain game round, an effect with content different from the predetermined content is performed. Therefore, in the game round after the number of executions of the game round from the starting point reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform the performance in two ways: a performance with predetermined content and a performance with content different from the predetermined content. This has the effect of widening the range of performance modes and increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature lE2]
The gaming machine according to feature 1E1,
The special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of executions of the game from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times. means for shifting the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game round (when winning a jackpot),
The first presentation means is
The presentation of the predetermined content is that the judgment mode determining means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode (winning the fall lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. A gaming machine is characterized in that it executes a suggestive performance (a life-or-death battle performance) that suggests that one of the following applies (a jackpot win in a winning lottery).

According to feature lE2, if the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of executions of the game from the starting point reaches a predetermined number, the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. The determination mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of a certain game round and at the start of a game round in which the determination mode determination means has determined that determination is to be performed in the first determination mode. and, in the relevant game round, the determination mode determining means has decided to execute the determination in the first determination mode, or the special information has become one that satisfies a predetermined condition. A suggestive effect that suggests that the above applies is executed. The determination by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, and therefore the degree of advantage for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it will be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature 1E2, a suggestive effect that suggests that the degree of advantage for the player is low or that the degree of advantage for the player is high is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lE3]
The gaming machine according to feature 1E1 or feature 1E2,
The second presentation means is
As a production of content different from the predetermined content, the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A game characterized by executing a suggestive effect (superiority battle effect) that suggests that either of the following has occurred (missing), and that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Machine.

According to feature lE3, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, or the special information does not meet the predetermined condition. In a game round that satisfies the above, it is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that the game is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, or that the degree of advantage to the player is high. Therefore, according to feature 1E3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic IF group>
The feature IF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature IF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 675 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
Determination mode determining means (Fig. 679 (fall determination processing),
The determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode (not winning the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery). The first state is determined from information specifying a state other than the first state from the stored state information at the end of the game round related to the specific case. a game round end state information transition means (step Sl1606 in the game state transition process in FIG. 685) that performs a process of transitioning the information to the information shown in FIG.
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the game round related to the specific case, the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. and that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, and a first suggestion effect means for performing a suggestion effect (superiority battle effect) suggesting that either of the following applies. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature IF1, at the end of a game round when the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), The state information is transferred from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the judgment mode determining means determines to perform the judgment in the second judgment mode, and Suggestive effects are performed that suggest that either the special information no longer satisfies the predetermined condition or the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. The fact that the determination mode determining means decides to perform the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition can be said to be a situation that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it will be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature IF1, when the timing of transitioning the state information to the information specifying the first state is when the player finishes, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player, and A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree of advantage is high and that one of the following applies will be executed. If it is assumed that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature IF1, , since the player is not disadvantaged until the end of the game round, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player in that game round, nor is it highly advantageous for the player. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that the above applies. Therefore, according to the feature IF1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature IF2]
The gaming machine according to feature IF1,
The game round execution means is
At the start of a game round related to the specific case, a game round start in which processing is performed to shift the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state. time state information transfer means (steps Sl1104 and Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680);
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the processing by the state information transfer means at the start of the game round can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (the mode selection transition switching means that enables the processing by the state information transition means at the end of the game round to be executed when the lottery result is in a late fall mode;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the game round related to the specific case, the determination mode determining means has determined to execute the determination in the first determination mode (winning the fall lottery), and the special information is based on the predetermined condition. a second suggestion presentation means that executes a suggestion presentation (life-or-death battle presentation) that suggests that the condition has been satisfied (a jackpot win in a winning lottery);
When the first condition is met, the second suggestion production means is enabled to execute the suggestion production, and when the second condition is met, the first suggestion production means is enabled to perform the suggestion production. Suggestive performance switching means (steps Sl2603 to Sx2608 in the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games in FIG. 695);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature IF2, at the start of a game round when the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), The state information is transferred from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the judgment mode determining means determines to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode. Suggestive effects are performed that suggest that either of the following applies: and that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. The fact that the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower, and therefore the degree of advantage for the player is lowered. I end up. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it will be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature LD1, when the timing of transitioning the state information to the information specifying the first state is when the player starts, the degree of advantage for the player is low, and the degree of advantage for the player is low. A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree is high and that one of the following applies will be executed. If it is assumed that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature IF2, , the player will be at a disadvantage at the start of the game round, and before notifying the player of this fact, the player must be informed that the degree of advantage to the player is low and the degree of advantage to the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that one of the above applies. Therefore, according to feature IF2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature IF3]
The gaming machine according to feature IF1 or feature IF2,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature IF3, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature IF3, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature IF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features IF1 to IF3,
Each of the game round start state information transfer means and the game round end state information transfer means,
A game round after the number of executions of the game round reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for transferring the state information in the specific case.

According to feature IF4, a game can be played after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. In the case where the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the range of gaming modes can be expanded.

<Characteristic IG group>
The feature IG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 2 of the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature lG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 675 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the first condition (winning a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery and after the opening/closing execution mode ends) is satisfied, the stored state information is changed from the information specifying the first state. first state information transition means for transitioning to information specifying a state other than the first state;
After the transition by the first status information transfer means is performed, the gaming session when the second condition (winning a jackpot in the winning lottery) is satisfied is defined as a specific gaming session, and the information is stored in the specific gaming session. second state information transfer means for transferring the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state;
Equipped with
The second state information transfer means includes:
As transition modes with different timings for transitioning the state information, there is a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the specific game round, and a second transition mode in which the timing is the end of the specific game round. 2 transition mode (later drop mode), and the mode is determined whether to adopt the first transition mode or the second transition mode to migrate the state information. 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a transition mode determining unit that determines a mode based on the number of times the game is executed after the transition by the one-state information transition unit and up to the specific game.

According to feature lG1, when the first condition is satisfied, the state information stored in the state storage means shifts from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. After that transition, in a specific game round when the second condition is satisfied, the state information is shifted from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, The timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of a game round and a second transition mode at the end of a game round. Therefore, according to feature lG1, in a specific game, a game based on information specifying the first state after the state information is transferred and a state other than the first state before the state information is transferred. The game can be played in two ways: a game based on information that specifies the . Therefore, according to feature lG1, it is possible to widen the range of game modes in a game round, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, according to feature lG1, based on the number of times the game has been executed since the state information was shifted from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying a state other than the first state, Since it is determined whether the transition mode to be adopted is the first transition mode or the second transition mode, it is possible to perform a game with a rich story, for example, a production with a rich story, It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG2]
The gaming machine according to feature lG1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature IG2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature IG2, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features lG3]
The gaming machine according to feature lG2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second condition is that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature IG3, the game time when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is regarded as a specific game time and the status information is transferred. Therefore, in the game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the range of game modes can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic G4]
The gaming machine according to feature lG3,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 679 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to perform the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state. (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lG4, a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and in which state information is transferred in the first transition mode (=specific game round) and a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific game round), In either case, at the start of the game round, the state information changes from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state. The state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the information specifying the state, and the state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. Therefore, when a player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has become the first control mode at the start of a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. Which is the specific game round in which the state information is transferred by the first transition mode or the game round in which the determination mode determination means decides to execute the determination in the first determination mode? Although it is unclear, it can be assumed that it was narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, according to feature IG4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Features lG5]
The gaming machine according to feature IG3 or feature IG4,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 679 (fall determination processing),
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is means for maintaining information specifying a state other than the state (NO determination in step Sl1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 679, NO determination in step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature IG5, a game round (=specific game round) corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and in which the state information is transferred by the second transition mode (=specific game round); In any case where the special information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode (the game time when the game fails) , in that game round, the state information is maintained as information specifying a state other than the first state. Therefore, if the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues in the second control mode in a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is a game corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. The game time in which the state information is transferred in the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, and the determination mode determination means executes the determination in the second determination mode. Although it is unclear which one of the game rounds was determined, it can be assumed that the selection was narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to feature IG5, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic IH group>
The feature IH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 675 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition; There is a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, and a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is at the end of the game round. and a second transition mode (late drop mode), and the first transition mode is executable when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode). , state information transition means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 680, Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The performance execution means is
In the game round in which the transition is made in the first transition mode, a performance with predetermined content (life-or-death battle performance) is executed, and in the game game in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the predetermined content is A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing performances with different contents (superiority battle performances).

According to feature lH1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies the first state from information that specifies a state other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of a game round and a second transition mode at the end of a game round. In a game round in which a transition is made in the mode, a performance with predetermined content is executed, and in a game round in which a transition is made in the second transition mode, a performance with content different from the predetermined content is performed. Therefore, according to feature lH1, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the game is played in two ways: an effect with predetermined content and an effect with content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, according to feature 1H1, it is possible to widen the range of game modes in a game round, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic mA group>
The feature mA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mA1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a general lottery) that executes a first determination, which is a determination of whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state (V winning jackpot). a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (special train opening/closing execution mode based on special map small winning) and the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special train opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a time longer than the sum of (total time: 128.0 seconds).

According to feature mA1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. Ru.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means converts the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode into the time required from the start to end of the second transition mode and the start of the third transition mode. Since the device is equipped with a means that can set the time to be longer than the sum of the time required from continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means may transition to the ball entering state and the game ball may be able to enter the second ball entering means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mA2]
The gaming machine according to feature mA1,
The first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature mA2, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state while the first transition mode is being executed and after the third transition mode ends. Since the game ball is provided with the means, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends. If the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mA3]
The gaming machine according to feature mA1 or feature mA2,
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mA3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since a means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second ball entry means is subsequently The transition mode will not be executed and the third transition mode will not be executed either, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the second transition mode and the third transition mode to be completed by the time the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

Furthermore, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When a configuration is adopted in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to the entry possible state. In this case, multiple pieces of second predetermined information are held, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the entry possible state of the first state transition means, the first state transition means enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed one time each for one transition of the one state transition means to the ball entry possible state.

[Features mA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to feature mA3,
The third transition mode execution means includes:
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from start to end is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mA4, the third transition mode execution means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device includes means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode becomes the predetermined length. It cannot be longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entering ball entry state because the length of the third transition mode has become longer than a predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such thing. As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is also not executed.

[Features mA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to feature mA4,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
In the first transition mode (normal power opening/closing execution mode), the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state, and then transitions from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state. The length of the interval period (normal electricity interval period), which is the period until A gaming machine characterized by comprising means that can be set to.

According to feature mA5, the first transition mode execution means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode, and then from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state. A means is provided that can set the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a shorter time (for example, 0.7T) than the time (for example, T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. A case will be described in which the configuration of the comparative example is adopted.

First, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode will be started, and then the third transition mode will be started. Thereafter, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode is still continuing in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode will not be newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so the game ball is in the second entry state. When the ball enters the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are such that the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first and third ball entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. The game starts when the ball enters the ball, but it does not start even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the second ball entry possible state.

Next, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first ball entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode is not started, and neither is the third transition mode. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is not executed, so the game ball is in the second entry state. Upon entering the means, the second transition mode will be initiated, and then the third transition mode will be initiated. Thereafter, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode is still continuing in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode will not be newly started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so the game ball is in the second entry state. When the ball enters the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are such that the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the second and fourth entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. The game is started when the ball enters the ball, but even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the third ball entry possible state, the game will not start.

In this way, unlike this feature, when the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a shorter time than the length of the third transition mode, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is There is a problem that the timing of starting the second transition mode and the third transition mode during execution is not fixed, making the flow of the game complicated and making it difficult to control the game.

Next, in this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a longer time (for example, 1.3T) than the time (for example, T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. A case in which this configuration is adopted will be explained.

First, in the configuration of this feature, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode will be started, and then the third transition mode will be started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so the game ball is in the second entry state. When the ball enters the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode is not started, and neither is the third transition mode. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is not executed, so the game ball is in the second entry state. Upon entering the means, the second transition mode will be initiated, and then the third transition mode will be initiated.

As described above, according to this feature, since the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, At the timing when the first state transition means becomes the ball entry possible state, the third transition mode is executed regardless of how many times the first state transition means becomes the ball entry possible state. It is either not available or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means when the first state transition means is in the state where the ball can enter in the first transition mode, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are There's no way it won't start. That is, according to this feature, the timing of starting the second transition mode and the third transition mode during execution of the first transition mode can be fixed, and the flow of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, by setting the number of times the first state transition means is in the ball entry possible state while the first transition mode is being executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode can be executed while the first transition mode is being executed. It becomes possible to set an upper limit on the possible number of times.

[Feature mA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to feature mA5,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
After the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state in the first transition mode (normal power opening/closing execution mode), the first determination by the first determination means is performed. The length of the waiting period (general electricity ending period), which is the period until it becomes possible to execute, is the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for setting a time longer than .

According to the feature mA6, the first transition mode execution means executes the first state transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. A means is provided that can set the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination becomes executable, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, a case will be described in which, unlike this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the length of the standby period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is performed after the end of the waiting period and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is performed and the first There is a possibility that the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. However, in this configuration, if the third transition mode is executed immediately after the start of the standby period, the third transition mode continues even after the standby period ends, and the game ball is moved to the second transition mode. The third transition mode may continue even at the timing when the ball enters the ball entering means. In this case, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is not executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, the first transition mode execution means makes the first determination after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The method includes means that can set the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the first determination by the means can be executed, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the third transition mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and it is possible to suppress a disadvantageous situation for the player.

[Feature mA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to feature mA6,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
In the first transition mode (normal power opening/closing execution mode), the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state, and then the first determination means executes the next determination. The length of the waiting period (Fuden Ending Period), which is the period until it becomes possible, is
An interval period (normal power interval period) is a period from when the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state and from when the ball entry disabled state transitions to the ball entry enabled state. ) (135.0 seconds) or more (140.0 seconds).

According to feature mA7, the first transition mode execution means performs the next determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry allowed state to the ball entry prohibited state in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until it becomes executable, is set such that the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state, and then transitions from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state. Since the device is equipped with means that can set the length to be longer than the length of the interval period, which is the period up to It becomes possible to realize the same. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a new game in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode can be executed during both the interval period and the standby period in the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mB group>
The feature mB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Feature mB1]
A first ball entry area (normal game starting gate 35) into which game balls can enter;
a first lottery execution means that executes a first lottery (general lottery) based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area;
a first variation means that executes a variable display and a stop display of the first identification information (normal symbol) based on the execution of the first lottery;
A second ball entry area (special figure starting port 34a) into which game balls can enter;
From a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry area, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry area. A first transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning to a ball-enabled state (open state);
If the result of the first lottery is a first predetermined lottery result (normal map winning), a first transition mode (general power network) for transitioning the first transition means from the ball-inhibited state to the ball-inable state; a first transition mode execution means for executing an opening/closing execution mode);
a second lottery execution means for executing a second lottery (special figure lottery) based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area (special figure starting port 34a);
a second variation means that executes a variable display and a stop display of the second identification information (special symbol) based on the execution of the second lottery;
A third ball entry area (V winning opening 57av) into which game balls can enter;
From a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry area (closed state), it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry area. a second transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning to a ball-enabled state (open state);
If the result of the second lottery is a second predetermined lottery result (special map small win), a second transition mode (special lottery) for transitioning the second transition means from the ball-inhibited state to the ball-in possible state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a small hit;
determining means for determining the granting of a specific profit (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) based on the game ball entering the third ball entry area;
means for terminating the granting of the specific profit when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the granting of the specific profit has started;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one cycle from the transition of the first transition means to the ball entry possible state (time t3 in FIG. 714) to the end of the provision of the specific profit (time t10 in FIG. 714) is defined as one special game round. ,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
Based on the result of the first lottery, means for causing at least the transition operation of the first transition means to be executed a plurality of times for one first predetermined lottery result;
The first special game round is executed based on the first transition means transitioning to the ball entry possible state at a first timing, and the first transition means is executed at a second timing after the one special game round ends. means for controlling the transition to the state in which the ball can be entered;
restricting means for restricting the first identification information from starting to be displayed in a variable manner;
Equipped with
The restriction means includes means for generating a predetermined restriction period in a period from the first timing to the end of the one special game round that occurs after the second timing,
The predetermined end condition for the specific profit is established when a first state (round game) advantageous to the player is executed multiple times,
The first state can change between a first time with the shortest execution time and a second time with the longest execution time depending on the game state,
The first transition mode execution means is configured such that the first state of the plurality of specific profits in the one special game run executed after the first timing is all executed in the second time. The gaming machine is also characterized in that the first transition means can be transitioned to the ball entry enabled state after the end of the one special game round.

According to feature mB1, when a game ball enters the first ball entry area, the first lottery is executed, the result of the first lottery becomes the first predetermined lottery result, and the first transition mode is executed. , if the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry area during execution of the first transition mode, the second lottery is executed, and the second lottery is executed. The result of the lottery becomes a second predetermined lottery result, and the second transition mode is executed. Then, during execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third ball entry area, and it is determined that a specific profit will be awarded.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means causes at least the transition operation of the first transition means to be executed a plurality of times for one first predetermined lottery result based on the result of the first lottery. and one special game round is executed based on the first transition means transitioning to a state in which balls can be entered at a first timing, and the first transition means enters at a second timing after the one special game round ends. and means for controlling the state to transition to a state in which a sphere is possible. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game a plurality of times for one first predetermined lottery result in the first lottery.

Furthermore, according to the present feature, the first transition mode execution means includes a restriction means for restricting the first identification information from starting to be displayed in a variable manner, and the restriction means is configured to restrict the display of the first identification information from occurring from the first timing to the second timing or later. The present invention includes means for generating a predetermined limit period during a period until the end of one special game round. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first identification information from starting to be displayed in a variable manner before the end of the first special game round, so that even though the first special game round has not yet ended, the first lottery It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the following is executed. As a result, for example, even though the first lottery result is the first predetermined lottery result that is advantageous to the player, the game balls are It is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the second transition mode is not executed even if the ball enters the second ball entry area.

Further, according to the present feature, the predetermined end condition of the specific profit is established by executing the first state advantageous to the player multiple times, and the first state is the first state that has the shortest execution time depending on the gaming state. and the longest second time, and the first transition mode execution means is configured such that the first state of a plurality of specific profits in one special game run executed after the first timing is all changed to a second time. Even if it is executed in time, the first transition means can be made to transition to the ball entry possible state after the end of the one special game round. Therefore, even if the first state of a plurality of specific profits in one special game round are all executed in the second time, the game ball enters the second ball entry area after the end of the one special game round. It becomes possible to make the ball hit, and it becomes possible to execute one special game round again. As a result, it becomes possible to reliably execute the special game round a plurality of times, regardless of the length of the first state of the plurality of specific profits.

[Feature mB2]
The gaming machine described in feature mB1,
A gaming machine comprising: a number display means for displaying information regarding the number of times of the first state (remaining number of round games).

According to the feature mB2, since it is provided with the number display means for displaying information regarding the number of times of the first state, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of times of the first state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can.

[Feature mB3]
The gaming machine according to feature mB1 or feature mB2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific image display means for displaying a specific image (ending image) at the end of the provision of the specific profit (during the special electricity ending period of the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot).

According to feature mB3, since the specific image display means is provided to display a specific image at the end of the provision of the specific profit, it is possible to make the player recognize that the provision of the specific profit has ended, and also to display the specific image. It is possible to give the player a sense of fulfillment from being awarded a profit and a desire to play the game thereafter.

[Features mB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to feature mB3,
At the end of the provision of the specific profit (during the special electricity ending period of the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot), the player is provided with profit information display means for displaying information regarding the profit earned by the player by the provision of the specific profit. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature mB4, at the end of the provision of a specific profit, the profit information display means is provided for displaying information regarding the profit that the player has acquired by the provision of the specific profit. It is possible to make the player understand the profit that has been obtained, and also to give a sense of fulfillment in having been given the specific profit and to be motivated to play the game thereafter.

[Features mB5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to feature mB4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determining means includes means for determining the granting of one of the specific profits from among a plurality of types of the specific profits (special electric opening/closing execution mode A or B based on the V winning jackpot).

According to feature mB5, the determining means includes means for determining the granting of one specific profit from among a plurality of types of specific profits, so that the player is only interested in whether or not a specific profit will be awarded. Rather, if specific benefits are granted, it is possible to arouse interest in what kind of specific benefits will be granted.

[Features mB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to feature mB5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a predetermined information changing means for performing variable display and stop display of predetermined identification information (decorative symbols) in the first state (round game).

According to the feature mB6, since the predetermined information changing means is provided for performing variable display and stop display of the predetermined identification information in the first state, the player is not surprised that the predetermined identification information has started to be displayed in a variable manner in the first state. It is possible to make the user feel the same emotion as above, and also to create a great sense of anticipation as to what the display mode (stop mode) will be when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed.

<Characteristic mC group>
The feature mC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mC1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a general lottery) that executes a first determination, which is a determination of whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state (V winning jackpot). a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game ball enters the first ball entry means (general figure starting gate 35) and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the game ball enters the first transition mode (general electric opening/closing execution). mode) is executed, and if the game ball continues to be fired in a predetermined firing mode,
During execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on special figure small winning) is executed. is,
During execution of the second transition mode, a game ball enters the third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a), and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means. The ball enters the ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) and the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed,
Even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and changes the game ball. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball may be allowed to enter the second ball entry means.

According to feature mC1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. Even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entering state and the game ball enters the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed once, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mC2]
The gaming machine according to feature mC1,
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mC2, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since a means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode will not be executed and the third transition mode will not be executed either, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the second transition mode and the third transition mode to be completed by the time the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

Furthermore, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When a configuration is adopted in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to the entry possible state. In this case, multiple pieces of second predetermined information are held, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the entry possible state of the first state transition means, the first state transition means enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed one time each for one transition of the one state transition means to the ball entry possible state.

[Feature mC3]
The gaming machine according to feature mC1 or feature mC2,
The third transition mode execution means includes:
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from start to end is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mC3, the third transition mode execution means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device includes a means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode becomes the predetermined length. It cannot be longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the ball entering state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than a predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such thing. As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is also not executed.

<Characteristic mD group>
The feature mD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Feature mD1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a general lottery) that executes a first determination, which is a determination of whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state (V winning jackpot). a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising:
In a situation where game balls are continuously being fired in a predetermined firing mode,
After the first transition mode is started,
With the start of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state;
The game ball enters the first ball entry means (regular figure starting gate 35) as the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state;
When the first predetermined information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means (common game starting gate 35) satisfies the first condition, the game ball enters the first transition mode (common ticket opening/closing). execution mode) is executed,
During execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on special figure small winning) is executed. is,
A game ball enters the third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) during execution of the second transition mode,
The game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) and the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed. is,
When the time required for the third transition mode to end is defined as the specific required time (time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 714),
The first transition mode execution means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) to be longer than the specific required time.

According to feature mD1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. Ru.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the specific required time, so that the first transition mode Even after the end of the first transition mode, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entering state and the game ball changes to the second ball entering means. It may be possible to enter the ball.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mD2]
The gaming machine according to feature mD1,
The first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature mD2, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state while the first transition mode is being executed and after the third transition mode ends. Since the game ball is provided with the means, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends. If the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mD3]
The gaming machine according to feature mD1 or feature mD2,
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mD3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since a means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second ball entry means is subsequently The transition mode will not be executed and the third transition mode will not be executed either, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the second transition mode and the third transition mode to be completed by the time the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

Furthermore, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When a configuration is adopted in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to the entry possible state. In this case, multiple pieces of second predetermined information are held, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means during one transition of the first state transition means to the ball entry possible state, the first state transition means It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed one time each for one transition of the one state transition means to the ball entry possible state.

[Feature mD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mD1 to feature mD3,
The third transition mode execution means includes:
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from start to end is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mD4, the third transition mode execution means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device includes means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode becomes the predetermined length. It cannot be longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entering ball entry state because the length of the third transition mode has become longer than a predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such thing. As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is also not executed.

<Characteristic mE group>
The feature mE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mE1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mE1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode executing means is a means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and the game ball is released. In some cases, it becomes possible to enter the ball using the second ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mE2]
The gaming machine according to feature mE1,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mE1, the first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state during execution of the first transition mode, after the privilege granting mode ends. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mE3]
The gaming machine according to feature mE1 or feature mE2,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the privilege awarding mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to feature mE3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege granting mode execution means executes the procedure for causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Since the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode will not be executed thereafter. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the bonus award mode to end before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means arrives.

[Features mE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mE1 to feature mE3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mE4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mF group>
The feature mF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mF1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means; and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which, when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is satisfied, a benefit granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mF1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state during execution of the first transition mode and after the privilege granting mode ends. Since the game ball is provided with a means for causing the ball to enter the second ball, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means after the privilege giving mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to feature mF1, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mF2]
The gaming machine according to feature mF1,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the privilege awarding mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mF2, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege grant mode execution means executes the procedure for causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Since the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by a ball, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the privilege granting mode is being executed, the privilege granting mode will not be executed thereafter. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the bonus award mode to end before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means arrives.

[Feature mF3]
The gaming machine according to feature mF1 or feature mF2,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mF3, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mG group>
The feature mG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mG1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
Privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V-winning) is a mode in which a privilege is awarded to the player when a predetermined privilege awarding condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is satisfied. );
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the privilege awarding mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to feature mG1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege grant mode execution means transfers the game ball to the second ball entry means. Since the system includes a means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by the entry of the second ball, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode is executed afterwards. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the bonus award mode to end before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means arrives.

[Features mG2]
The gaming machine according to feature mG1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mG2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode is continuing, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and the game ball changes to the second state. The ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mG3]
The gaming machine according to feature mG1 or feature mG2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mG3, the first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mG4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mG1 to feature mG3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mG4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mH group>
The feature mH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mH1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
As the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the length from the start to the end is a predetermined period regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege awarding mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a length of .

According to feature mH1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means has a length from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode that is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device is equipped with means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege granting mode in which the predetermined length is set, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is longer than the predetermined length. It doesn't get too long either. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine where the length of the benefit granting mode is longer than a predetermined length, which would put the player in a disadvantageous situation, it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous situation for the player. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine where a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the bonus granting mode, the bonus granting mode is not executed afterwards, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. The privilege granting mode becomes longer than a predetermined length, and even when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode has not yet ended, and the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. It is possible to prevent such disadvantageous situations for players.

[Feature mH2]
The gaming machine according to feature mH1,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the privilege awarding mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to feature mH2, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege provision mode execution means executes the procedure for causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Since the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode will not be executed thereafter. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

However, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means has a predetermined length as the privilege granting mode from the start to the end regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device is equipped with means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege granting mode in which the predetermined length is set, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is longer than the predetermined length. It doesn't get too long either. Therefore, in a situation where the length of the privilege granting mode has become longer than a predetermined length and the first state transition means has transitioned to the ready state, the privilege granting mode has not yet ended. The occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the benefit granting mode triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means is not executed, which is disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent such a situation from arising.

[Feature mH3]
The gaming machine according to feature mH1 or feature mH2,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mH3, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode is continuing, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and the game ball changes to the second state. The ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mH4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mH1 to feature mH3,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mH4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mH5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mH1 to feature mH4,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mH5, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mI group>
The feature mI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mI1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
In the first transition mode (normal power opening/closing execution mode), the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state, and then transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry enabled state. The length of the interval period (general electric power interval period), which is the period until A gaming machine characterized by having a setting means.

According to feature mI1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means is configured to allow ball entry from the ball entry prohibited state after the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The device is provided with means capable of setting the length of an interval period, which is a period until the state changes, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege grant mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a shorter time (for example, 0.7T) than the time (for example, T) required from the start to the end of the benefit grant mode. A case will be described in which the configuration of the comparative example to be set is adopted.

First, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the privilege granting mode will be started. Thereafter, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is still continuing. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, a new privilege granting mode will not be started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the bonus granting mode has already ended, so the game ball is in the second entry state. If you enter the means, a new benefit granting mode will start. That is, in this case, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means in the first and third entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the second ball entry possible state, the game will not start.

Next, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first ball entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the benefit grant mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege granting mode is not executed, the game ball is transferred to the second ball entry means. If you enter the game, the bonus grant mode will start. Thereafter, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is still continuing. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, a new privilege granting mode will not be started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the bonus granting mode has already ended, so the game ball is transferred to the second entry ball. If you enter the means, a new benefit granting mode will start. That is, in this case, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means in the second and fourth entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the third ball entry possible state, the game will not start.

In this way, unlike this feature, when the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a shorter time than the length of the benefit granting mode, the execution of the first transition mode There is a problem that the start timing of the bonus granting mode in the game is not fixed, making the flow of the game complicated and making it difficult to control the game.

Next, the configuration of this feature sets the length of the interval period of the first transition mode to a longer time (for example, 1.3T) than the time (for example, T) required from the start to the end of the benefit grant mode. We will explain the case where .

First, in the configuration of this feature, a case where a game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first ball entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege granting mode will be started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege giving mode has already ended, the game ball is in the second entry state. If you enter the means, a new benefit granting mode will start.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the benefit grant mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege granting mode is not being executed, the game ball is transferred to the second ball entry means. If you enter the game, the bonus grant mode will start.

As described above, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode, so that At the timing when the first state transition means becomes the ball entry possible state, the privilege granting mode is not being executed or It is already finished. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means when the first state transition means is in the state where the ball can enter in the first transition mode, the privilege granting mode will not be started. . That is, according to this feature, it is possible to fix the start timing of the benefit granting mode while the first transition mode is being executed, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and also to prevent the flow of the game from becoming complicated. By setting the number of times the first state transition means is in the ball entry possible state while the transition mode is being executed, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of times the privilege granting mode can be executed while the first transition mode is being executed. Become.

[Feature mI2]
The gaming machine according to feature mI1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mI2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mI3]
The gaming machine according to feature mI1 or feature mI2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mI3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state during execution of the first transition mode, after the privilege granting mode ends. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mI1 to mI3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mI4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mJ group>
The feature mJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mJ1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
After the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state in the first transition mode (normal power opening/closing execution mode), the first determination by the first determination means is performed. The length of the waiting period (general electric power ending period), which is the period until it becomes possible to execute, is determined from the time required from the start to the end of the above-mentioned benefit granting mode (special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot). A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with means that can set the time for a long period of time.

According to feature mJ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to the present feature, the first transition mode execution means is configured to perform the first state transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The apparatus is provided with a means capable of setting the length of a waiting period, which is a period until determination 1 can be executed, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege grant mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, a case will be described in which, unlike this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the length of the waiting period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit grant mode. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is performed after the end of the waiting period and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is performed and the first There is a possibility that the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the transition mode, and the privilege granting mode is executed. However, in this configuration, if the privilege granting mode is executed immediately after the start of the waiting period, the said privilege granting mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and the game ball is placed in the second ball. The benefit provision mode may continue even at the timing when the player enters the device. In this case, there is a problem that even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is not executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, the first transition mode execution means makes the first determination after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. Since the method includes a means that can set the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the first determination by the means can be executed, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit grant mode, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the privilege grant mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and it is possible to suppress a disadvantageous situation for the player.

[Feature mJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature mJ1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mJ2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode is continuing, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and the game ball changes to the second state. The ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege giving mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature mJ1 or feature mJ2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mJ3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry possible state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mJ4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mJ1 to feature mJ3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mJ4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mK group>
The feature mK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mK1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
In the first transition mode (normal power opening/closing execution mode), the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state, and then the first judgment means executes the next determination. The length of the waiting period (Fuden Ending Period), which is the period until it becomes possible, is
An interval period (normal power interval period) is a period from when the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state and from when the ball entry disabled state transitions to the ball entry enabled state. ) (135.0 seconds) or more (140.0 seconds).

According to feature mK1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to the present feature, the first transition mode executing means is configured to perform the next transition by the first determining means after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination of the above can be executed, is determined by the first state transition means from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the state where the ball can be entered. Since it is equipped with a means that can set the length to be longer than the length of the interval period which is the period until the transition, the flow of a series of games realized in the interval period of the first transition mode can be set to the length of the waiting period of the first transition mode. This can also be achieved in the same way. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a new game in which the privilege granting mode can be executed during both the interval period and the standby period in the first transition mode.

[Features mK2]
The gaming machine according to feature mK1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mK2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mK3]
The gaming machine according to feature mK1 or feature mK2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mK3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mK4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mK1 to feature mK3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mK4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mL group>
The feature mL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Feature mL1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
Based on the transition mode (number of openings) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode to transition from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state, the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is set. A gaming machine characterized in that an executable upper limit number of times (upper limit number of consecutive games) of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special electric opening/closing scenario for a V winning jackpot) during execution is determined.

According to feature mL1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the benefit granting mode during execution of the first transition mode is based on the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode to transition from the ball entry prohibited state to the ball entry possible state. Since the upper limit number of times that can be executed is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player may be interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It is possible to make the game more interesting and to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mL2]
The gaming machine described in feature mL1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mL2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode is continuing, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and the game ball changes to the second state. The ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mL3]
The gaming machine according to feature mL1 or feature mL2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mL3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mL1 to feature mL3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mL4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mm group>
The feature mm group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mm1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
During the period in which the first transition mode is being executed, the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state, and then transitions from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing the privilege granting mode during an interval period (general power interval period) until the end of the period.

According to feature mm1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to the present feature, the privilege granting mode executing means is configured to perform the privilege granting mode after the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state during the period in which the first transition mode is being executed. The number of interval periods included in the first transition mode is a very important factor for players because it is equipped with a means for executing the benefit granting mode during the interval period that is the period from the unavailable state to the available state. becomes. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is asked how many interval periods are included in the first transition mode. It is possible to arouse interest and interest in the game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Feature mm2]
The gaming machine according to feature mm1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mm2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mm3]
The gaming machine according to feature mm1 or feature mm2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mm3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mm4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mm1 to feature mm3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mm4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mN group>
The feature mN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mN1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting mode execution means executes the privilege granting mode (special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) a plurality of times from the start of the first transition mode (general electric switch opening/closing execution mode) to the end thereof. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a means capable of doing so.

According to feature mN1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means includes means capable of executing the privilege granting mode a plurality of times between the start and end of the first transition mode, so that the first transition mode is Whether or not the game starts is a very important factor for players. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is started, and the first transition mode is started. In this case, it is possible to make the player interested in how many times the privilege awarding mode will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mN2]
The gaming machine according to feature mN1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mN2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mN3]
The gaming machine according to feature mN1 or feature 2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mN3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state during execution of the first transition mode, after the privilege granting mode ends. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mN4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mN1 to feature mN3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mN4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mO group>
The feature mO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic mO1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means executes an effect (diagram) that suggests a transition mode (number of openings) of the first state transition means to transition from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state in the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mO1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to the present feature, since the first state transition means in the first transition mode is provided with a means for executing an effect that suggests a transition mode of transitioning from the ball entry prohibited state to the ball entry possible state, the first predetermined information When the first transition mode is executed while satisfying the first condition, the player can be made interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO2]
The gaming machine according to feature mO1,
Based on the transition mode (number of openings) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode to transition from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state, the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is set. A gaming machine characterized in that an upper limit number of times (upper limit number of consecutive games) that the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special electric opening/closing scenario for a V winning jackpot) can be executed during execution is determined.

According to the feature mO2, based on the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode to transition from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state, the privilege granting mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode. Since the possible upper limit number of times is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode becomes a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player may be interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It is possible to make the game more interesting and to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO3]
The gaming machine according to feature mO1 or feature mO2,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mO3, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mO1 to feature mO3,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mO4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mO1 to feature mO4,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mO5, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mP group>
The feature mP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mP1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
As the benefit granting mode, there is an indefinite benefit granting mode that may not end by the predetermined timing (timing when the normal electric accessory 34b opens) in the first transition mode (in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot in the modified example). A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a means capable of executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode (based on special electric opening/closing execution mode).

According to feature mP1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means includes means capable of executing, as the privilege granting mode, an indefinite privilege granting mode that may not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode.

For example, if the configuration of this feature is applied to a gaming machine that would be at a disadvantage to the player if the benefit granting mode did not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the player would be in a disadvantageous situation. , it is possible to make the user feel impatient and want the indefinite benefit granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

In particular, in the case of a configuration in which whether or not the indefinite benefit granting mode ends by a predetermined timing depends on the firing manner of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball, the player is informed of the firing manner of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball. It is possible to arouse interest and interest in the behavior of the game ball.

[Feature mP2]
The gaming machine described in feature mP1,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If the privilege awarding mode has not ended by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a). A gaming machine further comprising: means for avoiding execution of the privilege imparting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means.

According to feature mP2, if the indefinite benefit granting mode has not ended by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the privilege granting mode executing means executes the procedure when the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, so that the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege granting mode. Even if the player enters the game, the bonus granting mode will not be executed after that, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel impatient and want the indefinite benefit granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Feature mP3]
The gaming machine according to feature mP1 or feature mP2,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mP3, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mP4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mP1 to feature mP3,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mP4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mP5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mP1 to feature mP4,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mP5, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mQ group>
The feature mQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mQ1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
a privilege awarding ball entry means (second special electric accessory 58b) that allows a game ball to enter during execution of the privilege awarding mode;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means causes a predetermined number of game balls to enter the privilege granting ball entry means by a predetermined timing (timing when the normal electric accessory 34b is next released) during execution of the privilege granting mode. 739(A). A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a means capable of executing a performance to encourage the player to enter the ball (a performance to promote ball entry shown in FIG. 739(A)).

According to feature mQ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the performance execution means is a means capable of executing a performance that urges a predetermined number of game balls to enter the benefit granting ball entry means by a predetermined timing during execution of the benefit granting mode. Equipped with

For example, if the configuration of this feature is applied to a gaming machine where the player would be in a disadvantageous situation if the benefit granting mode did not end by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the predetermined timing It is possible to make the player understand a new gameplay feature in which the privilege awarding mode is ended by the predetermined timing by inserting a predetermined number of game balls into the privilege awarding ball entry means by the time of the predetermined timing. It is possible to increase the player's desire to enter a predetermined number of game balls into the bonus ball entry means by the timing.

[Feature mQ2]
The gaming machine described in feature mQ1,
A game characterized in that the performance execution means includes means capable of executing a specific performance (disappearance performance shown in FIG. 739(C)) when the benefit grant mode is not completed by the predetermined timing. Machine.

According to feature mQ2, the effect executing means includes means capable of executing a specific effect when the privilege awarding mode is not completed by a predetermined timing, so that the effect is not granted to the player by the predetermined timing. It is possible to make the player recognize that the mode has not ended, and it is also possible to make the player recognize that the subsequent flow of the game will change due to the fact that the privilege granting mode has not ended.

[Feature mQ3]
The gaming machine according to feature mQ1 or feature mQ2,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If the privilege giving mode has not ended by the predetermined timing, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a), the game ball's A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by a ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to feature mQ3, if the privilege granting mode has not ended by a predetermined timing, the privilege granting mode executing means executes the game even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Since the device includes a means for avoiding execution of the privilege awarding mode triggered by the ball entering the second ball entry means, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entry means while the privilege awarding mode is being executed. However, the bonus granting mode will not be executed after that, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel impatient and want the bonus granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Feature mQ4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to feature mQ3,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mQ4, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mQ5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to feature mQ4,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mQ5, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mQ6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to feature mQ5,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the privilege-granting ball entry means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the privilege-granting ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enabled state (open state);
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the bonus ball entry means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mQ6, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mR group>
The feature mR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mR1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a general lottery) that executes a first determination, which is a determination of whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
a second ball entry means (special electric starting port) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
A second transition mode in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state when a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special electric starting port); (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port);
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state (V winning jackpot). a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting gate) and the start of the third transition mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a time longer than the sum of the time required from start to end.

According to feature mR1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. Ru.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means converts the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode into the time required from the start to end of the second transition mode and the start of the third transition mode. Since the device is equipped with a means that can set the time to be longer than the sum of the time required from continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means may transition to the ball entering state and the game ball may be able to enter the second ball entering means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mR2]
The gaming machine according to feature mR1,
The first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature mR2, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state while the first transition mode is being executed and after the third transition mode ends. Since the game ball is provided with the means, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends. If the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mR3]
The gaming machine according to feature mR1 or feature mR2,
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mR3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since a means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second ball entry means is subsequently The transition mode will not be executed and the third transition mode will not be executed either, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the second transition mode and the third transition mode to be completed by the time the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

Moreover, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When a configuration is adopted in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to the entry possible state. In this case, multiple pieces of second predetermined information are held, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means during one transition of the first state transition means to the ball entry possible state, the first state transition means It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed one time each for one transition of the one state transition means to the ball entry possible state.

[Features mR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mR1 to feature mR3,
The third transition mode execution means includes:
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from start to end is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mR4, the third transition mode execution means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device includes means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode becomes the predetermined length. It cannot be longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entering ball entry state because the length of the third transition mode has become longer than a predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such thing. As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is also not executed.

In addition, the inventions of each of the above feature groups solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various changes have been made to the structure, control, performance, etc., with the aim of increasing the interest of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from this point of view.

Various technical improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the soundness of gaming, such as discovering and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired for the purpose of increasing the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing healthier gaming. It is rare.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which one or more configurations included in each of the above feature groups are combined as appropriate. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature group described above can be applied or is applied to each feature group will be shown.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launcher that launches a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation, and a starting ball that is provided in the game area and allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter. a game ball, an information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry unit, and an acquisition information storage unit that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit. Machine.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: a picture display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, a start means for starting the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of a start operation means, and operation of a stop operation means. A gaming machine comprising: a stop means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to the change in time or the passage of a predetermined time; and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, but can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. The technical features included in the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, and feature groups may be used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems or to achieve some or all of the above-mentioned effects. , it is possible to replace or combine them. Further, unless the technical feature is described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

Claims (3)

a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
first determining means for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means capable of transitioning between states;
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing;
a privilege granting mode execution means for executing a privilege granting mode in which a privilege is granted to a player when a predetermined privilege granting condition including that a game ball enters the second ball entering means is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
a second predetermined information obtaining means for obtaining second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means;
a second determination means for executing a second determination, which is a determination of whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means, and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means capable of transitioning between the states;
a second transition mode in which the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition; a second transition mode execution means for executing;
a fourth ball entry means into which the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means can enter;
a fifth ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means, and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means capable of transitioning between the states;
a payout means for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode for transitioning between.

Images